BLD 229 Spec

Marine Corps Air Station (MCAS)
Yuma, Arizona
P-617 Aviation
Maintenance and Support
Complex
Engine Maintenance Shop

Building 229
SPECIFICATIONS
Final Submittal
15 February 2016
SOLICITATION NO.: N62473-12-D-0263 T.O. #X003
WORK ORDER NO.: 1312010
JACOBS PROJECT NO.: FDYD1739
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
3161 Michelson Drive, Suite 500

Irvine, California 92612
P-617 Aviation Maintenance and Support
Complex
Marine Corps Air Station
Yuma, Arizona
Engine Maintenance Shop

Building 229
Final Submittal
Specifications
15 February 2016
SOLICITATION NO.: N62473-12-D-0263 T.O. #X003

WORK ORDER NO.: 1312010
JACOBS PROJECT NO.: FDYD1739
CERTIFICATIONS PAGE
P-617 Aviation Maintenance and

Support Complex
Marine Corps Air Station (MCAS)
Yuma, Arizona
Final Submittal
Specifications
ARCHITECT CIVIL ENGINEER STRUCTURAL ENGINEER
FIRE PROTECTION
MECHANICAL ENGINEER ELECTRICAL ENGINEER
ENGINEER
CERTIFICATION PAGE 000000 - 1

TELECOMMUNICATION
LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT
ENGINEER
v
CERTIFICATION PAGE 000000 - 2

Engine Maintenance Shop Bldg. 229 Solicitation No. N62473-12-D-0263 T.O. #X003
Final Submittal 15 February 2016
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
00 01 15 LIST OF DRAWINGS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK
01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS
01 20 00.00 20 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
01 32 17.00 20 COST-LOADED NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULES (NAS)
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
01 42 00 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
01 45 00.00 20 QUALITY CONTROL
01 45 35 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
01 50 00 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 50 10 FOREIGN OBJECT DEBRIS (FOD) CONTROL & MANAGEMENT -
AIRFIELDS
01 57 19.00 20 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
01 57 19.01 20 SUPPLEMENTAL TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
01 58 00 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
01 75 00.00 40 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 24.00 20 FACILITY ELECTRONIC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT
INFORMATION (eOMSI)
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 01 10 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS PROCEDURES

02 02 35 EXISTING CONDITIONS - HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
02 09 00 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ABATEMENT AND CONTROL
02 41 00 DEMOLITION
02 82 14.00 10 ASBESTOS HAZARD CONTROL ACTIVITIES
02 82 33.13 20 REMOVAL/CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF PAINT WITH LEAD
02 84 33 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS (PCBs)
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
04 20 00 MASONRY
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 21 19 OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST FRAMING
05 30 00 STEEL DECKS
05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS
05 51 00 METAL STAIRS
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1

05 51 33 METAL LADDERS
05 52 00 METAL RAILINGS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 41 16.00 10 LAMINATE CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK
06 61 16 SOLID POLYMER (SOLID SURFACING) FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 05 23 PRESSURE TESTING AN AIR BARRIER SYSTEM FOR AIR TIGHTNESS

07 14 00 FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
07 21 00 PERIMETER FIRE CONTAINMENT - THERMAL INSULATION SYSTEM
07 21 13 CAVITY WALL INSULATION
07 21 16 MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
07 22 00 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION
07 27 10.00 10 BUILDING AIR BARRIER SYSTEM
07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS
07 54 19 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING
07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING
07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08 11 13 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 11 16 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES
08 44 00 CURTAIN WALL AND GLAZED ASSEMBLIES
08 56 54 BLAST RESISTANT FACADE SYSTEMS
08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
08 81 00 GLAZING
08 91 00 METAL DOOR LOUVERS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE
09 22 00 SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD
09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING
09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING
09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10 14 00.20 INTERIOR SIGNAGE

10 14 01 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES
10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
14 24 00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 13 13.00 20 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE

22 05 48.00 20 MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL
22 07 19.00 40 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS

23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
23 05 48.00 40 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
23 08 00.00 10 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
23 09 23.13 20 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC
23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 31 13.00 40 METAL DUCTS
23 34 23.00 40 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
23 37 13.00 40 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLS
23 76 00.00 10 INDIRECT EVAPORATIVE COOLING SYSTEMS
23 81 28.10 22 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) MULTI-SPLIT AIR
CONDITIONING AND HEAT PUMP EQUIPMENT
23 82 02.00 10 UNITARY HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING
26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
26 23 00 SWITCHBOARDS
26 28 01.00 10 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION
26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
27 05 28.36 40 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
31 00 00 EARTHWORK
31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL

31 63 29 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 05 33 LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT
32 11 24 GRADED CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE FOR FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT
32 12 16 HOT-MIX ASPHALT (HMA) FOR ROADS
32 16 13 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS
32 17 23.00 20 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
32 31 13.53 HIGH-SECURITY CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
32 84 24 IRRIGATION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
33 11 23 NATURAL GAS AND LIQUID PETROLEUM PIPING

33 30 00 SANITARY SEWERS
33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION
-- End of Project Table of Contents --

DOCUMENT 00 01 15
LIST OF DRAWINGS
02/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This section lists the drawings for the project pursuant to contract
clause "DFARS 252.236-7001, Contract Drawings, Maps and Specifications."
1.2 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
Contract drawings are as follows:
DRAWING REVISION NAVFAC DWG TITLE

NO. NO. NO.
GENERAL
G001 18218450 TITLE SHEET
G002 18218451 SHEET INDEX
CIVIL
C001 18218452 NOTES, LEGEND, ABBREVIATIONS, & MAPS
C002 18218453 BORING LOGS (FOR REFERENCE ONLY)
C101 18218454 EXISTING CONDITIONS, SURVEY SHEET, & BORING LOCATION

MAP
CD102 18218455 DEMOLITION PLAN
CI103 18218456 IMPROVEMENT PLAN
CG104 18218457 GRADING PLAN
CU105 18218458 UTILITY PLAN
CS106 18218459 HORIZONTAL CONTROL PLAN
C107 18218460 EROSION CONTROL PLAN
C501 18218461 CIVIL DETAILS
DOCUMENT 00 01 15 Page 1

NO. NO. NO.
LANDSCAPE
L100 18218465 PLANT SCHEDULE, NOTES & DETAILS
L101 18218466 PLANTING PLAN
L200 18218467 IRRIGATION SCHEDULE & NOTES
L201 18218468 IRRIGATION PLAN
L202 18218469 IRRIGATION DETAILS
L203 18218470 IRRIGATION DETAILS
ARCHITECTURAL
A001 18218471 LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS
A010 18218472 FIRST FLOOR CODE ANALYSIS & LIFE SAFETY PLAN
A011 18218473 SECOND FLOOR CODE ANALYSIS & LIFE SAFETY PLAN
A030 18218474 LIFE SAFETY SITE PLAN
A020 18218475 ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS
A030 18218476 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS FIRST FLOOR PLAN
AD110 18218477 OVERALL DEMOLITION FIRST FLOOR PLAN
AD150 18218478 OVERALL DEMOLITION FIRST FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
A110 18218479 OVERALL FIRST FLOOR PLAN
A111 18218480 FIRST FLOOR PLAN - SECTOR A
A112 18218481 FIRST FLOOR PLAN - SECTOR B
A120 18218482 OVERALL SECOND FLOOR PLAN
A122 18218483 SECOND FLOOR PLAN - SECTOR B
A130 18218484 OVERALL ROOF PLAN
A151 18218485 FIRST FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - SECTOR A
A152 18218486 FIRST FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - SECTOR B
A153 18218487 SECOND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - SECTOR A
A154 18218488 SECOND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - SECTOR B

NO. NO. NO.
A200 18218889 BUILDING ELEVATIONS
A300 18218890 BUILDING SECTIONS
A350 18218891 WALL SECTIONS
A401 18218892 ENLARGED ELEVATOR PLANS
A402 18218893 ELEVATOR DETAILS
A403 18218494 ENLARGED STAIR PLAN
A410 18218495 ENLARGED RESTROOM PLANS
A411 18218496 ENLARGED RESTROOM PLANS
A501 18218497 EXTERIOR DETAILS
A502 18218498 EXTERIOR RAMP AND STAIR DETAILS
A521 18218499 ROOF DETAILS
A522 18218500 ROOF DETAILS
A531 18218501 CEILING DETAILS
A541 18218502 OPENING DETAILS
A542 18218503 OPENING DETAILS
A551 18218504 INTERIOR DETAILS
A552 18218505 INTERIOR DETAILS
A561 18218506 SIGNAGE DETAILS
A600 18218507 DOOR SCHEDULE
A601 18218508 WINDOW SCHEDULE
A610 18218509 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE
A801 18218510 PARTITION TYPE DETAILS
INTERIORS
I110 18218511 OVERALL FIRST FLOOR FF&E PLAN
I111 18218512 FIRST FLOOR FF&E PLAN - SECTION A

NO. NO. NO.
I112 18218513 FIRST FLOOR FF&E PLAN - SECTION B
I120 18218514 OVERALL SECOND FLOOR FF&E PLAN
I121 18218515 SECOND FLOOR FF&E PLAN - SECTION A
I122 18218516 SECOND FLOOR FF&E PLAN - SECTION B
I700 18218517 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE
I800 18218517A SIGNAGE PLAN
I900 18218518 SIGNAGE DETAILS
STRUCTURAL
S001 18218519 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS, & GENERAL NOTES
S002 18218520 GENERAL NOTES
S003 18218521 GENERAL NOTES
S004 18218522 GENERAL NOTES & WIND UPLIFT DIAGRAMS
S110 18218523 FOUNDATION PLAN - SECTOR B
S120 18218524 SECOND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN
S130 18218525 ROOF FRAMING PLAN - SECTOR B
S200 18218526 ELEVATIONS
S501 18218527 TYPICAL CONCRETE DETAILS
S510 18218532 TYPICAL STEEL DETAILS

NO. NO. NO.
S515 18218537 ATFP DETAILS
MECHANICAL
M001 18218538 LEGEND, SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, & DESIGN CRITERIA
M002 18218539 GENERAL NOTES
MD111 18218540 DEMOLITION FIRST FLOOR PLAN
M111 18218541 FIRST FLOOR PLAN
M121 18218542 SECOND FLOOR PLAN
M130 18218543 ROOF PLAN
M501 18218544 MECHANICAL DETAILS
M601 18218547 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES
M602 18218548 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES
M603 18218549 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES & PIPING DIAGRAMS
M701 18218550 MECHANICAL AIRFLOW SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
M800 18218551 MECHANICAL CONTROL DIAGRAM
M801 18218552 MECHANICAL POINT LIST
M802 18218553 MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
PLUMBING
P001 18218554 LEGEND, SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, & DESIGN CRITERIA
PD111 18218555 DEMOLITION FIRST FLOOR PLAN
PD131 18218556 DEMOLITION PARTIAL ROOF PLAN - SECTOR A
P110 18218557 FIRST FLOOR PLAN - SECTOR A AND B
P122 18218558 SECOND FLOOR PLAN - SECTOR B
P132 18218559 ROOF PLAN - SECTOR B
P401 18218560 ENLARGED PLANS

NO. NO. NO.
P501 18218561 DETAILS
P601 18218562 RISER DIAGRAMS
P701 18218563 FIXTURE/EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
P801 18218564 CALCULATIONS
FIRE PROTECTION
F001 18218565 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL NOTES & SYMBOLS
FD110 18218566 OVERALL FIRE PROTECTION DEMOLITION FIRST FLOOR PLAN
FA111 18218567 FIRST FLOOR FA/MN PLAN - SECTOR A
FA112 18218568 FIRST FLOOR FA/MN PLAN - SECTOR B
FA113 18218569 SECOND FLOOR FA/MN PLAN - SECTOR A
FA114 18218570 SECOND FLOOR FA/MN PLAN - SECTOR B
FS111 18218571 FIRST FLOOR FIRE SPRINKLER PLAN - SECTOR A
FS112 18218572 FIRST FLOOR FIRE SPRINKLER PLAN - SECTOR B
FS113 18218573 SECOND FLOOR FIRE SPRINKLER PLAN - SECTOR B
F501 18218574 FIRE ALARM DETAILS
F502 18218575 FIRE SPRINKLER DETAILS
ELECTRICAL
E001 18218576 LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS
E002 18218577 GENERAL NOTES AND DEMOLITION GENERAL NOTES
E100 18218578 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN
ED201 18218579 DEMOLITION FIRST FLOOR POWER PLAN
E211 18218580 FIRST FLOOR POWER PLAN - SECTOR A
E212 18218581 FIRST FLOOR POWER PLAN - SECTOR B
E222 18218582 SECOND FLOOR POWER PLAN - SECTOR A & B
E230 18218583 ROOF POWER PLAN - SECTORS A & B
E241 18218584 FIRST FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN - SECTOR A

NO. NO. NO.
E242 18218585 FIRST FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN - SECTOR B
E252 18218586 SECOND FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN - SECTOR B
E501 18218587 ELECTRICAL DETAILS
E502 18218588 ELECTRICAL DETAILS
E600 18218589 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
E601 18218590 FAULT ANALYSIS SUMMARY
E700 18218591 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
E701 18218592 FEEDER AND PANEL SCHEDULES
E702 18218593 PANEL SCHEDULES
E703 18218594 FIRST FLOOR LIGHTING CALCULATIONS - SECTOR B
E704 18218595 SECOND FLOOR LIGHTING CALCULATIONS - SECTOR B
E705 18218596 SITE LIGHTING CALCULATIONS - SECTOR B
TELECOM
T001 18218597 SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND GENERAL NOTES
T201 18218598 FIRST FLOOR TELECOM PLAN
T202 18218599 SECOND FLOOR TELECOM PLAN - AREA A
T500 18218600 TELECOM DETAILS
T501 18218601 TELECOM DETAILS
T600 18218602 TELECOM SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
1.3 SUPPLEMENTARY DRAWINGS
These supplementary drawings may not be a part of the contract but are
included with the drawings for information.
1.3.1 Reference Drawings
The following reference drawings are intended only to show the original
construction. Drawings are the property of the Government and shall not
be used for any purpose other than that intended by the contract. Full
size drawings may be inspected during regular working hours at the office
of the Contracting Officer.
As Built drawings for Building 229, Building 230, Building 234,

Building 328, and Building 1229.
1.3.2 Boring Logs
The Government does not guarantee that borings indicate actual conditions,
except for the exact locations and the time that they were made.
1.3.3 Subsurface Data
The soils report is included as part of the solicitation.
-- End of Document --
SECTION 01 11 00
SUMMARY OF WORK
08/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the

extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by
the basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM E2114 (2008) Standard Terminology for

Sustainability Relative to the Performance
of Buildings
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy

Efficiency Labeling System (FEMP)
1.2 DEFINITIONS
Definitions pertaining to sustainable development are as defined in

ASTM E2114, Section 01 57 19.00 20 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS and
Section 01 57 19.01 20 SUPPLEMENTAL TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS, and
as specified.
a. "Environmentally preferable products" have a lesser or reduced effect

on the environment in comparison to conventional products and
services. This comparison may consider raw materials acquisition,
production, manufacturing, packaging, distribution, reuse, operation,
maintenance, or disposal of the product.
b. "Indoor environmental quality" is the physical characteristics of the

building interior that impact occupants, including air quality,
illumination, acoustics, occupant control, thermal comfort,
daylighting, and views.
c. "Operational performance" is the functional behavior of the building

as a whole or of the building components.
d. "Sustainability" is the balance of environmental, economic, and

societal considerations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;

submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Upon receipt of Government Furnished Equipment, the Contractor
SECTION 01 11 00 Page 1
shall submit records in accordance with paragraph entitled,

"Government Furnished Property," of this section.
Submit the following items to the Contracting Officer:
Utility Outage Requests

Utility Connection Requests
Borrow Permits
Excavation Permits
Welding Permits
Utility Location Coordination Report; G
Emergency Utility Repair Plan; G
Utility Service Connection application; including a construction

plan for the utility service connection; G
SD-07 Certificates
Energy Performance Rating
1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.4.1 Project Description
The work includes upgrading Buildings 229 Engine Maintenance Shop, 230
Airframe Shop, 234 Ground Support Equipment (GSE) Shop, 328 Storage
Air/Ground Organization Units and 1229 Aviation Armament Shop and
construct new additions on Buildings 229 and 1229, paving and site
improvements, and incidental related work.
1.4.2 Location
The work shall be located at MCAS Yuma, Arizona. The exact location will
be shown by the Contracting Officer.
1.5 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
Refer to Section 00 01 15 LIST OF DRAWINGS for drawings accompany this

specification and are a part thereof.
Contractor shall immediately check drawings and notify the Government of

any discrepancies.
1.6 WORK RESCHEDULING
Refer to Section 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS, paragraph 1.4.2 and 1.4.3.
1.7 PROJECT ENVIRONMENTAL GOALS
Contractor shall distribute copies of the Environmental Goals to each

subcontractor and the Contracting Officer. The overall goal for design,
construction, and operation is to produce a building that meets the
functional program needs and incorporates the principles of
sustainability. Specifically:
a. Preserve and restore the site ecosystem and biodiversity; avoid site
degradation and erosion. Minimize offsite environmental impact.
b. Use the minimum amount of energy, water, and materials feasible to

meet the design intent. Select energy and water efficient equipment
and strategies.
c. Use environmentally preferable products and decrease toxicity level of

materials used.
d. Use renewable energy and material resources.
e. Optimize operational performance (through commissioning efforts) in

order to ensure energy efficient equipment operates as intended.
Consider the durability, maintainability, and flexibility of building
systems.
f. Manage construction site and storage of materials to ensure no

negative impact on the indoor environmental quality of the building.
g. Reduce construction waste through reuse, recycling, and supplier

take-back.
1.7.1 Independent Verification
1.7.1.1 EPA Energy Performance Rating
Provide work consistent with drawings in order to meet Energy Star in

accordance with design.
1.8 OCCUPANCY OF PREMISES
Building(s) will be occupied during performance of work under this

Contract. Occupancy notifications will be posted in a prominent location
in the work area.
Before work is started, the Contractor shall arrange with the Contracting
Officer a sequence of procedure, means of access, space for storage of
materials and equipment, and use of approaches, corridors, and stairways.
1.9 EXISTING WORK
In addition to "FAR 52.236-9, Protection of Existing Vegetation,

Structures, Equipment, Utilities, and Improvements":
a. Remove or alter existing work in such a manner as to prevent

injury or damage to any portions of the existing work which remain.
b. Repair or replace portions of existing work which have been

altered during construction operations to match existing or
adjoining work, as approved by the Contracting Officer. At the
completion of operations, existing work shall be in a condition
equal to or better than that which existed before new work started.
1.10 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE OF NEW CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING NAVY-OWNED

UTILITIES AND NEW UTILITY EQUIPMENT
Prior to any construction of a utility connection, a Utility Service

Connection application; including a construction plan for the utility
service connection shall be submitted to and approved by PW Utilities Plan
Reviewer. Each application shall include the relevant construction plans
and specifications, following the standards of the applicable utility

provider and regulatory agency that governs the utility where the project
is located.
(1) For all new/repaired utility connections, FEAD/ROICC or

other utilities connection installer shall schedule a pre-outage
coordination meeting. During this meeting the FEAD/ROICC will coordinate
a pre-connection inspection to be conducted after trenching and layout is
completed, but before the proposed service has been connected, and a
post-connection inspection conducted after the connection has been made
and before the connection is buried. The pre- and post-connection
inspections will typically be on the same or consecutive days and shall be
scheduled with the PW Utilities Inspector 14 days prior to the proposed
date of the work. The PW Utilities Inspector shall be present during the
inspections. The PW Utilities Inspector will verify that all new
connections to utility systems are made properly based on applicable
standards.
(2) Special Sanitary Sewer System Requirements. As part of

the post-connection inspection for all new or modified sanitary sewer
lateral and main connections, the contractor, with the PW Utilities
Inspector observing, shall confirm that each new connection is connected
to an existing sanitary sewer main. Verify the sewer connection to the
sewer system by performing a dye check from the project to the first
manhole on the next active sewer branch main downstream from the sewer
branch main used as the project point of connection. Testing shall
continue till the dye visually confirms the design connection is
appropriate. Dye shall be a nontoxic non-staining sewer tracing dye.
During the test the contractor shall monitor the storm drainage system
downstream from the project, either manholes or outfalls, for any sign of
cross connection.
FEAD/ROICC representative will ensure test results are

noted in the daily CQC report.
(3) If deficiencies are found in the pre-connection

inspection, the PW Utilities inspector will provide a list of deficiencies
to the FEAD/ROICC representative. The FEAD/ROICC representative will
determine if the requirements are within the contract. Items considered
to be within the contract requirement will be given to the contractor for
correction and documented in the contract files. Resolution of items
considered outside of the contract by the FEAD/ROICC but deemed required
by PW Utilities shall be resolved prior to cutting in the connection.
(This situation should be avoided by having prior approved PW Utilities
connection applications/construction plans.)
(4) The PW Utilities Inspector shall be notified when all

deficiencies have been completed to reschedule the pre-connection
inspection. The repeated inspection will only cover items noted in the
previous inspection.
(5) After post connection inspection is completed, the PW

Utilities Inspector will authorize the system or equipment to be energized
and/or placed into service.
(6) The Contractor shall provide as-built utility drawings,

preferably in standard electronic format to FEAD/ROICC showing the
location of all utility lines, mains, laterals, and other appurtenances
reference to a known location or in GPS Coordinates. The type, class,
size of all piping and valves shall be indicated on the as-builts. For
new sewers, as-built invert elevations shall be provided starting from the
building going to the first pre-existing downstream manhole. The
FEAD/ROICC shall provide these to PW Utilities as soon as possible. The
FEAD/ROICC shall follow the requirements of BMS 1.6.11 NAVFAC RED ZONE to
provide to PW Utilities utility record drawings.
(7) Any change(s) to storm water systems shall be

coordinated with installation environmental staff, including providing
as-built drawings to update storm water system networks for compliance
with National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permits.
(8) These guidelines are not a substitute for professional

judgment as to when additional safe guards are needed to prevent improper
connections to existing utility systems.
1.11 ON-SITE PERMITS
1.11.1 Utility Outage Requests and Utility Connection Requests
CONFORM TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS.
Notify the Contracting Officer at least 48 hours prior to starting

excavation work. Contractor is responsible for marking and verifying all
utilities not marked.
The Contractor shall verify the elevations of existing piping, utilities,

and any type of underground obstruction not indicated or specified to be
removed. But indicated in locations to be transversed by piping, ducts,
and other work to be installed. Verify elevations before installing new
work closer than nearest manhole or other structure at which an adjustment
in grade can be made.
Work shall be scheduled to hold outages to a minimum.
Utility outages and connections required during the prosecution of work

that affect existing systems shall be arranged for at the convenience of
the Government and shall be scheduled outside the regular working hours or
on weekends.
Contractor shall not be entitled to additional payment for utility outages

and connections required to be performed outside the regular work hours.
Requests for utility outages and connections shall be made in writing to

the Contracting Officer at least 14 calendar days in advance of the time
required. Outages require prior approval by the Contracting Officer.
Schedule all utility "outages" after 4:00 pm or on weekends. Each request
shall state the system involved, area involved, approximate duration of
outage, and the nature of work involved.
1.11.2 Borrow, Excavation, Welding Permits
ACTIVITY SUBMISSION DATE SUBMISSION FORM
Borrow Permits 14 calendar days prior to MCAS Yuma

work
ACTIVITY SUBMISSION DATE SUBMISSION FORM
Excavation Permits 14 calendar days prior to MCAS Yuma

work
Welding Permits 14 calendar days prior to MCAS Yuma
work
Permits shall be posted at a conspicuous location in the construction area.
Burning of trash or rubbish is not permitted.
1.12 LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
Obtain digging permits prior to start of excavation by contacting the

Contracting Officer 30 calendar days in advance. Locate all existing
utilities in the area of work. Utilize FMD, dig alert, base technical
sources including but not limited to meeting with Installations &
Logistics (I&L) personnel, and base communications personnel, and
researching station drawings and files. Employ the services of a private
third-party locator service company that specializes in underground and
in-slab utility locating. Scan the construction site with electromagnetic
or sonic equipment, and mark the surface of the ground and/or interior
paved surface where existing utilities or obstructions are discovered.
Use 'Survey grade' GPS to identify new and existing utilities encountered.
Submit Coordination Report to Contracting Officer summarizing locating
efforts, offices contacted, utilities encountered and include a detailed
site map and interior floor plan completed with all the utilities located
PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF ANY DEMO, UNDERGROUND WORK, OR INTERIOR SLAB
CUT/CORE OR GRINDING. Verify the elevations of existing piping,
utilities, and any type of underground or encased obstruction indicated to
be traversed by piping, ducts, and other work.
1.12.1 Coordination
After contract award and prior to commencement of any clearing and

grubbing, trenching, boring, earthwork, pile driving, or other operation
that may damage underground utilities, the Contractor shall provide his
own utility locator services. The Contractor shall review all available
As-built Base Facility Drawings(s) for the area under construction. The
Contractor shall coordinate the utility locating service with other
applicable activities and agencies.
1.12.2 Utility Location Coordination Report
When utility location is furnished, the Contractor shall submit a report

outlining the activities and agencies contacted. The DIG ALERT inquiry
identification shall be provided in the report. No activity that could
damage the underground utilities may begin until the Contracting Officer
approves the coordination report.
1.12.3 Notification Prior to Excavation
After all related permits have been approved by the Contracting Officer;
Notify the Contracting Officer at least 7 days prior to starting
excavation work.
1.12.4 Emergency Utility Repair Plan
The contractors shall be required to submit an Emergency Utility Repair

Plan prior to being allowed to perform any excatation. Emergency shall be
defined as the interruption of any and/or damage of any utility service.
Including but not limted to the spill, or potential spill of any fuel oil,
gas, potable water, sewage effluent, raw sewage, or storm water outside of
system facilities.
The Emegency Utility Repair Plan shall include the following elements:
a. Equipment list of available pumps with sizes, excavation

equipment, tools, and repair materials that are available onsite.
b. Labor force that will be available as a minimum to respond to

emergencies.
c. Site-specific plan for locating, potholing, protecting, avoiding,

and repairing any damage caused to existing, or newly installed
utilities.
d. Include the same level of detail for any subcontractors that will
be performing work involving excavation.
e. Include a description of any planned effort that would involve

bringing in a subcontractor personnel to respond to emergencies.
f. The Plan shall be subject to approval by the Contracting Officer.
The Contractor shall demonstrate in his Emergency Utility Repair Plan that
they are capable of responding to utility interruptions that could be
caused by their construction operations or impacts from them. Immediately
upon discovery of the situation, the Contractor shall react in a way that
will minimize utility interruptions, releases, spills, impacts to utility
customers, and potential for fines or notices of violations. In no case
will repairs be left to be resolved the next day without the approval of
the Contracting Officer.
The Contractor's Emergency Utility Repair Plan shall address the above
items for each utility potentially impacted by construction, crossed by
excavation, or known to be in the area but possessing properties that
cause difficulties in identification of the exact location.
In the event that a utility is broken, all repairs will be the

responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall repair any damage
to those facilities, including those that are the property of a third
party, resulting from failure to comply with the requirements of this
contract or failure to exercise reasonable care in performing the work. If
the Contractor fails or refuses to repair the damage promptly, the
Contracting Officer may have the necessary work performed and charge the
cost to the Contractor.
1.13 Utility Lines Broken By Contractor
Utility lines broken by the Contractor shall be repaired at Contractor's

expense regardless if the utility is marked out or not by the Government.
Costs borne by the Government to repair/replace/assist in utility work as a
result of Contractor breaks in utility lines shall be reimbursed by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for immediately repairing
any damaged utility lines or systems to prevent disruptions to the

operations of the users of the facility.
1.14 GOVERNMENT-FURNISHED MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
Pursuant to Contract Clause "FAR 52.245-2, Government Property (Fixed

Price Contracts)" , the Government will furnish the following materials
and equipment for installation by the Contractor:
DESIGNATION NO. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY
Building 230 Existing "T-10" One
Note: Contractor to relocate existing "T-10"

equipment.
Quantities indicated for the above-listed items marked with an asterisk

are estimates. It is the intention of the Government to furnish all
quantities of the asterisk items required to complete the work as
specified and the various quantities will be adjusted when necessary.
Quantities stated for the above items not marked with an asterisk are all
that will be furnished by the Government. Contractor shall furnish any
additional quantities required.
1.14.1 Delivery Schedule
Notify the Contracting Officer in writing at least 14 calendar days in

advance of the date on which the materials and equipment are required.
Pick up materials and equipment no later than 30 calendar days after such
date.
1.14.2 Delivery Location
The materials and equipment will be delivered to the site.
1.15 Navy and Marine Corps (NMCI) Coordination Requirements
1.15.1 NMCI Contractor Access
The NMCI Contractor must be allowed access to the facility towards the end
of construction (finishes 90 percent complete, rough-in 100 percent
complete, Inside Plant (ISP)/Outside Plant (OSP) infrastructure in place)
to provide equipment in the telecommunications rooms and make final
connections. Coordinate efforts with the NMCI contractor to facilitate
joint use of building spaces during the final phases of construction.
After the Contracting Officer has facilitated coordination meetings
between the two contractors, the construction contractor must, within one
week, incorporate the effort of additional contractor coordination into
construction schedule to demonstrate plan for maintaining the contract
duration. Contractor to coordinate with Base NMCI point of contact.
1.16 SALVAGE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
Items designated by the Contracting Officer to be salvaged shall remain

the property of the Government.
The salvaged property shall be segregated, itemized, delivered, and
off-loaded at the Government designated storage area located within the

Base.
Contractor shall maintain property control records for material or

equipment designated as salvage. Contractor's system of property control
may be used if approved by the Contracting Officer. Contractor shall be
responsible for storage and protection of salvaged materials and equipment
until disposition by the Contracting Officer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 14 00
WORK RESTRICTIONS
11/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic
designation only.
U.S. Code (USC)
8 USC 1101 Definitions
1.2 SUBMITTALS

List of Contact Personnel; G
Personnel List; G
Vehicle List; G
1.3 SPECIAL SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS
a. Temporary facilities must be ready for operation as approved by

Contracting Officer before work is started on all construction which
would interfere with normal operation.
b. Have materials, equipment, and personnel required to perform the work

at the site prior to the commencement of the work. Specific items of
work to which this requirement applies include:
(1) Building 230 - Dry Filter Paint Booth System.
(2) Building 230 - Downdraft Booth.
(3) Building 230 - Modular X-Ray Vault.
(4) Building 230 - T-10 Equipment.
c. All buildings will remain in operation during the entire construction

period. The Contractor must conduct his operations so as to cause the
least possible interference with normal operations of the activity.
d. Permission to interrupt any Activity roads, railroads, and/or utility

service must be requested in writing a minimum of 14 calendar days
prior to the desired date of interruption.
e. The work under this contract requires special attention to the

scheduling and conduct of the work in connection with existing
operations. Identify on the construction schedule each factor which
constitutes a potential interruption to operations.
The following conditions apply:
(1) Building 230: Existing paint booth operations can only be

interupted for a total of 21 days, to allow for new paint booth to
be installed. New paint booth must be fully operational after the
transition period.
(2) Building 230: Room must have all components ready for acceptance
for relocation of the existing "T-10" Equipment. This includes
process cooling.
1.4 CONTRACTOR ACCESS AND USE OF PREMISES
1.4.1 Activity Regulations
Ensure that Contractor personnel employed on the Activity become familiar

with and obey Activity regulations including safety, fire, traffic and
security regulations. Keep within the limits of the work and avenues of
ingress and egress. To minimize traffic congestion, delivery of materials
must be outside of peak traffic hours (6:30 to 8:00 a.m. and 3:30 to 5:00
p.m.) unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Officer.Wear hard hats
in designated areas. Do not enter any restricted areas unless required to
do so and until cleared for such entry. Mark Contractor equipment for
identification.
1.4.1.1 Subcontractors and Personnel Contacts
Provide a list of contact personnel of the Contractor and subcontractors

including addresses and telephone numbers for use in the event of an
emergency. As changes occur and additional information becomes available,
correct and change the information contained in previous lists.
1.4.1.2 Identification Badges and Installation Access
Application for and use of badges will be as directed. Obtain access to

the installation by participating in the Navy Commercial Access Control
System (NCACS), or by obtaining passes each day from the Base Pass and
Identification Office. Costs for obtaining passes through the NCACS are
the responsibility of the Contractor. One-day passes, issued through the
Base Pass and Identification Office, will be furnished without charge.
Furnish a completed EMPLOYMENT ELIGIBILITY VERIFICATION (DHS FORM I-9)
form for all personnel requesting badges. This form is available at
http://www.uscis.gov/portal/site/uscis by searching or selecting
Employment Verification (Form I-9). Immediately report instances of lost
or stolen badges to the Contracting Officer.
a. NCACS Program: NCACS is a voluntary program in which Contractor

personnel who enroll, and are approved, are subsequently granted
access to the installation for a period up to one year, or the length
of the contract, whichever is less, and are not required to obtain a
new pass from the Base Pass and Identification Office for each visit.
The Government performs background screening and credentialing.
Throughout the year the Contractor employee must continue to meet
background screening standards. Periodic background screenings are
conducted to verify continued NCACS participation and installation

access privileges. Under the NCACS program, no commercial vehicle
inspection is required, other than for Random Anti-Terrorism Measures
(RAM) or in the case of an elevation of Force Protection Conditions
(FPCON). Information on costs and requirements to participate and
enroll in NCACS is available at http://www.rapidgate.com or by calling
1-877-727-4342. Contractors should be aware that the costs incurred
to obtain NCACS credentials, or costs related to any means of access
to a Navy Installation, are not reimbursable. Any time invested, or
price(s) paid, for obtaining NCACS credentials will not be compensated
in any way or approved as a direct cost of any contract with the
Department of the Navy.
b. One-Day Passes: Participation in the NCACS is not mandatory, and if

the Contractor chooses to not participate, the Contractor's personnel
will have to obtain daily passes, be subject to daily mandatory
vehicle inspection, and will have limited access to the installation.
The Government will not be responsible for any cost or lost time
associated with obtaining daily passes or added vehicle inspections
incurred by non-participants in the NCACS.
1.4.1.3 No Smoking Policy
Smoking is prohibited within and outside of all buildings on

installation, except in designated smoking areas. This applies to
existing buildings, buildings under construction and buildings under
renovation. Discarding tobacco materials other than into designated
tobacco receptacles is considered littering and is subject to fines. The
Contracting Officer will identify designated smoking areas.
1.4.2 Working Hours
Regular working hours must consist of an 8 hour period, between 6 a.m. and
6 p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding Government holidays.
1.4.3 Work Outside Regular Hours
Work outside regular working hours requires Contracting Officer approval.

Make application 15 calendar days prior to such work to allow arrangements
to be made by the Government for inspecting the work in progress, giving
the specific dates, hours, location, type of work to be performed,
contract number and project title. Based on the justification provided,
the Contracting Officer may approve work outside regular hours. During
periods of darkness, the different parts of the work must be lighted in a
manner approved by the Contracting Officer. Make utility cutovers after
normal working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, and Government holidays
unless directed otherwise.
1.4.4 Exclusionary Period
No work must be performed during the the Weapon and Tactics Instructors
Course (WTI), inclusive, without prior written approval of the Contracting
Officer. This period has not been considered in computing the time
allowed for the performance of this contract.
WTI schedules are as follows:
Airshow 02/29/2016 - 03/04/2016

WTI 2-16 03/06/2016 - 04/29/2016
WTI 1-17 09/06/2016 - 10/31/2016

Airshow 03/06/2017 - 03/10/2017
WTI 2-17 03/12/2017 - 05/03/2017
1.4.5 Occupied and Existing Buildings
The Contractor shall be working in existing buildings and around existing

buildings which are occupied. Do not enter the buildings without prior
approval of the Contracting Officer.
Contractor shall maintain vehicular parking and access to adjacent

building's during the duration of the construction project.
The existing buildings and their contents must be kept secure at all
times. Provide temporary closures as required to maintain security as
directed by the Contracting Officer.
Provide dust covers or protective enclosures to protect existing work that

remains and Government material located in the building and project site
during the construction period.
Relocate movable furniture as required to perform the work, protect the

furniture, and replace the furniture in their original locations upon
completion of the work. Leave attached equipment in place, and protect
them against damage, or temporarily disconnect, relocate, protect, and
reinstall them at the completion of the work.
The Government will remove and relocate other Government property in the
areas of the buildings scheduled to receive work.
1.4.6 Utility Cutovers and Interruptions
a. Make utility cutovers and interruptions after normal working hours or

on Saturdays, Sundays, and Government holidays. Conform to procedures
required in the paragraph "Work Outside Regular Hours."
b. Ensure that new utility lines are complete, except for the connection,
before interrupting existing service.
c. Interruption to water, sanitary sewer, storm sewer, telephone and data

service, electric service, air conditioning, heating, fire alarm,
compressed air, and fire protection sprinklers are considered utility
cutovers pursuant to the paragraph entitled "Work Outside Regular
Hours." Such interruptions are further limited to 4 hours. This time
limit includes time for deactivation and reactivation.
d. Operation of Station Utilities: The Contractor must not operate nor

disturb the setting of control devices in the station utilities
system, including water, sewer, electrical, and steam services. The
Government will operate the control devices as required for normal
conduct of the work. The Contractor must notify the Contracting
Officer giving reasonable advance notice when such operation is
required.
1.5 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
Contract Clause "FAR 52.204-2, Security Requirements and Alternate II,"

"FAC 5252.236-9301, Special Working Conditions and Entry to Work Area,"
and the following apply:
1.5.1 Employment Restrictions For NAVFAC SW
The Contractor must not employ any person, for any work required by this
contract, who: (1)is a non-immigrant as described in section
101(a)(15)(H)(ii) of the Immigration and Nationality Act 8 USC 1101
(a)(15)(H)(ii), (2)is an alien having a residence in a foreign country
which he has no intention of abandoning and who is coming to the United
States to perform temporary services or labor.
1.5.1.1 Personnel List
Submit for approval, at least 15 days prior to the desired date of entry,
an original alphabetical list of personnel who require entry into
Government property to perform work on the project. Furnish for each
person:
a. Name
b. Date and place of birth
c. Citizenship
d. Home address
e. Social security number
f. Current pass expiration date
g. Naturalization or Alien Registration number
h. Passport number, place of issue, and expiration date
The request for personnel passes must be accompanied with the following
certification:
"I hereby certify that all personnel on this list are either born U.S.
citizens, naturalized U.S. citizens with the naturalization number shown."
Signature/Firm Name
1.5.2 Vehicle List
Submit an original list of vehicles to be utilized at the work site with

the following information for each vehicle:
a. Make
b. Year
c. Model
d. License number
e. Registered owner
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
SECTION 01 20 00.00 20
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

11/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
EP-1110-1-8 (2009) Construction Equipment Ownership

and Operating Expense Schedule
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Earned Value Report; G
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Final Form Dd 1354; G
1.3 EARNED VALUE REPORT
1.3.1 Data Required
This contract requires the use of a cost-loaded Network Analysis Schedule

(NAS). The information required for the Schedule of Prices will be
entered as an integral part of the Network Analysis. Within 15 calendar
days of notice of award, prepare and deliver to the Contracting Officer an
Earned Value Report (construction contract) as directed by the Contracting
Officer. Provide a detailed breakdown of the contract price, giving
quantities for each of the various kinds of work, unit prices, and
extended prices. Costs shall be summarized and totals provided for each
construction category.
1.3.2 Schedule Instructions
Payments will not be made until the Earned Value Report from the
cost-loaded NAS has been submitted to and accepted by the Contracting
Officer. Identify the cost for site work, and include incidental work to
the 5 ft line. Identify costs for the building(s), and include work out
to the 5 ft line. Work out to the 5 ft line shall include construction
encompassed within a theoretical line 5 ft from the face of exterior walls
and shall include attendant construction, such as pad mounted HVAC cooling
equipment, cooling towers, and transformers placed beyond the 5 ft line.
SECTION 01 20 00.00 20 Page 1

1.3.3 Real Property Assets
The Government will provide the Draft DD Form 1354, Transfer and
Acceptance of Military Real Property filled in with the appropriate Real
Property Unique Identifiers (RPUID) and related construction Category
Codes to summarize the designed real property assets that apply to this
contract. The Contractor shall meet with the Contracting Officer and the
Real Property Accounting Officer during the Pre Construction Meeting and
the Project Closeout Meetings to modify and include any necessary changes
and updates to the DD Form 1354. The Contractor shall provide the Interim
DD Form 1354 that uses the appropriate division of the RPUIDs/ Category
Codes to represent the final constructed facility and include all
associated cost to the Contracting Officer for Government review 60 days
prior to the Beneficial Occupancy Date (BOD) based on the Government's
review of the Interim DD 1354, complete the Final DD Form 1354 and certify
that the information provided is complete and accurate. Submit the Final
Form DD 1354 to the Contracting Officer with the final invoice.
Coordinate the Contractor's Price and Payment structure with the structure
of the RPUIDs/ Category Codes.
Divide detailed asset breakdown into the RPUIDs and related construction
Category Codes and populate associated costs which represent all aspects
of the work. Where assets diverge into multiple RPUID/ Category Codes,
divide the asset and provide the proportion of the assets in each RPUID/
Category Code. Assets and related RPUID/ Category Codes may be modified
by the Contracting Officer as necessary during course of the work.
Coordinate identification and proportion of these assets with the
Government Real Property Accounting Officer.
Cost data accumulated under this section are required in the preparation
of DD Form 1354.
1.3.4 Schedule Requirements for HVAC TAB
The field work Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING shall be

broken down in the Earned Value Report from the cost-loaded NAS by
separate line items which reflect measurable deliverables. Specific
payment percentages for each line item shall be determined on a case by
case basis for each contract. The line items shall be as follows:
a. Approval of Design Review Report: The TABS Agency is required to

conduct a review of the project plans and specifications to identify
any feature, or the lack thereof, that would preclude successful
testing and balancing of the project HVAC systems. The resulting
findings shall be submitted to the Government to allow correction of
the design. The progress payment shall be issued after review and
approval of the report.
b. Approval of the pre-field engineering report: The TABS Agency submits

a report which outlines the scope of field work. The report shall
contain details of what systems will be tested, procedures to be used,
sample report forms for reporting test results and a quality control
checklist of work items that must be completed before TABS field work
commences.
c. Season I field work: Incremental payments are issued as the TABS

field work progresses. The TABS Agency mobilizes to the project site
and executes the field work as outlined in the pre-field engineering
report. The HVAC water and air systems are balanced and operational
SECTION 01 20 00.00 20 Page 2

data shall be collected for one seasonal condition (either summer or

winter depending on project timing).
d. Approval of Season I report: On completion of the Season I field

work, the data is compiled into a report and submitted to the
Government. The report is reviewed, and approved, after ensuring
compliance with the pre-field engineering report scope of work.
e. Completion of Season I field QA check: Contract QC and Government

representatives meet the TABS Agency at the jobsite to retest portions
of the systems reported in the Season I report. The purpose of these
tests are to validate the accuracy and completeness of the previously
submitted Season I report.
f. Approval of Season II report: The TABS Agency completes all Season II

field work, which is normally comprised mainly of taking heat transfer
temperature readings, in the season opposite of that under which
Season I performance data was compiled. This data shall be compiled
into a report and submitted to the Government. On completion of
submittal review to ensure compliance with the pre-field engineering
report scope, progress payment is issued. Progress payment is less
than that issued for the Season I report since most of the water and
air balancing work effort is completed under Season I.
1.4 CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS
In conjunction with the Contract Clause "DFARS 252.236-7000, Modification

Proposals-Price Breakdown," and where actual ownership and operating costs
of construction equipment cannot be determined from Contractor accounting
records, equipment use rates shall be based upon the applicable provisions
of the EP-1110-1-8.
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S INVOICE AND CONTRACT PERFORMANCE STATEMENT
1.5.1 Content of Invoice
Requests for payment will be processed in accordance with the Contract

Clause FAR 52.232-27, Prompt Payment Construction Contracts
and FAR 52.232-5, Payments Under Fixed-Price Construction Contracts. The
requests for payment shall include the documents listed below.
a. The Contractor's invoice, on NAVFAC Form 7300/30 furnished by the

Government, showing in summary form, the basis for arriving at the
amount of the invoice. Form 7300/30 shall include certification by
Quality Control (QC) Manager as required by the contract.
b. The Earned Value Report from the cost-loaded NAS, showing in detail:
the estimated cost, percentage of completion, and value of completed
performance for each of the construction categories stated in this
contract.
c. Updated Project Schedule and reports required by the contract.
d. Contractor Safety Self Evaluation Checklist.
e. Other supporting documents as requested.
f. Updated copy of submittal register.
SECTION 01 20 00.00 20 Page 3

g. Invoices not completed in accordance with contract requirements will be

returned to the Contractor for correction of the deficiencies.
1.5.2 Submission of Invoices
If NFAS Clause 5252.232-9301 is included in the contract, the documents

listed in paragraph "CONTENT OF INVOICE" shall be provided in their
entirety as attachments in Wide Area Work Flow (WAWF) for each invoice
submitted. The maximum size of each WAWF attachment is two megabytes, but
there are no limits on the number of attachments. If a document cannot be
attached in WAWF due to system or size restriction it shall be provided as
instructed by the Contracting Officer.
1.5.3 Final Invoice
a. A final invoice shall be accompanied by the certification required by

DFARS 252.247.7023 TRANSPORTATION OF SUPPLIES BY SEA, and the
Contractor's Final Release. If the Contractor is incorporated, the
Final Release shall contain the corporate seal. An officer of the
corporation shall sign and the corporate secretary shall certify the
Final Release.
b. For final invoices being submitted via WAWF, the original Contractor's
Final Release Form and required certification of Transportation of
Supplies by Sea must be provided directly to the respective
Contracting Officer prior to submission of the final invoice. Once
receipt of the original Final Release Form and required certification
of Transportation of Supplies by Sea has been confirmed by the
Contracting Officer, the Contractor shall then submit final invoice
and attach a copy of the Final Release Form and required certification
of Transportation of Supplies by Sea in WAWF.
c. Final invoices not accompanied by the Contractor's Final Release and

required certification of Transportation of Supplies by Sea will be
considered incomplete and will be returned to the Contractor.
1.6 PAYMENTS TO THE CONTRACTOR
Payments will be made on submission of itemized requests by the Contractor

which comply with the requirements of this section, and will be subject to
reduction for overpayments or increase for underpayments made on previous
payments to the Contractor.
1.6.1 Obligation of Government Payments
The obligation of the Government to make payments required under the

provisions of this contract will, at the discretion of the Contracting
Officer, be subject to reductions and/or suspensions permitted under the
FAR and agency regulations including the following in accordance with "FAR
32.503-6:
a. Reasonable deductions due to defects in material or workmanship;
b. Claims which the Government may have against the Contractor under or
in connection with this contract;
c. Unless otherwise adjusted, repayment to the Government upon demand for

overpayments made to the Contractor; and
SECTION 01 20 00.00 20 Page 4

d. Failure to provide up to date record drawings not current as stated in

Contract Clause "FAC 5252.236-9310, Record Drawings."
1.6.2 Payment for Onsite and Offsite Materials
Progress payments may be made to the contractor for materials delivered on

the site, for materials stored off construction sites, or materials that
are in transit to the construction sites under the following conditions:
a. FAR 52.232-5(b) Payments Under Fixed Price Construction Contracts.
b. Materials delivered on the site but not installed, including completed

preparatory work, and off-site materials to be considered for progress
payment shall be major high cost, long lead, special order, or
specialty items, not susceptible to deterioration or physical damage
in storage or in transit to the construction site. Examples of
materials acceptable for payment consideration include, but are not
limited to, structural steel, non-magnetic steel, non-magnetic
aggregate, equipment, machinery, large pipe and
fittings,precast/prestressed concrete products, plastic lumber (e.g.,
fender piles/curbs), and high-voltage electrical cable. Materials not
acceptable for payment include consumable materials such as nails,
fasteners, conduits, gypsum board, glass, insulation, and wall
coverings.
c. Materials to be considered for progress payment prior to installation

shall be specifically and separately identified in the Contractor's
estimates of work submitted for the Contracting Officer's approval in
accordance with Earned Value Report requirement of this contract.
Requests for progress payment consideration for such items shall be
supported by documents establishing their value and that the title
requirements of the clause at FAR 52.232-5 have been met.
d. Materials are adequately insured and protected from theft and exposure.
e. Provide a written consent from the surety company with each payment
request for offsite materials.
f. Materials to be considered for progress payments prior to installation

shall be stored either in Hawaii, Guam, Puerto Rico, or the
Continental United States. Other locations are subject to written
approval by the Contracting Officer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
SECTION 01 20 00.00 20 Page 5

SECTION 01 30 00
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
11/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS

View location map
Progress and completion pictures
1.2 VIEW LOCATION MAP
Submit to the Contracting Officer, prior to or with the first digital

photograph submittals, a sketch or drawing indicating the required
photographic locations. Update as required if the locations are moved.
1.3 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION PICTURES
Contractor to verify with the Contracting Officer and User when progress
photos can be taken. Security requirements may not permit the use of
photos for progress of construction.
Photographically document site conditions prior to start of construction

operations. Provide monthly, and within one month of the completion of
work, digital photographs, 1600x1200x24 bit true color minimum resolution
in JPEG file format showing the sequence and progress of work. Take a
minimum of 20 digital photographs each week throughout the entire project
from a minimum of ten views from points located by the Contracting
Officer. Submit a view location sketch indicating points of view. Submit
with the monthly invoice two sets of digital photographs each set on a
separate CD-R, cumulative of all photos to date. Indicate photographs
demonstrating environmental procedures. Photographs for each month shall
be in a separate monthly directory and each file shall be named to
indicate its location on the view location sketch. The view location
sketch shall also be provided on the CD as digital file. All file names
shall include a date designator. Cross reference submittals in the
appropriate daily report. Photographs shall be provided for unrestricted
use by the Government.
1.4 MINIMUM INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
Procure and maintain during the entire period of performance under this
contract the following minimum insurance coverage:
a. Comprehensive general liability: $500,000 per occurrence
b. Automobile liability: $200,000 per person, $500,000 per occurrence

for bodily injury, $20,000 per occurrence for property damage
c. Workmen's compensation as required by Federal and State workers'

compensation and occupational disease laws.
d. Employer's liability coverage of $100,000, except in States where

workers compensation may not be written by private carriers,
e. Others as required by State law.
1.5 CONTRACTOR SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
1.5.1 Asbestos Containing Material
All contract requirements of Section 02 82 14.00 10, "ASBESTOS HAZARD

CONTORL ACTIVITIES" assigned to the Private Qualified Person (PQP) shall
be accomplished directly by a first tier subcontractor.
1.5.2 Space Temperature Control, HVAC TAB, and Apparatus Inspection
All contract requirements of Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND

BALANCING FOR HVAC and Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING
shall be accomplished directly by a first tier subcontractor, including
the Commissioning Agent. No work required by Section 23 05 93 or 26 08 00
shall be accomplished by a second tier subcontractor.
1.6 SUPERVISION
Have at least one qualified supervisor capable of reading, writing, and

conversing fluently in the English language on the job site during working
hours. In addition, if a Quality Control (QC) representative is required
on the contract, then that individual shall also have fluent English
communication skills.
1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
After award of the contract but prior to commencement of any work at the
site, meet with the Contracting Officer to discuss and develop a mutual
understanding relative to the administration of the value engineering and
safety program, preparation of the schedule of prices or earned value
report, shop drawings, and other submittals, scheduling programming,
prosecution of the work, and clear expectations of the "Interim DD Form
1354" Submittal. Major subcontractors who will engage in the work shall
also attend.
1.8 FACILITY TURNOVER PLANNING MEETINGS (NAVFAC Red Zone - NRZ)
Key personnel will meet to identify strategies to ensure the project is

carried to expeditious closure and turnover to the Client. Start the
turnover process at the Pre Construction Conference meeting and convene at
the Facility Turnover Meetings once the project has reached approximately
75 percent completion or three to six months prior to Beneficial Occupancy
Date (BOD), whichever comes first. The Contracting Officer's
Representative will lead the meetings and guide discussions based on an
agenda provided by the Government. The facility Turnover effort shall
include the following:
a. Pre Construction Meeting - Contracting Officer's Technical

Representative (COTR) will provide the NRZ Checklist and the
Contractor, Client, and NAVFAC Representatives will compare
Contractor's schedule to NRZ Checklist items.
b. Facility Turnover Meetings
1. Fill in the NRZ Checklist including Contractor, Client, and NAVFAC

Checklist Items and assign a person responsible for each item and
a due date. The Contractor's Representative will facilitate the
assignment of responsibilities, fill out the NRZ Checklist, and
discuss "Interim DD Form 1354" requirements.
2. Review the Contractor's updated schedule. The Contractor shall

develop a POAM for the completion of all Contractor, Client, and
NAVFAC Checklist items.
3. Confirm that all NRZ Checklist items will be completed on time for
the scheduled Facility Turnover.
1.9 PARTNERING
To most effectively accomplish this contract, the Government requires the

formation of a cohesive partnership within the Project Team whose members
are from the Government, the Contractor and their Subcontractors. Key
personnel from the Supported Command, the End User (who will occupy the
facility), NAVFAC (Echelon III and IV), the Navy Region/Installation, the
Contractor and Subcontractors, and the Designer of Record will be invited
to participate in the Partnering process. The Partnership will draw on
the strength of each organization in an effort to achieve a project that
is without any safety mishaps, conforms to the Contract, and stays within
budget and on schedule.
The Contracting Officer will provide Information on the Partnering Process

and a list of key and optional personnel who should attend the Partnering
meeting.
1.9.1 Formal Partnering
Provide and host the Partnering sessions with key personnel of the Project
Team, including Contractor personnel and Government personnel. Pay all
costs associated with the Partnering effort including the Facilitator, the
meeting room, and other incidental items. In exception, participants
shall bear their own costs for meals, lodging, and transportation
associated with the Partnering sessions.
Before a Partnering session, coordinate with the Facilitator all

requirements for incidental items (such as audio-visual equipment, easels,
flipchart paper, colored markers, note paper, pens/pencils, colored flash
cards, etc.), and have these items available at the Partnering session.
Provide copies of documents for distribution to all attendees.
The Facilitator shall be experienced in conducting Partnering Workshops,

and shall be acceptable to both the Government and the Contractor. The
Facilitator is responsible for leading the team in a timely manner and
making sure that issues are identified and resolved. A list of Partnering
Facilitators is available from the Contracting Officer.
a. The Initial Partnering Session shall be a duration of one day minimum.

It shall be located at a place off the construction site, as agreed to
by the Contracting Officer and the Contractor. It may take place
concurrently with the Pre-Construction Meeting.
b. The Follow-on Partnering Session(s) generally last a half day or less.

Schedule them at 3 to six month intervals, or when needed.
Participants are encouraged to utilize electronic means to expedite
meetings. Meetings may be held at a location off-Base, at the project
site, or in a Government Facility on Base. Follow-on meetings may be
held concurrently with other scheduled meetings. Attendees need only
be those required to resolve current issues. Recommend using the same
Facilitator from the Initial Partnering session to achieve best
results and for continuity.
1.10 AVAILABILITY OF CADD DRAWING FILES
After award and upon request, the electronic "Computer-Aided Drafting and
Design (CADD)" drawing files will only be made available to the Contractor
for use in preparation of construction data related to the referenced
contract subject to the following terms and conditions. Request specific
drawing numbers of files required; the entire set of drawing files will
not be provided.
Data contained on these electronic files shall not be used for any purpose
other than as a convenience in the preparation of construction data for
the referenced project. Any other use or reuse shall be at the sole risk
of the Contractor and without liability or legal exposure to the
Government. The Contractor shall make no claim and waives to the fullest
extent permitted by law, any claim or cause of action of any nature
against the Government, its agents or sub consultants that may arise out
of or in connection with the use of these electronic files. The
Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and
hold the Government harmless against all damages, liabilities or costs,
including reasonable attorney's fees and defense costs, arising out of or
resulting from the use of these electronic files.
These electronic CADD drawing files are not construction documents.

Differences may exist between the CADD files and the corresponding
construction documents. The Government makes no representation regarding
the accuracy or completeness of the electronic CADD files, nor does it
make representation to the compatibility of these files with the
Contractors hardware or software. In the event that a conflict arises
between the signed and sealed construction documents prepared by the
Government and the furnished CADD files, the signed and sealed
construction documents shall govern. The Contractor is responsible for
determining if any conflict exists. Use of these CADD files does not
relieve the Contractor of duty to fully comply with the contract
documents, including and without limitation, the need to check, confirm
and coordinate the work of all contractors for the project.
If the Contractor uses, duplicates and/or modifies these electronic CADD

files for use in producing construction data related to this contract, all
previous indicia of ownership (seals, logos, signatures, initials and
dates) shall be removed.
1.11 ELECTRONIC MAIL (E-MAIL) ADDRESS
The Contractor shall establish and maintain electronic mail (e-mail)

capability along with the capability to open various electronic
attachments in Microsoft, Adobe Acrobat, and other similar formats.
Within 10 days after contract award, the Contractor shall provide the
Contracting Officer a single (only one) e-mail address for electronic
communications from the Contracting Officer related to this contract

including, but not limited to contract documents, invoice information,
request for proposals, and other correspondence. The Contracting Officer
may also use email to notify the Contractor of base access conditions when
emergency conditions warrant, such as hurricanes, terrorist threats, etc.
Multiple email address will not be allowed.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to make timely distribution of all

Contracting Officer initiated e-mail with its own organization including
field office(s). The Contractor shall promptly notify the Contracting
Officer, in writing, of any changes to this email address.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
SECTION 01 32 17.00 20
COST-LOADED NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULES (NAS)

02/15
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
The Contractor is responsible for scheduling procurement, Contractor

quality control and construction, acceptance testing and training. Refer
to Specification Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES to determine if any
items require Government approval prior to construction; if any are
required, include that submittal review time in the schedule.
The schedule is a tool to manage the project, both for Contractor and
Government activities. It will also be used to report progress and
evaluate time extensions. The Project NAS must be cost-loaded and will
provide the basis for progress payments. Use the Critical Path Method
(CPM) and the Precedence Diagram Method (PDM) to satisfy time and cost
applications. For consistency, when scheduling software terminology is
used in this specification, the terms in Primavera's scheduling programs
are used.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
The use of a "G" following a submittal indicates that a Government

approval action is required. Submit the following in accordance with
Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
Qualifications; G
Baseline Network Analysis Schedule (NAS); G
SD-07 Certificates
Monthly Network Analysis Schedule Update; G
As-Built Schedule; G
1.3 SCHEDULE ACCEPTANCE PRIOR TO START OF WORK
Participate with the Contracting Officer in a preliminary meeting(s) to

discuss the proposed schedule and requirements of this section prior to
the Contractor preparing the Project Baseline Schedule. Government review
comments on the Contractor's schedule(s) do not relieve the Contractor
from compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents. Only bonds
may be paid prior to acceptance of the Baseline Network Analysis Schedule
(NAS) The acceptance of a Baseline NAS is a condition precedent to:
a. The Contractor starting work on the demolition or construction

stage(s) of the contract.
b. Processing Contractor's invoices(s) for construction activities/items
SECTION 01 32 17.00 20 Page 1

of work.
c. Review of any schedule updates.
Submittal of the Baseline Network Analysis Schedule, and subsequent

schedule updates, is understood to be the Contractor's certification that
the submitted schedule meets all of the requirements of the Contract
Documents, represents the Contractor's plan on how the work will be
accomplished, and accurately reflects the work that has been accomplished
and how it was sequenced (as-built logic).
1.4 SOFTWARE
Prepare and maintain project schedules using Primavera P6. Importing data
into P6 using data conversion techniques or third party software is cause
for rejection of the submitted schedule.
A listing of Primavera P6 settings and parameters which must be used in

preparing the Schedules are contained later in this specification
section. Deviation from these settings and parameters, without prior
consent of the Contracting Officer, is cause for rejection of schedule
submission.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
The designated Scheduler for the project must have prepared and maintained
at least 3 previous schedules of similar size and complexity of this
contract using Primavera P3, Primavera SureTrak, or Primavera P6. At
least one of the three must be in Primavera P6. Submit a resume outlining
the qualifications of the Scheduler. Payment will not be processed until
an acceptable Scheduler is provided.
1.6 NETWORK SYSTEM FORMAT
The system must include time-scaled logic diagrams and specified reports.
1.6.1 Diagrams
Provide Time-scaled Logic Diagram printed in color on ANSI D size sheets.

The diagram must clearly show activities on the critical path. Include
the following information for each activity:
a. Activity ID
b. Activity Description
c. Original Duration in Work Days
d. Remaining duration in Work Days
e. Physical Percent Complete
f. Start Date
g. Finish Date
h. Total Float
SECTION 01 32 17.00 20 Page 2

1.6.2 Schedule Activity Properties and Level of Detail
The NAS must identify all Government, Construction Quality Management

(CQM), Construction activities planned for the project and all other
activities that could impact project completion if delayed. Create
separate activities for each Phase, Area, Floor Level and Location the
activity is occurring. Activity categories included in the schedule are
specified below.
With the exception of the Contract Award and Contract Completion Date
(CCD) milestone activities, no activity shall be open-ended; each activity
must have predecessor and successor ties. No activity must have open
start or open finish (dangling) logic. Minimize redundant logic ties.
Once an activity exists on the schedule it must not be deleted or renamed
to change the scope of the activity and must not be removed from the
schedule logic without approval from the Contracting Officer. While an
activity cannot be deleted, where said activity is no longer applicable to
the schedule but must remain within the logic stream for historical
record, it can be changed to a milestone. Document any such change in the
milestone's "Notebook", including a date and explanation for the change.
The ID number for a deleted activity must not be re-used for another
activity. Within the Baseline Schedule no more than 20 percent of the
activities shall be critical or near critical. Critical is defined as
having zero days of Total Float. "Near Critical" is defined as having
Total Float of 1 to 14 days. Contractor activities must be driven by
calendars that reflect Saturdays, Sundays and all Federal Holidays as
non-work days.
1.6.2.1 Activity Categories
1.6.2.1.1 Procurement Activities
Examples of procurement activities include, but are not limited to;

Material/equipment submittal preparation, submittal and approval of
material/equipment; material/equipment fabrication and delivery, and
material/equipment on-site. As a minimum, separate procurement activities
will be provided for critical items, long lead items, items requiring
Government approval and material/equipment procurement for which payment
will be requested in advance of installation. Show each delivery with
relationship tie to the Construction Activity specifically for the
delivery.
1.6.2.1.2 Government Activities
Government and other agency activities that could impact progress must be
clearly identified. Government activities include, but are not limited
to; Government approved submittal reviews, Government conducted
inspections/tests, environmental permit approvals by State regulators,
utility outages, and delivery of Government Furnished Material/Equipment.
1.6.2.1.3 Quality Management (QM) Activities
The Preparatory Phase and Initial Phase for each Definable Feature of Work
identified in the Contractor's Quality Control Plan must be added to each
Three-Week Look Ahead Schedule referenced in the paragraph THREE-WEEK LOOK
AHEAD SCHEDULE. The Follow-up Phase will be represented by the
Construction Activities in the Baseline Schedule and in the schedule
updates.
SECTION 01 32 17.00 20 Page 3

1.6.2.1.4 Construction Activities
No on-site construction activity may have a duration in excess of 20

working days. Contractor activities must be driven by calendars that
reflect Saturdays, Sundays and all Federal Holidays as non-work days,
unless otherwise defined in this contract.
1.6.2.1.5 Turnover and Closeout Activities
Include activities with all items on the NAVFAC Red Zone Checklist/POAM
that are applicable to this project. As a minimum, include all testing,
specialized inspection activities, Pre-Final Inspection, Punch List
Completion, Final Inspection and Acceptance. Add a milestone for the
Facility Turnover Planning Meeting at approximately 75 percent
construction contract completion or three to six months prior to Contract
Completion Date (CCD), whichever is sooner.
1.6.2.2 Contract Milestones and Constraints
1.6.2.2.1 Project Start Date Milestones
Include as the first activity on the schedule a start milestone titled

"Contract Award", which must have a Mandatory Start constraint equal to
the Contract Award Date.
1.6.2.2.2 Facility Turnover Planning Meeting Milestones
See paragraph ACTIVITY CATEGORIES above.
1.6.2.2.3 Substantial Completion Milestone
Include an unconstrained finish milestone on the schedule titled

"Substantial Completion". Substantial Completion is defined as the point
in time the Government would consider the project ready for beneficial
occupancy wherein by mutual agreement of the Government and Contractor,
Government use of the facility is allowed while construction access
continues in order to complete remaining items (e.g. punch list and other
close out submittals).
1.6.2.2.4 Projected Completion Milestone
Include an unconstrained finish milestone on the schedule titled

"Projected Completion". Projected Completion is defined as the point in
time the Government would consider the project complete. This milestone
must have the Contract Completion (CCD) milestone as its only successor.
1.6.2.2.5 Contract Completion Date (CCD) Milestone
Include as the last activity on the schedule a finish milestone titled

"Contract Completion (CCD)". Calculation of schedule updates must be such
that if the finish of the "Projected Completion" milestone falls after the
contract completion date, then negative float will be calculated on the
longest path and if the finish of the "Projected Completion" milestone
falls before the contract completion date, the float calculation must
reflect positive float on the longest path.
1.6.2.3 Work Breakdown Structure & Activity Code
At a minimum, the Contractor must establish a Work Breakdown Structure
SECTION 01 32 17.00 20 Page 4

(WBS) and provide activity codes identified as follows:
1.6.2.3.1 Work Breakdown Structure (WBS)
Group all activities and milestones within appropriate WBS categories

including, at a minimum, the following:
a. Project Milestones:
(1) Management Milestones
(2) Project Administrative Meetings
b. Pre-Construction Phase:
(1) Submittals and Reviews
(2) Procurement
c. Construction Phase; Create multiple sub-sections in accordance with

project specific categories of work including in WBS descending order
as follows:
(1) General Area
(a) Type of Work Item
1. Location
d. Commissioning & Testing:
(1) Specific area/locations of commissioning
(2) Final Testing
(3) Training
e. Project Closeout: Include activity items such as Punchlist,

Demobilization, O&M, As-built Drawings, and As-built NAS.
f. Modifications: Create multiple sub-sections as the project progresses

identified by modifications issued.
1.6.2.3.2 Responsibility Code
All activities in the project schedule must be identified with the party
responsible for completing the task. Activities must not belong to more
than one responsible party.
1.6.2.3.3 Construction Specification Institute (CSI) Masterformat Code
Identify all activities in the project schedule with its respective

Specification Section number. Activities must not belong to more than one
Section number. If an activity does not have an applicable CSI Code (e.g.
Mobilize), the code must be "0000".
1.6.2.3.4 Drawing Code
Identify all activities in the project schedule with its respective
SECTION 01 32 17.00 20 Page 5

Drawing Code. The Drawing Code is the Sheet Number on the primary project
drawing which indicates work to be performed. If an activity does not
have an applicable Drawing Code (e.g. Mobilize), the code must be "0000".
1.6.2.4 Anticipated Weather Lost Work Days
Use the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration's (NOAA)

historical monthly averages for days with precipitation, using a nominal
30-year, greater than 0.10 inch amount parameter, as indicated on the
Station Report for the NOAA location closest to the project site as the
basis for establishing a "Weather Calendar" showing the number of
anticipated non-workdays for each month due to adverse weather, in
addition to Saturdays, Sundays and all Federal Holidays as non-work days.
Assign the Weather Calendar to any activity that could be impacted by

adverse weather. The Contracting Officer will issue a modification in
accordance with the contract clauses, giving the Contractor a time
extension for the difference of days between the anticipated and actual
adverse weather delay if the number of actual adverse weather delay days
exceeds the number of days anticipated for the month in which the delay
occurs and the adverse weather delayed activities are critical to contract
completion. A lost workday due to weather conditions is defined as a day
in which the Contractor cannot work at least 50 percent of the day on the
impacted activity.
1.6.2.5 Anticipated Restricted Delays
Unless otherwise noted or defined in Section 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS,

allow in the schedule a total of 10 lost workdays per calendar year for
instances where base access is not permitted due to a restriction or
closure which causes a delay in the work. A lost workday is defined as a
day which the Contractor cannot work at least 50 percent of the day on the
closed installation. If the installation is closed for a period longer
than 10 lost workdays per calendar year, the Contracting Officer will
issue a no cost contract modification as applicable in accordance with the
contract clauses extending the contract completion date where the critical
path has been impacted.
1.6.2.6 Cost Loading
1.6.2.6.1 Cost Loading Activities
Assign Material and Equipment Costs, for which payment will be requested
in advance of installation, to their respective procurement activity
(i.e., the material/equipment on-site activity). Assign cost for
material/equipment, paid for after installation; labor; and construction
equipment to their respective Construction Activities. The value of
commissioning, testing and closeout WBS section may not be less than 10
percent of the total costs for Procurement and Construction Activities.
Evenly disperse overhead and profit to each activity over the duration of
the project.
1.6.2.6.2 Quantities and Units of Measure
Each cost loaded activity must have a detailed quantity breakdown and unit
of measure. Lump sum costing is not acceptable.
SECTION 01 32 17.00 20 Page 6

1.6.3 Schedule Software Settings and Restrictions
a. Activity Constraints: Date/time constraint(s), other than those

required by the contract, are not allowed unless accepted by the
Contracting Officer. Identify any constraints proposed and provide an
explanation for the purpose of the constraint in the Narrative Report
as described in paragraph REQUIRED TABULAR REPORTS.
b. Default Progress Data Disallowed: Actual Start and Actual Finish dates
on the CPM schedule must match the dates on the Contractor Quality
Control and Production Reports.
c. Software Settings: Handle schedule calculations and Out-of-Sequence

progress (if applicable) through Retained Logic, not Progress
Override. Show all activity durations and float values in days. Show
activity progress using Remaining Duration. Set default activity type
to "Task Dependent".
d. At a minimum, include the following settings and parameters in

Baseline Schedule preparation:
(1) General: Define or establish Calendars and Activity Codes at the

"Project" level, not the "Global" level.
(2) Admin Drop-Down Menu, Admin Preferences, Time Periods Tab:
(a) Set time periods for P6 to 8.0 Hours/Day, 40.0 Hours/Week,

172.0 Hours/Month and 2000.0 Hours/Year.
(b) Use assigned calendar to specify the number of work hours for
each time period: Must be checked.
(3) Admin Drop-Down Menu, Admin Preferences, Earned Value Tab:
(a) Earned Value Calculation: Use "Budgeted values with current

dates".
(4) Project Level, Dates Tab:
(a) Set "Must Finish By" date to "Contract Completion Date".
(5) Project Level, Defaults Tab:
(a) Duration Type: Set to "Fixed Duration & Units".
(b) Percent Complete Type: Set to "Physical".
(c) Activity Type: Set to "Task Dependent".
(d) Calendar: Set to "Standard 5 Day Workweek". Calendar must

reflect Saturday, Sunday and all Federal holidays as non-work
days. Alternative calendars may be used with Contracting Officer
approval.
(6) Project Level, Calculations Tab:
(a) Activity percent complete based on activity steps: Must be

Checked.
SECTION 01 32 17.00 20 Page 7

(b) Reset Remaining Duration and Units to Original: Must be

Checked.
(c) Subtract Actual from At Completion: Must be Checked.
(d) Recalculate Actual units and Cost when duration percent(%)

complete changes: Must be Checked.
(e) Link Actual to Date and Actual This Period Units and Cost:
Must be Checked.
(f) Price/Unit: Set to "$1/h".
(g) Update units when costs change on resource assignments: Must

be Unchecked.
(7) Project Level, Settings Tab:
(a) Define Critical Activities: Check "Total Float is less than or

equal to" and add "0d".
(8) Work Breakdown Structure Level, Earned Value Tab:
(a) Technique for Computing Performance Percent Complete:

"Activity percent complete" is selected.
(b) Technique for Computing Estimate to Complete (ETC): "PF = 1"

is selected.
1.6.4 Required Tabular Reports
Include the following reports with the Baseline, Monthly Update and any
other required schedule submittals:
a. Log Report: Listing of all changes made between the previous schedule
and current updated schedule.
b. Narrative Report: Identify and justify:
(1) Progress made in each area of the project;
(2) Critical Path;
(3) Date/time constraint(s), other than those required by the contract
(4) Changes in the following; added or deleted activities, original

and remaining durations for activities that have not started,
logic, milestones, planned sequence of operations, critical path,
and cost loading;
(5) Any decrease in previously reported activity Earned Amount;
(6) Pending items and status thereof, including permits, changes

orders, and time extensions;
(7) Status of Contract Completion Date and interim milestones;
(8) Current and anticipated delays (describe cause of delay and

corrective actions(s) and mitigation measures to minimize);
SECTION 01 32 17.00 20 Page 8

(9) Description of current and future schedule problem areas.
Each entry in the narrative report must cite the respective Activity
ID and Activity Description, the date and reason for the change, and
description of the change.
c. Earned Value Report: List all activities having a budget amount cost
loaded. Compile total earnings on the project from notice to proceed
to current progress payment request. Show current budget, previous
physical percent complete, to-date physical percent complete, previous
earned value, to-date earned value and cost to complete on the report
for each activity.
d. Schedule Variance Control (SVC) Diagram: With each schedule

submission, provide a SVC diagram showing 1) Cash Flow S-Curves
indicating planned project cost based on projected early and late
activity finish dates and 2) Earned Value to-date. Revise Cash Flow
S-Curves when the contract is modified, or as directed by the
Contracting Officer.
e. Daily Reported Production Activity: Submit on a monthly basis, in

electronic spreadsheet format, a summary of daily reported production
activity for the reporting month in the update schedule. Use the
following columns for reporting:
(1) Date
(2) Activity ID
(3) Work Description
(4) Contractor
(5) Billable Hours
1.7 SUBMISSION AND ACCEPTANCE
1.7.1 Monthly Network Analysis Updates
Meet with Government representatives at monthly intervals to review and

agree on the information presented in the updated project schedule. The
submission of an acceptable, updated schedule to the Government is a
condition precedent to the processing of the Contractor's invoice. Submit
an acceptable, updated schedule to the Government regardless of whether a
Contractor's invoice is submitted for the given period. The Contractor
and Government must consent to agree on percentage of payment for each
activity progressed during the update period. Monthly update schedules
must incorporate as-built events as they occurred and provide ongoing
status of anticipated finish dates. As-built events must correspond to
contemporaneous records including but not limited to submittals, daily
production reports and quality control reports.
Provide the following with each Schedule submittal:
a. Time-Scaled Logic Diagram.
b. Reports listed in paragraph entitled "REQUIRED TABULAR REPORTS."
SECTION 01 32 17.00 20 Page 9

c. Data disks containing the project schedule. Include the back-up native .xer
program files.
1.7.2 As-Built Schedule
As a condition precedent to the release of retention and making final

payment, submit an "As-Built Schedule," as the last schedule update
showing all activities at 100 percent completion. This schedule must
reflect the exact manner in which the project was actually constructed.
1.8 CONTRACT MODIFICATION
Submit a Time Impact Analysis (TIA) with each cost and time proposal for a
proposed change. TIA must illustrate the influence of each change or
delay on the Contract Completion Date or milestones. No time extensions
will be granted nor delay damages paid unless a delay occurs which
consumes all available Project Float, and extends the Projected Finish
beyond the Contract Completion Date.
a. Each TIA must be in both narrative and schedule form. The narrative
must define the scope and conditions of the change; provide start and
finish dates of impact, successor and predecessor activity to impact
period, responsible party; describe how it originated, and how it
impacts the schedule. The schedule submission must consist of three
native files:
(1) Fragnet used to define the scope of the changed condition
(2) Most recent accepted schedule update as of the time of the

proposal or claim submission that has been updated to show all
activity progress as of the time of the impact start date.
(3) The impacted schedule that has the fragnet inserted in the updated
schedule and the schedule “run” so that the new completion date is
determined.
b. For claimed as-built project delay, the inserted fragnet TIA method
must be modified to account for as-built events known to occur after
the data date of schedule update used.
c. All TIAs must include any mitigation, and must determine the
apportionment of the overall delay assignable to each individual
delay. The associated narrative must clearly describe the findings in
a chronological listing beginning with the earliest delay event.
(1) Identify types of delays as follows:
(a) Excusable Delay: Force-Majeure (e.g. weather) - Contractor may

receive time extension, but time will not be compensable.
(b) Inexcusable Delay: Contractor Responsibility – Contractor will

not receive time extension.
(c) Compensable Delay: Government Responsibility – Contractor may

receive compensable time extension.
(2) If a combination of delay types occurs, it is considered

Concurrent Delay, which is defined in the following combinations:
SECTION 01 32 17.00 20 Page 10

(a) Excusable Delay and Compensable Delay results in Excusable

Delay
(b) Excusable Delay and Inexcusable Delay results in Inexcusable

Delay
(c) Compensable Delay and Inexcusable Delay results in Excusable

Delay
d. Submit Data disks containing the narrative and native schedule files.
e. Unless the Contracting Officer requests otherwise, only add conformed

contract modifications into the Project NAS.
1.8.1 No Reservation of Rights
All direct costs, indirect cost, and time extensions will

be negotiated and made full, equitable and final at the time of
modification issuance.
1.9 PROJECT FLOAT
Project Float is the length of time between the Contractor's Projected

Completion Milestone and the Contract Completion Date Milestone. Project
Float available in the schedule will not be for the exclusive use of
either the Government or the Contractor.
The use of Resource Leveling or other techniques used for the purpose of
artificially adjusting activity durations to consume float and influence
critical path is prohibited.
1.10 THREE-WEEK LOOK AHEAD SCHEDULE
Prepare and issue a 3-Week Look Ahead schedule to provide a more detailed
day-to-day plan of upcoming work identified on the Project Network
Analysis Schedule. Key the work plans to NAS activity numbers and update
each week to show the planned work for the current and following two-week
period. Additionally, include upcoming outages, closures, field
evaluation tests, preparatory meetings, and initial meetings. Identify
critical path activities on the Three-Week Look Ahead Schedule. The
detail work plans are to be bar chart type schedules, derived from but
maintained separately from the Project NAS on an electronic spreadsheet
program and printed on 8-1/2 by 11 inch sheets as directed by the
Contracting Officer. Activities must not exceed 5 working days in
duration and have sufficient level of detail to assign crews, tools and
equipment required to complete the work. Deliver three hard copies and
one electronic file of the 3-Week Look Ahead Schedule to the Contracting
Officer no later than 8 a.m. each Monday and review during the weekly CQC
Coordination or Production Meeting.
1.11 CORRESPONDENCE AND TEST REPORTS
All correspondence (e.g., letters, Requests for Information (RFIs),

e-mails, meeting minute items, Production and QC Daily Reports, material
delivery tickets, photographs) must reference Schedule activity IDs that
are being addressed. All test reports (e.g., concrete, soil compaction,
weld, pressure) must reference schedule activity IDs that are being
addressed.
SECTION 01 32 17.00 20 Page 11

1.12 ADDITIONAL SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS
Any references to additional scheduling requirements, including systems to

be inspected, tested and commissioned, that are located throughout the
remainder of the Contract Documents, are subject to all requirements of
this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used.
SECTION 01 32 17.00 20 Page 12

SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
05/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
The Contracting Officer may request submittals in addition to those

specified when deemed necessary to adequately describe the work covered in
the respective sections.
Units of weights and measures used on all submittals are to be the same as
those used in the contract drawings.
Each submittal is to be complete and in sufficient detail to allow ready

determination of compliance with contract requirements.
Contractor's Quality Control (CQC) Manager and the QC Specialist to check

and approve all items prior to submittal and stamp, sign, and date
indicating action taken. Proposed deviations from the contract
requirements are to be clearly identified. Include within submittals
items such as: Contractor's, manufacturer's, or fabricator's drawings;
descriptive literature including (but not limited to) catalog cuts,
diagrams, operating charts or curves; test reports; test cylinders;
samples; O&M manuals (including parts list); certifications; warranties;
and other such required submittals.
Submittals requiring Government approval are to be scheduled and made

prior to the acquisition of the material or equipment covered thereby.
Pick up and dispose of samples not incorporated into the work in
accordance with manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and in
compliance with existing laws and regulations.
A submittal register showing items of equipment and materials for when

submittals are required by the specifications is provided as "Appendix A -
Submittal Register".
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Submittal Descriptions (SD)
Submittals requirements are specified in the technical sections.

Submittals are identified by Submittal Description (SD) numbers and titles
as follows:
Submittals which are required prior to start of construction (work).

issuance of contract notice to proceed.or commencing work on site.or
the start of the next major phase of the construction on a multi-phase
contract, includes schedules, tabular list of data, or tabular list
including location, features, or other pertinent information regarding
products, materials, equipment, or components to be used in the work.
Certificates of insurance
Surety bonds
List of proposed Subcontractors
List of proposed products
Construction progress schedule
Network Analysis Schedule (NAS)
Submittal register
Earned Value Report
Health and safety plan
Work plan
Quality Control(QC) plan
Environmental protection plan
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drawings, diagrams and schedules specifically prepared to illustrate

some portion of the work.
Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in

producing the product and as aids to the Contractor for integrating
the product or system into the project.
Drawings prepared by or for the Contractor to show how multiple

systems and interdisciplinary work will be coordinated.
SD-03 Product Data
Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts,

instructions and brochures illustrating size, physical appearance and
other characteristics of materials, systems or equipment for some
portion of the work.
Samples of warranty language when the contract requires extended

product warranties.
SD-04 Samples
Fabricated or unfabricated physical examples of materials, equipment

or workmanship that illustrate functional and aesthetic
characteristics of a material or product and establish standards by
which the work can be judged.
Color samples from the manufacturer's standard line (or custom color
samples if specified) to be used in selecting or approving colors for
the project.
Field samples and mock-ups constructed on the project site establish

standards by which the ensuring work can be judged. Includes
assemblies or portions of assemblies which are to be incorporated into
the project and those which will be removed at conclusion of the work.
SD-05 Design Data
Design calculations, mix designs, analyses or other data pertaining to

a part of work.
Design submittals, design substantiation submittals and extensions of

design submittals.
SD-06 Test Reports
Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that a

material, product or system identical to the material, product or
system to be provided has been tested in accord with specified
requirements. Unless specified in another section, testing must have
been within three years of date of contract award for the project.
Report which includes findings of a test required to be performed by

the Contractor on an actual portion of the work or prototype prepared
for the project before shipment to job site.
Report which includes finding of a test made at the job site or on

sample taken from the job site, on portion of work during or after
installation.
Investigation reports.
Daily logs and checklists.
Final acceptance test and operational test procedure.
SD-07 Certificates
Statements printed on the manufacturer's letterhead and signed by

responsible officials of manufacturer of product, system or material
attesting that product, system or material meets specification
requirements. Must be dated after award of project contract and
clearly name the project.
Document required of Contractor, or of a manufacturer, supplier,

installer or Subcontractor through Contractor. The document purpose
is to further promote the orderly progression of a portion of the work
by documenting procedures, acceptability of methods or personnel
qualifications.
Confined space entry permits.
Text of posted operating instructions.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Preprinted material describing installation of a product, system or

material, including special notices and (MSDS)concerning impedances,
hazards and safety precautions.
SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by

manufacturer's representative at the job site, in the vicinity of the
job site, or on a sample taken from the job site, on a portion of the
work, during or after installation, to confirm compliance with
manufacturer's standards or instructions. The documentation must be
signed by an authorized official of a testing laboratory or agency and
state the test results; and indicate whether the material, product, or
system has passed or failed the test.
Factory test reports.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Data that is furnished by the manufacturer, or the system provider, to

the equipment operating and maintenance personnel, including
manufacturer's help and product line documentation necessary to
maintain and install equipment. This data is needed by operating and
maintenance personnel for the safe and efficient operation,
maintenance and repair of the item.
This data is intended to be incorporated in an operations and

maintenance manual or control system.
Documentation to record compliance with technical or administrative

requirements or to establish an administrative mechanism.
Submittals required for Guiding Principle Validation (GPV) or Third

Party Certification (TPC).
Special requirements necessary to properly close out a construction

contract. For example, Record Drawings and as-built drawings. Also,
submittal requirements necessary to properly close out a major phase
of construction on a multi-phase contract.
1.2.2 Approving Authority
Office or designated person authorized to approve submittal.
1.2.3 Work
As used in this section, on- and off-site construction required by

contract documents, including labor necessary to produce submittals,
except those SD-01 Pre-Construction Submittals noted above, construction,
materials, products, equipment, and systems incorporated or to be
incorporated in such construction.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor QC approval.
Submit the following in accordance with this section.
Submittal Register; G
1.4 SUBMITTAL CLASSIFICATION
Submittals are classified as follows:
1.4.1 Government Approved (G)
Government approval is required for extensions of design, critical

materials, deviations, equipment whose compatibility with the entire
system must be checked, and other items as designated by the Contracting
Officer.Within the terms of the Contract Clause SPECIFICATIONS AND
DRAWINGS FOR CONSTRUCTION, they are considered to be "shop drawings."
1.4.2 For Information Only
Submittals not requiring Government approval will be for information only/

Contractor QC Approval Process. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT ALL SUBMITTALS
WITHOUT A "G" TO THE GOVERNMENT FOR INFORMATION ONLY PURPOSES AFTER
CONTRACTOR QC APPROVAL PROCESS. The Government reserves the right to
require the Contractor to resubmit any item found not to comply with the
contract. This does not relieve the Contractor from the obligation to
furnish material conforming to the plans and specifications; will not
prevent the Contracting Officer from requiring removal and replacement of
nonconforming material incorporated in the work; and does not relieve the
Contractor of the requirement to furnish samples for testing by the
Government laboratory or for check testing by the Government in those
instances where the technical specifications so prescribe.
1.5 FORWARDING SUBMITTALS REQUIRING GOVERNMENT APPROVAL
1.5.1 Submittals Required from the Contractor
As soon as practicable after award of contract, and before procurement of

fabrication, forward to the Architect-Engineer: Jacobs Engineering,
submittals required in the technical sections of this specification,
including shop drawings, product data and samples. Forward one copy of
the transmittal form for all submittals to the Resident Officer in Charge
of Construction.
The Architect-Engineer for this project will review for the Contracting
Officer those submittals reserved for Contracting Officer approval to
verify submittals comply with the contract requirements.
1.5.1.1 O&M Data
The Architect-Engineer for this project will review for the Contracting
Officer O&M Data to verify the submittals comply with the contract
requirements; submit data specified for a given item within 30 calendar
days after the item is delivered to the contract site.
In the event the Contractor fails to deliver O&M Data within the time
limits specified, the Contracting Officer may withhold from progress
payments 50 percent of the price of the item with which such O&M Data
are applicable.
1.5.1.2 Submittals Reserved for NAVFAC SW Approval
As an exception to the standard submittal procedure specified above,

submit the following to the Commander, NAVFAC SW, Code CI4:
b. All fire protection system submittals
c. All fire alarm system submittals
d. Section 23 09 23.13 20 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR

HVAC: SD-06 field test report submittals
1.6 PREPARATION
1.6.1 Transmittal Form
Transmit each submittal, except sample installations and sample panels to

office of approving authority. Transmit submittals with transmittal form
prescribed by Contracting Officer and standard for project. On the
transmittal form identify Contractor, indicate date of submittal, and
include information prescribed by transmittal form and required in
paragraph IDENTIFYING SUBMITTALS of this section. Process transmittal
forms to record actions regarding samples and installations panels.
1.6.2 Identifying Submittals
When submittals are provided by a Subcontractor, the Prime Contractor is

to prepare, review and stamp with Contractor's approval all specified
submittals prior to submitting for Government approval.
Identify submittals, except sample installations and sample panels, with

the following information permanently adhered to or noted on each separate
component of each submittal and noted on transmittal form. Mark each copy
of each submittal identically, with the following:
a. Project title and location.
b. Construction contract number.
c. Date of the drawings and revisions.
d. Name, address, and telephone number of subcontractor, supplier,

manufacturer and any other subcontractor associated with the submittal.
e. Section number of the specification section by which submittal is

required.
f. Submittal description (SD) number of each component of submittal.
g. When a resubmission, add alphabetic suffix on submittal description,

for example, submittal 18 would become 18A, to indicate resubmission.
h. Product identification and location in project.
1.6.3 Format for SD-02 Shop Drawings
Shop drawings are not to be less than 8 1/2 by 11 inches nor more than 30
by 42 inches, except for full size patterns or templates. Prepare
drawings to accurate size, with scale indicated, unless other form is
required. Drawings are to be suitable for reproduction and be of a
quality to produce clear, distinct lines and letters with dark lines on a
white background.
Present 8 1/2 by 11 inches sized shop drawings as part of the bound volume
for submittals required by section. Present larger drawings in sets.
Include on each drawing the drawing title, number, date, and revision
numbers and dates, in addition to information required in paragraph

IDENTIFYING SUBMITTALS.
Number drawings in a logical sequence. Contractors may use their own

number system. Each drawing is to bear the number of the submittal in a
uniform location adjacent to the title block. Place the Government
contract number in the margin, immediately below the title block, for each
drawing.
Reserve a blank space on the right hand side of each sheet for the
Government disposition stamp.
Dimension drawings, except diagrams and schematic drawings; prepare

drawings demonstrating interface with other trades to scale. Use the same
unit of measure for shop drawings as indicated on the contract drawings.
Identify materials and products for work shown.
Include the nameplate data, size and capacity on drawings. Also include
applicable federal, military, industry and technical society publication
references.
Submit drawings PDF format.
1.6.4 Format of SD-03 Product Data and SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Present product data submittals for each section as a complete, bound

volume. Include table of contents, listing page and catalog item numbers
for product data.
Indicate, by prominent notation, each product which is being submitted;

indicate specification section number and paragraph number to which it
pertains.
Supplement product data with material prepared for project to satisfy

submittal requirements for which product data does not exist. Identify
this material as developed specifically for project, with information and
format as required for submission of SD-07 Certificates.
Include the manufacturer's name, trade name, place of manufacture, and

catalog model or number on product data. Also include applicable federal,
military, industry and technical society publication references. Should
manufacturer's data require supplemental information for clarification,
submit as specified for SD-07 Certificates.
Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and

technical society reference standards of the organizations such as
American National Standards Institute (ANSI), ASTM International (ASTM),
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA), Underwriters
Laboratories (UL), and Association of Edison Illuminating Companies
(AEIC), submit proof of such compliance. The label or listing by the
specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance. In lieu
of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent testing
organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the
Contracting Officer. State on the certificate that the item has been
tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and
that the item complies with the specified organization's reference
standard.
Collect required data submittals for each specific material, product, unit
of work, or system into a single submittal and marked for choices,

options, and portions applicable to the submittal. Mark each copy of the
product data identically. Partial submittals will not be accepted for
expedition of construction effort.
Submit manufacturer's instructions prior to installation.
1.6.5 Format of SD-04 Samples
Furnish samples in sizes below, unless otherwise specified or unless the

manufacturer has prepackaged samples of approximately same size as
specified:
a. Sample of Equipment or Device: Full size.
b. Sample of Materials Less Than 2 by 3 inches: Built up to 8 1/2 by 11

inches.
c. Sample of Materials Exceeding 8 1/2 by 11 inches: Cut down to 8 1/2

by 11 inches and adequate to indicate color, texture, and material
variations.
d. Sample of Linear Devices or Materials: 10 inch length or length to be

supplied, if less than 10 inches. Examples of linear devices or
materials are conduit and handrails.
e. Sample of Non-Solid Materials: Pint. Examples of non-solid materials

are sand and paint.
f. Color Selection Samples: 2 by 4 inches. Where samples are specified

for selection of color, finish, pattern, or texture, submit the full
set of available choices for the material or product specified. Sizes
and quantities of samples are to represent their respective standard
unit.
g. Sample Panel: 4 by 4 feet.
h. Sample Installation: 100 square feet.
Samples Showing Range of Variation: Where variations in color, finish,

pattern, or texture are unavoidable due to nature of the materials, submit
sets of samples of not less than three units showing extremes and middle
of range. Mark each unit to describe its relation to the range of the
variation.
Reusable Samples: Incorporate returned samples into work only if so

specified or indicated. Incorporated samples are to be in undamaged
condition at time of use.
Recording of Sample Installation: Note and preserve the notation of area

constituting sample installation but remove notation at final clean up of
project.
When color, texture or pattern is specified by naming a particular

manufacturer and style, include one sample of that manufacturer and style,
for comparison.
1.6.6 Format of SD-05 Design Data and SD-07 Certificates
Provide design data and certificates on 8 1/2 by 11 inches paper. Provide

a bound volume for submittals containing numerous pages.
1.6.7 Format of SD-06 Test Reports and SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
Provide reports on 8 1/2 by 11 inches paper in a complete bound volume.
Indicate by prominent notation, each report in the submittal. Indicate

specification number and paragraph number to which it pertains.
1.6.8 Format of SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data (O&M)
Comply with the requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE DATA for O&M Data format.
1.6.9 Format of SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals and SD-11 Closeout

Submittals
When submittal includes a document which is to be used in project or

become part of project record, other than as a submittal, do not apply
Contractor's approval stamp to document, but to a separate sheet
accompanying document.
1.6.10 Source Drawings for Shop Drawings
The entire set of Source Drawing files (DWG) will not be provided to the
Contractor. Only those requested by the Contractor to prepare shop
drawings may be provided. Request the specific Drawing Number only for
the preparation of Shop Drawings. These drawings may only be provided
after award.
1.6.10.1 Terms and Conditions
Data contained on these electronic files must not be used for any purpose
other than as a convenience in the preparation of construction data for
the referenced project. Any other use or reuse shall be at the sole risk
of the Contractor and without liability or legal exposure to the
Government. The Contractor must make no claim and waives to the fullest
extent permitted by law, any claim or cause of action of any nature
against the Government, its agents or sub consultants that may arise out
of or in connection with the use of these electronic files. The
Contractor must, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and
These electronic Source Drawing files are not construction documents.

Differences may exist between the Source Drawing files and the
corresponding construction documents. The Government makes no
representation regarding the accuracy or completeness of the electronic
Source Drawing files, nor does it make representation to the compatibility
of these files with the Contractor hardware or software. In the event
that a conflict arises between the signed and sealed construction
documents prepared by the Government and the furnished Source Drawing
files, the signed and sealed construction documents govern. The
Contractor is responsible for determining if any conflict exists. Use of
these Source Drawing files does not relieve the Contractor of duty to
fully comply with the contract documents, including and without

limitation, the need to check, confirm and coordinate the work of all
contractors for the project. If the Contractor uses, duplicates or
modifies these electronic Source Drawing files for use in producing
construction data related to this contract, remove all previous indicia of
ownership (seals, logos, signatures, initials and dates).
1.6.11 Electronic File Format
Provide submittals in electronic format, with the exception of material

samples required for SD-04 Samples items. In addition to the electronic
submittal, provide three hard copies of the submittals. Compile the
submittal file as a single, complete document, to include the Transmittal
Form described within. Name the electronic submittal file specifically
according to its contents, coordinate the file naming convention with the
Contracting Officer. Electronic files must be of sufficient quality that
all information is legible. Electronic format shall be in PDF, unless
otherwise specified or directed by the Contracting Officer. Generate PDF
files from original documents with bookmarks so that the text included in
the PDF file is both searchable and can be copied. If documents are
scanned, Optical Character Resolution (OCR) routines are required. Index
and bookmark files exceeding 30 pages to allow efficient navigation of the
file. When required, the electronic file must include a valid electronic
signature, or scan of a signature.
1.7 QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALS
1.7.1 Number of Copies of SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit six copies of submittals of shop drawings requiring review and

approval only by QC organization and seven copies of shop drawings
requiring review and approval by Contracting Officer.
1.7.2 Number of Copies of SD-03 Product Data and SD-08 Manufacturer's

Instructions
Submit in compliance with quantity requirements specified for shop

drawings.
1.7.3 Number of Samples SD-04 Samples
a. Submit two samples, or two sets of samples showing range of variation,

of each required item. One approved sample or set of samples will be
retained by approving authority and one will be returned to Contractor.
b. Submit one sample panel or provide one sample installation where

directed. Include components listed in technical section or as
directed.
c. Submit one sample installation, where directed.
d. Submit one sample of non-solid materials.
1.7.4 Number of Copies SD-05 Design Data and SD-07 Certificates
Submit in compliance with quantity requirements specified for shop

drawings.
1.7.5 Number of Copies SD-06 Test Reports and SD-09 Manufacturer's Field
Reports
Submit in compliance with quantity and quality requirements specified for

shop drawings other than field test results that will be submitted with QC
reports.
1.7.6 Number of Copies of SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Submit three copies of O&M Data to the Contracting Officer for review and
approval.
SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FINAL SUBMITTAL:

Provide four hard copies and four sets of electronically (single document .PDF)
formatted information to the Contracting Officer 30 days prior to the
Beneficial Occupancy Date (BOD).
1.7.7 Number of Copies of SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals and SD-11

Closeout Submittals
Unless otherwise specified, submit three sets of administrative submittals.
1.8 INFORMATION ONLY SUBMITTALS
Normally submittals for information only will not be returned. Approval

of the Contracting Officer is not required on information only
submittals. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor
to resubmit any item found not to comply with the contract. This does not
relieve the Contractor from the obligation to furnish material conforming
to the plans and specifications; will not prevent the Contracting Officer
from requiring removal and replacement of nonconforming material
incorporated in the work; and does not relieve the Contractor of the
requirement to furnish samples for testing by the Government laboratory or
for check testing by the Government in those instances where the technical
specifications so prescribe.
1.9 VARIATIONS
Variations from contract requirements require both Designer of Record

(DOR) and Government approval pursuant to contract Clause FAR 52.236-21
and will be considered where advantageous to Government.
1.9.1 Considering Variations
Discussion with Contracting Officer prior to submission, after consulting

with the DOR, will help ensure functional and quality requirements are met
and minimize rejections and re-submittals. When contemplating a variation
which results in lower cost, consider submission of the variation as a
Value Engineering Change Proposal (VECP).
Specifically point out variations from contract requirements in

transmittal letters. Failure to point out deviations may result in the
Government requiring rejection and removal of such work at no additional
cost to the Government.
1.9.2 Proposing Variations
When proposing variation, deliver written request to the Contracting

Officer, with documentation of the nature and features of the variation
and why the variation is desirable and beneficial to Government, including

the DOR's written analysis and approval. If lower cost is a benefit, also
include an estimate of the cost savings. In addition to documentation
required for variation, include the submittals required for the item.
Clearly mark the proposed variation in all documentation.
1.9.3 Warranting that Variations are Compatible
When delivering a variation for approval, Contractor, including its

Designer(s) of Record, warrants that this contract has been reviewed to
establish that the variation, if incorporated, will be compatible with
other elements of work.
1.9.4 Review Schedule is Modified
In addition to normal submittal review period, a period of 10 working days

will be allowed for consideration by the Government of submittals with
variations.
1.10 CONTRACTOR REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI)
Contractor shall submit Request for Information to the Contracting

Officer. Contracting Officer review of RFI's will be completed within 15
calendar days after date of submission.
1.11 SUBMITTAL REGISTER
Prepare and maintain submittal register, as the work progresses. Do not

change data which is output in columns (c), (d), (e), and (f) as delivered
by Government; retain data which is output in columns (a), (g), (h), and
(i) as approved. A submittal register showing items of equipment and
materials for which submittals are required by the specifications is
provided as an attachment. This list may not be all inclusive and
additional submittals may be required. The Government will provide the
initial submittal register in electronic format with the following fields
completed, to the extent that will be required by the Government during
subsequent usage.
Column (c): Lists specification section in which submittal is

required.
Column (d): Lists each submittal description (SD No. and type,
e.g. SD-02 Shop Drawings) required in each specification section.
Column (e): Lists one principal paragraph in specification

section where a material or product is specified. This listing is
only to facilitate locating submitted requirements. Do not
consider entries in column (e) as limiting project requirements.
Column (f): Indicate approving authority for each submittal.
Thereafter, the Contractor is to track all submittals by maintaining a

complete list, including completion of all data columns, including dates
on which submittals are received and returned by the Government.
1.11.1 Use of Submittal Register
Submit submittal register. Submit with QC plan and project schedule.

Verify that all submittals required for project are listed and add missing
submittals. Coordinate and complete the following fields on the register

submitted with the QC plan and the project schedule:
Column (a) Activity Number: Activity number from the project

schedule.
Column (g) Contractor Submit Date: Scheduled date for approving

authority to receive submittals.
Column (h) Contractor Approval Date: Date Contractor needs

approval of submittal.
Column (i) Contractor Material: Date that Contractor needs

material delivered to Contractor control.
1.11.2 Contractor Use of Submittal Register
Update the following fields in the Government-furnished submittal register

program with each submittal throughout contract.
Column (b) Transmittal Number: Contractor assigned list of

consecutive numbers.
Column (j) Action Code (k): Date of action used to record

Contractor's review when forwarding submittals to QC.
Column (l) List date of submittal transmission.
Column (q) List date approval received.
1.11.3 Approving Authority Use of Submittal Register
Update the following fields in the Government-furnished submittal register

program.
Column (b) Transmittal Number: Contractor assigned list of

consecutive numbers.
Column (l) List date of submittal receipt.
Column (m) through (p) List Date related to review actions.
Column (q) List date returned to Contractor.
1.11.4 Action Codes
1.11.4.1 Contractor Action Codes
NR - Not Received
AN - Approved as noted
A - Approved
RR - Disapproved, Revise, and Resubmit
1.11.5 Copies Delivered to the Government
Deliver one copy of submittal register updated by Contractor to Government
with each invoice request.
1.12 SCHEDULING
Schedule and submit concurrently submittals covering component items

forming a system or items that are interrelated. Include certifications
to be submitted with the pertinent drawings at the same time. No delay
damages or time extensions will be allowed for time lost in late
submittals. An additional 10 calendar days will be allowed and shown on
the register for review and approval of submittals for food service
equipment and refrigeration and HVAC control systems.
a. Coordinate scheduling, sequencing, preparing and processing of

submittals with performance of work so that work will not be delayed
by submittal processing. Allow for potential resubmittal of
requirements.
b. Submittals called for by the contract documents will be listed on the

register. If a submittal is called for but does not pertain to the
contract work, the Contractor is to include the submittal in the
register and annotate it "N/A" with a brief explanation. Approval by
the Contracting Officer does not relieve the Contractor of supplying
submittals required by the contract documents but which have been
omitted from the register or marked "N/A."
c. Re-submit register and annotate monthly by the Contractor with actual

submission and approval dates. When all items on the register have
been fully approved, no further re-submittal is required.
d. Carefully control procurement operations to ensure that each

individual submittal is made on or before the Contractor scheduled
submittal date shown on the approved "Submittal Register."
e. Except as specified otherwise, allow review period, beginning with

receipt by approving authority, that includes at least 15 working days
for submittals for QC Manager approval and 15 working days for
submittals for Contracting Officer approval. Period of review for
submittals with Contracting Officer approval begins when Government
receives submittal from QC organization.
f. For submittals requiring review by fire protection engineer, allow

review period, beginning when Government receives submittal from QC
organization, of 30 working days for return of submittal to the
Contractor.
g. Period of review for each resubmittal is the same as for initial

submittal.
1.12.1 Reviewing, Certifying, Approving Authority
The QC organization is responsible for reviewing and certifying that

submittals are in compliance with contract requirements. Approving
authority on submittals is QC Manager unless otherwise specified for
specific submittal. At each "Submittal" paragraph in individual
specification sections, a notation "G," following a submittal item,
indicates Contracting Officer is approving authority for that submittal
item. An "S" following a submittal item, indicates that the QC Manager is
the approving authority, and that a copy of the approved submittal must be
provided to the Designer of Record.
1.12.2 Constraints
Conform to provisions of this section, unless explicitly stated otherwise

for submittals listed or specified in this contract.
Submit complete submittals for each definable feature of work. Submit at

the same time components of definable feature interrelated as a system.
When acceptability of a submittal is dependent on conditions, items, or

materials included in separate subsequent submittals, submittal will be
returned without review.
Approval of a separate material, product, or component does not imply

approval of assembly in which item functions.
1.12.3 QC Organization Responsibilities
a. Note date on which submittal was received from Contractor on each

submittal.
b. Review each submittal; and check and coordinate each submittal with
requirements of work and contract documents.
c. Review submittals for conformance with project design concepts and

compliance with contract documents.
d. Act on submittals, determining appropriate action based on QC

organization's review of submittal.
(1) When QC Manager is approving authority, take appropriate action on

submittal from the possible actions defined in paragraph APPROVED
SUBMITTALS.
(2) When Contracting Officer is approving authority or when variation

has been proposed, forward submittal to Government with certifying
statement or return submittal marked "not reviewed" or "revise and
resubmit" as appropriate. The QC organization's review of
submittal determines appropriate action.
e. Ensure that material is clearly legible.
f. Stamp each sheet of each submittal with QC certifying statement or

approving statement, except that data submitted in bound volume or on
one sheet printed on two sides may be stamped on the front of the
first sheet only.
(1) When approving authority is Contracting Officer, QC organization

will certify submittals forwarded to Contracting Officer with the
following certifying statement:
"I hereby certify that the (equipment) (material) (article) shown and
marked in this submittal is that proposed to be incorporated with
contract Number, is in compliance with the contract drawings and
specification, can be installed in the allocated spaces, and is
submitted for Government approval.
Certified by Submittal Reviewer _____________________, Date _______

(Signature when applicable)
Certified by QC Manager _____________________________, Date ______"

(Signature)
(2) When approving authority is QC Manager, QC Manager will use the

following approval statement when returning submittals to
Contractor as "Approved" or "Approved as Noted."
"I hereby certify that the (material) (equipment) (article) shown and
marked in this submittal and proposed to be incorporated with contract
Number, is in compliance with the contract drawings and specification,
can be installed in the allocated spaces, and is approved for use.
Certified by Submittal Reviewer ______________________, Date ______

(Signature when applicable)
Approved by QC Manager _______________________________, Date _____"

(Signature)
g. Sign certifying statement or approval statement. The QC organization

member designated in the approved QC plan is the person signing
certifying statements. The use of original ink for signatures is
required. Stamped signatures are not acceptable.
h. Update submittal register as submittal actions occur and maintain the

submittal register at project site until final acceptance of all work
by Contracting Officer.
i. Retain a copy of approved submittals at project site, including

Contractor's copy of approved samples.
j. For "S" submittals, provide a copy of the approved submittal to the

Designer of Record.
1.13 GOVERNMENT APPROVING AUTHORITY
When approving authority is Contracting Officer, the Government will:
a. Note date on which submittal was received from QC Manager.
b. Review submittals for approval within scheduling period specified and

only for conformance with project design concepts and compliance with
contract documents.
c. Identify returned submittals with one of the actions defined in

paragraph REVIEW NOTATIONS and with markings appropriate for action
indicated.
Upon completion of review of submittals requiring Government approval,

stamp and date submittals. Two copies of the submittal will be retained by
the Contracting Officer and two copies of the submittal will be returned
to the Contractor.
1.13.1 Review Notations
Contracting Officer review will be completed within 15 calendar days after

date of submission. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor with
the following notations:
a. Submittals marked "approved" or "accepted" authorize the Contractor to

proceed with the work covered.
b. Submittals marked "approved as noted" "or approved, except as noted,

resubmittal not required," authorize the Contractor to proceed with
the work covered provided he takes no exception to the corrections.
c. Submittals marked "not approved" or "disapproved," or "revise and

resubmit," indicate noncompliance with the contract requirements or
design concept, or that submittal is incomplete. Resubmit with
appropriate changes. No work shall proceed for this item until
resubmittal is approved.
d. Submittals marked "not reviewed" will indicate submittal has been

previously reviewed and approved, is not required, does not have
evidence of being reviewed and approved by Contractor, or is not
complete. A submittal marked "not reviewed" will be returned with an
explanation of the reason it is not reviewed. Resubmit submittals
returned for lack of review by Contractor or for being incomplete,
with appropriate action, coordination, or change.
1.14 DISAPPROVED SUBMITTALS
Contractor shall make corrections required by the Contracting Officer. If

the Contractor considers any correction or notation on the returned
submittals to constitute a change to the contract drawings or
specifications; notice as required under the Contract clause CHANGES, is
to be given to the Contracting Officer. Contractor is responsible for the
dimensions and design of connection details and construction of work.
Failure to point out deviations may result in the Government requiring
rejection and removal of such work at the Contractor's expense.
If changes are necessary to submittals, make such revisions and submission

of the submittals in accordance with the procedures above. No item of
work requiring a submittal change is to be accomplished until the changed
submittals are approved.
1.15 APPROVED SUBMITTALS
The Contracting Officer's approval or acceptance of submittals is not to

be construed as a complete check, and indicates only that the general
method of construction, materials, detailing and other information are
satisfactory.
Approval or acceptance will not relieve the Contractor of the

responsibility for any error which may exist, as the Contractor under the
Contractor Quality Control (CQC) requirements of this contract is
responsible for dimensions, the design of adequate connections and
details, and the satisfactory construction of all work.
After submittals have been approved or accepted by the Contracting

Officer, no resubmittal for the purpose of substituting materials or
equipment will be considered unless accompanied by an explanation of why a
substitution is necessary.
1.16 APPROVED SAMPLES
Approval of a sample is only for the characteristics or use named in such

approval and is not be construed to change or modify any contract
requirements. Before submitting samples, the Contractor to assure that

the materials or equipment will be available in quantities required in the
project. No change or substitution will be permitted after a sample has
been approved.
Match the approved samples for materials and equipment incorporated in the
work. If requested, approved samples, including those which may be
damaged in testing, will be returned to the Contractor, at his expense,
upon completion of the contract. Samples not approved will also be
returned to the Contractor at its expense, if so requested.
Failure of any materials to pass the specified tests will be sufficient

cause for refusal to consider, under this contract, any further samples of
the same brand or make of that material. Government reserves the right to
disapprove any material or equipment which previously has proved
unsatisfactory in service.
Samples of various materials or equipment delivered on the site or in

place may be taken by the Contracting Officer for testing. Samples
failing to meet contract requirements will automatically void previous
approvals. Contractor to replace such materials or equipment to meet
contract requirements.
Approval of the Contractor's samples by the Contracting Officer does not

relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the contract.
1.17 WITHHOLDING OF PAYMENT
Payment for materials incorporated in the work will not be made if

required approvals have not been obtained.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER N62473-10-D-5403
TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR
P-617 Engine Maintenance Shop
CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY
G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
V T E R I E O DATE FWD O MAILED
I T C A C N TO APPR N TO
T A G# A R AUTH/ CONTR/
Y L S R T E C C
E DESCRIPTION A I V APPROVAL MATERIAL O DATE DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD O DATE DATE RCD
N N C P O W NEEDED NEEDED D OF FROM TO OTHER FROM OTH D OF FRM APPR
O O T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT BY BY E ACTION CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER E ACTION AUTH REMARKS
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
01 11 00 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

Utility Outage Requests 1.11.1
Utility Connection Requests 1.11.1
Borrow Permits 1.11.2
Excavation Permits 1.11.2
Welding Permits 1.11.2
Utility Location Coordination 1.12.2 G
Report
Emergency Utility Repair Plan 1.12.4 G
Utility Service Connection 1.10 G
application; including a
construction plan for the utility
service connection
SD-07 Certificates
Energy Performance Rating 1.7.1.1
List of Contact Personnel 1.4.1.1 G
Personnel List 1.5.1.1 G
Vehicle List 1.5.2 G
01 20 00.00 20 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Earned Value Report 1.3 G
Final Form Dd 1354 1.3.3 G
View location map 1.2
Progress and completion pictures 1.3
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 1 OF 73 PAGES

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C

Qualifications 1.5 G
Baseline Network Analysis 1.3 G
Schedule
SD-07 Certificates
Monthly Network Analysis 1.7.1 G
As-Built Schedule 1.7.2 G
Submittal Register 1.11 G
Heavy Equipment and Vehicle 3.1.2
List
Existing Conditions Survey 3.1.2
Construction Operations Plan 3.1.2
Safety Plan 3.1.2
Schedule of Work 3.1.2
Accident Prevention Plan (APP) 1.7 G
Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) 1.8 G
Crane Critical Lift Plan 1.7.1 G
Crane Operators 1.6.1.3 G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fall Protection System 2.2 G
PROJECT SAFETY 2.3
PERFORMANCE SIGNBOARD

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
01 35 26 SD-06 Test Reports

Notifications and Reports 1.12
Accident Reports 1.12.2 G
Crane Reports 1.12.3
SD-07 Certificates
Confined Space Entry Permit 1.9
Hot work permit 1.9
License Certificates 1.14
Contractor Safety Self-Evaluation 1.4 G
Checklist
Certificate of Compliance 1.12.4
Construction Quality Control (QC) 1.6.1 G
Plan
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) 1.18 G
Management Plan
Basis of Design and Design 1.10.1 G
Intent
SD-05 Design Data
Design Review 1.10.2 G
SD-07 Certificates
CA Resume 1.5.2.2 G
Project Manual G
Written Practices 3.1.2

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
01 45 35 NDT Procedures and Equipment 3.1.2

Calibration Records
SD-06 Test Reports
Daily Reports 3.1.2
Biweekly Reports 3.1.1
SD-07 Certificates
Steel Joist Institute Membership 2.1
Certificate of Compliance 2.1
Special Inspector 1.5 G
Qualification Records 3.1.2
Interim Final Report 3.1.2
Comprehensive Final Report 2.1 G
Comprehensive Final Report 3.1.2 G
Construction Site Plan 1.3 G
Traffic Control Plan 3.4.1 G
Temporary Facilities Plan G
SD-03 Product Data
Backflow Preventers 1.4 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Backflow Preventer Tests 2.2.4
SD-07 Certificates
Backflow Tester 1.4.1
Backflow Preventers 1.4

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
01 57 19.00 20 NESHAP FORM 1.5.4 G

Preconstruction Survey 1.5.1 G
Solid Waste Management Plan 3.3 G
and Permit
Regulatory Notifications 1.5.5 G
Environmental Protection Plan 1.6 G
Storm Water Pollution Prevention 3.1.2.1 G
Plan
Storm Water Notice of Intent (for 3.1.2.1 G
NPDES coverage under the
general permit for construction
activities)
Dirt and Dust Control Plan 3.13.1
Contractor Hazardous Material 3.7.1 G
Inventory Log
SD-06 Test Reports
Laboratory Analysis 1.5.2
Disposal Requirements 3.14.2
Erosion and Sediment Control 3.1.2
Inspection Reports
Storm Water Inspection Reports 3.1.2
for General Permit
Solid Waste Management Report 3.3.1 G
SD-07 Certificates
Contractor 40 CFR employee 1.5.8 G
training records

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
01 57 19.00 20 ECATTS certificate of completion 1.4.2

Storm Water Pollution Prevention 3.1.2.2 G
Plan compliance notebook
Waste Determination 3.4
Documentation
Disposal Documentation for 3.3.2.1
Hazardous and Regulated Waste
Contractor 40 CFR Employee 1.5.8
Training Records
Solid Waste Management Permit 3.3
Solid Waste Management Report 3.3.1
Contractor Hazardous Material 3.7.1 G
Inventory Log
Hazardous Waste/Debris 3.12.2
Management
Regulatory Notifications 1.5.5
Notice of Intent (NOI) 1.2.1 G
01 58 00 SD-02 Shop Drawings
preliminary drawing indicating 1.4.1 G
layout and text content
SD-04 Samples
Final rendering 1.3.1.1 G
Final framed rendering 1.3.1.2 G

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
01 74 19 Waste Management Plan 1.5 G

Records 1.6
Verification of Prior Experience 1.2.1 G
Documentation of Manufacturer's 1.2.1 G
Prior Experience
Quality Control Plan 1.2.1 G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drawings, Diagrams and 1.2.2 G
Schedules
Diagrams and Instructions 1.2.2 G
Coordination Drawings 1.2.2 G
SD-03 Product Data
Catalog Cuts 1.2.3 G
Manufacturer's Sample Warranty 1.2.1 G
Samples of Warranty Language 1.2.3 G
SD-05 Design Data
Design Calculations 1.2.3 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Factory Tests 1.2.4.1 G
Functional Field Test 1.2.4.3 G
Final Acceptance Test 1.2.4.4 G
Test Procedures 1.2.4.2 G
SD-07 Certificates
Qualification of Manufacturer 1.2.1

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
01 75 00.00 40 Qualification of Installer 1.2.1 G

United States Manufacture 1.2.1 G
SD-08 Manufacturer’s Instructions
Manufacturer's Administrative 1.2.1 G
Requirements
Demonstration and Training 1.2.1 G
Information
Manufacturer's Procedural 1.2.1 G
Requirements
SD-09 Manufacturer’s Field
Reports
Documentation of the Testing and 1.2.4.3 G
Verification Actions
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance
Data
Operation and Maintenance Data 1.2.3 G
Safety and Security Data or 1.2.3 G
Posters
01 78 00 SD-03 Product Data
Warranty Management Plan 1.6.1
Warranty Tags 1.6.4
Final Cleaning 3.4
Spare Parts Data 1.5
Preventative Maintenance 3.5

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
01 78 00 Condition Monitoring (Predictive 3.5

Testing)
Inspection 3.5
Instructions 1.6.1
Data
Operation and Maintenance 3.3 G
Manuals
As-Built Drawings 3.1 G
Record Drawings 3.2 G
As-Built Record of Equipment
and Materials
Certification of EPA Designated 2.1 G
Items
Interim DD FORM 1354 3.6 G
Checklist for DD FORM 1354 3.6 G
NAVFAC Sustainable & Energy 3.7 G
Data Record Card
01 78 24.00 20 SD-10 Operation and Maintenance
Data
Training Plan 3.1.1 G
Training Outline 3.1.3 G
Training Content 3.1.2 G
eOMSI, Progress Submittal 1.4.1 G

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
01 78 24.00 20 eOMSI, Prefinal Submittal 1.4.2 G

eOMSI, Final Submittal 1.4.3 G
Training Video Recording 3.1.4 G
Validation of Training Completion 3.1.6 G
Contaminated/Hazardous Soils 3.7.2
SD-06 Test Reports
Analytical Testing 3.7.3 G
Site Tests: Clearance Criteria 3.3.4.1 G
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications 1.5.1 G
Notifications 3.3.1 G
Hazardous Waste Manifest 3.7.10.2 G
Soils Disposed 3.7.6 G
Weighing Of Excavated Material 3.7.11
Demolition Plan 1.2.1 G
Existing Conditions 1.10
SD-07 Certificates
Notification 1.7 G
Receipts 3.3.3
02 82 14.00 10 SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detailed Drawings 1.4 G
SD-03 Product Data

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
02 82 14.00 10 Asbestos Waste Shipment 3.10.3.1 G

Records
Weight Bills and Delivery Tickets 1.1
Encapsulants 2.1 G
Respiratory Protection Program 1.9.1 G
Cleanup and Disposal 3.10 G
Training Program 1.11
Licenses, Permits and 1.8.1
Notifications
Asbestos Management Plan 3.10.3.2 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Exposure Assessment and Air 3.8
Monitoring
Local Exhaust System 1.7.3
SD-07 Certificates
Local Exhaust System 1.7.3
Encapsulants 2.1 G
Medical Surveillance 1.9
Requirements
02 82 33.13 20 SD-03 Product Data
Vacuum Filters 1.6.4 G
Respirators 1.6.1 G
SD-06 Test Reports
sampling results 1.5.2.3 G

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
02 82 33.13 20 Occupational and Environmental 1.5.2.3 G

Assessment Data Report
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications of CP 1.5.1.1 G
Testing Laboratory 1.5.1.3 G
Occupant Notification G
Training Certification 1.5.1.2 G
Notification of the G
Commencement of LBP Hazard
Abatement
lead-based paint/paint with lead 1.5.3 G
removal/control plan
Rental equipment notification 1.6.3 G
Respiratory Protection Program 1.5.2.6 G
Hazard Communication Program 1.5.2.7 G
EPA approved hazardous waste 3.5.2 G
treatment, storage, or disposal
facility
Lead Waste Management Plan 1.5.2.8 G
Vacuum filters 1.6.4 G
Clearance Certification 3.5.1.1 G
hazardous waste manifest 3.5.2.1 G
Medical Examinations 1.5.2.4 G
Training Certification 1.5.1.2 G

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
02 82 33.13 20 turn-in documents or weight 3.5.2.1 G

tickets
02 84 33 SD-07 Certificates
Training certification 1.7.1
Qualifications of CIH 1.7.2
PCB removal work plan 1.7.3
PCB disposal plan 1.7.4
Notification 1.7.5
Transporter certification 3.8
Certification of Decontamination 3.5.4
Post cleanup sampling 3.5.5
Certificate of disposal 3.8.1
Concrete Curing Plan 1.6.3.1
Quality Control Plan 1.6.5 G
Quality Control Personnel 1.6.6 G
Certifications
Quality Control Organizational 1.6.6
Chart
Laboratory Accreditation 1.6.8 G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Reinforcing steel 1.6.2.1 G
SD-03 Product Data
Joint sealants 2.4.8
Joint filler 2.4.7
Materials for Forms 2.1

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
03 30 00 Cementitious Materials 2.4.1

Vapor retarder 2.4.6
Concrete Curing Materials 2.3.3
Reinforcement 2.5
Admixtures 2.4.5
Waterstops 2.2.1
SD-05 Design Data
mix design 2.3.1 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Concrete mix design 1.6.1.1 G
Fly ash 1.6.4.1
Pozzolan 1.6.4.1
Ground granulated blast-furnace 1.6.4.2
slag
Aggregates 2.4.3
Compressive strength tests 3.14.2.3 G
Air Content 3.14.2.4
Slump Tests 3.14.2.1
Water 2.4.2
SD-07 Certificates
Reinforcing Bars 2.5.1
Welder Qualifications 1.8
VOC Content for form release 1.6.3.2
agents, curing compounds, and
concrete penetrating sealers
Material Safety Data Sheets 1.6.3.3

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
03 30 00 Field Testing Technician and 1.6.6.2

Testing Agency
Curing Compound 2.3.3
Detail Drawings 1.4.4 G A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Cement 2.3.4 G A/E
Insulation 2.10 G A/E
Cold Weather Installation 1.6.2 G A/E
Water-Repellant Admixture 2.4 G A/E
SD-04 Samples
Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) 2.2 G A/E
Anchors, Ties, and Bar 2.6 G A/E
Positioners
Expansion-Joint Materials G A/E
Joint Reinforcement 2.7 G A/E
Insulation 2.10 G A/E
SD-05 Design Data
Pre-mixed Mortar 2.3.5 G A/E
Unit Strength Method 1.2.2.1 G A/E
SD-06 Test Reports
Efflorescence Test 3.18.3 G A/E
Field Testing of Mortar 3.18.1 G A/E
Field Testing of Grout 3.18.2 G A/E
Prism tests 3.18.4 G A/E

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
04 20 00 Masonry Cement 2.3.4 G A/E

Masonry Inspector Qualifications 1.4.3 G A/E
Single-Wythe Masonry Wall 3.18.5 G A/E
Water Penetration Test
SD-07 Certificates
Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) 2.2
Anchors, Ties, and Bar 2.6
Positioners
Expansion-Joint Materials
Joint Reinforcement 2.7
Masonry Cement 2.3.4
Insulation 2.10
Insulation 2.10
Precast Concrete Items
Admixtures for Masonry Mortar 2.3.1
Admixtures for Grout 2.5.1
Contamination 1.4.2
Masonry Cement 2.3.4
Data
Plastic Identification 1.2.1
Take-Back Program 3.17.2
Erection Drawings 1.5.1.1 G
SD-02 Shop Drawings

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
05 12 00 Fabrication drawings 1.5.2 G

SD-03 Product Data
Shop primer 2.6.2
Welding electrodes and rods 2.4.1
Direct Tension Indicator Washers 2.3.2.3
Non-Shrink Grout 2.4.2
Tension control bolts 2.3.3
SD-06 Test Reports
Class B coating 2.6.2
Bolts, nuts, and washers 2.3
Weld Inspection Reports 3.7.1.2
Direct Tension Indicator Washer 3.7.2.1
Inspection Reports
Bolt Testing Reports 3.7.3.1
Embrittlement Test Reports 3.7.4
SD-07 Certificates
Steel 2.2
Bolts, nuts, and washers 2.3
Galvanizing 2.5
AISC Fabrication Plant Quality 1.3
Certification
AISC Erector Quality Certification 1.3
Welding procedures and 1.5.3.1
qualifications
Welding electrodes and rods 2.4.1

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
05 21 19 Welder qualification 1.5.2

Material Safety Data Sheet 1.5.2
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Steel joist framing 1.5.1 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Erection inspection 3.4.1
Welding inspections 3.4.1
SD-07 Certificates
Accessories 2.1
Certification of Compliance 1.5.2
Fabrication Drawings 1.3.5
Metal Floor Deck Units
Cant Strips 2.3.2.1
Ridge and Valley Plates 2.3.2.2
Metal Closure Strips 2.3.2.3
SD-03 Product Data
Accessories 2.2
Deck Units 2.3.1
Galvanizing Repair Paint 2.1.3.1
Galvanizing Repair Paint 2.1.6
Joint Sealant Material 2.1.5
Mechanical Fasteners 2.2.12
Powder-Actuated Tool Operator 1.3.2
Repair Paint 2.3.6

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
05 30 00 Sound Absorbing Material

Welder Qualifications 1.3.3
Welding Equipment 1.3.3
Welding Rods and Accessories 1.3.3
SD-04 Samples
Metal Roof Deck Units 2.3
Flexible Closure Strips 2.1.7
Flexible Closure Strips 2.3
Accessories 2.2
SD-05 Design Data
Deck Units 2.3.1
SD-07 Certificates
Welding Procedures 1.3.3
Fire Safety 1.3.4.1
Wind Storm Resistance 1.3.4.2
Framing Components 1.6.1 G A/E
SD-03 Product Data
studs,joists 2.1
SD-05 Design Data
Metal framing calculations 1.6.2 G A/E
SD-07 Certificates
Load-bearing cold-formed metal 1.4
framing
Welds 3.1.1

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
05 50 13 Access doors and panels 2.3 G

Expansion joint covers 2.4 G A/E
angles and plates 2.7 G
Roof hatch 3.8 G
SD-03 Product Data
Access doors and panels 2.3 G
Expansion joint covers 2.4 G A/E
Roof hatch 3.8 G
SD-04 Samples
Expansion joint covers 2.4 G
Iron and Steel Hardware 2.1 G A/E
Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and 2.1 G A/E
Strips
Metal Stair System 2.7 G A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Cold-Drawn Steel Tubing 2.3 G A/E
Concrete Inserts 2.5 G A/E
Steel Pan Stairs 2.9 G A/E
Steel Stairs 2.9.4 G A/E
SD-07 Certificates
Welding Procedures 1.3 G
Welder Qualification 1.3 G
Protective Coating 2.8 G

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
05 51 33 Ladders 2.3 G A/E

SD-03 Product Data
Ladders 2.3 G A/E
Fabrication Drawings 1.2.1 G A/E
Strips
Strips
SD-03 Product Data
Concrete Inserts 2.7 G A/E
Protective Coating 2.9 G A/E
Steel Railings and Handrails 2.10 G A/E
Anchorage and Fastening G A/E
Systems
SD-07 Certificates
Welding Procedures 1.4.1 G
Welder Qualification 1.4.2 G
Installation Instructions 3.1 G
Fabricated structural members 1.9.1 G A/E
Modifications of structural 1.9.2 G A/E
members

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
06 10 00 Nailing Strips 2.2.1 G A/E

SD-03 Product Data
Fire-retardant treatment 1.8
SD-06 Test Reports
Preservative-treated 1.4.3
SD-07 Certificates
Certificates of grade 1.9.3
Preservative treatment 1.7
Adhesives 2.3.3
Oriented Strand Board
Shop Drawings 2.9 G A/E
Installation 3.1
SD-03 Product Data
Wood Materials 2.1
Wood Finishes
Finish Schedule 2.9.7.3 G A/E
Certification
SD-04 Samples
Plastic Laminates 2.3 G A/E
Cabinet Hardware 2.6
SD-07 Certificates
Quality Assurance 1.4
Laminate Clad Casework 3.1

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
06 61 16 Installation 3.1 G
SD-03 Product Data
Solid polymer material 2.1 G A/E
Certification
VOC Content
SD-04 Samples
Material 2.1 G A/E
Counter and Vanity Tops 2.3.4 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Solid polymer material 2.1
SD-07 Certificates
Fabrications 2.3
Qualifications 1.4.1
Data
Clean-up 3.2
Work Plan 1.4 G
SD-03 Product Data
Thermal Imaging Camera 2.2 G
SD-05 Design Data
Envelope Surface Area 3.2 G
Calculations
SD-07 Certificates
Pressure Test Agency 1.6.2.1
Thermographer Qualifications 1.6.2.2

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
07 05 23 Test Instruments 1.6.3

Date Of Last Calibration 1.6.3
SD-06 Test Reports
Pressure Test Procedures 3.5 G
Air Leakage Test Report 3.5.5 G
Diagnostic Test Report 3.6.5 G
Fluid-applied membrane 2.1 G A/E
Membrane primer 2.2 G A/E
Elastomeric sheet 2.7 G A/E
Solvent 3.3 G A/E
Bond breaker 2.6 G A/E
Warranty 1.6
Information Card 3.6
Instructions To Government 3.5
Personnel
Curtain Wall Insulation 2.2.1 G A/E
Safing Insulation 2.2.2 G A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Curtain Wall Insulation 2.2.1 G A/E
Safing Insulation 2.2.2 G A/E
SD-07 Certificates
Installer Qualifications 1.4.2 G

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
07 21 00 Curtain Wall Insulation 2.2.1 G

Safing Insulation 2.2.2 G
Warranty 1.7 G
Cavity wall insulation 2.1 G A/E
Pressure sensitive tape 2.2 G A/E
Protection board or coating 2.3 G A/E
Accessories 2.4 G A/E
Block or Board Insulation
Adhesive 2.4.1
Blanket insulation 2.1
Sill sealer insulation
Vapor retarder
Pressure sensitive tape 2.3
Accessories 2.4
Certification
Insulation 3.2.1
Wood nailers 2.4 G A/E
Tapered roof insulation 2.1.4 G A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Fasteners 2.3 G A/E

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
07 22 00 Insulation 2.1 G A/E

SD-06 Test Reports
Flame spread and smoke 1.4.1
developed ratings
SD-07 Certificates
qualifications 1.3
fasteners 2.3
insulation 2.1
07 27 10.00 10 SD-06 Test Reports
Design Review Report 1.8 G DO
Testing and Inspection 3.5.2 G RO
SD-07 Certificates
Air Barrier Inspector 1.7 G RO
Qualification of Manufacturer 1.5.3 G
Qualification of Installation 1.5.4 G
Contractor
Warranty 1.8 G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation Drawings 1.5.1.1 G A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Wall Panels 2.2.1 G A/E
Factory Color Finish 2.2.2 G A/E
Closure Materials 1.5.5 G A/E
Pressure Sensitive Tape 2.5.4.4 G A/E

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
07 42 13 Sealants and Caulking 2.5.4.1 G A/E

Enamel Repair Paint 1.5.3.1 G A/E
Accessories 1.5.5 G A/E
SD-04 Samples
Wall Panels 2.2.1 G A/E
Metal Closure Strips 2.5.3 G A/E
Color chart G A/E
SD-05 Design Data
Wind load design analysis 1.5.1.2 G A/E
SD-06 Test Reports
Leakage Tests 3.7.2 G
Wind Load Tests 1.3.2 G
Coating 2.2.2.6 G
Chalking 2.2.2.6 G
Seismic Tests 1.3.2 G
SD-07 Certificates
Coil Stock 1.5.3.1 G
Fasteners 1.5.3.1 G
Installation 3.3 G
Reports
Manufacturer's Field Reports 3.8.1 G A/E
Warranty 1.8 G

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
07 42 13 Maintenance Instructions 1.5.6 G

Roofing Membrane 2.2 G A/E
SD-07 Certificates
Qualification of manufacturer 1.5.1 G
Wind Uplift 1.6.2 G
Warranty 1.9 G
Covering on flat, sloped, or 3.1.14 G A/E
curved surfaces
Expansion joints 3.1.15 G A/E
Base flashing 3.1.9 G A/E
Counterflashing 3.1.10 G A/E
Flashing at roof penetrations 3.1.16 G A/E
Reglets 3.1.11 G A/E
Drip edge 3.1.12 G A/E
Quality Control Plan 3.5
Firestopping Materials 2.1 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Inspection 3.3 G
SD-07 Certificates
Inspector Qualifications 1.4.2
Firestopping Materials 2.1

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
07 84 00 Installer Qualifications 1.4.1 G

Sealants 2.1
Primers 2.2
Bond breakers 2.3
Backstops 2.4
SD-07 Certificates
Sealant 3.3.6
Doors 2.1 G A/E
Doors 2.1 G A/E
Frames 2.4 G A/E
Frames 2.4 G A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Doors 2.1 G A/E
Frames 2.4 G A/E
Accessories 2.2
Doors, windows and frames 1.5.1 G A/E
SD-04 Samples
Finish sample G A/E
SD-05 Design Data
calculations 1.2.1 G
Doors and frames 2.1

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C

Glazed curtain wall system 1.5 G A/E
Installation Drawings 1.12 G A/E
Shop-Painting Aluminum 2.4.2 G A/E
Shop-Painting Steel 2.4.3 G A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Glazed curtain wall system 1.5 G A/E
Preventive Maintenance and 1.13 G
Inspection
Metals For Fabrication 2.2 G
Nonskinning Sealing Compound 2.3 G
Metal Accessories 2.4.1 G A/E
Curtain-wall Framing Members 2.5 G A/E
Aluminum Doors and Frames 2.6 G A/E
Curtain Wall Frame 2.7.1 G A/E
Thermal Insulation Materials 2.8 G A/E
Sealants and Caulkings 2.9 G A/E
Curtain-Wall Installation Materials 2.10 G A/E
Masonry Anchorage Devices 2.10.4 G A/E
warranties 1.8.1 G
warranties 1.8.1 G
SD-05 Design Data
Calculations 1.3 G A/E
Finish 2.4.5 G A/E
Exposed-to-View Aluminum 2.4.5 G A/E
Finish

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
08 44 00 Seismic Calculations 1.5.6 G A/E

Glazed curtain wall system 1.5 G
Insulating glass 2.1.5.2 G
WARRANTY 1.8 G
Test Reports G
SD-07 Certificates
Engineer's qualifications G
Hardware schedule 3.10 G
SD-03 Product Data
Hardware items 2.2 G
Installation 3.3 G
Data
Hardware Schedule 3.10 G
Key Bitting 3.4 G
Installation G A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Insulating Glass 1.6.1 G A/E
Glazing Accessories 1.3 G A/E

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
08 81 00 SD-04 Samples
Insulating Glass 1.6.1 G A/E
Glazing Compound 2.3.2 G
Tape 2.3.6 G
Sealant 2.3.3.1 G
SD-07 Certificates
Insulating Glass 1.6.1 G
Glazing Accessories 1.3 G
Setting and sealing materials 2.3 G
Glass setting 3.2 G
Door louvers 1.5 G A/E
Door louvers 2.3 G A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Metal Door Louvers 2.2 G A/E
SD-04 Samples
Door louvers 1.5 G
Door louvers 2.3 G
Metal support systems 2.1 G A/E
Cementitious backer units 2.1.4 G A/E
Glass Mat Covered or Reinforced 2.1.3 G A/E
Gypsum Sheathing

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
09 29 00 Glass Mat Covered or Reinforced 2.1.3.1 G A/E

Gypsum Sheathing Sealant
Accessories 2.1.9 G A/E
Gypsum Board 2.1.1 G A/E
Adhesives 2.1.7 G A/E
Joint Treatment Materials 2.1.5 G A/E
SD-04 Samples
Trim Accessories G
SD-07 Certificates
Asbestos Free Materials 2.1 G
Material Safety Data Sheets 2.1
Data
Manufacturer maintenance 2.1
instructions
Waste Management 3.9
Detail Drawings 3.2 G A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Tile 2.1 G A/E
Tile 2.1 G A/E
Setting-Bed 2.2 G
Mortar, Grout, and Adhesive 2.4 G A/E
SD-04 Samples
Tile 2.1 G A/E

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
09 30 13 Accessories 2.1 G
Transition Strips 2.1 G A/E
Transition Strips 2.5 G A/E
Grout G A/E
SD-07 Certificates
Tile 2.1
Mortar, Grout, and Adhesive 2.4
Maintenance Instructions 3.7
Data
Installation 3.2
Tile 2.1
Adhesives
Approved Detail Drawings 1.2 G A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Acoustical Ceiling Systems G A/E
Certification
SD-04 Samples
Acoustical Units 2.1 G A/E
Acoustic Ceiling Tiles
SD-06 Test Reports
Ceiling Attenuation Class and 1.2.1
Test

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
09 51 00 SD-07 Certificates
Acoustical Units 2.1
Resilient Flooring and 2.10 G A/E
Accessories
SD-03 Product Data
Accessories
Adhesives 2.6 G A/E
Rubber Sheet Flooring 2.1 G A/E
Solid Vinyl Tile 2.3 G A/E
Wall Base 2.4 G A/E
Stair Treads, Risers and 2.5 G A/E
Stringers
ESD Rubber Tile 2.2 G A/E
SD-04 Samples
Accessories
SD-06 Test Reports
Moisture, Alkalinity and Bond 3.3 G
Tests
Surface Preparation 3.2 G
Installation 3.1 G

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
09 65 00 SD-10 Operation and Maintenance

Data
Resilient Flooring and 2.10 G
Accessories
Piping identification 3.8 G A/E
stencil 3.8 G A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Coating 2.1 G A/E
Manufacturer's Technical Data 2.1
Sheets
SD-04 Samples
Color G A/E
SD-07 Certificates
Applicator's qualifications 1.3
Qualification Testing 1.4.1.2 G
Manufacturer's Material Safety 1.7.2
Data Sheets
Data
Coatings: 2.1 G
10 14 00.20 SD-02 Shop Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Installation 3.1 G

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
10 14 00.20 Warranty 1.6 G

SD-04 Samples
Interior Signage 1.4.1 G
Data
Protection and Cleaning 3.1.2 G
Approved Detail Drawings 3.1 G A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Building Mounted Type Signs 2.1 G A/E
Installation 3.1 G A/E
Exterior Signage 1.2 G A/E
Wind Load Requirements 1.2.1
SD-04 Samples
Exterior Signage 1.2 G A/E
Data
Protection and Cleaning 3.1.2 G
Fabrication Drawings 2.1 G A/E
Installation Drawings 3.2 G A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Cleaning and Maintenance 2.1
Instructions
Colors And Finishes 2.7 G A/E
Galvanized Steel Sheet G A/E

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
10 21 13 Sound-Deadening Cores G A/E

Anchoring Devices and Fasteners 2.2.1 G A/E
Hardware and Fittings 2.2.3 G A/E
Brackets 2.2.2 G A/E
Door Hardware 2.2.4 G A/E
Toilet Enclosures 2.3.1 G A/E
Urinal Screens 2.3.2 G A/E
Pilaster Shoes 2.5 G A/E
SD-04 Samples
Colors and Finishes 2.7 G A/E
Hardware and Fittings 2.2.3
Anchoring Devices and Fasteners 2.2.1
SD-07 Certificates
Warranty 1.5
Data
Plastic Identification 2.1.1 G A/E
Toilet Enclosures 2.3.1
Urinal Screens 2.3.2
Pilaster Shoes 2.5
Finishes 2.1.2 G A/E
Accessory Items 2.2
SD-04 Samples
Finishes 2.1.2

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
10 28 13 Accessory Items 2.2

SD-07 Certificates
Accessory Items 2.2
Manufacturer's Data G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Accessories G A/E
Cabinets Part 2 G A/E
Wall Brackets G A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Fire Extinguishers G A/E
Accessories G A/E
Cabinets Part 2 G A/E
Wall Brackets G A/E
Replacement Parts 3.2.1 G A/E
Installation 3.3 G A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Window Shades 2.1 G A/E
SD-04 Samples
Window Shades 2.1 G A/E
SD-06 Test Reports
Window Shades 2.1
Window Shades 2.1

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
12 24 13 SD-10 Operation and Maintenance

Data
Window Shades 2.1
Bracing 3.1 G
Resilient Vibration Isolation 3.4 G
Devices
Equipment Requirements 2.1 G
SD-03 Product Data
Bracing 3.1 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Anchor Bolts 3.3 G
Coupling and Bracing 3.1
Flexible Couplings or Joints 3.2
Equipment Requirements 2.1
Contractor Designed Bracing 1.2.4 G
SD-03 Product Data
Coupling and Bracing 3.1 G
Contractor Designed Bracing 1.2.4 G
SD-07 Certificates
Flexible Ball Joints 2.2

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C

Passenger Elevators 2.1 G A/E
Field Quality Control 3.2 G A/E
Logic Control 2.4.2 G A/E
SD-05 Design Data
Reaction Loads 1.2.1 G A/E
Heat Loads 1.2.1 G A/E
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Tests Reports 3.2.2
SD-07 Certificates
Welders' Qualifications 1.4.3 G A/E
Data
Operation and Maintenance 3.3 G A/E
Manuals
Maintenance and Diagnostic 1.7.1 G A/E
Tools
Maintenance and Diagnostic 2.4.2.3
Software
Maintenance and Repair Action 1.7 G A/E
Plan
Operation and Maintenance 3.3 G A/E
Training
Shop Drawings 1.5.2 G A/E
SD-03 Product Data

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
21 13 13.00 20 Pipe 2.2.1 G A/E

Fittings 2.2.1 G A/E
Valves 2.2.5 G A/E
Sprinklers 2.2.4 G A/E
Pipe hangers and supports 2.2.6 G A/E
Sprinkler Alarm Switches 2.3.1 G A/E
Mechanical couplings 2.2.1 G A/E
Seismic Bracing 2.2.6 G A/E
SD-05 Design Data
Hydraulic Calculations 1.3 G A/E
SD-06 Test Reports
Request to schedule Preliminary 3.6 G
Tests
Preliminary Test Report 3.6 G
Request to schedule Final 3.7 G
Acceptance Test
Final Acceptance Test Report 3.7 G
SD-07 Certificates
Inspection by Fire Protection 3.1 G
Engineer
Fire Protection Engineer 1.5.1 G
Sprinkler System Installer 1.5.2 G
Data
Operating and Maintenance 3.8
Instructions

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
21 13 13.00 20 SD-11 Closeout Submittals

As-built drawings 3.7 G
On-site training 3.8
Plumbing System 3.7.1 G
SD-03 Product Data
Fixtures 2.4 G A/E
Flush valve water closets 2.4.2 G A/E
Flush valve urinals 2.4.3 G A/E
Wall hung lavatories 2.4.5 G A/E
Kitchen sinks 2.4.6 G A/E
Service sinks 2.4.7 G A/E
Drinking-water coolers 2.4.8 G A/E
Domestic Water Service Meter 2.10 G A/E
Water heaters 2.8 G A/E
Pumps 2.9 G A/E
Backflow prevention assemblies 2.5 G A/E
Welding 1.5.1
Plumbing System 3.7.1
SD-06 Test Reports
Tests, Flushing and Disinfection 3.7
Data
Plumbing System 3.7.1 G
22 05 48.00 20 SD-03 Product Data
Flexible connectors 2.4 G

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
22 05 48.00 20 Pipe guides 2.5 G

Thrust restraints 2.6 G
Machinery manufacturer's sound 1.4.1
data
SD-05 Design Data
machinery 1.4.2
SD-06 Test Reports
Equipment sound level tests 3.2.2.1
Vibration and noise isolation 3.1.1
components
Seismic protection components 2.7
Installation Drawings 1.2 G
SD-03 Product Data
Adhesives 2.3 G
Coatings 2.3 G
Insulating Cement 2.3 G
Insulation Materials 2.3 G
SD-07 Certificates
Recycled Materials 1.4.1 G
Installation Manual 1.2 G
Detail Drawings 1.4.5 G
SD-03 Product Data

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 00 00 Duct Connectors G A/E

In-Line Centrifugal Fans 2.9.1.1 G A/E
Test Procedures 1.4.6
SD-06 Test Reports
Performance Tests 3.10 G
Manufacturer's Installation 3.2
Instructions
Operation and Maintenance 3.12.2
Training
Data
Operation and Maintenance 3.12.1 G
Manuals
In-Line Centrifugal Fans 2.9.1.1 G
Outline Drawings 1.2 G
SD-03 Product Data
Equipment and Performance 1.2 G
Data
SD-06 Test Reports
Type of Isolator 2.1 G A/E
Type of Base 2.1 G
Allowable Deflection 2.1 G
Measured Deflection 2.1 G

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C

Records of Existing Conditions 1.3 G
Records of Existing Conditions 1.3.2 G
TAB Firm 1.5.4.1 G
TAB team assistants 1.2 G
TAB team engineer 1.2 G
TAB Specialist 1.5.4.2 G
TAB team field leader 1.2 G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
TAB Schematic Drawings and 1.3.2 G
Report Forms
SD-03 Product Data
Equipment and Performance 1.3 G
Data
TAB Related HVAC Submittals 1.5.4.4 G
TAB Procedures 1.5.2 G
Calibration 1.5.2 G
Systems Readiness Check 1.3.2 G
TAB Execution 1.5.5 G
TAB Verification 1.5.5.3 G
SD-06 Test Reports
DALT and TAB Work Execution 3.7 G
Schedule
DALT and TAB Procedures 3.7 G
Summary
Design review report 1.3.2 G

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 05 93 Design review report 1.7.3.1 G

Design review report 3.7 G
Pre-Final DALT report 1.5.3 G
Final DALT report 1.5.3 G A/E
TAB report for Season 1 1.5.6.2 G A/E
SD-07 Certificates
Independent TAB agency and 1.5.1 G
personnel qualifications
Independent TAB agency and 1.5.1 G
personnel qualifications
Advance notice of Pre-Final 3.3.2 G
DALT field work
Completed Pre-Final DALT Work 3.7 G
Checklist
Completed Pre-Final DALT Work 3.7 G
Checklist
Advance Notice of TAB Field 3.7 G
Work
Completed Pre-TAB Work 3.7
Checklist
Completed Pre-TAB Work 3.7
Checklist

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 05 93 TAB Firm 1.5.4.1 G

DALT and TAB Submittal and 1.7.1 G
Work Schedule
DALT and TAB Submittal and 1.7.3 G
Work Schedule
Design review report 1.3.2 G
Design review report 1.7.3.1 G
Design review report 3.7 G
Pre-field DALT preliminary 1.7.3.2 G
notification
Pre-field TAB engineering report 1.7.3.3 G
Advanced notice for TAB field 1.7.3 G
work
Prerequisite HVAC Work Check 1.7.3 G
Out List
MICA Plates 3.2.2.4 G
Pipe Insulation Systems 2.3
Pipe Insulation Systems 3.2
SD-03 Product Data
Pipe Insulation Systems 2.3 G

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 08 00.00 10 Commissioning Plan 1.5.2.2 G

SD-03 Product Data
Pre-Functional Performance Test 3.2.1 G
Checklists
Functional Performance Tests 3.2.2 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Commissioning Report 3.3
SD-07 Certificates
Commissioning Firm 1.5.1
Commissioning Specialist 1.5.2
Control system drawings title 1.4.1.1 G
sheet
List of I/O Points 1.4.1.2 G
Control System Components List 1.4.1.3 G
Control system schematics 1.4.1.4 G
HVAC Equipment Electrical 1.4.1.5 G
Ladder diagrams
Component wiring diagrams 1.4.1.6 G
Terminal strip diagrams 1.4.1.7 G
BACnet communication 1.4.1.8 G
architecture schematic
SD-03 Product Data
Direct Digital Controllers 2.1.1 G
BACnet Gateways 2.1.1.12 G
DDC Software 2.1.2 G

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 09 23.13 20 BACnet Operator Workstation 2.1.3 G

Sensors and Input Hardware 2.2 G
Output Hardware 2.3 G
Surge and transient protection 2.4.2 G
Indicators 2.5 G
Variable frequency (motor) drives 2.6 G
SD-05 Design Data
Performance Verification Testing 3.4.2 G
Plan
Pre-Performance Verification 3.4.4 G
Testing Checklist
SD-06 Test Reports
Performance Verification Testing 3.4.11 G
Report
SD-07 Certificates
Contractor's Qualifications 1.6.6 G
Reports
Pre-PVT Checklist 3.4.1 G
Data
BACnet Direct Digital Control 1.4 G
Systems
Controls System Operators 3.3 G
Manuals
VFD Service Manuals 2.6.2 G

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 09 23.13 20 SD-11 Closeout Submittals

Training documentation 3.5.1 G
Refrigerant Piping System 2.3 G
SD-03 Product Data
Refrigerant Piping System 2.3 G
Material, Equipment, and Fixture Part 2 G
Lists
Records of Existing Conditions 2.1.1 G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Connection Diagrams 2.1 G
Offset Fitting Configurations 2.3.1 G
Offset Fitting Configurations 2.3.2 G
SD-03 Product Data
Equipment and Performance 2.1.1 G
Data
Galvanized Steel Ductwork 2.2.1 G
Materials
Mill-Rolled Reinforcing and 2.2.2 G
Supporting Materials
Round Sheet Metal Duct Fittings 2.3.1 G
Flexible Connectors 2.3.4 G A/E
Flexible Duct Materials 2.3.7 G
Power Operated Dampers 2.3.10 G A/E

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 31 13.00 40 Fire Dampers and Wall Collars 2.3.11 G

Gravity Backdraft and Relief 2.3.9 G A/E
Dampers
Manual Volume Dampers 2.3.8 G A/E
SD-05 Design Data
Design Analysis and Calculations 2.1 G
Design Analysis and Calculations 2.1.1 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Ductwork Leakage Tests 3.4.2 G
Operational Tests 3.4.1 G
SD-07 Certificates
Listing of Product Installations 3.2 G
Galvanized Steel Ductwork 2.2.1 G
Materials
Mill-Rolled Reinforcing and 2.2.2 G
Supporting Materials
Round Sheet Metal Duct Fittings 2.3.1 G
Dampers 2.3.3 G
Flexible Connectors 2.3.4 G
Data
Manuals
Power Operated Dampers 2.3.10 G
Fire Dampers and Wall Collars 2.3.11 G

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 34 23.00 40 Shop Drawings 2.1 G

SD-03 Product Data
Housing 2.2 G A/E
Fan 2.3 G A/E
Bases 2.5 G A/E
Roof Curbs 2.6 G A/E
Dampers 2.7 G A/E
Screens 2.8 G A/E
SD-06 Test Reports
Final Test Reports 3.2.2 G
Material, Equipment, and Fixture 2.1 G
Lists
Records of Existing Conditions 2.1 G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fabrication Drawings 2.1 G
SD-03 Product Data
Equipment and Performance 1.3 G A/E
Data
SD-04 Samples
Manufacturer's Standard Color 2.1 G
Chart

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 76 00.00 10 Installation Drawings 1.3.2 G

SD-03 Product Data
Equipment 3.2 G A/E
Test Procedures 1.3.2 G
Installation 3.2 G
Manufacturer's Representative 1.3.2 G
Service Organization 1.3.3 G
Training Course 3.4 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 3.5 G
SD-07 Certificates
Installation Drawings 1.3.2 G
Data
Manuals
23 81 28.10 22 SD-03 Product Data
Indoor Units 2.3 G
Outdoor Units 2.1 G
Refrigerant Valves 2.2.2 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Manufacturers Installation 3.1
Instructions

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 81 28.10 22 Operation And Maintenance 3.3

Training
Data
Operation And Maintenance 3.3
Manuals
Indoor Units 2.3 G
Outdoor Units 2.1 G
Training Course 3.4 G
Drawings 1.4
SD-03 Product Data
Materials and Equipment 2.1
Spare Parts 1.6
Posted Instructions 3.4
Verification of Dimensions 3.1
System Performance Tests 3.6
Demonstrations 3.4 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Refrigerant Tests, Charging, and 3.5 G
Start-Up
System Performance Tests 3.6 G
SD-07 Certificates
Materials and Equipment 2.1
Service Organization 2.1.1

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 82 02.00 10 SD-10 Operation and Maintenance

Data
Manuals
Lighting Fixtures in Buildings 3.2
Equipment Requirements 1.3
SD-03 Product Data
Lighting Fixtures in Buildings 3.2 G
Contractor Designed Bracing 1.2.4 G A/E
Acceptance tests and inspections 3.1 G
SD-07 Certificates
Acceptance test and inspections 1.4.3 G
procedure
Panelboards 2.12 G A/E
Transformers 2.15 G A/E
Wireways 2.27 G
Marking strips 3.1.9.1 G
SD-03 Product Data
Receptacles 2.11 G
Circuit breakers 2.12.3 G
Switches 2.9 G

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
26 20 00 Transformers 2.15 G A/E

Enclosed circuit breakers 2.13 G
Motor controllers 2.17 G
Manual motor starters 2.18 G
Grounding Busbar 2.21.3 G
Surge protective devices 2.28 G
SD-06 Test Reports
600-volt wiring test 3.5.2 G
Grounding system test 3.5.5 G
Transformer tests 3.5.3 G
Ground-fault receptacle test 3.5.4 G
SD-07 Certificates
Fuses 2.10 G
Reports
Transformer factory tests 2.30.1
Data
Electrical Systems 1.5.1 G
Switchboard Drawings 1.5.2 G A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Switchboard 2.2 G A/E
SD-06 Test Reports
Switchboard design tests 2.5.2
Switchboard production tests 2.5.3

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
26 23 00 Acceptance checks and tests 3.5.1

Assembled Operation and 1.6.1 G
Maintenance Manuals
Equipment Test Schedule 2.5.1
26 28 01.00 10 SD-03 Product Data
Fault Current Analysis 2.4 G A/E
Protective Device Coordination 2.4 G A/E
Study
Equipment 2.1
Arc Flash Hazard Analysis 2.4.7 G A/E
System Coordinator 1.4.1
Installation 3.2
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Testing 3.3
Photometric Plan 1.6.1.2 G A/E
LED Luminaire Warranty G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Luminaire drawings 1.6.1.1 G A/E
SD-03 Product Data
LED Lighting Fixtures and Drivers 2.1 G A/E
Lighting contactor 2.6 G
Time switch 2.7 G
Exit signs 2.8 G A/E
Emergency lighting equipment 2.9 G

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
26 51 00 Occupancy sensors 2.10 G

Energy Efficiency 1.6.1.8
SD-05 Design Data
Design Data for luminaires 1.6.1.3
SD-06 Test Reports
LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test 1.6.1.4 G
Report
LED Light Source - IES LM-80 1.6.1.5 G
Test Report
Operating test 3.2
Data
Lighting Control System 1.4.1 G
Photometric Plan 1.5.2 G
LED Luminaire Warranty 1.6.1 G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Luminaire drawings 1.5.1.1 G
SD-03 Product Data
LED Luminaires 2.2 G
Luminaire Light Sources 2.2.2 G
Luminaire Power Supply Units 2.2.3 G
(Drivers)
Time switch 2.3.2 G
Lighting Control Relay Panel 2.3.3 G
Motion Sensor 2.3.4 G

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
26 56 00 Photocell 2.3.1 G
SD-05 Design Data
Design Data for luminaires 1.5.3
SD-06 Test Reports
LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test 1.5.4 G
Report
LED Light Source - IES LM-80 1.5.5 G
Test Report
Operating test 3.2
SD-07 Certificates
Luminaire Useful Life Certificate 1.6.1 G
Data
LED Luminaire Warranty 1.6.1
Fabrication Drawings 1.2.1 G
Installation Drawings 3.1.2 G
SD-03 Product Data
Cable Trays 1.2.1 G
Supports 1.2.1 G
Manufacturer's Instructions 3.1.1 G
Telecommunications drawings 1.6.1.1 G
Telecommunications Space 1.6.1.2 G
Drawings

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C

Telecommunications cabling 2.3 G
Patch panels 2.4.3 G
Telecommunications 2.5 G
outlet/connector assemblies
Connector blocks 2.4.1 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Telecommunications cabling 3.4.1 G
testing
SD-07 Certificates
Telecommunications Contractor 1.6.2.1 G
Key Personnel 1.6.2.2 G
Manufacturer Qualifications 1.6.2.3 G
Test plan 1.6.3 G
Reports
Factory reel tests 2.10.1 G
Data
Telecommunications cabling and 1.10.1 G
pathway system
Record Documentation 1.10.2 G
Nameplates 2.1.2 G A/E
Wiring Diagrams 3.2.1 G A/E

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
28 31 76 System Layout 1.2.1 G A/E

System Operation 2.3 G A/E
Notification Appliances 2.18 G A/E
Amplifiers 2.15 G A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Technical Data And Computer 1.6 G
Software
Fire Alarm Control Unit and Mass 2.14 G A/E
Notification Control Unit (FMCP)
Terminal cabinets 3.2.2 G A/E
Manual stations 2.17 G A/E
Transmitters 2.21 G A/E
Batteries 2.13.1 G A/E
Battery chargers 2.13.2 G A/E
Smoke sensors 2.10 G A/E
Heat detectors 2.11 G A/E
Notification appliances 2.18 G A/E
Addressable interface devices 2.7 G A/E
Amplifiers 2.15 G A/E
Tone generators 2.15 G A/E
Digitalized voice generators 2.15 G A/E
Digital alarm communicator 2.21.1 G A/E
transmitter (DACT)
Local Operating Console (LOC) 1.4.3 G A/E
SD-05 Design Data
Battery power 2.13.1.2 G A/E

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
28 31 76 Battery chargers 2.13.2 G A/E

SD-06 Test Reports
Field Quality Control 3.7
Testing Procedures 3.7.1 G A/E
Smoke sensor testing 2.10.3 G A/E
SD-07 Certificates
Installer 1.7.1.4
Formal Inspection and Tests 3.7.2.2
Final Testing 3.7.2.3
Reports
System Operation 2.3 G
Fire Alarm/Mass Notification 1.7.2.2
System
Data
(O&M) Data Instructions
Instruction of Government 3.8 G
Employees
As-Built Drawings 3.7.2.4 G
Utilization of Excavated Materials 3.7 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing 3.14

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
31 00 00 Borrow Site Testing 2.1

SD-07 Certificates
Testing 3.14
Nonsaleable Materials 3.5.2 G
SD-04 Samples
Tree wound paint 2.1
Herbicide 2.2
31 23 00.00 20 SD-06 Test Reports
Borrow Site Testing 1.6 G
Fill and backfill 3.12.2.1
Porous fill 3.12.2.2
Density tests 3.12.2.3
Moisture Content Tests 3.12.2.4
Drilled Shaft Diameters 2.1.1 G
Top and Bottom of Shaft 2.1.1 G
Elevations
Steel Reinforcement 2.1.1 G
Anchor Bolt Locations 2.1.1 G
Accessories 2.1.1 G
SD-05 Design Data
Mix Design Data 2.1 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Ground Water Conditions 3.3.1 G
Slump 3.3.1 G

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
31 63 29 Concrete 3.3.1 G
Compressive Strength 3.3.1 G
SD-07 Certificates
Bill of Lading for Ready-Mix 2.1 G
Concrete Deliveries
Steel Reinforcement 2.1.1 G
Welding Certificates 1.3.5 G
Excavation and Drilling 2.2.1 G
Equipment
Qualifications of Excavator 1.3.4 G
Integrated Pest Management 2.4 G
Plan
SD-03 Product Data
Fertilizer 2.1 G
SD-07 Certificates
Maintenance inspection report 3.4.1
Data
Maintenance 1.6
Tree, staking and guying removal 3.4.2
Aggregates 2.1.1
SD-06 Test Reports
Gradation 3.6.2.1

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
32 11 24 Gradation 3.6.2.1
Bearing ratio 2.1.1
Liquid limit 2.1.1
Plasticity index 2.1.1
Percentage of wear 2.1.1
Density 3.6.2.3
Density 3.6.2.3
Smoothness 3.6.2.2
Thickness 3.6.2.5
Mix Design 2.4 G
Quality Control 3.9 G
Material Acceptance 3.10 G
SD-04 Samples
Asphalt Cement Binder 2.3
Aggregates 2.2
SD-06 Test Reports
Aggregates 2.2 G
QC Monitoring 3.9.3.10
SD-07 Certificates
Asphalt Cement Binder 2.3 G
Testing Laboratory 3.5
Concrete 2.1
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Quality Control 3.8

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
32 17 23.00 20 SD-03 Product Data

Paints for roads and streets 2.1.1
Equipment 1.5 G
SD-06 Test Reports
SD-07 Certificates
Volatile Organic Compound 2.1.1
Construction equipment list 1.5
32 31 13.53 SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fence Installation 1.3.2
Fence Installation 3.1
Installation Drawings 1.3.2
Location of gate, corner, end, and 1.3.2
pull posts
Gate Assembly 1.3.2
Gate Assembly 2.6.1
Gate Assembly 2.6.1
Gate Hardware and Accessories 1.3.2
SD-03 Product Data
Gate Assembly 1.3.2

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
32 31 13.53 Gate Assembly 2.6.1

Gate Assembly 2.6.1
SD-04 Samples
Fabric 2.1.1
Posts 2.2
Post Caps 2.2.2
Braces 2.3
Line Posts 2.3
Sleeves
Top Rail 2.3
Barbed Wire 2.4.2
Barbed Wire Supporting Arms 2.2.2
Stretcher Bars 2.1.1
Gate Posts 2.1.1
Padlocks
Wire Ties 2.4.1
SD-06 Test Reports
zinc coating 1.3.1
SD-07 Certificates
Chain Link Fence 2.2.1
Reports 1.3.1
Reports 1.3.1

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
32 31 13.53 Zinc Coating 1.3.1

Fabric 2.1.1
Barbed Wire 2.4.2
Stretcher Bars 2.1.1
Concrete 2.5
Gate Assembly 1.3.2
Gate Assembly 2.6.1
Gate Assembly 2.6.1
Hardware Assembly 3.6
Accessories 1.3.1
Data
Operating and maintenance 3.6
instructions
Piping materials 2.1
Valves 2.3
heads 2.2
Backflow preventers 2.3.4
Automatic controller 2.5
Solvent cement 2.1.1

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
32 84 24 Control wiring 2.6.1

Water meter 2.4.1
Rain shut-off device
Valve boxes and lids 3.1.7.2
SD-06 Test Reports
Backflow preventers 2.3.4 G A/E
Pressure test 3.2.1 G A/E
Operation test 3.2.2 G A/E
Automatic controller 2.5
Piping materials 2.1
Backflow preventers 2.3.4
Valves 2.3
Water meter 2.4.1
Weather sensor device 2.4.3.1
Data
Piping materials 2.1 G
Backflow preventers 2.3.4 G
Valves 2.3 G
Automatic controller 2.5 G
Water meter 2.4.1 G
Rain shut-off device G
Controller Charts 3.2.3

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
32 93 00 State Landscape Contractor's 1.4.3

License
Time Restrictions and Planting 1.6
Conditions
SD-03 Product Data
Peat 2.3.5
Composted Derivatives 2.3.9
Rotted Manure 2.3.12
Organic Mulch Materials
Gypsum 2.3.10
Inert Mulch 2.6 G
Fertilizer 2.5
Root control barrier 1.5.2.4 G
Staking Material 2.7.1
Metal anchors 2.7.7
Antidesiccants 2.8
Photographs G
SD-04 Samples
Inert Mulch 2.6 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Topsoil composition tests 1.4.1
Topsoil composition tests 2.2.3
Percolation Test 1.4.4
SD-07 Certificates
Nursery certifications 1.4.2
Nursery certifications 2.1.1

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C

Warning and identification tape 2.3
SD-07 Certificates
PE welder's qualifications 1.4.1
PE pipe and fittings 2.2.1
Existing Conditions 1.6
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drawings 1.4.2
SD-03 Product Data
Pipeline materials 2.1
SD-06 Test Reports
Reports 2.2
Placing Pipe 3.3
SD-04 Samples
Pipe for Storm Drains 2.1
SD-07 Certificates
Resin Certification 2.1.1
Pipeline Testing 3.6
Hydrostatic Test on Watertight 2.3
Joints
Determination of Density 3.5.5
Frame and Cover 2.2.3

CONTRACT NO.
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
33 71 02 Precast underground structures 1.6.1 G A/E

SD-03 Product Data
Medium voltage cable 2.5 G A/E
Medium voltage cable joints 2.7 G A/E
Medium voltage cable 2.6 G A/E
terminations
Precast concrete structures 2.12.1.1 G A/E
Sealing Material 2.12.1.4
Pulling-In Irons 3.4.2
Manhole frames and covers 2.12.2 G A/E
Handhole frames and covers 2.12.3 G A/E
Cable supports 2.13 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Medium voltage cable 2.15.2 G A/E
qualification and production tests
Field Acceptance Checks and 3.17.1 G A/E
Tests
Arc-proofing test 2.15.1 G A/E
Cable Installation Plan and 3.3 G A/E
Procedure
SD-07 Certificates
Cable splicer/terminator 1.6.2
Cable Installer Qualifications 1.6.3

SECTION 01 35 13
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES

11/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

U.S. FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)
FAA AC 150/5300-13 (2012; Rev A; Change 1 2014) Airport Design
FAA AC 70/7460-1 (2007; Rev K) Obstruction Marking and

Lighting
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Landing Areas
"Landing Areas" means:
a. The primary surfaces, comprising the surface of the runway, runway

shoulders, and lateral safety zones. The length of each primary
surface is the same as the runway length. The width of each primary
surface is 2000 feet ( 1000 feet on each side of the runway
centerline). Exceptions: Some airfields are based on a primary width
of 1500 feet ( 750 feet on each side of the runway centerline). In
such instances, substitute the proper width in the applicable
statements.
b. The "clear zone" beyond the ends of each runway is the extension of
the primary surface for a distance of 1000 feet beyond each end of
each runway.
c. All taxiways, plus the lateral clearance zones along each side for the
length of the taxiways (the outer edge of each lateral clearance zone
is laterally 250 feet from the far or opposite edge of the taxiway
(example: a 75 foot widetaxiway must have a combined width and
lateral clearance zone of 425 feet.)
d. All aircraft parking aprons, plus the area 125 feet in width extending
beyond each edge all around the aprons.
1.2.2 Safety Precaution Areas
“Safety Precaution Areas” means those portions of approach-departure

clearance zones and transitional zones where placement of objects incident
to contract performance might result in vertical projections at or above
the approach-departure clearance, or the transitional surface.
a. The “approach-departure clearance surface” is an extension of the

primary surface and the clear zone at each end of each runway, for a
distance of 50,000 feet, first along an inclined (glide angle) and
then along a horizontal plane, both flaring symmetrically about the

runway centerline extended.
(1) The inclined plane (glide angle) begins in the clear zone 200 feet
past the end of the runway (and primary surface) at the same
elevation as the end of the runway. It continues upward at a
slope of 50:1 ( 1 foot vertically for each 50 feet horizontally)
to an elevation of 500 feet above the established airfield
elevation. At that point the plane becomes horizontal, continuing
at that same uniform elevation to a point 50,000 feet
longitudinally from the beginning of the inclined plane (glide
angle) and ending there.
(2) The width of the surface at the beginning of the inclined plane
(glide angle) is the same as the width of the clear zone. It then
flares uniformly, reaching the maximum width of 16,000 feetat the
end.
b. The “approach-departure clearance zone” is the ground area under the

approach-departure clearance surface.
c. The “transitional surface” is a sideways extension of all primary

surfaces, clear zones, and approach-departure clearance surfaces along
inclined planes.
(1) The inclined plane in each case begins at the edge of the surface.
(2) The slope of the incline plane is 7:1 ( 1 foot vertically for each
7 feet horizontally). It continues to the point of intersection
with the:
(a) Inner horizontal surface (which is the horizontal plane 150

feet above the established airfield elevation); or
(b) Outer horizontal surface (which is the horizontal plane 500

feet above the established airfield elevation), whichever is
applicable.
d. The “transitional zone” is the ground area under the transitional

surface. (It adjoins the primary surface, clear zone, and
approach-departure clearance zone.)
1.3 SUBMITTALS

Heavy Equipment and Vehicle List
Existing Conditions Survey
Construction Operations Plan
Safety Plan
Schedule of Work
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AIRFIELD OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS
Airfield obstruction lights must conform to FAA AC 70/7460-1 and have red
or white lenses.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 HAZARDS TO AIRFIELD OPERATION
In addition to "DFARS 252.236-7005, Airfield Safety Precautions," the

following paragraphs apply.
3.1.1 Work in Proximity to Landing Areas, Landing Strips, and Landing

Pad(s)
Place nothing upon the landing area or applicable portions of safety

precaution areas without authority of the Contracting Officer.
Use of landing areas, landing strips, and landing pads for purposes other
than aircraft operation,is prohibited without permission of the
Contracting Officer, and the landing area, landing strip, and landing pad
is closed by order of the Contracting Officer and marked as indicated
herein.
Accomplish all construction work on the runways, taxiways, and parking

aprons and in the end zones of the runways and 75 feet to each side of the
runways and taxiways, the landing strip, 75 feet to each side thereof, and
on the taxiways and parking aprons, the landing pad(s) with extreme care
regarding the operation of aircraft. Cooperate closely, and coordinate
with the Operations Officer and the Contracting Officer. Park equipment in
an area designated by the Contracting Officer. Parking of equipment,
vehicles, or any type of storage overnight or for any extended period of
time in the proximity of the landing areas or taxiways, landing strip, and
landing pad is strictly prohibited. Leave no material in areas where
extreme care is to be taken regarding the operation of aircraft.
During periods of active performance of work on the airfield by the

Contractor, govern all operations of mobile equipment per the safety
provisions.
3.1.2 Schedule of Work/Aircraft Operating Schedules
Schedule work to conform to aircraft operating schedules. The Government

will exert every effort to schedule aircraft operations so as to permit
the maximum amount of time for the Contractor's activities; however, in
the event of emergency, intense operational demands, adverse wind
conditions, and other such unforeseen difficulties, the Contractor must
cease operations at the specified locations in the aircraft operational
area for the safety of the Contractor and military personnel and
Government property. Submit a schedule of the work to the Contracting
Officer for transmittal to the Operations Officer describing the work to
be accomplished; the location of the work, noting distances from the ends
of landing areas, taxiways, landing strips, and landing pads and buildings
and other structures as necessary; and dates and hours during which the
work is to be accomplished. Keep the approved schedule of work current,
and notify the Contracting Officer of any changes prior to beginning each
day's work.
Prior to commencement of work, submit the following to the Contracting

Officer for transmittal to the Operations Officer:
Existing Conditions Survey

Construction Operations Plan
Safety Plan
Heavy Equipment and Vehicle List
Where flying is controlled, additional permission must be obtained from

the control tower operator to enter a landing area unless such area is
marked as hazardous to aircraft.
3.1.3 Daytime Markings
During daylight, mark stationary and mobile equipment with international

orange and white checkered flags, mark the material, and work with yellow
flags.
Vehicles operating in the landing area, must be identified by means of a

flag on a staff attached to and flying above the vehicle. Flag size must
be not less than 3 feet square and consist of a checkered pattern of
international orange and white squares not less than 1 foot on each side.
Flags varying in any dimension by not more than 10 percent of the
specified dimensions are considered to comply with the stated requirements.
3.1.4 Nighttime Markings
During nighttime, which begins 2 hours before sundown and ends 2 hours
after sunrise, mark stationary and mobile equipment and material, and work
with red lanterns. Where the Operations Officer determines that the red
lanterns may confuse pilots approaching for landings, the Operations
Officer may direct that the red lanterns be left off or that the color of
the globes or lights be changed.
Light construction and installation must comply with FAA AC 70/7460-1.

Lights must be operational during periods of reduced visibility, darkness,
and as directed by the Contracting Officer.
No separate payments will be made for lighting and protection necessitated

by the safety provisions.
3.1.5 Excavation
Open only those trenches for which material is on hand and ready for
placing therein. As soon as possible after the material has been placed
and work approved, backfill and compact the trenches as specified.
Maintain landing areas, landings strips, and landing pads at all times
free from hazards, holes, material piles, or projecting shoulders that
might damage tires or landing gear. Paved surfaces must be kept clean at
all times and free from small stones or other objects which could cause
damage to propellers, craft, and personnel.
3.1.6 Contractor Safety Precautions
The Contractor is advised that aircraft operations will produce extremely
high noise levels and will induce vibrations in pavements, structures, and
equipment in the vicinity, and may result in high velocity flying debris
in the area. The Contractor is responsible for providing all necessary
protective eye and ear gear and other safety devices for his personnel,
for insuring protection of his equipment, and for scheduling the work to
eliminate hazards to his personnel and equipment and to prevent damage to
work performed by him.
Boundary areas for hazardous work locations and restrictions are defined
in FAA AC 150/5300-13. Construction activity within the limits of the
boundary areas without approval of the Contracting Officer is prohibited.
Provide a minimum of 2 aviation red or high intensity white obstruction

lights on temporary structures (including cranes) over 100 feet above
ground level.
3.1.7 Radio Contact
Provide necessary battery powered portable radios, including one radio for
the tower. During work within the landing area, have an operator (who
speaks fluent English) available for radio contact with the tower at all
times. Radio frequency must be approved by the tower.
SECTION 01 35 26
GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

02/12
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)
ASSE/SAFE A10.32 (2012) Fall Protection
ASSE/SAFE A10.34 (2001; R 2012) Protection of the Public on

or Adjacent to Construction Sites
ASSE/SAFE Z359.1 (2007) Safety Requirements for Personal

Fall Arrest Systems, Subsystems and
Components
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B30.22 (2010) Articulating Boom Cranes
ASME B30.3 (2012) Tower Cranes
ASME B30.5 (2014) Mobile and Locomotive Cranes
ASME B30.8 (2010) Floating Cranes and Floating

Derricks
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 10 (2013) Standard for Portable Fire

Extinguishers
NFPA 241 (2013) Standard for Safeguarding

Construction,Alteration, and Demolition
Operations
NFPA 51B (2014) Standard for Fire Prevention During

Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work
NFPA 70 (2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 1 2013; AMD 2

2013; Errata 2 2013; AMD 3 2014; Errata
3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National
Electrical Code
NFPA 70E (2015; ERTA 1 2015) Standard for

Electrical Safety in the Workplace
EM 385-1-1 (2014) Safety and Health Requirements
Manual
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
10 CFR 20 Standards for Protection Against Radiation
29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards
29 CFR 1910.146 Permit-required Confined Spaces
29 CFR 1915 Confined and Enclosed Spaces and Other

Dangerous Atmospheres in Shipyard
Employment
29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for

Construction
29 CFR 1926.1400 Cranes & Derricks in Construction
29 CFR 1926.16 Rules of Construction
29 CFR 1926.500 Fall Protection
CPL 2.100 (1995) Application of the Permit-Required

Confined Spaces (PRCS) Standards, 29 CFR
1910.146
U.S. NAVAL FACILITIES ENGINEERING COMMAND (NAVFAC)
NAVFAC P-307 (2009; Change 1 Mar 2011; Change 2 Aug

2011)Management of Weight Handling
Equipment
1.2 DEFINITIONS
a. Competent Person for Fall Protection. A person who is capable of

identifying hazardous or dangerous conditions in the personal fall
arrest system or any component thereof, as well as their application
and use with related equipment, and has the authority to take prompt
corrective measures to eliminate the hazards of falling.
b. High Visibility Accident. Any mishap which may generate publicity or

high visibility.
c. Medical Treatment. Treatment administered by a physician or by

registered professional personnel under the standing orders of a
physician. Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment
even through provided by a physician or registered personnel.
d. Operating Envelope. The area surrounding any crane. Inside this

"envelope" is the crane, the operator, riggers and crane walkers,
rigging gear between the hook and the load, the load and the crane's
supporting structure (ground, rail, etc.).
e. Recordable Injuries or Illnesses. Any work-related injury or illness

that results in:
(1) Death, regardless of the time between the injury and death, or the
length of the illness;
(2) Days away from work (any time lost after day of injury/illness
onset);
(3) Restricted work;
(4) Transfer to another job;
(5) Medical treatment beyond first aid;
(6) Loss of consciousness; or
(7) A significant injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or other

licensed health care professional, even if it did not result in
(1) through (6) above.
f. "USACE" property and equipment specified in USACE EM 385-1-1 should be

interpreted as Government property and equipment.
g. Weight Handling Equipment (WHE) Accident. A WHE accident occurs when

any one or more of the eight elements in the operating envelope fails
to perform correctly during operation, including operation during
maintenance or testing resulting in personnel injury or death;
material or equipment damage; dropped load; derailment; two-blocking;
overload; or collision, including unplanned contact between the load,
crane, or other objects. A dropped load, derailment, two-blocking,
overload and collision are considered accidents even though no
material damage or injury occurs. A component failure (e.g., motor
burnout, gear tooth failure, bearing failure) is not considered an
accident solely due to material or equipment damage unless the
component failure results in damage to other components (e.g., dropped
boom, dropped load, roll over, etc.) Any mishap meeting the criteria
described above shall be documented in both the Contractor Significant
Incident Report (CSIR) and using the NAVFAC prescribed Navy Crane
Center (NCC) form submitted within five days both as provided by the
Contracting Officer. Comply with additional requirements and
procedures for accidents in accordance with NAVFAC P-307, Section 12.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

Accident Prevention Plan (APP); G
Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA); G
Crane Critical Lift Plan; G
Proof of qualification for Crane Operators; G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fall Protection System; G
Provide detail drawings showing "Permanent Fall Protection

System" roof installation; including structural framing supports
at all connection support to cabling system. Also provide system
as a whole operating system including restraint systems. Conform
to all standards as stated in this specification.
"Permanent Fall Protection System" structural framing shall be

designed and detailed by a Professional Engineer that the
contractor shall provide. Submit calculations and shop drawings to
substantiate compliance with design requirements. The Professional
Engineer shall seal the calculations and shop drawings.
PROJECT SAFETY PERFORMANCE SIGNBOARD
SD-06 Test Reports
Notifications and Reports
Submit reports as their incidence occurs, in accordance with the

requirements of the paragraph, "Notifications and Reports."
Accident Reports; G
Crane Reports
SD-07 Certificates
Confined Space Entry Permit
Hot work permit
License Certificates
Contractor Safety Self-Evaluation Checklist; G
Certificate of Compliance (Crane)
Submit one copy of each permit/certificate attached to each

Daily Quality Control Report.
1.4 CONTRACTOR SAFETY SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST
Contracting Officer will provide a "Contractor Safety Self-Evaluation

checklist" to the Contractor at the pre-construction conference. Complete
the checklist monthly and submit with each request for payment voucher.
An acceptable score of 90 or greater is required. Failure to submit the
completed safety self-evaluation checklist or achieve a score of at least
90 may result in retention of up to 10 percent of the voucher.
Additionally, provide a Monthly Exposure Report and attach to the monthly
billing request. This report is a compilation of employee-hours worked
each month for all site workers, both prime and subcontractor. Failure to
submit the report may result in retention of up to 10 percent of the
voucher. The Contracting Officer will submit a copy of the Contractor
Safety Self-Evaluation and Monthly Exposure Report to the local safety and
occupational health office.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
In addition to the detailed requirements included in the provisions of
this contract, comply with the most recent edition of USACE EM 385-1-1,
and the following federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, criteria,
rules and regulations. Submit matters of interpretation of standards to
the appropriate administrative agency for resolution before starting
work. Where the requirements of this specification, applicable laws,
criteria, ordinances, regulations, and referenced documents vary, the most
stringent requirements govern.
1.6 SITE QUALIFICATIONS, DUTIES AND MEETINGS
1.6.1 Personnel Qualifications
1.6.1.1 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)
The SSHO must meet the requirements of EM 385-1-1 section 1 and ensure
that the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.16 are met for the project. Provide
a Safety oversight team that includes a minimum of one (1) person at each
project site to function as the Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO).
The SSHO or an equally-qualified Designated Representative/alternate shall
be at the work site at all times to implement and administer the
Contractor's safety program and government-accepted Accident Prevention
Plan. The SSHO's training, experience, and qualifications shall be as
required by EM 385-1-1 paragraph 01.A.17, entitled SITE SAFETY AND HEALTH
OFFICER (SSHO), and all associated sub-paragraphs.
A Competent Person shall be provided for all of the hazards identified in

the Contractor's Safety and Health Program in accordance with the accepted
Accident Prevention Plan, and shall be on-site at all times when the work
that presents the hazards associated with their professional expertise is
being performed. Provide the credentials of the Competent Persons(s) to
the the Contracting Officer for acceptance in consultation with the Safety
Office.
1.6.1.1.1 Construction Safety Hazard Awareness Training
Construction Safety Hazard Awareness Training The training requirements

for the Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO) must include the successful
completion of a 40 hour (minimum) course focusing on the EM 385-1-1.
Provide a certificate of course completion from a NAVFAC approved vendor
with submission of the APP."
There are currently three approved vendors. The vendors can be found on
the NAVFAC SW public website under the safety tab.
1.6.1.1.2 Contractor Quality Control (QC) Person:
The Contractor Quality Control Person cannot be the SSHO on this project,
even though the QC has safety inspection responsibilities as part of the
QC duties.
1.6.1.2 Competent Person for Confined Space Entry
Provide a "Competent Person" to supervise the entry into each confined

space. That individual must meet the requirements and definition of
Competent Person as contained in EM 385-1-1.
1.6.1.3 Crane Operators
Meet the crane operators requirements in USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 16 and

Appendix I. In addition, for mobile cranes with Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) rated capacitates of 50,000 pounds or greater,

designate crane operators as qualified by a source that qualifies crane
operators (i.e., union, a government agency, or an organization that tests
and qualifies crane operators). Provide proof of current qualification.
In addition, the Contractor shall comply with Contractor Operated Crane
Requirements included in the latest revision of document NAVFAC P-307
Section 1.7.2 "Contractor Operated Cranes," and Appendix P, Figure P-1 and
with 29 CFR 1926, Subpart CC.
1.6.2 Personnel Duties
1.6.2.1 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)
The SSHO shall:
a. Conduct daily safety and health inspections and maintain a written log
which includes area/operation inspected, date of inspection,
identified hazards, recommended corrective actions, estimated and
actual dates of corrections. Attach safety inspection logs to the
Contractors' daily quality control report.
b. Conduct mishap investigations and complete required reports. Maintain

the OSHA Form 300 and Daily Production reports for prime and
sub-contractors.
c. Maintain applicable safety reference material on the job site.
d. Attend the pre-construction conference, pre-work meetings including

preparatory inspection meeting, and periodic in-progress meetings.
e. Implement and enforce accepted APPS and AHAs.
f. Maintain a safety and health deficiency tracking system that monitors

outstanding deficiencies until resolution. Post a list of unresolved
safety and health deficiencies on the safety bulletin board.
g. Ensure sub-contractor compliance with safety and health requirements.
h. Maintain a list of hazardous chemicals on site and their material

safety data sheets.
Failure to perform the above duties will result in dismissal of the

superintendent, QC Manager, and/or SSHO, and a project work stoppage.
The project work stoppage will remain in effect pending approval of a
suitable replacement.
1.6.3 Meetings
1.6.3.1 Preconstruction Conference
a. Contractor representatives who have a responsibility or significant

role in accident prevention on the project shall attend the
preconstruction conference. This includes the project superintendent,
site safety and health officer, quality control supervisor, or any
other assigned safety and health professionals who participated in the
development of the APP (including the Activity Hazard Analyses (AHAs)
and special plans, program and procedures associated with it).
b. Discuss the details of the submitted APP to include incorporated
plans, programs, procedures and a listing of anticipated AHAs that

will be developed and implemented during the performance of the
contract. This list of proposed AHAs will be reviewed at the
conference and an agreement will be reached between the Contractor and
the Contracting Officer's representative as to which phases will
require an analysis. In addition, establish a schedule for the
preparation, submittal, review, and acceptance of AHAs to preclude
project delays.
c. Deficiencies in the submitted APP will be brought to the attention of

the Contractor at the preconstruction conference, and the Contractor
shall revise the plan to correct deficiencies and re-submit it for
acceptance. Do not begin work until there is an accepted APP.
1.6.3.2 Safety Meetings
Conduct and document meetings as required by EM 385-1-1. Attach minutes

showing contract title, signatures of attendees and a list of topics
discussed to the Contractors' daily quality control report.
1.7 ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP)
Use a qualified person to prepare the written site-specific APP. Prepare

the APP in accordance with the format and requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1
and as supplemented herein. Cover all paragraph and subparagraph elements
in USACE EM 385-1-1, Appendix A, "Minimum Basic Outline for Accident
Prevention Plan". Specific requirements for some of the APP elements are
described below. The APP shall be job-specific and address any unusual or
unique aspects of the project or activity for which it is written. The
APP shall interface with the Contractor's overall safety and health
program. Include any portions of the Contractor's overall safety and
health program referenced in the APP in the applicable APP element and
made site-specific. The Government considers the Prime Contractor to be
the "controlling authority" for all work site safety and health of the
subcontractors. Contractors are responsible for informing their
subcontractors of the safety provisions under the terms of the contract
and the penalties for noncompliance, coordinating the work to prevent one
craft from interfering with or creating hazardous working conditions for
other crafts, and inspecting subcontractor operations to ensure that
accident prevention responsibilities are being carried out. The APP shall
be signed by the person and firm (senior person) preparing the APP, the
Contractor, the on-site superintendent, the designated site safety and
health officer, the Contractor Quality control Manager, and any designated
CSP or CIH.
Submit the APP to the Contracting Officer 15 calendar days prior to the
date of the preconstruction conference for acceptance. Work cannot
proceed without an accepted APP.
Once accepted by the Contracting Officer, the APP and attachments will be
enforced as part of the contract. Disregarding the provisions of this
contract or the accepted APP will be cause for stopping of work, at the
discretion of the Contracting Officer, until the matter has been rectified.
Once work begins, changes to the accepted APP shall be made with the
knowledge and concurrence of the Contracting Officer, project
superintendent, SSHO and quality control manager. Should any severe
hazard exposure, i.e. imminent danger, become evident, stop work in the
area, secure the area, and develop a plan to remove the exposure and
control the hazard. Notify the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of

discovery. Eliminate/remove the hazard. In the interim, take all
necessary action to restore and maintain safe working conditions in order
to safeguard onsite personnel, visitors, the public (as defined by
ASSE/SAFE A10.34,) and the environment.
Copies of the accepted plan will be maintained at the Contracting Officer's

office and at the job site.
Continuously review and ammend the APP, as necessary, throughout the life
of the contract. Incorporate unusual or high-hazard activities not
identified in the original APP as they are discovered.
1.7.1 EM 385-1-1 Contents
In addition to the requirements outlined in Appendix A of USACE EM 385-1-1,

the following is required:
a. Names and qualifications (resumes including education, training,

experience and certifications) of all site safety and health personnel
designated to perform work on this project to include the designated
site safety and health officer and other competent and qualified
personnel to be used such as CSPs, CIHs, STSs, CHSTs. Specify the
duties of each position.
b. Qualifications of competent and of qualified persons. As a minimum,

designate and submit qualifications of competent persons for each of
the following major areas: excavation; scaffolding; fall protection;
hazardous energy; confined space; health hazard recognition,
evaluation and control of chemical, physical and biological agents;
personal protective equipment and clothing to include selection, use
and maintenance.
c. Confined Space Entry Plan. Develop a confined and/or enclosed space

entry plan in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1, applicable OSHA
standards 29 CFR 1910, 29 CFR 1915, and 29 CFR 1926, OSHA Directive
CPL 2.100, and any other federal, state and local regulatory
requirements identified in this contract. Identify the qualified
person's name and qualifications, training, and experience. Delineate
the qualified person's authority to direct work stoppage in the event
of hazardous conditions. Include procedure for rescue by contractor
personnel and the coordination with emergency responders. (If there
is no confined space work, include a statement that no confined space
work exists and none will be created.)
d. Crane Critical Lift Plan.

Prepare and sign weight handling critical lift plans for lifts over 75
percent of the capacity of the crane or hoist (or lifts over 50 percent of
the capacity of a barge mounted mobile crane's hoists) at any radius of
lift; lifts involving more than one crane or hoist; lifts of personnel;
and lifts involving non-routine rigging or operation, sensitive equipment,
or unusual safety risks. Submit 15 calendar days prior to on-site work and
include the requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1, paragraph 16.H. and the
following:
(1) For lifts of personnel, demonstrate compliance with the requirements

of 29 CFR 1926.1400.
e. Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Program Documentation. The

program documentation shall be site specific and address all fall
hazards in the work place and during different phases of

construction. Address how to protect and prevent workers from falling
to lower levels when they are exposed to fall hazards above 6 feet. A
qualified person for fall protection shall prepare and sign the
program documentation. Include fall protection and prevention
systems, equipment and methods employed for every phase of work,
responsibilities, assisted rescue, self-rescue and evacuation
procedures, training requirements, and monitoring methods. Revise the
Fall Protection and Prevention Program documentation every six months
for lengthy projects, reflecting any changes during the course of
construction due to changes in personnel, equipment, systems or work
habits. Keep and maintain the accepted Fall Protection and Prevention
Program documentation at the job site for the duration of the
project. Include the Fall Protection and Prevention Program
documentation in the Accident Prevention Plan (APP).
The FP&P Plan shall include a Rescue and Evacuation Plan in accordance
with USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 21.M. The plan shall include a detailed
discussion of the following: methods of rescue; methods of
self-rescue; equipment used; training requirement; specialized
training for the rescuers; procedures for requesting rescue and
medical assistance; and transportation routes to a medical facility.
Include the Rescue and Evacuation Plan in the Fall Protection and
Prevention (FP&P) Plan, and as part of the Accident Prevention Plan
(APP).
f. Lead Compliance Plan. The safety and health aspects of lead work,
prepared in accordance with Section 02 82 33.13 20 REMOVAL/CONTROL AND
DISPOSAL OF PAINT WITH LEAD.
g. Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan. The safety and health aspects of

asbestos work, prepared in accordance with Section 02 82 14.00 10
ASBESTOS HAZARD CONTROL ACTIVITIES.
h. Site Demolition Plan. The safety and health aspects prepared in

accordance with Section 02 41 00 DEMOLITION and referenced sources.
Include engineering survey as applicable.
i. Excavation Plan. The safety and health aspects prepared in accordance

with Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.
1.8 ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSIS (AHA)
The Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) format shall be in accordance with

USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 1. Submit the AHA for review at least 15
calendar days prior to the start of each phase. Format subsequent AHAs as
amendments to the APP. The analysis should be used during daily
inspections to ensure the implementation and effectiveness of the
activity's safety and health controls.
The AHA list will be reviewed periodically (at least monthly) at the
Contractor supervisory safety meeting and updated as necessary when
procedures, scheduling, or hazards change.
Develop the activity hazard analyses using the project schedule as the
basis for the activities performed. Any activities listed on the project
schedule will require an AHA. The AHAs will be developed by the
contractor, supplier or subcontractor and provided to the prime contractor
for submittal to the Contracting Officer.
1.9 DISPLAY OF SAFETY INFORMATION
Within one calendar day after commencement of work, erect a safety

bulletin board at the job site. Where size, duration, or logistics of
project do not facilitate a bulletin board, an alternative method,
acceptable to the Contracting Officer, that is accessible and includes all
mandatory information for employee and visitor review, shall be deemed as
meeting the requirement for a bulletin board. Include and maintain
information on safety bulletin board as required by EM 385-1-1, section
01.A.06. Additional items required to be posted include:
a. Confined space entry permit.
b. Hot work permit.
1.10 SITE SAFETY REFERENCE MATERIALS
Maintain safety-related references applicable to the project, including

those listed in the article "References." Maintain applicable equipment
manufacturer's manuals.
1.11 EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT
Contractors will arrange for their own emergency medical treatment.

Government has no responsibility to provide emergency medical treatment.
1.12 NOTIFICATIONS and REPORTS
1.12.1 Accident Notification
Notify the Contracting Officer as soon as practical, but no more than four
hours after any accident meeting the definition of Recordable Injuries or
Illnesses or High Visibility Accidents, property damage equal to or
greater than $2,000, or any weight handling equipment accident. Within
notification include contractor name; contract title; type of contract;
name of activity, installation or location where accident occurred; date
and time of accident; names of personnel injured; extent of property
damage, if any; extent of injury, if known, and brief description of
accident (to include type of construction equipment used, PPE used,
etc.). Preserve the conditions and evidence on the accident site until
the Government investigation team arrives on-site and Government
investigation is conducted.
1.12.2 Accident Reports
a. Conduct an accident investigation for recordable injuries and

illnesses, for Medical Treatment defined in paragraph DEFINITIONS,
property damage accidents resulting in at least $20,000 in damages,
and near misses as defined in EM 385-1-1, to establish the root
cause(s) of the accident. Complete the applicable NAVFAC Contractor
Incident Reporting System (CIRS), and electronically submit via the
NAVFAC Enterprise Safety Applications Management System (ESAMS. The
Contracting Officer will provide copies of any required or special
forms.
b. Near Misses: Complete the applicable documentation in NAVFAC

Contractor Incident Reporting System (CIRS), and electronically submit
via the NAVFAC Enterprise Safety Applications Management System
(ESAMS).
c. Conduct an accident investigation for any weight handling equipment

accident (including rigging gear accidents) to establish the root
cause(s) of the accident, complete the WHE Accident Report (Crane and
Rigging Gear) form and provide the report to the Contracting Officer
within 30 calendar days of the accident. Do not proceed with crane
operations until cause is determined and corrective actions have been
implemented to the satisfaction of the contracting officer. The
Contracting Officer will provide a blank copy of the accident report
form.
1.12.3 Crane Reports
Submit crane inspection reports required in accordance with USACE

EM 385-1-1, Appendix I and as specified herein with Daily Reports of
Inspections.
1.12.4 Certificate of Compliance
Provide a Certificate of Compliance for each crane entering an activity

under this contract (see Contracting Officer for a blank certificate).
State within the certificate that the crane and rigging gear meet
applicable OSHA regulations (with the Contractor citing which OSHA
regulations are applicable, e.g., cranes used in construction, demolition,
or maintenance comply with 29 CFR 1926 and USACE EM 385-1-1 Section 16 and
Appendix I. Certify on the Certificate of Compliance that the crane
operator(s) is qualified and trained in the operation of the crane to be
used. Also certify that all of its crane operators working on the DOD
activity have been trained in the proper use of all safety devices (e.g.,
anti-two block devices). Post certifications on the crane.
1.13 HOT WORK
Submit and obtain a written permit prior to performing "Hot Work"

(welding, cutting, etc.) or operating other flame-producing/spark
producing devices, from the STATION Fire Division. A permit is required
from the Explosives Safety Office for work in and around where explosives
are processed, stored, or handled. CONTRACTORS ARE REQUIRED TO MEET ALL
CRITERIA BEFORE A PERMIT IS ISSUED. Provide at least two (2) twenty (20)
pound 4A:20 BC rated extinguishers for normal "Hot Work". All
extinguishers shall be current inspection tagged, approved safety pin and
tamper resistant seal. It is also mandatory to have a designated FIRE
WATCH for any "Hot Work" done at this activity. The Fire Watch shall be
trained in accordance with NFPA 51B and remain on-site for a minimum of 30
minutes after completion of the task or as specified on the hot work
permit.
When starting work in the facility, require personnel to familiarize

themselves with the location of the nearest fire alarm boxes and place in
memory the emergency STATION Fire Division phone number. ANY FIRE, NO
MATTER HOW SMALL, SHALL BE REPORTED TO THE RESPONSIBLE STATION FIRE
DIVISION IMMEDIATELY.
1.14 RADIATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
License Certificates for radiation materials and equipment shall be

submitted to the Contracting Officer and Radiation Safety Office (RSO),
and Contracting Oversight Technician (COT) for all specialized and
licensed material and equipment that could cause fatal harm to

construction personnel or to the construction project.
Workers shall be protected from radiation exposure in accordance with

10 CFR 20. Standards for Protection Against Radiation
Loss of radioactive material shall be reported immediately to the

Actual exposure of the radiographic film or unshielding the source shall

not be initiated until after 5 p.m. on weekdays.
In instances where radiography is scheduled near or adjacent to buildings

or areas having limited access or one-way doors, no assumptions shall be
made as to building occupancy. Where necessary, the Contracting Officer
will direct the Contractor to conduct an actual building entry, search,
and alert. Where removal of personnel from such a building cannot be
accomplished and it is otherwise safe to proceed with the radiography, a
fully instructed employee shall be positioned inside such building or area
to prevent exiting while external radiographic operations are in process.
Transportation of Regulated Amounts of Radioactive Material will comply
with 49 CFR, Subchapter C, Hazardous Material Regulations. Local Fire
authorities and the site Radiation Safety officer (RSO) shall be notified
of any Radioactive Material use.
Transmitter Requirements: The base policy concerning the use of

transmitters such as radios, cell phones, etc., must be adhered to by all
contractor personnel. They must also obey Emissions control (EMCON)
restrictions.
1.15 FACILITY OCCUPANCY CLOSURE
Streets, walks, and other facilities occupied and used by the Government
shall not be closed or obstructed without written permission from the
1.16 SEVERE STORM PLAN
In the event of a severe storm warning, the Contractor must:
a. Secure outside equipment and materials and place materials that could
be damaged in protected areas.
b. Check surrounding area, including roof, for loose material, equipment,

debris, and other objects that could be blown away or against existing
facilities.
c. Ensure that temporary erosion controls are adequate.
1.17 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS.
Contractors entering and working in confined spaces while performing

general industry work are required to follow the requirements of OSHA
29 CFR 1926 and comply with the requirements in Section 34 of EM 385-1-1,
OSHA 29 CFR 1910, and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.146.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONFINED SPACE SIGNAGE
Provide permanent signs integral to or securely attached to access covers

for new permit-required confined spaces. Signs wording:
"DANGER--PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE - DO NOT ENTER -" in bold letters
a minimum of one inch in height and constructed to be clearly legible with
all paint removed. The signal word "DANGER" shall be red and readable from
5 feet.
2.2 FALL PROTECTION SYSTEM
Provide "Permanent Fall Protection System" at roof. Location as indicated.

Provide structural framing in roof structure, anchorage, cabling, and
restraint system as required in accordance with ASSE/SAFE Z359.1,
ANSI Z359.1, ANSI Z359.2, ANSI Z359.3, ANSI Z359.4, ANSI A1264.1,
EM 385-1-1, and standards as stated in this specification. Store restraint
system equipment in building location as directed by the Contracting
Officer.
2.3 PROJECT SAFETY PERFORMANCE SIGNBOARD
Prior to initiating any work on site, provide one project safety

performance sign. Construct the sign in accordance with project sign
detail attached at the end of this section. Maintain and update sign
throughout the life of the project. Upon completion of the project,
remove the sign from the site.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION AND OTHER WORK
Comply with USACE EM 385-1-1, NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, NFPA 241, the APP, the
AHA, Federal and State OSHA regulations, and other related submittals and
activity fire and safety regulations. The most stringent standard
prevails.
PPE is governed in all areas by the nature of the work the employee is
performing. Use personal hearing protection at all times in designated
noise hazardous areas or when performing noise hazardous tasks. Safety
glasses must be carried/available on each person.
Mandatory PPE includes:
a. Hard Hat
b. Appropriate Safety Shoes
c. Reflective Vests
3.1.1 Hazardous Material Use
Each hazardous material must receive approval from the Contracting Office
or their designated representative prior to being brought onto the job
site or prior to any other use in connection with this contract. Allow a
minimum of 10 working days for processing of the request for use of a
hazardous material.
3.1.2 Hazardous Material Exclusions
Notwithstanding any other hazardous material used in this contract,

radioactive materials or instruments capable of producing
ionizing/non-ionizing radiation (with the exception of radioactive
material and devices used in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 such as
nuclear density meters for compaction testing and laboratory equipment
with radioactive sources) as well as materials which contain asbestos,
mercury or polychlorinated biphenyls, di-isocynates, lead-based paint are
prohibited. The Contracting Officer, upon written request by the
Contractor, may consider exceptions to the use of any of the above
excluded materials. Low mercury lamps used within fluorescent lighting
fixtures are allowed as an exception without further Contracting Officer
approval. Notify the Radiation Safety Officer (RSO) prior to excepted
items of radioactive material and devices being brought on base.
3.1.3 Unforeseen Hazardous Material
The design should have identified materials such as PCB, lead paint, and
friable and non-friable asbestos and other OSHA regulated chemicals (i.e.
29 CFR Part 1910.1000). If additional material, not indicated, that may
be hazardous to human health upon disturbance during construction
operations is encountered, stop that portion of work and notify the
Contracting Officer immediately. Within 14 calendar days the Government
will determine if the material is hazardous. If material is not hazardous
or poses no danger, the Government will direct the Contractor to proceed
without change. If material is hazardous and handling of the material is
necessary to accomplish the work, the Government will issue a modification
pursuant to "FAR 52.243-4, Changes" and "FAR 52.236-2, Differing Site
Conditions."
3.2 PRE-OUTAGE COORDINATION MEETING
Apply for utility outages at least 14 days in advance. As a minimum, the

request should include the location of the outage, utilities being
affected, duration of outage and any necessary sketches. Special
requirements for electrical outage requests are contained elsewhere in
this specification section. Once approved, and prior to beginning work on
the utility system requiring shut down, attend a pre-outage coordination
meeting with the Contracting Officer, Base Facilities Representative,
Contractor's Installation Representative, and Public Utilities
Representative to review the scope of work and the lock-out/tag-out
procedures for worker protection. No work will be performed on energized
electrical circuits unless proof is provided that no other means exist.
3.3 CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY (LOCKOUT/TAGOUT)
Ensure that each employee is familiar with and complies with these
procedures and USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 12, Control of Hazardous Energy.
3.4 FALL HAZARD PROTECTION AND PREVENTION PROGRAM
Establish a fall protection and prevention program, for the protection of

all employees exposed to fall hazards. Within the program include company
policy, identify responsibilities, education and training requirements,
fall hazard identification, prevention and control measures, inspection,
storage, care and maintenance of fall protection equipment and rescue and
evacuation procedures in accordance with ASSE/SAFE Z359.1.
3.4.1 Training
Institute a fall protection training program. As part of the Fall Hazard

Protection and Prevention Program, provide training for each employee who
might be exposed to fall hazards. Provide training by a competent person
for fall protection in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 21.B.
3.4.2 Fall Protection Equipment and Systems
Enforce use of the fall protection equipment and systems designated for
each specific work activity in the Fall Protection and Prevention Plan
and/or AHA at all times when an employee is exposed to a fall hazard.
Protect employees from fall hazards as specified in EM 385-1-1, Section
21. In addition to the required fall protection systems, safety skiff,
personal floatation devices, life rings etc., are required when working
above or next to water in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1, Paragraphs
21.N through 21.N.04. Personal fall arrest systems are required when
working from an articulating or extendible boom, swing stages, or
suspended platform. In addition, personal fall arrest systems are
required when operating other equipment such as scissor lifts if the work
platform is capable of being positioned outside the wheelbase. The need
for tying-off in such equipment is to prevent ejection of the employee
from the equipment during raising, lowering, or travel. Fall protection
must comply with 29 CFR 1926.500, Subpart M, USACE EM 385-1-1 and
ASSE/SAFE A10.32.
3.4.2.1 Personal Fall Arrest Equipment
Personal fall arrest equipment, systems, subsystems, and components shall

meet ASSE/SAFE Z359.1. Only a full-body harness with a shock-absorbing
lanyard or self-retracting lanyard is an acceptable personal fall arrest
body support device. Body belts may only be used as a positioning device
system (for uses such as steel reinforcing assembly and in addition to an
approved fall arrest system). Harnesses shall have a fall arrest
attachment affixed to the body support (usually a Dorsal D-ring) and
specifically designated for attachment to the rest of the system. Only
locking snap hooks and carabiners shall be used. Webbing, straps, and
ropes shall be made of synthetic fiber. The maximum free fall distance
when using fall arrest equipment shall not exceed 6 feet. The total fall
distance and any swinging of the worker (pendulum-like motion) that can
occur during a fall shall always be taken into consideration when
attaching a person to a fall arrest system.
3.4.3 Fall Protection for Roofing Work
Implement fall protection controls based on the type of roof being

constructed and work being performed. Evaluate the roof area to be
accessed for its structural integrity including weight-bearing
capabilities for the projected loading.
a. Low Sloped Roofs:
(1) For work within 6 feet of an edge, on low-slope roofs, protect

personnel from falling by use of personal fall arrest systems,
guardrails, or safety nets. A safety monitoring system is not
adequate fall protection and is not authorized.
(2) For work greater than 6 feet from an edge, erect and install
warning lines in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.500 and USACE
EM 385-1-1.
b. Steep-Sloped Roofs: Work on steep-sloped roofs requires a personal

fall arrest system, guardrails with toe-boards, or safety nets. This
requirement also includes residential or housing type construction.
3.4.4 Horizontal Lifelines
Design, install, certify and use under the supervision of a qualified

person horizontal lifelines for fall protection as part of a complete fall
arrest system which maintains a safety factor of 2 (29 CFR 1926.500).
3.4.5 Guardrails and Safety Nets
Design, install and use guardrails and safety nets in accordance with
EM 385-1-1 and 29 CFR 1926 Subpart M.
3.4.6 Rescue and Evacuation Procedures
When personal fall arrest systems are used, ensure that the mishap victim
can self-rescue or can be rescued promptly should a fall occur. Prepare a
Rescue and Evacuation Plan and include a detailed discussion of the
following: methods of rescue; methods of self-rescue; equipment used;
training requirement; specialized training for the rescuers; procedures
for requesting rescue and medical assistance; and transportation routes to
a medical facility. Include the Rescue and Evacuation Plan within the
Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of work, in the Fall
Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan, and the Accident Prevention Plan
(APP).
3.5 SCAFFOLDING
Provide employees with a safe means of access to the work area on the
scaffold. Climbing of any scaffold braces or supports not specifically
designed for access is prohibited. Access scaffold platforms greater than
20 feet maximum in height by use of a scaffold stair system. Do not use
vertical ladders commonly provided by scaffold system manufacturers for
accessing scaffold platforms greater than 20 feet maximum in height. The
use of an adequate gate is required. Ensure that employees are qualified
to perform scaffold erection and dismantling. Do not use scaffold without
the capability of supporting at least four times the maximum intended load
or without appropriate fall protection as delineated in the accepted fall
protection and prevention plan. Stationary scaffolds must be attached to
structural building components to safeguard against tipping forward or
backward. Give special care to ensure scaffold systems are not
overloaded. Side brackets used to extend scaffold platforms on
self-supported scaffold systems for the storage of material is
prohibited. The first tie-in shall be at the height equal to 4 times the
width of the smallest dimension of the scaffold base. Place work platforms
on mud sills. Scaffold or work platform erectors shall have fall
protection during the erection and dismantling of scaffolding or work
platforms that are more than six feet. Delineate fall protection
requirements when working above six feet or above dangerous operations in
the Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan and Activity Hazard
Analysis (AHA) for the phase of work.
3.6 EQUIPMENT
3.6.1 Material Handling Equipment
a. Material handling equipment such as forklifts shall not be modified

with work platform attachments for supporting employees unless
specifically delineated in the manufacturer's printed operating
instructions.
b. The use of hooks on equipment for lifting of material must be in

accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Additionally,
when material handling equipment is used as a crane it must meet
NAVFAC P-307 requirements in Sections 1.7.2, "Contractor Operated
Cranes," and 12, "Investigation and Reporting of Crane and Rigging
Gear Accidents."
c. Operators of forklifts or power industrial trucks shall be licensed in

accordance with OSHA.
3.6.2 Weight Handling Equipment
a. Equip cranes and derricks as specified in EM 385-1-1, section 16.
b. Notify the Contracting Officer 15 days in advance of any cranes

entering the activity so that necessary quality assurance spot checks
can be coordinated. Contractor's operator shall remain with the crane
during the spot check.
c. Comply with the crane manufacturer's specifications and limitations

for erection and operation of cranes and hoists used in support of the
work. Perform erection under the supervision of a designated person
(as defined in ASME B30.5). Perform all testing in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommended procedures.
d. Comply with ASME B30.5 for mobile and locomotive cranes, ASME B30.22
for articulating boom cranes, ASME B30.3 for construction tower
cranes, and ASME B30.8 for floating cranes and floating derricks.
e. Under no circumstance shall a Contractor make a lift at or above 90

percent of the cranes rated capacity in any configuration.
f. When operating in the vicinity of overhead transmission lines,

operators and riggers shall be alert to this special hazard and follow
the requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1 Section 11, NAVFAC P-307 Figure
10-3 and ASME B30.5 or ASME B30.22 as applicable.
g. Do not crane suspended personnel work platforms (baskets) unless the

Contractor proves that using any other access to the work location
would provide a greater hazard to the workers or is impossible. Do
not lift personnel with a line hoist or friction crane.
h. Inspect, maintain, and recharge portable fire extinguishers as

specified in NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.
i. All employees must keep clear of loads about to be lifted and of

suspended loads.
j. Use cribbing when performing lifts on outriggers.
k. The crane hook/block must be positioned directly over the load. Side
loading of the crane is prohibited.
l. A physical barricade must be positioned to prevent personnel from

entering the counterweight swing (tail swing) area of the crane.
m. Certification records which include the date of inspection, signature

of the person performing the inspection, and the serial number or
other identifier of the crane that was inspected shall always be
available for review by Contracting Officer personnel.
n. Written reports listing the load test procedures used along with any
repairs or alterations performed on the crane shall be available for
review by Contracting Officer personnel.
o. Certify that all crane operators have been trained in proper use of
all safety devices (e.g. anti-two block devices).
p. Take steps to ensure that wind speed does not contribute to loss of
control of the load during lifting operations. Prior to conducting
lifting operations set a maximum wind speed at which a crane can be
safely operated based on the equipment being used, the load being
lifted, experience of operators and riggers, and hazards on the work
site. This maximum wind speed determination shall be included as part
of the activity hazard analysis plan for that operation.
q. Comply with NAVFAC P-307 requirements for cranes and other

weight-handling equipment including multipurpose machines (MPMs) used
for suspended load lifts.
3.6.3 Equipment and Mechanized Equipment
a. Proof of qualifications for operator shall be kept on the project site

for review.
b. Manufacture specifications or owner's manual for the equipment shall

be on-site and reviewed for additional safety precautions or
requirements that are sometimes not identified by OSHA or USACE
EM 385-1-1. Incorporate such additional safety precautions or
requirements into the AHAs.
3.6.4 USE OF EXPLOSIVES
Explosives shall not be used or brought to the project site.
3.7 EXCAVATIONS
Soil classification must be performed by a competent person in accordance

with 29 CFR 1926 and EM 385-1-1.
3.7.1 Utility Locations
All underground utilities in the work area must be positively identified

by a third party, independent, private utility locating company in
addition to any station locating service and coordinated with the station
utility department.
3.7.2 Utility Location Verification
Physically verify underground utility locations, including utility depth,

by hand digging using wood or fiberglass handled tools when any adjacent
construction work is expected to come within three feet of the underground
system.
3.7.3 Utilities Within and Under Concrete, Bituminous Asphalt, and Other
Impervious Surfaces
Utilities located within and under concrete slabs or pier structures,

bridges, parking areas, and the like, are extremely difficult to identify.
Whenever contract work involves chipping, saw cutting, or core drilling
through concrete, bituminous asphalt or other impervious surfaces, the
existing utility location must be coordinated with station utility
departments in addition to location and depth verification by a third
party, independent, private locating company. The third party,
independent, private locating company shall locate utility depth by use of
Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR), X-ray, bore scope, or ultrasound prior to
the start of demolition and construction. Outages to isolate utility
systems must be used in circumstances where utilities are unable to be
positively identified. The use of historical drawings does not alleviate
the contractor from meeting this requirement.
3.8 ELECTRICAL
3.9.1 Portable Extension Cords
Size portable extension cords in accordance with manufacturer ratings for

the tool to be powered and protected from damage. Immediately removed
from service all damaged extension cords. Portable extension cords shall
meet the requirements of EM 385-1-1, NFPA 70E, and OSHA electrical
standards.
3.9 WORK IN CONFINED SPACES
Comply with the requirements in Section 34 of USACE EM 385-1-1, OSHA

29 CFR 1910, OSHA 29 CFR 1910.146, OSHA Directive CPL 2.100 and OSHA
29 CFR 1926. Any potential for a hazard in the confined space requires a
permit system to be used.
a. Entry Procedures. Prohibit entry into a confined space by personnel

for any purpose, including hot work, until the qualified person has
conducted appropriate tests to ensure the confined or enclosed space
is safe for the work intended and that all potential hazards are
controlled or eliminated and documented. (See Section 34 of USACE
EM 385-1-1 for entry procedures.) All hazards pertaining to the space
shall be reviewed with each employee during review of the AHA.
b. Forced air ventilation is required for all confined space entry

operations and the minimum air exchange requirements must be
maintained to ensure exposure to any hazardous atmosphere is kept
below its' action level.
c. Sewer wet wells require continuous atmosphere monitoring with audible

alarm for toxic gas detection.
SECTION 01 42 00
SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS

11/14
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
Various publications are referenced in other sections of the

specifications to establish requirements for the work. These references
are identified in each section by document number, date and title. The
document number used in the citation is the number assigned by the
standards producing organization (e.g. ASTM B564 Standard Specification
for Nickel Alloy Forgings). However, when the standards producing
organization has not assigned a number to a document, an identifying
number has been assigned for reference purposes.
1.2 ORDERING INFORMATION
The addresses of the standards publishing organizations whose documents

are referenced in other sections of these specifications are listed below,
and if the source of the publications is different from the address of the
sponsoring organization, that information is also provided. Documents
listed in the specifications with numbers which were not assigned by the
standards producing organization should be ordered from the source by
title rather than by number.
ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ASA)

1305 Walt Whitman Road, Suite 300
Melville, NY 11747-4300
Ph: 516-576-2360
Fax: 631-923-2875
E-mail: asa@aip.org
Internet: http://asa.aip.org
AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)

30 West University Drive
Arlington Heights, IL 60004-1893
Ph: 847-394-0150
Fax: 847-253-0088
E-mail: amca@amca.org
Internet: http://www.amca.org
AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)

2111 Wilson Blvd, Suite 500
Arlington, VA 22201
Ph: 703-524-8800
Fax: 703-562-1942
Internet: http://www.ahrinet.org
ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)

National Headquarters
1525 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, VA 22209
Ph: 703-358-2960
E-Mail: info@aluminum.org
Internet: http://www.aluminum.org
AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)

1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550
Schaumburg, IL 60173-4268
Ph: 847-303-5664
Fax: 847-303-5774
E-mail: customerservice@aamanet.org
Internet: http://www.aamanet.org
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS

(AASHTO)
444 North Capital Street, NW, Suite 249
Washington, DC 20001
Ph: 202-624-5800
Fax: 202-624-5806
E-Mail: info@aashto.org
Internet: http://www.aashto.org
AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA)

2025 M Street, NW, Suite 800
Ph: 202-367-1155
E-mail: info@americanbearings.org
Internet: http://www.americanbearings.org
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL (ACI)

38800 Country Club Drive
Farmington Hills, MI 48331-3439
Ph: 248-848-3700
Fax: 248-848-3701
E-mail: bkstore@concrete.org
Internet: http://www.concrete.org
AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)

1330 Kemper Meadow Drive
Cincinnati, OH 45240
Ph: 513-742-2020 or 513-742-6163
Fax: 513-742-3355
E-mail: mail@acgih.org
Internet: http://www.acgih.org
AMERICAN HARDBOARD ASSOCIATION (AHA)

1210 West Northwest Highway
Palatine, IL 60067
Ph: 847-934-8800
Fax: 847-934-8803
E-mail: aha@hardboard.org
Internet: http://domensino.com/AHA/
AMERICAN INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE ASSOCIATION (AIHA)

3141 Fairview Park Dr, Suite 777
Falls Church, VA 22042
Tel: 703-849-8888
Fax: 703-207-3561
E-mail: infonet@aiha.org
Internet http://www.aiha.org
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)

One East Wacker Drive, Suite 700
Chicago, IL 60601-1802
Ph: 312-670-2400
Fax: 312-670-5403
Bookstore: 800-644-2400
E-mail: aisc@ware-pak.com
Internet: http://www.aisc.org
AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI)

25 Massachusetts Avenue, NW Suite 800
Ph: 202-452-7100
Internet: http://www.steel.org
AMERICAN LUMBER STANDARDS COMMITTEE (ALSC)

P.O. Box 210
Germantown, MD 20875-0210
Ph: 301-972-1700
Fax: 301-540-8004
E-mail: alsc@alsc.org
Internet: http://www.alsc.org
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

1899 L Street, NW,11th Floor
Ph: 202-293-8020
Fax: 202-293-9287
E-mail: storemanager@ansi.org
Internet: http://www.ansi.org/
AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API)

Internet: http://www.api.org
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING (ASNT)

P.O. Box 28518
1711 Arlingate Lane
Columbus, OH 43228-0518
Ph: 800-222-2768; 614-274-6003
Fax: 614-274-6899
E-mail: tjones@asnt.org
Internet: http://www.asnt.org
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)

1801 Alexander Bell Drive
Reston, VA 20191
Ph: 703-295-6300; 800-548-2723
E-mail: member@asce.org
Internet: http://www.asce.org
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
1791 Tullie Circle, NE
Atlanta, GA 30329
Ph: 800-527-4723 or 404-636-8400
Fax: 404-321-5478
E-mail: ashrae@ashrae.org
Internet: http://www.ashrae.org

1800 East Oakton Street
Des Plaines, IL 60018
Ph: 847-699-2929
Internet: http://www.asse.org
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)

18927 Hickory Creek Drive, Suite 220
Mokena, IL 60448
Ph: 708-995-3019
Fax: 708-479-6139
E-mail: staffengineer@asse-plumbing.org
Internet: http://www.asse-plumbing.org
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

6666 West Quincy Avenue
Denver, CO 80235-3098
Ph: 303-794-7711
E-mail: distribution@awwa.org
Internet: http://www.awwa.org
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

13301 NW 47 Ave
Miami, FL 33054
Ph: 888-WELDING, 305-824-1177, 305-826-6192

Fax: 305-826-6195
E-mail: customer.service@awspubs.com
Internet: http://www.aws.org
AMERICAN WOOD COUNCIL (AWC)

222 Catoctin Circle SE, Suite 201
Leesburg, VA 20175
Ph: 800-890-7732
Fax: 412-741-0609
E-mail: publications@awc.org
Internet: http://www.awc.org
AMERICAN WOOD PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (AWPA)

P.O. Box 361784
Birmingham, AL 35236-1784
Ph: 205-733-4077
Fax: 205-733-4075
Internet: http://www.awpa.com
AmericanHort (AH)
2130 Stella Court
Columbus, OH 43215 USA
Ph: 614-487-1117
Fax: 614-487-1216
E-mail: hello@AmericanHort.org
Internet: http://americanhort.org/AmericanHort/AmericanHort
APA - THE ENGINEERED WOOD ASSOCIATION (APA)

7011 South 19th St.
Tacoma, WA 98466-5333
Ph: 253-565-6600
Fax: 253-565-7265
Internet: http://www.apawood.org
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE (AWI)

46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120
Potomac Falls, VA 20165
Ph: 571-323-3636
Fax: 571-323-3630
E-mail: info@awinet.org
Internet: http://www.awinet.org
ARCNET TRADE ASSOCIATION (ATA)

E-mail: info@arcnet.com
Internet: http://www.arcnet.com/index.htm</URL

Two Park Avenue, M/S 10E
New York, NY 10016-5990
Ph: 800-843-2763
Fax: 973-882-1717
E-mail: customercare@asme.org
Internet: http://www.asme.org
ASPHALT INSTITUTE (AI)

2696 Research Park Drive
Lexington, KY 40511-8480
Ph: 859-288-4960
Fax: 859-288-4999
E-mail: info@asphaltinstitute.org
Internet: http://www.asphaltinstitute.org
ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC)

1518 K Street, NW
Ph: 202-737-0202
Fax: 202-638-4833
E-mail: info@aabc.com
Internet: http://www.aabc.com/
ASSOCIATION OF EDISON ILLUMINATING COMPANIES (AEIC)

600 North 18th Street
P.O. Box 2641
Birmingham, AL 35291-0992
Ph: 205-257-3839
E-Mail: aeicdir@bellsouth.net
Internet: http://www.aeic.org

100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700
West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959
Ph: 877-909-2786
Internet: http://www.astm.org
BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)

355 Lexington Avenue, 15th Floor
New York, NY 10017
Ph: 212-297-2122
Fax: 212-370-9047
Internet: http://www.buildershardware.com
CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION (CEC)

Media and Public Communications Office
1516 Ninth Street, MS-29
Sacramento, CA 95814-5512
Ph: 916-654-5106
E-mail: appliances@energy.ca.gov
Internet: http://www.energy.ca.gov/
CARPET AND RUG INSTITUTE (CRI)

P.O. Box 2048
Dalton, GA 30722-2048
Ph: 706-278-3176
Fax: 706-278-8835
Internet: http://www.carpet-rug.com
CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI)

3008 Preston Station Drive
Hixson, TN 37343
Ph: 423-842-2122
Internet: http://www.cispi.org
COMPRESSED GAS ASSOCIATION (CGA)

14501 George Carter Way, Suite 103
Chantilly, VA 20151-1788
Ph: 703-788-2700
Fax: 703-961-1831
E-mail: cga@cganet.com
Internet: http://www.cganet.com
CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI)

933 North Plum Grove Road
Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758
Ph: 847-517-1200
Fax: 847-517-1206
Internet: http://www.crsi.org/
COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)

Internet: http://www.copper.org
CSA GROUP (CSA)

178 Rexdale Blvd.
Toronto, ON, Canada M9W 1R3
Ph: 416-747-4044
Fax: 416-747-2510
E-mail: sales@csagroup.org
Internet: http://www.csagroup.org/us/en/home
ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (ECIA)

2214 Rock Hill Rd., Suite 170
Herndon, VA 20170
Ph: 571-323-0294
Fax: 571-323-0245
E-mail: emikoski@ecaus.org
Internet: http://www.ecianow.org/
ETL TESTING LABORATORIES (ETL)

Intertek
Ph: 888-DIRLIST (888-347-5478)
Internet: http://www.intertek.com/
FM GLOBAL (FM)
270 Central Avenue
P.O. Box 7500
Johnston, RI 02919-4923
Ph: 877-364-6726
Fax: 401-275-3029
E-mail: servicedesk.myrisk@fmglobal.com
Internet: http://www.fmglobal.com
FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH

(FCCCHR)
University of South California
Research Annex 219
3716 South Hope Street
Los Angeles, CA 90089-7700
Ph: 213-740-2032 or 866-545-6340
Fax: 213-740-8399
E-mail: fccchr@usc.edu
Internet: http://www.usc.edu/dept/fccchr
GLASS ASSOCIATION OF NORTH AMERICA (GANA)

800 SW Jackson St., Suite 1500
Topeka, KS 66612-1200
Ph: 785-271-0208
E-mail: gana@glasswebsite.com
Internet: http://www.glasswebsite.com
GREEN SEAL (GS)

1001 Connecticut Avenue, NW
Suite 827
Washington, DC 20036-5525
Ph: 202-872-6400
Fax: 202-872-4324
Internet: http://www.greenseal.org
GYPSUM ASSOCIATION (GA)

6525 Belcrest Road, Suite 480
Hyattsville, MD 20782
Ph: 301-277-8686
Fax: 301-277-8747
E-mail: info@gypsum.org
Internet: http://www.gypsum.org
ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY (IES)

120 Wall Street, 17th Floor
New York, NY 10005-4001
Ph: 212-248-5000
Fax: 212-248-5018
E-mail: IES@IES.org
Internet: http://www.IES.org
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)

445 and 501 Hoes Lane
Piscataway, NJ 08854-4141
Ph: 732-981-0060 or 800-701-4333
Fax: 732-562-9667
E-mail: onlinesupport@ieee.org
Internet: http://www.ieee.org
INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (ICEA)

P.O. Box 1568
Carrollton, GA 30112
E-mail:
http://www.icea.net/Public_Pages/Contact/Email_Contact.html
Internet: http://www.icea.net
INSULATING GLASS MANUFACTURERS ALLIANCE (IGMA)

27 N. Wacker Dr. Suite 365
Chicago, IL 60606-2800
Ph: 613-233-1510
Fax: 613-482-9436
E-mail: enquiries@igmaonline.org
Internet: http://www.igmaonline.org
INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)

500 New Jersey Avenue, NW
6th Floor, Washington, DC 20001
Ph: 800-786-4452 or 888-422-7233
E-mail: order@iccsafe.org
Internet: www.iccsafe.org
INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)

3050 Old Centre Ave. Suite 102
Portage, MI 49024
Ph: 269-488-6382
Internet: http://www.netaworld.org
INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION (IEC)

3, rue de Varembe
P.O. Box 131
CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland
Ph: 41-22-919-02-11
Fax: 41-22-919-03-00
Internet: http://www.iec.ch
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)

1, ch. de la Voie-Creuse
Case Postale 56
CP 56 - CH-1211 Geneva 20
Switzerland
Ph: 41-22-749-01-11
Fax: 41-22-733-34-30
E-mail: central@iso.ch
Internet: http://www.iso.org
INTERNATIONAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATION (ISEA)

1901 North Moore Street
Arlington, VA 22209-1762
Ph: 703-525-1695
Fax: 703-528-2148
Internet: http://www.safetyequipment.org/
L.H. BAILEY HORTORIUM (LHBH)

Dept of Plant Biology
c/o Cornell University
440 Mann Library Building
Ithaca, NY 14853
Ph: 607-255-1052
Fax: 607-254-5407
Internet: http://plantbio.cals.cornell.edu/hortorium
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS

INDUSTRY (MSS)
127 Park Street, NE
Vienna, VA 22180-4602
Ph: 703-281-6613
E-mail: info@mss-hq.com
Internet: http://mss-hq.org/Store/index.cfm
MARBLE INSTITUTE OF AMERICA (MIA)

380 E. Lorain Street
Oberlin, OH 44074
Ph: 440-250-9222
Fax: 440-774-9222
E-mail: miainfo@marble-institute.com
Internet: http://www.marble-institute.com
MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MPI)

2800 Ingleton Avenue
Burnaby, BC CANADA V5C 6G7
Ph: 1-888-674-8937
Fax: 1-888-211-8708
E-mail: info@paintinfo.com or techservices@mpi.net
Internet: http://www.mpi.net/
METAL BUILDING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (MBMA)

1300 Sumner Avenue
Cleveland, OH 44115-2851
Ph: 216-241-7333
Fax: 216-241-0105
E-mail: mbma@mbma.com
Internet: http://www.mbma.com
MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MICA)

16712 Elm Circle
Omaha, NE 68130
Ph: 800-747-6422
Fax: 402-330-9702
Internet: http://www.micainsulation.org
NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)

Houston, TX 77084-4906
Ph: 281-228-6223
Fax: 281-228-6300
E-mail: firstservice@nace.org
Internet: http://www.nace.org
NATIONAL AERONAUTICS AND SPACE ADMINISTRATION (NASA)
Superintendent of Documents at
U.S. Government Printing Office
732 North Capitol Street, NW
Ph: 202-783-3238
Fax: 202-512-1800
E-mail: ContactCenter@gpo.gov
Internet: http://www.nasa.gov or http://www.gpoaccess.gov
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)

800 Roosevelt Road, Bldg C, Suite 312
Glen Ellyn, IL 60137
Ph: 630-942-6591
Fax: 630-790-3095
E-mail: wlewis7@cox.net(Wes Lewis,technical consultant)
Internet: http://www.naamm.org
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NECA)

3 Bethesda Metro Center, Suite 1100
Bethesda, MD 20814
Ph: 301-657-3110
Fax: 301-215-4500
Internet: http://www.necanet.org/
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

1300 North 17th Street, Suite 900
Arlington, VA 22209
Ph: 703-841-3200
Internet: http://www.nema.org/
NATIONAL ELEVATOR INDUSTRY, INC. (NEII)

1677 County Route 64
P.O. Box 838
Salem, New York 12865-0838
Ph: 518-854-3100
Fax: 518-854-3257
E-Mail: into@neii.org
Internet: http://www.neii.org/index.cfm
NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB)

8575 Grovemont Circle
Gaithersburg, MD 20877
Ph: 301-977-3698
Fax: 301-977-9589
Internet: http://www.nebb.org
NATIONAL FENESTRATION RATING COUNCIL (NFRC)

6305 Ivy Lane, Suite 140
Greenbelt, MD 20770
Ph: 301-589-1776
Fax: 301-589-3884
E-Mail: info@nfrc.org
Internet: http://www.nfrc.org

1 Batterymarch Park
Quincy, MA 02169-7471
Ph: 617-770-3000
Fax: 617-770-0700
Internet: http://www.nfpa.org
NATIONAL HARDWOOD LUMBER ASSOCIATION (NHLA)

6830 Raleigh LaGrange Road
PO Box 34518
Memphis, TN 38184
Ph: 901-377-1818
Store: 901-399-7563
Internet: http://www.nhla.org
NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH (NIOSH)

395 E Street, S.W.
Suite 9200
Patriots Plaza Building
Ph: 800-232-4636
Fax: 513-533-8347
E-mail: nioshdocket@cdc.gov
Internet: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/
NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST)

100 Bureau Drive
Stop 1070
Gaithersburg, MD 20899-1070
Ph: 301-975-NIST (6478)
E-mail: inquiries@nist.gov
Internet: http://www.nist.gov
NORTHEASTERN LUMBER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NELMA)

272 Tuttle Road
Cumberland, ME 04021
Ph: 207-829-6901
Fax: 207-829-4293
E-mail: info@nelma.org
Internet: http://www.nelma.org
NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)

789 North Dixboro Road
P.O. Box 130140
Ann Arbor, MI 48105
Ph: 734-769-8010 or 800-NSF-MARK
Fax: 734-769-0109
E-mail: info@nsf.org
Internet: http://www.nsf.org
PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS ASSOCIATION (PPFA)

800 Roosevelt Road
Building C, Suite 312
Glen Ellyn, IL 60137
Ph: 630-858-6540
Fax: 630-790-3095
Internet: http://www.ppfahome.org
PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI)

800 Turnpike Street, Suite 300
North Andover, MA 01845
Ph: 978-557-0720 or 800-589-8956
E-Mail: pdi@PDIonline.org
Internet: http://www.pdionline.org
REDWOOD INSPECTION SERVICE (RIS) OF THE CALIFORNIA REDWOOD

ASSOCIATION (CRA)
818 Grayson Road, Suite 201
Pleasant Hill, CA 94523
Ph: 925-935-1499
Fax: 925-935-1496
E-Mail: ris@calredwood.org
Internet: http://www.redwoodinspection.com/
SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)

2000 Powell Street, Suite 600
Emeryville, CA 94608
Ph: 800-326-3228
E-mail: info@SCSglobal services.com
Internet: http://www.scsglobalservices.com/
SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION

(SMACNA)
4201 Lafayette Center Drive
Chantilly, VA 20151-1219
Ph: 703-803-2980
Fax: 703-803-3732
Internet: http://www.smacna.org
SINGLE PLY ROOFING INDUSTRY (SPRI)

411 Waverley Oaks Road, Suite 331B
Waltham, MA 02452
Ph: 781-647-7026
Fax: 781-647-7222
E-mail: info@spri.org
Internet: http://www.spri.org
SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)

40 24th Street, 6th Floor
Pittsburgh, PA 15222
Ph: 412-281-2331
Fax: 412-281-9992
E-mail: info@sspc.org
Internet: http://www.sspc.org
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)

400 Commonwealth Drive
Warrendale, PA 15096
Ph: 724-776-4970
Fax: 877-606-7323
E-mail: customerservice@sae.org
Internet: http://www.sae.org
SOUTHERN CYPRESS MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (SCMA)

665 Rodi Road, Suite 305
Pittsburgh, PA 15235
Ph: 412-244-0440
Fax: 412-244-9090
E-Mail: member-services@cypressinfo.org
Internet: http://www.cypressinfo.org
SOUTHERN PINE INSPECTION BUREAU (SPIB)

P.O. Box 10915
Pensacola, FL 32504-0915
Ph: 850-434-2611
Fax: 850-433-5594
Internet: http://www.spib.org
STATE OF CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (CALTRANS)

Publication Distribution Unit
1801 30th Street

Sacramento, CA 95816-8041
Ph: 916-227-8396
E-mail: michael_campos@dot.ca.gov
Internet: http://www.dot.ca.gov/hq/esc/techpubs/
STEEL DECK INSTITUTE (SDI)

P.O. Box 426
Glenshaw, PA 15116
Ph: 412.487.3325
Fax: 412.487.3326
E-mail: bob@sdi.org
Internet: http://www.sdi.org
STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE (SDI/DOOR)

30200 Detroit Road
Westlake, OH 44145
Ph: 440-899-0010
Fax: 440-892-1404
E-mail: info@steeldoor.org
Internet: http://www.steeldoor.org
STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE (SJI)

234 W. Cheves Street
Florence, SC 29501
Ph: 843-407-4091
Internet: http://www.steeljoist.org
TECHNICAL ASSOCIATION OF THE PULP AND PAPER INDUSTRY (TAPPI)

15 Technology Parkway South, Suite 115
Peachtree Corners, GA 30092
Ph: 800-322-8686 or 770-446-1400
Fax: 770-446-6947
E-mail: memberconnection@tappi.org
Internet: http://www.tappi.org
TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)

1320 N. Courthouse Rd., Suite 200
Arlington, VA 22201
Ph: 703-907-7700
Fax: 703-907-7727
Internet: http://www.tiaonline.org
TILE COUNCIL OF NORTH AMERICA (TCNA)

100 Clemson Research Boulevard
Anderson, SC 29625
Ph: 864-646-8453
Fax: 864-646-2821
E-mail: info@tileusa.com
Internet: http://www.tcnatile.com/
TREE CARE INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TCIA)

136 Harvey Road, Suite 101
Londonderry, NH 03053
Ph: 603-314-5380
Fax: 603-314-5386
Internet: http://tcia.org/

CRD-C DOCUMENTS available on Internet:
http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/browse_cat.php?c=68
Order Other Documents from:
USACE Publications Depot
Attn: CEHEC-IM-PD
2803 52nd Avenue
Hyattsville, MD 20781-1102
Ph: 301-394-0081
Fax: 301-394-0084
E-mail: pubs-army@usace.army.mil
Internet: http://www.publications.usace.army.mil/
or
http://www.hnc.usace.army.mil/Missions/Engineering/TECHINFO.aspx
U.S. CODE (USC)

Office of the Law Revision Counsel
Internet: http://uscode.house.gov/
U.S. DEFENSE LOGISTICS AGENCY (DLA)
Fort Belvoir, VA
Internet: http://www.dla.mil
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)

Order AMS Publications from:
AGRICULTURAL MARKETING SERVICE (AMS)
Seed Regulatory and Testing Branch
801 Summit Crossing Place, Suite C
Gastonia, NC 28054-2193
Ph: 704-810-8871
Fax: 704-852-4189
E-mail: seed.ams@usda.gov
Internet: http://www.ams.usda.gov/lsg/seed.htm
Order Other Publications from:
U.S. Department of Agriculture, Rural Utilities Program
USDA Rural Development, Room 4051-S
Mail Stop 1510
1400 Independence Avenue SW
Phone: (202) 720-9540
TTY: (800) 877-8339 (Federal Relay Service)
Fax: (202) 720-1725
Internet: http://www.rurdev.usda.gov/utilities_lp.html
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE (DOC)

1401 Constitution Avenue, NW
Ph: 202-482-2000
Internet: http://www.commerce.gov/
Order Publications From:
National Technical Information Service (NTIS)
Alexandria, VA 22312
Ph: 703-605-6050 or 800-533-6847
E-mail: customerservice@ntis.gov
Internet: http://www.ntis.gov
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)

Order DOD Documents from:
Room 3A750-The Pentagon
1400 Defense Pentagon
Ph: 703-571-3343
FAX: 215-697-1462
E-mail: customerservice@ntis.gov
Obtain Military Specifications, Standards and Related Publications
from:
Acquisition Streamlining and Standardization Information System
(ASSIST)
Department of Defense Single Stock Point (DODSSP)
Document Automation and Production Service (DAPS)
Building 4/D
700 Robbins Avenue
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094
Ph: 215-697-6396 - for account/password issues
Internet: http://assist.daps.dla.mil/online/start/; account
registration required
Obtain Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) from:
Whole Building Design Guide (WBDG)
National Institute of Building Sciences (NIBS)
1090 Vermont Avenue NW, Suite 700
Washington, CD 20005
Ph: 202-289-7800
Fax: 202-289-1092
Internet: http://www.wbdg.org/references/docs_refs.php
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY (DOE)

1000 Independence Avenue Southwest
Washington, D.C. 20585
Internet: www.eere.energy.gov
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF HOUSING AND URBAN DEVELOPMENT (HUD)

HUD User
P.O. Box 23268
Ph: 800-245-2691 or 202-708-3178
TDD: 800-927-7589
Fax: 202-708-9981
Internet: http://www.huduser.org

Ariel Rios Building
1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, N.W.
Ph: 202-272-0167
Internet: http://www2.epa.gov/libraries
--- Some EPA documents are available only from:
National Technical Information Service (NTIS)
5301 Shawnee Road
Alexandria, VA 22312
Ph: 703-605-6050 or 1-688-584-8332
Fax: 703-605-6900
E-mail: info@ntis.gov

Order for sale documents from:
Superintendent of Documents
U.S. Government Printing Office (GPO)
Ph: 202-512-1800
Fax: 202-512-2104
E-mail: contactcenter@gpo.gov
Internet: http://www.gpoaccess.gov
Order free documents from:
Federal Aviation Administration
Department of Transportation
800 Independence Avenue, SW
Ph: 1-866-835-5322
Internet: http://www.faa.gov
U.S. FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)

445 12th Street SW
Ph: 888-225-5322
TTY: 888-835-5322
Fax: 866-418-0232
Internet: http://www.fcc.gov
Order Publications From:
U.S. Government Printing Office (GPO)
Ph: 202-512-1800
Fax: 866-418-0232
E-mail: gpoweb@gpo.gov
Internet: http://www.gpoaccess.gov/
U.S. FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION (FHWA)

FHWA, Office of Safety
1200 New Jersey Ave., SE
Ph: 202-366-4000
Internet: http://www.fhwa.dot.gov
Order from:
U. S. Government Printing Office (GPO)
Ph: 202-512-1800
Fax: 202-512-2104
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

General Services Administration
1275 First St. NE
Ph: 202-501-1231
Internet: http://www.gsaelibrary.gsa.gov/ElibMain/home.do
Obtain documents from:
Acquisition Streamlining and Standardization Information System
(ASSIST)
Internet: https://assist.dla.mil/online/start/; account
registration required
U. S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)

2101 L St NW, Suite 500
Washington, D.C. 20037
Ph: 800-795-1747
Internet: http://www.usgbc.org

8601 Adelphi Road
College Park, MD 20740-6001
Ph: 866-272-6272
Fax: 301-837-0483
Internet: http://www.archives.gov
Order documents from:
U.S.Government Printing Office (GPO)
Ph: 202-512-1800
Fax: 202-512-2104
U.S. NAVAL FACILITIES ENGINEERING COMMAND (NAVFAC)

1322 Patterson Ave. SE, Suite 1000
Washington Navy Yard, DC 20374-5065
Ph: 202-685-9387
Internet: http://www.navfac.navy.mil
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

2600 N.W. Lake Road
Camas, WA 98607-8542
Ph: 877-854-3577
E-mail: CEC.us@us.ul.com
Internet: http://www.ul.com/
UL Directories available through IHS at http://www.ihs.com
UNI-BELL PVC PIPE ASSOCIATION (UBPPA)

2711 LBJ Freeway, Suite 1000
Dallas, TX 75234
Ph: 972-243-3902
Fax: 972-243-3907
E-mail: info@uni-bell.org
Internet: http://www.uni-bell.org
WEST COAST LUMBER INSPECTION BUREAU (WCLIB)

P.O. Box 23145
Portland, OR 97281
Ph: 503-639-0651
Fax: 503-684-8928
E-mail: info@wclib.org
Internet: http://www.wclib.org
WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION (WWPA)

1500 SW First Ave., Suite 870
Portland, OR 97201
Ph: 503-224-3930
Fax: 503-224-3934
E-mail: info@wwpa.org
Internet: http://www.wwpa.org
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20
QUALITY CONTROL
11/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 52.2 (2012; Errata 2013; INT 1 2014; ADD A,

B, AND D SUPP 2015; INT 3 2015) Method of
Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning
Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle
Size
ASHRAE 189.1 (2011) Standard for the Design of

High-Performance Green Buildings
ASHRAE 55 (2004; Addenda a, b 2008; Addenda d, e, f,

g 2009; Errata 2010) Thermal Environmental
Conditions for Human Occupancy
ASTM D6245 (2012) Using Indoor Carbon Dioxide

Concentrations to Evaluate Indoor Air
Quality and Ventilation
ASTM D6345 (2010) Selection of Methods for Active,

Integrative Sampling of Volatile Organic
Compounds in Air

(SMACNA)
ANSI/SMACNA 008 (2007) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied

Buildings Under Construction, 2nd Edition

Manual
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 1

Construction Quality Control (QC) Plan; G
Submit a Construction QC Plan prior to start of construction.
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan; G
Basis of Design and Design Intent; G
SD-05 Design Data
Design Review; G
Submit items listed in accordance with paragraph 1.10.2 Design

Review.
SD-07 Certificates
CA Resume; G
1.3 INFORMATION FOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER
Prior to commencing work on construction, the Contractor can obtain a

single copy set of the current report forms from the Contracting Officer.
The report forms will consist of the Contractor Production Report,
Contractor Production Report (Continuation Sheet), Contractor Quality
Control (CQC) Report, (CQC) Report (Continuation Sheet), Preparatory Phase
Checklist, Initial Phase Checklist, Rework Items List, and Testing Plan
and Log.
Deliver the following to the Contracting Officer during Construction:
a. CQC Report: Mail or hand-carry the original (wet signatures) and one
copy by 10:00 AM the next working day after each day that work is
performed and for every seven consecutive calendar days of no-work.
b. Contractor Production Report: Submit the report electronically by

10:00 AM the next working day after each day that work is performed
and for every seven consecutive calendar days of no-work.
c. Preparatory Phase Checklist: Submit the report electronically in the

same manner as the CQC Report for each Preparatory Phase held.
Original attached to the original CQC Report and one copy attached to
each QC Report copy.
d. Initial Phase Checklist: Submit the report electronically in the same

manner as the CQC Report for each Initial Phase held. Original
attached to the original CQC Report and one copy attached to each QC
Report copy.
e. QC Specialist Reports: Submit the report electronically by 10:00 AM

the next working day after each day that work is performed.
f. Field Test Reports: Within two working days after the test is
performed, submit the report as an electronic attachment to the CQC
Report.
g. Monthly Summary Report of Tests: Submit the report as an electronic

attachment to the CQC Report at the end of each month.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 2

h. Testing Plan and Log: Submit the report as an electronic attachment

to the CQC Report, at the end of each month. A copy of the final
Testing Plan and Log shall be provided to the OMSI preparer for
inclusion into the OMSI documentation.
i. Rework Items List: Submit lists containing new entries daily, in the
same manner as the CQC Report.
j. CQC Meeting Minutes: Within two working days after the meeting is
held, submit the report as an electronic attachment to the CQC Report.
k. QC Certifications: As required by the paragraph entitled "QC

Certifications."
1.4 QC PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
Establish and maintain a QC program as described in this section. This QC

program is a key element in meeting the objectives of NAVFAC
Commissioning. The QC program consists of a QC Organization, QC Plan, QC
Plan Meeting(s), a Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting, QC
meetings, three phases of control, submittal review and approval, testing,
completion inspections, and QC certifications and documentation necessary
to provide materials, equipment, workmanship, fabrication, construction
and operations which comply with the requirements of this Contract. The
QC program must cover on-site and off-site work and be keyed to the work
sequence. No construction work or testing may be performed unless the QC
Manager is on the work site. The QC Manager must report to an officer of
the firm and not be subordinate to the Project Superintendent or the
Project Manager. The QC Manager, Project Superintendent and Project
Manager must work together effectively. Although the QC Manager is the
primary individual responsible for quality control, all individuals will
be held responsible for the quality of work on the job.
1.4.1 Commissioning
Commissioning (Cx) is a systematic process of ensuring that all building

systems meet the requirements and perform interactively according to the
Contract. The QC Program is a key to this process by coordinating,
verifying and documenting measures to achieve the following objectives:
a. Verify and document that the applicable equipment and systems are
installed in accordance with the design intent as expressed through
the Contract and according to the manufacturer's recommendations and
industry accepted minimum standards.
b. Verify and document that equipment and systems receive complete

operational checkout by the installing contractors.
c. Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems.
d. Verify that Operation and Maintenance (O&M) documentation is complete

in accordance with Sections 01 78 24.00 20 FACILITY ELECTRONIC
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION (eOMSI) and 01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
e. Verify the Training Plan and training materials are accurate and
provide correct instruction and documentation on the critical elements
of the products, materials, and systems in the constructed facility.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 3

Verify that all identified Government operating personnel are trained.
1.4.2 Acceptance of the Construction Quality Control (QC) Plan
Acceptance of the QC Plan is required prior to the start of construction.

The Contracting Officer reserves the right to require changes in the QC
Plan and operations as necessary, including removal of personnel, to
ensure the specified quality of work. The Contracting Officer reserves
the right to interview any member of the QC organization at any time in
order to verify the submitted qualifications. All QC organization
personnel are subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer. The
Contracting Officer may require the removal of any individual for
non-compliance with quality requirements specified in the Contract.
1.4.3 Preliminary Construction Work Authorized Prior to Acceptance
The only construction work that is authorized to proceed prior to the

acceptance of the QC Plan is mobilization of storage and office trailers,
temporary utilities, and surveying.
1.4.4 Notification of Changes
Notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, of any proposed changes in the

QC Plan or changes to the QC organization personnel, a minimum of 10 work
days prior to a proposed change. Proposed changes are subject to
acceptance by the Contracting Officer.
1.5 QC ORGANIZATION
1.5.1 QC Manager
1.5.1.1 Duties
Provide a QC Manager at the work site to implement and manage the QC

program. The only duties and responsibilities of the QC Manager are to
manage and implement the QC program on this Contract. The QC Manager is
required to attend the partnering meetings, QC Plan Meetings, Coordination
and Mutual Understanding Meeting, conduct the QC meetings, perform the
three phases of control except for those phases of control designated to
be performed by QC Specialists, perform submittal review and approval,
ensure testing is performed and provide QC certifications and
documentation required in this Contract. The QC Manager is responsible
for managing and coordinating the three phases of control and
documentation performed by the QC Specialists, testing laboratory
personnel and any other inspection and testing personnel required by this
Contract. The QC Manager is the manager of all QC activities.
1.5.1.2 Qualifications
A graduate of a four year accredited college or university program in one

of the following disciplines: Engineering, Architecture, Construction
Management, Engineering Technology, Building Construction, or Building
Science, with a minimum of 10 years experience as a Project
Superintendent, QC Manager, Project Manager, Project Engineer or
Construction Manager on similar size and type construction contracts which
included the major trades that are part of this Contract. The individual
must have at least two years experience as a QC Manager. The individual
must be familiar with the requirements of EM 385-1-1, and have experience
in the areas of hazard identification, safety compliance, and
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 4

sustainability.
1.5.2 eOMSI Commissioning Authority
1.5.2.1 Duties
Provide a third party Commissioning Authority (CA) as key person for the
Cx and documentation thereof. The CA directs and coordinates Cx
activities and submits Cx reports to the Contracting Officer. The CA
coordinates the actions of the QC Specialists, Testing Laboratory
personnel, eOMSI Preparer, and other inspection and testing personnel
required by this Contract for building Cx. Cx shall include reports for
documentation and verification required during construction in accordance
with ASHRAE 189.1 Section 10.3.1.2 except ASHRAE 55 section 6.2
requirements.
1.5.2.2 Qualifications
The CA must be certified as a commissioning professional by the

Association of Energy Engineers (AEE), the Building Commissioning
Association (BCA), the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), or
the University of Wisconsin - Madison (UWM). CA resume is required,
providing education, experience and management capabilities on at least
two similar size and type contracts. The CA may not have been involved
with the project design, construction management, or supervision, and must
be with a third-party firm that is not on the design team.
1.5.3 Construction Quality Management Training
In addition to the above experience and education requirements, the QC

Manager must have completed the course entitled "Construction Quality
Management (CQM) for Contractors." If the QC Manager does not have a
current certification, they must obtain the CQM for Contractors course
certification within 90 days of award. This course is periodically
offered by the Naval Facilities Engineering Command and the Army Corps of
Engineers. Contact the Contracting Officer for information on the next
scheduled class.
1.5.4 Alternate QC Manager Duties and Qualifications
Designate an alternate for the QC Manager at the work site to serve in the
event of the designated QC Manager's absence. The period of absence may
not exceed two weeks at one time, and not more than 30 workdays during a
calendar year. The qualification requirements for the Alternate QC
Manager must be the same as for the QC Manager.
1.5.5 QC Specialists Duties and Qualifications
Provide a separate QC Specialist at the work site for each of the areas of
responsibilities, specified in "Submittal Reviewers Duties and
Qualifications", Execution, of the technical sections, who shall assist
and report to the QC Manager and who will have no duties other than their
assigned quality control duties. QC Specialists are required to attend the
Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting, QC meetings and be
physically present at the construction site to perform the three phases of
control and prepare documentation for each definable feature of work in
their area of responsibility at the frequency specified below.
Additional QC personnel may be required to manage work load depending on
the Contractor's scheduled activities.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 5

THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM QC SPECIALISTS/INSPECTORS WILL BE REQUIRED FOR THIS

PROJECT:
Qualification/Experience Area of
in Area of Responsibility Responsibility Frequency
Registered Soils Full-Time During Soils

Geotechnical Engineer Compaction, Compaction
Materials Technician(s) with Testing of concrete, As required

minimum required two (2) rigid and flexible during
years experience for pavement, foundation construction
appropriate area base course, and other
materials testing
requirements
ICBO Certified concrete Masonry Full-Time During Masonry

Masonry Inspector; and Grout Placement
10 Years Experience
ACI Certified Concrete Concrete Full-Time During

Concrete Inspector; 10 years Placement
Experience
Roofing Manufacturers Built-up 4 Times During

Technical Representative Roofing Installation of
System Roof
ICBO Certified Mechanical/ Mechanical At Leat Once a Week

Plumbing Inspector and Plumbing During Installation
Mechanical
QC Specialist / Mechanical Systems, Full time during
Registered Mechanical testing
Engineer, (P.E.)
BICSI Certified Registered Telecommuni- 4 Times During

Communication Distribution cation During Installation
Designer
U.S. Registered Fire Fire Protection Full-Time During

Protection Systems All Tests,
Engineer (FPE) Preliminary/Final
Inspections
ICBO Certified Steel All field welding;

Inspector; and
10 Years Experience Steel Erection Full-Time During
Installation
Certified Architectural Door Hardware 4 Times During

Hardware Consultant (AHC) Hardware Installation
Electrical
QC Specialist / Electrical Systems Full time during
Registered Electrical testing
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 6

Engineer, (P.E.)
Corrosion Specialist Cathodic Protection As req'd to comply

System with Section
22 00 00
1.5.6 Registered Fire Protection Engineer
The U.S. Registered Fire Protection Engineer (FPE) shall be an independent

third party hired directly by the Prime Contractor as an integral part of
the Prime Contractor's Quality Control Organization. This FPE must have
no business relationships (owner, partner, operating officer, distributor,
salesman, or technical representative) with any subcontractors involved
with this project, or with any fire protection equipment device
manufacturers, suppliers or installers for any such equipment provided as
part of this project. This FPE is responsible for review, approval, and
coordination of all fire protection system material submittals,
calculations, shop drawings, etc.
1.5.7 QC Administrative Assistant
Provide an Administrative Assistant at the work site until the work has
been accepted. The primary duty is to assist the QC Manager in processing
and maintaining files for submittals, preparing and publishing reports and
meeting minutes. After primary duties are accomplished, other duties may
be assigned provided the duties do not interfere with primary duties.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL (QC) PLAN
1.6.1 Construction Quality Control (QC) Plan
1.6.1.1 Requirements
Provide, for acceptance by the Contracting Officer, a Construction QC Plan

submitted in a three-ring binder that includes a table of contents, with
major sections identified with tabs, with pages numbered sequentially, and
that documents the proposed methods and responsibilities for accomplishing
commissioning activities during the construction of the project:
a. QC ORGANIZATION: A chart showing the QC organizational structure.
b. NAMES AND QUALIFICATIONS: Names and qualifications, in resume format,

for each person in the QC organization. Include the CQM for
Contractors course certifications for the QC Manager and Alternate QC
Manager as required by the paragraphs entitled "Construction Quality
Management Training" and "Alternate QC Manager Duties and
Qualifications".
c. DUTIES, RESPONSIBILITY AND AUTHORITY OF QC PERSONNEL: Duties,

responsibilities, and authorities of each person in the QC
organization.
d. OUTSIDE ORGANIZATIONS: A listing of outside organizations, such as

architectural and consulting engineering firms, that will be employed
by the Contractor and a description of the services these firms will
provide.
e. APPOINTMENT LETTERS: Letters signed by an officer of the firm

appointing the QC Manager and Alternate QC Manager and stating that
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 7

they are responsible for implementing and managing the QC program as

described in this Contract. Include in this letter the responsibility
of the QC Manager and Alternate QC Manager to implement and manage the
three phases of control, and their authority to stop work which is not
in compliance with the Contract. Letters of direction are to be
issued by the QC Manager to all other QC Specialists outlining their
duties, authorities, and responsibilities. Include copies of the
letters in the QC Plan.
f. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES AND INITIAL SUBMITTAL REGISTER: Procedures for

reviewing, approving, and managing submittals. Provide the name(s) of
the person(s) in the QC organization authorized to review and certify
submittals prior to approval. Provide the initial submittal of the
Submittal Register as specified in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES.
g. TESTING LABORATORY INFORMATION: Testing laboratory information

required by the paragraphs entitled "Accreditation Requirements", as
applicable.
h. TESTING PLAN AND LOG: A Testing Plan and Log that includes the tests
required, referenced by the specification paragraph number requiring
the test, the frequency, and the person responsible for each test.
Use Government forms to log and track tests.
i. PROCEDURES TO COMPLETE REWORK ITEMS: Procedures to identify, record,

track, and complete rework items. Use Government forms to record and
track rework items.
j. DOCUMENTATION PROCEDURES: Use Government form.
k. LIST OF DEFINABLE FEATURES: A Definable Feature of Work (DFOW) is a

task that is separate and distinct from other tasks and has control
requirements and work crews unique to that task. A DFOW is identified
by different trades or disciplines and is an item or activity on the
construction schedule. Include in the list of DFOWs, but not be
limited to, all critical path activities on the NAS. Include all
activities for which this specification requires QC Specialists or
specialty inspection personnel. Provide separate DFOWs in the Network
Analysis Schedule for each design development stage and submittal
package.
l. PROCEDURES FOR PERFORMING THE THREE PHASES OF CONTROL: Identify

procedures used to ensure the three phases of control to manage the
quality on this project. For each DFOW, a Preparatory and Initial
phase checklist will be filled out during the Preparatory and Initial
phase meetings. Conduct the Preparatory and Initial Phases and
meetings with a view towards obtaining quality construction by
planning ahead and identifying potential problems for each DFOW.
m. PERSONNEL MATRIX: A personnel matrix showing for each section of the

specification who will review and approve submittals, who will perform
and document the three phases of control, and who will perform and
document the testing.
n. PROCEDURES FOR COMPLETION INSPECTION: Procedures for identifying and

documenting the completion inspection process. Include in these
procedures the responsible party for punch out inspection, pre-final
inspection, and final acceptance inspection.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 8

o. TRAINING PROCEDURES AND TRAINING LOG: Procedures for coordinating and

documenting the training of personnel required by the Contract.
p. ORGANIZATION AND PERSONNEL CERTIFICATIONS LOG: Procedures for

coordinating, tracking and documenting all certifications on
subcontractors, testing laboratories, suppliers, personnel, etc. QC
Manager will ensure that certifications are current, appropriate for
the work being performed, and will not lapse during any period of the
contract that the work is being performed.
1.7 QC PLAN MEETINGS
Prior to submission of the QC Plan, the QC Manager will meet with the
Contracting Officer to discuss the QC Plan requirements of this Contract.
The purpose of this meeting is to develop a mutual understanding of the QC
Plan requirements prior to plan development and submission and to agree on
the Contractor's list of DFOWs.
1.8 COORDINATION AND MUTUAL UNDERSTANDING MEETING
After submission of the QC Plan, and prior to the start of construction,

the QC Manager will meet with the Contracting Officer to present the QC
program required by this Contract. When a new QC Manager is appointed,
the coordination and mutual understanding meeting shall be repeated.
1.8.1 Purpose
The purpose of this meeting is to develop a mutual understanding of the QC

details, including documentation, administration for on-site and off-site
work, design intent, Cx, environmental requirements and procedures,
coordination of activities to be performed, and the coordination of the
Contractor's management, production, and QC personnel. At the meeting,
the Contractor will be required to explain in detail how three phases of
control will be implemented for each DFOW, as well as how each DFOW will
be affected by each management plan or requirement as listed below:
a. Waste Management Plan.
b. IAQ Management Plan.
c. Procedures for noise and acoustics management.
d. Environmental Protection Plan.
e. Environmental regulatory requirements.
f. Cx Plan.
g. Cx Schedule.
1.8.2 Coordination of Activities
Coordinate activities included in various sections to assure efficient and

orderly installation of each component. Coordinate operations included
under different sections that are dependent on each other for proper
installation and operation. Schedule construction operations with
consideration for indoor air quality as specified in the IAQ Management
Plan. Coordinate prefunctional tests and startup testing with Cx.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 9

1.8.3 Attendees
As a minimum, the Contractor's personnel required to attend include an

officer of the firm, the Project Manager, Project Superintendent, QC
Manager, Alternate QC Manager, QC Specialists, A/E, CA, Environmental
Manager, and subcontractor representatives. Each subcontractor who will
be assigned QC responsibilities shall have a principal of the firm at the
meeting. Minutes of the meeting will be prepared by the QC Manager and
signed by the Contractor, the A/E and the Contracting Officer. Provide a
copy of the signed minutes to all attendees and shall be included in the
QC Plan.
1.9 QC MEETINGS
After the start of construction, conduct weekly QC meetings by the QC

Manager at the work site with the Project Superintendent, QC Specialists,
the CA, and the foremen who are performing the work of the DFOWs. The QC
Manager is to prepare the minutes of the meeting and provide a copy to the
Contracting Officer within two working days after the meeting. The
Contracting Officer may attend these meetings. As a minimum, accomplish
the following at each meeting:
a. Review the minutes of the previous meeting.
b. Review the schedule and the status of work and rework.
c. Review the status of submittals.
d. Review the work to be accomplished in the next two weeks and

documentation required.
e. Resolve QC and production problems (RFI, etc.).
f. Address items that may require revising the QC Plan.
g. Review Accident Prevention Plan (APP).
h. Review environmental requirements and procedures.
i. Review Waste Management Plan.
j. Review IAQ Management Plan.
k. Review Environmental Management Plan.
l. Review the status of training completion.
m. Review Cx Plan and progress.
1.10 DESIGN REVIEW AND DOCUMENTATION
1.10.1 Basis of Design and Design Intent
Commissioning Authority (CA) and QC Manager shall review the basis of

design received from the Contracting Officer and the design intent.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 10

1.10.2 Design Review
Review design documents to verify that each commissioned system meets the
design intent relative to functionality, energy performance, water
performance, maintainability, sustainability, system cost, indoor
environmental quality, and local environmental impacts. Fully document
review in written report. Submit for review and approval by the Government:
Commissioning plan, installation verification and operational function
performance tests, checklists, schedule for fundamental commissioning and
design review comments for basis of design, OPR, systems manual and O&M
review report at 10 months before substantial completion.
1.10.3 Contract Document Review
Review the Contract documents to verify that Cx is adequately specified,

and that each commissioned system is likely to meet the design intent
relative to functionality, energy performance, water performance,
maintainability, sustainability, system cost, indoor environmental
quality, and local environmental impacts.
1.11 THREE PHASES OF CONTROL
Adequately cover both on-site and off-site work with the Three Phases of
Control and include the following for each DFOW.
1.11.1 Preparatory Phase
Notify the Contracting Officer at least two work days in advance of each
preparatory phase meeting. The meeting will be conducted by the QC
Manager and attended by the QC Specialists, the Project Superintendent,
the CA, and the foreman responsible for the DFOW. When the DFOW will be
accomplished by a subcontractor, that subcontractor's foreman shall attend
the preparatory phase meeting. Document the results of the preparatory
phase actions in the daily Contractor Quality Control Report and in the
Preparatory Phase Checklist. Perform the following prior to beginning
work on each DFOW:
a. Review each paragraph of the applicable specification sections.
b. Review the Contract drawings.
c. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on construction and/or

shop drawings before confirming product orders, in order to minimize
waste due to excessive materials.
d. Verify that appropriate shop drawings and submittals for materials and
equipment have been submitted and approved. Verify receipt of
approved factory test results, when required.
e. Review the testing plan and ensure that provisions have been made to
provide the required QC testing.
f. Examine the work area to ensure that the required preliminary work has
been completed.
g. Coordinate the schedule of product delivery to designated prepared

areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to
stored materials.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 11

h. Arrange for the return of shipping/packaging materials, such as wood

pallets, where economically feasible.
i. Examine the required materials, equipment and sample work to ensure

that they are on hand and conform to the approved shop drawings and
submitted data.
j. Discuss specific controls used and construction methods, construction

tolerances, workmanship standards, and the approach that will be used
to provide quality construction by planning ahead and identifying
potential problems for each DFOW.
k. Review the APP and appropriate Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) to

ensure that applicable safety requirements are met, and that required
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are submitted.
l. Review the Cx Plan and ensure all preliminary work items have been
completed and documented.
1.11.2 Initial Phase
Notify the Contracting Officer at least two work days in advance of each
initial phase. When construction crews are ready to start work on a DFOW,
conduct the initial phase with the QC Specialists, the Project
Superintendent, and the foreman responsible for that DFOW. Observe the
initial segment of the DFOW to ensure that the work complies with Contract
requirements. Document the results of the initial phase in the daily CQC
Report and in the Initial Phase Checklist. Repeat the initial phase for
each new crew to work on-site, or when acceptable levels of specified
quality are not being met. Perform the following for each DFOW:
a. Establish the quality of workmanship required.
b. Resolve conflicts.
c. Ensure that testing is performed by the approved laboratory.
d. Check work procedures for compliance with the APP and the appropriate
AHA to ensure that applicable safety requirements are met.
e. Review the Cx Plan and ensure all preparatory work items have been
completed and documented.
1.11.3 Follow-Up Phase
Perform the following for on-going work daily, or more frequently as

necessary, until the completion of each DFOW and document in the daily CQC
Report:
a. Ensure the work is in compliance with Contract requirements.
b. Maintain the quality of workmanship required.
c. Ensure that testing is performed by the approved laboratory.
d. Ensure that rework items are being corrected.
e. Assure manufacturers representatives have performed necessary

inspections if required and perform safety inspections.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 12

f. Review the Cx Plan and ensure all work items, testing, and
documentation has been completed.
1.11.4 Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases
Conduct additional preparatory and initial phases on the same DFOW if the
quality of on-going work is unacceptable, if there are changes in the
applicable QC organization, if there are changes in the on-site production
supervision or work crew, if work on a DFOW is resumed after substantial
period of inactivity, or if other problems develop.
1.11.5 Notification of Three Phases of Control for Off-Site Work
Notify the Contracting Officer at least two weeks prior to the start of
the preparatory and initial phases.
1.12 SUBMITTAL REVIEW AND APPROVAL
Procedures for submission, review and approval of submittals are described

in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
1.13 TESTING
Except as stated otherwise in the specification sections, perform sampling

and testing required under this Contract.
1.13.1 Accreditation Requirements
Construction materials testing laboratories must be accredited by a

laboratory accreditation authority and will be required to submit a copy
of the Certificate of Accreditation and Scope of Accreditation. The
laboratory's scope of accreditation must include the appropriate ASTM
standards (E 329, C 1077, D 3666, D 3740, A 880, E 543) listed in the
technical sections of the specifications. Laboratories engaged in
Hazardous Materials Testing shall meet the requirements of OSHA and EPA.
The policy applies to the specific laboratory performing the actual
testing, not just the Corporate Office.
1.13.2 Laboratory Accreditation Authorities
Laboratory Accreditation Authorities include the National Voluntary

Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) administered by the National
Institute of Standards and Technology at
http://ts.nist.gov/ts/htdocs/210/214/214.htm , the American Association of
State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) program at
http://www.transportation.org/aashto/home.nsf/frontpage , International
Accreditation Services, Inc. (IAS) at http://www.iasonline.org, U. S. Army
Corps of Engineers Materials Testing Center (MTC)at
http://www.wes.army.mil/SL/MTC/, the American Association for Laboratory
Accreditation (A2LA) program at http://www.a2la.org/, the Washington
Association of Building Officials (WABO) at http://www.wabo.org/
(Approval authority for WABO is limited to projects within Washington
State), and the Washington Area Council of Engineering Laboratories
(WACEL) at http://www.wacel.org/labaccred.html (Approval authority by
WACEL is limited to projects within Facilities Engineering Command (FEC)
Washington geographical area).
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 13

1.13.3 Capability Check
The Contracting Officer retains the right to check laboratory equipment in

the proposed laboratory and the laboratory technician's testing
procedures, techniques, and other items pertinent to testing, for
compliance with the standards set forth in this Contract.
1.13.4 Test Results
Cite applicable Contract requirements, tests or analytical procedures

used. Provide actual results and include a statement that the item tested
or analyzed conforms or fails to conform to specified requirements. If
the item fails to conform, notify the Contracting Officer immediately.
Conspicuously stamp the cover sheet for each report in large red letters
"CONFORMS" or "DOES NOT CONFORM" to the specification requirements,
whichever is applicable. Test results must be signed by a testing
laboratory representative authorized to sign certified test reports.
Furnish the signed reports, certifications, and other documentation to the
Contracting Officer via the QC Manager. Furnish a summary report of field
tests at the end of each month, per the paragraph entitled "INFORMATION
FOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER".
1.13.5 Test Reports and Monthly Summary Report of Tests
Furnish the signed reports, certifications, and a summary report of field

tests at the end of each month to the Contracting Officer. Attach a copy
of the summary report to the last daily Contractor Quality Control Report
of each month. Provide a copy of the signed test reports and
certifications to the OMSI preparer for inclusion into the OMSI
documentation.
1.14 QC CERTIFICATIONS
1.14.1 CQC Report Certification
Contain the following statement within the CQC Report: "On behalf of the
Contractor, I certify that this report is complete and correct and
equipment and material used and work performed during this reporting
period is in compliance with the contract drawings and specifications to
the best of my knowledge, except as noted in this report."
1.14.2 Invoice Certification
Furnish a certificate to the Contracting Officer with each payment

request, signed by the QC Manager, attesting that as-built drawings are
current, coordinated and attesting that the work for which payment is
requested, including stored material, is in compliance with Contract
requirements.
1.14.3 Completion Certification
Upon completion of work under this Contract, the QC Manager shall furnish
a certificate to the Contracting Officer attesting that "the work has been
completed, inspected, tested and is in compliance with the Contract."
Provide a copy of this final QC Certification for completion to the OMSI
preparer for inclusion into the OMSI documentation.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 14

1.15 COMPLETION INSPECTIONS
1.15.1 Punch-Out Inspection
Near the completion of all work or any increment thereof, established by a

completion time stated in the Contract Clause entitled "Commencement,
Prosecution, and Completion of Work," or stated elsewhere in the
specifications, the QC Manager and the CA must conduct an inspection of
the work and develop a "punch list" of items which do not conform to the
approved drawings, specifications and Contract. Include in the punch list
any remaining items on the "Rework Items List", which were not corrected
prior to the Punch-Out Inspection. Include within the punch list the
estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. Provide a
copy of the punch list to the Contracting Officer. The QC Manager, or
staff, must make follow-on inspections to ascertain that all deficiencies
have been corrected. Once this is accomplished, notify the Government
that the facility is ready for the Government "Pre-Final Inspection".
1.15.2 Pre-Final Inspection
The Government and QCM will perform this inspection to verify that the
facility is complete and ready to be occupied. A Government "Pre-Final
Punch List" will be documented by the CQM as a result of this inspection.
The QC Manager will ensure that all items on this list are corrected prior
to notifying the Government that a "Final" inspection with the Client can
be scheduled. Any items noted on the "Pre-Final" inspection must be
corrected in a timely manner and be accomplished before the contract
completion date for the work,or any particular increment thereof, if the
project is divided into increments by separate completion dates.
1.15.3 Final Acceptance Inspection
Notify the Contracting Officer at least 14 calendar days prior to the date
a final acceptance inspection can be held. State within the notice that
all items previously identified on the pre-final punch list will be
corrected and acceptable, along with any other unfinished Contract work,
by the date of the final acceptance inspection. The Contractor must be
represented by the QC Manager, the Project Superintendent, the CA, and
others deemed necessary. Attendees for the Government will include the
Contracting Officer, other FEAD/ROICC personnel, and personnel
representing the Client. Failure of the Contractor to have all contract
work acceptably complete for this inspection will be cause for the
Contracting Officer to bill the Contractor for the Government's additional
inspection cost in accordance with the Contract Clause entitled
"Inspection of Construction."
1.16 DOCUMENTATION
Maintain current and complete records of on-site and off-site QC program

operations and activities.
1.16.1 Construction Documentation
Reports are required for each day that work is performed and must be
attached to the Contractor Quality Control Report prepared for the same
day. Maintain current and complete records of on-site and off-site QC
program operations and activities. The forms identified under the
paragraph "INFORMATION FOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER" will be used. Reports
are required for each day work is performed. Account for each calendar
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 15

day throughout the life of the Contract. Every space on the forms must be
filled in. Use N/A if nothing can be reported in one of the spaces. The
Project Superintendent and the QC Manager must prepare and sign the
Contractor Production and CQC Reports, respectively. The reporting of
work must be identified by terminology consistent with the construction
schedule. In the "remarks" sections of the reports, enter pertinent
information including directions received, problems encountered during
construction, work progress and delays, conflicts or errors in the
drawings or specifications, field changes, safety hazards encountered,
instructions given and corrective actions taken, delays encountered and a
record of visitors to the work site, quality control problem areas,
deviations from the QC Plan, construction deficiencies encountered,
meetings held. For each entry in the report(s), identify the Schedule
Activity No. that is associated with the entered remark.
1.16.2 Quality Control Validation
Establish and maintain the following in a series of three ring binders.

Binders shall be divided and tabbed as shown below. These binders must be
readily available to the Contracting Officer during all business hours.
a. All completed Preparatory and Initial Phase Checklists, arranged by

specification section.
b. All milestone inspections, arranged by Activity Number.
c. An up-to-date copy of the Testing Plan and Log with supporting field
test reports, arranged by specification section.
d. Copies of all contract modifications, arranged in numerical order.

Also include documentation that modified work was accomplished.
e. An up-to-date copy of the Rework Items List.
f. Maintain up-to-date copies of all punch lists issued by the QC staff

to the Contractor and Sub-Contractors and all punch lists issued by
the Government.
g. Commissioning documentation including Cx checklists, schedules, tests,

and reports.
1.16.3 Reports from the QC Specialist(s)
Reports are required for each day that work is performed in their area of
responsibility. QC Specialist reports shall include the same
documentation requirements as the CQC Report for their area of
responsibility. QC Specialist reports are to be prepared, signed and
dated by the QC Specialists and shall be attached to the CQC Report
prepared for the same day.
1.16.4 Testing Plan and Log
As tests are performed, the CA and the QC Manager will record on the
"Testing Plan and Log" the date the test was performed and the date the
test results were forwarded to the Contracting Officer. Attach a copy of
the updated "Testing Plan and Log" to the last daily CQC Report of each
month, per the paragraph "INFORMATION FOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER".
Provide a copy of the final "Testing Plan and Log" to the OMSI preparer
for inclusion into the OMSI documentation.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 16

1.16.5 Rework Items List
The QC Manager must maintain a list of work that does not comply with the
Contract, identifying what items need to be reworked, the date the item
was originally discovered, the date the item will be corrected by, and the
date the item was corrected. There is no requirement to report a rework
item that is corrected the same day it is discovered. Attach a copy of
the "Rework Items List" to the last daily CQC Report of each month. The
Contractor is responsible for including those items identified by the
1.16.6 As-Built Drawings
The QC Manager is required to ensure the as-built drawings, required by

Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS are kept current on a daily basis and
marked to show deviations which have been made from the Contract
drawings. Ensure each deviation has been identified with the appropriate
modifying documentation (e.g. PC No., Modification No., Request for
Information No., etc.). The QC Manager must initial each revision. Upon
completion of work, the QC Manager will furnish a certificate attesting to
the accuracy of the as-built drawings prior to submission to the
1.17 NOTIFICATION ON NON-COMPLIANCE
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of any detected

non-compliance with the Contract. Take immediate corrective action after
receipt of such notice. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor at
the work site, shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of
notification. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the
Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work
until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of the time
lost due to such stop orders will be made the subject of claim for
extension of time for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.
1.18 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY (IAQ) MANAGEMENT PLAN
Submit an IAQ Management Plan within 15 days after Contract award and not
less than 10 days before the preconstruction meeting. Revise and resubmit
Plan as required by the Contracting Officer. Make copies of the final
plan available to all workers on site. Include provisions in the Plan to
meet the requirements specified below and to ensure safe, healthy air for
construction workers and building occupants.
1.18.1 Requirements During Construction
Provide for evaluation of indoor Carbon Dioxide concentrations in

accordance with ASTM D6245. Provide for evaluation of volatile organic
compounds (VOCs) in indoor air in accordance with ASTM D6345. Use filters
with a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 8 in permanently
installed air handlers during construction.
1.18.1.1 Control Measures
Meet or exceed the requirements of ANSI/SMACNA 008, Chapter 3, to help

minimize contamination of the building from construction activities. The
five requirements of this manual which must be adhered to are described
below:
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 17

a. HVAC protection: Isolate return side of HVAC system from surrounding

environment to prevent construction dust and debris from entering the
duct work and spaces.
b. Source control: Use low emitting paints and other finishes, sealants,
adhesives, and other materials as specified. When available, cleaning
products shall have a low VOC content and be non-toxic to minimize
building contamination. Utilize cleaning techniques that minimize
dust generation. Cycle equipment off when not needed. Prohibit
idling motor vehicles where emissions could be drawn into building.
Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming material that minimize
IAQ impacts.
c. Pathway interruption: When pollutants are generated use strategies

such as 100 percent outside air ventilation or erection of physical
barriers between work and non-work areas to prevent contamination.
d. Housekeeping: Clean frequently to remove construction dust and

debris. Promptly clean up spills. Remove accumulated water and keep
work areas dry to discourage the growth of mold and bacteria. Take
extra measures when hazardous materials are involved.
f. Each applicable facility provided under this Task Order shall have no
evidence of mold and/or mildew due to condensate or other moisture on
any indoor or interior surfaces after two (2) years of service or
facility operation. The Construction Contractor shall be required to
provide a 2-year warranty for no mold and/or mildew after the facility
has been accepted. In the event that mold and/or mildew is found
during this warranty period, the Construction Contractor shall, at no
cost to the Government, investigate and provide reports; remove the
mold and/or mildew; repair any damage due to investigation and/or
removal work; and replace (as necessary) all portions of a facility
where repair does not resolve the mold and/or mildew problem.
e. Scheduling: Control the sequence of construction to minimize the

absorption of VOCs by other building materials.
1.18.1.2 Moisture Contamination
a. Remove accumulated water and keep work dry.
b. Use dehumidification to remove moist, humid air from a work area.
c. Do not use combustion heaters or generators inside the building.
d. Protect porous materials from exposure to moisture.
e. Remove and replace items which remain damp for more than a few hours.
1.18.2 Requirements after Construction
After construction ends and prior to occupancy, conduct a building

flush-out or test the indoor air contaminant levels. Flush-out must be a
minimum two-weeks with MERV-13 filtration media as determined by
ASHRAE 52.2at 100 percent outside air. Air contamination testing must be
consistent with EPA's current Compendium of Methods for the Determination
of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air. After building flush-out or testing and
prior to occupancy, replace filtration media. Filtration media must have
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 18

a MERV of 13 as determined by ASHRAE 52.2, unless indicated otherwise.
Submit systems manual and O&M review report at 10 months after substantial
completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming material to be delivered

according to installation schedule and to be placed convenient to work
area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and
misapplication. Store and handle materials in a manner as to prevent loss
from weather and other damage. Keep materials, products, and accessories
covered and off the ground, and store in a dry, secure area. Prevent
contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or
staining. Protect all materials and installations from damage by the
activities of other trades.
3.2 COMMISSIONING PROCESS
The Commissioning Agent coordinates all activities. The following

activities outline the commissioning tasks and the general order in which
they occur.
a. Design Review and documentation consisting of:
(1) Documentation of Basis of Design and Project Requirements
(2) Design Development Review
(3) Construction Document Review
b. Commissioning Scoping Meeting
c. Commissioning Plan
d. Submittals Review
e. Start-Up/Pre-Functional Checklists
f. Functional Performance Testing
g. Short-Term Diagnostic Testing
h. Deficiency Report and Resolution Record
i. Operations and Maintenance Training
j. Record Documents Review
k. Final Commissioning Report and Documentation
l. Deferred testing due to unforeseen deferred tests, seasonal testing or

end of Warranty review.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 19

3.3 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING
Fully describe system test procedures identifying configuration and steps

required for each test. Provide appropriate documents so that another
party can repeat the tests with virtually identical results.
Submit documentation to the Contracting Officer verifying conformance with

the following standards:
3.3.1 Functional Performance Test Procedures
Develop functional performance test procedures for equipment and systems.

Identify specific test procedures and forms to verify and document proper
operation of each piece of equipment and system. Coordinate test
procedures with the contractor for feasibility, safety, equipment and
warranty protection.
Include the following information on the functional performance test forms:
a. System and equipment or component name(s)
b. Equipment location and ID number
c. Date
d. Project name
e. Participating parties
e. Instructions for setting up the test, including special cautions,

alarm limits, etc.
f. Specific step-by-step procedures to execute the test
g. Acceptance criteria of proper performance with a Yes / No check box
h. Comment section
3.3.2 Test Methods
Methods for functional performance testing and verification include direct

manipulation of system inputs (i.e. heating or cooling sensors),
manipulation of system inputs with the building automation system (i.e.
software override of sensor inputs), trend logs of system inputs and
outputs using the building automation system, or short-term monitoring of
system inputs and outputs using stand alone data loggers. The
Commissioning Agent determines which method, or combination of methods, is
most appropriate.
3.3.3 Setup
Perform each test procedure under conditions that simulate normal

operating conditions as closely as possible. Where equipment requires
integral safety devices to stop/prevent equipment operation unless minimum
safety standards or conditions are met, have functional performance test
procedures demonstrate the actual performance of safety shutoffs in a real
or closely-simulated conditions of failure.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 20

3.3.4 Sampling
The Commissioning Agent develops a sampling strategy when multiple

identical pieces of non-life-safety or non-critical equipment may be
functionally tested. If, after three test attempts at testing the
specified sample percentage, failures are still present, then test all
remaining units at the contractors' expense.
3.3.5 Functional Performance Testing Results
Coordinate, observe and record the results of the functional performance

testing. Coordinate retesting as necessary until satisfactory performance
is verified. Verify the intended operation of individual components and
system interactions under various conditions and modes of operation.
3.4 SHORT-TERM DIAGNOSTIC TESTING
After initial occupancy, perform short-term diagnostic testing, using the

building automation system to record system operation over a three week
period.
Investigate the dynamic interactions between components in the building

system. Evaluate the scheduling, the interaction between heating and
cooling, and the effectiveness of the HVAC system in meeting the comfort
requirements.
3.5 DEFICIENCY REPORT AND RESOLUTION RECORD
Document items of non-compliance in materials, installation or operation.
3.5.1 Non-Conformance
Immediately address observed non-conformance and deficiencies in terms of

notification to responsible parties, and provide recommended actions to
correct deficiencies.
Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during the tests

at the discretion of the Commissioning Agent. In such cases document the
deficiency and resolution on the procedure form.
3.5.1.1 Identified Deficiencies Correction Procedure
If there is no dispute on the deficiency and the responsibility to correct

it:
a. The Commissioning Agent documents the deficiency and the adjustments

or alterations required to correct it. The Contractor corrects the
deficiency and notifies the Commissioning Agent that the equipment is
ready to be retested.
b. The Commissioning Agent reschedules the test and the test is repeated.
If there is a dispute about a deficiency or who is responsible:
a. The deficiency is documented on the non-compliance form and a copy

given to the Green Consultant.
b. Resolutions are made at the lowest management level possible.

Additional parties are brought into the discussions as needed.
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 21

Contractor has responsibility for resolving construction

deficiencies. If a design revision is deemed necessary and approved
by the Contracting Officer, the Architect/Engineer has responsibility
for providing a design revision.
c. The Commissioning Agent documents the resolution process.
d. Once the interpretation and resolution have been decided, the

appropriate party corrects the deficiency and notifies the
Commissioning Agent that the equipment is ready to be retested. The
Commissioning Agent reschedules the test and the test is repeated
until satisfactory performance is achieved.
The Contractor is responsible for retesting costs.
3.6 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING
Provide complete operations and maintenance manuals, a training plan and

an operations and maintenance database.
Coordinate and review with the Contracting Officers' representative the

training programs for O&M personnel.
Develop the database from the O&M manual containing the information
required to start a preventative maintenance program.
Provide additional materials as necessary to stress and enhance the

importance of system interactions, troubleshooting, and long-term
preventative maintenance and operation.
3.7 FINAL COMMISSIONING REPORT
Compile and submit a Final Commissioning Report. Summarize all of the

tasks, findings, conclusions, and recommendations of the commissioning
process.
3.8 DEFERRED TESTING
3.8.1 Unforeseen Deferred Tests
If a test cannot be completed due to the building structure, required

occupancy condition, or other deficiency, the functional testing may be
delayed upon recommendation of the Commissioning Agent and the approval of
the Contracting Officer. Conduct these tests in the same manner as the
seasonal tests as soon as possible.
3.8.2 Deferred Tests
Schedule, coordinate, observe, and document additional testing for

seasonal variation in operations and control strategies during the
opposite season to verify performance of the HVAC system and controls.
Complete testing during the warranty period to fully test all sequences of
operation.
3.8.3 End-of-Warranty Review
Conduct end of warranty review prior to the end of the warranty period.
Review the current building operation with the facility maintenance
staff. Include in the review all outstanding issues from original or
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 22

seasonal testing. Interview facility staff to identify concerns with

building operation. Provide suggestions for improvements and assist
Contracting Officer in developing reports or documentation to remedy
problems.
Update O&M manuals and Record Documents as necessary due to the testing.
3.9 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM SCHEDULE
Commission the following equipment in this project.
System Equipment Check
HVAC System Chillers
Pumps
Evaporative Coolers
Boilers
Air Handlers
Packaged AC units
VRF System
Split System
DOAS
Motorized Dampers
Dehumidifiers
Exhaust fans
Supply fans
Lighting Controls Sweep or scheduled lighting

controls
Day light dimming controls
Lighting occupancy sensors
BAS System
Domestic Hot Water
Renewable Energy
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 23

System Equipment Check
Elevators and Controls
SECTION 01 45 00.00 20 Page 24

SECTION 01 45 35
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
02/15
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASCE 7 (2010; Errata 2011; Supp 1 2013) Minimum

Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures
ICC IBC (2012) International Building Code
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Perform Special Inspections in accordance with the Statement of Special

Inspections, Schedule of Special Inspections and Chapter 17 of ICC IBC.
The Statement of Special Inspections and Schedule of Special Inspections
are included as an attachment to this specification. Special Inspections
are to be performed by an independent third party and are intended to
ensure that the work of the prime contractor is in accordance with the
Contract Documents and applicable building codes. Special inspections do
not take the place of the three phases of control inspections performed by
the Contractor's QC Manager or any testing and inspections required by
other sections of the specifications.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.3.1 Continuous Special Inspections
Continuous Special Inspections is the constant monitoring of specific

tasks by a special inspector. These inspections must be carried out
continuously over the duration of the particular tasks.
1.3.2 Periodic Special Inspections
Periodic Special Inspections is Special Inspections by the special

inspector who is intermittently present where the work to be inspected has
been or is being performed.
1.3.3 Perform
Perform these Special Inspections tasks for each welded joint or member.
1.3.4 Observe
Observe these Special Inspections items on a random daily basis.
Operations need not be delayed pending these inspections.
1.3.5 Special Inspector (SI)
A qualified person retained by the contractor and approved by the

Contracting Officer as having the competence necessary to inspect a
particular type of construction requiring Special Inspections. The SI
must be an independent third party hired directly by the Prime Contractor.
1.3.6 Third Party
A third party inspector must not be company employee of the Contractor or

any Sub-Contractor performing the work to be inspected.
1.3.7 Contracting Officer
The Government official having overall authority for administrative

contracting actions. Certain contracting actions may be delegated to the
Contracting Officer's Representative (COR).
1.3.8 Contractor's Quality Control (QC) Manager
An individual retained by the prime contractor and qualified in accordance

with the Section 01 45 00.00 20 QUALITY CONTROL having the overall
responsibility for the contractor's QC organization.
1.3.9 Designer of Record (DOR)
A registered design professional contracted by the Government as an A/E

responsible for the overall design and review of submittal documents
prepared by others. The DOR is registered or licensed to practice their
respective design profession as defined by the statutory requirements of
the professional registration laws in state in which the design
professional works. The DOR is also referred to as the Engineer of Record
(EOR) in design code documents.
1.3.10 Statement of Special Inspections (SSI)
A document developed by the DOR identifying the material, systems,

components and work required to have Special Inspections.
1.3.11 Schedule of Special Inspections
A schedule which lists each of the required Special Inspections, the

extent to which each Special Inspections is to be performed, and the
required frequency for each in accordance with ICC IBC Chapter 17.
1.3.12 Designated Seismic System
Those nonstructural components that require design in accordance with

ASCE 7 Chapter 13 and for which the component importance factor, Ip, is
greater than 1.0. This designation applies to systems that are required
to be operational following the Design Earthquake for RC I - IV structures
and following the MCER for RC V structures. Designated Seismic Systems
will be identified by Owner and will have an Importance Factor Ip = 1.5.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Special Inspections Project Manual; G

Special Inspections Agency's Written Practices
NDT Procedures and Equipment Calibration Records
SD-06 Test Reports
Special Inspections Daily Reports

Special Inspections Biweekly Reports
SD-07 Certificates
Steel Joist Institute Membership

Certificate of Compliance
Special Inspector Qualifications; G
Qualification Records for NDT technicians
Interim Final Report of Special Inspections

Comprehensive Final Report of Special Inspections; G
1.5 SPECIAL INSPECTOR QUALIFICATIONS
Submit qualifications for each special inspector.
Certifying Associations
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
ACI American Concrete Institute
AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry
AWS American Welding Society
FM Factory Mutual
ICC International Code Council
NDT Nondestructive Testing
NICET National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies
UL Underwriters Laboratories
1.5.1 Steel Construction and High Strength Bolting
1.5.1.1 Special Inspector
a. ICC Structural Steel and Bolting Special Inspector certificate with

one year of related experience, or
b. Registered Professional Engineer with related experience
1.5.2 Welding Structural Steel
a. ICC Structural Welding Special Inspector certificate with one year of

related experience, or
b. AWS Certified Welding Inspector
1.5.3 Nondestructive Testing of Welds
NDT Level III Certificate
1.5.4 Cold Formed Steel Framing
a. ICC Structural Steel and Bolting Special Inspector certificate with

one year of related experience, or
b. ICC Commercial Building Inspector with one year of experience, or
c. ICC Residential Building Inspector with one year of experience, or
d. Registered Professional Engineer with related experience
1.5.5 Concrete Construction
a. ICC Reinforced Concrete Special Inspector Certificate with one year

of related experience, or
b. ACI Concrete Construction Special Inspector, or
c. NICET Concrete Technician Level III Certificate in Construction

Materials Testing, or
1.5.6 Masonry Construction
a. ICC Structural Masonry Special Inspector Certificate with one year of

related experience, or
1.5.7 Verification of Site Soil Condition, Fill Placement and Load-Bearing

Requirements
a. ICC Soils Special Inspector Certificate with one year of related

experience, or
b. NICET Soils Technician Level II Certificate in Construction Material

Testing, or
c. NICET Geotechnical Engineering Technician Level II Construction or

Generalist Certificate, or
d. Geologist-In-Training with one year of related experience, or
e. Registered Professional Engineer with related experience
1.5.8 Deep Foundations
a. NICET Soils Technician Level II Certificate in Construction Material

Testing, or
b. NICET Geotechnical Engineering Technician Level II Construction or

Generalist Certificate, or
c. Geologist-In-Training with one year of related experience, or
1.5.9 Sprayed Fire Resistant Material
a. ICC Spray-applied Fireproofing Special Inspector Certificate, or
b. ICC Fire Inspector I Certificate with one year of related experience,

or
c. Registered Professional Engineer with related experience
1.5.10 Fire-Resistant Penetrations and Joints
a. Passed the UL Firestop Exam with one year of related experience, or
b. Passed the FM Firestop Exam with one year of related experience, or
c. Registered Professional Engineer with related experience
1.5.11 Smoke Control
a. AABC Technician Certification with one year of related experience, or
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATOR SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
Special Inspections of fabricator's work performed in the fabricator's

shop is required to be inspected in accordance with the Statement of
Special Inspections and the Schedule of Special Inspections unless the
fabricator is certified by the approved agency to perform such work
without Special Inspections. Submit the following certifications to the
Contracting Officer for information to allow work performed in the
fabricator's shop to not be subjected to Special Inspections.
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Certified Fabrication

Plant, Category STD.
Steel Joist Institute Membership
At the completion of fabrication, submit a certificate of compliance, to

be included with the comprehensive final report of Special Inspections,
stating that the materials supplied and work performed by the fabricator
are in accordance the construction documents.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 RESPONSIBILITIES
3.1.1 Quality Control Manager
a. Verify the qualifications of all of the Special Inspectors.
b. Verify the qualifications of fabricators.
c. Maintain a 3- ring binder for the Special Inspector's daily and

biweekly reports. This file must be located in a conspicuous place in
the project trailer/office to allow review by the Contracting Officer
and the DOR.
d. Maintain a rework items list that includes discrepancies noted on the

Special Inspectors daily report.
3.1.2 Special Inspectors
a. Inspect all elements of the project for which the special inspector is
qualified to inspect and are identified in the Schedule of Special
Inspections.
b. Attend preparatory phase meetings related to the Definable Feature of

Work (DFOW) for which the special inspector is qualified to inspect.
c. Submit Special Inspections agency's written practices for the

monitoring and control of the agency's operations to include the
following:
(1) The agency's procedures for the selection and administration of

inspection personnel, describing the training, experience and
examination requirements for qualifications and certification of
inspection personnel.
(2) The agency's inspection procedures, including general inspection,

material controls, and visual welding inspection.
d. Submit qualification records for nondestructive testing (NDT)

technicians designated for the project.
e. Submit NDT procedures and equipment calibration records for NDT to be

performed and equipment to be used for the project.
f. Submit a copy of the daily reports to the QC Manager.
g. Discrepancies that are observed during Special Inspections must be

reported to the QC Manager for correction. If discrepancies are not
corrected before the special inspector leaves the site the observed
discrepancies must be documented in the daily report.
h. Submit a biweekly Special Inspection Report until all inspections are

complete. A report is required for each biweekly period in which
Special Inspections activity occurs, and must include the following:
(1) A brief summary of the work performed during the reporting time
frame.
(2) Changes and/or discrepancies with the drawings and specifications

that were observed during the reporting period.
(3) Discrepancies which were resolved or corrected.
(4) A list of nonconforming items requiring resolution.
5) All applicable test result including nondestructive testing

reports.
i. At the completion of each DFOW requiring Special Inspections, submit
an interim final report of Special Inspections that documents the
Special Inspections completed for that DFOW. Identify the inspector
responsible for each item inspected and corrections of all
discrepancies noted in the daily reports. The interim final report of
Special Inspections must be signed, dated and indicate the
certification of the special inspector qualifying them to conduct the
inspection.
j. At the completion of the project submit a comprehensive final report

of Special Inspections that documents the Special Inspections
completed for the project and corrections of all discrepancies noted
in the daily reports. The comprehensive final report of Special
Inspections must be signed, dated and indicate the certification of
the special inspector qualifying them to conduct the inspection.
3.2 DEFECTIVE WORK
Check work as it progresses, but failure to detect any defective work or

materials must in no way prevent later rejection if defective work or
materials are discovered, nor obligate the Contracting Officer to accept
such work.
SECTION 01 50 00
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

08/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AWWA C511 (2007) Standard for Reduced-Pressure

Principle Backflow Prevention Assembly

(FCCCHR)
FCCCHR List (continuously updated) List of Approved

Backflow Prevention Assemblies
FCCCHR Manual (10th Edition) Manual of Cross-Connection

Control
NFPA 241 (2013) Standard for Safeguarding

Construction,Alteration, and Demolition
Operations

3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National
Electrical Code

Lighting
MUTCD (2009) Manual on Uniform Traffic Control

Devices
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Construction Site Plan; G
Traffic Control Plan; G
Temporary Facilities Plan; G
SD-03 Product Data
Backflow Preventers; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Backflow Preventer Tests
SD-07 Certificates
Backflow Tester Certification
Backflow Preventers Certificate of Full Approval
1.3 CONSTRUCTION SITE PLAN
Prior to the start of work, submit a site plan showing the locations and
dimensions of temporary facilities (including layouts and details,
equipment and material storage area (onsite and offsite), and access and
haul routes, avenues of ingress/egress to the fenced area and details of
the fence installation. Identify any areas which may have to be graveled
to prevent the tracking of mud. Indicate if the use of a supplemental or
other staging area is desired. Show locations of safety and construction
fences, site trailers, construction entrances, trash dumpsters, temporary
sanitary facilities, and worker parking areas. Refer to Civil drawings
for location of temporary facilities.
1.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS CERTIFICATE
Certificate of Full Approval from FCCCHR List, University of Southern

California, attesting that the design, size and make of each backflow
preventer has satisfactorily passed the complete sequence of performance
testing and evaluation for the respective level of approval. Certificate
of Provisional Approval will not be acceptable.
1.4.1 Backflow Tester Certificate
Prior to testing, submit to the Contracting Officer certification issued

by the State or local regulatory agency attesting that the backflow tester
has successfully completed a certification course sponsored by the
regulatory agency. Tester must not be affiliated with any company
participating in any other phase of this Contract.
1.4.2 Backflow Prevention Training Certificate
Submit a certificate recognized by the State or local authority that

states the Contractor has completed at least 10 hours of training in
backflow preventer installations. The certificate must be current.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPORARY SIGNAGE
2.1.1 Bulletin Board
Immediately upon beginning of work, provide a weatherproof glass-covered

bulletin board not less than 36 by 48 inches in size for displaying the
Equal Employment Opportunity poster, a copy of the wage decision contained
in the contract, Wage Rate Information poster, and other information
approved by the Contracting Officer.
2.1.2 Project and Safety Signs
The requirements for the signs, their content, and location will be
presented at the PAK meeting, and specified in Section 01 58 00 PROJECT
IDENTIFICATION. Erect signs within 15 days after receipt of the notice to
proceed. Correct the data required by the safety sign daily, with light
colored metallic or non-metallic numerals.
2.2 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
2.2.1 Barricades
Erect and maintain temporary barricades to limit public access to

hazardous areas. Whenever safe public access to paved areas such as
roads, parking areas or sidewalks is prevented by construction activities
or as otherwise necessary to ensure the safety of both pedestrian and
vehicular traffic barricades will be required. Securely place barricades
clearly visible with adequate illumination to provide sufficient visual
warning of the hazard during both day and night.
2.2.2 Fencing
Provide fencing along the construction site at all open excavations and
tunnels to control access by unauthorized people. Refer to Civil drawings
for Contractor laydown areas and F.O.D. protection.
a. The safety fencing must be a high visibility orange colored, high

density polyethylene grid or approved equal, a minimum of 48 inches
high and maximum mesh size of 2 inches, supported and tightly secured
to steel posts located on maximum 10 foot centers, constructed at the
approved location. Install fencing to be able to restrain a force of
at least 250 pounds against it.
b. Enclose the project work area and Contractor lay-down area with a 8 ft
high chain link fence with 3 strands of bare wire and gates, UV light
resistant, plastic fabric mesh netting (similar to tennis court or
other screening). Color shall be green. Remove the fence upon
completion and acceptance of the work. Intent is to block (screen)
public view of the construction and to prevent foreign objects from
entering the flight line. Fence is to be secured by means of
anchoring into the concrete pavement. Patch and repair concrete after
removing fence.
c. In addition, prior to the start of work, enclose those areas at the

construction site which are not within the construction fence with a
temporary safety fence, including gates and warning signs, to protect
the public from construction activities. The safety fence shall match
the base standard color (or bright orange where it protects excavated
areas), shall be made of high density polyethylene grid or approved
equal, a minimum of 42 inches high, supported and tightly secured to
steel posts located on minimum 10 foot centers. Remove the fence from
the work site upon completion of the contract.
d. Provide a temporary 8 feet 0 inch high chain link fence with green
filter fabric, approximately 1,000 lf. from the SW corner of Building
229 to the NE corner of Building 240 to collect windblown F.O.D. This
temporary fence is to be held down by drilling anchors into the
concrete pavement. Remove the fence at the completion of construction
(24 months).
2.2.3 Temporary Wiring
Provide temporary wiring in accordance with NFPA 241 and NFPA 70.
Include frequent inspection of all equipment and apparatus.
2.2.4 Backflow Preventers
Reduced pressure principle type conforming to the applicable requirements

AWWA C511. Provide backflow preventers complete with 150 pound flanged
cast iron, mounted gate valve and strainer, 304 stainless steel or bronze,
internal parts. The particular make, model/design, and size of backflow
preventers to be installed must be included in the latest edition of the
List of Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies issued by the FCCCHR List
and be accompanied by a Certificate of Full Approval from FCCCHR List.
After installation conduct Backflow Preventer Tests and provide test
reports verifying that the installation meets the FCCCHR Manual Standards.
2.2.5 Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers
Provide an approved reduced pressure backflow prevention assembly at each

location where the Contractor taps into the Government potable water
supply. A certified tester(s) shall perform testing of backflow
preventer(s) for proper installation and operation and provide subsequent
tagging. Backflow preventer tests shall be performed using test
equipment, procedures, and certification forms conforming to those
outlined in the latest edition of the Manual of Cross-Connection Control
published by the FCCCHR Manual. Test and tag each reduced pressure
backflow preventer upon initial installation (prior to continued water
use) and monthly thereafter. Tag shall contain the following information:
make, model, serial number, dates of tests, results, maintenance
performed, and signature of tester. Record test results on certification
forms conforming to requirements cited
earlier in this paragraph.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EMPLOYEE PARKING
Contractor employees will park privately owned vehicles in an area

designated by the Contracting Officer. This area will be within
reasonable walking distance of the construction site. Contractor employee
parking must not interfere with existing and established parking
requirements of the government installation.
3.2 TEMPORARY BULLETIN BOARD
Locate the bulletin board at the project site in a conspicuous place

easily accessible to all employees, as approved by the Contracting Officer.
3.3 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES
3.3.1 Temporary Utilities
Materials may be new or used, must be adequate for the required usage, not
create unsafe conditions, and not violate applicable codes and standards.
3.3.2 Payment for Utility Services
a. Reasonable amounts of water and electricity will be made available to

the Contractor without charge.
b. The point at which the Government will deliver such utilities or

services and the quantity available is as indicated. Pay all costs
incurred in connecting, converting, and transferring the utilities to
the work. Make connections, including providing backflow-preventing
devices on connections to domestic water lines; providing meters; and
providing transformers; and make disconnections. Under no
circumstances will taps to base fire hydrants be allowed for obtaining
domestic water.
3.3.3 Meters and Temporary Connections
At the Contractors expense and in a manner satisfactory to the Contracting

Officer, provide and maintain necessary temporary connections,
distribution lines, and meter bases (Government will provide meters)
required to measure the amount of each utility used for the purpose of
determining charges. Notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, 5
working days before final electrical connection is desired so that a
utilities contract can be established. The Government will provide a
meter and make the final hot connection after inspection and approval of
the Contractor's temporary wiring installation. The Contractor will not
make the final electrical connection.
3.3.4 Advance Deposit
An advance deposit for utilities consisting of an estimated month's usage

or a minimum of $50.00 will be required. The last monthly bills for the
fiscal year will normally be offset by the deposit and adjustments will be
billed or returned as appropriate. Services to be rendered for the next
fiscal year, beginning 1 October, will require a new deposit.
Notification of the due date for this deposit will be mailed to the
Contractor prior to the end of the current fiscal year.
3.3.5 Final Meter Reading
Before completion of the work and final acceptance of the work by the
Government, notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, 5 working days
before termination is desired. The Government will take a final meter
reading, disconnect service, and remove the meters. Then remove all the
temporary distribution lines, meter bases, and associated paraphernalia.
Pay all outstanding utility bills before final acceptance of the work by
the Government.
3.3.6 Sanitation
a. Provide and maintain within the construction area minimum

field-type sanitary facilities approved by the Contracting Officer and
periodically empty wastes into a municipal, district, or station
sanitary sewage system, or remove waste to a commercial facility.
Obtain approval from the system owner prior to discharge into any
municipal, district, or commercial sanitary sewer system. Any
penalties and / or fines associated with improper discharge will be
the responsibility of the Contractor. Coordinate with the Contracting
Officer and follow station regulations and procedures when discharging
into the station sanitary sewer system. Maintain these conveniences
at all times without nuisance. Include provisions for pest control
and elimination of odors. Government toilet facilities will not be
available to Contractor's personnel.
b. Provide temporary sewer and sanitation facilities that are

self-contained units with both urinals and stool capabilities.
Ventilate the units to control odors and fumes and empty and clean
them at least once a week or more often if required by the Contracting
Officer. The doors shall be self-closing. The exterior of the unit
shall match the base standard color. Locate the facility behind the
construction fence or out of the public view.
3.3.7 Telephone
Make arrangements and pay all costs for telephone facilities desired.
3.3.8 Obstruction Lighting of Cranes
Provide a minimum of 2 aviation red or high intensity white obstruction

lights on temporary structures (including cranes) over 100 feet above
ground level. Light construction and installation must comply with
FAA AC 70/7460-1. Lights must be operational during periods of reduced
visibility, darkness, and as directed by the Contracting Officer. Refer
to Section 01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES for additional information.
3.3.9 Fire Protection
Provide temporary fire alarm and protection equipment for the protection
of personnel and property during construction, including all temporary
facilities deemed applicable by MCAS Yuma Fire Department. Remove debris
and flammable materials daily to minimize potential hazards.
3.4 TRAFFIC PROVISIONS
3.4.1 Maintenance of Traffic
a. Conduct operations in a manner that will not close any thoroughfare or

interfere in any way with traffic on railways or highways except with
written permission of the Contracting Officer at least 15 calendar
days prior to the proposed modification date, and provide a Traffic
Control Plan detailing the proposed controls to traffic movement for
approval. The plan must be in accordance with State and local
regulations and the MUTCD, Part VI. . Contractor may move oversized
and slow-moving vehicles to the worksite provided requirements of the
highway authority have been met.
b. Conduct work so as to minimize obstruction of traffic, and maintain
traffic on at least half of the roadway width at all times. Obtain

approval from the Contracting Officer prior to starting any activity
that will obstruct traffic.
c. Provide, erect, and maintain, at contractors expense, lights,

barriers, signals, passageways, detours, and other items, that may be
required by the Life Safety Signage, overhead protection authority
having jurisdiction.
3.4.2 Traffic Work
All work around/involving roadways, to include roadway excavations and

utility crossings, will be conducted in accordance with Manual of Traffic
Control Devices. Contractors shall provide and ensure appropriate road
closure and detour signs are established as necessary for motor traffic
management. All road closures shall be coordinated with the Contracting
Officer in advance. Self-illuminated (lighted) barricades shall be
provided during hours of darkness. Brightly-colored (orange) vests are
required for all personnel working in roadways. Road closures shall
require a road closure plan showing the location of signage.
3.4.3 Protection of Traffic
Maintain and protect traffic on all affected roads during the construction
period except as otherwise specifically directed by the Contracting
Officer. Measures for the protection and diversion of traffic, including
the provision of watchmen and flagmen, erection of barricades, placing of
lights around and in front of equipment the work, and the erection and
maintenance of adequate warning, danger, and direction signs, will be as
required by the State and local authorities having jurisdiction. Protect
the traveling public from damage to person and property. Minimize the
interference with public traffic on roads selected for hauling material to
and from the site. Investigate the adequacy of existing roads and their
allowable load limit. Contractor is responsible for the repair of any
damage to roads caused by construction operations.
3.4.4 Rush Hour Restrictions
Do not interfere with the peak traffic flows preceding and during normal
operations for MCAS Yuma without notification to and approval by the
3.4.5 Dust Control
Dust control methods and procedures must be approved by the Contracting

Officer. Treat dust abatement on access roads with applications of
calcium chloride, water sprinklers, or similar methods or treatment.
3.5 CONTRACTOR'S TEMPORARY FACILITIES
Contractor-owned or -leased trailers must be identified by Government

assigned numbers. Size and location of the number will comply with MCAS
Yuma. Apply the number to the trailer within 14 calendar days of
notification, or sooner, if directed by the Government.
3.5.1 Lay Down Area
On site laydown area(s) for contractor's site trailer, and materials and
equipment storage must remain within the construction limits of the
contract. Refer to Civil drawings for location of temporary facilities

and Contractor laydown areas.
3.5.2 Safety
Protect the integrity of any installed safety systems or personnel safety

devices. If entrance into systems serving safety devices is required, the
Contractor must obtain prior approval from the Contracting Officer. If it
is temporarily necessary to remove or disable personnel safety devices in
order to accomplish contract requirements, provide alternative means of
protection prior to removing or disabling any permanently installed safety
devices or equipment and obtain approval from the Contracting Officer.
3.5.3 Administrative Field Offices
Provide and maintain administrative field office facilities within the

construction area at the designated site. Government office and warehouse
facilities will not be available to the Contractor's personnel.
Temporary facilities (including trailers) shall be in like new condition.

Locate these facilities where directed and within the indicated operations
area. Storage of material/debris under such facilities is prohibited.
Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the stored property.
3.5.4 Quality Control Manager Records and Field Office
Provide on the jobsite an office with approximately 100 square feet of

useful floor area for the exclusive use of the QC Manager. Provide a
weathertight structure with adequate heating and cooling, toilet
facilities, lighting, ventilation, a 4 by 8 foot plan table, a standard
size office desk and chair, computer station, and working communications
facilities. Provide either a 1,500 watt radiant heater and a
window-mounted air conditioner rated at 9,000 Btus minimum or a
window-mounted heat pump of the same minimum heating and cooling ratings.
Provide a door with a cylinder lock and windows with locking hardware.
Make utility connections. Locate as directed. File quality control records
in the office and make available at all times to the Government. After
completion of the work, remove the entire structure from the site.
3.5.5 Storage Area and Location
Construct a temporary 6 foot high chain link fence around trailers and
materials. Include plastic strip inserts, color per Contracting Officer,
so that visibility through the fence is obstructed. Fence posts may be
driven, in lieu of concrete bases, where soil conditions permit. Do not
place or store Trailers, materials, or equipment outside the fenced area
unless such trailers, materials, or equipment are assigned a separate and
distinct storage area by the Contracting Officer away from the vicinity of
the construction site but within the installation boundaries. Trailers,
equipment, or materials must not be open to public view with the exception
of those items which are in support of ongoing work on any given day. Do
not stockpile materials outside the fence in preparation for the next
day's work. Park mobile equipment, such as tractors, wheeled lifting
equipment, cranes, trucks, and like equipment within the fenced area at
the end of each work day.
Contractor shall be responsible for security of his property. The Contract

Clause entitled "FAR 52.236-10, Operations and Storage Areas" and the
following apply:
The open site available for storage shall be determined at the

Pre-Construction meeting with the Contracting Officer. The storage area
shall be confined to the indicated operations area as indicated by the
3.5.6 Supplemental Storage Area
Upon Contractor's request, the Contracting Officer may designate another

or supplemental area for the Contractor's use and storage of trailers,
equipment, and materials. This area may not be in close proximity of the
construction site but will be within the installation boundaries. Fencing
of materials or equipment may or not be required at this site; however,
the Contractor is responsible for cleanliness and orderliness of the area
used and for the security of any material or equipment stored in this
area. Utilities will not be provided to this area by the Government.
3.5.7 Appearance of Trailers
a. Trailers utilized by the Contractor for administrative or material

storage purposes must present a clean and neat exterior appearance and
be in a state of good repair. Trailers which, in the opinion of the
Contracting Officer, require exterior painting or maintenance will not
be allowed on installation property.
3.5.8 Maintenance of Storage Area
a. Keep fencing in a state of good repair and proper alignment. Grassed

or unpaved areas, which are not established roadways, will be covered
with a layer of gravel as necessary to prevent rutting and the
tracking of mud onto paved or established roadways, should the
Contractor elect to traverse them with construction equipment or other
vehicles; gravel gradation will be at the Contractor's discretion.
Mow and maintain grass located within the boundaries of the
construction site for the duration of the project. Grass and
vegetation along fences, buildings, under trailers, and in areas not
accessible to mowers will be edged or trimmed neatly.
3.5.9 Security Provisions
Provide adequate outside security lighting at the Contractor's temporary

facilities. The Contractor will be responsible for the security of its
own equipment; in addition, the Contractor will notify the appropriate
law enforcement agency requesting periodic security checks of the
temporary project field office.
3.5.10 Weather Protection of Temporary Facilities and Stored Materials
Take necessary precautions to ensure that roof openings and other critical
openings in the building are monitored carefully. Take immediate actions
required to seal off such openings when rain or other detrimental weather
is imminent, and at the end of each workday. Ensure that the openings are
completely sealed off to protect materials and equipment in the building
from damage.
3.5.10.1 Building and Site Storm Protection
When a warning of gale force winds is issued, take precautions to minimize

danger to persons, and protect the work and nearby Government property.
Precautions must include, but are not limited to, closing openings;
removing loose materials, tools and equipment from exposed locations; and
removing or securing scaffolding and other temporary work. Close openings
in the work when storms of lesser intensity pose a threat to the work or
any nearby Government property.
3.6 GOVERNMENT FIELD OFFICE
3.6.1 Temporary Field Offices
Provide on the jobsite an office with approximately 6,000 square feet of

double-wide trailers large enough to accommodate 40 desks and chairs for
the exclusive use of the Government. Existing furniture to be GFGI.
Provide a weathertight structure with adequate heating and cooling, single
uni-sex toilet facility (one per trailer), lighting, air conditioning, and
40 working power, LAN, communications, and telephone outlets per desk.
Provide either a 1,500 watt radiant heater and a window-mounted air
conditioner rated at 9,000 Btus minimum or a window-mounted heat pump of
the same minimum heating and cooling ratings per trailer. Provide a door
with a cylinder lock and windows with locking hardware. Make all utility
connections, including water, sewer, power, telephone, fire alarm, and LAN.
Refer to Civil drawings for locations. After completion of the work,
remove the entire structure from the site.
3.6.2 Trailer-Type Toilet Facilities
Furnish and maintain a trailer-type mobile toilet facility with four (4)
toilet compartments; one for female, three for male acceptable to the
Contracting Officer and providing air conditioning, ventilation, and
lighting. Make all utility connections, including water, sanitary, power,
and fire detection. Duration shall be 24 months or when toilets in new
facilities are turned over to Government, whichever is less. Securely
anchor the trailer to the ground at all four corners to guard against
movement during high winds.
3.6.3 Temporary Canopies
Provide and maintain temporary canopies (multiple or single structures)

totaling an area of 40 feet by 64 feet. Provide a chain link fence
anchored to the ground. Anchor to concrete pad 11 feet by 58 feet, cut
and patch when removal of structures. Contractor required to submit to
GSE/I&L for approval of layout. Comply with all life safety, MCAS Yuma
Fire Department requirements. Maintain in structures until Building 234
service yard is ready for benefical occupancy.
3.6.4 Portable Toilets
Provide and maintain four (4) portable toilets North of Building 1229.
Locate within the existing service yard. Portable toilets shall comply
with Section 3.3.6 SANITATION paragraph above. Duration shall be 6 months
or when new toilets on existing facilities are completely finished.
3.6.5 Tent
Provide and maintain a two-sided 6,000 square feet tent just east of
Building 240 to house the existing paint and sanding booth while new paint
and sanding booth is installed in Building 230. Provide and maintain a
plastic ground cloth (spill pad) to prevent paint from being sprayed on
concrete pavement. Provide temporary power and lighting from Building
230. Comply with all life-safety and MCAS Yuma Fire Department
requirements. Remove the tent and the exisitng paint and sanding booths
once benefical occupancy is received for new paint and sanding booths.
3.7 PLANT COMMUNICATION
Whenever the Contractor has the individual elements of its plant so

located that operation by normal voice between these elements is not
satisfactory, the Contractor must install a satisfactory means of
communication, such as telephone or other suitable devices and made
available for use by Government personnel.
3.8 TEMPORARY PROJECT SAFETY FENCING
As soon as practicable, but not later than 15 days after the date
established for commencement of work, furnish and erect temporary project
safety fencing at the work site. Maintain the safety fencing during the
life of the contract and, upon completion and acceptance of the work, will
become the property of the Contractor and be removed from the work site.
3.9 CLEANUP
Remove construction debris, waste materials, packaging material and the

like from the work site daily. Any dirt or mud which is tracked onto
paved or surfaced roadways must be cleaned away. Store any salvageable
materials resulting from demolition activities within the fenced area
described above or at the supplemental storage area. Neatly stack stored
materials not in trailers, whether new or salvaged.
3.10 RESTORATION OF STORAGE AREA
Upon completion of the project remove the bulletin board, signs,

barricades, haul roads, and any other temporary products from the site.
After removal of trailers, materials, and equipment from within the fenced
area, remove the fence that will become the property of the Contractor.
Restore areas used by the Contractor for the storage of equipment or
material, or other use to the original or better condition. Remove gravel
used to traverse grassed areas and restore the area to its original
condition, including top soil and seeding as necessary.
SECTION 01 50 10
FOREIGN OBJECT DEBRIS (FOD) CONTROL & MANAGEMENT - AIRFIELDS

11/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 FOD CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT BACKGROUND
The purpose of this document is to establish a guideline for the military

prevent foreign object damage (FOD) to aircraft operating on/at Marine
Corps Air Station (MCAS) Yuma, AZ. Most FOD can be attributed to poor
construction site housekeeping, motor vehicle tires, airfield pavement
demolition, construction debris hauling/loading operations and
construction material hauling/placement and poor airfield pavement
construction/placement practices. An effective FOD prevention program
identifies potential problems, corrects negative factors, provides
awareness, effective employee training, and uses industry "lessons earned"
for continued improvement. The objective of the FOD Prevention
Program/Plan is to promote ground and flight safety and the preservation
of private and national assets. This process is intended to be used as a
minimum baseline for FOD prevention. The contractor shall apply, as a
minimum, the contents of this specification.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Foreign Object Debris (FOD)
A substance, debris or article alien to a vehicle or system which would

potentially cause damage.
1.2.2 Foreign Object Damage (FOD)
Any damage attributed to a foreign object that can be expressed in

physical or economic terms which may or may not degrade an aircraft's
performance characteristics.
1.2.3 Potential FOD
The condition where foreign object debris may cause damage and/or failure
should an aircraft operate in the vicinity of FOD. Examples are:
a. Metal or wire clippings solder balls, welding slag, electrical wiring,

wire nuts, wiring connectors, bolts, nuts, etc.
b. Tools, hardware, or debris left in the vicinity, or in a migratory

path of an aircraft parking apron, taxiway, runway or other
operating/maintenance facility.
c. Debris lying on runways, ramps and taxiways, to include, but not

limited to, rocks, stones, gravels, sand, mud, Portland cement
concrete rubble, asphalt debris, payment marking materials and other
earthen materials.
d. Propwash exhaust blasts
e. Inclement weather
f. Birds and other animals
g. Electro-Static Discharge (ESD)
h. Construction debris associated with this or other project not defined

above.
1.2.4 FOD Critical Area
Any area where flight hardware is in place and exposure to foreign objects
would potentially cause an aircraft engine or system to deteriorate,
malfunction or become damage.
1.2.5 Foreign Object Elimination (FOE)
A program or process used to assure a FOD-free product/system.
1.2.6 Tote Tray
A device for storing/carrying/transporting tools or equipment in a secure

manner to prevent inadvertent dropping: i.e., a tool holder, an apron with
pocket rings to which tools can be secured. Tote trays with lids will
have the lid secured to the tote tray body.
1.2.7 Clean As You Go
a. Clean the immediate area when work cannot continue.
b. Clean the immediate area when work debris has the potential to migrate
to an out of sight or inaccessible area and cause damage and/or give
the appearance of poor workmanship.
c. Clean the immediate area after work is completed and prior to

inspection.
d. Clean at the end of each shift.
e. If you drop something or hear something drop - pick it up!
1.2.8 Consumables: Supplies provided to workers that are expendable
a. Issued apparel Safety glasses
b. Glue, paint, sealant Rags
c. Sandpaper, brushes, applicators
d. Stock items such as rivets, washers, fasteners and other hardware.
1.2.9 Tether
A lanyard of sufficient strength (wire, rope, cable, etc.) attached to the

tool/equipment and to the user or fixed secure object. The tether should
be minimum length to preclude damage from tethered tool "free swing."
1.3 IMPLEMENTATION CONTROL METHODS
Establish and maintain an effective FOD prevention program that is planned

and implemented using the "continuous improvement" approach.
1.3.1 Basic Elements
1. FOD Prevention Training
2. Early design consideration for FOD prevention, resistance to damage,

foreign object entrapment, etc.
3. Assembly sequencing techniques that include proper care and use of

assembly/maintenance equipment and parts protective devices.
4. Handling of material
5. Housekeeping
6. Control of tools and personal items
7. Control of hardware/consumables
8. ncident investigation/reporting, "lessons learned"
9. Control of hazardous material
10. Access controls
11. Awareness/Employee Feedback
1.3.2 Preventive Practices
1. Follow procedures
2. Practice good housekeeping, "Clean-As-You-Go."
3. Account for all tools, hardware and equipment at specific intervals.
4. Provide worker awareness to FOD causes.
5. Establish designated storage areas for ladders, hoses, tool boxes and
other work aids.
6. FOD sweeping equipment operating continuously during airfield

construction activities.
1.4 MEASURING PERFORMANCE
The operational target in any FOD Prevention Program should always be

"zero" to enable visibility to problem areas and trends, provide
management and workers with inspection results, incident/mishap reports,
and feedback of progress. Methods providing this information are:
a. Visibility Charts - identify areas on a project site drawing depicting

where and when FOD is being identified or found.
b. Trend Analysis - Where have you been? Where are you going?
c. Report Card - a checklist of areas routinely inspected that shows

specific problem areas.
d. Performance Review - a review of worker conformance to standards or
expectations, i.e., FOD tire checks, load covering, FOD fence

corrective actions, spot sweeping, etc.
e. Customer comments, concerns, or complaints.
Workers need specific information about what is wrong before they can be
expected to improve processes. Let them know when they're doing well or
when they're not. Feedback is vital to process improvement.
1.5 TRAINING
The primary objectives of a FOD prevention training program is to increase

employee awareness to the causes and effects of FOD, promote active
involvement through specific techniques, and stress good work habits
through work disciplines.
The contractor shall establish a FOD prevention training Program for all
employees, to include subcontractors, suppliers and other contractor
support activities associated with design, development, manufacturing,
assembly, test, operations, repair, modification, refurbishment, and
maintenance is required as part of initial contract job orientation and on
a continuing basis.
Training subjects include:
a. Proper storage, shipping and handling of material, components, and

equipment.
b. Techniques to control debris
c. Housekeeping
d. Cleaning and inspection of construction equipment and vehicles
e. Accountability/control of tools and hardware
f. Control of personal items, equipment and consumables
g. Identification and reporting of construction site construction debris

and FOD to supervisors, foremen, job superintendent, quality control
manager, FOD manager, etc.
h. Quality workmanship ("Clean-As-You-Go," Inspection)
i. Flight line, taxiway and ramp control methods
j. How to report FOD incidents or potential incidents.
k. Operation and maintenance of airfield pavement sweeping/cleaning

equipment.
1.6 FOD CONTROL OFFICER
The construction contractor shall appoint in writing a Foreign Object

Damage (FOD) Prevention Manager (FOD-PM). The designated FOD-PM shall
develop and implement plans and programs to prevent and control foreign
object debris at and adjacent to the construction contract site, as well
on the transportation route(s) to and from the construction site, to
include, but not limited to the Plant 42 security access control gate.
The FOD-PM shall have the authority and organizational resources and
responsibility to identify and implement FOD preventive measures for the
construction project to prevent FOD. The FOD-PM's duties shall include:
a. Review and assess the FOD prevention program and make necessary
revisions.
b. Conduct scheduled audits of work areas to assess effectiveness of the

FOD prevention program.
c. Assure implementation of corrective actions for FOD prevention

throughout the organization.
d. Assure that causes of FOD incidents are thoroughly analyzed to define

essential corrective measures.
e. Notify affected contractor, subcontractor, supplier and project

associated organizations and personnel of unique FOD prevention
requirements.
f. Develop techniques and assign responsibilities for publication of

special FOD prevention instructions.
g. Review results of the FOD incident identification by contractor and

Government personnel and evaluate adequacy of corrective actions.
h. Evaluate the amount and kind of foreign objects found and how they
were found.
i. Review and approve FOD prevention training curricula designate

training personnel, and assure that personnel receive required
training.
j. Assure FOD prevention and control is discussed at all weekly tail gate
safety meetings. Record and annotate personnel in attendance and
topics discussed.
k. The FOD-PM shall have no other project duties and shall be solely
engaged in FOD issues only.
1.7 FOD PLAN DESIGN CONSIDERATION
Begin the reduction of damage potential and elimination of FOD hazards

with the FOD plan design process. Assure design includes, but is not
limited to:
a. Identify and eliminate foreign object entrapment areas
b. Identify and seal areas through which foreign objects can migrate
c. Identify the location, height, fabric materials and FOD fence weight
requirements for required FOD fencing.
d. Identify special access areas for vehicle tire inspection and clean-
out of foreign objects that could potentially cause damage
e. Provide FOD collection barrels properly marked and painted at the

entry points and at the job site.
f. Use fasteners with self-retaining features to secure high usage access

panels.
g. Ensure construction debris and construction material loads are

properly covered prior to transporting materials on to and off of the
flightline area.
h. Use proper dust control measures.
i. Clean and vacuum all construction demolition areas concurrently with
j. Procedures should include provisions for FOD incident feedback and

appropriate corrective action.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FOD FENCE
Contractor shall construct a foreign object debris (FOD) fence partition

to prevent the migration of FOD from their construction site and traffic
routes beginning at the start of project mobilization until demobilization.
2.1.1 FOD Fence Design and Fabrication
Contractor shall construct a FOD fence of materials suitable for the

specific project site and location on the airfield. Design and
fabrication of the FOD barrier shall consider the exposure of the FOD
fence to aircraft engine exhaust associated with all types/makes/models of
aircraft, to include jet engines, turbo-propeller and rotary wing,
operating in the vicinity of the construction project site.
The design height of the FOD fence shall consider that the horizontal wind
and aircraft exhaust/propeller wash is directly proportional to the height
of the fence. Height of the fence shall ensure that construction vehicle
operators can adequate see the FOD fence.
2.1.2 FOD Fence Materials
a. Engineered Fabric. Engineered fabric material used for construction

of a FOD fence shall be constructed of an engineered fabric consisting
of a polypropylene, stable fiber. The color of the fabric material
should be red, orange or yellow to highlight the construct site
boundary.
b. Plywood. Plywood panels utilized for construction of a FOD fence

shall be free of splinters, broken edges and other damaged edges. All
plywood panels shall be painted both sides. Oriented strand board
(OSB) and "particle board" shall not be used for FOD fencing.
c. Prefabricated barricades. Prefabricated barricades (i.e., Jersey,

precast Portland cement concrete, molded plastic, molded fiberglass,
etc.) shall be clean of debris and in good condition. The barricades
must rest on the ground along their full length. Joints between
adjacent barricades shall form a sealed space to prevent migration of
FOD through the joint. Plastic water filled barricades shall be
properly weighted in place to prevent movement under aircraft engine
exhaust, propeller wash or ambient wind. Leaking barricades shall not
be used. Leaking barricades will be replaced.
d. Chain-link fencing. Chain-link fencing fabric installed by itself

shall not be used acceptable FOD barricade fencing. Chain-link
fencing fabric installed in a four sided frame may be used as a
structural system used to support for engineered fabric or plywood.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FOD Fence Installation
a. The bottom of the FOD fence screen fabric shall be continuously in

contact with the adjacent pavement or adjacent ground surface to
prevent the migration of FOD below the fence line. Contractor shall
utilize steel shapes, steel pipe, common lumber sizes or other means
to weight the bottom of the FOD fence to prevent the blowing or other
migration of FOD through the bottom of the FOD fence.
b. Use of sand bags to anchor the FOD fence fabric or support structure
is not allowed due to their characteristic to leak sand/gravel
3.2 FOD SWEEPING
a. The Prime contractor shall be responsible for all FOD sweeping, to

include all work performed by their subcontractors at all times.
b. Contractor shall provide adequate type and number of commercial truck

mounted vacuum sweepers to remove from all airfield pavement areas
utilized by the contractor during the performance of this contract.
c. All airfield pavements encompassed by the contracted project site and

all haul routes to/from the construction site shall be swept and
maintained FOD free at all times.
d. FOD sweeping shall include the construction area inside of the

contractor constructed FOD fence perimeter, as well as a minimum of 10
feet exterior of the FOD fence perimeter.
e. All construction sweeping/vacuuming equipment shall be in good working

order. Sweeping brushes that drop or leave brush bristle fibers on
the airfield pavement surface shall be removed from the project site.
Metallic sweeping brushes shall not be used.
f. Rotary (kick) broom use shall be limited to the area inside of the FOD
fence area.
All airfield sweeping equipment shall be equipped with dust control

measures. Water misting/spraying systems shall not be operated in a
manner that results in mud build-up or caking of dust or fine sand
particulates on the brushes or on the swept pavement surface.
3.3 VEHICLE INSPECTION AREA
The contractor shall identify required FOD inspection areas for all
contractor, subcontractor, supplier and construction support activity
vehicle and vehicle tire inspection entering the flight line area and
leaving the construction site. Provide project specific signage, site
markings and FOD storage containers.
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20
TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

11/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

EPA 530/F-93/004 (1993; Rev O; Updates I, II, IIA, IIB, and

III) Test Methods for Evaluating Solid
Waste (Vol IA, IB, IC, and II) (SW-846)
EPA 833-R-060-04 (2007) Developing Your Storm Water

Pollution Prevention Plan, a Guide for
Construction Sites
29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards
29 CFR 1910.120 Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency

Response
40 CFR 112 Oil Pollution Prevention
40 CFR 112.7 General Requirements for Spill Prevention,

Control, and Countermeasure Plans
40 CFR 122.26 Storm Water Discharges (Applicable to

State NPDES Programs, see section 123.25)
40 CFR 241 Guidelines for Disposal of Solid Waste
40 CFR 243 Guidelines for the Storage and Collection

of Residential, Commercial, and
Institutional Solid Waste
40 CFR 258 Subtitle D Landfill Requirements
40 CFR 260 Hazardous Waste Management System: General
40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous

Waste
40 CFR 262 Standards Applicable to Generators of

Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 263 Standards Applicable to Transporters of

Hazardous Waste
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 1

40 CFR 264 Standards for Owners and Operators of

Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and
Disposal Facilities
40 CFR 265 Interim Status Standards for Owners and

Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment,
Storage, and Disposal Facilities
40 CFR 266 Standards for the Management of Specific

Hazardous Wastes and Specific Types of
Hazardous Waste Management Facilities
40 CFR 268 Land Disposal Restrictions
40 CFR 270 EPA Administered Permit Programs: The

Hazardous Waste Permit Program
40 CFR 271 Requirements for Authorization of State

Hazardous Waste Programs
40 CFR 272 Approved State Hazardous Waste Management

Programs
40 CFR 273 Standards For Universal Waste Management
40 CFR 279 Standards for the Management of Used Oil
40 CFR 280 Technical Standards and Corrective Action

Requirements for Owners and Operators of
Underground Storage Tanks (UST)
40 CFR 300 National Oil and Hazardous Substances

Pollution Contingency Plan
40 CFR 355 Emergency Planning and Notification
40 CFR 372-SUBPART D Specific Toxic Chemical Listings
40 CFR 60 Standards of Performance for New

Stationary Sources
40 CFR 63 National Emission Standards for Hazardous

Air Pollutants for Source Categories
40 CFR 761 Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs)

Manufacturing, Processing, Distribution in
Commerce, and Use Prohibitions
40 CFR 82 Protection of Stratospheric Ozone
49 CFR 171 General Information, Regulations, and

Definitions
49 CFR 172 Hazardous Materials Table, Special

Provisions, Hazardous Materials
Communications, Emergency Response
Information, and Training Requirements
49 CFR 173 Shippers - General Requirements for
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 2

Shipments and Packagings
49 CFR 178 Specifications for Packagings
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Sediment
Soil and other debris that have eroded and have been transported by runoff
water or wind.
1.2.2 Solid Waste
Garbage, refuse, debris, sludge, or other discharged material, including

solid, liquid, semisolid, or contained gaseous materials resulting from
domestic, industrial, commercial, mining, or agricultural operations.
Types of solid waste typically generated at construction sites may include:
a. Green waste: The vegetative matter from landscaping, land clearing

and grubbing, including, but not limited to, grass, bushes, scrubs,
small trees and saplings, tree stumps and plant roots. Marketable
trees, grasses and plants that are indicated to remain, be re-located,
or be re-used are not included.
b. Surplus soil: Existing soil that is in excess of what is required for

this work, including aggregates intended, but not used, for on-site
mixing of concrete, mortars and paving. Contaminated soil meeting the
definition of hazardous material or hazardous waste is not included.
c. Debris: Non-hazardous solid material generated during the

construction, demolition, or renovation of a structure which exceeds
2.5 inch particle size that is: a manufactured object; plant or animal
matter; or natural geologic material (e.g. cobbles and boulders),
broken or removed concrete, masonry, and rock asphalt paving;
ceramics; roofing paper and shingles. Inert materials may not be
reinforced with or contain ferrous wire, rods, accessories and
weldments. A mixture of debris and other material such as soil or
sludge is also subject to regulation as debris if the mixture is
comprised primarily of debris by volume, based on visual inspection.
d. Wood: Dimension and non-dimension lumber, plywood, chipboard,

hardboard. Treated and/or painted wood that meets the definition of
lead contaminated or lead based contaminated paint is not included.
e. Scrap metal: Scrap and excess ferrous and non-ferrous metals such as
reinforcing steel, structural shapes, pipe and wire that are recovered
or collected and disposed of as scrap. Scrap metal meeting the
definition of hazardous material or hazardous waste is not included.
f. Paint cans: Metal cans that are empty of paints, solvents, thinners
and adhesives. If permitted by the paint can label, a thin dry film
may remain in the can.
g. Recyclables: Materials, equipment and assemblies such as doors,

windows, door and window frames, plumbing fixtures, glazing and
mirrors that are recovered and sold as recyclable. Metal meeting the
definition of lead contaminated or lead based paint contaminated may
not be included as recyclable if sold to a scrap metal company. Paint
cans may not be included as recyclable if sold to a scrap metal company.
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 3

h. Hazardous Waste: By definition, to be a hazardous waste a material

must first meet the definition of a solid waste. Hazardous waste and
hazardous debris are special cases of solid waste. They have
additional regulatory controls and must be handled separately. They
are thus defined separately in this document.
Material not regulated as solid waste are: nuclear source or byproduct

materials regulated under the Federal Atomic Energy Act of 1954 as
amended; suspended or dissolved materials in domestic sewage effluent
or irrigation return flows, or other regulated point source
discharges; regulated air emissions; and fluids or wastes associated
with natural gas or crude oil exploration or production.
1.2.3 Hazardous Debris
As defined in Solid Waste paragraph, debris that contains listed hazardous

waste (either on the debris surface, or in its interstices, such as pore
structure) per 40 CFR 261; or debris that exhibits a characteristic of
hazardous waste per 40 CFR 261.
1.2.4 Chemical Wastes
This includes salts, acids, alkalizes, herbicides, pesticides, and organic

chemicals.
1.2.5 Garbage
Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking, dispensing, and

consumption of food.
1.2.6 Hazardous Waste
Any discarded material, liquid, solid, or gas, which meets the definition
of hazardous material or is designated hazardous waste by the
Environmental Protection Agency or State Hazardous Control Authority as
defined in 40 CFR 260, 40 CFR 261, 40 CFR 262, 40 CFR 263, 40 CFR 264,
40 CFR 265, 40 CFR 266, 40 CFR 268, 40 CFR 270, 40 CFR 271, 40 CFR 272,
40 CFR 273, 40 CFR 279, and 40 CFR 280.
1.2.7 Hazardous Materials
Hazardous materials as defined in 49 CFR 171 and listed in 49 CFR 172.
Hazardous material is any material that:
a. Is regulated as a hazardous material per 49 CFR 173, or
b. Requires a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) per 29 CFR 1910.120, or
c. During end use, treatment, handling, packaging, storage,

transpiration, or disposal meets or has components that meet or have
potential to meet the definition of a hazardous waste as defined by
40 CFR 261 Subparts A, B, C, or D.
Designation of a material by this definition, when separately regulated or

controlled by other instructions or directives, does not eliminate the
need for adherence to that hazard-specific guidance which takes precedence
over this instruction for "control" purposes. Such material include
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 4

ammunition, weapons, explosive actuated devices, propellants,

pyrotechnics, chemical and biological warfare materials, medical and
pharmaceutical supplies, medical waste and infectious materials, bulk
fuels, radioactive materials, and other materials such as asbestos,
mercury, and polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs). Nonetheless, the exposure
may occur incident to manufacture, storage, use and demilitarization of
these items.
1.2.8 Waste Hazardous Material (WHM)
Any waste material which because of its quantity, concentration, or

physical, chemical, or infectious characteristics may pose a substantial
hazard to human health or the environment and which has been so
designated. Used oil not containing any hazardous waste, as defined
above, falls under this definition.
1.2.9 Oily Waste
Those materials which are, or were, mixed with used oil and have become
separated from that used oil. Oily wastes also means materials, including
wastewaters, centrifuge solids, filter residues or sludges, bottom
sediments, tank bottoms, and sorbents which have come into contact with
and have been contaminated by, used oil and may be appropriately tested
and discarded in a manner which is in compliance with other State and
local requirements.
This definition includes materials such as oily rags, "kitty litter"

sorbent clay and organic sorbent material. These materials may be land
filled provided that:
a. It is not prohibited in other State regulations or local ordinances
b. The amount generated is "de minimus" (a small amount)
c. It is the result of minor leaks or spills resulting from normal process

operations
d. All free-flowing oil has been removed to the practical extent possible
Large quantities of this material, generated as a result of a major spill

or in lieu of proper maintenance of the processing equipment, are a solid
waste. As a solid waste, a hazardous waste determination must be performed
prior to disposal. As this can be an expensive process, it is recommended
that this type of waste be minimized through good housekeeping practices
and employee education.
1.2.10 Regulated Waste
Those solid wastes that have specific additional Federal, state, or local
controls for handling, storage, or disposal.
1.2.11 Class I and II Ozone Depleting Substance (ODS)
Class I ODS is defined in Section 602(a) of The Clean Air Act and includes
the following chemicals:
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 5

chlorofluorocarbon-11 (CFC-11)
halon-1211
halon-1301
halon-2402
carbon tetrachloride
methyl bromide
methyl chloroform
Class II ODS is defined in Section 602(s) of The Clean Air Act and
includes the following chemicals:
hydrochlorofluorocarbon-21 (HCFC-21)
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 6

SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 7

1.2.12 Universal Waste
The universal waste regulations streamline collection requirements for

certain hazardous wastes in the following categories: batteries,
pesticides, mercury-containing equipment (e.g., thermostats) and lamps
(e.g., fluorescent bulbs). The rule is designed to reduce hazardous waste
in the municipal solid waste (MSW) stream by making it easier for
universal waste handlers to collect these items and send them for
recycling or proper disposal. These regulations can be found at 40 CFR 273.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

NESHAP FORM; G
Preconstruction Survey; G
Solid Waste Management Plan and Permit; G
Regulatory Notifications; G
Environmental Protection Plan; G
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan; G
Storm Water Notice of Intent (for NPDES coverage under the general
permit for construction activities); G
Dirt and Dust Control Plan
Contractor Hazardous Material Inventory Log; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Laboratory Analysis
Disposal Requirements
Erosion and Sediment Control Inspection Reports
Storm Water Inspection Reports for General Permit
Solid Waste Management Report; G
SD-07 Certificates
Contractor 40 CFR employee training records; G
ECATTS certificate of completion
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 8

Some of the records listed below are also required as part of

other submittals. For the "Records" submittal, maintain on-site a
separate three-ring Environmental Records binder and submit at the
completion of the project. Make separate parts to the binder
corresponding to each of the applicable sub items listed below.
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan compliance notebook; G
Waste Determination Documentation
Disposal Documentation for Hazardous and Regulated Waste
Contractor 40 CFR Employee Training Records
Solid Waste Management Permit
Solid Waste Management Report
Contractor Hazardous Material Inventory Log; G
Hazardous Waste/Debris Management
Regulatory Notifications
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
Provide and maintain, during the life of the contract, environmental

protection as defined. Plan for and provide environmental protective
measures to control pollution that develops during normal construction
practice. Plan for and provide an environmental manager, and
environmental protective measures required to correct conditions or reduce
environmental impacts that develop during the construction of permanent or
temporary environmental features associated with the project. Comply with
Federal, State, and local regulations pertaining to the environment,
including water, air, solid waste, hazardous waste and substances, oily
substances, and noise pollution.
The Contractor may be required to promptly conduct tests and procedures

for the purpose of assessing whether construction operations are in
compliance with Applicable Environmental Laws. Analytical work shall be
done by qualified personnel and laboratories; and where required by law,
the laboratories shall be certified.
The contractor shall comply with all applicable Arizona Revised Statutes
(ARS). ARS that are known to apply to this project are ARS Title
49-Chapter 2-Article 3.1-Arizona Pollutant Discharge Elimination System
Program, ARS Title 49-Chapter 4-Solid Waste Management, and ARS Title
49-Chapter 5-Hazardous Waste Disposal.
1.4.1 Contractor Liabilities for Environmental Protection
The Contractor is advised that this project and the station are subject to
Federal, State, and local regulatory agency inspections to review
compliance with environmental laws and regulations. The Contractor will
fully cooperate with any representative from any Federal, State or local
regulatory agency who may visit the job site and will provide immediate
notification to the Contracting Officer, who will accompany them on any
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 9

subsequent site inspections. The Contractor will complete, maintain, and

make available to the Contracting Officer, station, or regulatory agency
personnel all documentation relating to environmental compliance under
applicable Federal, State and local laws and regulations. The Contractor
will immediately notify the Contracting Officer if a Notice of Violation
(NOV) is issued to the Contractor.
The Contractor will be responsible for all damages to persons or property

resulting from Contractor fault or negligence as well as for the payment
of any civil fines or penalties which may be assessed by any Federal,
State or local regulatory agency as a result of the Contractor's or any
subcontractor's violation of any applicable Federal, State or local
environmental law or regulation. Should a Notice of Violation (NOV),
Notice of Noncompliance (NON), Notice of Deficiency (NOD), or similar
regulatory agency notice be issued to the Government as facility
owner/operator on account of the actions or inactions of the Contractor or
one of its subcontractors in the performance of work under this contract,
the Contractor will fully cooperate with the Government in defending
against regulatory assessment of any civil fines or penalties arising out
of such actions or inactions.
1.4.2 Environmental Compliance Assessment Training and Tracking System

(ECATTS)
The QC Manager is responsible for environmental compliance on projects

unless an Environmental Manager is named. The QC Manager (and alternative
QC Manager) or Environmental Manager must complete ECATTS training prior
to starting respective portions of on-site work under this contract. If
personnel changes occur for any of these positions after starting work,
replacement personnel must complete ECATTS training within 14 days of
assignment to the project
Submit an ECATTS certificate of completion for personnel who have

completed the required "Environmental Compliance Assessment Training and
Tracking System (ECATTS)" training. This training is web-based and can be
accessed from any computer with Internet access using the following
instructions.
Register for NAVFAC Environmental Compliance Training and Tracking System,

by logging on to http://navfac.ecatts.com/. Obtain the password for
registration from the Contracting Officer.
This training has been structured to allow contractor personnel to receive

credit under this contract and also to carry forward credit to future
contracts. Contractors shall ensure that the QC Manager (and alternate QC
Manager) or Environmental Manager review their training plans for new
modules or updated training requirements prior to beginning work. Some
training modules are tailored for specific State regulatory requirements;
therefore, Contractors working in multiple states will be required to
re-take modules tailored to the state where the contract work is being
performed.
ECATTS is available for use by all contractor and subcontractor personnel

associated with this project. These other personnel are encouraged (but
not required) to take the training and may do so at their discretion.
1.4.3 Conformance with the Environmental Management System
Perform work under this contract consistent with the policy and objectives
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 10

identified in the installation's Environmental Management System (EMS).

Perform work in a manner that conforms to objectives and targets,
environmental programs and operational controls identified by the EMS.
Provide monitoring and measurement information as necessary to address
environmental performance relative to environmental, energy, and
transportation management goals. In the event an EMS nonconformance or
environmental noncompliance associated with the contracted services,
tasks, or actions occurs, take corrective and/or preventative actions. In
addition, ensure that employees are aware of their roles and
responsibilities under the EMS and how these EMS roles and
responsibilities affect work performed under the contract.
Ensure that employees receive applicable environmental and occupational

health and safety training, and keep up to date on regulatory required
specific training for the type of work to be conducted onsite. All
on-site Contractor personnel, and their subcontractor personnel,
performing tasks that have the potential to cause a significant
environmental impact shall be competent on the basis of appropriate
education, training or experience. Upon contract award, the Contracting
Officer's Representative will notify the installation's EMS coordinator to
arrange EMS training. Refer to Section 01 57 19.01 20, SUPPLEMENTAL
TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS for additional site specific EMS
requirements related to construction. The installation's EMS coordinator
will identify training needs associated with environmental aspects and the
EMS, and arrange training or take other action to meet these needs.
Provide training documentation to the Contracting Officer. The EMS
coordinator must retain associated records.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1 Preconstruction Survey
Perform a Preconstruction Survey of the project site with the Contracting

Officer, and take photographs showing existing environmental conditions in
and adjacent to the site. Submit a report for the record.
1.5.2 Laboratory Analysis
Submit a copy of a laboratory analysis of solid waste and debris with the
potential of becoming classified as a hazardous waste (i.e., abrasive/sand
blasting debris, etc.). Waste stream determinations are required at the
point of generation and must sufficiently document whether the waste will
be a solid waste, hazardous waste, or Resource Conservation and Recovery
Act (RCRA) exempt waste. Determinations must use EPA approved methods and
provide written rational for whether the waste is classified as hazardous
or non-hazardous. The Contractor will bear the cost of the waste stream
determinations, and the Contracting Officer reserves the right to request
waste stream determinations on questionable waste streams.
1.5.3 Lead and Asbestos Materials
In addition to required forms, the Contractor shall comply with the

following attached forms and requirements (Coordinate with MCAS Yuma
Environmental Office):
1. Lead And Asbestos Material Removal Information Form.
2. Asbestos NESHAP Notification Forms Renovation And Demolition

Activities.
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 11

3. Air Quality And Emergency Planning And Community Right-To-Know Act

(EPCRA) Requirements.
4. Asbestos And Lead Inspection Memorandum.
5. Model OSHA Written Compliance Plan For Lead In Construction.
6. Model OSHA Written Compliance Plan For Asbestos In Construction.
7. Engineering Review Notice Of Intent To Discharge Sewage Collection

System
1.5.4 NESHAP FORM
Contractor to submit the "NESHAP" filled-out form for all demolition taking
place on site. Submit form to MCAS Yuma Environmental Office two weeks
before any demolition takes place; addressed to Vivian Blevins.
1.5.5 Regulatory Notifications
MCAS Yuma Environmental Department will make all regulatory notifications

on behalf of the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for notifying
the MCAS Yuma Environmental Department of all regulatory notification
requirements in accordance with Federal, State and local regulations. The
Contractor will forward copies to the Contracting Officer prior to
commencement of work activities. Typically, regulatory notifications must
be provided for the following (this listing is not all inclusive):
demolition, renovation, NPDES defined site work, remediation of controlled
substances (asbestos, hazardous waste, lead paint). Notifications, Notices
of Intent (NOIs), etc. shall be included as part of the Environmental
Protection Plan required in this Section. MCAS Yuma is typically the
interface for any notifications, etc.
1.5.6 Environmental Brief
Attend an environmental brief to be included in the preconstruction

meeting. Provide the following information: types, quantities, and use
of hazardous materials that will be brought onto the activity; types and
quantities of wastes/wastewater that may be generated during the contract.
Discuss the results of the Preconstruction Survey at this time.
Prior to initiating any work on site, meet with the Contracting Officer
and activity environmental staff to discuss the proposed Environmental
Protection Plan. Develop a mutual understanding relative to the details
of environmental protection, including measures for protecting natural
resources, required reports, required permits, permit requirements, and
other measures to be taken.
1.5.7 Environmental Manager
Appoint in writing an Environmental Manager for the project site. The

Environmental Manager will be directly responsible for coordinating
contractor compliance with Federal, State, local, and station
requirements. The Environmental Manager will ensure compliance with
Hazardous Waste Program requirements (including hazardous waste handling,
storage, manifesting, and disposal); implement the Environmental
Protection Plan; ensure that all environmental permits are obtained,
maintained, and closed out; ensure compliance with Storm Water Program
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 12

Management requirements; ensure compliance with Hazardous Materials

(storage, handling, and reporting) requirements; and coordinate any
remediation of regulated substances (lead, asbestos, PCB transformers).
This can be a collateral position; however the person in this position
must be trained to adequately accomplish the following duties: ensure
waste segregation and storage compatibility requirements are met; inspect
and manage Satellite Accumulation areas; ensure only authorized personnel
add wastes to containers; ensure all Contractor personnel are trained in
40 CFR requirements in accordance with their position requirements;
coordinate removal of waste containers; and maintain the Environmental
Records binder and required documentation, including environmental permits
compliance and close-out.
1.5.8 Contractor 40 CFR Employee Training Records
Prepare and maintain employee training records throughout the term of the
contract meeting applicable 40 CFR requirements. Ensure every employee
completes a program of classroom instruction or on-the-job training that
teaches them to perform their duties in a way that ensures compliance with
Federal, State and local regulatory requirements for RCRA Large Quantity
Generator. Provide a Position Description for each employee, by
subcontractor, based on the Davis-Bacon Wage Rate designation or other
equivalent method, evaluating the employee's association with hazardous
and regulated wastes. This Position Description will include training
requirements as defined in 40 CFR 265 for a Large Quantity Generator
facility. Submit these training records to the Contracting Officer at the
conclusion of the project, unless otherwise directed.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN (EPP)
Prior to initiating any work on site, meet with the Contracting Officer to
discuss the proposed Environmental Protection Plan and develop a mutual
understanding relative to the details of environmental protection,
including measures for protecting natural resources, required reports, and
other measures to be taken. This meeting shall include verification of
environmental monitoring well locations within the contractor's work area
with the MCAS Yuma Environmental Department. The Environmental Protection
Plan will be submitted in the following format and will, at a minimum,
address the following elements (also refer to paragraph entitled
"Protection of Natural Resources" in this section):
a. Description of the Environmental Protection Plan
(1) General overview and purpose
(a) A brief description of each specific plan required by

environmental permit or elsewhere in this contract.
(b) The duties and level of authority assigned to the person(s) on

the job site that oversee environmental compliance.
(c) A copy of any standard or project specific operating

procedures that will be used to effectively manage and protect the
environment on the project site.
(d) Communication and training procedures that will be used to

convey environmental management requirements to contractor
employees and subcontractors.
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 13

(e) Emergency contact information contact information (office

phone number, cell phone number, and e-mail address).
(2) General site information
(3) A letter signed by an officer of the firm appointing the

Environmental Manager and stating that he/she is responsible for
managing and implementing the Environmental Program as described
in this contract. Include in this letter the Environmental
Manager's authority to direct the removal and replacement of
non-conforming work.
b. Management of Natural Resources
(1) Land resources
(2) Tree protection
(3) Replacement of damaged landscape features
(4) Temporary construction
c. Protection of Historical and Archaeological Resources
(1) Objectives
(2) Methods
d. Storm Water Management and Control
(1) Ground cover
(2) Erodible soils
(3) Temporary measures
(a) Mechanical retardation and control of runoff
(b) Vegetation and mulch
(4) Effective selection, implementation and maintenance of Best

Management Practices (BMPs).
(5) Provide a "Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan" (SWPPP) per

paragraph 3.1.2.1 of this section.
e. Protection of the Environment from Waste Derived from Contractor

Operations
(1) Control and disposal of solid and sanitary waste. If Section

01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT is included
in the contract, submit the plan required by that section as part
of the Environmental Protection Plan.
(2) Control and disposal of hazardous waste (Hazardous Waste

Management Section)
This item will consist of the management procedures for all

hazardous waste to be generated. The elements of those procedures
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 14

will coincide with the Activity Hazardous Waste Management Plan.

A copy of the Activity Hazardous Waste Management Plan will be
provided by the Contracting Officer. As a minimum, include the
following:
(a) Procedures to be employed to ensure a written waste

determination is made for appropriate wastes which are to be
generated;
(b) Sampling/analysis plan;
(c) Methods of hazardous waste accumulation/storage (i.e., in

tanks and/or containers);
(d) Management procedures for storage, labeling, transportation,

and disposal of waste (treatment of waste is not allowed unless
specifically noted);
(e) Management procedures and regulatory documentation ensuring

disposal of hazardous waste complies with Land Disposal
Restrictions (40 CFR 268);
(f) Management procedures for recyclable hazardous materials such

as lead-acid batteries, used oil, and the like;
(g) Used oil management procedures in accordance with 40 CFR 279;
(h) Pollution prevention\hazardous waste minimization procedures;
(i) Plans for the disposal of hazardous waste by permitted

facilities;
(j) Procedures to be employed to ensure all required employee

training records are maintained.
f. Prevention of Releases to the Environment
(1) Procedures to prevent releases to the environment
(2) Notifications in the event of a release to the environment
g. Regulatory Notification and Permits
List what notifications and permit applications must be made.

Some permits require up to 90 days to obtain. Demonstrate that
those permits have been obtained or applied for by including
copies of all applicable, environmental permits. The Plan will
not be approved until all permits have been obtained.
h. Clean Air Act Compliance
(1) Identify air pollution generating equipment or processes that

may require federal, state, or local permits under the clean air
act.
(2) Identify portable and stationary internal combustion engines

(ICE's) that will be supplied, utilized or serviced. Address
compliance with 40 CFR 60 Subpart IIII, 40 CFR 63 Subpart ZZZZ,
and local regulations as applicable. At minimum, include the
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 15

make, model, serial number, manufacture date, size (engine bhp),

and EPA emission certification status of each engine.
(3) Identify management practices to ensure that HVAC work involving

refrigerants complies with 40 CFR 82 requirements.
(4) Identify planned air pollution generating processes and

management control measures (including but not limited to spray
painting, abrasive blasting, demolition, material handling,
fugitive dust, and fugitive emissions)
i. All internal combustion engines over 10 HP must be approved by the

MCAS Yuma Environmental Department. Submit all information
required by MCAS Yuma Environmental Department.
1.6.1 Environmental Protection Plan Review
Within thirty days after the Contract award date, submit the proposed
Environmental Protection Plan for review and approval. Commencement of
work will not begin until the environmental protection plan has been
approved.
1.6.2 Licenses and Permits
Obtain licenses and permits pursuant to the "Permits and Responsibilities"

FAR Clause 52.236-7.
Where required by the State regulatory authority, the inspections and

certifications will be provided through the services of a Professional
Engineer (PE), registered in the State where the work is being performed.
As a part of the quality control plan, which is required by Section
01 45 00.00 20 QUALITY CONTROL, provide a sub item containing the name,
appropriate professional registration or licence number, address, and
telephone number of the professionals or other qualified persons who will
be performing the inspections and certifications for each permit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION OF NATURAL RESOURCES
Preserve the natural resources within the project boundaries and outside
the limits of permanent work. Restore to an equivalent or improved
condition upon completion of work. Confine construction activities to
within the limits of the work indicated or specified.
Except in areas to be cleared, do not remove, cut, deface, injure, or

destroy trees or shrubs without the Contracting Officer's permission. Do
not fasten or attach ropes, cables, or guys to existing nearby trees for
anchorages unless authorized by the Contracting Officer. Where such use
of attached ropes, cables, or guys is authorized, the Contractor will be
responsible for any resultant damage.
Protect existing trees which are to remain and which may be injured,
bruised, defaced, or otherwise damaged by construction operations. Remove
displaced rocks from uncleared areas. By approved excavation, remove
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 16

trees with 30 percent or more of their root systems destroyed. Remove

trees and other landscape features scarred or damaged by equipment
operations, and replace with equivalent, undamaged trees and landscape
features. Obtain Contracting Officer's approval before replacement.
3.1.1 Erosion and Sediment Control Measures
3.1.1.1 Burnoff
Burnoff of the ground cover is not permitted.
3.1.1.2 Protection of Erodible Soils
Immediately finish the earthwork brought to a final grade, as indicated or

specified. Immediately protect the side slopes and back slopes upon
completion of rough grading. Plan and conduct earthwork to minimize the
duration of exposure of unprotected soils.
3.1.1.3 Temporary Protection of Erodible Soils
Use the following methods to prevent erosion and control sedimentation:
a. Mechanical Retardation and Control of Runoff
Mechanically retard and control the rate of runoff from the

construction site. This includes construction of diversion ditches,
benches, berms, and use of gravel bags to retard and divert runoff to
protected drainage courses.
3.1.2 Erosion and Sediment Control Inspection Reports
Submit "Erosion and Sediment Control Inspection Reports" (E&S) (form

provided at the pre-construction conference) and Storm Water Inspection
Reports for General Permit to the Contracting Officer once every 7
calendar days and within 24 hours of a storm event that produces 0.5 inch
or more of rain.
Note erosion control inspection reports may be compiled as part of a

stormwater pollution prevention plan inspection reports if applicable.
3.1.2.1 Storm Water Notice of Intent for Construction Activities and Storm
Water Pollution Prevention Plan
Submit a Storm Water Notice of Intent (for NPDES coverage under the
general permit for construction activities) and a Storm Water Pollution
Prevention Plan (SWPPP) for the project to the Contracting Officer prior
and gain approval prior to the commencement of work. The SWPPP must meet
the requirements of the EPA or State general permit for storm water
discharges from construction sites. Submit the SWPPP along with any
required Notice of Intent, Notice of Termination, and appropriate permit
fees, via the Contracting Officer, to the appropriate Federal or State
agency for approval, a minimum of 14 calendar days prior to the start of
any land disturbing activities. Maintain an approved copy of the SWPPP at
the construction on-site office, and continually update as regulations
require, reflecting current site conditions. Additional requirements may
be found in UFGS Section 01 57 19.01 20, SUPPLEMENTAL TEMPORARY
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.
Coverage under this permit requires the contractor prepare a Storm Water
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 17

Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP), prepare and submit a Registration

Statement as a co-permittee with the Construction Officer, and provide the
permit fee to the responsible state agency before any land disturbing
activities begin. File for permit coverage on behalf of both the
Construction Officer and themself, and file a Notice of Termination once
construction is complete and the site is stabilized with a final
sustainable cover.
Under the terms and conditions of the permit, the Contractor may be
required to install, inspect, and maintain best management practices
(BMPs), and submit stormwater BMP inspection reports and stormwater
pollution prevention plan inspection reports. Ensure construction
operations and management are constantly in compliance with the terms and
conditions of the general permit for storm water discharges from
construction activities.
a. The SWPPP shall:
(1) Identify potential sources of pollution which may be reasonably

expected to affect the quality of storm water discharge from the
site.
(2) Describe and ensure implementation of practices which will be

used to reduce the pollutants in storm water discharge from the
site.
(3) Ensure compliance with terms of the EPA or State general permit
for storm water discharge.
(4) Select applicable best management practices from EPA 833-R-060-04.
(5) Include a completed copy of the Registration Statement, BMP

Inspection Report Template and Notice of Termination except for
the effective date.
(6) Storm Water Pollution Prevention Measures and Notice of Intent

40 CFR 122.26, EPA 833-R-060-04. Provide a "Storm Water Pollution
Prevention Plan" (SWPPP) for the project. The SWPPP will meet the
requirements of the EPA or State general permit for storm water
discharges from construction sites. Submit the SWPPP along with
any required Notice of Intent, Notice of Termination, and
appropriate permit fees, via the Contracting Officer, to the
appropriate Federal or State agency for approval, a minimum of 14
calendar days prior to the start of construction. A copy of the
approved SWPPP will be kept at the construction on-site office,
and continually updated as regulations require reflecting current
site conditions.
3.1.2.2 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Compliance Notebook
Create and maintain a three ring binder of documents that demonstrate

compliance with the Stormwater Construction Activity permit. The binder
shall include a copy of the permit Registration Statement, proof of permit
fee payment, SWPPP and SWPPP update amendments, inspection reports, copies
of correspondence with the State of Arizona and a copy of the permit
Notice of Termination. At the completion of the project the notebook
shall become the property of the Government. Provide the compliance
notebook to Contracting Officer. Provide an advance copy of the
Registration Statement to the Contracting Officer immediately after the
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 18

form is presented to the permitting agency.
3.1.3 Stormwater Drainage and Construction Dewatering
There will be no discharge of excavation ground water to the sanitary

sewer, storm drains without prior specific authorization of the
Environmental Division in writing. Discharge of hazardous substances will
not be permitted under any circumstances.
Construction site runoff will be prevented from entering any storm drain
directly by the use of gravel bags or other method suitable to the
Environmental Division. Contractor will provide erosion protection of the
surrounding soils.
Construction Dewatering shall not be discharged to the sanitary sewer. If

the construction dewatering is noted or suspected of being contaminated,
it may only be released to the storm drain system if the discharge is
specifically permitted. Authorization for any contaminated groundwater
release shall be obtained in advance from the base Environmental Officer.
Discharge of hazardous substances will not be permitted under any
circumstances.
3.2 HISTORICAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL RESOURCES
Carefully protect in-place and report immediately to the Contracting

Officer historical and archaeological items or human skeletal remains
discovered in the course of work. Upon discovery, notify the Contracting
Officer. Stop work in the immediate area of the discovery until directed
by the Contracting Officer to resume work. The Government retains
ownership and control over historical and archaeological resources.
3.3 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN and PERMIT
Provide to the contracting officer written notification of the quantity of

solid waste/debris that is anticipated to be generated by construction.
Include in the report the locations where various types of waste will be
disposed or recycled. Include letters of acceptance or as applicable,
submit one copy of a State and local Solid Waste Management Permit or
license showing such agency's approval of the disposal plan before
transporting wastes off Government property.
3.3.1 Solid Waste Management Report
Monthly, submit a solid waste disposal report to the Contracting Officer.

For each waste, the report will state the classification (using the
definitions provided in this section), amount, location, and name of the
business receiving the solid waste.
Include copies of the waste handling facilities' weight tickets, receipts,

bills of sale, and other sales documentation. In lieu of sales
documentation, the Contractor may submit a statement indicating the
disposal location for the solid waste which is signed by an officer of the
Contractor firm authorized to legally obligate or bind the firm. The
sales documentation or Contractor certification will include the
receiver's tax identification number and business, EPA or State
registration number, along with the receiver's delivery and business
addresses and telephone numbers. For each solid waste retained by the
Contractor for his own use, the Contractor will submit on the solid waste
disposal report the information previously described in this paragraph.
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 19

Prices paid or received will not be reported to the Contracting Officer

unless required by other provisions or specifications of this Contract or
public law.
3.3.2 Control and Management of Solid Wastes
Pick up solid wastes, and place in covered containers which are regularly
emptied. Do not prepare or cook food on the project site. Prevent
contamination of the site or other areas when handling and disposing of
wastes. At project completion, leave the areas clean. Recycling is
encouraged and can be coordinated with the Contracting Officer and the
activity recycling coordinator. Remove all solid waste (including
non-hazardous debris) from Government property and dispose off-site at an
approved landfill. Solid waste disposal off-site must comply with most
stringent local, State, and Federal requirements including 40 CFR 241,
40 CFR 243, and 40 CFR 258.
Manage spent hazardous material used in construction, including but not

limited to, aerosol cans, waste paint, cleaning solvents, contaminated
brushes, and used rags, as per environmental law.
3.3.2.1 Disposal Documentation for Hazardous and Regulated Waste
Manifest, pack, ship and dispose of hazardous or toxic waste and universal
waste that is generated as a result of construction in accordance with the
generating facilities generator status under the Recourse Conservation and
Recovery Act. Contact the Contracting Officer for the facility RCRA
identification number that is to be used on each manifest.
Submit a copy of the applicable EPA and or State permit(s), manifest(s),

or license(s) for transportation, treatment, storage, and disposal of
hazardous and regulated waste by permitted facilities. Hazardous or toxic
waste manifest must be reviewed, signed, and approved by the Navy before
the Contractor may ship waste. To obtain specific disposal instructions
coordinate with the Activity Environmental office. Refer to Section
01 57 19.01 20 SUPPLEMENTAL TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS for the
Activity Point of Contact information.
3.3.2.2 Dumpsters
Equip dumpsters with a secure cover and paint the standard base color.
Keep cover closed at all times, except when being loaded with trash and
debris. Locate dumpsters behind the construction fence or out of the
public view. Empty site dumpsters at least once a week. or as needed to
keep the site free of debris and trash. If necessary, provide 55 gallon
trash containers painted the darker base color to collect debris in the
construction site area. Locate the trash containers behind the
construction fence or out of the public view. Empty trash containers at
least once a day. For large demolitions, large dumpsters without lids are
acceptable if in compliance with other ADEQ requirementsbut should not
have debris higher than the sides before emptying.
3.4 WASTE DETERMINATION DOCUMENTATION
Complete a Waste Determination form (provided at the pre-construction

conference) for all contractor derived wastes to be generated. Base the
waste determination upon either a constituent listing from the
manufacturer used in conjunction with consideration of the process by
which the waste was generated, EPA approved analytical data, or laboratory
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 20

analysis (Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) by themselves are not

adequate). Attach all support documentation to the Waste Determination
form. As a minimum, a Waste Determination form must be provided for the
following wastes (this listing is not all inclusive): oil and latex based
painting and caulking products, solvents, adhesives, aerosols, petroleum
products, and all containers of the original materials.
3.5 POLLUTION PREVENTION/HAZARDOUS WASTE MINIMIZATION
Minimize the use of hazardous materials and the generation of hazardous

waste. Include procedures for pollution prevention/ hazardous waste
minimization in the Hazardous Waste Management Section of the
Environmental Protection Plan. Consult with the activity Environmental
Office for suggestions and to obtain a copy of the installation's
pollution prevention/hazardous waste minimization plan for reference
material when preparing this part of the plan. If no written plan exists,
obtain information by contacting the Contracting Officer. Describe the
types of the hazardous materials expected to be used in the construction
when requesting information.
3.6 WASTE HAZARDOUS MATERIAL (WHM)/HAZARDOUS WASTE (HW) MATERIALS

PROHIBITION
No waste hazardous material or hazardous waste shall be disposed of on

government property. No hazardous material shall be brought onto
government property that does not directly relate to requirements for the
performance of this contract. The government is not responsible for
disposal of Contractor's waste material brought on the job site and not
required in the performance of this contract. The intent of this
provision is to dispose of that waste identified as waste hazardous
material/hazardous waste as defined herein that was generated as part of
this contract and existed within the boundary of the Contract limits and
not brought in from offsite by the Contractor. Incidental materials used
to support the contract including, but not limited to aerosol cans, waste
paint, cleaning solvents, contaminated brushes, rags, clothing, etc. are
the responsibility of the Contractor. The list is illustrative rather
than inclusive. The Contractor is not authorized to discharge any
materials to sanitary sewer, or storm drain or conduct waste treatment or
disposal on government property without written approval of the
3.7 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL MANAGEMENT
Include hazardous material control procedures in the Safety Plan. Address

procedures and proper handling of hazardous materials, including the
appropriate transportation requirements. No hazardous material shall be
brought onto government property that does not directly relate to
requirements for the performance of this contract. Submit a MSDS and
estimated quantities to be used for each hazardous material to the
Contracting Officer prior to bringing the material on base. Typical
materials requiring MSDS and quantity reporting include, but are not
limited to, oil and latex based painting and caulking products, solvents,
adhesives, aerosol, and petroleum products. Ensure that hazardous
materials are utilized in a manner that will minimize the amount of
hazardous waste that is generated. Ensure that all containers of
hazardous materials have NFPA labels or their equivalent. Certify that
all hazardous materials removed from the site are hazardous materials and
do not meet the definition of hazardous waste per 40 CFR 261.
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 21

3.7.1 Contractor Hazardous Material Inventory Log
Submit the "Contractor Hazardous Material Inventory Log"(found at:

http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/NAVGRAPH/graphtoc.pdf), which provides information
required by (EPCRA Sections 312 and 313) along with corresponding Material
Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), to the Contracting Officer at the start and at
the end of construction (30 days from final acceptance), and update no
later than January 31 of each calendar year during the life of the
contract. Keep copies of the MSDS for hazardous materials on site at all
times. At the end of the project, provide the Contracting Officer with
copies of all of these MSDS, and the maximum quantity of each material
that was present at the site at any one time, the dates the material was
present, the amount of each material that was used during the project, and
how the material was used.
Documentation for any spills/releases, environmental reports or off-site

transfers may be requested by the Contracting Officer.
3.8 PETROLEUM PRODUCTS AND REFUELING
Conduct the fueling and lubricating of equipment and motor vehicles in a

manner that protects against spills and evaporation. Manage all used oil
generated on site in accordance with 40 CFR 279. Determine if any used
oil generated while on-site exhibits a characteristic of hazardous waste.
Used oil containing 1000 parts per million of solvents will be considered
a hazardous waste and disposed of at Contractor's expense. Used oil mixed
with a hazardous waste will also be considered a hazardous waste.
3.8.1 Oily and Hazardous Substances
Prevent oil or hazardous substances from entering the ground, drainage

areas, or navigable waters. In accordance with 40 CFR 112, surround all
temporary fuel oil or petroleum storage tanks with a temporary berm or
containment of sufficient size and strength to contain the contents of the
tanks, plus 10 percent freeboard for precipitation. The berm will be
impervious to oil for 72 hours and be constructed so that any discharge
will not permeate, drain, infiltrate, or otherwise escape before cleanup
occurs. Provide general secondary containment for oil transfer operations
as required by 40 CFR 112.7.
3.8.2 Inadvertent Discovery of Petroleum Contaminated Soil or Hazardous

Wastes
If petroleum contaminated soil or suspected hazardous waste is found

during construction that was not identified in the contract documents, the
contractor shall immediately notify the contracting officer. The
contractor shall not disturb this material until authorized by the
contracting officer.
3.9 FUEL TANKS
Petroleum products and lubricants required to sustain up to 30 days of

construction activity may be kept on site. Storage and refilling
practices shall comply with 40 CFR Part 112. Secondary containment shall
be provided and be no less than 110 percent of the tank volume plus five
inches of free-board. If a secondary berm is used for containment then
the berm shall be impervious to oil for 72 hours and be constructed so
that any discharge will not permeate, drain, infiltrate, or otherwise
escape before cleanup occurs. Drips pans are required and the tanks must
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 22

be covered during inclement weather.
3.10 RELEASES/SPILLS OF OIL AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
Exercise due diligence to prevent, contain, and respond to spills of

hazardous material, hazardous substances, hazardous waste, sewage,
regulated gas, petroleum, lubrication oil, and other substances regulated
by environmental law. Maintain spill cleanup equipment and materials at
the work site. In the event of a spill, take prompt, effective action to
stop, contain, curtail, or otherwise limit the amount, duration, and
severity of the spill/release. In the event of any releases of oil and
hazardous substances, chemicals, or gases; immediately (within 15 minutes)
notify the Base or Activity Fire Department, the activity's Command Duty
Officer, and the Contracting Officer. If the contractor's response is
inadequate, the Navy may respond. If this should occur, the contractor
will be required to reimburse the government for spill response assistance
and analysis.
The Contractor is responsible for verbal and written notifications as

required by the federal 40 CFR 355, State, local regulations and Navy
Instructions. Spill response will be in accordance with 40 CFR 300 and
applicable State and local regulations. Contain and clean up these spills
without cost to the Government. If Government assistance is requested or
required, the Contractor will reimburse the Government for such
assistance. Provide copies of the written notification and documentation
that a verbal notification was made within 20 days.
Maintain spill cleanup equipment and materials at the work site. Clean up
all hazardous and non-hazardous (WHM) waste spills. The Contractor shall
reimburse the government for all material, equipment, and clothing
generated during any spill cleanup. The Contractor shall reimburse the
government for all costs incurred including sample analysis materials,
equipment, and labor if the government must initiate its own spill cleanup
procedures, for Contractor responsible spills, when:
a. The Contractor has not begun spill cleanup procedure within one hour
of spill discovery/occurrence, or
b. If, in the government's judgment, the Contractor's spill cleanup is

not adequately abating life threatening situation and/or is a threat
to any body of water or environmentally sensitive areas.
3.11 CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL (ACM)
Items, components, or materials disturbed by or included in work under

this contract do involve asbestos. Other materials in the general area
around where work will be performed may contain asbestos. All thermal
insulation, in all work areas, should be considered to be asbestos unless
positively identified by conspicuous tags or previous laboratory analysis
certifying them as asbestos free.
Inadvertent discovery of non-disclosed asbestos that will result in an

abatement action requires a change in scope before proceeding. Upon
discovery of asbestos containing material not identified in the contract
documents, the Contractor shall immediately stop all work that would
generate further damage to the material, evacuate the asbestos exposed
area, and notify the Contracting Officer for resolution of the situation
prior to resuming normal work activities in the affected area. Do not
remove or perform work on any asbestos containing materials without the
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 23

prior approval of the Contracting Officer. Do not engage in any activity,

which would remove or damage such materials or cause the generation of
fibers from such materials.
Manage and dispose of asbestos containing waste in accordance with

applicable environmental law. Asbestos containing waste shall be
manifested and the manifest provided to the Contracting Officer.
3.12 CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT OF HAZARDOUS WASTES
3.12.1 Facility Hazardous Waste Generator Status
MCAS Yuma is designated as a Large Quantity Generator. All work conducted

within the boundaries of this activity must meet the regulatory
requirements of this generator designation. Comply with all provisions of
Federal, State and local regulatory requirements applicable to this
generator status regarding training and storage, handling, and disposal of
all construction derived wastes.
3.12.2 Hazardous Waste/Debris Management
Identify all construction activities which will generate hazardous

waste/debris. Provide a documented waste determination for all resultant
waste streams. Hazardous waste/debris will be identified, labeled,
handled, stored, and disposed of in accordance with all Federal, State,
and local regulations including 40 CFR 261, 40 CFR 262, 40 CFR 263,
40 CFR 264, 40 CFR 265, 40 CFR 266, and 40 CFR 268.
Hazardous waste will also be managed in accordance with the approved

Hazardous Waste Management Section of the Environmental Protection Plan.
Store hazardous wastes in approved containers in accordance with 49 CFR 173
and 49 CFR 178. Hazardous waste generated within the confines of
Government facilities will be identified as being generated by the
Government.
Prior to removal of any hazardous waste from Government property, all

hazardous waste manifests must be signed by activity personnel from the
Station Environmental Office. No hazardous waste must be brought onto
Government property. Provide to the Contracting Officer a copy of waste
determination documentation for any solid waste streams that have any
potential to be hazardous waste or contain any chemical constituents
listed in 40 CFR 372-SUBPART D. For hazardous wastes spills, verbally
notify the Contracting Officer immediately.
3.12.2.1 Regulated Waste Storage/Satellite Accumulation/90 Day Storage

Areas
If the work requires the temporary storage/collection of regulated or

hazardous wastes, the Contractor will request the establishment of a
Regulated Waste Storage Area, a Satellite Accumulation Area, or a 90 Day
Storage Area at the point of generation. The Contractor must submit a
request in writing to the Contracting Officer providing the following
information:
Contract Number _____
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 24

Contractor _____
Haz/Waste or Regulated Waste POC _____
Phone Number _____
Type of Waste _____
Source of Waste _____
Emergency POC _____
Phone Number _____
Location of the Site _____
(Attach Site Plan to the Request)
Attach a waste determination form. Allow ten working days for processing
this request. The designated area where waste is being stored shall be
barricaded and a sign identifying as follows:
"DANGER - UNAUTHORIZED PERSONNEL KEEP OUT"
3.12.2.2 Sampling and Analysis of Hazardous Waste (HW)
a. Waste Sampling
Sample waste in accordance with EPA 530/F-93/004. Each sampled drum

or container will be clearly marked with the Contractor's
identification number and cross referenced to the chemical
analysis performed.
b. Laboratory Analysis
Follow the analytical procedure and methods in accordance with the

40 CFR 261. The Contractor will provide all analytical results
and reports performed to the Contracting Officer
c. Analysis Type
Identify waste hazardous material/hazardous waste by analyzing for

the following properties as a minimum: ignitability,
corrosiveness, total chlorides, BTU value, PCBs, TCLP for heavy
metals, and cyanide.
3.12.2.3 Hazardous Waste Disposal
No hazardous, toxic, or universal waste shall be disposed or hazardous

material abandoned on government property. And unless otherwise noted in
this contract, the government is not responsible for disposal of
Contractor generated waste material. The disposal of incidental materials
used to accomplish the work including, but not limited to aerosol cans,
waste paint, cleaning solvents, contaminated brushes, rags, clothing, etc.
are the responsibility of the Contractor. The list is illustrative rather
than inclusive.
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 25

The Contractor is not authorized to discharge any materials to sanitary

sewer, storm drain, or water way or conduct waste treatment or disposal on
government property without written approval of the Contracting Officer.
Control of stored waste, packaging, sampling, analysis, and disposal will

be determined by the details in the contract. The requirements for jobs
in the following paragraphs will be used as the guidelines for disposal of
any hazardous waste generated.
a. Responsibilities for Contractor's Disposal
Contractor responsibilities include any generation of WHM/HW requiring

Contractor disposal of solid waste or liquid.
(1) Provide all service necessary for the final

treatment/disposal of the hazardous material/waste in accordance
with all local, State and Federal laws and regulations, and the
terms and conditions of the contract within sixty (60) days after
the materials have been generated. These services will include
all necessary personnel, labor, transportation, packaging,
detailed analysis (if required for disposal, and/or
transportation, including manifesting or completing waste profile
sheets, equipment, and the compilation of all documentation is
required).
(2) Contain all waste in accordance with 40 CFR 260, 40 CFR 261,
40 CFR 262, 40 CFR 263, 40 CFR 264, 40 CFR 265, 40 CFR 266,
40 CFR 268, 40 CFR 270, 40 CFR 272, 40 CFR 273, 40 CFR 279,
40 CFR 280, and 40 CFR 761.
(3) Obtain a representative sample of the material generated for

each job done to provide waste stream determination.
(4) Analyze each sample taken and providing analytical results to

the Contracting Officer. Provide two copies of the results.
(5) Determine the DOT proper shipping names for all waste (each
container requiring disposal) and will demonstrate how this
determination is developed and supported by the sampling and
analysis requirements contained herein to the Contracting Officer.
Contractor Disposal Turn-In Requirements
For any waste hazardous materials or hazardous waste generated which

requires the Contractor to dispose of, the following conditions
must be complied with in order to be acceptable for disposal:
(1) Drums compatible with waste contents and drums meet DOT
requirements for 49 CFR 173 for transportation of materials.
(2) Drums banded to wooden pallets. No more than three (3) 55

gallon drums to a pallet, or two (2) 85 gallon over packs.
(3) Band using 1-1/4 inch minimum band on upper third of drum.
(4) Recovery materials label (provided by Code 106.321) located

in middle of drum, filled out to indicate actual volume of
material, name of material manufacturer, other vendor information
as available.
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 26

(5) Always have three (3) to five (5) inches of empty space above
volume of material. This space is called 'outage'.
3.12.2.4 Universal Waste/e-Waste Management
Universal waste including but not limited to some mercury containing

building products such florescent lamps, mercury vapor lamps, high
pressure sodium lamps, CRTs, batteries, aerosol paint containers,
electrical equipment containing PCBs, and consumed electronic devices,
shall be managed in accordance with applicable environmental law and
installation instructions.
3.12.3 Class I and II ODS Prohibition
Class I and II ODS in pure or blended form as defined and identified

herein must not be used in the performance of this contract, nor be
provided as part of the equipment except for the use of servicing existing
government owned equipment. This prohibition will be considered to prevail
over any other provision, specification, drawing, or referenced documents.
3.12.3.1 Recycling Requirements
Recycle used refrigerants and ozone depleting substances generated during

the performance of this contract to the maximum extent practicable to
minimize used refrigerant and ozone depleting substance disposal as HW.
Test, collect, transfer, recycle, and/or arrange for shipping and proper
disposal of used refrigerants and ozone depleting substances generated
during the performance of work under this contract. The Contractor is
responsible for all associated costs.
Any and all Class I ODS and R-22 recovered by the Contractor as part of
this contract shall be packaged and turned over to the Government for
recycling upon the completion of the work covered by this contract. The
Contractor shall arrange for recycling of used refrigerants not turned
over to the government, at a licensed refrigerant recycler approved by the
3.12.3.2 EPA Certification Requirements
Heating and air conditioning technicians must be certified through an

EPA-approved program. Copies of certifications shall be maintained at the
employees' place of business and be carried as a wallet card by the
technician, as provided by environmental law.
3.12.3.3 Accidental Venting of Refrigerant
Accidental venting of a refrigerant is a release and must be reported to

the Contracting Officer
3.13 DUST CONTROL
Keep dust down at all times, including during nonworking periods.

Sprinkle or treat, with dust suppressants, the soil at the site, haul
roads, and other areas disturbed by operations. Dry power brooming will
not be permitted. Instead, use vacuuming, wet mopping, wet sweeping, or
wet power brooming. Air blowing will be permitted only for cleaning
nonparticulate debris such as steel reinforcing bars. Only wet cutting
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 27

will be permitted for cutting concrete blocks, concrete, and bituminous

concrete. Do not unnecessarily shake bags of cement, concrete mortar, or
plaster.
3.13.1 Dirt and Dust Control Plan
Submit truck and material haul routes along with a plan for controlling
dirt, debris, and dust on base roadways. As a minimum, identify in the
plan the subcontractor and equipment for cleaning along the haul route and
measures to reduce dirt, dust, and debris from roadways.
3.14 ABRASIVE BLASTING
3.14.1 Blasting Operations
The use of silica sand is prohibited in sandblasting.
Provide tarpaulin drop cloths and windscreens to enclose abrasive blasting

operations to confine and collect dust, abrasive, agent, paint chips, and
other debris in accordance with the requirements specified. Perform work
involving removal of hazardous material in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.
3.14.2 Disposal Requirements
Submit analytical results of the debris generated from abrasive blasting

operations per Laboratory Analysis in paragraph SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS OF
HW. Hazardous waste generated from blasting operations will be managed in
accordance with paragraph CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT OF HAZARDOUS WASTE and
with the approved HWMP. Disposal of non-hazardous abrasive blasting
debris will be in accordance with paragraph CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF SOLID
WASTES.
3.15 NOISE
Make the maximum use of low-noise emission products, as certified by the

EPA. Blasting or use of explosives will not be permitted without written
permission from the Contracting Officer, and then only during the
designated times. Confine pile-driving operations to the period between 8
a.m. and 4 p.m., Monday through Friday, exclusive of holidays, unless
otherwise specified.
3.16 MERCURY MATERIALS
Mercury is prohibited in the construction of this facility, unless

specified otherwise, and with the exception of mercury vapor lamps and
fluorescent lamps. Dumping of mercury-containing materials and devices
such as mercury vapor lamps, fluorescent lamps, and mercury switches, in
rubbish containers is prohibited. Remove without breaking, pack to
prevent breakage, and transport out of the activity in an unbroken
condition for disposal as directed. Immediately report to the
Environmental Office and the Contracting Officer instances of breakage or
mercury spillage. Clean mercury spill area to the satisfaction of the
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 28

Cleanup of a mercury spill shall not be recycled and shall be managed as a

hazardous waste for disposal.
All Contractors and contract personnel performing work on items,

equipment, components, materials which contain mercury or mercury
compounds, such as mercury switches or fluorescent/mercury vapor lamps,
shall abide by the requirement of NAVSHIPYDNORINST P5100.56, Volume III,
Chapter 10, "Control of Occupations Exposure to Mercury and Mercury
Compounds." Mercury may have harmful effects on personnel, materials and
the environment. The MCAS Yuma Environmental Department must be contacted
for approval prior to using mercury, mercury compounds, mercury containing
items, equipment, materials or prior to using any materials contaminated
by mercury. Mercury containing items, including fluorescent/mercury vapor
lamps, must be properly disposed of in accordance with MCAS Yuma, Federal,
State, and Local regulations.
3.17 DISPOSAL OF HYDROSTATIC TEST WATER
Hydrostatic test water shall be disposed into the Station sanitary sewer
system. Approval to discharge this water must be received from the local
authority. The contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer 14 days
prior to disposal to allow the Government to receive approval from the
local authority.
3.18 BASE INSPECTIONS
MCAS Yuma Environmental Department may conduct periodic environmental

compliance reviews of the Contractor's construction, material storage, and
office trailer sites within the boundaries of station property to assess
the Contractor's compliance with State, Federal and military environmental
regulations.
SECTION 01 57 19.00 20 Page 29

SECTION 01 57 19.01 20
SUPPLEMENTAL TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

02/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS

Notice of Intent (NOI); G
1.2 SOUTHWEST
1.2.1 Arizona
Regulatory Requirements for the Notice of Intent
The Contractor shall submit the Notice of Intent (NOI) as deliverable

with draft Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP, signed
but not dated, via the Contracting Officer, to the Environmental
Department for approval. MCAS Yuma will submit contractor SWPPP
and MCAS Yuma NOI to Arizona Department of Environmental Quality
(ADEQ) at least 5 days prior to construction. Arizona Department
of Environmental Quality (ADEQ: does not require a filing fee.
If discharges to a unique or impaired water body are proposed, the

SWPPP must be submitted along with the NOI. See General permit
for instructions. The owner/operator shall complete and submit a
complete Notice of Termination (NOT) to the ADEQ within 30 days
after permit conditions have been met.
Arizona Pollutant Discharge Elimination System General Permit for

Dischargers from Construction Activities to Water of the United
States 2008Permit No. AZG2013-001 expires June 2, 2018.
http://www.azdeq.gov/environ/water/permits/download/2013_cgp.pdf
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
SECTION 01 57 19.01 20 Page 1

SECTION 01 58 00
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
08/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AWPA C1 (2003) All Timber Products - Preservative

Treatment by Pressure Processes
AWPA C2 (2003) Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and

Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by
Pressure Processes
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
preliminary drawing indicating layout and text content; G
SD-04 Samples
Final rendering sample; G
Final framed rendering and copies; G
1.3.1 Rendering
Provide the project rendering in accordance with the following drawing

stages as required in paragraph entitled "Submittals". The following
submittal data is required to properly identify the appropriate view and
approve the final rendering of the facility. The final painted rendering
will be used to produce the image for the signboard and framed
photographic copies provided to the Contracting Officer.
1.3.1.1 Final Rendering Sample
Provide a photographic copy (8 by 10 inches minimum size) of final

rendering for approval prior to final submittal.
1.3.1.2 Final Framed Rendering and Copies
Provide final full color rendering of the proposed facility as specified.
1.4 PROJECT SIGN
Prior to initiating any work on site, provide one project identification

sign at the location designated. Construct the sign in accordance with
project sign detail, which can be downloaded at:
http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/NAVGRAPH/graphtoc.pdf. Maintain sign throughout
the life of the project. Upon completion of the project, remove the sign
from the site. The Government will temporarily supply the Contractor a
copy of the rendering and/or floor plans to use in the production of the
final signboard artwork. Provide color rendering of the project.
Reproduce the rendering on the signboard or enclose a copy of the
rendering under a water-proof, transparent cover, and caulk for weather
protection.
1.4.1 Project Identification Signboard (Navy)
A project identification signboard shall be provided in accordance with

attached Plates 2MC, 3, 4, and 5. Provide preliminary drawing indicating
layout and text content.The signboard shall be provided at a conspicuous
location on the job site where directed by the Contracting Officer.
a. The field of the sign shall consist of a 4 by 8 foot sheet of grade

B-B medium density overlaid exterior plywood.
b. Lumber shall be B or better Southern pine, pressure-preservative

treated in accordance with AWPA C1 and AWPA C2. Nails shall be
aluminum or galvanized steel.
c. The entire signboard and supports shall be given one coat of exterior
alkyd primer and two coats of exterior alkyd enamel paint. The
lettering and sign work shall be performed by a skilled sign painter
using paint known in the trade as bulletin colors. The colors,
lettering sizes, and lettering styles shall be as indicated. Where
preservative-treated lumber is required, utilize only cured
pressure-treated wood which has had the chemicals leached from the
surface of the wood prior to painting.
d. Use spray applied automotive quality high gloss acrylic white enamel
paint as background for the NAVFAC logo. NAVFAC logo shall be an
applied 2 mil film sticker/decal with either transparent or white
background or paint the logo by stencil onto the sign. The weather
resistant sticker/decal film shall be rated for a minimum of 2-year
exterior vertical exposure. The self-adhering sticker shall be
mounted to the sign with pressure sensitive, permanent acrylic
adhesive. Shop cut sticker/decal to rectangular shape and provide
pull-off backing sheet on adhesive side of design sticker for shipping.
e. Sign paint colors (manufacturer's numbers/types listed below for color

identification only)
(1) Blue = To match dark blue color in the NAVFAC logo.
(2) White = To match Brilliant White color in the NAVFAC logo.
f. NAVFAC logo must retain proportions and design integrity. NAVFAC

logos in electronic format may be obtained from the NAVFAC web portal
via the following link:

https://portal.navfac.navy.mil/portal/page?_pageid=181,3465071&_dad=portal&_schema=po
Use the following to choose color values for the paint to be used:
(1) Dark Blue = equivalent to CMYK values 100, 72, 0, 8 .
(2) Light Blue = equivalent to CMYK values 69, 34, 0, 0.
(3) Cyan = equivalent to CMYK values 100, 9, 0, 6.
(4) Yellow = equivalent to CMYK values 0.9,94, 0.
g. Final signboard artwork (rendering) may be either mounted under

plexiglass as indicated in attached Plates 2 and 5, or at the
Contractor's option may be electrostatically printed on 4 mil
self-adhering, weather resistant, glossy vinyl film and mounted to
signboard. Provide film that is capable of full color reproduction of
the building rendering and cover it with an ultra-violet protection
film. Laminate the 2 mil satin gloss clear protection film to the
white 4 mil vinyl image film. Utilize pressure sensitive "controltac"
adhesive to attach rendering to signboard and smooth out surface with
hand pressure tools in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Shop cut sticker to size required and provide
pull-off backing sheet on adhesive side of film for shipping. Provide
the rendering on film that is rated for a minimum of 2 years exterior
vertical exposure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
SECTION 01 74 19
CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT

01/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GOVERNMENT POLICY
Government policy is to apply sound environmental principles in the

design, construction and use of facilities. As part of the implementation
of that policy: (1) practice efficient waste management when sizing,
cutting, and installing products and materials and (2) use all reasonable
means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and
incinerators and to facilitate their recycling or reuse. Divert a minimum
of 60 percent by weight of total project solid waste from the landfill.
1.2 MANAGEMENT
Develop and implement a waste management program. Take a pro-active,

responsible role in the management of construction and demolition waste
and require all subcontractors, vendors, and suppliers to participate in
the effort. The Environmental Manager, as specified in Section
01 57 19.00 20 Temporary Environmental Controls, is responsible for
instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste
Management Plan for the project. Construction and demolition waste
includes products of demolition or removal, excess or unusable
construction materials, packaging materials for construction products, and
other materials generated during the construction process but not
incorporated into the work. In the management of waste, consider the
availability of viable markets, the condition of the material, the ability
to provide the material in suitable condition and in a quantity
acceptable to available markets, and time constraints imposed by internal
project completion mandates. Implement any special programs involving
rebates or similar incentives related to recycling of waste. Revenues or
other savings obtained for salvage, or recycling accrue to the
Contractor. Appropriately permit firms and facilities used for recycling,
reuse, and disposal for the intended use to the extent required by
federal, state, and local regulations. Also, provide on-site instruction
of appropriate separation, handling, recycling, salvage, reuse, and return
methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

Waste Management Plan; G
Records
1.4 MEETINGS
Conduct Construction Waste Management meetings. After award of the

Contract and prior to commencement of work, schedule and conduct a meeting
with the Contracting Officer to discuss the proposed Waste Management Plan
and to develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of waste
management. The requirements for this meeting may be fulfilled during the
coordination and mutual understanding meeting outlined in Section
01 45 00.00 20 QUALITY CONTROL. At a minimum, discuss environmental and
waste management goals and issues at the following additional meetings:
a. Pre-bid meeting.
b. Preconstruction/Pre-demolition meeting.
c. Regular QC meetings.
d. Work safety meetings.
1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
Submit a waste management plan within 21 days after contract award and not
less than 10 days before the preconstruction/pre-demolition meeting. The
plan demonstrates how to meet the the project waste diversion goal. Also,
include the following in the plan:
a. Name of individuals on the Contractor's staff responsible for waste

prevention and management.
b. Actions that will be taken to reduce solid waste generation, including

coordination with subcontractors to ensure awareness and participation.
c. Description of the regular meetings to be held to address waste

management.
d. Description of the specific approaches to be used in recycling/reuse

of the various materials generated, including the areas on site and
equipment to be used for processing, sorting, and temporary storage of
wastes.
e. Characterization, including estimated types and quantities, of the

waste to be generated.
f. Name of landfill and/or incinerator to be used and the estimated costs

for use, assuming that there would be no salvage or recycling on the
project.
g. Identification of local and regional reuse programs, including

non-profit organizations such as schools, local housing agencies, and
organizations that accept used materials such as materials exchange
networks and Habitat for Humanity. Include the name, location, and
phone number for each reuse facility to be used, and provide a copy of
the permit or license for each facility.
h. List of specific waste materials that will be salvaged for resale,

salvaged and reused on the current project, salvaged and stored for
reuse on a future project, or recycled. Identify the recycling
facilities by name, location, and phone number, including a copy of
the permit or license for each facility.
i. Identification of materials that cannot be recycled/reused with an

explanation or justification, to be approved by the Contracting
Officer.
j. Description of the means by which any waste materials identified in

item (h) above will be protected from contamination.
k. Description of the means of transportation of the recyclable materials

(whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to
designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a
waste hauler and removed from the site).
l. Anticipated net cost savings determined by subtracting Contractor

program management costs and the cost of disposal from the revenue
generated by sale of the materials and the incineration and/or
landfill cost avoidance.
Revise and resubmit Plan as required by the Contracting Officer. Approval

of Contractor's Plan will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with applicable environmental regulations or meeting project
cumulative waste diversion requirement. Distribute copies of the Waste
Management Plan to each subcontractor, the Quality Control Manager, and
1.6 RECORDS
Maintain records to document the quantity of waste generated; the quantity

of waste diverted through sale, reuse, or recycling; and the quantity of
waste disposed by landfill or incineration. Quantities may be measured by
weight or by volume, but must be consistent throughout. List each type of
waste separately noting the disposal or diversion date. Identify the
landfill, recycling center, waste processor, or other organization used to
process or receive the solid waste. Provide explanations for any waste not
recycled or reused. With each application for payment, submit updated
documentation for solid waste disposal and diversion, and submit
manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices specifically identifying
the project and waste material. Make the records available to the
Contracting Officer during construction, and deliver to the Contracting
Officer upon completion of the construction a copy of the records.
Demolition accomplished by other parties on this project site count toward

the project's total waste diversion for sustainability requirements.
Information on the quantity and disposition of these materials will be
provided by the Contracting Officer. Include this data in records,
annotated to indicate that it was accomplished by another party.
1.7 COLLECTION
Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable and
salvageable waste products in a manner that maximizes recyclability and
salvagability of identified materials. Provide the necessary containers,
bins and storage areas to facilitate effective waste management and
clearly and appropriately identify them. Provide materials for barriers
and enclosures around recyclable material storage areas which are
nonhazardous and recyclable or reusable. Locate out of the way of
construction traffic. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and
convenience to subcontractors. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be
kept neat and clean, and handle recyclable materials to prevent
contamination of materials from incompatible products and materials.

Clean contaminated materials prior to placing in collection containers.
Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous and biodegradable. Handle
hazardous waste and hazardous materials in accordance with applicable
regulations and coordinate with Section 01 57 19.00 20 TEMPORARY
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS. Separate materials by one of the following
methods:
1.7.1 Source Separated Method.
Separate waste products and materials that are recyclable from trash and
sorted as described below into appropriately marked separate containers
and then transported to the respective recycling facility for further
processing. Deliver materials in accordance with recycling or reuse
facility requirements (e.g., free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum
contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling
process). Separate materials into the following category types as
appropriate to the project waste and to the available recycling and reuse
programs in the project area:
a. Land clearing debris.
b. Asphalt.
c. Concrete and masonry.
d. Metal (e.g. banding, stud trim, ductwork, piping, rebar, roofing,

other trim, steel, iron, galvanized, stainless steel, aluminum,
copper, zinc, lead brass, bronze).
(1) Ferrous.
(2) Non-ferrous.
e. Wood (nails and staples allowed).
f. Debris.
g. Glass (colored glass allowed).
h. Paper.
(1) Bond.
(2) Newsprint.
(3) Cardboard and paper packaging materials.
i. Plastic.
Type
1 Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET, PETE)
2 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
Type
3 Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC)
4 Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE)
5 Polypropylene (PP)
6 Polystyrene (PS)
7. Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in question is

made with a resin other than the six listed above, or is made of more
than one resin listed above, and used in a multi-layer combination.
j. Gypsum.
k. Non-hazardous paint and paint cans.
l. Carpet.
m. Ceiling tiles.
n. Insulation.
o. Beverage containers.
p. All other items that do not contain hazardous materials.
1.7.2 Co-Mingled Method.
Place waste products and recyclable materials into a single container and
then transport to a recycling facility where the recyclable materials are
sorted and processed.
1.7.3 Other Methods.
Other proposed methods may be used when approved by the Contracting

Officer.
1.8 DISPOSAL
Control accumulation of waste materials and trash. Recycle or dispose of

collected materials off-site at intervals approved by the Contracting
Officer and in compliance with waste management procedures. Except as
otherwise specified in other sections of the specifications, dispose of in
accordance with the following:
1.8.1 Reuse.
Give first consideration to salvage for reuse since little or no

re-processing is necessary for this method, and less pollution is created
when items are reused in their original form. Coordinate reuse with the
Contracting Officer. Reuse materials as indicated. Consider sale or
donation of waste suitable for reuse.
1.8.2 Recycle.
Recycle waste materials not suitable for reuse, but having value as being
recyclable. Recycle all fluorescent lamps, HID lamps, and
mercury-containing thermostats removed from the site. Arrange for timely
pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facilities in order to
prevent contamination of recyclable materials.
1.8.3 Compost
Consider composting on site if a reasonable amount of compostable material

will be available. Compostable materials include plant material, sawdust,
and certain food scraps.
1.8.4 Waste.
Dispose of materials with no practical use or economic benefit to

waste-to-energy plants where available. As the last choice, dispose of
materials at a landfill or incinerator.
1.8.5 Return
Set aside and protect misdelivered and substandard products and materials
and return to supplier for credit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used. -- End of Section --
SECTION 01 75 00.00 40
STARTING AND ADJUSTING

05/15
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Requirements of this Section apply to, and are a component part of, each
section of the specifications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Verification of Prior Experience; G
Documentation of Manufacturer's Prior Experience; G
Quality Control Plan; G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drawings, Diagrams and Schedules; G
Diagrams and Instructions; G
Coordination Drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Catalog Cuts; G
Manufacturer's Sample Warranty; G
Samples of Warranty Language; G
SD-05 Design Data
Design Calculations; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Factory Tests; G
Functional Field Test; G
Final Acceptance Test; G
Test Procedures; G
SD-07 Certificates
SECTION 01 75 00.00 40 Page 1

Qualification of Manufacturer
Qualification of Installer; G
United States Manufacture; G
Manufacturer's Administrative Requirements; G
Demonstration and Training Information; G
Manufacturer's Procedural Requirements; G
Documentation of the Testing and Verification Actions; G
Operation and Maintenance Data; G
Safety and Security Data or Posters; G
1.2.1 Preconstruction and Pre-Testing Requirements
Deliver equipment and services required by the specifications. Ensure all

equipment is free of latent manufacturing and installation defects. The
Government reserves the option to elect performance of acceptance testing
by internal personnel, or a designated third party. Regardless of who
performs the acceptance testing, ensure the requirements of acceptance are
met.
Submit the following for review and approval prior to the commencement of
work and any testing, whether such testing is on site or elsewhere:
a. Verification of prior experience and expertise with similar project

scope
b. Documentation of manufacturer's prior experience and expertise with

similar project materials and systems
c. Quality Control Plan
d. Manufacturer's sample warranty and operation and maintenance data,

with details regarding start-up procedures
e. Manufacturer's administrative requirements
f. Manufacturer's procedural requirements
g. Demonstration and training information
Submit the following certifications:
a. Provide evidence that products used within this specification are

United States manufacture.
SECTION 01 75 00.00 40 Page 2

b. Qualification of manufacturer, including current licenses and

insurance.
c. Qualification of installer, including licenses and insurance.
1.2.2 Shop Drawings and Diagrams
Submit the following shop drawings, record drawings, and diagrams as

required to correctly execute the installation of the work:
a. Drawings, diagrams and schedules specifically prepared to illustrate

some portion of the work
b. Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in

producing the product and as aids for integrating the product or
system into the project
c. Coordination drawings to show how multiple systems and

interdisciplinary work will be coordinated
1.2.3 Product and Design Data
Submit all product data and any design calculations, mix designs, analyses
or other data pertaining to a part of work to ensure a complete functional
installation; including, but not limited to:
a. Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts,

instructions and brochures illustrating size, physical appearance and
other characteristics of materials, systems or equipment for some
portion of the work
b. Samples of warranty language when the contract requires extended

product warranties
c. Operation and maintenance data provided by the manufacturer to ensure

the safe and efficient operation, maintenance and repair of the system
or equipment provided
d. Safety and security data or posters provided by the manufacturer to be

posted in a conspicuous visible location for operational and
maintenance personnel
1.2.4 Tests Required
Perform tests to verify proper functioning of fire protection, fire

suppression, HVAC, compressed air, electrical switchgear, protective
relaying, fluid and gas systems, pump/motor combinations, boiler systems,
hydraulic and pneumatic control, condition/performance monitoring systems,
energy control and monitoring systems, and other assemblies and components
that need to be tested as an interrelated whole.
1.2.4.1 Factory Tests
Submit certified copies of required tests performed at the factory to

verify proper build. These test results will be used in the "Final
Acceptance Test" section to verify no shipping damage and proper
installation.
SECTION 01 75 00.00 40 Page 3

1.2.4.2 Test Procedures
Submit test procedure and recording forms that document the test steps for
approval to the Contracting Officer 21 calendar days prior to the proposed
test date. Ensure procedures clearly state step by step instruction to
verify system parameters, components, and functions.
1.2.4.3 Functional Field Test
Perform functional field tests test to verify that the system and
components have been properly installed and are functioning properly.
Perform test(s) in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Acceptance
will be issued when system has performed per other sections and referenced
industry standards.
Coordinate and submit documentation of the testing and verification actions

taken by manufacturer's representative at the job site, on a portion of
the work, after installation, to confirm compliance with manufacturer's
standards or instructions.
1.2.4.4 Final Acceptance Test
Perform a formal test with full documentation using the approved recording
form. Contracting Officer will witness this test and issue a written
final acceptance. Provide final test data to the Contracting Officer with
a cover letter clearly marked with the system name, date, and the words "
Final Test Data - Forward to the Systems Engineer/Condition Monitoring
Office/Predictive Testing Group for inclusion in the Maintenance Database."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
SECTION 01 75 00.00 40 Page 4

SECTION 01 78 00
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
08/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM E1971 (2005; R 2011) Stewardship for the

Cleaning of Commercial and Institutional
Buildings
GREEN SEAL (GS)
GS-37 (2012) Cleaning Products for Industrial

and Institutional Use
FC 1-300-09N (2014) Navy and Marine Corps Design

Procedures
UFC 1-300-08 (2009, with Change 2) Criteria for

Transfer and Acceptance of DoD Real
Property
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 As-Built Drawings
As-built drawings are developed and maintained by the Contractor and

depict actual conditions, including deviations from the Contract
Documents. These deviations and additions may result from coordination
required by, but not limited to: contract modifications; official
responses to Contractor submitted Requests for Information; direction from
the Contracting Officer; designs which are the responsibility of the
Contractor, and differing site conditions. Maintain the as-builts
throughout construction as red-lined hard copies on site and red-lined PDF
files. As-built drawings are further defined in NFAS 5252.236-9310.
These files serve as the basis for the creation of the record drawings.
1.2.2 Record Drawings
The record drawings are the final compilation of actual conditions

reflected in the as-built drawings.
1.3 SOURCE DRAWING FILES
Request the full set of electronic drawings, in the source format, for
Record Drawing preparation, after award and at least 30 days prior to
required use.
1.3.1 Terms and Conditions
Data contained on these electronic files must not be used for any purpose
other than as a convenience in the preparation of construction drawings
and data for the referenced project. Any other use or reuse shall be at
the sole risk of the Contractor and without liability or legal exposure to
the Government. The Contractor must make no claim and waives to the
fullest extent permitted by law, any claim or cause of action of any
nature against the Government, its agents or sub consultants that may
arise out of or in connection with the use of these electronic files. The
Contractor must, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and
These electronic CAD drawing files are not construction documents.

Differences may exist between the CAD files and the corresponding
construction documents. The Government makes no representation regarding
the accuracy or completeness of the electronic CAD files, nor does it make
representation to the compatibility of these files with the Contractor
hardware or software. In the event that a conflict arises between the
signed and sealed construction documents prepared by the Government and
the furnished Source drawing files, the signed and sealed construction
documents govern. The Contractor is responsible for determining if any
conflict exists. Use of these Source Drawing files does not relieve the
Contractor of duty to fully comply with the contract documents, including
and without limitation, the need to check, confirm and coordinate the work
of all contractors for the project. If the Contractor uses, duplicates or
modifies these electronic source drawing files for use in producing
construction drawings and data related to this contract, remove all
previous indicia of ownership (seals, logos, signatures, initials and
dates).
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Warranty Management Plan

Warranty Tags
Final Cleaning
Spare Parts Data
Preventative Maintenance
Condition Monitoring (Predictive Testing)
Inspection
Posted Instructions
Operation and Maintenance Manuals; G
As-Built Drawings; G
Record Drawings; G
As-Built Record of Equipment and Materials
Certification of EPA Designated Items; G
Interim DD FORM 1354; G
Checklist for DD FORM 1354; G
NAVFAC Sustainable & Energy Data Record Card; G
1.5 SPARE PARTS DATA
Submit two copies of the Spare Parts Data list.
a. Indicate manufacturer's name, part number, nomenclature, and stock

level required for maintenance and repair. List those items that may
be standard to the normal maintenance of the system.
1.6 WARRANTY MANAGEMENT
1.6.1 Warranty Management Plan
Develop a warranty management plan which contains information relevant to

the clause Warranty of Construction. At least 30 days before the planned
pre-warranty conference, submit two sets of the warranty management plan.
Include within the warranty management plan all required actions and
documents to assure that the Government receives all warranties to which
it is entitled. The plan must be in narrative form and contain sufficient
detail to render it suitable for use by future maintenance and repair
personnel, whether tradesmen, or of engineering background, not
necessarily familiar with this contract. The term "status" as indicated
below must include due date and whether item has been submitted or was
accomplished. Warranty information made available during the construction
phase must be submitted to the Contracting Officer for approval prior to
each monthly pay estimate. Assemble approved information in a binder and
turn over to the Government upon acceptance of the work. The construction
warranty period will begin on the date of project acceptance and continue
for the full product warranty period. A joint 4 month and 9 month
warranty inspection will be conducted, measured from time of acceptance,
by the Contractor, Contracting Officer and the Customer Representative.
Include within the warranty management plan , but not limited to, the
following:
a. Roles and responsibilities of all personnel associated with the

warranty process, including points of contact and telephone numbers
within the organizations of the Contractors, subContractors,
manufacturers or suppliers involved.
b. Furnish with each warranty the name, address, and telephone number of
each of the guarantor's representatives nearest to the project
location.
c. Listing and status of delivery of all Certificates of Warranty for

extended warranty items, to include roofs, HVAC balancing, pumps,
motors, transformers, and for all commissioned systems such as fire
protection and alarm systems, sprinkler systems, lightning protection
systems, etc.
d. A list for each warranted equipment, item, feature of construction or

system indicating:
(1) Name of item.

(2) Model and serial numbers.
(3) Location where installed.
(4) Name and phone numbers of manufacturers or suppliers.
(5) Names, addresses and telephone numbers of sources of spare parts.
(6) Warranties and terms of warranty. Include one-year overall
warranty of construction, including the starting date of warranty
of construction. Items which have extended warranties must be
indicated with separate warranty expiration dates.
(7) Cross-reference to warranty certificates as applicable.
(8) Starting point and duration of warranty period.
(9) Summary of maintenance procedures required to continue the
warranty in force.
(10) Cross-reference to specific pertinent Operation and Maintenance
manuals.
(11) Organization, names and phone numbers of persons to call for
warranty service.
(12) Typical response time and repair time expected for various
warranted equipment.
e. The plans for attendance at the 4 and 9 month post-construction

warranty inspections conducted by the Government.
f. Procedure and status of tagging of all equipment covered by extended

warranties.
g. Copies of instructions to be posted near selected pieces of equipment

where operation is critical for warranty and/or safety reasons.
1.6.2 Performance Bond
The Performance Bond must remain effective throughout the construction

period.
a. In the event the Contractor fails to commence and diligently pursue

any construction warranty work required, the Contracting Officer will
have the work performed by others, and after completion of the work,
will charge the remaining construction warranty funds of expenses
incurred by the Government while performing the work, including, but
not limited to administrative expenses.
b. In the event sufficient funds are not available to cover the

construction warranty work performed by the Government at the
Contractor's expense, the Contracting Officer will have the right to
recoup expenses from the bonding company.
c. Following oral or written notification of required construction

warranty repair work, respond in a timely manner. Written
verification will follow oral instructions. Failure to respond will
be cause for the Contracting Officer to proceed against the Contractor.
1.6.3 Pre-Warranty Conference
Prior to contract completion, and at a time designated by the Contracting

Officer, meet with the Contracting Officer to develop a mutual
understanding with respect to the requirements of this section.
Communication procedures for Contractor notification of construction

warranty defects, priorities with respect to the type of defect,
reasonable time required for Contractor response, and other details deemed
necessary by the Contracting Officer for the execution of the construction
warranty will be established/reviewed at this meeting. In connection with
these requirements and at the time of the Contractor's quality control
completion inspection, furnish the name, telephone number and address of a
licensed and bonded company which is authorized to initiate and pursue
construction warranty work action on behalf of the Contractor. This point
of contact will be located within the local service area of the warranted
construction, be continuously available, and be responsive to Government
inquiry on warranty work action and status. This requirement does not
relieve the Contractor of any of its responsibilities in connection with
other portions of this provision.
1.6.4 Warranty Tags
At the time of installation, tag each warranted item with a durable, oil
and water resistant tag approved by the Contracting Officer. Attach each
tag with a copper wire and spray with a silicone waterproof coating.
Also, submit two record copies of the warranty tags showing the layout and
design. The date of acceptance and the QC signature must remain blank
until the project is accepted for beneficial occupancy. Show the
following information on the tag.
Type of product/material
Model number
Serial number
Contract number
Warranty period from/to
Inspector's signature
Construction Contractor
Address
Telephone number
Warranty contact
Address
Telephone number
Warranty response time

priority code
WARNING - PROJECT PERSONNEL TO PERFORM ONLY OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE DURING THE

WARRANTY PERIOD.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CERTIFICATION OF EPA DESIGNATED ITEMS
Submit the Certification of EPA Designated Items as required by FAR

52.223-9, "Certification and Estimate of Percentage of Recovered Material
Content for EPA Designated Items". Include on the certification form the
following information: project name, project number, Contractor name,
license number, Contractor address, and certification. The certification
will read as follows and be signed and dated by the Contractor. "I hereby
certify the information provided herein is accurate and that the
requisition/procurement of all materials listed on this form comply with
current EPA standards for recycled/recovered materials content. The
following exemptions may apply to the non-procurement of
recycled/recovered content materials:
1) The product does not meet appropriate performance standards;

2) The product is not available within a reasonable time frame;
3) The product is not available competitively (from two or more sources);
4) The product is only available at an unreasonable price (compared with
a comparable non-recycled content product)."
Record each product used in the project that has a requirement or option
of containing recycled or biobased content, noting total price, total
value of post-industrial recycled content, total value of post-consumer
recycled content, total value of biobased content, exemptions (1, 2, 3, or
4, as indicated), and comments. Recycled and biobased content values may
be determined by weight or volume percent, but must be consistent
throughout.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
Provide and maintain As-Built Drawings in accordance with NFAS

5252.236-9310. Submit As-Built Drawings 30 days prior to Beneficial
Occupancy Date(BOD).
3.1.1 Markup Guidelines
Make comments and markup the drawings complete without reference to

letters, memos, or materials that are not part of the As-Built drawing.
Show what was changed, how it was changed, where items(s) were relocated
and change related details. These working as-built markup prints must be
neat, legible and accurate as follows:
a. Use base colors of red, green, and blue. Color code for changes as
follows:
(1) Special (Blue) - Items requiring special information,

coordination, or special detailing or detailing notes.
(2) Deletions (Red) - Over-strike deleted graphic items (lines),

lettering in notes and leaders.
(3) Additions (Green) - Added items, lettering in notes and leaders.
b. Provide a legend if colors other than the "base" colors of red, green,
and blue are used.
c. Add and denote any additional equipment or material facilities,

service lines, incorporated under As-Built Revisions if not already
shown in legend.
d. Use frequent written explanations on markup drawings to describe

changes. Do not totally rely on graphic means to convey the revision.
e. Use legible lettering and precise and clear digital values when
marking prints. Clarify ambiguities concerning the nature and
application of change involved.
f. Wherever a revision is made, also make changes to related section

views, details, legend, profiles, plans and elevation views,
schedules, notes and call out designations, and mark accordingly to
avoid conflicting data on all other sheets.
g. For deletions, cross out all features, data and captions that relate
to that revision.
h. For changes on small-scale drawings and in restricted areas, provide

large-scale inserts, with leaders to the applicable location.
i. Indicate one of the following when attaching a print or sketch to a

markup print:
1) Add an entire drawing to contract drawings
2) Change the contract drawing to show
3) Provided for reference only to further detail the initial design.
j. Incorporate all shop and fabrication drawings into the markup drawings.
3.1.2 As-Built Drawings Content
Show on the as-built drawings, but not limited to, the following
information:
a. The actual location, kinds and sizes of all sub-surface utility

lines. In order that the location of these lines and appurtenances
may be determined in the event the surface openings or indicators
become covered over or obscured, show by offset dimensions to two
permanently fixed surface features the end of each run including each
change in direction on the record drawings. Locate valves, splice
boxes and similar appurtenances by dimensioning along the utility run
from a reference point. Also record the average depth below the
surface of each run.
b. The location and dimensions of any changes within the building

structure.
c. Layout and schematic drawings of electrical circuits and piping.
d. Correct grade, elevations, cross section, or alignment of roads,

earthwork, structures or utilities if any changes were made from
contract plans.
e. Changes in details of design or additional information obtained from

working drawings specified to be prepared and/or furnished by the
Contractor; including but not limited to shop drawings, fabrication,
erection, installation plans and placing details, pipe sizes,
insulation material, dimensions of equipment foundations, etc.
f. The topography, invert elevations and grades of drainage installed or

affected as part of the project construction.
g. Changes or Revisions which result from the final inspection.
h. Where contract drawings or specifications present options, show only

the option selected for construction on the working as-built markup
drawings.
i. If borrow material for this project is from sources on Government

property, or if Government property is used as a spoil area, furnish a
contour map of the final borrow pit/spoil area elevations.
j. Systems designed or enhanced by the Contractor, such as HVAC controls,

fire alarm, fire sprinkler, and irrigation systems.
k. Changes in location of equipment and architectural features.
j. Modifications (include within change order price the cost to change

working as-built markup drawings to reflect modifications) and
compliance with FC 1-300-09N procedures.
l. Actual location of anchors, construction and control joints, etc., in

concrete.
m. Unusual or uncharted obstructions that are encountered in the contract

work area during construction.
n. Location, extent, thickness, and size of stone protection particularly

where it will be normally submerged by water.
3.2 RECORD DRAWINGS
Prepare and provide Record Drawings in accordance with FC 1-300-09N.

Provide 2 copies of Record Drawings on two separate CDs or DVDs 30 days
after BOD.
3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Provide project operation and maintenance manuals as specified in Section

01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS.
Submit one PDF file and 6 hard copies of the project operation and
maintenance manuals 30 calendar days prior to testing the system
involved. Update and resubmit data for final approval no later than 30
calendar days prior to contract completion.
3.3.1 Configuration
Operation and Maintenance Manuals must be consistent with the
manufacturer's standard brochures, schematics, printed instructions,

general operating procedures, and safety precautions. Provide
manufacturer's PDF files of above and bind information in manual format
and grouped by technical sections. Organize data by separate index and
tabbed sheets for vendor data and manuals. Test data must be legible and
of good quality. Caution and warning indications must be clearly labeled.
Hard copy pages must have 0.39-inch holes and be bound in 3-ring,
loose-leaf binders. Binder must lie flat with printed sheets that are
easy to read.
3.3.2 Training and Instruction
Submit classroom and field instructions in the operation and maintenance

of systems equipment where required by the technical provisions. These
services must be directed by the Contractor, using the manufacturer's
factory-trained personnel or qualified representatives. Contracting
Officer will be given 7 calendar days written notice of scheduled
instructional services. Instructional materials belonging to the
manufacturer or vendor, such as lists, static exhibits, and visual aids,
must be made available to the Contracting Officer.
3.4 CLEANUP
Provide final cleaning in accordance with ASTM E1971 and submit two copies
of the listing of completed final clean-up items. Leave premises "broom
clean." Comply with GS-37 for general purpose cleaning and bathroom
cleaning. Use only nonhazardous cleaning materials, including natural
cleaning materials, in the final cleanup. Clean interior and exterior
glass surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and
foreign substances; polish transparent and glossy surfaces; vacuum
carpeted and soft surfaces. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary
condition. Replace filters of operating equipment and comply with the
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan. Clean debris from roofs,
gutters, downspouts and drainage systems. Sweep paved areas and rake
clean landscaped areas. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish and
construction facilities from the site. Recycle, salvage, and return
construction and demolition waste from project in accordance with Section
01 57 19.00 20 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS, and 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION
AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT.
3.5 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE
Submit Preventative Maintenance, Condition Monitoring (Predictive Testing)

and Inspection schedules with instructions that state when systems should
be retested.
a. Define the anticipated length of each test, test apparatus, number of

personnel identified by responsibility, and a testing validation
procedure permitting the record operation capability requirements
within the schedule. Provide a signoff blank for the Contractor and
Contracting Officer for each test feature; e.g., gpm, rpm, psi.
Include a remarks column for the testing validation procedure
referencing operating limits of time, pressure, temperature, volume,
voltage, current, acceleration, velocity, alignment, calibration,
adjustments, cleaning, or special system notes. Delineate procedures
for preventative maintenance, inspection, adjustment, lubrication and
cleaning necessary to minimize corrective maintenance and repair.
b. Repair requirements must inform operators how to check out,
troubleshoot, repair, and replace components of the system. Include

electrical and mechanical schematics and diagrams and diagnostic
techniques necessary to enable operation and troubleshooting of the
system after acceptance.
3.6 REAL PROPERTY RECORD
Near the completion of Project, but a minimum of 60 days prior to final

acceptance of the work, complete, update draft DD FORM 1354 attached to
this section, and submit an accounting of all installed property with
Interim DD FORM 1354. Include any additional assets, improvements, and
alterations from the Draft DD FORM 1354. Contact the Contracting Officer
for any project specific information necessary to complete the DD FORM
1354. Refer to UFC 1-300-08 for instruction on completing the DD FORM
1354. For information purposes, a blank fillable PDF DD FORM 1354 may be
obtained at the following:
http://www.dtic.mil/whs/directives/forms/eforms/dd1354.pdf
Submit the completed Checklist for DD FORM 1354 of Installed Building

Equipment items. Attach this list to the updated DD FORM 1354.
3.7 NAVFAC SUSTAINABLE & ENERGY DATA RECORD CARD
Within 60 days of the completion of Project, complete an electronic copy

of the NAVFAC Sustainable & Energy Data Record Card, and submit to the
Contracting Officer. Draft Record card for this project should be
available from Designer of Record (DOR) or Contracting Officer.
Instructions and a blank DD Form (fill-able) in ADOBE (PDF) may be
obtained at the Whole Building Design Guide web site by navigating:
Home > Participating Agencies > Department of Defense (DoD) > NAVFAC
Sustainable Development Program > Contract Documents > NAVFAC Sustainable
& Energy Data Record Card; or directly at
http://www.wbdg.org/pdfs/navfac_sustainable_energy_data_record_card.pdf.
SECTION 01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

07/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM E1971 (2005; R 2011) Stewardship for the

Cleaning of Commercial and Institutional
Buildings
1.2 SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data specifically applicable to

this contract and a complete and concise depiction of the provided
equipment, product, or system, stressing and enhancing the importance of
system interactions, troubleshooting, and long-term preventative
maintenance and operation. The subcontractors must compile and prepare
data and deliver to the Contractor prior to the training of Government
personnel. The Contractor must compile and prepare aggregate O&M data
including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to
as-built conditions. Organize and present information in sufficient
detail to clearly explain O&M requirements at the system, equipment,
component, and subassembly level. Include an index preceding each
submittal. Submit in accordance with this section and Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
1.2.1 Package Quality
Documents must be fully legible. Poor quality copies and material with
hole punches obliterating the text or drawings will not be accepted.
1.2.2 Package Content
Data package content shall be as shown in the paragraph titled "Schedule

of Operation and Maintenance Data Packages." Comply with the data package
requirements specified in the individual technical sections, including the
content of the packages and addressing each product, component, and system
designated for data package submission, except as follows. Commissioned
items without a specified data package requirement in the individual
technical sections must use Data Package 5. Commissioned items with a
Data Package 1 or 2 requirement must use instead Data Package 5.
1.2.3 Changes to Submittals
Manufacturer-originated changes or revisions to submitted data must be

furnished by the Contractor if a component of an item is so affected
subsequent to acceptance of the O&M Data. Submit changes, additions, or
revisions required by the Contracting Officer for final acceptance of
submitted data within 30 calendar days of the notification of this change
requirement.
1.2.4 Review and Approval
The Contractor's Commissioning Authority (CA) must review the commissioned

systems and equipment submittals for completeness and applicability. The
CA must verify that the systems and equipment provided meet the
requirements of the Contract documents and design intent, particularly as
they relate to functionality, energy performance, water performance,
maintainability, sustainability, system cost, indoor environmental
quality, and local environmental impacts. The CA must communicate
deficiencies to the Contracting Officer. Upon a successful review of the
corrections, the CA must recommend approval and acceptance of these O&M
manuals to the Contracting Officer. This work is in addition to the
normal review procedures for O&M data.
1.2.5 O&M Database
Develop a database from the O&M manuals that contains the information
required to start a preventative maintenance program.
1.2.5.1 O&M Database-Final Submittal
Submit 6 copies and PDF format on a CD of the project operation and

maintenance manuals 30 calendar days prior to testing the system
involved. Update and resubmit data for final approval no later than 30
calendar days prior to contract completion.
1.3 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN O&M DATA PACKAGES
1.3.1 Operating Instructions
Include specific instructions, procedures, and illustrations for the

following phases of operation for the installed model and features of each
system:
1.3.1.1 Safety Precautions and Hazards
List personnel hazards and equipment or product safety precautions for all
operating conditions. List all residual hazards identified in the
Activity Hazard Analysis provided under Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENT
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS. Provide recommended safeguards for each identified
hazard.
1.3.1.2 Operator Prestart
Include procedures required to install, set up, and prepare each system
for use.
1.3.1.3 Startup, Shutdown, and Post-Shutdown Procedures
Provide narrative description for Startup, Shutdown and Post-shutdown

operating procedures including the control sequence for each procedure.
1.3.1.4 Normal Operations
Provide narrative description of Normal Operating Procedures. Include

Control Diagrams with data to explain operation and control of systems and
specific equipment.
1.3.1.5 Emergency Operations
Include Emergency Procedures for equipment malfunctions to permit a short

period of continued operation or to shut down the equipment to prevent
further damage to systems and equipment. Include Emergency Shutdown
Instructions for fire, explosion, spills, or other foreseeable
contingencies. Provide guidance and procedures for emergency operation of
all utility systems including required valve positions, valve locations
and zones or portions of systems controlled.
1.3.1.6 Operator Service Requirements
Include instructions for services to be performed by the operator such as

lubrication, adjustment, inspection, and recording gage readings.
1.3.1.7 Environmental Conditions
Include a list of Environmental Conditions (temperature, humidity, and

other relevant data) that are best suited for the operation of each
product, component or system. Describe conditions under which the item
equipment should not be allowed to run.
1.3.1.8 Operating Log
Provide forms, sample logs, and instructions for maintaining necessary

operating records.
1.3.2 Preventive Maintenance
Include the following information for preventive and scheduled maintenance

to minimize corrective maintenance and repair for the installed model and
features of each system. Include potential environmental and indoor air
quality impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials.
1.3.2.1 Lubrication Data
Include preventative maintenance lubrication data, in addition to

instructions for lubrication provided under paragraph titled "Operator
Service Requirements":
a. A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature ranges

and applications.
b. Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing lubrication

points, recommended types and grades of lubricants, and capacities.
c. A Lubrication Schedule showing service interval frequency.
1.3.2.2 Preventive Maintenance Plan and Schedule
Include manufacturer's schedule for routine preventive maintenance,

inspections, tests and adjustments required to ensure proper and
economical operation and to minimize corrective maintenance. Provide
manufacturer's projection of preventive maintenance work-hours on a daily,
weekly, monthly, and annual basis including craft requirements by type of
craft. For periodic calibrations, provide manufacturer's specified
frequency and procedures for each separate operation.
1.3.2.3 Cleaning Recommendations
Provide environmentally preferable cleaning recommendations in accordance

with ASTM E1971.
1.3.3 Corrective Maintenance (Repair)
Include manufacturer's recommended procedures and instructions for

correcting problems and making repairs for the installed model and
features of each system. Include potential environmental and indoor air
quality impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials.
1.3.3.1 Troubleshooting Guides and Diagnostic Techniques
Include step-by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical

malfunctions. Describe clearly why the checkout is performed and what
conditions are to be sought. Identify tests or inspections and test
equipment required to determine whether parts and equipment may be reused
or require replacement.
1.3.3.2 Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams
Wiring diagrams and control diagrams shall be point-to-point drawings of

wiring and control circuits including factory-field interfaces. Provide a
complete and accurate depiction of the actual job specific wiring and
control work. On diagrams, number electrical and electronic wiring and
pneumatic control tubing and the terminals for each type, identically to
actual installation configuration and numbering.
1.3.3.3 Maintenance and Repair Procedures
Include instructions and a list of tools required to repair or restore the

product or equipment to proper condition or operating standards.
1.3.3.4 Removal and Replacement Instructions
Include step-by-step procedures and a list required tools and supplies for
removal, replacement, disassembly, and assembly of components, assemblies,
subassemblies, accessories, and attachments. Provide tolerances,
dimensions, settings and adjustments required. Instructions shall include
a combination of text and illustrations.
1.3.3.5 Spare Parts and Supply Lists
Include lists of spare parts and supplies required for maintenance and
repair to ensure continued service or operation without unreasonable
delays. Special consideration is required for facilities at remote
locations. List spare parts and supplies that have a long lead-time to
obtain.
1.3.4 Corrective Maintenance Work-Hours
Include manufacturer's projection of corrective maintenance work-hours

including requirements by type of craft. Corrective maintenance that
requires completion or participation of the equipment manufacturer shall
be identified and tabulated separately.
1.3.5 Appendices
Provide information required below and information not specified in the

preceding paragraphs but pertinent to the maintenance or operation of the
product or equipment. Include the following:
1.3.5.1 Product Submittal Data
Provide a copy of all SD-03 Product Data submittals required in the

applicable technical sections.
1.3.5.2 Manufacturer's Instructions
Provide a copy of all SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions submittals

required in the applicable technical sections.
1.3.5.3 O&M Submittal Data
Provide a copy of all SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data submittals

required in the applicable technical sections.
1.3.5.4 Parts Identification
Provide identification and coverage for all parts of each component,

assembly, subassembly, and accessory of the end items subject to
replacement. Include special hardware requirements, such as requirement
to use high-strength bolts and nuts. Identify parts by make, model,
serial number, and source of supply to allow reordering without further
identification. Provide clear and legible illustrations, drawings, and
exploded views to enable easy identification of the items. When
illustrations omit the part numbers and description, both the
illustrations and separate listing shall show the index, reference, or key
number that will cross-reference the illustrated part to the listed part.
Parts shown in the listings shall be grouped by components, assemblies,
and subassemblies in accordance with the manufacturer's standard
practice. Parts data may cover more than one model or series of
equipment, components, assemblies, subassemblies, attachments, or
accessories, such as typically shown in a master parts catalog
1.3.5.5 Warranty Information
List and explain the various warranties and clearly identify the servicing
and technical precautions prescribed by the manufacturers or contract
documents in order to keep warranties in force. Include warranty
information for primary components such as the compressor of air
conditioning system.
1.3.5.6 Extended Warranty Information
List all warranties for products, equipment, components, and

sub-components whose duration exceeds one year. For each warranty listed,
indicate the applicable specification section, duration, start date, end
date, and the point of contact for warranty fulfillment. Also, list or
reference all specific operation and maintenance procedures that must be
performed to keep the warranty valid.
1.3.5.7 Personnel Training Requirements
Provide information available from the manufacturers that is needed for
use in training designated personnel to properly operate and maintain the

equipment and systems.
1.3.5.8 Testing Equipment and Special Tool Information
Include information on test equipment required to perform specified tests

and on special tools needed for the operation, maintenance, and repair of
components.
1.3.5.9 Testing and Performance Data
Include completed prefunctional checklists, functional performance test

forms, and monitoring reports. Include recommended schedule for retesting
and blank test forms.
1.3.5.10 Field Test Reports
Provide Field Test Reports (SD-06) that apply to equipment associated with
the system.
1.3.5.11 Contractor Information
Provide a list that includes the name, address, and telephone number of
the General Contractor and each Subcontractor who installed the product or
equipment, or system. For each item, also provide the name address and
telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service
organization that can provide replacements most convenient to the project
site. Provide the name, address, and telephone number of the product,
equipment, and system manufacturers.
1.4 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN CONTROLS O&M DATA PACKAGES
Include Data Package 5 and the following for control systems:
a. Narrative description on how to perform and apply all functions,

features, modes, and other operations, including unoccupied operation,
seasonal changeover, manual operation, and alarms. Include detailed
technical manual for programming and customizing control loops and
algorithms.
b. Full as-built sequence of operations.
c. Copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the

Contractor (not Cx tests).
d. Full points list. A listing of rooms shall be provided with the

following information for each room:
(1) Floor
(2) Room number
(3) Room name
(4) Air handler unit ID
(5) Reference drawing number
(6) Air terminal unit tag ID
(7) Heating and/or cooling valve tag ID
(8) Minimum cfm
(9) Maximum cfm
e. Full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and
acceptance of the system.
f. Full as-built print out of software program.
g. Electronic File:
(1) Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file

in PDF format. Provide HDD’s, DVD's or CD's as appropriate, so
that each one contains all maintenance and record files, and also
the Project Record Documents and Training Videos, of the entire
program for this facility.
(2) Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with
applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked
operation and maintenance directory.
(3) Link the index to separate files within the composite of files.
Book mark maintenance and record files, that have a Table of
Contents, according to the Table of Contents
h. Marking of all system sensors and thermostats on the as-built floor

plan and mechanical drawings with their control system designations.
1.5 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES
Furnish the O&M data packages specified in individual technical sections.

The required information for each O&M data package is as follows:
1.5.1 Data Package 1
a. Safety precautions
b. Cleaning recommendations
c. Maintenance and repair procedures
d. Warranty information
e. Contractor information
f. Spare parts and supply list
b. Normal operations
c. Environmental conditions
d. Lubrication data
e. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
f. Cleaning recommendations
g. Maintenance and repair procedures
h. Removal and replacement instructions
i. Spare parts and supply list
j. Parts identification
k. Warranty information
l. Contractor information
b. Operator prestart
c. Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures
d. Normal operations
e. Emergency operations
f. Environmental conditions
g. Lubrication data
h. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
i. Cleaning recommendations
j. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
k. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams
l. Maintenance and repair procedures
m. Removal and replacement instructions
n. Spare parts and supply list
o. Product submittal data
p. O&M submittal data
q. Parts identification
r. Warranty information
s. Testing equipment and special tool information
t. Testing and performance data
u. Contractor information
c. Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures
e. Emergency operations
f. Operator service requirements
g. Environmental conditions
h. Lubrication data
i. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
j. Cleaning recommendations
k. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
l. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams
m. Maintenance and repair procedures
n. Removal and replacement instructions
o. Spare parts and supply list
p. Corrective maintenance man-hours
q. Product submittal data
r. O&M submittal data
s. Parts identification
t. Warranty information
u. Personnel training requirements
v. Testing equipment and special tool information
w. Testing and performance data
x. Contractor information
c. Start-up, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures
e. Environmental conditions
f. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
g. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
h. Wiring and control diagrams
i. Maintenance and repair procedures
j. Removal and replacement instructions
k. Spare parts and supply list
l. Product submittal data
m. Manufacturer's instructions
n. O&M submittal data
o. Parts identification
p. Testing equipment and special tool information
q. Warranty information
r. Testing and performance data
s. Contractor information
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20
FACILITY ELECTRONIC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION (eOMSI)

02/15
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

FC 1-300-09N (2014) Navy and Marine Corps Design

Procedures
1.2 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
1.2.1 eOMSI Manual
Manual (PDF file) provided by the Contractor that includes, but is not
limited to, product information, a facility description with photos, and a
list of primary facility systems.
1.2.2 eOMSI Facility Data Workbook (FDW)
A Microsoft Excel spreadsheet containing 17 facility asset fields to be

populated with the required information by the Contractor.
1.2.3 Systems
The words "system", "systems", and "equipment", when used in this document
refer to as-built systems and equipment.
1.2.4 Computer Assisted Design and Drafting (CADD)
Electronic Computer Assisted Design and Drafting graphic software program

that is used to create facility design contract documents and Record
Drawings.
1.2.5 KTR
An abbreviation for "Contractor."
1.3 EOMSI MEETINGS
1.3.1 Pre-Construction Meeting
Be prepared to discuss the following during this meeting:
a. eOMSI Manual Development Meetings
b. Processes and methods of gathering eOMSI Manual information during

construction.
c. The eOMSI Submittals schedule. Include the eOMSI submittal schedule
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 1

on the Baseline Construction Schedule in accordance with Section

01 32 17.00 20 COST-LOADED NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULE (NAS).
1.3.2 eOMSI Manual Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting
Facilitate a meeting after the Pre-Construction Meeting prior to the

submission of the eOMSI Progress Submittal. Meeting attendance must
include the Contractor's eOMSI Manual Preparer, Designer of Record (DOR),
and Quality Control Manager, the Commissioning Authority (CA), and the
Government's Design Manager (DM), Contracting Officer's Representative,
and NAVFAC Public Works (PW) Facilities Management Division (FMD). Also
include the Mechanical, Electrical, and Fire Protection Sub-Contractors as
required.
The purpose of this meeting is to reach a mutual understanding of the

scope of work concerning the contract requirements for eOMSI and
coordinate the efforts necessary by both the Government and Contractor to
ensure an accurate collection, preparation and timely Government review of
eOMSI.
1.3.3 Facility Turnover Meeting
Include eOMSI in Red Zone (NRZ) facility turnover meetings as specified in

Section 01 30 00, ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS.
1.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULING
1.4.1 eOMSI, Progress Submittal
Submit the Progress submittal when construction is approximately 50

percent complete, to the Contracting Officer for approval. Provide eOMSI
Manual Files (Bookmarked PDF). Include all elements and portions of
system construction completed up to this point.
The purpose of this submittal is to verify progress is in accordance with

contract requirements as discussed during the eOMSI Coordination and
Mutual Understanding Meeting. Field verify a portion of the eOMSI
information in accordance with paragraph FIELD VERIFICATION.
1.4.2 eOMSI, Prefinal Submittal
Submit the 100 percent submittal of the eOMSI Prefinal Submittal to the
Contracting Officer for approval within 90 calendar days of the Beneficial
Occupancy Date (BOD). This submittal must provide a complete, working
document that can be used to operate and maintain the facility. Any
portion of the submittal that is incomplete or inaccurate requires the
entire submittal to be returned for correction. Any discrepancies
discovered during the Government's review of eOMSI Progress submittal must
be corrected prior to the Prefinal submission.
The eOMSI Prefinal Submittal must include eOMSI Manual Files (Bookmarked
PDF).
1.4.3 eOMSI, Final Submittal
Submit completed eOMSI Manual Files (Bookmarked PDF). The Final submittal
is due at BOD. Any discrepancies discovered during the Government's
review of the Prefinal eOMSI submittal, including the Field Verification,
must be corrected prior to the Final eOMSI submission.
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 2

1.5 UNITS OF MEASURE
Provide eOMSI utilizing the units of measure used in the Government

generated contract documents.
1.6 SUBMITTALS

Training Plan; G
Training Outline; G
Training Content; G
eOMSI, Progress Submittal; G
eOMSI, Prefinal Submittal; G
eOMSI, Final Submittal; G
Training Video Recording; G
Validation of Training Completion; G
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 eOMSI FILES FORMAT
Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file using

the most current version of Adobe Acrobat or similar software capable of
producing PDF file format. Provide compact disks (CD) or data digital
versatile disk (DVD) as appropriate, so that each one contains all
maintenance and record files, and Project Record Documents and Training
Videos. Include a complete electronically linked operation and
maintenance directory. Provide four electronic copies of the eOMSI Manuals
to the Contracting Officer for approval.
Scan eOMSI Manual Files for malicious viruses using a commercially

available scanning program that is routinely updated to identify and
remove current virus threats.
2.1.1 eOMSI Manual Organization
Organize the eOMSI Manuals into two parts: 1) Product and Drawing
Information, and 2) Facility Information. Bookmark the PDF files for easy
access to the information.
a. Bookmark Facility Information and Primary Systems to at least one

level lower than the major system.
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 3

b. Bookmark Product and Drawing Information documents using the current

version of CSI Masterformat numbering system, and arrange submittals
using the specification sections as a structure. Use CSI Masterformat
and UFGS numbers along with descriptive bookmarked titles that explain
the content of the information that is being bookmarked.
2.1.2 eOMSI Manual Compact Disk Label and Disk Holder or Case
Provide the following information on the compact disk label and disk
holder or case:
a. Building Number
b. Project Title
c. Activity and Location
d. Construction Contract Number
e. Prepared For: (Contracting Agency)
f. Prepared By: (Name, title, phone number and email address)
g. Include the compact disk content on the disk label
h. Date
i. Virus scanning program used
2.2 EOMSI MANUAL
2.2.1 Product and Drawing Information
Provide an organized record of the facility products, materials,

equipment, and minimum information necessary to operate the facility.
Provide Product and Drawing Information for all systems in the final
constructed facility. Organize and bookmark the information for easy
access and quick retrieval.
2.2.1.1 O&M Data
As a minimum, include the O&M Data, submitted in the technical

specification sections, and in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
2.2.1.2 Record Drawings
Provide an electronic, PDF copy of the Record Drawings, prepared in

accordance with FC 1-300-09N and Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.
Bookmark all drawings using the sheet title and sheet number.
Include Record Drawings as part of the Red-Zone in accordance with Section

01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS.
2.2.1.3 Utility Record Drawings
Using Record Source Drawings, show and document details of the actual
installation of the utility systems; annotate and highlight the eOMSI
information. Provide Utility Record Drawings in PDF format. Provide the
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 4

following drawings at a large enough scale to differentiate designated

isolation units from surrounding valves and switches.
a. Utility Schematic Diagrams - Provide a one line schematic diagram for

each utility system such as power, water, wastewater, and gas/fuel.
Schematic diagram must show from the point where the utility line is
connected to the mainline up to the 5 foot connection point to the
facility. Indicate location or area designation for route of
transmission or distribution lines; locations of duct banks, manholes/
handholes or poles; isolation units such as valves and switches; and
utility facilities such as pump stations, lift stations, and
substations.
b. Enlarged Connection and Cutoff Plans - Provide enlarged floor plans

that provide information between the 5 foot utility connection point
and where utilities connect to facility distribution. Enlarge floor
plans / elevations of the rooms where the utility enters the building
and indicate on these plans locations of the main interior and
exterior connection and cutoff points for all utilities. Also enlarge
floor plans / elevations of the rooms where equipment is located.
Include enough information to enable someone unfamiliar with the
facility to locate the connection and cutoff points. Indicate
designations such as room number, panel number, circuit breaker, or
valve number, of each utility and equipment connection and cutoff
point, and what that connection and cutoff point controls.
2.2.2 Facility Information
Provide the following in Facility Information:
2.2.2.1 General Facility and System Description
Describe the function of the facility. Detail the overall dimensions of

the facility, number of floors, foundation type, expected number of
occupants, and facility Category Code. List and generally describe all
the facility systems listed in the Primary Systems Information and any
special building features (for example, HVAC Controls, Sprinkler Systems,
Cranes, Elevators, and Generators). Include photographs marked up and
labeled to show key operating components and the overall facility
appearance.
2.2.2.2 Floor Plans
Provide uncluttered, legible 11 by 17 inches floor plans. Include room

numbers, type or function of spaces, and overall facility dimensions on
the floor plans. Do not include items such as construction instructions,
references, or frame numbers.
2.2.2.3 Floor Coverings, Wall Surfaces, and Ceiling Surfaces
Provide a table that lists by room number (including hallways and common
spaces), the type, and area of finish, manufacturer's product name,
identifying number, and color. Include a facility summary of the total
area for each type of space and floor, wall, or ceiling finish in the
table.
2.2.2.4 Windows
Provide a table that lists by room number (including hallways
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 5

and common spaces), the type of window, window size, number of each size
and type, special features, manufacturer's product name, identifying
number, and color. The table must include a facility summary of the total
number for each type and size of window.
2.2.2.5 Roofing
Provide the total area of each type of roof surface and system. Provide
the name of the roofing product and system; manufacturer's, supplier's,
and installer's names, addresses, and phone numbers; manufacturer's
product name, identifying number, and color. For each type of roof,
provide a recommended inspection, maintenance and repair schedule that
details checkpoints, frequencies, and prohibited practices. List roof
structural load limits.
2.2.2.6 HVAC Filters
Provide a table that lists the quantity, type, size, and location of each
HVAC filter, manufacturer's product name, and identifying number.
2.2.2.7 Plumbing Fixtures
Provide a table that lists by room number, the number

and type of plumbing and bathroom plumbing fixtures (for example, sinks,
water closets, urinals, showers and drinking fountains).
2.2.2.8 Lighting Fixtures
Provide a table that lists by room number (including hallways and common
spaces), the type of lighting fixture, ballast, number of lighting
fixtures, type of lamps and number of lamps, and the manufacturer's
product name and the identifying number. The table must include a
facility summary of the total number of fixtures of each type and number
of lamps of each type.
2.2.2.9 Equipment Listing
Provide a table that lists the major equipment shown on the design
equipment schedules. Show the item descriptions, locations, model numbers;
and the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of the manufacturers,
suppliers, contractors, and subcontractors.
2.2.2.10 System Flow Diagrams
Provide a flow diagram indicating system liquid, air or gas flow during
normal operations. Integrate all system components into the diagram. A
compilation of non-integrated, flow diagrams for the individual system
components are not acceptable.
2.2.2.11 Valve List
Provide a list of all valves associated with the system. Show valve type,
identification number, function, location and normal operating position.
2.2.2.12 Riser Diagrams
Provide riser diagrams and settings of equipment.
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 6

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 eOMSI TRAINING
Prior to acceptance of the facility by the Contracting Officer for

Beneficial Occupancy, provide comprehensive training for the systems and
equipment specified in the technical specifications. The trainees must
include the Facilities Management Specialist, building maintenance
personnel, and applicable building occupants. Instructors must be
well-versed in the particular systems that they are presenting. Address
all aspects of the eOMSI Manual submittal. Training must include
classroom and field lectures as applicable. The location of classroom
training requires approval by the Contracting Officer.
3.1.1 Training Plan
Submit a written training plan to the Contracting Officer for approval at

least 60 calendar days prior to the scheduled training. Indicate prior
approval of the training plan by the Quality Control Manager (QC) on the
submittal forwarded to the Contracting Officer. Also, coordinate the
training schedule with the Contracting Officer and QC. Include within the
plan the following elements:
a. Equipment included in training
b. Intended audience
c. Location of training
d. Dates of training
e. Objectives
f. Outline of the information to be presented and subjects covered

including description
g. Start and finish times and duration of training on each subject
h. Methods (e.g. classroom lecture, video, site walk-through, actual

operational demonstrations, written handouts)
i. Instructor names and instructor qualifications for each subject
j. List of texts and other materials required to support training
3.1.2 Training Content
The core of this training must be based on manufacturer's recommendations

and the operation and maintenance information defined in Section 01 78 23
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA. The QC is responsible for overseeing and
approving the content and adequacy of the training. Provide a brief
summary of "Facility Information" and a more detailed presentation of,
"Primary Systems Information". Spend 95 percent of the instruction time
during the presentation on the "Primary Systems Information". Include the
following for each Primary system training presentation:
a. Start-up, normal operation, shutdown, unoccupied operation, seasonal

changeover, manual operation, controls set-up and programming,
troubleshooting, and alarms.
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 7

b. Relevant health and safety issues.
c. Discussion of how the feature or system is environmentally

responsive. Advise adjustments and optimizing methods for energy
conservation.
d. Design intent.
e. Use of O&M Manual Files.
f. Review of control drawings and schematics.
g. Interactions with other systems.
h. Special maintenance and replacement sources.
i. Tenant interaction issues.
3.1.3 Training Outline
Provide the eOMSI Manual Files (Bookmarked PDF) and a written course
outline listing the major and minor topics to be discussed by the
instructor on each day of the course to each trainee in the course.
Provide the course outline 14 calendar days prior to the training.
3.1.4 Training Video Recording
Provide to the Contracting Officer two copies of the training course in

DVD video recording format. Capture within the recording, in video and
audio, all instructors' training presentations including question and
answer periods with the trainees. Confirm proposed software used to
create the training is compatible with the using activity resources to
play the training materials. The recording camera(s) must be attended by
a person during the recording sessions to assure proper size of exhibits
and projections during the recording are visible and readable when viewed
as training.
3.1.5 Unresolved Questions from Trainees
If, at the end of the training course, there are questions from trainees
that remain unresolved, the instructor must send the answers, in writing,
to the Contracting Officer for transmittal to the trainees, and the
training video must be modified to include the appropriate clarifications.
3.1.6 Validation of Training Completion
Ensure that each attendee at each training session signs a class roster
daily to confirm Government participation in the training. At the
completion of all training, submit a signed validation letter that
includes a sample record of training for reporting what systems were
included in the training, who provided the training, when and where the
training was performed, and copies of the signed class rosters. Provide
two copies of the validation to the Contracting Officer, and one copy to
the eOMSI Preparer for inclusion into the eOMSI documentation.
3.1.7 Quality Control Coordination
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 8

Coordinate the eOMSI training with the QC in Section 01 45 00.00 20

QUALITY CONTROL.
SECTION 01 78 24.00 20 Page 9

SECTION 02 01 10
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS PROCEDURES

08/15
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Section includes general requirements and procedures for hazardous

materials related work activities, as applicable, to the Work and the
existing conditions at the project site.
a. Work includes Hazardous Materials Precautions and Handling Procedures

for non-abatement trades.
1.2 REFERENCES

29 CFR 1926.1101 Asbestos
29 CFR 1926.62 Lead
NFPA 701 (2015) Standard Methods of Fire Tests for

Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.3.1 Abatement
TePrimary work involving the removal, containment, control or treatment of

hazardous materials.
1.3.2 Asbestos
A generic name given to a number of naturally occurring hydrated mineral

silicates that possess a unique crystalline structure, are incombustible
in air, and are separate into fibers. Asbestos includes any material that
contains greater than 0.1 percent by weight in the asbestiform varieties
of chrysotile (serpentine); crocidolite (riebecklite); amosite
(cummingtonite-grunerite); anthophyllite; tremolite; and actinolite. For
the purposes of determining respiratory protection and worker protection
both the asbestiform and non-asbestiform varieties of the above materials
and any of these materials that have been chemically treated or altered
shall be considered asbestos.
1.3.3 Asbestos-Containing Material (ACM)
Any material which contains more than one percent (>1%) asbestos by weight
for the purposes of abatement, waste disposal and fiber controls specified
under this Contract.
1.3.4 Hazardous Materials Control
Incidental work procedures for control of releases of project- related

hazardous materials, including containment, enclosure, wetting, controlled
renovations and demolition procedures, and removal and disposal.
1.3.5 Hazardous Waste
a. Waste material, including asbestos, loose and peeling lead-based

paints, PCB ballasts, and any other material which requires
management, handling transport, treatment, storage or disposal
according to the requirements of the Federal Resource, Conservation
and Recovery Act (RCRA) and associated regulation 42 U.S.C. 6901 et
seq. and 40 CFR Part 260 et seq.).
b. References to hazardous material or contaminated material incorporate

definitions of hazardous pollutants, hazardous contaminants, hazardous
material, hazardous substance, hazardous waste, toxic pollutants and
toxic substance applicable in accordance with Federal, State, regional
and local statutes, laws, regulations and policies.
1.3.6 Lead
Metallic lead, all inorganic lead compounds and organic lead soaps, and
excluding all other organic lead compounds.
1.3.7 Lead-Based Paints
Paints or coated surfaces that contain an amount of lead equal to, or in

excess of, one milligram per square centimeter or more than half of one
percent (0.5 percent) lead by weight.
1.3.8 Lead-Containing
Any material, coating, substrate or product that contains metallic lead,

all inorganic lead compounds and organic lead soaps, and excluding all
other organic lead compounds.
1.3.9 Lead-Contaminated Dust
Dusts that contain an amount of lead equal to, or in excess of, forty
micrograms per square foot for floor surfaces and two hundred and fifty
micrograms per square foot for horizontal window surfaces.
1.3.10 Lead-Contaminated Soil
Bare soil that contains lead equal to, or in excess of, four hundred parts
per million (400 ppm) in children's play areas and one thousand parts per
million (1,000 ppm) in all other areas.
1.3.11 Lead-Related Construction Work
Means any construction, alteration, painting, demolition, salvage,

renovation, repair or maintenance of any residential or public building,
including preparation and clean-up, that, by using or disturbing
lead-containing material or soil, may result in significant exposure of
adults or children to lead.
1.3.12 Presumed Lead-Based Paint
Means paint or surface coating affixed to a component in or on a

structure, excluding paint or surface coating affixed to a component in or
on a residential dwelling constructed on or after January 1, 1978.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
a. Contractor shall pay all costs associated with the compliance with
applicable hazardous materials regulations or requirements incurred by
the Contractor or its subcontractors for this Project.
b. Take precautions necessary to protect the health and safety of

construction workers, site visitors, the Government's representatives,
outside consultants, public and others from exposure to hazardous
materials.
c. Take precautions necessary to insure all surrounding properties or

adjacent occupied areas are protected from any contamination from all
hazardous materials from this Project Site.
d. Review the information in the environmental and hazardous material

investigation reports and make such information available to
appropriate subcontractors and building occupants.
e. Obtain and pay for all sampling and profiling analyses required for
waste disposal.
f. Minimize generation and migration of hazardous and contaminated

materials, waste, dust, fumes and debris.
g. Prevent contamination or further contamination of any material or area

by hazardous or contaminated material, waste, dust, fumes or debris.
h. Avoid mixing or concentrating removed, or demolished materials so as

to increase the cost of disposing of such materials required to be
disposed as hazardous or contaminated wastes.
i. Contractor shall retain, and the Government will not indemnify

against, any liability of Contractor resulting from the activities or
duties which are the responsibility of Contractor under the terms of
the Contract, including but not limited to present or future liability
arising from the arrangement of transportation or disposal of any
hazardous or contaminated material, whether on or off-site.
j. Pursuant to 29 CFR 1926.1101, the Contractor shall be deemed to

exercise general supervisory authority over the work covered by the
standard, even though the General Contractor is not qualified to serve
as the asbestos "Competent Person," as defined by the standard. As
supervisor of the entire Project, the General Contractor shall
ascertain whether any subcontractor is in compliance with the standard
and shall require such contractor to come into compliance with the
standard when necessary.
k. Contractors shall schedule and coordinate abatement activities to time

limitations indicated in the Contract Documents, as specified in the
Abatement Work Plan.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
1.5.1 Hazardous Materials Supervisor
Assign a qualified person directly responsible under the Contractor's

Superintendent having the necessary training to be knowledgeable in the
identification, control, and management of the hazardous materials
on-site. The Hazardous Materials Supervisor is responsible for the
following:
a. Enforcing safe work and hygiene practices in compliance with the

Site-Specific Hazardous Materials Management Plan (HMMP).
b. Advising subcontractors of potential hazards and minimum general

requirements of the HMMP.
c. Coordinating subcontractor's work regarding hazardous material

procedures and controls.
d. Establishing and maintaining restricted work areas.
e. Requiring proper use of personal protective equipment.
f. Communicating approved modified safety requirements to site personnel.
g. Notification and coordinating signing of waste manifests with the

Government's representatives.
1.5.2 Hazardous Materials Handlers
Only qualified persons shall engage in hazardous material- related work.

Contractor and subcontractor personnel who come into contact with, are
exposed to, disturb, operate equipment or otherwise handle hazardous or
contaminated material, or debris shall have appropriate hazard
communication and required training, personal and medical monitoring, and
shall be certified to wear appropriate personal protective equipment as
required by the applicable laws and regulations. Special qualifications
which may be required depending on the Contractor's means and methods
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.5.2.1 Asbestos-Related Work Involving Asbestos-Containing Materials

Exceeding 100 Square Feet
a. Work shall be completed under the on-site supervision of a Competent

Person as defined by OSHA Regulation 29 CFR Part 1926.1101.
b. All abatement workers shall have AHERA training with annual 8-hour
refresher training, current medical exams for the use of respiratory
protection, and current fit tests of appropriate respirators.
1.5.2.2 Lead-Hazard Work
All affected workers shall have lead awareness training, current medical
examinations and approval for the use of respiratory protection, and
current fit testing of respirators complying with OSHA regulation
29 CFR Part 1926.62 when affecting lead paints and lead construction
hazards including, but not limited to:
a. Demolishing or salvaging structural items where lead or materials
containing lead are present.
b. Removing or encapsulating materials containing lead.
c. Constructing, altering, repairing or renovating structures,

substrates, or portions thereof that contain lead or materials
containing lead.
d. Installing of products containing lead.
e. Cleaning-up of lead contamination.
f. Transporting, disposing, storing, or containing lead or

lead-containing materials on the site or other locations where
construction and renovation activities are performed.
1.5.2.3 Lead Abatement Work
Only qualified and trained persons (ref. OSHA regulation 1926.62 (l) (1))
with annual medical examinations and approval for the use of respiratory
protection, and current fit testing of respirators under the direct
supervision of a Lead Abatement Supervisor shall engage in work defined
under affecting lead-based paints and lead construction hazards, including
but not limited to:
a. Working in an environment where lead exposures exceed 30 micrograms/m3.
b. Abating lead-based paints, including but not limited to abatement of

loose and peeling lead-based paints, demolition and disposal of
concrete-encased primed structural steel and/or stripping of lead
coatings from structural steel prior to torching or welding.
1.5.2.4 PCB Ballast-Related Work
Removal of non-leaking PCB ballasts may be completed by workers with PCB

hazard awareness training as verified by the Contractor's Health and
Safety Officer or Superintendent. Removal of leaking or damaged PCB
ballasts from lighting fixtures shall be completed by a trained worker,
wearing protective gloves and following safety procedures as outlined in
the HMMP. Hazardous waste shall be handled according to the U. S.
Environmental Protection Agency's Standards 40 CFR 761.60 and 40 CFR 761.65.
1.5.2.5 Contaminated Soils-Related Work Including Underground Storage Tanks
Workers shall have current 40-hour HAZWOPER training and 8-hour annual
refresher training per OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1910.120 and shall comply
with other health and safety requirements as approved in a Site-Specific
Hazardous Materials Management Plan.
1.5.2.6 Bio-Hazard Work
Work areas contaminated with fecal matter and human excretions, along with
needles and syringes and other materials potentially contaminated with
infectious bloodborne pathogens or other bio-hazards shall comply with the
health and safety requirements as approved in a Site-Specific Hazardous
Materials Management Plan.
1.5.3 Hazardous Materials Haulers
a. Possess during the hauling of hazardous material, applicable federal,

state, and local vehicle insurance requirements, valid driver's
license, vehicle registration and licenses.
b. Possess a Hazardous Substance Removal Certification and other required

certifications and insurance.
c. Contractor shall be responsible for informing drivers of hauling

vehicles about:
(1) The nature of the material hauled.
(2) Any recommended or required routes to and from the site.
(3) Applicable city street use regulations and requirements, and State
of Arizona Department of Transportation codes, regulations and
requirements.
(4) The Government's requirements for proper handling and

transportation of hazardous waste.
(5) The legal maximum loads for each vehicle.
a. Hazardous and contaminated materials and hazardous waste shall be

handled according to applicable laws and regulations in effect at the
time of disturbance, transport or disposal of said hazardous materials
or waste and requirements of the Contract Documents. In the event of
conflict, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
b. Marine Corps Air Station, Yuma, AZ is the generator, as defined in

40 CFR Part 261, of any hazardous waste, and will be responsible for
that hazardous waste to the extent required by law.
c. Contractor is alerted to and shall familiarize itself to the following

laws and regulations regarding the generation, management,
characterization and disposal of hazardous waste:
(1) Resources Conservation and Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C. Section 6901 et

seq. and regulations 40 CFR Part 260 et seq.
(2) For Asbestos Hazards: Comply with the applicable requirements of

the OSHA Construction Asbestos Standard, 29 CFR 29 CFR 1926.1101
and the EPA's NESHAP regulation, 40 CFR Part 61, Subpart M.
(3) For Lead Hazards and Abatement: Comply with the applicable
requirements of the OSHA Lead in Construction Standard,
29 CFR 1926.62.
1.7 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS USED TO PERFORM THE WORK
Minimize the use of hazardous materials to perform the work. Where

materials that contain hazardous substances or mixtures are used to
perform the work, material usage shall be in strict adherence to OSHA's
safety requirements and the manufacturer's warnings and application
instructions listed on the Material Safety Data Sheet provided by the
product manufacturer and on the product container label.
a. Contractor will be responsible for coordinating the exchange of MSDS

or other hazard communication information between subcontractors at
the site.
b. Contractor will notify the Government when a specific product or

equipment, or their intended usage, may be unsafe prior to ordering
the product or equipment or prior to the product or equipment being
incorporated in the Work.
1.7.1 Prohibited Material
The following materials and chemicals are specifically prohibited from use
on this project unless otherwise accepted in writing by the Government.
a. Material with a stated ACGIH threshold limit value of less than 25

parts per million.
b. Ethylene glycol monomethyl ether.
c. Dipropylene glycol methyl ether.
d. Ethylene glycol.
e. Formaldehyde.
f. Isocyanates.
g. Chemicals with a flash point of less than 140 degrees Fahrenheit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
2.1.1 Protective Devices
Temporary wash stations or showers, disposable clothing, respirators,

gloves, hard hats, and other required items. Respirators shall protect
against appropriate dusts, fumes and mists as approved by the National
Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) under provisions of
30 CFR Part 11.
2.1.2 Waste Receptacles
Conform to federal and State regulations, with 6-mil minimum thickness

waste bags.
2.1.3 Polyethylene Sheeting and Dust Barriers
Polyethylene sheeting shall be flame-retardant and approved and listed by

the State Fire Marshal.
a. Thickness and Size: 6-mil thick minimum, unless otherwise specified,

sized to minimize the frequency of joints.
b. Flammability: Comply with NFPA 701 with a flame spread rating of no

greater than 5 and a smoke development rating of no more than 70 when
tested in accordance with ASTM procedures.
2.1.4 HEPA Vacuums and Negative Pressure Units (NPUs)
HEPA Vacuums and Negative Pressure Units (NPUs) used for clean-up of
materials and detail cleaning shall be HEPA-filtered.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Notify the Contractor's Hazardous Material Supervisor of suspect

conditions for testing by the Government. Promptly notify the Government
of differing conditions. Please note that the Contract Documents may
restrict access to some ceiling spaces and plenums were known
asbestos-containing damaged, friable surfacing materials exist. Access to
these restricted areas will require the use of respiratory protection,
full coveralls and decontamination procedures if accessed by non-abatement
trades unless a negative exposure assessment is submitted to show that
lower standards of protection are acceptable.
3.2 ASBESTOS HAZARD CONTROL PROCEDURES
3.2.1 Prohibited Activities Not Specified in This Section
a. Asbestos-containing materials shall not be disturbed by cutting,

sawing, grinding, pulverizing, crumbling, breaking, or otherwise
rendered friable or airborne unless these activities are conducted
under the requirements of all applicable regulations and guidelines.
b. A qualified Asbestos Abatement Contractor per OSHA regulation 29 CFR

1926.1101 shall complete Work exceeding 100 sq. ft. or 100 linear feet
of asbestos-containing materials. All work affecting friable
asbestos-containing materials shall be completed in compliance with
OSHA Work Class I or III procedures, as applicable. Class III work
may be completed by workers with EPA Asbestos Operations and
Maintenance training and annual refresher training, minimum. Refer to
Section 02 09 00 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ABATEMENT AND CONTROL.
3.2.2 Demolition of Non-ACM Obstructing Known Intact ACM
a. Remove non-contaminated and non-asbestos materials for access using

standard dust control procedures as required for painted assemblies,
etc.
b. Minimize disturbances to substrates concealing friable or damaged

asbestos-containing materials, such as laid-in ceiling tiles
concealing asbestos-containing acoustical plasters, demolition of
non-ACM partitions which may destabilize sprayed-on
asbestos-containing acoustical finishes, etc. Work impacting
asbestos-containing materials shall be completed by qualified workers
only.
c. Remove and dispose of non-contaminated waste, where feasible. Alert

the Contractor's Hazardous Material Supervisor of contaminated
conditions for proper removal and disposal and cordon off the affected
areas where contamination is encountered. Do not dry sweep affected
wastes and debris.
3.2.3 Unexpected Exposure to Known or Suspect Intact ACM
a. Where asbestos materials are intact, such as intact ceiling plasters,

proceed to remove the affected substrate and immediately label the
asbestos material with a "Caution" sign to prevent unintentional
disturbances.
b. Where asbestos materials uncovered are damaged or unknown asbestos

contaminated conditions are encountered, discontinue work in the
immediate contaminated area, shutdown the areas HVAC system, if not
already disengaged, and alert the Contractor's Hazardous Materials
Supervisor of the conditions for proper removal and disposal.
3.2.4 Unexpected Release of Asbestos Into the Environment
a. Cordon off the immediate area (10 to 20 ft. radius average minimum),
and shutdown the area's HVAC system (if applicable). Stop work and
immediately notify the Government of the disturbance.
b. Notify the Contractor's Hazardous Materials Supervisor for proper

removal and disposal using wet methods and HEPA-filtered vacuums.
Clean-up work shall be completed under the directions of a Competent
Person with 16-hour minimum EPA Operations and Maintenance asbestos
training and by workers with 2-hours asbestos awareness training
minimum unless exposures exceed the permissible exposure limit of 0.1
fibers/cc.
c. Decontaminate or dispose of friable waste in double 6-mil thick

goosenecked labeled waste bags for manifesting and disposal.
3.2.5 Procedures for Reporting Suspect Asbestos Containing Materials
Advise the Contractor's Hazardous Materials Supervisor (HMS) of suspect

conditions for testing by the Government or its consultants. Do not
remove or disturb suspect materials until tested and approved.
3.2.6 Perimeter Action Level
Failure of the Contractor to follow wet methods, immediate clean up, and
fiber control procedures as outlined herein resulting in exceedances to
the Perimeter Action Level of 0.01 fibers/cc by Phase Contrast Microscopy
at the perimeter of the regulated area, or within adjoining occupied zones
(as measured by the Government or its consultants) shall result in
clean-up and analysis of the samples by Transmission Electron Microscopy
(TEM) at the Contractor's expense.
3.3 LEAD HAZARD CONTROL PROCEDURES
Lead-related construction work affecting lead-based paints or

lead-contaminated soils. Refer to Section 02 09 00 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
ABATEMENT AND CONTROL.
3.3.2 Prohibited Activities
a. Open flame burning or torching of lead-based paints or presumed

lead-based paints, including use of propane-fueled heat grids.
b. Scraping, sanding, or grinding of lead-based paints or presumed

lead-based paints without proper containment or a HEPA local vacuum
exhaust tool.
c. Uncontained hydro-blasting or high pressure washing of lead-based

paints or presumed lead-based paints.
d. Heat guns operating above 1,100 degrees Fahrenheit.
e. Dry sweeping of debris and removal of surface coatings by torch or

flame.
f. Disturbance of lead-painted or lead-coated surfaces scheduled to

remain within the structure(s) by cutting, sawing, grinding, or other
construction operations without adequate dust controls.
g. Eating, smoking and drinking in or in the proximity of lead hazard

operations.
h. Removal of lead-containing coatings with a torch or flame, except as a

result of unavoidable welding or torching of back-to-back structural
elements that cannot be adequately previously abated without affecting
the integrity of the structure.
i. Steam cleaning and compressed air removal for lead-based paints or

presumed lead-based paints.
j. Lead hazard contamination beyond the containment barriers.
3.3.3 Handling
a. For existing lead-painted or lead-coated surfaces that are indicated

to remain, advise workers of the potential hazards.
b. For areas where handling or disturbance of loose or peeling paints are

required, verify that the paint that remains on interior walls,
ceilings, and other surfaces in areas of active work, as applicable,
is adhered to the substrate sufficiently to support eventual
repainting. Paints that peel or loosen during wetting shall be
handled and removed as specified in this Section.
c. Clean debris and surfaces with HEPA-filtered vacuums and wet methods.
Dry sweeping is not permitted.
d. Show where existing lead-painted or lead-coated surfaces are scheduled

to remain, workers shall be advised of the potential hazard of these
materials with all work completed by qualified workers.
e. Shoveling, wet sweeping, and brushing may be used only where vacuuming
or other equally effective methods have been tried and are found to be
ineffective.
f. Loose debris and scraped materials with a lead content greater than
1.0 mg/cm2 or 0.5 percent by weight shall be treated as hazardous
waste. Construction waste coated with intact lead paints or glazing
may be disposed as construction debris in accordance with EPA
requirements.
g. Workers shall decontaminate themselves and appropriate equipment prior
to eating, drinking and smoking.
3.3.4 Recycling
Items to be recycled, such as but not limited to lead roof flashing or

lead sheeting, shall be accompanied with a bill of lading and a memorandum
from the recycler acknowledging that lead may be present and work
activities and disposal will comply with applicable regulations. Submit
in accordance with procedures of Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
3.3.5 Cleaning
Provide daily "housekeeping" on the project site including, but limited

to:
a. Clean-up of loose debris and contamination daily prior to leaving the

job site, or covering with tarpaulins to prevent unwanted
disturbances.
b. Daily clean-up of traffic areas, using a HEPA vacuum or wet methods.
c. Repair of torn or damaged protective barriers.
3.3.6 Field Quality Control
a. Maintain airborne dust levels within the regulated construction zone

and throughout the construction site below the OSHA Project Action
Level of 30 micrograms per cubic meter. Levels above the Project
Action Level may require an upgrade in respiratory protection for all
affected workers, as well as amended work practices and clean-up of
affected areas at no additional cost to the Government.
b. Maintain airborne lead dust levels at the site's property line or

adjoining occupied non- construction areas below the National Ambient
Air Quality Standard (NAAQS) of 1.5 micrograms per cubic meter.
Exceeding this level may require further isolation of the work areas,
amended work practices, and clean-up of affected areas at no
additional cost to the Government.
c. All costs for additional sampling of contaminated areas, including the

Government's time and expenses for handling, shipping, and analysis
charges, required to show background levels below the lead standards
in Subparagraphs 3.3.6.a. and 3.3.6.b. shall be at the Contractor's
expense.
d. Failure by the Contractor to contain construction dust and debris and

exceedances of the NAAQS standard of 1.5 micrograms/cubic meter
outside the construction boundaries within adjoining occupied areas of
the site as measured by the Government or its consultants will require
detailed clean-up and additional clearance wipe sampling at the
Contractor's expense.
3.3.7 Project Hygiene Facilities
Provide project hygiene wash-up facilities including:
a. A 2-stage decontamination assembly, minimum, including an equipment

and contiguous clean room with a bucket wash-up facility positioned
outside all regulated work areas. The Equipment Room shall contain
labeled bags for storing contaminated protective clothing and

equipment. The Clean Room shall contain lockers and containers for
storing employee street clothes and personal items, including a
suitable supply of potable water to permit each employee to wash their
hair, hands, forearms, face and neck. Provide 1 wash station minimum
for every 10 workers.
b. Sufficient sets of protective full-body clothing to be worn in the

designated work areas and whenever a potential airborne lead hazard
exists. Clothing shall include, but not be limited to, full-body
coveralls, headgear, eye protection, and gloves. Disposable-type
protective clothing is acceptable.
3.3.8 General Dust Controls
Provide general dust control including:
a. Hudson or airless sprayers for wetting-down construction materials and

debris throughout demolition or scraping phases.
b. Fire-retardant polyethylene dust barriers.
c. HEPA-filtered vacuum for clean-up of loose debris and suspect

contamination.
d. Polyethylene drop cloths for protection of floors, furnishings,

landscaping, etc., as applicable, to prevent contamination or damage
to building surfaces, equipment or finishes.
3.3.9 Warnings and Signs
Provide the following minimum signs and posting requirements:
a. Cordon off the proximity (within approximately 20 ft.) of regulated

work areas using "Caution" tape, polyethylene dust barriers, or other
appropriate means. Persons entering the regulated "cordoned" work
areas shall wear appropriate respiratory protection and full-body
coveralls.
b. Affix warning signs at the entry and approaches to the regulated areas.
c. Lockout electrical and HVAC equipment within the regulated area, as

necessary.
3.4 PCB BALLAST PROCEDURES
3.4.1 Identifying PCB Ballasts
All ballasts not specifically labeled "non-PCB" or "PCB free" shall be

considered PCB-containing.
Removal of ballasts from fixtures with hazard awareness training as

indicated by the Contractor's Hazardous Materials Supervisor.
3.4.3 Procedures for Removal of Non-Leaking Ballasts
Non-leaking ballasts shall be removed from their fixtures and packed in
kitty litter-lined steel drums for hazardous waste disposal. Workers

removing ballasts may require protective gloves as a precaution against
unforeseen leaks or damage.
3.4.4 Procedure for Handling Leaking PCB Ballasts
a. Workers removing ballasts from fixtures shall wear protective clothing

and nitrile or neoprene gloves.
b. Leaking ballasts pose a health and safety hazard and shall therefore
be removed by trained workers only (OSHA 40-hour Hazwoper training is
recommended).
c. Wipe down the fixture showing signs of overheated or leaking ballasts

with paper towels after the unit has been cooled to room temperature.
d. Follow with additional wiping with an organic solvent, e.g., mineral

spirits or isopropyl alcohol.
e. Place leaking ballasts and rags into a plastic bag, which is tied-off
and secured.
f. Pack the ballasts in steel drums for hazardous waste disposal.
3.4.5 Procedure for Disposal of PCB Ballasts
a. Pack PCB ballasts and bagged leaking ballasts and rags into a steel
drum, sealed, labeled, and transported to an approved incinerator
following required manifest procedures as specified in this Section.
b. Absorbent material, such as kitty litter, shall be used as a cushion

and absorbent within the drums.
c. Do not exceed the incinerator's drum loading requirements, typically

350 to 500 lbs. per drum.
d. Transport hazardous waste for disposal per the requirements of the

Arizona Department of Transportation.
e. Dispose as a hazardous waste per EPA Regulation 40 CFR 761.00 and

40 CFR 761.65.
3.5 MERCURY-CONTAINING LAMP REMOVAL PROCEDURES
Disposal of quantities over 25 lamps per day as non-hazardous waste.
3.5.2 Handling and Disposal of Lamps
a. Spent fluorescent and other mercury-containing lamps shall be

considered a hazardous waste.
b. Ship lamps exceeding 25 units per site per day to a commercial

recycler where they are to be crushed and the mercury reclaimed.
c. Comply with DOT requirements for manifests, with evidence of proper

disposal provided to the Government, including a log of shipping dates
and quantities.
d. Load into secured cardboard boxes for shipment to prevent unnecessary

breakage.
e. In the event of lamp breakage, clean-up broken glass and debris

immediately, using a HEPA-filtered vacuum for final clean-up.
3.6 WASTE DISPOSAL AND MANIFESTING PROCEDURES
3.6.1 Hazardous Waste Disposal
a. Packing, labeling, transporting, and disposing of hazardous waste

shall comply with EPA regulations under 40 CFR, including completion
of the Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest Form.
b. A "Waste Manifest" shall be completed for disposal of hazardous

waste. The transporter shall possess a valid EPA Transporter I.D.
number. The Contractor's Hazardous Materials Supervisor shall notify
the Project Manager at least 48 hours prior to the time that the
Manifest is required to be signed by MCAS Yuma or its representatives.
c. Applicable information to be included in the "Waste Manifest" includes

the following:
(1) EPA Generator I.D. Number: Verify with the Contracting Officer.
(2) Generator's Name and Address: Marine Corps Air Station, Yuma, AZ
83565
(3) Generator Tax I.D. Number: _________________________.
3.6.2 Disposal of Contaminated and Other Materials
a. Disposal of intact lead-coated architectural or structural elements

may occur as non- hazardous waste (based on waste profiling results)
in accordance with EPA requirements.
b. Loose and peeling lead-based paints and miscellaneous lead debris

shall be treated as hazardous waste, unless otherwise indicated. Lead
wastes shall be profiled by the Contractor by means of standard
digestion and extraction tests (TCLP, and SW846), as appropriate, and
shall be manifested and properly disposed.
3.7 FINAL PROJECT CLEAN-UP CLEARANCE CRITERIA PROCEDURES
3.7.1 Asbestos
Asbestos-containing materials will be abated with clearance by visual

inspection and Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM) or Transmission Electron
Microscopy (TEM), as applicable, as outlined under the "Hazardous
Materials Abatement and Control" Section, as applicable.
3.7.2 Lead Hazards
3.7.2.1 Visual Inspection
Final clean-up prior to re-occupancy or Substantial Completion shall

include wet wiping using a mild detergent solution and HEPA vacuuming all
suspect dust and debris for final visual inspection, or wipe dust sampling
as outlined under the "Hazardous Materials Abatement and Control" Section,

as applicable.
3.7.2.2 Final Cleaning
Final clean-up shall include wet wiping using a mild detergent solution
and HEPA vacuuming all suspect dust and debris areas.
DOCUMENT 02 02 35
EXISTING CONDITIONS - HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

08/15
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This Document describes Reference Documents covering investigations of

existing hazardous materials, including data identified in a survey report
prepared by SCA/LA Environmental, Inc., and the use of data resulting from
various investigations.
1.2 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REPORT(S)
The Bidder's attention is directed to the fact that a survey report was
prepared for the site by SCA/LA Environmental, Inc., entitled "Summary
Report: Pre-Renovation Hazardous Building Materials Survey - Marine Corps
Air Station, Yuma, Arizona, Building 229, Engine Maintenance Shop" dated
May 2015, which was utilized by the Government and its Consultants in
preparing the Contract Documents.
1.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REPORT(S) - SUMMARY INFORMATION
1.3.1 Asbestos Hazards
Certain existing building components or materials that may be impacted by

the Work of this Project are known or presumed to contain asbestos.
a. The following materials were tested and found to contain asbestos at

concentrations greater than one percent (> 1 percent):
(1) Resilient tan exterior caulking present at CMU joints, doors and
windows.
(2) Sticky, resilient gray expansion caulking ay the cold joints of

the concrete slab perimeter.
(3) 12 by 12 inch gray vinyl floor tiles with darker gray and white
streaks and associated black mastic, present in some first floor
rooms and a hallway.
b. The following materials were not tested, but the Contractor, for
purposes of this Contract, shall assume that these materials contain
asbestos at greater than one percent (>1 percent), and manage these
materials as asbestos-containing:
(1) Not applicable.
c. The following materials were tested and found to contain less than 1
percent (<1 percent) asbestos:
(1) Not applicable.
d. The following suspect asbestos-containing materials were tested and

found not to contain asbestos:
(1) Roof field, consisting of 4 by 4 foot sheets, white coating,

black felt and gray "sand-like" cellulose substrate.
(2) Gray rolled, composition sheet roofing and black tar, present on
the raised roof pads.
(3) Black/gray roof penetration mastic.
(4) Gray, canvas-type roofing material associated with roof pads and
parapets.
(5) White, semi-resilient interior caulking around bathroom fixtures.
(6) Hard gray expansion joint material associated with some interior
floor slab cold joints.
(7) 2 by 4 foot white laid-in ceiling tiles with pinholes.
(8) Gypsum board walls and associated joint compound, with smooth
finish.
(9) Brown/yellow mastic associated with 4 inch vinyl cove base.
(10) "Yellowish" terrazzo flooring.
(11) Tan, sprayed-on "Monokote®-type" structural fireproofing, above

the ceilings in some office areas.
(12) Off-white, canvas-type seam tape associated with sheet metal HVAC
ducts.
(13) Gray resilient mastic associated with sheet metal HVAC ducts.
(14) Resilient fire-stop material associated with conduit ceiling

penetrations.
(15) 12 by 12 inch beige vinyl floor tiles and associated yellow

mastic, under carpeting in some rooms.
1.3.2 Lead Hazards
Certain existing painted or coated surfaces to be impacted by the scope of

this Project are known or suspected to contain lead.
a. The following paints, coatings, or materials were tested and found to

contain lead at concentrations at or above the U.S. Department of
Housing and Urban Development (HUD) definition of a lead-containing
material (either > 1.0 mg/cm2 or > 0.5 percent (>0.5 percent) lead by
weight):
(1) Chipped yellow paint on the steel bollards at the exterior of the
building.
(2) White glazing on porcelain sinks in the Women's restroom.
(3) Metallic lead flashing on a roof vent.
b. The following materials were not tested but, the Contractor, for the
purposes of this Contract, assume, and manage, them as lead containing.
(1) Plumbing components, such as pipes, fittings and solders.
(2) Mastics and adhesives.
c. The following materials were tested and the concentrations of lead

were found to be below the HUD definition of lead a containing
material (< 1.0 mg/cm2 or < 0.5 percent lead by weight). For OSHA
compliance, therefore, the Contractor shall assume that, at a minimum,
some lead is "present" in all these materials and that they have the
potential, until proven otherwise, to create a lead hazard.
(1) Brown paint on the steel stair railing to the mezzanine.
(2) Structural steel, including wide flange beams, columns, steel

angles and channels, hoists, etc.
(3) Beige paint on a steel transformer.
(4) Tan paints on steel door frames.
(5) Red paint on a fire water valve.
(6) Off white paint on some CMU walls.
d. The Government has not verified that any paints, coatings, dusts, or
materials are "lead free," or below 90 ppm.
1.3.3 PCB-Containing Fluorescent Light Ballasts
Approximately 51 light ballasts, which are assumed to contain PCBs (unless

labeled otherwise), were observed throughout the building.
1.3.4 Mercury, Cadmium, and/or Sodium-Containing Fluorescent Light

Tubes/Bulbs, Thermostats and Controls
Approximately 385 fluorescent light tubes, which are assumed to contain

mercury, were observed throughout the building.
1.3.5 Sewage, Sludge, and Bacterial Hazards Associated From Untreated

Sewage
Not observed.
1.3.6 Bio-Hazards
a. Animal nests, animals and their waste may be present in or around the
building, although substantial bio-hazards were not noted in the 2015
survey report.
b. The presence of some water damage in the restroom areas of the

building may be indicative of concealed mold growth, although visible
mold growth was not noted in the 2015 survey report.
1.4 USE OF DATA
Environmental consultation was obtained only for the use of the Government
and its Consultants for planning and design stages of this Project. The
above mentioned report(s) are not, as a whole, part of the Contract

Documents, but the survey data contained therein can be relied upon by the
Contractor to characterize general site conditions, although quantities,
friability and other factors may have changed or been altered since the
published report date(s).
All statements, findings, and interpretations in the above-mentioned

reports are those of the Environmental Consultant. The Government makes no
representations, either expressed or implied, as to the completeness or
adequacy of the above-mentioned reports. Bidders are advised that the
limited testing of components allow for generalizations in describing the
extent of hazardous materials. Specific components or materials, should
be checked against the referenced survey report(s) and the Contract
Documents, or be tested at affected locations, prior to disturbance of
such components.
Bidders shall visit the site and acquaint themselves with the existing
conditions.
1.5 PRE-BID VISIT TO WORK SITE
Prior to bidding, Bidders may make their own investigations to satisfy

themselves as to the site conditions, but such investigations shall be
performed only under the provisions set by the Government during the Bid
Walk Phase.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used.
SECTION 02 09 00
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ABATEMENT AND CONTROL

08/15
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1 Section Includes
Minimum requirements for hazardous materials handling, control, and

abatement activities, as applicable, including, but not necessarily
limited to:
a. Hazardous materials controls.
b. Handling and disposal of asbestos-containing building materials (ACBM).
c. Handling and disposal of lead-based paints and lead-containing

materials.
d. Removal and disposal of existing ballasts containing polychlorinated

biphenyls (PCBs).
e. Disposal of mercury-containing lamps.
f. Handling and disposal of contaminated soils.
g. Demolition associated with access to hazardous materials.
h. Criteria for abatement zone clearance testing.
i. Criteria for re-occupancy clearance.
1.1.2 Related Work
Related Work to be Performed by the Government under Separate Contract:
a. Hazardous materials removal as specified in the Abatement Work Plan:

Summary of Work.
1.2 REFERENCES

ASTM E84 (2014) Standard Test Method for Surface

Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials

Response
29 CFR 1910.134 Respiratory Protection
29 CFR 1926.62 Lead

Hazardous Waste

Air Pollutants
40 CFR 61-SUBPART M National Emission Standard for Asbestos

40 CFR 763 Asbestos


49 CFR 179 Specifications for Tank Cars

NFPA 90A (2015) Standard for the Installation of

Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.3.1 Abatement
For lead hazards work, includes any set of measures designed to reduce or
eliminate lead hazards.
1.3.2 Activity Class/Category - Lead
Lead hazard designations assigned to work activities that involve

lead-containing materials. Activities that fall into Classes I through
III, including as examples the operations defined below, are required to
assume the following personal airborne exposure levels, unless otherwise
demonstrated.
a. Activity Class I; Exposure <500 micrograms/m3
(1) Surface clean-up of lead-containing dust or debris < 15,000
micrograms/ft2;
(2) Spray painting with lead-based paints; Manual demolition of

structures (e.g. drywall, plaster, etc.);
(3) Manual sanding, grinding, needle gunning, chiseling, hammering,

wire brushing, milling or scraping of lead-based coatings;
(4) Heat gun removal of any surface coating; and power tool cleaning
with dust collection systems.
b. Activity Class II; Exposure > 500 micrograms/m3 and < 2,500
micrograms/m3
(1) Using lead mortar;
(2) Lead burning;
(3) Rivet busting;
(4) Power tool cleaning without dust collection systems;
(5) Clean-up of dry abrasive; and
(6) Abrasive blasting enclosure movement and removal.
c. Activity Class III; Exposure > 2,500 micrograms/m3
(1) Abrasive blasting of any coated surfaces;
(2) Welding on any coated surfaces;
(3) Torching or cutting or any coated surfaces; and
(4) Torch burning of any coated surfaces.
1.3.3 Asbestos Work Class
Activities for removing asbestos materials by categories are as follows:
a. Work Class I: Activity involving removal of TSI and surfacing

asbestos-containing materials (ACM) or friable presumed
asbestos-containing materials (PACM).
b. Work Class II: Activity involving removal miscellaneous materials

excluding TSI and surfacing asbestos-containing materials (ACM) or
friable presumed asbestos-containing materials (PACM), including but
not limited to wallboard, floor tiles and sheeting, roofing and siding
shingles, and construction mastics.
c. Work Class III: Repair and maintenance operations where TSI or

surfacing is likely to be disturbed, which fits within one standard
glovebag or waste container under 60 inches.
d. Work Class IV: Maintenance and custodial activities during which

employees contact but do not disturb PACM or ACM and activities to
clean-up dust, waste and debris resulting from Work Class I, II, and
III activities.
1.3.4 Lead Worker
Includes those who do lead-related construction work activities on a work

site under the directions of a Lead Supervisor, including:
a. Removal, disposal or abatement of loose and peeling lead-based paints

as defined by HUD, including scraping, demolition or other OSHA
Activity 1 through 3 work as defined above lasting over 20 years.
b. Removal or repair of lead plumbing.
c. Repainting or general construction on surfaces painted with lead-based

paints.
d. Removal, enclosing or covering of lead-contaminated soils.
e. Note that renovations, remodeling, painting, operations and

maintenance work or other activities listed above that are considered
to be interim controls, or lasting under 20 years, may be completed by
workers satisfying OSHA's lead awareness training requirements only.
1.3.5 Lead Supervisor
Includes those who supervise daily work activities on a lead-related

construction site, as well as supervision of repainting or general
construction performed on surfaces with lead-based paints where abatement
is designed to permanently reduce or eliminate lead hazards for public
(non-industrial) buildings or to last more than 20 years. The Lead
Supervisor shall oversee the Lead Workers, enforce safe work practices,
and schedule and coordinate work site activities with the building
occupants and other contractors and consultants.
1.3.6 Containment
Includes any system, process, or barrier used to contain lead hazards in a

work area, including plastic sheeting, wet scraping, and other lead-safe
work practices as described in the HUD Guidelines, Chapter 8.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

Contaminated/Hazardous Soils
SD-06 Test Reports
Analytical Testing; G
Site Tests: Clearance Criteria; G
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications; G
Notifications; G
Hazardous Waste Manifest; G
Soils Disposed; G
Weighing Of Excavated Material
1.5.1 Qualifications
1.5.1.1 Submittals
At the time of the Notice to Proceed to the Contractor, provide the

following:
a. Proof of valid training records.
b. A list of Class I, II, and III landfills and/or disposal facilities

and brokers that the Contractor proposes to use.
c. The name and rates of the accredited laboratory.
1.5.1.2 Asbestos Abatement Work
Only qualified persons shall engage in asbestos abatement activities.

Work shall be completed under the on-site supervision of a Competent
Person, as defined by OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1926.1101. All abatement
workers shall have AHERA training with annual 8-hour refresher training,
current medical exams for the use of respiratory protection, and current
fit test of appropriate respirators.
1.5.1.3 Lead Hazard/Abatement Work
Only qualified and trained persons, current medical examinations and

approval for the use of respiratory protection, and current fit testing of
respirators under the direct supervision of a Lead Abatement Supervisor
shall engage in work defined under OSHA regulation 29 CFR 1926.62,
affecting lead-based paints and lead construction hazards, including but
not limited to:
a. Working in an environment where lead exposures exceed 30 micrograms

per cubic meter.
b. Abating lead-based paints, including but not limited to abatement of

loose and peeling lead-based paints, demolition and disposal of
concrete-encased primed structural steel and/or stripping of lead
coatings from structural steel prior to torching or welding.
1.5.1.4 PCB Hazard Work
Removal of leaking or damaged PCB ballasts from lighting fixtures shall be

completed by a trained worker, wearing protective gloves and following
safety procedures as outlined in the HMMP. Hazardous waste shall be
handled according to the U. S. Environmental Protection Agency's Standards
40 CFR 761.60 and 40 CFR 761.65.
1.5.1.5 Contaminated Soils-Related Work
Subcontractors will be required to have current 40- hour HAZWOPER training

and 8-hour annual refresher training per OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1910.120
and shall comply with other health and safety requirements as approved in
a Site-Specific Hazardous Materials Management Plan, approved and signed
by the Contractor's Certified Industrial Hygienist.
1.5.1.6 Underground Storage Tank-Related Work
Subcontractors will be required to have current 40-hour HAZWOPER training

and 8-hour annual refresher training per OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1910.120
and shall comply with other health and safety requirements as approved in
a Site-Specific Hazardous Materials Management Plan, approved and signed
by the Contractor's Certified Industrial Hygienist.
1.5.2 Regulatory Requirements
The Contractor shall be alerted to and familiar with the following laws
and regulations regarding the hazards, control measures, management,
characterizing, transport and disposal of hazardous wastes:
1.5.2.1 Asbestos Abatement Work
All labor, materials, facilities, equipment, services, employees and

training, and testing necessary to perform the work required for asbestos
abatement and disposal of waste shall be in accordance with these
Specifications and the most current regulations, including but not limited
to:
a. Environmental Protection Agency, including NESHAP (40 CFR 61-SUBPART M

) and AHERA regulations (40 CFR 763, as applicable).
b. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (inclusive of OSHA

29 CFR 1926.1101)
c. Other applicable federal, state, and local governmental regulations

pertaining to asbestos-containing materials (ACM) and asbestos waste.
1.5.2.2 Lead Hazard/Abatement Work

training, and testing necessary to perform the work required for lead
abatement, demolition, decontamination, hazard control, and disposal of
waste shall be in accordance with these Specifications and the most
current regulations, including but not limited to:
a. Environmental Protection Agency National Ambient Air Quality

Standards, as applicable (40 CFR 61).
b. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (inclusive of OSHA

29 CFR 1926.62).
c. Other applicable federal, state, and local governmental regulations

pertaining to lead hazards and lead waste.
1.5.2.3 Polychlorinated Biphenyl Work

training, and testing necessary to handle, containerize, secure, label,
manifest, transport and either reuse, dispose, incinerate, or recycle
PCB-containing ballasts shall be in accordance with these Specifications
and with EPA regulations.
1.5.2.4 Mercury-Containing Lamp Disposal/Recycling

training, and testing necessary to handle, containerize, secure, label,
manifest, transport and either reuse, dispose, or recycle
mercury-containing lamps impacted by the construction operations shall be
in accordance with these Specifications and with EPA Regulations.
1.5.2.5 Contaminated Soil Clean-up

training, and testing necessary to perform the work required for
contaminated soil and/or ground water abatement, decontamination, hazard
control, and disposal of waste shall be in accordance with these
Specifications and the most current regulations.
1.5.3 Meetings
1.5.3.1 Pre-Construction or Pre-Abatement Meeting
Prior to any abatement work, the Contractor is to attend a

pre-construction meeting to be attended by representatives of the
Government, the Government's Consultants, the Contractor, the Hazardous
Materials Abatement Subcontractor, and other Subcontractors whose work may
be affected. The meeting agenda shall include the following
considerations:
a. Review of the Specifications and Plans in detail related to the

abatement and hazards work. All conflicts and ambiguities, if any,
shall be discussed.
b. Review in detail the project conditions, schedule, construction

sequencing, abatement application requirements, and quality of
completed work.
c. Review in detail the means of protecting adjoining areas, protection

of Contractor's, Subcontractor's, the Government's workers, and
completed work during the abatement activities.
d. Pre-job submittals requirements.
e. Site security requirements.
1.5.3.2 Weekly Meetings
At the Government's option, abatement projects extending over one week in

length may require attendance of the Contractor at a weekly progress
meeting. The purpose of this meeting is to review abatement and project
scheduling, coordination with other trades, security and site-specific
requirements.
1.6 TIME LIMITATION AND DELAY CHARGES
Complete all asbestos, lead, and other hazard work specified in this
Section in no more than 3 calendar days. In the event of failure to
complete the Work of this Section within the specified time, the
Contractor shall pay liquidated damages in the amount of one thousand
dollars ($1,000.00) per calendar day for each day of delay in completion
of work beyond the number of days specified above. The specified amount
of liquidated damages represents the Government's estimate of costs which
include, but are not limited to, those of the Government and the
Government's Consultants for observations and inspections, daily air
monitoring, equipment, transportation, and analysis charges which would be
incurred by the Government after the number of calendar days specified for
completion of the Work of this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ASBESTOS WORK - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
a. Temporary wash stations or showers, disposable clothing, respirators,

gloves, hard hats, and other required items.
b. Respirators shall protect against asbestos and other appropriate

dusts, fumes and mists as approved by the National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) under provisions of 30 CFR 11.
Conform to federal and State regulations, with 6 mil minimum thickness or

glovebags or waste bags.
2.1.3 Sealants and Polyethylene Sheeting
a. Polyethylene sheeting shall be flame-retardant and approved and listed

by the State Fire Marshal.
(1) Thickness and Size: 6 mil thick minimum, unless otherwise

specified, sized to minimize the frequency of joints.
(2) Flammability: Comply with NFPA 701 with a flame spread rating of
no greater than 5 and a smoke development rating of no more than
70 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 procedures.
b. Sealing Tape shall conform to the following:
(1) 2-inches or wider, capable of sealing joints of adjacent sheets of

polyethylene and attaching polyethylene sheet to finished or
unfinished surfaces or similar materials.
(2) Tape shall be capable of adhering under dry and wet conditions,
including use of amended water.
c. Preservation Sealing Tape: Type specifically designed for adhering to

critical or sensitive surfaces without damage to surface; 3M or equal.
d. Spray adhesives shall not contain methylene chloride or methyl

chloroform (1,1,1-trichloroethane) compounds.
e. Fire resistant sealants shall be compatible with concrete, metals,

wood, cable jacketing and other materials capable of preventing fire,
smoke, water and toxic fumes from penetrating through sealants.
(1) Sealants shall be asbestos free and shall have a flame spread,
smoke and fuel contribution of zero.
(2) Sealants shall be ASTM -and UL-rated for 3 hours for standard
method of fire test for firestop systems.
f. Lagging sealer for enclosing and sealing raw exposed edges of piping,
fitting, equipment and duct insulation (as applicable) shall meet the
requirements of NFPA 90A.
2.1.4 Surfactants and Encapsulants
a. Wetting agents or surfactants shall be effective and compatible with

the ACM and ACBM being wetted.
b. Bridging or penetrating type encapsulants shall have the following

characteristics:
(1) Water-based. Do not utilize an organic solvent in which the solid

parts of the encapsulant are suspended.
(2) Non-flammable with no methylene chloride.
(3) U.L. listed encapsulants, in full-scale ASTM E119 fire test,

compatible with W.R. Grace "Retroguard, RG-1" fireproofing with
"Spatterkote Type SKII" bonding treatment for structural and
decking widths exceeding 24 inches.
(4) Compatible with replacement materials, especially mastics,

fireproofing, and adhesives.
2.1.5 Mastic Removers
Mastic removers shall conform to the following:
a. Non-flammable solvent or gel, with a flash point above 140 degrees F.
b. Solvent waste shall not result in the generation of hazardous waste.
c. Removers shall not contain methylene chloride, halogenated

hydrocarbons, or any of the following glycol ethers:
Common Name Abbrev. CAS# Chemical Name
ethylene glycol methyl EGME 109-86-4 2-methoxyethanol

ether
ethylene glycol methyl EGMEA 110-49-6 2-methoxyethyl acetate
ether acetate
ethylene glycol ethyl EGEE 110-80-5 2-ethoxyethanol
ether
ethylene glycol ethyl EGEEA 111-15-9 2-ethoxyethyl acetate

ether acetate
ethylene glycol dimethyl EGDME 110-71-4 1,2-dimethoxyethane
ether
ethylene glycol diethyl EGDEE 629-14-1 1,2-diethoxyethane
ether
diethylene glycol DEG 111-46-6 2,2'-dihydroxyethyl ether
diethylene glycol methyl DEGME 111-77-3 2-(2-methoxyethoxy) ethanol

ether
diethylene glycol ethyl DEGEE 111-90-0 2-(2-ethoxyethoxy) ethanol
ether
diethylene glycol DEGDME 111-90-6 bis(2-methoxyethoxy) ether
dimethyl ether
triethylene glycol TEGDME 112-49-2 2,5,8,11-tetraoxadodecane
dimethyl ether
dipropylene glycol DPG 110-98-5 2,2-dihydroxyisopropyl ether
2.1.6 Vacuums and Negative Pressure Units (NPUs)
Vacuums and Negative Pressure Units (NPUs) used for clean-up of materials
and detail shall be HEPA-filtered.
2.2 LEAD-RELATED WORK - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
a. Polyethylene drop cloths and dust barriers, temporary wash stations or

showers, disposable clothing, respirators, gloves, hard hats, and
other required items.
b. Respirators shall protect against lead and other appropriate dusts,

fumes and mists as approved by the National Institute for Occupational
Safety and Health (NIOSH) under provisions of 30 CFR 11.
Provide waste receptacles that meet federal and State regulations.
2.2.3 Sealants and Polyethylene Sheeting
a. Polyethylene sheeting shall be flame-retardant and approved and listed

by the State Fire Marshal.
(1) Thickness and Size: 6-mil thick minimum, unless otherwise

specified, sized to minimize the frequency of joints.
(2) Flammability: Comply with NFPA 701 with a flame spread rating of
no greater than 5 and a smoke development rating of no more than
70 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 procedures.
b. Sealing Tape shall conform to the following:
(1) 2-inches or wider, capable of sealing joints of adjacent sheets of

polyethylene and attaching polyethylene sheet to finished or
unfinished surfaces or similar materials.
(2) Tape shall be capable of adhering under dry and wet conditions,
including use of amended water.
c. Preservation Sealing Tape: Type specifically designed for adhering to

critical or sensitive surfaces without damage to surface; 3M or equal.
d. Spray adhesives shall not contain methylene chloride or methyl

chloroform (1,1,1-trichloroethane) compounds.
e. Fire resistant sealants shall be compatible with concrete, metals,

wood, cable jacketing and other materials capable of preventing fire,
smoke, water and toxic fumes from penetrating through sealants.
(1) Sealants shall be asbestos free and shall have a flame spread,
smoke and fuel contribution of zero.
(2) Sealants shall be ASTM -and UL-rated for 3 hours for standard
method of fire test for firestop systems.
2.2.4 Paint Removers
Mastic removers shall conform to the following:
a. Non-flammable removing solvents or gels, with a flash point above 140

degrees F.
b. Solvent waste shall not result in the generation of hazardous waste.
c. Removers shall not contain methylene chloride, halogenated

hydrocarbons, or any of the following glycol ethers:
ethylene glycol methyl EGME 109-86-4 2-methoxyethanol

ether
ethylene glycol methyl EGMEA 110-49-6 2-methoxyethyl acetate
ether acetate
ethylene glycol ethyl EGEE 110-80-5 2-ethoxyethanol
ether
ethylene glycol ethyl EGEEA 111-15-9 2-ethoxyethyl acetate
ether acetate
ethylene glycol dimethyl EGDME 110-71-4 1,2-dimethoxyethane
ether
ethylene glycol diethyl EGDEE 629-14-1 1,2-diethoxyethane
ether
diethylene glycol DEG 111-46-6 2,2'-dihydroxyethyl ether
diethylene glycol methyl DEGME 111-77-3 2-(2-methoxyethoxy) ethanol

ether
diethylene glycol ethyl DEGEE 111-90-0 2-(2-ethoxyethoxy) ethanol
ether
diethylene glycol DEGDME 111-90-6 bis(2-methoxyethoxy) ether
dimethyl ether
triethylene glycol TEGDME 112-49-2 2,5,8,11-tetraoxadodecane

dimethyl ether
dipropylene glycol DPG 110-98-5 2,2-dihydroxyisopropyl ether
2.2.5 Cleaning Agents
Cleaning agents, equipment, and methods employed shall not in any way
damage the substrate or adjoining surfaces and finishes. Cleaning solvents
shall be non-injurious to the surfaces upon which they are applied. The
methods used shall cause no pitting, erosion or damages to the surfaces.
a. Do not use chemicals that may attach or leave deposits on the

substrate material.
b. Modify the process or processes to suit the finish, hardness, and

condition of the surface to be cleaned.
2.2.6 Vacuums and Negative Pressure Units (NPUs)
Vacuums and negative pressure units shall be HEPA-filtered for clean-up of

loose debris and contaminants.
2.3 OTHER HAZARDOUS MATERIALS - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
2.3.1 Soil, Pea Gravel or Other Backfill Materials
a. Import engineered fill in uniform layers (lifts) not exceeding 12

inches loose thickness and compacted to at least 90 percent of the
maximum dry unit weight of the soil, or as otherwise directed by the
Government.
b. Fill shall be free of all excess organic material and hazardous or

toxic materials, man- made or naturally occurring, including
serpentine rock (serpentinite), hydrocarbon materials, metals, and
construction debris of any sort.
2.3.2 Asphalt and Concrete Surfacing Materials
a. Provide materials that conform to all requirements of the Government

and DOT.
b. Materials shall closely match the existing materials in the same

area. Where new materials are installed adjacent to older materials,
care shall be taken to match the height, slope, color, and surface
texture of the new material with the old.
2.3.3 Waste Containers
Provide sealable metal drums, 55-gallon capacity, with sealable lids.

Label the drums in accordance with EPA and ADEQ requirements, including
the Generator I.D. or location identification and manifest number. Drums
shall be air and water tight.
2.3.4 Miscellaneous Other Materials and Equipment
a. Use dry ice in pelletized form.
b. Use non-recycled, fire-rated polyethylene sheeting, 20 mil or greater

thickness, underneath and on top of excavated soils or materials.
c. Provide adequately rated equipment with sufficient capacity to remove

the tank and perform ancillary excavation and compacting work within
the allowable time constraints identified by the Government.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Review the hazardous material report(s) to familiarize oneself with

hazardous material locations and conditions, and previous abatement by
Others, as applicable. Review site conditions to verify quantities, work
zones, available utilities, security, etc.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.2.1 Minimum Protective Procedures for Asbestos Work
a. Protection of Visitors and Other Site Personnel: Cordon off the

abatement area(s) with appropriate signs, and provide temporary
tunneling or scaffolding, as applicable.
b. Respiratory Protection: Comply with OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1910.134

and ANSI Z88.2. Use respirators approved by the National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH).
c. Provide site security to assure that no member of the public is able

to gain access to the asbestos work area at any time. Maintain access
and egress routes at all times.
d. Provide worker training, respiratory protection, and medical

examinations to meet applicable regulations.
e. Provide temporary lighting and power to work areas, including

installation of ground fault interrupters.
f. Fully ground all equipment within the work zone and decontamination
assemblies.
g. Establish negative pressure in work area(s) as required under

29 CFR 1926.1101.
h. Construct enclosure system(s) for worker and equipment decontamination.
i. Provide workers with sufficient sets of protective full-body clothing

to be worn in the designated work area and whenever a potential
exposure to airborne asbestos or potential safety hazards exist. Such
clothing shall include but not be limited to: full-body coveralls,
headgear, eye protection, and gloves. Disposable-type protective
clothing, headgear, and footwear may be provided.
(1) Full-Body Clothing: Assure that workers wear hoods covering their
hair in the designated work areas at all times. Do not wear
protective clothing in lieu of street clothing outside the work
area. Leave non-disposable-type protective clothing and footwear
in the wash room until the end of the asbestos abatement work. An
acceptable alternative to disposal is proper storage in a sealed

and labeled container so that containers would be opened and
clothing reused only in an asbestos work area.
(2) Eye protection: Provide eye protection to be worn as required by

applicable safety regulations. Wear eye protection at all times
within the asbestos work areas during all phases of work:
preparation, removal, clean-up, encapsulation, waste handling, and
similar operations. When appropriate, based on regulatory
mandates, a full facepiece respirator may be worn to satisfy this
requirement. Equipment shall conform with ANSI Z87.1. Use of
contact lenses with respiratory protection is prohibited.
(3) Head Protection: Provide hard hats or other head protection as

required by applicable safety regulations, conforming with ANSI
Z89.1, Class A or B.
(4) Foot Protection: Provide nonskid footwear to all abatement

workers, conforming to ANSI Z41.1, Class 75.
3.2.2 Minimum Protective Procedures for Lead-Related Work
a. Follow, at the minimum, dust control procedures as outlined under OSHA

regulation 29 CFR 1926.62.
b. Respiratory Protection: Comply with OSHA Regulations included in

29 CFR 1910.134 and ANSI Z88.2.
(1) Use respirators approved by the National Institute for

Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH).
(2) Provide respiratory protection to employees involved with

lead-based paint demolition and/or abatement elements or as
required for demolition work where employees may be occupationally
exposed to lead at or exceeding the Action Level (AL) at no cost
to the employees or the Government.
(3) Workers shall wear appropriate respiratory protection during lead

hazards work, unless initial testing verifies that employee
exposures are below the Action Level.
c. Site security to assure that no member of the public is able to gain

access to regulated work areas. Maintain access and egress routes at
all times.
d. Worker training, respiratory protection, medical examinations, and

blood lead monitoring to meet applicable regulations.
e. Activity Class I work areas, as a minimum, with a 2-stage

decontamination assembly, including an equipment and contiguous clean
room with bucket wash-up facilities positioned as follows:
(1) Equipment Room shall have lockers or labeled bags and containers
for storing contaminated protective clothing and equipment.
(2) Clean Room shall have lockers or containers for storing employee's
street clothes and personal items. Clean Room shall also contain
a suitable supply of potable water to permit each employee to wash
their hair, hands, forearms, face and neck.
f. Sufficient sets of protective full-body clothing for workers to be

worn in designated work area and/or whenever a potential airborne lead
hazard exists. Clothing shall include, but not be limited to,
full-body coveralls, headgear, eye protection, and gloves.
Disposable-type protective clothing, headgear and footwear is
acceptable.
g. Full-Body Clothing: Workers shall wear hoods covering their hair in

the designated lead hazard work areas at all times.
(1) Wearing of protective clothing, in lieu of street cloths, outside

the work area is not permitted.
(2) Non-disposable-type protective clothing and footwear shall be left

in the Wash Room decontamination assembly for disposal.
(3)
c) The use of cloth coveralls following the prescribed laundry
procedures as identified 29 CFR 1926.62 is acceptable.
h. Eye Protection: Eye protection, conforming to ANSI Z87.1 shall be

worn at all times within the lead hazard areas.
i. Head Protection: Hard hats or other head protection as required by

applicable safety regulations and conforming to ANSI Z89.1, Class A or
B.
j. Foot Protection: Construction workers shall use non-skid footwear

conforming to ANSI Z41.1, Class 75.
3.2.3 Site Protective Controls
a. Protect against unnecessary disturbances or damages to sensitive

finishes or furnishings that will remain within the facility.
b. Locate temporary scaffolding and containment barriers, as required,

and proceed with the construction or demolition, allowing for
continued operation of any adjacent occupied areas, as applicable.
c. Protect existing furnishings and building finishes from water, lead

dusts, or chemical strippers.
d. Erect temporary protective covers over pedestrian walkways and at

points of passage for persons or vehicles that are to remain
operational during the lead hazard work.
e. Lead hazard operations shall utilize mini-containments, drop cloths,

wet methods, and HEPA vacuums as outlined in OSHA regulation
29 CFR 1926.62 and the HUD Guidelines, Chapter 8.
f. The Government may evaluate the lead dust concentrations outside the
work area on adjoining finishes during the work progress by collecting
wipe samples to evaluate the integrity of the containment and to
detect dust contamination.
Evaluation will review possible contamination resulting from:
(1) Failure to adequately cordon off or contain work area dusts,
clean-up debris, and use approved work practices, such as wet

wiping and HEPA vacuuming.
(2) Failure or breaches in the work area isolation containment.
(3) Failure or rupture in the negative pressurization/HEPA filtration

system.
(4) Incomplete decontamination of personnel or equipment removed from

the work area(s).
Perimeter wipe samples may be collected adjacent to each work area and
compared to the pre-construction background concentrations. The wipe
sample will be analyzed by the Government by flame atomic absorption
per NIST 1578.
The Contractor shall re-clean adjoining occupied areas with surface

concentrations exceeding background level or 800 micrograms/ft2 during
the construction activities. The Contractor shall bear the costs
(including engineering, administrative, housekeeping, analytical and
the labor and materials costs of the Government's consultant(s)) to
return surface lead concentrations in elevated areas to acceptable
levels.
3.3 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT PROCEDURES
3.3.1 Notifications
Provide NESHAP notification (40 CFR 61-SUBPART M) in writing, 10 working

days prior to commencement of any non-emergency asbestos project involving
more than 260 linear feet (LF) or more than 160 square feet (SF) of
asbestos materials.
3.3.2 Procedures
3.3.2.1 Vinyl Floor Tiles and Mastics
a. Remove the flooring and mastics as indicated on the Contract Drawings

using full isolation procedures, satisfying the requirements of OSHA
Regulation 29 CFR 1926.1101, Work Class II.
b. Set-up critical barriers and splash guards and establish negative

pressurization.
c. Remove the tiles using wet methods to minimize breakage and airborne
fiber releases.
d. Remove the mastic using a mastic remover.
e. HEPA vacuum the contained area following abatement for clearance;

minimize use of encapsulant on substrates to be retiled.
f. Provide a full decontamination system with shower for areas exceeding

25 SF.
g. Dispose of tiles and mastic as Category 1 non-friable waste.
3.3.2.2 Sheet Vinyl ("Linoleum") Flooring and Mastic
a. Remove the flooring and mastics as indicated on the Contract Drawings

using full isolation procedures, satisfying the requirements of OSHA
Regulation 29 CFR 1926.1101, Work Class II.
b. Set-up critical barriers and splash guards and establish negative

pressurization.
c. Remove the sheet vinyl backing using wet methods to minimize breakage
and airborne fiber releases.
d. Remove the mastic using an approved mastic remover.
e. HEPA vacuum the contained area following abatement for clearance;

minimize use of encapsulant on substrates to be retiled.

25 SF.
g. Dispose of sheet vinyl backing and mastics as friable asbestos waste.
3.3.2.3 Transite® (Asbestos Cement) Materials
a. Remove interior materials as noted on the Contract Drawings using full

isolation procedures satisfying the requirements of OSHA Regulation
29 CFR 1926.1101, Work Class II.
b. Set-up critical barriers and establish negative pressurization.
c. Remove the exterior materials by cordoning off the work area,

installing polyethylene drop cloths on the ground and nearby objects,
and removing the Transite® intact, where feasible.
d. Remove the materials using wet methods, minimizing breakage and

airborne fiber releases.
e. Abate all adjoining mastics or caulking as Category 1 non-friable

waste.
f. HEPA vacuum the contained area following abatement for clearance.
g. Provide a full decontamination system with shower for areas exceeding

25 SF.
h. Dispose of Transite® as Category 2 non-friable waste, double wrapping

intact segments in 6-mil polyethylene sheeting.
3.3.2.4 Roofing
a. Remove the roofing and flashing materials as indicated by the Contract

Drawings.
b. Cordon off the work area, installing critical barriers at the

skylights, roof-level windows, and other penetrations, as applicable.
c. Remove all 3-dimensional materials using wet methods per OSHA

Regulation 29 CFR 1926.1101.
d. Set-up drop cloths on the ground and nearby objects to contain falling
materials the ground or public access areas surrounding the work area.
e. HEPA vacuum the roof following abatement.

100 SF.
g. Dispose of roofing as Category 1 non-friable waste.
h. Use of disposal chutes shall be pre-approved by the Government, per

the Contractor's Hazardous Materials Management Plan (HMMP)
submittal. Chutes shall be leak-tight, using negative air and HEPA
equipment. The bottom of the chute shall be continuously manned during
use, by a worker in full PPE.
3.3.2.5 Gypsum Board Walls and Ceilings and Joint Compounds
a. Remove composite materials using full isolation or mini-containment

procedures within occupied building per OSHA Regulation
29 CFR 1926.1101, Work Class II.
b. Use wet methods and HEPA vacuums, setting up critical barriers for
occupied areas.
c. For building demolition projects, cordon off the area and use dust
control methods to minimize airborne fiber releases.
d. Provide full decontamination system with shower for areas exceeding

100 SF.
e. HEPA vacuum the entire contained area prior to clearances for

renovation projects.
f. Dispose of composite materials as non-hazardous waste, unless

otherwise contaminated with other asbestos or hazardous wastes.
3.3.2.6 Asbestos Plasters and Sprayed-on Surfacing Materials
a. Remove ACM as indicated on the Contract Drawings using full isolation

or mini-containment procedures per OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1926.1101,
Work Class I, minimum.
b. Use wet methods and HEPA vacuums.
c. Set-up critical barriers for quantities greater than 25 LF.
d. Seal HVAC systems and install drop cloths below and over nearby
objects. Ventilate away from the workers, using a HEPA filtration
system.
e. Provide a full decontamination system with shower for abatement

quantities exceeding 25 LF or as otherwise directed by the Contract
Documents.
f. HEPA vacuum the entire contained area prior to clearance air testing.
g. Dispose of ACM in double goosenecked bags properly labeled as friable

asbestos waste.
3.3.2.7 Perimeter Window and Door Caulking
a. Remove the caulking as indicated by the Contract Drawings.
b. Cordon off the work area, installing critical barriers at the windows,
doors, and other penetrations, as applicable.
c. Remove ACM using wet methods per OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1926.1101,
Work Class II.
d. Set-up drop cloths on the ground and nearby objects to contain falling
materials on the ground or public access areas surrounding the work
area.
e. HEPA vacuum the sills and frames following abatement.

100 SF.
g. Dispose of caulking as Category 1 non-friable waste.
3.3.2.8 Contaminated Non-Asbestos Materials
a. Remove contaminated non-ACM substrates or underlying ceiling tiles,

etc.
b. Use wet methods and HEPA-filtered vacuums to decontaminate, where

feasible. Allow inspection of the decontaminated materials by the
Government or its Environmental Consultant prior to removal from the
work area.
c. Contaminated waste shall be disposed in double goosenecked bags or

burrito- wrapped, as friable asbestos waste.
d. Minimize excess waste quantities, where feasible.
3.3.3 Special Techniques and Procedures
a. Isolate HVAC system(s) to prevent contamination and fiber dispersal to

other areas of the building.
(1) Openings to ducts, fans, louvers, and plenums shall be sealed with
two layers of polyethylene sheeting prior to the start of removal.
(2) Provide caulked, rigid panels at the discretion of the Government.
(3) Repair any damage to ductwork, grilles, dampers, louvers, or HVAC

equipment at the completion of the abatement work.
(4) Secure systems and equipment using OSHA lock-out and tag-out
procedures, as applicable.
b. Ensure that all electrical power terminating in the work area,

including but not limited to outlets and lights are disconnected and
cannot be reenergized during the course of the work.
(1) Ensure that all power lines which transit the work area and are
necessary for the continued operation of services in areas outside
the work area are identified and protected adequately in order not
to pose a hazard to workers during the course of work.
(2) Provide temporary power and lighting, and ensure safe installation
of temporary sources and equipment per applicable electrical code
requirements, and provide safety lighting and ground fault
interrupter circuits as power source of electrical equipment.
(3) Secure systems and equipment using OSHA lock-out and tag-out
procedures, as applicable.
c. Construct critical barriers and decontamination enclosure systems, as

applicable. Erect polyethylene sheeting to protect walls, windows,
flooring, and fixed equipment, as applicable.
d. Provide differential air pressure systems for each work area in

accordance with Appendix J of EPA 560/5-85-024.
(1) Establish negative pressurization within all Asbestos Work Class 1

and 2 interior areas, exhausting air to the exterior, unless
otherwise approved by the Government.
(2) Do not locate outlets near or adjacent to other building intake

vents or louvers or at the entrances to the building.
(3) Do not exhaust air into the building's interior spaces or within
50 feet of the building's supply air intakes without on-site DOP
testing of all NPUs to show a filter efficiency of 99.97 percent
minimum.
(4) Provide a minimum work area differential air pressure of -0.025

inch w.g. and 4 air changes per hour at all times for Asbestos
Work Class 1 areas or as otherwise designated by the Contract
Documents.
e. Remove ACM employing full isolation, glovebag, and glovebag with

mini-containment procedures as designated by material quantities and
work class under OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1926.1101.
(1) Glovebag cut-out methods may be used for systems scheduled for
demolition as outlined in the Demolition Plans.
(2) Use wet cleaning methods, HEPA vacuuming, and proper work
practices.
(3) Mini-containments may not be required for glovebag removal in

unoccupied zones provided the bag is evacuated with a
HEPA-filtered vacuum prior to the removal of the element being
stripped or unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.
All areas requiring aggressive clearance air sampling will require
mini-containments or full containments and pre-cleaning throughout
the isolated area using HEPA vacuums and wet methods.
f. As applicable to abatement of surfacing materials and non-glovebag

thermal system insulation removal projects or for other work completed
within full isolation containments, remove visible accumulations of
asbestos material, debris, and dust from within the work area and its
decontamination enclosure systems. Clean all surfaces within the work
area.
g. Where encapsulation is required, encapsulate following the

Government's pre-encapsulation inspection.
h. Minimize encapsulating of sensitive abated areas or surfaces, such as

vinyl flooring from wood or concrete substrates, so as not to affect
the adhesion of replacement materials.
i. After encapsulation:
(1) Remove the inner layer of polyethylene sheeting from the floor,
walls, and other equipment.
(2) Dispose as asbestos waste, as applicable.
(3) Leave all critical barriers with one layer of polyethylene

sheeting.
j. After removing the final layer of polyethylene sheeting (as

appropriate):
(1) Final-clean all surfaces, including the inner surface of the outer
layer of polyethylene that serves as a critical barrier, any
subfloor trenches, and similar locations.
(2) Allow adequate time for settlement of dust, then repeat final
cleaning operation.
(3) Clean and remove all materials and equipment within the work area,
using the equipment decontamination enclosure system.
i. Exterior Asbestos Work Class II abatement operations shall utilize

critical barriers, drop cloths, wet methods, and HEPA vacuums as
outlined under OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1926.1101.
3.3.4 Field Quality Control
3.3.4.1 Site Tests: Clearance Criteria
a. Clearance air samples using aggressive air sampling techniques shall

be collected for all abatement zones, unless otherwise designated in
the Contract Documents.
b. Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM) Clearances: Areas cleared by PCM

shall show an airborne concentration of total fibers for each sample
at or below 0.01 fibers per cubic centimeter (f/cc) using the NIOSH
7400 A counting rules. Any sample result exceeding 0.01 fibers/cc
shall require re-cleaning of the work area and retesting. The minimum
number of samples shall be determined by the Government, based on the
quantity and types of materials removed, configuration, and sequencing
of the work areas, and similar considerations.
c. When Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) clearances are required,

as designated by the Contract Documents, analysis shall be by the
method described in 40 CFR 763, Appendix A, Subpart E (AHERA), with an
analysis turn-around time of 24 hours, unless otherwise designated by
the Government.
d. The Government shall pay the costs of the final round of visual
inspections, aggressive air sampling, and PCM and/or TEM analyses that
will meet the Specifications. All rounds of visual inspections,
aggressive air sampling, and PCM and/or TEM analyses that fail to meet
the contract criteria shall be borne by the Contractor. For the
purpose of this paragraph, visual inspection includes the area
isolation inspection, pre-encapsulation inspection, and final area
cleanup inspection.
3.3.5 Waste Disposal and Manifesting
Packing, labeling, transporting, and disposing of asbestos materials shall

comply with EPA regulations under 40 CFR, including completion of the
Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest Form (EPA 8700-22), and the requirements
of subpart 3.4.7 of this Section.
3.4 LEAD ABATEMENT AND HAZARD CONTROL
3.4.1 Notifications
Cordon off active lead hazard and abatement zone(s) and post with warning
signs at entries to regulated areas bearing the following information:
Warning
Lead Work Area
No Smoking or Eating
Authorized Personnel Only
3.4.2 Procedures
3.4.2.1 Abatement of lead-based paints and presumed lead-based paints as

defined by HUD and as regulated by the EPA shall:
a. Be conducted only by a Lead Supervisor or a Lead Workers where

abatement is designed to permanently eliminate or reduce lead hazards
for public (non-industrial) buildings. The Lead Supervisor shall be
on-site during all work site preparation and during the post-abatement
clean-up of work areas. At all other times when abatement is
conducted, the Lead Supervisor shall be on-site or available by mobile
phone, and able to be present at the work area in no more than 2 hours.
b. Be conducted using containment in a manner such as not to contaminate

non-work areas with lead dust, soil, or paint debris.
c. Be conducted in accordance with procedures specified in the HUD

Guidelines, Chapters 11 and 12.
3.4.2.2 Loose and Peeling Paint
Scrape loose and peeling paints using dust control procedures and
procedures as outlined under OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1926.62. Characterize
the waste for possible disposal as a hazardous waste.
3.4.2.3 Lead Paint Abatement
a. Remove paints on structural steel components scheduled for welding or

torching using a chemical stripper, needle gun or other approved
methods as outlined in the approved Contractor's Hazardous Materials
Management Plan (HMMP). Note that spot abatement of structural steel
components does not eliminate the possible need for respiratory
protection and hazard controls by the welder or torcher under

29 CFR 1926.62 due to unabated residues or paints on back-to-back
components, which cannot be accessed for abatement.
b. Use drop cloths, polyethylene barriers, Hudson and airless sprayers

and other methods as required for dust control.
c. Characterize and dispose of paints, rags, etc., separately for

possible disposal as a hazardous waste.
3.4.2.4 Lead Dust Clean-up
Clean-up background or construction-related dusts from demolition of

lead-coated elements or other contaminant sources using wet methods and
HEPA-filtered vacuums. Do not dry sweep.
3.4.2.5 Lead Hazard Control
a. Scrape loose and peeling paints and use dust controls for demolition
of lead- coated architectural and structural elements as indicated by
the Demolition Plans, following minimum procedures as outlined under
OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1926.62.
b. Remove and dispose of intact lead-coated architectural and structural

elements as potentially non-hazardous waste.
c. HEPA vacuum residual debris and wet wipe affected substrates as

required for clearance inspection or testing.
3.4.3 Special Procedures and Techniques
a. Cordon off the proximity (within approximately 20 feet) of Activity

Class I work areas using construction tape, polyethylene dust
barriers, or other appropriate means.
(1) Persons entering the regulated "cordoned" work area shall wear
appropriate respiratory protection and full body coveralls.
(2) Affix appropriate warning signs at the entry and approaches to the
regulated area(s).
b. Lockout electrical and HVAC equipment within the regulated area as

necessary.
c. Protect floors, landscaping, and other items with polyethylene drop

cloths or other acceptable means to prevent contamination or damage to
other building surfaces and finishes.
d. Apply chemical strippers and scrape following the manufacturer's

recommended procedures. After scraping, remove remaining loose paint
with a HEPA vacuum.
e. Maintain work area surfaces as free as practicable from accumulated

dust or debris. Clean equipment, tools and containment structures
within regulated areas, at a minimum, with HEPA vacuums or wet methods.
f. Conduct operations to prevent injury to adjoining facilities, persons,

motor vehicles, and other items, as applicable.
(1) Prevent chemical cleaning agents from coming into contact with
pedestrians, motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other
items and surfaces that could be injured or damaged by such
contact.
(2) Do not spray or scrape outdoors during winds of sufficient force

to spread cleaning agents to unprotected surfaces.
g. For areas where removal of loose and peeling paints only are required,
the Contractor shall ensure that the paint that remains on walls,
ceilings, eaves, and other surfaces in areas of active work, as
applicable, shall be adhered to the substrate sufficiently to support
eventual repainting. Paints that peel or loosen during wetting will
become part of the scope of work scheduled for removal and disposal.
h. Where complete removal of lead coats is required, finished work shall

show no signs of stains, scratches, streaks, or runs of discoloration
from use of cleaners.
(1) Leave substrate surfaces neat and clean, including removal of

primers in addition to finish coats. Surfaces shall be uniformly
cleaned.
(2) Neutralize substrate using a mild detergent wash.
i. Avoid direct welding or cutting on surfaces containing lead in

concentrations greater than 0.64 micrograms/cm2 by mechanically or
chemically removing the coating to a distance of at least six inches
from the point at which heat is applied.
(1) If surface coatings are not removed prior to welding or cutting,

provide local exhaust ventilation to capture the aerosolized lead,
using HEPA filters.
(2) If surface coatings are not removed prior to torching or welding,

provide upgraded welder's respiratory protection in compliance
with OSHA regulation 29 CFR 1926.62.
j. Where mechanical removal of surface coatings constitutes a Level II

activity, provide power tools, to the extent feasible, with local HEPA
exhaust or dust collector systems to capture the aerosolized lead.
3.4.4 Demolition Procedures
a. Removal of obstructing materials as needed for access to hazardous

materials.
b. Removal of obstructing materials where hazardous materials

contamination is known to exist.
c. Removal of obstructing materials where hazardous materials exposure is

likely to result.
d. Follow, at the minimum, the protective procedures as outlined in OSHA

regulation 29 CFR 1926.62.
e. Protection of Visitors and Other Site Personnel: Cordon off the

abatement area(s) with appropriate signs, and provide temporary
tunneling or scaffolding, as applicable.
f. Respiratory Protection: Comply with OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1910.134

and ANSI Z88.2. Use respirators approved by the National Institute
for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH).
3.4.5 Prohibited Activities
a. Workers shall decontaminate themselves and appropriate equipment prior

to eating, drinking and smoking.
b. Clean debris and surfaces with HEPA-filtered vacuums or wet methods.
c. Shoveling, wet sweeping, and brushing may be used only where vacuuming
or other equally effective methods have been tried and are found to be
ineffective.
3.4.6 Site Test
3.4.6.1 Monitoring and Clearance by the Government
a. During lead hazard-related work, such as demolition, refinishing, or

torching and welding activities, the Government may collect air
samples for analysis by flame atomic absorption.
b. Air sampling results in excess of the OSHA "Project Action Level" of

30 micrograms per cubic meter within the construction zone may require
isolation of the work area, upgrades in the required respiratory
protection, amendment of work procedures, and/or clean-up of the
affected area.
c. Air sampling results in excess of the EPA's National Ambient Air

Quality Standard (NAAQS) of 1.5 micrograms/m3 at the site's property
line or at adjoining occupied non-construction areas may require
isolation of the work area, amendment of work procedures, and clean-up
of the affected area.
d. Re-sampling of the contaminated areas and handling, shipping, and

analysis charges (including the Government's time and expenses) for
additional sampling required to show background levels below these
lead standards shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.4.6.2 Clearance Criteria - Lead Abatement Zones
a. The lead abatement zone shall remain secured until cleared by the
Government.
b. Visual Inspection:
(1) When the Contractor considers the work or a designated portion of

the work to be complete, the Contractor shall notify the
Government's Representative that the work is ready for abatement
zone clearance inspection.
(2) Within a reasonable time after receiving notification from the

Contractor, the Government will perform a visual inspection of the
work area.
(3) Evidence of lead contamination identified during the inspection

will necessitate further cleaning as specified herein.
c. Wipe Sample Clearance Criteria: The Contractor shall re-clean the

area if surface concentrations exceed the following "EPA Clearance
Dust Standards":
40 micrograms/ft2 for floors

250 micrograms/ft2 for interior window sills and stools
800 micrograms/ft2 for exterior window sills and
interior window wells
800 micrograms/ft2 for exterior concrete or other rough surfaces
800 micrograms/ft2 for attic and non-public spaces
d. Air Sample Clearance: Where lead hazard abatement occurs concurrent

with asbestos abatement activities, the area may be cleared by
aggressive air sampling, where airborne lead concentrations following
the final visual inspection shall not exceed the EPA's NAAQS standard
of 1.5 micrograms/m3 as analyzed by NIOSH method 7082 (flame atomic
absorption) or 7105 (graphite furnace atomic absorption).
e. Re-sampling of the contaminated areas and handling, shipping, analysis

charges (including the Government's time and expenses) for additional
sampling required to show background levels below these lead standards
shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.4.7 Waste Disposal and Manifesting
a. Comply with current federal, State and local regulations concerning

the waste handling, containerization, transportation, and disposal of
lead-based paint or lead-contaminated materials, and subpart 3.10 of
this Section.
b. Loose debris and scraped materials shall be treated as hazardous

waste, unless otherwise approved by the Government. Construction
waste coated with intact LBP may be disposed of as construction debris
in accordance with the EPA requirements (pending characterization of
the waste).
c. Laboratory costs associated with analyses required for disposal, if

required, shall be at the Contractor's expense.
d. Segregate, containerize, and characterize construction debris

including rags, protective coveralls, polyethylene sheeting, and other
consumable items. Waste shall be packaged in accordance with the
applicable U. S. Department of Transportation regulations included in
49 CFR 173, 49 CFR 178, and 49 CFR 179.
e. Profile waste with an approved landfill or incinerator by means of

standard digestion and extraction tests (TCLP and SW846), as
appropriate. Use the site's EPA Generator I.D. number on the "Waste
Manifest."
f. If debris is to be recycled, provide a bill of lading and a memorandum

from the recycler acknowledging that lead may be present and work
activities and disposal will comply with applicable regulations.
Submit in accordance with procedures of Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
3.5 PCB BALLAST REMOVAL
Pack ballasts marked as "containing PCB" or ballasts not specifically
marked as "non-PCB" or "PCB free" as hazardous waste. Workers removing

ballasts from fixtures shall wear protective clothing and nitrile or
neoprene gloves. Those ballasts showing signs of overheating or leakage
will require wipe-down of the fixture with clean paper towels after the
unit has cooled to room temperature. This step shall be followed with
additional wiping with an organic solvent, such as mineral spirits or
isopropyl alcohol. The leaking ballasts and rags shall be placed in a
plastic bag, tied off, and secured. Remaining PCB ballasts and bagged
waste shall be placed in steel drums, sealed, labeled, and transported to
an approved incinerator following required manifest procedures. Absorbent
material, such as kitty litter, shall be used as a cushion and absorbent
within the drums. Drum loading shall not exceed the incinerator's
requirements (typically 350 to 500 pound limit per drum).
Contractor shall ensure that PCB-containing lighting ballasts, are

handled, containerized, secured, labeled, manifested, transported, and
either reused, disposed, incinerated or recycled, as appropriate.
3.5.1 Disposal
PCB ballasts shall be disposed of in accordance with the standards set

forth in 40 CFR 761.50-.79). The transporter shall use a shipping paper
that contains the information required pursuant to 49 CFR 172, Subpart C
to document the transportation of the ballasts.
a. The shipping paper or manifest shall accompany the shipments, with a

legible copy maintained by the transporter for a minimum period of
three years.
b. The total number of PCB-containing light ballasts being transported

shall not exceed two 55 gallon drums of non-leaking ballasts per load
and shall not contain any other hazardous wastes.
c. The transporting container shall meet applicable federal and state

regulations.
d. Any discharges or spills of hazardous waste consisting of

PCB-containing fluorescent light ballasts shall be reported and
cleaned up.
3.5.2 Waste Characterization
The U. S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA; 40 CFR 761.60 & 40 CFR 761.65)
considers PCBs from ballasts as a hazardous waste. Disposal (storage or
incineration) of the PCB-containing ballasts shall be in Toxic Substances
Control Act (TSCA - 40 CFR) requirements.
3.6 MERCURY-CONTAINING LAMP REMOVAL
Spent fluorescent and mercury vapor lamps contain mercury, and are
considered a hazardous waste by the EPA, under the Universal Waste Rule.
Ship lamps to a commercial recycler, where they are crushed and the
mercury is reclaimed. The recycler shall comply with DOT requirements for
manifests, etc., with evidence of proper disposal provided to the
Government, including a log of shipment dates and quantities.
3.7 REMOVAL OF CONTAMINATED SOILS
3.7.1 Training Requirements
a. Soils exceeding hazardous waste criteria (federal, state, and local)

may be encountered at MCAS Yuma. Therefore, as part of this Contract,
the Contractor shall provide a minimum of two (2) properly trained
individual personnel to handle, excavate, and dispose of contaminated
soils and contaminated and hazardous waste. Training shall include
40-hour Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response (HAZWOPER)
Training and the associated 8-hour annual refresher in accordance with
29 CFR 1910.120 and 29 CFR 1910.134.
b. This training shall be required of all personnel who come in contact

with or operate equipment that handles surface and subsurface
contaminated materials when performing their work. The Contractor
shall comply with local requirements addressing hazardous materials.
c. No time extensions will be given for the Contractor's inability to

supply the properly trained individuals for the Project. Therefore,
at Notice to Proceed (NTP) the Contractor shall provide the Government
with written and valid certification of the above training for
personnel on the job.
d. This training shall be considered as incidental work. The cost for

having trained workers working in and around, excavating, and handling
serpentine, contaminated, and hazardous soils shall be considered as
incidental work.
3.7.2 Contaminated/Hazardous Soils
a. All reference to hazardous waste and/or hazardous material and/or

hazardous soil incorporate definitions of "hazardous pollutant,"
"hazardous contaminant," "hazardous material," "hazardous substance,"
"hazardous waste," and "toxic substance" applicable in accordance with
all federal, state, regional, and local statutes, laws, regulations,
and policies.
b. The Contractor is specifically alerted to and shall familiarize

themselves with the liability statutes of:
(1) The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and

Liability Act (CERCLA) of 1980, found in 42 USC, Section 9601, et
seq.
c. If the Contractor encounters material in trenches or other excavation,

reasoned or believed to be contaminated and/or hazardous wastes, the
Contractor's Hazardous Materials Supervisor shall immediately notify
the Government's Representative.
d. If authorized by the Government's Representative, excavation in the

immediate area of the suspected hazardous material shall be suspended
until the Government's Representative authorizes resumption. If such
suspension delays the current controlling operation, the Contractor
will be granted an extension of time as provided in Section 107.10 and
cost reimbursement in accordance with Section 112.05 of the General
Conditions.
e. The Government reserves the right to use other forces for exploratory
work to identify and determine the extent of the contaminated and/or

hazardous waste and for removing such material from the site.
f. The Contractor shall arrange for the testing, hauling, and disposal of
the contaminated/hazardous excavated soils. The Contractor shall be
familiar with the acceptance and analytical testing criteria,
methodology of the landfills/disposal facilities available and of the
corresponding disposal fees and taxes. All such disposal activities
shall require the approval of the Government's Representative prior to
actual testing, loading, and disposal.
g. All contaminated material and hazardous material shall be placed

directly into the transport vehicle for transport to the disposal
facility. Contaminated material and hazardous material shall be
transported separately, with no mixing of the different types of
material.
h. The Contractor shall use only workers with the above-described

training to work in and around, excavate, and handle
serpentine-contaminated and/or hazardous soils.
3.7.3 Analytical Testing
a. Analytical testing shall be performed by a fully-accredited

laboratory. The selected laboratory shall guarantee a maximum of ten
(10) days' standard turnaround time at standard rates for results of
analytical testing. All original copies of testing results shall be
forwarded to the Contracting Officer. Faxed copies of results are
acceptable as an interim step.
b. The Contractor shall be responsible for all necessary sample

collections, laboratory coordination, and analytical testing done at
the construction site. The testing criteria for each sample shall be
set by the Government's Representative at the time the sampling shall
be based on the requirements of the designated landfills/disposal
facilities. The Government's Representative shall compare the
analytical results with the acceptance criteria of the Contractor's
designated landfills/disposal facilities.
c. The Contractor shall be responsible for forwarding the samples to the

accredited laboratory. The Contractor shall furnish all labor,
materials, equipment, sampling bottles, chain-of-custody forms,
preservatives, shipping containers, and incidentals required to
properly sample and transport the soil samples to an accredited
laboratory.
d. The furnishing of all labor, materials, and equipment for sample

collection, handling, and delivery to the testing laboratory; soil and
groundwater laboratory analysis, and reporting of such testing and
analysis will be paid as Incidental Work. Only laboratory analyses
for soil and serpentine will be paid under the Force Account Cash
Allowance.
3.7.4 Storage of Soils
For storage of excavated soil along the Project alignment, the following
conditions shall apply:
a. The volume of the soil stockpile will be limited at the discretion of
the Government's Representative.
b. The location for soil storage shall be determined by the Government's

Representative.
c. The Government retains the right to suspend the use of temporary

stockpiling at any time. In such an event, the Contractor is directed
to dispose of the stockpile within 48 hours.
d. All exposed stockpiles shall be kept wet using amended water. Dust
control requirements shall be strictly enforced.
e. All stockpiles being stored overnight shall be placed on and shall be

covered with 10-mil HDPE plastic sheets weighted down securely using
tires and chains.
f. After a stockpile has been removed, the Contractor shall wet-sweep the
area to remove any residual dirt.
g. All costs associated with temporary stockpiling shall be borne by the

Contractor. No additional payment shall be made therefor. Such
related costs include, but are not limited to, dust control measures,
wet sweeping, covering of soils, multiple handling, multiple staging,
work re-sequencing or rescheduling, time associated owing to duration
of storage, and other the Government requirements.
3.7.5 Contractor Responsibility for Handling, Transportation, and Disposal

of All Soils and Serpentine
a. The Contractor is responsible for the handling, transportation, and

disposal of all excavated soils (including serpentine) meeting
requirements of Class I, II, and III landfill.
b. Excavated materials (i.e., asphalt, concrete, wet material/slurry,

wooden and metal debris, and other debris) shall be separated from the
contaminated/hazardous soils and properly disposed by the Contractor.
3.7.6 Documentation of All Soils Disposed by the Contractor
The Contractor shall provide the Government with the following

documentation and information:
a. Name, address, and phone number of landfill; type of landfill;

volume/weight of soils transported; date of transport; original
location of excavated soils; and other requested information.
b. A copy of each bill of lading, certified weight ticket, and other

indication of the weight of the shipment, which has been received at
the disposal facility, to the Government's Representative so that
payment per bid item can be made, based on weight of the shipment.
c. Any other pertinent information.
d. The Contractor shall inform the Government, in writing, and obtain the
Government approval prior to any sale, supply, or offer to sell any
excavated material. The Contractor in such a case, at its expense,
shall perform any and all engineering and chemical testing as required
by the Government and by federal, state, and local statutes,
regulations, and policy.
e. All contaminated excavated material and unrestricted material shall be

hauled off the site, using a bill of lading approved by the
Government's Representative, to an approved treatment/disposal
facility in accordance with all applicable federal, state, and local
regulations.
f. For all contaminated excavated material and unrestricted material, the

Contractor shall prepare a bill of lading for each shipment of
material from the site. The bill of lading shall describe the
contents of each truck carrying materials to the waste disposal site,
including the address of the ultimate disposal site, the weight or
yardage of the waste materials (as applicable), and an emergency phone
number. The hauler shall sign and date the bill of lading, indicating
that they have accepted the load described in the manifest on that
particular day. The Government's Representative will sign the bill of
lading and keep the appropriate number of copies and give the
remaining copies to the hauler. Copies of bills of lading accepted by
the treatment/disposal sites shall be provided to the Government.
3.7.7 Backfill Material
The Contractor shall maximize the use of any excavated backfill material.
Soils removed from the construction excavation (except for contaminated
and/or hazardous soils, or clayey soils) may be used for backfill
material, provided that it meets the requirements of the Government and as
approved by the MCAS Yuma Base representative. Imported material for
backfill shall meet the requirements of the Government.
3.7.8 Specification for Haulers
The Contractor shall ensure that his/her drivers, as well as the

subcontractor drivers, have in their possession during the hauling of
material and soil all applicable Arizona State and local vehicle insurance
requirements, valid driver's license, and vehicle registration and/or
licensing. The Contractor shall be responsible for informing all drivers
of haul vehicles about:
a. The nature of the haul material.
b. Any recommended routes.
c. Applicable city street excavation regulations and requirements and

State of Arizona Department of Transportation codes, regulations, and
requirements.
d. The Government's requirement for proper handling and transportation of

the soil.
3.7.9 Requirements for Proper Handling and Transportation of Soils
a. The Contractor shall separate the excavated materials (i.e., asphalt,

concrete, wooden and metal debris, and other debris from other soils)
and shall properly dispose of these materials.
b. The Contractor shall be responsible for the excavation and handling of

contaminated and hazardous wastes.
c. Haul trucks carrying soil shall be loaded so that the soil does not
extend above the walls of the truck bed.
d. The soil loads shall be tightly covered so as to prevent soils from

spilling over the sides and backs of the haul trucks. In addition,
any excavated serpentine soil shall be kept wet and covered.
3.7.10 Transportation of Hazardous Material/Waste
In the event that the hazardous waste is encountered and a Change Order is
issued to the Contractor to handle and transport the hazardous waste, then
the Contractor shall adhere to the following requirements:
3.7.10.1 Scope of Work
a. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and

incidentals required to transport those materials identified as
hazardous waste for the purpose of disposal.
b. The Contractor shall comply with all the applicable regulatory

requirements listed as well as other applicable federal (including DOT
- HM - 181 in accordance with 49 CFR 172), state, or local laws,
codes, and ordinances that govern or regulate hazardous waste.
c. The Contractor shall obtain all the permits required and furnish all
labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and provide
surface cleanup, spillage, spillage, and ultimate disposal of
contaminated materials found within the Project boundaries.
3.7.10.2 Hazardous Waste Manifest
a. All excavated materials classified as hazardous waste shall be hauled

off the site by the Contractor, using a licensed hazardous waste
hauler and the uniform hazardous waste manifest form, to an approved
waste disposal facility in accordance with all applicable federal,
state, and local regulations.
b. The Contractor shall prepare the hazardous waste manifest for each
shipment of hazardous wastes from the site.
c. The licensed hauler shall carry a hazardous waste manifest (shipping

document) with each truckload.
d. The manifest shall describe the contents of each truck carrying

materials to the waste disposal site, including, as applicable, the
weight of the waste materials. The licensed hauler shall also sign
and date the manifest, indicating that they have accepted the load
described in the manifest on that particular day.
e. The Government's Representative will sign the manifest and keep the
Generator's copy and the EPA's copy and give the remaining copies to
the licensed hauler. Weight and not volume shall be used to measure
waste quantities for manifest purposes.
f. The Government's Representative will provide a hazardous waste

generator identification number for use on the manifest while the
Contractor shall provide the State Transporter's I.D. and Phone
Number. Should any hazardous waste manifest not be returned within
thirty-five (35) days of shipment, the Contractor shall initiate
follow-up and shall document its follow-up effort, in writing, with an
Exception Report in accordance with 40 CFR 262.42 and provide a copy

to the Government's Representative.
g. A copy of the completed hazardous waste manifest shall be provided to

the Government's Representative indicating that each waste shipment
has been received at the waste treatment or disposal facility within
two (2) days of their return to the Contractor.
3.7.10.3 Preparation for Shipment
Marking, labeling, placarding, packaging, EPA registration, and

manifesting wastes prior to transport shall be in accordance with all
regulations and shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
3.7.10.4 Transportation
Transportation of hazardous waste shall be carried out by a licensed

hauler in accordance with the regulations. The Contractor shall be
responsible for clean-up of any hazardous waste discharge/spill from this
Project that occurs during transportation. The Contractor shall also
follow the applicable regulations under 40 CFR 263, including licensing,
manifest system, recordkeeping, and discharges.
3.7.11 Weighing of Excavated Material
The Contractor shall provide a weight measurement of all excavated

material produced, which shall correlate the measurement to either the
vehicle's bill of lading number or the hazardous waste manifest number.
The information shall show the date of loading, net weight of soil loaded
to the appropriate vehicle, and an identification of the vehicle that has
been loaded. All such information shall be given to the Government's
Representative in order to reconcile the Contractor's charges for hauling
and disposal of contaminated excavated soils and bay mud.
3.7.12 Payment
a. The Contractor shall include a cash allowance of $50,000 (described

below) as a stipulated force account bid amount in the Schedule of Bid
Prices in the Proposal. This amount will be paid to the Contractor
for work directed by the Contracting Officer on a force account
basis. The General Conditions regarding compensation do not apply to
work not directed by the Contracting Officer. No mark-ups or profit
shall be paid to the Contractor on the unused portion of the
allowance. In the event that the quantities increase or decrease for
all excavated materials related to the cash allowance, Section 101.07
of the General Conditions shall not apply.
b. The cash allowance shall be used to provide services as requested by

the Government's Representative. Work described as incidental work in
this Section and work already shown elsewhere in the Contract
Documents shall not be part of this cash allowance. The unused
portion of the cash allowance shall be credited to the Government.
c. The following costs of items shall be paid under this bid item plus
any contaminated/hazardous waste miscellaneous work as directed by the
Contracting Officer, except where indicated:
(1) Analytical testing of soil and groundwater.
(2) Any additional mitigation measures beyond the incidental work, as

determined by the Contracting Officer.
(3) Any other work related to contaminated/hazardous waste, as

directed by the Contracting Officer that is not covered by the
original Contract.
(4) Hauling and disposal of contaminated/hazardous waste to the

appropriate landfill site. The Contractor shall be responsible
for verifying the availability of various landfill sites to accept
the different types of contaminated and hazardous
materials/waste. Payment of different soil classes shall be paid
as separate items from the cash allowance.
(5) Disposal of additional material resulting from the Contractor's

option to slope the excavations in lieu of shoring at locations
where this is possible and has been approved by the Government's
Representative or any other excavation operations outside
structure excavation pay limits shall be at the Contractor's
expense. This resultant material shall be treated as either
contaminated or hazardous material if the test results for the
location indicate that the material being excavated is
contaminated or hazardous.
(6) The cost of having trained workers handling and working in and
around the excavation; excavating and handling non-hazardous soil,
contaminated soil, and hazardous soils by trained workers;
performing dust control procedures (misting, wet sweeping of
streets); implementing and preparation of the Contractor's Safety
Program (i.e., clean-up areas, respirators, medical surveillance,
personal protective equipment and clothing, HDPE plastic liners,
and similar considerations); implementing mitigation soil
measures; documentation submittals; preparation of Hazardous Waste
Manifest; and weighing of soils are all considered incidental
work, and no additional payment(s) will be made therefor.
Furthermore, when performing excavation/backfill, the Contractor
shall have taken into account the productivity losses, if any, due
to the use of respirators and personal protective equipment. No
additional compensation will be paid for by the Government owing
the use of respirators and personal protective equipment in the
Project area.
(7) The cost of the work of this Section, including but not limited to
excavating, separating, and handling of Class I, II, and III soil
from excavation in compliance with all federal, state, and the
Government regulations shall be performed as Incidental Work and
included in the items of work to which they are appurtenant.
(8) All other work related to the hazardous waste and not considered
by the Government's Representative to be incidental work shall be
paid for under a negotiated price as extra work. For extra work
relative to contaminated and hazardous waste/material, Section
101.07 of the General Conditions shall not apply. Mark-up for the
cost of contaminated and hazardous waste/material soil and
groundwater testing, transportation, disposal, and dump fees shall
be limited to 1) 4 percent for the first $100,000.00 and 2) 2
percent thereafter for greater sums than $100,000.00 of the
Contractor's actual costs for performing this work.
3.8 WASTE DISPOSAL AND MANIFESTING
3.8.1 Hazardous Waste Disposal
a. Packing, labeling, transporting, and disposing of hazardous waste

shall comply with EPA regulations under 40 CFR, including completion
of the Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest Form. Waste and glovebags
shall be properly labeled prior to their removal from the contained or
regulated area, including all required asbestos warning labels.
b. Waste dumpsters shall be placarded, sealed, and locked overnight.

Waste containers shall be stored to prevent public access or
disturbances.
c. A "Waste Manifest" shall be completed for disposal of hazardous

waste. The transporter shall possess a valid EPA Transporter I.D.
number. The Contractor shall notify the Government's Representative
at least 48 hours prior to the time that the Manifest is required to
be signed by the Government or its representatives.
d. Applicable information to be included in the "Waste Manifest" includes

the following:
(1) EPA Generator I.D. Number: Verify with the MCAS Yuma
Representative.
(2) Generator's Name and Address: Marine Corps Air Station, Yuma,
Yuma, AZ 85365
(3) Generator Tax I.D. Number: _______________________
3.9 FINAL PROJECT CLEAN-UP AND REOCCUPANCY CLEARANCE CRITERIA
3.9.1 Lead
3.9.1.1 Final Re-occupancy Cleaning
Final clean-up prior to re-occupancy shall include wet wiping using a mild
detergent solution and HEPA vacuuming all suspect dust and debris areas.
3.9.1.2 Final Re-occupancy Clearance
a. Following the final clean-up, the Government may visually inspect for
any loose dust or debris, followed by wipe sampling of the settled
dust to document surface lead levels below the specified clearance
levels. Samples will be collected using commercial wipes moistened
with a non-alcohol wetting agent. A one-foot square area will be
wiped in an "S" pattern, folding the wipe inward and placing it in a
labeled sample container. The wipe sample(s) will be analyzed by
flame atomic absorption.
b. The Contractor shall re-clean the zone when surface concentrations

exceed the following "EPA Dust Clearance Standards":
40 micrograms/SF for floors

250 micrograms/SF for interior window sills and stools
800 micrograms/SF for exterior window sills and interior window wells
800 micrograms/SF for concrete or other rough surfaces
800 micrograms/SF for attic and non-public areas
c. Areas that do not comply with the "Final Re-occupancy Clearance

Criteria" shall continue to be cleaned by and at the Contractor's
expense until the specified criteria is achieved, as evidenced by
results of inspections as previously specified.
SCA/LA Project No. 15-027N Renovation of Building 229
Marine Corps Air Station, Yuma, AZ
Updated: 08/18/15
ABATEMENT WORK PLAN – SUMMARY OF WORK
The work covered by this work plan includes the removal, handling and disposal of various hazardous
materials in accordance with the Government’s Master Specification Sections 01110 and 02090 and
applicable federal, state and local regulations at the above designated site.
A copy of this Abatement Work Plan is to be posted on-site during the abatement work.
I. Summary of Work (as designated)
X Removal and disposal of asbestos-containing materials (ACM) in conjunction with the

renovation of Building 229 at the Marine Corps Air Station, Yuma, AZ.
X Scraping and stabilization of loose and peeling paints as required for disposal of intact
painted elements as [potentially] non-hazardous waste, including associated dust
controls and personal protective procedures in compliance with OSHA’s Construction
Lead Standard, 29 CFR 1926.62.
X Spot abatement and disposal of waste for primer and lead-containing paints on
structural steel elements prior to torching, cutting, etc., including dust controls and
personal protective procedures in compliance with OSHA’s Construction Lead
Standard, 29 CFR 1926.62.
X Preparation and disposal of waste for repainting, including dust controls and personal
protective procedures for manual scraping or sanding in compliance with OSHA’s
Construction Lead Standard, 29 CFR 1926.62.
X Demolition, removal and disposal of painted surfaces with lead ceramic glazing or
lead-based paints (LBPs) whereby airborne exposures may exceed the permissible
exposure limit, requiring worker protection in accordance with OSHA’s Construction
Lead Standard, 29 CFR 1926.62.
Clean-up of metals contamination.
X Removal and disposal of PCB-containing ballasts, as designated.
X Removal and recycling of mercury-containing lamps, switches and/or
mercury-containing thermostats.
X Removal, characterizing, and disposal of solvents or chemicals as potential hazardous
waste.
X For Controlled Renovation Projects: Use of controlled renovation procedures for
drilling, coring and anchoring through asbestos-containing materials, in accordance
with 29 CFR 1926.1101.
X For Controlled Renovation Projects: Use of dust controls during drilling, coring and
anchoring through materials containing lead, as required per 29 CFR 1926.62.
X For Controlled Renovation Projects: Clean-up of building dust and contamination for
clearance dust sampling.
Abatement Work Plan – Summary of Work

Page 1
Updated: 08/18/15
II. Submittals:
Pre-job Submittals (as designated):
X NESHAP Notification per 40 CFR Part 61, Subpart M (10 working days in advance);
X Copy of current Contractors’ State Licensing Board (CSLB) License;
X Proof of all required permits or variances;
X Abatement work schedule;
X Abatement work plan(s);
X Copies of workers’ asbestos training certificates, including the Competent Person;
X Copies of workers’ lead training certificates, including the Competent Person;
Copies of workers’ lead awareness training certificates;
X Copies of workers’ annual medical exam and respirator approval;
X Copies of workers’ 12-month respirator fit testing records;
X Copies of workers’ blood lead test within past 90 days;
X Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for chemicals used;
X Emergency phone listing;
Independent third-party DOP testing of negative pressure units and vacuums;
X Proposed location of locked dumpster(s); and
X Rotameter calibrations within past 6 months.
Periodic Submittals (as designated):

X Personal air monitoring (daily);
X Updated worker documentation (as needed);
X Boundary access logs (daily);
X Negative pressure records for applicable containments (daily); and
X Copies of updated notification to regulatory agencies (as needed).
Project Close-out Submittals (as designated within 2 weeks of completion):

X Certificate of Completion;
X Receipt and weight tickets from landfill operator or recycler (as applicable);
X Copies of completed uniform waste manifests, including hazardous
and non-hazardous waste;
X Waste profiling data (TCLP and SW846, as applicable);
X Filter change logs for all filtration units, water filtration units (as applicable)
and respirators;
X Foreman’s daily job reports;
X Employee and visitor entry/exit logs for all containments;
X Manometer printouts for all applicable containments; and
X Air sample results for all personnel, work areas and air filtration units.

Page 2
Updated: 08/18/15
III. Schedule
Start Date: To be determined.
End Date: To be determined.
Maximum Abatement Shifts: (3) concurrent asbestos and lead hazard/abatement shifts.
Time frame: 7:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Monday thru Friday, excluding statutory
holidays, unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.
IV. Contacts:
Contact Individual Phone # e-mail Mobile #
MCAS Yuma
Representative:
Contracting
Officer:
Jacobs Project Mike Betz, AIA 949.224.7533 Mike.Betz@
Manager jacobs.com>
SCA/LA Mark Osborn 562.988.8401 mosborn@ 310.701.4044
Environmental scala-enviro.com
Project Manager
Abatement To be
Contractor’s determined.
Project Manager
General To be
Contractor’s determined.
Project Manager
Note: Contact the Government’s representatives only in an emergency.
V. Security
Arrange site security with Marine Corps Air Station, Yuma (MCAS Yuma) at the beginning of the
job.
Provide temporary security at building penetrations created by the renovations and abatement.
VI. Special Conditions
Design:
1. Asbestos Abatement and Lead Hazard Abatement Project Designs shall be completed by
the Government’s designated Environmental Consultant only. Designers shall be EPA-
accredited Asbestos Project Designers only.
Air Sampling:
1. PCM Analysis: Analysis of PCM samples shall follow the procedures outlined in NIOSH
method 7400 and within these Contract Documents.

Page 3
Updated: 08/18/15
2. TEM Analysis: The U. S. Environmental Protection Agency passed regulations for

schools under the Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA), which are found
in 40 CFR Part 763 “Asbestos Containing Materials in Schools.” This regulation states
that all abatement work shall be evaluated upon completion by collecting air samples
using aggressive sampling techniques and that all such samples shall be analyzed using
Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM). The TEM protocol for large projects/zones
calls for the collection of a minimum of 5 inside samples, 5 outside samples, and 3 blank
samples and each should be analyzed by TEM. The regulation strictly defines the criteria
that must be met to determine that a building is acceptably clean after removal. TEM
analysis turnaround times shall be 24 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
3. The sampling and analytical criteria in the AHERA regulation for schools shall be
viewed as the preferred method for determining that any asbestos abatement project in
any building has achieved a satisfactory level of cleanliness. The Government or its
Consultants shall clear all asbestos work areas using aggressive sampling and TEM
analysis, unless otherwise noted. The Government reserves the right to determine the
quantity of clearance air samples to be collected for each subzone.
4. The Government shall pay the Environmental Consultant’s costs of the final round of
visual inspections, aggressive air sampling, and PCM and/or TEM analyses that will meet
the asbestos abatement specification. All rounds of visual inspections, aggressive air
sampling, and PCM and/or TEM analyses that fail to meet the contract criteria shall be
borne by the Contractor. For the purpose of this paragraph, visual inspection includes the
area isolation inspection, pre-encapsulation inspection, and final area clean-up inspection.
5. During all asbestos-related work, perimeter sample results will be collected by the
Government and/or their Environmental Consultant (Industrial Hygienist). These
samples will be analyzed by Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM). Sample results that are
in excess of the background level or 0.01 fibers per cubic centimeter (f/cc) Project Action
Level may be forwarded for analysis by Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) with a
12-hour turnaround specified. Handling, shipping, and analysis charges (including the
Environmental Consultant’s time and expenses) will be paid for by the Contractor. Any
sample results in excess of 70 asbestos structures per square millimeter of filter area
(corrected for a 1,200 - 1,800 liter sample volume as appropriate) will require cleaning,
inspection, and re-sampling of the affected area at the Contractor’s expense.
6. During all lead hazard-related work, such as demolition, torching and welding activities,
etc., as applicable, perimeter air sample and/or lead wipe sample results may be collected
by the Government’s Environmental Consultant (Industrial Hygienist). These samples
will be analyzed by flame atomic absorption. Wipe sample results which are in excess of
the construction dust control standard of 800 micrograms per square foot for adjoining
construction zones on two consecutive samplings (or two consecutive days) on any
occasion will require isolation and clean-up of the affected areas. Air sampling results in
excess of the Cal/OSHA “Project Action Level” of 30 micrograms per cubic meter will
require isolation of the work area and amendment of work procedures and/or clean-up of
the affected areas. Re-sampling of the affected areas and handling, shipping, and analysis
charges (including the Environmental Consultant’s time and expenses) for additional
sampling required to show background levels below these construction lead standards
shall be borne by the Contractor.

Page 4
Updated: 08/18/15
Submittals:
1. All pre-construction submittals shall be forwarded to the Government’s Representative

and the Government’s designated Environmental Consultant prior to the start of
abatement as designated in the Contract Documents and herein.
2. Failure by the Contractor to fulfill the submittal requirements as specified in the Contract
Documents and herein shall be the basis for withholding final payment until such
submittal requirements are satisfied.
Additional Liquidated Damages:
1. The Contractor shall pay for all Environmental Consultant costs for delays in completion
of work beyond the authorized schedule established by the Government. Such charges
shall include the Consultant’s observations and inspections, daily air monitoring,
equipment, transportation and analysis charges. Such costs are estimated at $1,000 per
day, exclusive of any costs associated with final clearance air testing. See the Liquidated
Damages Section in the General Conditions for further requirements.
Waste Manifests:
1. The Contractor shall coordinate the inspection and signing of all waste manifests with the
Government and its Environmental Consultant, while on-site. Failure to complete the
manifests or callbacks after completion of the project will be backcharged to the
Contractor.
VII. Summary of Sampling Results:
Non-asbestos materials identified, which may be impacted by the renovations include:
• See Document 00235 or the Contract Documents, as applicable.
Lead-based paints tested on-site, requiring protection from disturbances causing airborne lead
dusts during the renovation phase include:
• See Document 00235 or the Contract Documents, as applicable.
Treat all similar paints and substrates in kind. Note that most building paints contain some lead
content, and require demolition dust control procedures for compliance with OSHA’s
Construction Lead Standard, under 29 CFR 1926.62.
Scrape and stabilize all loose and peeling paints on-site and characterize for possible disposal as
hazardous waste. Intact painted elements may be disposed as non-hazardous waste complying
with dust controls and personal protective procedures per OSHA’s Construction Lead Standard,
under 29 CFR 1926.62.

Page 5
Updated: 08/18/15
VIII. Standard Procedures

Asbestos Abatement:
Abatement
Material Vinyl Floor Tiles and Mastic
Task A-1:
Method: X Full Isolation Glovebag Glovebag-Cutout
Negative Pressure
Containments
Material Activity Sample I.D. % Asbestos Est. Quantity*
Class
12” x 12” gray vinyl 2 FLVCT-115-01 2 CH (tiles); 375 ft2
floor tiles with through -03 and
darker gray and 4% CH (mastic)
white streaks, and
associated black
mastic (on concrete
*Quantity estimate is for project planning purposes only. All quantities are to be verified in the
field by the Contractor, prior to abatement.
Asbestos Abatement Procedures for Task A-1 (Applicable Indicated):

De-con System: Shower if Central X
Hudson sprayer
>2,500 SF or bucket decon
if <2,500 SF
Floor: # Layers Poly Drop Cloths Scaffold
Walls: # of Polyethylene Layers X Splash Guards
Criticals: 1 # of Polyethylene Layers Plywood Barriers
Other Comments: For Vinyl Floor Tile and Mastic Abatement:
Abate the vinyl floor tiles and related mastic using manual methods, with negative pressure
containment(s), per OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101 Work Class II procedures, minimum. Demolish
interior partitions and counters to access and abate concealed materials, as necessary. Remove
baseboards in conjunction with mastic abatement. Abate the mastics using an approved “low
odor” mastic remover with greater than 140°F flash point. Use of mastic removers containing
methylene chloride is specifically prohibited.
Note that, in some cases, multiple layers of flooring may be present, all of which are to be abated
and disposed of as Category 1, non-friable asbestos.
For Disposal & Cleanup: HEPA vacuum the surrounding areas following the abatement for
final aggressive air clearance. Dispose of all floor tiles and mastic as Category 1 non-friable
asbestos waste. Characterize and dispose of mastic, mastic remover residue, rags and cloths as a
separate (potentially hazardous) waste stream.
Note that the use of mechanical means (chippers, bead-blasters, etc.) to abate the floor tiles and
mastic will require specific approval in advance of abatement. Additional requirements
(including full negative pressure enclosure with manometer, disposal of waste as friable
[Asbestos Waste], etc.) will apply.

Page 6
Updated: 08/18/15
Abatement Material Interior and Exterior Caulking

Group A-2:
Method: X Cordon Area Glovebag Glovebag-Cutout
Material Activity Sample I.D. % Asbestos Est. Quantity
Class Present*
Resilient tan exterior 2 CAULK-105-01 2% CH ~1,700 linear feet
caulking, present at through -03 (~150 ft2)
CMU joints, doors
and windows.
Sticky, resilient gray 2 FLEJ-109-01 2% CH ~40 linear feet
expansion caulking at through -03 (~4 ft2)
the cold joints of the
slab perimeter.
*Quantity estimate is for project planning purposes only. All quantities are to be verified in the
field by the Contractor, prior to abatement.
Asbestos Abatement Procedures for Material Group A-2 (Applicable Indicated):

Decon System: Shower Central X Hudson sprayer
or bucket decon
Floor: # Layers Poly X Drop Cloths X Scaffold
Walls: # of Polyethylene Layers Splash Guards
Criticals: 1 # of Polyethylene Layers Plywood Barriers
Other Comments:
For Exterior Caulking and Slab Expansion Joint Caulking: Close and seal off all nearby
openings from the inside, and complete scraping of caulking as required to facilitate the scope of
work. Install drop cloths outside as required to contain caulking debris. HEPA-vacuum sills,
jambs and surrounding areas and drop cloths before final visual clearances.
Coordinate with stabilization of loose and peeling lead containing paints. All loose and abated
materials must be locked within the waste dumpster daily before leaving the site. Allow for a 20
ft. minimum buffer zone between the abatement activities and other demolition or renovation
work.
Make sure that drop cloths extend sufficiently, about 10-ft. minimum, in all directions.
See Procedures CR-1 below for further details on “minor” procedures for coring, anchoring, etc.

Page 7
Updated: 08/18/15
Lead Hazards Construction and Demolition Work:

Task L-1: Interior & Exterior Paints, Ceramic Tile Glazing and Porcelain Sinks
Material Color Area Lead Content Activity Class
HUD-defined White Varies >1.0 mg/cm2 1
lead glazing on
porcelain sinks
Chipped paint on Brown < 20 SF 650 ppm 1
Mezzanine stair
railing
Chipped paints on Yellow Varies 6.7 mg/cm2 1
exterior steel
bollards
Structural steel Varies Varies Some lead 1
throughout detected
Majority of painted Varies Varies > 90 ppm 1
substrates (steel
door frames,
painted CMU, etc.)
Flashing on roof -- 1 ea. Metallic Lead --
vents
Lead Hazard Procedures for Task L-1 (Applicable Indicated):

Decon System: Shower Central X Hudson sprayer
Required Methods: Full X Manual Methods X Loose &
Containment w/Drop Cloths Peeling Paints
Only
Other Comments: For Stabilization of Loose & Peeling Paints:
Manually scrape and stabilize loose and peeling paints prior to demolition of painted substrates
using drop cloths, wet methods, and HEPA vacuums for dust control, in compliance with OSHA
regulation 29 CFR 1926.62. Avoid dry sweeping. Coordinate paint stabilization with the
asbestos abatement activities, as applicable.
For Mechanical Sanding (as applicable): Work areas requiring mechanical sanding or
stripping of painted surfaces with any lead content shall be fully contained with polyethylene dust
barriers, establishing negative pressure of the zone, and using HEPA-filtered tools and other dust
control procedures as outlined under 29 CFR 1926.62.
For Disposal & Cleanup: Demolish and dispose of intact painted or glazed elements as
[potentially] non-hazardous waste, pending characterization of the waste. Characterize and
dispose of loose and peeling paint debris, chemical strippers, rags, etc. as [potentially] hazardous
waste. Clean-up drop cloths and HEPA vacuum loose and peeling chips and debris daily for all
work areas, before leaving the site. Metallic lead flashing may be recycled.
For Demolition of Lead-Glazed Porcelain Fixtures: Demolish lead-glazed porcelain fixtures

intact, wrap in 6-mil polyethylene sheeting, and dispose of as [potentially] non-hazardous waste,
pending characterization of the waste.
For Impacts to Structural Steel: “Spot abate” any painted structural steel in areas where
cutting, welding, or torching may be required, for a distance of 18” around any impact point.
Only approved chemical paint strippers may be used. (Submit MSDS for approval prior to use.)
Use of products containing methylene chloride is specifically prohibited. Dispose of paints and
chemical residue as [potentially] hazardous waste, pending characterization of the waste.

Page 8
Updated: 08/18/15
Controlled
Renovation Controlled Renovations through Non-Friable Asbestos
Procedure Wall or Floor Caulking
CR-1:
Method: X Cordon Area Glovebag Glovebag-Cutout
Material Asbestos Sample I.D % Asbestos Est. Quantity
Activity Class
Resilient tan 3 CAULK-105-01 2% CH
exterior caulking, through -03
present at CMU
joints, doors and
See Arch. Plans
windows.
for areas of
Sticky, resilient 3 FLEJ-109-01 2% CH
impact.
gray expansion through -03
caulking at the
cold joints of the
slab perimeter.
Material Lead Activity Sample I.D Lead Content Est. Quantity
Class
Majority of painted 1 Varies > 90 to See Arch. Plans
substrates ppm for areas of
impact.
Controlled Renovation Procedure CR-1 (Applicable Indicated):

De-con System: Shower Central X Hudson sprayer
or bucket de-con
Floor: # Layers Poly X Drop Cloths Scaffold
Walls: # of Polyethylene Layers Splash Guards
Criticals: # of Polyethylene Layers Plywood Barriers
Other Comments: For Wall/Door or Floor Caulking:
If impacts must occur, cordon off the room or area and remove the caulking intact, where
feasible. Where removal is not feasible, drill through the material using a wet sponge as a fiber
control agent. Dispose of any caulking debris and fragments as friable asbestos waste (RACM).
Wet wipe and HEPA vacuum the area following completion of the controlled renovation
procedures. Clean-up debris immediately.
For Surfaces with Lead Containing or Lead-Based Paints: Shoot anchors or drill through a
wetted sponge, where feasible, following installation of polyethylene drop cloths on the floor or
other surfaces. Cordon off the room or area and cut holes for receptacle or other devices using
drop cloths on the ground and wet methods. Continually wet the controlled renovation area
during the process and wet wipe and HEPA vacuum the area immediately following completion
of the controlled renovation procedures. Characterize and dispose of waste as potentially
hazardous waste.
Minor procedures impacting lead-based or lead containing finishes, such as installation of

raceway and wire mold anchors, etc., may be completed using drop cloths and wet sponges for
drilling or shooting anchors. All debris shall be immediately wet wiped or HEPA vacuumed to
avoid dispersion of dust.

Page 9
Updated: 08/18/15
IX. Monitoring and Clearance

Asbestos Clearance Requirements (includes budgeted # of samples):
A-1: Vinyl floor tiles Visual Only PCM/zone 5 TEM/zone
& mastic (minimum)
A-2: Caulking X Visual Only PCM/zone TEM/zone
materials
X. Diagrams
See the attached plans for areas of impact.
Consultant’s Signature: Date:
Mark Osborn, AIA, CHMM

AHERA Project Designer
Project Consultant
Contractor’s Signature Date:

Page 10
SECTION 02 41 00
DEMOLITION
05/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AHRI Guideline K (2009) Guideline for Containers for

Recovered Non-Flammable Fluorocarbon
Refrigerants

(AASHTO)
AASHTO M 145 (1991; R 2008) Standard Specification for

Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate
Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes
AASHTO T 180 (2010) Standard Method of Test for

Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using
a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm
(18-in.) Drop
ASSE/SAFE A10.6 (2006) Safety Requirements for Demolition

Operations
CARPET AND RUG INSTITUTE (CRI)
CRI CIS (2011) Carpet Installation Standard

Manual
U.S. DEFENSE LOGISTICS AGENCY (DLA)
DLA 4145.25 (Jun 2000; Reaffirmed Oct 2010) Storage

and Handling of Liquefied and Gaseous
Compressed Gases and Their Full and Empty
Cylinders
http://www.aviation.dla.mil/UserWeb/aviationengineering/
DOD 4000.25-1-M (2006) MILSTRIP - Military Standard

Requisitioning and Issue Procedures
MIL-STD-129 (2014; Rev R) Military Marking for

Shipment and Storage

Lighting

Air Pollutants
49 CFR 173.301 Shipment of Compressed Gases in Cylinders

and Spherical Pressure Vessels
1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
1.2.1 Demolition Plan
Prepare a Demolition Plan and submit proposed salvage, demolition, and

removal procedures for approval before work is started. Include in the
plan procedures for careful removal and disposition of materials specified
to be salvaged, coordination with other work in progress, a disconnection
schedule of utility services, a detailed description of methods and
equipment to be used for each operation and of the sequence of operations.
Identify components and materials to be salvaged for reuse or recycling
with reference to paragraph Existing Facilities to be Removed. Append
tracking forms for all removed materials indicating type, quantities,
condition, destination, and end use. Coordinate with Waste Management
Plan. Include statements affirming Contractor inspection of the existing
roof deck and its suitability to perform as a safe working platform or if
inspection reveals a safety hazard to workers, state provisions for
securing the safety of the workers throughout the performance of the work.
Provide procedures for safe conduct of the work in accordance with
EM 385-1-1. Plan shall be approved by Contracting Officer prior to work
beginning.
1.2.2 General Requirements
Do not begin demolition until authorization is received from the

Contracting Officer. The work of this section is to be performed in a
manner that maximizes the value derived from the salvage and recycling of
materials. Remove rubbish and debris from the station daily; do not allow
accumulations inside or outside the building on airfield pavements. The
work includes demolition,, salvage of identified items and materials, and
removal of resulting rubbish and debris. Remove rubbish and debris from
Government property daily, unless otherwise directed. Store materials
that cannot be removed daily in areas specified by the Contracting Officer.
In the interest of occupational safety and health, perform the work in
accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 23, Demolition, and other applicable
Sections. Refer to Division 02 for environmental requirements.
1.3 ITEMS TO REMAIN IN PLACE
Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in
place, to be reused, or to remain the property of the Government. Repair

or replace damaged items as approved by the Contracting Officer.
Coordinate the work of this section with all other work indicated.
Construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and supports as required. Ensure
that structural elements are not overloaded. Increase structural supports
or add new supports as may be required as a result of any cutting,
removal, or demolition work performed under this contract. Do not
overload structural elements or pavements to remain. Provide new supports
and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by demolition or
removal work. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement require
approval by the Contracting Officer prior to performing such work.
1.3.1 Existing Construction Limits and Protection
Do not disturb existing construction beyond the extent indicated or

necessary for installation of new construction. Provide temporary shoring
and bracing for support of building components to prevent settlement or
other movement. Provide protective measures to control accumulation and
migration of dust and dirt in all work areas. Remove dust, dirt, and
debris from work areas daily.
1.3.2 Weather Protection
For portions of the building to remain, protect building interior and

materials and equipment from the weather at all times. Where removal of
existing roofing is necessary to accomplish work, have materials and
workmen ready to provide adequate and temporary covering of exposed areas.
1.3.3 Trees
Protect trees within the project site which might be damaged during
demolition and which are indicated to be left in place, by a 6 foot high
fence. Erect and secure fence a minimum of 5 feet from the trunk of
individual trees or follow the outer perimeter of branches or clumps of
trees. Replace any tree designated to remain that is damaged during the
work under this contract with like-kind or as approved by the Contracting
Officer.
1.3.4 Utility Service
Maintain existing utilities indicated to stay in service and protect

against damage during demolition operations. Prior to start of work,
utilities serving each area of alteration or removal will be shut off by
the Government and disconnected and sealed by the Contractor.
1.3.5 Facilities
Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal

of existing utilities and pavement is specified or indicated, provide
approved barricades, temporary covering of exposed areas, and temporary
services or connections for electrical and mechanical utilities. Floors,
roofs, walls, columns, pilasters, and other structural components that are
designed and constructed to stand without lateral support or shoring, and
are determined to be in stable condition, must remain standing without
additional bracing, shoring, or lateral support until demolished or
deconstructed, unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer.
Ensure that no elements determined to be unstable are left unsupported and
place and secure bracing, shoring, or lateral supports as may be required
as a result of any cutting, removal or demolition work performed under
this contract.
1.4 BURNING
The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and
debris will not be permitted. Where burning is permitted, adhere to
federal, state, and local regulations.
1.5 AVAILABILITY OF WORK AREAS
Areas in which the work is to be accomplished shall be coordinated with

1.6 SUBMITTALS

submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following
in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
Demolition Plan; G
Existing Conditions
SD-07 Certificates
Notification; G
Receipts
Submit timely notification of demolition and renovation projects to

Federal, State, regional, and local authorities in accordance with
40 CFR 61, Subpart M. Notify the Contracting Officer in writing 10
working days prior to the commencement of work in accordance with 40 CFR 61,
Subpart M. Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal
regulations. In addition to the requirements of the "Contract Clauses,"
conform to the safety requirements contained in ASSE/SAFE A10.6. Comply
with the Environmental Protection Agency requirements specified. Use of
explosives will not be permitted.
1.7.1 Dust and Debris Control
Prevent the spread of dust and debris to occupied portions of the building
on airfield pavements and avoid the creation of a nuisance or hazard in
the surrounding area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or
objectionable conditions such as, but not limited to, ice, flooding, or
pollution. Vacuum and dust the work area daily. Sweep pavements as often
as necessary to control the spread of debris that may result in foreign
object damage potential to aircraft.
1.8 PROTECTION
1.8.1 Traffic Control Signs
a. Where pedestrian and driver safety is endangered in the area of

removal work, use traffic barricades with flashing lights. Notify the
Contracting Officer prior to beginning such work.
Provide a minimum of 2 FAA type L-810 steady burning red obstruction

lights on temporary structures (including cranes) over 100 feet, but
less than 100 ft, above ground level. The use of LED based
obstruction lights are not permitted. For temporary structures
(including cranes) over 200 ft above ground level provide obstruction
lighting in accordance with FAA AC 70/7460-1. Light construction and
installation shall comply with FAA AC 70/7460-1. Lights shall be
operational during periods of reduced visibility, darkness, and as
directed by the Contracting Officer. Maintain the temporary services
during the period of construction and remove only after permanent
services have been installed and tested and are in operation.
1.8.2 Protection of Personnel
Before, during and after the demolition work continuously evaluate the
condition of the structure being demolished and take immediate action to
protect all personnel working in and around the project site. No area,
section, or component of floors, roofs, walls, columns, pilasters, or
other structural element will be allowed to be left standing without
sufficient bracing, shoring, or lateral support to prevent collapse or
failure while workmen remove debris or perform other work in the immediate
area.
1.9 RELOCATIONS
Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items as indicated

with workmen skilled in the trades involved. Repair or replace items to
be relocated which are damaged by the Contractor with new undamaged items
as approved by the Contracting Officer.
1.10 EXISTING CONDITIONS
Before beginning any demolition work, survey the site and examine the
drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work. Record
existing conditions in the presence of the Contracting Officer showing the
condition of structures and other facilities adjacent to areas of
alteration or removal. Photographs sized 4 inch will be acceptable as a
record of existing conditions. Include in the record the elevation of the
top of foundation walls, finish floor elevations, possible conflicting
electrical conduits, plumbing lines, alarms systems, the location and
extent of existing cracks and other damage and description of surface
conditions that exist prior to before starting work. It is the
Contractor's responsibility to verify and document all required outages
which will be required during the course of work, and to note these
outages on the record document. Submit survey results.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FILL MATERIAL
a. Comply with excavating, backfilling, and compacting procedures for
soils used as backfill material to fill basements, voids, depressions

or excavations resulting from demolition of structures. Fill material
shall be waste products from demolition until all waste appropriate
for this purpose is consumed.
b. Fill material shall conform to the definition of satisfactory soil

material as defined in AASHTO M 145, Soil Classification Groups A-1,
A-2-4, A-2-5 and A-3. In addition, fill material shall be free from
roots and other organic matter, trash, debris, frozen materials, and
stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension.
c. Proposed fill material must be sampled and tested by an approved soil

testing laboratory, as follows:
Soil classification AASHTO M 145
Moisture-density relations AASHTO T 180, Method B or D
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED
3.1.1 Utilities and Related Equipment
3.1.1.1 General Requirements
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities,

except when authorized in writing by the Contracting Officer. Do not
interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the
Government except when approved in writing and then only after temporary
utility services have been approved and provided. Do not begin demolition
or deconstruction work until all utility disconnections have been made.
Shut off and cap utilities for future use, as indicated.
3.1.2 Chain Link Fencing
Remove chain link fencing, gates and other related salvaged items
scheduled for removal and transport to designated areas. Remove gates as
whole units.
3.1.3 Paving and Slabs
Sawcut concrete and asphaltic concrete paving and slabs as indicated.

Provide neat sawcuts at limits of pavement removal as indicated. Pavement
and slabs not to be used in this project shall be removed from the
Installation at Contractor's expense.
3.1.4 Masonry
Sawcut and remove masonry so as to prevent damage to surfaces to remain.
3.1.5 Concrete
Saw concrete along straight lines to a depth of a minimum 2 inch. Make

each cut in walls perpendicular to the face and in alignment with the cut
in the opposite face. Break out the remainder of the concrete provided
that the broken area is concealed in the finished work, and the remaining
concrete is sound. At locations where the broken face cannot be
concealed, grind smooth or saw cut entirely through the concrete.
3.1.6 Structural Steel
Dismantle structural steel at field connections and in a manner that will

prevent bending or damage. Salvage for structural steel, steel joists,
girders, angles, plates, columns and shapes. Flame-cutting torches are
permitted when other methods of dismantling are not practical. Transport
structural steel shapes to a designated recycling facility.
3.1.7 Miscellaneous Metal
Salvage shop-fabricated items such as access doors and frames, steel

gratings, metal ladders, wire mesh partitions, metal railings, metal
windows and similar items as whole units. Salvage light-gage and
cold-formed metal framing, such as steel studs, steel trusses, metal
gutters, roofing and siding, metal toilet partitions, toilet accessories
and similar items. Scrap metal shall become the Contractor's property.
Recycle scrap metal as part of demolition and deconstruction operations.
Provide separate containers to collect scrap metal and transport to a
scrap metal collection or recycling facility, in accordance with the Waste
Management Plan.
3.1.8 Carpet
Remove existing carpet for reclamation in accordance with manufacturer

recommendations and as follows. Remove used carpet in large pieces, roll
tightly, and pack neatly in a container. Remove adhesive according to
recommendations of the Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI). Adhesive removal
solvents shall comply with CRI CIS. Recycle removed carpet cushion.
3.1.9 Acoustic Ceiling Tile
Remove, neatly stack, and recycle acoustic ceiling tiles. Recycling may
be available with manufacturer. Otherwise, priority shall be given to a
local recycling organization. Recycling is not required if the tiles
contain or may have been exposed to asbestos material.
3.1.10 Patching
Where removals leave holes and damaged surfaces exposed in the finished
work, patch and repair these holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent
finished surfaces, using on-site materials when available. Where new work
is to be applied to existing surfaces, perform removals and patching in a
manner to produce surfaces suitable for receiving new work. Finished
surfaces of patched area shall be flush with the adjacent existing surface
and shall match the existing adjacent surface as closely as possible as to
texture and finish. Patching shall be as specified and indicated, and
shall include:
a. Concrete and Masonry: Completely fill holes and depressions, caused by

previous physical damage or left as a result of removals in existing
masonry walls to remain, with an approved masonry patching material,
applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
b. Where existing partitions have been removed leaving damaged or missing

resilient tile flooring, patch to match the existing floor tile.
c. Patch acoustic lay-in ceiling where partitions have been removed. The
transition between the different ceiling heights shall be effected by

continuing the higher ceiling level over to the first runner on the
lower ceiling and closing the vertical opening with a painted sheet
metal strip.
3.1.11 Air Conditioning Equipment
Remove air conditioning, refrigeration, and other equipment containing

refrigerants without releasing chlorofluorocarbon refrigerants to the
atmosphere in accordance with the Clean Air Act Amendment of 1990. Recover
all refrigerants prior to removing air conditioning, refrigeration, and
other equipment containing refrigerants and dispose of in accordance with
the paragraph entitled "Disposal of Ozone Depleting Substance (ODS)."
3.1.12 Cylinders and Canisters
Remove all fire suppression system cylinders and canisters and dispose of
in accordance with the paragraph entitled "Disposal of Ozone Depleting
Substance (ODS)."
3.1.13 Locksets on Swinging Doors
Remove all locksets from all swinging doors indicated to be removed and
disposed of. Deliver the locksets and related items to a designated
location for receipt by the Contracting Officer after removal.
3.1.14 Mechanical Equipment and Fixtures
Disconnect mechanical hardware at the nearest connection to existing

services to remain, unless otherwise noted. Disconnect mechanical
equipment and fixtures at fittings. Remove service valves attached to the
unit. Salvage each item of equipment and fixtures as a whole unit;
listed, indexed, tagged, and stored. Salvage each unit with its normal
operating auxiliary equipment. Transport salvaged equipment and fixtures,
including motors and machines, to a designated storage area as directed by
the Contracting Officer. Do not remove equipment until approved. Do not
offer low-efficiency equipment for reuse; provide to recycling service for
disassembly and recycling of parts.
3.1.14.1 Preparation for Storage
Remove water, dirt, dust, and foreign matter from units; tanks, piping and
fixtures shall be drained; interiors, if previously used to store
flammable, explosive, or other dangerous liquids, shall be steam cleaned.
Seal openings with caps, plates, or plugs. Secure motors attached by
flexible connections to the unit. Change lubricating systems with the
proper oil or grease.
3.1.14.2 Piping
Disconnect piping at unions, flanges and valves, and fittings as required

to reduce the pipe into straight lengths for practical storage. Store
salvaged piping according to size and type. If the piping that remains
can become pressurized due to upstream valve failure, end caps, blind
flanges, or other types of plugs or fittings with a pressure gage and
bleed valve shall be attached to the open end of the pipe to ensure
positive leak control. Carefully dismantle piping that previously
contained gas, gasoline, oil, or other dangerous fluids, with precautions
taken to prevent injury to persons and property. Store piping outdoors
until all fumes and residues are removed. Box prefabricated supports,
hangers, plates, valves, and specialty items according to size and type.
Wrap sprinkler heads individually in plastic bags before boxing. Classify
piping not designated for salvage, or not reusable, as scrap metal.
3.1.14.3 Ducts
Classify removed duct work as scrap metal.
3.1.14.4 Fixtures, Motors and Machines
Remove and salvage fixtures, motors and machines associated with plumbing,
heating, air conditioning, refrigeration, and other mechanical system
installations. Salvage, box and store auxiliary units and accessories
with the main motor and machines. Tag salvaged items for identification,
storage, and protection from damage. Classify broken, damaged, or
otherwise unserviceable units and not caused to be broken, damaged, or
otherwise unserviceable as debris to be disposed of by the Contractor.
3.1.15 Electrical Equipment and Fixtures
Salvage motors, motor controllers, and operating and control equipment

that are attached to the driven equipment. Salvage wiring systems and
components. Box loose items and tag for identification. Disconnect
primary, secondary, control, communication, and signal circuits at the
point of attachment to their distribution system.
3.1.15.1 Fixtures
Remove and salvage electrical fixtures. Salvage unprotected glassware

from the fixture and salvage separately. Salvage incandescent,
mercury-vapor, and fluorescent lamps and fluorescent ballasts manufactured
prior to 1978, boxed and tagged for identification, and protected from
breakage.
3.1.15.2 Electrical Devices
Remove and salvage switches, switchgear, transformers, conductors

including wire and nonmetallic sheathed and flexible armored cable,
regulators, meters, instruments, plates, circuit breakers, panelboards,
outlet boxes, and similar items. Box and tag these items for
identification according to type and size.
3.1.15.3 Wiring Ducts or Troughs
Remove and salvage wiring ducts or troughs. Dismantle plug-in ducts and
wiring troughs into unit lengths. Remove plug-in or disconnecting devices
from the busway and store separately.
3.1.15.4 Conduit and Miscellaneous Items
Salvage conduit except where embedded in concrete or masonry. Consider

corroded, bent, or damaged conduit as scrap metal. Sort straight and
undamaged lengths of conduit according to size and type. Classify
supports, knobs, tubes, cleats, and straps as debris to be removed and
disposed.
3.1.16 Items With Unique/Regulated Disposal Requirements
Remove and dispose of items with unique or regulated disposal requirements

in the manner dictated by law or in the most environmentally responsible
manner.
3.2 CONCURRENT EARTH-MOVING OPERATIONS
Do not begin excavation, filling, and other earth-moving operations that

are sequential to demolition work in areas occupied by structures to be
demolished until all demolition in the area has been completed and debris
removed. Fill holes, open basements and other hazardous openings.
3.3 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL
3.3.1 Title to Materials
Except for salvaged items specified in related Sections, and for materials
or equipment scheduled for salvage, all materials and equipment removed
and not reused or salvaged, shall become the property of the Contractor
and shall be removed from Government property. Title to materials
resulting from demolition and deconstruction, and materials and equipment
to be removed, is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the
Contracting Officer of the Contractor's demolition, deconstruction, and
removal procedures, and authorization by the Contracting Officer to begin
demolition and deconstruction. The Government will not be responsible for
the condition or loss of, or damage to, such property after contract
award. Showing for sale or selling materials and equipment on site is
prohibited.
3.3.2 Reuse of Materials and Equipment
Remove and store materials and equipment listed in the Demolition Plan to
be reused or relocated to prevent damage, and reinstall as the work
progresses.
3.3.3 Disposal of Ozone Depleting Substance (ODS)
Class I and Class II ODS are defined in Section, 602(a) and (b), of The
Clean Air Act. Prevent discharge of Class I and Class II ODS to the
atmosphere. Place recovered ODS in cylinders meeting AHRI Guideline K
suitable for the type ODS (filled to no more than 80 percent capacity) and
provide appropriate labeling. Recovered ODS shall be removed from
Government property and disposed of in accordance with 40 CFR 82.
Products, equipment and appliances containing ODS in a sealed,
self-contained system (e.g. residential refrigerators and window air
conditioners) shall be disposed of in accordance with 40 CFR 82. Submit
Receipts or bills of lading, as specified. Submit a shipping receipt or
bill of lading for all containers of ozone depleting substance (ODS)
shipped to the Defense Depot, Richmond, Virginia.
3.3.3.1 Special Instructions
No more than one type of ODS is permitted in each container. A

warning/hazardous label shall be applied to the containers in accordance
with Department of Transportation regulations. All cylinders including
but not limited to fire extinguishers, spheres, or canisters containing an
ODS shall have a tag with the following information:
a. Activity name and unit identification code
b. Activity point of contact and phone number
c. Type of ODS and pounds of ODS contained
d. Date of shipment
e. National stock number (for information, call (804) 279-4525).
3.3.3.2 Fire Suppression Containers
Deactivate fire suppression system cylinders and canisters with electrical

charges or initiators prior to shipment. Also, safety caps must be used
to cover exposed actuation mechanisms and discharge ports on these special
cylinders.
3.3.4 Transportation Guidance
Ship all ODS containers in accordance with MIL-STD-129, DLA 4145.25 (also
referenced one of the following: Army Regulation 700-68, Naval Supply
Instruction 4440.128C, Marine Corps Order 10330.2C, and Air Force
Regulation 67-12), 49 CFR 173.301, and DOD 4000.25-1-M.
3.4 CLEANUP
Remove debris and rubbish from basement and similar excavations. Remove
and transport the debris in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or
adjacent areas. Apply local regulations regarding hauling and disposal.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIALS
3.5.1 Regulation of Removed Materials
Dispose of debris, rubbish, scrap, and other nonsalvageable materials

resulting from removal operations with all applicable federal, state and
local regulations as contractually specified in the Waste Management Plan.
Storage of removed materials on the project site is prohibited.
3.5.2 Burning on Government Property
Burning of materials removed from demolished structures will not be

permitted on Government property.
3.5.3 Removal to Spoil Areas on Government Property
Transport noncombustible materials removed from demolition and

deconstruction structures to designated spoil areas on Government property.
3.5.4 Removal from Government Property
Transport waste materials removed from demolished and deconstructed

structures, except waste soil, from Government property for legal
disposal. Dispose of waste soil as directed.
3.6 REUSE OF SALVAGED ITEMS
Recondition salvaged materials and equipment designated for reuse before

installation. Replace items damaged during removal and salvage operations
or restore them as necessary to usable condition.
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10
ASBESTOS HAZARD CONTROL ACTIVITIES

02/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
Submit copies of weight bills and delivery tickets for payment to the
Contracting Officer during the progress of the work. Furnish scale
tickets for each load of ACM weighed and certified. These tickets shall
include tare weight; identification mark for each vehicle weighed; and
date, time and location of loading and unloading. Tickets shall be
furnished at the point and time individual trucks arrive at the worksite.
A master log of all vehicle loading shall be furnished for each day of
loading operations. Before the final statement is allowed, file with the
Contracting Officer certified weigh bills and/or certified tickets and
manifests of all ACM actually disposed by the Contractor for this contract.
1.2 REFERENCES

ASSE Z9.2 (2012) Fundamentals Governing the Design

and Operation of Local Exhaust Ventilation
Systems
ASTM D4397 (2010) Standard Specification for

Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction,
Industrial, and Agricultural Applications
ASTM E1368 (2014) Visual Inspection of Asbestos

Abatement Projects
COMPRESSED GAS ASSOCIATION (CGA)
CGA G-7 (2014) Compressed Air for Human

Respiration; 6th Edition
INTERNATIONAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATION (ISEA)
ANSI/ISEA Z87.1 (2010) Occupational and Educational

Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices

SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 1

NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH (NIOSH)
NIOSH 2003-154 (2003; 4th Ed; Supple 3) NIOSH Manual of

Analytical Methods

Manual
EP 1110-1-11 (1992; Change 1 1997) Engineering and

Design -- Asbestos Abatement Guideline
Detail Sheets
EPA 340/1-90/018 (1990) Asbestos/NESHAP Regulated Asbestos

Containing Materials Guidance
29 CFR 1910.141 Sanitation
29 CFR 1910.147 Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock Out/Tag

Out)
29 CFR 1926.32 Safety and Health Regulations for

Construction - Definition

Air Pollutants
40 CFR 763 Asbestos
42 CFR 84 Approval of Respiratory Protective Devices
49 CFR 107 Hazardous Materials Program Procedures

Definitions


UL 586 (2009; Reprint Sep 2014) Standard for

High-Efficiency Particulate, Air Filter
Units
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 2

1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.3.1 Amended Water
Water containing a wetting agent or surfactant with a surface tension of

at least 29 dynes per square centimeter.
1.3.2 Asbestos-Containing Material (ACM)
Any materials containing more than one percent asbestos.
1.3.3 Authorized Person
Any person authorized by the Contractor and required by work duties to be

present in the regulated areas.
1.3.4 Building Inspector
Individual who inspects buildings for asbestos and has EPA Model
Accreditation Plan (MAP) "Building Inspector" training; accreditation
required by 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix C, has EPA/State
certification/license as a "Building Inspector".
1.3.5 Class I Asbestos Work
Activities defined by OSHA involving the removal of thermal system

insulation (TSI) and surfacing ACM.
1.3.6 Class II Asbestos Work
Activities defined by OSHA involving the removal of ACM which is not

thermal system insulation or surfacing material. This includes, but is
not limited to, the removal of asbestos - containing wallboard, floor tile
and sheeting, roofing and siding shingles, and construction mastic.
Certain "incidental" roofing materials such as mastic, flashing and
cements when they are still intact are excluded from Class II asbestos
work. Removal of small amounts of these materials which would fit into a
glovebag may be classified as a Class III job.
1.3.7 Class III Asbestos Work
Activities defined by OSHA that involve repair and maintenance operations,

where ACM, including TSI and surfacing ACM, is likely to be disturbed.
Operations may include drilling, abrading, cutting a hole, cable pulling,
crawling through tunnels or attics and spaces above the ceiling, where
asbestos is actively disturbed or asbestos-containing debris is actively
disturbed.
1.3.8 Class IV Asbestos Work
Maintenance and custodial construction activities during which employees

contact but do not disturb ACM and activities to clean-up dust, waste and
debris resulting from Class I, II, and III activities. This may include
dusting surfaces where ACM waste and debris and accompanying dust exists
and cleaning up loose ACM debris from TSI or surfacing ACM following
construction
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 3

1.3.9 Clean Room
An uncontaminated room having facilities for the storage of employees'

street clothing and uncontaminated materials and equipment.
1.3.10 Competent Person
In addition to the definition in 29 CFR 1926.32(f), a person who is

capable of identifying existing asbestos hazards as defined in
29 CFR 1926.1101, selecting the appropriate control strategy, has the
authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them and has EPA
Model Accreditation Plan (MAP) "Contractor/Supervisor" training; has
EPA/State certification/license as a "Contractor/Supervisor".
1.3.11 Contractor/Supervisor
Individual who supervises asbestos abatement work and has EPA Model
Accreditation Plan "Contractor/Supervisor" training; has EPA/State
certification as a "Contractor/Supervisor".
1.3.12 Critical Barrier
One or more layers of plastic sealed over all openings into a regulated
area or any other similarly placed physical barrier sufficient to prevent
airborne asbestos in a regulated area from migrating to an adjacent area.
1.3.13 Decontamination Area
An enclosed area adjacent and connected to the regulated area and

consisting of an equipment room, shower area, and clean room, which is
used for the decontamination of workers, materials, and equipment that are
contaminated with asbestos.
1.3.14 Demolition
The wrecking or taking out of any load-supporting structural member and

any related razing, removing, or stripping of asbestos products.
1.3.15 Disposal Bag
A 6 mil thick, leak-tight plastic bag, pre-labeled in accordance with

29 CFR 1926.1101, used for transporting asbestos waste from containment to
disposal site.
1.3.16 Disturbance
Activities that disrupt the matrix of ACM, crumble or pulverize ACM, or

generate visible debris from ACM. Disturbance includes cutting away small
amounts of ACM, no greater than the amount which can be contained in 1
standard sized glovebag or waste bag, not larger than 60 inches in length
and width in order to access a building component.
1.3.17 Equipment Room or Area
An area adjacent to the regulated area used for the decontamination of

employees and their equipment.
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 4

1.3.18 Fiber
A fibrous particulate, 5 micrometers or longer, with a length to width

ratio of at least 3 to 1.
1.3.19 Friable ACM
A term defined in 40 CFR 61, Subpart M and EPA 340/1-90/018 meaning any
material which contains more than 1 percent asbestos, as determined using
the method specified in 40 CFR 763, Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM), that
when dry, can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand
pressure.
1.3.20 Glovebag
Not more than a 60 by 60 inch impervious plastic bag-like enclosure

affixed around an asbestos-containing material, with glove-like appendages
through which material and tools may be handled.
1.3.21 High-Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) Filter
A filter capable of trapping and retaining at least 99.97 percent of all

mono-dispersed particles of 0.3 micrometers in diameter.
1.3.22 Intact
ACM which has not crumbled, been pulverized, or otherwise deteriorated so

that the asbestos is no longer likely to be bound with its matrix.
Removal of "intact" asphaltic, resinous, cementitious products does not
render the ACM non-intact simply by being separated into smaller pieces.
1.3.23 Model Accreditation Plan (MAP)
USEPA training accreditation requirements for persons who work with

asbestos as specified in 40 CFR 763.
1.3.24 Negative Initial Exposure Assessment
A demonstration by the Contractor to show that employee exposure during an

operation is expected to be consistently below the OSHA Permissible
Exposure Limits (PELs).
1.3.25 NESHAP
National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants. The USEPA

NESHAP regulation for asbestos is at 40 CFR 61, Subpart M.
1.3.26 Nonfriable ACM
A NESHAP term defined in 40 CFR 61, Subpart M and EPA 340/1-90/018 meaning
any material containing more than 1 percent asbestos that, when dry,
cannot be crumbled, pulverized or reduced to powder by hand pressure.
1.3.27 Nonfriable ACM (Category I)
A NESHAP term defined in 40 CFR 61, Subpart E and EPA 340/1-90/018 meaning
asbestos-containing packings, gaskets, resilient floor covering, and
asphalt roofing products containing more than 1 percent asbestos.
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 5

1.3.28 Nonfriable ACM (Category II)
A NESHAP term defined in 40 CFR 61, Subpart E and EPA 340/1-90/018 meaning
any material, excluding Category I nonfriable ACM, containing more than 1
percent asbestos.
1.3.29 Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs)
1.3.29.1 PEL-Time Weighted Average(TWA)
Concentration of asbestos not in excess of 0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter

of air (f/cc) as an 8 hour time weighted average (TWA).
1.3.29.2 PEL-Excursion Limit
An airborne concentration of asbestos not in excess of 1.0 f/cc of air as

averaged over a sampling period of 30 minutes.
1.3.30 Regulated Area
An OSHA term defined in 29 CFR 1926.1101 meaning an area established by

the Contractor to demarcate areas where Class I, II, and III asbestos work
is conducted; also any adjoining area where debris and waste from such
asbestos work accumulate; and an area within which airborne concentrations
of asbestos exceed, or there is a reasonable possibility they may exceed,
the permissible exposure limit.
1.3.31 Removal
All operations where ACM is taken out or stripped from structures or

substrates, and includes demolition operations.
1.3.32 Repair
Overhauling, rebuilding, reconstructing, or reconditioning of structures

or substrates, including encapsulation or other repair of ACM attached to
structures or substrates.
1.3.33 Surfacing ACM
Asbestos-containing material which contains more than 1 percent asbestos

and is sprayed-on, troweled-on, or otherwise applied to surfaces, such as
acoustical plaster on ceilings and fireproofing materials on structural
members, or other materials on surfaces for acoustical, fireproofing, or
other purposes.
1.3.34 Thermal System Insulation (TSI) ACM
ACM which contains more than 1 percent asbestos and is applied to pipes,
fittings, boilers, breeching, tanks, ducts, or other interior structural
components to prevent heat loss or gain or water condensation.
1.3.35 Transite
A generic name for asbestos cement wallboard and pipe.
1.3.36 Worker
Individual (not designated as the Competent Person or a supervisor) who
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 6

performs asbestos work and has completed asbestos worker training required
by 29 CFR 1926.1101, to include EPA Model Accreditation Plan (MAP)
"Worker" training; accreditation if required by the OSHA Class of work to
be performed or by the state where the work is to be performed.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section covers all operations in which asbestos-containing materials

(ACM) are encountered. These procedures and equipment are required to
protect workers and building occupants from airborne asbestos fibers and
ACM dust and debris. Activities include OSHA Class II work operations.
This section also includes containment, storage, transportation and
disposal of the generated ACM wastes. Submit Detailed Drawings in
accordance with EP 1110-1-11 and containing descriptions, and site layout
to include worksite containment area(s), local exhaust systems locations,
decontamination units and load-out units, other temporary waste storage
facility, access tunnels, location of temporary utilities (electrical,
water, sewer) and boundaries of each regulated area. When the detail
sheets are not attached to this specification, the Contractor can get them
from the web at:
http://140.194.76.129/publications/eng-pamphlets/ep1110-1-11/toc.htm
1.4.1 Abatement Work Tasks
The specific ACM to be abated is identified on the detailed plans and

project drawings . A summary for each work task including the appropriate
RESPONSE ACTION DETAIL SHEET (item to be abated and methods to be used)
and SET-UP DETAIL SHEETS (containment techniques to include safety
precautions and methods) is included in Table 1, "Individual Work Task
Data Elements" at the end of this section.
1.4.2 Unexpected Discovery of Asbestos
For any previously untested building components suspected to contain

asbestos and located in areas impacted by the work, notify the Contracting
Officer (CO) who will have the option of ordering up to 3 bulk samples to
be obtained at the Contractor's expense and delivered to a laboratory
accredited under the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)
"National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP)" and analyzed
by PLM. If the asbestos content is less than 10 percent, as determined by
a method other than point counting, the asbestos content shall be verified
by point counting. Any additional components identified as ACM that have
been approved by the CO for removal shall be removed and will be paid for
by an equitable adjustment to the contract price under the CONTRACT CLAUSE
titled "changes". Sampling shall be conducted by personnel who have
successfully completed the EPA Model Accreditation Plan (MAP) "Building
Inspector" training course and is EPA/State certified/licensed as a
"Building Inspector".
1.5 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detailed Drawings; G
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 7

SD-03 Product Data
Asbestos Waste Shipment Records; G

Weight Bills and Delivery Tickets
Encapsulants; G
Respiratory Protection Program; G
Cleanup and Disposal; G
Qualifications; G
Training Program
Licenses, Permits and Notifications
Asbestos Management Plan; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Exposure Assessment and Air Monitoring

Local Exhaust System
SD-07 Certificates
Local Exhaust System

Encapsulants; G
Medical Surveillance Requirements
In addition to detailed requirements of this specification, work performed

under this contract shall comply with EM 385-1-1, applicable federal,
state, and local laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and regulations
regarding handling, storing, transporting, and disposing of asbestos waste
materials. Matters of interpretation of standards shall be submitted to
the appropriate administrative agency for resolution before starting
work. Where the requirements of this specification, applicable laws,
criteria, ordinances, regulations, and referenced documents vary, the most
stringent requirements shall apply. The following state and local laws,
rules and regulations regarding demolition, removal, encapsulation,
construction alteration, repair, maintenance, renovation, spill/emergency
cleanup, housekeeping, handling, storing, transporting and disposing of
asbestos material apply: Federal OSHA and EPA requirements for asbestos.
1.6.1 Written Qualifications and Organization Report
Submit a written qualifications and organization report providing evidence

of qualifications of the Contractor, Contractor's Project Supervisor,
Designated Competent Person, supervisors and workers; Designated IH;
independent testing laboratory; all subcontractors to be used including
disposal transportation and disposal facility firms, subcontractor
supervisors, subcontractor workers; and any others assigned to perform
asbestos abatement and support activities. Include in the report an
organization chart showing the Contractor's staff organization chain of
command and reporting relationship with all subcontractors. The report
shall be signed by the Contractor, the Contractor's onsite project
manager, Designated Competent Person, Designated IH, designated testing
laboratory and the principals of all subcontractors to be used. Include
the following statement in the report: "By signing this report I certify
that the personnel I am responsible for during the course of this project
fully understand the contents of 29 CFR 1926.1101, 40 CFR 61, Subpart M,
and the federal, state and local requirements for those asbestos abatement
activities that they will be involved in."
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 8

1.6.2 Specific Requirements
Designate in writing, personnel meeting the following qualifications:
a. Asbestos Abatement Contractor: Certified/licensed by applicable state

agencies to perform asbestos-related activities.
b. Designated Competent Person: Qualified in accordance with

29 CFR 1926.32 and 29 CFR 1926.1101, has EPA MAP
"Contractor/Supervisor" training accreditation, has EPA/State
certification/license as a "Contractor/Supervisor" and is experienced
in the administration and supervision of asbestos abatement projects,
including exposure assessment and monitoring, work practices,
abatement methods, protective measures for personnel, setting up and
inspecting asbestos abatement work areas, evaluating the integrity of
containment barriers, placement and operation of local exhaust
systems, ACM generated waste containment and disposal procedures,
decontamination units installation and maintenance requirements, site
safety and health requirements, notification of other employees
onsite, etc. The Designated Competent Person shall be responsible for
compliance with applicable federal, state and local requirements, the
Contractor's Accident Prevention Plan (APP) and Asbestos Hazard
Abatement Plan (AHAP). Submit the "Contractor/Supervisor" course
completion certificate and the most recent certificate for required
refresher training, EPA/State certification/license with the employee
"Certificate of Worker Acknowledgment". Submit evidence that this
person has a minimum of 2 years of on-the-job asbestos abatement
experience relevant to OSHA competent person requirements. The
Designated Competent Person shall be onsite at all times during the
conduct of this project.
c. Project and Other Supervisors: Have EPA MAP "Contractor/Supervisor"

training accreditation. Submit the "Contractor/Supervisor" course
completion certificate and the most recent certificate for required
refresher training, EPA/State certification/license with the employee
"Certificate of Worker Acknowledgment". Also submit evidence that the
Project Supervisor has a minimum of 2 years of on-the-job asbestos
abatement experience relevant to project supervisor responsibilities
and the other supervisors have a minimum of 1 year on-the-job asbestos
abatement experience commensurate with the responsibilities they will
have on this project.
d. Designated Industrial Hygienist: Resume for the Industrial Hygienist

(IH) selected to prepare the Contractor's AHAP, prepare and perform
training, direct air monitoring and assist the Contractor's Competent
Person in implementing and ensuring that safety and health
requirements are complied with during the performance of all required
work. The Designated IH shall be a person who is board certified in
the practice of industrial hygiene or board eligible (meets all
education and experience requirements) as determined and documented by
the American Board of Industrial Hygiene (ABIH), has EPA MAP
"Contractor/Supervisor" training accreditation, has EPA/State
certification/license, and has a minimum of 2 years of comprehensive
experience in planning and overseeing asbestos abatement activities.
Submit the "Contractor/Supervisor" course completion certificate and
the most recent certificate for required refresher training and
EPA/State certification/license with the employee "Certificate of
Worker Acknowledgment". The Designated IH shall be completely
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 9

independent from the Contractor according to federal, state, or local

regulations; that is, shall not be a Contractor's employee or be an
employee or principal of a firm in a business relationship with the
Contractor negating such independent status. A copy of the Designated
IH's current valid ABIH certification shall be included. The
Designated IH shall visit the site at least 1 per week for the
duration of asbestos activities and shall be available for
emergencies. In addition, submit resumes of additional IH's and
industrial hygiene technicians (IHT) who will be assisting the
Designated IH in performing onsite tasks. IHs and IHTs supporting the
Designated IH shall have a minimum of 2 years of practical onsite
asbestos abatement experience. Indicate the formal reporting
relationship between the Designated IH and the support IHs and IHTs,
the Designated Competent Person, and the Contractor.
e. Asbestos Abatement Workers: Meet the requirements contained in

29 CFR 1926.1101, 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, and other applicable federal,
state and local requirements. Worker training documentation shall be
provided as required on the "Certificate of Workers Acknowledgment".
Training documentation is required for each employee who will perform
OSHA Class I, Class II, Class III, or Class IV asbestos abatement
operations. Such documentation shall be submitted on a Contractor
generated form titled "Certificate of Workers Acknowledgment", to be
completed for each employee in the same format and containing the same
information as the example certificate at the end of this section.
Training course completion certificates (initial and most recent
update refresher) required by the information checked on the form
shall be attached.
f. Physician: Resume of the physician who will or has performed the

medical examinations and evaluations of the persons who will conduct
the asbestos abatement work tasks. The physician shall be currently
licensed by the state where the workers will be or have been examined,
have expertise in pneumoconiosis and shall be responsible for the
determination of medical surveillance protocols and for review of
examination/test results performed in compliance with 29 CFR 1926.1101.
The physician shall be familiar with the site's hazards and the scope
of this project.
g. Independent Testing Laboratory: identify the independent testing

laboratory selected to perform the sample analyses and report the
results. The testing laboratory shall be completely independent from
the Contractor as recognized by federal, state or local regulations.
Written verification of the following criteria, signed by the testing
laboratory principal and the Contractor, shall be submitted:
(1) Phase contrast microscopy (PCM): The laboratory is fully

equipped and proficient in conducting PCM of airborne samples
using the methods specified by 29 CFR 1926.1101, OSHA method
ID-160, the most current version of NIOSH 2003-154 Method 7400 as
shown in Table 3 at the end of this Section. The laboratory shall
be currently judged proficient (classified as acceptable) in
counting airborne asbestos samples by PCM by successful
participation in each of the last 4 rounds in the American
Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) Proficiency Analytical
Testing (PAT) Program or by participating in the AIHA PAT Program,
and being judged proficient in counting samples.
(2) Polarized light microscopy (PLM): The laboratory is fully
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 10

equipped and proficient in conducting PLM analyses of suspect ACM

bulk samples in accordance with 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E;
the laboratory is currently accredited by NIST under the NVLAP for
bulk asbestos analysis and will use analysts with demonstrated
proficiency to conduct PLM analyses.
(3) Transmission electron microscopy (TEM): The laboratory is fully

equipped and proficient in conducting TEM analysis of airborne
samples using the mandatory method specified by 40 CFR 763,
Subpart E, Appendix E; the laboratory is currently accredited by
NIST under the NVLAP for airborne sample analysis of asbestos by
TEM; the laboratory will use analysts with demonstrated
proficiency under NVLAP.
(4) PCM/TEM: The laboratory is fully equipped and each analyst is

proficient in conducting PCM and TEM analysis of airborne samples
using NIOSH 2003-154 Method 7400 PCM and NIOSH 2003-154 Method
7402 (TEM confirmation of asbestos content of PCM results) from
the same filter.
h. Disposal Facility, Transporter: Written evidence that the landfill to

be used is approved for asbestos disposal by the USEPA regulatory
agencies. Copies of signed agreements between the Contractor
(including subcontractors and transporters) and the asbestos waste
disposal facility to accept and dispose of all asbestos containing
waste shall be provided. The Contractor and transporters shall meet
the DOT requirements of 49 CFR 171, 49 CFR 172, and 49 CFR 173 as well
as registration requirements of 49 CFR 107 and other applicable state
or local requirements. The disposal facility shall meet the
requirements of 40 CFR 61, Sections .154 or .155, as required in
40 CFR 61 150(b), and other applicable state or local requirements.
1.6.3 Federal, State or Local Citations on Previous Projects
The Contractor and all subcontractors shall submit a statement, signed by

an officer of the company, containing a record of any citations issued by
Federal, State or local regulatory agencies relating to asbestos
activities (including projects, dates, and resolutions); a list of
penalties incurred through non-compliance with asbestos project
specifications, including liquidated damages, overruns in scheduled time
limitations and resolutions; and situations in which an asbestos-related
contract has been terminated (including projects, dates, and reasons for
terminations). If there are none, a negative declaration signed by an
officer of the company shall be provided.
1.6.4 Preconstruction Conference
The Contractor and the Contractor's Designated Competent Person, Project

Supervisor, and Designated IH shall meet with the Contracting Officer (CO)
prior to beginning work at a safety preconstruction conference to discuss
the details of the Contractor's submitted APP to include the AHAP and AHAs
appendices. Deficiencies in the APP will be discussed. Onsite work shall
not begin until the APP has been accepted.
1.7 SAFETY
Prepare a written comprehensive site-specific Accident Prevention Plan

(APP) at least 30 days prior to the preconstruction conference. The APP
shall be in accordance with the format and requirements in Appendix A of
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 11

EM 385-1-1. The APP shall incorporate an Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan

(AHAP), and Activity Hazard Analyses (AHAs) as separate appendices into
one site-specific document. The APP shall take into consideration all the
individual asbestos abatement work tasks identified in Table 1. See
Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENT SAFETY REQUIREMENTS for additional
requirements.
1.7.1 Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan Appendix
The AHAP shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
a. The personal protective equipment to be used;
b. The location and description of regulated areas including clean and

dirty areas,access tunnels, and decontamination unit (clean room,
shower room, equipment room, storage areas such as load-out unit);
c. Initial exposure assessment in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101;
d. Level of supervision;
e. Method of notification of other employers at the worksite;
f. Abatement method to include containment and control procedures;
g. Interface of trades;
h. Sequencing of asbestos related work;
i. Storage and disposal procedures and plan;
j. Type of wetting agent and asbestos encapsulant;
k. Location of local exhaust equipment;
l. Air monitoring methods (personal, environmental and clearance);
m. Bulk sampling and analytical methods (if required);
n. A detailed description of the method to be employed in order to

control the spread of ACM wastes and airborne fiber;
o. Fire and medical emergency response procedures;
p. The security procedures to be used for all regulated areas.
1.7.2 Activity Hazard Analyses Appendix
AHAs for each major phase of work, shall be submitted and updated during
the project. The AHAs format shall be in accordance with Figure 1-1 of
EM 385-1-1. The analysis shall define the activities to be performed for
a major phase of work, identify the sequence of work, the specific hazards
anticipated, and the control measures to be implemented to eliminate or
reduce each hazard to an acceptable level. Work shall not proceed on that
phase until the AHA has been accepted and a preparatory meeting has been
conducted by the Contractor to discuss its contents with everyone engaged
in the activities, including the onsite Government representatives. The
AHAs shall be continuously reviewed and, when appropriate, modified to
address changing site conditions or operations.
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 12

1.7.3 Local Exhaust System
Local exhaust units shall conform to ASSE Z9.2 and 29 CFR 1926.1101.
Filters on local exhaust system equipment shall conform to ASSE Z9.2 and
UL 586. Filter shall be UL labeled. Submit pressure differential
recordings and Manufacturer's certifications showing compliance with
ASSE Z9.2 for:
a. Vacuums.
b. Water filtration equipment.
c. Ventilation equipment.
d. Other equipment required to contain airborne asbestos fibers.
1.8 SECURITY
Fenced and locked security area shall be provided for each regulated
area. A log book shall be kept documenting entry into and out of the
regulated area. Entry into regulated areas shall only be by personnel
authorized by the Contractor and the CO. Personnel authorized to enter
regulated areas shall be trained, medically evaluated, and wear the
required personal protective equipment.
1.8.1 Licenses, Permits and Notifications
Obtain necessary licenses, permits and notifications in conjunction with

the project's asbestos abatement, transportation and disposal actions and
timely notification furnished of such actions as required by federal,
state, regional, and local authorities. Notify the Regional Office of the
USEPA in writing, at least 10 working days prior to the commencement of
work, in accordance with 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, and state and local
requirements to include the mandatory "Notification of Demolition and
Renovation Record" form and other required notification documents. Notify
by Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested. Furnish copies of the
receipts to the CO, in writing, prior to the commencement of work. The
associated fees/costs for licenses, permits, and notifications are is
contract.
1.8.2 Regulated Areas
All Class I, II, and III asbestos work shall be conducted within regulated
areas. The regulated area shall be demarcated to minimize the number of
persons within the area and to protect persons outside the area from
exposure to airborne asbestos. Control access to regulated areas, ensure
that only authorized personnel enter, and verify that Contractor required
medical surveillance, training and respiratory protection program
requirements are met prior to allowing entrance.
1.8.3 Warning Signs and Tape
Warning signs and tape printed bilingually in English and Spanishshall be

provided at the regulated boundaries and entrances to regulated areas.
Signs shall be located to allow personnel to read the signs and take the
necessary protective steps required before entering the area. Warning
signs, as shown and described in DETAIL SHEET 11, and displaying the
following legend in the lower panel:
DANGER
ASBESTOS
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 13

CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD

AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA
See DETAIL SHEET 11 and DETAIL SHEET 15.

Decontamination unit signage shall be as shown and described on DETAILED
SHEET 15.
1.8.4 Warning Labels
Warning labels shall be affixed to all asbestos disposal containers,

asbestos materials, scrap, waste debris, and other products contaminated
with asbestos. Containers with preprinted warning labels conforming to
requirements are acceptable. See DETAIL SHEET 14,
1.9 MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
Medical surveillance requirements shall conform to 29 CFR 1926.1101.

Asbestos workers shall be enrolled in a medical surveillance program that
meets 29 CFR 1926.1101 (m) requirements and other pertinent state or local
requirements. This requirement shall have been satisfied within the last
12 months. Submit required medical certification and the Physician's
written opinion.
1.9.1 Respiratory Protection Program
The Contractor's Designated IH shall establish in writing, and implement

a respiratory protection program in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101 and
29 CFR 1910.134. The Contractor's Designated IH shall establish minimum
respiratory protection requirements based on measured or anticipated
levels of airborne asbestos fiber concentrations.
1.9.2 Respiratory Fit Testing
The Contractor's Designated IH shall conduct a qualitative or

quantitative fit test conforming to Appendix A of 29 CFR 1910.134 for each
worker required to wear a respirator, and any authorized visitors who
enter a regulated area where respirators are required to be worn. A
respirator fit test shall be performed prior to initially wearing a
respirator and every 12 months thereafter. If physical changes develop
that will affect the fit, a new fit test shall be performed. Functional
fit checks shall be performed each time a respirator is put on and in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
1.9.3 Respirator Selection and Use Requirements
Provide respirators, and ensure that they are used as required by

29 CFR 1926.1101 and in accordance with CGA G-7 and the manufacturer's
recommendations. Respirators shall be approved by the National Institute
for Occupational Safety and Health NIOSH, under the provisions of 42 CFR 84,
for use in environments containing airborne asbestos fibers. For
air-purifying respirators, the particulate filter shall be high-efficiency
particulate air (HEPA)/(N-,R-,P-100). The initial respirator selection
and the decisions regarding the upgrading or downgrading of respirator
type shall be made by the Contractor's Designated IH based on the measured
or anticipated airborne asbestos fiber concentrations to be encountered.
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 14

1.9.4 Personal Protective Equipment
Three complete sets of personal protective equipment shall be made

available to the CO and authorized visitors for entry to the regulated
area. The CO and authorized visitors shall be provided with training
equivalent to that provided to Contractor employees in the selection,
fitting, and use of personal protective equipment and the site safety and
health requirements. Provide workers with personal protective clothing
and equipment and ensure that it is worn properly. The Designated IH and
Designated Competent Person shall select and approve all the required
personal protective clothing and equipment.
1.9.5 Whole Body Protection
Personnel exposed to or having the potential to be exposed to airborne

concentrations of asbestos that exceed the PELs, or for all OSHA Classes
of work for which a required negative exposure assessment is not produced,
shall be provided with whole body protection and such protection shall be
worn properly. Disposable whole body protection shall be disposed of as
asbestos contaminated waste upon exiting from the regulated area.
Reusable whole body protection worn shall be either disposed of as
asbestos contaminated waste upon exiting from the regulated area or be
properly laundered in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101. The Contractor's
Designated Competent Person, in consultation with the Designated IH, has
the authority to take immediate action to upgrade or downgrade whole body
protection when there is an immediate danger to the health and safety of
the wearer.
1.9.5.1 Coveralls
Disposable-breathable coveralls with a zipper front shall be provided.

Sleeves shall be secured at the wrists, and foot coverings secured at the
ankles. See DETAIL SHEET 13.
1.9.5.2 Gloves
Gloves shall be provided to protect the hands where there is the potential
for hand injuries (i.e., scrapes, punctures, cuts, etc.).
1.9.5.3 Foot Coverings
Cloth socks shall be provided and worn next to the skin. Footwear, as
required by OSHA and EM 385-1-1, that is appropriate for safety and health
hazards in the area shall be worn. Reusable footwear removed from the
regulated area shall be thoroughly decontaminated or disposed of as ACM
waste.
1.9.5.4 Head Covering
Hood type disposable head covering shall be provided. In addition,

protective head gear (hard hats) shall be provided as required. Hard hats
shall only be removed from the regulated area after being thoroughly
decontaminated.
1.9.5.5 Protective Eye Wear
Eye protection shall be provided, when operations present a potential eye

injury hazard, and shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ISEA Z87.1.
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 15

1.10 HYGIENE
Establish a decontamination area for the decontamination of employees,

material and equipment. Ensure that employees enter and exit the
regulated area through the decontamination area.
1.10.1 3-Stage Decontamination Area
A temporary negative pressure decontamination unit that is adjacent and

attached in a leak-tight manner to the regulated area shall be provided as
described in SET-UP DETAIL SHEET Numbers 22 and 23. The decontamination
unit shall have an equipment room and a clean room separated by a shower
that complies with 29 CFR 1910.141, unless the Contractor can demonstrate
that such facilities are not feasible. Equipment and surfaces of
containers filled with ACM shall be cleaned prior to removing them from
the equipment room or area. Two separate lockers shall be provided for
each asbestos worker, one in the equipment room and one in the clean
room. Provide a minimum of 1 shower. Wastewater shall be collected and
filtered to remove asbestos contamination. Filters and residue shall be
disposed of as asbestos contaminated material, in accordance with DETAIL
SHEETS 9 and 14. Filtered water shall be discharged to the sanitary sewer
system. Wastewater filters shall be installed in series with the first
stage pore size of 20 microns and the second stage pore size of 5
microns. The floor of the decontamination unit's clean room shall be kept
dry and clean at all times. Proper housekeeping and hygiene requirements
shall be maintained. Soap and towels shall be provided for showering,
washing and drying. Any cloth towels provided shall be disposed of as ACM
waste or shall be laundered in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101.
1.10.2 Load-Out Unit
A temporary load-out unit that is adjacent and connected to the regulated

area and shall be provided as described in DETAIL SHEET Number 20 and 25.
The load-out unit shall be attached in a leak-tight manner to each
regulated area.
1.10.3 Single Stage Decontamination Area
A decontamination area (equipment room/area) shall be provided for Class I

work involving less than 25 feet or 10 square feet of TSI or surfacing
ACM, and for Class II and Class III asbestos work operations where
exposures exceed the PELs or where there is no negative exposure
assessment. The equipment room or area shall be adjacent to the regulated
area for the decontamination of employees, material, and their equipment
which could be contaminated with asbestos. The area shall be covered by
an impermeable drop cloth on the floor or horizontal working surface. The
area must be of sufficient size to accommodate cleaning of equipment and
removing personal protective equipment without spreading contamination
beyond the area.
1.10.4 Decontamination Area Exit Procedures
Ensure that the following procedures are followed:
a. Before leaving the regulated area, remove all gross contamination and
debris from work clothing using a HEPA vacuum.
b. Employees shall remove their protective clothing in the equipment room

and deposit the clothing in labeled impermeable bags or containers
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 16

(see Detail Sheets 9A and 14) for disposal and/or laundering.
c. Employees shall not remove their respirators until showering.
d. Employees shall shower prior to entering the clean room. If a shower

has not been located between the equipment room and the clean room or
the work is performed outdoors, ensure that employees engaged in Class
I asbestos jobs: a) Remove asbestos contamination from their work
suits in the equipment room or decontamination area using a HEPA
vacuum before proceeding to a shower that is not adjacent to the work
area; or b) Remove their contaminated work suits in the equipment
room, without cleaning worksuits, and proceed to a shower that is not
adjacent to the work area.
1.10.5 Smoking
Smoking, if allowed by the Contractor, shall only be permitted in

designated areas approved by the CO.
1.11 TRAINING PROGRAM
Establish and submit a training program as specified by EPA MAP, training

requirements at 40 CFR 763, OSHA requirements at 29 CFR 1926.1101 (k)(9).
Contractor employees shall complete the required training for the type of
work they are to perform and such training shall be documented and
provided to the CO.
a. Class I and II operations 32 hours Asbestos Worker Training
Prior to commencement of work the Contractor's Designated IH and Competent

Person shall instruct each worker about:
a. The hazards and health effects of the specific types of ACM to be

abated; and
b. The content and requirements of the Contractor's APP to include the

AHAP and AHAs and site-specific safety and health precautions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ENCAPSULANTS
Encapsulants shall conform to USEPA requirements, shall contain no toxic

or hazardous substances and no solvent. Submit certificates stating that
encapsulants meet the applicable specified performance requirements.
2.2 EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES
2.2.1 Glovebag
Glovebags shall be provided as described in 29 CFR 1926.1101 and SET-UP

DETAIL SHEET 10. The glovebag assembly shall be 6 mil thick plastic,
prefabricated and seamless at the bottom with preprinted OSHA warning
label.
2.2.2 Duct Tape
Industrial grade duct tape of appropriate widths suitable for bonding

sheet plastic and disposal container.
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 17

2.2.3 Disposal Containers
Leak-tight (defined as solids, liquids, or dust that cannot escape or

spill out) disposal containers shall be provided for ACM wastes as
required by 29 CFR 1926.1101 and DETAIL SHEETS 9A, 9B, 9C and 14.
Disposal containers can be in the form of:
a. Disposal Bags
b. Fiberboard Drums
2.2.4 Sheet Plastic
Sheet plastic shall be polyethylene of 6 mil minimum thickness and shall

be provided in the largest sheet size necessary to minimize seams ,as
indicated on the project drawings. Film shall be frosted and conform to
ASTM D4397, except as specified below:
2.2.4.1 Flame Resistant
Where a potential for fire exists, flame-resistant sheets shall be

provided. Film shall be frosted and shall conform to the requirements of
NFPA 701.
2.2.4.2 Reinforced
Reinforced sheets shall be provided where high skin strength is required,

such as where it constitutes the only barrier between the regulated area
and the outdoor environment. The sheet stock shall consist of
translucent, nylon-reinforced or woven-polyethylene thread laminated
between 2 layers of polyethylene film. Film shall meet flame resistant
standards of NFPA 701.
2.2.5 Mastic Removing Solvent
Mastic removing solvent shall be nonflammable and shall not contain

methylene chloride, glycol ether, or halogenated hydrocarbons. Solvents
used onsite shall have a flash point greater than 140 degrees F.
2.2.6 Leak-tight Wrapping
Two layers of 6 mil minimum thick polyethylene sheet stock shall be used
for the containment of removed asbestos-containing components or materials
such as reactor vessels, large tanks, boilers, insulated pipe segments and
other materials too large to be placed in disposal bags as described in
DETAIL SHEET 9B. Upon placement of the ACM component or material, each
layer shall be individually leak-tight sealed with duct tape.
2.2.7 Viewing Inspection Window
Where feasible, a minimum of 1 clear, 1/8 inch thick, acrylic sheet, 18

by 24 inches, shall be installed as a viewing inspection window at eye
level on a wall in each containment enclosure. The windows shall be
sealed leak-tight with industrial grade duct tape.
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 18

2.3 EQUIPMENT
2.3.1 Rental Equipment
If rental equipment is to be used, written notification shall be provided

to the rental agency, concerning the intended use of the equipment, the
possibility of asbestos contamination of the equipment and the steps that
will be taken to decontaminate such equipment.
2.3.2 Air Monitoring Equipment
The Contractor's Designated IH shall approve air monitoring equipment.

The equipment shall include, but shall not be limited to:
a. High-volume sampling pumps that can be calibrated and operated at a

constant airflow up to 16 liters per minute.
b. Low-volume, battery powered, body-attachable, portable personal pumps

that can be calibrated to a constant airflow up to approximately 3.5
liters per minute, and a self-contained rechargeable power pack
capable of sustaining the calibrated flow rate for a minimum of 10
hours. The pumps shall also be equipped with an automatic flow
control unit which shall maintain a constant flow, even as filter
resistance increases due to accumulation of fiber and debris on the
filter surface.
c. Single use standard 25 mm diameter cassette, open face, 0.8 micron

pore size, mixed cellulose ester membrane filters and cassettes with
50 mm electrically conductive extension cowl, and shrink bands for
personal air sampling.
d. Single use standard 25 mm diameter cassette, open face, 0.45 micron

pore size, mixed cellulose ester membrane filters and cassettes with
50 mm electrically conductive cowl, and shrink bands when conducting
environmental area sampling using NIOSH 2003-154 Methods 7400 and
7402, (and the transmission electric microscopy method specified at
40 CFR 763 if required).
e. A flow calibrator capable of calibration to within plus or minus 2

percent of reading over a temperature range of minus 4 to plus 140
degrees F and traceable to a NIST primary standard.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Asbestos abatement work tasks shall be performed as shown on the detailed

plans and drawings. Use the engineering controls and work practices
required in 29 CFR 1926.1101(g) in all operations regardless of the levels
of exposure. Personnel shall wear and utilize protective clothing and
equipment. Do not permit eating, smoking, drinking, chewing or applying
cosmetics in the regulated area. Personnel of other trades, shall not be
exposed at any time to airborne concentrations of asbestos unless all the
administrative and personal protective provisions of the Contractor's APP
are complied with. Power to the regulated area shall be locked-out and
tagged in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.147, and temporary electrical
service with ground fault circuit interrupters shall be provided as
needed. Temporary electrical service shall be disconnected when necessary
for wet removal. Stop abatement work in the regulated area immediately
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 19

when the airborne total fiber concentration: (1) equals or exceeds 0.01
f/cc, or the pre-abatement concentration, whichever is greater, outside
the regulated area; or (2) equals or exceeds 1.0 f/cc inside the regulated
area. Correct the condition to the satisfaction of the CO, including
visual inspection and air sampling. Work shall resume only upon
notification by the CO. Corrective actions shall be documented.
3.2 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT WORK OR AREAS TO REMAIN
Perform asbestos abatement without damage to or contamination of adjacent

work or area. Where such work or area is damaged or contaminated, it
shall be restored to its original condition or decontaminated at no
expense to the Government. When spills occur, work shall stop in all
effected areas immediately and the spill shall be cleaned. When
satisfactory visual inspection and air sampling analysis results are
obtained and have been evaluated by the Contractor's Designated IH and the
CO, work shall proceed.
3.3 OBJECTS
3.3.1 Removal of Mobile Objects
The Government will remove Furniture and equipment from the area of work
before work begins. DETAIL SHEET 27 contains a summary of Contractor's
required handling, cleaning and storage and reinstallation of furniture
and equipment located in each abatement area. Furnishings identified in
DETAIL SHEET 27 are not considered contaminated with asbestos fibers.
Furnishings shall be precleaned using HEPA filtered vacuum followed by wet
wiping. These objects shall be removed to an area or site designated on
DETAIL SHEET 27 and as identified by the CO, and stored; or other
appropriate action taken as identified on DETAIL SHEET 27. Carpets,
draperies, and other items which may not be suitable for onsite wet
cleaning methods shall be properly cleaned in accordance with
29 CFR 1926.1101 .
3.3.2 Stationary Objects
Stationary objects, furniture and equipment as shown on DETAIL SHEET 27,

shall remain in place. Stationary objects and furnishings shall be
covered with 2 layers of polyethylene and edges sealed with duct tape.
3.4 BUILDING VENTILATION SYSTEM AND CRITICAL BARRIERS
Building ventilation system supply and return air ducts in a regulated

area shall be shut down. isolated by airtight seals to prevent the spread
of contamination throughout the system. The airtight seals shall consist
of 2 layers of polyethylene. Edges to wall, ceiling and floor surfaces
shall be sealed with industrial grade duct tape.
3.5 METHODS OF COMPLIANCE
3.5.1 Mandated Practices
The specific abatement techniques and items identified shall be detailed

in the Contractor's AHAP. Use the following engineering controls and work
practices in all operations, regardless of the levels of exposure:
a. Vacuum cleaners equipped with HEPA filters.
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 20

b. Wet methods or wetting agents except where it can be demonstrated that

the use of wet methods is unfeasible due to the creation of electrical
hazards, equipment malfunction, and in roofing.
c. Prompt clean-up and disposal.
d. Inspection and repair of polyethylene.
e. Cleaning of equipment and surfaces of containers prior to removing

them from the equipment room or area.
3.5.2 Control Methods
Use the following control methods:
a. Local exhaust ventilation equipped with HEPA filter;
b. Enclosure or isolation of processes producing asbestos dust;
c. Where the feasible engineering and work practice controls are not
sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the PELs, use them
to reduce employee exposure to the lowest levels attainable and shall
supplement them by the use of respiratory protection.
3.5.3 Unacceptable Practices
The following work practices shall not be used:
a. High-speed abrasive disc saws that are not equipped with point of cut
ventilator or enclosures with HEPA filtered exhaust air.
b. Compressed air used to remove asbestos containing materials, unless

the compressed air is used in conjunction with an enclosed ventilation
system designed to capture the dust cloud created by the compressed
air.
c. Dry sweeping, shoveling, or other dry clean up.
d. Employee rotation as a means of reducing employee exposure to asbestos.
3.5.4 Class II Work
In addition to the requirements of paragraphs Mandated Practices and

Control Methods, the following engineering controls and work practices
shall be used:
a. A Competent Person shall supervise the work.
b. For indoor work, critical barriers shall be placed over all openings
to the regulated area.
c. Impermeable dropcloths shall be placed on surfaces beneath all removal

activity.
3.5.5 Specific Control Methods for Class II Work
3.5.5.1 Vinyl and Asphalt Flooring Materials
When removing vinyl and asphalt flooring materials which contain ACM, use
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 21

the following practices as shown in RESPONSE ACTION DETAIL SHEET 56, 57, 58,
59, 60, 61, 62, 63, and 64. Resilient sheeting shall be removed by
adequately wet methods. Tiles shall be removed intact (if possible);
wetting is not required when tiles are heated and removed intact.
Flooring or its backing shall not be sanded. Scraping of residual
adhesive and/or backing shall be performed using wet methods. Mechanical
chipping is prohibited unless performed in a negative pressure enclosure.
Dry sweeping is prohibited. Use vacuums equipped with HEPA filter,
disposable dust bag, and metal floor tool (no brush) to clean floors.
Wire brushes are prohibited.
3.5.5.2 Roofing Material
When removing roofing materials which contain ACM as described in

29 CFR 1926.1101(g)(8)(ii), use the following practices as shown in
RESPONSE ACTION DETAIL SHEET 74 and 75. Roofing material shall be removed
in an intact state. Wet methods shall be used to remove roofing materials
that are not intact, or that will be rendered not intact during removal,
unless such wet methods are not feasible or will create safety hazards.
When removing built-up roofs, with asbestos-containing roofing felts and
an aggregate surface, using a power roof cutter, all dust resulting from
the cutting operations shall be collected by a HEPA dust collector, or
shall be HEPA vacuumed by vacuuming along the cut line.
Asbestos-containing roofing material shall not be dropped or thrown to the
ground, but shall be lowered to the ground via covered, dust-tight chute,
crane, hoist or other method approved by the CO. Any ACM that is not
intact shall be lowered to the ground as soon as practicable, but not
later than the end of the work shift. While the material remains on the
roof it shall be kept wet or placed in an impermeable waste bag or wrapped
in plastic sheeting. Intact ACM shall be lowered to the ground as soon as
practicable, but not later than the end of the work shift. Unwrapped
material shall be transferred to a closed receptacle. Critical barriers
shall be placed over roof level heating and ventilation air intakes.
3.5.5.3 Cementitious Siding and Shingles or Transite Panels
When removing cementitious asbestos-containing siding, shingles or

transite panels use the following work practices shown in RESPONSE ACTION
DETAIL SHEET 81, 82, and 83. Intentionally cutting, abrading or breaking
is prohibited. Each panel or shingle shall be sprayed with amended water
prior to removal. Nails shall be cut with flat, sharp instruments.
Unwrapped or unbagged panels or shingles shall be immediately lowered to
the ground via covered dust-tight chute, crane or hoist, or placed in an
impervious waste bag or wrapped in plastic sheeting and lowered to the
ground no later than the end of the work shift.
3.5.5.4 Gaskets
Gaskets shall be thoroughly wetted with amended water prior to removal and
immediately placed in a disposal container. If a gasket is visibly
deteriorated and unlikely to be removed intact, removal shall be
undertaken within a glovebag. Any scraping to remove residue shall be
performed wet.
3.5.6 Class II Asbestos Work Response Action Detail Sheets
The following Class II Asbestos Work Response Action Detail Sheet is

specified on Table 1 for each individual work task to be performed:
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 22

a. Vinyl or Vinyl Asbestos Tile Adhered to Concrete Floor System by

Asbestos-Containing Adhesive: See Sheet 56
b. Miscellaneous Asbestos-Containing Materials: See Sheet 45
c. Built-Up Roofing and Flashing: See Sheet 74
3.5.7 Encapsulation of ACM
Prior to applying any encapsulant, the entire surface area shall be

inspected for loose, or damaged asbestos material:
a. Penetrating Encapsulation: Before penetrating encapsulation is

applied, asbestos removal work in the area shall be complete.
Substrate shall be evaluated before application to ensure that the
encapsulant will not cause the substrate to fail in any way. Plug
samples shall be taken to determine if full penetration has been
achieved. If full penetration has not been achieved, surfaces shall
be recoated while the matrix is still wet, until full penetration is
achieved: See Detail Sheet 39.
3.5.8 Response Action Detail Sheets for Repair of Class II Materials
a. Vinyl or Vinyl Asbestos Tile Adhered to Concrete Floor System by

Asbestos-Containing Adhesive: See Detail Sheet 56
3.6 FINAL CLEANING AND VISUAL INSPECTION
After completion of all asbestos removal work and the gross amounts of
asbestos have been removed from every surface, any remaining visible
accumulations of asbestos shall be collected. For all classes of indoor
asbestos abatement projects a final cleaning shall be performed using HEPA
vacuum and wet cleaning of all exposed surfaces and objects in the
regulated area. Upon completion of the cleaning, conduct a visual
pre-inspection of the cleaned area in preparation for a final inspection
before final air clearance monitoring. The Contractor and the CO shall
conduct a final visual inspection of the cleaned regulated area in
accordance with ASTM E1368 and document the results on the Final Cleaning
and Visual Inspection as specified on the SET-UP DETAIL SHEET 19. If the
CO rejects the clean regulated area as not meeting final cleaning
requirements, reclean as necessary and have a follow-on inspection
conducted with the CO. Recleaning and follow-up reinspection shall be at
the Contractor's expense.
3.7 LOCKDOWN
Prior to removal of plastic barriers and after final visual inspection, a

(lockdown) encapsulant shall be spray applied to ceiling, walls, floors,
and other surfaces in the regulated area.
3.8 EXPOSURE ASSESSMENT AND AIR MONITORING
a. Exposure assessment, air monitoring and analysis of airborne

concentration of asbestos fibers shall be performed in accordance with
29 CFR 1926.1101, and the Contractor's air monitoring plan. Results
of breathing zone samples shall be posted at the job site and made
available to the CO. Submit all documentation regarding initial
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 23

exposure assessments, negative exposure assessments, and

air-monitoring results.
b. Worker Exposure.
(1) The Contractor's Designated IH shall collect samples

representative of the exposure of each employee who is assigned to
work within a regulated area. Breathing zone samples shall be
taken for at least 25 percent of the workers in each shift, or a
minimum of 2, whichever is greater. Air monitoring results at the
95 percent confidence level shall be calculated as shown in Table 2
at the end of this section.
(2) Provide an onsite independent testing laboratory with qualified

analysts and appropriate equipment to conduct sample analyses of
air samples using the methods prescribed in 29 CFR 1926.1101, to
include NIOSH 2003-154 Method 7400.
(3) Workers shall not be exposed to an airborne fiber concentration in

excess of 1.0 f/cc, as averaged over a sampling period of 30
minutes. Should a personal excursion concentration of 1.0 f/cc
expressed as a 30-minute sample occur inside a regulated work
area, stop work immediately, notify the Contracting Officer, and
implement additional engineering controls and work practice
controls to reduce airborne fiber levels below prescribed limits
in the work area. Do not restart work until authorized by the CO.
c. Environmental Exposure
(1) All environmental air monitoring shall be performed by the

Contractor's Designated IH and Contracting Officer's IH.
(2) Environmental and final clearance air monitoring shall be

performed using NIOSH 2003-154 Method 7400 (PCM) with optional
confirmation of results by OSHA or EPA TEM.
(3) For environmental and final clearance, air monitoring shall be

conducted at a sufficient velocity and duration to establish the
limit of detection of the method used at 0.005 f/cc.
(4) When confirming asbestos fiber concentrations (asbestos f/cc) from

environmental and final clearance samples, use TEM in accordance
with NIOSH 2003-154 Method 7402. When such confirmation is
conducted, it shall be from the same sample filter used for the
NIOSH 2003-154 Method 7400 PCM analysis. All confirmation of
asbestos fiber concentrations, using NIOSH 2003-154 Method 7402,
shall be at the Contractor's expense.
(5) Monitoring may be duplicated by the Government at the discretion

of the CO and at the Government's expense.
(6) Maintain a fiber concentration inside a regulated area less than

or equal to 0.1 f/cc expressed as an 8 hour, time-weighted average
(TWA) during the conduct of the asbestos abatement.
(7) At the discretion of the Contracting Officer, fiber concentration

may exceed 0.1 f/cc but shall not exceed 1.0 f/cc expressed as an
8-hour TWA. Should an environmental concentration of 1.0 f/cc
expressed as an 8-hour TWA occur inside a regulated work area,
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 24

stop work immediately, notify the Contracting Officer, and

implement additional engineering controls and work practice
controls to reduce airborne fiber levels below prescribed limits
in the work area. Work shall not restart until authorized by the
CO.
3.8.2 Initial Exposure Assessment
The Contractor's Designated IH shall conduct an exposure assessment

immediately before or at the initiation of an asbestos abatement operation
to ascertain expected exposures during that operation. The assessment
shall be completed in time to comply with the requirements, which are
triggered by exposure data or the lack of a negative exposure assessment,
and to provide information necessary to assure that all control systems
planned are appropriate for that operation. The assessment shall take
into consideration both the monitoring results and all observations,
information or calculations which indicate employee exposure to asbestos,
including any previous monitoring conducted in the workplace, or of the
operations of the Contractor which indicate the levels of airborne
asbestos likely to be encountered on the job.
3.8.3 Negative Exposure Assessment
Provide a negative exposure assessment for the specific asbestos job which
will be performed within two days of the initiation of the project and
conform to the following criteria:
a. Objective Data: Objective data demonstrating that the product or

material containing asbestos minerals or the activity involving such
product or material cannot release airborne fibers in concentrations
exceeding the PEL-TWA and PEL-Excursion Limit under those work
conditions having the greatest potential for releasing asbestos.
b. Prior Asbestos Jobs: Where the Contractor has monitored prior

asbestos jobs for the PEL and the PEL-Excursion Limit within 12 months
of the current job, the monitoring and analysis were performed in
compliance with asbestos standard in effect; the data were obtained
during work operations conducted under workplace conditions closely
resembling the processes, type of material, control methods, work
practices, and environmental conditions used and prevailing in the
Contractor's current operations; the operations were conducted by
employees whose training and experience are no more extensive than
that of employees performing the current job; and these data show that
under the conditions prevailing and which will prevail in the current
workplace, there is a high degree of certainty that the monitoring
covered exposure from employee exposures will not exceed the PEL-TWA
and PEL-Excursion Limit.
c. Initial Exposure Monitoring: The results of initial exposure

monitoring of the current job, made from breathing zone air samples
that are representative of the 8-hour PEL-TWA and 30-minute short-term
exposures of each employee. The monitoring covered exposure from
operations which are most likely during the performance of the entire
asbestos job to result in exposures over the PELs.
3.8.4 Independent Environmental Monitoring
The Government has retained an independent air monitoring firm to perform

during abatemen and tfinal clearance air monitoring. The air monitoring
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 25

Contractor has been provided a copy of the contract that includes this
abatement work. The abatement Contractor will provide the air monitoring
Contractor with an up-to-date copy of the accepted AHAP, APP and pertinent
detailed drawings. The air monitoring Contractor is required to comply
with the abatement Contractor's safety and health requirements. The
abatement Contractor will coordinate all onsite activities with the air
monitoring Contractor, the COR, and other affected parties as directed by
the COR. The abatement Contractor will provide the air monitoring
Contractor with an up-to-date schedule of abatement Contractor work
activities. The air monitoring Contractor will coordinate with the
abatement Contractor and the COR during the performance Government
required air monitoring. The abatement Contractor is responsible for
performing exposure assessment and personal air monitoring of abatement
Contractor's work. The air monitoring Contractor is responsible for
performing these tasks for its employee.
3.8.5 Environmental Air Monitoring During Abatement
Until an exposure assessment is provided to the CO, environmental air

monitoring shall be conducted at locations and frequencies that will
accurately characterize any evolving airborne asbestos fiber
concentrations. The assessment shall demonstrate that the product or
material containing asbestos minerals, or the abatement involving such
product or material, cannot release airborne asbestos fibers in
concentrations exceeding 0.01 f/cc as a TWA under those work conditions
having the greatest potential for releasing asbestos. The monitoring
shall be at least once per shift at locations including, but not limited
to, close to the work inside a regulated area; preabatement sampling
locations; outside entrances to a regulated area; close to glovebag
operations; representative locations outside of the perimeter of a
regulated area; inside clean room; and at the exhaust discharge point of
local exhaust system ducted to the outside of a containment (if used). If
the sampling outside regulated area shows airborne fiber levels have
exceeded background or 0.01 f/cc, whichever is greater, work shall be
stopped immediately, and the Contracting Officer notified. The condition
causing the increase shall be corrected. Work shall not restart until
authorized by the CO.
3.8.6 Final Clearance Air Monitoring
The Contracting Officer's IH will conduct final clearance air monitoring

using aggressive air sampling techniques as defined in 40 CFR 763, Subpart
E, Appendix A, Unit III, TEM Method B.7(d-f) and Table 4 of this section
for all indoor asbestos abatement projects. Clearance air monitoring is
not required for outside work or for soil cleanups.
3.8.6.1 Final Clearance Requirements, NIOSH PCM Method
For PCM sampling and analysis using NIOSH 2003-154 Method 7400, the fiber
concentration inside the abated regulated area, for each airborne sample,
shall be less than 0.01 f/cc. The abatement inside the regulated area is
considered complete when every PCM final clearance sample is below the
clearance limit. If any sample result is greater than 0.01 total f/cc,
the asbestos fiber concentration (asbestos f/cc) shall be confirmed from
that same filter using NIOSH 2003-154 Method 7402 (TEM) at Contractor's
expense. If any confirmation sample result is greater than 0.01 asbestos
f/cc, abatement is incomplete and cleaning shall be repeated. Upon
completion of any required recleaning, resampling with results to meet the
above clearance criteria shall be done.
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 26

3.8.6.2 Final Clearance Requirements, EPA TEM Method
For EPA TEM sampling and analysis, using the EPA Method specified in
40 CFR 763, abatement inside the regulated area is considered complete
when the arithmetic mean asbestos concentration of the 5 inside samples is
less than or equal to 70 structures per square millimeter (70 S/mm). When
the arithmetic mean is greater than 70 S/mm, the 3 blank samples shall be
analyzed. If the 3 blank samples are greater than 70 S/mm, resampling
shall be done. If less than 70 S/mm, the 5 outside samples shall be
analyzed and a Z-test analysis performed. When the Z-test results are
less than 1.65, the decontamination shall be considered complete. If the
Z-test results are more than 1.65, the abatement is incomplete and
cleaning shall be repeated. Upon completion of any required recleaning,
resampling with results to meet the above clearance criteria shall be done.
3.8.6.3 Air Clearance Failure
If clearance sampling results fail to meet the final clearance

requirements, pay all costs associated with the required recleaning,
resampling, and analysis, until final clearance requirements are met.
3.8.7 Air-Monitoring Results and Documentation
Air sample fiber counting shall be completed and results provided within
24 hours (breathing zone samples), and 24 hours (environmental/clearance
monitoring) after completion of a sampling period. The CO shall be
notified immediately of any airborne levels of asbestos fibers in excess
of established requirements. Written sampling results shall be provided
within 5 working days of the date of collection. The written results
shall be signed by testing laboratory analyst, testing laboratory
principal and the CO's IH. The air sampling results shall be documented
on a Contractor's daily air monitoring log. The daily air monitoring log
shall contain the following information for each sample:
a. Sampling and analytical method used;
b. Date sample collected;
c. Sample number;
d. Sample type: BZ = Breathing Zone (Personal), P = Preabatement, E =

Environmental, C = Abatement Clearance;
e. Location/activity/name where sample collected;
f. Sampling pump manufacturer, model and serial number, beginning flow

rate, end flow rate, average flow rate (L/min);
g. Calibration date, time, method, location, name of calibrator,

signature;
h. Sample period (start time, stop time, elapsed time (minutes);
i. Total air volume sampled (liters);
j. Sample results (f/cc and S/mm square) if EPA methods are required for
final clearance;
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 27

k. Laboratory name, location, analytical method, analyst, confidence

level. In addition, the printed name and a signature and date block
for the Industrial Hygienist who conducted the sampling and for the
Industrial Hygienist who reviewed the daily air monitoring log
verifying the accuracy of the information.
3.9 CLEARANCE CERTIFICATION
When asbestos abatement is complete, ACM waste is removed from the

regulated areas, and final clean-up is completed, the CO will allow the
warning signs and boundary warning tape to be removed. After final
clean-up and acceptable airborne concentrations are attained, but before
the HEPA unit is turned off and the containment removed, the Contractor
shall remove all pre-filters on the building HVAC system and provide new
pre-filters. Dispose of such filters as asbestos contaminated materials.
HVAC, mechanical, and electrical systems shall be re-established in proper
working order. The Contractor and the CO shall visually inspect all
surfaces within the containment for residual material or accumulated
debris. Reclean all areas showing dust or residual materials. The CO
will certify in writing that the area is safe before unrestricted entry is
permitted. The Government will have the option to perform monitoring to
certify the areas are safe before entry is permitted.
3.10 CLEANUP AND DISPOSAL
3.10.1 Title to ACM Materials
ACM material resulting from abatement work, except as specified otherwise,

shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of as
specified and in accordance with applicable federal, state and local
regulations.
3.10.2 Collection and Disposal of Asbestos
All ACM waste shall be collected including contaminated wastewater

filters, scrap, debris, bags, containers, equipment, and asbestos
contaminated clothing and placed in leak-tight containers. Waste within
the containers shall be wetted in case the container is breeched.
Asbestos-containing waste shall be disposed of at an EPA, state and local
approved asbestos landfill. For temporary storage, sealed impermeable
containers shall be stored in an asbestos waste load-out unit or in a
storage/transportation conveyance (i.e., dumpster, roll-off waste boxes,
etc.) in a manner acceptable to and in an area assigned by the CO.
Procedure for hauling and disposal shall comply with 40 CFR 61, Subpart M,
state, regional, and local standards. Submit manufacturer's catalog data
for all materials and equipment to be used, including brand name, model,
capacity, performance characteristics and any other pertinent
information. Test results and certificates from the manufacturer of
encapsulants substantiating compliance with performance requirements of
this specification. Material Safety Data Sheets for all chemicals to be
used onsite in the same format as implemented in the Contractor's HAZARD
COMMUNICATION PROGRAM. Data shall include, but shall not be limited to,
the following items:
a. High Efficiency Filtered Air (HEPA) local exhaust equipment
b. Vacuum cleaning equipment
c. Pressure differential monitor for HEPA local exhaust equipment
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 28

d. Air monitoring equipment
e. Respirators
f. Personal protective clothing and equipment
g. Glovebags. Written manufacturer's proof that glovebags will not break

down under expected temperatures and conditions.
h. Duct Tape
i. Disposal Containers
j. Sheet Plastic
k. Wetting Agent
l. Strippable Coating
m. Prefabricated Decontamination Unit
n. Material Safety Data Sheets (for all chemicals proposed)
3.10.3 Records and Management Plan
3.10.3.1 Asbestos Waste Shipment Records
Complete and provide the CO final completed copies of the Waste Shipment
Record for all shipments of waste material as specified in 40 CFR 61,
Subpart M and other required state waste manifest shipment records, within
3 days of delivery to the landfill. Each Waste Shipment Record shall be
signed and dated by the CO, the waste transporter and disposal facility
operator.
3.10.3.2 Asbestos Management Plan
Provide a summary, in electronic form, of site activities (bulk samples,

asbestos removed, repaired, encased, etc.) for updating the installation
Asbestos Management Plan.
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 29

TABLE 1
INDIVIDUAL WORK TASK DATA ELEMENTS
Sheet_____ of _____
There is a separate data sheet for each individual work task.
1. WORK TASK DESIGNATION NUMBER _______

2. LOCATION OF WORK TASK__________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________
3. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL TO BE ABATED:____________________
_______________________________________________________________
a. Type of Asbestos _____________________________

b. Percent asbestos content ____________________
4. ABATEMENT TECHNIQUE TO BE USED_________________________________

5. OSHA ASBESTOS CLASS DESIGNATION FOR WORK TASK__________________
6. EPA NESHAP FRIABILITY DESIGNATION FOR WORK TASK
Friable _____ Non-friable Category I _____
Non-friable Category II_____
7. FORM _____ and CONDITION OF ACM: GOOD_____ FAIR_____ POOR_____
8. QUANTITY: METERS__________________, SQUARE METERS_____________
8a. QUANTITY: LINEAR FT.______________, SQUARE FT._______________
9. RESPONSE ACTION DETAIL SHEET NUMBER FOR WORK TASK______________
10. SET-UP DETAIL SHEET NUMBERS
FOR WORK TASK __________, __________, __________, __________,
__________, __________, __________, __________.
NOTES:
(1) Numeric sequence of individual work tasks (1,2,3,4, etc.) for
each regulated area. Each category of EPA friability/OSHA class has
a separate task.
(2) Specific location of work (building, floor, area,
e.g., Building 1421, 2nd Floor, Rm 201)
(3) A description of material to be abated (example: horizontal pipe,
cement wall panels, tile, stucco, etc.) type of asbestos (chrysotile,
amosite, crocidolite, etc.); and percent asbestos content.
(4) Technique to be used: Removal = REM; Encapsulation = ENCAP;
Encasement = ENCAS; Enclosure = ENCL; Repair = REP.
(5) Class designation: Class I, II, III, or IV (OSHA designation).
(6) Friability of materials: Check the applicable EPA NESHAP friability
designation.
(7) Form: Interior or Exterior Architectural = IA or EA;
Mechanical/Electrical = ME.
Condition: Good = G; Fair = F; Poor = P.
(8) Quantity of ACM for each work task in meters or square meters.
(8a) Quantity of ACM for each work task in linear feet or square feet.
(9) Response Action Detail Sheet specifies the material to be abated
and the methods to be used. There is only one Response Action Detail
Sheet for each abatement task.
(10) Set-up Detail Sheets indicate containment and control methods used
in support of the response action (referenced in the selected
Response Action Detail Sheet).
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 30

TABLE 2
FORMULA FOR CALCULATION OF THE 95 PERCENT CONFIDENCE LEVEL

(Reference: NIOSH 7400)
_______________________________________________________________________
Fibers/cc(01.95 percent CL) = X + (X) * (1.645) * (CV)
Where: X = ((E)(AC))/((V)(1000))
E = ((F/Nf) - (B/Nb))/Af
CV = The precision value; 0.45 shall be used unless the

analytical laboratory provides the Contracting Officer
with documentation (Round Robin Program participation
and results) that the laboratory's precision is better.
AC = Effective collection area of the filter in square

millimeters
V = Air volume sampled in liters
E = Fiber density on the filter in fibers per square millimeter
F/Nf = Total fiber count per graticule field
B/Nb = Mean field blank count per graticule field
Af = Graticule field area in square millimeters
TWA = C1/T1 + C2/T2 = Cn/Tn
Where: C = Concentration of contaminant
T = Time sampled.
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 31

TABLE 3
NIOSH METHOD 7400
PCM ENVIRONMENTAL AIR SAMPLING PROTOCOL (NON-PERSONAL)
Sample Location Minimum No. of Samples Filter Pore Min. Vol. Sampling
Size (Note 1) (Note 2) Rate
(Liters) (liters/min.
Inside 0.5/140 Square Meters 0.45 microns 3850 2-16

Abatement Area (Notes 3 & 4)
Each Room in 1 0.45 microns 3850 2-16

Abatement Area
Less than 140
Square meters
Field Blank 2 0.45 microns 0 0
Laboratory Blank 1 0.45 microns 0 0
Notes:
1. Type of filter is Mixed Cellulose Ester.
2. Ensure detection limit for PCM analysis is established at 0.005 fibers/cc.
3. One sample shall be added for each additional 140 square meters.
(The corresponding I-P units are 5/1500 square feet).
4. A minimum of 5 samples are to be taken per abatement area, plus 2 field blanks.
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 32

TABLE 4
EPA AHERA METHOD: TEM AIR SAMPLING PROTOCOL
Location Sampled Minimum No. Filter Pore Size Min. Vol. Sampling Rate
of Samples (Liters) (liters/min.)
Inside 5 0.45 microns 1500 2-16

Abatement Area
Outside 5 0.45 microns 1500 2-16

Abatement Area
Field Blank 2 0.45 microns 0 0
Laboratory Blank 1 0.45 microns 0 0
Notes:
1. Type of filter is Mixed Cellulose Ester.
2. The detection limit for TEM analysis is 70 structures/square mm.
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 33

CERTIFICATE OF WORKER'S ACKNOWLEDGMENT
PROJECT NAME _________________________ CONTRACT NO. ______________________

PROJECT ADDRESS __________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR FIRM NAME _____________________________________________________
EMPLOYEE'S NAME _________________________,_______________,______,
(Print) (Last) (First) (MI)
Social Security Number: _______-_______-________,__(Optional)
WORKING WITH ASBESTOS CAN BE DANGEROUS. INHALING ASBESTOS FIBERS HAS

BEEN LINKED WITH TYPES OF LUNG DISEASE AND CANCER. IF YOU SMOKE AND
INHALE ASBESTOS FIBERS, THE CHANCE THAT YOU WILL DEVELOP LUNG CANCER
IS GREATER THAN THAT OF THE NONSMOKING PUBLIC.
Your employer's contract for the above project requires that you be provided
and you complete formal asbestos training specific to the type of work you
will perform and project specific training; that you be supplied with proper
personal protective equipment including a respirator, that you be trained
in its use; and that you receive a medical examination to evaluate your
physical capacity to perform your assigned work tasks, under the
environmental conditions expected, while wearing the required personal
protective equipment. These things are to be done at no cost to you. By
signing this certification, you are acknowledging that your employer has
met these obligations to you. The Contractor's Designated Industrial
Hygienist will check the block(s) for the type of formal training you have
completed. Review the checked blocks prior to signing this certification.
FORMAL TRAINING:
_____ a. For Competent Persons and Supervisors: I have completed EPA's
Model Accreditation Program (MAP) training course, "Contractor/Supervisor",
that meets this State's requirements.
b.For Workers:
_____ (1) For OSHA Class I work: I have completed EPA's MAP training
course, "Worker", that meets this State's requirements.
_____ (2) For OSHA Class II work (where there will be abatement of more
than one type of Class II materials, i.e., roofing, siding, floor
tile, etc.): I have completed EPA's MAP training course, "Worker",
(3) For OSHA Class II work (there will only be abatement of one
type of Class II material):
_____ (a) I have completed an 8-hour training class on the
elements of 29 CFR 1926.1101(k)(9)(viii), in addition to the specific work
practices and engineering controls of 29 CFR 1926.1101(g) and hands-on
training.
_____ (b) I have completed EPA's MAP training course, "Worker",
_____ (4) For OSHA Class III work: I have completed at least a 16-hour
course consistent with EPA requirements for training of local education
agency maintenance and custodial staff at 40 CFR 763, Section .92(a)(2) and
the elements of 29 CFR 1926.1101(k)(9)(viii), in addition to the specific
work practices and engineering controls at 29 CFR 1926.1101, and hands-on
training.
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 34

_____ (5) For OSHA Class IV work: I have completed at least a 2-hr
course consistent with EPA requirements for training of local education
agency maintenance and custodial staff at 40 CFR 763, (a)(1), and the
elements of 29 CFR 1926.1101(k)(9)(viii), in addition to the specific work
practices and engineering controls at 29 CFR 1926.1101(g) and hands-on
training.
_____ c. Workers, Supervisors and the Designated Competent Person: I have

completed annual refresher training as required by EPA's MAP that meets
this State's requirements.
PROJECT SPECIFIC TRAINING:

_____ I have been provided and have completed the project specific training
required by this Contract. My employer's Designated Industrial Hygienist
and Designated Competent Person conducted the training.
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION:
_____ I have been trained in accordance with the criteria in the
Contractor's Respiratory Protection program. I have been trained in the
dangers of handling and breathing asbestos dust and in the proper work
procedures and use and limitations of the respirator(s) I will wear. I
have been trained in and will abide by the facial hair and contact lens use
policy of my employer.
RESPIRATOR FIT-TEST TRAINING:

_____ I have been trained in the proper selection, fit, use, care,
cleaning, maintenance, and storage of the respirator(s) that I will wear.
I have been fit-tested in accordance with the criteria in the Contractor's
Respiratory Program and have received a satisfactory fit. I have been
assigned my individual respirator. I have been taught how to properly
perform positive and negative pressure fit-check upon donning negative
pressure respirators each time.
EPA/ CERTIFICATION/LICENSE
I have an EPA certification/license as:

Building Inspector/Management Planner; Certification #______
Contractor/Supervisor, Certification # _____________________
Project Designer, Certification # __________________________
Worker, Certification # ____________________________________
MEDICAL EXAMINATION:
_____ I have had a medical examination within the last twelve months which
was paid for by my employer. The examination included: health history,
pulmonary function tests, and may have included an evaluation of a chest
x-ray. A physician made a determination regarding my physical capacity to
perform work tasks on the project while wearing personal protective
equipment including a respirator. I was personally provided a copy and
informed of the results of that examination. My employer's Industrial
Hygienist evaluated the medical certification provided by the physician and
checked the appropriate blank below. The physician determined that there:
_____ were no limitations to performing the required work tasks.

_____ were identified physical limitations to performing the required work
tasks.
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 35


Date of the medical examination __________________
Employee Signature ______________________________________ date ___________

Contractor's Industrial
Hygienist Signature _____________________________________ date ___________
SECTION 02 82 14.00 10 Page 36

MODEL OSHA WRITTEN COMPIANCE PLAN FOR LEAD IN CONSTRUCTION
This plan shall be used a guide/boiler plate ONLY for achieving compliance at MCAS YUMA.
An original Compliance Plan shall be drafted by the contractor and forwarded to the Lead
Program Manager for approval prior to job start up. For questions concerning this matter
contact the Lead Program Manager at (928) 269-5215.
This plan has been developed to comply with the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) Lead in Construction Standard, 29 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)
1926.62 and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Lead-based Paint Activities in
Target Housing and Child Occupied Facilities, 40 CFR 745.
Scope:
A. 29 CFR 1926.62, This section applies to all construction work where an employee may be
occupationally exposed to lead. Construction work is defined as work for construction,
alteration and/or repair, including painting and decorating. It includes but not limited
to: demolition or salvage of structures where lead or materials containing lead are
present; removal or encapsulation of materials containing lead; new construction,
alteration, repair or renovation of structures substrates, or portions thereof that
contain lead; installation of products containing lead; and lead contamination/emergency
cleanup.
B. 40 CFR 745, EPA Requirements for Lead-based Paint Activities in Target Housing and
Child Occupied Facilities. To ensure that individuals conducting lead-based paint
activities in target housing and child occupied facilities are properly trained and
certified.
C. Explanation: A key difference between OSHA and EPA training is that OSHA training is
primarily designed to reduce the occupational exposure to lead for construction workers.
In contrast, the primary purpose of EPA training for abatement workers, supervisors, and
project designers is to protect building occupants, particularly children ages 6 years
and younger, from potential lead-based paint hazards and exposures both during and after
an abatement.
1. Location of Project:___________________________________________________(full address).
2. Lead inspection of this building performed by:________________________________________

(name and address of inspection firm).
3. Inspection revealed that lead base paint or lead hazards are present in the following
locations:____________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
4. Name of all building components to be
treated:______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
These building components are coated with lead-base paint and/or contain lead and
represent a hazard to workers and/or building occupants during lead hazard control,
renovation, abatement or maintenance activities.
5. Does this building meet the definition of target housing and/or a child occupied
facility? circle yes or no.
a. Target housing is defined as any housing constructed prior to 1978.
b. A child-occupied facility is defined as a building, or portion of a building,
constructed prior to 1978, visited by the same child, 6 years of age or under, on at
least 2 different days within any week.
6. This job will involve the following lead hazard reduction measures: (complete all that
apply and name all components):
Replacement/removal of_______________________________________________________________
Enclosure of_________________________________________________________________________
Paint removal of_____________________________________________________________________
Encapsulation of_____________________________________________________________________
Paint film stabilization of__________________________________________________________
Friction surface treatment of________________________________________________________
Impact surface treatment of__________________________________________________________
Dust removal in the following areas__________________________________________________
7. The job is expected to start on ___/___/___ and end on ___/___/___. This compliance
plan will take effect effect immediately on ___/___/___. The competent person will
conduct work site visual inspections on a daily basis.
Day 1: Initial setup, followed by_____________________________________________________

(name tasks to be completed)
Daily cleanup: wet mopping, HEPA vacuuming
Day 2 tasks:__________________________________________________________________________
Day 3 tasks:__________________________________________________________________________
Day 4 final cleanup and clearance_____________________________________________________
5. Equipment and materials:______________________________________________________________

HEPA vacuums, protective clothing, plastic sheeting, respirators, scrapers, bars,
chemical paint removers with MSDS, and etc.
6. Crew: the work will be completed by a crew of ______ (insert number) workers. Crew
assignments are as follows:
Crew 1___________________________(name)________________________________________(task)
Crew 2___________________________(name)________________________________________(task)
7. Competent Person:______________________(name), a certified lead abatement supervisor,

will be on site at all times and will act as the competent person for occupational health
and safety issues. The lead supervisor license (or certificate) number is:_______________
provide copy of training certificate. The lead supervisor will conduct daily inspections
of the work areas to ensure that engineering control measures, work practices, personal
protective equipment, and hygiene facilities are used as prescribed in this document.
8. Control Measures (check all that apply):

___ method substitution (building component replacement, enclosure)
___ wet methods
___ wrapping materials to be discarded in plastic
___ respiratory protection
___ local exhaust ventilation (needle guns, vacuum blasting)
___ general room ventilation
___ on the job training
___ HEPA vacuums
___ containment (use of plastic barriers)
9. Respirators: All individuals in the work area will be provided with a NIOSH/MSHA-
approved half-mask, air-purifying respirator equipped with HEPA cartridges or a powered
air-purifying respirator (if so requested). Respirators will be provided in the context
of a complete respiratory protection program; the written respirator program is attached.
Provide copies of respirator fit testing certificates.
Respirators will be required during (name phases of job for which respirators will be
required):_______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
10. Protective clothing: Disposable protective clothing will be provided by the

contractor and will be worn at all times inside the work area. Protective clothing will
be made of breathable fabric to reduce the potential for worker heat stress. If visibly
contaminated with dust or paint chips, protective clothing will be HEPA vacuumed before
it is removed.
11. Hygiene facilities: Employers will provide hand-washing facilities for workers
exposed to lead. Showers and/or a three stage decon facility are used on jobs that
generate high leaded dust levels. Labeled plastic bins with covers will be used to
separate disposable protective clothing from street clothing. Hot water, soap, and towels
will be provided. Hands and face will be washed before all breaks and at the end of the
day. Wastewater will be collected, pretreated onsite with filtration, and disposed of in
accordance with_______________________________(name of local water and sewage authority).
12. Initial exposure assessment: The OSHA standard requires all employers to conduct
initial exposure assessments for all jobs involving the use or removal of lead or lead
containing materials (if employers do not have an exposure assessment they shall perform
one).
a. Clearance (if required): shall be performed by a certified risk assessor or inspector

technician who is completely independent of the lead hazard control contractor.
13. Medical surveillance program: A medical surveillance program is already in place for
this work crew. It is supervised by: Dr._________________________________________________
(name, address, and phone number of physician and/or firm).
14. Training: The following workers have been trained using the EPA Worker Training
Curriculum. The training was conducted by________________________________________________
(name, address, and phone number of training provider). Provide copies of OSHA training
certificates. The following workers will be conducting lead-based paint activities in
target housing and child occupied facilities and have been trained and certified by the
EPA. Provide copies of EPA certifications of training.
15. EPA and DOT compliance:
a. Test lead containing materials in accordance with 40 CFR 261 for hazardous waste. Test
lead base paint residue, paint chips, wood painted with lead paint, material containing
lead, ceramic tile, corrosive chemicals used to remove lead paint, used abrasives, and
etc. To avoid testing costs, painted metal components shall be recycled as scrap metal.
b. Collect and contain lead-contaminated waste, scrap, debris, bags, containers,

equipment, and clothing, which may produce airborne concentrations of lead particles.
Label the containers in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62 and 40 CFR 261.
c. Store and ship waste materials in accordance with 49 CFR 178 (UN approved packaging).
Properly mark and label each package to identify the type of waste (49 CFR 172) and the
date the drum was filled. Do not store hazardous waste drums in interim storage longer
than 90-calendar days form the date affixed to each drum. The Contracting Officer or an
authorized representative will assign an area for interim storage of waste containing
drums.
d. Handle, store, transport, and dispose lead or lead contaminated waste in accordance
with 40 CFR 260, 40 CFR 261, 40 CFR 262, 40 CFR 263, 40 CFR 264, and 40 CFR 265. Comply
with land disposal restriction notification requirements as required by 40 CFR 268.
e. The Station Environmental Department shall inspect, approve, and sign all Hazardous
Waste Manifests and shipments leaving MCAS Yuma. For questions on this matter contact:
The Station Environmental Department at (928) 269-3201.
16. Lead base paint and lead-containing materials such as ceramic tile shall not be used
at MCAS Yuma.
Plan completed by:___________________________________________________(name and signature)

Date:___/___/___
MODEL OSHA WRITTEN COMPLIANCE PLAN FOR ASBESTOS IN CONSTRUCTION
This plan shall be used as a guide/boiler plate ONLY for achieving compliance at MCAS
YUMA. An original Compliance Plan shall be drafted by the contractor and forwarded to
the Asbestos Program Manager for approval prior to job start up. For questions
concerning this matter contact the Asbestos Program Manager at ext. (928) 269-5215.
This plan has been developed to comply with the OSHA Asbestos Standard, 29 CFR 1926.1101.
Scope: This section regulates asbestos exposure in all work where an employee may be
occupationally exposed to asbestos. It includes but not limited to: Demolition or salvage
of structures where asbestos is present. Removal, or encapsulation of materials
containing asbestos. Construction, alteration, repair, maintenance, or renovation of
structures, substrates, or portions thereof, that contain asbestos. Installation of
products containing asbestos. Asbestos spill/emergency cleanup, transportation, disposal,
storage, containment of and housekeeping activities involving asbestos or products
containing asbestos, on the site or location at which construction activities are
performed. Coverage under this standard shall be based on the nature of the work
operation involving asbestos exposure.
All asbestos work or disturbance is categorized into four classes of work, each class
having its own regulatory requirements:
Class I Work: Removal of thermal system insulation (TSI) or surfacing
Class II Work: Removal of any other asbestos containing material (ACM)
Class III Work: Maintenance level work up to one glovebag or waste bag
Class IV Work: Clean-up work in contact with ACM
1. Location of project: _________________________________________________ (full address).
2. Asbestos inspection of this building performed by: ___________________________________

(name and address of inspection firm).
3. Inspection revealed that asbestos or asbestos hazards are present in the following
locations:____________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
4. Name of all building components to be
treated:______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
a. These building components contain asbestos and represent a hazard to workers and who
may disturb it during asbestos hazard control, renovation, abatement or maintenance
activities.
b. Standard prohibitions on asbestos work sites include: High speed abrasive removal,
compressed air removal, dry sweeping or clean-up, employee rotation to comply with PEL.
This Job will be a demolition _____. This job will be a renovation _____. This job will
involve the following asbestos hazard reduction measures: (complete all that apply and
name all components):
Removal of ___________________________________________________________________________
Replacement of _______________________________________________________________________
Enclosure of _________________________________________________________________________
Encapsulation of _____________________________________________________________________
Dust removal in the following areas __________________________________________________
5. The job is expected to start on ___/___/___ and end on ___/___/___. This compliance
plan will take effect immediately on ___/___/___. The competent person will conduct
work site visual inspections on a daily basis.
Day 1: Initial setup, followed by ____________________________________________________
(name tasks to be completed)
Daily cleanup: wet mopping, HEPA vacuuming
Day 2 tasks: _________________________________________________________________________
Day 3 tasks: _________________________________________________________________________
Day 4 final cleanup and clearance ____________________________________________________
6. Equipment and materials: _____________________________________________________________

HEPA vacuums, protective clothing, plastic sheeting, respirators, negative air
machines, surfactants, scrapers, bars, chemicals with MSDS, etc.
7. Crew: the work will be completed by a crew of ______ (insert number) workers. Crew
assignments are as follows:
Crew 1 _________________________ (name) ______________________________________ (task)
Crew 2 _________________________ (name) ______________________________________ (task)
8. Competent Person: ____________________ (name), an AHERA certified asbestos abatement

supervisor, will be on site at all times and will act as the competent person for
occupational health and safety issues. The asbestos supervisor license (or
certificate) number is: ______________ provide copy of training certificate. The
Competent person will conduct daily inspections of the work areas to ensure that
engineering control measures, work practices, personal protective equipment, and
hygiene facilities are used as prescribed in this document.
9. Control Measures (check all that apply):

___ regulated area
___ method substitution (building component replacement, enclosure)
___ wet methods
___ wrapping materials to be discarded in plastic
___ respiratory protection
___ prompt cleanup of debris
___ negative air machines ______ insert number of machines
___ on the job training/hazard communication
___ HEPA vacuums
___ critical barriers (use of plastic barriers)
___ enclosure of the work area
___ signage
___ lockout/tagout/Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters
___ housekeeping
___ 3 stage decon
10. Respirators: All individuals in the work area will be provided with a NIOSH/MSHA-
approved half-mask, air-purifying respirator equipped with HEPA cartridges or a powered
air-purifying respirator (if so requested). Respirators will be provided in the context
of a complete respiratory protection program; the written respirator program is attached.
Provide copies of respirator fit testing certificates.
Respirators will be required during (name phases of job for which respirators will be
required): ______________________________________________________________________________
11. Protective clothing: Disposable protective clothing will be provided by the

contractor and will be worn at all times inside the work area. Protective clothing will
be made of breathable fabric to reduce the potential for worker heat stress. If visibly
contaminated with dust or debris, protective clothing will be HEPA vacuumed before it is
removed.
12. Hygiene facilities: Employers must provide clean change areas for employees required
to work in regulated areas or required to wear respirators and protective clothing.
Showers and/or a three stage decon facility are used on jobs that generate high asbestos
dust levels. Labeled plastic bins with covers will be used to separate disposable
protective clothing from street clothing. Hot water, soap, and towels will be provided.
Wastewater will be collected, pretreated onsite with filtration, and disposed of in
accordance with _____________________________ (name of local water and sewage authority).
13. Initial exposure assessment: The OSHA standard requires all employers to conduct
initial exposure assessments for all jobs involving the use or removal of asbestos or
asbestos containing materials (if employers do not have an exposure assessment they shall
perform one).
a. Clearance (if required): shall be performed by a AHERA inspector or certified
industrial hygienist who is completely independent of the asbestos hazard control
contractor.
14. Medical surveillance program: A medical surveillance program is already in place for
this work crew. It is supervised by: Dr. ________________________________________________
(name, address, and phone number of physician and/or firm).
15. Training: The employer shall, institute a training program for all employees who are
likely to be exposed in excess of a PEL and for all employees who perform Class I through
IV asbestos operations. For Class I and Class II operations that require the use of
critical barriers (or equivalent isolation methods) and or negative pressure enclosures
under this section the following workers have been trained using the EPA Model
Accreditation Plan (MAP) Asbestos abatement workers training (40 CFR part 763, subpart E,
appendix C). The training was conducted by: _____________________________________________
________________________________________________
(name, address, and phone number of training provider). Provide copies of training
certificates.
16. EPA compliance 40 CFR Subpart M Section 61.145

Provide the Administrator with written notice of intention to demolish or renovate.
Delivery of the notice by U.S. Postal Service, commercial delivery service, or hand
delivery is acceptable. At least 10 working days before asbestos stripping or removal
work or any other activity begins (such as site preparation that would break up, dislodge
or similarly disturb asbestos material). In no event shall an operation covered by this
paragraph begin on a date other than the date contained in the written notice of the
start date.
a. Contractors must submit the NESHAP notification to the Asbestos Program Manager for
review 5 working days before forwarding the notification to the Administrator.
b. The Station Environmental Department shall inspect, approve, and sign all Waste
Manifests and shipments leaving MCAS Yuma. For questions on this matter contact: The
Station Environmental Department at ext. (928) 269-3201.
17. Asbestos and/or asbestos containing building materials shall not be used at MCAS
Yuma.
Plan completed by:___________________________________________________(name and signature)

Date:___/___/___
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION
29 CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS 1926.1101
Class II asbestos work – Means activities involving the removal of asbestos containing
material (ACM) which is not thermal system insulation (TSI) or surfacing material. This
includes, but is not limited to, the removal of asbestos-containing wallboard, floor tile
and sheeting, roofing and siding shingles, and construction mastics.
Occupational, Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 29 Code of Federal Regulations

(CFR) 1926.1101 methods of compliance including but not limited to:
1. Engineering controls and work practices for all asbestos work:

a. Vacuum cleaners equipped with High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filters
b. Wet methods
c. Prompt clean-up and disposal of wastes and debris in leak-tight containers
d. Exposure assessment and monitoring
e. Training
f. Enclosure or isolation of processes producing asbestos dust
2. Control measures and work practices for Class II work:

a. Local exhaust ventilation equipped with HEPA filter dust collection systems
b. Where indoors, if no “negative exposure assessment” - Critical barriers
(containment) or another barrier or isolation method which prevents the migration of
airborne asbestos from the regulated area
c. All objects within the regulated area shall be covered with dropcloths and taped
d. Decontamination and hygiene facilities (depending on removal methods and exposure)
e. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
f. Impermeable dropcloths shall be placed on surfaces beneath all removal activity
3. All Class II work shall be supervised by a Competent Person:

a. Competent person shall inspect work site
b. Competent Person shall be trained – Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Model
Accreditation Plan (MAP) for Supervisor (40 hours)
c. Competent Person shall conduct exposure assessment and daily monitoring
4. Training – Certification (40 CFR Part 763, subpart E, appendix C, 32 hr worker

course) or 8 hr. work specific “hands on” relating to each category of material
removed:
a. Training shall be provided prior to or at the time of initial assignment and at
least annually thereafter
b. The purpose, proper use, fitting instructions, and limitations of respirators as
required by 29 CFR 1910.134
c. Appropriate work practices for performing the asbestos job
5. Workers must be included in a Medical Surveillance Program:

a. The content of 29 CFR 1926.1101
b. Names, addresses and phone numbers of public health organizations
c. Requirements for posting signs and affixing labels and the meaning of the required
legends for such signs and labels
6. National Emission Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) Regulations

(40 CFR Part 61, Subpart M):
a. Removal of more than 260 LF of thermal system insulation (TSI), or 160 SF of
surfacing, or 35 CF of combined waste will trigger EPA NESHAP reporting requirements
and 10-day advance notification requirements. All waste manifests shall be approved
and signed by Station Environmental at (928) 269-3201.
7. Prohibitions:
a. High-speed abrasive disk saws without HEPA exhaust filtration
b. Compressed air to remove ACM
c. Dry sweeping, shoveling, or other dry cleanup of dust and debris
d. Employee rotations as a means of reducing exposure
Enclosure 1
LEAD AND ASBESTOS MATERIAL
REMOVAL INFORMATION
TO:__________________ FROM:___________________
FAX NO:_____________ PAGES:__________________
DATE:_______________ SUBJECT:________________
This is to inform you that (Contractor)_____________________has removed the

following materials from the MCAS Yuma, Project #_______________.
Building Number and floor number (use one form for each building)_________
Asbestos containing floor tile______________square feet.
Friable asbestos containing drywall and/or texture_______________square feet.
Friable thermal insulation (TSI)________________linear feet.
Asbestos containing transite pipe_________________linear feet/cubic feet.
Lead containing material described as___________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Asbestos containing material (ACM) described as__________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
The above described material has been profiled and transported to:
_____________________________________________________________________
Profile #_____________________________
Manifest #____________________________
Comments:_____________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
6280
ENVL
16 June 15
MEMORANDUM
From: Environmental Director, Marine Corps Air Station Yuma, Arizona

To: Installation and Logistic Engineering Division,
Attn: Mr. Steven Fisher, Station Architect
Subj: ASBESTOS AND LEAD INSPECTION FOR BUILDING 230
Ref: (a) Environmental Work Order #8883805

(b) OSHA Lead in Construction Standard 29 CFR 1926.62
(c) OSHA Asbestos in Construction Standard 29 CFR 1926.1101
(d) 40 CFR Subpart M Section 1.45
Encl: (1) Model OSHA Lead in Construction Compliance Plan

(2) Model OSHA Asbestos in Construction Compliance Plan
(3) Class II Regulatory Overview
(4) Lead and Asbestos Removal Form
(5) NESHAP
1. As requested by reference (a), on 11 June 2015, the interior and roof of

Building 230 was inspected and tested for asbestos and lead base paint (LBP).
Work to include: making the Heads and building Architectural Barriers Act
(ABA) compliant, upgrading lighting, electrical, Fire suppression system and
alarms, Comm/Data systems, replacing some doors and frames, replacing floor
tiles, cove base, repainting interior walls (CBU) may be removed.
2. Previous and new testing have identified asbestos in the following

locations and materials:
a. Tar and tarpaper on the roof
b. Black mastic under all tiled rooms.
3. Previous and new testing have identified LBP in the following locations
and materials:
a. 4” and 6” ceramic wall tiles in all Heads
b. Numerous roof vent jacks are lead containing material
4. Testing was conducted by Mr. Harry Crow using an INNOV-X Systems X-Ray
Fluorescence Analyzer, Model I-3000, s/n 9115.
5. Per reference (b) and (c), Occupational and Health Administration (OSHA)
Regulation, 29 Code of Federal Regulation, 29 CFR 1926.62 and 29 CFR
1926.1101 shall apply. To comply with the regulations, the contractor shall
provide documents to the Environmental Department for approval prior to
renovation beginning.
a. Compliance Plan is required by 29 CFR 1926.62(e), 29 CFR 1926.1101(g)

and enclosure (1) and (2).
Subj: ASBESTOS AND LEAD INSPECTION FOR BUILDING 230
b. Exposure assessment as required by 29 CFR 1926.62(d), 29 CFR

1926.1101(g)
c. Employee information and training – Provide copies of Training

Certification as required by 29 CFR 1926.62(f) and 29 CFR 1926.1101(m)
d. Employee information and training – Provide copies of Respiratory Fit

Test and Medical Test as required by 29 CFR 1926.62(f) and 29 CFR
1926.1101(m)
6. All Hazardous Waste manifest(s) and enclosure (4) will be reviewed and
signed by an MCAS Yuma Environmental Compliance Officer. Waste containers
will be inspected for proper bagging, labels and markings before being
allowed to leave the Air Station. Transporter and general contractor or
abatement contractor must be present at time of manifest(s) being signed and
shipment inspection.
7. For Lead abatement please be advised that MCAS Yuma only accepts
Environmental Protection Agency Certified Workers; no Awareness Training or
OSHA Certifications will be accepted.
8. Per reference (d), the Arizona State National Emission Standards for
Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP), Coordinator must be provided with written
notice of intention to renovate at least ten (10) working days before
renovation begins. Prior to submission to the Arizona Department of
Environmental quality (ADEQ), the contractor shall forward the NESHAP
Notification to the Environmental Department, (Attn: Asbestos and Lead
Program Manager) for final approval five (5) days prior.
9. The Environmental Department will review and approve the NESHAP

Notification, once approved; the Environmental Department will officially
forward the Notification to ADEQ.
10. If additional information or assistance is needed, please contact Mrs.

Vivian Blevins, Asbestos and Lead Program Manager at (928) 269-5215/3201.
D. RODRIGUEZ
2
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20
REMOVAL/CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF PAINT WITH LEAD

08/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AMERICAN INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE ASSOCIATION (AIHA)
AIHA Z88.6 (2006) Respiratory Protection - Respirator

Use-Physical Qualifications for Personnel
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF HOUSING AND URBAN DEVELOPMENT (HUD)
HUD 6780 (1995; Errata Aug 1996;Rev Ch. 7 - 1997)

Guidelines for the Evaluation and Control
of Lead-Based Paint Hazards in Housing
29 CFR 1926.21 Safety Training and Education
29 CFR 1926.33 Access to Employee Exposure and Medical

Records
29 CFR 1926.55 Gases, Vapors, Fumes, Dusts, and Mists
29 CFR 1926.59 Hazard Communication
29 CFR 1926.62 Lead

Response
40 CFR 260 Hazardous Waste Management System: General
40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous

Waste
40 CFR 262 Standards Applicable to Generators of

Hazardous Waste

Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 264 Standards for Owners and Operators of

Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and
Disposal Facilities
40 CFR 265 Interim Status Standards for Owners and
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 1

Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment,

Storage, and Disposal Facilities
40 CFR 268 Land Disposal Restrictions
40 CFR 745 Lead-Based Paint Poisoning Prevention in

Certain Residential Structures


Units
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Abatement
As applied to target housing and child occupied facilities, "abatement"

means any set of measures designed to permanently eliminate lead-based
paint hazards in accordance with standards established by appropriate
Federal agencies. Such term includes:
a. The removal of lead-based paint and lead-contaminated dust, the

permanent containment or encapsulation of lead-based paint, the
replacement of lead-painted surfaces or fixtures, and the removal or
covering of lead contaminated soil; and
b. All preparation, cleanup, disposal, and post-abatement clearance

testing activities associated with such measures.
1.2.2 Action Level
Employee exposure, without regard to use of respirators, to an airborne

concentration of lead of 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air averaged
over an 8 hour period in a work environment.
1.2.3 Area Sampling
Sampling of lead concentrations within the lead control area and inside
the physical boundaries, which is representative of the airborne lead
concentrations but is not collected in the breathing zone of personnel.
1.2.4 Child Occupied Facility
A building or portion of a building constructed prior to 1978 visited

regularly by the same child, 6 years of age or under, on a least two
different days within any week, provided each days visit last at least 3
hours and the combined weekly visit last at least 6 hours and the combined
annual visit last at least 60 hours. Child occupied facilities may
include, but are not limited to day-care centers, preschools and
kindergarten classrooms.
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 2

1.2.5 Competent Person (CP)
As used in this section, refers to a person employed by the Contractor who

is trained in the recognition and control of lead hazards in accordance
with current federal, State, and local regulations. A Certified Industrial
Hygienist (CIH) certified for comprehensive practice by the American Board
of Industrial Hygiene or a Certified Safety Professional (CSP) certified
by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals is the best choice.
1.2.6 Contaminated Room
Refers to a room for removal of contaminated personal protective equipment

(PPE).
1.2.7 Decontamination Shower Facility
That facility that encompasses a clean clothing storage room, and a

contaminated clothing storage and disposal rooms, with a shower facility
in between.
1.2.8 Deleading
Activities conducted by a person who offers to eliminate lead-based paint

or lead-based paint hazards or to plan such activities in commercial
buildings, bridges or other structures.
1.2.9 Eight-Hour Time Weighted Average (TWA)
Airborne concentration of lead to which an employee is exposed, averaged

over an 8 hour workday as indicated in 29 CFR 1926.62.
1.2.10 High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) Filter Equipment
HEPA filtered vacuuming equipment with a UL 586 filter system capable of

collecting and retaining lead-contaminated paint dust. A high efficiency
particulate filter means 99.97 percent efficient against 0.3 micron or
larger size particles.
1.2.11 Lead
Metallic lead, inorganic lead compounds, and organic lead soaps.
1.2.12 Lead-Based Paint (LBP)
Paint or other surface coating that contains lead in excess of 1.0

milligrams per centimeter squared or 0.5 percent by weight.
1.2.13 Lead-Based Paint Activities
In the case of target housing or child occupied facilities, lead-based

paint activities include; a lead-based paint inspection, a risk
assessment, or abatement of lead-based paint hazards.
1.2.14 Lead-Based Paint Hazard (LBP Hazard)
Any condition that causes exposure to lead from lead-contaminated dust,

lead-contaminated soil, lead-based paint that is deteriorated or present
in accessible surfaces, friction surfaces, or impact surfaces that would
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 3

result in adverse human health effects.
1.2.15 Paint with Lead (PWL)
Any paint that contains lead as determined by the testing laboratory using
a valid test method. The requirements of this section does not apply if no
detectable levels of lead are found using a quantitative method for
analyzing paint using laboratory instruments with specified limits of
detection (usually 0.01 percent). An X-Ray Fluorescence (XRF) instrument
is not considered a valid test method.
1.2.16 Lead Control Area
A system of control methods to prevent the spread of lead dust, paint

chips or debris to adjacent areas that may include temporary containment,
floor or ground cover protection, physical boundaries, and warning signs
to prevent unauthorized entry of personnel. HEPA filtered local exhaust
equipment may be used as engineering controls to further reduce personnel
exposures or building/outdoor environmental contamination.
1.2.17 Lead Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)
Fifty micrograms per cubic meter of air as an 8 hour time weighted average
as determined by 29 CFR 1926.62. If an employee is exposed for more than
eight hours in a workday, the PEL shall be determined by the following
formula:
PEL (micrograms/cubic meter of air) = 400/No. hrs worked per day
1.2.18 Personal Sampling
Sampling of airborne lead concentrations within the breathing zone of an

employee to determine the 8 hour time weighted average concentration in
accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62. Samples shall be representative of the
employees' work tasks. Breathing zone shall be considered an area within a
hemisphere, forward of the shoulders, with a radius of 6 to 9 inches and
centered at the nose or mouth of an employee.
1.2.19 Physical Boundary
Area physically roped or partitioned off around an enclosed lead control

area to limit unauthorized entry of personnel. As used in this section,
"inside boundary" shall mean the same as "outside lead control area but
inside the physical boundary."
1.2.20 Target Housing
Housing constructed prior to 1978. It does not include housing for the
elderly, or persons with disabilities unless any one or more children age
6 years and younger resides or is expected to reside in such housing.
1.3 DESCRIPTION
1.3.1 Description of Work
Remove/control lead-based and paint with lead in accordance with the work
plan and drawings.
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 4

1.3.2 Coordination with Other Work
The contractor shall coordinate with work being performed in adjacent

areas. Coordination procedures shall be explained in the Removal/Control
Plan and shall describe how the Contractor will prevent lead exposure to
other contractors and/or Government personnel performing work unrelated to
lead activities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Vacuum Filters; G
Respirators; G
SD-06 Test Reports
sampling results; G
Occupational and Environmental Assessment Data Report; G
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications of CP; G
Testing Laboratory qualifications; G
Occupant Notification; G
Training Certification of workers and supervisors; G
Notification of the Commencement of LBP Hazard Abatement; G
lead-based paint/paint with lead removal/control plan including CP

approval (signature, date, and certification number); G
Rental equipment notification; G
Respiratory Protection Program; G
Hazard Communication Program; G
EPA approved hazardous waste treatment, storage, or disposal

facility for lead disposal; G
Lead Waste Management Plan; G
Vacuum filters; G
Clearance Certification; G
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 5

Completed and signed hazardous waste manifest from treatment or

disposal facility; G
Certification of Medical Examinations; G
Employee Training Certification; G
Waste turn-in documents or weight tickets for non-hazardous wastes

that are disposed of at sanitary or construction and demolition
landfills; G
1.5.1.1 Qualifications of CP
Submit name, address, and telephone number of the CP selected to perform

responsibilities specified in paragraph entitled "Competent Person (CP)
Responsibilities." Provide previous experience of the CP. Submit proper
documentation that the CP is trained and certified in accordance with
Federal, State, and local laws.
1.5.1.2 Training Certification
Submit a certificate for each employee and supervisor, signed and dated by
the authorized training provider meeting 40 CFR 745 (Subpart L)
requirements, stating that the employee or supervisor has received the
required lead training and is certified to perform or supervise deleading
or lead removal.
1.5.1.3 Testing Laboratory
Submit the name, address, and telephone number of the testing laboratory
selected to perform the air, wipe, and soil sampling, testing, and
reporting of airborne concentrations of lead. Use a laboratory accredited
under the EPA National Lead Laboratory Accreditation Program (NLLAP) by
either the American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA) or the
American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) and that is successfully
participating in the Environmental Lead Proficiency Analytical Testing
(ELPAT) program to perform sample analysis. Laboratories selected to
perform blood lead analysis shall be OSHA approved.
1.5.2 Requirements
1.5.2.1 Competent Person (CP) Responsibilities
a. Verify training meets all federal, State, and local requirements.
b. Review and approve lead-based paint/paint with lead removal/control

plan for conformance to the applicable standards. Ensure work is
performed in strict accordance with specifications at all times.
c. Continuously inspect lead-based paint removal/control work for

conformance with the approved plan.
d. Perform air and wipe sampling.
e. Control work to prevent hazardous exposure to human beings and to the
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 6

environment at all times.
f. Certify the conditions of the work as called for elsewhere in this

specification.
1.5.2.2 Lead-Based Paint/Paint with Lead Removal/Control Plan (LBP/PWL

R/CP)
Submit a detailed job-specific plan of the work procedures to be used in

the removal/control of LBP/PWL. The plan shall include a sketch showing
the location, size, and details of lead control areas, location and
details of decontamination facilities, viewing ports, and mechanical
ventilation system. Include a description of equipment and materials,
controls and job responsibilities for each activity from which lead is
emitted. Include in the plan, eating, drinking, smoking and sanitary
procedures, interface of trades, sequencing of lead related work,
collected waste water and paint debris disposal plan, air sampling plan,
respirators, personal protective equipment, and a detailed description of
the method of containment of the operation to ensure that lead is not
released outside the lead control area. Include site preparation, cleanup
and clearance procedures. Include occupational and environmental sampling,
training, sampling methodology, frequency, duration of sampling, and
qualifications of sampling personnel in the air sampling portion of the
plan. Include a description of arrangements made among contractors on
multi-contractor worksites to inform affected employees and to clarify
responsibilities to control exposures.
The Removal/Control Plan shall be developed by a certified planner/project

designer.
In occupied buildings, the Removal/Control Plan shall also include an

occupant protection program that describes the measures that will be taken
during the work to protect the building occupants.
1.5.2.3 Occupational and Environmental Assessment Data Report
If initial monitoring is necessary, submit occupational and environmental

sampling results to the Contracting Officer within three working days of
collection, signed by the testing laboratory employee performing the
analysis, the employee that performed the sampling, and the CP.
In order to reduce the full implementation of 29 CFR 1926.62, the

Contractor shall provide documentation. Submit a report that supports the
determination to reduce full implementation of the requirements of
29 CFR 1926.62 and supporting the Lead Removal/Control Plan.
a. The initial monitoring shall represent each job classification, or if

working conditions are similar to previous jobs by the same employer,
provide previously collected exposure data that can be used to
estimate worker exposures per 29 CFR 1926.62. The data shall represent
the worker's regular daily exposure to lead for stated work.
b. Submit worker exposure data gathered during the task based trigger
operations of 29 CFR 1926.62 with a complete process description. This
includes manual demolition, manual scraping, manual sanding, heat gun,
power tool cleaning, rivet busting, cleanup of dry expendable
abrasives, abrasive blast enclosure removal, abrasive blasting,
welding, cutting and torch burning where lead containing coatings are
present.
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 7

c. The initial assessment shall determine the requirement for further

monitoring and the need to fully implement the control and protective
requirements including the lead compliance plan per 29 CFR 1926.62.
1.5.2.4 Medical Examinations
Initial medical surveillance as required by 29 CFR 1926.62 shall be made

available to all employees exposed to lead at any time (1 day) above the
action level. Full medical surveillance shall be made available to all
employees on an annual basis who are or may be exposed to lead in excess
of the action level for more than 30 days a year or as required by
29 CFR 1926.62. Adequate records shall show that employees meet the
medical surveillance requirements of 29 CFR 1926.33, 29 CFR 1926.62, and
29 CFR 1926.103. Maintain complete and accurate medical records of
employees for a period of at least 30 years or for the duration of
employment plus 30 years, whichever is longer.
1.5.2.5 Training
Train each employee performing paint removal, disposal, and air sampling
operations prior to the time of initial job assignment and annually
thereafter, in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.21, 29 CFR 1926.62, and State
and local regulations where appropriate.
1.5.2.6 Respiratory Protection Program
a. Provide each employee required to wear a respirator a respirator fit

test at the time of initial fitting and at least annually thereafter
as required by 29 CFR 1926.62.
b. Establish and implement a respiratory protection program as required by

AIHA Z88.6, 29 CFR 1926.103, 29 CFR 1926.62, and 29 CFR 1926.55.
1.5.2.7 Hazard Communication Program
Establish and implement a Hazard Communication Program as required by 29

CFR 1926.59.
1.5.2.8 Lead Waste Management
The Lead Waste Management Plan shall comply with applicable requirements
of federal, State, and local hazardous waste regulations and address:
a. Identification and classification of hazardous wastes associated with

the work.
b. Estimated quantities of wastes to be generated and disposed of.
c. Names and qualifications of each contractor that will be transporting,

storing, treating, and disposing of the wastes. Include the facility
location and operator and a 24-hour point of contact. Furnish two
copies of proof of EPA hazardous waste permits, manifests, and EPA
Identification numbers and Transporter Number.
d. Names and qualifications (experience and training) of personnel who

will be working on-site with hazardous wastes.
e. List of waste handling equipment to be used in performing the work, to
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 8

include cleaning, volume reduction, and transport equipment.
f. Spill prevention, containment, and cleanup contingency measures

including a health and safety plan to be implemented in accordance
with 29 CFR 1926.65.
g. Work plan and schedule for waste containment, removal and disposal.
Wastes shall be cleaned up and containerized daily. Proper containment
of the waste includes using acceptable waste containers (e.g.,
55-gallon drums) as well as proper marking/labeling of the containers.
h. Unit cost for waste disposal according to this plan.
1.5.2.9 Environmental, Safety and Health Compliance
In addition to the detailed requirements of this specification, comply

with laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations of Federal, State, and local
authorities regarding removing, handling, storing, transporting, and
disposing of lead waste materials. Comply with the applicable requirements
of the current issue of 29 CFR 1926.62. Submit matters regarding
interpretation of standards to the Contracting Officer for resolution
before starting work. Where specification requirements and the referenced
documents vary, the most stringent requirement shall apply.
1.5.3 Pre-Construction Conference
Along with the CP, meet with the Contracting Officer to discuss in detail
the lead waste management plan and the lead-based paint/paint with lead
removal/control plan, including work procedures and precautions for the
removal plan.
1.6 EQUIPMENT
1.6.1 Respirators
Furnish appropriate respirators approved by the National Institute for

Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), Department of Health and Human
Services, for use in atmospheres containing lead dust. Respirators shall
comply with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.62.
1.6.2 Special Protective Clothing
Furnish personnel who will be exposed to lead-contaminated dust with

proper disposable protective whole body clothing, head covering, gloves,
and foot coverings as required by 29 CFR 1926.62. Furnish proper
disposable plastic or rubber gloves to protect hands. Reduce the level of
protection only after obtaining approval from the CP.
1.6.3 Rental Equipment Notification
If rental equipment is to be used during lead-based paint handling and

disposal, notify the rental agency in writing concerning the intended use
of the equipment. Furnish a copy of the written notification to the
1.6.4 Vacuum Filters
UL 586 labeled HEPA filters.
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 9

1.6.5 Equipment for Government Personnel
Furnish the Contracting Officer with two complete sets of personal

protective equipment (PPE) daily, as required herein, for entry into and
inspection of the paint removal work within the lead controlled area.
Personal protective equipment shall include disposable whole body
covering, including appropriate foot, head, and hand protection. PPE shall
remain the property of the Contractor. The Government will provide
respiratory protection for the Contracting Officer.
1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
1.7.1 Protection of Existing Work to Remain
Perform paint removal work without damage or contamination of adjacent

areas. Where existing work is damaged or contaminated, restore work to its
original condition or better.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.1.1 Protection
3.1.1.1 Notification
a. Notify the Contracting Officer 20 days prior to the start of any paint
removal work.
3.1.1.2 Boundary Requirements
a. Provide physical boundaries around the lead control area by roping off
the area designated in the work plan or providing curtains, portable
partitions or other enclosures to ensure that lead will not escape
outside the lead control area.
b. Warning Signs - Provide warning signs at approaches to lead control

areas. Locate signs at such a distance that personnel may read the
sign and take the necessary precautions before entering the area.
Signs shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.62.
3.1.1.3 Furnishings
The Government will remove furniture and equipment from the building
before lead-based paint removal work begins.
3.1.1.4 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Systems
Shut down, lock out, and isolate HVAC systems that supply, exhaust, or
pass through the lead control areas. Seal intake and exhaust vents in the
lead control area with 6 mil plastic sheet and tape. Seal seams in HVAC
components that pass through the lead control area. Provide temporary HVAC
system for areas in which HVAC has been shut down outside the lead control
area.
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 10

3.1.1.5 Decontamination Shower Facility
Provide clean and contaminated change rooms and shower facilities in

accordance with this specification and 29 CFR 1926.62.
3.1.1.6 Eye Wash Station
Where eyes may be exposed to injurious corrosive materials, suitable

facilities for quick drenching or flushing of the eyes shall be provided
within the work area.
3.1.1.7 Mechanical Ventilation System
a. Use adequate ventilation to control personnel exposure to lead in

accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62.
b. To the extent feasible, use local exhaust ventilation connected to HEPA

filters or other collection systems, approved by the CP. Local exhaust
ventilation systems shall be evaluated and maintained in accordance
with 29 CFR 1926.62.
c. Vent local exhaust outside the building only and away from building
ventilation intakes.
d. Use locally exhausted, power actuated, paint removal tools.
3.1.1.8 Personnel Protection
Personnel shall wear and use protective clothing and equipment as

specified herein. Eating, smoking, or drinking or application of cosmetics
is not permitted in the lead control area. No one will be permitted in the
lead control area unless they have been appropriately trained and provided
with protective equipment.
3.2 ERECTION
3.2.1 Lead Control Area Requirements
Establish a lead control area by situating critical barriers and physical

boundaries around the area or structure where LBP/PWL removal/control
operations will be performed.
3.3 APPLICATION
3.3.1 Work Procedures
Perform removal of lead-based paint in accordance with approved lead-based

paint/paint with lead removal/control plan. Use procedures and equipment
required to limit occupational and environmental exposure to lead when
lead-based paint is removed in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62. Dispose of
removed paint chips and associated waste in compliance with Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA), State, and local requirements.
3.3.2 Lead-Based Paint Removal/Control/Deleading
Manual or power sanding of interior and exterior surfaces is not permitted

unless tools are equipped with HEPA attachments or wet methods. The dry
sanding or grinding of surfaces that contain lead is prohibited Provide
methodology for LBP removal/control in work plan. Remove paint within the
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 11

areas designated on the drawings in order to completely expose the

substrate. Take whatever precautions necessary to minimize damage to the
underlying substrate.
Avoid deterioration of the substrate. Provide surface preparations for

painting in accord with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
Provide methodology for LBP/PWL removal and processes to minimize

contamination of work areas outside the control area with
lead-contaminated dust or other lead-contaminated debris/waste and to
ensure that unprotected personnel are not exposed to hazardous
concentrations of lead. Describe this LBP/PWL removal/control process in
the LBP/PWL R/CP.
3.3.2.1 Indoor Paint Removal
Perform manual paint removal in lead control areas using enclosures,

barriers, or containments and powered locally exhausted paint removal tools.
Collect residue debris for disposal in accordance with federal, State, and
local requirements.
3.3.2.2 Outdoor Paint Removal
Perform outdoor removal as indicated in federal, State, and local

regulations and in the LBP/CPR/CP. The worksite preparation (barriers or
containments) shall be job dependent and presented in the LBP/PWL R/CP.
3.3.3 Personnel Exiting Procedures
Whenever personnel exit the lead-controlled area, they shall perform the
following procedures and shall not leave the work place wearing any
clothing or equipment worn during the work day:
a. Vacuum themselves off.
b. Remove protective clothing in the contaminated change room, and place

them in an approved impermeable disposal bag.
c. Wash hands and face at the site, don appropriate disposable or

uncontaminated reusable clothing; move to an appropriate facility;
shower.
d. Change to clean clothes prior to leaving the physical boundary

designated around the lead control area.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.4.1 Tests
3.4.1.1 Air and Wipe Sampling
Air sample for lead in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62 and as specified
herein. Air and wipe sampling shall be directed or performed by the CP.
a. The CP shall be on the job site directing the air and non-clearance
wipe sampling and inspecting the lead-based paint removal/control work
to ensure that the requirements of the contract have been satisfied
during the entire lead-based paint removal operation.
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 12

b. Collect personal air samples on employees who are expected to have the
greatest risk of exposure as determined by the CP. In addition,
collect air samples on at least 25 percent of the work crew or a
minimum of two employees, whichever is greater, during each work shift.
c. Submit results of air samples, within 72 hours after the air samples
are taken.
d. Collect surface wipe samples at a location no greater than 10 feet

outside the lead control area at a frequency of once per day while
lead removal work is conducted. Surface wipe results shall meet
criteria in paragraph "Clearance Certification."
3.4.1.2 Air Sampling During Paint Removal Work
Conduct area air sampling daily, on each shift in which lead-based paint
removal operations are performed, in areas immediately adjacent to the
lead control area. Sufficient area monitoring shall be conducted to ensure
unprotected personnel are not exposed at or above 30 micrograms per cubic
meter of air. If 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air is reached or
exceeded, stop work, correct the conditions(s) causing the increased
levels. Notify the Contracting Officer immediately. Determine if
condition(s) require any further change in work methods. Removal work
shall resume only after the CP and the Contracting Officer give approval.
For outdoor operations, at least one sample on each shift shall be taken
on the downwind side of the lead control area.
3.4.1.3 Sampling After Paint Removal/Control
After the visual inspection, conduct soil sampling if bare soil is present
during external removal/control operations and collect wipe samples
according to the HUD protocol contained in HUD 6780 to determine the lead
content of settled dust and dirt in micrograms per square meter foot of
surface area and parts per million (ppm) for soil.
3.4.1.4 Testing of Removed Paint and Used Abrasive
Test removed paint and used abrasive in accordance with 40 CFR 261 for
hazardous waste.
3.5 CLEANING AND DISPOSAL
3.5.1 Cleanup
Maintain surfaces of the lead control area free of accumulations of paint

chips and dust. Restrict the spread of dust and debris; keep waste from
being distributed over the work area. Do not dry sweep or use compressed
air to clean up the area. At the end of each shift and when the paint
removal operation has been completed, clean the area of visible lead paint
contamination by vacuuming with a HEPA filtered vacuum cleaner, wet
mopping the area and wet wiping the area as indicated by the CP. Reclean
areas showing dust or residual paint chips or debris. After visible dust,
chips and debris is removed, wet wipe and HEPA vacuum all surfaces in the
work area. If adjacent areas become contaminated at any time during the
work, clean, visually inspect, and then wipe sample all contaminated
areas. The CP shall then certify in writing that the area has been cleaned
of lead contamination before restarting work.
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 13

3.5.1.1 Clearance Certification
The CP shall certify in writing that air samples collected outside the
lead control area during paint removal operations are less than 30
micrograms per cubic meter of air; the respiratory protection used for the
employees was adequate; the work procedures were performed in accordance
with 29 CFR 1926.62 and 40 CFR 745; and that there were no visible
accumulations of material and dust containing lead left in the work site.
Do not remove the lead control area or roped off boundary and warning
signs prior to the Contracting Officer's acknowledgement of receipt of the
CP certification.
For exterior paint removal/control work, soil samples taken at the

exterior of the work site shall be used to determine if soil lead levels
had increased at a statistically significant level (significant at the 95
percent confidence limit) from the soil lead levels prior to the work. If
soil lead levels do show a statistically significant increase or is above
any applicable Federal or State standard for lead in soil, the soil shall
be remediated back to the pre-work level.
Clear the lead control area in industrial facilities of all visible dust
and debris.
For lead-based paint hazard abatement work, surface wipe and soil sampling
shall be conducted and clearance determinations made according to the work
practice standards presented in 40 CFR 745.227.
3.5.2 Disposal
a. Collect lead-contaminated waste, scrap, debris, bags, containers,

equipment, and lead-contaminated clothing that may produce airborne
concentrations of lead particles. Label the containers in accordance
with 29 CFR 1926.62 and 40 CFR 262. Dispose of lead-contaminated waste
material at an EPA approved hazardous waste treatment, storage, or
disposal facility off Government property.
b. Place waste materials in U.S. Department of Transportation (49 CFR 178)

approved 55 gallon drums. Properly label each drum to identify the
type of waste (49 CFR 172) and the date the drum was filled. For
hazardous waste, the collection drum requires marking/labeling in
accordance with 40 CFR 262 during the accumulation/collection
timeframe. The Contracting Officer or an authorized representative
will assign an area for interim storage of waste-containing drums. Do
not store hazardous waste drums in interim storage longer than 90
calendar days from the date affixed to each drum.
c. Handle, transport, and dispose lead or lead-contaminated material

classified as hazardous waste in accordance with 40 CFR 260, 40 CFR 261,
40 CFR 262, 40 CFR 263, 40 CFR 264, and 40 CFR 265. Comply with land
disposal restriction notification requirements as required by
40 CFR 268.
d. All material, whether hazardous or non-hazardous shall be disposed in

accordance with laws and provisions and Federal, State, or local
regulations. Ensure waste is properly characterized. The result of
each waste characterization (TCLP for RCRA materials) will dictate
disposal requirements.
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 14

3.5.2.1 Disposal Documentation
Submit written evidence to demonstrate the hazardous waste treatment,

storage, or disposal facility (TSD) is approved for lead disposal by the
EPA, State or local regulatory agencies. Submit one copy of the completed
hazardous waste manifest, signed and dated by the initial transporter in
accordance with 40 CFR 262. Contractor shall provide a certificate that
the waste was accepted by the disposal facility. Provide turn-in documents
or weight tickets for non-hazardous waste disposal.
3.5.3 Payment for Hazardous Waste
Payment for disposal of hazardous and non-hazardous waste will not be made
until a signed copy of the manifest from the treatment or disposal
facility certifying the amount of lead-containing materials or
non-hazardous waste delivered is returned and a copy is furnished to the
Government.
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 15

SECTION 02 84 33
REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS (PCBs)

04/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

29 CFR 1910.1000 Air Contaminants
29 CFR 1910.145 Accident Prevention Signs and Tags


Definitions


49 CFR 174 Carriage by Rail
49 CFR 175 Carriage by Aircraft
49 CFR 176 Carriage by Vessel
49 CFR 177 Carriage by Public Highway
49 CFR 179 Specifications for Tank Cars
1.2 REQUIREMENTS
The work includes the removal and disposal of PCB containing lighting
ballasts and hydraulic or transformer oils. Perform work in accordance
with 40 CFR 761 and the requirements specified herein.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.3.1 Leak
Leak or leaking means any instance in which a PCB Article, PCB Container,
or PCB Equipment has any PCBs on any portion of its external surface.
1.3.2 PCBs
PCBs as used in this specification shall mean the same as PCBs, PCB
Article, PCB Article Container, PCB Container, PCB Equipment, PCB Item,
PCB Transformer, PCB-Contaminated Electrical Equipment, as defined in
40 CFR 761, Section 3, Definitions.
1.3.3 Spill
Spill means both intentional and unintentional spills, leaks, and other
uncontrolled discharges when the release results in any quantity of PCBs
running off or about to run off the external surface of the equipment or
other PCB source, as well as the contamination resulting from those
releases.
1.4.1 Training
Instruct employees on the dangers of PCB exposure, on respirator use,

decontamination, and applicable OSHA and EPA regulations.
1.4.2 Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH)
Obtain the services of an industrial hygienist certified by the American

Board of Industrial Hygiene to certify training, review and approve the
PCB removal plan, including determination of the need for personnel
protective equipment (PPE) in performing PCB removal work.
1.4.3 Regulation Documents
Maintain at all times one copy each at the office and one copy each in
view at the job site 29 CFR 1910.1000, 40 CFR 761, and Contractor work
practices for removal, storage and disposal of PCBs.
1.4.4 Surveillance Personnel
Surveillance personnel may enter PCB control areas for brief periods of
time provided they wear disposable polyethylene gloves and disposal
polyethylene foot covers, as a minimum. Additional protective equipment
may be required if respiratory hazard is involved or if skin contact with
PCB is involved.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

SD-07 Certificates
Training certification
Qualifications of CIH
PCB removal work plan
PCB disposal plan
Notification
Transporter certification of notification to EPA of their PCB

waste activities and EPA ID numbers
Certification of Decontamination for PCB Spill
Post cleanup sampling data
Certificate of disposal
1.6 EQUIPMENT
1.6.1 Special Clothing
Work clothes shall consist of PPE as required by OSHA regulations,

including, but not limited to the following:
a. Disposable coveralls
b. Gloves (Disposable rubber gloves may be worn under these)
c. Disposable foot covers (polyethylene)
d. Chemical safety goggles
e. Half mask cartridge respirator.
1.6.2 Special Clothing for Government Personnel
Provide PPE specified in paragraph entitled "Special Clothing" to the

Contracting Officer as required for inspection of the work.
1.6.3 PCB Spill Kit
Assemble a spill kit to include the following items:
ITEM MINIMUM QUANTITY
1. Disposable gloves (polyethylene) 6 prs
2. Gloves with a high degree of impermeability to PCB 6 prs
3. Disposable coveralls with permeation resistance to PCB 4 ea
4. Chemical safety goggles 2 ea
5. Disposable foot covers (polyethylene) 6 prs
6. PCB Caution Sign: "PCB Spill--Authorized Personnel 2 ea

Only"
7. Banner guard or equivalent banner material 100 feet
8. Absorbent material
9. Blue polyethylene waste bags 5 bags
10. Cloth backed tape 5 ea
11. Area access logs, blank 1 roll
12. Brattice cloth, 6' x 6' 10 ea
13. Rags 1 piece
14. Ball point pens 20 ea
15. Herculite, 4' x 4' and 8' x 8' 2 ea and 1 ea
16. Blank metal signs and grease pencils
17. Waste containers 55 gallon drum, may be used as 2 ea

container for kit ea
1.7.1 Training Certification
Submit certificates, prior to the start of work but after the main
abatement submittals, signed and dated by the CIH and by each employee
stating that the employee has received training. Certificates shall be
organized by individual worker, not grouped by type of certificates.
1.7.2 Qualifications of CIH
Submit the name, address, and telephone number of the Industrial Hygienist
selected to perform the duties in paragraph entitled "Certified Industrial
Hygienist." Submit proper documentation that the Industrial Hygienist is
certified, including certification number and date of
certification/recertification.
1.7.3 PCB Removal Work Plan
Submit a detailed job-specific plan of the work procedures to be used in

the removal of PCB-containing materials, not to be combined with other
hazardous abatement plans. Provide a Table of Contents for each abatement
submittal which shall follow the sequence of requirements in the
contract. The plan shall include a sketch showing the location, size, and
details of PCB control areas, location and details of decontamination
rooms, change rooms, shower facilities, and mechanical ventilation system.
Include in the plan, eating, drinking, smoking and restroom procedures,
interface of trades, sequencing of PCB related work, PCB disposal plan,
respirators, protective equipment, and a detailed description of the
method of containment of the operation to ensure that PCB contamination is

not spread or carried outside of the control area. Include provisions to
ensure that airborne PCB concentrations of 3.10 E-08 pound per cubic feet
of air are not exceeded outside of the PCB control area. Include air
sampling, training and strategy, sampling methodology, frequency, duration
of sampling, and qualifications of air monitoring personnel in the air
sampling portion of the plan. Obtain approval of the plan prior to the
start of PCB removal work.
1.7.4 PCB Disposal Plan
Submit a PCB Disposal Plan within 45 calendar days after award of contract
for Contracting Officer's approval. The PCB Disposal Plan shall comply
with applicable requirements of Federal, State, and local PCB waste
regulations and address:
a. Identification of PCB wastes associated with the work.
b. Estimated quantities of wastes to be generated and disposed of.
c. Names and qualifications of each contractor that will be transporting,

storing, treating, and disposing of the wastes. Include the facility
location and a 24-hour point of contact. Furnish two copies of EPA
PCB waste permits and EPA Identification numbers.
d. Names and qualifications (experience and training) of personnel who

will be working on-site with PCB wastes.
e. List of waste handling equipment to be used in performing the work, to

include cleaning, volume reduction, and transport equipment.
f. Spill prevention, containment, and cleanup contingency measures to be

implemented.
g. Work plan and schedule for PCB waste containment, removal and
disposal. Wastes shall be cleaned up and containerized daily.
1.7.5 Notification
Notify the Contracting Officer 20 days prior to the start of PCB removal
work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
3.1.1 PCB Control Area
Isolate PCB control area by physical boundaries to prevent unauthorized

entry of personnel. Food, drink and smoking materials shall not be
permitted in areas where PCBs are handled or PCB items are stored.
3.1.2 Personnel Protection
Workers shall wear and use PPE, as recommended by the Industrial
Hygienist, upon entering a PCB control area. If PPE is not required per
the CIH, specify in the PCB removal work plan.
3.1.3 Footwear
Work footwear shall remain inside work area until completion of the job.
3.1.4 Permissible Exposure Limits (PEL)
PEL for PCBs is 3.1 E-08 lb/cubic foot on an 8-hour time weighted average
basis.
3.1.5 Special Hazards
a. PCBs shall not be exposed to open flames or other high temperature

sources since toxic decomposition by-products may be produced.
b. PCBs shall not be heated to temperatures of 135 degrees F or higher

without Contracting Officer's concurrence.
3.1.6 PCB Caution Label
40 CFR 761, Subpart C. Affix labels to PCB waste containers and other
PCB-contaminated items. Provide label with sufficient print size to be
clearly legible, with bold print on a contrasting background, displaying
the following: CAUTION: Contains PCBs (Polychlorinated Biphenyls).
3.1.7 PCB Caution Sign
29 CFR 1910.145. Provide signs at approaches to PCB control areas.

Locate signs at such a distance that personnel may read the sign and take
the necessary precautions before entering the area.
3.2 WORK PROCEDURE
Furnish labor, materials, services, and equipment necessary for the

complete removal of PCBs located at the site as indicated or specified in
accordance with local, State, or Federal regulations. Package and mark
PCB as required by EPA and DOT regulations and dispose of off Government
property in accordance with EPA, DOT, and local regulations at a permitted
site.
3.2.1 No Smoking
Smoking is not permitted within 50 feet of the PCB control area. Provide
"No Smoking" signs as directed by the Contracting Officer.
3.2.2 Work Operations
Ensure that work operations or processes involving PCB or PCB-contaminated

materials are conducted in accordance with 40 CFR 761 and the applicable
requirements of this section, including but not limited to:
a. Obtaining advance approval of PCB storage sites.
b. Notifying Contracting Officer prior to commencing the operation.
c. Reporting leaks and spills to the Contracting Officer.
d. Cleaning up spills.
e. Maintaining an access log of employees working in a PCB control area

and providing a copy to the Contracting Officer upon completion of the
operation.
f. Inspecting PCB and PCB-contaminated items and waste containers for

leaks and forwarding copies of inspection reports to the Contracting
Officer.
g. Maintaining a spill kit as specified in paragraph entitled "PCB Spill

Kit."
h. Maintaining inspection, inventory and spill records.
3.3 PCB TRANSFORMERS
3.3.1 Draining of Transformer Liquid
Perform work in accordance with 49 CFR 171, 49 CFR 172, 49 CFR 173,
49 CFR 174, 49 CFR 175, 49 CFR 176, 49 CFR 177, 49 CFR 178, and 49 CFR 179,
Subchapter C and as specified herein. Drain the transformer, switches,
and regulators of free flowing liquid prior to transportation. Place the
drained liquids in DOT Spec 17E drums. The drums shall not contain more
than 50 gallons of oil. If the equipment cannot be drained, then place it
in DOT Spec 17C drums.
3.3.2 Markings
Provide drums and drained PCB-contaminated electrical equipment with

caution label markings as specified in paragraph entitled "PCB Caution
Label."
3.3.3 Laboratory Analysis
All transformers shall have a laboratory analysis for turn-in.

DRMO-Hawaii prefers a gas chromotograph test. The only two exceptions to
this rule are:
a. The transformer is hermetically sealed (solder sealed or fusion

sealed. No access ports or openings).
b. The name plate states that the transformer contains pyranol,

interteen, etc.
Attach a copy of the lab analysis to both the DD 1348-1 and the
transformer itself.
3.3.4 Markings
3.3.4.1 Transformers, Less Than 50 ppm
Add absorbent material to absorb residue oil remaining after draining.

Write the date drained on the transformer. Turn in transformers to the
DRMO Scrapyard. Telephone 471-3636 to schedule appointment for turn-in.
3.3.4.2 Transformers, 50-499 ppm
Same procedure as transformers in the less than 50 ppm range.
3.3.4.3 Transformers, Greater Than 500 ppm
Stencil date drained on the transformer. Turn in transformer to

DRMO-Hawaii, Building #26, Manana Storage Area.
3.3.4.4 Drums
Stencil on DOT-approved 55 gallon drums containing PCB liquid the

following:
a. ppm
b. Date drum filled
c. Serial number of transformer liquid came from
d. National Stock Number
(1) "9999-00-OIL" for <50 ppm
(2) "9999-00-CONPCB" for 50-499 ppm
(3) "9999-00-PCBOIL" for >500 ppm
Do not mix different ppms in the same drum. Drums must have a 2 inch
ullage space from the top of the drum.
3.4 PCB REMOVAL
Select PCB removal procedure to minimize contamination of work areas with

PCB or other PCB-contaminated debris/waste. Handle PCBs such that no skin
contact occurs. PCB removal process should be described in the work plan.
3.4.1 Confined Spaces
As feasible, do not carry out PCB handling operations in confined spaces.

A confined space shall mean a space having limited means of egress and
inadequate cross ventilation.
3.4.2 Control Area
Establish a PCB control area around the PCB item as specified in paragraph
entitled "PCB Control Area." Only personnel briefed on the elements in
the paragraph entitled "Training" and on the handling precautions shall be
allowed into the area.
3.4.3 Exhaust Ventilation
If used, exhaust ventilation for PCB operations shall discharge to the

outside and away from personnel.
3.4.4 Temperatures
As feasible, handle PCBs at ambient temperatures and not at elevated

temperatures.
3.4.5 Solvent Cleaning
Clean contaminated tools, containers, etc., after use by rinsing three

times with an appropriate solvent or by wiping down three times with a
solvent wetted rag. Suggested solvents are stoddard solvent or hexane.
3.4.6 Drip Pans
Drip pans are required under portable PCB transformers and rectifiers in
use or stored for use. The pans shall have a containment volume of at
least one and one-half times the internal volume of PCBs in the item.
3.4.7 Evacuation Procedures
Procedures shall be written for evacuation of injured workers. Aid for a

seriously injured worker shall not be delayed for reasons of
decontamination.
3.5 PCB SPILL CLEANUP REQUIREMENTS
3.5.1 PCB Spills
Immediately report to the Contracting Officer any PCB spills on the ground
or in the water, PCB spills in drip pans, or PCB leaks.
3.5.2 PCB Spill Control Area
Rope off an area around the edges of a PCB leak or spill and post a "PCB
Spill Authorized Personnel Only" caution sign. Immediately transfer
leaking items to a drip pan or other container.
3.5.3 PCB Spill Cleanup
40 CFR 761, Subpart G. Initiate cleanup of spills as soon as possible,

but no later than 48 hours of its discovery. To clean up spills,
personnel shall wear the PPE prescribed in paragraph entitled "Special
Clothing" of this section. If misting, elevated temperatures or open
flames are present, or if the spill is situated in a confined space,
notify the Contracting Officer. Mop up the liquid with rags or other
conventional absorbent. The spent absorbent shall be properly contained
and disposed of as solid PCB waste.
3.5.4 Records and Certification
Document the cleanup with records of decontamination in accordance with

40 CFR 761, Section 125, Requirements for PCB Spill Cleanup. Provide
certification of decontamination.
3.5.5 Sampling Requirements
Perform post cleanup sampling as required by 40 CFR 761, Section 130,

Sampling Requirements. Do not remove boundaries of the PCB control area
until site is determined satisfactorily clean by the Contracting Officer.
3.6 STORAGE FOR DISPOSAL
3.6.1 Storage Containers for PCBs
49 CFR 178. Store liquid PCBs in Department of Transportation (DOT)
Specification 17E containers. Store nonliquid PCB mixtures, articles, or

equipment in DOT Specification 5, 5B, or 17C containers with removable
heads.
3.6.2 Waste Containers
Label with the following:
a. "Solid (or Liquid) Waste Polychlorinated Biphenyls"
b. The PCB Caution Label, paragraph entitled "PCB Caution Label"
c. The date the item was placed in storage and the name of the cognizant
activity/building.
3.6.3 PCB Articles and PCB-Contaminated Items
Label with items b. through c. above.
3.6.4 Approval of Storage Site
Obtain in advance Contracting Officer approval using the following

criteria without exception.
a. Adequate roof and walls to prevent rainwater from reaching the stored
PCBs.
b. An adequate floor which has continuous curbing with a minimum 6 inch

high curb. Such floor and curbing shall provide a containment volume
equal to at least two times the internal volume of the largest PCB
article or PCB container stored therein or 25 percent of the total
internal volume of all PCB equipment or containers stored therein,
whichever is greater.
c. No drain valves, floor drains, expansion joints, sewer lines, or other

openings that would permit liquids to flow from the curbed area.
d. Floors and curbing constructed of continuous smooth and impervious

materials such as portland cement, concrete or steel to prevent or
minimize penetrations of PCBs.
e. Not located at a site which is below the 100-year flood water

elevation.
f. Each storage site shall be posted with the PCB Caution Sign, paragraph
entitled "PCB Caution Sign."
3.7 CLEANUP
Maintain surfaces of the PCB control area free of accumulations of PCBs.

Restrict the spread of dust and debris; keep waste from being distributed
over work area.
Do not remove the PCB control area and warning signs prior to the
Contracting Officer's approval. Reclean areas showing residual PCBs.
3.8 DISPOSAL
Comply with disposal requirements and procedures outlined in 40 CFR 761.
Do not accept PCB waste unless it is accompanied by a manifest signed by

the Government. Before transporting the PCB waste, sign and date the
manifest acknowledging acceptance of the PCB waste from the Government.
Return a signed copy to the Government before leaving the job site.
Ensure that the manifest accompanies the PCB waste at all times. Submit
transporter certification of notification to EPA of their PCB waste
activities.
3.8.1 Certificate of Disposal
40 CFR 761. Submit to the Government within 30 days of the date that the
disposal of the PCB waste identified on the manifest was completed.
Certificate for the PCBs and PCB items disposed shall include:
a. The identity of the disposal facility, by name, address, and EPA

identification number.
b. The identity of the PCB waste affected by the Certificate of Disposal

including reference to the manifest number for the shipment.
c. A statement certifying the fact of disposal of the identified PCB

waste, including the date(s) of disposal, and identifying the disposal
process used.
d. A certification as defined in 40 CFR 761, Section 3.
3.8.1.1 Payment Upon Furnishing Certificate of Disposal of PCBs
Payment will not be made until the certificate of disposal has been
furnished to the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
05/14
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ACI 117 (2010; Errata 2011) Specifications for

Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials and Commentary
ACI 121R (2008) Guide for Concrete Construction

Quality Systems in Conformance with ISO
9001
ACI 211.1 (1991; R 2009) Standard Practice for

Selecting Proportions for Normal,
Heavyweight and Mass Concrete
ACI 211.2 (1998; R 2004) Standard Practice for

Selecting Proportions for Structural
Lightweight Concrete
ACI 213R (2014) Guide for Structural

Lightweight-Aggregate Concrete

Structural Concrete
ACI 302.1R (2004; Errata 2006; Errata 2007) Guide for

Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
ACI 304.2R (1996; R 2008) Placing Concrete by Pumping

Methods
ACI 304R (2000; R 2009) Guide for Measuring,

Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete
ACI 305R (2010) Guide to Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306.1 (1990; R 2002) Standard Specification for

Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 306R (2010) Guide to Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 308.1 (2011) Specification for Curing Concrete
ACI 318 (2014; Errata 2014) Building Code

Requirements for Structural Concrete and
Commentary
ACI 347 (2004; Errata 2008; Errata 2012) Guide to

Formwork for Concrete
ACI SP-15 (2011) Field Reference Manual: Standard

Specifications for Structural Concrete ACI
301-05 with Selected ACI References
ACI SP-2 (2007; Abstract: 10th Edition) ACI Manual

of Concrete Inspection
ACI SP-66 (2004) ACI Detailing Manual
AMERICAN HARDBOARD ASSOCIATION (AHA)
AHA A135.4 (1995; R 2004) Basic Hardboard
AWS D1.4/D1.4M (2011) Structural Welding Code -

Reinforcing Steel
ASTM A1064/A1064M (2014) Standard Specification for

Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for
Concrete
ASTM A53/A53M (2012) Standard Specification for Pipe,

Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
ASTM A615/A615M (2014) Standard Specification for Deformed

and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement

Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement

Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel
Reinforcing Bars
ASTM A996/A996M (2014a) Standard Specification for

Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM C1017/C1017M (2013) Standard Specification for Chemical

Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing
Concrete
ASTM C1077 (2014) Standard Practice for Laboratories

Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates
for Use in Construction and Criteria for
Laboratory Evaluation
ASTM C1107/C1107M (2014) Standard Specification for Packaged
Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)
ASTM C1157/C1157M (2011) Standard Specification for

Hydraulic Cement
ASTM C1260 (2014) Standard Test Method for Potential

Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates
(Mortar-Bar Method)
ASTM C143/C143M (2012) Standard Test Method for Slump of

Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
ASTM C150/C150M (2012) Standard Specification for Portland

Cement
ASTM C1567 (2013) Standard Test Method for Potential

Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations
of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate
(Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method)
ASTM C1602/C1602M (2012) Standard Specification for Mixing

Water Used in Production of Hydraulic
Cement Concrete
ASTM C172/C172M (2014a) Standard Practice for Sampling

Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C173/C173M (2014) Standard Test Method for Air

Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method
ASTM C192/C192M (2014) Standard Practice for Making and

Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Laboratory

Pressure Method
ASTM C260/C260M (2010a) Standard Specification for

Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C295/C295M (2012) Petrographic Examination of

Aggregates for Concrete

Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
ASTM C311/C311M (2013) Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or

Natural Pozzolans for Use as a Mineral
Admixture in Portland-Cement Concrete
ASTM C33/C33M (2013) Standard Specification for Concrete

Aggregates
ASTM C39/C39M (2014a) Standard Test Method for

Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens
ASTM C42/C42M (2013) Standard Test Method for Obtaining

and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams
of Concrete

Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C552 (2014) Standard Specification for Cellular

Glass Thermal Insulation
ASTM C578 (2014a) Standard Specification for Rigid,

Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation
ASTM C591 (2013) Standard Specification for Unfaced

Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate
Thermal Insulation
ASTM C595/C595M (2014) Standard Specification for Blended

Hydraulic Cements
ASTM C618 (2012a) Standard Specification for Coal

Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
ASTM C78/C78M (2012; E 2013) Standard Test Method for

Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using
Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading)
ASTM C920 (2014a) Standard Specification for

Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM C94/C94M (2014b) Standard Specification for

Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C989/C989M (2014) Standard Specification for Slag

Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars
ASTM D1751 (2004; E 2013; R 2013) Standard

Specification for Preformed Expansion
Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and
Structural Construction (Nonextruding and
Resilient Bituminous Types)
ASTM D1752 (2004a; R 2013) Standard Specification for

Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled
PVC Expansion
ASTM D412 (2006a; R 2013) Standard Test Methods for

Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers - Tension
ASTM D471 (2012a) Standard Test Method for Rubber

Property - Effect of Liquids
ASTM D5759 (2012) Characterization of Coal Fly Ash

and Clean Coal Combustion Fly Ash for
Potential Uses
ASTM D6690 (2012) Standard Specification for Joint
and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for

Concrete and Asphalt Pavements
ASTM E1643 (2011) Standard Practice for Selection,

Design, Installation, and Inspection of
Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs
ASTM E1745 (2011) Standard Specification for Water

Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil
or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs
ASTM E1993/E1993M (1998; R 2013; E 2013) Standard

Specification for Bituminous Water Vapor
Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or
Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs
ASTM E329 (2014a) Standard Specification for

Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or
Inspection of Materials Used in
Construction
ASTM E96/E96M (2014) Standard Test Methods for Water

Vapor Transmission of Materials
CRSI 10MSP (2009; 28th Ed) Manual of Standard Practice
NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST)
NIST PS 1 (2009) DOC Voluntary Product Standard PS

1-07, Structural Plywood
COE CRD-C 513 (1974) Corps of Engineers Specifications

for Rubber Waterstops
COE CRD-C 572 (1974) Corps of Engineers Specifications

for Polyvinylchloride Waterstops
FS SS-S-200 (Rev E; Am 1; Notice 1) Sealant, Joint,

Two-Component, Jet-Blast-Resistant,
Cold-Applied, for Portland Cement Concrete
Pavement
1.2 DEFINITIONS
a. "Cementitious material" as used herein must include all portland

cement, pozzolan, fly ash, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and
silica fume.
b. "Exposed to public view" means situated so that it can be seen from

eye level from a public location after completion of the building. A
public location is accessible to persons not responsible for operation
or maintenance of the building.
c. "Chemical admixtures" are materials in the form of powder or fluids

that are added to the concrete to give it certain characteristics not
obtainable with plain concrete mixes.
d. "Supplementary cementing materials" (SCM) include coal fly ash, silica

fume, granulated blast-furnace slag, natural or calcined pozzolans,
and ultra-fine coal ash when used in such proportions to replace the
portland cement that result in improvement to sustainability and
durability and reduced cost.
e. "Design strength" (f'c) is the specified compressive strength of

concrete at time(s) specified in this section to meet structural
design criteria.
f. "Mass Concrete" is any concrete system that approaches a maximum

temperature of 158 degrees F within the first 72 hours of placement.
In addition, it includes all concrete elements with a section
thickness of 3 feet or more regardless of temperature.
g. "Mixture proportioning" is the process of designing concrete mixture

proportions to enable it to meet the strength, service life and
constructability requirements of the project while minimizing the
initial and life-cycle cost.
h. "Mixture proportions" are the masses or volumes of individual

ingredients used to make a unit measure (cubic meter or cubic yard) of
concrete.
i. "Pozzolan" is a siliceous or siliceous and aluminous material, which

in itself possesses little or no cementitious value but will, in
finely divided form and in the presence of moisture, chemically react
with calcium hydroxide at ordinary temperatures to form compounds
possessing cementitious properties.
j. "Workability (or consistence)" is the ability of a fresh (plastic)

concrete mix to fill the form/mould properly with the desired work
(vibration) and without reducing the concrete's quality. Workability
depends on water content, chemical admixtures, aggregate (shape and
size distribution), cementitious content and age (level of hydration).
1.3 SUBMITTALS

Concrete Curing Plan

Quality Control Plan; G
Quality Control Personnel Certifications; G
Quality Control Organizational Chart
Laboratory Accreditation; G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Reinforcing steel; G
SD-03 Product Data
Joint sealants
Joint filler
Materials for Forms
Cementitious Materials
Vapor retarder
Concrete Curing Materials
Reinforcement
Admixtures
Waterstops
SD-05 Design Data
Concrete mix design; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Concrete mix design; G
Fly ash
Pozzolan
Ground granulated blast-furnace slag
Aggregates
Compressive strength tests; G
Air Content
Slump Tests
Water
SD-07 Certificates
Reinforcing Bars
Welder Qualifications
VOC Content for form release agents, curing compounds, and

Material Safety Data Sheets
Field Testing Technician and Testing Agency
Curing Compound
1.4 MODIFICATION OF REFERENCES
Accomplish work in accordance with ACI publications except as modified
herein. Consider the advisory or recommended provisions to be mandatory.

Interpret reference to the "Building Official," the "Structural Engineer,"
and the "Architect/Engineer" to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Follow ACI 301, ACI 304R and ASTM A934/A934M requirements and
recommendations. Do not deliver concrete until vapor retarder, vapor
barrier, forms, reinforcement, embedded items, and chamfer strips are in
place and ready for concrete placement. Do not store concrete curing
compounds or sealers with materials that have a high capacity to adsorb
volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions. Do not store concrete curing
compounds or sealers in occupied spaces.
1.5.1 Reinforcement
Store reinforcement of different sizes and shapes in separate piles or

racks raised above the ground to avoid excessive rusting. Protect from
contaminants such as grease, oil, and dirt. Ensure bar sizes can be
accurately identified after bundles are broken and tags removed.
1.6.1 Design Data
1.6.1.1 Concrete Mix Design
Sixty days minimum prior to concrete placement, submit a mix design for
each strength and type of concrete. Submit a complete list of materials
including type; brand; source and amount of cement, complementary
cementitious materials, and admixtures; and applicable reference
specifications. Submit mill test and all other test for cement,
complementary cementitious materials, aggregates, and admixtures.
Provide documentation of maximum nominal aggregate size, gradation
analysis, percentage retained and passing sieve, and a graph of percentage
retained verses sieve size. Provide mix proportion data using at least
three different water-cementitious material ratios for each type of
mixture, which produce a range of strength encompassing those required for
each type of concrete required. If source material changes, resubmit mix
proportion data using revised source material. Provide only materials
that have been proven by trial mix studies to meet the requirements of
this specification, unless otherwise approved in writing by the
Contracting Officer. Indicate clearly in the submittal where each mix
design is used when more than one mix design is submitted. Resubmit data
on concrete components if the qualities or source of components changes.
For previously approved concrete mix designs used within the past twelve
months, the previous mix design may be re-submitted without further trial
batch testing if accompanied by material test data conducted within the
last six months. Obtain mix design approval from the contracting officer
prior to concrete placement.
1.6.2 Shop Drawings
1.6.2.1 Reinforcing Steel
ACI SP-66. Indicate bending diagrams, assembly diagrams, splicing and

laps of bars, shapes, dimensions, and details of bar reinforcing,
accessories, and concrete cover. Do not scale dimensions from structural
drawings to determine lengths of reinforcing bars. Reproductions of
contract drawings are unacceptable.
1.6.3 Control Submittals
1.6.3.1 Concrete Curing Plan
Submit proposed materials, methods and duration for curing concrete

elements in accordance with ACI 308.1.
1.6.3.2 VOC Content for form release agents, curing compounds, and
Submit certification for the form release agent, curing compounds, and
concrete penetrating sealers that indicate the VOC content of each product.
1.6.3.3 Material Safety Data Sheets
Submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all materials that are
regulated for hazardous health effects. MSDS must be readily accessible
during each work shift to employees when they are at the construction site.
1.6.4 Test Reports
1.6.4.1 Fly Ash and Pozzolan
Submit test results in accordance with ASTM C618 for fly ash and
pozzolan. Submit test results performed within 6 months of submittal date.
1.6.4.2 Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag
Submit test results in accordance with ASTM C989/C989M for ground

granulated blast-furnace slag. Submit test results performed within 6
months of submittal date.
1.6.5 Quality Control Plan
Develop and submit for approval a concrete quality control program in

accordance with the guidelines of ACI 121R and as specified herein. The
plan must include approved laboratories. Provide direct oversight for the
concrete qualification program inclusive of associated sampling and
testing. All quality control reports must be provided to the Contracting
Officer, Quality Manager and Concrete Supplier. Maintain a copy of
ACI SP-15 and CRSI 10MSP at project site.
1.6.6 Quality Control Personnel Certifications
The Contractor must submit for approval the responsibilities of the

various quality control personnel, including the names and qualifications
of the individuals in those positions and a quality control organizational
chart defining the quality control hierarchy and the responsibility of the
various positions. Quality control personnel must be employed by the
Contractor.
Submit American Concrete Institute certification for the following:
a. CQC personnel responsible for inspection of concrete operations.
b. Lead Foreman or Journeyman of the Concrete Placing, Finishing, and

Curing Crews.
c. Field Testing Technicians: ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade

I.
1.6.6.1 Quality Manager Qualifications
The quality manager must hold a current license as a professional engineer

in a U.S. state or territory with experience on at least five (5) similar
projects. Evidence of extraordinary proven experience may be considered by
the Contracting Officer as sufficient to act as the Quality Manager.
1.6.6.2 Field Testing Technician and Testing Agency
Submit data on qualifications of proposed testing agency and technicians

for approval by the Contracting Officer prior to performing testing on
concrete.
a. Work on concrete under this contract must be performed by an ACI

Concrete Field Testing Technician Grade 1 qualified in accordance with
ACI SP-2 or equivalent. Equivalent certification programs must include
requirements for written and performance examinations as stipulated in
ACI SP-2.
b. Testing agencies that perform testing services on reinforcing steel

must meet the requirements of ASTM E329.
c. Testing agencies that perform testing services on concrete materials

must meet the requirements of ASTM C1077.
1.6.7 Laboratory Qualifications for Concrete Qualification Testing
The concrete testing laboratory must have the necessary equipment and
experience to accomplish required testing. The laboratory must meet the
requirements of ASTM C1077 and be Cement and Concrete Reference Laboratory
(CCRL) inspected.
1.6.8 Laboratory Accreditation
Laboratory and testing facilities must be provided by and at the expense

of the Contractor. The laboratories performing the tests must be
accredited in accordance with ASTM C1077, including ASTM C78/C78M and
ASTM C1260. The accreditation must be current and must include the
required test methods, as specified. Furthermore, the testing must comply
with the following requirements:
a. Aggregate Testing and Mix Proportioning: Aggregate testing and mixture

proportioning studies must be performed by an accredited laboratory
and under the direction of a registered professional engineer in a
U.S. state or territory competent in concrete materials who is
competent in concrete materials and must sign all reports and designs.
b. Acceptance Testing: Furnish all materials, labor, and facilities

required for molding, curing, testing, and protecting test specimens
at the site and in the laboratory. Furnish and maintain boxes or other
facilities suitable for storing and curing the specimens at the site
while in the mold within the temperature range stipulated by
ASTM C31/C31M.
c. Contractor Quality Control: All sampling and testing must be performed
by an approved, onsite, independent, accredited laboratory.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Provide space ventilation according to manufacturer recommendations, at a

minimum, during and following installation of concrete curing compound and
sealer. Maintain one of the following ventilation conditions during the
curing period or for 72 hours after installation:
a. Supply 100 percent outside air 24 hours a day.
b. Supply airflow at a rate of 6 air changes per hour, when outside

temperatures are between 55 degrees F and 84 degrees F and humidity is
between 30 percent and 60 percent.
c. Supply airflow at a rate of 1.5 air changes per hour, when outside air
conditions are not within the range stipulated above.
1.7.1 Submittals for Environmental Performance
a. Provide data indication the percentage of post-industrial pozzolan (fly

ash, blast furnace slag) cement substitution as a percentage of the
full product composite by weight.
b. Provide data indicating the percentage of post-industrial and

post-consumer recycled content aggregate.
c. Provide product data indicating the percentage of post-consumer

recycled steel content in each type of steel reinforcement as a
percentage of the full product composite by weight.
d. Provide product data stating the location where all products were
manufactured
e. For projects using FSC certified formwork, provide chain-of-custody

documentation for all certified wood products.
f. For projects using reusable formwork, provide data showing how formwork
is reused.
g. Provide MSDS product information data showing that form release agents
meet any environmental performance goals such as using vegetable and
soy based products.
h. Provide MSDS product information data showing that concrete adhesives

meet any environmental performance goals including low emitting, low
volatile organic compound products.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR WELDING WORK
Welding procedures must be in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M.
Verify that Welder qualifications are in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M or

under an equivalent qualification test approved in advance. Welders are
permitted to do only the type of welding for which each is specifically
qualified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS FOR FORMS
Provide wood, plywood, plastic, carton, or steel. Use plywood or steel

forms where a smooth form finish is required.
2.1.1 Wood Forms
Use lumber as specified in Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY and as

follows. Provide lumber that is square edged or tongue-and-groove boards,
free of raised grain, knotholes, or other surface defects. Provide
plywood that complies with NIST PS 1, B-B concrete form panels or better
or AHA A135.4, hardboard for smooth form lining.
2.1.1.1 Concrete Form Plywood (Standard Rough)
Provide plywood that conforms to NIST PS 1, B-B, concrete form, not less
than 5/8-inch thick.
2.1.1.2 Overlaid Concrete Form Plywood (Standard Smooth)
Provide plywood that conforms to NIST PS 1, B-B, high density form

overlay, not less than 5/8-inch thick.
2.1.2 Plastic Forms
Plastic lumber as specified in Section 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY. Provide

plastic forms that contain a minimum of 50 percent post-consumer recycled
content, or a minimum of 50 percent post-industrial recycled content.
2.1.3 Carton Forms
Moisture resistant treated paper faces, biodegradable, structurally

sufficient to support weight of wet concrete until initial set.
2.1.4 Steel Forms
Provide steel form surfaces that do not contain irregularities, dents, or

sags.
2.2 FORM TIES AND ACCESSORIES
Provide a form tie system that does not leave mild steel after break-off
or removal any closer than 2 inches from the exposed surface. Do not use
wire alone. Form ties and accessories must not reduce the effective cover
of the reinforcement.
2.2.1 Waterstops
2.2.1.1 PVC Waterstop
Polyvinylchloride waterstops must conform to COE CRD-C 572.
2.2.1.2 Rubber Waterstop
Rubber waterstops must conform to COE CRD-C 513.
2.2.1.3 Thermoplastic Elastomeric Rubber Waterstop
Thermoplastic elastomeric rubber waterstops must conform to ASTM D471.
2.2.1.4 Hydrophilic Waterstop
Swellable strip type compound of polymer modified chloroprene rubber that

swells upon contact with water must conform to ASTM D412 as follows:
Tensile strength 420 psi minimum; ultimate elongation 600 percent
minimum. Hardness must be 50 minimum on the type A durometer and the
volumetric expansion ratio in distilled water at 70 degrees F must be 3 to
1 minimum.
2.2.2 Dovetail Anchor Slot
Preformed metal slot approximately 1 inch by 1 inch of not less than 22

gage galvanized steel cast in concrete. Coordinate actual size and throat
opening with dovetail anchors and provide with removable filler material.
2.2.3 Perimeter Insulation
Perimeter insulation must be polystyrene conforming to ASTM C578, Type II;

polyurethane conforming to ASTM C591, Type II; or cellular glass
conforming to ASTM C552, Type I or IV.
2.3 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
2.3.1 Contractor-Furnished Mix Design
ACI 211.1, ACI 301, ACI 318, ACI 211.2, ACI 304.2R, and ACI 213R except as
otherwise specified. Indicate the compressive strength (f'c) of the
concrete for each portion of the structure(s) as specified below. Where
faster set time is required, use Type III cement before using calcium
chloride with approval from the contracting officer.
2.3.1.1 Footings
Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
a. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
b. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 .
c. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
d. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of

delivery for 1-1/2 inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
e. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of

delivery for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
2.3.1.2 Slab-on-Grade
a. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
d. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to

exceed 3 percent.
2.3.1.3 Slabs on Metal Deck
a. Minimum Compressive Strength: Refer to drawings.
d. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to

exceed 3 percent.
2.3.1.4 Mix Proportions for Normal Weight Concrete
Trial design batches, mixture proportioning studies, and testing

requirements for various classes and types of concrete specified are the
responsibility of the Contractor. Base mixture proportions on compressive
strength as determined by test specimens fabricated in accordance with
ASTM C192/C192M and tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M. Samples of
all materials used in mixture proportioning studies must be representative
of those proposed for use in the project and must be accompanied by the
manufacturer's or producer's test report indicating compliance with these
specifications. Base trial mixtures having proportions, consistencies,
and air content suitable for the work on methodology described in ACI 211.1.
In the trial mixture, use at least three different water-cementitious
material ratios for each type of mixture, which must produce a range of
strength encompassing those required for each class and type of concrete
required on the project. The maximum water-cementitious material ratio
allowed must be based on equivalent water-cementitious material ratio
calculations as determined by the conversion from the weight ratio of
water to cement plus pozzolan by weight equivalency method. Design
laboratory trial mixture for maximum permitted slump and air content.
Each combination of material proposed for use must have separate trial
mixture, except for accelerator or retarder use can be provided without
separate trial mixture. Report the temperature of concrete in each trial
batch. For each water-cementitious material ratio, at least three test
cylinders for each test age must be made and cured in accordance with
ASTM C192/C192M and tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M for 7 and 28
days. From these results, plot a curve showing the relationship between
water-cementitious material ratio and strength for each set of trial mix
studies. In addition, plot a curve showing the relationship between 7 and
28 day strengths.
2.3.1.5 Required Average Strength of Mix Design
The selected mixture must produce an average compressive strength

exceeding the specified strength by the amount indicated in ACI 301, but
may not exceed the specified strength at the same age by more than 20
percent. When a concrete production facility has a record of at least 15
consecutive tests, the standard deviation must be calculated and the
required average compressive strength must be determined in accordance
with ACI 301.
2.3.2 Ready-Mix Concrete
Provide concrete that meets the requirements of ASTM C94/C94M.
Ready-mixed concrete manufacturer must provide duplicate delivery tickets

with each load of concrete delivered. Provide delivery tickets with the
following information in addition to that required by ASTM C94/C94M:
Type and brand cement
Cement and complementary cementitious materials content in 94-pound bags

per cubic yard of concrete
Maximum size of aggregate
Amount and brand name of admixtures
Total water content expressed by water cementitious material ratio
2.3.3 Concrete Curing Materials
Provide concrete curing material in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5 and
ACI 308.1 Section 2. Submit product data for concrete curing compounds.
Submit manufactures instructions for placement of curing compound.
2.4 MATERIALS
2.4.1 Cementitious Materials
For exposed concrete, use one manufacturer and one source for each type of
cement, ground slag, fly ash, and pozzolan.
2.4.1.1 Fly Ash
ASTM C618, Class F, except that the maximum allowable loss on ignition
must not exceed 3 percent. Class F fly ash for use in mitigating
Alkali-Silica Reactivity must have a Calcium Oxide (CaO) content of less
than 8 percent and a total equivalent alkali content less than 1.5 percent.
Add with cement. Fly ash content must be a minimum of 15 percent by

weight of cementitious material, provided the fly ash does not reduce the
amount of cement in the concrete mix below the minimum requirements of
local building codes. Where the use of fly ash cannot meet the minimum
level, provide the maximum amount of fly ash permittable that meets the
code requirements for cement content. Report the chemical analysis of the
fly ash in accordance with ASTM C311/C311M. Evaluate and classify fly ash
in accordance with ASTM D5759.
2.4.1.2 Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
Natural pozzolan must be raw or calcined and conform to ASTM C618, Class
N, including the optional requirements for uniformity and effectiveness in
controlling Alkali-Silica reaction and must have an ignition loss not
exceeding 3 percent. Class N pozzolan for use in mitigating Alkali-Silica
Reactivity must have a Calcium Oxide (CaO) content of less than 13 percent
and total equivalent alkali content less than 3 percent.
2.4.1.3 Ultra Fine Fly Ash and Ultra Fine Pozzolan
Ultra Fine Fly Ash (UFFA) and Ultra Fine Pozzolan (UFP) must conform to
ASTM C618, Class F or N, and the following additional requirements:
a. The strength activity index at 28 days of age must be at least 95

percent of the control specimens.
b. The average particle size must not exceed 6 microns.
c. The sum of SiO2 + Al2O3 + Fe2O3 must be greater than 77 percent.
2.4.1.4 Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag
ASTM C989/C989M, Grade 120. Slag content must be a minimum of 25 percent

by weight of cementitious material.
2.4.1.5 Portland Cement
Provide cement that conforms to ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or II with

tri-calcium aluminates (C3A) content less than 10 percent and a maximum
cement-alkali content of 0.80 percent Na2Oe (sodium oxide) equivalent..
Use one brand and type of cement for formed concrete having
exposed-to-view finished surfaces.
2.4.1.6 Blended Cements
Blended cement must conform to ASTM C595/C595M and ASTM C1157/C1157M, Type
IP or IS, including the optional requirement for mortar expansion and
sulfate soundness and consist of a mixture of ASTM C150/C150M Type I, or
Type II cement and a complementary cementing material. The slag added to
the Type IS blend must be ASTM C989/C989M ground granulated blast-furnace
slag. The pozzolan added to the Type IP blend must be ASTM C618 Class F
and must be interground with the cement clinker. The manufacturer must
state in writing that the amount of pozzolan in the finished cement will
not vary more than plus or minus 5 mass percent of the finished cement
from lot-to-lot or within a lot. The percentage and type of mineral
admixture used in the blend must not change from that submitted for the
aggregate evaluation and mixture proportioning.
2.4.2 Water
Water must comply with the requirements of ASTM C1602/C1602M. Minimize

the amount of water in the mix. Improve workability by adjusting the
grading rather than by adding water. Water must be potable; free from
injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organic materials, or
other substances deleterious to concrete. Submit test report showing
water complies with ASTM C1602/C1602M.
2.4.3 Aggregates
ASTM C33/C33M, except as modified herein. Furnish aggregates for exposed

concrete surfaces from one source. Provide aggregates that do not contain
any substance which may be deleteriously reactive with the alkalies in the
cement. Submit test report showing compliance with ASTM C33/C33M.
Fine and coarse aggregates must show expansions less than 0.08 percent at
28 days after casting when testing in accordance with ASTM C1260. Should
the test data indicate an expansion of 0.08 percent or greater, reject the
aggregate(s) or perform additional testing using ASTM C1567 using the

Contractor's proposed mix design. In this case, include the mix design
low alkali portland cement and one of the following supplementary
cementitious materials:
1. GGBF slag at a minimum of 40 percent of total cementitious
2. Fly ash or natural pozzolan at a minimum of total cementitious of

a. 30 percent if (SiO2 plus Al2O3 plus Fe2O3) is 65 percent or more,
b. 25 percent if (SiO2 plus Al2O3 plus Fe2O3) is 70 percent or more,
c. 20 percent if (SiO2 plus Al2O3 plus Fe2O3) is 80 percent or more,
d. 15 percent if (SiO2 plus Al2O3 plus Fe2O3) is 90 percent or more.
3. Silica fume at a minimum of 7 percent of total cementitious.
If a combination of these materials is chosen, the minimum amount must be

a linear combination of the minimum amounts above. Include these
materials in sufficient proportion to show less than 0.08 percent
expansion at 28 days after casting when tested in accordance with
ASTM C1567.
Aggregates must not possess properties or constituents that are known to

have specific unfavorable effects in concrete when tested in accordance
with ASTM C295/C295M.
2.4.3.1 Aggregates/Combined Aggregate Gradation (Floor Slabs Only)
ASTM C33/C33M, uniformly graded and as follows: Nominal maximum aggregate

size of 1 inch. A combined sieve analysis must indicate a well graded
aggregate from coarsest to finest with not more than 18 percent and not
less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, except that less than
8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 (0.3mm) sieve,
and less than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than No. 50
(0.3mm). Provide sand that is at least 50 percent natural sand.
2.4.4 Nonshrink Grout
ASTM C1107/C1107M.
2.4.5 Admixtures
ASTM C494/C494M: Type A, water reducing; Type B, retarding; Type C,

accelerating; Type D, water-reducing and retarding; and Type E,
water-reducing and accelerating admixture. Do not use calcium chloride
admixtures. Submit product data for admixtures used in concrete.
2.4.5.1 Air-Entraining
ASTM C260/C260M.
2.4.5.2 High Range Water Reducer (HRWR) (Superplasticizers)
ASTM C494/C494M, Type F and Type G (HRWR retarding admixture) and

ASTM C1017/C1017M.
2.4.6 Vapor Retarder
ASTM E1745 Class A polyethylene sheeting, minimum 15 milthickness or

ASTM E1993/E1993M bituminous membrane or other equivalent material with a
maximum permeance rating of 0.01 perms per ASTM E96/E96M.
Consider plastic vapor retarders and adhesives with a high recycled

content, low toxicity low VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) levels.
2.4.7 Expansion/Contraction Joint Filler
ASTM D1751 or ASTM D1752 Type I or II. Material must be 1/2 inch thick,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.4.8 Joint Sealants
Submit manufacturer's product data, indicating VOC content.
2.4.8.1 Horizontal Surfaces, 3 Percent Slope, Maximum
ASTM D6690 or ASTM C920, Type M, Class 25, Use T.
2.4.8.2 Vertical Surfaces Greater Than 3 Percent Slope
ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use T. FS SS-S-200, no sag.
2.4.9 Biodegradable Form Release Agent
Provide form release agent that is colorless, biodegradable, and rapeseed

oil-based, soy oil-based, or water-based, with a low (maximum of 55
grams/liter (g/l)) VOC content. A minimum of 85 percent of the total
product must be biobased material. Provide product that does not bond
with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair
subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. Provide form release agent
that does not contain diesel fuel, petroleum-based lubricating oils,
waxes, or kerosene. Submit documentation indicating type of biobased
material in product and biobased content. Indicate relative dollar value
of biobased content products to total dollar value of products included in
project.
2.5 REINFORCEMENT
2.5.1 Reinforcing Bars
ACI 301 unless otherwise specified. Use deformed steel. ASTM A615/A615M
with the bars marked A, Grade 60; or ASTM A996/A996M with the bars marked
R, Grade 60, or marked A, Grade 60. Submit mill certificates for
reinforcing bars.
2.5.1.1 Weldable Reinforcing Bars
Provide weldable reinforcing bars that conform to ASTM A706/A706M and

ASTM A615/A615M and Supplement S1, Grade 60, except that the maximum
carbon content must be 0.55 percent.
2.5.2 Mechanical Reinforcing Bar Connectors
ACI 301. Provide 125 percent minimum yield strength of the reinforcement
bar.
2.5.3 Wire
2.5.3.1 Welded Wire Reinforcement
ASTM A1064/A1064M. Provide flat sheets of welded wire reinforcement for

slabs and toppings.
2.5.3.2 Steel Wire
Wire must conform to ASTM A1064/A1064M.
2.5.4 Reinforcing Bar Supports
Supports include bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices necessary

for proper spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded
wire reinforcement in place.
Provide wire bar type supports of coated or non-corrodible material

conforming to ACI SP-66 and CRSI 10MSP.
Legs of supports in contact with formwork must be hot-dip galvanized, or

plastic coated after fabrication, or stainless-steel bar supports.
2.5.5 Dowels for Load Transfer in Floors
Provide greased dowels for load transfer in floors of the type, design,
weight, and dimensions indicated. Provide dowel bars that are
plain-billet steel conforming to ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 40. Provide dowel
pipe that is steel conforming to ASTM A53/A53M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly constructed;

verify that substrates are level.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer,

notify Contracting Officer of unsatisfactory preparation before processing.
Check field dimensions before beginning installation. If dimensions vary

too much from design dimensions for proper installation, notify
Contracting Officer and wait for instructions before beginning
installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
Determine quantity of concrete needed and minimize the production of

excess concrete. Designate locations or uses for potential excess
concrete before the concrete is poured.
3.2.1 General
Surfaces against which concrete is to be placed must be free of debris,

loose material, standing water, snow, ice, and other deleterious
substances before start of concrete placing.
Remove standing water without washing over freshly deposited concrete.

Divert flow of water through side drains provided for such purpose.
3.2.2 Subgrade Under Foundations and Footings
When subgrade material is semiporous and dry, sprinkle subgrade surface

with water as required to eliminate suction at the time concrete is
deposited, or seal subgrade surface by covering surface with specified
vapor retarder. When subgrade material is porous, seal subgrade surface
by covering surface with specified vapor retarder.
3.2.3 Subgrade Under Slabs on Ground
Before construction of slabs on ground, have underground work on pipes and

conduits completed and approved.
Previously constructed subgrade or fill must be cleaned of foreign

materials.
Finish surface of capillary water barrier under interior slabs on ground

must not show deviation in excess of 1/4 inch when tested with a 10-foot
straightedge parallel with and at right angles to building lines.
Finished surface of subgrade or fill under exterior slabs on ground must

not be more than 0.02-foot above or 0.10-foot below elevation indicated.
3.2.4 Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs
Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to
obtain indicated elevations and contours in finished slab surface and must
be strong enough to support vibrating bridge screeds or roller pipe
screeds if nature of specified slab finish requires use of such
equipment. Align concrete surface to elevation of screed strips by use of
strike-off templates or approved compacting-type screeds.
3.2.5 Reinforcement and Other Embedded Items
Secure reinforcement, joint materials, and other embedded materials in

position, inspected, and approved before start of concrete placing.
3.3 FORMS
Provide forms, shoring, and scaffolding for concrete placementin

accordance with ACI 301 Section 2 and 5 and ACI 347. Set forms
mortar-tight and true to line and grade. Chamfer above grade exposed
joints, edges, and external corners of concrete 0.75 inch unless otherwise
indicated. Provide formwork with clean-out openings to permit inspection
and removal of debris.
3.3.1 Coating
Before concrete placement, coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form
release agent.
3.3.2 Reshoring
Reshore concrete elements in accordance with ACI 301 Section 2.
3.3.3 Reuse
Reuse forms providing the structural integrity of concrete and the
aesthetics of exposed concrete are not compromised. Wood forms must not
be clogged with paste and must be capable of absorbing high
water-cementitious material ratio paste.
3.3.4 Forms for Standard Rough Form Finish
Provide formwork in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5 with a surface

finish, SF-1.0, for formed surfaces that are to be concealed by other
construction.
3.3.5 Forms for Standard Smooth Form Finish
Provide formwork in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5 with a surface

finish, SF-3.0, for formed surfaces that are exposed to view.
3.3.6 Form Ties
Provide ties in accordance with ACI 301 section 2.
3.3.7 Tolerances for Form Construction
Construct formwork to ensure that after removal of forms and prior to

patching and finishing of formed surfaces, provide concrete surfaces in
accordance with tolerances specified in ACI 301 Section 5 and ACI 117.
3.3.8 Removal of Forms and Supports
After placing concrete, removal of forms must be in accordance with ACI 301
Section 2 except as modified by approved form removal schedule.
3.4 WATERSTOP INSTALLATION AND SPLICES
Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated.
Install waterstops to form a continuous diaphragm in each joint. Make

adequate provisions to support and protect waterstops during progress of
work. Protect waterstops protruding from joints from damage.
3.4.1 Hydrophilic Waterstop
Miter cut ends to be joined with sharp knife or shears. The ends must be
adhered with adhesive.
3.5 PLACING REINFORCEMENT AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
ACI 301 and ACI SP-66. Provide bars, welded wire reinforcement, wire
ties, supports, and other devices necessary to install and secure
reinforcement. Reinforcement must not have rust, scale, oil, grease,
clay, or foreign substances that would reduce the bond. Rusting of
reinforcement is a basis of rejection if the effective cross-sectional
area or the nominal weight per unit length has been reduced. Remove loose
rust prior to placing steel. Tack welding is prohibited.
3.5.1 General
Provide details of reinforcement that are in accordance with ACI 301 and
ACI SP-66 and as specified.
3.5.2 Vapor Retarder
Install in accordance with ASTM E1643. Provide beneath the on-grade

concrete floor slab. Use the greatest widths and lengths practicable to
eliminate joints wherever possible. Lap joints a minimum of 12 inches and
tape. Remove torn, punctured, or damaged vapor retarder material and
provide with new vapor retarder prior to placing concrete. Concrete
placement must not damage vapor retarder .
3.5.3 Perimeter Insulation
Install perimeter insulation per architectural drawing. Adhesive must be

used where insulation is applied to the interior surface of foundation
walls and may be used for exterior application.
3.5.4 Reinforcement Supports
Support reinforcement in accordance with ACI 301 Section 3. Supports for

coated or galvanized bars must also be coated with electrically compatible
material for a distance of at least 2 inches beyond the point of contact
with the bars.
3.5.5 Splicing
As indicated. For splices not indicated ACI 301. Do not splice at points
of maximum stress. Overlap welded wire reinforcement the spacing of the
cross wires, plus 2 inches. AWS D1.4/D1.4M. Approve welded splices prior
to use.
3.5.6 Future Bonding
Plug exposed, threaded, mechanical reinforcement bar connectors with a

greased bolt. Provide bolt threads that match the connector. Countersink
the connector in the concrete. Caulk the depression after the bolt is
installed.
3.5.7 Setting Miscellaneous Material
Place and secure anchors and bolts, pipe sleeves, conduits, and other such
items in position before concrete placement and support against
displacement. Plumb anchor bolts and check location and elevation.
Temporarily fill voids in sleeves with readily removable material to
prevent the entry of concrete.
3.5.8 Fabrication
Shop fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to shapes and dimensions

indicated for reinforcement, and as follows:
Provide fabrication tolerances that are in accordance with ACI 318 and
ACI SP-66.
Provide hooks and bends that are in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI SP-66.
Reinforcement must be bent cold to shapes as indicated. Bending must be

done in the shop. Rebending of a reinforcing bar that has been bent
incorrectly is not be permitted. Bending must be in accordance with
standard approved practice and by approved machine methods.
Tolerance on nominally square-cut, reinforcing bar ends must be in

accordance with ACI SP-66.
Deliver reinforcing bars bundled, tagged, and marked. Tags must be metal
with bar size, length, mark, and other information pressed in by machine.
Marks must correspond with those used on the placing drawings.
Do not use reinforcement that has any of the following defects:
a. Bar lengths, depths, and bends beyond specified fabrication tolerances
b. Bends or kinks not indicated on drawings or approved shop drawings
c. Bars with reduced cross-section due to rusting or other cause
Replace defective reinforcement with new reinforcement having required

shape, form, and cross-section area.
3.5.9 Placing Reinforcement
Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI SP-66.
For slabs on grade (over earth or over capillary water barrier) and for
footing reinforcement, support bars or welded wire reinforcement on
precast concrete blocks, spaced at intervals required by size of
reinforcement, to keep reinforcement the minimum height specified above
the underside of slab or footing.
For slabs other than on grade, supports for which any portion is less than
1 inch from concrete surfaces that are exposed to view or to be painted
must be of precast concrete units, plastic-coated steel, or stainless
steel protected bar supports. Precast concrete units must be wedge
shaped, not larger than 3-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches, and of thickness equal to
that indicated for concrete protection of reinforcement. Provide precast
units that have cast-in galvanized tie wire hooked for anchorage and blend
with concrete surfaces after finishing is completed.
Provide reinforcement that is supported and secured together to prevent

displacement by construction loads or by placing of wet concrete, and as
follows:
Provide supports for reinforcing bars that are sufficient in number and
have sufficient strength to carry the reinforcement they support, and in
accordance with ACI 318, ACI SP-66 and CRSI 10MSP. Do not use supports to
support runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction
loads.
Equip supports on ground and similar surfaces with sand-plates.
Support welded wire reinforcement as required for reinforcing bars.
Secure reinforcements to supports by means of tie wire. Wire must be

black, soft iron wire, not less than 16 gage.
Reinforcement must be accurately placed, securely tied at intersections,

and held in position during placing of concrete by spacers, chairs, or
other approved supports. Point wire-tie ends away from the form.
Unless otherwise indicated, numbers, type, and spacing of supports
must conform to ACI SP-66.
Bending of reinforcing bars partially embedded in concrete is permitted

only as specified in ACI SP-66 and ACI 318.
3.5.10 Spacing of Reinforcing Bars
Spacing must be as indicated. If not indicated, spacing must be in

accordance with the ACI 318 and ACI SP-66.
Reinforcing bars may be relocated to avoid interference with other

reinforcement, or with conduit, pipe, or other embedded items. If any
reinforcing bar is moved a distance exceeding one bar diameter or
specified placing tolerance, resulting rearrangement of reinforcement is
subject to preapproval by the Contracting Officer.
3.5.11 Concrete Protection for Reinforcement
Concrete protection must be in accordance with the ACI 318 and ACI SP-66.
3.5.12 Welding
Welding must be in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M.
3.6 BATCHING, MEASURING, MIXING, AND TRANSPORTING CONCRETE
ASTM C94/C94M, ACI 301, ACI 302.1R and ACI 304R, except as modified
herein. Batching equipment must be such that the concrete ingredients are
consistently measured within the following tolerances: 1 percent for
cement and water, 2 percent for aggregate, and 3 percent for admixtures.
Furnish mandatory batch ticket information for each load of ready mix
concrete.
3.6.1 Measuring
Make measurements at intervals as specified in paragraphs SAMPLING and

TESTING.
3.6.2 Mixing
ASTM C94/C94M, ACI 301 and ACI 304R. Machine mix concrete. Begin mixing
within 30 minutes after the cement has been added to the aggregates.
Place concrete within 90 minutes of either addition of mixing water to
cement and aggregates or addition of cement to aggregates if the air
temperature is less than 84 degrees F. Reduce mixing time and place
concrete within 60 minutes if the air temperature is greater than 84
degrees F except as follows: if set retarding admixture is used and slump
requirements can be met, limit for placing concrete may remain at 90
minutes. Additional water may be added, provided that both the specified
maximum slump and water-cementitious material ratio are not exceeded and
the required concrete strength is still met. When additional water is
added, an additional 30 revolutions of the mixer at mixing speed is
required. If the entrained air content falls below the specified limit,
add a sufficient quantity of admixture to bring the entrained air content
within the specified limits. Dissolve admixtures in the mixing water and
mix in the drum to uniformly distribute the admixture throughout the
batch. Do not reconstitute concrete that has begun to solidify.
3.6.3 Transporting
Transport concrete from the mixer to the forms as rapidly as practicable.

Prevent segregation or loss of ingredients. Clean transporting equipment
thoroughly before each batch. Do not use aluminum pipe or chutes. Remove
concrete which has segregated in transporting and dispose of as directed.
3.7 PLACING CONCRETE
Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5.
3.7.1 Footing Placement
Concrete for footings may be placed in excavations without forms upon

inspection and approval by the Contracting Officer. Excavation width must
be a minimum of 4 inches greater than indicated.
3.7.2 Pumping
ACI 304R and ACI 304.2R. Pumping must not result in separation or loss of
materials nor cause interruptions sufficient to permit loss of plasticity
between successive increments. Loss of slump in pumping equipment must
not exceed 2 inches at discharge/placement. Do not convey concrete
through pipe made of aluminum or aluminum alloy. Avoid rapid changes in
pipe sizes. Limit maximum size of course aggregate to 33 percent of the
diameter of the pipe. Limit maximum size of well rounded aggregate to 40
percent of the pipe diameter. Take samples for testing at both the point
of delivery to the pump and at the discharge end.
3.7.3 Cold Weather
ACI 306.1. Do not allow concrete temperature to decrease below 50 degrees

F. Obtain approval prior to placing concrete when the ambient temperature
is below 40 degrees F or when concrete is likely to be subjected to
freezing temperatures within 24 hours. Cover concrete and provide
sufficient heat to maintain 50 degrees F minimum adjacent to both the
formwork and the structure while curing. Limit the rate of cooling to 37
degrees F in any 1 hour and 50 degrees F per 24 hours after heat
application.
3.7.4 Hot Weather
Maintain required concrete temperature using Figure 4.2 in ACI 305R to

prevent the evaporation rate from exceeding 0.2 pound of water per square
foot of exposed concrete per hour. Cool ingredients before mixing or use
other suitable means to control concrete temperature and prevent rapid
drying of newly placed concrete. Shade the fresh concrete as soon as
possible after placing. Start curing when the surface of the fresh
concrete is sufficiently hard to permit curing without damage. Provide
water hoses, pipes, spraying equipment, and water hauling equipment, where
job site is remote to water source, to maintain a moist concrete surface
throughout the curing period. Provide burlap cover or other suitable,
permeable material with fog spray or continuous wetting of the concrete
when weather conditions prevent the use of either liquid membrane curing
compound or impervious sheets. For vertical surfaces, protect forms from
direct sunlight and add water to top of structure once concrete is set.
3.7.5 Bonding
Surfaces of set concrete at joints, must be roughened and cleaned of

laitance, coatings, loose particles, and foreign matter. Roughen surfaces
in a manner that exposes the aggregate uniformly and does not leave
laitance, loosened particles of aggregate, nor damaged concrete at the
surface.
Obtain bonding of fresh concrete that has set as follows:
At joints between footings and walls or columns, between walls or columns

and the beams or slabs they support, and elsewhere unless otherwise
specified; roughened and cleaned surface of set concrete must be
dampened, but not saturated, immediately prior to placing of fresh
concrete.
At joints in exposed-to-view work; at vertical joints in walls; at joints

near midpoint of span in girders, beams, supported slabs, other
structural members; in work designed to contain liquids; the roughened
and cleaned surface of set concrete must be dampened but not saturated
and covered with a cement grout coating.
Provide cement grout that consists of equal parts of portland cement and
fine aggregate by weight with not more than 6 gallons of water per
sack of cement. Apply cement grout with a stiff broom or brush to a
minimum thickness of 1/16 inch. Deposit fresh concrete before cement
grout has attained its initial set.
3.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT
Provide as specified in the Waste Management Plan and as follows.
3.8.1 Mixing Equipment
Before concrete pours, designate Contractor-owned site meeting

environmental standards or on-site area to be paved later in project for
cleaning out concrete mixing trucks. Minimize water used to wash
equipment.
3.8.2 Hardened, Cured Waste Concrete
Crush and reuse hardened, cured waste concrete as fill or as a base course
for pavement.
3.8.3 Reinforcing Steel
Collect reinforcing steel and place in designated area for recycling.
3.8.4 Other Waste
Identify concrete manufacturer's or supplier's policy for collection or

return of construction waste, unused material, deconstruction waste,
and/or packaging material. Return excess cement to supplier. Institute
deconstruction and construction waste separation and recycling for use in
manufacturer's programs. When such a program is not available, seek local
recyclers to reclaim the materials.
3.9 SURFACE FINISHES EXCEPT FLOOR, SLAB, AND PAVEMENT FINISHES
3.9.1 Defects
Repair surface defects in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5.
3.9.2 Not Against Forms (Top of Walls)
Surfaces not otherwise specified must be finished with wood floats to even
surfaces. Finish must match adjacent finishes.
3.9.3 Formed Surfaces
3.9.3.1 Tolerances
ACI 117 and as indicated.
3.9.3.2 As-Cast Rough Form
Provide for surfaces not exposed to public view a surface finish SF-1.0.
Patch holes and defects in accordance with ACI 301.
3.9.3.3 Standard Smooth Finish
Provide for surfaces exposed to public view a surface finish SF-3.0. Patch
holes and defects in accordance with ACI 301.
3.10 FLOOR, SLAB, AND PAVEMENT FINISHES AND MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION
ACI 301 and ACI 302.1R, unless otherwise specified. Slope floors
uniformly to drains where drains are provided. Depress the concrete base
slab where quarry tile, or ceramic tile are indicated. Steel trowel and
fine-broom finish concrete slabs that are to receive quarry tile, ceramic
tile, or paver tile. Where straightedge measurements are specified,
Contractor must provide straightedge.
3.10.1 Finish
Place, consolidate, and immediately strike off concrete to obtain proper

contour, grade, and elevation before bleedwater appears. Permit concrete
to attain a set sufficient for floating and supporting the weight of the
finisher and equipment. If bleedwater is present prior to floating the
surface, drag the excess water off or remove by absorption with porous
materials. Do not use dry cement to absorb bleedwater.
3.10.1.1 Scratched
Use for surfaces intended to receive bonded applied cementitious

applications. Finish concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5 for a
scratched finish.
3.10.1.2 Floated
Use for exterior slabs where not otherwise specified. Finish concrete in
accordance with ACI 301 Section 5 for a floated finish.
3.10.1.3 Concrete Containing Silica Fume
Finish using magnesium floats or darbies.
3.10.1.4 Steel Troweled
Use for floors intended as walking surfaces, and for reception of floor
coverings. Finish concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5 for a
steel troweled finish.
3.10.1.5 Nonslip Finish
Use on surfaces of exterior platforms, steps, and landings; and on

exterior and interior pedestrian ramps. Finish concrete in accordance
with ACI 301 Section 5 for a dry-shake finish. After the selected
material has been embedded by the two floatings, complete the operation
with a broomed finish.
3.10.1.6 Broomed
Use on surfaces of exterior walks, platforms, patios, and ramps, unless

otherwise indicated. Finish concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5
for a broomed finish.
3.10.1.7 Pavement
Screed the concrete with a template advanced with a combined longitudinal

and crosswise motion. Maintain a slight surplus of concrete ahead of the
template. After screeding, float the concrete longitudinally. Use a
straightedge to check slope and flatness; correct and refloat as
necessary. Obtain final finish by a burlap drag. Drag a strip of clean,
wet burlap from 3 to 10 feet wide and 2 feet longer than the pavement
width across the slab. Produce a fine, granular, sandy textured surface
without disfiguring marks. Round edges and joints with an edger having a
radius of 1/8 inch.
3.10.2 Concrete Walks
Provide 4 inches thick minimum. Provide contraction joints spaced every 5

linear feet unless otherwise indicated. Cut contraction joints one inch
deep with a jointing tool after the surface has been finished. Provide
0.5 inch thick transverse expansion joints at changes in direction where
sidewalk abuts curb, steps, rigid pavement, or other similar structures;
space expansion joints every 50 feet maximum. Give walks a broomed
finish. Unless indicated otherwise, provide a transverse slope of 1/48.
Limit variation in cross section to 1/4 inch in 5 feet.
3.10.3 Pits and Trenches
Place bottoms and walls monolithically or provide waterstops and keys.
3.10.4 Curbs
Provide contraction joints spaced every 10 feet maximum unless otherwise

indicated. Cut contraction joints 3/4 inch deep with a jointing tool
after the surface has been finished. Provide expansion joints 1/2 inch
thick and spaced every 100 feet maximum unless otherwise indicated.
Perform pavement finish.
3.11 JOINTS
3.11.1 Construction Joints
Make and locate joints not indicated so as not to impair strength and
appearance of the structure, as approved. Joints must be perpendicular to
main reinforcement. Reinforcement must be continued and developed across
construction joints. Locate construction joints as follows:
3.11.1.1 Maximum Allowable Construction Joint Spacing
a. In walls at not more than 60 feet in any horizontal direction.
b. In slabs on ground, so as to divide slab into areas not in excess of

1,200 square feet.
3.11.1.2 Construction Joints for Constructability Purposes
a. In walls, at top of footing; at top of slabs on ground; at top and

bottom of door and window openings or where required to conform to
architectural details; and at underside of deepest beam or girder
framing into wall.
b. In columns or piers, at top of footing; at top of slabs on ground; and

at underside of deepest beam or girder framing into column or pier.
c. Near midpoint of spans for supported slabs, beams, and girders unless a
beam intersects a girder at the center, in which case construction
joints in girder must offset a distance equal to twice the width of
the beam. Make transfer of shear through construction joint by use of
inclined reinforcement.
Provide keyways at least 1-1/2-inches deep in construction joints in walls

and slabs and between walls and footings; approved bulkheads may be used
for slabs.
3.11.2 Isolation Joints in Slabs on Ground
Provide joints at points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical

surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
elsewhere as indicated.
Fill joints with premolded joint filler strips 1/2 inch thick, extending
full slab depth. Install filler strips at proper level below finish floor
elevation with a slightly tapered, dress-and-oiled wood strip temporarily
secured to top of filler strip to form a groove not less than 3/4 inch in
depth where joint is sealed with sealing compound and not less than 1/4
inch in depth where joint sealing is not required. Remove wood strip
after concrete has set. Contractor must clean groove of foreign matter
and loose particles after surface has dried.
3.11.3 Contraction and Control Joints in Slabs on Ground
Provide joints to form panels as indicated.
Under and on exact line of each control joint, cut 50 percent of welded
wire reinforcement before placing concrete.
Sawcut contraction joints into slab on ground in accordance with ACI 301
Section 5.
3.11.4 Sealing Joints in Slabs on Ground
Contraction and control joints which are to receive finish flooring

material must be sealed with joint sealing compound after concrete curing
period. Slightly underfill groove with joint sealing compound to prevent
extrusion of compound. Remove excess material as soon after sealing as
possible.
Sealed groove must be left ready to receive filling material that is

provided as part of finish floor covering work.
3.12 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING
3.12.1 Standard Floor Topping
Provide topping for treads and platforms of metal steel stairs and
elsewhere as indicated.
Preparations Prior to Placing
When topping is placed on a green concrete base slab, screed surface of

base slab to a level not more than 1-1/2 inches nor less than 1 inch below
required finish surface. Remove water and laitance from surface of base
slab before placing topping mixture. As soon as water ceases to rise to
surface of base slab, place topping.
When topping is placed on a hardened concrete base slab, remove dirt,

loose material, oil, grease, asphalt, paint, and other contaminants from
base slab surface, leaving a clean surface. Prior to placing topping
mixture, 2-1/2-inches minimum, slab surface must be dampened and left free
of standing water. Immediately before topping mixture is placed, broom a
coat of neat cement grout onto surface of slab. Do not allow cement grout
to set or dry before topping is placed.
When topping is placed on a metal surface, such as metal pans for steel
stairs, remove dirt, loose material, oil, grease, asphalt, paint, and
other contaminants from metal surface.
Placing
Spread standard topping mixture evenly on previously prepared base slab or

metal surface, brought to correct level with a straightedge, and struck
off. Topping must be consolidated, floated, checked for trueness of
surface, and refloated as specified for float finish.
Finishing
Give trowel finish standard floor topping surfaces.
Give other finishes standard floor topping surfaces as indicated.
3.13 CURING AND PROTECTION
ACI 301 Section 5, unless otherwise specified. Begin curing immediately

following form removal. Avoid damage to concrete from vibration created
by blasting, pile driving, movement of equipment in the vicinity,
disturbance of formwork or protruding reinforcement, and any other
activity resulting in ground vibrations. Protect concrete from injurious

action by sun, rain, flowing water, frost, mechanical injury, tire marks,
and oil stains. Do not allow concrete to dry out from time of placement
until the expiration of the specified curing period. Do not use
membrane-forming compound on surfaces where appearance would be
objectionable, on any surface to be painted, where coverings are to be
bonded to the concrete, or on concrete to which other concrete is to be
bonded. If forms are removed prior to the expiration of the curing
period, provide another curing procedure specified herein for the
remaining portion of the curing period. Provide moist curing for those
areas receiving liquid chemical sealer-hardener or epoxy coating. Allow
curing compound/sealer installations to cure prior to the installation of
materials that adsorb VOCs.
3.13.1 Curing Periods
ACI 301 Section 5, except 10 days for retaining walls, pavement or

chimneys. Begin curing immediately after placement. Protect concrete
from premature drying, excessively hot temperatures, and mechanical
injury; and maintain minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant
temperature for the period necessary for hydration of the cement and
hardening of the concrete. The materials and methods of curing are
subject to approval by the Contracting Officer.
3.13.2 Curing Formed Surfaces
Accomplish curing of formed surfaces, including undersurfaces of girders,

beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces by moist curing with
forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If
forms are removed before end of curing period, accomplish final curing of
formed surfaces by any of the curing methods specified above, as
applicable.
3.13.3 Curing Unformed Surfaces
Accomplish initial curing of unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs,

floor topping, and other flat surfaces, by membrane curing.
Unless otherwise specified, accomplish final curing of unformed surfaces

by any of curing methods specified, as applicable.
Accomplish final curing of concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor

hardener of finish flooring by moisture-retaining cover curing.
3.13.4 Temperature of Concrete During Curing
When temperature of atmosphere is 41 degrees F and below, maintain

temperature of concrete at not less than 55 degrees F throughout concrete
curing period or 45 degrees F when the curing period is measured by
maturity. When necessary, make arrangements before start of concrete
placing for heating, covering, insulation, or housing as required to
maintain specified temperature and moisture conditions for concrete during
curing period.
When the temperature of atmosphere is 80 degrees F and above or during

other climatic conditions which cause too rapid drying of concrete, make
arrangements before start of concrete placing for installation of wind
breaks, of shading, and for fog spraying, wet sprinkling, or
moisture-retaining covering of light color as required to protect concrete
during curing period.
Changes in temperature of concrete must be uniform and not exceed 37

degrees F in any 1 hour nor 80 degrees F in any 24-hour period.
3.13.5 Protection from Mechanical Injury
During curing period, protect concrete from damaging mechanical

disturbances, particularly load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive
vibration and from damage caused by rain or running water.
3.13.6 Protection After Curing
Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage by construction operations.
3.14.1 Sampling
ASTM C172/C172M. Collect samples of fresh concrete to perform tests

specified. ASTM C31/C31M for making test specimens.
3.14.2 Testing
3.14.2.1 Slump Tests
ASTM C143/C143M. Take concrete samples during concrete

placement/discharge. The maximum slump may be increased as specified with
the addition of an approved admixture provided that the water-cementitious
material ratio is not exceeded. Perform tests at commencement of concrete
placement, when test cylinders are made, and for each batch (minimum) or
every 20 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete.
3.14.2.2 Temperature Tests
Test the concrete delivered and the concrete in the forms. Perform tests
in hot or cold weather conditions (below 50 degrees F and above 80 degrees
F) for each batch (minimum) or every 20 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete,
until the specified temperature is obtained, and whenever test cylinders
and slump tests are made.
3.14.2.3 Compressive Strength Tests
ASTM C39/C39M. Make six 6 inch by 12 inch test cylinders for each set of
tests in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M, ASTM C172/C172M and applicable
requirements of ACI 305R and ACI 306R. Take precautions to prevent
evaporation and loss of water from the specimen. Test two cylinders at 7
days, two cylinders at 28 days, and hold two cylinder in reserve. Take
samples for strength tests of each mix design of concrete placed each day
not less than once a day, nor less than once for each 100 cubic yards of
concrete for the first 500 cubic yards, then every 500 cubic yards
thereafter, nor less than once for each 5400 square feet of surface area
for slabs or walls. For the entire project, take no less than five sets
of samples and perform strength tests for each mix design of concrete
placed. Each strength test result must be the average of two cylinders
from the same concrete sample tested at 28 days. Concrete compressive
tests must meet the requirements of ACI 318 Section 5.6. Retest locations
represented by erratic core strengths. Where retest does not meet
concrete compressive strength requirements submit a mitigation or
remediation plan for review and approval by the contracting officer.

Repair core holes with nonshrink grout. Match color and finish of
adjacent concrete.
3.14.2.4 Air Content
ASTM C173/C173M or ASTM C231/C231M for normal weight concrete. Test

air-entrained concrete for air content at the same frequency as specified
for slump tests.
3.14.2.5 Strength of Concrete Structure
The strength of the concrete structure will be considered to be deficient

if any of the following conditions are identified:
Failure to meet compressive strength tests as evaluated
Reinforcement not conforming to requirements specified
Concrete which differs from required dimensions or location in such a

manner as to reduce strength
Concrete curing and protection of concrete against extremes of temperature

during curing, not conforming to requirements specified
Concrete subjected to damaging mechanical disturbances, particularly load

stresses, heavy shock, and excessive vibration
Poor workmanship likely to result in deficient strength
Where the strength of the concrete structure is considered deficient

submit a mitigation or remediation plan for review and approval by the
contracting officer.
3.14.2.6 Non-Conforming Materials
Factors that indicate that there are non-conforming materials include (but
not limited to) excessive compressive strength, inadequate compressive
strength, excessive slump, excessive voids and honeycombing, concrete
delivery records that indicate excessive time between mixing and
placement, or excessive water was added to the mixture during delivery and
placement. Any of these indicators alone are sufficient reason for the
Contracting Officer to request additional sampling and testing.
Investigations into non-conforming materials must be conducted at the

Contractor's expense. The Contractor must be responsible for the
investigation and must make written recommendations to adequately mitigate
or remediate the non-conforming material. The Contracting Officer may
accept, accept with reduced payment, require mitigation, or require
removal and replacement of non-conforming material at no additional cost
to the Government.
3.14.2.7 Testing Concrete Structure for Strength
When there is evidence that strength of concrete structure in place does

not meet specification requirements or there are non-conforming materials,
make cores drilled from hardened concrete for compressive strength
determination in accordance with ASTM C42/C42M, and as follows:
Take at least three representative cores from each member or area of

concrete-in-place that is considered potentially deficient. Location
of cores will be determined by the Contracting Officer.
Test cores after moisture conditioning in accordance with ASTM C42/C42M if

concrete they represent is more than superficially wet under service.
Air dry cores, (60 to 80 degrees F with relative humidity less than 60
percent) for 7 days before test and test dry if concrete they
represent is dry under service conditions.
Strength of cores from each member or area are considered satisfactory if

their average is equal to or greater than 85 percent of the 28-day
design compressive strength of the class of concrete.
Fill core holes solid with patching mortar and finished to match adjacent
concrete surfaces.
Correct concrete work that is found inadequate by core tests in a manner

approved by the Contracting Officer.
3.15 REPAIR, REHABILITATION AND REMOVAL
Before the Contracting Officer accepts the structure the Contractor must
inspect the structure for cracks, damage and substandard concrete
placements that may adversely affect the service life of the structure. A
report documenting these defects must be prepared which includes
recommendations for repair, removal or remediation must be submitted to
the Contracting Officer for approval before any corrective work is
accomplished.
3.15.1 Crack Repair
Prior to final acceptance, all cracks in excess of 0.02 inches wide must
be documented and repaired. The proposed method and materials to repair
the cracks must be submitted to the Contracting Officer for approval. The
proposal must address the amount of movement expected in the crack due to
temperature changes and loading.
3.15.2 Repair of Weak Surfaces
Weak surfaces are defined as mortar-rich, rain-damaged, uncured, or

containing exposed voids or deleterious materials. Concrete surfaces with
weak surfaces less than 1/4 inch thick must be diamond ground to remove
the weak surface. Surfaces containing weak surfaces greater than 1/4 inch
thick must be removed and replaced or mitigated in a manner acceptable to
3.15.3 Failure of Quality Assurance Test Results
Proposed mitigation efforts by the Contractor must be approved by the

Contracting Officer prior to proceeding.
SECTION 04 20 00
MASONRY
02/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ACI 530/530.1 ( 2013) Building Code Requirements and

Specification for Masonry Structures and
Related Commentaries

Concrete
ASTM A153/A153M (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc

Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware

Reinforcement
ASTM A641/A641M (2009a; R 2014) Standard Specification for

Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire
ASTM B633 (2013) Standard Specification for

Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron
and Steel
ASTM C1019 (2013) Standard Test Method for Sampling

and Testing Grout
ASTM C1072 (2013; E 2014) Standard Test Method for

Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond
Strength
ASTM C1142 (1995; R 2013) Standard Specification for

Extended Life Mortar for Unit Masonry
ASTM C129 (2014) Standard Specification for

Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units
Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

Cement

Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes
ASTM C270 (2014) Standard Specification for Mortar

for Unit Masonry
ASTM C476 (2010) Standard Specification for Grout

for Masonry

Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C641 (2009) Staining Materials in Lightweight

Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C67 (2014) Standard Test Methods for Sampling

and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile
ASTM C780 (2014a) Preconstruction and Construction

Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and
Reinforced Unit Masonry
ASTM C90 (2014) Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units
ASTM C91/C91M (2012) Standard Specification for Masonry

Cement

ASTM C989/C989M (2014) Standard Specification for Slag

Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars
ASTM D2000 (2012) Standard Classification System for

Rubber Products in Automotive Applications
ASTM D2240 (2005; R 2010) Standard Test Method for

Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness
ASTM D2287 (2012) Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and

Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds
ASTM D7611/D7611M (2013; E 2014) Standard Practice for

Coding Plastic Manufactured Articles for
Resin Identification
ASTM E514/E514M (2014a) Standard Test Method for Water

Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry
UFC 3-310-04 (2013) Seismic Design for Buildings
1.2.1 Plastic Identification
Verify that plastic products to be incorporated into the project are

labeled in accordance with ASTM D7611/D7611M. Where products are not
labeled, submit product data indicating polymeric information in the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Type
1 Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET, PETE)
2 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
3 Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC)
4 Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE)
5 Polypropylene (PP)
6 Polystyrene (PS)
7. Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in question is made
with a resin other than the six listed above, or is made of more than one
resin listed above, and used in a multi-layer combination.
1.2.2 Design Requirements
1.2.2.1 Unit Strength Method
Compute compressive strength of masonry system "Unit Strength Method",

ACI 530/530.1. Submit calculations and certifications of unit and mortar
strength.
1.2.2.2 Seismic Requirement
In addition to design requirements of ICC IBC, provide additional seismic

reinforcement in accordance with UFC 3-310-04 and as detailed on the
drawings. The total minimum reinforcing percentage for structural walls
shall be 0.20 percent and non-structural walls shall be 0.15 percent. The
maximum spacing of reinforcing bars shall be as follows:
Wall Type Vertical Horizontal
Structural 24 inches 48 inches
Non-structural 48 inches 80 inches
Bond beams are required at the top of footings, at the bottom and top of
openings at roof and floor levels, and at the top of parapet walls.
1.2.2.3 Special Inspection
Perform special inspections and testing for seismic-resisting systems and

components in accordance with UFC 3-310-04 SEISMIC DESIGN FOR BUILDINGS
and as indicated on drawings.
1.2.2.4 Masonry Strength
Determine masonry strength in accordance with ACI 530/530.1; submit test

reports on three prisms as specified in ACI 530/530.1. The cost of
testing shall be paid by the Contractor.
1.2.3 Additional Requirements
a. Maintain at least one spare vibrator on site at all times.
b. Provide bracing and scaffolding necessary for masonry work. Design

bracing to resist wind pressure as required by local code.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings; G, A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Cement; G, A/E
Insulation; G, A/E
Cold Weather Installation; G, A/E
Water-Repellant Admixture; G, A/E
SD-04 Samples
Concrete Masonry Units (CMU); G, A/E

Anchors, Ties, and Bar Positioners; G, A/E
Expansion-Joint Materials; G, A/E
Joint Reinforcement; G, A/E
Insulation; G, A/E
SD-05 Design Data
Pre-mixed Mortar; G, A/E

Unit Strength Method; G, A/E
SD-06 Test Reports
Efflorescence Test; G, A/E

Field Testing of Mortar; G, A/E
Field Testing of Grout; G, A/E
Prism tests; G, A/E
Masonry Cement; G, A/E
Masonry Inspector Qualifications; G, A/E

Single-Wythe Masonry Wall Water Penetration Test; G, A/E
SD-07 Certificates
Concrete Masonry Units (CMU)

Anchors, Ties, and Bar Positioners
Expansion-Joint Materials
Joint Reinforcement
Masonry Cement
Insulation
Precast Concrete Items
Admixtures for Masonry Mortar
Admixtures for Grout
Insulation
Contamination
Masonry Cement
Plastic Identification
Take-Back Program
1.4.1 Appearance
Manufacture bricks at one time and from the same batch. Blend all brick
to produce a uniform appearance when installed. An observable "banding"
or "layering" of colors or textures caused by improperly mixed brick is
unacceptable.
1.4.2 Contamination
When using bricks containing contaminated soil, supplier shall certify

that the hazardous waste is neutralized by the manufacturing process and
that no additional pollutants will be released, or that the product is
free from hazardous contaminants.
1.4.3 Masonry Inspector Qualifications
A qualified masonry inspector approved by the Contracting Officer shall

perform inspection of the masonry work. Minimum qualifications for the
masonry inspector shall be 5 years of reinforced masonry inspection
experience or acceptance by a State, municipality, or other governmental
body having a program of examining and certifying inspectors for
reinforced masonry construction. The masonry inspector shall be present
during preparation of masonry prisms, sampling and placing of masonry
units, placement of reinforcement (including placement of dowels in
footings and foundation walls), inspection of grout space, immediately
prior to closing of cleanouts, and during grouting operations. The
masonry inspector shall assure compliance with the drawings and
specifications. The masonry inspector shall keep a complete record of all
inspections and shall submit daily written reports to the Quality Control
Supervisory Representative reporting the quality of masonry construction.
Submit copies of masonry inspector reports.
1.4.4 Detail Drawings
Submit detail drawings showing bar splice locations. . Bent bars shall
be identified on a bending diagram and shall be referenced and located on
the drawings. Wall dimensions, bar clearances, and wall openings greater
than one masonry unit in area shall be shown. No approval will be given
to the shop drawings until the Contractor certifies that all openings,
including those for mechanical and electrical service, are shown. If,
during construction, additional masonry openings are required, the
approved shop drawings shall be resubmitted with the additional openings
shown along with the proposed changes. Location of these additional
openings shall be clearly highlighted. The minimum scale for wall
elevations shall be 1/4 inch per foot. Reinforcement bending details
shall conform to the requirements of ACI SP-66. Submit drawings including
plans, elevations, and details of wall reinforcement; details of
reinforcing bars at corners and wall intersections; offsets; tops,
bottoms, and ends of walls; control and expansion joints; lintels; and
wall openings.
Materials shall be delivered, stored, handled, and protected to avoid

chipping, breakage, and contact with soil or contaminating material.
Store and prepare materials in already disturbed areas to minimize project
site disturbance and size of project site.
1.5.1 Masonry Units
Cover and protect moisture-controlled concrete masonry units and

cementitious materials from precipitation. Conform to all handling and
storage requirements of ASTM C90. Mark prefabricated lintels on top sides
to show either the lintel schedule number or the number and size of top
and bottom bars.
1.5.2 Reinforcement, Anchors, and Ties
Steel reinforcing bars, coated anchors, ties, and joint reinforcement

shall be stored above the ground. Steel reinforcing bars and uncoated
ties shall be free of loose mill scale and rust.
1.5.3 Cementitious Materials, Sand and Aggregates
Cementitious and other packaged materials shall be delivered in unopened

containers, plainly marked and labeled with manufacturers' names and
brands. Cementitious material shall be stored in dry, weathertight
enclosures or be completely covered. Cement shall be handled in a manner
that will prevent the inclusion of foreign materials and damage by water
or dampness. Store sand and aggregates in a manner to prevent
contamination or segregation.
Conform to ACI 530/530.1 for hot and cold weather masonry erection.
1.6.1 Hot Weather Installation
Take the following precautions if masonry is erected when the ambient air
temperature is more than 99 degrees F in the shade and the relative
humidity is less than 50 percent or the ambient air temperature exceeds 90

degrees F and the wind velocity is more than 8 mph. All masonry materials
shall be shaded from direct sunlight; mortar beds shall be spread no more
than 4 feet ahead of masonry; masonry units shall be set within one minute
of spreading mortar; and after erection, masonry shall be protected from
direct exposure to wind and sun for 48 hours.
1.6.2 Cold Weather Installation
Before erecting masonry when ambient temperature or mean daily air

temperature falls below 40 degrees F or temperature of masonry units is
below 40 degrees F, submit a written statement of proposed cold weather
construction procedures for approval.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
The source of materials which will affect the appearance of the finished
work shall not be changed after the work has started except with
Contracting Officer's approval. Submit sample of colored mortar with
applicable masonry unit and color samples of three stretcher units and one
unit for each type of special shape. Units shall show the full range of
color and texture. Submit test reports from an approved independent
laboratory. Test reports on a previously tested material shall be
certified as the same as that proposed for use in this project. Submit
certificates of compliance stating that the materials meet the specified
requirements.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU)
Submit samples and certificates as specified. Cement shall have a low

alkali content and be of one brand. Units shall be of modular dimensions
and air, water, or steam cured. Exposed surfaces of units shall be smooth
and of uniform texture. Exterior concrete masonry units shall have
water-repellant admixture added during manufacture.
a. Non-Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C129, made with normal weight aggregate.
2.2.1 Aggregates
Lightweight aggregates and blends of lightweight and heavier aggregates in

proportions used in producing the units, shall comply with the following
requirements when tested for stain-producing iron compounds in accordance
with ASTM C641: by visual classification method, the iron stain deposited
on the filter paper shall not exceed the "light stain" classification.
Use industrial waste by-products (air-cooled slag, cinders, or bottom
ash), ground waste glass and concrete, granulated slag, and expanded slag
in aggregates. Slag shall comply with ASTM C989/C989M.
2.2.2 Kinds and Shapes
Units shall be modular in size and shall include closer, jamb, header,
lintel, and bond beam units and special shapes and sizes to complete the
work as indicated. In exposed interior masonry surfaces, units having a
bullnose shall be used for vertical external corners except at door,
window, and louver jambs. Radius of the bullnose shall be 1 inch. Units
used in exposed masonry surfaces in any one building shall have a uniform
fine to medium texture and a uniform color.
2.2.2.1 Architectural Units
Units shall have patterned face shell. Face shell pattern shall be
precision. Units shall be integrally colored during manufacture. Color
shall match existing building. Patterned face shell shall be properly
aligned in the completed wall.
2.3 MASONRY MORTAR
Type M mortar shall conform to ASTM C270 and shall be used for foundation
walls. Mortar Type S shall conform to the proportion specification of
ASTM C270 except Type S cement-lime mortar proportions shall be 1 part
cement, 1/2 part lime and 4-1/2 parts aggregate; Type N cement-lime mortar
proportions shall be 1 part cement, 1 part lime and 6 parts aggregate.
Type N or S mortar shall be used for non-load-bearing, non-shear-wall
interior masonry; and Type S for remaining masonry work; except where
higher compressive strength is indicated on structural drawings. When
masonry cement ASTM C91/C91M is used the maximum air content shall be
limited to 12 percent and performance equal to cement-lime mortar shall be
verified. Verification of masonry cement performance shall be based on
ASTM C780 and ASTM C1072. Pointing mortar in showers and kitchens shall
contain ammonium stearate, or aluminum tri-stearate, or calcium stearate
in an amount equal to 3 percent by weight of cement used. Cement shall
have a low alkali content and be of one brand. Aggregates shall be from
one source.
2.3.1 Admixtures for Masonry Mortar
In cold weather, a non-chloride based accelerating admixture may be used

subject to approval. Accelerating admixture shall be non-corrosive, shall
contain less than 0.2 percent chlorides, and shall conform to
ASTM C494/C494M, Type C. Submit the required certifications.
2.3.2 Colored Mortar
Mortar coloring shall be added to the mortar used for exposed masonry
surfaces to produce a uniform color matching existing building. Quantity
of pigment to cementitious content of the masonry cement shall not exceed 5
percent by weight; carbon black shall not exceed 1 percent by weight.
Quantity of pigment to cementitious content of cement-lime mix shall not
exceed 10 percent by weight, carbon black no more than 2 percent by
weight. Mortar coloring shall be chemically inert, of finely ground
limeproof pigment, and furnished in accurately pre-measured and packaged
units that can be added to a measured amount of cement. Compressive
strength of colored mortar shall equal 1,800 psi.
2.3.3 Hydrated Lime and Alternates
Hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C207, Type S.
2.3.4 Cement
Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or II. Masonry

cement shall conform to ASTM C91/C91M, Type S. Containers shall bear
complete instructions for proportioning and mixing to obtain the required
types of mortar. Incorporate to the maximum extent, without conflicting
with other requirements of this section, up to 40 percent fly ash, up to
70 percent slag, up to 10 percent cenospheres, and up to 10 percent silica
fume. When masonry cement is used, submit the manufacturer's printed

instructions on proportions of water and aggregates and on mixing to
obtain the type of mortar required. Additives shall conform to
requirements in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
2.3.5 Pre-Mixed Mortar
Pre-mixed mortar shall conform to ASTM C1142, Type RS. Submit pre-mixed
mortar composition.
2.3.6 Sand and Water
Sand shall conform to ASTM C144. Water shall be clean, potable, and free
from substances which could adversely affect the mortar.
2.4 WATER-REPELLANT ADMIXTURE
Polymeric type formulated to reduce porosity and water penetration and

water absorption of the mortar and masonry units required to provide for
the exterior single-wythe masonry wall water penetration resistance
indicated in Paragraph SINGLE-WYTHE MASONRY WALL WATER PENETRATION TEST.
2.5 GROUT AND READY-MIXED GROUT
Grout shall conform to ASTM C476, fine or coarse. Cement used in grout
shall have a low alkali content. Grout slump shall be between 8 and 10
inches. Minimum grout strength shall be 2000 psi in 28 days, as tested by
ASTM C1019. Use grout subject to the limitations of Table III. Do not
change proportions and do not use materials with different physical or
chemical characteristics in grout for the work unless additional evidence
is furnished that the grout meets the specified requirements. Ready-Mixed
grout shall conform to ASTM C94/C94M.
2.5.1 Admixtures for Grout
In cold weather, a non-chloride based accelerating admixture may be used

subject to approval; accelerating admixture shall be non-corrosive, shall
contain less than 0.2 percent chlorides, and shall conform to
ASTM C494/C494M, Type C. In general, air-entrainment, anti-freeze or
chloride admixtures shall not be used except as approved by the
Contracting Officer. Submit required certifications.
2.5.2 Grout Barriers
Grout barriers for vertical cores shall consist of fine mesh wire,
fiberglass, or expanded metal.
2.6 ANCHORS, TIES, AND BAR POSITIONERS
Anchors and ties shall be fabricated without drips or crimps and shall be
zinc-coated in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M, Class B-2. Steel wire
used for anchors and ties shall be fabricated from steel wire conforming
to ASTM A1064/A1064M. Wire ties or anchors in exterior walls shall
conform to ASTM A641/A641M. Joint reinforcement in interior walls, and in
exterior or interior walls exposed to moist environment shall conform to
ASTM A641/A641M; coordinate with paragraph JOINT REINFORCEMENT below.
Anchors and ties shall be sized to provide a minimum of 5/8 inch mortar
cover from either face. Submit two anchors, ties and bar positioners of
each type used, as samples.
2.6.1 Wire Mesh Ties
Wire mesh for tying 4 inch thick concrete masonry unit partitions to other
intersecting masonry partitions shall be 1/2 inch mesh of minimum 16 gauge
steel wire. Minimum lengths shall be not less than 12 inches.
2.6.2 Wall Ties
Provide wall ties rectangular-shaped or Z-shaped fabricated of 3/16 inch

diameter zinc-coated steel wire. Rectangular wall ties shall be no less
than 4 inches wide. Wall ties may also be of a continuous type conforming
to paragraph JOINT REINFORCEMENT. Adjustable type wall ties, if approved
for use, shall consist of two essentially U-shaped elements fabricated of
3/16 inch diameter zinc-coated steel wire. Adjustable ties shall be of
the double pintle to eye type and shall allow a maximum of 1/2 inch
eccentricity between each element of the tie. Play between pintle and eye
opening shall be not more than 1/16 inch. The pintle and eye elements
shall be formed so that both can be in the same plane.
2.6.3 Dovetail Anchors
Provide dovetail anchors of the flexible wire type, 3/16 inch diameter
zinc-coated steel wire, triangular shaped, and attached to a 12 gauge or
heavier steel dovetail section. Use these anchors for anchorage of veneer
wythes or composite-wall facings extending over the face of concrete
columns, beams, or walls. Fill cells within vertical planes of these
anchors solid with grout for full height of walls or partitions, or solid
units may be used. Dovetail slots are specified in Section 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
2.6.4 Adjustable Anchors
Adjustable anchors shall be 3/16 inch diameter steel wire,

triangular-shaped. Anchors attached to steel shall be 5/16 inch diameter
steel bars placed to provide 1/16 inch play between flexible anchors and
structural steel members. Spacers shall be welded to rods and columns.
Equivalent welded-on steel anchor rods or shapes standard with the
flexible-anchor manufacturer may be furnished when approved. Welds shall
be cleaned and given one coat of zinc-rich touch up paint.
2.6.5 Bar Positioners
Bar positioners, used to prevent displacement of reinforcing bars during

the course of construction, shall be factory fabricated from 9 gauge steel
wire or equivalent, and coated with a hot-dip galvanized finish. Not more
than one wire shall cross the cell. Telescoping bar positioner shall be
manufactured from AISI 1065 spring steel and coated in accordance with
ASTM B633.
2.7 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
Joint reinforcement shall be factory fabricated from steel wire conforming

to ASTM A1064/A1064M, welded construction. Tack welding will not be
acceptable in reinforcement used for wall ties. Wire shall have zinc
coating conforming to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B-2. All wires shall be a
minimum of 9 gauge. Reinforcement shall be ladder type design, having one
longitudinal wire in the mortar bed of each face shell for hollow units
and one wire for solid units. Joint reinforcement shall be placed a
minimum of 5/8 inch cover from either face. The distance between
crosswires shall not exceed 16 inches. Joint reinforcement for straight
runs shall be furnished in flat sections not less than 10 feet long.
Joint reinforcement shall be provided with factory formed corners and
intersections. If approved for use, joint reinforcement may be furnished
with adjustable wall tie features. Submit one piece of each type used,
including corner and wall intersection pieces, showing at least two cross
wires.
2.8 REINFORCING STEEL BARS AND RODS
Reinforcing steel bars and rods shall conform to ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60.
2.9 CONTROL JOINT KEYS
Control joint keys shall be a factory fabricated solid section of natural

or synthetic rubber (or combination thereof) conforming to ASTM D2000or
polyvinyl chloride conforming to ASTM D2287. The material shall be
resistant to oils and solvents. The control joint key shall be provided
with a solid shear section not less than 5/8 inch thick and 3/8 inch thick
flanges, with a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch. The control joint
key shall fit neatly, but without forcing, in masonry unit jamb sash
grooves. The control joint key shall be flexible at a temperature of
minus 30 degrees F after five hours exposure, and shall have a durometer
hardness of not less than 70 when tested in accordance with ASTM D2240.
2.10 RIGID BOARD-TYPE INSULATION
Provide rigid board-type insulation as specified in Section 07 21 13 BOARD

AND BLOCK INSULATION. Submit one piece of each type used, including
corner and wall intersection pieces, showing at least two cross wires.
Submit certificate attesting that the polyurethane or polyisocyanurate
insulation furnished for the project contains recovered material, and
showing an estimated percent of such recovered material.
2.11 THROUGH WALL FLASHING
Provide Through Wall Flashing as specified in Section 07 60 00 FLASHING

AND SHEET METAL. Provide one of the following types except that flashing
indicated to terminate in reglets shall be metal or coated-metal flashing
and except that the material shall be one which is not adversely affected
by dampproofing material.
2.12 WEEP HOLE VENTILATORS
Weep hole ventilators shall be prefabricated, plastic blocking sized to

form the proper size opening in head joints. Provide plastic inserts with
grill or screen-type openings designed to allow the passage of moisture
from cavities and to prevent the entrance or insects. Ventilators shall
be sized to match modular construction with a standard 3/8 inch mortar
joint.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Prior to start of work, masonry inspector shall verify the applicable

conditions as set forth in ACI 530/530.1, inspection. The Contracting
Officer will serve as inspector or will select a masonry inspector.
3.1.1 Protection
Ice or snow formed on the masonry bed shall be thawed by the application
of heat. Heat shall be applied carefully until the top surface of the
masonry is dry to the touch. Sections of masonry deemed frozen and
damaged shall be removed before continuing construction of those sections.
3.1.1.1 Air Temperature 40 to 32 Degrees F
Heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and

120 degrees F
3.1.1.2 Air Temperature 32 to 25 Degrees F
Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and
120 degrees F. Maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing.
3.1.2 Completed Masonry and Masonry Not Being Worked On
3.1.2.1 Mean Daily Air Temperature 40 to 32 Degrees F
Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours by covering with

weather-resistive membrane.
3.1.2.2 Mean Daily Air Temperature 32 to 25 Degrees F
Completely cover masonry with weather-resistant membrane for 24 hours.
3.1.3 Stains
Protect exposed surfaces from mortar and other stains. When mortar joints
are tooled, remove mortar from exposed surfaces with fiber brushes and
wooden paddles. Protect base of walls from splash stains by covering
adjacent ground with sand, sawdust, or polyethylene.
3.1.4 Loads
Do not apply uniform loads for at least 12 hours or concentrated loads for
at least 72 hours after masonry is constructed. Provide temporary bracing
as required.
3.1.5 Surfaces
Clean surfaces on which masonry is to be placed of laitance, dust, dirt,

oil, organic matter, or other foreign materials and slightly roughen to
provide a surface texture with a depth of at least 1/8 inch. Sandblast,
if necessary, to remove laitance from pores and to expose the aggregate.
3.2 LAYING MASONRY UNITS
a. Coordinate masonry work with the work of other trades to accommodate

built-in items and to avoid cutting and patching. Masonry units shall
be laid in running bond pattern. Facing courses shall be level with
back-up courses, unless the use of adjustable ties has been approved
in which case the tolerances shall be plus or minus 1/2 inch. Each
unit shall be adjusted to its final position while mortar is still
soft and plastic.
b. Units that have been disturbed after the mortar has stiffened shall be
removed, cleaned, and relaid with fresh mortar. Air spaces, cavities,
chases, expansion joints, and spaces to be grouted shall be kept free
from mortar and other debris. Units used in exposed masonry surfaces
shall be selected from those having the least amount of chipped edges
or other imperfections detracting from the appearance of the finished
work. Vertical joints shall be kept plumb.
c. Units being laid and surfaces to receive units shall be free of water
film and frost. Solid units shall be laid in a nonfurrowed full bed
of mortar. Mortar for veneer wythes shall be beveled and sloped
toward the center of the wythe from the cavity side. Units shall be
shoved into place so that the vertical joints are tight. Vertical
joints of brick and the vertical face shells of concrete masonry
units, except where indicated at control, expansion, and isolation
joints, shall be completely filled with mortar. Mortar will be
permitted to protrude up to 1/2 inch into the space or cells to be
grouted. Means shall be provided to prevent mortar from dropping into
the space below.
3.2.1 Forms and Shores
Provide bracing and scaffolding as required. Design bracing to resist

wind pressure as required by local codes. Forms and shores shall be
sufficiently rigid to prevent deflections which may result in cracking or
other damage to supported masonry and sufficiently tight to prevent
leakage of mortar and grout. Supporting forms and shores shall not be
removed in less than 10 days.
3.2.2 Tolerances
Lay masonry plumb, true to line, with courses level. Keep bond pattern
plumb throughout. Square corners unless noted otherwise. Except for
walls constructed of prefaced concrete masonry units, lay masonry within
the following tolerances (plus or minus unless otherwise noted):
TABLE II TOLERANCES
Variation from the plumb in the lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises
In adjacent masonry units 1/8 inch
In 10 feet 1/4 inch
In 20 feet 3/8 inch
In 40 feet or more 1/2 inch
Variations from the plumb for external corners, expansion joints, and other
conspicuous lines
In 20 feet 1/4 inch
TABLE II TOLERANCES
Variations from the level for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves,
and other conspicuous lines
In 20 feet 1/4 inch
Variation from level for bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls
In 10 feet 1/4 inch
Variations from horizontal lines
In 10 feet 1/4 inch
In 20 feet 3/8 inch
Variations in cross sectional dimensions of columns and in thickness of walls
Minus 1/4 inch
Plus 1/2 inch
3.2.3 Cutting and Fitting
Full units of the proper size shall be used wherever possible, in lieu of
cut units. Cutting and fitting, including that required to accommodate
the work of others, shall be done by masonry mechanics using power masonry
saws. Concrete masonry units may be wet or dry cut. Wet cut units,
before being placed in the work, shall be dried to the same surface-dry
appearance as uncut units being laid in the wall. Cut edges shall be
clean, true and sharp. Openings in the masonry shall be made carefully so
that wall plates, cover plates or escutcheons required by the installation
will completely conceal the openings and will have bottoms parallel with
the masonry bed joints.
3.2.4 Jointing
Joints shall be tooled when the mortar is thumbprint hard. Horizontal

joints shall be tooled last. Joints shall be brushed to remove all loose
and excess mortar. Mortar joints shall be finished as follows:
3.2.4.1 Flush Joints
Joints in concealed masonry surfaces and joints at electrical outlet boxes

in wet areas shall be flush cut. Flush cut joints shall be made by
cutting off the mortar flush with the face of the wall. Joints in
unparged masonry walls below grade shall be pointed tight. Flush joints
for architectural units, such as fluted units, shall completely fill both
the head and bed joints.
3.2.4.2 Tooled Joints
Joints in exposed exterior and interior masonry surfaces shall be tooled

slightly concave. Joints shall be tooled with a jointer slightly larger
than the joint width so that complete contact is made along the edges of
the unit. Tooling shall be performed so that the mortar is compressed and
the joint surface is sealed. Jointer of sufficient length shall be used
to obtain a straight and true mortar joint.
3.2.4.3 Door and Window Frame Joints
On the exposed interior side of exterior frames, joints between frames and
abutting masonry walls shall be raked to a depth of 3/8 inch. On the
exterior side of exterior frames, joints between frames and abutting
masonry walls shall be raked to a depth of 3/8 inch.
3.2.5 Joint Widths
Joint widths shall be as follows:
3.2.5.1 Concrete Masonry Units
Concrete masonry units shall have 3/8 inch joints, except for prefaced
concrete masonry units.
3.2.6 Embedded Items
Fill spaces around built-in items with mortar. Point openings around
flush-mount electrical outlet boxes in wet locations with mortar. Embed
anchors, ties, wall plugs, accessories, flashing, pipe sleeves and other
items required to be built-in as the masonry work progresses. Fully
embed anchors, ties and joint reinforcement in the mortar. Fill cells
receiving anchor bolts and cells of the first course below bearing plates
with grout.
3.2.7 Unfinished Work
Step back unfinished work for joining with new work. Toothing may be
resorted to only when specifically approved. Remove loose mortar and
thoroughly clean the exposed joints before laying new work.
3.2.8 Masonry Wall Intersections
Masonry bond each course at corners and elsewhere as shown. Masonry walls
shall be anchored or tied together at corners and intersections with bond
beam reinforcement and prefabricated corner or tee pieces of joint
reinforcement as shown.
3.3 ANCHORED VENEER CONSTRUCTION
Completely separate the inner and outer wythes by a continuous airspace as

indicated. Lay up both the inner and the outer wythes together except
when adjustable joint reinforcement assemblies are approved for use. When
both wythes are not brought up together, through-wall flashings shall be
protected from damage until they are fully enclosed in the wall. The
airspace between the wythes shall be kept clear and free of mortar
droppings by temporary wood strips laid on the wall ties and carefully
lifted out before placing the next row of ties. A coarse gravel or
drainage material shall be placed behind the weep holes in the cavity to a
minimum depth of 4 inches of coarse aggregate or 10 inches of drainage
material to keep mortar droppings from plugging the weep holes.
3.4 WEEP HOLES
Wherever through-wall flashing occurs, provide weep holes to drain

flashing to exterior at acceptable locations as indicated on drawings.
Weep holes shall be clear round holes not less than 1/4 inch in diameter at
24 inches o.c. Weep holes shall be provided not more than 24 inches on
centers in mortar joints of the exterior wythe above wall flashing, over
foundations, bond beams, and any other horizontal interruptions of the
cavity. Weep holes shall be perfectly horizontal or slightly canted
downward to encourage water drainage outward and not inward. Other
approved methods may be used for providing weep holes. Weep holes shall
be kept free of mortar and other obstructions.
3.5 MORTAR MIX
Mix mortar in a mechanically operated mortar mixer for at least 3 minutes,

but not more than 5 minutes. Measure ingredients for mortar by volume.
Ingredients not in containers, such as sand, shall be accurately measured
by the use of measuring boxes. Mix water with the dry ingredients in
sufficient amount to provide a workable mixture which will adhere to the
vertical surfaces of masonry units. Retemper mortar that has stiffened
because of loss of water through evaporation by adding water to restore
the proper consistency and workability. Discard mortar that has reached
its initial set or that has not been used within 2.5 hours after mixing.
3.6 CONTROL JOINTS
Control joints shall be provided as indicated and shall be constructed by

using special control-joint units or sash jamb units with control joint key
in accordance with the details shown on the drawings. Sash jamb units
shall have a 3/4 by 3/4 inch groove near the center at end of each unit.
The vertical mortar joint at control joint locations shall be continuous,
including through all bond beams. This shall be accomplished by utilizing
half blocks in alternating courses on each side of the joint. The control
joint key shall be interrupted in courses containing continuous bond beam
steel. In single wythe exterior masonry walls, the exterior control
joints shall be raked to a depth of 3/4 inch; backer rod and sealant shall
be installed in accordance with Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. Exposed
interior control joints shall be raked to a depth of 1/4 inch. Concealed
control joints shall be flush cut.
3.7 INDICATED JOINTS
Concrete masonry veneer joints located, detailed, and constructed as

indicated. Keep joints free of mortar and other debris.
3.8 SHELF ANGLES
Adjust shelf angles as required to keep the masonry level and at the
proper elevation. Shelf angles shall be galvanized and provided in
sections not longer than 10 feet and installed with a 1/4 inch gap between
sections. Shelf angles shall be mitered and welded at building corners
with each angle not shorter than 4 feet, unless limited by wall
configuration.
3.9 LINTELS
3.9.1 Masonry Lintels
Construct masonry lintels with lintel units filled solid with grout in all
courses and reinforced with a minimum of two No. 4 bars in the bottom
course unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Lintel reinforcement
shall extend beyond each side of masonry opening 40 bar diameters or 24
inches, whichever is greater. Reinforcing bars shall be supported in
place prior to grouting and shall be located 1/2 inch above the bottom
inside surface of the lintel unit.
3.9.2 Steel Lintels
Steel lintels as shown on the drawings. Lintels shall be set in a full

bed of mortar with faces plumb and true. Steel and precast lintels shall
have a minimum bearing length of 8 inches unless otherwise indicated on
the drawings.
3.10 SILLS AND COPINGS
Sills and copings shall be set in a full bed of mortar with faces plumb
and true.
3.11 ANCHORAGE TO STRUCTURAL STEEL
3.11.1 Anchorage to Structural Steel
Masonry shall be anchored to vertical structural steel framing with

adjustable steel wire anchors spaced not over 16 inches on centers
vertically, and if applicable, not over 24 inches on centers horizontally.
3.12 INSULATION
Anchored veneer walls shall be insulated, where shown, by installing

board-type insulation on the cavity side of the inner wythe. Board type
insulation shall be applied directly to the masonry or thru-wall flashing
with adhesive. Insulation shall be neatly fitted between obstructions
without impaling of insulation on ties or anchors. The insulation shall
be applied in parallel courses with vertical joints breaking midway over
the course below and shall be applied in moderate contact with adjoining
units without forcing, and shall be cut to fit neatly against adjoining
surfaces.
3.13 SPLASH BLOCKS
Locate splash blocks as indicated.
3.14 POINTING AND CLEANING
After mortar joints have attained their initial set, but prior to
hardening, completely remove mortar and grout daubs or splashings from
masonry-unit surfaces that will be exposed or painted. Before completion
of the work, defects in joints of masonry to be exposed or painted shall
be raked out as necessary, filled with mortar, and tooled to match
existing joints. Immediately after grout work is completed, scum and
stains which have percolated through the masonry work shall be removed
using a high pressure stream of water and a stiff bristled brush. Masonry
surfaces shall not be cleaned, other than removing excess surface mortar,
until mortar in joints has hardened. Masonry surfaces shall be left

clean, free of mortar daubs, dirt, stain, and discoloration, including
scum from cleaning operations, and with tight mortar joints throughout.
Metal tools and metal brushes shall not be used for cleaning.
3.14.1 Dry-Brushing
a. Exposed concrete masonry unit
b. shall be dry-brushed at the end of each day's work and after any
required pointing, using stiff-fiber bristled brushes.
3.15 BEARING PLATES
Set bearing plates for beams, joists, joist girders and similar structural
members to the proper line and elevation with damp-pack bedding mortar,
except where non-shrink grout is indicated. Bedding mortar and non-shrink
grout shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
3.16 PROTECTION
Protect facing materials against staining. Cover top of walls with

nonstaining waterproof covering or membrane when work is not in progress.
Covering of the top of the unfinished walls shall continue until the wall
is waterproofed with a complete roof or parapet system. Covering shall
extend a minimum of 2 feet down on each side of the wall and shall be held
securely in place. Before starting or resuming, top surface of masonry in
place shall be cleaned of loose mortar and foreign material.
Manage waste according to the Waste Management Plan and as follows.

Minimize water used to wash mixing equipment. Use trigger operated spray
nozzles for water hoses.
3.17.1 Separate and Recycle Waste
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated

containers. Fold up metal banding, flatten, and place in designated area
for recycling. Collect wood packing shims and pallets and place in
designated area. Use leftover mixed mortar where lower strength mortar
meets the requirements for bulk fill. Separate masonry waste and place in
designated area for use as structural fill. Separate selected masonry
waste and excess for landscape uses, either whole or crushed as ground
cover.
3.17.2 Take-Back Program
Collect information from manufacturer for take-back program options. Set

aside masonry units, full and partial to be returned to manufacturer for
recycling into new product. When such a service is not available, local
recyclers shall be sought after to reclaim the materials. Submit
documentation that includes contact information, summary of procedures,
and the limitations and conditions applicable to the project. Indicate
manufacturer's commitment to reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse.
3.18 TEST REPORTS
3.18.1 Field Testing of Mortar
Take at least three specimens of mortar each day. Spread a layer of mortar
1/2 to 5/8 inch thick on the masonry units and allowed to stand for one
minute. Prepare and test the specimens for compressive strength in
accordance with ASTM C780. Submit test results.
3.18.2 Field Testing of Grout
Field sampling and testing of grout shall be in accordance with the

applicable provisions of ASTM C1019. A minimum of three specimens of
grout per day shall be sampled and tested. Each specimen shall have a
minimum ultimate compressive strength of 2000 psi at 28 days. Submit test
results.
3.18.3 Efflorescence Test
Test brick, which will be exposed to weathering, for efflorescence.

Schedule tests far enough in advance of starting masonry work to permit
retesting if necessary. Sampling and testing shall conform to the
applicable provisions of ASTM C67. Units meeting the definition of
"effloresced" will be subject to rejection. Submit test results.
3.18.4 Prism Tests
Perform at least one prism test sample for each 5,000 square feet of wall
but not less than three such samples shall be made for any building.
Three prisms will be used in each sample. Prisms shall be tested in
accordance with ACI 530/530.1. Seven-day tests may be used provided the
relationship between the 7- and 28-day strengths of the masonry is
established by the tests of the materials used. Compressive strength
shall not be less than 1,500psi at 28 days. If the compressive strength
of any prism falls below the specified value by more than 500 psi, steps
shall be taken to assure that the load-carrying capacity of the structure
is not jeopardized. If the likelihood of low-strength masonry is
confirmed and computations indicate that the load-carrying capacity may
have been significantly reduced, tests of cores drilled, or prisms sawed,
from the area in question may be required. In such case, three specimens
shall be taken for each prism test more than 500 psi below the specified
value. Masonry in the area in question shall be considered structurally
adequate if the average compressive strength of three specimens is equal
to at least 85 percent of the specified value, and if the compressive
strength of no single specimen is less than 75 percent of the specified
value. Additional testing of specimens extracted from locations
represented by erratic core or prism strength test results will be
permitted. Submit test results.
3.18.5 Single-Wythe Masonry Wall Water Penetration Test
Prior to start of field construction of the single-wythe masonry wall,

perform masonry wall water penetration test on mock-up wall assemblies
consisting of the identical design, materials, mix, and construction
methods as the actual wall construction and in accordance with
ASTM E514/E514M. Prepare a minimum of three specimens and cure for
minimum 28 days prior to testing. Construct panels by the same methods,
processes, and applications to be used on the project's construction site.
The spray test duration shall be 6 hours for each specimen. No water shall
be visible on back of test panels during the test and any areas of
dampness on the backside of the test panels shall not exceed 25 percent of
the wall area. Dampness is defined as any area of surface darkening or
discoloration due to moisture penetration or accumulation below the
observed surface. Construct additional test panels for each failed test
performed until three test panels pass the test. Factors that can affect
test performance include materials, mixing, and quality of application and
workmanship. Materials, mixing, and methods adjustments may be necessary
in order to provide construction that passes the water penetration test.
Document and record the test specimen construction materials and
application and provide written test report in accordance with
ASTM E514/E514M, supplemented by a detailed discussion of the specifics of
test panel construction, application methods and processes used, quality
of construction, and any variances or deviations that may have occurred
between test panels during test panel construction. For failed test
panels, identify in the supplemental report any variances, deficiencies or
flaws that contributed to test panel failure and itemize the precautions
to be taken in field construction of the masonry wall to prevent similar
deficiencies and assure the wall construction replicates test panel
conditions that pass the water penetration test. Submit the complete,
certified test report, including supplemental report, to the Contracting
Officer prior to start of single-wythe masonry wall construction.
Significant changes to materials, proportions, or construction techniques
from those used in the passing water penetration test are grounds for
performing new tests, at the discretion of the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 05 12 00
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05/14
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AISC 201 (2006) AISC Certification Program for

Structural Steel Fabricators
AISC 303 (2010) Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges
AISC 325 (2011) Steel Construction Manual
AISC 326 (2009) Detailing for Steel Construction
AISC 341 (2010) Seismic Provisions for Structural

Steel Buildings
AISC 360 (2010) Specification for Structural Steel

Buildings
AISC DESIGN GUIDE 10 (1997) Erection Bracing of Low-Rise

Structural Steel Buildings
AWS A2.4 (2012) Standard Symbols for Welding,

Brazing and Nondestructive Examination
AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2010; Errata 2011) Structural Welding

Code - Steel
AWS D1.8/D1.8M (2009) Structural Welding Code—Seismic

Supplement
ASME B46.1 (2009) Surface Texture, Surface Roughness,

Waviness and Lay

(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products
ASTM A143/A143M (2007; R 2014) Standard Practice for

Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of
Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel

Products and Procedure for Detecting
Embrittlement
ASTM A29/A29M (2013) Standard Specification for General

Requirements for Steel Bars, Carbon and
Alloy, Hot-Wrought
ASTM A307 (2014) Standard Specification for Carbon

Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile
Strength
ASTM A325 (2014) Standard Specification for

Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
ASTM A36/A36M (2012) Standard Specification for Carbon

Structural Steel

Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat
Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and
Shapes

Welded and Seamless
ASTM A563 (2007a; R2014) Standard Specification for

Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
ASTM A563M (2007; R 2013) Standard Specification for

Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Metric)

Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel
Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling
ASTM A780/A780M (2009) Standard Practice for Repair of

Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip
Galvanized Coatings

Structural Steel Shapes
ASTM C1107/C1107M (2014) Standard Specification for Packaged

Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)
ASTM C827/C827M (2010) Change in Height at Early Ages of

Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious
Mixtures
ASTM F1554 (2007a; E 2011) Standard Specification for

Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi
Yield Strength
ASTM F1852 (2014) Standard Specification for "Twist

Off" Type Tension Control Structural
Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat
Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength
ASTM F2329 (2013) Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements

for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel
Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special
Threaded Fasteners
ASTM F436 (2011) Hardened Steel Washers
ASTM F844 (2007a; R 2013) Washers, Steel, Plain

(Flat), Unhardened for General Use
ASTM F959 (2013) Compressible-Washer-Type Direct

Tension Indicators for Use with Structural
Fasteners
SSPC PA 1 (2000; E 2004) Shop, Field, and

Maintenance Painting of Steel
SSPC Paint 20 (2002; E 2004) Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I,

Inorganic, and Type II, Organic)
SSPC Paint 29 (2002; E 2004) Zinc Dust Sacrificial

Primer, Performance-Based
SSPC SP 3 (1982; E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning
SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3 (2007) Commercial Blast Cleaning
UFC 3-301-01 (2013) Structural Engineering
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Erection Drawings; G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fabrication drawings including description of connections; G
SD-03 Product Data
Shop primer
Welding electrodes and rods
Direct Tension Indicator Washers
Non-Shrink Grout
Tension control bolts
SD-06 Test Reports
Class B coating
Bolts, nuts, and washers
Weld Inspection Reports
Direct Tension Indicator Washer Inspection Reports
Bolt Testing Reports
Embrittlement Test Reports
SD-07 Certificates
Steel
Bolts, nuts, and washers
Galvanizing
AISC Fabrication Plant Quality Certification
AISC Erector Quality Certification
Welding procedures and qualifications
Welding electrodes and rods
1.3 AISC QUALITY CERTIFICATION
Work must be fabricated in an AISC Certified Fabrication Plant, Category

Std. Submit AISC fabrication plant quality certification.
Work must be erected by an AISC Certified Erector, Category CSE. Submit

AISC erector quality certification.
1.4 SEISMIC PROVISIONS
The structural steel system must be provided in accordance with AISC 341,
Chapter J as amended by UFC 3-310-04.
1.5.1 Preconstruction Submittals
1.5.1.1 Erection Drawings
Submit for record purposes. Indicate the sequence of erection, temporary

shoring and bracing. The erection drawings must conform to AISC 303.
Erection drawings must be reviewed, stamped and sealed by a registered
professional engineer.
1.5.2 Fabrication Drawing Requirements
Submit fabrication drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Prepare in

accordance with AISC 326 and AISC 325. Fabrication drawings must not be
reproductions of contract drawings. Include complete information for the
fabrication and erection of the structure's components, including the
location, type, and size of bolts, welds, member sizes and lengths,
connection details, blocks, copes, and cuts. Use AWS A2.4 standard
welding symbols. Shoring and temporary bracing must be designed and
sealed by a registered professional engineer and submitted for record
purposes, with calculations, as part of the drawings. Any deviations from
the details shown on the contract drawings must be clearly highlighted on
the fabrication drawings. Explain the reasons for any deviations from the
contract drawings.
1.5.3 Certifications
1.5.3.1 Welding Procedures and Qualifications
Prior to welding, submit certification for each welder stating the type of
welding and positions qualified for, the code and procedure qualified
under, date qualified, and the firm and individual certifying the
qualification tests. If the qualification date of the welding operator is
more than one-year old, the welding operator's qualification certificate
must be accompanied by a current certificate by the welder attesting to
the fact that he has been engaged in welding since the date of
certification, with no break in welding service greater than 6 months.
Conform to all requirements specified in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Provide the structural steel system, including shop primer or galvanizing,

complete and ready for use. Structural steel systems including design,
materials, installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection,
inspection, quality control, and testing must be provided in accordance
with AISC 360, AISC 341, UFC 3-301-01 and UFC 3-310-04 except as modified
in this contract.
2.2 STEEL
Wide flange and WT shapes, ASTM A992/A992M. Angles, Channels and Plates,
ASTM A36/A36M.
2.2.2 Structural Steel Tubing
ASTM A500/A500M, Grade C.
2.2.3 Steel Pipe
ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or S, Grade B, weight class STD (Standard).
2.3 BOLTS, NUTS, AND WASHERS
Submit the certified manufacturer's mill reports which clearly show the
applicable ASTM mechanical and chemical requirements together with the
actual test results for the supplied fasteners.
2.3.1 Common Grade Bolts
2.3.1.1 Bolts
ASTM A307, Grade A. The bolt heads and the nuts of the supplied fasteners
must be marked with the manufacturer's identification mark, the strength
grade and type specified by ASTM specifications.
2.3.1.2 Nuts
ASTM A563M, Grade A, heavy hex style.
2.3.1.3 Washers
ASTM F844.
2.3.2 High-Strength Bolts
2.3.2.1 Bolts
ASTM A325, Type 1 ASTM A490, Type 1 or 2.
2.3.2.2 Nuts
ASTM A563, Grade and Style as specified in the applicable ASTM bolt
standard.
2.3.2.3 Direct Tension Indicator Washers
ASTM F959.
2.3.2.4 Washers
ASTM F436, plain carbon steel.
2.3.3 Tension Control Bolts
ASTM F1852, Type 1, heavy-hex head assemblies consisting of steel

structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon steel nuts, and
hardened carbon steel washers. Assembly finish must be plain or
mechanically deposited zinc coating.
2.3.4 Foundation Anchorage
2.3.4.1 Anchor Rods
ASTM F1554 Gr 55, Class 1A.
2.3.4.2 Anchor Nuts
ASTM A563, Grade A, hex style.
2.3.4.3 Anchor Washers
ASTM F844.
2.3.4.4 Anchor Plate Washers
ASTM A36/A36M.
2.4 STRUCTURAL STEEL ACCESSORIES
2.4.1 Welding Electrodes and Rods
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
2.4.2 Non-Shrink Grout
ASTM C1107/C1107M, with no ASTM C827/C827M shrinkage.
2.4.3 Welded Shear Stud Connectors
ASTM A29/A29M, Type B. AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
2.5 GALVANIZING
ASTM F2329 for threaded parts or ASTM A123/A123M for structural steel
members, as applicable, unless specified otherwise galvanize after
fabrication where practicable.
2.6 FABRICATION
Fabrication must be in accordance with the applicable provisions of

AISC 325. Fabrication and assembly must be done in the shop to the
greatest extent possible. Punch, subpunch and ream, or drill bolt holes
perpendicular to the surface of the member.
Compression joints depending on contact bearing must have a surface

roughness not in excess of 500 micro inch as determined by ASME B46.1, and
ends must be square within the tolerances for milled ends specified in
ASTM A6/A6M.
Shop splices of members between field splices will be permitted only where
indicated on the Contract Drawings. Splices not indicated require the
approval of the Contracting Officer.
2.6.1 Markings
Prior to erection, members must be identified by a painted erection mark.

Connecting parts assembled in the shop for reaming holes in field
connections must be match marked with scratch and notch marks. Do not
locate erection markings on areas to be welded. Do not locate match

markings in areas that will decrease member strength or cause stress
concentrations. Affix embossed tags to hot-dipped galvanized members.
2.6.2 Shop Primer
SSPC Paint 20 or SSPC Paint 29, (zinc rich primer). Shop prime structural
steel, except as modified herein, in accordance with SSPC PA 1. Do not
prime steel surfaces embedded in concrete, galvanized surfaces, surfaces
designed as part of a composite steel concrete section, or surfaces within
0.5 inch of the toe of the welds prior to welding (except surfaces on
which metal decking is to be welded). If flash rusting occurs, re-clean
the surface prior to application of primer. Apply primer in accordance
with endorsement "P1" of AISC 201 to a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0
mil.
Slip critical surfaces must be primed with a Class B coating in accordance

with AISC 325. Submit test report for Class B coating.
Prior to assembly, prime surfaces which will be concealed or inaccessible

after assembly. Do not apply primer in foggy or rainy weather; when the
ambient temperature is below 45 degrees F or over 95 degrees F; or when
the primer may be exposed to temperatures below 40 degrees F within 48
hours after application, unless approved otherwise by the Contracting
Officer. Repair damaged primed surfaces with an additional coat of primer.
2.6.2.1 Cleaning
SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3, except steel exposed in spaces above ceilings, attic
spaces, furred spaces, and chases that will be hidden to view in finished
construction may be cleaned to SSPC SP 3 when recommended by the shop
primer manufacturer. Maintain steel surfaces free from rust, dirt, oil,
grease, and other contaminants through final assembly.
2.6.3 Surface Finishes
ASME B46.1 maximum surface roughness of 125 for pin, pinholes, and sliding
bearings, unless indicated otherwise.
2.7 DRAINAGE HOLES
Adequate drainage holes must be drilled to eliminate water traps. Hole

diameter must be 1/2 inch and location must be indicated on the detail
drawings. Hole size and location must not affect the structural integrity.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
a. Erection of structural steel, except as indicated in item b. below,

must be in accordance with the applicable provisions of AISC 325.
b. For low-rise structural steel buildings ( 60 feet tall or less and a

maximum of 2 stories), the structure must be erected in accordance
with AISC DESIGN GUIDE 10.
After final positioning of steel members, provide full bearing under base
plates and bearing plates using nonshrink grout. Place nonshrink grout in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3.1.1 STORAGE
Material must be stored out of contact with the ground in such manner and
location as will minimize deterioration.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
Except as modified in this section, connections not detailed must be

designed in accordance with AISC 360. Build connections into existing
work. Do not tighten anchor bolts set in concrete with impact torque
wrenches. Holes must not be cut or enlarged by burning. Bolts, nuts, and
washers must be clean of dirt and rust, and lubricated immediately prior
to installation.
3.2.1 Common Grade Bolts
ASTM A307 bolts must be tightened to a "snug tight" fit. "Snug tight" is
the tightness that exists when plies in a joint are in firm contact. If
firm contact of joint plies cannot be obtained with a few impacts of an
impact wrench, or the full effort of a man using a spud wrench, contact
the Contracting Officer for further instructions.
Provide direct tension indicator washers in all ASTM A325 and ASTM A490
bolted connections. Bolts must be installed in connection holes and
initially brought to a snug tight fit. After the initial tightening
procedure, bolts must then be fully tensioned, progressing from the most
rigid part of a connection to the free edges.
3.2.2.1 Installation of Direct Tension Indicator Washers (DTIW)
Where possible, the DTIW must be installed under the bolt head and the nut
must be tightened. If the DTIW is installed adjacent to the turned
element, provide a flat washer between the DTIW and nut when the nut is
turned for tightening, and between the DTIW and bolt head when the bolt
head is turned for tightening. In addition to the LIW, provide flat
washers under both the bolt head and nut when ASTM A490 bolts are used.
3.2.3 Tension Control Bolts
Bolts must be installed in connection holes and initially brought to a

snug tight fit. After the initial tightening procedure, bolts must then
be fully tensioned, progressing from the most rigid part of a connection
to the free edges.
3.3 GAS CUTTING
Use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors

will not be permitted on any major member in the structural framing. Use
of a gas cutting torch will be permitted on minor members not under stress
only after approval has been obtained from the Contracting Officer.
3.4 WELDING
Welding must be in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M.

Grind exposed welds smooth as indicated. Provide AWS D1.1/D1.1M qualified
welders, welding operators, and tackers.
Develop and submit the Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) for all
welding, including welding done using prequalified procedures.
Prequalified procedures may be submitted for information only; however,
procedures that are not prequalified must be submitted for approval.
3.4.1 Removal of Temporary Welds, Run-Off Plates, and Backing Strips
Remove only from finished areas. Remove backing strips from bottom flange
of moment connections, backgouge the root pass to sound weld metal and
reinforce with a 5/16 inch fillet weld minimum.
3.5 SHOP PRIMER REPAIR
Repair shop primer in accordance with the paint manufacturer's

recommendation for surfaces damaged by handling, transporting, cutting,
welding, or bolting.
3.5.1 Field Priming
Steel exposed to the weather, or located in building areas without HVAC

for control of relative humidity must be field primed. After erection,
the field bolt heads and nuts, field welds, and any abrasions in the shop
coat must be cleaned and primed with paint of the same quality as that
used for the shop coat.
3.6 GALVANIZING REPAIR
Repair damage to galvanized coatings using ASTM A780/A780M zinc rich paint
for galvanizing damaged by handling, transporting, cutting, welding, or
bolting. Do not heat surfaces to which repair paint has been applied.
Perform field tests, and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals

required for testing, except that electric power for field tests will be
furnished as set forth in Division 1. The Contracting Officer must be
notified in writing of defective welds, bolts, nuts, and washers within 7
working days of the date of the inspection.
3.7.1 Welds
3.7.1.1 Visual Inspection
AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Furnish the services of AWS-certified welding inspectors

for fabrication and erection inspection and testing and verification
inspections.
Inspect proper preparation, size, gaging location, and acceptability of

welds; identification marking; operation and current characteristics of
welding sets in use.
3.7.1.2 Nondestructive Testing
Nondestructive testing must be in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and

AWS D1.8/D1.8M. Test locations must be selected by the Contracting Officer.
If more than 20 percent of welds made by a welder contain defects
identified by testing, then all welds made by that welder must be tested
by ultrasonic testing, as approved by the Contracting Officer. When all
welds made by an individual welder are required to be tested, magnetic

particle testing must be used only in areas inaccessible to ultrasonic
testing. Retest defective areas after repair. Submit weld inspection
reports.
Testing frequency: Provide the following types and number of tests:
Test Type Number of Tests
Ultrasonic 10 percent of all complete joint penetration

welds, with an increase in the rate of testing
in accordance with AISC 360, Chapter N Section
5f.
Dye Penetrant 10 percent of all fillet welds.
3.7.2 Direct Tension Indicator Washers
3.7.2.1 Direct Tension Indicator Washer Compression
Direct tension indicator washers must be tested in place to verify that

they have been compressed sufficiently to provide the 0.015 inch gap when
the direct tension indicator washer is placed under the bolt head and the
nut is tightened, and to provide the 0.005 inch gap when the direct
tension indicator washer is placed under the turned element, as required by
ASTM F959. Submit direct tension indicator washer inspection reports.
3.7.2.2 Direct Tension Indicator Gaps
In addition to the above testing, an independent testing agency as

approved by the Contracting Officer, must test in place the direct tension
indicator gaps on 20 percent of the installed direct tension indicator
washers to verify that the ASTM F959 direct tension indicator gaps have
been achieved. If more than 10 percent of the direct tension indicators
tested have not been compressed sufficiently to provide the average gaps
required by ASTM F959, then all in place direct tension indicator washers
shall be tested to verify that the ASTM F959 direct tension indicator gaps
have been achieved. Test locations must be selected by the Contracting
Officer.
3.7.3.1 Testing Bolt, Nut, and Washer Assemblies
Test a minimum of 3 bolt, nut, and washer assemblies from each mill
certificate batch in a tension measuring device at the job site prior to
the beginning of bolting start-up. Demonstrate that the bolts and nuts,
when used together, can develop tension not less than the provisions
specified in AISC 360, depending on bolt size and grade. The bolt tension
must be developed by tightening the nut. A representative of the
manufacturer or supplier must be present to ensure that the fasteners are
properly used, and to demonstrate that the fastener assemblies supplied
satisfy the specified requirements. Submit bolt testing reports.
3.7.3.2 Inspection
Inspection procedures must be in accordance with AISC 360. Confirm and

report to the Contracting Officer that the materials meet the project
specification and that they are properly stored. Confirm that the faying
surfaces have been properly prepared before the connections are
assembled. Observe the specified job site testing and calibration, and
confirm that the procedure to be used provides the required tension.
Monitor the work to ensure the testing procedures are routinely followed
on joints that are specified to be fully tensioned.
Inspect calibration of torque wrenches for high-strength bolts.
3.7.3.3 Testing
The Government has the option to perform nondestructive tests on 5 percent

of the installed bolts to verify compliance with pre-load bolt tension
requirements. Provide the required access for the Government to perform
the tests. The nondestructive testing will be done in-place using an
ultrasonic measuring device or any other device capable of determining
in-place pre-load bolt tension. The test locations must be selected by
the Contracting Officer. If more than 10 percent of the bolts tested
contain defects identified by testing, then all bolts used from the batch
from which the tested bolts were taken, must be tested at the Contractor's
expense. Retest new bolts after installation at the Contractor's expense.
3.7.4 Testing for Embrittlement
ASTM A143/A143M for steel products hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

Submit embrittlement test reports.
SECTION 05 21 19
OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST FRAMING

07/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AWS B2.1/B2.1M (2014) Specification for Welding Procedure

and Performance Qualification

Code - Steel
SSPC Paint 15 (1999; E 2004) Steel Joist Shop Primer
STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE (SJI)
SJI LOAD TABLES (2005; Errata 1 2006; Errata 2 2007;

Errata 3 2007) 42nd Edition Catalog of
Standard Specifications Load Tables and
Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist
Girders
SJI MANUAL (2009) 80 Years of Open Web Steel Joist

Construction
SJI TD 10 (2003) Technical Digest No. 10 - Design of

Fire Resistive Assemblies with Steel Joists
SJI TD 8 (2008) Technical Digest No. 8 - Welding Of

Open-Web Steel Joists And Joist Girders;
2nd Edition
SJI TD 9 (2008) Technical Digest No. 9 - Handling

and Erection of Steel Joists and Joist
Girders; 3rd Edition
29 CFR 1910.1200 Hazard Communication
29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for

Construction
29 CFR 1926.757 Steel Erection; Open Web Steel Joists
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Welder qualification
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) per OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1200
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Steel joist framing; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Erection inspection
Welding inspections
SD-07 Certificates
Accessories
Certification of Compliance
1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENT
All joist girder framing must conform to 29 CFR 1926.757. Secure all
joist bridging and anchoring in place prior to the application of any
construction loads. Distribute temporary loads so that joist capacity is
not exceeded. Do not apply loads to bridging.
1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Handle, transport, and store joists in a manner to prevent damage

affecting their structural integrity. Store all items off the ground in a
well drained location protected from the weather and easily accessible for
inspection and handling.
All work must comply with the requirements set forth in 29 CFR 1926.
1.5.1 Drawing Requirements
Submit steel joist framing drawings. Show joist type and size, layout in
plan, and erection details including methods of anchoring, framing at
openings, type and spacing of bridging, requirements for field welding,
and details of accessories as applicable.
1.5.2 Certification of Compliance
Prior to construction commencement, submit Material Safety Data Sheetper

29 CFR 1910.1200 for steel joists , and certification for welder
qualification, compliance with AWS B2.1/B2.1M, welding operation, and

tacker, stating the type of welding and positions qualified for, the code
and procedure qualified under, date qualified, and the firm and individual
certifying the qualification tests.
Submit certification of compliance for the following:

SJI MANUAL
SJI TD 8
SJI TD 9
SJI TD 10
29 CFR 1926
29 CFR 1926.757
1.6 AT/FP DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Roof joists shall be designed to meet the following requirements to

achieve AT/FP compliance.
1.6.1 Joists
Joists shall be designed with section properties equivalent to or greater

than the joist sizes provided on the structural drawings.
1.6.2 Materials
Top and bottom chord members shall be 50 ksi.
1.6.3 Bracing
Provide bottom chord bracing at 1/4 points.
1.6.4 Connections
End shear connections between the joist and the supporting element shall
be designed to resist the flexural capacity of the joist in both the
downward and uplift directions. Connections between web members and
chords shall result in web buckling prior to connection failure.
1.6.5 Other Requirements
Both the bottom chord and top chord shall yield prior to buckling of the
web members considering a uniform load scenario. The shear
demand-to-capacity ratio shall be less than or equal to 0.9.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 JOISTS AND ACCESSORIES
Provide design data from SJI LOAD TABLES for the joist series indicated.
2.2 PAINTING
2.2.1 Shop Painting
Clean and prime joists in accordance with SSPC Paint 15.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Handling and Erection
Conform to SJI LOAD TABLES for the joist series indicated.
3.1.2 Welding
All welding must conform to AWS B2.1/B2.1M and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.2 BEARING PLATES
Provide bearing plates to accept full bearing after the supporting members
have been plumbed and properly positioned, but prior to placing
superimposed loads. The area under the plate must be damp-packed solidly
with bedding mortar, except where nonshrink grout is indicated on the
drawings. Bedding mortar and grout must be as specified in Section
03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
3.3 PAINTING
3.3.1 Touch-Up Painting
After erection of joists , touch-up connections and areas of abraded shop

coat with paint of the same type used for the shop coat.
3.3.2 Field Painting
Paint joists requiring a finish coat in conformance with the requirements

of Section 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING.
3.4 VISUAL INSPECTIONS
3.4.1 Erection Inspection
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 6. Perform erection inspection and field welding

inspections with AWS certified welding inspectors. Welding inspectors
must visually inspect and mark welds.
SECTION 05 30 00
STEEL DECKS
11/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Buildings
AISI D100 (1991; R 2008) Cold-Formed Steel Design

Manual
AISI SG03-3 (2002; Suppl 2001-2004; R 2008)

Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual Set

Code - Steel

Code - Sheet Steel
ASTM A1008/A1008M (2013) Standard Specification for Steel,

Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength
Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened
ASTM A108 (2013) Standard Specification for Steel

Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished

Steel Products

Structural Steel
ASTM A653/A653M (2013) Standard Specification for Steel

Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process

Galvanized Coatings

Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by
the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM D1056 (2014) Standard Specification for Flexible

Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded
Rubber

Rubber Deterioration - Surface Ozone
Cracking in a Chamber
ASTM D746 (2013) Standard Test Method for

Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and
Elastomers by Impact

Materials
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM APP GUIDE (updated on-line) Approval Guide

http://www.approvalguide.com/
FM DS 1-28 (2002) Design Wind Loads
SSPC Paint 20 (2002; E 2004) Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I,

Inorganic, and Type II, Organic)
STEEL DECK INSTITUTE (SDI)
SDI 31 (2007) Design Manual for Composite Decks,

Form Decks, and Roof Decks
SDI DDMO3 (2004; Errata 2006; Add 2006) Diaphragm

Design Manual; 3rd Edition
SDI DDP (1987; R 2000) Deck Damage and Penetrations
SDI MOC2 (2006) Manual of Construction with Steel

Deck
UFC 3-301-01 (2013) Structural Engineering
UL 209 (2011) Cellular Metal Floor Raceways and

Fittings
UL 580 (2006; Reprint Oct 2013) Tests for Uplift

Resistance of Roof Assemblies
UL Bld Mat Dir (2012) Building Materials Directory
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fabrication Drawings
Cant Strips
Ridge and Valley Plates
Metal Closure Strips
SD-03 Product Data
Accessories
Deck Units
Galvanizing Repair Paint
Joint Sealant Material
Mechanical Fasteners
Powder-Actuated Tool Operator
Repair Paint
Sound Absorbing Material
Welder Qualifications
Welding Equipment
Welding Rods and Accessories
SD-04 Samples
Metal Roof Deck Units
Flexible Closure Strips
Accessories
SD-05 Design Data
Deck Units
Submit manufacturer's design calculations, or applicable published

literature for the structural properties of the proposed deck
units.
SD-07 Certificates
. Welding Procedures
Fire Safety
Wind Storm Resistance
1.3.1 Deck Units
Furnish deck units and accessory products from a manufacturer regularly

engaged in manufacture of steel decking. Provide manufacturer's
certificates attesting that the decking material meets the specified
requirements.
1.3.2 Certification of Powder-Actuated Tool Operator
Manufacturer's certificate attesting that the operators are authorized to

use the low velocity powder-actuated tool.
1.3.3 Qualifications for Welding Work
Follows Welding Procedures in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Test

specimens shall be made in the presence of Contracting Officer and shall
be tested by an approved testing laboratory at the Contractor's expense.
Submit qualified Welder Qualifications in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

or under an equivalent approved qualification test. Perform tests on test
pieces in positions and with clearances equivalent to those actually
encountered. If a test weld fails to meet requirements, perform an
immediate retest of two test welds until each test weld passes. Failure
in the immediate retest will require the welder be retested after further
practice or training, performing a complete set of test welds.
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for Welding Equipment and Welding Rods
and Accessories.
1.3.4.1 Fire Safety
Test roof deck as a part of a roof deck construction assembly of the type
used for this project, listing as fire classified in the UL Bld Mat Dir,
or listing as Class I construction in the FM APP GUIDE, and so labeled.
1.3.4.2 Wind Storm Resistance
Provide roof construction assembly capable of withstanding an uplift

pressure as indicated on drawings when tested in accordance with the
uplift pressure test described in the FM DS 1-28 or as described in UL 580
and in general compliance with UFC 3-301-01.
1.3.5 Fabrication Drawings
Show type and location of units, location and sequence of connections,

bearing on supports, methods of anchoring, attachment of accessories,
adjusting plate details, size and location of holes to be cut and
reinforcement to be provided, the manufacturer's erection instructions and
other pertinent details.
Deliver deck units to the site in a dry and undamaged condition. Store
and handle steel deck in a manner to protect it from corrosion,
deformation, and other types of damage. Do not use decking for storage or
as working platform until units have been fastened into position.
Exercise care not to damage material or overload decking during
construction. The maximum uniform distributed storage load must not
exceed the design live load. Stack decking on platforms or pallets and
cover with weathertight ventilated covering. Elevate one end during
storage to provide drainage. Maintain deck finish at all times to prevent
formation of rust. Repair deck finish using touch-up paint. Replace
damaged material.
1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR ROOF DECKS
1.5.1 Properties of Sections
Properties of metal roof deck sections must comply with engineering design
width as limited by the provisions of AISI D100.
1.5.2 Allowable Loads
Indicate total uniform dead and live load for detailing purposes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Steel Sheet
Flat rolled carbon steel sheets of structural quality, thickness as

indicated on drawings, meeting the requirements of AISI SG03-3, except as
modified herein.
2.1.2 Steel Coating
ASTM A653/A653M designation G90 galvanized, or ASTM A792/A792M designation

AZ55, aluminum-zinc alloy. Apply coating to both sides of sheet. Conform
to UL 209 for coating on decking provided as wire raceways.
2.1.3 Mixes
2.1.3.1 Galvanizing Repair Paint for Floor Decks
Provide a high-zinc-dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in

galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A780/A780M.
2.1.4 Galvanized Steel Angles for Roof Decks
Provide hot-rolled carbon steel angles conforming to ASTM A36/A36M,

merchant quality, Grade Designation SAE/AISI 1023 or SAE/AISI 1025, and
hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.
2.1.5 Joint Sealant Material for Roof Decks
Provide a nonskinning, gun-grade, bulk compound material as recommended by

the manufacturer.
2.1.6 Galvanizing Repair Paint for Roof Decks
Provide a high zinc-dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in

galvanized steel and shall conform to ASTM A780/A780M.
2.1.7 Flexible Closure Strips for Roof Decks
Provide strips made of elastomeric material specified and premolded to the

configuration required to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends and
sides of steel roof decking.
Provide a vulcanized, closed-cell, expanded chloroprene elastomer having

approximately 3.5 psi compressive-deflection at 25 percent deflection
(limits), conforming to ASTM D1056, Grade No. SCE 41, with the following
additional properties:
Brittleness temperature of minus 40 degrees F when tested in

accordance with ASTM D746.
Flammability resistance with a flame spread rating of less than 25

when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
Resistance to ozone must be "no cracks" after exposure of a sample

kept under a surface tensile strain of 25 percent to an ozone
concentration of 100 parts per million of air by volume in air for 100
hours at 104 degrees F and tested in accordance with ASTM D1149.
Provide a elastomeric type adhesive with a chloroprene base as

recommended by the manufacturer of the flexible closure strips.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
Provide accessories of same material as deck, unless specified otherwise.

Provide manufacturer's standard type accessories, as specified.
2.2.1 Adjusting Plates
Provide adjusting plates, or segments of deck units, of same thickness and

configuration as deck units in locations too narrow to accommodate full
size units. Provide factory cut plates of predetermined size where
possible.
2.2.2 End Closures
Fabricated of sheet metal by the deck manufacturer. Provide end closures

minimum 0.028 inch thick to close open ends at exposed edges of floors,
parapets, end walls, eaves, and openings through deck.
2.2.3 Partition Closures
Provide closures for closing voids above interior walls and partitions
that are perpendicular to the direction of the configurations. Provide
rubber, plastic, or sheet steel closures above typical partitions.
Provide sheet steel closures above fire-resistant interior walls and
partitions located on both sides of wall or partition.
2.2.4 Closure Plates for Composite Deck
Support and retain concrete at each floor level. Provide edge closures at
all edges of the slab of sufficient strength and stiffness to support the
wet concrete. Provide metal closures for all openings in composite steel
deck 1/4 inch and over.
2.2.5 Sheet Metal Collar
Where deck is cut for passage of pipes, ducts, columns, etc., and deck is
to remain exposed, provide a neatly cut sheet metal collar to cover edges
of deck. Do not cut deck until after installation of supplemental
supports.
2.2.6 Cover Plates
Sheet metal to close panel edge and end conditions, and where panels
change direction or butt. Polyethylene-coated, self-adhesive, 2 inch wide
joint tape may be provided in lieu of cover plates on flat-surfaced
decking butt joints.
Fabricate cover plates for abutting floor deck units from the specified
structural-quality steel sheets not less than nominalthick before
galvanizing. Provide 6 inch wide cover plates and form to match the
contour of the floor deck units.
2.2.7 Roof Sump Pans
Sump pans must be provided for roof drains and must be minimum 0.075 inch
thick steel, flat or recessed type. Shape sump pans to meet roof slope by
the supplier or by a sheet metal specialist. Provide bearing flanges of
sump pans to overlap steel deck a minimum of 3 inch. Shape, size, and
reinforce the opening in bottom of the sump pan to receive roof drain.
2.2.8 Column Closures
Sheet metal, minimum 0.0358 inch thick or metal rib lath.
2.2.9 Access Hole Covers
Sheet metal, minimum 0.0474 inch thick.
2.2.10 Hanger
Provide clips or loops for utility systems and suspended ceilings of one
or more of the following types:
a. Lip tabs or integral tabs where noncellular decking or flat plate of

cellular section is 0.0474 inch thick or more, and a structural
concrete fill is used over deck.
b. Slots or holes punched in decking for installation of pigtails.
c. Tabs driven from top side of decking and arranged so as not to pierce
electrical cells.
d. Decking manufacturer's standard as approved by the Contracting Officer.
2.2.11 Shear Connectors
Provide shear connectors as headed stud type, ASTM A108, Grade 1015 or
1020, cold finished carbon steel with dimensions complying with AISC 360.
2.2.12 Mechanical Fasteners
Provide mechanical fasteners, such as powder actuated or pneumatically

driven fasteners, for anchoring the deck to structural supports and
adjoining units that are designed to meet the loads indicated. Provide
positive locking-type fasteners listed by the Steel Deck Institute and
ICC-ES, as approved by the Contracting Officer.
2.2.13 Miscellaneous Accessories

Furnish the manufacturer's standard accessories to complete the deck
installation. Furnish metal accessories of the same material as the deck
and with the minimum design thickness as follows: saddles, 0.0474 inch
welding washers, 0.0598 inch cant strip, 0.0295 inch other metal
accessories, 0.0358 inch unless otherwise indicated. Accessories must
include but not be limited to saddles, welding washers, fasteners, cant
strips, butt cover plates, underlapping sleeves, and ridge and valley
plates.
2.3 FABRICATION
Furnish one sample of each type of Metal Floor Deck Units used to
illustrate the actual cross section dimensions and configuration.
Furnish sample of Metal Roof Deck Units used to illustrate actual cross
section dimensions and configurations.
Furnish one sample of each type Flexible Closure Strips, 12 inch long.
2.3.1 Deck Units
2.3.2 Roof Deck
Conform to ASTM A792/A792M or ASTM A1008/A1008M for deck used in

conjunction with insulation and built-up roofing. Fabricate roof deck
units of the steel design thickness required by the design drawings and
galvanized or zinc-coated in conformance with ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating
class or aluminum-zinc coated in accordance with ASTM A792/A792M Coating
Designation AZ55.
2.3.2.1 Cant Strips for Roof Decks
Fabricate cant strips from the specified commercial-quality steel sheets

not less than nominal 0.0359 inch thick before galvanizing. Bend strips to
form a 45-degree cant not less than 5 inch wide, with top and bottom
flanges a minimum 3 inch wide. Length of strips 10 feet.
2.3.2.2 Ridge and Valley Plates for Roof Decks
Fabricate plates from the specified structural-quality steel sheets, not

less than nominal 0.0359 inch thick before galvanizing. Provide plates of
minimum 4-1/2 inch wide and bent to provide tight fitting closures at
ridges and valleys. Provide a minimum length of ridge and valley plates of
10 feet.
2.3.2.3 Metal Closure Stripsfor Roof Decks
Fabricate strips from the specified commercial-quality steel sheets not

less than nominal 0.0359 inch thick before galvanizing. Provide strips
from the configuration required to provide tight-fitting closures at open
ends and sides of steel roof decking.
2.3.3 Form Deck
Conform to ASTM A653/A653M or ASTM A1008/A1008M for deck used as formwork

for concrete. Fabricate form deck of the steel design thickness required
by the design drawings. Zinc-coat in conformance with ASTM A653/A653M, G90
coating class.
2.3.4 Composite Deck
Conform to ASTM A653/A653M or ASTM A1008/A1008M for composite deck

assembly. Fabricate deck used as the tension reinforcing in composite
deck of the steel design thickness required by the design drawings.
Zinc-coat in conformance with ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating class.
In addition to resisting shear, provide devices to resist vertical

separation between the steel deck and the concrete. Provide one of the
following types of shear devices:
a. Mechanically fixed shear devices such as embossments, holes, or welded

buttons.
b. Mechanically or powder-actuated devices such as inverted, triangular

or L-shaped ribs
2.3.5 Shop Priming
Shop prime accessories and underside of deck at the factory after

coating. Clean surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's standard
procedure followed by a spray, dip or roller coat of rust-inhibitive
primer, oven cured.
2.3.6 Touch-Up Paint
Provide touch-up paint for shop-painted units of the same type used for
the shop painting, and touch-up paint for zinc-coated units of an approved
galvanizing repair paint with a high-zinc dust content. Touch-up welds
with paint conforming to SSPC Paint 20 in accordance with ASTM A780/A780M.
Maintain finish of deck units and accessories by using touch-up paint
whenever necessary to prevent the formation of rust.
For floor decking installation, wire brush, clean, and touchup paint the
scarred areas on the top and bottom surfaces of the metal floor decking
and on the surface of supporting steel members. Include welds, weld
scars, bruises, and rust spots for scarred areas. Touched up the
galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint. Touch up the painted

surfaces with paint for the repair of painted surfaces.
After roof decking installation, wire brush, clean, and touchup paint the
scarred areas on top and bottom surfaces of metal roof decking. The
scarred areas include welds, weld scars, bruises, and rust spots. Touchup
galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint. Touchup painted
surfaces with repair paint of painted surfaces.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Prior to installation of decking units and accessories, examine worksite

to verify that as-built structure will permit installation of decking
system without modification.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Install steel deck units in accordance with SDI 31, SDI DDMO3, and
approved shop drawings. Place units on structural supports, properly
adjusted, leveled, and aligned at right angles to supports before
permanently securing in place. Damaged deck and accessories including
material which is permanently stained or contaminated, deformed, or with
burned holes shall not be installed. Extend deck units over three or more
supports unless absolutely impractical. Report inaccuracies in alignment
or leveling to the Contracting Officer and make necessary corrections
before permanently anchoring deck units. Locate deck ends over supports
only. Ends of floor deck may be lapped or butted. Do not use unanchored
deck units as a work or storage platform. Do not fill unanchored deck with
concrete. Permanently anchor units placed by the end of each working day.
Do not support suspended ceilings, light fixtures, ducts, utilities, or
other loads by steel deck unless indicated. Distribute loads by
appropriate means to prevent damage. Prepare shoring in position before
concrete placement begins in composite or form deck.
3.2.1 Attachment
Immediately after placement and alignment, and after correcting

inaccuracies, permanently fasten steel deck units to structural supports
and to adjacent deck units by welding with normal5/8 inch diameter puddle
welds or fastened with screws, powder-actuated fasteners, or pneumatically
driven fasteners as indicated on the design drawings and in accordance
with manufacturer's recommended procedure and SDI 31. Clamp or weight
deck units to provide firm contact between deck units and structural
supports while performing welding or fastening. Attachment of adjacent
deck units by button-punching is prohibited.
3.2.1.1 Welding
Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.3/D1.3M using methods and

electrodes recommended by the manufacturers of the base metal alloys being
used. Ensure only operators previously qualified by tests prescribed in
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.3/D1.3M make welds. Immediately recertify, or
replace qualified welders, that are producing unsatisfactory welding.
Conform to the recommendations of the Steel Deck Institute and the steel
deck manufacturerfor location, size, and spacing of fastening. Do use
welding washers at the connections of the deck to supports. Do not use
welding washers at sidelaps. Holes and similar defects will not be
acceptable. Lap 2 inch deck ends. Attach all partial or segments of deck
units to structural supports in accordance with Section 2.5 of SDI DDMO3.
Attach shear connectors as shown and welded as per AWS D1.1/D1.1M directly
to the steel member. Immediately clean welds by chipping and wire
brushing. Heavily coat welds, cut edges and damaged portions of coated
finish with zinc-dust paint conforming to ASTM A780/A780M and shop primed
finish with the manufacturer's standard touch-up paint.
3.2.1.2 Fastening
Anchor deck to structural supports and adjoining units with mechanical

fasteners as listed by the Steel Deck Institute, ICC-ES, the fastener and
steel deck manufacturers, and approved by the Contracting Officer. Drive
the powder-actuated fasteners with a low-velocity piston tool by an
operator authorized by the manufacturer of the powder-actuated tool.
Drive pneumatically fasteners with a low-velocity fastening tool and
comply with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2.1.3 Fastening Floor Deck Units
Fasten floor deck units to the steel supporting members at ends and at all
intermediate supports, both parallel and perpendicular to deck span, by
welds. Do not exceed spacing of welds of 12 inch on center, with a
minimum of two welds per floor deck unit at each support. Provide 3/4
inch minimum diameter fusion welds. Coordinate welding sequence and
procedure with the placing of the floor deck units. Blow holes shall be
cause for rejection.
Lock sidelaps between adjacent floor deck units together at intervals not
exceeding 48 inch on center by welding or button punching for all spans.
3.2.2 Openings
Cut or drill all holes and openings required and be coordinated with the
drawings, specifications, and other trades. Frame and reinforce openings
through the deck in conformance with SDI DDP. Reinforce holes and openings
6 to 12 inch across by 0.0474 inch thick steel sheet at least 12 inch
wider and longer than the opening and be fastened to the steel deck at
each corner of the sheet and at a maximum of 6 inch on center. Reinforce
holes and openings larger than 12 inch by steel channels or angles
installed perpendicular to the steel joists and supported by the adjacent
steel joists. Install steel channels or angles perpendicular to the deck
ribs and fasten to the channels or angles perpendicular to the steel
joists. Deck manufacturer shall approve holes or openings larger than 6
inch in diameter prior to drilling or cutting. Openings must not
interfere with seismic members such as chords and drag struts.
3.2.3 Deck Damage
SDI MOC2, for repair of deck damage.
3.2.4 Accessory Installation
3.2.4.1 Adjusting Plates
Provide in locations too narrow to accommodate full-size deck units and

install as shown on shop drawings.
3.2.4.2 End Closures
Provide end closure to close open ends of cells at columns, walls, and
openings in deck.
3.2.4.3 Closures Above Partitions
Provide for closing voids between cells over partitions that are
perpendicular to direction of cells. Provide a one-piece closure strip
for partitions 4 inch nominal or less in thickness and two-piece closure
strips for wider partitions. Provide sheet metal closures above
fire-rated partitions at both sides of partition with space between filled
with fiberglass insulation. Provide flexible rubber closures above
acoustic-rated partitions at both sides of partition with space between
filled with blanket insulation.
3.2.4.4 Cover Plates
Where concrete leakage would be a problem, provide metal cover plates, or

joint tape, at joints between decking sheets, cellular or noncellular, to
be covered with concrete fill.
3.2.4.5 Column Closures
Provide for spaces between floor decking and columns which penetrate the
deck. Field cut closure plate to fit column in the field and tack weld to
decking and columns.
3.2.4.6 Access Hole Covers
Provide access whole covers to seal holes cut in decking to facilitate

welding of the deck to structural supports.
3.2.4.7 Hangers
Provide as indicated to support utility system and suspended ceilings.

Space devices as indicated.
3.2.5 Concrete Work
Prior to placement of concrete, inspect installed decking to ensure that

there has been no permanent deflection or other damage to decking.
Replace decking which has been damaged or permanently deflected as
approved by the Contracting Officer. Place concrete on metal deck in
accordance with Construction Practice of SDI 31.
3.2.6 Preparation of Fire-Proofed Surfaces
Provide deck surfaces, both composite and noncomposite, which are to

receive sprayed-on fireproofing, galvanized and free of all grease, mill
oil, paraffin, dirt, salt, and other contaminants which impair adhesion of
the fireproofing. Complete any required cleaning prior to steel deck
installation using a cleaning method that is compatible with the
sprayed-on fireproofing.
3.3 ROOF SUMP PANS
Place sump pans over openings in roof decking and fusion welded to top
surface of roof decking. Do not exceed spacing of welds of 12 inch with
not less than one weld at each corner. Field cut opening in the bottom of
each roof sump pan to receive the roof drain as part of the work of this
section.
3.4 CANT STRIPS FOR ROOF DECKS
Provide strips to be fusion welded to surface of roof decking, secured to

wood nailers by galvanized screws or to steel framing by galvanized
self-tapping screws or welds. Do not exceed spacing of welds and
fasteners of 12 inch. Lap end joints a minimum 3 inch and secure with
galvanized sheet metal screws spaced a maximum 4 inch on center.
3.5 RIDGE AND VALLEY PLATES FOR ROOF DECKS
Provide plates to be fusion welded to top surface of roof decking. Lap

end joints a minimum 3 inch. For valley plates, provide endlaps to be in
the direction of water flow.
3.6 CLOSURE STRIPS FOR ROOF DECKS
Provide closure strips at open, uncovered ends and edges of the roof
decking and in voids between roof decking and top of walls and partitions
where indicated. Install closure strips in position in a manner to
provide a weathertight installation.
3.7 ROOF INSULATION SUPPORT FOR ROOF DECKS
Provide metal closure strips for support of roof insulation where rib
openings in top surface of metal roof decking occur adjacent to edges and
openings. Weld metal closure strips in position.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION FOR ROOF DECKS
Upon completion of the deck, sweep surfaces clean and prepare for
installation of the roofing.
3.9.1 Decks Not Receiving Concrete
Inspect the decking top surface for distortion after installation. For
roof decks not receiving concrete, verify distortion by placing a straight
edge across three adjacent top flanges. The maximum allowable gap between
the straight edge and the top flanges is 1/16 inch; when gap is more than
1/16 inch, provide corrective measures or replacement. Reinspect decking
after performing corrective measures or replacement.
SECTION 05 40 00
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AISI S100 (2012) North American Specification for

the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members
AISI S200 (2007) North American Standard for

Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General
Provision

Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Product Data
AISI S202 (2011) Code of Standard Practice for

Cold-formed Steel Structural Framing

Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Wall Stud
Design

Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design
AISI S213 (2007; Suppl 1 2009) North American

Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing -
Lateral Design
AISI SG02-KIT (2001; Supp 1 2004) North American

Specification for the Design of
Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members
AISI SG03-3 (2002; Suppl 2001-2004; R 2008)


Code - Steel

Code - Sheet Steel
ASTM A1003/A1003M (2013b) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and

Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing
Members

Steel Products

Hardware
ASTM A370 (2014) Standard Test Methods and

Definitions for Mechanical Testing of
Steel Products

the Hot-Dip Process

Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse
and Axial) Steel Studs and Related
Accessories
ASTM C1513 (2013) Standard Specification for Steel

Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel
Framing Connections
ASTM C955 (2011c) Load-Bearing (Transverse and

Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and
Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application
of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster
Bases
ASTM E119 (2014) Standard Test Methods for Fire

Tests of Building Construction and
Materials

Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or
Inspection of Materials Used in
Construction
ASTM F1941 (2010) Standard Specification for

Electrodeposited Coatings on Threaded
Fasteners (Unified Inch Screw Threads
(UN/UNR))
ASTM F1941M (2007) Standard Specification for

Electrodeposited Coatings on Threaded
Fasteners (Metric)
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Framing Components; G, A/E
a. Cross sections, plans, and/or elevations showing component

types and locations for each framing application; including shop
coatings and material thicknesses for each framing component.
b. Connection details showing fastener type, quantity,

location, and other information to assure proper installation.
c. Drawings depicting panel configuration, dimensions,

components, locations, and construction sequence if the Contractor
elects to install prefabricated/prefinished frames.
SD-03 Product Data
Steel studs,joists, tracks, bracing, bridging and accessories
SD-05 Design Data
Metal framing calculations; G, A/E
SD-07 Certificates
Load-bearing cold-formed metal framing
Mill certificates or test reports from independent testing

agency, qualified in accordance with ASTM E329, showing that the
steel sheet used in the manufacture of each cold-formed component
complies with the minimum yield strengths and uncoated steel
thickness specified. Test reports shall be based on the results
of three coupon tests in accordance with ASTM A370.
Welds
Certified copies of welder qualifications test records showing

qualification in accordance with AWS D1.3/D1.3M.
Deliver materials to job site and store in adequately ventilated, dry

locations. Storage area shall permit easy access for inspection and
handling. If necessary to store materials outside, stack off the ground,
support on a level platform, and protect from the weather as approved.
Handle materials to prevent damage. Finish of the framing members shall
be maintained at all times, using an approved high zinc dust content,
galvanizing repair paint whenever necessary to prevent the formation of
rust. Replace damaged items with new, as directed by the Contracting
Officer. Steel framing and related accessories shall be stored and
handled in accordance with the AISI S202, "Code of Standard Practice for
Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing".
1.4 LOAD-BEARING COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Include top and bottom tracks, bracing, fastenings, and other accessories
necessary for complete installation. Framing members shall have the

structural properties indicated. Where physical structural properties are
not indicated, they shall be as necessary to withstand all imposed loads.
Design framing in accordance with AISI SG03-3. Non-load-bearing metal
framing, furring, and ceiling suspension systems are specified in Section
09 22 00 SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD. Metal suspension systems
for acoustical ceilings are specified in Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL
CEILINGS.
1.5 MAXIMUM DEFLECTION
a. Exterior Studs:
Deflection Criteria Exterior Finish
L/240 or L/360 Synthetic Plaster, Metal Panels
L/360 Cement Plaster, Wood Veneer
L/600 Brick Veneer, Stone Panels
Wall deflections shall be computed on the basis that studs withstand all
lateral forces independent of any composite action from sheathing
materials. Studs abutting windows or louvers shall also be designed not
to exceed 1/4 inch maximum deflection.
b. Floor Joists:
L/360 - Live load only

L/240 - Total load
c. Roof Rafters:
L/240 - Live load only
a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design

calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional
engineer.
b. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is

legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where project is located
and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind
indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those
indicated for this project in material, design, and extent.
c. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency,

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to
ASTM E329 for testing indicated.
d. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified

independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with
requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile
strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and
metallic-coating thickness.
e. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according

to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel".
2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel".
f. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide

cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for
fire resistance per ASTM E119 by, and displaying a classification
label from, a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
g. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with:
1. AISI S100, "North American Specification for the Design of

Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members".
2. AISI S200, "North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing

- General Provision".

- Product Data".
4. AISI S202, "Code of Standard Practice for Cold-Formed Steel

Structural Framing".

- Wall Stud Design".

- Header Design".

- Lateral Design".
Submit framing components to show sizes, thicknesses, layout, material

designations, methods of installation, and accessories.
1.6.2 Design Data Required
Submit metal framing calculations to verify sizes, gages, and spacing of

members and connections. Show methods and practices used in installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL STUDS, JOISTS, TRACKS, BRACING, BRIDGING AND ACCESSORIES
Framing components shall comply with ASTM C955 and the following.
a. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average

recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content
plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
b. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web

depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.
2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches.
3. Section Properties: As shown on drawings.
e. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of

web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs.
2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches.
2.1.1 Studs and Joists of 16 Gage (0.0538 Inch) and Heavier
Galvanized steel, ASTM A653/A653M and ASTM A1003/A1003M, SS Grade 50, G60
or G90.
2.1.2 Studs and Joists of 18 Gage (0.0478 Inch) and Lighter
Studs and Joists of 18 Gage (0.0428 Inch) and Lighter, Track, and
Accessories (All Gages): Galvanized steel, ASTM A653/A653M and
ASTM A1003/A1003M, SS, Grade 50 33,000 psi G60.
2.1.3 Sizes, Gages, Section Modulus, and Other Structural Properties
Size and gage as indicated. Steel stud deflection shall be limited to

L/600 for exterior wall brick veneer construction.
2.2 MARKINGS
Studs and track shall have product markings stamped on the web of the
section. The markings shall be repeated throughout the length of the
member at a maximum spacing of 4 feet on center and shall be legible and
easily read. The product marking shall include the following:
a. An ICC number.
b. Manufacturer's identification.
c. Minimum delivered uncoated steel thickness.
d. Protective coating designator.
e. Minimum yield strength.
2.3 CONNECTIONS
Screws for steel-to-steel connections shall be self-drilling, tapping

screws in compliance with ASTM C1513 of the type, size and location as
shown on the drawings. Electroplated screws shall have a minimum 5 micron
zinc coating in accordance with ASTM F1941. Screws, bolts, and anchors
shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M or
ASTM A153/A153M as appropriate. Screws bolts, and anchors shall be hot
dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M as
appropriate.
2.4 PLASTIC GROMMETS
Supply plastic grommets, recommended by stud manufacturer, to protect

electrical wires. Prevent metal to metal contact for plumbing pipes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FASTENING
Fasten framing members together by welding or by using self-drilling or

self-tapping screws. Electrodes and screw connections shall be as
required and indicated in the design calculations.
3.1.1 Welds
All welding shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.3/D1.3M, as

modified by AISI SG02-KIT. All welders, welding operations, and welding
procedures shall be qualified according to AWS D1.3/D1.3M. All welds
shall be cleaned and coated with rust inhibitive galvanizing paint. Do
not field weld materials lighter than 18 gage.
3.1.2 Screws
Screws shall be of the self-drilling self-tappingtype, size, and location

shown on the drawings. Screw penetration through joined materials shall
not be less than three exposed threads. Minimum spacings and edge
distances for screws shall be as specified in AISI SG02-KIT. Screws
covered by sheathing materials shall have low profile heads.
3.1.3 Anchors
Anchors shall be of the type, size, and location shown on the drawings.
3.1.4 Powder-Actuated Fasteners
Powder-actuated fasteners shall be of the type, size, and location shown

on the drawings.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Install cold-formed framing in accordance with ASTM C1007 and AISI S200.
Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S202 and to

manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are
indicated.
3.2.1 Tracks
Provide accurately aligned runners at top and bottom of partitions.

Anchor tracks as indicated in design calculations. Butt weld joints in
tracks or splice with stud inserts. Fasteners shall be at least 3 inches
from the edge of concrete slabs.
3.2.2 Studs
Cut studs square and set with firm bearing against webs of top and bottom
tracks. Position studs vertically in tracks and space as indicated in
design. Do not splice studs. Provide at least two studs at jambs of

doors and other openings 2 feet wide or larger. Provide jack studs over
openings, as necessary, to maintain indicated stud spacing. Provide
tripled studs at corners, positioned to receive interior and exterior
finishes. Fasten studs to top and bottom tracks by welding or screwing
both flanges to the tracks. Framed wall openings shall include headers
and supporting components as shown on the drawings. Headers shall be
installed in all openings that are larger than the stud spacing in a
wall. In curtain wall construction, provide for vertical movement where
studs connect to the structural frame. Provide horizontal bracing in
accordance with the design calculations and AISI SG03-3, consisting of, as
a minimum, runner channel cut to fit between and welded to the studs or
hot- or cold-rolled steel channels inserted through cutouts in web of each
stud and secured to studs with welded clip angles. Bracing shall be not
less than the following:
LOAD HEIGHT BRACING
Wind load only Up to 10 feet One row at mid-height
Over 10 feet Rows 5'-0" o.c. maximum
Axial load Up to 10 feet Two rows at 1/3 points
Over 10 feet Rows 3'-4" o.c. maximum
3.2.3 Joists and Trusses
Locate each joist or truss directly above a stud. Provide doubled joists
under parallel partitions wherever partition length exceeds 1/2 of joist
span. Joists shall have at least 2.50 inches of bearing on steel, 4 inches
on masonry, and shall be reinforced over bearings where required to
prevent web crippling. Splice joists over bearings only. Lap and weld
splices as indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard bridging which
shall not be less than the following:
CLEAR SPAN BRIDGING
Up to 14 feet One row near center
14 to 20 feet Two rows at 1/3 points
20 to 26 feet Three rows at 1/4 points
26 to 32 feet Four rows at 1/5 points
Temporary bracing shall be provided and remain in place until work is

permanently stabilized.
3.2.4 Erection Tolerances
a. Framing members which will be covered by finishes such as wallboard,
plaster, or ceramic tile set in a mortar setting bed, shall be within

the following limits:
(1) Layout of walls and partitions: 1/4 inch from intended

position;
(2) Plates and runners: 1/4 inch in 8 feet from a straight line;
(3) Studs: 1/4 inch in 8 feet out of plumb, not cumulative; and
(4) Face of framing members: 1/4 inch in 8 feet from a true

plane.
b. Framing members which will be covered by ceramic tile set in dry-set

mortar, latex-portland cement mortar, or organic adhesive shall be
within the following limits:
(1) Layout of walls and partitions: 1/4 inch from intended

position;
(2) Plates and runners: 1/8 inch in 8 feet from a straight line;
(3) Studs: 1/8 inch in 8 feet out of plumb, not cumulative; and
(4) Face of framing members: 1/8 inch in 8 feet from a true

plane.
SECTION 05 50 13
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS

05/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AA DAF45 (2003; Reaffirmed 2009) Designation System

for Aluminum Finishes
AISC 303 (2010) Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges
ASSE/SAFE A10.3 (2013) Operations - Safety Requirements

for Powder Actuated Fastening Systems

Code - Steel
ASME B18.2.1 (2012; Errata 2013) Square and Hex Bolts

and Screws (Inch Series)
ASME B18.2.2 (2010) Nuts for General Applications:

Machine Screw Nuts, Hex, Square, Hex
Flange, and Coupling Nuts (Inch Series)
ASME B18.21.1 (2009) Washers: Helical Spring-Lock, Tooth

Lock, and Plain Washers (Inch Series)
ASME B18.6.2 (1998; R 2010) Slotted Head Cap Screws,

Square Head Set Screws, and Slotted
Headless Set Screws: Inch Series
ASME B18.6.3 (2013) Machine Screws, Tapping Screws, and

Machine Drive Screws (Inch Series)

Steel Products

Hardware

Strength

Structural Steel
ASTM A47/A47M (1999; R 2014) Standard Specification for

Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings

Shapes

Welded and Seamless

the Hot-Dip Process

Galvanized Coatings

Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM B108/B108M (2014) Standard Specification for

Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings
ASTM B209 (2014) Standard Specification for Aluminum

and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings

Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel
Framing Connections
ASTM D1187/D1187M (1997; E 2011; R 2011) Asphalt-Base

Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings
for Metal
ASTM E488/E488M (2010) Standard Test Methods for Strength
of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements
MPI 79 (Oct 2009) Alkyd Anti-Corrosive Metal

Primer
1.2 SUBMITTALS

approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Access doors and panels, installation drawings; G
Expansion joint covers, installation drawings; G, A/E
Embedded angles and plates, installation drawings; G
Roof hatch; G
Submit fabrication drawings showing layout(s), connections to

structural system, and anchoring details as specified in AISC 303.
Submit templates, erection and installation drawings indicating

thickness, type, grade, class of metal, and dimensions. Show
construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation
with relation to the building construction.
SD-03 Product Data
Access doors and panels; G
Expansion joint covers; G, A/E
Roof hatch; G
SD-04 Samples
Expansion joint covers; G
Provide full size samples , taken from manufacturer's stock, and

be complete as required for installation in the structure.
Samples may be installed in the work, provided each sample is
clearly identified and its location recorded.
1.3 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS
Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Use procedures,

materials, and equipment of the type required for the work.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
Protect from corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage. Store

items in an enclosed area free from contact with soil and weather. Remove
and replace damaged items with new items.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Structural Carbon Steel
ASTM A36/A36M.
2.1.2 Structural Tubing
ASTM A500/A500M.
2.1.3 Steel Pipe
ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or S, Grade B.
2.1.4 Fittings for Steel Pipe
Standard malleable iron fittings ASTM A47/A47M.
2.1.5 Anchor Bolts
ASTM A307. Where exposed, shall be of the same material, color, and
finish as the metal to which applied.
2.1.5.1 Expansion Anchors, Sleeve Anchors, and Adhesive Anchors
Provide expansion anchors, sleeve anchors, and adhesive anchors as noted

on drawings. Minimum concrete and masonry embedment shall be as noted on
drawings. Design values listed shall be as tested according to
ASTM E488/E488M.
2.1.5.2 Lag Screws and Bolts
ASME B18.2.1, type and grade best suited for the purpose.
2.1.5.3 Toggle Bolts
ASME B18.2.1.
2.1.5.4 Bolts, Nuts, Studs and Rivets
ASME B18.2.2 or ASTM A307.
2.1.5.5 Powder Actuated Fasteners
Follow safety provisions of ASSE/SAFE A10.3.
2.1.5.6 Screws
ASME B18.2.1, ASME B18.6.2, ASME B18.6.3 and ASTM C1513.
2.1.5.7 Washers
Provide plain washers to conform to ASME B18.21.1. Provide beveled

washers for American Standard beams and channels, square or rectangular,
tapered in thickness, and smooth. Provide lock washers to conform to
ASME B18.21.1.
2.1.6 Aluminum Alloy Products
Conform to ASTM B209 for sheet plate, ASTM B221 for extrusions and
ASTM B26/B26M or ASTM B108/B108M for castings, as applicable. Provide
aluminum extrusions at least 1/8 inch thick and aluminum plate or sheet at
least 0.050 inch thick.
2.2 FABRICATION FINISHES
2.2.1 Galvanizing
Hot-dip galvanize items specified to be zinc-coated, after fabrication

where practicable. Galvanizing: ASTM A123/A123M, ASTM A153/A153M,
ASTM A653/A653M or ASTM A924/A924M, G90, as applicable.
2.2.2 Galvanize
Anchor bolts, grating fasteners, washers, and parts or devices necessary

for proper installation, unless indicated otherwise.
2.2.3 Repair of Zinc-Coated Surfaces
Repair damaged surfaces with galvanizing repair method and paint

conforming to ASTM A780/A780M or by application of stick or thick paste
material specifically designed for repair of galvanizing, as approved by
Contracting Officer. Clean areas to be repaired and remove slag from
welds. Heat surfaces to which stick or paste material is applied, with a
torch to a temperature sufficient to melt the metallics in stick or paste;
spread molten material uniformly over surfaces to be coated and wipe off
excess material.
2.2.4 Shop Cleaning and Painting
2.2.4.1 Surface Preparation
Blast clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3. Surfaces

that will be exposed in spaces above ceiling or in attic spaces, crawl
spaces, furred spaces, and chases may be cleaned in accordance with
SSPC SP 3 in lieu of being blast cleaned. Wash cleaned surfaces which
become contaminated with rust, dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants
with solvents until thoroughly clean. Steel to be embedded in concrete
shall be free of dirt and grease. Do not paint or galvanize bearing
surfaces, including contact surfaces within slip critical joints, but coat
with rust preventative applied in the shop.
2.2.4.2 Pretreatment, Priming and Painting
Apply pretreatment, primer, and paint in accordance with manufacturer's
printed instructions. On surfaces concealed in the finished construction

or not accessible for finish painting, apply an additional prime coat to a
minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil. Tint additional prime coat with a
small amount of tinting pigment.
2.2.5 Nonferrous Metal Surfaces
Protect by plating, anodic, or organic coatings.
2.2.6 Aluminum Surfaces
2.2.6.1 Surface Condition
Before finishes are applied, remove roll marks, scratches, rolled-in

scratches, kinks, stains, pits, orange peel, die marks, structural
streaks, and other defects which will affect uniform appearance of
finished surfaces.
2.2.6.2 Aluminum Finishes
Unexposed sheet, plate and extrusions may have mill finish as fabricated.
Sandblast castings' finish, medium, AA DAF45. Unless otherwise specified,
provide all other aluminum items with a anodized finish. Provide a coating
thickness not less than that specified for protective and decorative type
finishes for items used in interior locations or architectural Class I
type finish for items used in exterior locations in AA DAF45. Provide a
polished satin finish on items to be anodized.
2.3 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
Provide flush type access doors and panels unless otherwise indicated.
Fabricate frames for access doors of steel not lighter than 14 gage with
welded joints and anchorage for securing into construction. Provide
access doors with a minimum of 14 by 20 inches and of not lighter than 14
gage steel, with stiffened edges and welded attachments. Provide access
doors hinged to frame and with a flush-face, turn-screw-operated latch.
Provide exposed metal surface with a baked enamel finish.
Provide ceiling access panels for terminal air blenders as indicated.

Provide pin-tumbler cylinder locks with appropriate cams in lieu of
screwdriver-operated latches.
2.4 EXPANSION JOINT COVERS
Provide expansion joint covers constructed of extruded aluminum with

anodized satin aluminum finish for walls and ceilings and with standard
mill finish for floor covers and exterior covers. Furnish plates, backup
angles, expansion filler strip and anchors as indicated.
2.5 GAS-TIGHT MANHOLE COVER AND FRAME
Provide a heavy duty type made of ductile cast-iron with bolted lid,
machined bearing surfaces and gasket grooves, continuous neoprene gasket,
counter sunk bronze hex head cap screws, and concealed watertight
pickholes. Provide frame with a 30 inch diameter clear opening. Maximum
weight of frame and cover together to be 530 pounds.
2.6 GUARD POSTS (BOLLARDS/PIPE GUARDS)
Provide galvanized standard weight steel pipe as specified in ASTM A53/A53M.

Anchor posts in concrete as indicated and fill solidly with concrete with
minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS PLATES AND SHAPES
Provide for items that do not form a part of the structural steel
framework, such as lintels, sill angles, miscellaneous mountings and
frames. Provide lintels fabricated from structural steel shapes over
openings in masonry walls and partitions as indicated and as required to
support wall loads over openings. Provide with connections and fasteners
or welds. Construct to have at least 8 inches bearing on masonry at each
end.
Provide angles and plates, ASTM A36/A36M, for embedment as indicated.

Galvanize embedded items exposed to the elements according to
ASTM A123/A123M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Install items at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's

instructions. Verify all measurements and take all field measurements
necessary before fabrication. Exposed fastenings shall be compatible
materials, shall generally match in color and finish, and harmonize with
the material to which fastenings are applied. Include materials and parts
necessary to complete each item, even though such work is not definitely
shown or specified. Poor matching of holes for fasteners shall be cause
for rejection. Conceal fastenings where practicable. Thickness of metal
and details of assembly and supports shall provide strength and
stiffness. Form joints exposed to the weather shall be formed to exclude
water. Items listed below require additional procedures.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
Provide miscellaneous metalwork that is well formed to shape and size,

with sharp lines and angles and true curves. Drilling and punching shall
produce clean true lines and surfaces. Provide continuous welding along
the entire area of contact except where tack welding is permitted. Do not
tack weld exposed connections of work in place and ground smooth. Provide
a smooth finish on exposed surfaces of work in place and unless otherwise
approved, flush exposed riveting. Mill joints where tight fits are
required. Corner joints shall be coped or mitered, well formed, and in
true alignment. Accurately set work to established lines and elevations
and securely fastened in place. Install in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions and approved drawings, cuts, and details.
3.3 ANCHORAGE, FASTENINGS, AND CONNECTIONS
Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening miscellaneous metal items

securely in place. Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or
indicated slotted inserts, expansion shields, and powder-driven fasteners,
when approved for concrete; toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry;
machine and carriage bolts for steel; through bolts, lag bolts, and screws
for wood. Do not use wood plugs in any material. Provide non-ferrous
attachments for non-ferrous metal. Make exposed fastenings of compatible
materials, generally matching in color and finish, to which fastenings are

applied. Conceal fastenings where practicable.
3.4 BUILT-IN WORK
Form for anchorage metal work built-in with concrete or masonry, or

provide with suitable anchoring devices as indicated or as required.
Furnish metal work in ample time for securing in place as the work
progresses.
3.5 WELDING
Perform welding, welding inspection, and corrective welding, in accordance

with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Use continuous welds on all exposed connections.
Grind visible welds smooth in the finished installation.
3.6 FINISHES
3.6.1 Dissimilar Materials
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, protect surfaces with a coat

conforming to MPI 79 to prevent galvanic or corrosive action. Where
aluminum is in contact with concrete, plaster, mortar, masonry, wood, or
absorptive materials subject to wetting, protect with ASTM D1187/D1187M,
asphalt-base emulsion.
3.6.2 Field Preparation
Remove rust preventive coating just prior to field erection, using a

remover approved by the rust preventive manufacturer. Surfaces, when
assembled, shall be free of rust, grease, dirt and other foreign matter.
3.6.3 Environmental Conditions
Do not clean or paint surface when damp or exposed to foggy or rainy

weather, when metallic surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above
the dew point of the surrounding air, or when surface temperature is below
45 degrees F or over 95 degrees F, unless approved by the Contracting
Officer.
3.7 ACCESS PANELS
Install a removable access panel not less than 12 by 12 inches directly

below each valve, flow indicator, damper, or air splitter that is located
above the ceiling, other than an acoustical ceiling, and that would
otherwise not be accessible.
3.8 ROOF HATCH (SCUTTLES)
Provide zinc-coated steel sheets not less than 14 gage, with 3 inch beaded
flange, welded and ground at corner. Provide a minimum clear opening of 36
by 36 inches. Construction and accessories as follows:
a. Insulate cover and curb with one inch thick rigid fiberboard
insulation covered and protected by zinc-coated steel liner not less
than 26 gagewith 12 inches high curb, formed with 3 inch mounting
flange with holes provided for securing to the roof deck. Equip the
curb with an integral metal cap flashing of the same gage and metal as
the curb, full welded and ground at corners for weather tightness.
b. Provide hatch completely assembled with pintle hinges, compression

spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes, positive snap latch
with turn handles on inside and outside, and neoprene draft seal.
Provide fasteners for padlocking on the inside. Equip the cover with
an automatic hold-open arm complete with grip handle to permit
one-hand release. Cover action shall be smooth through its entire
range with an operating pressure of approximately 30 pounds.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF GUARD POSTS (BOLLARDS/PIPE GUARDS)
Set pipe guards vertically in concrete piers. Construct piers of, and the
hollow cores of the pipe filled with, concrete having a compressive
strength of 3000 psi.
SECTION 05 51 00
METAL STAIRS
02/12
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Buildings

Code - Steel


ASME B18.6.1 (1981; R 2008) Wood Screws (Inch Series)
ASME B18.6.3 (2013) Machine Screws, Tapping Screws, and

Machine Drive Screws (Inch Series)

Steel Products

Hardware

Castings, Carbon, for General Application
ASTM A283/A283M (2013) Standard Specification for Low and

Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel
Plates

Strength
Structural Steel


Cold-Drawn Buttweld Carbon Steel
Mechanical Tubing

Welded and Seamless
SSPC Paint 25 (1997; E 2004) Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed

Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned
Steel, Type I and Type II
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Iron and Steel Hardware; G, A/E
Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips; G, A/E
Metal Stair System; G, A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Cold-Drawn Steel Tubing; G, A/E
Concrete Inserts; G, A/E
Steel Pan Stairs; G, A/E
Steel Stairs; G, A/E
SD-07 Certificates
Welding Procedures; G
Welder Qualification; G
Protective Coating; G
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS FOR WELDING WORK
Section 05 05 23.16 STRUCTURAL WELDING applies to work specified in this

section.
Submit welding procedures in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Make test

specimens in the presence of the Contracting Officer and test by an
approved testing laboratory at the Contractor's expense.
Certify welder qualification by tests in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

or under an equivalent approved qualification test. In addition, perform
tests on test pieces in positions and with clearances equivalent to those
actually encountered. If a test weld fails to meet requirements, ensure
that an immediate retest of two test welds and each test weld is made and
passes. Failure in the immediate retest requires that the welder be
retested after further practice or training and a complete set of test
welds made.
1.3.1 Professional Engineer Qualifications
A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in

jurisdiction where project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are
defined as those performed for installations of stairs and landings that
are similar to those indicated for this project in material, design, and
extent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Submit complete and detailed fabrication drawings for all iron and steel
hardware, and for all steel shapes, plates, bars and strips used in
accordance with the design specifications referenced in this section.
Pre-assemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible.

Disassemble units only to the extent necessary for shipping and handling.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
For the fabrication of work exposed to view, use only materials that are
smooth and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, seam marks,
roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove blemishes by
grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and
application of surface finishes, including zinc coatings.
2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL PLATES, SHAPES AND BARS
Structural-size shapes and plates, conforming to ASTM A36/A36M, unless

otherwise noted, except bent or cold-formed plates.
Steel plates - bent or cold-formed, conforming to ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C.
Steel bars and bar-size shapes, conforming to ASTM A36/A36M, unless

otherwise noted for steel bars and bar-size shapes.
2.3 COLD-DRAWN STEEL TUBING
Cold drawn steel tubing conforming to ASTM A512, sunk drawn, butt-welded,
cold-finished, and stress-relieved.
2.4 STEEL PIPE
Steel pipe conforming to ASTM A53/A53M, type as selected, Grade B; primed
finish, unless galvanizing is required; standard weight (Schedule 40).
2.5 CONCRETE INSERTS
Wedge-type concrete inserts consisting of galvanized box-type ferrous

castings designed to accept 3/4-inch diameter bolts having special
wedge-shaped heads; either malleable iron conforming to ASTM A47/A47M or
cast steel conforming to ASTM A27/A27M and hot-dip galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A153/A153M.
2.6 FASTENERS
Galvanized zinc-coated fasteners in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M and

used for exterior applications or where built into exterior walls or floor
systems. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required for the
installation of steel stair items.
Standard/regular hexagon-head bolts and nuts be conforming to ASTM A307,

Grade A.
Square-head lag bolts conforming to ASME B18.2.1.
Machine screws cadmium-plated steel conforming to ASME B18.6.3.
Wood screws, flat-head carbon steel conforming to ASME B18.6.1.
Plain washers, round, general-assembly-grade, carbon steel conforming to

ASME B18.21.1.
Lockwashers helical spring, carbon steel conforming to.
2.7 GENERAL FABRICATION
Prepare and submit metal stair system shop drawings with detailed plans
and elevations at not less than 1 inch to 1 foot with details of sections
and connections at not less than 3 inches to 1 foot. Also detail
placement drawings, diagrams, templates for installation of anchorage,
including but not limited to, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
miscellaneous metal items having integral anchorage devices.
Use materials of size and thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, of

required size and thickness to produce adequate strength and durability in
finished product for intended use. Work materials to dimensions indicated
on approved detail drawings, using proven details of fabrication and
support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for the various
components of work.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces
and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately
1/32 inch, and bend metal corners to the smallest radius possible without
causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the work.
Continuously weld corners and seams in accordance with the recommendations

of AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Grind smooth exposed welds and flush to match and
blend with adjoining surfaces.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints that are flush and smooth,
using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of the
type indicated or, if not indicated, use Phillips flathead (countersunk)
screws or bolts.
Provide and coordinate anchorage of the type indicated with the supporting
structure. Fabricate anchoring devices, space as indicated and required
to provide adequate support for the intended use of the work.
Use hot-rolled steel bars for work fabricated from bar stock unless work
is indicated or specified as fabricated from cold-finished or cold-rolled
stock.
2.8 PROTECTIVE COATING
Shop prime steelwork with red oxide primer in accordance with SSPC Paint 25
Hot dip galvanize steelwork in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. Touch up

abraded surfaces and cut ends of galvanized members with zinc-dust,
zinc-oxide primer, or an approved galvanizing repair compound.
2.9 STEEL PAN STAIRS
2.9.1 General
Use welding for joining pieces together. Fabricate units so that bolts
and other fastenings do not appear on finish surfaces. Make joints true
and tight, and connections between parts lightproof tight. Grid smooth
continuous welds where exposed.
Construct metal stair units to sizes and arrangements indicated to support

a minimum live load of 100 pounds per square foot. Provide framing,
hangers, columns, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other
components as required for the support of stairs and platforms.
2.9.2 Stair Framing
Fabricate stringers of structural steel channels, or plates, or a

combination thereof as indicated. Provide closures for exposed ends of
strings.
Construct platforms of structural steel channel headers and miscellaneous

framing members as indicated. Bolt headers to stringers and newels and
framing members to stringers and headers.
2.9.3 Riser, Subtread, And Subplatform Metal Pans
Construct riser and subtread metal pans with steel angle supporting
brackets, of size indicated, welded to stringers. Secure metal pans to
brackets with rivets or welds. Secure subplatform metal pans to platform
frames with welds.
2.9.4 Steel Stairs
Provide steel stairs complete with stringers, steel-plate risers, and

metal-pan concrete-filled treads, landings, columns, handrails, and
necessary bolts and other fastenings. Hot-dip galvanize, Shop paint steel
stairs and accessories.
2.9.4.1 Design Loads
Design stairs to sustain a live load of not less than 100 pounds per
square foot, or a concentrated load of 300 applied where it is most

critical. Conform to AISC 360 with the design and fabrication of steel
stairs, other than a commercial product.
2.9.4.2 Materials
Provide steel stairs of welded construction except that bolts may be used
where welding is not practicable. Screw or screw-type connections are not
permitted.
a. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M.
b. Support metal pan for concrete fill on angle cleats welded to

stringers or treads with integral cleats, welded or bolted to the
stringer. Provide sheet-steel landings with angle stiffeners welded
on. Close exposed ends.
c. Before fabrication, obtain necessary field measurements and verify

drawing dimensions.
d. Clean metal surfaces free from mill scale, flake rust and rust pitting
prior to shop finishing. Weld permanent connections. Finish welds
flush and smooth on surfaces that will be exposed after installation.
2.9.5 Soffit Clips
Provide clips with holes for attaching metal furring for plastered
soffits. Space clips not more than 12 inches on center and be welded to
stair treads and platforms as required.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 STEEL STAIRS
Provide anchor bolts, grating fasteners, washers, and all parts or devices
necessary for proper installation. Provide lock washers under nuts.
3.2 FIELD WELDING
Execute procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and

quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work in
compliance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.3 TOUCHUP PAINTING
Immediately after installation, clean all field welds, bolted connections,

and abraded areas of the shop painted material, and repaint exposed areas
with the same paint used for shop painting. Apply paint by brush or spray
to provide a minimum dry-film thickness of 2 mils.
SECTION 05 51 33
METAL LADDERS
05/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Code - Steel

Steel Products

Hardware

Structural Steel


Shapes

Welded and Seamless

the Hot-Dip Process

Galvanized Coatings

ASTM D1187/D1187M (1997; E 2011; R 2011) Asphalt-Base

Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings
for Metal

Primer
29 CFR 1910.27 Fixed Ladders
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Ladders, installation drawings; G, A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Ladders; G, A/E
Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Use procedures,

materials, and equipment of the type required for the work.
Protect from corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage. Store

items in an enclosed area free from contact with soil and weather. Remove
and replace damaged items with new items.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Structural Carbon Steel
ASTM A36/A36M.
2.1.2 Structural Tubing
ASTM A500/A500M.
2.1.3 Steel Pipe
ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or S, Grade B.
2.1.4 Fittings for Steel Pipe
Standard malleable iron fittings ASTM A47/A47M.
2.2 FABRICATION FINISHES
2.2.1 Galvanizing
Hot-dip galvanize items specified to be zinc-coated, after fabrication

where practicable. Galvanizing: ASTM A123/A123M, ASTM A153/A153M,
ASTM A653/A653M or ASTM A924/A924M, G90, as applicable.
2.2.2 Galvanize
Anchor bolts, washers, and parts or devices necessary for proper

installation, unless indicated otherwise.
2.2.3 Repair of Zinc-Coated Surfaces
Repair damaged surfaces with galvanizing repair method and paint

conforming to ASTM A780/A780M or by application of stick or thick paste
material specifically designed for repair of galvanizing, as approved by
Contracting Officer. Clean areas to be repaired and remove slag from
welds. Heat surfaces to which stick or paste material is applied, with a
torch to a temperature sufficient to melt the metallics in stick or paste;
spread molten material uniformly over surfaces to be coated and wipe off
excess material.
Blast clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3. Surfaces

that will be exposed in spaces above ceiling or in attic spaces, crawl
spaces, furred spaces, and chases may be cleaned in accordance with
SSPC SP 3 in lieu of being blast cleaned. Wash cleaned surfaces which
become contaminated with rust, dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants
with solvents until thoroughly clean.
2.2.4.2 Pretreatment, Priming and Painting
Apply pretreatment, primer, and paint in accordance with manufacturer's

printed instructions.
2.2.5 Nonferrous Metal Surfaces
Protect by plating, anodic, or organic coatings.
2.3 LADDERS
Fabricate vertical ladders conforming to Section 7 of 29 CFR 1910.27. Use

2 1/2 by 3/8 inch steel flats for stringers and 3/4 inch diameter steel
rods for rungs. Rungs to be not less than 16 inches wide, spaced one foot
apart, plug welded or shouldered and headed into stringers. Install
ladders so that the distance from the rungs to the finished wall surface
will not be less than 7 inches. Provide heavy clip angles riveted or
bolted to the stringer and drilled as indicated. Provide intermediate
clip angles not over 48 inches on centers.
2.3.1 Ladder Cages
Conform to 29 CFR 1910.27. Fabricate 2 by 1/4 inchhorizontal bands and 1

1/2 by 3/16 inch vertical bars. Provide attachments for fastening bands
to the side rails of ladders or directly to the structure. Provide and
fasten vertical bars on the inside of the horizontal bands. Extend cages
not less than 27 inches or more than 28 inches from the centerline of the
rungs, excluding the flare at the bottom of the cage, and not less than 27
inches in width. Clear the inside of the cage of projections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Install items at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's

instructions. Verify all measurements and take all field measurements
necessary before fabrication. Provide Exposed fastenings of compatible
materials, generally matching in color and finish, and harmonize with the
material to which fastenings are applied. Include materials and parts
necessary to complete each item, even though such work is not definitely
shown or specified. Poor matching of holes for fasteners will be cause
for rejection. Conceal fastenings where practicable. Thickness of metal
and details of assembly and supports must provide strength and stiffness.
Formed joints exposed to the weather to exclude water. Items listed below
require additional procedures.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
Metalwork must be well formed to shape and size, with sharp lines and
angles and true curves. Drilling and punching must produce clean true
lines and surfaces. Continuously weld along the entire area of contact.
Do not tack weld exposed connections of work in place. Grid smooth
exposed welds. Provide smooth finish on exposed surfaces of work in
place, unless otherwise approved. Where tight fits are required, mill
joints. Cope or miter corner joints, well formed, and in true alignment.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and
approved drawings, cuts, and details.
3.3 ANCHORAGE, FASTENINGS, AND CONNECTIONS
Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening metal items securely in

place. Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated slotted
inserts, expansion anchors,and powder-actuated fasteners, when approved
for concrete; toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry; machine bolts,
carriage bolts and powder-actuated threaded studs for steel; through
bolts, lag bolts, and screws for wood. Do not use wood plugs in any
material. Provide non-ferrous attachments for non-ferrous metal. Make
exposed fastenings of compatible materials, generally matching in color
and finish, to which fastenings are applied. Conceal fastenings where
practicable.
3.4 WELDING
Perform welding, welding inspection, and corrective welding, in accordance

with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Use continuous welds on all exposed connections.
Grind visible welds smooth in the finished installation.
3.5 FINISHES
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, protect surfaces with a coat

conforming to MPI 79 to prevent galvanic or corrosive action. Where
aluminum is in contact with concrete, plaster, mortar, masonry, wood, or
absorptive materials subject to wetting, protect with ASTM D1187/D1187M,
asphalt-base emulsion.
3.5.2 Field Preparation
Remove rust preventive coating just prior to field erection, using a

remover approved by the rust preventive manufacturer. Surfaces, when
assembled, must be free of rust, grease, dirt and other foreign matter.
3.5.3 Environmental Conditions
Do not clean or paint surface when damp or exposed to foggy or rainy

weather, when metallic surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above
the dew point of the surrounding air, or when surface temperature is below
45 degrees F or over 95 degrees F, unless approved by the Contracting
Officer.
3.6 LADDERS
Secure to the adjacent construction with the clip angles attached to the
stringer. Secure to CMU with not less than two 1/2 inch diameter
expansion bolts. Install intermediate clip angles not over 48 inches on
center. Install brackets as required for securing of ladders bolted to
structural steel. Ends of ladders must not rest upon finished roof.
SECTION 05 52 00
METAL RAILINGS
02/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AISC/AISI 121 (2004) Standard Definitions for Use in the

Design of Steel Structures

Code - Steel



Steel Products

Hardware


Plates

Strength

Structural Steel


Shapes

Cold-Drawn Buttweld Carbon Steel
Mechanical Tubing

Welded and Seamless
NAAMM AMP 521 (2001) Pipe Railing Manual
SSPC Paint 25 (1997; E 2004) Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed

Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned
Steel, Type I and Type II
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
1.2.1 Pre-Installation Meetings
Within 30 days of Contract Award, submit fabrication drawings to the

Contracting Officer for the following items:
a. Anchorage and fastening systems
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fabrication Drawings; G, A/E
Iron and Steel Hardware; G, A/E
Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips; G, A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Concrete Inserts; G, A/E
Protective Coating; G, A/E
Steel Railings and Handrails; G, A/E
Anchorage and Fastening Systems; G, A/E
SD-07 Certificates
Welding Procedures; G
Welder Qualification; G
Installation Instructions; G
1.4.1 Welding Procedures

section.
Submit welding procedures testing in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M made

in the presence of the Contracting Officer and by an approved testing
laboratory at the Contractor's expense.
1.4.2 Welder Qualification
Submit certified welder qualification by tests in accordance with

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, or under an equivalent approved qualification test. In
addition be performed on test pieces in positions and with clearances
equivalent to those actually encountered. If a test weld fails to meet
requirements, make an immediate retest of two test welds and ensure each
test weld passes. Failure in the immediate retest will require that the
welder be retested after further practice or training and make a complete
set of test welds.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Provide complete, detailed fabrication and installation drawings for all

iron and steel hardware, and for all steel shapes, plates, bars and strips
used in accordance with the design specifications referenced in this
section.
Pre-assemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible.

Disassemble units only to the extent necessary for shipping and handling.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
For the fabrication of work exposed to view, use only materials that are
smooth and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, seam marks,
roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove blemishes by
grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and
application of surface finishes, including zinc coatings.
2.2 GENERAL FABRICATION
Provide railings and handrails detail plans and elevations at not less than
1 inch to 1 foot. Provide details of sections and connections at not
less than 3 inches to 1 foot. Also detail setting drawings, diagrams,
templates for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts,
anchor bolts, and miscellaneous metal items having integral anchors.
Use materials of size and thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, of
required size and thickness to produce adequate strength and durability in

finished product for intended use. Work materials to dimensions indicated
on approved detail drawings, using proven details of fabrication and
support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for the various
components of work.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces
and straight sharp edges. Ensure all exposed edges are eased to a radius
of approximately 1/32 inch. Bend metal corners to the smallest radius
possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the work.
Weld corners and seams continuously and in accordance with the

recommendations of AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush
to match and blend with adjoining surfaces.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints that are flush and smooth,
using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of the
type indicated or, if not indicated, use Phillips flathead (countersunk)
screws or bolts.
Provide anchorage of the type indicated and coordinated with the

supporting structure. Fabricate anchoring devices and space as indicated
and as required to provide adequate support for the intended use of the
work.
Use hot-rolled steel bars for work fabricated from bar stock unless work
is indicated or specified to be fabricated from cold-finished or
cold-rolled stock.
2.3 STRUCTURAL STEEL PLATES, SHAPES AND BARS
Provide structural-size shapes and plates, except plates to be bent or

cold-formed, conforming to ASTM A36/A36M, unless otherwise noted.
Provide steel plates, to be bent or cold-formed,conforming to

ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C.
Provide steel bars and bar-size shapes conforming to ASTM A36/A36M, unless
otherwise noted.
2.4 STRUCTURAL STEEL TUBING
Provide structural steel tubing, hot-formed, welded or seamless,

conforming to ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B, unless otherwise noted.
2.5 COLD-DRAWN STEEL TUBING
Provide tubing conforming to ASTM A512, sunk drawn, butt-welded,

cold-finished, and stress-relieved.
2.6 STEEL PIPE
Provide pipe conforming to ASTM A53/A53M, type as selected, Grade B;

primed finish, unless galvanizing is required; standard weight (Schedule
40).
2.7 CONCRETE INSERTS
Provide threaded-type concrete inserts consisting of galvanized ferrous
castings, internally threaded to receive 3/4-inch diameter machine bolts;

either malleable iron conforming to ASTM A47/A47M or cast steel conforming
to ASTM A27/A27M, hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M.
Provide wedge-type concrete inserts consisting of galvanized box-type

ferrous castings designed to accept 3/4-inch diameter bolts having special
wedge-shaped heads, made of either malleable iron conforming to
ASTM A47/A47M or cast steel conforming to ASTM A27/A27M and hot-dip
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M.
2.8 FASTENERS
Provide galvanized zinc-coated fasteners in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M

used for exterior applications or where built into exterior walls or
floor systems. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required
for the installation of steel stair items.
Provide standard hexagon-head bolts, conforming to ASTM A307, Grade A.
Provide square-head lag bolts conforming to ASME B18.2.1.
Provide plain round, general-assembly-grade, carbon steel washers

conforming to ASME B18.21.1.
Provide helical spring, carbon steel lockwashers conforming to ASME B18.2.1.
2.9 PROTECTIVE COATING
Shop prime steelwork with red oxide primer in accordance with SSPC Paint 25.
Shop prime steelwork as indicated in accordance with AISC/AISI 121 and

Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS except surfaces of steel to be
encased in concrete, surfaces to be welded, contact surfaces to be
high-strength bolt connected, and surfaces of crane rails.
Provide hot dipped galvanized steelwork as indicated in accordance with

ASTM A123/A123M. Touch up abraded surfaces and cut ends of galvanized
members with zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer, or an approved galvanizing
repair compound.
2.10 STEEL RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS
Handrails to resist a concentrated load of 250 lbs in any direction at any

point of the top of the rail or 20 lbs per foot applied horizontally to
top of the rail, whichever is more severe. NAAMM AMP 521, provide the
same size rail and post. Provide pipe collars of the same material and
finish as the handrail and posts.
2.10.1 Steel Handrails
Provide steel handrails, including inserts in concrete, steel pipe

conforming to ASTM A53/A53M or structural tubing conforming to
ASTM A500/A500M, Grade A or B of equivalent strength. Provide steel
railings of 1 1/2 inches o.d., hot-dip galvanized and shop painted.
a. Fabrication: Joint posts, rail, and corners by one of the following

methods:
(1) Flush-type rail fittings of commercial standard, welded and
ground smooth with railing splice locks secured with 3/8 inch
hexagonal-recessed-head setscrews.
(2) Mitered and welded joints made by fitting post to top rail and
intermediate rail to post, mitering corners, groove welding
joints, and grinding smooth. Butt railing splices and reinforce
them by a tight fitting interior sleeve not less than 6 inches
long.
(3) Railings may be bent at corners in lieu of jointing, provided

bends are made in suitable jigs and the pipe is not crushed.
Galvanize exterior railings, including pipe, fittings, brackets,

fasteners, and other ferrous metal components. Provide black steel pipe
for interior railings.
Provide galvanized railings, including pipe, fittings, brackets,

fasteners, and other ferrous metal components.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions for the following products

to be used in the fabrication of stair railing and hand rail work:
a. Anchorage and fastening systems
Provide complete, detailed fabrication and installation drawings for all

iron and steel hardware, and for all steel shapes, plates, bars and strips
used in accordance with the design specifications referenced in this
section.
3.2 PREPARATION
Adjust stair railings and handrails prior to securing in place to ensure

proper matching at butting joints and correct alignment throughout their
length. Space posts not more than 8 feet on center. Plumb posts in each
direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows:
Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select

fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections
suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction
indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
Anchor posts to steel with steel oval flanges, angle type or floor
type as required by conditions, welded to posts and bolted to the
steel supporting members.
Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with steel round flanges
welded to rail ends and anchored into the wall construction with lead
expansion shields and bolts.
Anchor posts and rail ends to steel with steel oval or round flanges
welded to tail ends and bolted to the structural steel members.
Secure handrails to walls by means of wall brackets and wall return

fitting at handrail ends. Provide brackets of malleable iron castings,
with not less than 3-inch projection from the finish wall surface to the
center of the pipe drilled to receive one 3/8-inch bolt. Locate brackets
not more than 60 inches on center. Provide wall return fittings of cast
iron castings, flush-type, with the same projection as that specified for
wall brackets. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building
construction as follows:
For concrete anchorage, use bolt anchor expansion shields and lag
bolts.
For stud partition anchorage, use toggle bolts having square heads.
Install toe boards and brackets where indicated. Make splices, where
required, at expansion joints. Install removable sections as indicated.
3.3 STEEL HANDRAIL
Secure rail ends by steel pipe flanges anchored by expansion shields and
bolts or through-bolted to a back plate or by 1/4 inch lag bolts to studs
or solid backing.
3.4 FIELD WELDING
Ensure procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and

quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work comply
with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.5 TOUCHUP PAINTING
Immediately after installation, clean field welds, bolted connections,

abraded areas of the shop paint, and exposed areas painted with the paint
used for shop painting. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a
minimum dry-film thickness of 2 mils.
SECTION 06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
02/12
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AMERICAN LUMBER STANDARDS COMMITTEE (ALSC)
ALSC PS 20 (2010) American Softwood Lumber Standard
AMERICAN WOOD COUNCIL (AWC)
AWC NDS (2012) National Design Specification (NDS)

for Wood Construction
AWC WFCM (2012) Wood Frame Construction Manual for

One- and Two-Family Dwellings
AWPA BOOK (2012) AWPA Book of Standards
AWPA M2 (2011) Standard for Inspection of Treated

Wood Products
AWPA M6 (2013) Brands Used on Preservative Treated

Materials
AWPA P18 (2014) Nonpressure Preservatives
AWPA P49 (2010) Standard for Fire Retardant FR-1
AWPA P5 (2014) Standard for Waterborne

Preservatives
AWPA T1 (2014) Use Category System: Processing and

Treatment Standard
AWPA U1 (2014) Use Category System: User

Specification for Treated Wood
APA - THE ENGINEERED WOOD ASSOCIATION (APA)
APA L870 (2010) Voluntary Product Standard, PS

1-09, Structural Plywood


ASME B18.5.2.1M (2006; R 2011) Metric Round Head Short

Square Neck Bolts
ASME B18.5.2.2M (1982; R 2010) Metric Round Head Square

Neck Bolts
ASME B18.6.1 (1981; R 2008) Wood Screws (Inch Series)

Hardware

Strength
ASTM D2898 (2010) Accelerated Weathering of

Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire
Testing
ASTM F1667 (2013) Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes,

and Staples
ASTM F547 (2006; R 2012) Nails for Use with Wood and
Wood-Base Materials
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM 4435 (2013) Roof Perimeter Flashing
GREEN SEAL (GS)
GS-36 (2011) Commercial Adhesives
NATIONAL HARDWOOD LUMBER ASSOCIATION (NHLA)
NHLA Rules (2011) Rules for the Measurement &

Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress
NORTHEASTERN LUMBER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NELMA)
NELMA Grading Rules (2013) Standard Grading Rules for

Northeastern Lumber
REDWOOD INSPECTION SERVICE (RIS) OF THE CALIFORNIA REDWOOD

ASSOCIATION (CRA)
RIS Grade Use (1998) Redwood Lumber Grades and Uses
SOUTHERN CYPRESS MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (SCMA)
SCMA Spec (1986; Supple. No. 1, Aug 1993) Standard

Specifications for Grades of Southern
Cypress
SOUTHERN PINE INSPECTION BUREAU (SPIB)
SPIB 1003 (2002) Standard Grading Rules for Southern

Pine Lumber
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE (DOC)
DOC/NIST PS58 (1973) Basic Hardboard (ANSI A135.4)
CID A-A-1923 (Rev A; Notice 2) Shield, Expansion (Lag,

Machine and Externally Threaded Wedge Bolt
Anchors)
CID A-A-1924 (Rev A; Notice 2) Shield, Expansion (Self

Drilling Tubular Expansion Shell Bolt
Anchors
CID A-A-1925 (Rev A; Notice 2) Shield Expansion (Nail

Anchors)
WEST COAST LUMBER INSPECTION BUREAU (WCLIB)
WCLIB 17 (2004) Standard Grading Rules
WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION (WWPA)
WWPA G-5 (2011) Western Lumber Grading Rules
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fabricated structural members; G, A/E
Modifications of structural members; G, A/E
Nailers and Nailing Strips; G, A/E
Drawings of field erection details, including materials and

methods of fastening nailers in conformance with Factory Mutual
wind uplift rated systems specified in other Sections of these
specifications.
SD-03 Product Data
Fire-retardant treatment
SD-06 Test Reports
Preservative-treated lumber and plywood
SD-07 Certificates
Certificates of grade
Certificate of Inspection for grade marked material by an

American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC) recognized inspection
agency prior to shipment.
Preservative treatment
Adhesives
Oriented Strand Board
Deliver materials to the site in an undamaged condition. Store, protect,

handle, and install prefabricated structural elements in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and as specified. Store materials off the
ground to provide proper ventilation, with drainage to avoid standing
water, and protection against ground moisture and dampness. Store
materials with a moisture barrier at both the ground level and as a cover
forming a well ventilated enclosure. Store wood I-beams and
glue-laminated beams and joists on edge. Adhere to requirements for
stacking, lifting, bracing, cutting, notching, and special fastening
requirements. Remove defective and damaged materials and provide new
materials. Store separated reusable wood waste convenient to cutting
station and area of work.
1.4 GRADING AND MARKING
1.4.1 Lumber
Mark each piece of framing and board lumber or each bundle of small pieces
of lumber with the grade mark of a recognized association or independent
inspection agency. Such association or agency shall be certified by the
Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, to grade the species
used. Surfaces that are to be exposed to view shall not bear grademarks,
stamps, or any type of identifying mark. Hammer marking will be permitted
on timbers when all surfaces will be exposed to view.
1.4.2 Plywood
Mark each sheet with the mark of a recognized association or independent

inspection agency that maintains continuing control over the quality of
the plywood. The mark shall identify the plywood by species group or span
rating, exposure durability classification, grade, and compliance with
APA L870.Surfaces that are to be exposed to view shall not bear grademarks
or other types of identifying marks.
1.4.3 Preservative-Treated Lumber and Plywood
The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of treated wood

products. Each treated piece shall be inspected in accordance with AWPA M2
and permanently marked or branded, by the producer, in accordance with
AWPA M6. The Contractor shall provide Contracting Officer's
Representative (COR) with the inspection report of an approved independent
inspection agency that offered products comply with applicable AWPA
Standards. The appropriate Quality Mark on each piece will be accepted,
in lieu of inspection reports, as evidence of compliance with applicable
AWPA treatment standards.
1.4.4 Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber
Mark each piece in accordance with AWPA M6, except pieces that are to be
natural or transparent finished. In addition, exterior fire-retardant
lumber shall be distinguished by a permanent penetrating blue stain.
Labels of a nationally recognized independent testing agency will be
accepted as evidence of conformance to the fire-retardant requirements of
AWPA M6.
1.4.5 Hardboard, Gypsum Board, and Fiberboard
Mark each sheet or bundle to identify the standard under which the
material is produced and the producer.
1.5 SIZES AND SURFACING
ALSC PS 20 for dressed sizes of yard and structural lumber. Lumber shall
be surfaced four sides. Size references, unless otherwise specified, are
nominal sizes, and actual sizes shall be within manufacturing tolerances
allowed by the standard under which the product is produced. Other
measurements are IP or SI standard.
1.6 MOISTURE CONTENT
Air-dry or kiln-dry lumber. Kiln-dry treated lumber after treatment.

Maximum moisture content of wood products shall be as follows at the time
of delivery to the job site:
a. Framing lumber and board, 19 percent maximum
b. Materials other than lumber; moisture content shall be in accordance

with standard under which the product is produced
1.7 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
Treat wood products with waterborne wood preservatives conforming to

AWPA P5. Pressure treatment of wood products shall conform to the
requirements of AWPA BOOK Use Category System Standards U1 and T1.
Pressure-treated wood products shall not contain arsenic, chromium, or
other agents classified as carcinogenic, probably carcinogenic, or
possibly carcinogenic to humans (compounds in Groups 1, 2A, or 2B) by the
International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC), Lyon, France.
Pressure-treated wood products shall not exceed the limits of the U.S.
EPA's Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP), and shall not be
classified as hazardous waste. Submit certification from treating plant
stating chemicals and process used and net amount of preservatives
retained are in conformance with specified standards.
a. 0.25 pcf intended for above ground use.
b. 0.40 pcf intended for ground contact and fresh water use. 0.60 pcf
intended for Ammoniacal Copper Quaternary Compound (ACQ)-treated
foundations. 0.80 to 1.00 pcf intended for ACQ-treated pilings. All
wood shall be air or kiln dried after treatment. Specific treatments
shall be verified by the report of an approved independent inspection
agency, or the AWPA Quality Mark on each piece. Do not incise
surfaces of lumber that will be exposed. Minimize cutting and avoid
breathing sawdust. Brush coat areas that are cut or drilled after
treatment with either the same preservative used in the treatment or
with a 2 percent copper naphthenate solution. All lumber and woodwork
shall be preservative treated. The following items shall be
preservative treated:
1. Nailers, edge strips, crickets, curbs, and cants for roof decks.
1.7.1 Existing Structures
Use borate, permathrin, or a sodium silicate wood mineralization process

to treat wood. Use borate for interior applications only.
1.7.2 New Construction
Use a boron-based preservative conforming to AWPA P18, sodium silicate

wood mineralization process, or Ammoniacal Copper Quaternary Compound to
treat wood. Use boron-based preservatives for above-ground applications
only.
1.8 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT
Fire-retardant treated wood shall be pressure treated with fire retardants

conforming to AWPA P49. Fire retardant treatment of wood products shall
conform to the requirements of AWPA U1, Commodity Specification H and
AWPA T1, Section H. Treatment and performance inspection shall be by an
independent and qualified testing agency that establishes performance
ratings. Each piece or bundle of treated material shall bear
identification of the testing agency to indicate performance in accordance
with such rating. Treated materials to be exposed to rain wetting shall
be subjected to an accelerated weathering technique in accordance with
ASTM D2898 prior to being tested. Such items which will not be inside a
building, and such items which will be exposed to heat or high humidity,
shall receive exterior fire-retardant treatment. Fire-retardant-treated
wood products shall be free of halogens, sulfates, ammonium phosphate, and
formaldehyde. Items to be treated include the following:
For fabricated structural members, trusses, qlu-lam members, indicate

materials, details of construction, methods of fastening, and erection
details. Include reference to design criteria used and manufacturers
design calculations. Submit drawings for all proposed modifications of
structural members. Do not proceed with modifications until the submittal
has been approved.
1.9.2 Data Required
Submit calculations and drawings for all proposed modifications of

structural members. Do not proceed with modifications until the submittal
has been approved.
1.9.3 Certificates of Grade
Submit certificates attesting that products meet the grade requirements

specified in lieu of grade markings where appearance is important and
grade marks will deface material.
1.9.4 Humidity Requirements
Sequence work to minimize use of temporary HVAC to dry out building and
control humidity.
During and immediately after installation of treated wood, engineered wood

products, and laminated wood products at interior spaces, provide
temporary ventilation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Virgin Lumber
Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. Avoid

companies who buy, sell, or use old growth timber in their operations,
when possible. Lumber shall be FSC-certified.
2.1.2 Recovered Lumber
Use recovered lumber where practical. Unless otherwise noted, recovered

lumber shall be delivered clean and free of contamination. Provide
grading certificates for any recovered wood materials used in structural
applications.
2.2 LUMBER
2.2.1 Framing Lumber
Framing lumber such as studs, plates, caps, collar beams, cant strips,
bucks, sleepers, nailing strips, and nailers and board lumber such as
subflooring and wall and roof sheathing shall be one of the species listed
in the table below. Minimum grade of species shall be as listed.
Table of Grades for Framing and Board Lumber
Grading Rules Species Framing Board Lumber
WWPA G-5 standard Aspen, Douglas All Species: All Species:

grading rules Fir-Larch, Douglas Standard Light No. 3 Common
Fir South, Framing or No. 3
Engelmann Structural Light
Spruce-Lodgepole Framing (Stud
Pine, Engelmann Grade for 2x4
Spruce, Hem-Fir, nominal size, 10
Idaho White Pine, feet and shorter)
Lodgepole Pine,
Mountain Hemlock,
Mountain
Hemlock-Hem-Fir,
Ponderosa
Pine-Sugar Pine,
Ponderosa
Pine-Lodgepole
Pine, Subalpine
Fir, White Woods,
Western Woods,
Western Cedars,
Western Hemlock
WCLIB 17 standard Douglas Fir-Larch, All Species: All Species:

grading rules Hem-Fir, Mountain Standard Light Standard
Hemlock, Sitka Framing or No. 3
Spruce, Western Structural Light
Cedars, Western Framing (Stud
Hemlock Grade for 2x4
nominal size, 10
feet and shorter)
SPIB 1003 standard Southern Pine All Species: No. 2 Boards

grading rules Standard Light
Framing or No. 3
Structural Light
Framing (Stud
Grade for 2x4
nominal size, 10
feet and shorter)
SCMA Spec standard Cypress No. 2 Common No. 2 Common

specifications
NELMA Grading Rules Balsam Fir, Eastern All Species: All Species:
standard grading rules Hemlock-Tamarack, Standard Light No. 3 Common
Eastern Spruce, Framing or No. 3 except Standard
Eastern White Pine, Structural Light for Eastern White
Northern Pine, Framing (Stud and Northern Pine
Northern Pine-Cedar Grade for 2x4
nominal size, 10
feet and shorter)
RIS Grade Use Redwood All Species: Construction Heart

standard Standard Light
specifications Framing or No. 3
Structural Light
Framing (Stud
Grade for 2x4
nominal size, 10
feet and shorter)
NHLA Rules rules for Cypress No. 2 Dimension No. 2 Common

the measurement and
inspection of
hardwood and cypress
lumber
2.3 OTHER MATERIALS
2.3.1 Hardboard Underlayment
DOC/NIST PS58, service class, sanded on one side, 1/4 inch thick 4 feet
wide.
2.3.2 Miscellaneous Wood Members
2.3.2.1 Nonstress Graded Members
Members shall include bridging, corner bracing, furring, grounds, and

nailing strips. Members shall be in accordance with TABLE I for the
species used. Sizes shall be as follows unless otherwise shown:
Member Size inch

Bridging 1 x 3 or 1 x 4 for use between members 2 x 12 and smaller; 2 x 4 for
use between members larger than 2 x 12.
Corner bracing 1 x 4.
Furring 1 x
Grounds Plaster thickness by 38.
Nailing strips 1 x 3 or 1 x 4 when used as shingle base or interior finish,
otherwise 2 inch stock.
2.3.2.2 Blocking
Blocking shall be standard or number 2 grade.
2.3.3 Adhesives
Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials,

GS-36 and as specified. Use water-based adhesives with maximum VOC
content of 15 grams/liter for all interior applications.
2.4 ROUGH HARDWARE
Unless otherwise indicated or specified, rough hardware shall be of the

type and size necessary for the project requirements. Sizes, types, and
spacing of fastenings of manufactured building materials shall be as
recommended by the product manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or
specified. Rough hardware exposed to the weather or embedded in or in
contact with preservative treated wood, exterior masonry, or concrete

walls or slabs shall be hot-dip zinc-coated in accordance with
ASTM A153/A153M. Nails and fastenings for fire-retardant treated lumber
and woodwork exposed to the weather shall be copper alloy or hot-dipped
galvanized fasteners as recommended by the treated wood manufacturer.
2.4.1 Bolts, Nuts, Studs, and Rivets
ASME B18.2.1, ASME B18.5.2.1M, ASME B18.5.2.2M and ASME B18.2.2.
2.4.2 Anchor Bolts
ASTM A307, size as indicated, complete with nuts and washers.
2.4.3 Expansion Shields
CID A-A-1923, CID A-A-1924, and CID A-A-1925. Except as shown otherwise,
maximum size of devices shall be 3/8 inch.
2.4.4 Lag Screws and Lag Bolts
ASME B18.2.1.
2.4.5 Wood Screws
ASME B18.6.1.
2.4.6 Nails
ASTM F547, size and type best suited for purpose. For sheathing and
subflooring, length of nails shall be sufficient to extend 1 inch into
supports. In general, 8-penny or larger nails shall be used for nailing
through 1 inch thick lumber and for toe nailing 2 inch thick lumber;
16-penny or larger nails shall be used for nailing through 2 inch thick
lumber. Nails used with treated lumber and sheathing shall be hot-dipped
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. Nailing shall be in
accordance with the recommended nailing schedule contained in AWC WFCM.
Where detailed nailing requirements are not specified, nail size and
spacing shall be sufficient to develop an adequate strength for the
connection. The connection's strength shall be verified against the nail
capacity tables in AWC NDS. Reasonable judgment backed by experience
shall ensure that the designed connection will not cause the wood to
split. If a load situation exceeds a reasonable limit for nails, a
specialized connector shall be used.
2.4.7 Wire Nails
ASTM F1667.
2.4.8 Clip Angles
Steel, 3/16 inch thick, size best suited for intended use; or zinc-coated
steel or iron commercial clips designed for connecting wood members.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Conform to AWC WFCM and install in accordance with the National
Association of Home Builders (NAHB) Advanced Framing Techniques: Optimum

Value Engineering, unless otherwise indicated or specified. Select lumber
sizes to minimize waste. Fit framing lumber and other rough carpentry,
set accurately to the required lines and levels, and secure in place in a
rigid manner. Space plastic lumber boards as necessary to allow for
lengthwise expansion and contraction. Do not splice framing members
between bearing points. Set joists, rafters, and purlins with their crown
edge up. Frame members for the passage of pipes, conduits, and ducts.
Provide adequate support as appropriate to the application, climate, and
modulus of elasticity of the product. Do not cut or bore structural
members for the passage of ducts or pipes without approval. Reinforce all
members damaged by such cutting or boring by means of specially formed and
approved sheet metal or bar steel shapes, or remove and provide new, as
approved. Provide as necessary for the proper completion of the work all
framing members not indicated or specified. Spiking and nailing not
indicated or specified otherwise shall be in accordance with the Nailing
Schedule contained in ICC IBC; perform bolting in an approved manner.
Spikes, nails, and bolts shall be drawn up tight. Use slate or steel
shims when leveling joists, beams, and girders on masonry or concrete. Do
not use shimming on wood or metal bearings. When joists, beams, and
girders are placed on masonry or concrete, a wood base plate shall be
positioned and leveled with grout. The joist, beam, or girder shall then
be placed on the plate. When joists, beams, and girders are set into
masonry or concrete, a pocket shall be formed into the wall. The joist,
beam, or girder shall then be placed into the pocket and leveled with a
steel shim.
3.1.1 Wall Sheathing
3.1.1.1 Particleboard
Install according to manufacturer's instructions and accepted industry

standards.
3.2 MISCELLANEOUS
3.2.1 Wood Roof Nailers, Edge Strips, Crickets, Curbs, and Cants
Provide sizes and configurations indicated or specified and anchored

securely to continuous construction.
3.2.1.1 Roof Nailing Strips
Provide roof nailing strips for roof decks as indicated and specified
herein. Apply nailing strips in straight parallel rows in the direction
and spacing indicated. Strips shall be surface applied.
a. Surface-Applied Nailers: Shall be 3 inches wide and of thickness to

finish flush with the top of the insulation. Anchor strips securely
to the roof deck with powder actuated fastening devices or expansion
shields and bolts, spaced not more than 24 inches o.c.
b. Embedded Nailers: Shall be nominal 2 by 3 with 2 inch sides beveled.

Set and anchor nailers to finish flush with the roof deck surface.
3.2.1.2 Roof Edge Strips and Nailers
Provide at perimeter of roof, around openings through roof, and where

roofs abut walls, curbs, and other vertical surfaces. Except where
indicated otherwise, nailers shall be 6 inches wide and the same thickness
as the insulation. Anchor nailers securely to underlying construction.
Anchor perimeter nailers in accordance with FM 4435. Strips shall be
grooved as indicated for edge venting; install at walls, curbs, and other
vertical surfaces with a 1/4 to 1/2 inch air space.
3.2.1.3 Crickets, Cants, and Curbs
Provide wood saddles or crickets, cant strips, curbs for scuttles and
ventilators, wood nailers bolted to tops of concrete or masonry curbs and
at expansion joints, as indicated, specified, or necessary.
3.2.2 Wood Blocking
Provide proper sizes and shapes at proper locations for the installation
and attachment of wood and other finish materials, fixtures, equipment,
and items indicated or specified.
3.2.3 Temporary Closures
Provide with hinged doors and padlocks and install during construction at
exterior doorways and other ground level openings that are not otherwise
closed. Cover windows and other unprotected openings with polyethylene or
other approved material, stretched on wood frames. Provide dustproof
barrier partitions to isolate areas as directed.
3.2.4 Temporary Centering, Bracing, and Shoring
Provide for the support and protection of masonry work during construction
as specified in Section 04 20 00 MASONRY. Forms and centering for
cast-in-place concrete work are specified in Section 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
3.2.5 Wood Sleepers
Run wood sleepers in lengths as long as practicable and stagger end joints
in adjacent rows.
Separate treated, stained, painted, and contaminated wood and place in

designated area for hazardous materials. Dispose of according to local
regulations. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, or other wood
waste buried in fill or on the ground. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings
from entering the storm drainage system. Do not burn scrap lumber that
has been pressure treated, or lumber that is less than one year old.
SECTION 06 41 16.00 10
LAMINATE CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK

08/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ANSI A161.2 (1998) Decorative Laminate Countertops,

Performance Standards for Fabricated High
Pressure
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE (AWI)
AWI AWS (2009) Architectural Woodwork Standards

Materials
ASTM F547 (2006; R 2012) Nails for Use with Wood and
Wood-Base Materials
ANSI/BHMA A156.9 (2010) Cabinet Hardware
ANSI/NEMA LD 3 (2005) Standard for High-Pressure

Decorative Laminates
Work in this section includes laminate clad custom casework cabinets as

shown on the drawings and as described in this specification. This
Section includes high-pressure laminate surfacing and cabinet hardware.
All exposed and semi-exposed surfaces, whose finish is not otherwise noted
on the drawings or finish schedule, shall be sanded smooth and shall
receive a clear finish of polyurethane. Wood finish may be shop finished
or field applied in accordance with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SECTION 06 41 16.00 10 Page 1

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Shop Drawings; G, A/E

Installation
SD-03 Product Data
Wood Materials
Wood Finishes
Finish Schedule; G, A/E
Certification
SD-04 Samples
Plastic Laminates; G, A/E

Cabinet Hardware
SD-07 Certificates
Quality Assurance
Laminate Clad Casework
Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, all materials, construction

methods, and fabrication shall conform to and comply with the custom grade
quality standards as outlined in AWI AWS, Section for laminate clad
cabinets. These standards shall apply in lieu of omissions or specific
requirements in this specification. Contractors and their personnel
engaged in the work shall be able to demonstrate successful experience
with work of comparable extent, complexity and quality to that shown and
specified. Submit a quality control statement which illustrates
compliance with and understanding of AWI AWS requirements, in general, and
the specific AWI AWS requirements provided in this specification. The
quality control statement shall also certify a minimum of ten years
Contractor's experience in laminate clad casework fabrication and
construction. The quality control statement shall provide a list of a
minimum of five successfully completed projects of a similar scope, size,
and complexity.
Casework may be delivered knockdown or fully assembled. Deliver all units

to the site in undamaged condition, stored off the ground in fully
enclosed areas, and protected from damage. The storage area shall be well
ventilated and not subject to extreme changes in temperature or humidity.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
Coordinate work with other trades. Units shall not be installed in any
room or space until painting, and ceiling installation are complete within
the room where the units are located. Floor cabinets shall be installed
before finished flooring materials are installed.
SECTION 06 41 16.00 10 Page 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD MATERIALS
2.1.1 Lumber
a. All framing lumber shall be kiln-dried Grade III to dimensions as

shown on the drawings. Frame front, where indicated on the drawings,
shall be nominal 3/4 inch hardwood.
2.1.2 Panel Products
2.1.2.1 Plywood
All plywood panels used for framing purposes shall be veneer core hardwood
plywood, AWI AWS Grade AA. Nominal thickness of plywood panels shall be
as indicated in this specification and on the drawings.
2.2 SOLID POLYMER MATERIAL
Solid surfacing casework components shall conform to the requirements of

Section 06 61 16 SOLID POLYMER (SOLID SURFACING) FABRICATIONS.
2.3 HIGH PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE (HPDL)
All plastic laminates shall meet the requirements of ANSI/NEMA LD 3 and

ANSI A161.2 for high-pressure decorative laminates. Design, colors,
surface finish and texture, and locations shall be as indicated on Section
09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE. Submit two samples of each plastic laminate
pattern and color. Samples shall be a minimum of 5 by 7 inches in size.
Plastic laminate types and nominal minimum thicknesses for casework
components shall be as indicated in the following paragraphs.
2.3.1 Horizontal General Purpose Standard (HGS) Grade
Horizontal general purpose standard grade plastic laminate shall be 0.048

inches (plus or minus 0.005 inches) in thickness. This laminate grade is
intended for horizontal surfaces where postforming is not required.
2.3.2 Vertical General Purpose Standard (VGS) Grade
Vertical general purpose standard grade plastic laminate shall be 0.028

inches (plus or minus 0.004 inches) in thickness. This laminate grade is
intended for exposed exterior vertical surfaces of casework components
where postforming is not required.
2.3.3 Horizontal General Purpose Fire Rated (HGF) Grade
Horizontal general purpose fire rated grade plastic laminate shall be

0.048 inches (plus or minus 0.005 inches) in thickness. Laminate grade
shall have a class 1, class A fire rating in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.3.4 Vertical General Purpose Fire Rated (VGF) Grade
Vertical general purpose fire rated grade plastic laminate shall be 0.028
inches (plus or minus 0.004 inches) in thickness. This laminate grade
shall have a class 1, class A fire rating in accordance with ASTM E84.
SECTION 06 41 16.00 10 Page 3

2.3.5 Cabinet Liner Standard (CLS) Grade
Cabinet liner standard grade plastic laminate shall be 0.020 inches in

thickness. This laminate grade is intended for light duty semi-exposed
interior surfaces of casework components.
2.3.6 Backing Sheet (BK) Grade
Undecorated backing sheet grade laminate is formulated specifically to be

used on the backside of plastic laminated panel substrates to enhance
dimensional stability of the substrate. Backing sheet thickness shall be
0.020 inches. Backing sheets shall be provided for all laminated casework
components where plastic laminate finish is applied to only one surface of
the component substrate.
2.4 THERMOSET DECORATIVE OVERLAYS (MELAMINE)
Thermoset decorative overlays (melamine panels) shall be used for casework

cabinet interior and drawer interior surfaces.
2.5 EDGE BANDING
Edge banding for casework doors and drawer fronts shall match exposed door
and drawer front laminate pattern and color.
2.6 CABINET HARDWARE
Submit one sample of each cabinet hardware item specified to include hinges,
pulls, and drawer glides. All hardware shall conform to ANSI/BHMA A156.9,
unless otherwise noted, and shall consist of the following components:
2.6.1 Door Hinges
Semi-concealed type, ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B01361.
2.6.2 Cabinet Pulls
Back-mounted type, ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B0211.
2.6.3 Drawer Slide
Side mounted standard type, ANSI/BHMA A156.9 with full extension and a
minimum 100 pound load capacity. Slides shall include an integral stop to
avoid accidental drawer removal.
2.6.4 Adjustable Shelf Support System
Support clips for the standards shall be open type, BHMA No. B04091.
2.7 FASTENERS
Nails, screws, and other suitable fasteners shall be the size and type
best suited for the purpose and shall conform to ASTM F547 where
applicable.
SECTION 06 41 16.00 10 Page 4

2.8 ADHESIVES, CAULKS, AND SEALANTS
2.8.1 Adhesives
Adhesives shall be of a formula and type recommended by AWI. Adhesives

shall be selected for their ability to provide a durable, permanent bond
and shall take into consideration such factors as materials to be bonded,
expansion and contraction, bond strength, fire rating, and moisture
resistance. Adhesives shall meet local regulations regarding VOC
emissions and off-gassing.
2.8.1.1 Laminate Adhesive
Adhesive used to join high-pressure decorative laminate to wood shall be a

water-based contact adhesive consistent with AWI and laminate
manufacturer's recommendations. PVC edgebanding shall be adhered using a
polymer-based hot melt glue.
2.8.2 Caulk
Caulk used to fill voids and joints between laminated components and
between laminated components and adjacent surfaces shall be clear, 100
percent silicone.
2.8.3 Sealant
Sealant shall be of a type and composition recommended by the substrate

manufacturer to provide a moisture barrier at sink cutouts and all other
locations where unfinished substrate edges may be subjected to moisture.
2.9 FABRICATION
Verify field measurements as indicated in the shop drawings before

fabrication. Fabrication and assembly of components shall be accomplished
at the shop site to the maximum extent possible. Construction and
fabrication of cabinets and their components shall meet or exceed the
requirements for AWI custom grade unless otherwise indicated in this
specification. Cabinet style, in accordance with AWI AWS, Section 400-G
descriptions, shall be flush overlay.
2.9.1 Base and Wall Cabinet Case Body
2.9.1.1 Cabinet Components
Frame members shall be glued-together, kiln-dried hardwood lumber. Top

corners, bottom corners, and cabinet bottoms shall be braced with either
hardwood blocks or water-resistant glue and nailed in place metal or
plastic corner braces. Cabinet components shall be constructed from the
following materials and thicknesses:
2.9.1.1.1 Body Members (Ends, Divisions, Bottoms, and Tops)
3/4 inch veneer core plywood panel product
2.9.1.1.2 Face Frames and Rails
3/4 inch hardwood lumber
SECTION 06 41 16.00 10 Page 5

2.9.1.1.3 Shelving
2.9.1.1.4 Cabinet Backs
2.9.1.1.5 Drawer Sides, Backs, and Subfronts
1/2 inch hardwood lumber
2.9.1.1.6 Drawer Bottoms
1/4 inch particleboard panel product
2.9.1.1.7 Door and Drawer Fronts
3/4-inch particleboard panel product
2.9.1.2 Joinery Method for Case Body Members
2.9.1.2.1 Tops, Exposed Ends, and Bottoms
a. Steel "European" assembly screws ( 1-1/2 inch from end, 5 inch on

center, fasteners will not be visible on exposed parts).
b. Doweled, glued under pressure (approx. 4 dowels per 12 inches of

joint).
c. Stop dado, glued under pressure, and either nailed, stapled or screwed
(fasteners will not be visible on exposed parts).
2.9.1.2.2 Exposed End Corner and Face Frame Attachment
2.9.1.2.2.1 Mitered Joint
lock miter or spline or biscuit, glued under pressure (no visible

fasteners)
2.9.1.2.3 Cabinet Backs (Wall Hung Cabinets)
Wall hung cabinet backs must not be relied upon to support the full weight
of the cabinet and its anticipated load for hanging/mounting purposes.
Method of back joinery and hanging/mounting mechanisms should transfer the
load to case body members. Fabrication method shall be:
2.9.1.2.3.1 Side Bound
Side bound, captured in groove or rabbetts; glued and fastened.
2.9.1.2.4 Cabinet Backs (Floor Standing Cabinets)
2.9.1.2.4.1 Side Bound
Side bound, captured in grooves; glued and fastened to top and bottom.
SECTION 06 41 16.00 10 Page 6

2.9.1.2.5 Wall Anchor Strips
Wall Anchor Strips shall be required for all cabinets with backs less than
1/2 inch thick. Strips shall consist of minimum 1/2 inch thick lumber,
minimum 2-1/2 inches width; securely attached to wall side of cabinet back
- top and bottom for wall hung cabinets, top only for floor standing
cabinets.
2.9.2 Cabinet Floor Base
Floor cabinets shall be mounted on a base constructed of 3/4 inch veneer

core exterior plywood. Base assembly components shall be treated lumber.
Finished height for each cabinet base shall be as indicated on the drawings.
Bottom edge of the cabinet door or drawer face shall extend below the top
of the base as indicated on the drawings.
2.9.3 Cabinet Door and Drawer Fronts
Door and drawer fronts shall be fabricated from 3/4 inch medium density
particleboard. All door and drawer front edges shall be surfaced with
high pressure plastic laminate, color and pattern to match exterior face
laminate.
2.9.4 Drawer Assembly
2.9.4.1 Drawer Components
Drawer components shall consist of a removable drawer front, sides, backs,

and bottom. Drawer components shall be constructed of the following
materials and thicknesses:
2.9.4.1.1 Drawer Sides and Backs For Transparent Finish
1/2 inch thick 7-ply hardwood veneer core plywood (no voids), any species
2.9.4.1.2 Drawer Sides and Backs For Laminate Finish
1/2 inch thick 7-ply hardwood veneer core substrate
2.9.4.1.3 Drawer Sides and Back For Thermoset Decorative Overlay

(Melamine) Finish
1/2 inch thick medium density particleboard or MDF fiberboard substrate
2.9.4.1.4 Drawer Bottom
1/4 inch thick thermoset decorative overlay melamine panel product
2.9.4.2 Drawer Assembly Joinery Method
a. Doweled, glued under pressure.
b. Lock shoulder, glued and pin nailed.
2.9.5 Shelving
Shelving shall be fabricated from 3/4 inch veneer core plywood. All
SECTION 06 41 16.00 10 Page 7

shelving top and bottom surfaces shall be finished with thermoset

decorative overlay (melamine). Shelf edges shall be finished in a PVC
edgebanding.
2.9.5.2 Shelf Support System
The shelf support system shall be:
2.9.5.2.1 Pin Hole Method
Drill holes on the interior surface of the cabinet side walls. Evenly
space holes in two vertical columns Space the holes in each column at 1
inch increments starting 6 inches from the cabinet interior bottom and
extending to within 6 inches of the top interior surface of the cabinet.
Drill holes to provide a level, stable surface when the shelf is resting
on the shelf pins. Coordinate hole diameter with pin insert size to
provide a firm, tight fit.
2.9.6 Laminate Application
Laminate application to substrates shall follow the recommended procedures

and instructions of the laminate manufacturer and ANSI/NEMA LD 3, using
tools and devices specifically designed for laminate fabrication and
application. Provide a balanced backer sheet (Grade BK) wherever only one
surface of the component substrate requires a plastic laminate finish.
Apply required grade of laminate in full uninterrupted sheets consistent
with manufactured sizes using one piece for full length only, using
adhesives specified herein or as recommended by the manufacturer. Fit
corners and joints hairline. All laminate edges shall be machined flush,
filed, sanded, or buffed to remove machine marks and eased (sharp corners
removed). Clean up at easing shall be such that no overlap of the member
eased is visible. Fabrication shall conform to ANSI A161.2. Laminate
types and grades for component surfaces shall be as follows unless
otherwise indicated on the drawings:
2.9.6.1 Base/Wall Cabinet Case Body
a. Exterior (exposed) surfaces to include exposed and semi-exposed face

frame surfaces: HPDL Grade VGS.
b. Interior (semi-exposed) surfaces to include interior back wall,

bottom, and side walls: Thermoset Decorative Overlay (melamine).
2.9.6.2 Adjustable Shelving
2.9.6.2.1 Top and Bottom Surfaces
Thermoset Decorative Overlay (melamine)
2.9.6.2.2 All Edges
PVC edgebanding
2.9.6.3 Fixed Shelving
2.9.6.3.1 Top and Bottom Surfaces
Thermoset Decorative Overlay (melamine)
SECTION 06 41 16.00 10 Page 8

2.9.6.3.2 Exposed Edges
PVC edgebanding
2.9.6.4 Door, Drawer Fronts, Access Panels
2.9.6.4.1 Exterior (Exposed) and Interior (Semi-Exposed) Faces
HPDL Grade VGS
2.9.6.4.2 Edges
PVC edgebanding
2.9.6.5 Drawer Assembly
All interior and exterior surfaces: Thermoset Decorative Overlay (melamine).
2.9.6.6 Countertops and Splashes
All exposed and semi-exposed surfaces: Solid surface material.
2.9.6.7 Tolerances
Flushness, flatness, and joint tolerances of laminated surfaces shall meet

the AWI AWS custom grade requirements.
2.9.7 Finishing
2.9.7.1 Filling
No fasteners shall be exposed on laminated surfaces. All nails, screws,

and other fasteners in non-laminated cabinet components shall be
countersunk and the holes filled with wood filler consistent in color with
the wood species.
2.9.7.2 Sanding
All surfaces requiring coatings shall be prepared by sanding with a grit

and in a manner that scratches will not show in the final system.
2.9.7.3 Coatings
Types, method of application and location of casework finishes shall be in

accordance with the finish schedule, drawings and Section 09 90 00 PAINTS
AND COATINGS. All cabinet reveals shall be painted. Submit descriptive
data which provides narrative written verification of all types of
construction materials and finishes, methods of construction, etc. not
clearly illustrated on the submitted shop drawings. Data shall provide
written verification of conformance with AWI AWS for the quality indicated
to include materials, tolerances, and types of construction. Both the
manufacturer of materials and the fabricator shall submit available
literature which describes re-cycled product content, operations and
processes in place that support efficient use of natural resources, energy
efficiency, emissions of ozone depleting chemicals, management of water
and operational waste, indoor environmental quality, and other production
techniques supporting sustainable design and products.
SECTION 06 41 16.00 10 Page 9

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Installation shall comply with applicable requirements for AWI AWS custom
quality standards. Countertops and fabricated assemblies shall be
installed level, plumb, and true to line, in locations shown on the
drawings. Cabinets and other laminate clad casework assemblies shall be
attached and anchored securely to the floor and walls with mechanical
fasteners that are appropriate for the wall and floor construction.
3.1.1 Anchoring Systems
3.1.1.1 Floor
Base cabinets shall utilize a floor anchoring system as detailed on the

drawings. Anchoring and mechanical fasteners shall not be visible from
the finished side of the casework assembly. Cabinet assemblies shall be
attached to anchored bases without visible fasteners as indicated in the
drawings. Where assembly abuts a wall surface, anchoring shall include a
minimum 1/2 inch thick lumber or panel product hanging strip, minimum
2-1/2 inch width; securely attached to the top of the wall side of the
cabinet back.
3.1.1.2 Wall
Cabinet to be wall mounted shall utilize minimum 1/2 inch thick lumber or
panel product hanging strips, minimum 2-1/2 inch width; securely attached
to the wall side of the cabinet back, both top and bottom.
3.1.2 Full Height Countertops
Countertops shall be installed in locations as indicated on the drawings.

Countertops shall be fastened to supporting casework structure with
mechanical fasteners, hidden from view. All joints formed by the
countertop or countertop splash and adjacent wall surfaces shall be filled
with a clear silicone caulk. Loose back splashes shall be adhered to both
the countertop surface perimeter and the adjacent wall surface with
adhesives appropriate for the type of materials to be adhered. Joints
between the countertop surface and splash shall be filled with clear
silicone caulk in a smooth consistent concave bead. Bead size shall be
the minimum necessary to fill the joint and any surrounding voids or
cracks.
3.1.3 Hardware
Casework hardware shall be installed in types and locations as indicated

on the drawings. Where fully concealed European-style hinges are
specified to be used with particleboard or fiberboard doors, the use of
plastic or synthetic insertion dowels shall be used to receive 3/16 inch
"Euroscrews". The use of wood screws without insertion dowels is
prohibited.
3.1.4 Doors, Drawers and Removable Panels
The fitting of doors, drawers and removable panels shall be accomplished

within target fitting tolerances for gaps and flushness in accordance with
AWI AWS custom grade requirements.
SECTION 06 41 16.00 10 Page 10

3.1.5 Plumbing Fixtures
Install sinks, sink hardware, and other plumbing fixtures in locations as

indicated on the drawings and in accordance with Section 22 00 00
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
SECTION 06 41 16.00 10 Page 11

SECTION 06 61 16
SOLID POLYMER (SOLID SURFACING) FABRICATIONS

08/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM D2583 (2013a) Indentation Hardness of Rigid

Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor
ASTM D570 (1998; E 2010; R 2010) Standard Test

Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
ASTM D638 (2010) Standard Test Method for Tensile

Properties of Plastics
ASTM D696 (2008; E 2013) Standard Test Method for

Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of
Plastics Between -30 degrees C and 30
degrees C With a Vitreous Silica
Dilatometer

Materials
ASTM G21 (2013) Determining Resistance of Synthetic

Polymeric Materials to Fungi
CSA GROUP (CSA)
CSA B45.5-11/IAPMO Z124 (2011; Update 1 2012) Plastic Plumbing

Fixtures - First Edition
ANSI/NEMA LD 3 (2005) Standard for High-Pressure

Decorative Laminates
NSF/ANSI 51 (2012) Food Equipment Materials
TCNA Hdbk (2013) Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and

Stone Tile Installation
a. Work under this section includes countertops and other items utilizing
solid polymer (solid surfacing) fabrication as shown on the drawings
and as described in this specification. Do not change source of
supply for materials after work has started, if the appearance of
finished work would be affected.
b. In most instances, installation of solid polymer fabricated components

and assemblies will require strong, correctly located structural
support provided by other trades. To provide a stable, sound, secure
installation, close coordination is required between the solid polymer
fabricator/installer and other trades to ensure that necessary
structural wall support, cabinet counter top structural support,
proper clearances, and other supporting components are provided for
the installation of wall panels, countertops, shelving, and all other
solid polymer fabrications to the degree and extent recommended by the
solid polymer manufacturer.
c. Appropriate staging areas for solid polymer fabrications. Allow

variation in component size and location of openings of plus or minus
1/8 inch.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation; G
SD-03 Product Data
Solid polymer material; G, A/E
Certification
VOC Content
SD-04 Samples
Material; G, A/E
Counter and Vanity Tops; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Solid polymer material
SD-07 Certificates
Fabrications
Qualifications
Clean-up
To ensure warranty coverage, solid polymer fabricators shall be certified

to fabricate by the solid polymer material manufacturer being utilized.
Mark all fabrications with the fabricator's certification label affixed in
an inconspicuous location. Fabricators shall have a minimum of 5 years of
experience working with solid polymer materials. Submit solid polymer
manufacturer's certification attesting to fabricator qualification
approval.
Do not deliver materials to project site until areas are ready for
installation. Deliver components and materials to the site undamaged, in
containers clearly marked and labeled with manufacturer's name. Materials
shall be stored indoors and adequate precautions taken to prevent damage
to finished surfaces. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical
damage or staining following installation, for duration of project.
1.6 WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer's warranty of ten years against defects in materials,

excluding damages caused by physical or chemical abuse or excessive heat.
Warranty shall provide for material and labor for replacement or repair of
defective material for a period of ten years after component installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
Provide solid polymer material that is a homogeneous filled solid polymer;

not coated, laminated or of a composite construction; meeting
CSA B45.5-11/IAPMO Z124 requirements. Material shall have minimum
physical and performance properties specified. Superficial damage to a
depth of 0.01 inch shall be repairable by sanding or polishing. Material
thickness shall be as indicated on the drawings. In no case shall
material be less than 1/4 inch in thickness. Submit a minimum 4 by 4 inch
sample of each color and pattern for approval. Samples shall indicate
full range of color and pattern variation. Approved samples shall be
retained as a standard for this work. Submit test report results from an
independent testing laboratory attesting that the submitted solid polymer
material meets or exceeds each of the specified performance requirements.
2.1.1 Cast, 100 Percent Acrylic Polymer Solid Surfacing Material
Cast, 100 percent acrylic solid polymer material shall be composed of

acrylic polymer, mineral fillers, and pigments and shall meet the
following minimum performance requirements:
PROPERTY REQUIREMENT TEST PROCEDURE

(min. or max.)
Tensile Strength 4000 psi (max.) ASTM D638
Hardness 55-Barcol Impressor (min.) ASTM D2583
Thermal Expansion .000023 in/in/F (max.) ASTM D696
Boiling Water Surface No Change ANSI/NEMA LD 3-3.05

Resistance
High Temperature No Change ANSI/NEMA LD 3-3.06

Resistance
Impact Resistance (Ball drop) ANSI/NEMA LD 3-303
1/4 inch sheet 36 inches, 1/2 lb ball, no failure
1/2 inch sheet 140 inches, 1/2 lb ball, no

failure

failure
Mold & Mildew Growth No growth ASTM G21
Bacteria Growth No growth ASTM G21
Liquid Absorption 0.1 percent max. ASTM D570

(Weight in 24 hrs.)
Flammability ASTM E84
Flame Spread 25 max.
Smoke Developed 30 max.
Sanitation "Food Contact" approval NSF/ANSI 51
2.1.2 Acrylic-modified Polymer Solid Surfacing Material
Cast, solid polymer material shall be composed of a formulation containing

acrylic and polyester polymers, mineral fillers, and pigments. Acrylic
polymer content shall be not less than 5 percent and not more than 10
percent in order to meet the following minimum performance requirements:

(min. or max.)
Tensile Strength 4100 psi (max.) ASTM D638

(min. or max.)
Hardness 50-Barcol Impressor (min.) ASTM D2583
Thermal Expansion .000023 in/in/F (max.) ASTM D696
Boiling Water Surface No Change ANSI/NEMA LD 3-3.05

Resistance
High Temperature No Change ANSI/NEMA LD 3-3.06

Resistance
Impact Resistance (Ball drop) ANSI/NEMA LD 3-303
1/4 inch sheet 36 inches, 1/2 lb ball, no failure

failure

failure
Mold & Mildew Growth No growth ASTM G21
Bacteria Growth No growth ASTM G21
Liquid Absorption 0.6 percent max. ASTM D570

(Weight in 24 hrs.)
Flammability ASTM E84
Flame Spread 25 max.
Smoke Developed 100 max.
Sanitation "Food Contact" approval NSF/ANSI 51
2.1.3 Material Patterns and Colors
Patterns and colors for all solid polymer components and fabrications
shall be those indicated on the project drawings. Pattern and color shall
occur, and shall be consistent in appearance, throughout the entire depth
(thickness) of the solid polymer material.
2.1.4 Surface Finish
Exposed finished surfaces and edges shall receive a uniform appearance.

Exposed surface finish shall be matte; gloss rating of 5-20.
2.2 ACCESSORY PRODUCTS
Accessory products, as specified below, shall be manufactured by the solid

polymer manufacturer or shall be products approved by the solid polymer
manufacturer for use with the solid polymer materials being specified.
2.2.1 Seam Adhesive
Seam adhesive shall be a two-part adhesive kit to create permanent,

inconspicuous, non-porous, hard seams and joints by chemical bond between
solid polymer materials and components to create a monolithic appearance
of the fabrication. Adhesive shall be approved by the solid polymer
manufacturer. Adhesive shall be color-matched to the surfaces being
bonded where solid-colored, solid polymer materials are being bonded
together. The seam adhesive shall be clear or color matched where
particulate patterned, solid polymer materials are being bonded together.
2.2.2 Panel Adhesive
Panel adhesive shall be neoprene based panel adhesive meeting TCNA Hdbk,
Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) listed. Use this adhesive to bond solid
polymer components to adjacent and underlying substrates.
2.2.3 Silicone Sealant
Sealant shall be a mildew-resistant, FDA and OSHA Nationally Recognized

Testing Laboratory (NRTL) listed silicone sealant or caulk in a clear
formulation. The silicone sealant shall be approved for use by the solid
polymer manufacturer. Use sealant to seal all expansion joints between
solid polymer components and all joints between solid polymer components
and other adjacent surfaces such as walls, floors, ceiling, and plumbing
fixtures.
2.2.4 Mounting Hardware
Provide mounting hardware, including sink/bowl clips, inserts and

fasteners for attachment of undermount sinks and lavatories.
2.3 FABRICATIONS
Components shall be factory or shop fabricated to sizes and shapes

indicated, to the greatest extent practical, in accordance with approved
Shop Drawings and manufacturer's requirements. Provide factory cutouts
for sinks, lavatories, and plumbing fixtures where indicated on the
drawings. Contours and radii shall be routed to template, with edges
smooth. Defective and inaccurate work will be rejected. Submit product
data indicating product description, fabrication information, and
compliance with specified performance requirements for solid polymer,
joint adhesive, sealants, and heat reflective tape. Both the manufacturer
of materials and the fabricator shall submit a detailed description of
operations and processes in place that support efficient use of natural
resources, energy efficiency, emissions of ozone depleting chemicals,
management of water and operational waste, indoor environmental quality,
and other production techniques supporting sustainable design and products.
2.3.1 Joints and Seams
Form joints and seams between solid polymer components using

manufacturer's approved seam adhesive. Joints shall be inconspicuous in
appearance and without voids to create a monolithic appearance.
2.3.2 Edge Finishing
Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform appearance and

finish. Edge shapes and treatments, including any inserts, shall be as
detailed on the drawings. Rout all cutouts, then sand all edges smooth.
Repair or reject defective or inaccurate work.
2.3.3 Counter and Vanity Top Splashes
Fabricate backsplashes and end splashes from 1/2 inch thick solid
surfacing material to be in conformance with dimensions and shapes as
indicated on the drawings. Backsplashes and end splashes shall be
provided at locations indicated on the drawings. Backsplashes shall be
shop fabricated and be permanently attached.
2.3.3.1 Permanently Attached Backsplash
Permanently attached backsplashes shall be attached straight with seam

adhesive to form a 90 degree transition.
2.3.3.2 End Splashes
End splashes shall be provided loose for installation at the jobsite after
horizontal surfaces to which they are to be attached have been installed.
2.3.4 Counter and Vanity Tops
Fabricate all solid surfacing, solid polymer counter top and vanity top
components from 1/2 inch thick material. Edge details, dimensions,
locations, and quantities shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Counter
tops shall be complete with 4 inch high permanently attached, 90 degree
transition. Attach 2 inch wide reinforcing strip of polymer material
under each horizontal counter top seam. Submit a minimum 1 foot wide by 6
inch deep, full size sample for each type of counter top shown on the
project drawings. The sample shall include the edge profile and
backsplash as detailed on the project drawings. Solid polymer material
shall be of a pattern and color as indicated on the drawings. Sample
shall include at least one seam. Approved sample shall be retained as
standard for this work.
2.3.4.1 Counter Top With Sink
a. Stainless Steel or Vitreous China Sink. Countertops with sinks shall

include cutouts to template as furnished by the sink manufacturer.
Manufacturer's standard sink mounting hardware installation shall be
provided. Seam between sink and counter top shall be sealed with
silicone sealant. Sink, faucet, and plumbing requirements shall be in
accordance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING,GENERAL PURPOSE.
2.3.5 Tub/Shower Wall Panel System
Tub/shower wall enclosures shall provide a system of solid polymer

components to include: panels, corner trim, and panel edge trim.
Dimensions of all components shall be as indicated on the drawings.
Panels shall be formed from manufacturer's standard 1/4 inch thick sheet
product. Panels shall be full width and height with seams occurring only
at the inside corners of the enclosure.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Components
Install all components and fabricated units plumb, level, and rigid. Make
field joints between solid polymer components using solid polymer
manufacturer's approved seam adhesives, to provide a monolithic appearance
with joints inconspicuous in the finished work. Attach metal or vitreous
china sinks and lavatory bowls to counter tops using solid polymer
manufacturer's recommended clear silicone sealant and mounting hardware.
Solid polymer sinks and bowls shall be installed using a color-matched
seam adhesive. Plumbing connections to sinks and lavatories shall be made
in accordance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
3.1.1.1 Loose Counter Top Splashes
Mount loose splashes in the locations noted on the drawings. Loose

splashes shall be adhered to the counter top with a color matched silicone
sealant when the solid polymer components are solid colors. Use a clear
silicone sealant to provide adhesion of particulate patterned solid
polymer splashes to counter tops.
3.1.1.2 Wall Panels & Panel Systems
Installation of wall panels and system components to substrates shall

include the use of a neoprene-based panel adhesive. Use seam adhesive to
adhere all solid polymer components to each other with the exception of
expansion joints and inside corners. All inside corners and expansion
joints between solid polymer components shall be joined with silicone
sealant. All joints between solid polymer components and non-solid
polymer surfaces shall be sealed with a clear silicone sealant.
3.1.2 Silicone Sealant
Use a clear, silicone sealant or caulk to seal all expansion joints

between solid polymer components and all joints between solid polymer
components and other adjacent surfaces such as walls, floors, ceiling, and
plumbing fixtures. Sealant bead shall be smooth and uniform in appearance
and shall be the minimum size necessary to bridge any gaps between the
solid surfacing material and the adjacent surface. Bead shall be
continuous and run the entire length of the joint being sealed.
3.1.3 Plumbing
Make plumbing connections to sinks and lavatories in accordance with

Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
3.2 CLEAN-UP
Components shall be cleaned after installation and covered to protect

against damage during completion of the remaining project items.
Components damaged after installation by other trades will be repaired or
replaced at the General Contractor's cost. Component supplier will
provide a repair/replace cost estimate to the General Contractor who shall
approve estimate before repairs are made. Submit a minimum of six copies
of maintenance data indicating manufacturer's care, repair and cleaning
instructions. Maintenance video shall be provided,if available.

Maintenance kit for matte finishes shall be submitted.
SECTION 07 05 23
PRESSURE TESTING AN AIR BARRIER SYSTEM FOR AIR TIGHTNESS

05/14
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Employ an independent agency to conduct the pressure test on the building

envelope in accordance with this specification section and ASTM E779.
1.2 REFERENCES

extent referenced. The publications are referenced within the text by the
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING (ASNT)
ANSI/ASNT CP-189 (2011) ASNT Standard for Qualification and

Certification of Nondestructive Testing
Personnel (ANSI/ASNT CP-105-2006)
ASNT CP-105 (2011) ASNT Standard Topical Outlines for

Qualification of Nondestructive Testing
Personnel - Item No. 2821
ASNT SNT-TC-1A (2011; Text Correction 2013) Recommended

Practice for Personnel Qualification and
Certification in Nondestructive Testing
ASTM E1186 (2003; R 2009) Standard Practices for Air

Leakage Site Detection in Building
Envelopes and Air Barrier Systems
ASTM E1827 (2011) Standard Test Methods for

Determining Airtightness of Buildings
Using an Orifice Blower Door
ASTM E779 (2010) Standard Test Method for

Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan
Pressurization
ISO 6781 (1983) Thermal Insulation - Qualitative

Detection of Thermal Irregularities in
Building Envelopes - Infrared Method
1.3 DEFINITIONS
The following terms as they apply to this section:
1.3.1 Air Barrier Envelope
The surface that separates the inside air from the outside air. The
combination of air barrier assemblies and air barrier components,
connected by air barrier accessories are designed to provide a continuous
barrier to the movement of air through an environmental separator. A
single building may have more than one air barrier envelope. The air
barrier surface includes the top, bottom, and sides of the envelope. The
term "air barrier envelope" is also known as "air barrier system" or
simply "air barrier".
1.3.2 Air Leakage Rate
How leaky, or conversely how air tight a building envelope is. The air
leakage is normally described in terms of air flow rate for the surface
area of the envelope at a defined differential pressure.
1.3.3 Bias Pressure
Also known as zero flow pressure, baseline pressure, offset pressure or

background pressure. With the envelope not artificially pressurized, bias
is the differential pressure that always exists between the envelope that
has been prepared (sealed) for the pressure test and the outdoors. Bias
pressure is made up of two components, fixed static offset (usually due to
stack effect or the HVAC system) and fluctuating pressure (usually due to
wind or a moving elevator). Because of pressure fluctuations many bias
pressure readings are recorded and averaged for use in the calculations.
1.3.4 Blower Door
Commonly used term for an apparatus used to pressurize and depressurize

the space within the building envelope and quantify air leakage through
the envelope. The blower door typically includes a door fan and an air
resistant fabric or a series of hard panels that extends to cover and seal
the door opening between the fan shroud and door frame. The door fan is a
calibrated fan capable of measuring air flow and is usually placed in the
opening of an exterior door. With the air barrier otherwise sealed, air
produced by the door fan pressurizes or de-pressurizes the envelope,
depending on the fan's orientation.
1.3.5 Environmental Separator
The parts of a building that separate the controlled interior environment

from the uncontrolled exterior environment, or that separate spaces within
a building that have dissimilar environments. The term "environmental
separator" is also known as the "control layer".
1.3.6 Pressure Test
A generic term for a test in which the envelope is either pressurized or

de-pressurized with respect to the outdoors.
1.3.6.1 Negative Pressure Test (Depressurization Test)
A test wherein air inside the envelope is drawn to the outdoors. This
places the envelope at a lower (negative) pressure with respect to the
outdoors.
1.3.6.2 Positive Pressure Test (Pressurization Test)
A test wherein outdoor air is pushed into the envelope. This air movement
places the envelope at a higher (positive) pressure with respect to the
outdoors.
1.4 WORK PLAN
Submit the following not later than 120 calendar days after contract
award, but before start of pressure testing work, steps to be taken by the
lead pressure test technician to accomplish the required testing.
a. Memorandum of test procedure.
(1) Proposed dates for conducting the pressure, thermographic and fog
tests.
(2) Submit detailed pressure test procedures prior to the test.

Provide a plan view showing proposed locations (personnel doors or
other similar openings) to install blower doors or flexible ducts
(for trailer-mounted fans), if used.
b. Test equipment to be used.
c. Scaffolding, scissor lifts, power, electrical extension cords, duct

tape, plastic sheeting and other Contractor's support equipment
required to perform all tests.
d. Other Contractor's support personnel who will be on site for testing.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

Work Plan; G
SD-03 Product Data
Thermal Imaging Camera; G
SD-05 Design Data
Envelope Surface Area Calculations; G
SD-07 Certificates
Pressure Test Agency

Thermographer Qualifications
Test Instruments
Date Of Last Calibration
SD-06 Test Reports
Pressure Test Procedures; G

Air Leakage Test Report; G
Diagnostic Test Report; G
No later than 14 days after completion of the pressure test,

submit 6 copies of an organized report bound in a durable 3-ring
binder. The report is to contain a table of contents, an
executive summary, an introduction, a results section and a
discussion of the results. Submit the Air Leakage Test Report as
described in paragraph AIR LEAKAGE TEST REPORT. Submit a
diagnostic test report as described in paragraph LOCATING LEAKS BY
DIAGNOSTIC TESTING. The diagnostic test report is to include the
Thermographic Investigation Report and the Fog Test Report (if
performed).
Submit field data and completed report forms found in the

appendices. Use the sample forms, Test Agency Qualification
Sheet, Air Leakage Test Form and Air Leakage Test Results Form to
summarize the tests for the appropriate building envelope. Submit
both electronically populated and field hand filled-in forms.
Report Data. Include in the report the following information

for all tests:
a. Date of Issue
b. Project title and number
c. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency
d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections
e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test
f. Designation of the work and test method
g. Identification of product and Specification Section
h. Complete inspection or test data
i. Test results and an interpretation of test results
j. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or
tested work complies with contract document requirements
k. Recommendations on retesting
1.6.1 Modification of References
Perform all pressure and diagnostic tests according to the referenced

publications listed in paragraph REFERENCES and as modified by this
section. Consider the advisory or recommended provisions, of the referred
references, as mandatory.
1.6.2.1 Pressure Test Agency
Submit, no later than 15 calendar days after contract award, information

certifying that the pressure test agency is not affiliated with any other
company participating in work on this contract. The work of the test
agency is limited to pressure testing the building envelope, performing a
thermography test and fog test, and investigating, through various
methods, the location of air leaks through the air barrier. See paragraph
PRESSURE TEST AGENCY for additional requirements. For thermographer
qualifications, see paragraph THERMOGRAPHER QUALIFICATIONS.
Use the sample TEST AGENCY QUALIFICATIONS SHEET form (Appendix C), to
submit the following information.
a. Verification of 5 years of experience as an agency in pressure testing

commercial and/or industrial buildings.
b. List of at least ten commercial/industrial facilities with building

envelopes that the agency has tested within the past 2 years. Include
building name, address, and name of prime construction contractor and
contractor's point-of-contact information.
c. Confirmation of 2 years of commercial and or industrial building

pressure test experience for the lead pressure test technician and the
thermographer in using the specified ASTM E779 testing standard.
References from five Contracting Officers for facilities where the
lead test technician has supervised commercial and or industrial
building pressure tests in the last 2 years.
d. Verification that the lead pressure test technician has been employed
by a building pressure testing agency in the capacity of a lead
pressure test technician for not less than 1 year.
1.6.2.2 Thermographer Qualifications
To perform an infrared diagnostic evaluation, use a lead thermographer who

has at least an active Level II Certification that is based on the
requirements in ASNT CP-105 or ANSI/ASNT CP-189 and is in accordance with
ASNT SNT-TC-1A. The course of study is to be specifically focused on
infrared thermography for building science. The thermographer must have
at least two years of building science thermography experience in IR
testing commercial or industrial buildings. The thermographer must also
have experience in building envelopes and building science in order to
make effective recommendations to the contractor should the envelope
require additional sealing. Submit the thermographer's certificate for
approval. Submit a list of at least ten commercial/industrial buildings on
which the thermographer has performed IR thermography in the past two
years. The thermographer is to have a current active certification.
Submit certification at least 60 days prior to thermography testing.
1.6.3 Test Instruments And Date Of Last Calibration
Submit a signed and dated list of test instruments, their application,

manufacturer, model, serial number, range of operation, accuracy and date
of most recent calibration.
1.7 CLIMATE CONDITIONS SUITABLE FOR A PRESSURE TEST
As the test date approaches, monitor the weather forecast for the test
site. Avoid testing on days forecast to experience high winds, rain, or
snow. Monitor weather forecasts prior to shipping pressure test equipment
to the site. Preferred ambient weather test conditions as stated in
ASTM E779 are 0 to 4 mph winds and an ambient temperature range of 41 - 95
degrees F. Based on current and forecast weather conditions, the
Contracting Officer's representative is to grant final approval for
testing to occur.
1.7.1 Rain
Rain can temporarily seal roof and wall assemblies so that they leak less
than under no-rain conditions. Do not test during rain or if rain is

anticipated during testing. If pneumatic hoses are installed and exposed
to rain inspect the hose to insure rainwater has not migrated into the
hose ends. Orient all exposed hose ends to keep them out of water
puddles. Success in temporarily sealing outdoor ventilation components
such as louvers and exhaust fans may also be compromised by rain. Don't
seal roof-mounted ventilation components during times of potential
lightning.
1.7.2 Wind
Because wind can skew pressure test results, test only on days and at
times when winds are anticipated to be the calmest. Avoid pressure
testing during gusty or high wind conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRESSURE TEST EQUIPMENT
Depending on site conditions and size of the envelope, the test may be
conducted using blower door equipment and/or trailer-mounted fans. The
testing agency is to supply sufficient quantity of blower equipment that
will produce a minimum of 75 Pa differential pressure between the envelope
and outdoors using the test methods described herein. Supplying
additional blower test equipment to provide additional airflow capacity or
to act as a backup is highly recommended.
2.1.1 Blower Door Fans and Trailer Mounted Fans
Each air flow measuring system including blower door fans and trailer
mounted fans are to be calibrated within the last 3 years in accordance
with ASTM E1827. Calibrated blower door fans and trailer mounted fans
must measure accurately to within plus or minus 5 percent of the flow
reading. Blower door equipment and trailer mounted fans are to be
specifically designed to pressurize building envelopes. Each set of
blower door equipment is to include fan(s), digital gage(s), door frame,
door fabric or hard panels.
2.1.2 Digital Gages as Test Instruments
Use only digital gages as measuring instruments in the pressure test;

analog gages are not acceptable. The gauges must be accurate to within
1.0 percent of the pressure reading or 0.15 Pa, whichever is greater.
Each gage is to have been calibrated within two years of the test. The
calibration is to be checked against a National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST, formerly National Bureau of Standards) traceable
standard.
2.2 THERMAL IMAGING CAMERA REQUIREMENTS
The thermal imaging camera used in the thermography test must have a
thermal sensitivity (Noise Equivalent Temperature Difference.) of +/- 0.18
degrees F at 86 degrees F or less. Ensure the camera's operating spectral
range falls between 2 and 15 micrometers. Ensure the camera's IR image
viewing screen resolution measures at least 240x180 pixels. Ensure the
camera has a means of recording thermal images seen on the camera viewing
screen. The camera is to display output as individual still frame images
that also can be downloaded and inserted into an electronic Thermographic
Investigation Report. Submit camera make and model, and catalog
information that defines the camera thermal sensitivity for approval.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PRESSURE TEST AGENCY
The test agency is to be an independent third party subcontractor, not an

affiliated or subsidiary of the prime contractor, subcontractors or A/E
firm. The agency is to be regularly engaged in pressure testing of
commercial/industrial building envelopes. If using blower door or
trailer-mounted fans, the lead test technician must have at least two
years of experience in using such equipment in building envelope
pressurization tests. Formal training using pressure test equipment is
highly recommended. Technicians using the building's air handling system
for pressure testing are to have tested at least five
commercial/industrial buildings within the past two years with each
building having over 50,000 square feet of floor area. Submit the name,
address and floor areas of each of these five buildings for approval.
3.1.1 Field Work
The lead pressure test technician and thermographer are to be present at

the project site while testing is performed and is to be responsible for
conducting, supervising, and managing of their respective test work.
Management includes health and safety of test agency employees.
3.1.2 Reporting Work
The lead pressure test technician is to prepare, sign, and date the test
agenda, equipment list, and submit a certified Air Leakage Test Report.
The thermographer is to prepare, sign, and date the test agenda, equipment
list, and submit a certified Thermographic Investigation Report. The
contractor is to prepare a final report that identifies improvements that
were made to the envelope to reduce leaks and repair insulation voids
discovered during diagnostic tests. Jointly submit all reports.
3.2 ENVELOPE SURFACE AREA CALCULATION
The architectural air barrier boundary includes the floor, walls, and
ceiling. After construction of the air barrier envelope is complete,
field measure the envelope to ensure the physical measurements match the
design drawings and the air barrier envelope surface area calculations.
If the measurements are not consistent with the defined air barrier
boundary as indicated, re-calculate the envelope surface area and submit
the envelope surface area calculation and results for review. If the air
barrier was defined during design but the air barrier envelope surface
area was not calculated, calculate it during construction and submit the
envelope surface area calculations and result for review.
3.3 PREPARING THE BUILDING ENVELOPE FOR THE PRESSURE TEST
3.3.1 Testing During Construction
The pressure test cannot be conducted until all components of the air
barrier system have been installed. After all sealing as described herein
has been completed, inspect the envelope to ensure it has been adequately
prepared. During the pressure test, stop all ongoing construction within
and neighboring the envelope which may impact the test or the air barrier
integrity. The pressure test may be conducted before finishes that are
not part of the air barrier envelope have been installed. For example, if
suspended ceiling tile, interior gypsum board or cladding systems are not
part of the air barrier the test can be conducted before they are
installed. Recommend testing prior to installing the finished ceilings
within the envelope and immediately surrounding it. The absence of
finished ceilings allows for inspection and diagnostic testing of the
roof/wall interface and for implementation of repairs to the air barrier,
if necessary to comply with the maximum allowed leakage.
3.3.2 Sealing The Air Barrier Envelope
Seal all penetrations through the air barrier. Unavoidable penetrations

due to electrical boxes or conduit, plumbing, and other assemblies that
are not air tight are to be made so by sealing the assembly and the
interface between the assembly and the air barrier or by extending the air
barrier over the assembly. Support the air barrier so as to withstand the
maximum positive and negative air pressure to be placed on the building
without displacement or damage, and transfer the load to the structure.
Durably construct the air barrier to last the anticipated service life of
the assembly and to withstand the maximum positive and negative pressures
placed on it during pressure testing. Do not install lighting fixtures
that are equipped with ventilation holes through the air barrier.
3.3.3 Sealing Plumbing
Prime all plumbing traps located within the envelope full of water.
3.3.4 Close and Lock Doors
Close and lock all doors and windows in the envelope perimeter. For doors
not equipped with latching hardware, temporarily secure them in the closed
position. Secure the doors in such a way that they remain fully closed
even when the maximum anticipated differential air pressure produced
during the test acts on them.
3.3.5 Hold Excluded Building Areas at the Outdoor Pressure Level
Keep building areas immediately surrounding but excluded from the test
envelope at the outdoor pressure level during the pressure test. Maintain
these areas at the outdoor pressure level by propping exterior doors open,
opening windows and de-energizing all air moving devices in or serving
these areas.
3.3.6 Maintain an Even Pressure within the Envelope
Ensure the pressure differences within the envelope are minimized by

opening all internal air pathways including propping open all interior
doors. Distribute test fans throughout the envelope as necessary to
ensure the internal pressures are uniform (within 10 percent of the
average differential pressure). Ideally, suspended ceilings will not be
installed until after all pressure tests have been completed. If, however
the envelope includes finished suspended ceiling spaces, temporarily
remove approximately 5 percent of all ceiling tiles or a minimum of 1 tile
from each isolated suspended ceiling space, whichever comprises the
greatest surface area. Temporarily remove additional ceiling tiles
during testing to allow for inspection and diagnostic testing of the
ceiling/wall interface.
3.3.7 Maintain Access to Mechanical and Electrical Rooms
Maintain access to mechanical rooms and electrical rooms associated with

the envelope to allow for de-energizing ventilation equipment and
resetting circuit breakers tripped by blower door equipment, if used.
3.3.8 Minimize Potential for Blowing Dust and Debris
Because high velocity air may be blown into and out of the envelope during
the test, debris, including dust and litter, may become airborne.
Airborne debris may become trapped or entangled in test equipment, thereby
skewing test results. Ensure areas within and surrounding the envelope
are free of dust, litter and construction materials that are easily
airborne. If pressurizing existing, occupied areas, provide adequate
notice to building occupants of blowing dust and debris, and general
disruption of normal activities during the test.
3.3.9 De-energize Air Moving Devices
De-energize all air moving devices serving the envelope to keep air within
the envelope as still as reasonably achievable. De-energize all fans that
deliver air to, exhaust air from, or recirculate air within the envelope.
Also de-energize all fans serving areas adjacent to but excluded from the
envelope.
3.3.10 Installing Blower Door Equipment in a Door Opening
Where blower door fans are used, before installing blower door equipment,
select a door opening that does not restrict air flow into and out of the
envelope and has at least 5 feet clear distance in front of and behind the
door opening. Disconnect the door actuator and secure the door open to
prevent it from being drawn into the fan by fan pressure.
3.4 BUILDING ENVELOPE AIR TIGHTNESS REQUIREMENT
For each building envelope, perform two pressure tests; the Architectural
Only test and the Architectural Plus HVAC System test. The purpose of the
pressure (air leakage) test is to determine final compliance with the
airtightness requirement by demonstrating the performance of the
continuous air barrier. An effective air barrier envelope minimizes
infiltration and exfiltration through unintended air paths (leaks). The
tests may be performed in any desired order.
3.4.1 Architectural Only Test
The test envelope is the architectural air barrier boundary as defined on

the contract drawings. This boundary includes connecting walls, roof and
floor which comprise a complete, whole, and continuous three dimensional
envelope. Perform both a positive pressure test and a negative pressure
test on this envelope, unless otherwise directed.
3.4.1.1 Test Goal
Input data from the test into the Air Leakage Rate by Fan Pressurization
spreadsheet as described in paragraph CALCULATION PROGRAM via the Air
Leakage Test Form. Compare output from the spreadsheet against the
maximum allowable leakage defined in Section 07 27 10.00 10 BUILDING AIR
BARRIER SYSTEM. The envelope passes the test if the leakage rate, as
calculated using the spreadsheet, is equal to or lower than the
Architectural Only leakage rate goal.
3.4.1.2 Preparing The Envelope For The Pressure Test - Seal All Openings
Through The Air Barrier
Temporarily close all perimeter windows, roof hatches and doors in the
envelope perimeter except for those doors that are to remain open to
accommodate blower door or trailer mounted fan test equipment
installation. Seal, or isolate all other intentional openings, pathways
and fenestrations through the architectural envelope prior to pressure
testing. Follow the Recommended Test Envelope Conditions identified in
ASTM E1827, Table 1, for the Closed Envelope condition. These openings
may include boiler flues, fuel-burning water heater flues, fuel-burning
kitchen equipment, clothes dryer vents, fireplaces, wall or ceiling
grilles, diffusers etc. Before sealing flues, close their associated fuel
valves and verify the associated pilot lights are extinguished. Prime all
plumbing traps located within the envelope full of water. In lieu of
applying tape and/or plastic, Typical temporary sealing materials include
tape and sheet plastic or a self-adhesive grille wrap. Use and apply tape
and plastic in a manner that does not deface or remove paint or mar the
finish of permanent surfaces. Be especially aware of residue that may
remain from tape applied to stainless steel surfaces such as kitchen hoods
or rollup doors. For painted surfaces, use tape types that will not
remove finish paint when the tape is removed. If paint is removed from
the finished surface, repaint to match existing surfaces. Secure dampers
closed either manually or by using the building's HVAC system controls.
Use the table below for further guidance in building preparation.
Building Component Envelope Condition
Air handling units, duct fans As found (open) or temporarily sealed as

necessary
Dampers - intake, exhaust Physically closed or closed using control
power or temporarily sealed
Diffusers, registers, grilles within the Temporarily sealed

envelope
Doors, personnel type, at the envelope Secured closed
perimeter
Doors, personnel type, within the envelope Secured (propped) open
Doors, roll-up type, at the envelope Closed (no additional sealing)

perimeter
Pilot light and associated fuel valve Extinguished and closed, respectively
Vented combustion appliance Temporarily sealed *
Vented combustion appliance exhaust flue Off
Windows Secured closed
* If the building component has an associated manual or automatic damper, consider

securing the damper closed in lieu of temporarily sealing.
3.4.2 Architectural Plus HVAC System Test
This test envelope includes the architectural air barrier boundary as

defined on the contract drawings plus all HVAC supply, return and exhaust
systems that penetrate and terminate within said architectural air barrier
boundary and that extends outward from said boundary. All associated
ductwork, intake and exhaust dampers, and air moving devices, including
air handling units and fans, are included in this test envelope even if
they are physically located outside of the architectural air barrier
boundary. The boundary extends to and includes the low leakage intake
and exhaust dampers. Perform both a positive pressure test and a negative
pressure test on this envelope, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4.2.1 Test Goal
Data from the test is to be input into the Air Leakage Rate by Fan
Pressurization spreadsheet as described in paragraph CALCULATION PROGRAM
via the Air Leakage Test Form. If both a positive and negative pressure
tests were performed, both data sets are together to be input in the
spreadsheet. Compare output from the spreadsheet against the leakage rate
goal. The envelope passes the test if the leakage rate, as calculated
using the spreadsheet, is equal to or lower than the Architectural Plus
HVAC System leakage rate goal.
3.4.2.2 Preparing the Building for the Pressure Test
In preparation of this test, de-energize all air moving devices within

this envelope by putting their controls in the Unoccupied mode. This
allows the building's HVAC controls to close all associated motorized
intake, exhaust, and relief dampers. Make no other changes to the HVAC
systems. Temporarily sealing diffusers, grilles, registers, kitchen
hoods, exhaust hoods, fans, air handling units and all other HVAC system
elements with tape and/or plastic sheeting or any other means is not
allowed. If the envelope includes a fireplace hearth do not seal it with
tape and plastic. Use the table below for further guidance in building
preparation.
Air handling units, duct fans As found (open)
Dampers - intake, exhaust As found (no preparation)
Diffusers, registers, grilles within the As found (open)

envelope
Doors, personnel type, at the envelope Secured closed
perimeter
Doors, personnel type, within the envelope Secured (propped) open
Doors, roll-up type, at the envelope Closed (no preparation)

perimeter
Pilot light and associated fuel valve Extinguished and closed, respectively
Vented combustion appliance Off
Vented combustion appliance exhaust flue As found (open)
Windows Secured closed
3.5 CONDUCTING THE PRESSURE TEST
Notify the Contracting Officer at least 10 working days before conducting

the pressure tests to provide the Government the opportunity to witness
the tests and to monitor weather forecasts for conditions favorable for
testing. Do not pressure test until verifying that the continuous air
barrier is in place and installed without failures in accordance with
installation instructions. During the pressure test periodically inspect
temporarily sealed items to ensure they are still sealed. Seals on
temporarily sealed items tend to release more readily at higher
pressures. Test data obtained after temporarily sealed items become
unsealed cannot be used as input into the calculation program. Follow the
Envelope Pressure Test Procedures in the paragraphs below. Submit
detailed pressure test procedures indicating the test apparatus, the test
methods and procedures, and the analysis methods to be employed for the
building envelope pressure (air tightness) test. Submit these procedures
not later than 60 days after Notice to Proceed.
3.5.1 Extend Pneumatic Tubes and Establish a Reference Differential

Pressure
Confirm the various zones within the envelope have a relatively uniform
interior pressure distribution by establishing a representative
differential pressure between the envelope and the outdoors with blower
door or trailer-mounted fans operating. The number of indoor pressure
difference measurements (pneumatic hoses) required depends on the number
of interior zones separated by bottle necks that could create significant
pressure drops (e.g. doorways and stairwells). Extend at least four
pneumatic hoses (differential pressure monitoring ports) to locations
within the envelope that are physically opposite of each other. In
multiple story buildings, especially those over three stories, extend
hoses to multiple floors. Locate the hose ends away from the effects of
air discharge from blower test equipment. Select one of the four (or
more) interior hoses, one judged by the test agency to be the most
unaffected by air velocity produced by blower test equipment, to serve as
the interior reference pressure port. Extend at least one additional
pneumatic hose to the outdoors (outdoor pressure port). To the end of
this hose manifold at least four hoses together and terminate each hose on
a different side of the building. With the envelope sealed and the blowers
energized, measure the differential pressure using the interior reference
pressure port and the four outdoor pressure ports. Then measure and
record the differential pressure by individually using each of the
remaining three interior hoses. Ensure each reading is within plus or
minus 10 percent of the reference reading. Thus at an average 75 Pa
maximum pressure difference across the envelope, the difference between
the highest and lowest interior pressure difference measurements should be
15 Pa or less. If this condition cannot be met, attempt to create
additional air pathways within the envelope to minimize pressure
differences within the envelope. If necessary, move the interior hose
ends. See step 2.13 of the Air Leakage Test Form in Appendix A.
3.5.2 Bias Pressure Readings
With the fan pressurization equipment de-energized and the envelope

sealed, obtain the differential pressure between the outdoors and the
envelope. Record 12 bias pressure readings before the pressure test and
12 bias pressure readings after the pressure test. Each reading is the
average of ten or more 1-second measurements. Include positive and
negative signs for each reading. To help dampen bias pressures that
significantly contribute to test pressure, reduce temperature differences
between indoor and outdoor air. Temperature differences can be reduced by
operating test fan equipment for a few minutes to replace most of the
indoor air with outdoor air.
3.5.3 Testing in Both Positive and Negative Directions
The preferred method for testing a building envelope is to test in both

the pressurized and depressurized directions. Testing in one direction is
only allowed if opposite direction testing cannot logistically be
performed due to test equipment limitations or restrictions. After
obtaining the pre-test bias differential pressure readings, conduct the
pressure test. Record the envelope pressures (in units of Pascals) from
one interior pneumatic hose (monitoring port) and the outdoor pneumatic
hose(s), averaged or manifolded, with corresponding flows (in units of cfm
) for each fan. Record the flow rates at at least 10 to 12 positive and
10 to 12 negative building pressure readings. If conducting both positive
and negative pressure tests the lowest allowable test pressure is 40 Pa
and the highest test pressure is 85 Pa. Keep at least 25 Pa difference
between the lowest and highest test pressure readings. Include the 75 Pa
pressure value between the lowest and highest readings. The 10 to 12
readings in each direction are to be roughly evenly spaced along the range
of pressures and flows. After testing is complete de-energize the
equipment used to provide pressurization and obtain an additional 10 to 12
post-test bias pressure readings. None of the bias pressure readings are
allowed to exceed 30 percent of the minimum test pressure. If these
limits are exceeded the test fails and must be repeated.
3.5.4 Failed Pressure Test
If the pressure test fails to meet the established criteria, use

diagnostic test methods described in paragraph LOCATING LEAKS BY
DIAGNOSTIC TESTING to discover the leak locations. Provide additional
permanent sealing measures to reduce or eliminate leak sources discovered
during diagnostic testing. Retest (perform another pressure test) after
sealing has been completed. Repeat this sequence of documenting test
results in the test report, performing diagnostic tests, documenting
recommendations for additional sealing measures in the test report,
sealing leak locations per recommendations, and re-testing as necessary
until the building envelope passes the pressure test and is in compliance
with the performance requirements.
3.5.5 Air Leakage Test Report
Report volumetric flow rates and corresponding differential pressures in

cubic feet per minute (cfm) and Pascals (Pa), respectively, on the Air
Leakage Test Form sample form found in Appendix A. Populate the
accompanying spreadsheet file entitled Pressure Test Data Analysis with
information obtained during the test. The spreadsheet uses equations
found in ASTM E779 as a basis for calculating the envelope leakage rate.
Other similar leakage rate calculation programs cannot be used or
submitted for review. Submit a printout of the data input and output in
the report. Should any air tightness (pressure) test fail, the pressure
test report is to include data and results from all previous failed tests
along with the final successful test data and results. Indicate if the
resulting leakage rate did or did not meet the goal leakage requirement.
Identify and document deficiencies in the building construction upon
failure of a test to meet the specified maximum leakage rate.
Include the Test Agency Qualification Sheet, Air Leakage Test Form and Air
Leakage Test Results Form in the written report. Document every test
set-up condition with diagrams and photos to ensure the tests can be made
repeatable. Document all pneumatic hose termination locations. Record in
detail how the building envelope was prepared for the tests. Also
describe in detail which building items were temporarily sealed. Include
photos of test equipment and sealing measures in the report. Include an
electronic (pdf) version of all test reports on a CD. If the building
envelope fails to meet the leakage rate goal, provide recommendations to
further seal the envelope and document these recommendations in the test
report.
3.6 LOCATING LEAKS BY DIAGNOSTIC TESTING
Use diagnostic test methods described herein to discover obvious leaks

through the envelope. Perform diagnostic tests on the building envelope
regardless of the envelope meeting or failing to meet the designated
leakage rate goal. Use diagnostic test methods in accordance with
ASTM E1186 and in conjunction with pressurization equipment as necessary.
Use the thermography diagnostic test to establish a baseline for envelope
leakage. Apply additional diagnostic tests (find, feel, fog or other
tests) as necessary to further define leak locations and pathways
discovered using thermography or to find additional leaks not readily
detected by thermography. Using a variety of diagnostic tests may help
locate leaks that would otherwise go undetected if only a single
diagnostic test were used. Pay special attention to locating leaks at
interfaces where there is a change in materials or a change in direction
of like materials. These interfaces, at a minimum, include roof/wall,
wall/wall, floor/wall, wall/window, wall/door, wall/louver, roof mounted
equipment/roof curb interfaces and all utility penetrations (ducts,pipes,
conduit, etc) through the envelope's architecture. Also use diagnostic
tests to check for leakage between the air duct and duct damper, when the
damper, under normal control power, is placed in the closed position.
Should leaks be discovered during diagnostic tests, thoroughly document
their exact locations on a floor plan so that sealing can be later
applied, if required or as directed. If the envelope passes the leakage
test, use the diagnostic test procedure described above to identify
obvious leakage locations. Seal the leaks at the discretion of the COR
based on the magnitude, location, potential for liquid moisture
penetration or retention, potential for condensation, presence of daylight
through an architectural surface or if the leakage location could
potentially cause rapid deterioration or mold growth of, or in the
building envelope materials and assemblies. Apply sealing measures after
diagnostic testing is complete and all pressurization blowers are off. To
verify that the applied sealing measures that are effective, re-test for
leaks using the same diagnostic methods that discovered the leak. Reseal
and retest until the envelope meets the leakage rate goal and all obvious
leaks through the envelope are sealed.
3.6.1 Find Test
Use visual observation to locate daylight and/or artificial light

streaming from the opposite side of the envelope. Observe all interfaces
identified above.
3.6.2 Feel Test
Use the building's air handling system or blower door equipment to

negatively pressurize the building envelope, to at least 25 Pa but no
greater than 85 Pa, with respect to the outdoors. The larger the pressure
difference, the easier discovering leaks by feeling them becomes. While
inside the envelope, hand feel roof/wall, wall/wall, and floor/wall
interfaces and utility penetrations (ducts, pipes, conduit, etc) for leaks
and note the leak locations on a floor plan. The "Feel" test may also be
used to check for leaks between the ductwork and ductwork damper. To do
this, positively pressurize the envelope and check for air movement from
the envelope exterior.
3.6.3 Infrared Thermography Test
Avoid performing thermography tests just after pressure testing the

building envelope (pressurizing and/or depressurizing the building
envelope) as thermography readings may be inaccurate due to excessive
air-wash. Perform thermography either before the pressure test or wait an
appropriate amount of time after pressure test completion for the
temperatures within the building envelope to stabilize before starting the
thermography tests. Coordinate thermography examination with the pressure
test agency and the test agency's pressurization equipment. The pressure
test agency is to allow adequate time for the thermographer to perform a
complete thermographic examination, as described hereinafter, of the
envelope interior and exterior.
3.6.3.1 Thermography Test Methods
Before thermographic testing, remove furniture, construction equipment,

and all other obstructions both inside and outside the building as
necessary to gain a clear field of view. In the Thermographic
Investigation Report, document all areas where obstructions remain. For
exterior thermal examination of the envelope, verify that no direct solar
radiation has heated the envelope surfaces to be examined for a period of
approximately 3 hours for frame construction and for approximately 8 hours
for masonry veneer construction. Conduct exterior investigations after
sunset, before sunrise, or on an overcast day when the influence of solar
radiation can be determined to be minimal. Limit exterior examinations to
times when the influence of solar radiation is minimal, such as after
sunset or before sunrise or during an overcast day. Conduct thermal
imaging tests only when wind speeds are less than 8 mph at the time of
analysis and at the end of analysis. Document any variations in wind
during the test. Document all variations of test conditions in the
Thermographic Investigation Report. Test only when exterior surfaces are
dry. Monitor and document ongoing test parameters, such as the
temperatures inside and outside the air barrier envelope, wind speed, and
differential pressure.
3.6.3.1.1 Thermography Testing of the Air Barrier
Test the building envelope in accordance with ISO 6781, and ASTM E1186.
Perform a complete thermographic inspection consisting of the full
inspection of the interior and exterior of the complete air barrier

envelope. Document envelope areas that are inaccessible for testing. Use
infrared thermography technology in concert with standard pressurization
methods (blower doors, trailer mounted fans and/or the building's own air
handling systems) to locate leaks through the air barrier. Because
thermography works best with at least a 18 degree F temperature difference
between the envelope interior and the exterior, adjust the HVAC system, if
possible, to create or enhance this temperature difference. The minimum
allowable temperature difference is 3 degrees F. Maintain this
temperature difference for at least 3 hours prior to the test. Use
pressurization methods to establish a minimum of +20 Pa pressure
difference with respect to the outdoors while using an infrared camera to
view the envelope from outdoors. When viewing with the camera from inside
the envelope, keep the envelope at a pressure differential of -20 Pa with
respect to the outdoors using pressure testing equipment or the building's
own air handling system.
3.6.3.1.2 Thermography Testing of the Insulation Envelope to Find

Insulation Voids (Qualitative Test)
After installation of the insulation envelope is complete, use

thermography to identify anomalies (insulation voids) in this envelope.
Test only when the temperature difference between inside and outside wall
surfaces and as defined by the surface being imaged must be a minimum of
18 degrees F or greater for a period of 4 hours before the test.
Alternatively, the thermographer is to verify and document in the
Thermographic Investigation Report that the imaging system is capable of
providing satisfactory results with less temperature difference between
inside and outside. Test during a time when there is no more than 0.05
inches differential pressure across the insulation envelope. Document the
location of the voids on floor plans or wall sections.
3.6.3.1.3 Thermography Testing of Thermal Bridging
Sample thermal images must be taken of representative parts of the

building envelope being examined and analyzed that demonstrate the
majority of areas with anomalies or identifiable thermal features. Also
sample thermal bridges in parts of the building that have no apparent
anomalies to demonstrate the correct functioning of building components.
3.6.3.2 Thermography Test Results
Document the location of all leaks, anomalies, and unusual thermal

features on a floor plan and/or elevation view and catalog them with a
visible light picture for locating the defect for correction. The
thermographer is to recommend corrective actions to eliminate the leaks,
anomalies and unusual thermal features. Where leaks are found perform
corrective sealing as necessary to achieve the whole envelope air leakage
rate specified. After sealing, again use thermography in concert with
standard pressurization methods to verify that the air leakage has been
reduced. After these leaks have been permanently sealed note all actions
taken on the drawings or in the Thermographic Investigation Report.
Submit the drawings for approval as part of the Thermographic
Investigation Report. Also include thermographic photos that show where
leaks were discovered. Include thermograms using an imaging palette that
clearly shows the observed thermal patterns indicating air leakage. The
Contracting Officer's Representative is to witness all testing.
3.6.4 Fog Test
Before using a theatrical fog generator, disable all building smoke

detectors as they may alarm when fog is issued. Coordinate fog tests and
the disabling of all smoke detectors with the Contracting Officer's
representative and the local fire department as necessary. Use pressure
test equipment or the buildings own air handling system to positively
pressurize the building envelope to at least 25 Pa but not greater than 85
Pa over the outdoors. Better results will be obtained by applying
pressures higher than 25 Pa. Using a theatrical fog generator within the
envelope, direct fog at suspected leakage points such as at building
interfaces. Test the following interfaces: roof/wall, wall/wall,
floor/wall, wall/window, roof/ mounted mechanical equipment. From the
vantage point immediately outside the envelope and opposite that of the
interface being tested, observe the effect as the fog is issued.
Detection may also be further enhanced by using a scented fog liquid or a
fog liquid that produces a colored fog. Look for fog and smell for
associated odor percolating through the interface. Also use smoke puffers
and smoke sticks as necessary to locate leaks at these and other interface
locations. If the Architectural Plus HVAC System pressure test will be/was
performed introduce fog into ductwork to check for leakage between
ductwork and associated dampers. After fog testing has ended, reactivate
the building smoke detectors and notify the Contracting Officer and local
fire department that the test has ended. After sealing has been completed
retest these areas using fog. Seal additional leaks that are found.
3.6.5 Diagnostic Test Report
Once the diagnostic tests have been completed and the leakage locations
identified and sealed, document these procedures, locations and
recommendations in the diagnostic test report. Submit plan and/or profile
drawings that thoroughly identify leak locations. Describe in detail all
leak locations so that the seal-up crew knows where to apply sealing
measures. After sealing measures have been applied, describe the methods
used along with applicable photos of the final sealed condition.
3.6.5.1 Thermographic Investigation Report
Submit a report of each thermographic investigation identifying the

thermal discontinuities in the thermal control layer. Indicate in the
final report locations to which improvements for both the air control
layer and the thermal control layer were made to reduce air leaks and
correct discontinuities in the thermal control layer. Include in the
report some selected radiometric images of suspected failure points in the
air barrier envelope that indicate before and after conditions. Devote a
chapter(s) of the Thermographic Investigation Report to identifying
suspected points of thermal bridging, moisture migration through roofs and
walls, and insulation voids. Indicate in the final report improvements
that were made to the envelope to reduce air leaks, correct wet roof and
wall areas, and repair insulation. Include the following items in the
report:
a. Brief description of the building construction
b. Types of interior and exterior surface materials used in the building.
c. Geographical orientation of the building with a description of the

exterior surroundings including other buildings, vegetation,
landscaping, and surface water drainage.
d. Camera brand, model and serial number, and date of most recent
calibration date; optional lenses with serial numbers (if applicable)
e. Thermographer's and Government Inspector's names
f. Date and time of tests
g. Air temperature and humidity inside the air barrier envelope
h. Outdoor air temperature and humidity
i. General information for the last 12 hours on the solar radiation

conditions in the geographic area where the test is being performed.
j. Ambient conditions such as precipitation and wind direction and speed

occurring with the last 24 hours, as applicable. Refer to specific
requirements in each section of each thermographic inspection type for
requirements in each specific area.
k. Documentation of those portions of the building envelop which were not

within test conditions when the scan was performed and which portions
were obstructed by adjacent structures, interior furnishings,
intervening cavities or reflective surfaces.
l. Other relevant information, which may have influenced test results.
m. Drawings, sketches, floor plans and/or photographs detailing the

locations in the buildings where thermograms were taken detailing
possible irregularities in the components being tested.
n. Thermal images taken during the inspection with their relative

locations and written or voiced recorded explanations of the anomaly
listed along with visual and reference images.
o. An identification of the aspects or components of the building being

examined.
p. Explanations for the type and the extent of each construction defect
observed during the inspection.
q. Any results from additional measurements and investigations. Identify

additional equipment used and support with type, model number, serial
number and date of most recent calibrated.
3.6.5.2 Fog Test Report
Document all turbulent air flow and dead air spaces within the envelope.
Report fog behavior as it exits from and/or is entrained within the
building. Include a floor plan in the report that documents the locations
where fog passed through the envelope.
3.7 CALCULATION PROGRAM
To calculate the envelope leakage rate and other required outputs, input
the data obtained during the pressure tests as documented in the Air
Leakage Test Form (Appendix A) into the Air Leakage Rate by Fan
Pressurization Excel spreadsheet. This spreadsheet can be found at the
following web site: http://wbdg.org/ccb/NAVGRAPH/graphtoc.pdf.
3.8 AFTER COMPLETION OF THE PRESSURE AND/OR DIAGNOSTIC TEST
After all pressure and/or diagnostic testing has been completed unseal all
temporarily sealed items. Unless otherwise directed by the Contracting
Officer, return all dampers, doors, and windows to their pre-test
condition. Remove tape and plastic from all temporarily sealed openings,
being careful not to deface painted surfaces. If paint is removed from
finished surfaces, repaint to match existing surfaces. Unless otherwise
directed by the Contracting Officer's representative, return fuel (gas)
valves to their pre-test position and relight pilot lights. Return all
fans and air handling units to pre-test conditions.
3.9 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility, regardless of

the assignment of responsibility for testing, inspection, and similar
services. Upon completion of inspection, testing, or sample taking and
similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and
finishes, protect construction exposed by or for quality control service
activities, and protect repaired construction.
3.10 APPENDICES
The following forms are available for download as a MS Word file at

http://wbdg.org/ccb/NAVGRAPH/graphtoc.pdf.
Appendix A - Air Leakage Test Form

Appendix B - Air Leakage Test Results Form
Appendix C - Test Agency Qualifications Sheet
SECTION 07 14 00
FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
02/12
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM C836/C836M (2012) High Solids Content, Cold

Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing
Membrane for Use With Separate Wearing
Course
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Fluid-applied membrane; G, A/E
Membrane primer; G, A/E
Elastomeric sheet; G, A/E

Solvent; G, A/E
Bond breaker; G, A/E
Submit material description and physical properties, application

details, and recommendations regarding shelf life, application
procedures, and precautions on flammability and toxicity.
Warranty
Information Card
Instructions To Government Personnel
Include copies of Material Safety Data Sheets for

maintenance/repair materials.
1.3 PREWATERPROOFING CONFERENCE
Prior to starting application of waterproofing system, arrange and attend

a prewaterproofing conference to ensure a clear understanding of drawings
and specifications. Give the Contracting Officer 7 days advance written

notice of the time and place of meeting. Ensure that the mechanical and
electrical subcontractor, flashing and sheetmetal subcontractor, and other
trades that may perform other types of work on or over the membrane after
installation, attend this conference.
Deliver waterproofing materials in manufacturer's original, unopened

containers, with labels intact and legible. Containers of materials
covered by a referenced specification number shall bear the specification
number, type, and class of the contents. Deliver materials in sufficient
quantity to continue work without interruption. Store and protect
materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and use within
their indicated shelf life. When hazardous materials are involved, adhere
to special precautions of the manufacturer, unless precautions conflict
with local, state, and federal regulations. Promptly remove from the site
materials or incomplete work adversely affected by exposure to moisture or
freezing. Store materials on pallets and cover from top to bottom with
canvas tarpaulins.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Apply materials when ambient temperature is 40 degrees F or above for a

period of 24 hours prior to the application and when there is no ice,
frost, surface moisture, or visible dampness on the substrate surface.
Apply materials when air temperature is expected to remain above 40
degrees F during the cure period recommended by the manufacturer.
Moisture test for substrate is specified under paragraph entitled
"Moisture Test." Work may be performed within heated enclosures, provided
the surface temperature of the substrate is maintained at a minimum of 40
degrees F for 24 hours prior to the application of the waterproofing, and
remains above that temperature during the cure period recommended by the
manufacturer.
1.6 WARRANTY
Provide roof system material and workmanship warranties meeting specified

requirements. Provide revisions or amendment to standard membrane
manufacturer warranty to comply with the specified requirements. Minimum
manufacturer warranty shall have no dollar limit, cover full system
water-tightness, and shall have a minimum duration of 20 years.
1.6.1 Continuance of Warranty
Approve repair or replacement work that becomes necessary within the

warranty period and accomplished in a manner so as to restore the
integrity of the roof system assembly and validity of the roof membrane
manufacturer warranty for the remainder of the manufacturer warranty
period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE
ASTM C836/C836M.
2.2 MEMBRANE PRIMER
As recommended by the fluid-applied membrane manufacturer unless

specifically prohibited by the manufacturer of the fluid-applied membrane.
2.3 SEALANT
As specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
2.4 SEALANT PRIMER
As specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
2.5 BACKING MATERIAL
Premolded, closed-cell, polyethylene, or polyurethane foam rod having a

diameter 25 percent larger than joint width before being compressed into
joint. Provide bond breaker of polyethylene film or other suitable
material between backing material and sealant.
2.6 BOND BREAKER
As recommended by the fluid-applied membrane manufacturer. Bond breaker

shall not interfere with the curing process or other performance
properties of the fluid-applied membrane.
2.7 ELASTOMERIC SHEET
Preformed; as recommended by the fluid-applied membrane manufacturer.

Bond strength between the fluid-applied membrane and the preformed
elastomeric sheet shall be a minimum of one psi when tested in accordance
with ASTM C836/C836M.
2.8 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ADHESIVE
As recommended by the elastomeric sheet manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Coordinate work with that of other trades to ensure that components to be

incorporated into the waterproofing system are available when needed.
Inspect and approve surfaces immediately before application of
waterproofing materials. Remove laitance, loose aggregate, sharp
projections, grease, oil, dirt, curing compounds, and other contaminants
which could adversely affect the complete bonding of the fluid-applied
membrane to the concrete surface.
3.1.1 Flashings
Make penetrations through sleeves in concrete slab watertight before

application of waterproofing. After flashing is completed, cover
elastomeric sheet with fluid-applied waterproofing during waterproofing
application.
3.1.1.1 Penetrations and Projections
Flash penetrations and projections through structural slab with an
elastomeric sheet adhered to the concrete slab and the penetration. Leave
elastomeric sheet unadhered for one inch over joint between penetration
and concrete slab. Adhere elastomeric sheet a minimum of 4 inches onto
horizontal deck.
3.1.1.2 Walls and Vertical Surfaces
Flash wall intersections which are not of monolithic pour or constructed

with reinforced concrete joints with an elastomeric sheet adhered to both
vertical wall surfaces and concrete slab. Flash intersections which are
monolithically poured or constructed with reinforced concrete joints with
either an elastomeric sheet or a vertical grade of fluid-applied
waterproofing adhered to vertical wall surfaces and concrete slab. Leave
sheet unadhered for a distance of one inch from the corner on both
vertical and horizontal surfaces.
3.1.2 Cracks and Joints
Prepare visible cracks and joints in substrate to receive fluid-applied

waterproofing membrane by placing a bond breaker and an elastomeric slip
sheet between membrane and substrate. Cracks that show movement shall
receive a 2 inch bond breaker followed by an elastomeric sheet adhered to
the deck. Nonmoving cracks shall be double coated with fluid-applied
waterproofing.
3.1.3 Priming
Prime surfaces to receive fluid-applied waterproofing membrane. Apply

primer as required by membrane manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.2 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS
Protect waterproofing materials during transport and application. Do not

dilute primers and other materials, unless specifically recommended by
materials manufacturer. Keep containers closed except when removing
contents. Do not mix remains of unlike materials. Thoroughly remove
residual materials before using application equipment for mixing and
transporting materials. Do not permit equipment on the project site that
has residue of materials used on previous projects. Use cleaners only for
cleaning, not for thinning primers or membrane materials. Ensure that
workers and others who walk on cured membrane wear clean, soft-soled shoes
to avoid damaging the waterproofing materials.
3.3 APPLICATION
Over primed surfaces, provide a uniform, wet, monolithic coating of

fluid-applied membrane, 60 mils thick, plus or minus 5 mils by following
manufacturer's printed instructions. Apply material by trowel, squeegee,
roller, brush, spray apparatus, or other method recommended by membrane
manufacturer. Check wet film thickness as specified in paragraph entitled
"Film Thickness" and adjust application rate as necessary to provide a
uniform coating of the thickness specified. Where possible, mark off
surface to be coated in equal units to facilitate proper coverage. At
expansion joints, control joints, prepared cracks, flashing, and
terminations, carry membrane over preformed elastomeric sheet in a uniform
60 mil thick, plus or minus 5 mils, wet thickness to provide a monolithic
coating. If membrane cures before next application, wipe previously
applied membrane with a solvent to remove dirt and dust that could inhibit
adhesion of overlapping membrane coat. Use solvent recommended by the
membrane manufacturer, as approved.
3.3.1 Work Sequence
Perform work so that protection board is installed prior to using the

waterproofed surface. Do not permanently install protection board until
the membrane has passed the flood test specified under paragraph entitled
"Flood Test." Move material storage areas as work progresses to prevent
abuse of membrane and overloading of structural deck.
3.3.2 Protection Board
Protect fluid-applied membrane by placing protection board over membrane

at a time recommended by the membrane manufacturer. Protect membrane
application when protection board is not placed immediately. Butt
protection boards together and do not overlap.
3.3.3 Insulation
Place insulation of thickness indicated, on top of drainage course just

prior to placement of concrete protection slab.
3.4.1 Moisture Test
Prior to application of fluid-applied waterproofing, measure moisture

content of substrate with a moisture meter in the presence of the
Contracting Officer. An acceptable device is the Delmhorst Moisture
Meter, Model BD7/2E/CS, Type 21 E. Similar meters by other manufacturers,
which are suitable for the purpose, may be used as approved by the
Contracting Officer. Do not begin application until meter reading
indicates "dry" range.
3.4.2 Film Thickness
Measure wet film thickness every 100 square feetduring application by

placing flat metal plates on the substrate or using a mil-thickness gage
especially manufactured for the purpose.
3.4.3 Flood Test
After application and curing is complete, plug drains and fill

waterproofed area with water to a depth of 2 inches. A minimum 48 hour
cure time, or longer cure time if recommended by the membrane
manufacturer, shall be required prior to flood testing. Allow water to
stand 24 hours. Test watertightness by measuring water level at beginning
and end of the 24 hour period. If water level falls, drain water, allow
installation to dry, and inspect. Make repairs or replace as required and
repeat the test. Work shall not proceed before approval of repairs or
replacement.
3.5 INSTRUCTIONS TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL
Furnish written and verbal instructions on proper maintenance procedures

to designated Government personnel. Furnish instructions by a competent
representative of the roof membrane manufacturer and include a minimum of
4 hours on maintenance and emergency repair of the membrane. Include a
demonstration of membrane repair, and give sources of required special
tools. Furnish information on safety requirements during maintenance and

emergency repair operations.
3.6 INFORMATION CARD
For each roof application, furnish a minimum 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch

information card for facility records and a card laminated in plastic and
framed for interior display at roof access point, or a photoengraved 0.032
inch thick aluminum card for exterior display. Identify facility name and
number; location; contract number; approximate roof area; detailed roof
system description, including deck type, membrane, number of plies, method
of application, manufacturer, insulation and cover board system and
thickness; presence of tapered insulation for primary drainage, presence
of vapor retarder; date of completion; installing contractor
identification and contract information; membrane manufacturer warranty
expiration, warranty reference number, and contact information. Install
card at roof top or access location as directed by the Contracting Officer
and provide a paper copy to the Contracting Officer.
FORM 1
FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING SYSTEM COMPONENTS
1. Contract Number
2. Date Work Completed
3. Project Specification Designation
4. Substrate Material
5. Slope of Substrate
6. Drains Type/Manufacturer
7. Waterproofing
a. Membrane
b. Sealant
c. Elastomeric Sheet
d. Materials Manufacturer(s)
8. Protection Board
a. Type
b. Thickness
c. Manufacturer's Name
9. Drainage Course Material Graduation
10. Insulation
a. Type
b. Thickness
c. Manufacturer's Name
11. Protection Slab
a. Material
b. Thickness
c. Support
FORM 1
FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING SYSTEM COMPONENTS
d. Joint System
12. Wearing Course
a. Type
b. Slope
c. Joint System
d. Sealant/Gasket Type
13. Wearing Surface Type
Manufacturer's Name
14. Warranty
a. Manufacturer warranty expiration
b. Warranty reference number
15. Statement of Compliance or Exception
Contractor's Signature Date Signed
Inspector's Signature Date Signed
SECTION 07 21 00
PERIMETER FIRE CONTAINMENT - THERMAL INSULATION SYSTEM

08/15
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
a. Perimeter Fire Containment Systems.
1.2 REFERENCES


Materials
ASTM E136 (2012) Behavior of Materials in a Vertical

Tube Furnace at 750 Degrees C
ASTM E1966 (2007; R 2011) Fire-Resistive Joint Systems
ASTM E2393 (2010a) Standard Practice for On-Site

Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive
Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire Barriers
ASTM E814 (2013a) Standard Test Method for Fire

Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
ASTM E2307 (2015a) Standard Test Method for

Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter
Fire Barrier Systems Using
Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test
Apparatus

Materials
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM 4991 (2013) Approval of Firestop Contractors
NFPA 101 (2015; ERTA 2015) Life Safety Code
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Curtain Wall Insulation; G, A/E
Safing Insulation; G, A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Curtain Wall Insulation; G, A/E
Safing Insulation; G, A/E
SD-07 Certificates
Installer Qualifications; G
Curtain Wall Insulation; G
Safing Insulation; G
Warranty; G
1.4.1 Manufacturer Qualifications
Single manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience manufacturing

or marketing products in this section shall provide all products listed.
1.4.2 Installer Qualifications
Submit certificate of installer's qualifications for installting thermal

insulation system.
a. Products listed in this section shall be installed by a single

organization with at least two (2) years experience successfully
installing insulation on projects of similar type and scope as
specified in this section.
b. If the installation of the curtain wall is the responsibility of a

different installer, coordinate specified installations prior to
commencement of work to ensure the complete system meets the specified
ratings.
c. Certification per FM 4991, Underwriters Laboratories, Intertek (OPL)

Laboratories, or by the Firestop Contractors International Association
(FCIA).
1.4.3 Fire-Test-Response Characteristics
Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response

characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per
test method indicated below by Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Intertek
(OPL) or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities

Identify materials appropriate markings of applicable testing and

inspecting agency.
1.4.3.1 Surface-Burning Characteristics
ASTM E84. Unfaced material will have a maximum flame spread 0 and
smoke-developed of 0. Foil Faced material will have maximum flame spread
25 and smoke-developed of 0.
1.4.3.2 Fire-Resistance Ratings
ASTM E2307 pertains to perimeter fire containment. ASTM E119 pertains to

fire rated walls, floors and ceilings. ASTM E814 pertains to poke-throughs
and penetration assemblies. ASTM E1966 pertains to fire resistive joint
systems.
1.4.3.3 Combustion Characteristics
Rated as non combustible as defined by NFPA 101 when tested in accordance

with ASTM E136.
1.4.4 Markings
Manufacturer's identification tags or marks are not acceptable on surfaces

where products are considered to be finish material.
a. Evidence of patching after removal of tags or marks is not acceptable.
1.4.5 Field Inspection
Follow criteria outlined in ASTM E2393 Standard Practice for On-Site

Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire
Barriers.
1.4.6 Mock-Up
Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and

application workmanship.
a. Finish areas designated by Architect.
b. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship is approved by

Architect.
c. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
1.5.1 Delivery
Deliver materials to the job site in original packages, containers, or

bundles bearing the brand name and manufacturer's identification.
1.5.2 Storage
Store materials in dry locations with adequate ventilation, free from
water, and in such a manner to permit easy access for inspection and
handling.
1.5.3 Handling
Handle materials to avoid damage. When installing or otherwise handling

these insulation products, wear a NIOSH approved dust mask or respirator,
gloves and long sleeved, loose fitting clothing closed at the neck and
wrists. Wear safety glasses when installing.
Protect adjacent work of other trades from damage. Clean substrates of

substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removal of
projections which might puncture vapor retarders. In cold weather, during
installation of smoke sealant material, temperatures within the building
shall be maintained above 55 Degree F. Provide adequate ventilation to
carry-off excess moisture.
1.7 WARRANTY
At project closeout, provide the Contracting Officer an executed copy of

the manufacturer's warranty document outlining the terms, conditions, and
exclusions of their Standard Limited Warranty against Manufacturing Defect.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1 Acceptable Manufacturer
Thermafiber, Inc., which is located at: 3711 Mill St. ; Wabash, IN 46992;
Toll Free Tel: 888-834-2371; Tel: 260-563-2111; Fax: 260-563-8979; Email:
request info; Web: www.thermafiber.com.
2.1.2 Substitutions
Not permitted.
2.2 PERIMETER FIRE CONTAINMENT
Where indicated for gaps between the perimeter edge of

fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies and non-fire-resistance-rated
exterior curtain walls, provide a perimeter fire-containment system with
the fire test response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing
identical systems per the Underwriters Laboratories or Intertek (OPL)
Laboratories, or another testing and inspecting agency accountable to
authorities having jurisdiction. If no tested system exists, an
engineering judgment as specified by the International Firestop Council
must accompany the design.
2.2.1 Curtain Wall Insulation
2.2.1.1 Thermafiber FireSpan 90 Insulation.
a. Thickness as noted in tested and listed design.
b. R-Value: 4.2 per inch.
c. Facing: Unfaced.
d. Facing: Foil Faced.
e. Density: 8.0 pcf (nominal).
f. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84. Unfaced material will have

a maximum flame spread 0 and smoke-developed of 0. Foil Faced material
will have maximum flame spread 25 and smoke-developed of 0.
2.2.2 Safing Insulation
2.2.2.1 Thermafiber Safing Insulation
a. R-Value: 4.2 per inch.
b. Facing: Unfaced.
c. Facing: Foil Faced.
d. Standard Density: 4.0 pcf (actual).
e. Density: 6.0 pcf (actual).
f. Density: 8.0 pcf (actual).
g. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84. Unfaced material will have

a maximum flame spread 0 and smoke-developed of 0. Foil Faced material
will have maximum flame spread 25 and smoke-developed of 0.
2.2.3 Safing Clips
Z-Shaped galvanized steel clips formed from 1 inch wide strips of 20 gauge
galvanized steel. 3 inches with 2 inch and 3 inch upper and lower
horizontal legs. See specific UL or OPL/Intertek design to verify if
safing clips are required.
2.2.4 Hardware
Thermafiber metale hardware for attaching curtain wall insulation.

Mechanical fasteners as approved by the Architect and Manufacturer.
2.2.5 Mullion Covers
a. 2 inch Thermafiber FireSpan 90 Insulation for protection of mullions.
2.2.6 Backer/Reinforcement Member
Thermafiber Impasse T-Bar or other light gauge steel channel or angle

approved by the primary manufacturer. Place horizontally at the safe-off
line to support the curtain wall insulation to prevent bowing of curtain
wall insulation caused by compression fitting of the Safing insulation.
2.2.7 Smoke Barrier
Smoke sealant as listed in the appropriate fire tested assembly and

approved by the Architect and Manufacturer.
2.2.8 Vapor Retarder Tape
Compatible with specified facer and comparable perm rating. For taping
insulation joints and repairing tears.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer,
notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Prepare surfaces using

the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result
for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 BACKER REINFORCEMENT MEMBERS
Install backer reinforcement member in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. Install Thermafiber Impasse T-Bar or an approved light
steel angle or channels, placed horizontally at the safing line, attached
to the vertical mullions either within the insulation at a horizontal
splice, or behind the insulation and mechanically attached to vertical
mullions. This detail prevents the bowing of the curtain wall insulation
due to the compression fit of the safing insulation.
3.4 CURTAIN WALL INSULATION
Install full depthcurtain wall insulation in accordance with Underwriters

Laboratories/Intertek (OPL) Laboratories listed system and manufacturer's
instructions.
3.4.1 Backer Bar Assembly
Install backer bar assembly in accordance with the tested design.
3.4.2 Fasteners
Retain insulation in place with mechanical fasteners within the mullions

and transoms (spandrel area), spaced at intervals recommended by tested
assembly to hold insulation securely in place without touching the
exterior wall. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated between
insulation and exterior wall.
3.5 SAFING INSULATION
a. Install safing insulation in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.
b. Install safing insulation of proper size in safe off area between

curtain wall insulation and floor slab as prescribed by the listed and
tested assembly.
c. Safing insulation direction and compression as well as the absence of

safing Z-clips are prescribed by the listed and tested assembly.
d. Install safing insulation of proper density and size into construction

joints (head-of-wall, floor-to-floor, floor-to-wall, etc.) as
prescribed by the listed and tested assembly.
e. Install safing insulation of proper density and size into

poke-throughs and penetrations as prescribed by the listed and tested
assembly.
3.6 SMOKE BARRIER SYSTEM
a. Install smoke barrier system in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.
b. Utilize foil faced FireSpan curtain wall Insulation with Thermafiber

safing Insulation. Apply approved smoke sealant in accordance with the
tested assembly.
c. Install safing insulation of proper density and size as prescribed by

the tested assembly. Apply approved smoke sealant in accordance with
the tested assembly.
d. Install safing insulation of proper density and size into

poke-throughs and penetrations as prescribed by the tested assembly.
Apply approved smoke sealant in accordance with the tested assembly.
3.7 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION
Seal all joints in curtain wall insulation or exterior wall insulation

with vapor retarder tape. Apply vapor retarder tape at intersection of
insulation with framing, adjacent pieces and similar intersections to
insure a vapor tight seal. Repair all tears in insulation foil facing
with vapor retarder tape.
3.8 PROTECTION
Protect installed products until completion and project closeout.

Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
3.9 CLEAN-UP
Prior to project closeout, remove all related rubbish, excess material,

scaffolding, tools and equipment from the site. Dispose of waste material
in a manner approved by applicable jurisdictions.
SECTION 07 21 13
CAVITY WALL INSULATION

05/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM C203 (2005; R 2012) Breaking Load and Flexural

Properties of Block-Type Thermal Insulation
ASTM C272/C272M (2012) Standard Test Method for Water

Absorption of Core Materials for Sandwich
Constructions
ASTM C553 (2013) Standard Specification for Mineral

Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications
ASTM C578 (2014a) Standard Specification for Rigid,

Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation
ASTM D1621 (2010) Compressive Properties of Rigid

Cellular Plastics
ASTM D3833/D3833M (1996; R 2011) Water Vapor Transmission of

Pressure-Sensitive Tapes

Materials

1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Cavity wall insulation; G, A/E
Pressure sensitive tape; G, A/E
Protection board or coating; G, A/E
Accessories; G, A/E
Block or Board Insulation
Adhesive
1.3.1 Delivery
Deliver materials to the site in original sealed wrapping bearing

manufacturer's name and brand designation, specification number, type,
grade, R-value, and class. Store and handle to protect from damage. Do
not allow insulation materials to become wet, soiled, crushed, or covered
with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for
handling, storing, and protecting of materials before and during
installation.
1.3.2 Storage
Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage; unload and store out
of weather in manufacturer's original packaging. Store only in dry
locations, not subject to open flames or sparks, and easily accessible for
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CAVITY WALL INSULATION
Provide only thermal insulating materials recommended by manufacturer for

type of application indicated. Provide board thermal insulation
conforming to the following standards and the physical properties listed
below:
a. Extruded Polystyrene Cavity Wall Insulation: ASTM C578
2.1.1 Thermal Resistance
Wall R-20.
2.1.2 Fire Protection Requirement
a. Flame spread index of 5 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
b. Smoke developed index of 175 or less when tested in accordance with

ASTM E84.
2.1.3 Other Material Properties
Provide thermal insulating materials with the following properties:
a. Rigid cellular plastics: Compressive Resistance at Yield: Not less

than 25 pounds per square inch (psi) when measured according to
ASTM D1621.
b. Flexural strength: Not less than 75 psi when measured according to

ASTM C203.
c. Water Vapor Permeance: Not more than 1.50 Perms or less when measured
according to ASTM E96/E96M, desiccant method, in the thickness
required to provide the specified thermal resistance, including
facings, if any.
d. Water Absorption: Not more than 0.10 percent by total immersion, by

volume, when measured according to ASTM C272/C272M.
e. Water Adsorption: Not more than 1 percent by volume when measured in

accordance with paragraph 14 of ASTM C553.
2.1.4 Prohibited Materials
Do not provide materials containing more than one percent of asbestos.
2.2 PRESSURE SENSITIVE TAPE
As recommended by manufacturer of vapor retarder and having a water vapor

permeance rating of one perm or less when tested in accordance with
ASTM D3833/D3833M.
2.3 PROTECTION BOARD OR COATING
As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
2.4.1 Adhesive
As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
Corrosion resistant fasteners as recommended by the insulation

manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Before installing insulation, ensure that all areas that will be in

contact with the insulation are dry and free of projections which could
cause voids, compressed insulation, or punctured vapor retarders. If
installing perimeter or under slab insulation, check that the fill is
flat, smooth, dry, and well tamped. If moisture or other conditions are
found that do not allow the proper installation of the insulation, do not
proceed but notify the Contracting Officer of such conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1 Insulation Board
Install and handle insulation in accordance with the manufacturer's

installation instructions. Keep material dry and free of extraneous
materials. Observe safe work practices.
3.2.2 Electrical Wiring
Do not install insulation in a manner that would sandwich electrical
wiring between two layers of insulation.
3.2.3 Continuity of Insulation
Butt tightly against adjoining boards, studs, rafters, joists, sill

plates, headers and obstructions. Provide continuity and integrity of
insulation at corners, wall to ceiling joint, roof, and floor. Avoid
creating any thermal bridges or voids.
3.3 INSTALLATION ON WALLS
3.3.1 Installation using Z-Furring Members at Metal Siding Exterior Wall
Install insulation between members as recommended by insulation

manufacturer.
3.3.2 Installation on Masonry Veneer Cavity
Secure insulation boards with two-piece wall ties designed for this
purpose and specified in Section 04 20 00 MASONRY. Fit courses of 16
inches wide insulation boards horizontally between 16 inches o.c.
horizontal continuous joint reinforcing/adjustable wall tie eyes. Snugly
friction fit insulation in place, between the wall tie eyes. Push the
insulation back tightly against the back-up wall surface, with edges
butted tightly in both directions. Secure insulation in place by
inserting the adjustable brick tie pintel into the wall tie eye.
Seal joints between foam plastic insulation units by applying adhesive,

mastic, or sealant to edges of each board to form a tight seal as units
are pressed into place. Fill voids in completed installation with
adhesive, mastic, or sealant.
SECTION 07 21 16
MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

11/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM C665 (2012) Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal

Insulation for Light Frame Construction
and Manufactured Housing
ASTM C930 (2012) Potential Health and Safety

Concerns Associated with Thermal
Insulation Materials and Accessories
ASTM D3833/D3833M (1996; R 2011) Water Vapor Transmission of

Pressure-Sensitive Tapes

1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Blanket insulation
Sill sealer insulation
Vapor retarder
Pressure sensitive tape
Accessories
Certification
Insulation
1.3.1 Delivery
Deliver materials to site in original sealed wrapping bearing

manufacturer's name and brand designation, specification number, type,
grade, R-value, and class. Store and handle to protect from damage. Do
not allow insulation materials to become wet, soiled, crushed, or covered
with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for
handling, storing, and protecting of materials before and during
installation.
1.3.2 Storage
Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage; unload and store out
of weather in manufacturer's original packaging. Store only in dry
locations, not subject to open flames or sparks, and easily accessible for
1.4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.4.1 Respirators
Provide installers with dust/mist respirators, training in their use, and

protective clothing, all approved by National Institute for Occupational
Safety and Health (NIOSH)/Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) in
accordance with 29 CFR 1910.134.
1.4.2 Smoking
Do not smoke during installation of blanket thermal insulation.
1.4.3 Other Safety Concerns
Consider other safety concerns and measures as outlined in ASTM C930.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BLANKET INSULATION
ASTM C665, Type I, blankets without membrane coverings.
2.1.1 Thermal Resistance Value (R-VALUE)
As indicated
2.1.2 Prohibited Materials
Do not provide asbestos-containing materials.
2.2 BLOCKING
Wood, metal, unfaced mineral fiber blankets in accordance with ASTM C665,
Type I, or other approved materials. Use only non-combustible materials
meeting the requirements of ASTM E136 for blocking around chimneys and
heat producing devices.
2.3 PRESSURE SENSITIVE TAPE
As recommended by the vapor retarder manufacturer and having a water vapor

permeance rating of one perm or less when tested in accordance with
ASTM D3833/D3833M.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
2.4.1 Adhesive
As recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
Corrosion resistant fasteners as recommended by the insulation

manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Before installing insulation, ensure that areas that will be in contact

with the insulation are dry and free of projections which could cause
voids, compressed insulation, or punctured vapor retarders. If moisture
or other conditions are found that do not allow the workmanlike
installation of the insulation, do not proceed but notify Contracting
Officer of such conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1 Insulation
Install and handle insulation in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. Keep material dry and free of extraneous materials. Ensure
personal protective clothing and respiratory equipment is used as
required. Observe safe work practices.
3.2.1.1 Electrical wiring
Do not install insulation in a manner that would sandwich electrical

wiring between two layers of insulation.
3.2.1.2 Continuity of Insulation
Install blanket insulation to butt tightly against adjoining blankets and

to studs, rafters, joists, sill plates, headers and any obstructions.
Provide continuity and integrity of insulation at corners, wall to ceiling
joints, roof, and floor. Avoid creating thermal bridges.
3.2.1.3 Installation at Bridging and Cross Bracing
Insulate at bridging and cross bracing by splitting blanket vertically at

center and packing one half into each opening. Butt insulation at
bridging and cross bracing; fill in bridged area with loose or scrap
insulation.
3.2.1.4 Insulation without Affixed Vapor Retarder
Provide snug friction fit to hold insulation in place. Stuff pieces of
insulation into cracks between trusses, joists, studs and other framing,
such as at attic access doors, door and window heads, jambs, and sills,
band joists, and headers.
3.2.1.5 Sizing of Blankets
Provide only full width blankets when insulating between trusses, joists,
or studs. Size width of blankets for a snug fit where trusses, joists or
studs are irregularly spaced.
3.2.1.6 Special Requirements for Ceilings
Place insulation under electrical wiring occurring across joists. Pack

insulation into narrowly spaced framing. Do not block flow of air through
soffit vents.
3.2.1.7 Installation of Sill Sealer
Size sill sealer insulation and place insulation over top of masonry or
concrete perimeter walls or concrete perimeter floor slab on grade.
Fasten sill plate over insulation.
3.2.1.8 Access Panels and Doors
Affix blanket insulation to access panels greater than one square foot and
access doors in insulated floors and ceilings. Use insulation with same
R-Value as that for floor or ceiling.
SECTION 07 22 00
ROOF AND DECK INSULATION

08/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM C1177/C1177M (2013) Standard Specification for Glass

Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing
ASTM C1289 (2014a) Standard Specification for Faced

Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation Board

Materials
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM 4470 (2010) Single-Ply, Polymer-Modified

Bitumen Sheet, Built-up Roof (BUR), and
Liquid Applied Roof Assemblies for Use in
Class 1 and Noncombustible Roof Deck
Construction

FM P9513 (2002) Specialist Data Book Set for

Roofing Contractors; contains 1-22 (2001),
1-28 (2002), 1-29 (2002), 1-28R/1-29R
(1998), 1-30 (2000), 1-31 (2000), 1-32
(2000), 1-33 (2000), 1-34 (2001), 1-49
(2000), 1-52 (2000), 1-54 (2001)
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Wood nailers; G, A/E
Tapered roof insulation system; G, A/E
Taper cants and crickets
Show location and spacing of wood nailers that are required for
securing insulation and for backnailing of roofing felts. Show a
complete description of the procedures for the installation of
each phase of the system indicating the type of materials,
thicknesses, identity codes, sequence of laying insulation,
location of ridges and valleys, special methods for cutting and
fitting of insulation, and special precautions. The drawings shall
be based on field measurements.
SD-03 Product Data
Fasteners; G, A/E
Insulation; G, A/E
Include minimum thickness of insulation for steel and concrete

decks and fastener pattern for insulation on steel decks.
SD-06 Test Reports
Flame spread and smoke developed ratings
Submit in accordance with ASTM E84.
SD-07 Certificates
Installer qualifications
Nails and fasteners
Roof insulation, including field of roof and perimeter attachment

requirements.
1.3 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE
Submit certificate from the insulation manufacturer attesting that the

installer has the proper qualifications for installing tapered roof
insulation systems.
Certificate attesting that the expanded perlite or polyisocyanurate

insulation contains recovered material and showing estimated percent of
recovered material. Certificates of compliance for felt materials.
1.4.1 Insulation on Combustible Steel Decks
Roof insulation shall have a flame spread rating not greater than 75 and a
smoke developed rating not greater than 150, exclusive of covering, when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Insulation bearing the UL label and
listed in the UL Bld Mat Dir as meeting the flame spread and smoke
developed ratings will be accepted in lieu of copies of test reports.

Compliance with flame spread and smoke developed ratings will not be
required when insulation has been tested as part of a roof construction
assembly of the type used for this project and the construction is listed
as fire-classified in the UL Bld Mat Dir or listed as Class I roof deck
construction in the FM APP GUIDE. Insulation tested as part of a roof
construction assembly shall bear UL or FM labels attesting to the ratings
specified herein.
1.4.2 Insulation for Cool Roofing
Provide thermal insulation above the roof deck with an R value of 33 or

greater.
1.5.1 Delivery
Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's unopened and undamaged

standard commercial containers bearing the following legible information:
a. Name of manufacturer;
b. Brand designation;
c. Specification number, type, and class, as applicable, where materials

are covered by a referenced specification; and
Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of the work.
1.5.2 Storage and Handling
Store and handle materials in a manner to protect from damage, exposure to

open flame or other ignition sources, and from wetting, condensation or
moisture absorption. Store in an enclosed building or trailer that
provides a dry, adequately ventilated environment. Store felt rolls on
ends. For the 24 hours immediately before application of felts, store
felts in an area maintained at a temperature no lower than 50 degrees F
above grade and having ventilation around all sides. Replace damaged
material with new material.
Do not install roof insulation during inclement weather or when air

temperature is below 40 degrees F and interior humidity is 45 percent or
greater, or when there is visible ice, frost, or moisture on the roof deck.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION
2.1.1 Insulation Types
Roof insulation shall be the following materials and compatible with

attachment methods for the specified insulation and roof membrane:
a. Polyisocyanurate Board: ASTM C1289 Type I foil faced both sides or

Type II, fibrous felt or glass mat membrane both sides, except minimum
compressive strength shall be 20 pounds per square inch (psi).
2.1.2 Recovered Materials
Provide thermal insulation materials containing recycled materials to the

extent practical.
2.1.3 Insulation Thickness
As necessary to provide a thermal resistance (R value) of 33 or more for

average thickness of tapered system. Thickness shall be based on the "R"
value for aged insulation. Insulation over steel decks shall satisfy both
specified R value and minimum thickness for width of rib opening
recommended in insulation manufacturer's published literature.
2.1.4 Tapered Roof Insulation at Crickets
One layer of the tapered roof insulation assembly shall be factory tapered
to a slope of not less than 1/4 inch per foot. Provide starter and filler
blocks as required to provide the total thickness of insulation necessary
to meet the specified slope and thermal conductance. Mitered joints shall
be factory fabricated and shall consist of two diagonally cut boards or
one board shaped to provide the required slopes. Identify each piece of
tapered insulation board by color or other identity coding system,
allowing the identification of different sizes of tapered insulation board
required to complete the roof insulation system.
2.2 PROTECTION BOARD
For use as a thermal barrier (underlayment), fire barrier (overlayment),

or protection board for hot-mopped, torched-down, or adhesively-applied
roofing membrane over roof insulation.
2.2.1 Glass Mat Gypsum Roof Board
ASTM C1177/C1177M, 0 Flame Spread and 0 Smoke Developed when tested in

accordance with ASTM E84, 500 psi, Class A, non-combustible, 1/2 inch
thick, 4 by 8 feet board size.
2.3 FASTENERS
Flush-driven through flat round or hexagonal steel or plastic plates.

Steel plates shall be zinc-coated, flat round not less than 1 3/8 inch
diameter or hexagonal not less than 28 gage. Plastic plates shall be
high-density, molded thermoplastic with smooth top surface, reinforcing
ribs and not less than 3 inches in diameter. Fastener head shall recess
fully into the plastic plate after it is driven. Plates shall be formed
to prevent dishing. Do not use bell-or cup-shaped plates. Fasteners shall
conform to insulation manufacturer's recommendations except that holding
power, when driven, shall be not less than 40 pounds each in steel deck.
Fasteners for steel or concrete decks shall conform to FM APP GUIDE for
Class I roof deck construction, and shall be spaced to withstand an uplift
pressure of 90 pounds per square foot.
2.3.1 Fasteners for Steel Decks
Approved hardened penetrating fasteners or screws conforming to FM 4470

and listed in FM APP GUIDE for Class I roof deck construction. Quantity
and placement to withstand a minimum uplift pressure of 90 psf conforming
to FM APP GUIDE.
2.4 WOOD NAILERS
Pressure-preservative-treated as specified in Section 06 10 00 ROUGH

CARPENTRY.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
3.1.1 Surface Inspection
Surfaces shall be clean, smooth, and dry. Surfaces receiving vapor

retarder shall be free of projections which might puncture the vapor
retarder. Check roof deck surfaces, including surfaces sloped to roof
drains and outlets, for defects before starting work.
The Contractor shall inspect and approve the surfaces immediately before
starting installation. Prior to installing vapor retarder, perform the
following:
a. Examine steel decks to ensure that panels are properly secured to

structural members and to each other and that surfaces of top flanges
are flat or slightly convex.
b. In the presence of the Contracting Officer perform the following

surface-dryness test on concrete substrates:
(1) Foaming: When poured on the deck, one pint of asphalt when
heated in the range of 350 to 400 degrees F, shall not foam upon
contact.
(2) Strippability: After asphalt used in the foaming test

application has cooled to ambient temperatures, test coating for
adherence. Should a portion of the sample be readily stripped
clean from surface, do not consider surface to be dry and do not
start application. Should rain occur during application, stop
work and do not resume until surface has been tested by method
above and found dry.
3.1.2 Surface Preparation
Correct defects and inaccuracies in roof deck surface to eliminate poor

drainage and hollow or low spots and perform the following:
a. Install wood nailers the same thickness as insulation at eaves, edges,

curbs, walls, and roof openings for securing cant strips, gravel
stops, gutters, and flashing flanges.
b. Cover steel decks with a layer of insulation board of sufficient

thickness to span the width of a deck rib opening, and conforming to
fire safety requirements. Secure with piercing or self-drilling,
self-tapping fasteners of quantity and placement conforming to
FM APP GUIDE. Insulation joints parallel to ribs of deck shall occur
on solid bearing surfaces only, not over open ribs.
3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION
Apply insulation in minimum of two layers with staggered joints when total
required thickness of insulation exceeds 1/2 inch. Lay insulation so that

continuous longitudinal joints are perpendicular to direction of roofing,
as specified in Section 07 54 19 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING, and end
joints of each course are staggered with those of adjoining courses. When
using multiple layers of insulation, joints of each succeeding layer shall
be parallel and offset in both directions with respect to layer below.
Keep insulation 1/2 inch clear of vertical surfaces penetrating and
projecting from roof surface.
3.2.1 Special Precautions for Installation of Foam Insulation
3.2.1.1 Polyisocyanurate Insulation
Where polyisocyanurate foam board insulation is provided, install 1/2 inch

thick, glass mat gypsum roof board over top surface of foam board
insulation. Stagger joints of insulation with respect to foam board
insulation below.
3.3 PROTECTION
3.3.1 Protection of Applied Insulation
Completely cover each day's installation of insulation with the finished

roofing specified in Section 07 54 19 POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING on same
day. Do not permit phased construction. Protect open spaces between
insulation and parapets or other walls and spaces at curbs, scuttles, and
expansion joints, until permanent roofing and flashing are applied. Do
not permit storing, walking, wheeling, or trucking directly on insulation
or on roofed surfaces. Provide smooth, clean board or plank walkways,
runways, and platforms near supports, as necessary, to distribute weight
to conform to indicated live load limits of roof construction. Exposed
edges of the insulation shall be protected by cutoffs at the end of each
work day or whenever precipitation is imminent. Cutoffs shall be 2 layers
of bituminous-saturated felt set in plastic bituminous cement or single ply
set in roof cement. Fill all profile voids in cut-offs to prevent
entrapping of moisture into the area below the membrane. Cutoffs shall be
removed when work is resumed.
3.3.2 Damaged Work and Materials
Restore work and materials that become damaged during construction to

original condition or replace with new materials.
3.4 INSPECTION
The Contractor shall establish and maintain an inspection procedure to

assure compliance of the installed roof insulation with the contract
requirements. Any work found not to be in compliance with the contract
shall be promptly removed and replaced or corrected in an approved
manner. Quality control shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
a. Observation of environmental conditions; number and skill level of

insulation workers; start and end time of work.
b. Verification of certification, listing or label compliance with

FM P9513.
c. Verification of proper storage and handling of insulation and vapor
retarder materials before, during, and after installation.
d. Inspection of vapor retarder application, including edge envelopes and

mechanical fastening.
e. Inspection of mechanical fasteners; type, number, length, and spacing.
f. Coordination with other materials, cants, sleepers, and nailing strips.
g. Inspection of insulation joint orientation and laps between layers,

joint width and bearing of edges of insulation on deck.
h. Installation of cutoffs and proper joining of work on subsequent days.
i. Continuation of complete roofing system installation to cover

insulation installed same day.
SECTION 07 27 10.00 10
BUILDING AIR BARRIER SYSTEM

05/14
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This Section specifies the construction and quality control of the

installation of an air barrier system. Construct the air barrier system
indicated, taking responsibity for the means, methods, and workmanship of
the installation of the air barrier system. The air barrier must be
contiguous and connected across all surfaces of the enclosed air barrier
envelope indicated. The maximum leakage requirements of individual air
barrier components and materials are specified in the other specification
sections covering these items.
This section also defines the maximum allowable leakage of the final air
barrier system. The workmanship must be adequate to meet the maximum
allowable leakage requirements of this specification. Test the assembled
air barrier system to demonstrate that the building envelope is properly
sealed and insulated. Passing the air barrier system leakage test and
thermography test will result in system acceptance. Conform air barrier
system leakage and thermography testing and reporting to the requirements
of Section 07 05 23 PRESSURE TESTING AN AIR BARRIER SYSTEM FOR AIR
TIGHTNESS.
This section includes vapor-retarding, fluid-applied, weather and air

barrier system. Conform to Section 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD for wall
sheathings and wall sheathing joint-and-penetration treatments and Section
07 14 00 FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING.
1.2 REFERENCES

extent referenced. The publications are referenced within the text by the

ASTM D4541 (2009; E 2010) Pull-Off Strength of

Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers
ASTM E2178 (2013) Standard Test Method for Air

Permeance of Building Materials
ASTM E2357 (2011) Standard Test Method for

Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier
Assemblies

SECTION 07 27 10.00 10 Page 1

1.3 DEFINITIONS
The following terms as they apply to this section:
1.3.1 Air Barrier Accessory
Products designated to maintain air tightness between air barrier

materials, air barrier assemblies and air barrier components, to fasten
them to the structure of the building, or both (e.g., sealants, tapes,
backer rods, transition membranes, fasteners, strapping, primers).
1.3.2 Air Barrier Assembly
The combination of air barrier materials and air barrier accessories that
are designated and designed within the environmental separator to act as a
continuous barrier to the movement of air through the environmental
separator.
1.3.3 Air Barrier Component
Pre-manufactured elements such as windows, doors, dampers and service

elements that are installed in the environmental separator.
1.3.4 Air Barrier Envelope
The combination of air barrier assemblies and air barrier components,

connected by air barrier accessories that are designed to provide a
continuous barrier to the movement of air through an environmental
separator. There may be more than one air barrier envelope in a single
building. Also known as Air Barrier System.
1.3.5 Air Barrier Material
A building material that is designed and constructed to provide the

primary resistance to airflow through an air barrier assembly.
1.3.6 Air Barrier System
Same as AIR BARRIER ENVELOPE.
1.3.7 Air Leakage Rate
The rate of airflow (CFM) driven through a unit surface area (sq.ft.) of
an assembly or system by a unit static pressure difference (Pa) across the
assembly. (example: 0.25 CFM/sq.ft. @ 75 Pa)
1.3.8 Air Leakage
The total airflow (CFM) driven through the air barrier system by a unit
static pressure difference (Pa) across the air barrier envelope. (example:
6500 CFM @ 75 Pa)
1.3.9 Air Permeance
The rate of airflow (CFM) through a unit area (sq.ft.) of a material

driven by unit static pressure difference (Pa) across the material
(example: 0.004 CFM/sq.ft. @ 75 Pa).
SECTION 07 27 10.00 10 Page 2

1.3.10 Environmental Separator
The parts of a building that separate the controlled interior environment

from the uncontrolled exterior environment, or that separate spaces within
a building that have dissimilar environments. Also known as the Control
Layer.
1.4 PREPARATORY PHASE OR PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
Organize pre-construction conferences between the air barrier inspector

and the sub-contractors involved in the construction of or penetration of
the air barrier system to discuss where the work of each sub-contractor
begins and ends, the sequence of installation, and each sub-contractor's
responsibility to ensure airtight joints, junctures, penetrations and
transitions between materials. Discuss the products, and assemblies of
products specified in the different sections to be installed by the
different sub-contractors.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

SD-06 Test Reports
Design Review Report; G, DO
Two copies not later than 14 days after approval of the Air
Barrier Inspector Qualifications.
Testing and Inspection; G, RO
SD-07 Certificates
Air Barrier Inspector; G, RO
Two copies 30 days after Notice to Proceed.
1.6 AIR BARRIER ENVELOPE SURFACE AREA AND LEAKAGE REQUIREMENTS
The building air barrier systems must meet the following leakage
requirements. The allowable leakage rate and the maximum leakage are at a
differential test pressure of 75 Pa.
Air Barrier Envelope 1
Surface Area 13,000 square feet (walls, roof, and floor)
Architectural Only Test:
Allowable leakage rate 0.25 CFM/sq.ft
SECTION 07 27 10.00 10 Page 3

Maximum leakage Total 3,250 CFM
Architectural Plus HVAC System Test:
Allowable leakage rate 0.30 CFM/sq.ft
Maximum leakage Total 3,900 CFM
1.7 AIR BARRIER INSPECTOR
Employ a designated Air Barrier Inspector on this project. The Air

Barrier Inspector performs a Design Review, oversees quality control
testing specified in these specifications, performs quality control air
barrier inspection as specified, interfaces with the designer and product
manufacturer's representatives to assure all installation requirements are
met, and coordinates efforts between all workers installing or penetrating
the air barrier materials. Qualification for the Air Barrier Inspector
are as follows:
a. Two years experience in the installation of air barrier materials and

assemblies including experience in joining and sealing various
components, and sealing penetrations of air barriers.
b. Experience coordinating and instructing personnel involved in the

installation, joining, and sealing of air barrier materials and
components.
1.8 DESIGN REVIEW
Review the Contract Plans and Specifications and advise the Contracting
Officer of any deficiencies that would prevent the construction of an
effective air barrier system. Provide a Design Review Report individually
listing each deficiency and the corresponding proposed corrective action
necessary for proper air barrier system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier

accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Air-Barrier Performance: Air-barrier assembly and seals with adjacent

construction shall be capable of performing as a continuous air barrier
and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior
incidental condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall
be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate
expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations,
tie-ins to installed waterproofing, and transitions at perimeter
conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified
limits.
Air-Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area
at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft., when tested according to ASTM E2357.
SECTION 07 27 10.00 10 Page 4

2.3 MEDIUM-BUILD AIR BARRIERS, VAPOR RETARDING
Medium-Build, Vapor-Retarding Air Barrier: Synthetic polymer material with

an installed dry film thickness, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, of 17 to 30 mils over smooth, void-free substrates.
Physical and Performance Properties:
a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at

1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E2178.
b. Vapor Permeance: Maximum 0.1 perm; ASTM E96/E96M, Desiccant

Method.
c. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 350 percent; ASTM D412, Die C.
d. Adhesion to Substrate: Minimum 16 lbf/sq. in. when tested

according to ASTM D4541.
e. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as

part of an approved assembly.
f. UV Resistance: Can be exposed to sunlight for 180 days

according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
Requirement: Provide primers, transition strips, termination strips,

joint reinforcing fabric and strips, joint sealants, counterflashing
strips, flashing membrane sheets and metal termination bars, termination
mastic, substrate patching materials, adhesives, tapes, foam sealants, lap
sealants, and other accessory materials that are recommended in writing by
air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air-barrier assembly and
that are compatible with primary air-barrier material and adjacent
construction to which they may seal.
Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by air-barrier

material manufacturer.
Preformed Silicone Extrusion: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of

cured low-modulus silicone extrusion, sized to fit opening widths, with a
single-component, neutral-curing, Class 100/50 (low-modulus) silicone
sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for

compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt,
excess mortar, or other contaminants.
2. Verify that substrates have cured and aged for minimum time
recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
SECTION 07 27 10.00 10 Page 5

corrected.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
Clean, prepare, treat, fill, and seal substrate and joints and cracks in
substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions and details.
Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air-barrier application.
Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage
and overspray affecting other construction.
Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing

compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings
from concrete.
Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb,
aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with
substrate-patching material.
Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other
obstructions.
At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads

at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to
another.
Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one
substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically
fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air
barrier.
Bridge expansion joints and discontinuous wall-to-wall, deck-to-wall, and

deck-to-deck joints with air-barrier accessory material that accommodates
joint movement according to manufacturer's written instructions and
details.
3.3 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
Install accessory materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's

written instructions and details to form a seal with adjacent construction
and ensure continuity of air and water barrier.
1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of

roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier
with roofing membrane.
2. Install transition strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so

that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate.
3. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply

primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.
4. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.

Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air-barrier material on
same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.
Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to

roofing-membrane system, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and
window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior
SECTION 07 27 10.00 10 Page 6

door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using
accessory materials.
At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips
to substrate with termination mastic.
Apply joint sealants forming part of air-barrier assembly within

manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult
manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature
ranges.
Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of hollow metal

doors and indicated surfaces of curtain wall members. Apply transition
strip so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each
substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to
perimeter frames, with not less than 1 inch of full contact.
1. Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion.
2. Preformed Silicone Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant

applied to walls, frame, and air-barrier material.
Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls,

storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air-barrier
material with foam sealant.
Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and
penetrations with termination mastic.
Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6 inch

wide, transition strip.
Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and

terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets
with termination mastic.
Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and

transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with
transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip
direction.
Terminate air barrier membrane flashing into curtain wall glazing pocket
where indicated.
3.4 AIR-BARRIER MATERIAL INSTALLATION
Apply air-barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition

strips and to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air-barrier
manufacturer's written instructions and details. Apply air-barrier
material within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges.
1. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply

primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.
2. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air-barrier

material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.
3. Where multiple prime coats are needed to achieve required bond,

allow adequate drying time between coats.
SECTION 07 27 10.00 10 Page 7

Medium-Build Air Barriers: Apply continuous unbroken air-barrier material

to substrates according to the following thickness. Apply an increased
thickness of air-barrier material in full contact around protrusions such
as masonry ties.
1. Vapor-Retarding, Medium-Build Air Barrier: Total dry film

thickness as recommended in writing by manufacturer to comply with
performance requirements, applied in two equal coats. Apply additional
material as needed to achieve void- and pinhole-free surface.
Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with
requirements; repair substrates and reapply air-barrier components.
3.5 QUALITY CONTROL
3.5.1 Documentation and Reporting
Document the entire installation process on daily job site reports. These
reports include information on the Installer, substrates, substrate
preparation, products used, ambient and substrate temperature, the
location of the air barrier installation, the results of the quality
control procedures, and testing results.
3.5.2 Quality Control Testing And Inspection
Conduct the following tests and inspections as applicable in the presence

of the Contracting Officer during installation of the air barrier system,
and submit quality control reports as indicated below.
a. Provide a Daily Report of Observations with a copy to the

b. Inspect to assure continuity of the air barrier system throughout the

building enclosure and that all gaps are covered, the covering is
structurally sound, and all penetrations are sealed allowing for no
infiltration or exfiltration through the air barrier system.
c. Inspect to assure structural support of the air barrier system to

withstand design air pressures.
d. Inspect to assure masonry surfaces receiving air barrier materials are

smooth, clean, and free of cavities, protrusions and mortar droppings,
with mortar joints struck flush or as required by the manufacturer of
the air barrier material.
e. Inspect and test to assure site conditions for application

temperature, and dryness of substrates are within guidelines.
f. Inspect to assure substrate surfaces are properly primed if

applicable and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Priming
must extend at least 2 inches beyond the air barrier material to make
it obvious that the primer was applied to the substrate before the air
barrier material.
g. Inspect to asure laps in materials are at least a 2-inch minimum,

shingled in the correct direction or mastic applied in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations, and with no fishmouths.
SECTION 07 27 10.00 10 Page 8

h. Inspect to assure that a roller has been used to enhance adhesion.

Identify any defects such as fishmouths, wrinkles, areas of lost
adhesion, and improper curing. Note the intended remedy for the
deficiencies.
i. Measure application thickness of liquid applied materials to assure

that manufacturer's specifications for the specific substrate are met.
j. Inspect to assure that the correct materials are installed for

compatibility.
k. Inspect to assure proper transitions for change in direction and

structural support at gaps.
l. Inspect to assure proper connection between assemblies (membrane and

sealants) for cleaning, preparation and priming of surfaces,
structural support, integrity and continuity of seal.
m. Perform adhesion tests for fluid-applied and self-adhered air barrier

membranes to assure that the manufacturer's specified adhesion
strength properties are met. Determine the bond strength of coatings
to substrate in accordance with ASTM D4541.
n. Provide cohesion tests for spray polyurethane foam (SPF). Perform the
tests in accordance with the specification sections which specify
these materials.
o. Provide written test reports of all tests performed.
p. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests

and inspections.
1. Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's

written instructions, where inspection results indicate
insufficient thickness.
2. Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting

as specified above
3.6 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample removal and similar

services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates, coatings and
finishes. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service
activities, and protect repaired construction.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of

construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather

exposure as recommended in writing by manufacturer. If exposed to
these conditions for longer than recommended, remove and replace air
barrier or install additional, full-thickness, air-barrier application
after repairing and preparing the overexposed materials according to
air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and
SECTION 07 27 10.00 10 Page 9

sealants not approved by air-barrier manufacturer.
Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed
in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in
writing by manufacturer of affected construction.
Remove masking materials after installation.
SECTION 07 27 10.00 10 Page 10

SECTION 07 42 13
METAL WALL PANELS

05/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AAMA 501.1 (2005) Standard Test Method for Water

Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls and
Doors Using Dynamic Pressure
AAMA 800 (2010) Voluntary Specifications and Test

Methods for Sealants

Steel Buildings
AISI S100 (2012) North American Specification for

the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members
AISI SG03-3 (2002; Suppl 2001-2004; R 2008)


Structures


Steel Products

Structural Steel
ASTM A606/A606M (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy,

Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Improved
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance

the Hot-Dip Process

Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip
Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating
Process for Exterior Exposed Building
Products

Galvanized Coatings

Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by
the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM B117 (2011) Standard Practice for Operating

Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus


Rubber
ASTM D1308 (2013) Effect of Household Chemicals on

Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes
ASTM D1654 (2008) Evaluation of Painted or Coated

Specimens Subjected to Corrosive
Environments
ASTM D1667 (2005; R 2011) Flexible Cellular Materials

- Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed-Cell)
ASTM D2244 (2014) Calculation of Color Tolerances and

Color Differences from Instrumentally
Measured Color Coordinates
ASTM D2247 (2011) Testing Water Resistance of

Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity
ASTM D2794 (1993; R 2010) Resistance of Organic

Coatings to the Effects of Rapid
Deformation (Impact)
ASTM D3359 (2009; E 2010; R 2010) Measuring Adhesion
by Tape Test
ASTM D3363 (2005; E 2011; R 2011; E 2012) Film

Hardness by Pencil Test
ASTM D4214 (2007) Standard Test Method for Evaluating

the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint
Films
ASTM D4587 (2011) Standard Practice for Fluorescent

UV-Condensation Exposures of Paint and
Related Coatings
ASTM D522/D522M (2014) Mandrel Bend Test of Attached

Organic Coatings
ASTM D523 (2014) Standard Test Method for Specular

Gloss
ASTM D5894 (2010) Cyclic Salt Fog/UV Exposure of

Painted Metal, (Alternating Exposures in a
Fog/Dry Cabinet and a UV/Condensation
Cabinet)
ASTM D610 (2008; R 2012) Evaluating Degree of

Rusting on Painted Steel Surfaces
ASTM D714 (2002; R 2009) Evaluating Degree of

Blistering of Paints
ASTM D822 (2001; R 2006) Filtered Open-Flame

Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related
Coatings
ASTM D968 (2005; R 2010) Abrasion Resistance of

Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive
ASTM E1592 (2005; R 2012) Structural Performance of

Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
ASTM E283 (2004; R 2012) Determining the Rate of Air

Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure
Differences Across the Specimen
ASTM E331 (2000; R 2009) Water Penetration of

Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and
Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference
ASTM E72 (2014a) Conducting Strength Tests of

Panels for Building Construction

Materials
ASTM G152 (2013) Operating Open Flame Carbon Arc
Light Apparatus for Exposure of

Nonmetallic Materials
ASTM G153 (2013) Operating Enclosed Carbon Arc Light

Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic
Materials
METAL BUILDING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (MBMA)
MBMA MBSM (2002) Metal Building Systems Manual
NAAMM AMP 500 (2006) Metal Finishes Manual

(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1793 (2012) Architectural Sheet Metal Manual,

7th Edition
1.2 DEFINITIONS
Metal Wall Panel: Metal wall panels, attachment system components and
accessories necessary for a complete weather-tight wall system.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WALL PANEL SYSTEM
Factory color finished, metal wall panel system with concealed fastening
attachment. Panel profile must be smooth face.
1.3.1 Metal Wall Panel General Performance
Comply with performance requirements, conforming to AISI S100, without

failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other
defects in construction. Wall panels and accessory components must
conform to the following standards:
ASTM A1008/A1008M
ASTM A123/A123M
ASTM A36/A36M
ASTM A653/A653M
ASTM A606/A606M
ASTM A755/A755M for metallic coated steel sheet for exterior coil
pre-painted applications.
ASTM A780/A780M for repair of damage or uncoated areas of hot-dipped
galvanized coating.
ASTM A924/A924M for metallic coated steel sheet
ASTM D522/D522M for applied coatings
UL Bld Mat Dir
1.3.2 Structural Performance
Maximum calculated fiber stress must not exceed the allowable value in the
AISI or AA manuals; a one third overstress for wind is allowed. Midspan
deflection under maximum design loads is limited to L/180. Contract

drawings show the design wind loads and the extent and general assembly
details of the metal siding. Contractor must provide design for members
and connections not shown on the drawings. Siding panels and accessories
must be the products of the same manufacturer.
Provide metal wall panel assemblies complying with the load and stress
requirements in accordance with ASTM E1592. Wind Load force due to wind
action governs the design for panels.
Wall systems and attachments are to resist the wind loads as determined by
ASTM E72 and ASCE 7 in the geographic area where the construction will
take place, in pounds per square foot. Submit five copies of wind load
tests and seismic tests to the Contracting Officer.
Provide metal wall panel assembly for seismic conditions complying with
the applicable requirements of AISC 341.
1.3.3 Air Infiltration
Air leakage must conform to the limits through the wall assembly area when
tested according to ASTM E283.
1.3.4 Water Penetration Under Static Pressure
No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E331.
1.3.5 Water Penetration Under Dynamic Pressure
No evidence of water leakage when tested according to AAMA 501.1.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

Submit Documentation for the following items:
Qualification of Manufacturer; G
Qualification of Installation Contractor; G
Sample Warranty; G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation Drawings ; G, A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Submit Manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:
Wall Panels ; G, A/E
Factory Color Finish; G, A/E

Closure Materials; G, A/E
Pressure Sensitive Tape; G, A/E

Sealants and Caulking; G, A/E
Enamel Repair Paint; G, A/E
Accessories; G, A/E
SD-04 Samples
Submit as required each of the following samples:
Wall Panels, 12 inches long by actual panel width; G, A/E

Metal Closure Strips, 10 inches long of each type; G, A/E
Color chart and chips ; G, A/E
Submit manufacturer's color charts and chips, approximately 4 by 4

inches, showing full range of colors, textures and patterns
available for wall panels with factory applied finishes.
SD-05 Design Data
Wind load design analysis ; G, A/E
As applicable, submit the following wind load design analysis

data, to include, but not limited to:
wind speed
exposure category,co-efficient,importance factor
type of facility
negative pressures for each zone
methods and requirements of attachment
SD-06 Test Reports
Submit test reports for the following in accordance with the

referenced articles in this section.
Leakage Tests; G
Wind Load Tests; G
Coating Tests; G
Chalking Tests; G
Seismic Tests; G
SD-07 Certificates
Submit certificates for the following items showing conformance

with referenced standards contained in this section:
Coil Stock; G
Fasteners; G
Include detailed application instructions and standard

manufacturer drawings altered as required by these specifications.
Installation of Wall panels; G
Submit 3 bound copies of the Manufacturer's Field Reports; G, A/E
Warranty; G
Maintenance Instructions; G
1.5.1 Pre-Installation Conference
Upon notification of submittal receipt and approval by the Contracting

Officer; and prior to the commencement of the work, the Contractor must
attend a pre-installation conference to review the following:
a. Drawings and Specifications.
b. Qualification of Installer.
c. Sustainable acquisition
d. Approved Warranty
e. Sample wall panels, 12 inches long by actual panel width
f. Sample metal closure strips, 10 inches long of each type
g. Color charts and chips
h. Coatings and base metal tests, chalking tests
i. Construction schedule, availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment and facilities required to progress with the work
without delay.
j. Methods and procedures related to installation of wall panels,

including manufacturer's written instructions. Explicitly identify in
writing, differences between manufacturer's instructions and the
specified requirements.
k. Support conditions for compliance with requirements, including

alignment between and attachment to structural members.
l. Flashing, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and

condition of other construction that will affect metal wall panels.
m. Governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates,

and tests and inspections if applicable.
n. Temporary protection requirements for metal wall panel assembly during

and after installation.
o. Wall panel observation and repair procedures after metal wall panel
installation. Provide detailed written instructions including copies
of Material Safety Data Sheets for maintenance and repair materials,
and manufacturer's maintenance instructions.
1.5.1.1 Installation Drawings
Installation shop drawings for wall panels, flashing, accessories, and

anchorage systems must indicate completely dimensioned structural frame
and erection layouts, openings in the wall, special framing details, and
construction details at corners, building intersections and flashing,
location and type of mastic and metal filler strips.
1.5.1.2 Wind Load Design Analysis
Wind design analysis must include wall plan delineating dimensions and
attachment patterns for each zone. Wind design analysis must be prepared
and sealed by Licensed Project Engineer in the geographic area where the
construction will take place.
1.5.2 Manufacturer's Technical Representative
The representative must have authorization from manufacturer to approve

field changes and be thoroughly familiar with the products and
installations in the geographical area where construction will take place.
1.5.3 Qualification of Manufacturer
Certify that metal wall panel system manufacturer has a minimum of five
(5) years experience in manufacturing metal wall system and accessory
products.
Manufacturer must also provide engineering services by an authorized

engineer; currently licensed in the geographical area where construction
will take place, having a minimum of four (4) years experience as an
engineer knowledgeable in wind load design analysis, protocols and
procedures per MBMA MBSM, "Metal Building Systems Manual"; ASCE 7, and
ASTM E1592 and seismic design conforming to AISC 341.
Provide certified engineering calculations, using the products submitted,

for Wind load requirements in accordance with ASCE 7.
1.5.3.1 Manufacturer's Certificates
Also provide the following certifications from the manufacturer:
Coil Stock
Fasteners
Galvanizing Repair Paint
Enamel Repair Paint
Submit certification from coil stock manufacturer or supplier that the

machinery used will form the provided coil stock without warping,
waviness, or rippling that is not a part of the panel profile, and without
damage, abrasion or marring of the finish coating.
Provide evidence that products used within this specification are

manufactured in the United States.
1.5.4 Certified Qualification of Installation Contractor
The installation contractor must be approved and certified by the metal

wall panel manufacturer prior to beginning the installation of the metal
wall panel system. Subcontracting by Certified Contractor for the metal
wall panel work is not permitted.
1.5.5 Single Source
Obtain each type of metal wall panels, clips, closure materials and other
accessories from the standard products of the single source from a single
manufacturer to operate as a complete system for the intended use.
1.5.6 Manufacturer's Maintenance Instructions
Provide manufacturer's detailed written instructions including copies of

Material Safety Data Sheets for maintenance and repair materials.
1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
Deliver and protect package components, sheets, metal wall panels, and
other manufactured items to prevent damage or deformation during
transportation and handling.
Unload, store, and erect metal wall panels in a manner to prevent bending,
warping, twisting, and surface damage.
Stack and store metal wall panels horizontally on platforms or pallets,

covered with suitable weather-tight and ventilated covering to ensure
dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal
wall panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining,
denting, or other surface damage.
Retain strippable protective covering on metal wall panel until actual

installation.
1.7.1 Field Measurements
Verify locations of wall framing and opening dimensions by field

measurements before metal wall panel fabrication and indicate measurements
on Shop Drawings.
1.7.2 Weather Limitations
Proceed with installation preparation only when existing and forecasted

weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering into wall
system or building.
1.8 WARRANTY
Warranty must conform to the Sample Warranty as reviewed and approved by

1.8.1 20 Year "No Dollar Limit" Warranty for Labor and Material
Furnish manufacturer's no-dollar-limit warranty for the metal wall panel

system. The warranty period is to be no less than twenty (20) years from
the date of Government acceptance of the work. The warranty is to be
issued directly to the Government. The warranty is to provide that if
within the warranty period the metal wall panel system shows evidence of
corrosion, perforation, rupture or excess weathering due to deterioration
of the wall panel system resulting from defective materials and correction
of the defective workmanship is to be the responsibility of the metal wall

panel system manufacturer. Repairs that become necessary because of
defective materials and workmanship while metal wall panel system is under
warranty are to be performed within 24 hours after notification, unless
additional time is approved by the Contracting Officer. Failure to
perform repairs within 24 hours of notification will constitute grounds
for having emergency repairs performed by others and not void the warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATION
Unless approved otherwise, fabricate and finish metal wall panels and
accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's
standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated
and specified performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles
and with dimensional and structural requirements.
Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening

ribs, if any, for full length of panel. Fabricate metal wall panel side
laps with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that
provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that
will seal weather-tight and minimize noise from movements within panel
assembly.
2.1.1 Sheet Metal Accessories
Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA 1793

that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of
item indicated:
a. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil
canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels
indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
b. End Seams: fabricate nonmoving end seams with flat-lock seams. Form
seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional
strength.
c. Sealed Joints: form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to

accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA 1793.
d. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed

fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
e. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of size and metal thickness

recommended by SMACNA 1793 or by metal wall panel manufacturer for
application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
2.2 PANEL MATERIALS
2.2.1 Steel Sheet
Roll-form steel wall panels to the specified profile, with fy= 50 ksi, 20
gauge and depth as indicated. Material must be plumb and true, and within
the tolerances listed:
a. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-coated Steel Sheet conforming to ASTM A792/A792M

and AISI SG03-3.
b. Individual panels must be continuous length to cover the entire length

of any unbroken wall area with no joints or seams and formed without
warping, waviness, or ripples that are not part of the panel profile
and free of damage to the finish coating system.
c. Provide panels with thermal expansion and contraction consistent with

the type of system specified.
1. Profile and coverage to be a minimum height and width from

manufacturer's standard for the indicated wall area.
2. Profile to be a 1-1/2 inch high rib at 12 inches o.c. with

hairline joints at panel connections and concealed fasteners.
3. Smooth, flat Surface Texture.
2.2.2 Factory Color Finish
Comply with NAAMM AMP 500 for recommendations for applying and designating
finishes. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they
are within the range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
All panels are to receive a factory-applied polyvinylidene fluoride Kynar

500/Hylar 5000 finish consisting of a baked-on top-coat with a
manufacturer's recommended prime coat conforming to the following:
2.2.2.1 Metal Preparation
Carefully prepare all metal surface for painting on a continuous process

coil coating line by alkali cleaning, hot water rinsing, application of
chemical conversion coating, cold water rinsing, sealing with acid rinse,
and thorough drying.
2.2.2.2 Prime Coating
Apply a base coat of epoxy paint, specifically formulated to interact with

the top-coat, to the prepared surfaces by roll coating to a dry film
thickness of 0.20 plus 0.05 mils. Prime coat must be oven cured prior to
application of finish coat.
2.2.2.3 Exterior Finish Coating
Roll coat the finish coating over the primer by roll coating to dry film
thickness of 0.80 plus 5 mils (3.80 plus 0.50 mils for Vinyl Plastisol)
for a total dry film thickness of 1.00 plus 0.10 mils (4.00 plus 0.10 mils
for Vinyl Plastisol). Oven-cure finish coat.
2.2.2.4 Interior Finish Coating
Apply a wash-coat on the reverse side over the primer by roll coating to a
dry film thickness of 0.30 plus 0.05 mils for a total dry film thickness
of 0.50 plus 0.10 mils. Oven-cured the wash coat.
2.2.2.5 Color
Provide exterior finish color as as specified.
2.2.2.6 Physical Properties
Coating must conform to the industry and manufacturer's standard

performance criteria as listed by the following certified test reports:
General: ASTM D5894 and ASTM D4587
Abrasion: ASTM D968
Adhesion: ASTM D3359
Chalking: ASTM D4214
Chemical Pollution: ASTM D1308
Color Change and Conformity: ASTM D2244
Creepage: ASTM D1654
Cyclic Corrosion Test: ASTM D5894
Flame Spread: ASTM E84
Flexibility: ASTM D522/D522M
Formability: ASTM D522/D522M
Gloss at 60 and 85 degrees: ASTM D523
Humidity: ASTM D2247 and ASTM D714
Oxidation: ASTM D610
Pencil Hardness: ASTM D3363
Reverse Impact: ASTM D2794
Salt Spray: ASTM B117
Weatherometer: ASTM G152, ASTM G153 and ASTM D822
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
Cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet conforming to ASTM A653/A653M and

specified in Section 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING unless otherwise
indicated.
2.3.1 Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing
Type, material, corrosion resistance, size and sufficient length to

penetrate the supporting member a minimum of 1 inch with other properties
required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to supporting
members and substrates in accordance with the wall panel manufacturer's

and ASCE 7 requirements.
2.4 FASTENERS
2.4.1 General
2.4.1.1 Hidden Fasteners
Provide corrosion resistant fasteners recommended by the manufacturer to

meet the performance requirements and design loads.
2.4.1.2 Screws
Screws to be corrosion resistant coated steel, aluminum and/or 305 - series

stainless steel being the type and size recommended by the manufacturer
to meet the performance requirements.
2.4.1.3 Rivets
Rivets to be closed-end type, corrosion resistant coated steel, aluminum

or stainless steel where watertight connections are required. Color to
match metal panel.
2.4.1.4 Attachment Clips
Fabricate clips from steel hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with

ASTM A653/A653M, Z275 G 90 or Series 300 stainless steel. Size, shape,
thickness and capacity as required meeting the insulation thickness and
design load criteria specified.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
2.5.1 General
All accessories must be compatible with the metal wall panels. Sheet metal
flashing, trim, metal closure strips, caps and similar metal accessories
must not be less than the minimum thickness specified for the wall panels.
Exposed metal accessories/finishes to match the panels furnished, except
as otherwise indicated. Molded foam rib, ridge and other closure strips
must be non-absorbent closed-cell or solid-cell synthetic rubber or
pre-molded neoprene to match configuration of the panels.
2.5.2 Rubber Closure Strips
Provide closed-cell, expanded cellular rubber conforming to ASTM D1056 and

ASTM D1667; extruded or molded to the configuration of the specified wall
panel and in lengths supplied by the wall panel manufacturer.
2.5.3 Metal Closure Strips
Provide factory fabricated steel closure strips to be the same gauge or

thickness, color, finish and profile of the specified wall panel.
2.5.4.1 Sealants and Caulking
Provide approved gun type sealants for use in hand- or air-pressure
caulking guns at temperatures above 4 degrees C (or frost-free application

at temperatures above 10 degrees F with minimum solid content of 85
percent of the total volume. Sealants must dry with a tough, durable
surface skin which permit remaining soft and pliable underneath, providing
a weather-tight joint. No migratory staining is permitted on painted or
unpainted metal, stone, glass, vinyl, or wood.
Prime all joints receiving sealants with a compatible one-component or

two-component primer as recommended by the wall panel manufacturer.
2.5.4.2 Shop-Applied
Sealant for shop-applied caulking must be non-curing butyl compliant with

AAMA 800 to ensure the sealant's plasticity at the time of field erection.
2.5.4.3 Field-Applied
Sealant for field-applied caulking must be an approved gun grade, non-sag

one component polysulfide or two-component polyurethane with an initial
maximum Shore A durometer hardness of 25, and conforming to ASTM C920,
Type II. Color to match panel colors.
2.5.4.4 Pressure Sensitive Tape
Provide pressure sensitive tape sealant, 100 percent solid with a release
paper backing; permanently elastic, non-sagging, non-toxic and
non-staining as approved by the wall panel manufacturer.
2.6 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
2.6.1 Fabrication
Shop fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim where practicable to comply
with recommendations in SMACNA 1793 that apply to design, dimensions,
metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Obtain field
measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with
exposed edges folded back to form hems.
2.7 REPAIR OF FINISH PROTECTION
Repair paint for color finish enameled wall panel must be compatible paint
of the same formula and color as the specified finish furnished by the
wall panel manufacturer. Provide quarts of repair paint matching the
specified wall panels.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal wall panel
supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Examine primary and secondary wall framing to verify that rafters,

purlins, angles, channels, and other structural panel support members and
anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by
metal wall panel manufacturer, UL, ASTM, ASCE 7 and as required for the
geographical area where construction will take place.
Examine solid wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported
by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances
required by metal wall panel manufacturer.
Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal wall

panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam
locations of metal wall panels before metal wall panel installation.
Submit to the Contracting Officer a written report, endorsed by Installer,

listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing

projections capable of interfering with insulation attachment.
Miscellaneous framing installation, including sub-purlins, girts, angles,
furring, and other miscellaneous wall panel support members and anchorage
must be according to metal wall panel manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
Provide full length metal wall panels, from sill to eave as indicated,
unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. Anchor
metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement in accordance with MBMA MBSM.
Erect wall panel system in accordance with the approved erection drawings,
the printed instructions and safety precautions of the manufacturer.
Sheets are not to be subjected to overloading, abuse, or undue impact.

Bent, chipped, or defective sheets shall not be applied.
Sheets must be erected true and plumb and in exact alignment with the
horizontal and vertical edges of the building, securely anchored, and with
the indicated eave, and sill.
Work is to allow for thermal movement of the wall panel, movement of the
building structure, and to provide permanent freedom from noise due to
wind pressure.
Field cutting metal wall panels by torch is not permitted. Coordinate

with Section 07 27 10.00 10 BUILDING AIR BARRIER SYSTEM FOR PANEL
INSTALLATION.
3.3.1 Steel Wall Panels
Use stainless-steel fasteners for exterior surfaces and galvanized steel

fasteners for interior surfaces.
3.3.2 Anchor Clips
Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in
place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers'
written instructions.
3.3.3 Metal Protection
Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,

protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each
contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal
wall panel manufacturer.
3.3.4 Joint Sealers
Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where
required for weatherproof performance of metal wall panel assemblies.
Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not
indicated, types recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
3.4 FASTENER INSTALLATION
Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in
place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers'
3.5 FLASHING, TRIM AND CLOSURE INSTALLATION
Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation

instructions, and SMACNA 1793. Provide concealed fasteners where
possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work
with laps, joints, and seams to form permanently watertight and weather
resistant.
Install sheet metal work is to form weather-tight construction without

waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion, and allow for
expansion and contraction. Cutting, fitting, drilling, and other
operations in connection with sheet metal required to accommodate the work
of other trades is to be performed by sheet metal mechanics.
3.5.2 Metal Flashing
Install exposed metal flashing at building corners, sills and eaves,

junctions between metal siding and walling. Exposed metal flashing must
be the same material, color, and finish as the specified metal wall panel.
Fasten flashing at a minimum of 8 inches on center, except where flashing

is held in place by the same screws that secure covering sheets.
Flashing is to be furnished in at least 8 foot lengths. Exposed flashing

is to have 1 inch locked and blind-soldered end joints, and expansion
joints at intervals of not more than 16 feet.
Exposed flashing and flashing subject to rain penetration to be bedded in

the specified joint sealant.
Isolate flashing which is in contact with dissimilar metals by means of

the specified asphalt mastic material to prevent electrolytic
deterioration.
Form drips to the profile indicated, with the edge folded back 1/2 inch to
form a reinforced drip edge.
3.5.3 Closures
Install metal closure strips at open ends of corrugated or ribbed pattern

walls, and at intersection of wall and wall unless open ends are concealed
with formed eave flashing; and in other required areas.
Install mastic closure strips at intersection of the wall with metal

walling; top and bottom of metal siding; heads of wall openings; and in
other required locations.
3.6 WORKMANSHIP
Make lines, arises, and angles sharp and true. Free exposed surfaces from
visible wave, warp, buckle, and tool marks. Fold back exposed edges
neatly to form a 1/2 inch hem on the concealed side. Make sheet metal
exposed to the weather watertight with provisions for expansion and
contraction.
Make surfaces to receive sheet metal plumb and true, clean, even, smooth,
dry, and free of defects and projections which might affect the
application. For installation of items not shown in detail or not covered
by specifications conform to the applicable requirements of SMACNA 1793.
Provide sheet metal flashing in the angles formed where roof decks abut
walls, curbs, ventilators, pipes, or other vertical surfaces and wherever
indicated and necessary to make the work watertight.
3.7 ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS
3.7.1 Erection Tolerances
Erect metal wall panels straight and true with plumb vertical lines
correctly lapped and secured in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.7.2 Leakage Tests
Finished application of metal wall panels are to be subject to inspection

and test for leakage by request of the Contracting Officer,
Architect/Engineer. Conduct inspection and tests at no cost to the
Government.
Inspection and testing is to be made promptly after erection to permit

correction of defects and the removal and replacement of defective
materials.
3.7.3 Repairs to Finish
Scratches, abrasions, and minor surface defects of finish may be repaired

with the specified repair materials. Finished repaired surfaces must be
uniform and free from variations of color and surface texture.
Repaired metal surfaces that are not acceptable to the project

requirements and/or Contracting Officer are to be immediately removed and
replaced with new material.
3.7.4 Paint-Finish Metal Siding
Paint-finish metal siding will be tested for color stability by the
Contracting Officer during the manufacturer's specified guarantee period.
Panels that indicate color changes, fading, or surface degradation,

determined by visual examination, must be removed and replaced with new
panels at no expense to the Government.
New panels will be subject to the specified tests for an additional year
from the date of their installation.
3.8.1 Construction Monitoring
Make visual inspections as necessary to ensure compliance with specified

requirements. Additionally, verify the following:
a. Materials comply with the specified requirements.
b. All materials are properly stored, handled and protected from damage.
Damaged materials are removed from the site.
c. Framing and substrates are in acceptable condition, in compliance with

specification, prior to application of wall panels.
d. Panels are installed without buckles, ripples, or waves and in uniform

alignment and modulus.
e. Side laps are formed, sealed, fastened or seam locked as required.
f. The proper number, type, and spacing of attachment clips and fasteners
are installed.
g. Installer adheres to specified and detailed application parameters.
h. Associated flashing and sheet metal are installed in a timely manner

in accord with the specified requirements.
Provide five bound copies of Manufacturer's Field Reports to the

Contracting Officer two weeks prior to project close-out.
3.9 CLEAN-UP AND DISPOSAL
Clean all exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove

metal shavings, filings, nails, bolts, and wires from work area. Remove
grease and oil films, excess sealants, handling marks, contamination from
steel wool, fittings and drilling debris and scrub the work clean.
Exposed metal surfaces must be free of dents, creases, waves, scratch
marks, solder or weld marks, and damage to the finish coating.
Collect and place scrap/waste materials in containers. Promptly dispose

of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate
on-site; transport demolished materials from government property and
legally dispose of them.
SECTION 07 54 19
POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE ROOFING
02/13
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Structures
ASTM D204 (2002, R 2010) Standard Test Methods for

Sewing Threads
ASTM D2136 (2002; R 2012) Coated Fabrics -

Low-Temperature Bend Test
ASTM D3045 (1992; R 2010) Practice for Heat Aging of

Plastics Without Load
ASTM D4434/D 4434M (2012) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Sheet Roofing
ASTM D570 (1998; E 2010; R 2010) Standard Test

Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
ASTM D751 (2006; R 2011) Coated Fabrics
ASTM E108 (2011) Fire Tests of Roof Coverings
ASTM G154 (2012a) Standard Practice for Operating

Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV
Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials
1.2 SYSTEM ELEMENTS
A.. High Strength PVC, prefabricated thermoplastic membrane adhered with

water-based adhesive.
B. 1/2 inch exterior gypsum roof board, attached with roof manufacturer
approved/supplied insulation adhesive.
C. Polyiso insulation board (flat and tapered), attached with roof

manufacturer approved/supplied insulation adhesive per Section 07 22 00
ROOF AND DECK INSULATION.
D. Prefabricated flashings, corners, parapets, stacks, vents, and related

details.
E. Fasteners, adhesives, and other accessories required for a complete

roofing installation.
F. Traffic Protection.
G. Pull tests and core samples as required by the manufacturer.
Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain

waterproof; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified
uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather
without failure.
Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible

with one another under conditions of service and application required, as
demonstrated by roofing membrane manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
1.3.1 Physical Properties
1. Roof product must meet the requirements of Type III PVC sheet roofing
as defined by ASTM D4434/D 4434M and must meet or exceed the following
physical properties.
2. Thickness: 60 mil, nominal, in accordance with ASTM D751. 100 percent

same PVC material above and below reinforced scrim. No filler
material is authorized. Membrane will be reinforced with a
high-strength, weft-inserted polyester, rip resistant scrim that has a
minimum thread pattern of 18 x 14 threads per square inch. Deck
sheets will be factory prefabricated to maximize the use of factory
welds.
3. Thickness Over Scrim: > 28 mil in accordance with ASTM D751.
4. Breaking Strengths: > 390 pounds per foot (MD) and > 438 pounds per
foot (XMD) in accordance with ASTM D751 Grab Method.
5. Elongation at Break: > 31 percent (MD) and > 31 percent (XMD) in

accordance with ASTM D751 Grab Method.
6. Heat Aging in accordance with ASTM D3045: 176 degree F for 56 days.
No sign of cracking, chipping or crazing. (In accordance with
ASTM D4434/D 4434M).
7. Factory Seam Strength: > 431 pound per foot in accordance with
ASTM D751 Grab Method.
8. Tearing Strength: > 132 lbf. (MD) and > 163 lbf. (XMD) in accordance
with ASTM D751, Procedure B.
9. Low Temperature Bend (Flexibility): Pass at - 40 degree F in

10. Accelerated Weathering: No cracking, checking, crazing, erosion or

chalking after 5,000 hours in accordance with ASTM G154.
11. Linear Dimensional Change: < 0.5 percent in accordance with ASTM D204
at 176 ± 2 degree F for 6 hours.
12. Water Absorption: < 2.6 percent in accordance with ASTM D570 at 158
degree F for 166 hours.
13. Static Puncture Resistance: > 56 pounds in accordance with ASTM D

5602.
14. Dynamic Puncture Resistance: > 14.7 feet - pound per foot in
accordance with ASTM D 5635.
1.3.2 Cool Roof Rating Council (CRRC)
Membrane must be listed on CRRC website.
a. Initial Solar Reflectance: > 88 percent.
b. Initial Thermal Emittance: > 87 percent.
c. Initial Solar Reflective Index (SRI): > 111.
d. 3-Year Aged Solar Reflectance: > 68 percent.
e. 3-Year Aged Thermal Emittance: > 84 percent.
f. 3-Year Aged Solar Reflective Index (SRI): > 82.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Roofing Membrane; G, A/E
SD-07 Certificates
Qualification of manufacturer; G
Wind Uplift; G
Warranty; G
Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.5.1 Qualification of Manufacturer
A manufacturer specializing in the production of PVC membranes

prefabricated systems and utilizing a Quality Control Manual during the
production of the membrane roofing system that has been approved by and is
inspected by Underwriters Laboratories. Manufacturer will prefabricate
the deck sheets by use of in-factory controlled hot air welds, minimizing
the hand welds on the roof.
There shall be no deviations from the roof membrane manufacturer's

specifications or the approved shop drawings without the prior written
approval of the manufacturer.
Company specializing in installation of roofing systems similar to those

specified in this project and approved by the roofing system manufacturer.
1.5.3 Source Limitations
Obtain components for membrane roofing system from roofing membrane

manufacturer.
Conform to applicable code for roof assembly wind uplift and fire hazard
requirements.
1.6.1 Fire Exposure
Provide membrane roofing materials with the following fire-test-response

characteristics. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings
of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure:
a. Class A; ASTM E108 for application and roof slopes indicated.
2. Conform to applicable code for roof assembly fire hazard requirements.
1.6.2 Wind Uplift
1. Roofing System Design: Provide a roofing system designed to resist

uplift pressures calculated according to the current edition of the
ASCE 7 Specification Minimum Design Loads for Buildings And Other
Structures.
2. The complete roof covering assembly shall be rated Class 1-90 or

appropriate in accordance with FM P7825, capable of withstanding an
uplift pressure as determined by the Structural Designer of Record
utilizing ASCE 7 Wind Provisions 90 pounds per square foot (with a
safety factor of 2) and FM l-49 for perimeter and flashing attachments.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
Convene meeting not less than one week before starting work of this
section. Review methods and procedures related to roof deck construction
and roofing system including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Meet with Government, Architect, base facilities representative,

roofing installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and
installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including
installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of

materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to
make progress and avoid delays.
3. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with

requirements, including flatness and fastening.
4. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after

roofing.
5. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof

penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction
that will affect roofing system.
6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and

certificates if applicable.
7. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and

after installation.
8. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing

installation.
1.8.1 Delivery
Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with

seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name
and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with
other components.
1.8.2 Storage
Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean,

dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by
roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct
sunlight.
Store roof materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent

deflection of deck.
Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with

solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.8.3 Handling
Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from

deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in
a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
1.9 WARRANTY
Contractor's Warranty: The contractor shall warrant the roof application

with respect to workmanship and proper application for five (5) years from
the effective date of the warranty issued by the manufacturer.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Must be a 20 Year No Dollar Limit (NDL) type

with a minimum 15 years covering Consequential Damages, Full System
Warranty. No requirement for inspections for the duration of the 20 year
NDL. Provide for completion of repairs, replacement of membrane or total
replacement of the roofing system at the then-current material and labor

prices throughout the life of the warranty. In addition the warranty must
meet the following criteria:
1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date issued by the manufacturer.

Consequential Damages: 15 years from date issued by the manufacturer.
2. First 15 years:
a. Must provide for completion of repairs, replacement of membrane or

total replacement of the roofing system at the then-current
material and labor prices.
b. No exclusions for incidental or consequential damages.
3. Last 5 years:
a. Must provide for completion of repairs, replacement of membrane or

total replacement of the roofing system at the then-current
material and labor prices.
b. Excludes incidental and consequential damages.
4. No exclusion for damage caused by ponding water.
5. No exclusion for damage caused by biological growth.
6. Issued direct from and serviced by the roof membrane manufacturer.
7. Transferable for the full term of the warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
All roofing system components to be provided or approved by roof system

manufacturer.
Acceptable Manufacturers: All PVC roofing manufacturers which can fully

comply with this specification without exceptions.
2.2 ROOFING SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Roofing Membrane: PVC thermoplastic, prefabricated membrane conforming to

ASTM D4434/D 4434M, type III, fabric-reinforced, PVC. Membrane properties
as follows:
1. Thickness: 60 mil.
2. Exposed Face Color: White.
2.2.1 Walkways
Provide non-skid, maintenance-free walkway pads in areas of heavy foot

traffic and around mechanical equipment or as determined by I & L, MCAS
Yuma.
1. Walkway Pads with factory installed heat weldable skirts on the

perimeter.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Verify that the existing roof surfaces and site conditions are ready to
receive work. Verify that the deck is supported and secured. Verify that
the deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections,
and properly sloped to drains, valleys, eaves, scuppers or gutters.
Verify that the deck surfaces are dry and free of standing water. Verify
that all roof openings or penetrations through the roof are solidly set.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another contractor,

notify the Contracting Officer of unsatisfactory preparation before
proceeding. Prior to re-covering an existing roofing system, conduct an
inspection of the roof system accompanied by a representative of the
membrane manufacturer or an authorized contractor.
1. Determine required fastener type, length, and spacing.
2. Verify that moisture content of existing roofing is within acceptable

limits.
3. Identify damaged areas requiring repair before installation of new

roofing.
4. Conduct core cuts as required to verify information required.
Provide manufacturer's inspection of the work at 50 percent completion and

at final completion of the roofing. Warranty shall not be issued until
all work is accepted by the manufacturer.
3.2 PREPARATION
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for

achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
Surfaces shall be clean, smooth, free of fins, sharp edges, loose and
foreign material, oil, grease, and bitumen.
Re-Roofing Over Existing Single-Ply System.
3.3 INSTALLATION
Install insulation in accordance with the roof manufacturer's requirements.
3.3.1 Insulation
Insulation: ISO II (flat and tapered).
1. Install insulation in accordance with the roof manufacturer's

requirements.
2. Insulation shall be adequately supported to sustain normal foot

traffic without damage.
3. Where field trimmed, insulation shall be fitted tightly around roof
protrusions with no gaps greater than 1/4 inch.
4. No more insulation shall be applied than can be covered with the roof
membrane by the end of the day or the onset of inclement weather.
5. If more than one layer of insulation is used, all joints between

subsequent layers shall be offset by at least 6 inches.
3.3.1.1 Insulation Cover Board
Glass-mat-faced, water-resistant gypsum substrate.
3.3.2 Roof Membrane
60 mil, PVC prefabricated thermoplastic membrane.
1. Use only membrane adhesive acceptable to the roof manufacturer's that

meets the applicable design requirements.
a. Water-based membrane adhesive.
2. Cut membrane to fit neatly around all penetrations and roof

projections.
3. Unroll roofing membrane and positioned with a minimum 6 inch overlap.
4. Apply adhesive in accordance with the roof manufacturer's

requirements.
a. Apply at the required rate in smooth, even coatings without voids,

globs, puddles or similar irregularities. Use care not to
contaminate the area of the membrane where hot air welding will
occur.
5. Follow guidelines outlined in the adhesive's Product Data Sheet.
6. Read the adhesive's Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) prior to using
the adhesive.
3.3.3 Seaming
1. Weld overlapping sheets together using hot air. Minimum weld width is
1-1/2 inches.
2. Check field welded seams for continuity and integrity and repair all
imperfections by the end of each work day.
3.3.4 Membrane Termination/Securement
All membrane terminations shall be completed in accordance with the

membrane manufacturer's requirements.
1. Provide securement at all membrane terminations at the perimeter of

each roof level, roof section, curb flashing, skylight, expansion
joint, interior wall, penthouse, and other similar condition.
2. Provide securement at any angle change where the slope or combined

slopes exceeds two inches in one horizontal foot.
3.3.5 Flashings
Complete all flashings and terminations as indicated on the drawings and

in accordance with the membrane manufacturer's requirements.
1. Provide securement at all membrane terminations at the perimeter of

each roof level, roof section, curb flashing, skylight, expansion
joint, interior wall, penthouse, and other similar condition.
a. Do not apply flashing over existing thru-wall flashings or weep

holes.
b. Secure flashing on a vertical surface before the seam between the

flashing and the main roof sheet is completed.
c. Extend flashing membrane a minimum of 6 inches onto the main

roof sheet beyond the mechanical securement.
d. Use care to ensure that the flashing does not bridge locations
where there is a change in direction (e.g. where the parapet meets
the roof deck).
2. Penetrations:
a. Flash all pipes, supports, soil stacks, cold vents, and other
penetrations passing through the roofing membrane as indicated on
the Drawings and in accordance with the membrane manufacturer's
requirements.
b. Utilize custom prefabricated flashings supplied by the membrane

manufacturer.
c. Existing Flashings: Remove when necessary to allow new flashing to

terminate directly to the penetration.
3. Pipe Clusters and Unusual Shapes:
a. Clusters of pipes or other penetrations which cannot be sealed

with prefabricated membrane flashings shall be sealed by
surrounding them with a prefabricated vinyl-coated metal pitch pan
and sealant supplied by the membrane manufacturer.
b. Vinyl-coated metal pitch pans shall be installed, flashed and

filled with sealant in accordance with the membrane manufacturer's
requirements.
c. Pitch pans shall not be used where prefabricated or field

fabricated flashings are possible.
3.3.6 Edge Details
1. Provide edge details as indicated on the Drawings. Install in

accordance with the membrane manufacturer's requirements.
2. Join individual sections in accordance with the membrane

manufacturer's requirements.
3. Coordinate installation of metal flashing and counter flashing

specified in Section 07620.
4. Manufactured Roof Specialties: Coordinate installation of copings,

counter flashing systems, gutters, downspouts, and roof expansion
assemblies specified in Section 07710.
3.3.7 Walkways
1. Install walkways in accordance with the membrane manufacturer's

requirements.
2. Provide walkways where indicated on the Drawings.
3. Install walkway pads at roof access, ladders, and all other traffic
concentration points regardless of traffic frequency. Provided in
areas receiving regular traffic to service rooftop units or where a
passageway over the surface is required.
4. Do not install walkways over flashings or field seams until

manufacturer's warranty inspection has been completed.
3.3.8 Water Cut-Offs
1. Provide water cut-offs on a daily basis at the completion of work and

at the onset of inclement weather.
2. Provide water cut-offs to ensure that water does not flow beneath the
completed sections of the new roofing system.
3. Remove water cut-offs prior to the resumption of work.
4. The integrity of the water cut-off is the sole responsibility of the

roofing contractor.
5. Any membrane contaminated by the cut-off material shall be cleaned or

removed.
The membrane manufacturer's representative shall provide a comprehensive

50 percent complete and final inspection after completion of the roof
system. All application errors shall be addressed and final punch list
completed.
3.5 PROTECTION
Protect installed roofing products from construction operations until

completion of project.
Where traffic is anticipated over completed roofing membrane, protect from

damage using durable materials that are compatible with membrane.
Repair or replace damaged products after work is completed.
3.6 PULL TESTS AND CORE SAMPLE
Pull tests and Core samples must be taken to verify the existing roof
conditions and capabilities.
SECTION 07 60 00
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL

08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AWS D1.2/D1.2M (2014) Structural Welding Code - Aluminum

Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip

Sheet, Terne (Lead-Tin Alloy) Coated by
the Hot Dip Process


ASTM B32 (2008; R 2014) Standard Specification for

Solder Metal
ASTM D4586/D4586M (2007; E 2012; R 2012) Asphalt Roof

Cement, Asbestos-Free

(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1793 (2012) Architectural Sheet Metal Manual,

7th Edition
SINGLE PLY ROOFING INDUSTRY (SPRI)
ANSI/SPRI RD-1 (2009) Performance Standard for Retrofit

Drains
Finished sheet metalwork will form a weathertight construction without

waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion, which allows for
expansion and contraction. Sheet metal mechanic is responsible for
cutting, fitting, drilling, and other operations in connection with sheet
metal required to accommodate the work of other trades. Coordinate

installation of sheet metal items used in conjunction with roofing with
roofing work to permit continuous roofing operations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Covering on flat, sloped, or curved surfaces; G, A/E
Expansion joints; G, A/E
Base flashing; G, A/E
Counterflashing; G, A/E
Flashing at roof penetrations; G, A/E
Reglets; G, A/E
Drip edge; G, A/E
Indicate thicknesses, dimensions, fastenings and anchoring

methods, expansion joints, and other provisions necessary for
thermal expansion and contraction. Scaled manufacturer's catalog
data may be submitted for factory fabricated items.
Quality Control Plan
Submit for sheet metal work in accordance with paragraph entitled

"Field Quality Control."
Package and protect materials during shipment. Uncrate and inspect

materials for damage, dampness, and wet-storage stains upon delivery to
the job site. Remove from the site and replace damaged materials that
cannot be restored to like-new condition. Handle sheet metal items to
avoid damage to surfaces, edges, and ends. Store materials in dry,
weather-tight, ventilated areas until immediately before installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Do not use lead, lead-coated metal, or galvanized steel. Use any metal
listed by SMACNA Arch. Manual for a particular item, unless otherwise
specified or indicated. Conform to the requirements specified and to the
thicknesses and configurations established in SMACNA Arch. Manual for the
materials. Different items need not be of the same metal, except that if
copper is selected for any exposed item, all exposed items must be copper.
Furnish sheet metal items in 8 to 10 foot lengths. Single pieces less than
8 feet long may be used to connect to factory-fabricated inside and
outside corners, and at ends of runs. Factory fabricate corner pieces
with minimum 12 inch legs. Provide accessories and other items essential
to complete the sheet metal installation. Provide accessories made of the
same or compatible materials as the items to which they are applied.
Fabricate sheet metal items of the materials specified below and to the
gage, thickness, or weight shown in Table I at the end of this section.
Provide sheet metal items with mill finish unless specified otherwise.
Where more than one material is listed for a particular item in Table I,
each is acceptable and may be used except as follows:
2.1.1 Exposed Sheet Metal Items
Must be of the same material. Consider the following as exposed sheet

metal: gutters, including hangers; downspouts; gravel stops and fascias;
cap, valley, steeped, base, and eave flashings and related accessories.
2.1.2 Drainage
Do not use copper for an exposed item if drainage from that item will pass
over exposed masonry, stonework or other metal surfaces. In addition to
the metals listed in Table I, lead-coated copper may be used for such
items.
2.1.3 Lead Sheet
Minimum weight 4 pounds per square foot.
2.1.4 Stainless Steel
ASTM A167, Type 302 or 304, 2D Finish, fully annealed, dead-soft temper.
2.1.5 Terne-Coated Steel
Minimum of 14 by 20 inch with minimum of 40 pound coating per double base

box. ASTM A308/A308M.
2.1.6 Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate
ASTM B209 anodized clear form alloy, and temper appropriate for use.
2.1.6.1 Finish
Exposed exterior sheet metal items of aluminum must have a baked-on,

factory-applied color coating of polyvinylidene fluoride (PVF2) or other
equivalent fluorocarbon coating applied after metal substrates have been
cleaned and pretreated. Provide finish coating dry-film thickness of 0.8
to 1.3 mils.
2.1.7 Aluminum Alloy, Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes
ASTM B221.
2.1.8 Solder
ASTM B32, 95-5 tin-antimony.
2.1.9 Bituminous Plastic Cement
ASTM D4586/D4586M, Type I.
2.1.10 Fasteners
Use the same metal or a metal compatible with the item fastened. Use
stainless steel fasteners to fasten dissimilar materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Workmanship
Make lines and angles sharp and true. Free exposed surfaces from visible
wave, warp, buckle, and tool marks. Fold back exposed edges neatly to
form a 1/2 inch hem on the concealed side. Make sheet metal exposed to
the weather watertight with provisions for expansion and contraction.
Make surfaces to receive sheet metal plumb and true, clean, even, smooth,
dry, and free of defects and projections. For installation of items not
shown in detail or not covered by specifications conform to the applicable
requirements of SMACNA 1793, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Provide
sheet metal flashing in the angles formed where roof decks abut walls,
curbs, ventilators, pipes, or other vertical surfaces and wherever
indicated and necessary to make the work watertight. Join sheet metal
items together as shown in Table II.
3.1.2 Nailing
Confine nailing of sheet metal generally to sheet metal having a maximum

width of 18 inch. Confine nailing of flashing to one edge only. Space
nails evenly not over 3 inch on center and approximately 1/2 inch from
edge unless otherwise specified or indicated. Face nailing will not be
permitted. Where sheet metal is applied to other than wood surfaces,
include in shop drawings, the locations for sleepers and nailing strips
required to secure the work.
3.1.3 Cleats
Provide cleats for sheet metal 18 inch and over in width. Space cleats
evenly not over 12 inch on center unless otherwise specified or
indicated. Unless otherwise specified, provide cleats of 2 inch wide by 3
inch long and of the same material and thickness as the sheet metal being
installed. Secure one end of the cleat with two nails and the cleat
folded back over the nailheads. Lock the other end into the seam. Where
the fastening is to be made to concrete or masonry, use screws and drive
in expansion shields set in concrete or masonry. Pretin cleats for
soldered seams.
3.1.4 Bolts, Rivets, and Screws
Install bolts, rivets, and screws where indicated or required. Provide

compatible washers where required to protect surface of sheet metal and to
provide a watertight connection. Provide mechanically formed joints in
aluminum sheets 0.040 inch or less in thickness.
3.1.5 Soldering
Where soldering is specified, apply to copper, terne-coated stainless

steel, zinc-coated steel, and stainless steel items. Pretin edges of
sheet metal before soldering is begun. Seal the joints in aluminum sheets
of 0.040 inch or less in thickness with specified sealants. Do not solder
aluminum.
3.1.5.1 Edges
Scrape or wire-brush the edges of lead-coated material to be soldered to

produce a bright surface. Flux brush the seams in before soldering.
Treat with soldering acid flux the edges of stainless steel to be
pretinned. Seal the joints in aluminum sheets of 0.040 inch or less in
thickness with specified sealants. Do not solder aluminum.
3.1.6 Welding and Mechanical Fastening
Use welding for aluminum of thickness greater than 0.040 inch. Aluminum
0.040 inch or less in thickness must be butted and the space backed with
formed flashing plate; or lock joined, mechanically fastened, and filled
with sealant as recommended by the aluminum manufacturer.
3.1.6.1 Welding of Aluminum
Use welding of the inert gas, shield-arc type. For procedures, appearance
and quality of welds, and the methods used in correcting welding work,
conform to AWS D1.2/D1.2M.
3.1.6.2 Mechanical Fastening of Aluminum
Use No. 12, aluminum alloy, sheet metal screws or other suitable aluminum
alloy or stainless steel fasteners. Drive fasteners in holes made with a
No. 26 drill in securing side laps, end laps, and flashings. Space
fasteners 12 inch maximum on center. Where end lap fasteners are required
to improve closure, locate the end lap fasteners not more than 2 inch from
the end of the overlapping sheet.
3.1.7 Protection from Contact with Dissimilar Materials
3.1.7.1 Aluminum
Do not allow aluminum surfaces in direct contact with other metals except
stainless steel, zinc, or zinc coating. Where aluminum contacts another
metal, paint the dissimilar metal with a primer followed by two coats of
aluminum paint. Where drainage from a dissimilar metal passes over
aluminum, paint the dissimilar metal with a non-lead pigmented paint.
3.1.7.2 Metal Surfaces
Paint surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, or other masonry

materials with alkali-resistant coatings such as heavy-bodied bituminous
paint.
3.1.7.3 Wood or Other Absorptive Materials
Paint surfaces that may become repeatedly wet and in contact with metal
with two coats of aluminum paint or a coat of heavy-bodied bituminous
paint.
3.1.8 Expansion and Contraction
Provide expansion and contraction joints at not more than 32 foot

intervals for aluminum and at not more than 40 foot intervals for other
metals. Provide an additional joint where the distance between the last
expansion joint and the end of the continuous run is more than half the
required interval. Space joints evenly. Join extruded aluminum gravel
stops and fascias by expansion and contraction joints spaced not more than
12 feet apart.
3.1.9 Base Flashing
Extend up vertical surfaces of the flashing not less than 8 inch and not
less than 4 inch under the roof covering. Where finish wall coverings
form a counterflashing, extend the vertical leg of the flashing up behind
the applied wall covering not less than 6 inch. Overlap the flashing
strips with the previously laid flashing not less than 3 inch. Fasten the
strips at their upper edge to the deck. Horizontal flashing at vertical
surfaces must extend vertically above the roof surface and fastened at
their upper edge to the deck a minimum of 6 inch on center with hex
headed, galvanized shielded screws a minimum of 2-inch lap of any
surface. Solder end laps and provide for expansion and contraction.
Extend the metal flashing over crickets at the up-slope side of curbs and
similar vertical surfaces extending through sloping roofs, the metal
flashings. Extend the metal flashings onto the roof covering not less than
4.5 inch at the lower side of vertical surfaces extending through the roof
decks. Install and fit the flashings so as to be completely
weathertight. Provide factory-fabricated base flashing for interior and
exterior corners. Do not use metal base flashing on built-up roofing.
3.1.10 Counterflashing
Except where indicated or specified otherwise, insert counterflashing in

reglets located from 9 to 10 inch above roof decks, extend down vertical
surfaces over upturned vertical leg of base flashings not less than 3 inch.
Fold the exposed edges of counterflashings 1/2 inch. Where stepped
counterflashings are required, they may be installed in short lengths a
minimum 8 inch by 10 inch or may be of the preformed one-piece type.
Provide end laps in counterflashings not less than 3 inch and make it
weathertight with plastic cement. Do not make lengths of metal
counterflashings exceed 10 feet. Form the flashings to the required
shapes before installation. Factory-form the corners not less than 12 inch
from the angle. Secure the flashings in the reglets with lead wedges and
space not more than 18 inch apart; on short runs, place wedges closer
together. Fill caulked-type reglets or raked joints which receive
counterflashing with caulking compound. Turn up the concealed edge of
counterflashings built into masonry or concrete walls not less than 1/4
inch and extend not less than 2 inch into the walls. Install
counterflashing to provide a spring action against base flashing. Where
bituminous base flashings are provided, extend down the counter flashing
as close as practicable to the top of the cant strip. Factory form
counter flashing to provide spring action against the base flashing.
3.1.11 Metal Reglets
Provide factory fabricated caulked type or friction type reglets with a

minimum opening of 1/4 inch and a depth of 1 1/4 inch, as approved.
3.1.11.1 Caulked Reglets
Provide with rounded edges and metal strap brackets or other anchors for
securing to the concrete forms. Provide reglets with a core to protect
them from injury during the installation. Provide built-up mitered corner
pieces for internal and external angles. Wedge the flashing in the
reglets with lead wedges every 18 inch, caulked full and solid with an
approved compound.
3.1.11.2 Friction Reglets
Provide with flashing receiving slots not less than 5/8 inch deep, one
inch jointing tongues, and upper and lower anchoring flanges installed at
24 inch maximum snaplock receiver. Insert the flashing the full depth of
the slot and lock by indentations made with a dull-pointed tool, wedges,
and filled with a sealant. For friction reglets, install flashing
snaplock receivers at 24 inch on center maximum. When the flashing has
been inserted the full depth, caulk the slot and lock with wedges and fill
with sealant.
3.1.12 Metal Drip Edge
Provide a metal drip edge, designed to allow water run-off to drip free of
underlying construction, at eaves and rakes prior to the application of
roofing shingles. Apply directly on the wood deck at the eaves and over
the underlay along the rakes. Extend back from the edge of the deck not
more than 3 inch and secure with compatible nails spaced not more than 10
inch on center along upper edge.
3.1.13 Flashing for Roof Drains
Provide a 30 inch square sheet indicated. Taper insulation to drain from

24 inch out. Set flashing on finished felts in a full bed of asphalt roof
cement, ASTM D4586/D4586M. Heavily coat the drain flashing ring with
asphalt roof cement. Clamp the roof membrane, flashing sheet, and
stripping felt in the drain clamping ring. Secure clamps so that felts
and drain flashing are free of wrinkles and folds. Retrofit roof drains
must conform to ANSI/SPRI RD-1.
3.1.14 Sheet Metal Covering on Flat, Sloped, or Curved Surfaces
Except as specified or indicated otherwise, cover and flash all minor

flat, sloped, or curved surfaces such as crickets, bulkheads, dormers and
small decks with metal sheets of the material used for flashing; maximum
size of sheets, 16 by 18 inch. Fasten sheets to sheathing with metal
cleats. Lock seams and solder. Lock aluminum seams as recommended by
aluminum manufacturer. Provide an underlayment of roofing felt for all
sheet metal covering.
3.1.15 Expansion Joints
Provide expansion joints for roofs, walls, and floors as indicated.

Provide expansion joints in continuous sheet metal at 40 foot intervals
for copper and stainless steel and at 32 foot intervals for aluminum,
aluminum gravel stops and fascias which must have expansion joints at not
more than 12 foot spacing. Provide evenly spaced joints. Provide an
additional joint where the distance between the last expansion joint and
the end of the continuous run is more than half the required interval
spacing. Conform to the requirements of Table I.
3.1.15.1 Roof Expansion Joints
Consist of curb with wood nailing members on each side of joint,

bituminous base flashing, metal counterflashing, and metal joint cover.
Bituminous base flashing is specified in Roofing Section. Provide
counterflashing as specified in paragraph "Counterflashing," except as
follows: Provide counterflashing with vertical leg of suitable depth to
enable forming into a horizontal continuous cleat. Secure the inner edge
to the nailing member. Make the outer edge projection not less than one
inch for flashing on one side of the expansion joint and be less than the
width of the expansion joint plus one inch for flashing on the other side
of the joint. Hook the expansion joint cover over the projecting outer
edges of counterflashing. Provide roof joint with a joint cover of the
width indicated. Hook and lock one edge of the joint cover over the
shorter projecting flange of the continuous cleat, and the other edge
hooked over and loose locked with the longer projecting flange. Joints
are specified in Table II.
3.1.15.2 Floor and Wall Expansion Joints
Provide U-shape with extended flanges for expansion joints in concrete and
masonry walls and in floor slabs.
3.1.16 Flashing at Roof Penetrations and Equipment Supports
Provide metal flashing for all pipes, ducts, and conduits projecting
through the roof surface and for equipment supports, guy wire anchors, and
similar items supported by or attached to the roof deck. Goose-necks,
rainhoods, power roof ventilators, and other mechanical penetrations as
indicated on the drawings.
3.1.17 Single Pipe Vents
See Table I, footnote (d). Set flange of sleeve in bituminous plastic

cement and nail 3 inch on center. Bend the top of sleeve over and extend
down into the vent pipe a minimum of 2 inch. For long runs or long rises
above the deck, where it is impractical to cover the vent pipe with lead,
use a two-piece formed metal housing. Set metal housing with a metal
sleeve having a 4 inch roof flange in bituminous plastic cement and nailed
3 inch on center. Extend sleeve a minimum of8 inch above the roof deck
and lapped a minimum of 3 inch by a metal hood secured to the vent pipe by
a draw band. Seal the area of hood in contact with vent pipe with an
approved sealant.
3.1.18 Stepped Flashing
Stepped flashing shall be installed where sloping roofs surfaced with

shingles abut vertical surfaces. Separate pieces of base flashing shall
be placed in alternate shingle courses.
3.1.19 Copings
Provide coping using copper sheets 8 or 10 feet long joined by a 3/4 inch
locked and soldered seam. Terminate outer edges in edge strips. Install
with sealed lap joints as indicated.
3.2 PAINTING
Field-paint sheet metal for separation of dissimilar materials.
Shall be solvent cleaned and given one coat of zinc-molybdate primer and
one coat of aluminum paint.
3.3 CLEANING
Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove

grease and oil films, handling marks, contamination from steel wool,
fittings and drilling debris, and scrub-clean. Free the exposed metal
surfaces of dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, and solder or weld marks.
3.4 REPAIRS TO FINISH
Scratches, abrasions, and minor surface defects of finish may be repaired

in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and as
approved. Repair damaged surfaces caused by scratches, blemishes, and
variations of color and surface texture. Replace items which cannot be
repaired.
Establish and maintain a Quality Control Plan for sheet metal used in
conjunction with roofing to assure compliance of the installed sheet
metalwork with the contract requirements. Remove work that is not in
compliance with the contract and replace or correct. Include quality
control, but not be limited to, the following:
a. Observation of environmental conditions; number and skill level of

sheet metal workers; condition of substrate.
b. Verification that specified material is provided and installed.
c. Inspection of sheet metalwork, for proper size(s) and thickness(es),

fastening and joining, and proper installation.
3.5.1 Procedure
Submit for approval prior to start of roofing work. Include a checklist

of points to be observed. Document the actual quality control
observations and inspections. Furnish a copy of the documentation to the
Contracting Officer at the end of each day.
HL4>TABLE I. SHEET METAL WEIGHT, THICKNESSES, AND GAGES
Sheet Metal Items Copper Aluminum, Stainless Terne-Coated Zinc-Coated

kilograms inch Steel, inch Stainless Steel, U.S.
per Steel, inch Std. Gage
square
foot
Building Expansion Joints
HL4>TABLE I. SHEET METAL WEIGHT, THICKNESSES, AND GAGES
Sheet Metal Items Copper Aluminum, Stainless Terne-Coated Zinc-Coated

kilograms inch Steel, inch Stainless Steel, U.S.
per Steel, inch Std. Gage
square
foot
Cover 16 .032 .015 .015 24
Waterstop-bellows 16 - .015 .015 -

or flanged, U-type.
Covering on minor 20 .040 .018 .018 -

flat, pitched or
curved surfaces
Flashings:
Base 20 .040 .018 .018 24
Cap 16 .032 .015 .015 26

(Counter-flashing)
Stepped 16 .032 .015 .015 -
Roof drain 16 (b)
Pipe vent sleave (d)
Coping 16 - - - -
Gravel stops and fascias:
Extrusions - .075 - - -
Sheets, corrugated 16 .032 .015 .015 -
Sheets, smooth 20 .050 .018 .018 24
Edge strip 24 .050 .025 - -
TABLE II. SHEET METAL JOINTS
TYPE OF JOINT
Item Designation Copper, Terne-Coated Aluminum Remarks

Stainless Steel,
Zinc-Coated Steel and
Stainless Steel
Joint cap for 1.25 inch single 1.25 inch single --

building expansion lock, standing seam, lock, standing
seam, cleated cleated
joint at roof
Flashings
Base One inch One inch flat Aluminum producer's

3 inch lap for locked, soldered; recommended hard
expansion joint sealed; 3 inch lap setting sealant for
for expansion joint locked aluminum
joints. Fill each
metal expansion
joint with a joint
sealing compound
compound.
Cap-in reglet 3 inch lap 3 inch lap Seal groove with

joint sealing
compound.
Reglets Butt joint -- Seal reglet groove

with joint sealing
compound.
Gravel stops:
Extrusions -- Butt with 1/2 inch Use sheet flashing

space beneath and a cover
plate
Sheet, smooth Butt with 1/4 inch Butt with 1/4 inch Use sheet flashing
space space backup plate.
(a) Provide a 3 inch lap elastomeric flashing with manufacturer's recommended

sealant.
(b) Seal Polyvinyl chloride reglet with manufacturer's recommended sealant.
SECTION 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING
05/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Materials
ASTM E1399/E1399M (1997; E 2013;R 2013) Cyclic Movement and

Measuring the Minimum and Maximum Joint
Widths of Architectural Joint Systems
ASTM E1966 (2007; R 2011) Fire-Resistive Joint Systems
ASTM E2174 (2014) Standard Practice for On-Site

Inspection of Installed Fire Stops
ASTM E2307 (2015a) Standard Test Method for

Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter
Fire Barrier Systems Using
Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test
Apparatus
ASTM E2393 (2010a) Standard Practice for On-Site

Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive
Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire Barriers
ASTM E699 (2009) Standard Practice for Evaluation of

Agencies Involved in Testing, Quality
Assurance, and Evaluating of Building
Components
ASTM E814 (2013a) Standard Test Method for Fire

Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops

Materials
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM 4991 (2013) Approval of Firestop Contractors

UL 1479 (2003; Reprint Oct 2012) Fire Tests of

Through-Penetration Firestops
UL 2079 (2004; Reprint Dec 2012) Tests for Fire

Resistance of Building Joint Systems
UL 723 (2008; Reprint Aug 2013) Test for Surface

Materials
UL Fire Resistance (2012) Fire Resistance Directory
1.2.1 General
Furnish and install tested and listed firestopping systems, combination of

materials, or devices to form an effective barrier against the spread of
flame, smoke and gases, and maintain the integrity of fire resistance
rated walls, partitions, floors, and ceiling-floor assemblies, including
through-penetrations and construction joints and gaps.
a. Through-penetrations include the annular space around pipes, tubes,

conduit, wires, cables and vents.
b. Construction joints include those used to accommodate expansion,

contraction, wind, or seismic movement; firestopping material shall
not interfere with the required movement of the joint.
Gaps requiring firestopping include gaps between the curtain wall and
the floor slab and between the top of the fire-rated walls and the
roof or floor deck above and at the intersection of shaft assemblies
and adjoining fire resistance rated assemblies.
1.2.2 Sequencing
Coordinate the specified work with other trades. Apply firestopping

materials, at penetrations of pipes and ducts, prior to insulating, unless
insulation meets requirements specified for firestopping. Apply
firestopping materials. at building joints and construction gaps, prior to
completion of enclosing walls or assemblies. Cast-in-place firestop
devices shall be located and installed in place before concrete
placement. Pipe, conduit or cable bundles shall be installed through
cast-in-place device after concrete placement but before area is concealed
or made inaccessible. Firestop material shall be inspected and approved
prior to final completion and enclosing of any assemblies that may conceal
installed firestop.
1.2.3 Submittals Requirements
a. Submit detail drawings including manufacturer's descriptive data,

typical details conforming to UL Fire Resistance or other details
certified by another nationally recognized testing laboratory,
installation instructions or UL listing details for a firestopping

assembly in lieu of fire-test data or report. For those firestop
applications for which no UL tested system is available through a
manufacturer, a manufacturer's engineering judgment, derived from
similar UL system designs or other tests, shall be submitted for
review and approval prior to installation. Submittal shall indicate
the firestopping material to be provided for each type of
application. When more than a total of 5 penetrations and/or
construction joints are to receive firestopping, provide drawings that
indicate location, "F" "T" and "L" ratings, and type of application.
b. Submit certificates attesting that firestopping material complies with

the specified requirements. For all intumescent firestop materials
used in through penetration systems, manufacturer shall provide
certification of compliance with UL 1479.
c. Submit documentation of training and experience for Installer.
d. Submit inspection report stating that firestopping work has been

inspected and found to be applied according to the manufacturer's
recommendations and the specified requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Firestopping Materials; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Inspection; G
SD-07 Certificates
Inspector Qualifications
Firestopping Materials
Installer Qualifications; G
1.4.1 Installer
Engage an experienced Installer who is:
a. FM Research approved in accordance with FM 4991, operating as a UL

Certified Firestop Contractor, or
b. Certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping

manufacturer as having the necessary staff, training, and a minimum of
3 years experience in the installation of manufacturer's products in
accordance with specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness
to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an installer
engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer installer
qualifications on the buyer. The Installer shall have been trained by

a direct representative of the manufacturer (not distributor or agent)
in the proper selection and installation procedures. The installer
shall obtain from the manufacturer written certification of training,
and retain proof of certification for duration of firestop
installation.
1.4.2 Inspector Qualifications
The inspector shall meet the criteria contained in ASTM E699 for agencies
involved in quality assurance and shall have a minimum of two years
experience in construction field inspections of firestopping systems,
products, and assemblies. The inspector shall be completely independent
of, and divested from, the installer, the manufacturer, and the supplier
of any material or item being inspected. The inspector shall not be a
competitor of the installer, the contractor, the manufacturer, or supplier
of any material or item being inspected. Include in the qualifications
submittal a notarized statement assuring compliance with the requirements
stated herein.
Deliver materials in the original unopened packages or containers showing

name of the manufacturer and the brand name. Store materials off the
ground, protected from damage and exposure to elements and temperatures in
accordance with manufacturer requirements. Remove damaged or deteriorated
materials from the site. Use materials within their indicated shelf life.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS
Provide firestopping materials, supplied from a single domestic

manufacturer, consisting of commercially manufactured, asbestos-free,
nontoxic products FM APP GUIDE approved, or UL listed, for use with
applicable construction and penetrating items, complying with the
following minimum requirements:
2.1.1 Fire Hazard Classification
Material shall have a flame spread of 25 or less, and a smoke developed

rating of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.
Material shall be an approved firestopping material as listed in
UL Fire Resistance or by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
2.1.2 Toxicity
Material shall be nontoxic and carcinogen free to humans at all stages of

application or during fire conditions and shall not contain hazardous
chemicals or require harmful chemicals to clean material or equipment.
Firestop material must be free from Ethylene Glycol, PCB, MEK, or other
types of hazardous chemicals.
2.1.3 Fire Resistance Rating
Firestop systems shall be UL Fire Resistance listed or FM APP GUIDE

approved with "F" rating at least equal to fire-rating of fire wall or
floor in which penetrated openings are to be protected. Where required,
firestop systems shall also have "T" rating at least equal to the
fire-rated floor in which the openings are to be protected.
2.1.3.1 Through-Penetrations
Firestopping materials for through-penetrations, as described in paragraph

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, shall provide "F", "T" and "L" fire resistance ratings
in accordance with ASTM E814 or UL 1479. Fire resistance ratings shall be
as follows:
2.1.3.1.1 Penetrations of Fire Resistance Rated Walls and Partitions
F Rating = 1 hour Rating of wall or partition being penetrated.
2.1.3.1.2 Penetrations of Fire Resistance Rated Floors, Floor-Ceiling

Assemblies
F Rating = 1 hour, T Rating = 1 hour. Where the penetrating item is

outside of a wall cavity the F rating must be equal to the fire resistance
rating of the floor penetrated, and the T rating shall be in accordance
with the requirements of ICC IBC.
2.1.3.2 Construction Joints and Gaps
Fire resistance ratings of construction joints, as described in paragraph

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, and gaps such as those between floor slabs and curtain
walls shall be the same as the construction in which they occur.
Construction joints and gaps shall be provided with firestopping materials
and systems that have been tested in accordance with ASTM E119, ASTM E1966
or UL 2079 to meet the required fire resistance rating. Curtain wall
joints shall be provided with firestopping materials and systems that have
been tested in accordance with ASTM E2307 to meet the required fire
resistance rating. Systems installed at construction joints shall meet
the cycling requirements of ASTM E1399/E1399M or UL 2079. All joints at
the intersection of the top of a fire resistance rated wall and the
underside of a fire-rated floor, floor ceiling, or roof ceiling assembly
shall provide a minimum class II movement capability.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Areas to receive firestopping shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, or loose

materials which may affect the fitting or fire resistance of the
firestopping system. For cast-in-place firestop devices, formwork or
metal deck to receive device prior to concrete placement shall be sound
and capable of supporting device. Prepare surfaces as recommended by the
manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Completely fill void spaces with firestopping material regardless of

geometric configuration, subject to tolerance established by the
manufacturer. Firestopping systems for filling floor voids 4 inches or
more in any direction shall be capable of supporting the same load as the
floor is designed to support or shall be protected by a permanent barrier
to prevent loading or traffic in the firestopped area. Install
firestopping in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
Provide tested and listed firestop systems in the following locations,
except in floor slabs on grade:
a. Penetrations of duct, conduit, tubing, cable and pipe through floors

and through fire-resistance rated walls, partitions, and ceiling-floor
assemblies.
b. Penetrations of vertical shafts such as pipe chases, elevator shafts,

and utility chutes.
c. Gaps at the intersection of floor slabs and curtain walls, including

inside of hollow curtain walls at the floor slab.
d. Gaps at perimeter of fire-resistance rated walls and partitions, such

as between the top of the walls and the bottom of roof decks.
e. Construction joints in floors and fire rated walls and partitions.
f. Other locations where required to maintain fire resistance rating of

the construction.
3.2.1 Insulated Pipes and Ducts
Thermal insulation shall be cut and removed where pipes or ducts pass
through firestopping, unless insulation meets requirements specified for
firestopping. Replace thermal insulation with a material having equal
thermal insulating and firestopping characteristics.
3.2.2 Fire Dampers
Install and firestop fire dampers in accordance with Section 23 00 00 AIR

SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM. Firestop installed
with fire damper must be tested and approved for use in fire damper
system. Firestop installed with fire damper must be tested and approved
for use in fire damper system.
3.2.3 Data and Communication Cabling
Cabling for data and communication applications shall be sealed with

re-enterable firestopping products or devices products and devices as
indicated.
3.2.3.1 Re-Enterable Devices
Firestopping devices shall be pre-manufactured modular devices, containing

built-in self-sealing intumescent inserts. Firestopping devices shall
allow for cable moves, additions or changes without the need to remove or
replace any firestop materials. Devices must be capable of maintaining
the fire resistance rating of the penetrated membrane at 0 percent to 100
percent visual fill of penetrants; while maintaining "L" rating of <10
cfm/sf measured at ambient temperature and 400 degrees F at 0 percent to
100 percent visual fill.
3.2.3.2 Re-Sealable Products
Provide firestopping pre-manufactured modular products, containing

self-sealing intumescent inserts. Firestopping products shall allow for
cable moves, additions or changes. Devices shall be capable of
maintaining the fire resistance rating of the penetrated membrane at 0
percent to 100 percent visual fill of penetrants.
3.3 INSPECTION
Install one of each type of penetration and have it inspected and accepted
by the Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Fire Protection Engineer
prior to the installation of the remainder of the penetrations. At this
inspection, the manufacturer's technical representative of the
firestopping material shall be present. For all projects, the remainder of
the firestopped areas shall not be covered or enclosed until inspection
is complete and approved by the Contracting Officer. The inspector shall
inspect the applications initially to ensure adequate preparations (clean
surfaces suitable for application, etc.) and periodically during the work
to assure that the completed work has been accomplished according to the
manufacturer's written instructions and the specified requirements.
Submit written reports indicating locations of and types of penetrations
and types of firestopping used at each location; type shall be recorded by
UL listed printed numbers.
3.3.2 Inspection Standards
Inspect all firestopping in accordance to ASTM E2393 and ASTM E2174 for
firestop inspection, and document inspection results to be submitted.
SECTION 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS
01/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM C1311 (2014) Standard Specification for Solvent

Release Agents
ASTM C509 (2006; R 2011) Elastomeric Cellular

Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material


Rubber
ASTM D1667 (2005; R 2011) Flexible Cellular Materials

- Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed-Cell)

Extrudability of Oil- and Resin-Base
Caulking Compounds

Shrinkage and Tenacity of Oil- and
Resin-Base Caulking Compounds
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Sealants
Primers
Bond breakers
Backstops
Manufacturer's descriptive data including storage requirements,
shelf life, curing time, instructions for mixing and application,

and primer data (if required). Provide a copy of the Material
Safety Data Sheet for each solvent, primer or sealant material.
SD-07 Certificates
Sealant
Certificates of compliance stating that the materials conform to

the specified requirements.
Apply sealant when the ambient temperature is between 40 and 90 degrees F.
Deliver materials to the job site in unopened manufacturers' external

shipping containers, with brand names, date of manufacture, color, and
material designation clearly marked thereon. Label elastomeric sealant
containers to identify type, class, grade, and use. Carefully handle and
store materials to prevent inclusion of foreign materials or subjection to
sustained temperatures exceeding 90 degrees F or less than 0 degrees F.
1.5.1 Compatibility with Substrate
Verify that each of the sealants are compatible for use with joint
substrates.
1.5.2 Joint Tolerance
Provide joint tolerances in accordance with manufacturer's printed

instructions.
1.6 SPECIAL WARRANTY
Guarantee sealant joint against failure of sealant and against water

penetration through each sealed joint for five years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANTS
Provide sealant that has been tested and found suitable for the substrates
to which it will be applied.
2.1.1 Interior Sealant
Provide ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 12.5, Use NT. Location(s)
and color(s) of sealant for the following:
LOCATION COLOR
a. Small voids between walls or partitions and adjacent lockers, As selected

casework, shelving, door frames, built-in or surface-mounted
equipment and fixtures, and similar items.
b. Perimeter of frames at doors, windows, and access panels which As selected

adjoin exposed interior concrete and masonry surfaces.
c. Joints of interior masonry walls and partitions which adjoin As selected

columns, pilasters, concrete walls, and exterior walls unless
otherwise detailed.
d. Joints between edge members for acoustical tile and adjoining As selected
vertical surfaces.
e. Interior locations, not otherwise indicated or specified, where As selected

small voids exist between materials specified to be painted.
f. Joints between bathtubs and ceramic tile; joints between shower As selected
receptors and ceramic tile; joints formed where nonplaner tile
surfaces meet.
g. Joints formed between tile floors and tile base cove; joints As selected
between tile and dissimilar materials; joints occurring where
substrates change.
h. Behind escutcheon plates at valve pipe penetrations and As selected

showerheads in showers.
2.1.2 Exterior Sealant
For joints in vertical surfaces, provide ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade NS,
Class 25, Use NT. For joints in horizontal surfaces, provide ASTM C920,
Type S or M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T. Provide location(s) and color(s)
of sealant as follows:
LOCATION COLOR
a. Joints and recesses formed where frames Match adjacent

and subsills of windows, doors, louvers, and surface color
vents adjoin masonry, concrete, or metal
frames. Use sealant at both exterior and
interior surfaces of exterior wall
penetrations.
b. Masonry joints where shelf angles occur. Match adjacent

surface color
c. Expansion and control joints. Match adjacent

surface color
LOCATION COLOR
d. Interior face of expansion joints in Match adjacent

exterior concrete or masonry walls where metal surface color
expansion joint covers are not required.
e. Voids where items pass through exterior Match adjacent

walls. surface color
f. Metal reglets, where flashing is inserted Match adjacent

into masonry joints, and where flashing is surface color
penetrated by coping dowels.
g. Metal-to-metal joints where sealant is Match adjacent

indicated or specified. surface color
h. Joints between ends of gravel stops, Match adjacent

fascias, copings, and adjacent walls. surface color
2.1.3 Floor Joint Sealant
ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T. Provide location(s) and
color(s) of sealant as follows:
LOCATION COLOR
a. Seats of metal thresholds for exterior As selected

doors.
b. Control and expansion joints in floors, As selected

slabs, ceramic tile, and walkways.
2.1.4 Preformed Sealant
Provide preformed sealant of polybutylene or isoprene-butylene based

pressure sensitive weather resistant tape or bead sealant capable of
sealing out moisture, air and dust when installed as recommended by the
manufacturer. At temperatures from minus 30 to plus 160 degrees F, the
sealant must be non-bleeding and no loss of adhesion.
2.1.4.1 Tape
Tape sealant: Provide cross-section per manufacturer's recommendation.
2.1.4.2 Bead
Bead sealant: Provide cross-section per manufacturer's recommendation.
2.2 PRIMERS
Provide a nonstaining, quick-drying type and consistency recommended by

the sealant manufacturer for the particular application.
2.3 BOND BREAKERS
Provide the type and consistency recommended by the sealant manufacturer

to prevent adhesion of the sealant to backing or to bottom of the joint.
2.4 BACKSTOPS
Provide glass fiber roving or neoprene, butyl, polyurethane, or

polyethylene foams free from oil or other staining elements as recommended
by sealant manufacturer. Provide 25 to 33 percent oversized backing for
closed cell and 40 to 50 percent oversized backing for open cell material,
unless otherwise indicated. Make backstop material compatible with
sealant. Do not use oakum and other types of absorptive materials as
backstops.
2.4.1 Rubber
Conform to ASTM D1056, Type 1, open cell, or Type 2, closed cell, Class A
or B, Grade 1, round cross section for cellular rubber sponge backing.
2.4.2 PVC
Conform to ASTM D1667, Grade VO 12, open-cell foam, round cross section
for Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) backing.
2.4.3 Synthetic Rubber
Conform to ASTM C509, Option I, Type I preformed rods or tubes for

Synthetic rubber backing.
2.4.4 Neoprene
Conform to ASTM D1056, closed cell expanded neoprene cord Type 2, Class C,
Grade 2C2 for Neoprene backing.
2.4.5 Butyl Rubber Based
Provide Butyl Rubber Based Sealants of single component, solvent release,

conforming to ASTM C1311.
2.4.6 Silicon Rubber Base
Provide Silicon Rubber Based Sealants of single component, solvent

release, conforming to ASTM C920, Non-sag.
2.5 CAULKING
Conform to ASTM D2452 and ASTM D2453, Type A, for Oil- and resin-based
caulking.
2.6 CLEANING SOLVENTS
Provide type(s) recommended by the sealant manufacturer except for

aluminum and bronze surfaces that will be in contact with sealant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Clean surfaces from dirt frost, moisture, grease, oil, wax, lacquer,
paint, or other foreign matter that would tend to destroy or impair
adhesion. Remove oil and grease with solvent. Surfaces must be wiped dry
with clean cloths. When resealing an existing joint, remove existing
caulk or sealant prior to applying new sealant. For surface types not
listed below, contact sealant manufacturer for specific recommendations.
3.1.1 Steel Surfaces
Remove loose mill scale by sandblasting or, if sandblasting is impractical

or would damage finish work, scraping and wire brushing. Remove
protective coatings by sandblasting or using a residue-free solvent.
3.1.2 Aluminum or Bronze Surfaces
Remove temporary protective coatings from surfaces that will be in contact

with sealant. When masking tape is used as a protective coating, remove
tape and any residual adhesive just prior to sealant application. For
removing protective coatings and final cleaning, use nonstaining solvents
recommended by the manufacturer of the item(s) containing aluminum or
bronze surfaces.
3.1.3 Concrete and Masonry Surfaces
Where surfaces have been treated with curing compounds, oil, or other such
materials, remove materials by sandblasting or wire brushing. Remove
laitance, efflorescence and loose mortar from the joint cavity.
3.2 SEALANT PREPARATION
Do not add liquids, solvents, or powders to the sealant. Mix

multicomponent elastomeric sealants in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.3 APPLICATION
3.3.1 Joint Width-To-Depth Ratios
a. Acceptable Ratios:
JOINT WIDTH JOINT DEPTH
Minimum Maximum
For metal, glass, or other nonporous surfaces:
1/4 inch (minimum) 1/4 inch 1/4 inch
over 1/4 inch 1/2 of width Equal to width
For wood, concrete, or masonry:
JOINT WIDTH JOINT DEPTH
Minimum Maximum
1/4 inch (minimum) 1/4 inch 1/4 inch
over 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch 1/4 inch Equal to width
over 1/2 inch to 2 inch 1/2 inch 5/8 inch
Over 2 inch As recommended by sealant manufacturer
b. Unacceptable Ratios: Where joints of acceptable width-to-depth ratios

have not been provided, clean out joints to acceptable depths and
grind or cut to acceptable widths without damage to the adjoining
work. Grinding is not required on metal surfaces.
3.3.2 Masking Tape
Place masking tape on the finish surface on one or both sides of a joint
cavity to protect adjacent finish surfaces from primer or sealant smears.
Remove masking tape within 10 minutes after joint has been filled and
tooled.
3.3.3 Backstops
Install backstops dry and free of tears or holes. Tightly pack the back
or bottom of joint cavities with backstop material to provide a joint of
the depth specified. Install backstops in the following locations:
a. Where indicated.
b. Where backstop is not indicated but joint cavities exceed the

acceptable maximum depths specified in paragraph entitled, "Joint
Width-to-Depth Ratios".
3.3.4 Primer
Immediately prior to application of the sealant, clean out loose particles

from joints. Where recommended by sealant manufacturer, apply primer to
joints in concrete masonry units, wood, and other porous surfaces in
accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. Do not apply primer
to exposed finish surfaces.
3.3.5 Bond Breaker
Provide bond breakers to the back or bottom of joint cavities, as

recommended by the sealant manufacturer for each type of joint and sealant
used, to prevent sealant from adhering to these surfaces. Carefully apply
the bond breaker to avoid contamination of adjoining surfaces or breaking
bond with surfaces other than those covered by the bond breaker.
3.3.6 Sealants
Provide a sealant compatible with the material(s) to which it is applied.

Do not use a sealant that has exceeded shelf life or has jelled and can
not be discharged in a continuous flow from the gun. Apply the sealant in
accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions with a gun having

a nozzle that fits the joint width. Force sealant into joints to fill the
joints solidly without air pockets. Tool sealant after application to
ensure adhesion. Make sealant uniformly smooth and free of wrinkles.
Upon completion of sealant application, roughen partially filled or
unfilled joints, apply sealant, and tool smooth as specified. Apply
sealer over the sealant when and as specified by the sealant manufacturer.
3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
3.4.1 Protection
Protect areas adjacent to joints from sealant smears. Masking tape may be
used for this purpose if removed 5 to 10 minutes after the joint is filled.
3.4.2 Final Cleaning
Upon completion of sealant application, remove remaining smears and stains

and leave the work in a clean and neat condition.
a. Masonry and Other Porous Surfaces: Immediately scrape off fresh

sealant that has been smeared on masonry and rub clean with a solvent
as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Allow excess sealant to
cure for 24 hour then remove by wire brushing or sanding.
b. Metal and Other Non-Porous Surfaces: Remove excess sealant with a

solvent-moistened cloth.
SECTION 08 11 13
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

02/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Code - Steel

Sheet, zinc Coated by the Electrolytic
Process for Applications Requiring
Designation of the Coating Mass on Each
Surface
ASTM C591 (2013) Standard Specification for Unfaced

Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate
Thermal Insulation
ASTM D2863 (2013) Measuring the Minimum Oxygen

Concentration to Support Candle-Like
Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index)
ANSI/BHMA A156.115 (2006) Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors

and Steel Frames
NFPA 105 (2013) Standard for Installation of Smoke

Door Assemblies and Other Opening
Protectives
NFPA 252 (2012) Standard Methods of Fire Tests of

Door Assemblies
NFPA 80 (2013) Standard for Fire Doors and Other

Opening Protectives
STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE (SDI/DOOR)
SDI/DOOR 111 (2009) Recommended Selection and Usage

Guide for Standard Steel Doors, Frames and
Accessories
SDI/DOOR 113 (2001; R2006) Standard Practice for
Determining the Steady State Thermal

Transmittance of Steel Door and Frame
Assemblies
SDI/DOOR A250.11 (2001) Recommended Erection Instructions

for Steel Frames
SDI/DOOR A250.6 (2003; R2009) Recommended Practice for

Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel
Doors and Frames
SDI/DOOR A250.8 (2003; R2008) Recommended Specifications

for Standard Steel Doors and Frames
UL 10C (2009) Standard for Positive Pressure Fire

Tests of Door Assemblies
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Doors; G, A/E
Frames; G, A/E
AccessoriesG, A/E
Show elevations, construction details, metal gages, hardware

provisions, method of glazing, and installation details.
Schedule of doors; G, A/E
Schedule of frames; G, A/E
Submit door and frame locations.
SD-03 Product Data
Doors; G, A/E
Frames; G, A/E
Accessories
Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for doors, frames,

and accessories. Include data and details on door construction,
panel (internal) reinforcement, insulation, and door edge
construction. When "custom hollow metal doors" are provided in
lieu of "standard steel doors," provide additional details and
data sufficient for comparison to SDI/DOOR A250.8 requirements.
Deliver doors, frames, and accessories undamaged and with protective

wrappings or packaging. Strap knock-down frames in bundles. Provide
temporary steel spreaders securely fastened to the bottom of each welded
frame. Store doors and frames on platforms under cover in clean, dry,
ventilated, and accessible locations, with 1/4 inch airspace between
doors. Remove damp or wet packaging immediately and wipe affected
surfaces dry. Replace damaged materials with new.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD STEEL DOORS
SDI/DOOR A250.8, except as specified otherwise. Prepare doors to receive

door hardware as specified in Section 08 71 00. Undercut where
indicated. Exterior doors shall have top edge closed flush and sealed to
prevent water intrusion. Doors shall be 1-3/4 inch thick, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.1.1 Classification - Level, Performance, Model
2.1.1.1 Heavy Duty Doors
SDI/DOOR A250.8, Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 1, with core

construction as required by the manufacturer for interior doors and for
exterior doors, of size(s) and design(s) indicated. Where vertical
stiffener cores are required, the space between the stiffeners shall be
filled with mineral board insulation. Provide Level 2 at all locations
unless noted otherwise.
2.1.1.2 Extra Heavy Duty Doors
SDI/DOOR A250.8, Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 1 with core

indicated exterior doors, of size(s) and design(s) indicated. Where
vertical stiffener cores are required, the space between the stiffeners
shall be filled with mineral board insulation. Provide Level 3 at
exterior doors, lobby, and restrooms.
2.1.1.3 Maximum Duty Doors
SDI/DOOR A250.8, Level 4, physical performance Level A, Model 1 with core

indicated exterior doors, of size(s) and design(s) indicated. Where
vertical stiffener cores are required, the space between the stiffeners
shall be filled with mineral board insulation. Provide Level 4 at storage
rooms.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
2.2.1 Louvers
2.2.1.1 Interior Louvers
SDI/DOOR 111, Louvers shall be stationary sightproof type where scheduled.

Detachable moldings on room or non security side of door; on security side
of door, moldings to be integral part of louver. Form louver frames of 20
gage steel and louver blades of a minimum 24 gage. Sightproof louvers to
be inverted "V" blade design with minimum 55 percent net-free opening.
2.2.2 Moldings
Provide moldings around glass of interior and exterior doors and louvers
of interior doors. Provide nonremovable moldings on outside of exterior
doors and on corridor side of interior doors. Other moldings may be
stationary or removable. Secure inside moldings to stationary moldings,
or provide snap-on moldings. Muntins shall interlock at intersections and
shall be fitted and welded to stationary moldings.
2.3 INSULATION CORES
Insulated cores shall be of type specified, and provide an apparent

U-factor of .48 in accordance with SDI/DOOR 113 and shall conform to:
a. Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Foam: ASTM C591, Type I or II,

foamed-in-place or in board form, with oxygen index of not less
than 22 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D2863; or
2.4 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
SDI/DOOR A250.8, Level 2, except as otherwise specified. Form frames to

sizes and shapes indicated, with welded corners. Provide steel frames for
doors, transoms, sidelights, mullions, cased openings, and interior glazed
panels, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4.1 Welded Frames
Continuously weld frame faces at corner joints. Mechanically interlock or

continuously weld stops and rabbets. Grind welds smooth.
Weld frames in accordance with the recommended practice of the Structural

Welding Code Sections 1 through 6, AWS D1.1/D1.1M and in accordance with
the practice specified by the producer of the metal being welded.
2.4.2 Mullions and Transom Bars
Mullions and transom bars shall be closed or tubular construction and be a

member with heads and jambs butt-welded thereto . Bottom of door mullions
shall have adjustable floor anchors and spreader connections.
2.4.3 Stops and Beads
Form stops and beads from 20 gage steel. Provide for glazed and other
openings in standard steel frames. Secure beads to frames with oval-head,
countersunk Phillips self-tapping sheet metal screws or concealed clips
and fasteners. Space fasteners approximately 12 to 16 inch on center.
Miter molded shapes at corners. Butt or miter square or rectangular beads
at corners.
2.4.4 Terminated Stops
Where indicated, terminate interior door frame stops 6 inch above floor.
2.4.5 Cased Openings
Fabricate frames for cased openings of same material, gage, and assembly
as specified for metal door frames, except omit door stops and preparation
for hardware.
2.4.6 Anchors
Provide anchors to secure the frame to adjoining construction. Provide

steel anchors, zinc-coated or painted with rust-inhibitive paint, not
lighter than 18 gage.
2.4.6.1 Wall Anchors
Provide at least three anchors for each jamb. For frames which are more
than 7.5 feet in height, provide one additional anchor for each jamb for
each additional 2.5 feet or fraction thereof.
a. Masonry: Provide anchors of corrugated or perforated steel straps

or 3/16 inch diameter steel wire, adjustable or T-shaped;
b. Stud partitions: Weld or otherwise securely fasten anchors to

backs of frames. Design anchors to be fastened to closed steel
studs with sheet metal screws, and to open steel studs by wiring
or welding;
c. Completed openings: Secure frames to previously placed concrete

or masonry with expansion bolts in accordance with SDI/DOOR 111;
and
2.4.6.2 Floor Anchors
Provide floor anchors drilled for 3/8 inch anchor bolts at bottom of each
jamb member. Where floor fill occurs, terminate bottom of frames at the
indicated finished floor levels and support by adjustable extension clips
resting on and anchored to the structural slabs.
2.5 FIRE DOORS AND FRAMES
NFPA 80 and NFPA 105 and this specification. The requirements of NFPA 80
and NFPA 105 shall take precedence over details indicated or specified.
2.5.1 Labels
Fire doors and frames shall bear the label of Underwriters Laboratories
(UL), Factory Mutual Engineering and Research (FM), or Warnock Hersey
International (WHI) attesting to the rating required. Testing shall be in
accordance with NFPA 252 or UL 10C. Labels shall be metal with raised
letters, and shall bear the name or file number of the door and frame
manufacturer. Labels shall be permanently affixed at the factory to
frames and to the hinge edge of the door. Door labels shall not be
painted.
2.5.2 Astragal on Fire Doors
On pairs of labeled fire doors, conform to NFPA 80 and UL requirements.
2.6 WEATHERSTRIPPING
As specified in Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE.
2.7 HARDWARE PREPARATION
Provide minimum hardware reinforcing gages as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.6.

Drill and tap doors and frames to receive finish hardware. Prepare doors
and frames for hardware in accordance with the applicable requirements of
SDI/DOOR A250.8 and SDI/DOOR A250.6. For additional requirements refer to
ANSI/BHMA A156.115. Drill and tap for surface-applied hardware at the
project site. Build additional reinforcing for surface-applied hardware
into the door at the factory. Locate hardware in accordance with the
requirements of SDI/DOOR A250.8, as applicable. Punch door frames , with
the exception of frames that will have weatherstripping to receive a
minimum of two rubber or vinyl door silencers on lock side of single doors
and one silencer for each leaf at heads of double doors. Set lock strikes
out to provide clearance for silencers.
2.8 FINISHES
2.8.1 Factory-Primed Finish
All surfaces of doors and frames shall be thoroughly cleaned, chemically

treated and factory primed with a rust inhibiting coating as specified in
SDI/DOOR A250.8. , or paintable A25 galvannealed steel without primer.
Where coating is removed by welding, apply touchup of factory primer.
2.8.2 Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Anchors and Accessories
Provide electrolytically deposited zinc-coated steel in accordance with

ASTM A879/A879M, Commercial Quality, Coating Class A. Phosphate treat and
factory prime zinc-coated surfaces as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8.
2.9 FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP
Finished doors and frames shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance,
and free from defects, waves, scratches, cuts, dents, ridges, holes, warp,
and buckle. Molded members shall be clean cut, straight, and true, with
joints coped or mitered, well formed, and in true alignment. Dress
exposed welded and soldered joints smooth. Design door frame sections for
use with the wall construction indicated. Corner joints shall be well
formed and in true alignment. Conceal fastenings where practicable.
Frames for use in solid plaster partitions shall be welded construction.
Design other frames in exposed masonry walls or partitions to allow
sufficient space between the inside back of trim and masonry to receive
caulking compound.
2.10 PROVISIONS FOR GLAZING
Materials are specified in Section 08 81 00, GLAZING.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Frames
Set frames in accordance with SDI/DOOR A250.11. Plumb, align, and brace
securely until permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottoms of frames with
expansion bolts or powder-actuated fasteners. Build in or secure wall
anchors to adjoining construction. Where frames require ceiling struts or
overhead bracing, anchor frames to the struts or bracing. Backfill frames
with mortar. Coat inside of frames with corrosion-inhibiting bituminous

material. For frames in exterior walls, ensure that stops are filled with
rigid insulation before grout is placed.
3.1.2 Doors
Hang doors in accordance with clearances specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8.

After erection and glazing, clean and adjust hardware.
3.1.3 Fire Doors and Frames
Install fire doors and frames, including hardware, in accordance with

NFPA 80.
3.2 PROTECTION
Protect doors and frames from damage. Repair damaged doors and frames
prior to completion and acceptance of the project or replace with new, as
directed. Wire brush rusted frames until rust is removed. Clean
thoroughly. Apply an all-over coat of rust-inhibitive paint of the same
type used for shop coat.
3.3 CLEANING
Upon completion, clean exposed surfaces of doors and frames thoroughly.

Remove mastic smears and other unsightly marks.
SECTION 08 11 16
ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES

08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES



Structural Steel


ASTM E1300 (2012a; E 2012) Determining Load

Resistance of Glass in Buildings


Pressure Difference
ASTM F1642 (2012) Standard Test Method for Glazing

and Glazing Systems Subject to Airblast
Loadings
ASTM F2248 (2012) Standard Practice for Specifying an

Equivalent 3-Second Duration Design
Loading for Blast Resistant Glazing
Fabricated with Laminated Glass
1.2.1 Structural
Exterior doors, frames and hardware shall be designed to resist equivalent

static design loads in accordance with ASTM F1642. Frame deflections
shall not exceed L/160 of the unsupported member lengths. Equivalent

static design loads for connections of window or door frame to the
surrounding walls or hardware and associated connections, and glazing stop
connections shall be in accordance with ASTM F2248 and ASTM E1300. Design
supporting elements and their connections based on their ultimate
capacities. Provide calculations of a Professional Engineer that
substantiates compliance with these requirements. Use frames that provide
an equivalent level of performance. Shapes and thicknesses of framing
members shall be sufficient to withstand a design wind load of not less
than 30 pounds per square foot of supported area with a deflection of not
more than 1/175 times the length of the member and a safety factor of not
less than 1.65. Provide glazing beads, moldings, and trim of not less than
0.050 inch nominal thickness.
1.2.2 Air Infiltration
When tested in accordance with ASTM E283, air infiltration shall not exceed
0.06 cubic feet per minute per square footof fixed area at a test
pressure of 6.24 pounds per square foot ( 50 mile per hour wind).
1.2.3 Water Penetration
When tested in accordance with ASTM E331, there shall be no water

penetration at a pressure of 8 pounds per square foot of fixed area.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Doors, windows and frames; G, A/E
Show elevations of each door type, size of doors and frames, metal
gages, details of door and frame construction, methods of
anchorage, glazing details, weatherstripping, provisions for and
location of hardware, and details of installation.
SD-04 Samples
Finish sampleG, A/E
SD-05 Design Data
Structural calculations for deflection; G
Doors and frames
Submit detail specifications and instructions for installation,

adjustments, cleaning, and maintenance.
Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage. Unload and store with
minimum handling. Provide storage space in dry location with adequate
ventilation, free from dust or water, and easily accessible for inspection
and handling. Stack materials on nonabsorptive strips or wood platforms.
Do not cover doors and frames with tarps, polyethylene film, or similar
coverings. Protect finished surfaces during shipping and handling using
manufacturer's standard method, except that no coatings or lacquers shall
be applied to surfaces to which caulking and glazing compounds must adhere.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
1.5.1 Shop Drawing Requirements
Drawings shall indicate elevations of doors, windows and frames, full-size

sections, thickness and gages of metal, fastenings, proposed method of
anchoring, size and spacing of anchors, details of construction, method of
glazing, details of operating hardware, mullion details, method and
materials for weatherstripping, material and method of attaching subframes,
trim, installation details, and other related items.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DOORS AND FRAMES
Swing-type aluminum doors and frames of size, design, and location

indicated. Provide doors complete with frames, framing members , subframes,
transoms, adjoining sidelights, trim, and accessories.
2.2 MATERIALS
2.2.1 Anchors
Stainless steel or steel with hot-dipped galvanized finish.
2.2.2 Weatherstripping
Continuous wool pile, silicone treated, or type recommended by door

manufacturer.
2.2.3 Aluminum Alloy for Doors and Frames
ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions. ASTM B209, alloy and temper
best suited for aluminum sheets and strips.
2.2.4 Fasteners
Hard aluminum or stainless steel.
ASTM A36/A36M.
2.2.6 Aluminum Paint
Aluminum door manufacturer's standard aluminum paint.
2.3 FABRICATION
2.3.1 Aluminum Frames
Extruded aluminum shapes with contours approximately as indicated.

Provide removable glass stops and glazing beads for frames accommodating
fixed glass. Use countersunk stainless steel Phillips screws for exposed
fastenings, and space not more than 12 inches on center. Mill joints in
frame members to a hairline fit, reinforce, and secure mechanically.
2.3.2 Aluminum Doors
Of type, size, and design indicated and not less than 1-3/4 inch thick.
Minimum wall thickness, 0.125 inch, except beads and trim, 0.050 inch.
Door sizes shown are nominal and shall include standard clearances as
follows: 0.093 inch at hinge and lock stiles, 0.125 inch between meeting
stiles, 0.125 inch at top rails, 0.187 inch between bottom and threshold,
and 0.687 inch between bottom and floor. Bevel single-acting doors 0.063
or 0.125 inch at lock, hinge, and meeting stile edges.
2.3.2.1 Full Glazed Stile and Rail Doors
Doors shall have narrow or medium stiles and rails as indicated. Fabricate
from extruded aluminum hollow seamless tubes or from a combination of
open-shaped members interlocked or welded together. Fasten top and bottom
rail together by means of welding or by 3/8 or 1/2 inch diameter
cadmium-plated tensioned steel tie rods. Provide an adjustable mechanism
of jack screws or other methods in the top rail to allow for minor
clearance adjustments after installation.
2.3.3 Welding and Fastening
Where possible, locate welds on unexposed surfaces. Dress welds on

exposed surfaces smoothly. Select welding rods, filler wire, and flux to
produce a uniform texture and color in finished work. Remove flux and
spatter from surfaces immediately after welding. Exposed screws or bolts
will be permitted only in inconspicuous locations, and shall have
countersunk heads. Weld concealed reinforcements for hardware in place.
2.3.4 Weatherstripping
Provide on stiles and rails of exterior doors. Fit into slots which are
integral with doors or frames. Weatherstripping shall be replaceable
without special tools, and adjustable at meeting rails of pairs of doors.
Installation shall allow doors to swing freely and close positively. Air
leakage of a single leaf weatherstripped door shall not exceed 0.5 cubic
feet per minute of air per square foot of door area when tested in
accordance with ASTM E283.
2.3.5 Anchors
On the backs of subframes, provide anchors of the sizes and shapes

indicated for securing subframes to adjacent construction. Anchor transom
bars at ends and mullions at head and sill. Where indicated, reinforce
vertical mullions with structural steel members of sufficient length to
extend up to the overhead structural slab or framing and secure thereto.
Place anchors near top and bottom of each jamb and at intermediate points
not more than 25 inch apart.
2.3.6 Provisions for Hardware
Coordinate with Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE. Deliver hardware

templates and hardware (except field-applied hardware) to the door
manufacturer for use in fabrication of aluminum doors and frames. Cut,
reinforce, drill, and tap doors and frames at the factory to receive
template hardware. Provide doors to receive surface-applied hardware,
except push plates, kick plates, and mop plates, with reinforcing only;
drill and tap in the field. Provide hardware reinforcements of stainless
steel or steel with hot-dipped galvanized finish, and secure with
stainless steel screws.
2.3.7 Provisions for Glazing
Provide extruded aluminum snap-in glazing beads on interior side of doors.

Provide extruded aluminum, theft-proof, snap-in glazing beads or fixed
glazing beads on exterior or security side of doors. Glazing beads shall
have vinyl insert glazing gaskets. Design glazing beads to receive glass
of thickness indicated or specified.
2.3.8 Finishes
Provide exposed aluminum surfaces with factory finish of anodic coating or

organic coating.
2.3.8.1 Anodic Coating
Clean exposed aluminum surfaces and provide an anodized finish conforming

to AA DAF45. Finish shall be clear (natural), designation AA-M10-C22-A31,
Architectural Class II 0.4 mil to 0.7 mil, clear (natural), designation
AA-M10-C22-A41, Architectural Class I 0.7 mil or thicker, electrolytically
deposited color-anodized, designation AA-M10-C22-A34, Architectural Class
II 0.4 mil to 0.7 mil or electrolytically deposited color-anodized,
designation AA-M10-C22-A44, Architectural Class I 0.7 mil or thicker.
Color shall be as indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Plumb, square, level, and align frames and framing members to receive doors
transoms and adjoining sidelights. Anchor frames to adjacent construction
as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
Anchor bottom of each frame to rough floor construction with 3/32 inch
thick stainless steel angle clips secured to back of each jamb and to
floor construction; use stainless steel bolts and expansion rivets for
fastening clip anchors. Hang doors to produce clearances specified in
paragraph entitled "Aluminum Doors," of this section. After erection and
glazing, adjust doors and hardware to operate properly.
3.2 PROTECTION FROM DISSIMILAR MATERIALS
3.2.1 Dissimilar Metals
Where aluminum surfaces come in contact with metals other than stainless
steel, zinc, or small areas of white bronze, protect from direct contact
to dissimilar metals.
3.2.1.1 Protection
Provide one of the following systems to protect surfaces in contact with

dissimilar metals:
a. Paint the dissimilar metal with one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous

paint.
b. Apply a good quality elastomeric sealant between the aluminum and the
dissimilar metal.
c. Paint the dissimilar metal with one coat of primer and one coat of
aluminum paint.
d. Use a nonabsorptive tape or gasket in permanently dry locations.
3.2.2 Drainage from Dissimilar Metals
In locations where drainage from dissimilar metals has direct contact with
aluminum, provide protective paint to prevent aluminum discoloration.
3.2.3 Masonry and Concrete
Provide aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, or other

masonry materials with one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
3.2.4 Wood or Other Absorptive Materials
Provide aluminum surfaces in contact with absorptive materials subject to

frequent moisture, and aluminum surfaces in contact with treated wood,
with two coats of aluminum paint or one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous
paint. In lieu of painting the aluminum, the Contractor shall have the
option of painting the wood or other absorptive surface with two coats of
aluminum paint and sealing the joints with elastomeric sealant.
3.3 CLEANING
Upon completion of installation, clean door and frame surfaces in

accordance with door manufacturer's written recommended procedure. Do not
use abrasive, caustic, or acid cleaning agents.
3.4 PROTECTION
Protect doors and frames from damage and from contamination by other
materials such as cement mortar. Prior to completion and acceptance of
the work, restore damaged doors and frames to original condition, or
replace with new ones.
SECTION 08 44 00
CURTAIN WALL AND GLAZED ASSEMBLIES

08/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AA ADM (2010) Aluminum Design Manual
AA ASD1 (2013) Aluminum Standards and Data
AAMA 501.1 (2005) Standard Test Method for Water

Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls and
Doors Using Dynamic Pressure
AAMA 501.4 & 501.6 (2009) Recommended Static Test Method for
Evaluating Curtain Wall and Storefront
Systems Subjected to Seismic and Wind
Induced Interstory Drifts & Recommended
Dynamic Test Method for Determining the
Seismic Drift Causing Glass Fallout from a
Wall System
AAMA 609 & 610 (2009) Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for
Architecturally Finished Aluminum
AAMA 611 (1998; R 2004) Voluntary Specification for

Anodized Architectural Aluminum
AAMA 800 (2010) Voluntary Specifications and Test

Methods for Sealants
AAMA CW-10 (2004) Care and Handling of Architectural

Aluminum from Shop to Site
AAMA MCWM-1 (1989) Metal Curtain Wall Manual
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 (2011) Standard/Specification for Windows,

Doors, and Skylights
AISC/AISI 121 (2004) Standard Definitions for Use in the

Design of Steel Structures
AISI SG03-3 (2002; Suppl 2001-2004; R 2008)


Structures
AWS A5.1/A5.1M (2012) Specification for Carbon Steel

Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
AWS A5.10/A5.10M (2012) Welding Consumables - Wire

Electrodes, Wires and Rods for Welding of
Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloys -
Classification

Code - Steel

Sheet, and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and
High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability and Ultra-High Strength

Steel Products

Hardware


Plates

Structural Steel


Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing

High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium
Structural Steel

the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM B136 (1984; R 2013) Standard Method for

Measurement of Stain Resistance of Anodic
Coatings on Aluminum
ASTM B137 (1995; R 2014) Standard Test Method for

Measurement of Coating Mass Per Unit Area
on Anodically Coated Aluminum


and Aluminum-Alloy Bar, Rod, and Wire

ASTM B244 (2009; R 2014) Standard Method for

Measurement of Thickness of Anodic
Coatings on Aluminum and of Other
Nonconductive Coatings on Nonmagnetic
Basis Metals with Eddy-Current Instruments

ASTM B316/B316M (2010) Standard Specification for Aluminum

and Aluminum-Alloy Rivet and Cold-Heading
Wire and Rods

Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings
ASTM C1036 (2010; E 2012) Standard Specification for

Flat Glass

Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT
Coated and Uncoated Glass
ASTM C1363 (2011) Standard Test Method for Thermal

Performance of Building Materials and
Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box
Apparatus
ASTM C542 (2005; R 2011) Lock-Strip Gaskets
ASTM C864 (2005; R 2011) Dense Elastomeric

Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks,
and Spacers

ASTM D1037 (2012) Evaluating Properties of Wood-Base

Fiber and Particle Panel Materials
ASTM D1730 (2009; R 2014) Standard Practices for

Preparation of Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Surfaces for Painting

Materials


ASTM E330/E330M (2014) Structural Performance of Exterior

Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain
Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference

Pressure Difference
ASTM E34 (2011) Chemical Analysis of Aluminum and

Aluminum-Base Alloys
ASTM E546 (2008) Frost Point of Sealed Insulating

Glass Units
ASTM E576 (2008) Frost Point of Sealed Insulating

Glass Units in the Vertical Position
ASTM E774 (1997) Classification of the Durability of

Sealed Insulating Glass Units

Materials
NAAMM AMP 500 (2006) Metal Finishes Manual
SSPC 7/NACE No.4 (2007; E 2004) Brush-Off Blast Cleaning
SSPC SP 1 (1982; E 2004) Solvent Cleaning
16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing

Materials
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Glazed curtain wall system; G, A/E
Submit for curtain wall system and accessories. Drawings shall

indicate in detail all system parts including elevations,
full-size sections, framing, jointing, panels, types and thickness
of metal, flashing and coping details, field connections, weep and
drainage system, finishes, sealing methods, glazing, glass sizes
and details, firestopping insulation materials, and erection
details.
Installation Drawings; G, A/E
Shop-Painting Aluminum; G, A/E
Shop-Painting Steel; G, A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Glazed curtain wall system; G, A/E
Include descriptive literature, detailed specifications, and

available performance test data.
Preventive Maintenance and Inspection; G
Metals For Fabrication; G
Nonskinning Sealing Compound; G
Metal Accessories; G, A/E
Curtain-wall Framing Members; G, A/E
Aluminum Doors and Frames; G, A/E
Curtain Wall Frame; G, A/E
Thermal Insulation Materials; G, A/E
Sealants and Caulkings; G, A/E
Curtain-Wall Installation Materials; G, A/E
Masonry Anchorage Devices; G, A/E
Sample warranties; G
SD-05 Design Data
Calculations; G, A/E
Finish; G, A/E
Exposed-to-View Aluminum Finish; G, A/E
Seismic Calculations; G, A/E
Glazed curtain wall system; G
Insulating glass; G
WARRANTY; G
1.3 REQUIREMENT FOR DESIGN DATA
Submit structural and thermal calculations for complete wall assembly.
A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in

jurisdiction where project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are
defined as those performed for installations of curtain wall that are
similar to those indicated for this project in material, design, and
extent.
1.4.1 Testing Requirements
The components listed below shall be tested in accordance with the

requirements below, and meet performance requirements specified.
a. Joint and Glazing Sealants: Perform tests as required by applicable

publications referenced.
b. Preformed Compression Gaskets and Seals: ASTM C864.
c. Preformed Lock-strip Gaskets: ASTM C542, modified as follows: Heat

age specimens seven days at 158 degrees F, in zipped or locked
position under full design compression. Unzip, cool for one hour,
re-zip, and test lip seal pressure, which must be minimum 2.5 pounds
per linear inch on any extruded or corner specimen.
d. Spandrel Glass: Fallout resistance test, ASTM C1048.
e. Anodized Finishes: Stain resistance, coating weight, and coating

thickness tests, ASTM B136, ASTM B137, and ASTM B244, respectively.
f. Insulating Glass: ASTM E546 or ASTM E576 at minus 20 degrees F, no

frost or dew point.
1.4.2 Factory Tests
Perform the following tests except that where a curtain wall system or
component of similar type, size, and design as specified for this project
has been previously tested, under the conditions specified herein.
1.4.2.1 Deflection and Structural Tests
No curtain wall framing member shall deflect, in a direction normal to the

plane of the wall, more than 1/175 of its clear span or 3/4 inch,
whichever is less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, except
that when a plastered surface will be affected the deflection shall not
exceed 1/360 of the span. No framing member shall have a permanent
deformation in excess of 0.2 percent of its clear span when tested in
accordance with ASTM E330/E330M for a minimum test period of 10 seconds at
1.5 times the design wind pressures specified.
1.4.2.2 Water Penetration Test
No water penetration shall occur when the wall is tested in accordance

with ASTM E331 at a differential static test pressure of 20 percent of the
inward acting design wind pressure as specified, but not less than 4 psf.
Make provision in the wall construction for adequate drainage to the
outside of water leakage or condensation that occurs within the outer face
of the wall. Leave drainage and weep openings in members and wall open
during test.
1.4.2.3 Air Infiltration Test
Air infiltration through the wall, when tested in accordance with ASTM E283,
shall not exceed 0.06 cfm per square foot of fixed wall area, plus the
permissible allowance specified for operable windows within the test area.
1.4.2.4 Delamination Test
Adhesively bonded metal-faced panels shall show no evidence of

delamination, warpage or other deterioration or damage when subjected to
the six "Accelerated Aging Cycles" specified in ASTM D1037.
1.4.2.5 Thermal Conductance Tests
The thermal transmittance of opaque panels shall not exceed specified

U-value, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363. Determine U-values of
components in accordance with ASTM C1363.
1.4.2.6 Window Tests
neProvide windows that meet the same requirements for deflection and
structural adequacy as specified for framing members when tested in
accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, except permanent deformation shall not
exceed 0.4 percent; there shall be no glass breakage, and no permanent
damage to fasteners, anchors, hardware, or operating devices. Provide
windows that have no water penetration when tested in accordance with
ASTM E331.
1.4.2.7 Fire Resistance Tests
Insulation provided in the curtain wall system and field applied in
conjunction with the curtain wall system shall have a flame spread rating
not exceeding 75 and a smoke developed rating not exceeding 150 when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84, except as specified otherwise herein.
a. Insulation: Insulation contained entirely within panel assemblies

which meets the flame spread and smoke developed ratings of 75 and 150
respectively is not required to comply with the flame spread and smoke
developed ratings specified.
b. Curtain Wall Systems: Material for firestopping the opening between

the edge of the floor slab and back of the curtain wall system, shall
have not less than the flame spread and smoke developed ratings
specified for insulation which is neither isolated from the building
interior nor encased in masonry cores.
c. Firestopping Materials and Devices: Firestopping material and

attachment devices shall be an effective barrier against the spread of
fire, smoke, and gases when exposed to the conditions of the standard
ASTM E119time-temperature curve for a period equivalent to the fire
rating of the floor system and shall also be rated noncombustible when
tested in accordance with ASTM E136.
1.5 GLAZED CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Provide system complete with framing, mullions, trim, framed pre-assembled

units, panels, windows, glass, glazing, sealants, insulation, fasteners,
anchors, accessories, concealed auxiliary members, and attachment devices
for securing the wall to the structure as specified or indicated.
1.5.1 Source
Furnish curtain wall system components by one manufacturer or fabricator;

however, all components need not be products of the same manufacturer.
1.5.2 Design
Stick system with mullions, horizontal rails, window units, framed

pre-assembled units with integral spandrel panels. Fully coordinate
system accessories directly incorporated, and adjacent to contiguous
related work and insure materials compatibility, deflection limitations,
thermal movements, and clearances and tolerances as indicated or specified.
1.5.3 Thermal Movement
Fabricate, assemble, and erect system with adequate allowances for

expansion and contraction of components and fastenings to prevent buckling
damage, joint seal failure, glass breakage, undue stress on fastenings or
other detrimental effects. For design purposes, base provisions for
thermal movement on assumed ambient temperature range of from -10 degrees F
to 110 degrees F.
1.5.4 Tolerances
Design and erect wall system to accommodate tolerances in building frame

and other contiguous work as indicated or specified. Provide with the
following tolerances:
a. Maximum variation from plane or location shown on approved shop

drawings: 1/8 inch per 12 feet of length up to not more than 1/2 inch
in any total length.
b. Maximum offset from true alignment between two identical members

abutting end to end in line: 1/16 inch.
1.5.5 Structural Requirements
No member shall deflect in a direction parallel to the plane of the wall,

when carrying its full design load, more than an amount which will reduce
the edge cover or glass bite below 75 percent of the design dimension. No
member after deflection under full design load, shall have a clearance
between itself and the top of the panel, glass, sash, or other part
immediately below it less than 1/8 inch; the clearance between the member
and an operable window or door shall be minimum 1/16 inch. Design entire
system to withstand the indicated wind and concentrated loads, and the
following wind loads acting normal to the plane of the wall:
a. On the first two stories above grade refer to structural drawings for
psf acting inward, and the same load acting outward.
1.5.6 Seismic Calculations
When tested to AAMA 501.4 & 501.6, system shall meet design displacement
of 0.010 times the story height and ultimate displacement of 1.5 times the
design displacement. Provide with the following tolerances:
a. Phase I: 3 stroke cycles using .005 times the story height - no

damage or failure.
b. Phase II: 3 stroke cycles using .010 times the story height - no
damage or failure.
Welding shall be performed by certified welders qualified in accordance

with AWS D1.1/D1.1M using procedures, materials, and equipment of the type
required for the work.
Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage; unload and store with
a minimum of handling in accordance with recommendations contained in
AAMA CW-10. Storage spaces shall be dry locations with adequate
ventilation, free from heavy dust, not subject to combustion products or
sources of water, and shall permit easy access for inspection and
handling. Deliver caulking and sealing compounds to the job site in sealed
containers labeled to show the designated name, formula or specifications
number; lot number; color; date of manufacturer; shelf life; and curing
time when applicable.
1.7.1 Protective Covering
Prior to shipment from the factory, place knocked-down lineal members in

cardboard containers and cover finished surfaces of aluminum with
protective covering of adhesive paper, waterproof tape, or strippable
plastic. Covering shall not chip, peel, or flake due to temperature or
weather, shall protect against discoloration and surface damage from
transportation, and storage, and shall be resistant to alkaline mortar and
plaster. Do not cover aluminum surfaces that will be in contact with
sealants after installation.
1.7.2 Identification
Prior to delivery, mark wall components to correspond with shop and

erection drawings placement location and erection.
1.8 WARRANTY
Guarantee insulating glass units not to develop material obstruction of

vision as a result of dust or film formation on the inner glass surface
caused by failure of the seal, other than through glass breakage, within a
period of 5 years from date of acceptance of work by the Government.
Replace units failing to comply with the terms of this guarantee with new
units without additional cost to the Government. The Contractor shall
require the manufacturer to execute their warranties in writing directly
to the Government.
1.8.1 Sample Warranties
Provide curtain wall and glazing assemblies material and workmanship

warranties meeting specified requirements. Provide revision or amendment
to standard membrane manufacturer warranty to comply with the specified
requirements.
a. Project Warranty: Refer to Section 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK and

Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES for project warranty provisions.
b. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance,

Manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized
company official manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a
limitation of, other rights Owner may have under the Contract
Documents.
c. Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair or replace components of steel fire-rated glazed
curtain-wall systems that do not comply with requirements or that
deteriorate as defined in this Section within specified warranty period.
d. Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within
specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal
weathering. Determine warranty on finish by type of finish selected.
e. Beneficiary: Issue warranty in the legal name of the project Owner.
f. Warranty Period: 10 years commencing on Date of Substantial

Completion, covering complete curtain wall system for failure to meet
specified requirements.
g. Warranty Acceptance: Owner is sole authority who will determine

acceptability of manufacturer's warranty documents.
1.9 INTERPRETATION OF AWS CODE

section.
AWS code, when referred to herein, shall mean AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel" with the following modification:
Revise AWS code Section 1, "General Provisions," Paragraph 1.1 as follows:

References to the need for approval shall mean "Approval by the
Contracting Officer" and references to the "Building Commissioner" shall
mean the "Contracting Officer."
1.10 QUALIFICATIONS FOR THE CURTAIN-WALL INSTALLER
Submit a written description of the proposed curtain-wall system installer

giving the name of the curtain-wall manufacturer, qualifications of
personnel, years of concurrent contracting experience, lists of projects
similar in scope to the specified work, and other information as may be
required by the Contracting Officer.
1.11.1 Allowable Design Stresses
Aluminum-alloy framing member allowable design stresses shall be in

accordance with the requirements of AA ADM pertaining to building type
structures made of the specified aluminum alloy.
Hot-rolled structural-steel member allowable design stresses and design

rules shall be in accordance with the requirements of AISC/AISI 121
pertaining to the specified structural steel.
Cold-formed light-gage steel structural member allowable design stresses

and design rules shall be in accordance with the requirements of
AISI SG03-3SG570 pertaining to structural members formed from the
specified structural-steel sheet or strip.
1.11.2 Design Wind Load
Design windload shall be in accordance with the structural drawings.

Design windload shall be in accordance with ASCE 7.
1.11.3 Structural Capacity
Design curtain-wall system, including framing members, windows, doors and

frames, metal accessories, panels, and glazing to withstand the specified
design windload acting normal to the plane of the curtain wall and acting
either inward or outward.
Deflection of any metal framing member in a direction normal to the plane

of the curtain wall, when subjected to the test of structural performance,
using the specified windload in accordance with
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, shall not exceed 1/175 of the clear span of
the member or 3/4 inch, whichever value is less.
Deflection of any metal member in a direction parallel to the plane of the

curtain wall, when the metal member is carrying its full design load,
shall not exceed 75 percent of the design clearance dimension between that
member and the glass, sash, panels, or other part immediately below it.
1.11.4 Provisions for Thermal Movement
Design curtain-wall systems, including framing members, windows, doors and

frames, metal accessories, and other components incorporated into the
curtain wall, to allow for expansion and contraction of the component

parts at an ambient temperature of 100 degrees F without causing buckling,
opening of joints, overstressing of fasteners, or other harmful effects.
1.12 DRAWINGS
Installation Drawings shall include the following information for curtain

wall assemblies.
Curtain-wall locations in building, layout and elevations, dimensions,

shapes and sizes of members, thickness of metals, types and locations of
shop and field connections, details of anchorage to building construction,
glazing provisions, and other pertinent construction and erection details.
Location and details of anchorage devices that are to be cast-in-place in

concrete and masonry construction.
Panel dimensions, thicknesses and kinds of materials, edge details,

details of installation in curtain-wall framing, and other pertinent
construction and erection details.
1.13 MANUFACTURER'S INFORMATION
Preventive Maintenance and Inspection shall consist of the aluminum

manufacturer's recommended cleaning materials and application methods,
including detrimental effects to the aluminum finish when improperly
applied.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Aluminum
Shall be free from defects impairing strength or durability of surface

finish. Provide standard alloys shall conform to standards and
designations of AA ASD1. Special alloys, not covered by the following
ASTM specifications, shall conform to standards and designations
recommended by the manufacturer for the purpose intended.
2.1.1.1 Wrought Aluminum Alloys
Shall be those which include aluminum alloying elements not exceeding the
following maximum limits when tested and additional in accordance with
ASTM E34. These limits apply to both bare products and the core of clad
products. The cladding of clad products shall be within the same limits
except that the maximum zinc limit may be 2.5 percent in order to assure
that the cladding is anodic to the core. Special wrought alloys with a
silicon content not more than 7.0 percent will be acceptable for limited
structural uses where special appearance is required:
ALLOY PERCENT
Silicon 1.5
ALLOY PERCENT
Magnesium, Manganese, and 6.0

Chromium combined
Iron 1.0
Copper 0.4
Zinc 1.0
Within the chemical composition limits set forth above, wrought aluminum
alloys shall conform to the following:
a. Extruded bars, rods, shapes and tubes: ASTM B221.
b. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209.
2.1.1.2 Cast Aluminum Alloys
Provide those in which the alloying elements are silicon, magnesium,

manganese, or a combination of these. Other elements shall not exceed the
following limits:
ALLOY PERCENT
Iron 1.2
Copper 0.4
Nickel 0.4
Titanium 0.2
Others (total) 0.5
Within the chemical composition limits set forth above, cast aluminum
alloys shall conform to the following:
a. Sand castings: ASTM B26/B26M.
b. Die casting: ASTM B85/B85M.
c. Permanent mold castings: ASTM B108/B108M.
2.1.1.3 Welding Rods and Electrodes
Provide welding rods and bare electrodes shall conform to AWS A5.10/A5.10M
as recommended by the manufacturer of the aluminum base metal alloy being
used.
2.1.1.4 Finish
Anodized finish on aluminum surfaces shall match in appearance or fall

within the two extremes of color range of the approved samples. The
following designation of finishes refer to standard finishes as defined in

the NAAMM AMP 500. Aluminum used for framing shall have a color anodized
finish designation AA-MIO-C22-A34 and AA-MIOC22-A44, meeting the
requirements of AAMA 611.
2.1.1.5 Strength
Aluminum extrusions for framing members used in curtain walls and main
frame and sash or ventilator members in windows shall have a minimum
ultimate tensile strength of 22,000 psi and a minimum yield strength of
16,000 psi.
2.1.2 High-Strength, Low-Alloy Steel
Conform to ASTM A572/A572M for structural shapes, plates, and bars.
2.1.3 Metal Fasteners
Provide fasteners as specified in paragraph entitled "Fastener Metals for

Joining Various Metal Combinations" in "Part 2 - Products" of the
AAMA MCWM-1. Use metals for fasteners shall be chemically and
galvanically compatible with contiguous materials.
2.1.4 Joint Sealants and Accessories
Provide manufacturer's standard colors as closely matching the adjacent

surfaces as possible.
2.1.4.1 Elastomeric, Single or Multiple Component
ASTM C920, Type S, single component. Use Grade NS, nonsag type in joints
on vertical surfaces and use Grade P, self-leveling or flow type, in
joints on horizontal surfaces.
2.1.4.2 Single Component Silicone Rubber Base
ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS (Silicone).
2.1.4.3 Solvents and Primers
Provide material which is quick drying, colorless, nonstaining, compatible

with compound used, as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Where primer
is specified or recommended by sealant manufacturer, tests related to that
material shall include primer.
2.1.4.4 Backing Material
Provide material which is nonstaining, nonabsorbent, and compatible with

sealing compound. Closed cell resilient urethane, polyvinylchloride or
polyethylene foam; closed-cell sponge of vinyl or rubber; closed cell
neoprene or butyl rod; or polychloroprene tubes or beads.
2.1.4.5 Bond Preventive Materials
Provide polyethylene tape with pressure-sensitive adhesive; aluminum foil

or waxed paper.
2.1.4.6 Preformed Sealing Compound
Provide nonskinning type conforming to AAMA 800. Tapes, beads, ribbons or

other shapes as required.
2.1.5 Glass and Glazing
Materials are specified under Section 08 81 00 GLAZING. Conform to

ASTM C1036, except ASTM C1048 for spandrel glass. All glazing material
must be certified as meeting 16 CFR 1201.
2.1.5.1 Glass Sizes and Clearances
Sizes indicated are nominal. Verify actual sizes required by measuring

frames. Coordinate dimensions for glass and glass holding members to meet
applicable minimum clearances as recommended by glass manufacturer. Do
not nip to remove flares or to reduce oversized dimensions.
2.1.5.2 Insulating Glass
Fused glass, banded, or unbanded. Banded type, ASTM E774, Class A shall
have perimeter banded or sealed, and encased in a nonferrous metal or
stainless steel frame. Unbanded type shall have perimeter sealed by
manufacturer's standard organic sealant. Do not field cut.
2.1.6 Firestopping Material
As specified in Section 07 21 00 PERIMETER FIRE CONTAINMENT - THERMAL

INSULATION SYSTEM, meeting fire resistance requirements specified.
2.1.7 Paint and Finishes
2.1.7.1 Primer
Zinc-molydate, alkyd type.
2.1.8 Metal Accessories
Flashings, Metal sills, and Closures. Fabricate accessories of sizes and

shapes indicated from similar materials and finish as specified for wall
system.
2.2 METALS FOR FABRICATION
2.2.1 Aluminum-Alloy Extrusions
Extrusions shall conform to ASTM B221.
Extrusions to receive an integral-color anodic coating shall be the alloy

and temper recommended by the aluminum producer for the specified finish
with integral-color anodic coating and have mechanical properties equal to
or exceeding those of 6063-T5.
2.2.2 Aluminum-Alloy Sheets and Plates
Unless otherwise specified, sheets and plates shall conform to ASTM B209,
Alloy 3003-H16.
Sheets and plates to receive a clear anodic coating shall conform to
ASTM B209, Alloy 5005-H16.
Sheets and plates to receive an integral-color anodic coating shall be the

alloy and temper recommended by the aluminum producer for the specified
coating and have mechanical properties equal to or exceeding those of
5005-H16.
Hot-rolled shapes, plates, and bars shall conform to ASTM A36/A36M.
Hot-formed tubing shall conform to ASTM A501/A501M.
Sheet and strip for cold-formed, light-gage, structural members shall

conform to ASTM A1011/A1011M.
2.2.4 Metals for Fasteners
Provide aluminum-alloy bolts and screws made from rod conforming to

ASTM B211, Alloy 2024-T351.
Provide aluminum-alloy nuts made from rod conforming to ASTM B211, Alloy
6061-T6.
Provide aluminum-alloy washers made from sheet conforming to ASTM B209,

Alloy 2024-T4.
Provide aluminum-alloy rivets made from rod or wire conforming to

ASTM B316/B316M, Alloy 6053-T61.
Provide steel fasteners made from corrosion-resistant chromium-nickel Type

302, 303, 304, 305, or 316 with the form and condition best suited for the
work.
2.3 NONSKINNING SEALING COMPOUND
Sealing compound shall be nonskinning, gun-grade type conforming to

AAMA 800.
2.4 FABRICATION
2.4.1 Workmanship
Metal Accessories shall be accurately formed; joints, except those

designed to accommodate movement, accurately fitted and rigidly assembled.
Insofar as practical, fitting and assembly of the work shall be done in

the manufacturer's plant. Mark work that cannot be permanently
factory-assembled before shipment to ensure proper assembly at the site.
2.4.2 Shop-Painting Aluminum
Shop prime aluminum surfaces that will come in contact with dissimilar
metals, masonry, concrete, or wood.
Prepare aluminum surfaces for painting in accordance with ASTM D1730, Type
B, Method 2 or 3.
Give aluminum surfaces one shop coat of paint applied to dry, clean,
surfaces to provide a continuous minimum dry-film thickness of 1.5 mils.
2.4.3 Shop-Painting Steel
Shop prime surfaces of concealed steel.
Remove scale, rust, and other deleterious materials. Remove heavy rust
and loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC SP 3 or SSPC 7/NACE No.4.
Remove oil, grease, and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP 1.
Give steel surfaces two coats of paint; the second coat shall have a color
different from the first coat. Apply paint to dry, clean, surfaces to
provide a continuous minimum dry-film thickness of 1.5 mils for the first
coat and 1 mil for the second coat.
2.4.4 Depth of Glazing Rabbets
Depth of glazing rabbets for openings to receive glass materials or panels

shall be as follows:
MATERIAL NOMINAL THICKNESS MAXIMUM SIZE MINIMUM RABBET DEPTH
Single-glass Double strength Up to 5 square feet 3/8 inch

lights
Double strength Over 5 square feet 1/2 inch
1/8 inch Up to 5 square feet 3/8 inch
1/8 inch 5 to 25 square feet 1/2 inch
1/8 inch 25 to 70 square feet 5/8 inch
3/16 inch Over 25 square feet 5/8 inch
7/32 inch All sizes 5/8 inch
1/4 inch Over 100 square feet 3/4 inch
MATERIAL NOMINAL THICKNESS MAXIMUM SIZE MINIMUM RABBET DEPTH
Double-glazing All thicknesses Up to 25 square feet 5/8 inch

units
All thicknesses 25 to 70 square feet 3/4 inch
Panels Up to 1 inch All sizes 5/8 inch
1 to 1-1/2 inches All sizes 3/4 inch
2.4.5 Finish
Exposed-to-View Aluminum Finish of surfaces must be:
Polished frosted finish with integral-color anodic coating: Smooth

specular buffed mechanical, followed by nonetching inhibitive alkaline
cleaning, medium-matte chemical etch, and Architectural Class I ( 0.7-mil
and greater thickness) anodic coating producing an integral-color finish.
Color shall be:
Per Section 09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE.
Test the anodic coating on aluminum for thickness in accordance with

ASTM B244.
Test anodically coated aluminum for the weight of the coating in

accordance with ASTM B137.
Test the resistance of anodically coated aluminum to staining by dyes in

accordance with ASTM B136.
2.5 CURTAIN-WALL FRAMING MEMBERS
2.5.1 General
Framing members shall be the section dimensions and arrangement indicated

and designed to accommodate windows, panels, and other materials to be
incorporated into the curtain-wall system.
Curtain-wall framing shall be the grid type with both the vertical and
horizontal mullions extending the indicated distance beyond the exterior
face of the curtain wall.
2.5.2 Construction
Framing members shall be aluminum-alloy extrusions with a wall thickness

not less than 0.125 inch. Glazing rabbet legs shall be an integral part
of the frame with the leg depth not less than the minimum depth specified
for the thickness and size of the glass material or panel to be installed
in the curtain-wall frame. Design and construct frames to receive window
sash and louvers of the type specified when required.
Prepare vertical mullions for anchorage to the building construction at

the bottom, at each intermediate floor elevation, and at the top.
Corners of frames shall be mortise-and-tenon construction except that the

corners of the vertical and horizontal mullions in grid frames shall be
coped-and-welded construction. Welds shall be on the unexposed surfaces.

Corner joints shall be accurately fitted and flush, with watertight
hairline joints not exceeding 1/64 inch in width. Apply nonskinning
sealing compound to the unexposed surfaces of all mortise-and-tenon joints.
2.6 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES
Aluminum doors and frames are specified in Section 08 11 16 ALUMINUM DOORS

AND FRAMES.
2.7 METAL ACCESSORIES
2.7.1 Sills
Sills shall be the shapes and dimensions indicated and fabricated of

aluminum-alloy extrusions having a wall thickness not less than 0.125 inch.
Sills shall run continuously under the curtain wall and permit the lower
curtain wall frame member to interlock without fastenings.
2.8 THERMAL INSULATION MATERIALS
Thermal insulation materials are specified in Section 07 21 16 MINERAL

FIBER BLANKET INSULATION.
2.9 SEALANTS AND CAULKINGS
Sealants and caulkings are specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
2.10 CURTAIN-WALL INSTALLATION MATERIALS
2.10.1 Threaded Concrete Inserts
Galvanized ferrous castings with enlarged bases with not less than two
nailing lugs, length as indicated, internally threaded 3/4-inch diameter
machine bolt shall conform to ASTM A47/A47M, Grade 32510 or ASTM A27/A27M,
Grade U-60-30, and hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M.
2.10.2 Wedge Concrete Inserts
Galvanized, box-type, ferrous castings with an integral loop at the back

of the box and designed for 3/4-inch diameter bolts with wedge-shaped
heads shall conform to ASTM A47/A47M, Grade 32510 or ASTM A27/A27M, Grade
U-60-30, and hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M.
Carbon steel bolts with wedge-shaped heads, nuts, washers, and shims shall
be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M.
2.10.3 Slotted Concrete Inserts
Galvanized pressed-steel plate, welded construction, box type with a slot

designed for 3/4-inch diameter square-head bolts to provide lateral
adjustment shall be 1/8-inch minimum thickness, conforming to
ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C, hot-dip galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A123/A123M. Length of the insert body less anchorage lugs shall be 6
inches minimum and provided with a knockout cover.
2.10.4 Masonry Anchorage Devices
2.10.5 Toggle Bolts
Toggle bolts shall be the tumble-wing type.
2.10.6 Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers
Bolts shall be regular hexagon head, low-carbon steel.
Nuts shall be hexagon, regular style, carbon steel.
Plain washers shall be round, general-assembly purpose, carbon steel.
Lockwashers shall be helical spring, carbon steel.
2.10.7 Machine Screws
Provide screws for concealed work that are corrosion-resistant steel,

slotted or cross-recessed type, roundhead.
Provide screws for exposed-to-view work that are corrosion-resistant

steel, cross-recessed, flathead.
2.10.8 Electrodes for Welding Steel
Electrodes for welding steel by the manual shielded metal arc welding
process shall meet the requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M and be covered
mild-steel electrodes conforming to AWS A5.1/A5.1M, E60 series.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
Install curtain walls and accessories in accordance with the approved

drawings and as specified.
3.2 FABRICATION
Provide curtain wall components of the materials and thickness indicated

or specified. The details indicated are representative of the required
design and profiles. Acceptable designs may differ from that shown if the
proposed system components conform to the limiting dimensions indicated
and the requirements specified herein. Unless specifically indicated or
specified otherwise, the methods of fabrication and assembly shall be at
the discretion of the curtain wall manufacturer. Perform fitting and
assembling of components in the shop to the maximum extent practicable.
Provide anchorage devices shall permit adjustment in three directions.
Exposed fastenings used on finished surfaces shall be truss head, flat
head, or oval head screws or bolts.
3.2.1 Joints
Provide welded or mechanical fasteners as indicated or specified. Match

joints in exposed work to produce continuity of line and design.
Bed-joints or rabbets receiving caulking or sealing material shall be
minimum 3/4 inch deep and 3/8 inch wide at mid ambient temperature range.
3.2.2 Welding
Conform to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Use methods and electrodes recommended by

manufacturers of base metal alloys. Provide welding rods of an alloy that
matches the color of the metal being welded. Protect glass and other
finish from exposure to welding spatter. Ground and finish weld beads on
exposed metal surfaces to minimize mismatch and to blend with finish on
adjacent parent metal. If flux is used in welding aluminum, completely
remove it immediately upon completion of welding operations. Do not use
exposed welds on aluminum surfaces.
3.2.3 Soldering and Brazing
Provide as recommended by suppliers. Solder only for filling or sealing

joints.
3.2.4 Ventilation and Drainage
Provide internal ventilation drainage system of weeps or based on

principles of pressure equalization to ventilate the wall internally and
to discharge condensation and water leakage to exterior as inconspicuously
as possible. Flashings and other materials used internally shall be
nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nonbleeding.
3.2.5 Protection and Treatment of Metals
3.2.5.1 General
Remove from metal surfaces lubricants used in fabrication and clean off
other extraneous material before leaving the shop.
3.2.5.2 Galvanic Action
Provide protection against galvanic action wherever dissimilar metals are

in contact, except in the case of aluminum in permanent contact with
galvanized steel, zinc, stainless steel, or relatively small areas of
white bronze. Paint contact surfaces with one coat bituminous paint or
apply appropriate caulking material or nonabsorptive, noncorrosive, and
nonstaining tape or gasket between contact surfaces.
3.2.5.3 Protection for Aluminum
Protect aluminum which is placed in contact with, built into, or which

will receive drainage from masonry, lime mortar, concrete, or plaster with
one coat of alkali-resistant bituminous paint. Where aluminum is
contacted by absorptive materials subject to repeated wetting or treated
with preservative noncompatible with aluminum, apply two coats of aluminum
paint, to such materials and seal joints with approved caulking compound.
3.3 INSTALLATION
Installation and erection of glazed wall system and all components shall
be performed under direct supervision of and in accordance with approved
recommendations and instructions of wall system manufacturer or fabricator.
3.3.1 Bench Marks and Reference Points
Establish and permanently mark bench marks for elevations and building
line offsets for alignment at convenient points on each floor level.
Should any error or discrepancy be discovered in location of the marks,

stop erection work in that area until discrepancies have been corrected.
3.3.2 Verifying Conditions and Adjacent Surfaces
After establishment of lines and grades and prior to system installation

examine supporting structural elements. Verify governing dimensions,
including floor elevations, floor to floor heights, minimum clearances
between curtain wall and structural frames, and other permissible
dimensional tolerances in the building frame.
3.3.3 Windows
Install windows in accordance with details indicated and approved detail

drawings.
3.3.3.1 Sealing
Seal exterior metal to metal joints between members of windows, frames,

mullions, and mullion covers. Remove excess sealant.
3.3.3.2 Ventilators and Hardware
After installing and glazing windows, adjust ventilators and hardware to

operate smoothly and to be weathertight when ventilators are closed and
locked. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
3.3.3.3 Weatherstripping
Install to make weathertight contact with frames when ventilators are

closed and locked. Do not cause binding of sash or prevent closing and
locking of ventilator.
Provide for ventilating sections of all windows to insure a weather-tight

seal meeting the infiltration tests specified. Use easily replaceable
factory-applied weatherstripping of manufacturer's stock type. Use molded
vinyl, molded or molded-expanded neoprene for weatherstripping for
compression contact surfaces. For sliding surfaces, use treated woven
pile or wool, polypropylene or nylon pile with nylon fabric and metal or
plastic backing strip weatherstripping. Do not use neoprene or polyvinyl
chloride weatherstripping where they will be exposed to direct sun light.
Surfaces to be primed and sealed shall be clean, dry to the touch, free
from frost, moisture, grease, oil, wax, lacquer, paint, or other foreign
matter. Enclose joints on three sides. Clean out grooves to proper
depth. Joint dimensions shall conform to approved detail drawings with a
tolerance of plus 1/8 inch. Do not apply compound unless ambient
temperature is between 40 and 90 degrees F. Clean out loose particles and
mortar just before sealing. Remove protective coatings or coverings from
surfaces in contact with sealants before applying sealants or tapes.
Solvents used to remove coatings shall be of type that leave no residue on
metals.
3.3.4.2 Applications
Match approved sample. Force compound into grooves with sufficient

pressure to fill grooves solidly. Sealing compound shall be uniformly
smooth and free of wrinkles and, unless indicated otherwise, tooled and
left sufficiently convex to result in a flush joint when dry. Do not trim
edges of sealing material after joints are tooled. Mix only amount of
multi-component sealant which can be installed within four hours, but at
no time shall this amount exceed 5 gallons.
3.3.4.3 Primer
Apply to masonry, concrete, wood, and other surfaces as recommended by

sealant manufacturer. Do not apply primer to surfaces which will be
exposed after caulking is completed.
3.3.4.4 Backing
Tightly pack in bottom of joints which are over 1/2 inch in depth with
specified backing material to depth indicated or specified. Roll backing
material of hose or rod stock into joints to prevent lengthwise stretching.
3.3.4.5 Bond Prevention
Install bond preventive material at back or bottom of joint cavities in

which no backstop material is required, covering full width and length of
joint cavities.
3.3.4.6 Protection and Cleaning
Remove compound smears from surfaces of materials adjacent to sealed

joints as the work progresses. Use masking tape on each side of joint
where texture of adjacent material will be difficult to clean. Remove
masking tape immediately after filling joint. Scrape off fresh compound
from adjacent surfaces immediately and rub clean with approved solvent.
Upon completion of caulking and sealing, remove remaining smears, stains,
and other soiling, and leave the work in clean neat condition.
3.3.5 Glass
Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations as modified

herein. Install insulating glass units made with heat absorbing glass
with heat absorbing pane on exterior side.
3.3.5.1 Inspection of Sash and Frames
Before installing glass, inspect sash and frames to receive glass for
defects such as dimensional variations, glass clearances, open joints, or
other conditions that will prevent satisfactory glass installation. Do
not proceed with installation until defects have been corrected.
3.3.5.2 Preparation of Glass and Rabbets
Clean sealing surfaces at perimeter of glass and sealing surfaces of

rabbets and stop beads before applying glazing compound, sealing compound,
glazing tape, or gaskets. Use only approved solvents and cleaning agents
recommended by compound or gasket manufacturer.
3.3.5.3 Positioning Glass
Set glass from inside the building unless otherwise indicated or

specified. Maintain specified edge clearances and glass bite at
perimeter. Maintain position of glass in rabbet and provide required
sealant thickness on both sides of glass. For glass dimensions larger than
50 united inches, provide setting blocks at sill and spacer shims on all
four sides; locate setting blocks one quarter way in from each jamb edge
of glass. Where setting blocks and spacer shims are set into glazing
compound or sealant, butter with compound or sealant, place in position,
and allow to firmly set prior to installation of glass.
3.3.5.4 Setting Methods
Apply glazing compound, glazing sealant, glazing tape, and gaskets

uniformly with accurately formed corners and bevels. Remove excess
compound from glass and sash. Use only recommended thinners, cleaners,
and solvents. Strip surplus compound from both sides of glass and tool at
slight angle to shed water and provide clean sight lines. Secure stop
beads in place with suitable fastenings. Do not apply compound or sealant
at temperatures lower than 40 degrees F, or on damp, dirty, or dusty
surfaces. After glazing, fix ventilators in sash so they cannot be
operated until compound or sealant has set.
a. Use sealant glazing to completely fill channel on edges and on both

sides of glass.
b. Use sealant and tape glazing, with glazing sealant for cap bead above
glazing tape against fixed exterior stops and glazing tape full height
against removable interior stops.
c. Use sealant and tape glazing, with glazing sealant full height against
removable exterior stops with heel bead or glazing sealant and glazing
tape full height against fixed interior stops.
d. Use sealant and tape glazing, with glazing sealant cap beads above
glazing tape against both exterior and interior stops. Removable stops
may be on either exterior or interior side of glass.
3.3.5.5 Void Space
Heat absorbing, insulating, spandrel, and tempered glass, and glass of

other types that exceed 100 united inches in size: Provide void space at
head and jamb to allow glass to expand or move without exuding the sealant.
3.3.5.6 Insulating Glass
Provide adequate means to weep incidental water and condensation away from
the sealed edges of insulated glass units and out of the wall system. The
weeping of lock-strip gaskets should be in accordance with the
recommendation of the glass manufacturer.
3.3.6 Firestopping
Provide firestopping in openings between wall system and floor at each

story to prevent passage of flame and hot gases from floor to floor under
extended fire exposure. Installed fire stopping shall remain in place
under extended fire exposure despite distortions that may occur in wall
system components. Securely attach anchoring or containment devices to
building structure and not to wall system. Place mineral fiber on steel
plates attached to bottom of floor slab.
3.4 FINISHES
3.4.1 Galvanizing
Conform to ASTM A123/A123M, ASTM A153/A153M, and ASTM A653/A653M, as

applicable.
3.4.1.1 Repair of Zinc-Coated Surfaces
Repair zinc coated surfaces damaged by welding or other means with

galvanizing repair paint or by application of stick or thick paste
material specifically designed for repair of galvanizing, as approved.
3.4.2.1 Cleaning
Clean steel and iron work by power wire brushing or other approved manual
or mechanical means, for removal of rust, loose paint, scale, and
deleterious substances. Wash cleaned surfaces which become contaminated
with rust, dirt, oil, grease, or other foreign matter, with solvents until
thoroughly clean. Cleaning steel embedded in concrete is not required.
3.4.2.2 Painting Steel or Iron Surfaces
Apply primer to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil. Apply

additional shop coat of specified paint, to which a small amount of
tinting material has been added, on surfaces that will be concealed in the
finished construction or that will not be accessible for finish painting.
Accomplish painting in dry weather or under cover, and on steel or iron
surfaces that are free from moisture and frost. Do not paint surfaces of
items to be embedded in concrete. Recoat damaged surfaces upon completion
of work. Prime coat steel immediately after cleaning. Do not apply
bituminous protective coatings to items to be finish painted.
3.4.2.3 Painting Weathering Steel
Clean and paint surfaces which will not be exposed to the weather with one
shop or field coat of specified primer, or other approved rust-inhibitive
primer. Clean and strip-paint weathering steel contact surface to be
covered by structural or compression gaskets or sealants with one coat to
insure positive seal.
3.5 FIELD TESTS
Conduct field check test for water leakage on designated wall areas after
erection. Conduct test on two wall areas, two bays wide by two stories
high where directed. Conduct test and take necessary remedial action as
described in AAMA 501.1.
3.6.1 General
At the completion of the installation, clean the work to remove mastic

smears and other foreign materials.
3.6.2 Glass
Upon completion of wall system installation, thoroughly wash glass

surfaces on both sides and remove labels, paint spots, putty, compounds,
and other defacements. Replace cracked, broken, and defective glass with
new glass at no additional cost to the Government.
Protection methods, cleaning, and maintenance shall be in accordance with

AAMA 609 & 610.
3.6.4 Other Metal Surfaces
After installation, protect windows, panels, and other exposed surfaces

from disfiguration, contamination, contact with harmful materials, and
from other construction hazards that will interfere with their operation,
or damage their appearance or finish. Protection methods must be in
accordance with recommendations of product manufacturers or of the
respective trade association. Remove paper or tape factory applied
protection immediately after installation. Clean surfaces of mortar,
plaster, paint, smears of sealants, and other foreign matter to present
neat appearance and prevent fouling of operation. In addition, wash with
a stiff fiber brush, soap and water, and thoroughly rinse. Where surfaces
become stained or discolored, clean or restore finish in accordance with
recommendations of product manufacturer or the respective trade
association.
3.6.5 Porcelain-Enamel Surfaces
Wash surfaces with clean water and soap and rinsed with clean water. Do
not use acid solutions, steel wool, or other harsh abrasives.
3.7 MATERIALS EMBEDDED IN OTHER CONSTRUCTION
Install materials to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete and masonry

prior to the installation of the curtain wall. Provide setting drawings,
templates, and instructions for installation.
3.8 FASTENING TO CONSTRUCTION-IN-PLACE
Provide anchorage devices and fasteners for fastening work to

construction-in-place. Provide fasteners as specified.
3.9 SETTING MASONRY ANCHORAGE DEVICES
Set devices in masonry or concrete-in-place construction in accordance

with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Leave drilled holes rough
and free of drill dust.
3.10 FIELD-WELDING STEEL AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
Procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding, the appearance and

quality of the welds made, and the methods used in correcting welding work
shall conform to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
After completion of welding, clean and paint field welds and scarred
surfaces on steel work and on adjacent ferrous-metal surfaces. Paint

shall be the same as that used for shop painting.
3.11 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
Install curtain walls within the following tolerances:
Deviation in location from that indicated on the Plus or minus 1/4 inch
drawings
Deviation from the plumb or horizontal
n 12 feet of length Not more than 1/8 inch
In any total length Not more than 1/2 inch
Offset from true alignment at joints between Not more than 1/16 inch
abutting members in line
3.12 PLACING CURTAIN-WALL FRAMING MEMBERS
Install members plumb, level, and within the limits of the installation
tolerances specified.
Connect members to building framing. Provide supporting brackets

adjustments for the accurate location of curtain-wall components.
Adjustable connections shall be rigidly fixed after members have been
positioned.
3.13 PANEL INSTALLATION
Panels shall be set with a glazing-tape back bed, two-component

elastomeric sealing-compound heel bead, glazing-tape bedding of the stop,
and two-component elastomeric sealing-compound topping bead on both sides
of the panel. Face and edge clearances shall not be less than 1/8 inch.
Remove excess sealing compound on both sides of the curtain wall opening
with a glazing knife at a slight angle over the rabbet leg or applied
stop. Install applied stops on the exterior side of the curtain wall and
secured with screws.
3.14 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS
3.14.1 Finished Curtain-Wall System Requirements
Curtain-wall work shall be rejected for any of the following deficiencies:
Finish of exposed-to-view aluminum having color and appearance that are

outside the color and appearance range of the approved samples.
Installed curtain-wall components having stained, discolored, abraded, or

otherwise damaged exposed-to-view surfaces that cannot be cleaned or
repaired.
Aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials that are not
protected as specified.
3.14.2 Repair of Defective Work
Remove and replace defective work with curtain-wall materials that meet
the specifications at no expense to the Government.
SECTION 08 56 54
BLAST RESISTANT FACADE SYSTEMS

08/15
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
Only use this paragraph to define terms used in the specification section
that are not defined by a commercial or Government standard and to provide
a common interpretation of a term for contractual purposes.
1.2 REFERENCES

ASTM C1135 (2011) Standard Test Method for

Determining Tensile Adhesion Properties of
Structural Sealants


Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective
Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in
Hurricanes
ASTM F1642 (2012) Standard Test Method for Glazing

Loadings
ASTM F2247 (2011) Metal Doors Used in Blast Resistant

Applications
ASTM F2248 (2012) Standard Practice for Specifying an

Equivalent 3-Second Duration Design
Loading for Blast Resistant Glazing
Fabricated with Laminated Glass
ASTM F2912 (2011) Standard Specification for Glazing

Loadings
ASTM F2927 (2012) Standard Test Method for Door

Systems Subject to Airblast Loadings
UFC 4-010-01 (February 9, 2012 with Change 1, October

1, 2013) DoD Minimum Antiterrorism
Standards for Buildings
This section includes exterior facade systems for the Building 229 New
Addition, including but not limited to windows systems, skylights, doors
and metal panel wall systems.
1.3.1 Performance Requirements
Where indicated in drawings, exterior facade wall systems functioning as

the blast envelope for the Building 229 New Addition and shall be designed
to meet a Low Level of Protection in accordance with UFC 4-010-01 DoD
Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings criteria dated February 9,
2012, with Change 1 October 1, 2013.
In conjunction with meeting aesthetic and performance requirements, the

Contractor may propose alternate detailing methods for consideration.
1.3.1.1 Window Requirements
Window and skylight system design shall meet the minimum requirements of
UFC 4-010-01, Standard 10. Window System Design meeting UFC 4-010-01,
Standard 10 shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.3.1.1.1 Glazing Requirements
1. Provide laminated glazing with a minimum polyvinyl-butyral (PVB)

interlayer thickness of 0.030-inch. For insulated glass units (IGUs),
provide laminated glazing with a minimum polyvinyl-butyral (PVB)
interlayer thickness of 0.030-inch at the inboard pane.
2. The load resistance of the glazing determined from ASTM E1300 shall be
greater than or equal to the 3-second duration equivalent design load
determined from ASTM F2248, as follows:
a. New Addition, South: 183.4-psf (1.27-psi)
b. New Addition, East: 54.5-psf (0.38-psi)
3. Skylight glazing shall meet the minimum hazard rating of ASTM F1642
which allows the glazing to break, but remain in the frame (medium level
of protection in UFC 4-010-01 Table 2-1) under dynamic loading provided in
Section 1.3.1.1.5-1.a
4. Glazing shall be designed with a dynamic capacity less than the

following:
a. South Elevation: Peak Pressure, P = 30-psi and Peak Impulse, I =

63-psi-msec
b. East Elevation: Peak Pressure,P = 8.8-psi and Peak Impulse, I =

43-psi-msec
1.3.1.1.2 Window Framing Requirements
1. Provide window and skylight frames, mullions, and sashes of aluminum

or steel designed in accordance with ASTM F2248.
2. Design framing members using strength design with load factors of 1.0
and strength reduction factors of 1.0. The moment and shear capacities of
framing members shall be designed to resist two (2) times the glazing
resistance applied to the framing members only from the tributary area of
the window, and the deflection shall be limited to 1/60 of the members'
span length between points of structural support. For framing elements
which support multiple panes with different glazing capacities, apply the
lowest capacity pane over the total tributary area to design the frame
element.
3. In the case of a punched or ribbon window, the supported edge length

shall be taken as equal to the span of glass, regardless of any
intermediate support connections.
4. Intermediate mullions shall be checked for deflection with the

supported edge length taken as equal to the longest span of a single glass
panel and the deflection shall be calculated based on simple support
conditions for that length.
1.3.1.1.3 Glazing Frame Bite
1. Glazing must be adhered to the supporting frame with structural

silicone sealant or adhesive glazing tape.
2. Refer to ASTM F2248 for glazing frame bite requirements for

structurally or non-structurally glazed windows, skylights, and glazed
doors. At a minimum, the glazing shall have a frame bite of 3/8 inch for
structurally glazed systems and 1 inch for non-structurally glazed
systems. For structurally glazed applications, apply the structural
silicone bead to both sides of the glass panel for single pane glazing,
but only to the inboard side for insulating glass units.
1.3.1.1.4 Connection Requirements
1. The connection design of windows and skylights to adjacent supporting

structural elements, of hardware and fasteners, of glazing stop
connections, and of other elements in shear shall be based on strength
design with load factors of 1.0 and strength reduction factors of 1.0.
2. The connection design loads shall be determined in accordance with

ASTM F2248. Connections shall be designed to EITHER:
a. Two (2) times the magnitude of the glazing resistance if the

ASTM F2248 load is greater than half the magnitude of the glazing
resistance.
b. One (1) times the magnitude of the glazing resistance if the

ASTM F2248 load is less than or equal to half the magnitude of the
glazing resistance.
1.3.1.1.5 Alternative Method of Design
As an alternative to the ASTM F2248 static design approach described in the

preceding section, any or all of the glazing, framing members, connections,
and supporting structural elements may be designed using dynamic analysis
to prove that the element of the window system shall perform equivalent to
or better than the hazard rating associated with a low level of protection
as defined below.
1. The dynamic design loading for analysis shall be the appropriate

pressures and impulses from the applicable explosive weights at the actual
standoff distances at which the windows are sited. A summary of applicable
dynamic design loads and their locations specific to this building's site
layout are as follows:
a. New Addition, South: peak pressure, Pr=42.9-psi, peak impulse, Ir=

90.5-psi-msec
b. New Addition, East: peak pressure, Pr=6.63-psi, peak impulse, Ir=

32.7-psi-msec
2. All elements designed using dynamic analysis shall be analyzed for all
applicable dynamic loads. This design load shall be applied over the areas
tributary to the element being analyzed.
3. Glazing shall meet the Very Low Hazard rating as defined in ASTM F1642
which is defined as the glazing is observed to fracture and is located
within 40 inches of its original location (low level of protection in
UFC 4-010-01 Table 2-1). In WinGARD 5.5.1 this is equivalent to condition
3a and use the probability of failure value of 500 per 1,000 or less.
4. Design frame elements not to exceed the following response limits,

associated with a Low Level of Protection:
a. Ductility of 7
b. Support rotation of 6 degrees
c. Shear demand-to-capacity ratio of 1.0
1.3.1.1.6 Testing
As an alternative to these requirements, window and skylight systems may

be dynamically tested to demonstrate performance equivalent to or better
than the glazing hazard rating associated with a low level of protection.
The design loading for a dynamic test shall be the appropriate pressure
and impulse from the applicable explosive weight at the actual standoff
distance at which the window is sited. Testing shall include the entire
window or skylight system, including connections, and shall be in
accordance with ASTM F1642 with hazard ratings in accordance with
ASTM F2912. Test report shall include but not be limited to:
1. Minimum of three (3) identical specimens shall be tested for the

design blast load summarized in preceding paragraphs or a higher air-blast
load. Those specimens shall be similar to the project window in pane sizes
and lay-up, mullion type and sizes, anchor number and system, etc.
2. The structural supporting material used in the test for fastener

attachment shall be representative of the field installed condition. Any
deviations in field application of the connections or the connected
elements from the test must be demonstrated by calculation to provide the
required level of protection for the specific application.
3. Standoff distance for the blast test shall be computed and documented
in accordance with ASTM F1642 for the design peak pressure and impulse.
4. Minimum of three (3) pressure transducers shall be installed in the

frame and one (1) free-field pressure transducer shall be used in the test
as specified in ASTM F1642.
5. Test report shall be performed by an accredited laboratory or signed

and sealed by a register Professional Engineer whose qualifications meet
or exceed Quality Assurance criteria.
1.3.1.2 Exterior Door Design
1. Exterior door design shall meet the minimum requirements of

UFC 4-010-01, Standard 12.
2. Specifically, the exterior door at the Lobby (Room 150) was

identified as requireing blast resistance.
1.3.1.2.1 Unglazed Doors:
1. Unglazed doors that open into occupied space shall be tested to

achieve the applicable performance in UFC 4-010-01 Table 2-1 in accordance
with ASTM F2247 or ASTM F2927 and blast loading specified in Section
1.3.1.2.3-a.1.
2. Provide doors that are tested to achieve the applicable performance in

UFC 4-010-01 Table 2-1 in accordance with ASTM F2247 or ASTM F2927 or that
meet the alternative door design described in Section 1.3.1.2.3
3. Fasteners and anchorage methods used to attach the tested door

assembly will be representative of the actual door installation. Any
deviations in actual installation of the connections or the connected
elements from those tested must be demonstrated by calculation to provide
the required level of protection for the specific application.
1.3.1.2.2 Glazed Doors:
1. Refer to all unglazed door requirements in the section above.
2. Glazed sidelights and transoms around doors shall meet UFC 4-010-01
Standard 10 requirements unless included as part of the tested assembly.
1.3.1.2.3 Alternative Door Design:
As an alternative, doors may be designed dynamically to demonstrate

through calculations that the door shall remain in its frame.
a. The dynamic design loading for analysis shall be the appropriate

pressures and impulses from the applicable explosive weights at the
actual standoff distances at which the windows are sited. A summary of
applicable dynamic design loads and their locations specific to this
building's site layout are as follows:
1) New Addition, South: peak pressure, Pr=42.9-psi, peak impulse,

Ir=90.5-psi-msec
2) New Addition, East: peak pressure, Pr=6.63-psi, peak impulse,

Ir=32.7-psi-msec
b. The glazing in glazed doors must meet the glazing and frame bite
provisions of UFC 4-010-01, Standard 10.
c. Elements may be designed to experience excessive permanent
deformation but shall not pose a flying projectile hazard in response

to the specified blast loading.
d. Response limits for door panels shall be a ductility of no greater

than 40 and rotation no greater than 12 degrees.
e. Response limits for door frames shall be a ductility of no greater

than 20 and rotation no greater than 12 degrees.
f. Connections shall be designed to develop the flexural capacity of

the element being connected.
1.3.1.2.4 Vestibules or Foyers:
1. Inner doors, sidelights, and transoms shall meet the provisions of

UFC 4-010-01, Standard 10 and Standard 12.
2. To provide debris resistance, any inner doors, sidelights, and

transoms must meet the windborne debris resistance requirements of
ASTM E1996 (missiles A and D in Table 2).
1.3.1.3 Exterior Metal Panel Wall Systems
Exterior metal panel wall systems, including but not limited to metal stud
walls above windows at the exisitng building serving as the building
envelope shall be designed to meet a low level of protection. The
supporting system shall meet the following design requirements:
1. Bracing of the interior flange of metal studs shall be provided

continuously by metal panel or plywood sheathing.
2. Connections shall be designed for the flexural yield capacity based on

the plastic section modulus of the member being connected.
3. Connections shall be designed using Load and Resistance Factor Design

(LRFD) methods with all load increase and strength reduction factors equal
to 1.0.
4. Metal stud sections shall be designed dynamically to provide an

equivalent level of protection as follows:
a. Peak dynamic pressure and impulse blast loading at exterior metal

panel wall systems are as follows:
1) New Addition, South: peak pressure, Pr=42.9-psi, peak impulse,

Ir=90.5-psi-msec
2) New Addition, East: peak pressure, Pr=6.63-psi, peak impulse,

Ir=32.7-psi-msec
b. Response limits for metal studs shall be a ductility of no greater

than 2.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

Design Data
Calculations; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Test Reports; G
SD-07 Certificates
Engineer's qualifications; G
1.4.1 Structural Calculations
Prior to performing engineering calculations, submit a description of the

technique(s) that shall be employed to calculate the response of the
system to the defined loading.
Calculation package is to include a summary sheet briefly outlining the

following:
1. Evaluation criteria
2. Calculation assumptions
3. Table of results by window type/location
4. Statement of Conformance with specification requirements
Calculation submittal is to be stamped and signed by a registered

Professional Engineer whose qualifications meet or exceed that of the
Quality Assurance section of this specification.
Submit engineering calculations or experimental testing to show that

window response meets specified prescriptive requirement under static or
dynamic design methods.
Calculations must include, but may not be limited to, analysis of the
following:
1. Mullions and framing members: Provide a clear load path from the glass
to the primary element and supporting analysis which illustrates each
component's ability to transfer the design load to the primary element.
a. Analysis of primary element shall illustrate flexural and shear

capacity.
b. Analysis will include verification that the structural silicone

sealant can hold the glass in the frame under design loads including
rebound.
c. With dynamic SDOF methods, if support rotations of the primary

mullion are between 4 and 6 degrees, analysis is required to verify
its ability to develop its plastic capacity without instability.
Additional calculations must include, but may not be limited to,
analysis of the following:
1) Global performance of mullion. Analysis shall verify that the
plastic moment of the mullion, acting in a composite manner with

its individual components, can be attained under maximum
calculated deflections. Fasteners between each component shall be
designed for the plastic capacity of the mullion.
2) Lateral torsional buckling. Analysis shall verify the ability

of the mullion to provide adequate resistance against lateral
torsional buckling under maximum calculated deflections.
3) Local buckling. Analysis shall verify the ability of the

mullion and its individual components and connections to provide
adequate resistance against localized buckling along the entire
load path under maximum calculated deflections.
4) Structural silicone stress. Analysis shall verify the capacity

of the silicon to retain the glass under maximum calculated
deflection.
2. Anchorage: Analyze the strength of embedded anchor assembly, as well

as pull-out and reaction forces shared with the building structure.
Analyze the wall anchor clip inserts and fasteners and assemblies,
including bolts and stiffeners. Include exact loadings to be transferred
to the building structure in the analysis.
3. Mechanical Anchors: Mechanical anchor capacities shall be developed

from dynamic testing. An International Code Council (ICC-ES) evaluation
report showing testing for dynamic loading (i.e. seismic or blast) is to
be submitted with calculations.
4. Supporting Structure: Coordination of the window/supporting structure

and door/supporting structure interaction shall be the contractors'
responsibility. The contractor's engineer performing blast calculations
shall coordinate loading scenarios with the cladding contractor's engineer
providing design for the exterior cladding system.
1. Engage an Engineering Professional to perform dynamic analysis of the

Blast Resistant system. The Engineer shall have a minimum of 5 years
experience performing dynamic analysis for blast resistant design and
demonstrable experience designing blast resistant systems in the past 18
months.
2. Window Bite: The required window system bite must be verified in the
field.
3. Installation Orientation: Curtain walls, storefronts, skylight,

precast panels and doors delivered to the construction site are to be
clearly labeled as to the proper installation orientation (i.e. laminated
pane of glass to be installed as the interior pane.)
1. Engineer's qualifications that meet or exceed Quality Assurance

criteria. At a minimum, qualifications must list each project in which the
Engineer performed dynamic analysis of doors and/or similar systems, the
effective start and end dates of performance of the analysis and a
reference.
2. Steel mill reports covering the number, chemical composition and

tension properties for structural quality steels.
3. When blast resistance is demonstrated by calculations, a certificate

stating that the system assembly provided was manufactured using the same
materials, dimensions, tolerances shown in the calculations.
4. When blast resistance is demonstrated by prototype testing, a

certificate stating that the stem assembly provided was manufactured using
the same materials, dimensions, tolerances as the tested prototype and
connections or frame anchors required to achieve blast resistance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Framing Members
Use extruded aluminum sections or continuous structural steel sections.
1. Yield Strength: Provide supporting references that grade of steel or

aluminum used is capable of achieving calculated ductility ratio.
2. If dynamic analysis is used, the yield strength of elements may be

increased to account for dynamic strain rate effects as follows:
a. Structural Steel: For fy = 36 ksi, the yield strength may be

increased by a factor of 1.42. For fy = 46 ksi, the yield strength
may be increased by a factor of 1.31.
b. Structural aluminum: For 6063-T6 Alloy with fy = 25 ksi, the

yield strength may be increased by a factor of 1.26. For 6061-T6
Alloy with fy = 35 ksi, the yield strength may be increased by a
factor of 1.16.
3. Section Modulus: The plastic section modulus may be used in dynamic

design calculations.
4. Built-Up Sections: Section properties of a built-up member consisting

of individual components of same or a combination of materials (i.e. steel
and aluminum) shall be determined based on the following:
a. Ultimate stress and strain compatibility between individual member

components shall be accounted for through industry standard methods of
analysis.
b. Composite section properties may only be used if calculations

demonstrate full shear stress transfer along the line of contact
between individual member components.
c. Combined section properties may only be used if calculations

demonstrate deformation compatibility between aluminum and steel
components.
2.1.2 Glass Unit
1. Glass-to-Glass Interlayer: Clear polyvinyl butyral (PVB) laminating

film/sheet shall be used on the inner lite of the exterior window systems.
2. Window Bite: Glazing must be adhered to frame with structural silicone

sealant or adhesive tape per ASTM F2248.
2.1.3 Structural Silicone Sealant
1. Ultimate Tensile Stress per ASTM C1135
a. Minimum 170 psi in tension
b. Ultimate tensile strength may be increased by a factor of 1.18 to

account for dynamic strain rate effects.
2. Safety Factors: Ultimate tension and shear capacities are to be used

with a safety factor of 1.0.
3. Apply a silicone sealant bead to both sides of the glass panel for
single pane glazing, but only inboard side for insulating glass units. The
minimum bead size is 1/4 inch.
2.2 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS
1. Test windows are required to be similar to the project windows.

Identical mullion shapes, glass lay-up, window distribution and anchorage
system are required between test windows and project windows. Glass pane
areas and mullion spans for the project windows are required to be within
10 percent of the test windows.
2. Test report package is to include a summary sheet briefly outlining

the following:
a. Brief description of the test performed
b. Table of test results by window type/location
c. Table of comparison between test windows and project windows
d. Statement of Conformance with ASTM F1642 with hazard ratings in

accordance with ASTM F2912
e. In addition, test reports must include all the information

required by ASTM F1642 Section 12.
3. Test report is to be stamped and signed by a registered Professional

Engineer whose qualifications meet or exceed Quality Assurance criteria
and/or certified by an accredited ASTM testing laboratory.
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
09/15
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This Section includes commercial door hardware for swinging doors and
other doors to the extent indicated. Door hardware includes, but is not
necessarily limited to, mechanical door hardware and cylinders specified
for doors in other sections.
1.2 REFERENCES

ANSI/BHMA A156.1 (2013) Butts and Hinges
ANSI/BHMA A156.16 (2013) Auxiliary Hardware
ANSI/BHMA A156.2 (2011) Bored and Preassembled Locks and

Latches
ANSI/BHMA A156.26 (2011) Continuous Hinges
ANSI/BHMA A156.3 (2014) Exit Devices
ANSI/BHMA A156.4 (2013) Door Controls - Closers
ANSI/BHMA A156.6 (2010) Architectural Door Trim
DOOR HARDWARE INSTITUTE (DHI)
DHI (LOCS) (2004) Recommended Locations for

Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames
ICC A117.1 (2009) Accessible and Usable Buildings and

Facilities
NFPA 80 (2013) Standard for Fire Doors and Other

Opening Protectives
UL 305 (2012) Standard for Panic Hardware
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Hardware schedule; G
SD-03 Product Data
Hardware items; G
Installation; G
Hardware Schedule items, Data Package 1; G
Submit data package in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION

AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
Key Bitting; G
1.4.1 Manufacturers Qualifications
Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented

experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated
for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service
performance.
A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and

electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction
with a record of successful in-service performance.
1.4.3 Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications
Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years

documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical
hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct
distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a
warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a
certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the
course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner

concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.
Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section
from a single source unless otherwise indicated.
1.4.5 Labeling
Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance

with the referenced standards.
1.4.6 Keying Conference
Conduct conference. Keying conference to incorporate the following

criteria into the final keying schedule document:
a. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security

required.
b. Plans for existing and future key system expansion.
c. Requirements for key control storage and software.
d. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software.
e. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.
1.4.7 Pre-Submittal Conference
Conduct coordination conference with attendance by representatives of

Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and
the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware.
a. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific

training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on
the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products.
Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware
(including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and
wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals,
hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required.
b. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections,

and other preparatory work performed by other trades.
c. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access

controlled opening.
d. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of

materials.
e. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and

demonstration procedures.
1.4.8 Written Documentation
At completion of installation, provide written documentation that

components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations
and according to approved schedule.
Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving
for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic
access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without
prior authorization.
Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the

final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions
with each item or package.
Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control

credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via
registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to
the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".
1.6 COORDINATION
1.6.1 Templates
Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames,
and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard
and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm
that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to
comply with indicated requirements.
1.6.2 Door and Frame Preparation
Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and

pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified
electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware
without additional in-field modifications.
1.7 WARRANTY
1.7.1 General Warranty
Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of

other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.7.2 Warranty Period
Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or

replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final
acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or

breakage.
b. Faulty operation of the hardware.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond

normal weathering.
d. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.
1.7.3 Standard Warranty Period
One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.
1.7.4 Special Warranty Periods
a. Five years for exit hardware.
b. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized

tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued
adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door
Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied
under.
2.1.1 Designations
Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function,

and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are
indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are
identified by using door hardware designations.
2.1.2 Named Manufacturer's Products
Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware
type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers'
names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
2.1.3 Substitutions
Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical

and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications
must be submitted in writing. Approval of requests is at the discretion of
the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.
2.2 HARDWARE ITEMS
2.2.1 Hinges
ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as

specified in the Door Hardware Sets.
2.2.1.1 Quantity
Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches.
b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches.
c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches.
d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1
hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.
2.2.1.2 Hinge Size
Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized
for door thickness and clearances required:
a. Widths up to 3'0": 4-1/2" standard or heavy weight as specified.
b. Sizes from 3'1" to 4'0": 5" standard or heavy weight as specified.
2.2.1.3 Hinge Weight and Base Material
Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil

impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard
weight.
b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil

impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.
2.2.1.4 Hinge Options
Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on

Drawings:
a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when

tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while
door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors.
2.2.1.5 Acceptable Manufacturers
a. Bommer Industries (BO).
b. Hager Companies (HA).
c. McKinney Products (MK).
2.2.2 Continuous Geared Hinges
ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 certified continuous geared hinge. with

minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and
a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and
fabricated to template screw locations. Factory trim hinges to suit door
height and prepare for electrical cut-outs.
a. Bommer Industries (BO).
b. McKinney Products (MK).
c. Pemko Manufacturing (PE).
2.3 DOOR OPERATING TRIM
2.3.1 Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts
ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified.
a. Manual flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length

to allow bolt location approximately six feet from the floor.
b. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts.
c. Surface bolts to be minimum 8 inches in length and U.L. listed for

labeled fire doors and U.L. listed for windstorm components where
applicable.
d. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators,

etc.) as required for appropriate installation and operation.
a. Burns Manufacturing (BU).
b. Door Controls International (DC).
c. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
2.3.2 Coordinators
ANSI/BHMA A156.3 certified door coordinators consisting of active-leaf,

hold-open lever and inactive-leaf release trigger. Model as indicated in
hardware sets.
b. Door Controls International (DC).
2.3.3 Door Push Plates and Pulls
ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design
specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and
height as required where conflicting hardware dictates.
2.3.3.1 Push/Pull Plates
Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with beveled
edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated.
2.3.3.2 Door Pull and Push Bar Design
Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum

clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated.
2.3.3.3 Offset Pull Design
Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum

clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees
unless otherwise indicated.
2.3.3.4 Fasteners
Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware

Sets.
b. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI).
2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum 10 years experience designing

secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying
system policy.
Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source
manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Schlage (SC).
2.4.2 Cylinders
Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:
a. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware
application.
b. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal

tailpiece, and raised trim ring.
c. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.
d. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the
cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes.
e. Keyway: Match Facility Standard.
2.4.3 Key Quantity
Provide the following minimum number of keys:
a. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2).
b. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5).
c. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).
2.4.4 Construction Keying
Provide construction master keyed cylinders.
2.4.5 Key Registration List (Bitting List)
a. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper

format for importing into key control software.
b. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by

the Owner.
2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES
2.5.1 Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Commercial Duty)
ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1 certified.
a. Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible.
S2.5.2 Acceptable Manufacturers
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - CL3500 Series.
b. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 4700LN Series.
2.6 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES
2.6.1 Strikes
Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or
lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match
door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:
a. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts,

as recommended by manufacturer.
b. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood

casing trim.
c. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box

fabricated for aluminum framing.
d. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with

retractable stop for rescue hardware applications.
2.6.2 Standards
Comply with the following:
a. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.
b. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.
c. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5.
d. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.
2.7 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES
All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following
criteria:
a. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with

NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to
UL 305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including
sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets.
b. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices
complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit
Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation
as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer's catalog and
template book for specific requirements.
c. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging
device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide
optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware
Sets.
d. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits
unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips
is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device
as in a full glass configuration.
e. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish
manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for
thru-bolts.
(1) Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes

and designs to match that of the specified locksets.
(2) Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a

cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.
f. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Provide and install interior surface and
concealed vertical rod exit devices as Less Bottom Rod (LBR) unless
otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins
are required to project into the floor.
g. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or

as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2
inch wide stiles.
h. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.
i. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door
width application.
j. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in

Door Hardware Sets.
2.7.1 Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty)
ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices
furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device
latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature.
2.7.2 Acceptable Manufacturers
a. Von Duprin (VD) - 35A/98 XP Series.
b. No Substitution.
2.8 DOOR CLOSERS
All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following
criteria:
2.8.1 General
Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style,

with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of
application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized
covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover.
2.8.2 Standards
Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L.
listed for use of fire rated doors.
2.8.3 Cycle Testing
Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed

and verified by UL.
2.8.4 Size of Units
Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door

closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated
frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be
accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ICC
A117.1.
2.8.5 Closer Arms
Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in
Hardware Sets.
a. Where closers are indicated to have mechanical dead-stop, provide

heavy duty arms and brackets with an integral positive stop.
b. Where closers are indicated to have mechanical hold open, provide

heavy duty units with an additional built-in mechanical holder
assembly designed to hold open against normal wind and traffic
conditions. Holder to be manually selectable to on-off position.
c. Where closers are indicated to have a cushion-type stop, provide heavy

duty arms and brackets with spring stop mechanism to cushion door when
opened to maximum degree.
d. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors;

where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. Provide
drop plates or other accessories as required for proper mounting.
2.8.6 Closer Covers
Provide PVC free closer covers with a painted finish to match other
hardware on the project.
2.8.7 Closer Accessories
Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special

mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates, and through-bolt and security
type fasteners as specified in the door Hardware Sets.
2.8.8 Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Large Body Cast Iron)
ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with
complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational
adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force.
Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron body construction,
with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing
sweep and latch speed control.
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DC8000 Series.
b. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 9500 Series.
c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 281 Series.
2.9 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in

the Hardware Sets.
2.9.1 Door Stops and Bumpers
ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide
wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated,
unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets.
Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or
wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders.
a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
2.9.2 Overhead Door Stops and Holders
ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and holders to be

surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide,
arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock
absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with
mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function.
a. Rixson Door Controls (RF).
b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA).
2.10 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS
Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as

specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip
gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing
on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide
non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.
2.10.1 Smoke Labeled Gasketing
Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing
according to UL 1784.
a. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled

openings.
2.10.2 Fire Labeled Gasketing
Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for
fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 10C.
a. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for

Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire
Tests of Door Assemblies.
2.10.3 Sound-Rated Gasketing
Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency,
for sound ratings indicated.
2.10.4 Replaceable Seal Strips
Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are
easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by
manufacturer.
a. Pemko Manufacturing (PE).
2.11 FABRICATION
2.11.1 Fasteners
Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates

generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide
screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for
application intended.
2.12 FINISHES
Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if

any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with
manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced
standards for the applicable units of hardware. Protect mechanical

finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
2.12.1 Standard
Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware

finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with
traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their
products.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly
construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting
performance.
Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door

schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after
such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.2.1 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.
3.2.2 Wood Doors
Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.
3.3 INSTALLATION
Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access

control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
according to specifications.
a. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the

proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security
products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices;
and seals.
3.3.1 Mounting Heights
Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable

publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with
governing regulations:
a. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI (LOCS).
b. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS-3.
c. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with

ICC A117.1.
d. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall
mounted hardware is located.
3.3.2 Retrofitting
Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates

and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to
install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted
or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and
reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work
specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items
until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
3.3.3 Thresholds
Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant
complying with requirements specified in Section 07 92 00.00 06 JOINT
SEALANTS.
3.3.4 Storage
Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet
installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that
the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before
and after installation.
3.4 1.4 KEY BITTING CHART REQUIREMENTS
Submit key bitting charts to the Contracting Officer prior to completion

of the work. Include:
a. Complete listing of all keys (AA1, AA2, etc.).
b. Complete listing of all key cuts (AA1-123456, AA2-123458).
c. Tabulation showing which key fits which door.
d. Copy of floor plan showing doors and door numbers.
e. Listing of 20 percent more key cuts than are presently required in

each master system.
3.5.1 Field Inspection
Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and

state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements,
including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and
adjusted.
3.6 ADJUSTING
3.6.1 Initial Adjustment
Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that
cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to
compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to
comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
3.7.1 Protection
Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry

place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction
phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.
3.7.2 Cleaning
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. Clean

operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final
protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without
damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain

mechanical and electromechanical door hardware.
3.10 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner
and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a
detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and
missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with
corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included
in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional
hardware required for proper application and functionality.
3.10.1 Manufacturer's Abbreviations
1. MK - McKinney
2. PE - Pemko
3. AD - Adams Rite
4. RO - Rockwood
5. YA - Yale
6. VD - Von Duprin
7. SC - Schlage
8. RF - Rixson
9. NO - Norton
10. SU - Securitron
11. 00 - Other
3.10.2 Hardware Schedule
Set: 04
Door: 156
3 Hinge TA2314 x NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D MK

1 Storeroom Lock SI PB 4705LN 626 YA
1 Cylinder 23-030 50-210 626 SC
1 Surface Closer PR9500 689 NO
1 Door Stop 481H US26D RO
1 Threshold 272A MSES25 PE
1 Rain Guard 346C PE
1 Gasketing S88BL (Head & Jamb) PE

1 Door Bottom 2221APK PE
Set: 05
Door: 152C

1 Exit Device 99EO US26D VD
1 Door Stop 406 US32D RO
Set: 06
Door: 108A

1 Exit Device 99NL-OP 110MD-NL US26D VD
1 Cylinder 23-030 50-210 626 SC
1 Cylinder 20-057 626 SC
Set: 07
Doors: 106, 111, and 112
8 Hinge (heavy weight) T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK

1 Flush Bolt 2842 US32D RO
1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO
1 Classroom Lock SI PB 4708LN 626 YA
1 Cylinder 23-030 50-210 626 SC
1 Coordinator 1600 US28 RO
2 Surface Closer R9500 689 NO
1 Astragal 357SP PE
2 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 08
Door: 100
6 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK

1 Flush Bolt 2842 US32D RO
1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO
1 Cylinder 23-030 50-210 626 SC
1 Coordinator 1600 US28 RO
1 Astragal 357SP PE
2 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 11
Door: 250
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK

1 Cylinder 23-030 50-210 626 SC
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 12
Doors: 101A, 119, 160, 161, and 254
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK

1 Cylinder 23-030 50-210 626 SC
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 13
Doors: 158 and 159
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK

1 Office Lock SI PB 4707LN 626 YA
1 Cylinder 23-030 50-210 626 SC
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 16
Doors: 106A, 106B, 106C, 118, 122, 122A, 122B, 122C, 123A, 123B, 125A,
127B, 128A, 128B, 131C, 132A, 132B, 133A, 230-103,
230-109
1 Cylinder 23-030 50-210 626 SC
Notes: Re-use the balance of the door, frame and

hardware.
Set: 21
Door: 150A
1 Continuous Hinge KCFMXX-HD1 PE

1 Rim Exit Device 33A-NL-OP 388NL(Std) US26D VD
1 Cylinder 23-030 50-210 626 SC
1 Surface Closer UNI9500 689 NO
1 Drop Plate 9587 (T.J.) 689 NO
1 Kickplate K1050 10 Inches 4BE CSK US32D RO
Set: 22
Door: 150B

1 Cylinder 23-030 50-210 626 SC
3 Silencer 608 RO
1 Kickplate K1050 10 Inches 4BE CSK US32D RO
Set: 23
Door: 151

1 Cylinder 23-030 50-210 626 SC
1 Surface Closer 9500 689 NO
1 Door Bottom 420APKL PE
Set: 24
Doors: 152A, 152B, 251A, and 251B

1 Exit Device 99L 996L(Std) US26D VD
1 Cylinder 23-030 50-210 626 SC
1 Surface Overhead Stop 9-X36 630 RF
1 Surface Closer PRO9500 689 NO
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 25
Doors: 153 and 154
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK

1 Privacy Latch PB 4702LN 626 YA
1 Surface Closer 9500 689 NO
1 Mop Plate K1050 4" 4BE CSK US32D RO
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 26
Doors: 252 and 253
3 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK

1 Push Plate 70C US32D-MS RO
1 Pull Plate 106x70C US32D-MS RO
1 Mop Plate K1050 4" 4BE CSK US32D RO
3 Silencer 608 RO
SECTION 08 81 00
GLAZING
08/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ANSI Z97.1 (2009; Errata 2010) Safety Glazing

Materials Used in Buildings - Safety
Performance Specifications and Methods of
Test

Flat Glass

Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT
Coated and Uncoated Glass

Laminated Architectural Flat Glass

Structural Silicone Sealants
ASTM C509 (2006; R 2011) Elastomeric Cellular

Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material
ASTM C864 (2005; R 2011) Dense Elastomeric

Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks,
and Spacers

ASTM D2287 (2012) Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and

Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds
ASTM D395 (2014) Standard Test Methods for Rubber

Property - Compression Set

Materials

ASTM E413 (2010) Rating Sound Insulation
ASTM E90 (2009) Standard Test Method for Laboratory

Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission
Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
GLASS ASSOCIATION OF NORTH AMERICA (GANA)
GANA Glazing Manual (2004) Glazing Manual
GANA Sealant Manual (2008) Sealant Manual
GANA Standards Manual (2001) Tempering Division's Engineering

Standards Manual
INSULATING GLASS MANUFACTURERS ALLIANCE (IGMA)
IGMA TB-3001 (2001) Guidelines for Sloped Glazing
IGMA TM-3000 (1990; R 2004) North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass
Units for Commercial & Residential Use
IGMA TR-1200 (1983; R 2007) Guidelines for Commercial

Insulating Glass Dimensional Tolerances
NATIONAL FENESTRATION RATING COUNCIL (NFRC)
NFRC 100 (2014) Procedure for Determining

Fenestration Product U-Factors
NFRC 200 (2014) Procedure for Determining

Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain
Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at
Normal Incidence

16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing

Materials
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation; G, A/E
Drawings showing complete details of the proposed setting
methods, mullion details, edge blocking, size of openings, frame

details, materials, and types and thickness of glass.
SD-03 Product Data
Insulating Glass; G, A/E
Documentation for Energy Star qualifications.
Glazing Accessories; G, A/E
Manufacturer's descriptive product data, handling and storage

recommendations, installation instructions, and cleaning
instructions.
SD-04 Samples
Insulating Glass; G, A/E
Glazing Compound; G
Glazing Tape; G
Sealant; G
Two 8 by 10 inch samples of each of the following: tinted glass,

patterned glass, heat-absorbing glass, and insulating glass units.
Three samples of each indicated material. Samples of plastic

sheets shall be minimum 5 by 7 inches.
SD-07 Certificates
Insulating Glass; G
Certificates stating that the glass meets the specified

requirements. Labels or manufacturers marking affixed to the
glass will be accepted in lieu of certificates.
Glazing Accessories; G
Certificates from the manufacturer attesting that the units meet

the luminous and solar radiant transmission requirements for heat
absorbing glass.
Setting and sealing materials; G
Glass setting; G
Submit glass manufacturer's recommendations for setting and

sealing materials and for installation of each type of glazing
material specified.
Glazing systems shall be fabricated and installed watertight and airtight

to withstand thermal movement and wind loading without glass breakage,
gasket failure, deterioration of glazing accessories, and defects in the

work. Glazed panels shall comply with the safety standards, as indicated
in accordance with ANSI Z97.1. Glazed panels shall comply with indicated
wind/snow loading in accordance with ASTM E1300.
Deliver products to the site in unopened containers, labeled plainly with

manufacturers' names and brands. Store glass and setting materials in
safe, enclosed dry locations and do not unpack until needed for
installation. Handle and install materials in a manner that will protect
them from damage.
Do not start glazing work until the outdoor temperature is above40 degrees
F and rising, unless procedures recommended by the glass manufacturer and
approved by the Contracting Officer are made to warm the glass and rabbet
surfaces. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation of moisture on
glazing work during installation. Do not perform glazing work during damp
or rainy weather.
1.6 WARRANTY
1.6.1 Warranty for Insulating Glass Units
Warranty insulating glass units against development of material

obstruction to vision (such as dust, fogging, or film formation on the
inner glass surfaces) caused by failure of the hermetic seal, other than
through glass breakage, for a 10-year period following acceptance of the
work. Provide new units for any units failing to comply with terms of
this warranty within 45 working days after receipt of notice from the
Government.
1.6.2 Monolithic Opacified Spandrel
Manufacturer shall warrant the opacifier film on the spandrel to be free

of peeling for a period of five years after Date of Substantial
Completion. Warranty shall be signed by manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS
ASTM C1036, unless specified otherwise. In doors and sidelights, provide

safety glazing material conforming to 16 CFR 1201.
2.1.1 Annealed Glass
Annealed glass shall be Type I transparent flat type, Class 1 - clear,

Quality q3 - glazing select, 42 percent visible light transmittance, 0.32
percent shading coefficient, conforming to ASTM C1036. Color shall be
bronze.
2.1.2 Laminated Glass
ASTM C1172, Kind LA fabricated from two nominal 1/8 inchpieces of Type I,
Class 1, Quality q3, flat annealed transparent glass conforming to
ASTM C1036. Flat glass shall be laminated together with a minimum of
0.030 inchthick, clear polyvinyl butyral interlayer. The total thickness

shall be nominally 1/4 inch. Color shall be bronze. The total thickness
shall be nominally 1/4 inch.
2.1.3 Tempered Glass
ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Type I,

Class 2 (tinted heat absorbing), Quality q3, 1/4 inch thick, 42 percent
light transmittance, 0.32 percent shading coefficient conforming to
ASTM C1048 and GANA Standards Manual. Color shall be bronze.
2.1.4 Spandrel Glass
2.1.4.1 Spandrel Glass
ASTM C1048, Kind FT or HS, silicone high performance coating. Coating

shall have a minimum thickness of 6.5 mils dry. Spandrel coating
orientation: interior surface (surface facing wall). Refer to 09 06 90
COLOR SCHEDULE for color.
2.1.5 Fire/Safety Rated Glass
Fire/safety rated glass shall be laminated Type I transparent flat type,

Class 1-clear. Glass shall have a 45 minute rating when tested in
accordance with ASTM E119. Glass shall be permanently labeled with
appropriate markings.
Contractor to coordinate the Insulated ("Blast-Resistant") Glazing with

the Curtainwall and Storefront Manufacturer/provider to insure compliance
with ATFP requirements. Contractor to provide required frame, rabbet, and
reinforcement details to meet ATFP standards.
2.2 INSULATING GLASS UNITS
Two panes of glass separated by a dehydrated 1/2 inch airspace, filled

with argon gas, and hermetically sealed. Non-residential glazed systems
(including frames and glass) shall be certified by the National
Fenestration Rating Council with a whole-window Solar Heat Gain
Coefficient (SHGC) maximum of 0.21 determined according to NFRC 200
procedures and a U-factor maximum of 0.28 in accordance with NFRC 100.
Shading coefficient maximum of 0.25. Glazing shall meet or exceed a
luminous efficacy of 1.0. Glazed panels shall be rated for not less than
35 Sound Transmission Class (STC) when tested for laboratory sound
transmission loss according to ASTM E90 and determined by ASTM E413.
Dimensional tolerances shall be as specified in IGMA TR-1200. Spacer shall
be black, roll-formed, steel-reinforced butyl rubber, with bent or tightly
welded or keyed and sealed joints to completely seal the spacer periphery
and eliminate moisture and hydrocarbon vapor transmission into airspace
through the corners. Primary seal shall be compressed polyisobutylene and
the secondary seal shall be a specially formulated silicone.
Two panes of glass separated by a dehydrated airspace and hermetically

sealed. Dimensional tolerances shall be as specified in IGMA TR-1200.
Spacer shall be roll-formed, with bent or tightly welded or keyed and
sealed joints to completely seal the spacer periphery and eliminate
moisture and hydrocarbon vapor transmission into airspace through the
corners. Primary seal shall be compressed polyisobutylene and the
secondary seal shall be a specially formulated silicone.
2.2.1 Low Emissivity Insulating Glass
Interior and exterior glass panes for Low-E insulating units shall be Type
I annealed flat glass, Class 1-clear with anti-reflective low-emissivity
coating on No. 3 surface (inside surface of interior pane), Quality q3 -
glazing select, conforming to ASTM C1036. Color shall be bronze and as
shown in Section 09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE.
2.3 SETTING AND SEALING MATERIALS
Provide as specified in the GANA Glazing Manual, IGMA TM-3000, IGMA TB-3001,
and manufacturer's recommendations, unless specified otherwise herein. Do
not use metal sash putty, nonskinning compounds, nonresilient preformed
sealers, or impregnated preformed gaskets. Materials exposed to view and
unpainted shall be gray or neutral color.
2.3.1 Putty and Glazing Compound
Glazing compound shall be as recommended by manufacturer for face-glazing

metal sash. Putty shall be linseed oil type. Putty and glazing compounds
shall not be used with insulating glass or laminated glass.
2.3.2 Glazing Compound
Use for face glazing metal sash. Do not use with insulating glass units
or laminated glass.
2.3.3 Sealants
Provide elastomeric and structural sealants.
2.3.3.1 Elastomeric Sealant
ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 12.5, Use G. Use for channel or stop
glazing metal sash. Sealant shall be chemically compatible with setting
blocks, edge blocks, and sealing tapes, with sealants used in manufacture
of insulating glass units. Color of sealant shall be white.
2.3.3.2 Structural Sealant
ASTM C1184, Type S.
2.3.4 Joint Backer
Joint backer shall have a diameter size at least 25 percent larger than
joint width; type and material as recommended in writing by glass and
sealant manufacturer.
2.3.5 Preformed Channels
Neoprene, vinyl, or rubber, as recommended by the glass manufacturer for

the particular condition.
2.3.6 Sealing Tapes
Preformed, semisolid, PVC-based material of proper size and

compressibility for the particular condition, complying with ASTM D2287.
Use only where glazing rabbet is designed for tape and tape is recommended
by the glass or sealant manufacturer. Provide spacer shims for use with
compressible tapes. Tapes shall be chemically compatible with the product

being set.
2.3.7 Setting Blocks and Edge Blocks
Closed-cell neoprene setting blocks shall be dense extruded type

conforming to ASTM C509 and ASTM D395, Method B, Shore A durometer between
70 and 90. Edge blocking shall be Shore A durometer of 50 (plus or minus
5). Silicone setting blocks shall be required when blocks are in contact
with silicone sealant. Profiles, lengths and locations shall be as
required and recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Block color
shall be black.
2.3.8 Glazing Gaskets
Glazing gaskets shall be extruded with continuous integral locking

projection designed to engage into metal glass holding members to provide
a watertight seal during dynamic loading, building movements and thermal
movements. Glazing gaskets for a single glazed opening shall be
continuous one-piece units with factory-fabricated injection-molded
corners free of flashing and burrs. Glazing gaskets shall be in lengths
or units recommended by manufacturer to ensure against pull-back at
corners. Glazing gasket profiles shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer for the intended application.
2.3.8.1 Fixed Glazing Gaskets
Fixed glazing gaskets shall be closed-cell (sponge) smooth extruded

compression gaskets of cured elastomeric virgin neoprene compounds
conforming to ASTM C509, Type 2, Option 1.
2.3.8.2 Wedge Glazing Gaskets
Wedge glazing gaskets shall be high-quality extrusions of cured

elastomeric virgin neoprene compounds, ozone resistant, conforming to
ASTM C864, Option 1, Shore A durometer between 65 and 75.
2.3.8.3 Aluminum Framing Glazing Gaskets
Glazing gaskets for aluminum framing shall be permanent, elastic,

non-shrinking, non-migrating, watertight and weathertight.
2.3.9 Accessories
Provide as required for a complete installation, including glazing points,

clips, shims, angles, beads, and spacer strips. Provide noncorroding
metal accessories. Provide primer-sealers and cleaners as recommended by
the glass and sealant manufacturers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Preparation, unless otherwise specified or approved, shall conform to

applicable recommendations in the GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual,
IGMA TB-3001, IGMA TM-3000, and manufacturer's recommendations.
Determine the sizes to provide the required edge clearances by measuring
the actual opening to receive the glass. Grind smooth in the shop glass
edges that will be exposed in finish work. Leave labels in place until
the installation is approved, except remove applied labels on

heat-absorbing glass and on insulating glass units as soon as glass is
installed. Securely fix movable items or keep in a closed and locked
position until glazing compound has thoroughly set.
3.2 GLASS SETTING
Shop glaze or field glaze items to be glazed using glass of the quality
and thickness specified or indicated. Glazing, unless otherwise specified
or approved, shall conform to applicable recommendations in the
GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual, IGMA TB-3001, IGMA TM-3000, and
manufacturer's recommendations. Aluminum windows, wood doors, and wood
windows may be glazed in conformance with one of the glazing methods
described in the standards under which they are produced, except that face
puttying with no bedding will not be permitted. Handle and install
glazing materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use
beads or stops which are furnished with items to be glazed to secure the
glass in place. Verify products are properly installed, connected, and
adjusted.
3.2.1 Sheet Glass
Cut and set with the visible lines or waves horizontal.
3.2.2 Insulating Glass Units
Do not grind, nip, or cut edges or corners of units after the units have
left the factory. Springing, forcing, or twisting of units during setting
will not be permitted. Handle units so as not to strike frames or other
objects. Installation shall conform to applicable recommendations of
IGMA TB-3001 and IGMA TM-3000.
3.3 CLEANING
Clean glass surfaces and remove labels, paint spots, putty, and other
defacement as required to prevent staining. Glass shall be clean at the
time the work is accepted.
3.4 PROTECTION
Glass work shall be protected immediately after installation. Glazed

openings shall be identified with suitable warning tapes, cloth or paper
flags, attached with non-staining adhesives. Reflective glass shall be
protected with a protective material to eliminate any contamination of the
reflective coating. Protective material shall be placed far enough away
from the coated glass to allow air to circulate to reduce heat buildup and
moisture accumulation on the glass. Upon removal, separate protective
materials for reuse or recycling. Glass units which are broken, chipped,
cracked, abraded, or otherwise damaged during construction activities
shall be removed and replaced with new units.
Disposal and recycling of waste materials, including corrugated cardboard

recycling, shall be in accordance with the Waste Management Plan. Close
and seal tightly all partly used sealant containers and store protected in
well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate temperature.
SECTION 08 91 00
METAL DOOR LOUVERS

05/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


the Hot-Dip Process
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Door louvers; G, A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Metal Door Louvers; G, A/E
SD-04 Samples
Door louvers; G
Deliver materials to the site in an undamaged condition. Carefully store

materials off the ground to provide proper ventilation, drainage, and
protection against dampness. Louvers shall be free from nicks, scratches,
and blemishes. Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
1.4 DETAIL DRAWINGS
Show all information necessary for fabrication and installation of wall

louvers. Indicate materials, sizes, thicknesses, fastenings, and profiles.
1.5 COLOR SAMPLES
Colors of finishes for wall louvers and door louvers shall closely
approximate colors indicated. Where color is not indicated, submit the
manufacturer's standard colors to the Contracting Officer for selection.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Galvanized Steel Sheet
ASTM A653/A653M, coating designation G90.
2.2 METAL DOOR LOUVERS
2.2.1 Formed Metal Louvers
Formed of steel sheet not thinner than 16 U.S. gage, not less than 0.08
inch thick.
2.2.2 Mullions and Mullion Covers
Same material and finish as louvers.
2.3 DOOR LOUVERS
Inverted "Y" or Inverted "V" sightproof type not less than one inch thick
with matching metal trim. Louvers for exterior doors shall be weather
resistant type.
2.3.1 Formed Metal Door Louvers
Fabricate of 20 U.S. gage steel sheet not less than 0.050 inch thick.
Trim shall be beveled "Z" molding both sides.
2.4 FASTENERS AND ACCESSORIES
Provide stainless steel screws and fasteners for louvers and zinc-coated
or stainless steel screws and fasteners for steel louvers. Provide other
accessories as required for complete and proper installation.
2.5 FINISHES
2.5.1 Steel
Provide factory-applied coating. Clean and phosphate treat exposed

surfaces and apply rust-inhibitive primer and baked enamel finish coat,
one mil minimum total dry film thickness.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Door Louvers
Install louvers in wood doors by using metal "Z" or "L" moldings. Fasten
moldings to door with screws.
3.1.2 Screens and Frames
Attach frames to louvers with screws or bolts.
3.2 PROTECTION FROM CONTACT OF DISSIMILAR MATERIALS
3.2.1 Metal
Paint metal in contact with mortar, concrete, or other masonry materials

with alkali-resistant coatings such as heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
3.2.2 Wood
Paint wood or other absorptive materials that may become repeatedly wet
and in contact with metal with two coats of paint or a coat of
heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
SECTION 09 06 90
COLOR SCHEDULE
05/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This section covers only the color of exterior and interior materials and
products that are exposed to view in the finished construction. The word
"color", as used herein, includes surface color and pattern. Requirements
for quality, product specifications, and method of installation are
covered in other appropriate sections of the specifications. Specific
locations where the various materials are required are shown on the
drawings if not identified in this specification. Items not designated
for color in this section may be specified in other sections. When color
is not designated for items, propose a color for approval. Refer to MCAS
Yuma Installation Master Plan dated, March 2014 for color paint palette of
federal standard colors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COLOR SCHEDULE
The color schedule information provided in the following paragraphs lists

the colors, patterns and textures required for exterior and interior
finishes, including both factory applied and field applied colors. Where
color is shown as being specific to one manufacturer, an equivalent color
by another manufacturer may be submitted for approval. Manufacturers and
materials specified are not intended to limit the selection of equal
colors from other manufacturers. In the case of difference between the
drawings and specifications, colors identified in this specification
govern.
2.2 EXTERIOR FINISHES
2.2.1 Exterior Walls
Exterior wall colors apply to exterior wall surfaces including recesses at

entrances and projecting vestibules. When applicable, paint conduit to
closely match the adjacent surface color. Provide wall colors to match
the colors listed below.
2.2.1.1 Mortar
Match existing building.
2.2.1.2 Concrete Masonry Units (Integrally Colored)
CMU 1 Oldcastle: Spanish Brown.
2.2.1.3 Metal Wall Panels, Hardware, and Associated Trim
33617.
2.2.1.4 Glass and Glazing
Solar ban 70XL, Solar Bronze, Lowe.
2.2.1.5 Spandrel
Match existing door and louver.
2.2.2 Exterior Trim
Provide exterior trim to match the colors listed below.
2.2.2.1 Steel Doors and Door Frames
Match existing.
2.2.2.2 Aluminum Doors and Door Frames
33617.
2.2.2.3 Aluminum Windows (mullion, muntin, sash, trim, and sill)
33617.
2.2.2.4 Flashings
Match adjacent material in color.
2.2.2.5 Handrails
37778.
2.2.2.6 Guardrails
37778.
2.2.2.7 Caulking and Sealants
2.2.2.8 Sun Shades
33617.
2.2.2.9 Expansion Joint and/or Covers
2.2.2.10 Bollard
Safety yellow.
2.3 INTERIOR FINISHES
2.3.1 Interior Floor Finishes
Provide flooring materials to match the colors listed below.
2.3.1.1 Vinyl Composition Tile
ESD - Staticworx; Eclipse Series PRSTO 24 x 24 inches.
2.3.1.2 Stair Flooring
RS - Johnsonite; RTR-29-RO; Moon rock raised circle.
2.3.1.3 Stair Landings
RS - Johnsonite; RTR-29-RO; Moon rock raised circle.
2.3.1.4 Porcelain Tile
PT-1: Daltile-Invoke, Evening Veil ID04, 18 x 36 inches.
PT-2: Daltile-Invoke, Mystic Way ID02, 18 x 36 inches.
2.3.1.5 Grout
G-1: Mapei, 14 Biscuit.
G-2: Mapei, 47 Charcoal.
G-3: Custom Building Products, 335 Winter Gray.
2.3.1.6 Plastic Laminate
Plam-Nevemar-Calypso WZ0057T.
2.3.1.7 Concrete
Concrete Sealer, Clear.
2.3.2 Interior Base Finishes
Provide base materials to match the colors listed below.
2.3.2.1 Resilient Base and Moldings
RB - Johnsonite; 29 Moon rock.
PT-1: Daltile-Invoke, Evening Veil ID04, 18 x 36 inches.
PT-2: Daltile-Invoke, Mystic Way ID02, 18 x 36 inches.
2.3.2.3 Grout
2.3.3 Interior Wall Finishes
Apply interior wall color to the entire wall surface, including reveals,
vertical furred spaces and columns, grilles, diffusers, electrical and

access panels, and piping and conduit adjacent to wall surfaces unless
otherwise specified. Paint items not specified in other paragraphs to
match adjacent wall surface. Provide wall materials to match the colors
listed below.
2.3.3.1 Paint
P-1: Benjamin Moore AC28 Smoke Embers, Eggshell.
P-2: Benjamin Moore AC29 San Antonio Gray, Eggshell.
PT-3: Daltile- Unity, Andrid P400, Polished 12 x 24 inches.
PT-4: Daltile- Unity, Andrid P400, Textured 12 x 24 inches.
2.3.3.3 Grout
2.3.3.4 Exposed Structural Columns
Semigloss, White.
2.3.4 Interior Ceiling Finishes
Apply ceiling colors to ceiling surfaces including soffits, furred down

areas, grilles, diffusers, registers, and access panels. In addition,
apply ceiling color to joists, underside of roof deck, and conduit and
piping where joists and deck are exposed and required to be painted.
Provide ceiling materials to match the colors listed below.
2.3.4.1 Acoustical Tile and Grid
Manufacturers Standard Color Sac-Armstrong, Ultima, Square Edge 24

x 48 inches.
2.3.4.2 Paint (Ceilings)
Semigloss, White.
2.3.4.3 Paint (Soffits)
Semigloss, White.
2.3.4.4 Metal Deck
P-3: Benjamin Moore 2127-40, Wolf Gray.
2.3.4.5 Structural Framing
2.3.5 Interior Trim
Provide interior trim to match the colors listed below.
2.3.5.1 Steel Doors
2.3.5.2 Steel Door Frames
2.3.5.3 Steel Windows (mullion, muntin, sash, trim, and stool)
2.3.5.4 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
Clear anodized aluminum.
2.3.5.5 Handrails
P-3: Benjamin Moore 2127-40, Wolf Gray..
2.3.5.6 Guardrails
2.3.5.7 Ladders
2.3.5.8 Metal Stairs; includes underside of stairs only
2.3.5.9 Exposed Ductwork
Semigloss, White.
2.3.6 Interior Window Treatment
Provide window treatments to match the colors listed below.
2.3.7 Interior Miscellaneous
Provide miscellaneous items to match the colors listed below.
2.3.7.1 Toilet Partitions and Urinal Screens
Submit manufacturer's full line of colors.
2.3.7.2 Plastic Laminate
Plam, Nevamar, Calypso WZ0057.
2.3.7.3 Solid Surfacing Material
SSM; Cosentino-ECO, Grey Moss.
2.3.7.4 Window Sills
Match frame and wall finish.
2.3.7.5 Signage Message Color
Match existing.
2.3.7.6 Wall Switch Handles and Standard Receptacle Bodies
White.
2.3.7.7 Electrical Device Cover Plates
White.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
SECTION 09 22 00
SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD

02/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Steel Buildings

Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip
Process

the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM C645 (2014) Nonstructural Steel Framing Members
ASTM C754 (2011) Installation of Steel Framing

Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum
Panel Products
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Metal support systems; G, A/E
Submit for the erection of metal framing, furring, and ceiling

suspension systems. Indicate materials, sizes, thicknesses, and
fastenings.
Deliver materials to the job site and store in ventilated dry locations.
Storage area shall permit easy access for inspection and handling. If
materials are stored outdoors, stack materials off the ground, supported
on a level platform, and fully protected from the weather. Handle
materials carefully to prevent damage. Remove damaged items and provide
new items.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Provide steel materials for metal support systems with galvanized coating
ASTM A653/A653M, G-60; aluminum coating ASTM A463/A463M, T1-25; or a
55-percent aluminum-zinc coating. Provide support systems and attachments
per AISC 341 and UFC 3-310-04 in seismic zones.
2.1.1 Materials for Attachment of Gypsum Wallboard
2.1.1.1 Suspended and Furred Ceiling Systems
ASTM C645.
2.1.1.2 Nonload-Bearing Wall Framing and Furring
ASTM C645, but not thinner than 0.0179 inch thickness, with 0.0329 inch
minimum thickness supporting wall hung items such as cabinetwork,
equipment and fixtures .
2.1.1.3 Z-Furring Channels with Wall Insulation
Not lighter than 26 gage galvanized steel, Z-shaped, with 1-1/4 inch and
3/4 inch flanges and depth as required by the insulation thickness provided.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Systems for Attachment of Gypsum Wallboard
3.1.1.1 Suspended and Furred Ceiling Systems
ASTM C754, except provide framing members 16 inches o.c. unless indicated
otherwise.
3.1.1.2 Non-loadbearing Wall Framing and Furring
ASTM C754, except as indicated otherwise.
3.1.1.3 Z-Furring Channels with Wall Insulation
Install Z-furring channels vertically spaced not more than 24 inches o.c.
Locate Z-furring channels at interior and exterior corners in accordance
with manufacturer's printed erection instructions. Fasten furring
channels to masonry walls with powder-driven fasteners or hardened
concrete steel nails through narrow flange of channel. Space fasteners
not more than 24 inches o.c.
3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES
Provide framing members which will be covered by finish materials such as
wallboard, plaster, or ceramic tile set in a mortar setting bed, within

a. Layout of walls and partitions: 1/4 inch from intended position;
b. Plates and runners: 1/4 inch in 8 feet from a straight line;
c. Studs: 1/4 inch in 8 feet out of plumb, not cumulative; and
d. Face of framing members: 1/4 inch in 8 feet from a true plane.
Provide framing members which will be covered by ceramic tile set in

dry-set mortar, latex-portland cement mortar, or organic adhesive within
a. Layout of walls and partitions: 1/4 inch from intended position;
b. Plates and runners: 1/8 inch in 8 feet from a straight line;
c. Studs: 1/8 inch in 8 feet out of plumb, not cumulative; and
d. Face of framing members: 1/8 inch in 8 feet from a true plane.
SECTION 09 29 00
GYPSUM BOARD
05/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ANSI A108.11 (1992; Reaffirmed 2005) Specifications for

Interior Installation of Cementitious
Backer Units

Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the
Application of Gypsum Panel Products or
Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel
Studs

Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and
Gypsum Veneer Base
ASTM C1177/C1177M (2013) Standard Specification for Glass

Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing
ASTM C1396/C1396M (2014a) Standard Specification for Gypsum

Board
ASTM C475/C475M (2012; E 2014) Joint Compound and Joint

Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board
ASTM C840 (2013) Application and Finishing of Gypsum

Board
ASTM C954 (2011) Steel Drill Screws for the

Application of Gypsum Panel Products or
Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from
0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)
in Thickness

Rubber Deterioration - Surface Ozone
Cracking in a Chamber
ASTM D226/D226M (2009) Standard Specification for

Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing
ASTM D3273 (2012) Resistance to Growth of Mold on the
Surface of Interior Coatings in an

Environmental Chamber

ASTM D624 (2000; R 2012) Tear Strength of

Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers
GYPSUM ASSOCIATION (GA)
GA 214 (2010) Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board

Finish
GA 216 (2010) Application and Finishing of Gypsum

Panel Products
GA 253 (2012) Application of Gypsum Sheathing
GA 600 (2009) Fire Resistance Design Manual
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Cementitious backer units; G, A/E
Glass Mat Covered or Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing; G, A/E
Glass Mat Covered or Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing Sealant; G, A/E
Accessories; G, A/E
Submit for each type of gypsum board and for cementitious backer
units.
Gypsum Board; G, A/E
Adhesives; G, A/E
Joint Treatment Materials; G, A/E
SD-04 Samples
Trim Accessories; G
Submit full size samples in 12-inch long length for each trim
accessory indicated.
SD-07 Certificates
Asbestos Free Materials; G
Certify that gypsum board types, gypsum backing board types,

cementitious backer units, and joint treating materials do not
contain asbestos.
Material Safety Data Sheets
Manufacturer maintenance instructions
Waste Management
1.3.1 Delivery
Deliver materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles with

each bearing the brand name, applicable standard designation, and name of
manufacturer, or supplier.
1.3.2 Storage
Keep materials dry by storing inside a sheltered building. Where

necessary to store gypsum board and cementitious backer units outside,
store off the ground, properly supported on a level platform, and
protected from direct exposure to rain, snow, sunlight, and other extreme
weather conditions. Provide adequate ventilation to prevent
condensation. Store per manufacturer's recommendations for allowable
temperature and humidity range. Do not store panels near materials that
may offgas or emit harmful fumes, such as kerosene heaters, fresh paint,
or adhesives.
1.3.3 Handling
Neatly stack gypsum board and cementitious backer units flat to prevent
sagging or damage to the edges, ends, and surfaces.
1.4.1 Temperature
Maintain a uniform temperature of not less than 50 degrees F in the

structure for at least 48 hours prior to, during, and following the
application of gypsum board, cementitious backer units, and joint
treatment materials, or the bonding of adhesives.
1.4.2 Exposure to Weather
Protect gypsum board and cementitious backer unit products from direct
exposure to rain, snow, sunlight, and other extreme weather conditions.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
Furnish type of gypsum board work specialized by the installer with a

minimum of 3 years of documented successful experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Conform to specifications, standards and requirements specified. Provide

gypsum board types, gypsum backing board types, cementitious backing
units, and joint treating materials manufactured from asbestos free
materials only. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets and manufacturer
maintenance instructions for gypsum materials including adhesives.
2.1.1 Gypsum Board
ASTM C1396/C1396M. Paper facings shall contain 100 percent post-consumer

recycled paper content. Gypsum board may contain post-consumer or
post-industrial recycled content.
2.1.1.1 Regular
48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, tapered edges.
2.1.1.2 Type X (Special Fire-Resistant)
48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, tapered edges.
2.1.2 Gypsum Backing Board
ASTM C1396/C1396M, gypsum backing board shall be used as a base in a

multilayer system.
2.1.2.1 Regular
48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, square edges.
2.1.2.2 Type X (Special Fire-Resistant)
48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, square edges.
2.1.3 Glass Mat Covered or Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing
Exceeds physical properties of ASTM C1396/C1396M and ASTM C1177/C1177M.

Provide 5/8 inch, gypsum sheathing. Provide gypsum board of with a
noncombustible water-resistant core, with glass mat surfaces embedded to
the gypsum core or reinforcing embedded throughout the gypsum core.
Warrant gypsum sheathing board for at least twelve months against
delamination due to direct weather exposure. Provide continuous, asphalt
impregnated, building felt to cover exterior face of sheathing. Seal all
joints, seams, and penetrations with compatible sealant.
2.1.3.1 Glass Mat Covered or Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing Sealant
Provide sealant compatible with gypsum sheathing, rubber washers for

masonry veneer anchors, and other associated cavity wall components such
as anchors and through wall flashing. Provide sealants for gypsum
sheathing board edge seams and veneer anchor penetrations recommended by
the gypsum sheathing manufacturer and have the following performance

requirements:
a. ASTM D412: Tensile Strength, 80 psi

b. ASTM D412: Ultimate Tensile Strength (maximum elongation), 170 psi
c. ASTM D624: Tear Strength, dieB, 27 ppi
d. ASTM D1149: Joint Movement Capability after 14 Days cure, plus or
minus 50 percent.
2.1.4 Cementitious Backer Units
In accordance with the Tile Council of America (TCA) Handbook.
2.1.5 Joint Treatment Materials
ASTM C475/C475M. Use all purpose joint and texturing compound containing
inert fillers and natural binders, including lime compound. Pre-mixed
compounds shall be free of antifreeze, vinyl adhesives, preservatives,
biocides and other slow releasing compounds.
2.1.5.1 Insulated Cementitious Backer Unit
ASTM D3273. Provide impact resistant cementitious backer laminated to

continuous layer of rigid insulation. Size as indicated in the drawings.
2.1.5.2 Embedding Compound
Specifically formulated and manufactured for use in embedding tape at

gypsum board joints and compatible with tape, substrate and fasteners.
2.1.5.3 Finishing or Topping Compound
Specifically formulated and manufactured for use as a finishing compound.
2.1.5.4 All-Purpose Compound
Specifically formulated and manufactured to serve as both a taping and a

finishing compound and compatible with tape, substrate and fasteners.
2.1.5.5 Setting or Hardening Type Compound
Specifically formulated and manufactured for use with fiber glass mesh
tape.
2.1.5.6 Joint Tape
Use cross-laminated, tapered edge, reinforced paper, or fiber glass mesh

tape recommended by the manufacturer.
2.1.6 Fasteners
2.1.6.1 Screws
ASTM C1002, Type "G", Type "S" or Type "W" steel drill screws for
fastening gypsum board to gypsum board, wood framing members and steel
framing members less than 0.033 inch thick. ASTM C954 steel drill screws
for fastening gypsum board to steel framing members 0.033 to 0.112 inch
thick. Provide cementitious backer unit screws with a polymer coating.
2.1.7 Adhesives
Do not use adhesive containing benzene, carbon tetrachloride, or

trichloroethylene. Adhesive shall contain a maximum VOC content of 50
grams per liter.
2.1.7.1 Adhesive for Fastening Gypsum Board to Metal Framing
Not permitted.
2.1.8 Shaftwall Liner Panel
ASTM C1396/C1396M. Conform to the UL Fire Resistance for the Design

Numbers(s) indicated for shaftwall liner panels. Manufacture liner panel
for cavity shaftwall system, with water-resistant paper faces, bevel
edges, single lengths to fit required conditions, 1" thick, by 24" wide.
2.1.9 Accessories
ASTM C1047. Fabricate from corrosion protected steel or plastic designed

for intended use. Accessories manufactured with paper flanges are not
acceptable. Flanges shall be free of dirt, grease, and other materials
that may adversely affect bond of joint treatment. Provide prefinished or
job decorated materials.
2.1.10 Asphalt Impregnated Building Felt
Provide a 15 lb asphalt moisture barrier over gypsum sheathing.

Conforming to ASTM D226/D226M Type 1 (No. 15) for asphalt impregnated
building felt.
2.1.11 Water
Provide clean, fresh, and potable water.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1 Framing and Furring
Verify that framing and furring are securely attached and of sizes and
spacing to provide a suitable substrate to receive gypsum board and
cementitious backer units. Verify that all blocking, headers and supports
are in place to support plumbing fixtures and to receive soap dishes, grab
bars, towel racks, and similar items. Do not proceed with work until
framing and furring are acceptable for application of gypsum board and
cementitious backer units.
3.2 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD
Apply gypsum board to framing and furring members in accordance with

ASTM C840 or GA 216 and the requirements specified. Apply gypsum board
with separate panels in moderate contact; do not force in place. Stagger
end joints of adjoining panels. Neatly fit abutting end and edge joints.
Use gypsum board of maximum practical length; select panel sizes to
minimize waste. Cut out gypsum board to make neat, close, and tight
joints around openings. In vertical application of gypsum board, provide
panels in lengths required to reach full height of vertical surfaces in
one continuous piece. Lay out panels to minimize waste; reuse cutoffs
whenever feasible. Surfaces of gypsum board and substrate members may not
be bonded together with an adhesive, except where prohibited by fire
rating(s). Treat edges of cutouts for plumbing pipes, screwheads, and
joints with water-resistant compound as recommended by the gypsum board
manufacturer. Provide type of gypsum board for use in each system
specified herein as indicated.
3.2.1 Semi-Solid Gypsum Board Partitions
Provide in accordance with ASTM C840, System IV or GA 216 .
3.2.2 Solid Gypsum Board Partitions
Provide in accordance with ASTM C840, System V or GA 216.
3.2.3 Application of Gypsum Board to Steel Framing and Furring
Apply in accordance with ASTM C840, System VIII or GA 216.
3.2.4 Exterior Application
Apply exterior gypsum board (such as at soffits) in accordance with

ASTM C840, System XI or GA 216.
3.2.5 Glass Mat Covered or Fiber Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing
Apply gypsum sheathing in accordance to gypsum association publications

GA 253. Follow gypsum sheathing manufacturer's requirements of design
details for joints and fasteners and be properly installed to protect the
substrate from moisture intrusion. Do not leave exposed surfaces of the
gypsum sheathing beyond the manufacturer's recommendation without a
weather barrier cladding. Provide continuous asphalt impregnated building
felt over sheathing surface in shingle fashion with edges and ends lapped
a minimum of 6 inch. Property flash the openings. Seal all joints,
seams, and penetrations with a compatible silicone sealant.
3.2.6 Floating Interior Angles
Minimize framing by floating corners with single studs and drywall

clips. Locate the attachment fasteners adjacent to ceiling and wall
intersections in accordance with ASTM C840, System XII or GA 216, for
single-ply and two-ply applications.
3.2.7 Control Joints
Install expansion and contraction joints in ceilings and walls in

accordance with ASTM C840, System XIII or GA 216. Fill control joints
between studs in fire-rated construction with firesafing insulation to
match the fire-rating of construction.
3.3 APPLICATION OF CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS
3.3.1 Application
In wet areas (tubs, shower enclosures, saunas, steam rooms, gang shower
rooms), apply cementitious backer units in accordance with ANSI A108.11.
Place a 15 lb asphalt impregnated, continuous felt paper membrane behind
cementitious backer units, between backer units and studs or base layer of
gypsum board. Place membrane with a minimum 6 inch overlap of sheets laid
shingle style.
3.3.2 Joint Treatment
ANSI A108.11.
3.4 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD
Tape and finish gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840, GA 214 and
GA 216. Finish plenum areas above ceilings to Level 1 in accordance with
GA 214. Finish water resistant gypsum backing board, ASTM C1396/C1396M,
to receive ceramic tile to Level 2 in accordance with GA 214. Finish
walls and ceilings to receive a heavy-grade wall covering or heave
textured finish before painting to Level 3 in accordance with GA 214.
Finish walls and ceilings without critical lighting to receive flat
paints, light textures, or wall coverings to Level 4 in accordance with
GA 214. Unless otherwise specified, finish all gypsum board walls,
partitions and ceilings to Level 5 in accordance with GA 214. Provide
joint, fastener depression, and corner treatment. Tool joints as smoothly
as possible to minimize sanding and dust. Do not use fiber glass mesh
tape with conventional drying type joint compounds; use setting or
hardening type compounds only. Provide treatment for water-resistant
gypsum board as recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer. Protect
workers, building occupants, and HVAC systems from gypsum dust.
3.4.1 Uniform Surface
Wherever gypsum board is to receive eggshell, semigloss or gloss paint

finish, or where severe, up or down lighting conditions occur, finish
gypsum wall surface in accordance to GA 214 Level 5. In accordance with
GA 214 Level 5, apply a thin skim coat of joint compound to the entire
gypsum board surface, after the two-coat joint and fastener treatment is
complete and dry.
3.5 SEALING
Seal openings around pipes, fixtures, and other items projecting through
gypsum board and cementitious backer units as specified in Section 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS Apply material with exposed surface flush with gypsum
board or cementitious backer units.
3.5.1 Sealing for Glass Mat or Reinforced Gypsum Board Sheathing
Apply silicone sealant in a 3/8 inch bead to all joints and trowel flat.
Apply enough of the same sealant to all fasteners penetrating through the
glass mat gypsum board surface to completely cover the penetration when
troweled flat. Do not place construction and materials behind sheathing
until a visual inspection of sealed joints during daylight hours has been
completed by Contracting Officer.
3.6 FIRE-RESISTANT ASSEMBLIES
Wherever fire-rated construction is indicated, provide materials and

application methods, including types and spacing of fasteners, wall and
ceiling framing in accordance with the specifications contained in
UL Fire Resistance for the Design Number(s) indicated, or GA 600 for the
File Number(s) indicated. Joints of fire-rated gypsum board enclosures
shall be closed and sealed in accordance with UL test requirements or GA
requirements. Seal penetrations through rated partitions and ceilings

tight in accordance with tested systems.
3.7 PATCHING
Patch surface defects in gypsum board to a smooth, uniform appearance,

ready to receive finishes.
3.8 SHAFTWALL FRAMING
Install the shaftwall system in accordance with the system manufacturer's

published instructions. Coordinate bucks, anchors, blocking and other
items placed in or behind shaftwall framing with electrical and mechanical
work. Patch or replace fireproofing materials which are damaged or
removed during shaftwall construction.
As specified in Waste Management Plan and as follows. Separate clean

waste gypsum products from contaminants. Do not include wood, plastic,
metal, asphalt-impregnated gypsum board, or any gypsum board coated with
glass fiber, vinyl, decorative paper, or other finish. Place in
designated area and protect from moisture and contamination.
Identify manufacturer's policy for collection or return of remaining

construction scrap, unused material, and demolition scrap. Institute
demolition and construction recycling to take advantage of manufacturer's
programs. When such a service is not available, seek local recyclers to
reclaim the materials.
SECTION 09 30 13
CERAMIC TILING
11/13
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ANSI A137.1 (2012) American National Standards

Specifications for Ceramic Tile
ASTM C1026 (2013) Standard Test Method for Measuring

the Resistance of Ceramic Tile to
Freeze-Thaw Cycling
ASTM C1027 (2009) Standard Test Method for

Determining Visible Abrasion Resistance of
Glazed Ceramic Tile

Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

Cement

Finishing Hydrated Lime

Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes

Aggregates
ASTM C648 (2004; R 2009) Breaking Strength of

Ceramic Tile
ASTM C847 (2014a) Standard Specification for Metal

Lath
ASTM D226/D226M (2009) Standard Specification for

Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing
ASTM D4068 (2009) Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheeting

for Concealed Water-Containment Membrane
MARBLE INSTITUTE OF AMERICA (MIA)
MIA Design Manual (2003) Dimension Stone Design Manual
TCNA Hdbk (2013) Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and

Stone Tile Installation
36 CFR 1191 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act
(ABA) Accessibility Guidelines
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Tile; G, A/E
Setting-Bed; G
Mortar, Grout, and Adhesive; G, A/E
Tile; G, A/E
SD-04 Samples
Tile; G, A/E
Accessories; G
Transition Strips; G, A/E
Grout; G, A/E
SD-07 Certificates
Tile
Mortar, Grout, and Adhesive
Maintenance Instructions
Installation
Tile
Adhesives
Installers to be from a company specializing in performing this type of

work and have a minimum of two years experience. Each type and color of
tile to be provided from a single source. Each type and color of mortar,
adhesive, and grout to be provided from the same source.
Ship tiles in sealed packages and clearly marked with the grade, type of
tile, producer identification, and country of origin. Deliver materials
to the project site in manufacturer's original unopened containers with
seals unbroken and labels and hallmarks intact. Protect materials from
weather, and store them under cover in accordance with manufacturer's
printed instructions.
Do not perform ceramic tile work unless the substrate and ambient
temperature is at least 50 degrees F and rising. Maintain temperature
above 50 degrees F while the work is being performed and for at least 7
days after completion of the work. When temporary heaters are used,
ventilate the area to the outside to avoid carbon dioxide damage to new
tilework.
1.6 WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that

extend beyond a 1-year period.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
Supply an extra 2 percent of each type tile used in clean and marked
cartons.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TILE
Furnish tiles that comply with ANSI A137.1 and are standard grade tiles.
Provide a minimum breaking strength of 125 lbs. for wall tile and 250 lbs.
for floor tile in accordance with ASTM C648. Provide exterior building
tile for cold climate projects that is approved by the manufacturer for
exterior use when tested in accordance with ASTM C1026. Provide floor
tiles with a wet dynamic coefficient of friction (DCOF) value of 0.42 or
greater when tested in accordance with ANSI A137.1 requirements. Provide
glazed floor tile with a Class IV-Commercial classification as rated by
the manufacturer when tested in accordance with ASTM C1027 for visible
abrasion resistance as related to foot traffic. For materials like tile,
accessories, and transition strips submit samples of sufficient size to
show color range, pattern, type and joints. Submit manufacturer's catalog
data.
2.1.1 Porcelain Tile
Furnish unglazed and/or glazed and textured, porcelain tile, cove base and
trim pieces with color extending uniformly through the body of the tile as
specified in Section 09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE and on Drawing Sheet No. A-61
FINISH LEGEND.
2.2 SETTING-BED
Submit manufacturer's catalog data. Compose the setting-bed oas specified

by the manufacturer.
2.2.1 Aggregate for Concrete Fill
Conform to ASTM C33/C33M for aggregate fill. Do not exceed one-half the
thickness of concrete fill for maximum size of coarse aggregate.
2.2.2 Portland Cement
Conform to ASTM C150/C150M for cement, Type I, white for wall mortar and
gray for other uses.
2.2.3 Sand
Conform to ASTM C144 for sand.
2.2.4 Hydrated Lime
Conform to ASTM C206 for hydrated lime, Type S or ASTM C207, Type S.
2.2.5 Metal Lath
Conform to ASTM C847 for flat expanded type metal lath, and weighing a
minimum 2.5 pound/square yard.
2.3 WATER
Provide potable water.
2.4 MORTAR, GROUT, AND ADHESIVE
Submit certificates indicating conformance with specified requirements.
2.4.1 Latex-Portland Cement Mortar
TCNA Hdbk.
2.4.2 Ceramic Tile Grout
TCNA Hdbk; petroleum-free and plastic-free sand portland cement grout,

dry-set grout, latex-portland cement grout, and commercial portland cement
grout.
2.4.3 Sealants
Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials

and as specified. Grout sealant must not change the color or alter the
appearance of the grout.
2.5 TRANSITION STRIPS
Provide solid surface anodized aluminum transitions between tile and

carpet or resilient flooring. Provide types as recommended by flooring
manufacturer for both edges and transitions of flooring materials specified.
Categorize marble Group A as classified by MIA Design Manual. Provide
transition strips that comply with 36 CFR 1191requirements.
2.6 MEMBRANE MATERIALS
Conform to ASTM D226/D226M, Type 1 for 15 pound waterproofing membrane,

asphalt-saturated building felt. Conform to ASTM D4068 4 mil for
polyethylene film.
2.7 COLOR, TEXTURE, AND PATTERN
Provide color, pattern and texture in accordance with Section 09 06 90

COLOR SCHEDULE and Drawing Sheet No. A-610 FINISH LEGEND. Provide floor
patterns as specified on the drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATORY WORK AND WORKMANSHIP
Inspect surface to receive tile in conformance to the requirements of

TCNA Hdbk for surface conditions for the type setting bed specified and
for workmanship. Provide variations of tiled surfaces that fall within
maximum values shown below:
TYPE WALLS FLOORS
Latex Portland Cement Mortar 1/8 inch in 8 ft. 1/8 inch in 10 ft.
Epoxy 1/8 inch in 8 ft. 1/8 inch in 10 ft.
Do not start tile work until roughing in for mechanical and electrical
work has been completed and tested, and built-in items requiring membrane
waterproofing have been installed and tested. Close space, in which tile
is being set, to traffic and other work. Keep closed until tile is firmly
set. Do not start floor tile installation in spaces requiring wall tile
until after wall tile has been installed. Apply tile in colors and
patterns indicated in the area shown on the drawings. Install tile with
the respective surfaces in true even planes to the elevations and grades
shown. Provide special shapes as required for sills, jambs, recesses,
offsets, external corners, and other conditions to provide a complete and
neatly finished installation. Solidly back tile bases and coves with
mortar. Do not walk or work on newly tiled floors without using kneeling
boards or equivalent protection of the tiled surface. Keep traffic off
horizontal portland cement mortar installations for at least 72 hours.
Keep all traffic off epoxy installed floors for at least 40 hours after
grouting, and heavy traffic off for at least 7 days, unless otherwise
specifically authorized by manufacturer. Dimension and draw detail
drawings at a minimum scale of 1/4 inch = 1 foot. Include drawings of
pattern at inside corners, outside corners, termination points and
location of all equipment items such as thermostats, switch plates,
mirrors and toilet accessories mounted on surface. Submit drawings
showing ceramic tile pattern elevations and floor plans. Submit
manufacturer's preprinted installation instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF WALL TILE
Install wall tile in accordance with the TCNA Hdbk and with grout joints
as recommended by the manufacturer for the type of tile. Install thinner
wall tile flush with thicker wall tile applied on same wall and provide
installation materials as recommended by the tile and setting materials
manufacturer's to achieve flush installation.
3.3.1 Workable or Cured Mortar Bed
Install tile over workable mortar bed or a cured mortar bed at the option
of the Contractor. Install a 4 mil polyethylene membrane, metal lath, and
scratch coat. Conform to TCNA Hdbk for workable mortar bed, materials,
and installation of tile. Conform to TCNA Hdbk for cured mortar bed and
materials.
3.3.2 Latex-Portland Cement Mortar
Use Latex-Portland Cement to install tile in accordance with TCNA Hdbk.

Use Latex Portland Cement when installing porcelain ceramic tile.
3.3.3 Furan Mortar and Grout
Conform to TCNA Hdbk for furan mortar and grout installation.
Prepare and install ceramic tile grout in accordance with TCNA Hdbk.
Provide and apply manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR TILE
Install floor tile in accordance with TCNA Hdbk and with grout joints as
recommended by the manufacturer for the type of tile.
3.4.1 Workable or Cured Mortar Bed
Install floor tile over a workable mortar bed or a cured mortar bed at the
option of the Contractor. Conform to TCNA Hdbk for workable mortar bed
materials and installation. Conform to TCNA Hdbk for cured mortar bed
materials and installation. Provide minimum 1/4 inch to maximum 3/8 inch
joints in uniformed width.
3.4.2 Latex-Portland Cement
Use Latex-Portland cement mortar to install tile directly over properly

cured, plane, clean concrete slabs in accordance with TCNA Hdbk. Use
Latex Portland cement when installing porcelain ceramic tile.
Prepare and install ceramic tile grout in accordance with TCNA Hdbk.
Provide and apply manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.4.4 Waterproofing
Shower pans are specified in Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
Conform to the requirements of Section 07 12 00 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS

WATERPROOFING for waterproofing under concrete fill.
3.4.5 Concrete Fill
Provide a 3500 psi concrete fill mix to dry as consistency as

practicable. Compose concrete fill by volume of 1 part Portland cement to
3 parts fine aggregate to 4 parts coarse aggregate, and mix with water to
as dry a consistency as practicable. Spread, tamp, and screed concrete
fill to a true plane, and pitch to drains or levels as shown. Thoroughly
damp concrete fill before applying setting-bed material. Reinforce
concrete fill with one layer of reinforcement, with the uncut edges lapped
the width of one mesh and the cut ends and edges lapped a minimum 2 inch.
Tie laps together with 18 gauge wire every 10 inch along the finished
edges and every 6 inch along the cut ends and edges. Provide
reinforcement with support and secure in the centers of concrete fills.
Provide a continuous mesh; except where expansion joints occur, cut mesh
and discontinue across such joints. Provide reinforced concrete fill
under the setting-bed where the distance between the under-floor surface
and the finished tiles floor surface is a minimum of 2 inches, and of the
same thickness that the mortar setting-bed over the concrete fill with the
thickness required in the specified TCNA Hdbk method.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF TRANSITION STRIPS
Install transition strips where indicated, in a manner similar to that of

the ceramic tile floor and as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide
thresholds full width of the opening. Install head joints at ends not
exceeding 1/4 inch in width and grouted full.
3.6 EXPANSION JOINTS
Form and seal joints as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
3.6.1 Walls
Provide expansion joints at control joints in backing material. Wherever

backing material changes, install an expansion joint to separate the
different materials.
3.6.2 Floors
Provide expansion joints over construction joints, control joints, and

expansion joints in concrete slabs. Provide expansion joints where tile
abuts restraining surfaces such as perimeter walls, curbs and columns and
at intervals of 24 to 36 feet each way in large interior floor areas and
12 to 16 feet each way in large exterior areas or areas exposed to direct
sunlight or moisture. Extend expansion joints through setting-beds and
fill.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
Upon completion, thoroughly clean tile surfaces in accordance with

manufacturer's approved cleaning instructions. Do not use acid for
cleaning glazed tile. Clean floor tile with resinous grout or with
factory mixed grout in accordance with printed instructions of the grout
manufacturer. After the grout has set, provide a protective coat of a
noncorrosive soap or other approved method of protection for tile wall
surfaces. Cover tiled floor areas with building paper before foot traffic
is permitted over the finished tile floors. Provide board walkways on

tiled floors that are to be continuously used as passageways by workmen.
Replace damaged or defective tiles. Submit copy of manufacturer's printed
maintenance instructions.
SECTION 09 51 00
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
08/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Steel Lifting Eyes

ASTM C423 (2009a) Sound Absorption and Sound

Absorption Coefficients by the
Reverberation Room Method
ASTM C635/C635M (2013a) Manufacture, Performance, and

Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings
ASTM C636/C636M (2013) Standard Practice for Installation

of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels
ASTM C834 (2014) Latex Sealants
ASTM E1264 (2008; E 2010) Acoustical Ceiling Products
ASTM E1414/E1414M (2011a; E 2014) Airborne Sound Attenuation

Between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling
Plenum
ASTM E1477 (1998a; R 2013) Luminous Reflectance

Factor of Acoustical Materials by Use of
Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers
ASTM E580/E580M (2014) Application of Ceiling Suspension

Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In
Panels in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic
Restraint
ASTM E795 (2005; R 2012) Mounting Test Specimens

During Sound Absorption Tests
Provide sound controlling units mechanically mounted on a ceiling

suspension system for acoustical treatment. The unit size, texture,
finish, and color must be as specified. The location and extent of
acoustical treatment shall be as shown on the approved detail drawings.
Submit drawings showing suspension system, method of anchoring and
fastening, details, and reflected ceiling plan. Coordinate with paragraph
RECLAMATION PROCEDURES for reclamation of mineral fiber acoustical ceiling
panels to be removed from the job site.
1.2.1 Ceiling Attenuation Class and Test
Provide a ceiling system with an attenuation class (CAC) of 35 when

determined in accordance with ASTM E1414/E1414M. Provide fixture
attenuators over light fixtures and other ceiling penetrations, and
provide acoustical blanket insulation adjacent to partitions, as required
to achieve the specified CAC. Provide test ceiling continuous at the
partition and assembled in the suspension system in the same manner that
the ceiling will be installed on the project.
1.2.2 Ceiling Sound Absorption
Determine the Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) in accordance with

ASTM C423 Test Method.
1.2.3 Light Reflectance
Determine light reflectance factor in accordance with ASTM E1477 Test

Method.
1.2.4 Other Submittals Requirements
The following shall be submitted:
a. Manufacturer's data indicating percentage of recycle material in

acoustic ceiling tiles to verify affirmative procurement compliance.
b. Total weight and volume quantities of acoustic ceiling tiles with

recycle material.
c. Manufacturer's catalog showing UL classification of fire-rated ceilings

giving materials, construction details, types of floor and roof
constructions to be protected, and UL design number and fire
protection time rating for each required floor or roof construction
and acoustic ceiling assembly.
d. Reports by an independent testing laboratory attesting that acoustical

ceiling systems meet specified sound transmission requirements. Data
attesting to conformance of the proposed system to Underwriters
Laboratories requirements for the fire endurance rating listed in
UL Fire Resistance may be submitted in lieu of test reports.
e. Certificate attesting that the mineral based acoustical units

furnished for the project contain recycled material and showing an
estimated percent of such material.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Approved Detail Drawings; G, A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Acoustical Ceiling Systems; G, A/E

Certification
SD-04 Samples
Acoustical Units; G, A/E

SD-06 Test Reports
Ceiling Attenuation Class and Test
SD-07 Certificates
Acoustical Units
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE. AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturer's original unopened

containers with brand name and type clearly marked. Carefully handle and
store materials in dry, watertight enclosures. Immediately before
installation, store acoustical units for not less than 24 hours at the
same temperature and relative humidity as the space where they will be
installed in order to assure proper temperature and moisture acclimation.
Maintain a uniform temperature of not less than 60 degrees F nor more than
85 degrees F and a relative humidity of not more than 70 percent for 24
hours before, during, and 24 hours after installation of acoustical units.
1.6 SCHEDULING
Complete and dry interior finish work such as plastering, concrete and
terrazzo work before ceiling installation. Complete mechanical,
electrical, and other work above the ceiling line; install and start
operating heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems in order to
maintain temperature and humidity requirements.
1.7 WARRANTY
extend beyond a one year period. Include an agreement to repair or

replace acoustical panels that fail within the warranty period in the
standard performance guarantee or warranty. Failures include, but are not
limited to, sagging and warping of panels; rusting and manufacturers
defects of grid system.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish spare tiles, from the same lot as those installed, of each color
at the rate of 5 tiles for each 1000 tiles installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
Submit two samples of each type of acoustical unit and each type of
suspension grid tee section showing texture, finish, and color. Conform
acoustical units to ASTM E1264, Class A, and the following requirements:
2.1.1 Units for Exposed-Grid System SAC
2.1.1.1 Type A
III (non-asbestos mineral fiber with painted finish)
2.1.1.2 Flame Spread
Class A, 25 or less
2.1.1.3 Pattern
No pattern.
2.1.1.4 Minimum NRC
0.70 in open office areas; 0.70 in conference rooms, executive offices,

teleconferencing rooms, and other rooms as designated; 0.70 in all other
rooms and areas when tested on mounting Type E-400 of ASTM E795.
2.1.1.5 Minimum Light Reflectance Coefficient
0.90.
2.1.1.6 Nominal Size
24 by 48 inch
2.1.1.7 Edge Detail
Square.
2.1.1.8 Finish
Factory-applied standard finish.
2.1.1.9 Minimum CAC
35.
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Provide standard direct hung, concealed, downward access standard width

flange suspension system conforming to ASTM C635/C635M for
intermediate-duty systems. Provide surfaces exposed to view of aluminum
or steel with a factory-applied white baked-enamel finish. Provide wall
molding having a flange of not less than 15/16 inch. Provide inside and
outside corner caps and mitered corners. Suspended ceiling framing system
must have the capability to support the finished ceiling, light fixtures,
air diffusers, and accessories, as shown. Provide a suspension system
with a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span length. Conform seismic
details to the guidance in UFC 3-310-04 and ASTM E580/E580M. Provide
seismic rated expose-grid system. Non-rated is not approved.
2.3 HANGERS
Provide hangers and attachment capable of supporting a minimum 300 pound

ultimate vertical load without failure of supporting material or
attachment.
2.3.1 Wires
Conform wires to ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1, 0.11 inch in diameter.
2.3.2 Eyebolts
Provide eyebolts of weldless, forged-carbon-steel, with a straight-shank

in accordance with ASTM A489. Eyebolt size must be a minimum 1/4 inch,
zinc coated.
2.3.3 Masonry Anchorage Devices
Comply with ASTM C636/C636M for anchorage devices for machine screws.
2.4 ACCESS PANELS
Provide access panels that match adjacent acoustical units, designed and
equipped with suitable framing and fastenings for removal and replacement
without damage. Size panel to be not less than 12 by 12 inch or more than
12 by 24 inch.
a. Attach an identification plate of 0.032 inch thick aluminum, 3/4 inch

in diameter, stamped with the letters "AP" and finished the same as
the unit, near one corner on the face of each access panel.
b. Identify ceiling access panel by a number utilizing white

identification plates or plastic buttons with contrasting numerals.
Provide plates or buttons of minimum 1 inch diameter and securely
attached to one corner of each access unit. Provide a typewritten
card framed under glass listing the code identification numbers and
corresponding system descriptions listed above. Mount the framed card
where directed and furnish a duplicate card to the Contracting
Officer. Code identification system is as follows:
1 Fire detection/alarm system
2 Air conditioning controls
3 Plumbing system
4 Heating and steam systems
5 Air conditioning duct system
6 Sprinkler system
7 Intercommunication system
8 Telephone junction boxes
2.5 ADHESIVE
Use adhesive as recommended by tile manufacturer.
2.6 FINISHES
Use manufacturer's standard textures, patterns and finishes as specified

for acoustical units and suspension system members. Treat ceiling
suspension system components to inhibit corrosion.
2.7 COLORS AND PATTERNS
Use colors and patterns for acoustical units and suspension system
components as specified in Section 09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE.
2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
Conform acoustical sealant to ASTM C834, nonstaining.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Examine surfaces to receive directly attached acoustical units for

unevenness, irregularities, and dampness that would affect quality and
execution of the work. Rid areas, where acoustical units will be
cemented, of oils, form residue, or other materials that reduce bonding
capabilities of the adhesive. Complete and dry interior finish work such
as plastering, concrete, and terrazzo work before installation. Complete
and approve mechanical, electrical, and other work above the ceiling line
prior to the start of acoustical ceiling installation. Provide acoustical
work complete with necessary fastenings, clips, and other accessories
required for a complete installation. Do not expose mechanical fastenings
in the finished work. Lay out hangers for each individual room or space.
Provide hangers to support framing around beams, ducts, columns, grilles,
and other penetrations through ceilings. Keep main runners and carrying
channels clear of abutting walls and partitions. Provide at least two
main runners for each ceiling span. Wherever required to bypass an object
with the hanger wires, install a subsuspension system so that all hanger
wires will be plumb.
3.1.1 Suspension System
Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M and as

specified herein. Do not suspend hanger wires or other loads from
underside of steel decking.
3.1.1.1 Plumb Hangers
Install hangers plumb and not pressing against insulation covering ducts
and pipes. Where lighting fixtures are supported from the suspended
ceiling system, provide hangers at a minimum of four hangers per fixture
and located not more than 6 inch from each corner of each fixture.
3.1.1.2 Splayed Hangers
Where hangers must be splayed (sloped or slanted) around obstructions,

offset the resulting horizontal force by bracing, countersplaying, or
other acceptable means.
3.1.2 Wall Molding
Provide wall molding where ceilings abut vertical surfaces. Miter corners
where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps. Secure wall molding
not more than 3 inch from ends of each length and not more than 16 inch on
centers between end fastenings. Provide wall molding springs at each
acoustical unit in semi-exposed or concealed systems.
3.1.3 Acoustical Units
Install acoustical units in accordance with the approved installation

instructions of the manufacturer. Ensure that edges of acoustical units
are in close contact with metal supports, with each other, and in true
alignment. Arrange acoustical units so that units less than one-half
width are minimized. Hold units in exposed-grid system in place with
manufacturer's standard hold-down clips, if units weigh less than 1 psf or
if required for fire resistance rating.
3.1.4 Caulking
Seal all joints around pipes, ducts or electrical outlets penetrating the
ceiling. Apply a continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant on vertical web
of wall or edge moldings.
3.1.5 Adhesive Application
Wipe back of tile to remove accumulated dust. Daub acoustical units on

back side with four equal daubs of adhesive. Apply daubs near corners of
tiles. Ensure that contact area of each daub is at least 2 inch diameter
in final position. Press units into place, aligning joints and abutting
units tight and uniform without differences in joint widths.
3.2 CEILING ACCESS PANELS
Locate ceiling access panels directly under the items which require access.
3.3 CLEANING
Following installation, clean dirty or discolored surfaces of acoustical

units and leave them free from defects. Remove units that are damaged or
improperly installed and provide new units as directed.
3.4 RECLAMATION PROCEDURES
Neatly stack ceiling tile, designated for recycling by the Contracting

Officer, on 4 by 4 foot pallets not higher than 4 foot. Panels must be
completely dry. Shrink wrap and symmetrically stack pallets on top of

each other without falling over.
SECTION 09 65 00
RESILIENT FLOORING
08/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM D4078 (2002; R 2008) Water Emulsion Floor Polish
ASTM E648 (2014c) Standard Test Method for Critical

Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems
Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source
ASTM F1482 (2004; E 2009; R 2009) Installation and

Preparation of Panel Type Underlayments to
Receive Resilient Flooring
ASTM F1700 (2013a) Solid Vinyl Floor Tile
ASTM F1859 (2012) Rubber Sheet Floor Covering Without

Backing
ASTM F1861 (2008; E 2012; R 2012) Resilient Wall Base
ASTM F1869 (2011) Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission

Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous
Calcium Chloride
ASTM F2169 (2012) Resilient Stair Treads
ASTM F2170 (2011) Determining Relative Humidity in

Concrete Floor Slabs in situ Probes
ASTM F710 (2011) Standard Practice for Preparing

Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient
Flooring
GREEN SEAL (GS)
GS-36 (2011) Commercial Adhesives
NFPA 253 (2011) Standard Method of Test for

Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering
Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source
1.2.1 Fire Resistance Requirements
Provide a critical radiant flux of not less than 0.22 watts per square
centimeter (Class 2) for flooring in corridors and exits when tested in
accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Resilient Flooring and Accessories; G, A/E
SD-03 Product Data

Adhesives; G, A/E
Rubber Sheet Flooring; G, A/E
Solid Vinyl Tile; G, A/E
Wall Base; G, A/E
Stair Treads, Risers and Stringers; G, A/E
ESD Rubber Tile; G, A/E
SD-04 Samples
SD-06 Test Reports
Moisture, Alkalinity and Bond Tests; G
Surface Preparation; G
Installation; G
Resilient Flooring and Accessories; G
Deliver materials to the building site in original unopened containers

bearing the manufacturer's name, style name, pattern color name and
number, production run, project identification, and handling
instructions. Store materials in a clean, dry, secure, and
well-ventilated area free from strong contaminant sources and residues
with ambient air temperature maintained above 68 degrees F and below 85
degrees F, stacked according to manufacturer's recommendations. Remove
resilient flooring products from packaging to allow ventilation prior to
installation. Protect materials from the direct flow of heat from hot-air
registers, radiators and other heating fixtures and appliances. Observe
ventilation and safety procedures specified in the MSDS. Do not store
rubber surface products with materials that have a high capacity to adsorb
volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions. Do not store exposed rubber
surface materials in occupied spaces. Do not store near materials that
may offgas or emit harmful fumes, such as kerosene heaters, fresh paint,
or adhesives.
Maintain areas to receive resilient flooring at a temperature above 68

degrees F and below 85 degrees F for 3 days before application, during
application and 2 days after application, unless otherwise directed by the
flooring manufacturer for the flooring being installed. Maintain a
minimum temperature of 55 degrees F thereafter. Provide adequate
ventilation to remove moisture from area and to comply with regulations
limiting concentrations of hazardous vapors.
1.6 SCHEDULING
Schedule resilient flooring application after the completion of other work

which would damage the finished surface of the flooring.
1.7 WARRANTY

extend beyond a one year period.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
Provide extra flooring material of each color and pattern at the rate of 5
tiles for each 1000 tiles and 5 square feet for each 1000 square feet of
sheet flooring installed. Provide extra wall base material composed of 20
linear feet of each type, color and pattern. Package all extra materials
in original properly marked containers bearing the manufacturer's name,
brand name, pattern color name and number, production run, and handling
instructions. Provide extra materials from the same lot as those
installed. Leave extra stock at the site in location assigned by
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 RUBBER SHEET FLOORING
Conform to ASTM F1859 (flooring without backing), Type I homogeneous,

minimum 36 inches wide. Provide embossed surface. Provide minimum 0.080
inch overall thickness.
2.2 ESD RUBBER TILE
Conform to ASTM F1859 (flooring without backing), Type I homogeneous,

minimum 36 inches wide. Provide embossed surface. Provide minimum
0.080 inch overall thickness. Provide electrostatic dissipative tile per
finish schedule.
2.3 SOLID VINYL TILE
Conform to ASTM F1700 Class III printed film minimum wear layer thickness
0.040 inch and minimum overall thickness 0.125 inch, Type A (smooth) with
minimum 15 year warranty and urethane finish. Provide 12 by 24 inch
square tile.
2.4 WALL BASE
Conform to ASTM F1861, Type TS (vulcanized thermoset rubber) or Type TP

(thermoplastic rubber), Style A (straight - installed with carpet), and
Style B (coved - installed with resilient flooring). Provide 4 inch high
and a minimum 1/8 inch thick wall base. Provide preformed corners in
matching height, shape, and color.
2.5 STAIR TREADS, RISERS AND STRINGERS
Conform to ASTM F2169, Type TS (vulcanized thermoset rubber) or Type TP

(thermoplastic rubber). Conform to ASTM F2169 for surface of treads Class
2 raised ribbed pattern and have Group 1 abrasive non-slip strip. Provide
round nosing. Provide either a one piece nosing/tread/riser or a two
piece nosing/tread design with a matching coved riser.
2.6 ADHESIVES
Provide adhesives for flooring, base and accessories as recommended by the

manufacturer and comply with local indoor air quality standards. VOC
content shall be less than 50 grams/L, the current VOC content limits of
GS-36. Submit manufacturer's descriptive data, documentation stating
physical characteristics, and mildew and germicidal characteristics.
2.7 SURFACE PREPARATION MATERIALS
Provide surface preparation materials, such as panel type underlayment,

lining felt, and floor crack fillers as recommended by the flooring
manufacturer for the subfloor conditions. Comply with ASTM F1482 for
panel type underlayment products. Use one of the following substrates:
a. Concrete.
2.8 POLISH/FINISH
Provide polish finish as recommended by the manufacturer and conform to

ASTM D4078 for polish.
2.9 CAULKING AND SEALANTS
Provide caulking and sealants in accordance with Section 07 92 00 JOINT

SEALANTS.
2.10 MANUFACTURER'S COLOR, PATTERN AND TEXTURE
Provide color, pattern and texture for resilient flooring and accessories
in accordance with Section 09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE. Provide flooring as
specified on the drawings Sheet No. A-610 FINISH LEGEND. Provide flooring
in any one continuous area or replacement of damaged flooring in
continuous area from same production run with same shade and pattern.
Submit scaled drawings indicating patterns (including location of patterns
and colors) and dimensions. Submit manufacturer's descriptive data and
three samples of each indicated color and type of flooring, base,
mouldings, and accessories sized a minimum 2-1/2 by 4 inch. Submit Data
Package 1 in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
DATA.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine and verify that site conditions are in agreement with the design
package. Report all conditions that will prevent a proper installation.
Do not take any corrective action without written permission from the
Government. Work will proceed only when conditions have been corrected
and accepted by the installer. Submit manufacturer's printed installation
instructions for all flooring materials and accessories, including
preparation of substrate, seaming techniques, and recommended adhesives.
Provide a smooth, true, level plane for surface preparation of the

flooring, except where indicated as sloped. Floor to be flat to within
3/16 inch in 10 feet. Prepare subfloor in accordance with flooring
manufacturer's recommended instructions. Prepare the surfaces of
lightweight concrete slabs (as defined by the flooring manufacturer) as
recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Comply with ASTM F710 for
concrete subfloor preparation. Floor fills or toppings may be required as
recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Install underlayments, when
required by the flooring manufacturer, in accordance with manufacturer's
recommended printed installation instructions. Comply with ASTM F1482 for
panel type underlayments. Before any work under this section is begun,
correct all defects such as rough or scaling concrete, chalk and dust,
cracks, low spots, high spots, and uneven surfaces. Repair all damaged
portions of concrete slabs as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.
Remove concrete curing and sealer compounds from the slabs, other than the
type that does not adversely affect adhesion. Remove paint, varnish,
oils, release agents, sealers, waxes, and adhesives, as required by the
flooring product in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation
instructions.
3.3 MOISTURE, ALKALINITY AND BOND TESTS
Determine the suitability of the concrete subfloor for receiving the

resilient flooring with regard to moisture content and pH level by
moisture and alkalinity tests. Conduct moisture testing in accordance
with ASTM F1869 or ASTM F2170, unless otherwise recommended by the
flooring manufacturer. Conduct alkalinity testing as recommended by the
flooring manufacturer. Determine the compatibility of the resilient
flooring adhesives to the concrete floors by a bond test in accordance
with the flooring manufacturer's recommendations. Submit copy of test
reports for moisture and alkalinity content of concrete slab, and bond
test stating date of test, person conducting the test, and the area tested.
3.4 PLACING SOLID VINYL TILES
Install tile flooring and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's

printed installation instructions. Prepare and apply adhesives in
accordance with manufacturer's directions. Keep tile lines and joints
square, symmetrical, tight, and even. Keep each floor in true, level
plane, except where slope is indicated. Vary edge width as necessary to
maintain full-size tiles in the field, no edge tile to be less than
one-half the field tile size, except where irregular shaped rooms make it
impossible. Cut flooring to fit around all permanent fixtures, built-in
furniture and cabinets, pipes, and outlets. Cut, fit, and scribe edge
tile to walls and partitions after field flooring has been applied.
3.5 PLACING RUBBER SHEET FLOORING
Install rubber sheet flooring and accessories in accordance with

manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Prepare and apply
adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. Provide
square, symmetrical, tight, and even flooring lines and joints. Keep each
floor in true, level plane, except where slope is indicated. Cut seams by
overlapping or underscribing as recommended by the manufacturer. Lay out
sheets to minimize waste. Cut flooring to fit around all permanent
fixtures, built-in furniture and cabinets, pipes, and outlets. Cut, fit,
and scribe flooring to walls and partitions after field flooring has been
applied.
3.6 PLACING FEATURE STRIPS
Install feature strips in accordance with manufacturer's printed

installation instructions. Prepare and apply adhesives in accordance with
manufacturer's printed directions.
3.7 PLACING MOULDING
Provide moulding where flooring termination is higher than the adjacent

finished flooring and at transitions between different flooring
materials. When required, locate moulding under door centerline.
Moulding is not required at doorways where thresholds are provided.
Secure moulding with adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. Prepare
and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions.
3.8 PLACING WALL BASE
Install wall base in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation

instructions. Prepare and apply adhesives in accordance with
manufacturer's printed directions. Tighten base joints and make even with
adjacent resilient flooring. Fill voids along the top edge of base at
masonry walls with caulk. Roll entire vertical surface of base with hand
roller, and press toe of base with a straight piece of wood to ensure
proper alignment. Avoid excess adhesive in corners.
3.9 PLACING STAIR TREADS, RISERS, AND STRINGERS
Secure and install stair treads, risers, and stringers in accordance with
manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Cover the surface of
treads and risers the full width of the stairs. Provide equal length
pieces butted together to cover the treads and risers for stairs wider
than manufacturer's standard lengths.
3.10 CLEANING
Immediately upon completion of installation of flooring in a room or an

area, dry/clean the flooring and adjacent surfaces to remove all surplus
adhesive. Clean flooring as recommended in accordance with manufacturer's
printed maintenance instructions and within the recommended time frame.
As required by the manufacturer, apply the recommended number of coats and
type of polish and/or finish in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.11 PROTECTION
From the time of installation until acceptance, protect flooring from

damage as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Remove and replace
flooring which becomes damaged, loose, broken, or curled and wall base
which is not tight to wall or securely adhered.
SECTION 09 90 00
PAINTS AND COATINGS

05/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)
ACGIH 0100 (2001; Supplements 2002-2008)

Documentation of the Threshold Limit
Values and Biological Exposure Indices
ASME A13.1 (2007; R 2013) Scheme for the

Identification of Piping Systems
ASTM D235 (2002; R 2012) Mineral Spirits (Petroleum

Spirits) (Hydrocarbon Dry Cleaning Solvent)
ASTM D4214 (2007) Standard Test Method for Evaluating

the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint
Films
ASTM D4263 (1983; R 2012) Indicating Moisture in

Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method
ASTM D4444 (2013) Use and Calibration of Hand-Held

Moisture Meters
ASTM D523 (2014) Standard Test Method for Specular

Gloss
ASTM D6386 (2010) Standard Practice for Preparation

of Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coated Iron
and Steel Product and Hardware Surfaces
for Painting
ASTM F1869 (2011) Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission

Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous
Calcium Chloride
MPI 1 (Oct 2009) Aluminum Paint
MPI 10 (Oct 2009) Exterior Latex, Flat, MPI Gloss

Level 1
MPI 101 (Oct 2009) Epoxy Anti-Corrosive Metal

Primer
MPI 107 (Oct 2009) Rust Inhibitive Primer

(Water-Based)
MPI 108 (Oct 2009) High Build Epoxy Coating, Low

Gloss
MPI 11 (Oct 2009) Exterior Latex, Semi-Gloss, MPI

Gloss Level 5
MPI 119 (Oct 2009) Exterior Latex, Gloss
MPI 134 (Oct 2009) Galvanized Primer (Waterbased)
MPI 138 (Oct 2009) Interior High Performance

Latex, MPI Gloss Level 2


MPI 141 (Oct 2009) Interior High Performance Latex

MPI Gloss Level 5
MPI 153 (Oct 2009) Interior W.B. Light Industrial

Coating, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5
MPI 161 (Oct 2009) Exterior W.B. Light Industrial

Coating, MPI Gloss Level 3

Coating, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5

Coating, Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 6
MPI 19 (Oct 2009) Inorganic Zinc Rich Primer
MPI 2 (Oct 2009) Aluminum Heat Resistant Enamel

(up to 427 C and 800 F
MPI 21 (Oct 2009) Heat Resistant Enamel, Gloss

(up to 205 degrees C and 400 degrees F),
MPI Gloss Level 6
MPI 22 (Oct 2009) Aluminum Paint, High Heat (up

to 590 degrees C and 1100 degrees F.
MPI 23 (Oct 2009) Surface Tolerant Metal Primer
MPI 26 (Oct 2009) Cementitious Galvanized Metal

Primer
MPI 44 (Oct 2009) Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level

2
MPI 47 (Oct 2009) Interior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss, MPI

Gloss Level 5
MPI 48 (Oct 2009) Interior Alkyd, Gloss, MPI

Gloss Level 6
MPI 49 (Oct 2009) Interior Alkyd, Flat, MPI Gloss

Level 1
MPI 50 (Oct 2009) Interior Latex Primer Sealer
MPI 51 (Oct 2009) Interior Alkyd, Eggshell, MPI

Gloss Level 2
MPI 52 (Oct 2009) Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level

3
MPI 54 (Oct 2009) Interior Latex, Semi-Gloss, MPI

Gloss Level 5
MPI 72 (Oct 2009) Polyurethane, Two Component,

Pigmented, Gloss
MPI 77 (Oct 2009) Epoxy Gloss

Primer
MPI 8 (Oct 2009) Exterior Alkyd, Flat, MPI Gloss

Level I
MPI 9 (Oct 2009) Exterior Alkyd, Gloss, MPI

Gloss Level 6
MPI 94 (Oct 2009) Exterior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss, MPI

Gloss Level 5
MPI 95 (Oct 2009) Quick Drying Primer for Aluminum
SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)
SCS SP-01 (2000) Environmentally Preferable Product

Specification for Architectural and
Anti-Corrosive Paints
SSPC 7/NACE No.4 (2007; E 2004) Brush-Off Blast Cleaning
SSPC PA 1 (2000; E 2004) Shop, Field, and

Maintenance Painting of Steel
SSPC PA Guide 3 (1982; E 1995) A Guide to Safety in Paint

Application
SSPC SP 1 (1982; E 2004) Solvent Cleaning
SSPC SP 10/NACE No. 2 (2007) Near-White Blast Cleaning
SSPC SP 12/NACE No.5 (2002) Surface Preparation and Cleaning of

Metals by Waterjetting Prior to Recoating
SSPC SP 2 (1982; E 2000; E 2004) Hand Tool Cleaning
SSPC VIS 1 (2002; E 2004) Guide and Reference

Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by
Dry Abrasive Blast Cleaning
SSPC VIS 3 (2004) Guide and Reference Photographs for

Steel Surfaces Prepared by Hand and Power
Tool Cleaning
SSPC VIS 4/NACE VIS 7 (1998; E 2000; E 2004) Guide and Reference
Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by
Waterjetting

Manual
MIL-STD-101 (2014; Rev C) Color Code for Pipelines and

for Compressed Gas Cylinders
EPA Method 24 (2000) Determination of Volatile Matter

Content, Water Content, Density, Volume
Solids, and Weight Solids of Surface
Coatings
FED-STD-313 (2014; Rev E) Material Safety Data,

Transportation Data and Disposal Data for
Hazardous Materials Furnished to
Government Activities
29 CFR 1910.1000 Air Contaminants
1.2 SUBMITTALS

The current MPI, "Approved Product List" which lists paint by brand,
label, product name and product code as of the date of contract award,
will be used to determine compliance with the submittal requirements of

this specification. The Contractor may choose to use a subsequent MPI
"Approved Product List", however, only one list may be used for the entire
contract and each coating system is to be from a single manufacturer. All
coats on a particular substrate must be from a single manufacturer. No
variation from the MPI Approved Products List is acceptable.
Samples of specified materials may be taken and tested for compliance with
specification requirements.
In keeping with the intent of Executive Order 13101, "Greening the

Government through Waste Prevention, Recycling, and Federal Acquisition",
products certified by SCS as meeting SCS SP-01 shall be given preferential
consideration over registered products. Products that are registered
shall be given preferential consideration over products not carrying any
EPP designation.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Piping identification; G, A/E
Submit color stencil codes; G, A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Coating; G, A/E
Manufacturer's Technical Data Sheets

SD-04 Samples
Color; G, A/E
Submit manufacturer's samples of paint colors. Cross reference

color samples to color scheme as indicated.
SD-07 Certificates
Applicator's qualifications
Qualification Testing laboratory for coatings; G
Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets
Submit manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets for coatings,

solvents, and other potentially hazardous materials, as defined in
FED-STD-313.
Coatings:; G
Preprinted cleaning and maintenance instructions for all coating

systems shall be provided.
1.3 APPLICATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS
1.3.1 Contractor Qualification
Submit the name, address, telephone number, FAX number, and e-mail address
of the contractor that will be performing all surface preparation and
coating application. Submit evidence that key personnel have successfully
performed surface preparation and application of coatings on a minimum of
three similar projects within the past three years. List information by
individual and include the following:
a. Name of individual and proposed position for this work.
b. Information about each previous assignment including:
Position or responsibility
Employer (if other than the Contractor)
Name of facility owner
Mailing address, telephone number, and telex number (if non-US) of

facility owner
Name of individual in facility owner's organization who can be

contacted as a reference
Location, size and description of structure
Dates work was carried out
Description of work carried out on structure
1.4.1 Field Samples and Tests
The Contracting Officer may choose up to two coatings that have been
delivered to the site to be tested at no cost to the Government. Take
samples of each chosen product as specified in the paragraph "Sampling
Procedures." Test each chosen product as specified in the paragraph
"Testing Procedure." Products which do not conform, shall be removed from
the job site and replaced with new products that conform to the referenced
specification. Testing of replacement products that failed initial
testing shall be at no cost to the Government.
Another required testing is Batch Quality Conformance Testing to prove

conformance of the manufacturer's paint to the specified MPI standard.
This testing is accomplished before the materials are delivered to the job
site. Provide testing for paint products. Test paint products as
specified in the paragraph "Testing Procedure".
1.4.1.1 Sampling Procedure
The Contracting Officer will select paint at random from the products that
have been delivered to the job site for sample testing. The Contractor
shall provide one quart samples of the selected paint materials. The
samples shall be taken in the presence of the Contracting Officer, and
labeled, identifying each sample. Provide labels in accordance with the
paragraph "Packaging, Labeling, and Storage" of this specification.
1.4.1.2 Testing Procedure
Provide Batch Quality Conformance Testing for specified products, as

defined by and performed by MPI. As an alternative to Batch Quality
Conformance Testing, the Contractor may provide Qualification Testing for
specified products above to the appropriate MPI product specification,
using the third-party laboratory approved under the paragraph
"Qualification Testing" laboratory for coatings. The qualification
testing lab report shall include the backup data and summary of the test
results. The summary shall list all of the reference specification
requirements and the result of each test. The summary shall clearly
indicate whether the tested paint meets each test requirement. Note that
Qualification Testing may take 4 to 6 weeks to perform, due to the extent
of testing required.
Submit name, address, telephone number, FAX number, and e-mail address of
the independent third party laboratory selected to perform testing of
coating samples for compliance with specification requirements. Submit
documentation that laboratory is regularly engaged in testing of paint
samples for conformance with specifications, and that employees performing
testing are qualified. If the Contractor chooses MPI to perform the Batch
Quality Conformance testing, the above submittal information is not
required, only a letter is required from the Contractor stating that MPI
will perform the testing.
1.5.1 Environmental Protection
In addition to requirements specified elsewhere for environmental

protection, provide coating materials that conform to the restrictions of
the local Air Pollution Control District and regional jurisdiction.
Notify Contracting Officer of any paint specified herein which fails to
conform.
1.5.2 Lead Content
Do not use coatings having a lead content over 0.06 percent by weight of
nonvolatile content.
1.5.3 Chromate Content
Do not use coatings containing zinc-chromate or strontium-chromate.
1.5.4 Asbestos Content
Materials shall not contain asbestos.
1.5.5 Mercury Content
Materials shall not contain mercury or mercury compounds.
1.5.6 Silica
Abrasive blast media shall not contain free crystalline silica.
1.5.7 Human Carcinogens
Materials shall not contain ACGIH 0100 confirmed human carcinogens (A1) or
suspected human carcinogens (A2).
1.6 PACKAGING, LABELING, AND STORAGE
Paints shall be in sealed containers that legibly show the contract

specification number, designation name, formula or specification number,
batch number, color, quantity, date of manufacture, manufacturer's
formulation number, manufacturer's directions including any warnings and
special precautions, and name and address of manufacturer. Pigmented
paints shall be furnished in containers not larger than 5 gallons. Paints
and thinners shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's written
directions, and as a minimum, stored off the ground, under cover, with
sufficient ventilation to prevent the buildup of flammable vapors, and at
temperatures between 40 to 95 degrees F. Do not store paint,
polyurethane, varnish, or wood stain products with materials that have a
high capacity to adsorb VOC emissions. Do not store paint, polyurethane,
varnish, or wood stain products in occupied spaces.
1.7 SAFETY AND HEALTH
Apply coating materials using safety methods and equipment in accordance

with the following:
Work shall comply with applicable Federal, State, and local laws and
regulations, and with the ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN, including the Activity
Hazard Analysis as specified in Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENT SAFETY
REQUIREMENTS and in Appendix A of EM 385-1-1. The Activity Hazard
Analysis shall include analyses of the potential impact of painting
operations on painting personnel and on others involved in and adjacent to
the work zone.
1.7.1 Safety Methods Used During Coating Application
Comply with the requirements of SSPC PA Guide 3.
1.7.2 Toxic Materials
To protect personnel from overexposure to toxic materials, conform to the

most stringent guidance of:
a. The applicable manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) or

local regulation.
b. 29 CFR 1910.1000.
c. ACGIH 0100, threshold limit values.
Comply, at minimum, with manufacturer recommendations for space

ventilation during and after installation. Isolate area of application
from rest of building when applying high-emission paints or coatings.
1.8.1 Coatings
Do not apply coating when air or substrate conditions are:
a. Less than 5 degrees F above dew point;
b. Below 50 degrees F or over 95 degrees F, unless specifically

pre-approved by the Contracting Officer and the product manufacturer.
Under no circumstances shall application conditions exceed
manufacturer recommendations.
1.8.2 Post-Application
Vacate space for as long as possible after application. Wait a minimum of

48 hours before occupying freshly painted rooms. Maintain one of the
following ventilation conditions during the curing period, or for 72 hours
after application:
a. Supply 100 percent outside air 24 hours a day.
b. Supply airflow at a rate of 6 air changes per hour, when outside

temperatures are between 55 degrees F and 85 degrees F and humidity is
between 30 percent and 60 percent.
c. Supply airflow at a rate of 1.5 air changes per hour, when outside air
conditions are not within the range stipulated above.
1.9 SCHEDULING
Allow paint, polyurethane, varnish, and wood stain installations to cure

prior to the installation of materials that adsorb VOCs.
1.10 LOCATION AND SURFACE TYPE TO BE PAINTED
1.10.1 Painting Included
Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following

unless indicated otherwise.
a. Surfaces behind portable objects and surface mounted articles readily

detachable by removal of fasteners, such as screws and bolts.
b. New factory finished surfaces that require identification or color

coding and factory finished surfaces that are damaged during
performance of the work.
c. Existing coated surfaces that are damaged during performance of the

work.
1.10.1.1 Exterior Painting
Includes new surfaces and existing coated surfaces of the building and
appurtenances as specified in the drawings. Also included are existing
coated surfaces made bare by cleaning operations.
1.10.1.2 Interior Painting
Includes new surfaces, existing uncoated surfaces, and existing coated

surfaces of the building and appurtenances as indicated and existing
coated surfaces made bare by cleaning operations. Where a space or
surface is indicated to be painted, include the following items, unless
indicated otherwise.
a. Exposed columns, girders, beams, joists, and metal deck; and
b. Other contiguous surfaces.
1.10.2 Painting Excluded
Do not paint the following unless indicated otherwise.
a. Surfaces concealed and made inaccessible by panelboards, fixed

ductwork, machinery, and equipment fixed in place.
b. Surfaces in concealed spaces. Concealed spaces are defined as

enclosed spaces above suspended ceilings, furred spaces, attic spaces,
crawl spaces, elevator shafts and chases.
c. Steel to be embedded in concrete.
d. Copper, stainless steel, aluminum, brass, and lead except existing

coated surfaces.
e. Hardware, fittings, and other factory finished items.
1.10.3 Mechanical and Electrical Painting
Includes field coating of interior and exterior, new and existing surfaces.
a. Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the

following items unless indicated otherwise.
(1) Exposed piping, conduit, and ductwork;
(2) Supports, hangers, air grilles, and registers;
(3) Miscellaneous metalwork and insulation coverings.
b. Do not paint the following, unless indicated otherwise:
(1) New zinc-coated, aluminum, and copper surfaces under insulation
(2) New aluminum jacket on piping
(3) New interior ferrous piping under insulation.
1.10.3.1 Fire Extinguishing Sprinkler Systems
Clean, pretreat, prime, and paint new fire extinguishing sprinkler systems
including valves, piping, conduit, hangers, supports, miscellaneous
metalwork, and accessories. Apply coatings to clean, dry surfaces, using
clean brushes. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, and loose
mill scale. Immediately after cleaning, provide the metal surfaces with
one coat primer per schedules. Shield sprinkler heads with protective
covering while painting is in progress. Upon completion of painting,
remove protective covering from sprinkler heads. Remove sprinkler heads
which have been painted and replace with new sprinkler heads. Provide
primed surfaces with the following:
a. Piping in Unfinished Areas: Provide primed surfaces with one coat of

red alkyd gloss enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0
mil in attic spaces, spaces above suspended ceilings, crawl spaces,

pipe chases, mechanical equipment room, and spaces where walls or
ceiling are not painted or not constructed of a prefinished material.
In lieu of red enamel finish coat, provide piping with 2 inch wide red
enamel bands or self-adhering red plastic bands spaced at maximum of
20 foot intervals.
b. Piping in Finished Areas: Provide primed surfaces with two coats of

paint to match adjacent surfaces, except provide valves and operating
accessories with one coat of red alkyd gloss enamel applied to a
minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil. Provide piping with 2 inch
wide red enamel bands or self-adhering red plastic bands spaced at
maximum of 20 foot intervals throughout the piping systems.
1.10.3.2 Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Systems
Paint exposed electrical, fire alarm and mass notification conduit, and
surface metal raceway to match adjacent finishes in exposed areas. Paint
junction boxes red in unfinished areas, conduits and surface metal
raceways shall be painted with a 1 inch wide red band every 10 feet in
unfinished areas.
1.10.4 Definitions and Abbreviations
1.10.4.1 Qualification Testing
Qualification testing is the performance of all test requirements listed

in the product specification. This testing is accomplished by MPI to
qualify each product for the MPI Approved Product List, and may also be
accomplished by Contractor's third party testing lab if an alternative to
Batch Quality Conformance Testing by MPI is desired.
1.10.4.2 Batch Quality Conformance Testing
Batch quality conformance testing determines that the product provided is

the same as the product qualified to the appropriate product
specification. This testing shall only be accomplished by MPI testing lab.
1.10.4.3 Coating
A film or thin layer applied to a base material called a substrate. A

coating may be a metal, alloy, paint, or solid/liquid suspensions on
various substrates (metals, plastics, wood, paper, leather, cloth, etc.).
They may be applied by electrolysis, vapor deposition, vacuum, or
mechanical means such as brushing, spraying, calendaring, and roller
coating. A coating may be applied for aesthetic or protective purposes or
both. The term "coating" as used herein includes emulsions, enamels,
stains, varnishes, sealers, epoxies, and other coatings, whether used as
primer, intermediate, or finish coat. The terms paint and coating are
used interchangeably.
1.10.4.4 DFT or dft
Dry film thickness, the film thickness of the fully cured, dry paint or
coating.
1.10.4.5 DSD
Degree of Surface Degradation, the MPI system of defining degree of
surface degradation. Five (5) levels are generically defined under the
Assessment sections in the MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual.
1.10.4.6 EPP
Environmentally Preferred Products, a standard for determining

environmental preferability in support of Executive Order 13101.
1.10.4.7 EXT
MPI short term designation for an exterior coating system.
1.10.4.8 INT
MPI short term designation for an interior coating system.
1.10.4.9 micron / microns
The metric measurement for 0.001 mm or one/one-thousandth of a millimeter.
1.10.4.10 mil / mils
The English measurement for 0.001 in or one/one-thousandth of an inch,

equal to 25.4 microns or 0.0254 mm.
1.10.4.11 mm
The metric measurement for millimeter, 0.001 meter or one/one-thousandth

of a meter.
1.10.4.12 MPI Gloss Levels
MPI system of defining gloss. Seven (7) gloss levels (G1 to G7) are
generically defined under the Evaluation sections of the MPI Manuals.
Traditionally, Flat refers to G1/G2, Eggshell refers to G3, Semigloss
refers to G5, and Gloss refers to G6.
Gloss levels are defined by MPI as follows:
Gloss Description Units Units

Level at 60 degrees at 85 degrees
G1 Matte or Flat 0 to 5 10 max

G2 Velvet 0 to 10 10 to 35
G3 Eggshell 10 to 25 10 to 35
G4 Satin 20 to 35 35 min
G5 Semi-Gloss 35 to 70
G6 Gloss 70 to 85
G7 High Gloss
Gloss is tested in accordance with ASTM D523. Historically, the

Government has used Flat (G1 / G2), Eggshell (G3), Semi-Gloss (G5), and
Gloss (G6).
1.10.4.13 MPI System Number
The MPI coating system number in each Division found in either the MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual or the Maintenance Repainting
Manual and defined as an exterior (EXT/REX) or interior system (INT/RIN).
The Division number follows the CSI Master Format.
1.10.4.14 Paint
See Coating definition.
1.10.4.15 REX
MPI short term designation for an exterior coating system used in

repainting projects or over existing coating systems.
1.10.4.16 RIN
MPI short term designation for an interior coating system used in

repainting projects or over existing coating systems.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Conform to the coating specifications and standards referenced in PART 3.

Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for specified coatings and
solvents. Minimum 50 percent post-consumer recycled content for
light-colored paints and primers. Minimum 50 percent post-consumer
recycled content for the dark-colored paints and primers. All
consolidated latex paints shall contain a minimum of 100 percent
post-consumer recycled content. Comply with applicable regulations
regarding toxic and hazardous materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION OF AREAS AND SPACES NOT TO BE PAINTED
Prior to surface preparation and coating applications, remove, mask, or

otherwise protect, hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces,
radiator covers, plates, lighting fixtures, public and private property,
and other such items not to be coated that are in contact with surfaces to
be coated. Following completion of painting, workmen skilled in the
trades involved shall reinstall removed items. Restore surfaces
contaminated by coating materials, to original condition and repair
damaged items.
Remove dirt, splinters, loose particles, grease, oil, disintegrated

coatings, and other foreign matter and substances deleterious to coating
performance as specified for each substrate before application of paint or
surface treatments. Oil and grease shall be removed prior to mechanical
cleaning. Cleaning shall be programmed so that dust and other
contaminants will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. Exposed
ferrous metals such as nail heads on or in contact with surfaces to be
painted with water-thinned paints, shall be spot-primed with a suitable
corrosion-inhibitive primer capable of preventing flash rusting and
compatible with the coating specified for the adjacent areas.
3.2.1 Additional Requirements for Preparation of Surfaces With Existing

Coatings
Before application of coatings, perform the following on surfaces covered
by soundly-adhered coatings, defined as those which cannot be removed with

a putty knife:
a. Wipe previously painted surfaces to receive solvent-based coatings,

except stucco and similarly rough surfaces clean with a clean, dry
cloth saturated with mineral spirits, ASTM D235. Allow surface to
dry. Wiping shall immediately precede the application of the first
coat of any coating, unless specified otherwise.
b. Sand existing glossy surfaces to be painted to reduce gloss. Brush,

and wipe clean with a damp cloth to remove dust.
c. The requirements specified are minimum. Comply also with the

application instructions of the paint manufacturer.
d. Previously painted surfaces specified to be repainted and damaged

during construction shall be thoroughly cleaned of all grease, dirt,
dust or other foreign matter.
e. Slick surfaces shall be roughened. Damaged areas such as, but not
limited to, nail holes, cracks, chips, and spalls shall be repaired
with suitable material to match adjacent undamaged areas.
f. Edges of chipped paint shall be feather edged and sanded smooth.
g. Rusty metal surfaces shall be cleaned as per SSPC requirements.

Solvent, mechanical, or chemical cleaning methods shall be used to
provide surfaces suitable for painting.
h. New, proposed coatings shall be compatible with existing coatings.
3.2.2 Existing Coated Surfaces with Minor Defects
Sand, spackle, and treat minor defects to render them smooth. Minor
defects are defined as scratches, nicks, cracks, gouges, spalls,
alligatoring, chalking, and irregularities due to partial peeling of
previous coatings. Remove chalking by sanding or blasting so that when
tested in accordance with ASTM D4214, the chalk rating is not less than 8.
3.2.3 Removal of Existing Coatings
Remove existing coatings from the following surfaces:
a. Surfaces containing large areas of minor defects;
b. Surfaces containing more than 20 percent peeling area; and
c. Surfaces designated by the Contracting Officer, such as surfaces where

rust shows through existing coatings.
3.2.4 Substrate Repair
a. Repair substrate surface damaged during coating removal;
b. Sand edges of adjacent soundly-adhered existing coatings so they are

tapered as smooth as practical to areas involved with coating removal;
and
c. Clean and prime the substrate as specified.
3.3 PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES
3.3.1 Existing and New Ferrous Surfaces
a. Ferrous Surfaces including Shop-coated Surfaces and Small Areas That

Contain Rust, Mill Scale and Other Foreign Substances: Solvent clean
or detergent wash in accordance with SSPC SP 1 to remove oil and
grease. Where shop coat is missing or damaged, clean according to
SSPC SP 2, SSPC SP 3, SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3, or SSPC SP 10/NACE No. 2.
Brush-off blast remaining surface in accordance with SSPC 7/NACE No.4;
Water jetting to SSPC SP 12/NACE No.5 WJ-4 may be used to remove loose
coating and other loose materials. Use inhibitor as recommended by
coating manufacturer to prevent premature rusting. Shop-coated
ferrous surfaces shall be protected from corrosion by treating and
touching up corroded areas immediately upon detection.
b. Surfaces With More Than 20 Percent Rust, Mill Scale, and Other Foreign
Substances: Clean entire surface in accordance with
SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3/SSPC SP 12/NACE No.5 WJ-3.
3.3.2 Final Ferrous Surface Condition:
For tool cleaned surfaces, the requirements are stated in SSPC SP 2 and
SSPC SP 3. As a visual reference, cleaned surfaces shall be similar to
photographs in SSPC VIS 3.
For abrasive blast cleaned surfaces, the requirements are stated in

SSPC 7/NACE No.4, SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3, and SSPC SP 10/NACE No. 2. As a
visual reference, cleaned surfaces shall be similar to photographs in
SSPC VIS 1.
For waterjet cleaned surfaces, the requirements are stated in

SSPC SP 12/NACE No.5. As a visual reference, cleaned surfaces shall be
similar to photographs in SSPC VIS 4/NACE VIS 7.
3.3.3 Galvanized Surfaces
a. New or Existing Galvanized Surfaces With Only Dirt and Zinc Oxidation
Products: Clean with solvent, steam, or non-alkaline detergent
solution in accordance with SSPC SP 1. If the galvanized metal has
been passivated or stabilized, the coating shall be completely removed
by brush-off abrasive blast. New galvanized steel to be coated shall
not be "passivated" or "stabilized" If the absence of hexavalent
stain inhibitors is not documented, test as described in ASTM D6386,
Appendix X2, and remove by one of the methods described therein.
b. Galvanized with Slight Coating Deterioration or with Little or No

Rusting: Water jetting to SSPC SP 12/NACE No.5 WJ3 to remove loose
coating from surfaces with less than 20 percent coating deterioration
and no blistering, peeling, or cracking. Use inhibitor as recommended
by the coating manufacturer to prevent rusting.
c. Galvanized With Severe Deteriorated Coating or Severe Rusting: Water

jet to SSPC SP 12/NACE No.5 WJ3 degree of cleanliness. Blast rusted
areas as described for steel in SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3, and waterjet to
SSPC SP 12/NACE No.5, WJ3 to remove existing coating.
3.3.4 Non-Ferrous Metallic Surfaces
Aluminum and aluminum-alloy, lead, copper, and other nonferrous metal

surfaces.
Surface Cleaning: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 and wash

with mild non-alkaline detergent to remove dirt and water soluble
contaminants.
3.3.5 Terne-Coated Metal Surfaces
Solvent clean surfaces with mineral spirits, ASTM D235. Wipe dry with
clean, dry cloths.
3.3.6 Existing Surfaces with a Bituminous or Mastic-Type Coating
Remove chalk, mildew, and other loose material by washing with a solution
of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cup household detergent, one quart 5
percent sodium hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of warm water.
3.4 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SURFACE
3.4.1 Concrete and Masonry
a. Curing: Concrete, stucco and masonry surfaces shall be allowed to

cure at least 30 days before painting, except concrete slab on grade,
which shall be allowed to cure 90 days before painting.
b. Surface Cleaning: Remove the following deleterious substances.
(1) Dirt, Chalking, Grease, and Oil: Wash new and existing uncoated
surfaces with a solution composed of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate,
1/4 cuphousehold detergent, and 4 quarts of warm water. Then
rinse thoroughly with fresh water. Wash existing coated surfaces
with a suitable detergent and rinse thoroughly. For large areas,
water blasting may be used.
(2) Fungus and Mold: Wash new, existing coated, and existing uncoated
surfaces with a solution composed of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate,
1/4 cup household detergent, 1 quart 5 percent sodium hypochlorite
solution and 3 quarts of warm water. Rinse thoroughly with fresh
water.
(3) Paint and Loose Particles: Remove by wire brushing.
(4) Efflorescence: Remove by scraping or wire brushing followed by

washing with a 5 to 10 percent by weight aqueous solution of
hydrochloric (muriatic) acid. Do not allow acid to remain on the
surface for more than five minutes before rinsing with fresh
water. Do not acid clean more than 4 square feet of surface, per
workman, at one time.
c. Cosmetic Repair of Minor Defects: Repair or fill mortar joints and

minor defects, including but not limited to spalls, in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and prior to coating application.
d. Allowable Moisture Content: Latex coatings may be applied to damp

surfaces, but not to surfaces with droplets of water. Do not apply
epoxies to damp vertical surfaces as determined by ASTM D4263 or
horizontal surfaces that exceed 3 lbs of moisture per 1000 square feet
in 24 hours as determined by ASTM F1869. In all cases follow
manufacturers recommendations. Allow surfaces to cure a minimum of 30
days before painting.
3.4.2 Gypsum Board
a. Surface Cleaning: Gypsum board shall be dry. Remove loose dirt and
dust by brushing with a soft brush, rubbing with a dry cloth, or
vacuum-cleaning prior to application of the first coat material. A
damp cloth or sponge may be used if paint will be water-based.
b. Repair of Minor Defects: Prior to painting, repair joints, cracks,

holes, surface irregularities, and other minor defects with patching
plaster or spackling compound and sand smooth.
c. Allowable Moisture Content: Latex coatings may be applied to damp

surfaces, but not surfaces with droplets of water. Do not apply
epoxies to damp surfaces as determined by ASTM D4263. New plaster to
be coated shall have a maximum moisture content of 8 percent, when
measured in accordance with ASTM D4444, Method A, unless otherwise
authorized. In addition to moisture content requirements, allow new
plaster to age a minimum of 30 days before preparation for painting.
3.5 APPLICATION
3.5.1 Coating Application
Painting practices shall comply with applicable federal, state and local
laws enacted to insure compliance with Federal Clean Air Standards. Apply
coating materials in accordance with SSPC PA 1. SSPC PA 1 methods are
applicable to all substrates, except as modified herein.
At the time of application, paint shall show no signs of deterioration.

Uniform suspension of pigments shall be maintained during application.
Unless otherwise specified or recommended by the paint manufacturer, paint

may be applied by brush, roller, or spray. Use trigger operated spray
nozzles for water hoses. Rollers for applying paints and enamels shall be
of a type designed for the coating to be applied and the surface to be
coated. Wear protective clothing and respirators when applying oil-based
paints or using spray equipment with any paints.
Paints, except water-thinned types, shall be applied only to surfaces that

are completely free of moisture as determined by sight or touch.
Thoroughly work coating materials into joints, crevices, and open spaces.
Special attention shall be given to insure that all edges, corners,
crevices, welds, and rivets receive a film thickness equal to that of
adjacent painted surfaces.
Each coat of paint shall be applied so dry film shall be of uniform

thickness and free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, pinholes or other
voids, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and finish.
Hiding shall be complete.
Touch up damaged coatings before applying subsequent coats. Interior

areas shall be broom clean and dust free before and during the application
of coating material.
Apply paint to new fire extinguishing sprinkler systems including valves,

piping, conduit, hangers, supports, miscellaneous metal work, and
accessories. Shield sprinkler heads with protective coverings while
painting is in progress. Remove sprinkler heads which have been painted
and replace with new sprinkler heads. For piping in unfinished spaces,
provide primed surfaces with one coat of red alkyd gloss enamel to a
minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil. Unfinished spaces include attic
spaces, spaces above suspended ceilings, crawl spaces, pipe chases,
mechanical equipment room, and space where walls or ceiling are not
painted or not constructed of a prefinished material. For piping in
finished areas, provide prime surfaces with two coats of paint to match
adjacent surfaces, except provide valves and operating accessories with
one coat of red alkyd gloss enamel. Upon completion of painting, remove
protective covering from sprinkler heads.
a. Drying Time: Allow time between coats, as recommended by the coating

manufacturer, to permit thorough drying, but not to present topcoat
adhesion problems. Provide each coat in specified condition to
receive next coat.
b. Primers, and Intermediate Coats: Do not allow primers or intermediate

coats to dry more than 30 days, or longer than recommended by
manufacturer, before applying subsequent coats. Follow manufacturer's
recommendations for surface preparation if primers or intermediate
coats are allowed to dry longer than recommended by manufacturers of
subsequent coatings. Each coat shall cover surface of preceding coat
or surface completely, and there shall be a visually perceptible
difference in shades of successive coats.
c. Finished Surfaces: Provide finished surfaces free from runs, drops,

ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in colors.
d. Thermosetting Paints: Topcoats over thermosetting paints (epoxies and

urethanes) should be applied within the overcoating window recommended
by the manufacturer.
3.5.2 Mixing and Thinning of Paints
Reduce paints to proper consistency by adding fresh paint, except when

thinning is mandatory to suit surface, temperature, weather conditions,
application methods, or for the type of paint being used. Obtain written
permission from the Contracting Officer to use thinners. The written
permission shall include quantities and types of thinners to use.
When thinning is allowed, paints shall be thinned immediately prior to

application with not more than 1 pint of suitable thinner per gallon. The
use of thinner shall not relieve the Contractor from obtaining complete
hiding, full film thickness, or required gloss. Thinning shall not cause
the paint to exceed limits on volatile organic compounds. Paints of
different manufacturers shall not be mixed.
3.5.3 Two-Component Systems
Two-component systems shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. Any thinning of the first coat to ensure proper penetration
and sealing shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for each type of
substrate.
3.5.4 Coating Systems
a. Systems by Substrates: Apply coatings that conform to the respective

specifications listed in the following Tables:
Table
Division 5. Exterior Metal, Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Paint Table
Division 5. Interior Metal, Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Paint Table

Division 9: Interior Plaster, Gypsum Board, Textured Surfaces
Paint Table
b. Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT): Apply paints, primers, varnishes,

enamels, undercoats, and other coatings to a minimum dry film
thickness of 1.5 mil each coat unless specified otherwise in the
Tables. Coating thickness where specified, refers to the minimum dry
film thickness.
c. Coatings for Surfaces Not Specified Otherwise: Coat surfaces which

have not been specified, the same as surfaces having similar
conditions of exposure.
d. Existing Surfaces Damaged During Performance of the Work, Including

New Patches In Existing Surfaces: Coat surfaces with the following:
(1) One coat of primer.
(2) One coat of undercoat or intermediate coat.
(3) One topcoat to match adjacent surfaces.
e. Existing Coated Surfaces To Be Painted: Apply coatings conforming to

the respective specifications listed in the Tables herein, except that
pretreatments, sealers and fillers need not be provided on surfaces
where existing coatings are soundly adhered and in good condition. Do
not omit undercoats or primers.
3.6 COATING SYSTEMS FOR METAL
Apply coatings of Tables in Division 5 for Exterior and Interior.
a. Apply specified ferrous metal primer on the same day that surface is
cleaned, to surfaces that meet all specified surface preparation
requirements at time of application.
b. Inaccessible Surfaces: Prior to erection, use one coat of specified

primer on metal surfaces that will be inaccessible after erection.
c. Shop-primed Surfaces: Touch up exposed substrates and damaged

coatings to protect from rusting prior to applying field primer.
d. Surface Previously Coated with Epoxy or Urethane: Apply MPI 101, 1.5
mils DFT immediately prior to application of epoxy or urethane
coatings.
e. Pipes and Tubing: The semitransparent film applied to some pipes and
tubing at the mill is not to be considered a shop coat, but shall be
overcoated with the specified ferrous-metal primer prior to
application of finish coats.
f. Exposed Nails, Screws, Fasteners, and Miscellaneous Ferrous Surfaces.

On surfaces to be coated with water thinned coatings, spot prime
exposed nails and other ferrous metal with latex primer MPI 107.
3.7 COATING SYSTEMS FOR CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SUBSTRATES
Apply coatings of Tables in Division 3, 4 and 9 for Exterior and Interior.
3.8 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
Piping Identification, Including Surfaces In Concealed Spaces: Provide in

accordance with MIL-STD-101 and ASME A13.1. Place stenciling in clearly
visible locations. On piping not covered by MIL-STD-101 and ASME A13.1,
stencil approved names or code letters, in letters a minimum of 1/2 inch
high for piping and a minimum of 2 inches high elsewhere. Stencil
arrow-shaped markings on piping to indicate direction of flow using black
stencil paint.
3.9 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
In addition to meeting previously specified requirements, demonstrate

mobility of moving components, including swinging and sliding doors,
cabinets, and windows with operable sash, for inspection by the
Contracting Officer. Perform this demonstration after appropriate curing
and drying times of coatings have elapsed and prior to invoicing for final
payment.
As specified in the Waste Management Plan and as follows. Do not use

kerosene or any such organic solvents to clean up water based paints.
Properly dispose of paints or solvents in designated containers. Close and
seal partially used containers of paint to maintain quality as necessary
for reuse. Store in protected, well-ventilated, fire-safe area at
moderate temperature. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste
in designated containers. Coordinate with manufacturer for take-back
program. Set aside scrap to be returned to manufacturer for recycling
into new product. When such a service is not available, local recyclers
shall be sought after to reclaim the materials. Set aside extra paint for
future color matches or reuse by the Government. Where local options
exist for leftover paint recycling, collect all waste paint by type and
provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility for reuse by
local organizations.
3.11 PAINT TABLES
All DFT's are minimum values. Use only materials with a GPS green check
mark having a minimum MPI "Environmentally Friendly" E1 rating based on
VOC (EPA Method 24) content levels. Acceptable products are listed in the
MPI Green Approved Products List, available at
http://www.specifygreen.com/APL/ProductIdxByMPInum.asp.
3.11.1 EXTERIOR PAINT TABLES
DIVISION 5: EXTERIOR METAL, FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS PAINT TABLE
STEEL / FERROUS SURFACES
STEEL / FERROUS SURFACES
A. New Steel that has been hand or power tool cleaned to SSPC SP 2 or
SSPC SP 3
1. Alkyd
New; MPI EXT 5.1Q-G5 (Semigloss) Existing; MPI REX 5.1D-G5
Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 23 MPI 94 MPI 94
System DFT: 5.25 mils
New; MPI EXT 5.1Q-G6 (Gloss) / Existing; MPI REX 5.1D-G6

MPI 23 MPI 9 MPI 9
B. New Steel that has been blast-cleaned to SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3:
1. Alkyd
New; MPI EXT 5.1D-G5 (Semigloss) / Existing; MPI REX 5.1D-G5
New; MPI EXT 5.1D-G6 (Gloss) / Existing; MPI REX 5.1D-G6

MPI 79 MPI 9 MPI 9
C. New and existing steel blast cleaned to SSPC SP 10/NACE No. 2:
1. Waterborne Light Industrial

MPI EXT 5.1R-G5 (Semigloss)
MPI 101 MPI 108 MPI 163
MPI EXT 5.1R-G6 (Gloss)

MPI 101 MPI 108 MPI 164
2. Pigmented Polyurethane
MPI EXT 5.1J-G6 (Gloss)
EXTERIOR GALVANIZED SURFACES
A. New Galvanized surfaces:
1. Cementitious primer / Latex

MPI EXT 5.3A-G1 (Flat)
MPI EXT 5.3A-G5 (Semigloss)

MPI EXT 5.3A-G6 (Gloss)

2. Waterborne Primer / Latex

MPI EXT 5.3H-G1 (Flat)
MPI EXT 5.3H-G5 (Semigloss)

MPI EXT 5.3H-G6 (Gloss)

MPI 134 MPI 119 MPI 119
3. Waterborne Primer / Waterborne Light Industrial Coating

MPI EXT 5.3J-G5 (Semigloss)
MPI 134 MPI 163 MPI 163
MPI EXT 5.3J-G6 (Gloss)

MPI 134 MPI 164 MPI 164
4. Epoxy Primer / Waterborne Light Industrial Coating

MPI EXT 5.3K-G5 (Semigloss)
MPI 101 MPI 163 MPI 163
System DFT: 5 mils
MPI EXT 5.3K-G6 (Gloss)

MPI 101 MPI 164 MPI 164
System DFT: 5 mils
MPI EXT 5.3L-G6 (Gloss)
MPI 101 N/A MPI 72
System DFT: 5 mils
B. Galvanized surfaces with slight coating deterioration; little or no

rusting:
1. Waterborne Light Industrial Coating

MPI REX 5.3J-G5 (Semigloss)

MPI 134 N/A MPI 163
MPI REX 5.3D-G6 (Gloss)
MPI 101 N/A MPI 72
System DFT: 5 mils
C. Galvanized surfaces with severely deteriorated coating or rusting:

MPI REX 5.3L-G5(Semigloss)
MPI 101 MPI 108 MPI 163
MPI REX 5.3L-G6(Gloss)

MPI 101 MPI 108 MPI 164
MPI REX 5.3K-G6(Gloss)
System DFT: 5 mils
EXTERIOR SURFACES, OTHER METALS (NON-FERROUS)
A. Aluminum, aluminum alloy and other miscellaneous non-ferrous metal items

not otherwise specified except hot metal surfaces, roof surfaces, and
new prefinished equipment. Match surrounding finish:
1. Alkyd
MPI EXT 5.4F-G1 (Flat)
MPI 95 MPI 8 MPI 8
System DFT: 5 mils
MPI EXT 5.4F-G5 (Semigloss)

System DFT: 5 mils
MPI EXT 5.4F-G6 (Gloss)

MPI 95 MPI 9 MPI 9
System DFT: 5 mils

MPI EXT 5.4G-G3(Eggshell)
System DFT: 5 mils
MPI EXT 5.4G-G5(Semigloss)

System DFT: 5 mils
MPI EXT 5.4G-G6(Gloss)

System DFT: 5 mils
B. Surfaces adjacent to painted surfaces; Mechanical, Electrical, Fire

extinguishing sprinkler systems including valves, conduit, hangers,
supports, exposed copper piping, and miscellaneous metal items not
otherwise specified except floors, hot metal surfaces, and new
prefinished equipment. Match surrounding finish:
1. Alkyd
MPI EXT 5.1D-G1 (Flat)
MPI 79 MPI 8 MPI 8
MPI EXT 5.1D-G5 (Semigloss)

MPI EXT 5.1D-G6 (Gloss)

MPI 79 MPI 9 MPI 9

MPI EXT 5.1C-G3(Eggshell)
System DFT: 5 mils
MPI EXT 5.1C-G5(Semigloss)

System DFT: 5 mils
MPI EXT 5.1C-G6(Gloss)

System DFT: 5 mils
C. Hot metal surfaces subject to temperatures up to 400 degrees F:
1. Heat Resistant Enamel

MPI EXT 5.2A
MPI 21 Surface preparation and number of coats per
manufacturer's instructions.
System DFT: Per Manufacturer
D. Ferrous metal subject to high temperature, up to 750 degrees F:

1. Inorganic Zinc Rich Coating
MPI EXT 5.2C
2. Heat Resistant Aluminum Enamel

MPI EXT 5.2B (Aluminum Finish)
E. New surfaces and Existing surfaces made bare cleaning to

SSPC SP 10/NACE No. 2 subject to temperatures up to 1100 degrees F:
1. Heat Resistant Coating

MPI EXT 5.2D
3.11.2 INTERIOR PAINT TABLES
DIVISION 5: INTERIOR METAL, FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS PAINT TABLE
INTERIOR STEEL / FERROUS SURFACES
A. Metal, Mechanical, Electrical, Fire extinguishing sprinkler systems

including valves, conduit, hangers, supports, Surfaces adjacent to
painted surfaces (Match surrounding finish), exposed copper piping, and
miscellaneous metal items not otherwise specified except floors, hot
metal surfaces, and new prefinished equipment:
1. High Performance Architectural Latex

MPI INT 5.1R-G2 (Flat)
System DFT: 5 mils
MPI INT 5.1R-G3 (Eggshell)

System DFT: 5 mils
MPI INT 5.1R-G5 (Semigloss)

System DFT: 5 mils
2. Alkyd
MPI INT 5.1E-G2 (Flat)

MPI INT 5.1E-G3 (Eggshell)
MPI INT 5.1E-G5 (Semigloss)

MPI INT 5.1E-G6 (Gloss)

B. Metal in toilets, restrooms, shower areas, areas requiring a high degree

of sanitation, and other high-humidity areas not otherwise specified
except floors, hot metal surfaces, and new prefinished equipment:
1. Alkyd
MPI INT 5.1E-G3 (Eggshell)
MPI INT 5.1E-G5 (Semigloss)

MPI INT 5.1E-G6 (Gloss)

2. Alkyd
MPI INT 5.1T-G3 (Eggshell) For hand tool cleaning
MPI INT 5.1T-G5 (Semigloss)

MPI INT 5.1T-G6 (Gloss)

C. Ferrous metal in concealed damp spaces or in exposed areas having

unpainted adjacent surfaces as follows:
1. Aluminum Paint
MPI INT 5.1M

MPI 79 MPI 1 MPI 1
D. Miscellaneous non-ferrous metal items not otherwise specified except

floors, hot metal surfaces, and new prefinished equipment. Match
surrounding finish:
1. High Performance Architectural Latex

MPI INT 5.4F-G2 (Flat)
System DFT: 5 mils
MPI INT 5.4F-G3 (Eggshell)

System DFT: 5 mils
MPI INT 5.4F-G4 (Satin)

System DFT: 5 mils
MPI INT 5.4F-G5 (Semigloss)

System DFT: 5 mils
2. Alkyd
MPI INT 5.4J-G2 (Flat)
System DFT: 5 mils
MPI INT 5.4J-G3 (Eggshell)

System DFT: 5 mils
MPI INT 5.4J-G5 (Semigloss)

System DFT: 5 mils
MPI INT 5.4J-G6 (Gloss)

System DFT: 5 mils
E. Hot metal surfaces subject to temperatures up to 400 degrees F:
1. Heat Resistant Enamel

MPI INT 5.2A
F. Ferrous metal subject to high temperature, up to 750 degrees F:
1. Inorganic Zinc Rich Coating

MPI INT 5.2C
2. Heat Resistant Aluminum Paint

MPI INT 5.2B (Aluminum Finish)
G. New surfaces and Existing surfaces made bare cleaning to

SSPC SP 10/NACE No. 2 subject to temperatures up to 1100 degrees F:
1. High Heat Resistant Coating

MPI INT 5.2D
DIVISION 9: INTERIOR PLASTER, GYPSUM BOARD, TEXTURED SURFACES PAINT

TABLE
A. New and Existing, previously painted Wallboard not otherwise specified:
1. Latex
New; MPI INT 9.2A-G2 (Flat) / Existing; RIN 9.2A-G2 (Flat)
System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 9.2A-G3 (Eggshell) / Existing; RIN 9.2A-G3 (Eggshell)

System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 9.2A-G5 (Semigloss) / Existing; RIN 9.2A-G5 (Semigloss)

System DFT: 4 mils
2. High Performance Architectural Latex - High Traffic Areas

New; MPI INT 9.2B-G2 (Flat) / Existing; MPI RIN 9.2B-G2 (Flat)
System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 9.2B-G3 (Eggshell) / Existing; MPI RIN 9.2B-G3 (Eggshell)
DIVISION 9: INTERIOR PLASTER, GYPSUM BOARD, TEXTURED SURFACES PAINT TABLE

System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 9.2B-G5 (Semigloss) / Existing; MPI RIN 9.2B-G5 (Semigloss)
System DFT: 4 mils
B. New and Existing, previously painted Wallboard in toilets, restrooms,

shower areas, and other high humidity areas not otherwise specified:

New; MPI INT 9.2L-G5(Semigloss) / Existing; MPI RIN 9.2L-G5 (Semigloss)
System DFT: 4 mils
2. Alkyd
New; MPI INT 9.2C-G5 (Semigloss) / Existing; MPI RIN 9.2C-G5 (Semigloss)
System DFT: 4 mils
3. Epoxy
New; MPI INT 9.2E-G6 (Gloss) / Existing; MPI RIN 9.2D-G6 (Gloss)
System DFT: 4 mils
SECTION 10 14 00.20
INTERIOR SIGNAGE
11/12
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
designation only.

AA PK-1 (2009) Pink Sheets: Designations and

Chemical Composition Limits for Aluminum
Alloys in the Form of Castings & Ingot
AAMA 2604 (2010) Voluntary Specification,

Performance Requirements and Test
Procedures for High Performance Organic
Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels

Test



SECTION 10 14 00.20 Page 1

1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Installation; G
Warranty; G
SD-04 Samples
Interior Signage; G
Protection and Cleaning; G
1.3 EXTRA MATERIALS
Provide 2 percent extra frames and extra stock of the following: 2 percent
blank plates of each color and size for each sign type. 2 percent
changeable message strips. Provide 2 percent paper inserts and one copy
of the software for user produced signs and inserts after project
completion and equipment necessary for removal of signage parts and pieces.
1.4.1 Samples
Submit interior signage samples of each of the following sign types

showing typical quality, workmanship and color: Directional sign, Standard
Room sign, Changeable message strip sign. The samples may be installed in
the work, provided each sample is identified and location recorded.
Submit detail drawings showing elevations of each type of sign,

dimensions, details and methods of mounting or anchoring, mounting height,
shape and thickness of materials, and details of construction. Include a
schedule showing the location, each sign type, and message.
Materials shall be packaged to prevent damage and deterioration during

shipment, handling, storage and installation. Product shall be delivered
to the jobsite in manufacturer's original packaging and stored in a clean,
dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.6 WARRANTY
Warrant the interior signage for a period of 2 years against defective

workmanship and material. Warranties shall be signed by the authorized

representative of the manufacturer. Submit warranty accompanied by the
document authenticating the signer as an authorized representative of the
guarantor. Guarantee that the signage products and the installation are
free from any defects in material and workmanship from the date of
delivery.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS
Signs, plaques, directories, and dimensional letters shall be the standard

product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such
products that essentially duplicate signs that have been in satisfactory
use at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Obtain signage from a single
manufacturer with edges and corners of finished letterforms and graphics
true and clean.
2.2 ROOM IDENTIFICATION/DIRECTIONAL SIGNAGE SYSTEM
2.2.1 Standard Room Signs
Signs shall consist of acrylic plastic 0.080 inch thickness minimum

conforming to ANSI Z97.1 and shall conform to the following:
a. Frames shall be molded acrylic, radius 1/4 inch thick.
b. End caps shall be molded acrylic with square style corners.
c. Units shall be frameless. Corners of signs shall be squared.
2.2.2 Changeable Message Strip Signs
Changeable message strip signs shall be of same construction as standard

room signs to include a clear sleeve that will accept a paper or plastic
insert identifying changeable text. The insert shall be prepared die-cut
vinyl letters applied to 0.015 inch rigid vinyl film . Provide software
for creating text and symbols for computers identified by owner for Owner
production of paper inserts after project completion. Furnish one suction
device to assist in removing face sheet. Sliding inserts or slide knobs
that slide horizontally exposing different graphic information shall be
provided as identified in the signage placement schedule and drawings
2.2.3 Type of Mounting For Signs
Provide extruded aluminum brackets for hanging, projecting, and

double-sided signs. Mounting for framed, hanging, and projecting signs
shall be by mechanical fasteners. Surface mounted signs shall be mounted
with 1/16 inch thick closed cell vinyl foam with adhesive backing.
Adhesive shall be transparent, long aging, high tech formulation on two
sides of the vinyl foam. fabricated from materials that are not corrosive
to sign material and mounting surface.
2.2.4 Graphics
Signage graphics for modular signs shall conform to the following:

2.2.4.1 Subsurface Copy
Copy is transferred to the back face of clear acrylic sheeting forming the
panel face to produce precisely formed opaque image. This method bonds
all sign elements (color, graphics, lettering, Braille and substrate) into
a single unit.
2.2.5 Character Proportions and Heights
Letters and numbers on signs conform to 36 CFR 1191.
2.2.6 Tactile Letters, Symbols and Braille
Raised letters and numbers on signs shall conform to 36 CFR 1191.
2.3 ALUMINUM ALLOY PRODUCTS
Aluminum extrusions shall be at least 1/8 inch thick, and aluminum plate
or sheet shall be at least 0.0508 inch thick. Extrusions shall conform to
ASTM B221; plate and sheet shall conform to ASTM B209. Where anodic
coatings are specified, alloy shall conform to AA PK-1 alloy designation
514.0. Exposed anodized aluminum finishes shall be as shown. Welding for
aluminum products shall conform to AWS D1.2/D1.2M.
2.4 ANODIC COATING
Anodized finish shall conform to AA DAF45 as follows:
a. Clear (natural) designation AA-M10-C22-A31, Architectural Class II 0.4

mil or thicker.
b. Integral color anodized designation AA-M10-C22-A32, Architectural Class

0.4 to 0.7 mil.
c. Electrolytically deposited color-anodized designation AA-M10-C22-A34,

Architectural Class II 0.4 to 0.7 mil.
2.5 ORGANIC COATING
Organic coating shall conform to AAMA 2604, with total dry film thickness
not less than 1.2 mils.
2.6 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE
2.6.1 Factory Workmanship
Holes for bolts and screws shall be drilled or punched. Drilling and
punching shall produce clean, true lines and surfaces. Exposed surfaces
of work shall have a smooth finish and exposed riveting shall be flush.
Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable.
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, the surfaces will be protected to

prevent galvanic or corrosive action.
2.7 COLOR, FINISH, AND CONTRAST
Color shall be in accordance with Section 09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE. Finish

of all signs shall be eggshell, matte, or other non-glare finish as

required in handicapped-accessible buildings.
2.8 TYPEFACE
ADA-ABA compliant font for Room Signs.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Signs shall be installed plumb and true and in accordance with approved
manufacturer's instructions at locations shown on the detail drawings.
Submit six copies of operating instructions outlining the step-by-step
procedures required for system operation. The instructions shall include
simplified diagrams for the system as installed, the manufacturer's name,
model number, service manual, parts list, and brief description of all
equipment and their basic operating features. Each set shall be
permanently bound and shall have a hard cover. The following
identification shall be inscribed on the covers: the words "OPERATING AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", name and location of the facility, name of the
Contractor, and contract number. Mounting height and mounting location
shall conform to 36 CFR 1191. Required blocking shall be installed.
Signs on doors or other surfaces shall not be installed until finishes on
such surfaces have been installed. Signs installed on glass surfaces
shall be installed with matching blank back-up plates in accordance with
3.1.1 Anchorage
Anchorage shall be in accordance with approved manufacturer's

instructions. Anchorage not otherwise specified or shown shall include
slotted inserts, expansion shields, and powder-driven fasteners when
approved for concrete; toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry; machine
carriage bolts for steel; lag bolts and screws for wood. Exposed anchor
and fastener materials shall be compatible with metal to which applied and
shall have matching color and finish.
a. Signs mounted to painted gypsum board surfaces shall be removable for

painting maintenance.
b. Mount signs mounted to lay-in ceiling grids with clip connections to

ceiling tees.
c. Install signs mounted on metal surfaces with magnetic tape.
d. Install signs mounted on fabric surfaces with hook and loop tape or
pin mount.
3.1.2 Protection and Cleaning
Protect the work against damage during construction. Hardware and

electrical equipment shall be adjusted for proper operation. Glass,
frames, and other sign surfaces shall be cleaned at completion of sign
installation in accordance with the manufacturer's approved instructions
and the requirements of Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA,
Package 1. Submit six copies of maintenance instructions listing routine
procedures, repairs, and guides.


SECTION 10 14 01
EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
04/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES



Test
AWS C1.1M/C1.1 (2012) Recommended Practices for

Resistance Welding

Code - Steel


Steel Products

Structural Steel

the Hot-Dip Process






Materials
All exterior signage shall be provided by a single manufacturer. Exterior

signage shall be of the design, detail, sizes, types, and message content
shown on the drawings, shall conform to the requirements specified, and
shall be provided at the locations indicated. Submit exterior signage
schedule in electronic media with spread sheet format. Spread sheet shall
include sign location, sign type, and message. Signs shall be complete
with lettering, framing as detailed, and related components for a complete
installation. Each sample shall consist of a complete sign panel with
letters and symbols. Samples may be installed in the work, provided each
sample is identified and location recorded. Submit three color samples
for each material requiring color and 12 inch square sample of sign face
color sample.
1.2.1 Wind Load Requirements
Exterior signage shall be designed to withstand windload per structural

drawings. Submit design analysis and supporting calculations performed in
support of specified signage.
1.2.2 Character Proportions and Heights
Letters and numbers on indicated signs for handicapped-accessible

buildings shall have a width-to-height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1 and a
stroke-width-to-height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10. Characters and numbers
on indicated signs shall be sized according to the viewing distance from
which they are to be read. The minimum height is measured using an upper
case letter "X". Lower case characters are permitted.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Approved Detail Drawings; G, A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Building Mounted Type Signs; G, A/E

Exterior Signage; G, A/E
Wind Load Requirements
SD-04 Samples
Exterior Signage; G, A/E
Protection and Cleaning; G
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
Signs, plaques, and dimensional letters shall be the standard product of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products. Items
of equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has been in
satisfactory use at least 2 years prior to bid opening.
Materials shall be wrapped for shipment and storage, delivered to the

jobsite in manufacturer's original packaging, and stored in a clean, dry
area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.6 WARRANTY
Manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that extend

beyond a one year period shall be provided.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BUILDING MOUNTED TYPE SIGNS
Exterior signage shall consist of a system of coordinated directional,

identification, and regulatory type signs located where shown.
Dimensions, details, materials, message content, and design of signage
shall be as shown. Submit manufacturer's descriptive data and catalog
cuts.
2.2 GRAPHICS FOR EXTERIOR SIGNAGE SYSTEMS
2.2.1 Graphics
Signage graphics shall conform to the following:
a. Cast plate aluminum letters, 1/2 inch thick shall be provided and
fastened to the message panel with concealed stud fasteners. Letters
shall project minimum 1 inch from face of panel.
2.2.2 Messages
See drawings for message content. Typeface: Helvetica medium. Type size
as indicated.
2.3 DIMENSIONAL BUILDING LETTERS
2.3.1 Fabrication
Letters shall be fabricated from cast aluminum. Letters shall be cleaned

by chemical etching or cleaned ultrasonically in a special degreasing
bath. Letters shall be packaged for protection until installation.
2.3.2 Typeface
Typeface shall be helvetica medium as indicated.
2.3.3 Size
Letter size shall be as indicated.
2.3.4 Finish
Anodized aluminum Polished bronze with clear coat finish shall be provided.
2.3.5 Mounting
Threaded studs of number and size as recommended by manufacturer, shall be

used for concealed anchorage. Letters which project from the building
line shall have stud spacer sleeves. Letters, studs, and sleeves shall be
of the same material. Supply templates for mounting.
2.4 ALUMINUM ALLOY PRODUCTS
Aluminum alloy products shall conform to ASTM B209 for sheet or plate,
ASTM B221 for extrusions and ASTM B26/B26M or ASTM B108/B108M for
castings. Aluminum extrusions shall be provided at least 1/8 inch thick
and aluminum plate or sheet at least 16 gauge thick. Welding for aluminum
products shall conform to AWS C1.1M/C1.1.
2.5 ANODIC COATING
Anodized finish shall conform to AA DAF45 as follows:
Clear (natural) designation AA-M10-C22-A31, Architectural Class II 0.4

mil or thicker.
2.6 STEEL PRODUCTS
Structural steel products shall conform to ASTM A36/A36M. Sheet and strip
steel products shall conform to ASTM A1011/A1011M. Welding for steel
products shall conform to AWS D1.2/D1.2M.
2.7 ACRYLIC SHEET
Acrylic sheet shall be in accordance with the flammability requirements of

ASTM E84 and shall conform to ANSI Z97.1.
2.8 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS
Exposed anchor and fastener materials shall be compatible with metal to

which applied and shall match in color and finish and shall be
non-rusting, non-corroding, and non-staining. Exposed fasteners shall be
tamper-proof.
2.9 SHOP FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE
2.9.1 Factory Workmanship
Work shall be assembled in the shop, as far as practical, ready for

installation at the site. Work that cannot be shop assembled shall be
given a trial fit in the shop to ensure proper field assembly. Holes for
bolts and screws shall be drilled or punched. Drilling and punching shall
produce clean, true lines and surfaces. Welding to or on structural steel
shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Welding shall be continuous
along the entire area of contact. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth.
Exposed surfaces of work shall have a smooth finish and exposed riveting
shall be flush. Fastenings shall be concealed where practical. Items
specified to be galvanized shall be by hot-dip process after fabrication
if practical. Galvanization shall be in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M
and ASTM A653/A653M, as applicable. Other metallic coatings of steel
sheet shall be in accordance with ASTM A924/A924M. Joints exposed to the
weather shall be formed to exclude water. Drainage and weep holes shall
be included as required to prevent condensation buildup.
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, or where aluminum is in contact

with concrete, mortar, masonry, wet or pressure-treated wood, or
absorptive materials subject to wetting, the surfaces shall be protected
with a coat of asphalt varnish or a coat of zinc-molybdate primer to
prevent galvanic or corrosive action.
2.9.3 Shop Painting
Surfaces of miscellaneous metal work, except nonferrous metal, corrosion

resisting steel, and zinc-coated work, shall be given one coat of
zinc-molybdate primer or an approved rust-resisting treatment and metallic
primer in accordance with manufacturer's standard practice. Surfaces of
items to be embedded in concrete shall not be painted. Upon completion of
work, damaged surfaces shall be recoated.
2.10 COLOR, FINISH, AND CONTRAST
Color shall be as indicated on the drawings and in Base IAP. For buildings
required to be handicapped-accessible, the characters and background of
signs shall be eggshell, matte, or other non-glare finish. Characters and
symbols shall contrast with their background - either light characters on
a dark background or dark characters on a light background.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Signs, plaques, or dimensional letters shall be installed in accordance

with approved manufacturer's instructions at locations shown on the
approved detail drawings; submit drawings showing elevations of each type
of sign; dimensions, details, and methods of mounting or anchoring; shape
and thickness of materials; and details of construction. A schedule
showing the location, each sign type, and message shall be included.
Signs shall be installed plumb and true at mounting heights indicated, and
by method shown or specified. Signs mounted on other surfaces shall not
be installed until finishes on such surfaces have been completed. Submit

manufacturer's installation instructions and cleaning instructions.
3.1.1 Anchorage
Anchorage and fastener materials shall be in accordance with approved

manufacturer's instructions for the indicated substrate. Anchorage not
otherwise specified or indicated shall include slotted inserts, expansion
shields, and powder-driven fasteners when approved for concrete; toggle
bolts and through bolts for masonry; machine carriage bolts for steel; lag
bolts and screws for wood.
3.1.2 Protection and Cleaning
The work shall be protected against damage during construction. Hardware

and electrical equipment shall be adjusted for proper operation. Glass,
frames, and other sign surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. After signs are completed and inspected,
Cover all project identification, directional, and other signs which may
mislead the public. Covering shall be maintained until instructed to be
removed by the Contracting Officer or until the facility is to be opened
for business. Submit six copies of maintenance instructions listing
routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and
troubleshooting guides. The instructions shall include simplified
diagrams for the equipment as installed. Signs shall be cleaned, as
required, at time of cover removal.
3.2 FIELD PAINTED FINISH
Miscellaneous metals and frames shall be field painted in accordance with

Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. Anodized metals, masonry, and glass
shall be protected from paint. Finish shall be free of scratches or other
blemishes.
SECTION 10 21 13
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
01/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Steel Products

Strip
ASTM A336/A336M (2010a) Standard Specification for Alloy

Steel Forgings for Pressure and
High-Temperature Parts
ASTM A385/A385M (2011) Standard Practice for Providing

High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip)

ASTM B36/B36M (2013) Standard Specification for Brass

Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar
ASTM B86 (2013) Standard Specification for Zinc and

Zinc-Aluminum (ZA) Alloy Foundry and Die
Castings
ASTM D7611/D7611M (2013; E 2014) Standard Practice for

Coding Plastic Manufactured Articles for
Resin Identification

Facilities
CID A-A-60003 (Basic) Partitions, Toilet, Complete

1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fabrication Drawings; G, A/E

Installation Drawings; G, A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Cleaning and Maintenance Instructions

Colors And Finishes; G, A/E
Galvanized Steel Sheet; G, A/E
Sound-Deadening Cores; G, A/E
Anchoring Devices and Fasteners; G, A/E
Hardware and Fittings; G, A/E
Brackets; G, A/E
Door Hardware; G, A/E
Toilet Enclosures; G, A/E
Urinal Screens; G, A/E
Pilaster Shoes; G, A/E
SD-04 Samples
Colors and Finishes; G, A/E

Hardware and Fittings
Anchoring Devices and Fasteners
SD-07 Certificates
Warranty
Plastic Identification; G, A/E
Toilet Enclosures
Urinal Screens
" Pilaster Shoes
Conform to ICC A117.1 code for access for the handicapped operation of
toilet compartment door and hardware.
Deliver materials in the manufacturer's original unopened packages with

the brand, item identification, and project reference clearly marked.
Store components in a dry location that is adequately ventilated; free
from dust, water, other contaminants, and damage during delivery, storage,
and construction.
1.5 WARRANTY
Provide certification or warranties that metal toilet partitions will be

free of defects in materials, fabrication, finish, and installation and
will remain so for a period of not less than 3 years after completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Provide a complete and usable toilet partition system, including toilet

enclosures, room entrance screens, urinal screens, system of panels,
hardware, and support components. Furnish the partition system from a
single manufacturer, with a standard product as shown in the most recent
catalog data. Submit Fabrication Drawings for toilet partitions and
urinal screens consisting of fabrication and assembly details to be
performed in the factory. Submit manufacturer's Cleaning and Maintenance
Instructions with Fabrication Drawings for review.
2.1.1 Plastic Identification
Verify that plastic products to be incorporated into the project are

labeled in accordance with ASTM D7611/D7611M. Where products are not
labeled, provide product data indicating polymeric information in the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Type 2 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
2.2 MATERIALS
2.2.1 Anchoring Devices and Fasteners
Provide steel anchoring devices and fasteners hot-dipped galvanized after

fabrication, in conformance with ASTM A385/A385M and ASTM A123/A123M.
Conceal all galvanized anchoring devices.
2.2.2 Brackets
Wall brackets shall be two-ear panel brackets, T-style, 1-inch stock.

Provide stirrup style panel-to-pilaster brackets.
2.2.3 Hardware and Fittings
Conform hardware for the toilet partition system to CID A-A-60003 for the
specified type and style of partitions. Provide hardware finish highly
resistant to alkalis, urine, and other common toilet room acids. Comply
latching devices and hinges for handicap compartments with 36 CFR 1191;
provide stainless steel devices and hinges with door latches that operate
without either tight grasping or twisting of the wrist of the operator.
Submit three samples of each item, including anchoring devices and
fasteners. Approved hardware samples may be installed in the work if
properly identified.
Material Conformance Standard
Cold-rolled sheet steel ASTM A336/A336M, commercial quality
Zinc-base alloy ASTM B86, Alloy AC41-A
Brass ASTM B36/B36M, Alloy C26800
Aluminum ASTM B221
Corrosion-resistant steel ASTM A167, Type 302
2.2.3.2 Finishes
a. Exposed fasteners shall match the hardware and fittings.
2.2.4 Door Hardware
2.2.4.1 Hinges
Hinges shall be adjustable to hold in-swinging doors open at any angle up

to 90 degrees and outswinging doors to 10 degrees. Provide
self-lubricating hinges with the indicated swing. Hinges shall be the
surface-mounted type. have the following type of return movement:
a. Gravity return movement
2.2.4.2 Latch and Pull
Latch and pull shall be a combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper
equipped with emergency access.
2.2.4.3 Coat Hooks
Coat hooks shall be combination units with hooks and rubber tipped pins.
2.3 PARTITION PANELS AND DOORS
Fabricate partition panels and doors not less than 1 inch thick.
2.3.1 Toilet Enclosures
Conform toilet enclosures to CID A-A-60003, Type I, Style A, floor with

overhead brace supported. Furnish width, length, and height of toilet
enclosures as shown. Provide a width of 1 inch. Finish surface of panels
shall be solid polyethylene, Finish 5; water resistant; graffiti
resistant; non-absorbent; 1/4 inch radius beveled edges. Reinforce
panels indicated to receive toilet paper holders or grab bars for mounting
of the items required. Provide grab bars to withstand a bending stress,
shear stress, shear force, and a tensile force induced by 250 lbf. Grab
bars shall not rotate within their fittings.
2.3.2 Urinal Screens
Conform urinal screens to CID A-A-60003, Type III, Style A, wall supported.
Provide finish for surface of screens as solid phenolic, solid
polyethylene, Finish 5; water resistant; graffiti resistant;
non-absorbent; 1/4 inch radius beveled edges. This item may contain
post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content. Furnish width and
height of urinal screens as shown. Provide thickness of 1 inch. Secure
wall hung urinal screens with a minimum of three wall stirrup brackets.
Fabricate screens from the same types of panels and pilasters as the
toilet partitions. Use corrosion-resistant steel fittings and fasteners.
2.4 FLOOR-ANCHORED PARTITIONS AND OVERHEAD BRACED
Pilasters shall be not less than 1 inch thick. Provide anchorage devices
complete with threaded rods, expansion shields, lock washers, and
leveling-adjustment nuts. Trim piece at the floor shall be 3 inch high
and fabricated from not less than 0.030 inch thick corrosion-resistant
steel.
2.5 PILASTER SHOES
Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal floor-mounted anchorage. Pilaster

shoes shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Height shall be 3 inches.
2.6 HARDWARE
Hardware for the toilet partition system shall conform to CID A-A-60003
for the specified type and style of partitions. Hardware shall be
pre-drilled by manufacturer. Hardware finish shall be highly resistant to
alkalis, urine, and other common toilet room acids. Hardware shall
include: chrome plated non ferrous cast pivot hinges, gravity type,
adjustable for door close positioning; nylon bearings; black anodized
aluminum door latch; door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; and cast
alloy chrome plated coat hook and bumper. Latching devices and hinges for
handicap compartments shall comply with 36 CFR 1191 and shall be
chrome-plated steel or stainless steel door latches that operate without
either tight grasping or twisting of the wrist of the operator. Screws
and bolts shall be stainless steel, tamper proof type. Wall mounting
brackets shall be continuous, full height, aluminum or stainless steel, in
accordance with toilet compartment manufacturer's instructions.
Floor-mounted anchorage shall consist of corrosion-resistant anchoring
assemblies with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts
at pilasters for structural connection to floor.
2.7 COLORS AND FINISHES
2.7.1 Colors
Provide manufacturer's standard color charts for color of finishes for

toilet partition system components. Submit three samples showing a
finished edge on two adjacent sides and core construction, each not less
than 12-inch square
2.7.2 Finishes No.4 and No. 5
Provide solid plastic fabricated of polymer resins (polyethylene) formed

under high pressure rendering a single component section not less than one
inch thick. Colors shall extend throughout the panel thickness. Provide
exposed finish surfaces: smooth, waterproof, non-absorbent, and resistant
to staining and marking with pens, pencils, or other writing devices.
Solid plastic partitions shall not show any sign of deterioration when
immersed in the following chemicals and maintained at a temperature of 80
degrees F for a minimum of 30 days:
Acetic Acid (80 percent) Hydrochloric Acid (40 percent)
Acetone Hydrogen Peroxide (30 percent)
Ammonia (liquid) Isopropyl Alcohol
Ammonia Phosphate Lactic Acid (25 percent)
Bleach (12 percent) Lime Sulfur
Borax Nicotine
Brine Potassium Bromide
Caustic Soda Soaps
Chlorine Water Sodium Bicarbonate
Citric Acid Trisodium Phosphate
Copper Chloride Urea; Urine
Core Oils Vinegar
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Take field measurements prior to the preparation of drawing and

fabrication to ensure proper fits. Verify that field measurements,
surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive
work. Verify correct spacing of plumbing fixtures. Verify correct
location of built in framing, anchorage, and bracing. Report in writing
to Contracting Officer prevailing conditions that will adversely affect
satisfactory execution of the work of this section. Do not proceed with
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level, with the panels
centered between the fixtures. Provide a panel clearance of not more than
1/2 inch and secure the panels to walls and pilasters with not less than
two wall brackets attached near the top and bottom of the panel. Locate
wall brackets so that holes for wall bolts occur in masonry or tile
joints. Secure Panels to pilasters with brackets matching the wall
brackets. Provide for adjustment due to minor floor variations. Locate
head rail joints at pilaster center lines. Install adjacent components
for consistency of line and plane. Equip each door with hinges, one door
latch, and one coat hook and bumper. Align hardware to uniform clearance
at vertical edges of doors.
a. Secure panels to hollow plastered walls with toggle bolts using not
less than 1/4-20 screws of the length required for the wall
thickness. Toggle bolts shall have a load-carrying strength of not
less than 600 pounds per anchor.
b. Secure panels to ceramic tile on hollow plastered walls or hollow

concrete-masonry walls with toggle bolts using not less than 1/4-20
screws of the length required for the wall thickness. Toggle bolts
shall have a load-carrying strength of not less than 600 pounds per
anchor.
c. Secure panels to solid masonry or concrete with lead or brass

expansion shields designed for use with not less than 1/4-20 screws,
with a shield length of not less than 1-1/2 inch. Expansion shields
shall have a load-carrying strength of not less than 600 pounds per
anchor.
d. Submit Installation Drawings for metal toilet partitions and urinal

screens showing plans, elevations, details of construction, hardware,
reinforcing and blocking, fittings, mountings and escutcheons.
Indicate on drawings the type of partition, location, mounting height,
cutouts, and reinforcement required for toilet-room accessories.
3.3 FLOOR-ANCHORED PARTITIONS AND OVERHEAD BRACED
Secure pilasters to the floor with the anchorage device specified. Make
all leveling devices readily accessible for leveling, plumbing, and
tightening the installation. Level tops of doors with tops of pilasters
when doors are in a closed position. Expansion shields shall have a
minimum 2-inch penetration into the concrete slab.
3.4 FINAL ADJUSTMENT
After completion of the installation, make final adjustments to the

pilaster-leveling devices, door hardware, and other working parts of the
partition assembly. Doors shall have a uniform vertical edge clearance of
approximately 3/16 inch and shall rest open at approximately 30 degrees
when unlatched.
3.5 CLEANING
Clean all surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces soiled as a result
of the work, in an approved manner compliant with the manufacturer's
recommended cleaning and protection from damage procedures until
accepted. Remove all equipment, tools, surplus materials, and work debris
from the site.
SECTION 10 28 13
TOILET ACCESSORIES
07/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Flat Glass
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Finishes; G, A/E
Accessory Items
SD-04 Samples
Finishes
Accessory Items
SD-07 Certificates
Accessory Items
Wrap toilet accessories for shipment and storage, then deliver to the
jobsite in manufacturer's original packaging, and store in a clean, dry
area protected from construction damage and vandalism.
1.4 WARRANTY

extend beyond a 1 year period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
Provide toilet accessories where indicated in accordance with paragraph

SCHEDULE. Porcelain type, tile-wall accessories are specified in Section
09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING. Provide each accessory item complete with the

necessary mounting plates of sturdy construction with corrosion resistant
surface.
2.1.1 Anchors and Fasteners
Provide anchors and fasteners capable of developing a restraining force

commensurate with the strength of the accessory to be mounted and suited
for use with the supporting construction. Provide tamperproof design
exposed fasteners with finish to match the accessory.
2.1.2 Finishes
Except where noted otherwise, provide the following finishes on metal:
Metal Finish
Stainless steel No. 4 satin finish
Carbon steel, copper alloy, and brass Chromium plated, bright
2.2 ACCESSORY ITEMS
Conform to the requirements for accessory items specified below. Submit

fasteners proposed for use for each type of wall construction, mounting,
operation, and cleaning instructions and one sample of each other
accessory proposed for use. Incorporate approved samples into the
finished work, provided they are identified and their locations noted.
Submit certificate for each type of accessory specified, attesting that
the items meet the specified requirements.
2.2.1 Grab Bar (GB)
Provide an 18 gauge, 1-1/4 inch grab bar OD Type 304 stainless steel.
Provide form and length for grab bar as indicated. Provide concealed
mounting flange. Provide grab with peened non-slip surface. Furnish
installed bars capable of withstanding a 500 pound vertical load without
coming loose from the fastenings and without obvious permanent
deformation. Allow 1-1/2 inch space between wall and grab bar.
2.2.2 Mirrors, Glass (MG)
Provide Type I transparent flat type, Class 1-clear glass for mirrors.
Glazing Quality q1 1/4 inch thick conforming to ASTM C1036. Coat glass on
one surface with silver coating, copper protective coating, and mirror
backing paint. Provide highly adhesive pure silver coating of a thickness
which provides reflectivity of 83 percent or more of incident light when
viewed through 1/4 inch thick glass, free of pinholes or other defects.
Provide copper protective coating with pure bright reflective copper,
homogeneous without sludge, pinholes or other defects, of proper thickness
to prevent "adhesion pull" by mirror backing paint. Provide mirror
backing paint with two coats of special scratch and abrasion-resistant
paint and baked in uniform thickness to provide a protection for silver
and copper coatings which will permit normal cutting and edge fabrication.
2.2.3 Combination Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle (PTDWR)
Provide semi-recessed dispenser/receptacle with a capacity of 600 sheets
of C-fold, single-fold, or quarter-fold towel. Design waste receptacle to

be locked in unit and removable for service. Provide tumbler key locking
mechanism. Provide waste receptacle capacity of 18 gallons. Fabricate a
minimum 0.03 inch stainless steel welded construction unit with all
exposed surfaces having a satin finish. Provide waste receptacle that
accepts reusable liner standard for unit manufacturer.
2.2.4 Sanitary Napkin and Tampon Dispenser (SNTD)
Provide sanitary napkin and tampon dispenser surface mounted or recessed

as indicated on drawings. Dispenser, including door of Type 304 stainless
steel that dispense both napkins and tampons with a minimum capacity of 20
each. Furnish dispensing mechanism for coin operation. Provide coin
mechanisms with minimum denominations of 10 cents, 25 cents, 50 cents, free.
Hang doors with a full-length corrosion-resistant steel piano hinge and
secure with a tumbler lock. Provide keys for coin box different from the
door keys.
2.2.5 Shower Curtain (SC)
Provide shower curtain, size to suit conditions. Provide anti-bacterial

nylon/vinyl fabric curtain. Furnish white color.
2.2.6 Soap Dispenser (SD)
Provide soap dispenser surface mounted, liquid type consisting of a

vertical Type 304 stainless steel tank with holding capacity of 40 fluid
ounces with a corrosion-resistant all-purpose valve that dispenses liquid
soaps, lotions, detergents and antiseptic soaps.
2.2.7 Toilet Tissue Dispenser (TTD)
Furnish Type II - surface mounted toilet tissue holder with two rolls of
standard tissue stacked vertically. Provide stainless steel, satin finish
cabinet.
2.2.8 Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser/Sanitary Napkin Dispenser/Waste

Receptacle (TSCTDWR)
Provide stainless steel and partition mounted or recessed mounted toilet

seat cover, tissue dispenser, and waste receptacle combination. Provide a
minimum of 500 seat covers and 2 standard tissue rolls for each
dispenser. Provide a waste receptacle of the reusable liner of type
standard with the receptacle manufacturer. Provide receptacle with 0.8
cubic feet capacity. Furnish tumbler key lock locking mechanism.
2.2.9 Mop and Broom Holder (MH)
Stainless steel with grip jaw cam mechanism securing 5 mop or broom
handles. Also includes hooks and storage shelf.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Provide the same finish for the surfaces of fastening devices exposed
after installation as the attached accessory. Provide oval exposed screw
heads. Install accessories at the location and height indicated. Protect
exposed surfaces of accessories with strippable plastic or by other means
until the installation is accepted. After acceptance of accessories,

remove and dispose of strippable plastic protection. Coordinate accessory
manufacturer's mounting details with other trades as their work
progresses. Use sealants for brackets, plates, anchoring devices and
similar items in showers (a silicone or polysulfide sealant) as they are
set to provide a watertight installation. After installation, thoroughly
clean exposed surfaces and restore damaged work to its original condition
or replace with new work.
3.1.1 Recessed Accessories
Fasten accessories with wood screws to studs, blocking or rough frame in

wood construction. Set anchors in mortar in masonry construction. Fasten
to metal studs or framing with sheet metal screws in metal construction.
3.1.2 Surface Mounted Accessories
Mount on concealed backplates, unless specified otherwise. Conceal

fasteners on accessories without backplates. Install accessories with
sheet metal screws or wood screws in lead-lined braided jute, PTFE or
neoprene sleeves, or lead expansion shields, or with toggle bolts or other
approved fasteners as required by the construction. Install backplates in
the same manner, or provide with lugs or anchors set in mortar, as
required by the construction. Fasten accessories mounted on gypsum board
and plaster walls without solid backing into the metal or wood studs or to
solid wood blocking secured between wood studs, or to metal backplates
secured to metal studs.
3.2 CLEANING
Clean material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not

use alkaline or abrasive agents. Take precautions to avoid scratching or
marring exposed surfaces.
SECTION 10 44 16
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
05/12
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS

Manufacturer's Data; G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Accessories; G, A/E
Cabinets; G, A/E
Wall Brackets; G, A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Fire Extinguishers; G, A/E
Accessories; G, A/E
Cabinets; G, A/E
Wall Brackets; G, A/E
Replacement Parts; G, A/E
1.2 DELIVERABLES
Protect materials from weather, soil, and damage during delivery, storage,
and construction.
Deliver materials in their original packages, containers, or bundles

bearing the brand name and the name and type of the material.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Submit fabrication drawings consisting of fabrication and assembly details

performed in the factory and product data for the following items:
Accessories, Cabinets, Wall Brackets.
2.1 CABINETS
2.1.1 Material
Provide corrosion-resistant aluminum semi-recessed cabinets.
2.1.2 Type
Provide semi-recessed cabinet for a 4-inch wall.
2.1.3 Size
Dimension cabinets to accommodate 5 and 10 lbs. fire extinguishers.
2.2 WALL BRACKETS
Provide wall-hook fire extinguisher wall brackets.
Provide wall bracket and accessories as approved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install Fire Extinguisher cabinets/brackets where indicated on the

drawings. Verify exact locations prior to installation.
Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for all installations.
3.2 ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS
3.2.1 Repairing
Remove and replace damaged and unacceptable portions of completed work

with new work at no additional cost to the Government.
Submit Replacement Parts list indicating specified items replacement part,

replacement cost, and name, address and contact for replacement parts
distributor.
3.2.2 Cleaning
Clean all surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces which are soiled as
a result of the work. Remove from the site all construction equipment,
tools, surplus materials and rubbish resulting from the work.
SECTION 12 24 13
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

08/10
PART 1 GENERAL
Provide roller window shades, complete with necessary brackets, fittings,

and hardware as indicated. Mount and operate equipment in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Windows to receive a shade shall be
completely covered.
a. Submit drawings showing plans, elevations, sections, product details,

installation details, operational clearances, wiring diagrams and
relationship to adjacent work. Include the use of same room
designations as indicated on the drawings.
b. Provide manufacturer's data composed of catalog cuts, brochures,

product information, and operating and maintenance instructions on
each product to be used. Include styles, profiles and features.
c. Furnish samples of each type and color of roller shade fabric and
roller shade channel. Shade material shall be minimum6 by 6 inch in
size. Mark face of material to indicate interior faces.
d. Mock up: Install shade in area designated by Contracting Officer. Do

not proceed with remaining work until the Contracting Officer approves
workmanship and operation. Re-work mock-up as required to produce
acceptable work. The approved shade can be used in installation.
e. Submit fire resistance data, flame spread and smoke contribution data.
1.2 REFERENCES

extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
designation only.
ASTM G21 (2013) Determining Resistance of Synthetic

Polymeric Materials to Fungi

1.3 SUBMITTALS

in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SD-02 Shop Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Window Shades; G, A/E
SD-04 Samples
Window Shades; G, A/E
SD-06 Test Reports
Window Shades
Window Shades
Window Shades
1.4.1.1 Manufacturer's Qualifications
Obtain motor-controlled roller shades through one source from a single

manufacturer with a minimum of twenty years experience and minimum of
three projects of similar scope and size in manufacturing products
comparable to those specified in this section.
1.4.1.2 Installer's Qualifications
Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of ten

years experience in installing products comparable to those specified in
this section.
1.4.2 Flammability Requirements
Passes in accordance with NFPA 701 small and large-scale vertical burn.
Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use.
1.4.3 Anti-Microbial Requirements
'No Growth' per ASTM G21 results for fungi ATCC9642, ATCC 9644, ATCC9645.
Deliver components to the jobsite in the manufacturer's original packaging

with the brand or company name, item identification, and project reference
clearly marked. Store components in a dry location that is adequately
ventilated and free from dust, water, or other contaminants and has easy
access for inspection and handling. Store materials flat in a clean dry
area with temperature maintained above 50 degrees F. Do not open
containers until needed for installation unless verification inspection is

required.
1.6 WARRANTY
Provide 10 year minimum limited warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WINDOW SHADES
Roller tube shall operate smoothly and be of sufficient diameter and

thickness to prevent excessive deflection. Provide brackets that are
appropriate for inside or outside mount. The shade cloth shall meet the
performance described in NFPA 701, small scale test. Treat steel features
for corrosion resistance.
2.1.1 Light Filtering Shades
Provide light filtering window shades to conform with the following:
a. Roller tube shall be extruded aluminum or steel. Diameter, wall

thickness, and material to be selected by the manufacturer to
accommodate the shade size. Provide roller idler assembly of molded
nylon and zinc-plated steel pin. Sliding pin shall allow easy
installation and removal of roller. Fabric shall be connected to the
roller tube with double sided adhesive specifically developed to
attach coated textiles to metal to eliminate horizontal impressions in
fabric or attached with a spline lock system.
b. Fascia shall be L-shaped aluminum extrusion to conceal shade roller and

hardware that snaps onto end caps without requiring exposed fasteners
of any kind. Fascia can be mounted continuously across two or more
shade bands.
c. End caps shall be stamped steel with universal design suitable for
mounting to window mullions. Provide size compatible with roller
size. End cap covers shall match fascia/headbox finish.
d. Provide hardware that allows for field adjustment or removal of shade

roller tube and other operable hardware component without requiring
removal of brackets and end or center supports. Provide hardware
system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands by a single
operator. Connectors shall be offset to assure alignment from the
first to the last shade band. Provide shade hardware constructed of
minimum 1/8 inch thick plated steel or heavier as required to support
150 percent of the full weight of each shade.
e. Manual Operated Chain Drive Hardware shall provide for universal,

regular and offset drive capacity, allowing drive chain to fall at
front, rear or non-offset for all shade drive end brackets. Universal
offset shall be adjustable for future change. Provide positive
mechanical engagement of drive mechanism to shade roller tube. The
drive bracket shall be fully integrated with all accessories. Drive
chain shall be #10 stainless steel chain rated to 90 lb. minimum
breaking strength.
2.2 COLOR
Provide color, pattern and texture for metal and shade fabric in
accordance with Section 09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE. . Color listed is not
intended to limit the selection of equal colors from other manufacturers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify all dimensions in
the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before
performing the work.
3.2 ROLLER WINDOW SHADE PLACEMENT SCHEDULE
Provide roller window shades at all exterior windows.
3.3 INSTALLATION
Perform installation in accordance with the approved detail drawings and

manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units level, plumb,
secure, and at proper height and location relative to window units.
Provide and install supplementary or miscellaneous items in total,
including clips, brackets, or anchorages incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure, and complete installation. Do not start installation until
completion of room painting and finishing operations.
3.4 CLEAN-UP
Upon completion of the installation, clean window treatments and adjust

them for form and appearance and proper operating condition. Repair or
replace damaged units as directed by the Contracting Officer. Isolate
metal parts from direct contact with concrete, mortar, or dissimilar
metals. Ensure shades installed in recessed pockets can be removed
without disturbing the pocket. The entire shade, when retracted, shall be
contained inside the pocket. For shades installed outside the jambs and
mullions, overlap each jamb and mullion 0.75 inch or more when the jamb
and mullion sizes permit. Include all hardware, brackets, anchors,
fasteners, and accessories necessary for a complete, finished installation.
SECTION 13 48 00
SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES




Hardware

Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

Structural Steel

Shapes

Welded and Seamless

High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium
Structural Steel
ASTM A603 (1998; R 2014) Standard Specification for

Zinc-Coated Steel Structural Wire Rope

the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM E488/E488M (2010) Standard Test Methods for Strength
of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements
ASTM F1554 (2007a; E 2011) Standard Specification for

Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi
Yield Strength
Apply the requirements for seismic protection measures, described in this

section, to the mechanical equipment and systems outlined in Section
13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, the electrical
equipment and systems outlined in Section 26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC
PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, and the miscellaneous equipment and
systems listed below, in accordance with UFC 3-310-04 and additional data
furnished by the Contracting Officer. Provide seismic protection measures
in addition to any other requirements called for in other sections of
these specifications. The design for seismic protection shall be based on
a Seismic Use Group Design Category D and Risk Category II and on site
response coefficients for SMS = 0.888g and SM1 = 0.502g Accomplish
resistance to lateral forces induced by earthquakes without consideration
of friction resulting from gravity loads. The basic force formulas, for
Ground Motions A and B in UFC 3-310-04, use the design spectral response
acceleration parameters for the performance objective of the building, not
for equipment in the building; therefore, corresponding adjustments to the
formulas are required.
1.2.2 Miscellaneous Equipment and Systems
The bracing for the following miscellaneous equipment and systems shall be
developed by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of this
specification:
Storage cabinets
Ornamentations
Storage Racks
Signs and Billboards
Shelving
Furnishings
Partitions
Equipment identified in Section 26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT.
Equipment identified in Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC FOR MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT and Section 23 05 48.00 40 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
CCTV monitor screens
AV equipment
High density shelving system
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Bracing; G
Resilient Vibration Isolation Devices; G
Equipment Requirements; G
SD-03 Product Data
Bracing; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Anchor Bolts; G
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
Submit detail drawings along with calculations, catalog cuts, templates,

and erection and installation details, as appropriate, for the items
listed below. Indicate thickness, type, grade, class of metal, and
dimensions; and show construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and
installation with relation to the building construction. For equipment
and systems in buildings that have a performance objective higher than
life-safety, the drawings shall be stamped by the registered engineer who
stamps the calculations. Calculations shall be stamped, by a registered
engineer, and verify the capability of structural members to which bracing
is attached for carrying the load from the brace.
2.1.1 Rigidly Mounted Equipment
The following specific items of equipment: Equipment identified in

Section 26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT and
equipment identified in Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC FOR MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT to be furnished under this contract shall be constructed and
assembled to withstand the seismic forces specified in UFC 3-310-04. For
any rigid equipment which is rigidly attached on both sides of a building
expansion joint, provide flexible joints for piping, electrical conduit,
etc., that are capable of accommodating displacements equal to the full
width of the joint in both orthogonal directions.
2.1.2 Nonrigid or Flexibly-Mounted Equipment
The following specific items of equipment to be furnished: Equipment

identified in Section 26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT and equipment identified in Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC FOR
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT shall be constructed and assembled to resist a
horizontal lateral force per IBC.
2.2 BOLTS AND NUTS
Squarehead and hexhead bolts, and heavy hexagon nuts, ASME B18.2.1,
ASME B18.2.2, or ASTM A325 for bolts and nuts. Provide bolts and nuts
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M when used underground and/or
exposed to weather.
2.3 SWAY BRACING
Material used for members listed in this section, shall be structural

steel conforming with the following:
a. Plates, rods, and rolled shapes, ASTM A36/A36M or ASTM A572/A572M,

Grade 503. If the Contractor does the design, both ASTM A36/A36Mand
ASTM A572/A572M, grade 503 will be allowed.
b. Wire rope, ASTM A603.
c. Tubes, ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B.
d. Pipes, ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or S, Grade B.
e. Light gauge angles, less than 1/4 inch thickness, ASTM A653/A653M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 BRACING
Provide bracing conforming to the arrangements shown. Secure trapeze-type

hanger with not less than two 1/2 inch bolts.
3.2 BUILDING DRIFT
Sway braces for a piping run shall not be attached to two dissimilar
structural elements of a building that may respond differentially during
an earthquake unless a flexible joint is provided.
3.3 ANCHOR BOLTS
Submit copies of test results to verify the adequacy of the specific

anchor and application, as specified.
3.3.1 Cast-In-Place
Use cast-in-place anchor bolts, conforming to ASTM F1554, Grade 55 for

floor or pad mounted equipment, except as specified below. Provide two
nuts on each bolt. Anchor bolts shall have an embedded straight length
equal to at least 12 times nominal diameter of the bolt. Anchor bolts
that exceed the normal depth of equipment foundation piers or pads shall
either extend into concrete floor or the foundation or be increased in
depth to accommodate bolt lengths.
3.3.2 Expansion or Chemically Bonded Anchors
Do not use expansion or chemically bonded anchors: 1)Unless test data in

accordance with ASTM E488/E488M has been provided to verify the adequacy
of the specific anchor and application. 2)To resist pull-out in overhead
and wall installations if the adhesive is manufactured with temperature
sensitive epoxies and the location is accessible to a building fire.
Install expansion and chemically bonded anchors in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Adjust the allowable forces for the
spacing between anchor bolts and the distance between the anchor bolt and
the nearest edge, as specified by the manufacturer.
3.3.2.1 General Testing
Test in place expansion and chemically bonded anchors not more than 24
hours after installation of the anchor, conducted by an independent
testing agency; testing shall be performed on random anchor bolts as
described below.
3.3.2.2 Torque Wrench Testing
Perform torque wrench testing on not less than 50 percent of the total
installed expansion anchors and at least one anchor for every piece of
equipment containing more than two anchors. The test torque shall equal
the minimum required installation torque as required by the bolt
manufacturer. Calibrate torque wrenches at the beginning of each day the
torque tests are performed. Recalibrate torque wrenches for each bolt
diameter whenever tests are run on bolts of various diameters. Apply
torque between 20 and 100 percent of wrench capacity. Reach the test
torque within one half turn of the nut, except for 3/8 inch sleeve anchors
which shall reach their torque by one quarter turn of the nut. If any
anchor fails the test, test similar anchors not previously tested until 20
consecutive anchors pass. Failed anchors shall be retightened and
retested to the specified torque; if the anchor still fails the test it
shall be replaced.
3.3.2.3 Pullout Testing
Test expansion and chemically bonded anchors by applying a pullout load

using a hydraulic ram attached to the anchor bolt. At least 5 percent of
the anchors, but not less than 3 per day shall be tested. Apply the load
to the anchor without removing the nut; when that is not possible, the nut
shall be removed and a threaded coupler shall be installed of the same
tightness as the original nut. Check the test setup to verify that the
anchor is not restrained from withdrawing by the baseplate, the test
fixture, or any other fixtures. The support for the testing apparatus
shall be at least 1.5 times the embedment length away from the bolt being
tested. Load each tested anchor to 1.5 times the design tension value for
the anchor or as specified by ESR for the specified anchor, whichever is
higher. The anchor shall have no observable movement at the test load.
If any anchor fails the test, similar anchors not previously tested shall
be tested until 20 consecutive anchors pass. Failed anchors shall be
retightened and retested to the specified load; if the anchor still fails
the test it shall be replaced.
3.4 RESILIENT VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES
Where the need for these devices is determined, based on the magnitude of
the design seismic forces, selection of anchor bolts for vibration
isolation devices and/or snubbers for equipment base and foundations shall
follow the same procedure as in paragraph ANCHOR BOLTS, except that an
equipment weight equal to five times the actual equipment weight shall be
used.
3.4.1 Resilient and Spring-Type Vibration Devices
Select vibration isolation devices so that the maximum movement of

equipment from the static deflection point is 1/2 inch.
3.4.2 Multidirectional Seismic Snubbers
Install multidirectional seismic snubbers employing elastomeric pads on

floor- or slab-mounted equipment. These snubbers shall provide 1/4 inch
free vertical and horizontal movement from the static deflection point.
Snubber medium shall consist of multiple pads of cotton duct and neoprene
or other suitable materials arranged around a flanged steel trunnion so
both horizontal and vertical forces are resisted by the snubber medium.
3.5 SWAY BRACES FOR PIPING
Provide transverse sway bracing for steel, copper pipe and for conduits 2
1/2 inch diameter or larger at intervals not to exceed those shown on the
drawings. Transverse sway bracing for pipes of materials other than steel
and copper shall be provided at intervals not to exceed the hanger spacing
as specified in Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE. Provide
bracing consisting of at least one vertical angle 2 by 2 inch by 16 gauge
and one diagonal angle of the same size.
3.5.1 Longitudinal Sway Bracing
Provide longitudinal sway bracing in accordance with Section 13 48 00.00 10

SEISMIC CONTROL FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.
3.5.2 Anchor Rods, Angles, and Bars
Anchor rods, angles, and bars shall be bolted to either pipe clamps or
pipe flanges at one end and cast-in-place concrete or masonry insert or
clip angles bolted to the steel structure on the other end. Rods shall be
solid metal or pipe as specified below. Anchor rods, angles, and bars
shall not exceed lengths given in the tabulation below.
3.5.3 Maximum Length for Anchor Braces
Type Size (in) Maximum Length* (ft-in)
Angles 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 1/4 4-10
2 x 2 x 1/4 6-6
2-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 1/4 8-0
3 x 2-1/2 x 1/4 8-10
3 x 3 x 1/4 9-10
Rods 3/4 3-1
7/8 3-8
Type Size (in) Maximum Length* (ft-in)
Flat Bars 1-1/2 x 1/4 1-2
2 x 1/4 1-2
2 x 3/8 1-9
Pipes (40s) 1 7-0
1-1/4 9-0
1-1/2 10-4
2 13-1
3.5.4 Bolts
Bolts used for attachment of anchors to pipe and structure shall be not
less than 1/2 inch diameter.
3.6 EQUIPMENT SWAY BRACING
3.6.1 Suspended Equipment and Light Fixtures
Provide equipment sway bracing for items supported from overhead floor or
roof structural systems, including light fixtures. Braces shall consist
of angles, rods, wire rope, bars, or pipes arranged as shown and secured
at both ends with not less than 1/2 inch bolts. Provide sufficient braces
for equipment to resist a horizontal force as specified in UFC 3-310-04
without exceeding safe working stress of bracing components. Provide, for
approval, specific force calculations in accordance with UFC 3-310-04 for
the equipment in the project. Submit details of equipment bracing for
acceptance. In lieu of bracing with vertical supports, these items may be
supported with hangers inclined at 45 degrees directed up and radially
away from equipment and oriented symmetrically in 90-degree intervals on
the horizontal plane, bisecting the angles of each corner of the
equipment, provided that supporting members are properly sized to support
operating weight of equipment when hangers are inclined at a 45-degree
angle.
3.6.2 Floor or Pad Mounted Equipment
3.6.2.1 Shear Resistance
Bolt to the floor, floor mounted equipment. Requirements for the number
and installation of bolts to resist shear forces shall be in accordance
with paragraph ANCHOR BOLTS.
3.6.2.2 Overturning Resistance
Use the ratio of the overturning moment from seismic forces to the
resisting moment due to gravity loads to determine if overturning forces
need to be considered in the sizing of anchor bolts. Provide calculations
to verify the adequacy of the anchor bolts for combined shear and
overturning.
3.7 SPECIAL INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR SEISMIC-RESISTING SYSTEMS
Perform special inspections and testing for seismic-resisting systems and

components in accordance with Section 01 45 35 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS.
SECTION 13 48 00.00 10
SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

10/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

Apply the requirements for seismic protection measures described in this

section to the mechanical equipment and systems listed below. Structural
requirements shall be in accordance with Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC
PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT.
1.2.2 Mechanical Equipment
Mechanical equipment to be seismically protected shall include the

following items to the extent required on the drawings or in other
sections of these specifications:
Boilers and furnaces Water and Gas Piping
Water Heaters Valves and Fittings for Piping
Expansion Air Separator Tanks Air Handling Units
Heat Exchangers Ducts
Water Chiller Units Pumps with Motors
Refrigerant Piping
1.2.3 Mechanical Systems
Install the following mechanical systems as required on the drawings and

other sections of these specifications and seismically protect them in
accordance with this specification:
a. All Piping Inside the Building Except as Specifically Stated Below
SECTION 13 48 00.00 10 Page 1

Under "Items Not Covered By This Section".
b. Chilled Water Distribution Systems Outside of Buildings.
c. Fuel Piping Outside of Buildings.
d. All Water Supply Systems.
e. Storm and Sanitary Sewer Systems.
f. Heat Distribution Systems (Supply, Return, and Condensate Return)

Outside of Buildings.
1.2.4 Contractor Designed Bracing
Submit copies of the design calculations with the drawings. Calculations

shall be approved, certified, stamped and signed by a registered
Professional Engineer. Calculations shall verify the capability of
structural members to which bracing is attached for carrying the load from
the brace. Design the bracing in accordance with UFC 3-310-04 and
additional data furnished by the Contracting Officer. Resistance to
lateral forces induced by earthquakes shall be accomplished without
consideration of friction resulting from gravity loads. UFC 3-310-04 uses
parameters for the building, not for the equipment in the building;
therefore, corresponding adjustments to the formulas shall be required.
Loadings determined using UFC 3-310-04 are based on strength design;
therefore, AISC 325 Specifications shall be used for the design. The
bracing for the mechanical equipment and systems shall be developed by the
Contractor.
1.2.5 Items Not Covered By This Section
1.2.5.1 Fire Protection Systems
Seismic protection of piping for fire protection systems shall be

installed as specified in other sections.
1.2.5.2 Items Requiring No Seismic Restraints
Seismic restraints are not required for the following items:
a. Gas piping less than 1 inch inside diameter.
b. Piping in boiler and mechanical equipment rooms less than 1-1/4 inches
inside diameter.
c. All other piping less than 2-1/2inches inside diameter.
d. Rectangular air handling ducts less than 6 square feet in cross

sectional area.
e. Round air handling ducts less than 28 inches in diameter.
f. Piping suspended by individual hangers 12 inches or less in length

from the top of pipe to the bottom of the supporting structural member
where the hanger is attached, except as noted below.
g. Ducts suspended by hangers 12 inches or less in length from the top of

the duct to the bottom of the supporting structural member, except as
SECTION 13 48 00.00 10 Page 2

noted below.
In exemptions f. and g. all hangers shall meet the length requirements.

If the length requirement is exceeded by one hanger in the run, the entire
run shall be braced. Interior piping and ducts not listed above shall be
seismically protected in accordance with the provisions of this
specification.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Coupling and Bracing

Flexible Couplings or Joints
Equipment Requirements
Contractor Designed Bracing; G
SD-03 Product Data
Coupling and Bracing; G

Contractor Designed Bracing; G
SD-07 Certificates
Flexible Ball Joints.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Submit copies of the design calculations with the detail drawings.

Calculations shall be stamped by a registered engineer and shall verify
the capability of structural members to which bracing is attached for
carrying the load from the brace.
2.2 FLEXIBLE BALL JOINTS
Flexible ball joints shall have cast or wrought steel casing and ball
parts capable of 360-degree rotation with not less than 15-degree angular
movement. Flexible ball joints shall be certified to be suitable for the
service intended by the manufacturer. Information verifying experience at
not less than 3 locations of 2 years' satisfactory operation in a similar
application shall be submitted.
2.3 FLEXIBLE MECHANICAL JOINTS
a. Mechanical couplings for steel or cast iron pipe shall be of the

sleeve type and shall provide a tight flexible joint under all
reasonable conditions, such as pipe movement caused by expansion,
contraction, slight settling or shifting of the ground, minor
variations in trench gradients, and traffic vibrations. Where
permitted in other sections of these specifications, joints utilizing
split-half couplings with grooved or shouldered pipe ends may be used.
SECTION 13 48 00.00 10 Page 3

b. Sleeve-type couplings shall be used for joining plain-end pipe

sections. The coupling shall consist of one steel middle ring, two
steel followers, two gaskets, and necessary steel bolts and nuts to
compress the gaskets.
2.4 MANUFACTURED BALL JOINTS
Manufactured ball joints shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for

the intended use, and shall be approved by the Contracting Officer before
installation.
2.5 SWAY BRACING MATERIALS
Sway bracing materials (e.g. rods, plates, rope, angles, etc.) shall be as
specified in Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIPMENT.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COUPLING AND BRACING
a. Submit detail drawings, as specified here and throughout this

specification, along with catalog cuts, templates, and erection and
installation details, as appropriate, for the items listed.
Submittals shall be complete in detail; shall indicate thickness,
type, grade, class of metal, and dimensions; and shall show
construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation with
relation to the building construction.
b. Coupling installation shall conform to the details shown on the

drawings. Provisions of this paragraph apply to all piping within a 5
foot line around outside of building unless buried in the ground.
Piping grouped for support on trapeze-type hangers shall be braced at
the most frequent interval as determined by applying the requirements
of this specification to each piping run on the common support.
c. Bracing components shall be sized as required for the total load

carried by the common supports. Bracing rigidly attached to pipe
flanges, or similar, shall not be used where it would interfere with
thermal expansion of piping.
3.2 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS OR JOINTS
3.2.1 Building Piping
Flexible couplings or joints in building piping shall be provided at

bottom of all pipe risers for pipe larger than 3-1/2 inches in diameter.
Flexible couplings or joints shall be braced laterally without interfering
with the action of the flexible coupling or joint. Cast iron waste and
vent piping need only comply with these provisions when caulked joints are
used. Flexible bell and spigot pipe joints using rubber gaskets may be
used at each branch adjacent to tees and elbows for underground waste
piping inside of building to satisfy these requirements.
3.3 PIPE SLEEVES
Pipe sleeves in interior non-fire rated walls shall be sized as indicated

on the drawings to provide clearances that will permit differential
SECTION 13 48 00.00 10 Page 4

movement of piping without the piping striking the pipe sleeve. Pipe
sleeves in fire rated walls shall conform to the requirements in Section
07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.4 SPREADERS
Spreaders shall be provided between adjacent piping runs to prevent

contact during seismic activity whenever pipe or insulated pipe surfaces
are less than 4 inches apart. Spreaders shall be applied at same interval
as sway braces at an equal distance between the sway braces. If rack type
hangers are used where the pipes are restrained from contact by mounting
to the rack, spreaders are not required for pipes mounted in the rack.
Spreaders shall be applied to surface of bare pipe and over insulation on
insulated pipes utilizing high-density inserts and pipe protection shields.
3.5 SWAY BRACES FOR PIPING
Sway braces shall be provided to prevent movement of the pipes under

seismic loading. Braces shall be provided in both the longitudinal and
transverse directions, relative to the axis of the pipe. The bracing
shall not interfere with thermal expansion requirements for the pipes as
described in other sections of these specifications.
3.5.1 Transverse Sway Bracing
Transverse sway bracing for steel and copper pipe shall be provided as
EQUIPMENT. All runs (length of pipe between end joints) shall have a
minimum of two transverse braces. Transverse sway bracing for pipes of
materials other than steel and copper shall be provided at intervals not
to exceed the hanger spacing as specified in Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING,
GENERAL PURPOSE.
3.5.2 Longitudinal Sway Bracing
Longitudinal sway bracing shall be provided at 40 foot intervals unless

otherwise indicated. All runs (length of pipe between end joints) shall
have one longitudinal brace minimum. Sway braces shall be constructed in
accordance with the drawings. Branch lines, walls, or floors shall not be
used as sway braces.
3.5.3 Vertical Runs
Run is defined as length of pipe between end joints. Vertical runs of

piping shall be braced at not more than 10 foot vertical intervals.
Braces for vertical runs shall be above the center of gravity of the
segment being braced. All sway braces shall be constructed in accordance
with the drawings. Sway braces shall attach to the structural system and
shall not be connected to branch lines, walls, or floors.
3.5.4 Clamps and Hangers
Clamps or hangers on uninsulated pipes shall be applied directly to pipe.

Insulated piping shall have clamps or hangers applied over insulation.
SECTION 13 48 00.00 10 Page 5

3.6 SWAY BRACES FOR DUCTS
3.6.1 Braced Ducts
Bracing details and spacing for rectangular and round ducts shall be in
accordance with UFC 3-310-04 procedures. However, the design seismic
loadings for these items shall not be less than loadings obtained using
the procedures in UFC 3-310-04.
3.6.2 Unbraced Ducts
Hangers for unbraced ducts shall be attached to the duct within 2 inches
of the top of the duct with a minimum of two #10 sheet metal screws.
Unbraced ducts shall be installed with a 6 inch minimum clearance to
vertical ceiling hanger wires.
SECTION 13 48 00.00 10 Page 6

SECTION 14 24 00
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
08/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Code - Steel
ASME A17.1/CSA B44 (2013) Safety Code for Elevators and

Escalators
ASME A17.2 (2012) Guide for Inspection of Elevators,

Escalators, and Moving Walks Includes
Inspection Procedures for Electric
Traction and Winding Drum Elevators,
Hydraulic Elevators, and Escalators and
Moving Walks
ASME B16.11 (2011) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and

Threaded
ASME B16.9 (2012) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought

Steel Buttwelding Fittings
ASTM A106/A106M (2014) Standard Specification for Seamless

Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Service

Welded and Seamless
NATIONAL ELEVATOR INDUSTRY, INC. (NEII)
NEII-1 (2000; R thru 2010) Building

Transportation Standards and Guidelines,
including the Performance Standards Matrix
for New Elevator Installation

3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National

Electrical Code
29 CFR 1910.27 Fixed Ladders

1.2 SUMMARY
Provide a pre-engineered elevator system, by manufacturer regularly

engaged in the manufacture of elevator systems, that complies with NAVFAC
Elevator Design Guide, ASME A17.1/CSA B44, and ASME A17.2 in their
entirety, and additional requirements specified herein.
1.2.1 Miscellaneous Requirements
Submit one set of wiring diagrams, in plastic or glass cover, framed and
mounted in elevator machine room for revised building electrical system,
if needed, to make supplied elevator system function as specified.
Deliver other sets to Contracting Officer. Coded diagrams are not
acceptable unless adequately identified. Submit calculations for the
Reaction Loadsimposed on the building by elevator systems that comply with
ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and for total anticipated Heat Loads generated by all
the elevator machine room equipment. Calculations shall be certified by a
Registered Professional Engineer. Do not fabricate materials nor perform
construction until approved.
1.2.2 Provisions for Earthquake Protection
The facility is located in a seismic Category D, and shall comply with all
ASME A17.1/CSA B44, Part 8.4 requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Passenger Elevators; G, A/E

Field Quality Control Plan; G, A/E
Logic Control; G, A/E
SD-05 Design Data
Reaction Loads; G, A/E

Heat Loads; G, A/E
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Tests Reports
SD-07 Certificates
Welders' Qualifications; G, A/E
Operation and Maintenance Manuals; G, A/E

Maintenance and Diagnostic Tools; G, A/E
Maintenance and Diagnostic Software
Maintenance and Repair Action Plan; G, A/E
Operation and Maintenance Training; G, A/E
1.4.1 Elevator Specialist
Perform work specified in this section under the direct guidance of the
Elevator Specialist who is regularly engaged in the installation and
maintenance of the type and complexity of elevator system specified in the
contract documents, and who served in a similar capacity for at least
three systems that have performed in the manner intended for a period of
not less than 24 months. Provide endorsement letter from the elevator
manufacturer certifying that the Elevator Specialist is acceptable to
manufacturer. The Elevator Specialist oversees the acceptance inspections
and tests, signs and certifies the successful results. Provide the
Elevator Specialist's written certification that the installation is in
accordance with the contract requirements, after completion of the
acceptance inspections and tests. Bring any discrepancy to the attention
of the Contracting Officer in writing, no later than three working days
after the discrepancy is discovered.
1.4.2 Elevator Inspector
a. The Elevator Inspector will be provided by the Government to inspect

the installation of the elevator(s) to ensure that the installation
conforms to all contract requirements. The Elevator Inspector will
witness the acceptance inspections and tests, approve all results, and
shall sign and certify the successful results. The Elevator
Inspector, after completion of the acceptance inspections and tests,
will provide written certification that the installation is accordance
with the contract requirements.
1.4.3 Welders' Qualifications
Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 4 Qualification. Provide certified

copies of welders' qualifications. List welders'names with corresponding
code marks to identify each welder's work. Submit a letter, no later than
14 days after the Notice to Proceed, providing the name and Statement of
Qualifications, including ASME A17.1/CSA B44 Certificate and all required
state and local licenses of the individual who will perform the duties
specified herein for the Elevator Inspector. A letter of endorsement from
the elevator manufacturer certifying that the Elevator Specialist is
acceptable to manufacturer, no later than 14 days after the Notice to
Proceed, providing the name and Statement of Qualifications of the
individual who will perform the duties specified herein for the Elevator
Specialist. Copies of certified welders' qualifications, demonstrating
compliance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 4; list welders' names with
corresponding code marks.
Submit detail drawings, including dimensioned layouts in plan and

elevation showing the arrangement of elevator equipment, accessories,
supporting systems, anchorage of equipment, clearances for maintenance and
operation; and details on hoistway, doors and frames, operation and signal
stations, controllers, motors, guide rails and brackets, cylinder and
plunge unit, and points of interface with normal power fire alarm system
and HVAC or exhaust systems. Provide drawings to show any revised
building electrical system required to make supplied elevator system
function as specified. Prepare drawings with complete wiring diagrams
showing electrical connections and other details required to demonstrate
sequence of operations and functions of system devices. Include the
appropriate sizing of electrical protective devices on the drawings, which
are frequently different from National Electrical Code standard sizes.
1.5 SCHEDULING
Every six months, test systems for Firefighters' Service. Schedule to not
interfere with building operations. For Firefighters' Service, test
monthly in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44, Section 8.6.10.1. Provide
written results of each test operation to the Contracting Officer.
Document all inspection and testing. Maintain copy of documentation in
machine room.
1.6 WARRANTY
Provide routine warranty service in accord with manufacturer's warranty

requirements, for a period of 12 months after the date of acceptance by
Contracting Officer. Perform work during regular working hours. During
the warranty service period, include 24-hour emergency service, with 1
hour response time, without additional cost to the Government. Include
adjustments, greasing, oiling, and cleaning. Provide routine inspection
and tests of elevators in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 Section
8.11.3 and ASME A17.2. Provide supplies and parts to keep elevator system
in operation. Perform service only by factory trained personnel.
Maintain a maintenance log of all service orders performed during the
warranty period and submit it to the Contracting Officer 21 days prior to
the end of the warranty period.
1.7 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTION PLAN
Provide plan of action prepared by the Elevator Specialist for emergency

and routine maintenance in accordance with paragraph titled WARRANTY.
Provide a list of phone numbers, personnel contacts, and all maintenance
and diagnostic tools provided by paragraph "Maintenance and Diagnostic
Tools", to the Contracting Officer.
1.7.1 Maintenance and Diagnostic Tools
Provide all special tools and software necessary to service and maintain
each elevator delivered at time of final acceptance. Provide one of each
tool per group of elevators. Include solid state or microprocessor
diagnostic tools unavailable on the open market. Provide necessary
diagnostic software in cases where the solid state or microprocessor

diagnostic tools are available on the open market
1.7.2 Keys for Elevator Key Switches
Provide a minimum of twelve keys per unique cylinder used on all key
switches for single elevator. If there is more than one elevator,
additional keys are not required unless there are additional unique
cylinders. Provide keys with brass or fiberglass tags marked 'PROPERTY OF
THE U.S. GOVERNMENT' on one side with function of key or approved code
number on other side.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PASSENGER ELEVATORS
2.1.1 Basic Requirements
Submit information on motor, pump, gages, piston and cylinder, piping and
valves, hall station, and buffer on elevators and accessories. For
elevator supporting systems, include information on car control systems.
On data sheets, provide document identification number or bulletin number,
published or copyrighted prior to the date of contract bid opening. These
requirements apply to Freight Elevators also.
a. Rated Load: 4,000 lbs.
b. Rated Speed: 125 fpm.
c. Travel Length: 14 ft.
d. Number of Stops: 2.
e. Number of Hoist Way Openings: 2 Front.
f. Car Inside Dimensions: 5 ft.- 8 in..wide, 7 ft.- 4in. deep and 8 ft.-
0 in. high.
h. Car Door Types: Single-speed side slide Horizontal sliding.
2.1.2 Cab Enclosures and Door Finishes
Provide finishes as listed below:
2.1.2.1 Floor
Vinyl composition tile.
2.1.2.2 Walls
Stainless steel. Provide each cab wall with equally spaced and equally
sized wall panels. Conceal all fasteners.
2.1.2.3 Wall Trim
Stainless steel.
2.1.2.4 Accessories
Hand rails.
2.1.2.5 Interior Face of Door(s)
Stainless steel.
2.1.2.6 Ceilings
Supported stainless steel, brushed.
2.1.2.7 Ceiling Frame
Stainless steel.
2.1.2.8 Hoistway Doors and Frame Finishes
Provide finishes on exterior of hoistway as follows:
2.1.2.8.1 Frame
Stainless steel.
2.1.2.8.2 Exterior Face of door
Stainless steel.
2.2 SPECIAL OPERATION AND CONTROL
Provide all special operations and control systems in accordance with

ASME A17.1/CSA B44. Provide special operation key switches with 5 or 6
pin cylinder locks with removable cores an a key control lock for each
operation system.
2.2.1 Firefighters' Service
Provide equipment and signaling devices. The designated level for

Firefighters' key operated switch is the ground floor.
2.2.2 Smoke Detectors
Provide connections directly to elevator controls which will, when smoke

is detected by any smoke detector, actuate Firefighters' Service and send
each elevator to the correct floor as required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
Provide dual-contact smoke detectors located in the elevator lobbies and
the elevator machine room. Provide dual-contact smoke detector at top of
hoistway. Include only these smoke detectors with the circuit for
elevator controller actuation of Firefighters' Service. In lieu of
dual-contact smoke detectors, use an addressable fire alarm system with
listed smoke detectors in the above stated locations. Ensure that all
smoke detectors are mounted on finished ceiling.
2.2.3 Fire Sprinklers
For each elevator, provide control wiring connecting the flow switch to
the shunt trip equipped circuit breaker within the electrical panel
serving the main line disconnect. Upon flow of water, equip flow switch
to instantaneously send a signal to cause opening of shunt-trip equipped
mainline circuit breaker, in compliance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44, Section

2.8.2, and send a signal to fire alarm control panel to indicate water
flow condition. Provide machine room sprinkler flow switch actuation to
shunt trip all elevator(s) served by the machine room. Provide hoistway
sprinkler flow switch actuation to shunt trip all elevator(s) in the
hoistway.
2.2.4 Top-of-Car Operating Device
Provide operating device mounted on or from car crosshead, to permit

operation of car at 150 fpm maximum for adjustment, maintenance, testing,
and repair. Include integral or remote safety device, continuous pressure
"UP" and "DOWN" switches or buttons, emergency stop switch, and inspection
switch.
2.2.5 Hoistway Access Switches
Provide key-operated hoistway access switch to permit limited movement of

car at terminal floors for car positioning, operative only when
"INSPECTION" switch in car operating panel is in the "INSPECTION"
position. Locate switch 6 feet above floor level, within 12 inches of
hoistway entrance frame or with only ferrule exposed when located in
entrance frame.
2.2.6 Independent Service
Provide exposed key-operated switch in car operating panel to enable

independent service and simultaneously disable in-car signals and
landing-call responses. Provide indicator lights that automatically
illuminate during independent service.
2.2.7 Elevator Operation
2.2.7.1 Single, Two-Stop, Automatic Operation
Provide Single Two-Stop Automatic Operation. Provide illuminating push

buttons.
2.2.7.2 Selective Collective Automatic Operation
Provide Selective Collective Automatic Operation. Provide illuminating

push buttons.
2.3 ELEVATOR DRIVE SYSTEM
Provide hydraulic elevator drive system, including pump unit, piping,

cylinder/plunger assembly, and associated equipment, which will operate at
a maximum working pressure of 500 psi or less. Provide complete elevator
system that meets or exceeds the NEII-1.
2.3.1 Hydraulic Pump Unit
Provide self-contained pump unit, including oil-hydraulic elevator pump,

electric motor, suction-line oil strainer, oil-tight drip pan, and
structural steel outer base with tank supports and isolation pads.
Provide oil tank capacity for full plunger displacement plus at least 10
gallons. Provide means to maintain oil temperature between 80 and 120
degrees F regardless of ambient temperature. Limit acoustic output in
elevator machine room to 80 dbA.
2.3.1.1 Pump Motor
Provide intermittent-duty pump motor rated at 120 starts/hour. Provide

motor that is sized so that the motor amperage does not exceed the motor
data tag amperage in any operating condition, exclusive of acceleration
and deceleration. Provide minimum of one megohm insulation resistance
between conductors and motor frame. Provide motor and pump nameplate and
data tags permanently mounted on the outside of the pump unit frame, with
all data viewable without the use of mirrors or other tools.
2.3.2 Hydraulic Controls and Equipment
Provide control valve, overspeed (rupture) valve, blowout-proof muffler,

and hydraulic pump discharge strainer in the hydraulic oil supply line.
Provide 1/4 turn, manual shutoff ball-valves in the elevator machine room
and in the hoistway pit. Provide scavenger pump in hoistway pit.
2.3.2.1 Hydraulic Control Valve
Provide constant-velocity, down-speed regulated, control valve.

Down-speed regulated control valve allows the car to travel at the same
speed in the down direction, regardless of the load on the elevator. In
addition, the hydraulic control valve shall have built-in adjustment
capability to operate the elevator at 140 percent of rated speed in the
down direction to facilitate periodic testing of the overspeed safety
valve.
2.3.2.2 Hydraulic Overspeed Safety Valve
Provide overspeed safety valve in hydraulic oil supply line, directly

adjacent to the hydraulic cylinder. Provide threaded pipe connections
between the hydraulic cylinder and the overspeed valve. Provide valve
equipped with manufacturer's manual shutoff feature. Overspeed valve
shall not be equipped with a manual lowering feature. Provide adjustable
valve with means to seal adjustment after inspection and testing by
certified elevator inspector.
2.3.2.3 Hydraulic Oil Scavenger Pump
Provide a scavenge oil reservoir with strainer and transfer pump. Provide
a manual-reset pit flood switch to prevent pump operation if pit is
flooded. Anchor pump and reservoir to pit floor.
2.3.3 Hydraulic Piping and Accessories
Provide ASTM A53/A53M or ASTM A106/A106M, Schedule 80, black steel piping
with ASME B16.9 or ASME B16.11 fittings for supply piping. Extend
schedule 80 piping from the pump control valve body, inside the pump unit,
to the hydraulic cylinder in the hoistway. Provide welded or threaded
forged pipe fittings for all fittings and components of the hydraulic oil
supply line. For direct plunger cylinders, provide dielectric union or
isolation couplings at each end of the hydraulic oil supply line. Provide
hangers or supports for all piping and components.
2.3.3.1 Containment of Hydraulic Oil Supply Line
Protect all portions of hydraulic oil supply line that are installed below
ground, including portions encapsulated in concrete or covered by
construction, with continuous, Schedule 80, PVC. Inside diameter of PVC

shall be 3 inches larger than the outside diameter of the hydraulic oil
supply line pipe and couplings.
2.3.4 Hydraulic Elevator Type
Provide a direct plunger type hydraulic elevator. Do not utilize

telescopic or inverted cylinder-plunger units. Telescopic and inverted
jacks are not acceptable. Do not utilize roped-hydraulic elevator design.
2.3.4.1 Cylinder-Plunger (Jack) Unit
Provide a single-stage plunger of seamless steel construction. Provide

cylinder with self-stabilizing mount that will support and hold cylinder
plumb without the need for stabilization means at the bottom of the
cylinder. Provide a threaded, 1/4 inch bleeder valve at the top of the
cylinder, just below packing gland.
2.3.5 Cylinder Well System
For direct plunger type hydraulic elevator, the cylinder well system
consists of a sealed, dry well casing and a PVC liner.
2.3.5.1 Well Casing
Locate and drill well for the cylinder well system. Line well with
steel casing, minimum 1/4 inch wall with welded 1/2 inch steel bottom.
Set casing plumb. Provide a dry, sealed well casing.
2.3.5.2 PVC or HDPE Cylinder Liner
Provide Schedule 80 PVC or HDPE pipe liner with bottom cap and couplings;
joints sealed watertight using pipe manufacturer's recommended adhesive or
heat welding methods. Provide liner inside diameter not less than 3 inches
larger than elevator cylinder maximum outside diameter. Liner shall
extend above hoistway pit finish floor. Liner may be provided as a
cylinder manufacture's applied liner or as a separate component. For
separate liner, set liner plumb in well casing, located as necessary for
cylinder installation. Provide dry, salt-free sand below and around liner
to top of well casing.
2.3.5.3 Cylinder Installation
Remove all moisture from inside of cylinder liner. Install cylinder

plumb, inside liner. Provide a 1/4 inch copper evacuation tube inside the
PVC liner. The bottom of the evacuation tube, shall be within 6 inch of
the bottom of the liner. Top of evacuation tube shall extend at least 6
inch above liner. Provide top of test tube with removable cap to exclude
foreign matter. Provide separate air pressure fitting in liner to
facilitate pressure test of liner as specified in paragraph PRESSURE TEST
OF PVC LINER/CYLINDER ASSEMBLY. Secure Liner/Cylinder Assembly as
recommended by cylinder manufacturer.
2.3.5.4 Pressure Test of PVC Liner/Cylinder Assembly
Perform 8 psig pressure test of liner/cylinder assembly. Perform the test

of liner/cylinder assembly as a sealed unit. Provide safety relief valve,
set to relieve at 10 psig. Provide 4.5 inch diameter dial pressure gage
scaled for 0 to 50 psig and calibrated to 0.5 percent accuracy and an air
pressure admission throttle and shutoff valve. For safety, pressure test
shall only be performed when liner and cylinder are fully inserted and
assembled in the well casing. Perform the test from remote location
outside of the elevator pit. Perform test in the presence of, and
witnessed by, a NAVFAC Certified Elevator Inspector.
2.3.5.5 Cylinder Liner Water and Oil Sensor System
Provide moisture sensor system designed to detect water and/or oil in the
bottom of the cylinder liner. Water and oil sensors shall be located
inside the cylinder liner and within 6 inches of the bottom of the liner.
Water and oil senor system shall include a control and alarm panel,
located in the elevator machine room. System shall provide automatic
actuation of audible and visual alarms upon detection of either water or
oil inside the cylinder liner.
2.3.5.6 Seal Top of Well Casing
Upon successful test and certification of PVC Liner/Cylinder assembly,

seal gap between steel well casing and PVC liner with foam insert strong
enough to retain and support final grouting. Provide 3000 psi grout to a
minimum of 4 inch thickness and level top of final grouting with pit floor.
2.4 CONTROL EQUIPMENT
2.4.1 Motor Control Equipment
Provide elevator motor controller with electronic, soft-start motor

starter. Enclose control equipment in factory-primed and baked-enamel
coated sheet-metal cabinets with removable or hinged doors with
ventilation louvers.
2.4.1.1 Electrical Isolation Protection
Provide individual isolation transformers and individual choke reactors

for each individual motor. Provide filtering to maintain harmonic
distortion below IEEE standards as measured at the elevator machine room
disconnect.
2.4.2 Logic Control Equipment
Provide a non-proprietary microprocessor controller for each individual

elevator and group controller. Store all programming in non-volatile
memory. Provide a microprocessor control system that includes all
hardware and software required to service and maintain the elevator and a
technical support service that is routinely provided to any elevator
service provider.
2.4.2.1 On-Board Diagnostic Panel
a. Provide, for each individual elevator microprocessor controller, an

on-board diagnostic control and LCD display panel that allows
unrestricted access to the comprehensive range of adjustable
parameters necessary to perform installation, adjusting, service,
maintenance, and testing of the elevator.
b. For each elevator group control, provide a separate on-board

diagnostic control and LCD display panel that allows unrestricted
access to the comprehensive range of options and adjustments necessary

to perform installation, adjusting, service, maintenance, and testing
of the elevator group.
c. For both individual and group controllers, provide fault log

capability to store all fault logs for up to 1 year of elevator
service history. The on-board LCD display shall provide the
capability to display and monitor any and all fault logs, trouble
calls, and fault history for up to 1 year of elevator service
history. The on-board LCD display shall also provide the capability
to display and diagnose trouble calls, faults, and shutdowns.
2.4.2.2 External Port
For each individual elevator microprocessor controller, and elevator group

microprocessor controller, provide a USB port or an RS 232 port that
allows connection to an on-site or a remote portable laptop computer.
Provide unrestricted access as specified in paragraph ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
PANEL.
2.4.2.3 Maintenance and Diagnostic Software
Provide three copies of the manufacturer's maintenance and service

diagnostic software, with complete software documentation, that shall
enable the same level of unrestricted access to all controllers of the
same make and model, regardless of the installation date or location.
Provide signed certification, from the manufacturer's corporate
headquarters, that guarantees that the microprocessor software and access
system will not terminate the unlimited and unrestricted access at any
future date.
2.4.2.4 Acceptable Controller Suppliers
Provide microprocessor controller from one of the following controller

manufacturers:
Elevator Controls Corporation

3525 La Grande Boulevard
Sacramento, CA 95823
G.A.L. Manufacturing Corporation

50 East 153rd Street
Bronx, New York 10451
Motion Control Engineering, Inc.

11354 Whiterock Road
Rancho Cordova, CA 95742-6522
Virginia Controls, Inc.

2513 Mechanicsville Turnpike
Richmond, Virginia 23223
2.5 OPERATING PANELS, SIGNAL FIXTURES, AND COMMUNICATIONS CABINETS
2.5.1 Capacity and Data Plates
Attach faceplates with spanner security screws. On car panel, provide
stainless steel capacity and data plates, with name of elevator

manufacturer.
2.5.2 Car and Hall Buttons
Provide recessed tamper-proof push buttons of minimum 3/4 inch size

satin-finish stainless steel, with illuminating jewel center.
2.5.3 Hall Station Door Operating Buttons
Identical in size and design to hall call buttons, but not illuminating.
2.5.4 Passenger Car-Operating Panel
Provide each car with one car operating panel that contains operation
controls and communication devices. Provide exposed, flush mounted
buttons for the controls that must be passenger accessible. Provide
service cabinet or keyed switches for those switches that should not be
passenger accessible. Allow maximum 48 inch height between car floor and
center line of top operating buttons. Allow 35 inch height between car
floor and center line of bottom button. Use engraving and backfilling or
photo etching for button and switch designations. Do not use attached
signs.
2.6 PASSENGER CONTROLS
2.6.1 Passenger Car-Operating Panel
a. Illuminating operating call buttons identified to correspond to

landings served by elevator car.
b. "DOOR OPEN" and "DOOR CLOSE" buttons.
c. Keyed "STOP" switch in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44, rule 2.26.2.
d. "ALARM" button in compliance with UFAS, ADA, and ASME A17.1/CSA B44,
Rule 2.27.1. Furnish a red alarm button with engraved legend
"ALARM." Allow alarm button to illuminate when pushed. Locate
"ALARM" button at panel bottom.
e. "FIRE DEPARTMENT" key switch, with "OFF-HOLD-ON" positions, in that

order with key to be removable in all positions. Provide fire sign or
jewel, and audible signal device, in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44
Section 2.27.3. Both visual and audible signals are activated when
Phase I key switch in hall is activated or when smoke detector
activates return of elevator(s) to main fire response floor. Keep
visual and audible signal activated until car has reached main or
designated alternate fire response floor. Upon arrival at fire
response floor visual signal remains illuminated and audible signal
becomes silent.
f. Emergency two-way communication. Provide momentary pressure, single

illuminating pushbutton operated communication device that complies
with ASME A17.1/CSA B44, UFAS, and the Americans with Disabilities Act.
g. Sound-actuated firefighter phone jack.
2.6.1.1 Service Controls
a. Inspection switch that transfers car control to top-of-car inspection

operating controls and prevents car operation from in-car control
panel.
b. Independent service switch.
c. Two car light switches, one for light in car and one for lights on top
and bottom of car frame.
d. Fan switch, two-speed.
e. 120-volt ac 60 Hz single-phase duplex electrical outlet of

ground-fault-circuit-interrupt (GFCI) design.
f. Device for communication between car and elevator machine room.
2.6.1.2 Certificate Window
Provide 4 inch high by 6 inch wide certificate window in car operating

panel for elevator inspection certificate.
2.6.2 Switches and Devices
Provide elevator manufacturer's standard grade for switches and devices on

car operating panel. Legibly and indelibly identify each device and its
operating positions. Locate car dispatching buttons in identical
positions in car operating panels for corresponding floors.
2.6.3 In-Car Position and Direction Indicator and Signal
Include in-car direction indicator in the in-car position indicator

fixture.
2.6.3.1 In-Car Position Indicator and Signal
Provide horizontal electrical or electronic digital position indicator

located minimum of 84 inch above car floor. Arrange indicator to show
floor position of car in hoistway and its traveling direction. Indicate
position by illuminating of numeral or letter corresponding to landing at
which car is passing or stopping. Provide audible signal to alert
passenger that elevator is passing or stopping at a floor. Provide
audible signals exceeding ambient noise level by at least 20 dbA with
frequency not higher than 1500 Hz.
2.6.3.2 In-Car Direction Indicator and Signal
Provide visual and audible car direction indicators in car, indicating car
traveling direction. For visual directional signal, provide arrow of
minimum 2-1/2 inch in size. Use equilateral triangles for arrows, green
for upward direction and red for downward direction. Provide audible
signal that sounds once for upward direction and twice for downward
direction.
2.6.4 Landing Position and Direction Indicator and Signal
Provide a single fixture containing the landing position and direction

indicator.
2.6.4.1 Landing Position Indicator and Signal
Provide an electrical or electronic digital position indicator similar to

the car position indicator. Arrange position indicator in wall
horizontally above the door frame or vertically at the side of the door
frame. Indicators to show floor position of car in hoistway. Indicate
position by illumination of numeral or letter corresponding to landing at
which car is passing or stopping.
2.6.4.2 Landing Direction Indicator and Signal
Provide landing direction indicator with visual and audible signal

devices. Provide single direction indicator at terminal floors; "UP" and
"DOWN" direction indicator at intermediate floors. Provide equilateral
triangles minimum 2-1/2 inch in size, green for upward direction and red
for downward direction. Provide electronic audible device that sounds
once for upward direction and twice for downward direction. Provide
audible signals exceeding ambient noise level by at least 20 decibels with
frequency not higher than 1500 Hz.
2.7 HOISTWAY AND CAR EQUIPMENT
2.7.1 Guide Rails and Fastenings
Paint rail shanks with one coat black enamel. Only T-section type rail is
acceptable.
2.7.2 Car Buffers
Provide buffer data plate on each buffer.
2.7.3 Pit Equipment
2.7.3.1 Pit "STOP" Switch
Provide push/pull type pit "STOP" switch for stopping elevator motor,
independent of regular operating device. Locate on same side of hoistway
as ladder.
2.7.3.2 Ladders
Provide galvanized steel ladder conforming to 29 CFR 1910.27 with minimum

7 inch distance between rung and wall. Locate ladder on hoistway side
wall closest to hoistway door opening.
2.7.3.3 Lighting of Pits
Locate pit light not less than 6 feet above pit floor. Locate switch on
same side of hoistway as ladder. Provide GFCI duplex receptacle in each
pit.
2.8 TERMINAL STOPPING DEVICES
Provide each elevator with a terminal stopping device.
2.8.1 Wiring and Traveling Cables
Suspend traveling cables by means of self-tightening webbed devices.
2.8.2 Emergency Signaling Device
Provide audible signaling device, operable from Car Operating Panel button
marked "ALARM". Mount the audible signaling device in hoistway.
2.9 PASSENGER CAR AND HOISTWAY DOOR ACCESSORIES
ASME A17.1/CSA B44, Sections 2.12, 2.13, 2.14, and 3. Provide infra-red
curtain unit (ICU) with multiple infra-red beams that protect to the full
height of the door opening. Extend minimum coverage from 2 inches off the
floor to 70 inch above floor level. Door operation must meet the
requirements of ASME A17.1/CSA B44 Rule 2.27.1 and 2.13.5. Provide
high-speed electric operator, safety interlocks for car and hoistway
doors, and electric safety contact to prevent car operation unless doors
are closed.
2.10 PASSENGER ELEVATOR GUIDES, FRAME, PLATFORM, AND ENCLOSURE
2.10.1 Roller Guides
Provide roller guide assemblies in adjustable mountings on each side of

car in accurate alignment at top and bottom of car frame.
2.10.2 Car Enclosure, Car Door, and Car Illumination
Provide natural and forced ventilation, stainless steel hooks, with fire
retardant pads.
2.10.2.1 Return Panels, Entrance Columns, Cove Base, and Transom
Provide 14 gauge minimum non perforated steel. Apply sound-deadening

mastic on car shell and all exterior components.
2.10.2.2 Car Top
Provide reinforced 12 gauge minimum steel with hinged emergency exit

openable by hand from car top only. Provide electrical contact which
prevents operation of elevator when emergency exit is open. Provide
sound-deadening mastic on all exterior components.
2.10.2.3 Car Door
Provide 16 gauge minimum steel, sandwich construction without binder

angles. Provide a minimum of 2 door guide assembles per door panel, one
guide at leading and one at trailing door edge with guides in the sill
groove their entire length of travel.
2.10.2.4 Car Entrance Sill
Provide one piece cast white bronze or nickel silver entrance sill. Set
sills level and flush with floor finish. Use same material for hoistway
and car entrance sills.
2.11 PASSENGER ELEVATOR HOISTWAY DOORS AND ENTRANCES
Provide hoistway entrance assemblies which have a minimum 1-1/2 hour fire
rating.
2.11.1 Hoistway Entrance Frames
Frame of 14 gauge thick stainless steel. Solidly grout uprights of

entrances to height of 5 feet.
2.11.2 Hoistway Entrance Sills
Provide one-piece cast solid white bronze or nickel silver entrance

sills. After sill is set level and flush with finished floor height,
solidly grout under full length of sill. Use same material for hoistway
and car door sills.
2.11.3 Hoistway Entrance Doors
Provide hoistway entrance door constructed with hollow metal non-vision

construction with flush surfaces on car and landing sides. Provide a
minimum of 2 door guide assembles per door panel, one guide at leading
edge and one at trailing door edge with guides in the sill groove the
entire length of travel.
2.11.4 Entrance Fascias and Dust Covers
Provide sheet metal hoistway door track dust covers at each landing. Dust
covers must cover door locks and door roller tracks and extend the full
width of the door track and associated hardware.
2.11.5 Hoistway Ventilation
Provide hoistway ventilation directly to outside air by fixed louver

through side wall of hoistway at top of hoistway. The net size of the
louver shall be a minimum of 3.5 percent of the cross section of hoistway.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, ASME A17.1/CSA B44,

36 CFR 1191, and NFPA 70.
3.1.1 Traveling Cables
Do not allow abrupt bending of traveling cables.
3.1.2 Automatic Shutoff Valve
Locate in supply-return line, as close as possible to cylinder-plunger

unit.
3.1.3 Structural Members
Do not cut or alter. Restore any damaged or defaced work to original

condition.
3.1.4 Safety Guards
Completely enclose selector cables or tapes exposed to possibility of

accidental contact in machine room with 16 gage thick sheet metal or
expanded metal guards, both horizontally and vertically. Protect exposed
gears, sprockets, and selector drums from accidental contact in accordance
with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
3.1.5 Other Requirements
Include recesses, cutouts, slots, holes, patching, grouting, and

refinishing to accommodate elevator installation. Use core drilling to
drill all new holes in concrete. Finish work to be straight, level, and
plumb. During installation, protect machinery and equipment from dirt,
water, or mechanical damage. At completion, clean all work, and spot
paint. Completion of firefighters' service includes installation and
wiring of all smoke detectors in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44,
Section 2.27.3.2. Coordinate smoke detector installation for
firefighters' service.
a. After completing elevators system installation, notify Contracting

Officer that elevator system is ready for final inspection and
acceptance test. In conjunction with the notification submit a plan
detailing the testing procedures 60 days prior to performing the
elevator tests. Contracting Officer will obtain services of Naval
Facilities Engineering Command certified elevator inspector.
b. Perform all required tests and demonstrate proper operation of each

elevator system and prove that each system complies with contract
requirements and ASME A17.1/CSA B44. Inspection procedures in
ASME A17.2 form a part of this inspection and acceptance testing.
Conduct all testing and inspections in the presence of both the
Elevator Specialist and the Elevator Inspector. Demonstrate the
proper operation of all equipment at various date settings, selected
by the Elevator Inspector, ranging from the date of contract award
through 1 January 2099.
c. The Elevator Inspector shall complete, sign and post the results of
all tests and inspection results and form NAVFACENGCOM 9-11014/23
(Rev. 7-88), Elevator Inspection Certificate after successful
completion of inspection and testing. The Contractor is responsible
for all costs involved with reinspection and retesting required to
correct discrepancies discovered during testing and the subsequent
retesting required ,including all costs and expenses incurred by the
Government Furnished Inspector.
3.2.1 Testing Materials and Instruments
Provide testing materials and instruments required for final inspection.

Include calibrated test weights, tachometer, 600-volt megohm meter, volt
meter and ammeter, three Celsius calibrated thermometers, door pressure
gage, spirit level, stop watch, hydraulic pressure test gauge, and a 100
foot tape measure.
3.2.2 Field Tests
Submit Field Tests Reports after completing each of the specified tests,
as required in the Submittals paragraph.
3.2.2.1 Endurance Tests
Test each elevator for a period of one hour continuous run, with specified
rated load in the car. Restart the one hour test period from beginning,
following any shutdown or failure. During the test run, stop car at each
floor in both directions of travel for standing period of 10 seconds per
floor. The requirements for Rated Speed, Leveling, Temperature Rise, and
Motor Amperes testing specified herein must be met throughout the duration
of the Endurance test.
3.2.2.2 Automatic Shutoff Valve Tests
Test the automatic shutoff valve twice. Once at beginning of acceptance

test and again at conclusion of one-hour Endurance test to ensure
consistent performance of shutoff valve, regardless of temperature of
equipment and oil.
3.2.2.3 Speed Tests
Determine actual speed of each elevator in both directions with rated load
and with no load in elevator car. Make Speed tests before and immediately
after Endurance test. Determine speed by tachometer reading, excluding
accelerating and slow-down zones in accordance with ASME A17.2, Section
2.22.4. Minimum acceptable speed is the Rated Speed as specified.
Maximum acceptable elevator speed is 110 percent of Rated Speed.
3.2.2.4 Leveling Tests
Test elevator car leveling devices for landing accuracy of plus or minus
1/4 inch at each floor with no load in car, symmetrical load in car, and
with rated load in car in both directions of travel. Determine accuracy
of floor landing both before and immediately after endurance tests.
3.2.2.5 Pressure Tests
Check operating pressure at pump and cylinder head under no load and rated
load. Test pressure at which relief valve operates.
3.2.2.6 Insulation Resistance Tests
Perform tests to ensure wiring systems free from short circuits and
grounds. Minimum acceptable insulation resistance for electrical
conductors is one megohm between each conductor and ground and between
each conductor and other conductors. Prior to megohm meter test, make
provision to prevent damage to the electronic devices.
3.2.2.7 Temperature Rise Tests
Determine the temperature rise of the hydraulic pump motor during the full
load test run for a minimum of one hour. Under these conditions, do not
exceed maximum acceptable temperature rise indicated on the manufacturer's
data plate. Start test only when equipment is within 5 degrees C of
ambient temperature.
3.2.2.8 Motor Ampere Tests
Measure and record motor amperage when motor is running and elevator is
lifting at rated load and speed. Measure and record motor amperage at the
beginning and the end of Endurance test.
3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING
The Elevator Specialist shall instruct Government personnel in care,
adjustment, and maintenance of elevator equipment for a period of not less

than 5 working days immediately following acceptance of system. Submit
data package in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
DATA, three Operation and Maintenance Manuals, 28 days prior to the
Operation and Maintenance Training, proposed Onsite Training schedule,
submitted concurrently with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
Include a list of phone numbers, personnel contacts, and all tools
required for operation and maintenance.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 20
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION

04/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM D709 (2013) Laminated Thermosetting Materials
FM GLOBAL (FM)

NFPA 13 (2013; TIA 10-1; TIA 11-2; ERTA 2014; TIA

14-3) Standard for the Installation of
Sprinkler Systems
UL Fire Prot Dir (2012) Fire Protection Equipment Directory
Design and provide new and modify existing automatic wet pipe fire
extinguishing sprinkler systems for complete fire protection coverage
throughout the building addition and renovated areas of the existing
building as indicated on the fire sprinkler plans and in this specification.
1.3 SPRINKLER SYSTEM DESIGN
Except as modified herein, design automatic wet pipe fire extinguishing

sprinkler systems in accordance with the required and advisory provisions
of NFPA 13, including all recommendations and advisory portions, which
shall be considered mandatory; this includes advisory provisions listed in
the appendices of such standard(s), as though the word "shall" had been
substituted for the word "should" wherever it appears. Design system by
hydraulic calculations for uniform distribution of water over the design
area. The building is not currently equipped with backflow prevention,
therefore the hydraulic calculations do not need to account for pressure
loss across the backflow preventer. Locate sprinklers in a consistent
pattern with ceiling grid, lights, and air supply diffusers. Provide
sprinklers and piping system layout. All Devices and equipment for fire
protection service shall be UL Fire Prot Dir listed or FM APP GUIDE
approved for use in wet pipe sprinkler systems. Provide seismic
protection for the sprinkler system. Design and install seismic
protection in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13 section titled
"Protection of Piping Against Damage Where Subject to Earthquakes."
SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 1

1.3.1 Location of Sprinklers
Sprinklers in relation to the ceiling and the spacing of sprinklers shall

not exceed the hazards indicated on the contract drawings. Uniformly
space sprinklers on the branch piping. Sprinklers shall provide coverage
throughout 100 percent of the building. This includes, but is not limited
to, telephone rooms, electrical equipment rooms, boiler rooms, switchgear
rooms, transformer rooms, and other electrical and mechanical spaces.
1.3.2 Water Distribution
Distribution shall be uniform throughout the area in which the sprinklers

will open. Discharge from individual sprinklers in hydraulically most
remote area shall be between 100 percent and 120 percent of the specified
density.
1.3.3 Density of Application of Water
Size pipe to provide the specified density when the system is discharging
the specified total maximum required flow. Refer to contract drawings for
sprinkler system design densities.
1.3.4 Sprinkler Discharge Area
Area shall be the hydraulically most remote 2,500 square feet of any
renovated shop area. Area reductions and increases from NFPA 13 shall not
be applied to this area.
1.3.5 Outside Hose Allowances
Hydraulic calculations shall include a hose allowance of 250 gpm for

outside hose streams.
1.3.6 Water Supply
Base hydraulic calculations on the water supply data shown on the fire
protection contract drawings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

approval.
Partial submittals and submittals not fully complying with the

requirements and recommended practices of NFPA 13 and this specification
section shall be returned disapproved without review. This contract
stipulation is non-negotiable.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL

PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Shop Drawings; G, A/E
Prepare 24 by 36 inch detail working drawings of sprinklers and

piping. Floor plans shall be drawn to a scale not less than 1/8"
SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 2

= 1'-0". Show data essential for proper installation of each

system. Show details, plan view, elevations and sections of the
systems supply and piping. Show piping schematic of systems
supply, devices, valves, pipe and fittings. Show point to point
electrical wiring diagrams. Submit drawings signed by a registered
fire protection engineer. Provide three copies of the Sprinkler
System Shop Drawings, no later than 21 days prior to the start of
sprinkler system installation.
SD-03 Product Data
Pipe; G, A/E
Fittings; G, A/E
Valves, including gate, check, and globe; G, A/E
Sprinklers; G, A/E
Pipe hangers and supports; G, A/E
Sprinkler Alarm Switches; G, A/E
Mechanical couplings; G, A/E
Seismic Bracing; G, A/E
Annotate descriptive data to show the specific model, type, and size of
each item. Catalog cuts shall also indicate UL Listing/FM Approval and
country of manufacture.
SD-05 Design Data
Hydraulic Calculations; G, A/E
Submit computer program generated hydraulic calculations to

substantiate compliance with hydraulic design requirements.
Calculations shall be performed by computer using software
intended specifically for fire protection system design. Submit
name of software program used.
SD-06 Test Reports
Request to schedule Preliminary Tests; G
Preliminary Test Report; G
Three copies of the completed Preliminary Test Report, no later

that 7 days after the completion of the Preliminary Tests. The
Preliminary Tests Report shall include both the Contractor's
Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping and the
Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground
Piping. All items in the Preliminary Tests Report shall be signed
by the Fire Protection Engineer.
Request to schedule Final Acceptance Test; G
Final Acceptance Test Report; G
Three copies of the completed Final Acceptance Tests Reports, no

later that 7 days after the completion of the Final Acceptance
Tests. All items in the Final Acceptance Report shall be signed
by the Fire Protection Engineer.
SD-07 Certificates
SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 3

Inspection by Fire Protection Engineer; G
Concurrent with the Final Acceptance Test Report, certification by

the Fire Protection Engineer that the sprinkler system is
installed in accordance with the contract requirements, including
signed approval of the Preliminary and Final Acceptance Test
Reports.
Fire Protection Engineer; G
The name and documentation of certification of the proposed Fire

Protection Engineer, no later than 14 days after the Notice to
Proceed and prior to the submittal of the sprinkler system
drawings and hydraulic calculations.
Sprinkler System Installer; G
Submit data showing the Sprinkler System Installer has

successfully installed systems of the same type and design as
specified herein, Data shall include names and locations of at
least two installations where the Contractor, or the subcontractor
referred to above, has installed such systems. Indicate type and
design of each system and certify that each system has performed
satisfactorily in the manner intended for not less than 18
months. Provide NICET certification of the system technician.
Contractor shall submit data along with submittal of the Fire
Protection Engineer Qualifications.
Operating and Maintenance Instructions
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE DATA as supplemented and modifies by this
specification section.
Provide six manuals in accordance with NFPA 13. The manuals shall
include the manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, list of
parts and tools that should be kept in stock by the owner for
routine maintenance including the name of a local supplier,
simplified wiring and controls diagrams, troubleshooting guide,
and recommended service organization (including address and
telephone number) for each item of equipment. Each service
organization submitted shall be capable of providing 4 hour
on-site response to a service call on an emergency basis.
As-built drawings; G
As-built shop drawings, at no later than 14 days after completion

of the Final Tests. The as-built drawings shall be updated to
reflect as-built conditions after all related work is completed
and shall reflect all changes and existing conditions for the
entire building at the completion of the project. Provide
electronic drawings in dwg or pdf format..
On-site training
SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 4

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
1.5.1 Fire Protection Engineer
A Fire Protection Engineer is a registered professional engineer (P.E.)

who has passed the fire protection engineering written examination
administered by the National Council of Examiners for Engineering and
Surveys (NCEES)
1.5.2 Sprinkler System Installer
The Sprinkler System Installer shall be regularly engaged in the

installation of the type and complexity of system specified in the
Contract documents, and shall have served in a similar capacity for at
least three systems that have performed in the manner intended for a
period of not less than 6 months. Installation drawings, shop drawings
and as-built drawings shall be prepared, by or under the supervision of,
an system technician who is experienced with the types of works specified
herein, and is currently certified by the National Institute for
Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) as an engineering
technician with minimum Level III certification in Automatic Sprinkler
System program or by a fire protection engineer.
1.6.1 Material and Equipment Qualifications
Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of

manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, which
are of a similar material, design and workmanship. Standard products
shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years
prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.
The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year
period.
1.6.2 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a two-year field service record will be

acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not
less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or
laboratory tests, can be shown.
1.6.3 Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's

name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
1.6.4 Field Fabricated Nameplates
ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment

enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in the technical
sections or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription
shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position.
Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black
center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 5

Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of
nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of
0.25 inch high normal block style.
1.7 ACCESSIBILITY
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation,

maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves,
expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in
locations freely accessible through access doors.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be housed in a manner

to preclude any damage from the weather, humidity and temperature
variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Additionally, all pipes
shall either be capped or plugged until installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 UNDERGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS
Not in scope. All underground piping and components are existing to

remain.
2.2 ABOVEGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS
All components of the aboveground piping shall fully comply with the
requirements and recommended practices of NFPA 13 and this specification
section. Aboveground piping shall be steel.
2.2.1 Steel Pipe
Pipe shall be rigid black steel. Steel pipe shall be Schedule 40 for sizes
less than 3 inches and Schedule 10 for sizes 3 inches or larger. Fittings
into which sprinklers, sprinkler riser nipples, or drop nipples are
threaded shall be welded, threaded, or grooved-end type. Plain-end
fittings with mechanical couplings, fittin+gs that use steel gripping
devices to bite into the pipe and segmented welded fittings shall not be
permitted. Rubber gasketed grooved-end pipe and fittings with mechanical
couplings shall be permitted in pipe sizes 1.5 inches and larger.
Fittings, mechanical couplings, and rubber gaskets shall be supplied by
the same manufacturer. Steel piping with wall thickness less than
Schedule 30 shall not be threaded.
2.2.2 Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings
Grooved couplings, fittings and grooving tools shall be products of the

same manufacturer.
2.2.3 Flexible Sprinkler Hose
The use of flexible sprinkler hose is permissible.
2.2.4 Sprinklers
Sprinklers with internal O-rings shall not be used. Sprinklers shall be

used in accordance with their listed coverage limitations. Provide new
sprinklers for any existing sprinklers that are removed. New sprinklers
SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 6

installed in areas with existing sprinklers shall match the adjacent

sprinklers in response and orifice characteristics. New sprinklers
located in existing rooms shall match the make and model of the existing
sprinklers. Where sprinklers in new rooms or rooms entirely renovated
cannot match existing sprinkler types and styles, they may be quick
response concealed pendent sprinklers with white cover plates, or chrome
or white recessed pendent sprinklers with matching escutcheons. Quick
response brass upright sprinklers can be utilized throughout areas exposed
to structure. Sprinklers will be centered in the lesser dimension of
ceiling tiles, located a minimum of 6-inches from the edge of the tile,
and aligned where possible with light fixtures in gypsum board ceilings.
Sprinklers susceptible to damage will be protected with sprinkler guards.
Temperature classification shall be as indicated. Sprinklers in high heat
areas including attic spaces or in close proximity to unit heaters shall
have temperature classification in accordance with NFPA 13. Extended
coverage sprinklers shall not be used. Deflector shall not be more than 3
inches below suspended ceilings. Ceiling plates shall not be more than
0.5 inch deep. Ceiling cups shall not be permitted.
See fire protection contract drawings for sprinkler system design criteria
table indicating minimum k-factor, response type, temperature and finish.
2.2.5 Valves
Provide valves of types approved for fire service. Valves shall open by
counterclockwise rotation and be OS&Y or butterfly type. Check valves
shall be clear opening swing-check type with inspection and access cover
plate for sizes 8 inches and larger.
2.2.6 Pipe Supports
Provide Pipe hangers and supports and Seismic Bracing in accordance with
NFPA 13.
2.2.7 Alarm Valves
Existing equipment to remain, no scope unless otherwise noted on the

contract drawings.
2.2.8 Water Motor Alarms

contract drawings.
2.2.9 Fire Department Connections

contract drawings.
2.2.10 Backflow Prevention Assembly
No scope, existing building is not equipped with a backflow prevention

assembly. Retrofitting a backflow preventer is not included in the scope
of this project.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 7

2.3 ALARM INITIATING AND SUPERVISORY DEVICES
2.3.1 Sprinkler Alarm Switches
Provide vane type flow switch(es) with circuit opener or closer for the
automatic transmittal of an alarm over the facility fire alarm system.
Connection of switch shall be under Section 28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM
AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM Vane type Alarm actuating devices shall have
mechanical diaphragm controlled retard device adjustable from 10 to 60
seconds and shall instantly recycle. Flow switches for elevator power
shunt shall have no retard feature. Provide properly lettered and
approved metal sign to elevator flow switch stating the circuits' voltage,
and identify the switch as an "Elevator Power Shunt Flow Switch".
2.3.2 Valve Supervisory (Tamper) Switch
Switch shall be suitable for mounting to the type of control valve to be

supervised open. The switch shall be tamper resistant and contain one set
of SPDT (Form C) contacts arranged to transfer upon removal of the housing
cover or closure of the valve of more than two rotations of the valve stem.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
2.4.1 Sprinkler Cabinet
Provide metal cabinet with extra sprinklers and sprinkler wrench adjacent
to each alarm valve. The number and types of extra sprinklers shall be as
specified in NFPA 13.
2.4.2 Pipe Escutcheon
Provide split hinge metal plates for piping entering walls, floors, and
ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide polished stainless steel plates or
chromium-plated finish on copper alloy plates in finished spaces. Provide
paint finish on metal plates in unfinished spaces.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION BY FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER
The Fire Protection Engineer shall inspect the sprinkler system

periodically during the installation to assure the sprinkler system is
being provided and installed in accordance with the contract requirements
and the approved sprinkler system submittal(s). The Fire Protection
Engineer shall attend both the preliminary and final tests, and shall sign
the test results. After the preliminary testing has been completed, the
Fire Protection Engineer, shall certify in writing the system is ready for
the final inspections and tests. This report shall document any
discrepancies found and what actions will be taken to correct. Any
discrepancy noted during the periodic site visits or the preliminary
testing shall be brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer in
writing, no later than three working days after the discrepancy is
discovered.
3.2 UNDERGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION

contract drawings.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 8

3.3 ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION
The methods of fabrication and installation of the aboveground piping

shall fully comply with the requirements and recommended practices of
NFPA 13 and this specification section.
3.3.1 Piping in Finished Areas
In areas with suspended or dropped ceilings and in areas with concealed

spaces above the ceiling, piping shall be concealed above ceilings.
Piping shall be inspected, tested and approved before being concealed.
Risers and similar vertical runs of piping in finished areas shall be
concealed.
3.3.2 Pendent Sprinklers
Where sprinklers are installed below suspended or dropped ceilings, drop

nipples shall be cut such that sprinkler ceiling plates or escutcheons are
of a uniform depth throughout the finished space. The outlet of the
reducing coupling shall not extend more than 1 inch below the underside of
the ceiling. Pendent sprinklers in suspended ceilings shall be a minimum
of 6 inches from ceiling grids.
3.3.3 Pipe Joints
Pipe joints shall conform to NFPA 13, except as modified herein. Welded
joints will be permitted, only if welding operations are performed as
required by NFPA 13 at the Contractor's fabrication shop, not at the
project construction site. Flanged joints shall be provided where
indicated or required by NFPA 13. Grooved pipe and fittings shall be
prepared in accordance with the manufacturer's latest published
specification according to pipe material, wall thickness and size.
Grooved couplings, fittings and grooving tools shall be products of the
same manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in the field shall be
measured using the method specifically approved by the coupling
manufacturer for the intended application. Groove width and dimension of
groove from end of pipe shall be measured and recorded for each change in
grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling manufacturer's
tolerances.
3.3.4 Reducers
Reductions in pipe sizes shall be made with one-piece tapered reducing

fittings. Bushings are prohibited.
3.3.5 Pipe Penetrations
Cutting structural members for passage of pipes or for pipe-hanger

fastenings will not be permitted. Pipes that must penetrate concrete or
masonry walls or concrete floors shall be core-drilled and provided with
pipe sleeves. Each sleeve shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel, ductile
iron or cast iron pipe and shall extend through its respective wall or
floor and be cut flush with each wall surface. Sleeves shall provide
required clearance between the pipe and the sleeve per NFPA 13. The space
between the sleeve and the pipe shall be firmly packed with mineral wool
insulation. Where pipes penetrate fire walls, fire partitions, or floors,
pipes shall be fire stopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING. In penetrations that are not fire-rated or not a floor
penetration, the space between the sleeve and the pipe shall be sealed at
SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 9

both ends with plastic waterproof cement that will dry to a firm but
pliable mass or with a mechanically adjustable segmented elastomer seal.
3.3.6 Inspector's Test Connection
Provide test connections approximately 6 feet above the floor for each
sprinkler system or portion of each sprinkler system equipped with an
alarm device. Provide test connection piping to a drain location that can
accept full flow where the discharge will be readily visible and where
water may be discharged without property damage. Discharge to floor
drains, janitor sinks or similar fixtures shall not be permitted. Provide
discharge orifice of same size as corresponding sprinkler orifice. The
penetration of the exterior wall shall be no greater than 2 feet above
finished grade.
3.3.7 Backflow Preventer Test Connection
No scope, existing building is not equipped with a backflow prevention

assembly. Retrofitting a backflow preventer is not included in the scope
of this project.
3.3.8 Drains
Auxiliary drains shall be provided as required by NFPA 13.
3.3.9 Installation of Fire Department Connection

contract drawings.
3.3.10 Identification Signs
Signs shall be affixed to each control valve, inspector test valve, main
drain, auxiliary drain, test valve, and similar valves as appropriate or
as required by NFPA 13. Valve identification signs shall be minimum 6
inches wide by 2 inches high with enamel baked finish on minimum 18 gauge
steel or 0.024 inch aluminum with red letters on a white background or
white letters on red background. Hydraulic design data nameplates shall
be permanently affixed to each sprinkler riser as specified in NFPA 13.
3.4 ELECTRICAL WORK
Except as supplemented and modified herein, electric equipment and wiring

shall be in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM. Alarm signal wiring connected to the building fire alarm control
system shall be in accordance with Section 28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM
AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM.
3.5 PIPE PAINTING AND COLOR CODE MARKING
Paint and color code mark sprinkler piping system as specified in Section
09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.6 PRELIMINARY TESTS
The aboveground interior piping systems and attached appurtenances

subjected to system working pressure shall be tested in accordance with
NFPA 13.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 10

Submit request to schedule Preliminary Tests, no later than 14 days prior

to the proposed start of the tests. Upon completion of specified tests,
the Contractor shall submit for approval a Preliminary Test Report.
3.6.1 Underground Piping
3.6.1.1 Flushing
Existing equipment to remain, no flushing scope unless otherwise noted on

the contract drawings.
3.6.1.2 Hydrostatic Testing
Existing equipment to remain, no flushing scope unless otherwise noted on

the contract drawings.
3.6.2 Aboveground Piping
3.6.2.1 Hydrostatic Testing
Aboveground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with

NFPA 13.
3.6.2.2 Backflow Prevention Assembly Forward Flow Test
No testing scope, the existing building is not provided with a backflow

prevention assembly.
3.7 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST
Final Acceptance Test shall begin only when the Preliminary Test Report
has been approved. Submit request to schedule Final Acceptance Test, no
later than 14 days prior to the proposed start of the tests. Notification
shall include a copy of the Contractor's Material & Test Certificates.
This shall include operation of control valves and flowing of inspector's

test connections to verify operation of associated waterflow alarm
switches. After operation of control valves has been completed, the main
drain test shall be repeated to assure that control valves are in the open
position. In addition, the representative shall have available copies of
as-built drawings and certificates of tests previously conducted. The
installation shall not be considered accepted until identified
discrepancies have been corrected and test documentation is properly
completed and received. The Contractor shall submit the Final Acceptance
Test Report as specified in the Submittals paragraph.
An experienced technician regularly employed by the system installer shall

be present during the inspection. The Fire Protection Engineer shall
attend the final inspections and tests. At this inspection, repeat any or
all of the required tests as directed. Correct defects in work provided
by the Contractor, and make additional tests until the systems comply with
contract requirements. Furnish appliances, equipment, electricity,
instruments, connecting devices, and personnel for the tests. The
Southwest Division, Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Fire Protection
Engineer, will witness formal tests and approve systems before they are
accepted.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 11

3.8 ON-SITE TRAINING
Submit request to schedule the On-site Training, at least 14 days prior

to the start of related training but prior to the final inspections and
tests. The sprinkler contractor shall conduct a training course for
operating and maintenance personnel as designated by the Contracting
Officer. Training shall be provided for a period of 4 hours of normal
working time and shall start after the system is functionally complete and
after the Final Acceptance Test. The On-Site Training shall cover all of
the items contained in the approved Operating and Maintenance Instructions.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 20 Page 12

SECTION 22 00 00
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE

11/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AHRI 1010 (2002) Self-Contained, Mechanically

Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers
ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4 (1999; Addenda A 2000, Addenda B 2001; R

2014) Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply
Systems

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 90.1 - IP (2010; ERTA 2011-2013) Energy Standard for

Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings
ASSE 1001 (2008) Performance Requirements for

Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers (ANSI
approved 2009)
ASSE 1003 (2009) Performance Requirements for Water

Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic
Water Distribution Systems - (ANSI
approved 2010)
ASSE 1010 (2004) Performance Requirements for Water

Hammer Arresters (ANSI approved 2004)
ASSE 1011 (2004; Errata 2004) Performance

Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum
Breakers (ANSI approved 2004)

Backflow Preventer with an Intermediate
Atmospheric Vent - (ANSI approved 2009)

Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow
Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire
Protection Principle Backflow Preventers -
(ANSI approved 2010)
ASSE 1018 (2001) Performance Requirements for Trap

Seal Primer Valves - Potable Water
Supplied (ANSI Approved 2002
ASSE 1020 (2004; Errata 2004; Errata 2004)

Performance Requirements for Pressure
Vacuum Breaker Assembly (ANSI Approved
2004)
AWWA 10084 (2005) Standard Methods for the

Examination of Water and Wastewater
AWWA B300 (2010; Addenda 2011) Hypochlorites
AWWA B301 (2010) Liquid Chlorine
AWWA C203 (2008) Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and

Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel
and Tape - Hot-Applied
AWWA C606 (2011) Grooved and Shouldered Joints
AWWA C651 (2005; Errata 2005) Standard for

Disinfecting Water Mains
AWWA C652 (2011) Disinfection of Water-Storage

Facilities
AWWA C700 (2009) Standard for Cold Water Meters -

Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case
AWWA C701 (2012) Standard for Cold-Water Meters -

Turbine Type for Customer Service
AWS A5.8/A5.8M (2011; Amendment 2012) Specification for

Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding
AWS B2.2/B2.2M (2010) Specification for Brazing Procedure

and Performance Qualification
ASME A112.1.2 (2012) Standard for Air Gaps in Plumbing

Systems (For Plumbing Fixtures and
Water-Connected Receptors)
ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 (2013) Standard for Vitreous China

Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic
Requirements for Water Closets and Urinals
ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 (2008; R 2013) Stainless Steel Plumbing

Fixtures
ASME A112.19.5 (2011) Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks
and Urinals
ASME A112.36.2M (1991; R 2012) Cleanouts
ASME A112.6.1M (1997; R 2012) Floor Affixed Supports for

Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public
Use
ASME A112.6.3 (2001; R 2007) Standard for Floor and

Trench Drains
ASME A112.6.4 (2003: R 2012) Roof, Deck and Balcony

Drains
ASME B1.20.1 (2013) Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)
ASME B16.12 (2009; R 2014) Cast Iron Threaded Drainage

Fittings
ASME B16.15 (2013) Cast Copper Alloy Threaded Fittings

Classes 125 and 250
ASME B16.18 (2012) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint

Pressure Fittings
ASME B16.21 (2011) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe

Flanges
ASME B16.22 (2013) Standard for Wrought Copper and

Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
ASME B16.23 (2011) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint

Drainage Fittings - DWV
ASME B16.24 (2011) Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and

Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 600,
900, 1500, and 2500
ASME B16.29 (2012) Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper

Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV
ASME B16.3 (2011) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,

Classes 150 and 300
ASME B16.34 (2013) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and

Welding End
ASME B16.39 (2009) Standard for Malleable Iron

Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250,
and 300
ASME B16.4 (2011) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded

Fittings; Classes 125 and 250
ASME B16.5 (2013) Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings:

NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard
ASME B16.50 (2013) Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy

Braze-Joint Pressure Fittings
ASME B31.1 (2014; INT 1-47) Power Piping
ASME B31.5 (2013) Refrigeration Piping and Heat

Transfer Components
ASME B40.100 (2013) Pressure Gauges and Gauge

Attachments
ASME BPVC SEC IV (2010) BPVC Section IV-Rules for

Construction of Heating Boilers
ASME BPVC SEC IX (2010) BPVC Section IX-Welding and Brazing

Qualifications

Steel Forgings for Piping Applications

Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting
Materials for High-Temperature Service and
Other Special Purpose Applications

ASTM A515/A515M (2010) Standard Specification for Pressure

Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for
Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature
Service
ASTM A516/A516M (2010) Standard Specification for Pressure

Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate-
and Lower-Temperature Service

Welded and Seamless

Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM A733 (2003; E 2009; R 2009) Standard

Specification for Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless
Steel Pipe Nipples
ASTM A74 (2013a) Standard Specification for Cast

Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
ASTM A888 (2013a) Standard Specification for Hubless

Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for
Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent
Piping Applications

ASTM B152/B152M (2013) Standard Specification for Copper

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar
ASTM B306 (2013) Standard Specification for Copper

Drainage Tube (DWV)

Solder Metal

Sheet and Strip for Building Construction
ASTM B42 (2010) Standard Specification for Seamless

Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes

Red Brass Pipe, Standard Sizes

Alloy Sand Castings for General
Applications
ASTM B75/B75M (2011) Standard Specification for Seamless

Copper Tube
ASTM B813 (2010) Standard Specification for Liquid

and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper
and Copper Alloy Tube
ASTM B828 (2002; R 2010) Standard Practice for

Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of
Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings

Copper Water Tube
ASTM B88M (2013) Standard Specification for Seamless

Copper Water Tube (Metric)
ASTM C564 (2014) Standard Specification for Rubber

Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings


Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
Schedule 40, Plastic Drain, Waste, and
Vent Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D2822/D2822M (2005; E 2011; R 2011) Asphalt Roof Cement
ASTM D3139 (1998; R 2011) Joints for Plastic Pressure

Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM D3212 (2007; R 2013) Standard Specification for

Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes
Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM D3311 (2011) Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV)

Plastic Fittings Patterns
ASTM E1 (2014) Standard Specification for ASTM

Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers

Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining
Plastic Pipe
ASTM F628 (2012; E 2013)

Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent
Pipe with a Cellular Core
CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI)
CISPI 301 (2009) Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain,
Waste, and Vent Piping Applications
CISPI 310 (2011) Coupling for Use in Connection with

Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and
Vent Piping Applications
COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)
CDA A4015 (2010) Copper Tube Handbook

Facilities
ICC IPC (2012) International Plumbing Code

INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-110 (2010) Ball Valves Threaded,

Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and
Flared Ends
MSS SP-25 (2013) Standard Marking System for Valves,

Fittings, Flanges and Unions
MSS SP-44 (2010; Errata 2011) Steel Pipeline Flanges
MSS SP-58 (1993; Reaffirmed 2010) Pipe Hangers and

Supports - Materials, Design and
Manufacture, Selection, Application, and
Installation
MSS SP-67 (2011) Butterfly Valves
MSS SP-69 (2003; Notice 2012) Pipe Hangers and
Supports - Selection and Application (ANSI

Approved American National Standard)
MSS SP-70 (2011) Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and

Threaded Ends
MSS SP-71 (2011; Errata 2013) Gray Iron Swing Check

Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
MSS SP-72 (2010a) Ball Valves with Flanged or

Butt-Welding Ends for General Service
MSS SP-78 (2011) Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and

Threaded Ends
MSS SP-80 (2013) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check

Valves
MSS SP-83 (2006) Class 3000 Steel Pipe Unions Socket

Welding and Threaded
MSS SP-85 (2011) Gray Iron Globe & Angle Valves

Flanged and Threaded Ends
NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)
NACE SP0169 (2013) Control of External Corrosion on

Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping
Systems
NEMA 250 (2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

(1000 Volts Maximum)
NEMA MG 1 (2011; Errata 2012) Motors and Generators
NEMA MG 11 (1977; R 2012) Energy Management Guide for

Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors

NSF 372 (2011) Drinking Water System Components -

Lead Content
NSF/ANSI 61 (2014) Drinking Water System Components -

Health Effects
PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS ASSOCIATION (PPFA)
PPFA Fire Man (2010) Firestopping: Plastic Pipe in Fire

Resistive Construction
PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI)
PDI WH 201 (2010) Water Hammer Arresters Standard
SAE J1508 (2009) Hose Clamp Specifications
EPA SM 9223 (2004) Enzyme Substrate Coliform Test
PL 93-523 (1974; A 1999) Safe Drinking Water Act
10 CFR 430 Energy Conservation Program for Consumer

Products
40 CFR 141.80 National Primary Drinking Water

Regulations; Control of Lead and Copper;
General Requirements
PL 109-58 Energy Policy Act of 2005 (EPAct05)
UL 174 (2004; Reprint Sep 2012) Household

Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters
UL 430 (2009; Reprint Oct 2013) Standard for

Waste Disposers
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Plumbing System; G
Detail drawings consisting of schedules, performance charts,

instructions, diagrams, and other information to illustrate the
requirements and operations of systems that are not covered by the
Plumbing Code. Detail drawings for the complete plumbing system
including piping layouts and locations of connections; dimensions
for roughing-in, foundation, and support points; schematic
diagrams and wiring diagrams or connection and interconnection
diagrams. Detail drawings shall indicate clearances required for
maintenance and operation. Where piping and equipment are to be
supported other than as indicated, details shall include loadings
and proposed support methods. Mechanical drawing plans,
elevations, views, and details, shall be drawn to scale.
SD-03 Product Data
Fixtures; G, A/E
List of installed fixtures with manufacturer, model, and flow

rate.
Flush valve water closets; G, A/E
Flush valve urinals; G, A/E
Wall hung lavatories; G, A/E
Kitchen sinks; G, A/E
Service sinks; G, A/E
Drinking-water coolers; G, A/E
Domestic Water Service Meter; G, A/E
Water heaters; G, A/E
Pumps; G, A/E
Backflow prevention assemblies; G, A/E
Welding
A copy of qualified procedures and a list of names and

identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators.
Plumbing System
Diagrams, instructions, and other sheets proposed for posting.

Manufacturer's recommendations for the installation of bell and
spigot and hubless joints for cast iron soil pipe.
SD-06 Test Reports
Tests, Flushing and Disinfection
Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed

to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove
compliance with the specified performance criteria, completion and
testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate
the final position of controls.
Plumbing System; G.
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE DATA.
Specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products.
Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has
performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening.
Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial

use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include
applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of
similar size. The product shall have been for sale on the commercial
market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures
during the 2 year period.

1.3.2 Service Support
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a

certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of
the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These
service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment
installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a
regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

acceptable.
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory

provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.3.4.1 Definitions
For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract
documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word
"should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code
official" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For
Navy owned property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to
mean the "Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the
"owner" shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the
"permit holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."
1.3.4.2 Administrative Interpretations
For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of

Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative
requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations
(FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the
Officer in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this
project. References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be
applied appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his
administrative cognizance and the FAR.
Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage

before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace
damaged or defective items.
1.5.1 Welding
Piping shall be welded in accordance with qualified procedures using

performance-qualified welders and welding operators. Procedures and
welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX. Welding
procedures qualified by others, and welders and welding operators
qualified by another employer, may be accepted as permitted by ASME B31.1.
The Contracting Officer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of tests,
and the tests shall be performed at the work site if practicable. Welders
or welding operators shall apply their assigned symbols near each weld
they make as a permanent record.
Unless otherwise required herein, plumbing work shall be in accordance

with ICC IPC. Energy consuming products and systems shall be in
accordance with PL 109-58 and ASHRAE 90.1 - IP
The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work, verify
dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any
discrepancy before performing any work.
1.8 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL
When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent

instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government
personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including
pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system.
Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the
installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical
operation and maintenance work.
Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the
equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government
for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of
instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section.
When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately
half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for
instruction with the equipment or system.
When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are

made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to
acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.
1.9 ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
Pipe schedules shall be selected based on service requirements. Pipe

fittings shall be compatible with the applicable pipe materials. Material
or equipment containing a weighted average of greater than 0.25 percent
lead shall not be used in any potable water system intended for human
consumption, and shall be certified in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61, Annex
G or NSF 372. In line devices such as water meters, building valves,
check valves, meter stops, valves, fittings and back flow preventers shall
comply with PL 93-523 and NSF/ANSI 61, Section 8. End point devices such
as drinking water fountains, lavatory faucets, kitchen and bar faucets,
residential ice makers, supply stops and end point control valves used to
dispense water for drinking must meet the requirements of NSF/ANSI 61,
Section 9. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be installed
underground, under concrete floor slabs, or in crawl spaces below kitchen
floors. Plastic pipe shall not be installed in air plenums. Plastic pipe
shall not be installed in a pressure piping system in buildings greater
than three stories including any basement levels.
2.1.1 Pipe Joint Materials
Grooved pipe and hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be used under
ground. Solder containing lead shall not be used with copper pipe. Cast
iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark
of the Cast Iron Soil Institute. Joints and gasket materials shall
conform to the following:
a. Coupling for Cast-Iron Pipe: for hub and spigot type ASTM A74,
AWWA C606. For hubless type: CISPI 310
b. Coupling for Steel Pipe: AWWA C606.
c. Flange Gaskets: Gaskets shall be made of non-asbestos material in

accordance with ASME B16.21. Gaskets shall be flat, 1/16 inch thick,
and contain Aramid fibers bonded with Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR)
or Nitro Butadiene Rubber (NBR). Gaskets shall be the full face or
self centering flat ring type. Gaskets used for hydrocarbon service
shall be bonded with NBR.
d. Brazing Material: Brazing material shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M,

BCuP-5.
e. Brazing Flux: Flux shall be in paste or liquid form appropriate for

use with brazing material. Flux shall be as follows: lead-free; have
a 100 percent flushable residue; contain slightly acidic reagents;
contain potassium borides; and contain fluorides.
f. Solder Material: Solder metal shall conform to ASTM B32.
g. Solder Flux: Flux shall be liquid form, non-corrosive, and conform to

ASTM B813, Standard Test 1.
h. Rubber Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil-Pipe and Fittings (hub and spigot
type and hubless type): ASTM C564.
i. Flexible Elastomeric Seals: ASTM D3139, ASTM D3212 or ASTM F477.
j. Flanged fittings including flanges, bolts, nuts, bolt patterns, etc.,

shall be in accordance with ASME B16.5 class 150 and shall have the
manufacturer's trademark affixed in accordance with MSS SP-25. Flange
material shall conform to ASTM A105/A105M. Blind flange material
shall conform to ASTM A516/A516M cold service and ASTM A515/A515M for
hot service. Bolts shall be high strength or intermediate strength
with material conforming to ASTM A193/A193M.
k. Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B88, Type K, L or M.
2.1.2 Miscellaneous Materials
Miscellaneous materials shall conform to the following:
a. Water Hammer Arrester: PDI WH 201. Water hammer arrester shall be

diaphragm or piston type.
b. Copper, Sheet and Strip for Building Construction: ASTM B370.
c. Asphalt Roof Cement: ASTM D2822/D2822M.
d. Hose Clamps: SAE J1508.
e. Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures: ASME A112.6.1M.
f. Metallic Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M.
g. Plumbing Fixture Setting Compound: A preformed flexible ring seal

molded from hydrocarbon wax material. The seal material shall be
nonvolatile nonasphaltic and contain germicide and provide watertight,
gastight, odorproof and verminproof properties.
h. Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines:

AWWA C203.
i. Hypochlorites: AWWA B300.
j. Liquid Chlorine: AWWA B301.
k. Gauges - Pressure and Vacuum Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element:

ASME B40.100.
l. Thermometers: ASTM E1. Mercury shall not be used in thermometers.
2.1.3 Pipe Insulation Material
Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION

FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
2.2 PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS
Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and
MSS SP-69.
2.3 VALVES
Valves shall be provided on supplies to equipment and fixtures. Valves

2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be bronze with threaded bodies for pipe and
solder-type connections for tubing. Valves 3 inches and larger shall have
flanged iron bodies and bronze trim. Pressure ratings shall be based upon
the application. Grooved end valves may be provided if the manufacturer
certifies that the valves meet the performance requirements of applicable
MSS standard. Valves shall conform to the following standards:
Description Standard
Butterfly Valves MSS SP-67
Cast-Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and MSS SP-70

Threaded Ends
Cast-Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and MSS SP-71

Threaded Ends
Ball Valves with Flanged Butt-Welding Ends MSS SP-72

for General Service
Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, MSS SP-110

Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends
Cast-Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and MSS SP-78

Threaded Ends
Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves MSS SP-80
Steel Valves, Socket Welding and Threaded ASME B16.34

Ends
Cast-Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged MSS SP-85

and Threaded Ends
Vacuum Relief Valves ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4
Water Pressure Reducing Valves ASSE 1003
Water Heater Drain Valves ASME BPVC SEC IV, Part HLW-810:
Requirements for Potable-Water Heaters
Bottom Drain Valve
Trap Seal Primer Valves ASSE 1018
Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4

for Hot Water Supply Systems
2.3.1 Wall Faucets
Wall faucets with vacuum-breaker backflow preventer shall be brass with

3/4 inch male inlet threads, hexagon shoulder, and 3/4 inch hose
connection. Faucet handle shall be securely attached to stem.
2.3.2 Relief Valves
Water heaters and hot water storage tanks shall have a combination
pressure and temperature (P&T) relief valve. The pressure relief element
of a P&T relief valve shall have adequate capacity to prevent excessive
pressure buildup in the system when the system is operating at the maximum
rate of heat input. The temperature element of a P&T relief valve shall
have a relieving capacity which is at least equal to the total input of
the heaters when operating at their maximum capacity. Relief valves shall
be rated according to ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4. Relief valves for systems
where the maximum rate of heat input is less than 200,000 Btuh shall have
3/4 inch minimum inlets, and 3/4 inch outlets. Relief valves for systems
where the maximum rate of heat input is greater than 200,000 Btuh shall
have 1 inch minimum inlets, and 1 inch outlets. The discharge pipe from
the relief valve shall be the size of the valve outlet.
2.3.3 Roof Hydrants
Roof hydrants shall have valve housings frost proof. Water from the
casing shall not be drained inside the building below roof. Hydrant shall
be bronze with cast-iron box or casing guard.
2.3.4 Thermostatic Mixing Valves
Provide thermostatic mixing valve for lavatory and sink faucets. Mixing
valves, thermostatic type, pressure-balanced or combination thermostatic
and pressure-balanced shall be line size and shall be constructed with
rough or finish bodies either with or without plating. Each valve shall
be constructed to control the mixing of hot and cold water and to deliver
water at a desired temperature regardless of pressure or input temperature
changes. The control element shall be of an approved type. The body
shall be of heavy cast bronze, and interior parts shall be brass, bronze,
corrosion-resisting steel or copper. The valve shall be equipped with
necessary stops, check valves, unions, and sediment strainers on the
inlets. Mixing valves shall maintain water temperature within 5 degrees F
of any setting.
2.4 FIXTURES
Fixtures shall be water conservation type, in accordance with ICC IPC.

Fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with
ICC A117.1. ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 302 stainless steel, Vitreous China,
nonabsorbent, hard-burned, and vitrified throughout the body shall be
provided. Porcelain enameled ware shall have specially selected, clear
white, acid-resisting enamel coating evenly applied on surfaces. No
fixture will be accepted that shows cracks, crazes, blisters, thin spots,
or other flaws. Fixtures shall be equipped with appurtenances such as
traps, faucets, stop valves, and drain fittings. Each fixture and piece
of equipment requiring connections to the drainage system, except grease
interceptors, shall be equipped with a trap. Brass expansion or toggle

bolts capped with acorn nuts shall be provided for supports, and polished
chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where exposed
to view. Fixtures with the supply discharge below the rim shall be
equipped with backflow preventers. Internal parts of flush and/or
flushometer valves, and pop-up stoppers of lavatory waste drains, may
contain acetal resin, fluorocarbon, nylon, acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene
(ABS) or other plastic material, if the material has provided satisfactory
service under actual commercial or industrial operating conditions for not
less than 2 yearsshall be copper alloy with all visible surfaces chrome
plated. Plastic in contact with hot water shall be suitable for 180
degrees F water temperature.
2.4.1 Lavatories
Vitreous china lavatories shall be provided with two integral molded lugs
on the back-underside of the fixture and drilled for bolting to the wall
in a manner similar to the hanger plate.
2.4.2 Flush Valve Water Closets
ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white vitreous china, siphon jet, elongated

bowl, floor-mounted, floor outlet. Top of toilet seat height above floor
shall be 14 to 15 inches, except 17 to 19 inches for wheelchair water
closets. Provide wax bowl ring including plastic sleeve. Provide white
solid plastic elongated open-front seat.
Water flushing volume of the water closet and flush valve combination
shall not exceed1.28 gallons per flush.
Provide large diameter flush valve including angle control-stop valve,

vacuum breaker, tail pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed to view
components shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Flush
valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush valves not less than 11
inches above the fixture. Mounted height of flush valve shall not
interfere with the hand rail in ADA stalls.
2.4.3 Flush Valve Urinals
ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white vitreous china, wall-mounted, wall outlet,

siphon jet, integral trap, and extended side shields. Provide urinal with
the rim 17 inches above the floor. Provide urinal with the rim 24 inches
above the floor. Water flushing volume of the urinal and flush valve
combination shall not exceed 0.125 gallons per flush. Provide
ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with vertical steel pipe
supports. Provide large diameter flush valve including angle control-stop
valve, vacuum breaker, tail pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed to
view components shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel.
Flush valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush valves not less than
11 inches above the fixture.
2.4.4 Wheelchair Flush Valve Type Urinals
ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white vitreous china, wall-mounted, wall outlet,

blowout action, integral trap, elongated projecting bowl, 20 inches long
from wall to front of flare, and ASME A112.19.5 trim. Provide large
diaphragm (not less than 2.625 inches upper chamber inside diameter at the
point where the diaphragm is sealed between the upper and lower chambers),
nonhold-open flush valve of chrome plated cast brass conforming to
ASTM B584, including vacuum breaker and angle (control-stop) valve with
back check. The water flushing volume of the flush valve and urinal
combination shall not exceed 0.125 gallon per flush. Furnish urinal
manufacturer's certification of conformance. Provide ASME A112.6.1M
concealed chair carriers. Mount urinal with front rim a maximum of 17
inches above floor and flush valve handle a maximum of 44 inches above
floor for use by handicapped on wheelchair.
2.4.5 Wall Hung Lavatories
ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white vitreous china, straight back type with
supply openings for use with top mounted centerset faucets, and openings
for concealed arm carrier installation. Water flow rate shall not exceed
0.5 gpm when measured at a flowing water pressure of 60 psi. Provide
ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with vertical steel pipe supports
and concealed arms for the lavatory. Mount lavatory with the front rim 34
inches above floor and with 29 inches minimum clearance from bottom of the
front rim to floor. Provide top mounted washerless centerset lavatory
faucets. Provide filters for chlorine in supply piping to faucets.
2.4.6 Kitchen Sinks
ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4, 20 gage stainless steel with integral mounting

rim for flush installation, minimum dimensions of 25 inches wide by 22
inches front to rear, single compartments, with undersides fully sound
deadened, with supply openings for use with top mounted washerless sink
faucets with hose spray, and with 3.5 inch drain outlet. Water flow rate
shall not exceed 1.5 gpm when measured at a flowing water pressure of 60
psi. Provide stainless steel drain outlets and stainless steel cup
strainers. Provide separate 1.5 inch P-trap and drain piping to vertical
vent piping from each compartment. Provide top mounted washerless sink
faucets with hose spray. Provide filters for chlorine in supply piping to
faucets. Provide UL 430 waste disposer in right compartment.
2.4.7 Service Sinks
ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, white enamel coating with minimum dimensions of

28 inches wide by 28 inches front to rear. Provide floor outlet cast iron
P-trap and stainless steel rim guards as recommended by service sink
manufacturer. Provide wall mounted washerless service sink faucets with
vacuum breaker and 0.75 inch external hose threads.
2.4.8 Drinking-Water Coolers
AHRI 1010 with more than a single thickness of metal between the potable
water and the refrigerant in the heat exchanger, wall-hung, bubbler style,
air-cooled condensing unit, 4.75 gph minimum capacity, stainless steel
splash receptor and basin, and stainless steel cabinet. Bubblers shall be
controlled by push levers or push bars, front mounted or side mounted near
the front edge of the cabinet. Bubbler spouts shall be mounted at maximum
of 36 inches above floor and at front of unit basin. Spouts shall direct
water flow at least 4 inches above unit basin and trajectory parallel or
nearly parallel to the front of unit. Provide filters for chlorine in
supply piping to faucets. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed steel pipe
chair carriers. Provide bottle filler with push button or lever handle.
2.4.9 Wheelchair Drinking Water cooler
AHRI 1010, wall-mounted bubbler style with ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair
carrier, air-cooled condensing unit, 4.75 gph minimum capacity, stainless

steel splash receptor, and all stainless steel cabinet, with 27 inch
minimum knee clearance from front bottom of unit to floor and 36 inch
maximum spout height above floor. Bubblers shall also be controlled by
push levers, by push bars, or touch pads one on each side or one on front
and both sides of the cabinet. Provide filters for chlorine in supply
piping to faucets. Provide bottle filler with push button or lever handle.
2.5 BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLIES
Backflow prevention devices must be approved by the State or local

regulatory agencies. If there is no State or local regulatory agency
requirements, the backflow prevention devices must be listed by the
Foundation for Cross-Connection Control & Hydraulic Research, or any other
approved testing laboratory having equivalent capabilities for both
laboratory and field evaluation of backflow prevention devices and
assemblies.
Reduced pressure principle assemblies, double check valve assemblies,

atmospheric (nonpressure) type vacuum breakers, and pressure type vacuum
breakers shall be meet the above requirements.
Backflow preventers with intermediate atmospheric vent shall conform to

ASSE 1012. Reduced pressure principle backflow preventers shall conform
to ASSE 1013. Hose connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1011.
Pipe applied atmospheric type vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE 1001.
Pressure vacuum breaker assembly shall conform to ASSE 1020. Air gaps in
plumbing systems shall conform to ASME A112.1.2.
2.6 DRAINS
2.6.1 Floor Drains
Floor drains shall consist of a galvanized body, integral seepage pan, and
adjustable perforated or slotted chromium-plated bronze, nickel-bronze, or
nickel-brass strainer, consisting of grate and threaded collar. Floor
drains shall be cast iron except where metallic waterproofing membrane is
installed. Drains shall be of double drainage pattern for embedding in
the floor construction. The strainer shall be adjustable to floor
thickness. Drains shall be provided with threaded connection. Between
the drain outlet and waste pipe, a neoprene rubber gasket conforming to
ASTM C564 may be installed, provided that the drain is specifically
designed for the rubber gasket compression type joint. Floor drains shall
conform to ASME A112.6.3. Provide drain with trap primer connection, trap
primer, and connection piping. Primer shall meet ASSE 1018.
2.6.2 Floor Sinks
Floor sinks shall be square, with 12 inch nominal overall width or

diameter and 6 inch nominal overall depth. Floor sink shall have an
acid-resistant enamel interior finish with cast-iron body, aluminum
sediment bucket, and perforated grate of cast iron in industrial areas and
stainless steel in finished areas. The outlet pipe size shall be as
indicated or of the same size as the connecting pipe. Provide drain with
trap primer connection, trap primer, and connection piping. Primer shall
meet ASSE 1018.
2.6.3 Roof Drains and Expansion Joints
Roof drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.4, with dome and integral flange,
and shall have a device for making a watertight connection between roofing
and flashing. The whole assembly shall be galvanized heavy pattern cast
iron. For aggregate surface roofing, the drain shall be provided with a
gravel stop. On roofs other than concrete construction, roof drains shall
be complete with underdeck clamp, sump receiver, and an extension for the
insulation thickness where applicable. A clamping device for attaching
flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the
flashing or membrane shall be provided when required to suit the building
construction. Strainer openings shall have a combined area equal to twice
that of the drain outlet. The outlet shall be equipped to make a proper
connection to threaded pipe of the same size as the downspout. An
expansion joint of proper size to receive the conductor pipe shall be
provided. The expansion joint shall consist of a heavy cast-iron housing,
brass or bronze sleeve, brass or bronze fastening bolts and nuts, and
gaskets or packing. The sleeve shall have a nominal thickness of not less
than 0.134 inch. Gaskets and packing shall be close-cell neoprene, O-ring
packing shall be close-cell neoprene of 70 durometer. Packing shall be
held in place by a packing gland secured with bolts.
2.7 TRAPS
Unless otherwise specified, traps shall be copper-alloy adjustable tube

type with slip joint inlet and swivel. Traps shall be withouta cleanout.
Tubes shall be copper alloy with walls not less than 0.032 inch thick
within commercial tolerances, except on the outside of bends where the
thickness may be reduced slightly in manufacture by usual commercial
methods. Inlets shall have rubber washer and copper alloy nuts for slip
joints above the discharge level. Swivel joints shall be below the
discharge level and shall be of metal-to-metal or metal-to-plastic type as
required for the application. Nuts shall have flats for wrench grip.
Outlets shall have internal pipe thread, except that when required for the
application, the outlets shall have sockets for solder-joint connections.
The depth of the water seal shall be not less than 2 inches. The interior
diameter shall be not more than 1/8 inch over or under the nominal size,
and interior surfaces shall be reasonably smooth throughout. A copper
alloy "P" trap assembly consisting of an adjustable "P" trap and threaded
trap wall nipple with cast brass wall flange shall be provided for
lavatories. The assembly shall be a standard manufactured unit and may
have a rubber-gasketed swivel joint.
2.8 WATER HEATERS
Water heater types and capacities shall be as indicated. Each primary

water heater shall have controls with an adjustable range that includes 90
to 160 degrees F.
2.8.1 Automatic Storage Type
2.8.1.1 Electric Type
Electric type water heaters shall conform to UL 174 with dual heating
elements. Each element shall be 4.5 KW. The elements shall be wired so
that only one element can operate at a time.
2.9 PUMPS
2.9.1 Sump Pumps
Sump pumps shall be of capacities indicated. The pumps shall be of the

automatic, electric motor-driven, submerged type, complete with necessary
control equipment and with a split or solid cast-iron or steel cover
plate. The pumps shall be direct-connected by an approved flexible
coupling to a vertical electric motor having a continuous oiling device or
packed bearings sealed against dirt and moisture. Motors shall be totally
enclosed, fan-cooled of sizes as indicated and shall be equipped with an
across-the-line magnetic controller in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
Integral size motors shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance
with NEMA MG 1. Each pump shall be fitted with a high-grade thrust
bearing mounted above the floor. Each shaft shall have an alignment
bearing at each end, and the suction inlet shall be between 3 and 6 inches
above the sump bottom. The suction side of each pump shall have a
strainer of ample capacity. A float switch assembly, with the switch
completely enclosed in a NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, shall start and stop
each motor at predetermined water levels. Duplex pumps shall be equipped
with an automatic alternator to change the lead operation from one pump to
the other, and for starting the second pump if the flow exceeds the
capacity of the first pump. The discharge line from each pump shall be
provided with a union or flange, a nonclog swing check valve, and a stop
valve in an accessible location near the pump.
2.9.2 Circulating Pumps
Domestic hot water circulating pumps shall be electrically driven,

single-stage, centrifugal, with mechanical seals, suitable for the
intended service. Pump and motor shall be close-coupled with an
overhung impeller, or supported by the piping on which it is installed.
The shaft shall be one-piece, heat-treated, corrosion-resisting steel with
impeller and smooth-surfaced housing of bronze.
Motor shall be totally enclosed, fan-cooled and shall have sufficient

horsepower for the service required. Each pump motor shall be equipped
with an across-the-line magnetic controller in a NEMA 250, Type 1
enclosure with "START-STOP" switch in cover.
Integral size motors shall be premium efficiency type in accordance with

NEMA MG 1. Pump motors smaller than 1 hp Fractional horsepower pump motors
shall have integral thermal overload protection in accordance with
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Guards shall shield
exposed moving parts.
2.10 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE METER
Cold water meters 2 inches and smaller shall be positive displacement type
conforming to AWWA C700. Cold water meters 2-1/2 inches and larger shall
be turbine type conforming to AWWA C701. Meter register may be round or
straight reading type. Meter shall be provided with a pulse generator,
remote readout register and all necessary wiring and accessories.
2.11 ELECTRICAL WORK
Provide electrical motor driven equipment specified complete with motors,

motor starters, and controls as specified herein and in Section 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide internal wiring for components of
packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Provide high

efficiency type, single-phase, fractional-horsepower alternating-current
motors, including motors that are part of a system, corresponding to the
applications in accordance with NEMA MG 11. Provide motors in accordance
with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive the load at the specified
capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor.
Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified.
Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop
operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop. Motor
torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20
seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals
during one starting period. Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease
supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.
Controllers and contactors shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the
controls provided. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal
devices required for the operation specified and any control wiring
required for controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be
provided. For packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide
controllers, including the required monitors and timed restart.
Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided
under and conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.12 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS
2.12.1 Escutcheon Plates
Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors,
walls, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide chromium-plated on copper
alloy plates or polished stainless steel finish in finished spaces.
Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces.
2.12.2 Pipe Sleeves
Provide where piping passes entirely through walls, ceilings, roofs, and
floors. Sleeves are not required where supply drain, waste, and vent
(DWV) piping passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade, except
where penetrating a membrane waterproof floor.
2.12.2.1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete
Provide steel pipe sleeves or schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe sleeves.

Sleeves are not required where drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes
through concrete floor slabs located on grade. Core drilling of masonry
and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the
core-drilled hole are completely grouted smooth.
2.12.2.2 Sleeves Not in Masonry and Concrete
Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet.
2.12.3 Pipe Hangers (Supports)
Provide MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, Type 1 with adjustable type steel support
rods, except as specified or indicated otherwise. Attach to steel joists
with Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining straps. Attach to Steel W or S
beams with Type 21, 28, 29, or 30 clamps. Attach to steel angles and
vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel
adapter. Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with drilled
hole on centerline and double nut and washer. Attach to concrete with
Type 18 insert or drilled expansion anchor. Provide Type 40 insulation
protection shield for insulated piping.
2.12.4 Nameplates
Provide 0.125 inch thick melamine laminated plastic nameplates, black

matte finish with white center core, for equipment, gages, thermometers,
and valves; valves in supplies to faucets will not require nameplates.
Accurately align lettering and engrave minimum of 0.25 inch high normal
block lettering into the white core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be
1.0 by 2.5 inches. Key nameplates to a chart and schedule for each
system. Frame charts and schedules under glass and place where directed
near each system. Furnish two copies of each chart and schedule.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Piping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements.

Piping located in shafts that constitute air ducts or that enclose air
ducts shall be noncombustible in accordance with NFPA 90A. Installation
of plastic pipe where in compliance with NFPA may be installed in
accordance with PPFA Fire Man. The plumbing system shall be installed
complete with necessary fixtures, fittings, traps, valves, and
accessories. Drainage piping shall be extended 5 feet outside the
building, unless otherwise indicated. Sewer and water pipes shall be laid
in separate trenches, except when otherwise shown. Exterior underground
utilities shall be at least 36 inches below the finish grade or as
indicated on the drawings. If trenches are closed or the pipes are
otherwise covered before being connected to the service lines, the
location of the end of each plumbing utility shall be marked with a stake
or other acceptable means. Valves shall be installed with control no
lower than the valve body.
3.1.1 Water Pipe, Fittings, and Connections
3.1.1.1 Utilities
The piping shall be extended to fixtures, outlets, and equipment. The

hot-water and cold-water piping system shall be arranged and installed to
permit draining. The supply line to each item of equipment or fixture,
except faucets, flush valves, or other control valves which are supplied
with integral stops, shall be equipped with a shutoff valve to enable
isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with
operation of other equipment or fixtures. Supply piping to fixtures,
faucets, and flushing devices shall be anchored to prevent movement.
3.1.1.2 Cutting and Repairing
The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and unnecessary cutting
of construction shall be avoided. Damage to building, piping, wiring, or
equipment as a result of cutting shall be repaired by mechanics skilled in
the trade involved.
3.1.1.3 Protection of Fixtures, Materials, and Equipment
Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation.

Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and protected against
dirt, water, chemicals, and mechanical injury. Upon completion of the
work, the fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned,
adjusted, and operated. Safety guards shall be provided for exposed
rotating equipment.
3.1.1.4 Mains, Branches, and Runouts
Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be accurately cut and

worked into place without springing or forcing. Structural portions of
the building shall not be weakened. Aboveground piping shall run parallel
with the lines of the building, unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes
from service lines may be taken from top, bottom, or side of main, using
crossover fittings required by structural or installation conditions.
Supply pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance
from other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2 inch
between finished covering on the different services. Bare and insulated
water lines shall not bear directly against building structural elements
so as to transmit sound to the structure or to prevent flexible movement
of the lines. Water pipe shall not be buried in or under floors unless
specifically indicated or approved. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made
with reducing fittings. Use of bushings will not be permitted except for
use in situations in which standard factory fabricated components are
furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation practice. Change
in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe 4
inches and smaller will be permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and
wide sweep bends are formed. The center-line radius of bends shall be not
less than six diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles,
flattening, or other malformations will not be acceptable.
3.1.1.5 Pipe Drains
Pipe drains indicated shall consist of 3/4 inch hose bibb with renewable
seat and ball valve ahead of hose bibb. At other low points, 3/4 inch
brass plugs or caps shall be provided. Disconnection of the supply piping
at the fixture is an acceptable drain.
3.1.1.6 Expansion and Contraction of Piping
Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of water

pipe. Each hot-water and hot-water circulation riser shall have expansion
loops or other provisions such as offsets, changes in direction, etc.,
where indicated and/or required. Risers shall be securely anchored as
required or where indicated to force expansion to loops. Branch
connections from risers shall be made with ample swing or offset to avoid
undue strain on fittings or short pipe lengths. Horizontal runs of pipe
over 50 feet in length shall be anchored to the wall or the supporting
construction about midway on the run to force expansion, evenly divided,
toward the ends. Sufficient flexibility shall be provided on branch
runouts from mains and risers to provide for expansion and contraction of
piping. Flexibility shall be provided by installing one or more turns in
the line so that piping will spring enough to allow for expansion without
straining. If mechanical grooved pipe coupling systems are provided, the
deviation from design requirements for expansion and contraction may be
allowed pending approval of Contracting Officer.
3.1.1.7 Thrust Restraint
Plugs, caps, tees, valves and bends deflecting 11.25 degrees or more,
either vertically or horizontally, in waterlines 4 inches in diameter or
larger shall be provided with thrust blocks, where indicated, to prevent
movement. Thrust blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than: 1
cement, 2-1/2 sand, 5 gravel; and having a compressive strength of not
less than 2000 psi after 28 days. Blocking shall be placed between solid
ground and the fitting to be anchored. Unless otherwise indicated or
directed, the base and thrust bearing sides of the thrust block shall be
poured against undisturbed earth. The side of the thrust block not
subject to thrust shall be poured against forms. The area of bearing will
be as shown. Blocking shall be placed so that the joints of the fitting
are accessible for repair. Steel rods and clamps, protected by
galvanizing or by coating with bituminous paint, shall be used to anchor
vertical down bends into gravity thrust blocks.
3.1.1.8 Commercial-Type Water Hammer Arresters
Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall be provided on hot- and

cold-water supplies and shall be located as generally indicated, with
precise location and sizing to be in accordance with PDI WH 201. Water
hammer arresters, where concealed, shall be accessible by means of access
doors or removable panels. Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall
conform to ASSE 1010. Vertical capped pipe columns will not be permitted.
3.1.2 Joints
Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and
notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Joints
shall be made up with fittings of compatible material and made for the
specific purpose intended.
3.1.2.1 Threaded
Threaded joints shall have American Standard taper pipe threads conforming
to ASME B1.20.1. Only male pipe threads shall be coated with graphite or
with an approved graphite compound, or with an inert filler and oil, or
shall have a polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied.
3.1.2.2 Unions and Flanges
Unions, flanges and mechanical couplings shall not be concealed in walls,

ceilings, or partitions. Unions shall be used on pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches
and smaller; flanges shall be used on pipe sizes 3 inches and larger.
3.1.2.3 Cast Iron Soil, Waste and Vent Pipe
Bell and spigot compression and hubless gasketed clamp joints for soil,
waste and vent piping shall be installed per the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.1.2.4 Copper Tube and Pipe
a. Brazed. Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with AWS B2.2/B2.2M,

ASME B16.50, and CDA A4015 with flux and are acceptable for all pipe
sizes. Copper to copper joints shall include the use of
copper-phosphorus or copper-phosphorus-silver brazing metal without
flux. Brazing of dissimilar metals (copper to bronze or brass) shall

include the use of flux with either a copper-phosphorus,
copper-phosphorus-silver or a silver brazing filler metal.
b. Soldered. Soldered joints shall be made with flux and are only
acceptable for piping 2 inches and smaller. Soldered joints shall
conform to ASME B31.5 and CDA A4015. Soldered joints shall not be
used in compressed air piping between the air compressor and the
receiver.
c. Copper Tube Extracted Joint. Mechanically extracted joints shall be

made in accordance with ICC IPC.
3.1.2.5 Other Joint Methods
3.1.3 Dissimilar Pipe Materials
Connections between ferrous and non-ferrous copper water pipe shall be

made with dielectric unions or flange waterways. Dielectric waterways
shall have temperature and pressure rating equal to or greater than that
specified for the connecting piping. Waterways shall have metal
connections on both ends suited to match connecting piping. Dielectric
waterways shall be internally lined with an insulator specifically
designed to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals. Dielectric
flanges shall meet the performance requirements described herein for
dielectric waterways. Connecting joints between plastic and metallic pipe
shall be made with transition fitting for the specific purpose.
3.1.4 Corrosion Protection for Buried Pipe and Fittings
Ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pipe, fittings, and joints shall have a
protective coating. Additionally, ductile iron, cast iron, and steel
pressure pipe shall have a cathodic protection system and joint bonding.
Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected in accordance with
NACE SP0169 and as otherwise specified. The pipe shall be cleaned and the
coating system applied prior to pipe tightness testing. Joints and
fittings shall be cleaned and the coating system applied after pipe
tightness testing. For tape coating systems, the tape shall conform to
AWWA C203 and shall be applied with a 50 percent overlap. Primer utilized
with tape type coating systems shall be as recommended by the tape
manufacturer.
3.1.5 Pipe Sleeves and Flashing
Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set in their proper and permanent
location.
3.1.5.1 Sleeve Requirements
Unless indicated otherwise, provide pipe sleeves meeting the following

requirements:
Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide

sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls,
ceilings, roofs, and floors.
A modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be installed in lieu of a

waterproofing clamping flange and caulking and sealing of annular space
between pipe and sleeve. The seals shall consist of interlocking
synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space

between the pipe and sleeve using galvanized steel bolts, nuts, and
pressure plates. The links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form
a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each
bolt head and each nut. After the seal assembly is properly positioned in
the sleeve, tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements
to expand and provide a watertight seal between the pipe and the sleeve.
Each seal assembly shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to
fit the pipe and sleeve involved.
Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members, except where

indicated or approved. Rectangular and square openings shall be as
detailed. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor, or roof,
and shall be cut flush with each surface, except for special
circumstances. Pipe sleeves passing through floors in wet areas such as
mechanical equipment rooms, lavatories, kitchens, and other plumbing
fixture areas shall extend a minimum of 4 inches above the finished floor.
Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be of a size to provide a

minimum of 1/4 inch clearance between bare pipe or insulation and inside
of sleeve or between insulation and inside of sleeve. Sleeves in bearing
walls and concrete slab on grade floors shall be steel pipe or cast-iron
pipe. Sleeves in nonbearing walls or ceilings may be steel pipe,
cast-iron pipe, galvanized sheet metal with lock-type longitudinal seam,
or plastic.
Except as otherwise specified, the annular space between pipe and sleeve,
or between jacket over insulation and sleeve, shall be sealed as indicated
with sealants conforming to ASTM C920 and with a primer, backstop material
and surface preparation as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
The annular space between pipe and sleeve, between bare insulation and
sleeve or between jacket over insulation and sleeve shall not be sealed
for interior walls which are not designated as fire rated.
Sleeves through below-grade walls in contact with earth shall be recessed

1/2 inch from wall surfaces on both sides. Annular space between pipe and
sleeve shall be filled with backing material and sealants in the joint
between the pipe and concrete or masonry wall as specified above. Sealant
selected for the earth side of the wall shall be compatible with
dampproofing/waterproofing materials that are to be applied over the joint
sealant. Pipe sleeves in fire-rated walls shall conform to the
requirements in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.5.2 Flashing Requirements
Pipes passing through roof shall be installed through a 16 ounce copper

flashing, each within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be
suitably formed, and the skirt or flange shall extend not less than 8
inches from the pipe and shall be set over the roof or floor membrane in a
solid coating of bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend up the pipe
a minimum of 10 inches. For cleanouts, the flashing shall be turned down
into the hub and caulked after placing the ferrule. Pipes passing through
pitched roofs shall be flashed, using lead or copper flashing, with an
adjustable integral flange of adequate size to extend not less than 8
inches from the pipe in all directions and lapped into the roofing to
provide a watertight seal. The annular space between the flashing and the
bare pipe or between the flashing and the metal-jacket-covered insulation
shall be sealed as indicated. Flashing for dry vents shall be turned down
into the pipe to form a waterproof joint. Pipes, up to and including 10
inches in diameter, passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane

may be installed through a cast-iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor
lugs, flashing-clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts. Flashing
shield shall be fitted into the sleeve clamping device. Pipes passing
through wall waterproofing membrane shall be sleeved as described above.
A waterproofing clamping flange shall be installed.
3.1.5.3 Waterproofing
Waterproofing at floor-mounted water closets shall be accomplished by

forming a flashing guard from soft-tempered sheet copper. The center of
the sheet shall be perforated and turned down approximately 1-1/2 inches
to fit between the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside
diameter of the cast-iron or steel pipe sleeve. The turned-down portion
of the flashing guard shall be embedded in sealant to a depth of
approximately 1-1/2 inches; then the sealant shall be finished off flush
to floor level between the flashing guard and drainpipe. The flashing
guard of sheet copper shall extend not less than 8 inches from the
drainpipe and shall be lapped between the floor membrane in a solid
coating of bituminous cement. If cast-iron water closet floor flanges are
used, the space between the pipe sleeve and drainpipe shall be sealed with
sealant and the flashing guard shall be upturned approximately 1-1/2 inches
to fit the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter of
the water closet floor flange. The upturned portion of the sheet fitted
into the floor flange shall be sealed.
3.1.5.4 Optional Counterflashing
Instead of turning the flashing down into a dry vent pipe, or caulking and
sealing the annular space between the pipe and flashing or
metal-jacket-covered insulation and flashing, counterflashing may be
accomplished by utilizing the following:
a. A standard roof coupling for threaded pipe up to 6 inches in diameter.
b. A tack-welded or banded-metal rain shield around the pipe.
3.1.5.5 Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors
Where pipes, fixture drains, floor drains, cleanouts or similar items

penetrate slab on grade floors, except at penetrations of floors with
waterproofing membrane as specified in paragraphs Flashing Requirements
and Waterproofing, a groove 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide by 1/4 to 3/8 inch deep
shall be formed around the pipe, fitting or drain. The groove shall be
filled with a sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
3.1.5.6 Pipe Penetrations
Provide sealants for all pipe penetrations. All pipe penetrations shall
be sealed to prevent infiltration of air, insects, and vermin.
3.1.6 Fire Seal
Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire-partitions, fire-rated pipe

chase walls or floors above grade, a fire seal shall be provided as
specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.7 Supports
3.1.7.1 General
Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to

permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the
load. Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in
accurate alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to prevent
buckling, swaying, and undue strain. Piping subjected to vertical
movement when operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be
supported by variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support
hangers. In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a
clip or clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support
member. Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger
and support spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe
run. Threaded sections of rods shall not be formed or bent.
3.1.7.2 Pipe Supports and Structural Bracing, Seismic Requirements
Piping and attached valves shall be supported and braced to resist seismic
loads as specified in Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT and Section 22 05 48.00 20 MECHANICAL SOUND,
VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL . Structural steel required for
reinforcement to properly support piping, headers, and equipment, but not
shown, shall be provided. Material used for supports shall be as
specified in Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.
3.1.7.3 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
Installation of pipe hangers, inserts and supports shall conform to

MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, except as modified herein.
a. Types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used.
b. Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe.
c. Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is

placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be used if
they otherwise meet the requirements for type 18 inserts.
d. Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-69 and shall have
both locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the manufacturer.
Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not
acceptable.
e. Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished

with an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.
f. Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated

frames.
g. Type 39 saddles shall be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger

when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or higher. Type 39
saddles shall be welded to the pipe.
h. Type 40 shields shall:
(1) Be used on insulated pipe less than 4 inches.
(2) Be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the

temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or less.
(3) Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes. High density
inserts shall have a density of 8 pcf or greater.
i. Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and

a support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting
joint at each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall
be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves. Operating temperatures in
determining hanger spacing for PVC or CPVC pipe shall be 120 degrees F
for PVC and 180 degrees F for CPVC. Horizontal pipe runs shall
include allowances for expansion and contraction.
j. Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at

slab-on-grade, at intervals of not more than 15 feet nor more than 8
feet from end of risers, and at vent terminations. Vertical pipe
risers shall include allowances for expansion and contraction.
k. Type 35 guides using steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)

or graphite slides shall be provided to allow longitudinal pipe
movement. Slide materials shall be suitable for the system operating
temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered.
Lateral restraints shall be provided as needed. Where steel slides do
not require provisions for lateral restraint the following may be used:
(1) On pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is
60 degrees F or higher, a Type 39 saddle, welded to the pipe, may
freely rest on a steel plate.
(2) On pipe less than 4 inches a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe
or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate.
(3) On pipe 4 inches and larger carrying medium less that 60 degrees F
a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation, may freely
rest on a steel plate.
l. Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall be the size of the

outside diameter of the insulation. The insulation shall be
continuous through the hanger on all pipe sizes and applications.
m. Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is not
desirable, the type 35 guide shall include a pipe cradle, welded to
the guide structure and strapped securely to the pipe. The pipe shall
be separated from the slide material by at least 4 inches or by an
amount adequate for the insulation, whichever is greater.
n. Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress, distort, cut
or abrade the piping, and shall allow free movement of pipe except
where otherwise required in the control of expansion/contraction.
3.1.7.4 Structural Attachments
Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in

concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts
and anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5.
Supports shall not be attached to metal decking. Supports shall not be
attached to the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks
unless approved by the Contracting Officer. Masonry anchors for overhead
applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only.
3.1.8 Welded Installation
Plumbing pipe weldments shall be as indicated. Changes in direction of

piping shall be made with welding fittings only; mitering or notching pipe
to form elbows and tees or other similar type construction will not be
permitted. Branch connection may be made with either welding tees or
forged branch outlet fittings. Branch outlet fittings shall be forged,
flared for improvement of flow where attached to the run, and reinforced
against external strains. Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and
inspection of weld shall conform to ASME B31.1. Weld defects shall be
removed and repairs made to the weld, or the weld joints shall be entirely
removed and rewelded. After filler metal has been removed from its
original package, it shall be protected or stored so that its
characteristics or welding properties are not affected. Electrodes that
have been wetted or that have lost any of their coating shall not be used.
3.1.9 Pipe Cleanouts
Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout
plugs larger than 4 inches will not be required. A cleanout installed in
connection with cast-iron soil pipe shall consist of a long-sweep 1/4 bend
or one or two 1/8 bends extended to the place shown. An extra-heavy
cast-brass or cast-iron ferrule with countersunk cast-brass head screw
plug shall be caulked into the hub of the fitting and shall be flush with
the floor. Cleanouts in connection with other pipe, where indicated,
shall be T-pattern, 90-degree branch drainage fittings with cast-brass
screw plugs, except plastic plugs shall be installed in plastic pipe.
Plugs shall be the same size as the pipe up to and including 4 inches.
Cleanout tee branches with screw plug shall be installed at the foot of
soil and waste stacks, at the foot of interior downspouts, on each
connection to building storm drain where interior downspouts are
indicated, and on each building drain outside the building. Cleanout tee
branches may be omitted on stacks in single story buildings with
slab-on-grade construction or where less than 18 inches of crawl space is
provided under the floor. Cleanouts on pipe concealed in partitions shall
be provided with chromium plated bronze, nickel bronze, nickel brass or
stainless steel flush type access cover plates. Round access covers shall
be provided and secured to plugs with securing screw. Square access
covers may be provided with matching frames, anchoring lugs and cover
screws. Cleanouts in finished walls shall have access covers and frames
installed flush with the finished wall. Cleanouts installed in finished
floors subject to foot traffic shall be provided with a chrome-plated cast
brass, nickel brass, or nickel bronze cover secured to the plug or cover
frame and set flush with the finished floor. Heads of fastening screws
shall not project above the cover surface. Where cleanouts are provided
with adjustable heads, the heads shall be cast iron.
3.2 WATER HEATERS
3.2.1 Relief Valves
No valves shall be installed between a relief valve and its water heater.
The P&T relief valve shall be installed where the valve actuator comes in
contact with the hottest water in the heater. Whenever possible, the
relief valve shall be installed directly in a tapping in the heater;
otherwise, the P&T valve shall be installed in the hot-water outlet
piping. A vacuum relief valve shall be provided on the cold water supply
line to the hot-water storage tank or water heater and mounted above and
within 6 inches above the top of the tank or water heater.
3.2.2 Heat Traps
Piping to and from each water heater and hot water storage tank shall be
routed horizontally and downward a minimum of 2 feet before turning in an
upward direction.
3.2.3 Connections to Water Heaters
Connections of metallic pipe to water heaters shall be made with

dielectric unions or flanges.
3.3 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS
Polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided

where exposed to view. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with
the faucets, or concealed type of lock-shield, and loose-key pattern stops
for supplies with threaded, sweat or solvent weld inlets shall be
furnished and installed with fixtures. Where connections between copper
tubing and faucets are made by rubber compression fittings, a beading tool
shall be used to mechanically deform the tubing above the compression
fitting. Exposed traps and supply pipes for fixtures and equipment shall
be connected to the rough piping systems at the wall, unless otherwise
specified under the item. Floor and wall escutcheons shall be as
specified. Drain lines and hot water lines of fixtures for handicapped
personnel shall be insulated and do not require polished chrome finish.
Plumbing fixtures and accessories shall be installed within the space
shown.
3.3.1 Fixture Connections
Where space limitations prohibit standard fittings in conjunction with the

cast-iron floor flange, special short-radius fittings shall be provided.
Connections between earthenware fixtures and flanges on soil pipe shall be
made gastight and watertight with a closet-setting compound or neoprene
gasket and seal. Use of natural rubber gaskets or putty will not be
permitted. Fixtures with outlet flanges shall be set the proper distance
from floor or wall to make a first-class joint with the closet-setting
compound or gasket and fixture used.
3.3.2 Flushometer Valves
Flushometer valves shall be secured to prevent movement by anchoring the

long finished top spud connecting tube to wall adjacent to valve with
approved metal bracket. Flushometer valves for water closets shall be
installed 39 inches above the floor, except at water closets intended for
use by the physically handicapped where flushometer valves shall be
mounted at approximately 30 inches above the floor and arranged to avoid
interference with grab bars. In addition, for water closets intended for
handicap use, the flush valve handle shall be installed on the wide side
of the enclosure.
3.3.3 Height of Fixture Rims Above Floor
Lavatories shall be mounted with rim 31 inches above finished floor.

Wall-hung drinking fountains and water coolers shall be installed with rim
42 inches above floor. Installation of fixtures for use by the physically
handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117.1.
3.3.4 Fixture Supports
Fixture supports for off-the-floor lavatories, urinals, and other fixtures

of similar size, design, and use, shall be of the chair-carrier type. The
carrier shall provide the necessary means of mounting the fixture, with a
foot or feet to anchor the assembly to the floor slab. Adjustability
shall be provided to locate the fixture at the desired height and in
proper relation to the wall. Support plates, in lieu of chair carrier,
shall be fastened to the wall structure only where it is not possible to
anchor a floor-mounted chair carrier to the floor slab.
3.3.4.1 Support for Solid Masonry Construction
Chair carrier shall be anchored to the floor slab. Where a floor-anchored

chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be imbedded in
the masonry wall.
3.3.4.2 Support for Concrete-Masonry Wall Construction
Chair carrier shall be anchored to floor slab. Where a floor-anchored

chair carrier cannot be used, a suitable wall plate shall be fastened to
the concrete wall using through bolts and a back-up plate.
3.3.4.3 Support for Steel Stud Frame Partitions
Chair carrier shall be used. The anchor feet and tubular uprights shall
be of the heavy duty design; and feet (bases) shall be steel and welded to
a square or rectangular steel tube upright. Wall plates, in lieu of
floor-anchored chair carriers, shall be used only if adjoining steel
partition studs are suitably reinforced to support a wall plate bolted to
these studs.
3.3.5 Access Panels
Access panels shall be provided for concealed valves and controls, or any
item requiring inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of
sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be serviced,
maintained, or replaced. Access panels shall be as specified in Section
05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.
3.3.6 Traps
Each trap shall be placed as near the fixture as possible, and no fixture
shall be double-trapped. Traps installed on cast-iron soil pipe shall be
cast iron. Traps installed on steel pipe or copper tubing shall be
recess-drainage pattern, or brass-tube type. Traps installed on plastic
pipe may be plastic conforming to ASTM D3311. Traps for acid-resisting
waste shall be of the same material as the pipe.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
3.4.1 Identification Tags
Identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or engraved

anodized aluminum, indicating service and valve number shall be installed
on valves, except those valves installed on supplies at plumbing fixtures.
Tags shall be 1-3/8 inch minimum diameter, and marking shall be stamped or
engraved. Indentations shall be black, for reading clarity. Tags shall

be attached to valves with No. 12 AWG, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded
chain, or plastic straps designed for that purpose.
3.4.2 Pipe Color Code Marking
Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00

PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.4.3 Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components
Scheme shall be provided in buildings having suspended grid ceilings. The

color coding scheme shall identify points of access for maintenance and
operation of operable components which are not visible from the finished
space and installed in the space directly above the suspended grid
ceiling. The operable components shall include valves, dampers, switches,
linkages and thermostats. The color coding scheme shall consist of a
color code board and colored metal disks. Each colored metal disk shall
be approximately 3/8 inch in diameter and secured to removable ceiling
panels with fasteners. The fasteners shall be inserted into the ceiling
panels so that the fasteners will be concealed from view. The fasteners
shall be manually removable without tools and shall not separate from the
ceiling panels when panels are dropped from ceiling height. Installation
of colored metal disks shall follow completion of the finished surface on
which the disks are to be fastened. The color code board shall have the
approximate dimensions of 3 foot width, 30 inches height, and 1/2 inch
thickness. The board shall be made of wood fiberboard and framed under
glass or 1/16 inch transparent plastic cover. Unless otherwise directed,
the color code symbols shall be approximately 3/4 inch in diameter and the
related lettering in 1/2 inch high capital letters. The color code board
shall be mounted and located in the mechanical or equipment room.
3.5 ESCUTCHEONS
Escutcheons shall be provided at finished surfaces where bare or insulated

piping, exposed to view, passes through floors, walls, or ceilings, except
in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms. Escutcheons shall be fastened
securely to pipe or pipe covering and shall be satin-finish,
corrosion-resisting steel, polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or
polished chromium-plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be either
one-piece or split-pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or
setscrew.
3.6 PAINTING
Painting of pipes, hangers, supports, and other iron work, either in

concealed spaces or exposed spaces, to match existing.
3.6.1 Painting of New Equipment
New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall
be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.
3.6.1.1 Factory Painting Systems
Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject

to certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand
125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors
shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test
shall be in accordance with ASTM B117, and for that test the acceptance
criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test,
the paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and
no loss of adhesion; and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage
beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark.
The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment
shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If
manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use
on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory
painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.
3.6.1.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces
Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces
need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the
surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and
solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces
subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned to
bare metal.
Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat
after the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting
and retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat
shall be aluminum or light gray.
a. Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the

metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F shall
receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry
film thickness of one mil per coat.
b. Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to

temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of
400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum
thickness of 2 mils.
c. Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to

temperatures greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 600
degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film
3.7 TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION
3.7.1 Plumbing System
The following tests shall be performed on the plumbing system in

accordance with ICC IPC, except that the drainage and vent system final
test shall include the smoke test. The Contractor has the option to
perform a peppermint test in lieu of the smoke test. If a peppermint test
is chosen, the Contractor must submit a testing procedure to the
Contracting Officer for approval.
a. Drainage and Vent Systems Test. The final test shall include a smoke
test.
b. Building Sewers Tests.
c. Water Supply Systems Tests.
3.7.2 Defective Work
If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall

be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspection and tests shall be
repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. Caulking
of screwed joints or holes will not be acceptable.
3.7.3 System Flushing
3.7.3.1 During Flushing
Before operational tests or disinfection, potable water piping system

shall be flushed with hot potable water. Sufficient water shall be used
to produce a water velocity that is capable of entraining and removing
debris in all portions of the piping system. This requires simultaneous
operation of all fixtures on a common branch or main in order to produce a
flushing velocity of approximately 4 fps through all portions of the
piping system. In the event that this is impossible due to size of
system, the Contracting Officer (or the designated representative) shall
specify the number of fixtures to be operated during flushing. Contractor
shall provide adequate personnel to monitor the flushing operation and to
ensure that drain lines are unobstructed in order to prevent flooding of
the facility. Contractor shall be responsible for any flood damage
resulting from flushing of the system. Flushing shall be continued until
entrained dirt and other foreign materials have been removed and until
discharge water shows no discoloration. All faucets and drinking water
fountains, to include any device considered as an end point device by
NSF/ANSI 61, Section 9, shall be flushed a minimum of 0.25 gallons per 24
hour period, ten times over a 14 day period.
3.7.3.2 After Flushing
System shall be drained at low points. Strainer screens shall be

removed, cleaned, and replaced. After flushing and cleaning, systems
shall be prepared for testing by immediately filling water piping with
clean, fresh potable water. Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage
to the finish, furnishings, or parts of the building due to the
Contractor's failure to properly clean the piping system shall be repaired
by the Contractor. When the system flushing is complete, the hot-water
system shall be adjusted for uniform circulation. Flushing devices and
automatic control systems shall be adjusted for proper operation according
to manufacturer's instructions. Comply with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP for minimum
efficiency requirements. Unless more stringent local requirements exist,
lead levels shall not exceed limits established by 40 CFR 141.80 (c)(1).
The water supply to the building shall be tested separately to ensure that
any lead contamination found during potable water system testing is due to
work being performed inside the building.
3.7.4 Operational Test
Upon completion of flushing and prior to disinfection procedures, the

Contractor shall subject the plumbing system to operating tests to
demonstrate satisfactory installation, connections, adjustments, and
functional and operational efficiency. Such operating tests shall cover a
period of not less than 8 hours for each system and shall include the
following information in a report with conclusion as to the adequacy of
the system:
a. Time, date, and duration of test.
b. Water pressures at the most remote and the highest fixtures.
c. Operation of each fixture and fixture trim.
d. Operation of each valve, hydrant, and faucet.
e. Pump suction and discharge pressures.
f. Temperature of each domestic hot-water supply.
g. Operation of each floor and roof drain by flooding with water.
3.7.5 Disinfection
After all system components are provided and operational tests are
complete, the entire domestic hot- and cold-water distribution system
shall be disinfected. Before introducing disinfecting chlorination
material, entire system shall be flushed with potable water until any
entrained dirt and other foreign materials have been removed.
Water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA C651 and

AWWA C652 as modified and supplemented by this specification. The
chlorinating material shall be hypochlorites or liquid chlorine. The
chlorinating material shall be fed into the water piping system at a
constant rate at a concentration of at least 50 parts per
million (ppm). Feed a properly adjusted hypochlorite solution
injected into the system with a hypochlorinator, or inject liquid
chlorine into the system through a solution-feed chlorinator and
booster pump until the entire system is completely filled.
Test the chlorine residual level in the water at 6 hour intervals for a
continuous period of 24 hours. If at the end of a 6 hour interval, the
chlorine residual has dropped to less than 25 ppm, flush the piping
including tanks with potable water, and repeat the above chlorination
procedures. During the chlorination period, each valve and faucet
shall be opened and closed several times.
After the second 24 hour period, verify that no less than 25 ppm
chlorine residual remains in the treated system. The 24 hour
chlorination procedure must be repeated until no less than 25 ppm
chlorine residual remains in the treated system.
Upon the specified verification, the system including tanks shall then be
flushed with potable water until the residual chlorine level is
reduced to less than one part per million. During the flushing
period, each valve and faucet shall be opened and closed several
times.
Take addition samples of water in disinfected containers, for bacterial

examination, at locations specified by the Contracting Officer
Test these samples for total coliform organisms (coliform bacteria,
fecal coliform, streptococcal, and other bacteria) in accordance with
EPA SM 9223 or AWWA 10084. The testing method used shall be EPA
approved for drinking water systems and shall comply with applicable
local and state requirements.
Disinfection shall be repeated until bacterial tests indicate the absence

of coliform organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters)
in the samples for at least 2 full days. The system will not be
accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained.
3.7.6 OPTIONAL DISINFECTION METHOD
Disinfect new potable water piping and affected portions of existing

potable water piping with geothermal water. Geothermal water shall be not
less than 194 degrees F and contact time shall be not less than 30
minutes. After disinfection, thoroughly flush new portable water piping
and affected portions of existing potable water piping with the
chlorinated base water supply for a minimum of two hours.
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated

containers. Return solvent and oil soaked rags for contaminant recovery
and laundering or for proper disposal. Close and seal tightly partly used
sealant and adhesive containers and store in protected, well-ventilated,
fire-safe area at moderate temperature. Place used sealant and adhesive
tubes and containers in areas designated for hazardous waste. Separate
copper and ferrous pipe waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan
and place in designated areas for reuse.
3.9 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS
Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic, including wiring

and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system,
shall be posted where directed. Condensed operating instructions
explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the
system for normal safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and
stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as specified
above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams.
The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the
systems.
3.10 PERFORMANCE OF WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT
Standard rating condition terms are as follows:
EF = Energy factor, minimum overall efficiency.
ET = Minimum thermal efficiency with 70 degrees F delta T.
SL = Standby loss is maximum (Btu/h) based on a 70 degrees F

temperature difference between stored water and ambient requirements.
V = Rated volume in gallons
Q = Nameplate input rate in kW (Btu/h)
3.10.1 Storage Water Heaters
3.10.1.1 Electric
a. Storage capacity of 60 gallons shall have a minimum energy factor (EF)

of 0.93 or higher per FEMP requirements.
b. Storage capacity of 60 gallons or more shall have a minimum energy

factor (EF) of 0.91 or higher per FEMP requirements.
3.11 TABLES
TABLE I
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS
Item Pipe and Fitting Materials SERVICE SERVICE SERVICE SERVICE SERVICE SERVICE
# A B C D E F
1 Cast iron soil pipe and X X X X X

fittings, hub and spigot,
ASTM A74 with compression
gaskets. Pipe and
fittings shall be marked
with the CISPI trademark.
2 Cast iron soil pipe and X X X X

fittings hubless,
CISPI 301 and ASTM A888.
Pipe and fittings shall
be marked with the CISPI
trademark.
3 Cast iron drainage X X X

fittings, threaded,
ASME B16.12 for use with
Item 10
4 Cast iron screwed fittings X X

(threaded) ASME B16.4 for
use with Item 10
5 Grooved pipe couplings, X X X X

ferrous and non-ferrous
pipe ASTM A536 And
ASTM A47/A47M
6 Ductile iron grooved joint X X X X

fittings for ferrous pipe
ASTM A536 and ASTM A47/A47M
for use with Item 5
TABLE I
# A B C D E F
7 Wrought copper grooved X X

joint pressure pressure
fittings for non-ferrous
pipe ASTM B75/B75M C12200,
ASTM B152/B152M, C11000,
ASME B16.22 ASME B16.22
for use with Item 5
8 Malleable-iron threaded X X
fittings, galvanized
Item 10
9 Steel pipe, seamless X X X

galvanized, ASTM A53/A53M,
Type S, Grade B
10 Seamless red brass pipe, X X

ASTM B43
11 Bronzed flanged fittings, X X

Items 11 and 14
12 Cast copper alloy solder X X

joint pressure fittings,
ASME B16.18for use with
Item 14
13 Seamless copper pipe, X

ASTM B42
14 Cast bronze threaded X X

fittings, ASME B16.15
15 Copper drainage tube, X* X X* X X

(DWV), ASTM B306
TABLE I
# A B C D E F
16 Wrought copper and wrought X X X X X

alloy solder-joint
drainage fittings.
ASME B16.29
17 Cast copper alloy solder X X X X X

joint drainage fittings,
DWV, ASME B16.23
18 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene X X X X X X
(ABS) plastic drain,
waste, and vent pipe and
fittings ASTM D2661,
ASTM F628
SERVICE:
A - Underground Building Soil, Waste and Storm Drain
B - Aboveground Soil, Waste, Drain In Buildings
C - Underground Vent
D - Aboveground Vent
E - Interior Rainwater Conductors Aboveground
F - Corrosive Waste And Vent Above And Belowground
* - Hard Temper
TABLE II
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS
Item # Pipe and Fitting Materials SERVICE A SERVICE B SERVICE C SERVICE D
1 Malleable-iron threaded fittings:
a. Galvanized, ASME B16.3 for use X X X X

with Item 4a
b. Same as "a" but not galvanized X
for use with Item 4b
TABLE II
2 Grooved pipe couplings, ferrous pipe X X X

ASTM A536 and ASTM A47/A47M,
non-ferrous pipe, ASTM A536 and
ASTM A47/A47M
3 Ductile iron grooved joint fittings X X X

for ferrous pipe ASTM A536 and
ASTM A47/A47M, for use with Item 2
4 Steel pipe:
a. Seamless, galvanized, X X X X
ASTM A53/A53M, Type S, Grade B
b. Seamless, black, ASTM A53/A53M, X

Type S, Grade B
5 Seamless red brass pipe, ASTM B43 X X X
6 Bronze flanged fittings, ASME B16.24 X X X

for use with Items 5 and 7
7 Seamless copper pipe, ASTM B42 X X X
8 Seamless copper water tube, ASTM B88, X** X** X** X***
ASTM B88M
9 Cast bronze threaded fittings, X X X

ASME B16.15 for use with Items 5 and
7
10 Wrought copper and bronze X X X X

solder-joint pressure fittings,
ASME B16.22 for use with Items 5, 7
and 8
11 Steel pipeline flanges, MSS SP-44 X X
TABLE II
12 Fittings: brass or bronze; X X

ASME B16.15, and ASME B16.18
ASTM B828
13 Carbon steel pipe unions, X X X

socket-welding and threaded,
MSS SP-83
14 Malleable-iron threaded pipe unions X X

ASME B16.39
15 Nipples, pipe threaded ASTM A733 X X X
16 Press Fittings:
A - Cold Water Service Aboveground
B - Hot and Cold Water Distribution
180 degrees F Maximum Aboveground
C - Compressed Air Lubricated
D - Cold Water Service Belowground
Indicated types are minimum wall thicknesses.
** - Type L - Hard
*** - Type K - Hard temper with brazed joints only or type K-soft
temper without joints in or under floors
**** - In or under slab floors only brazed joints
TABLE III
STANDARD RATING CONDITIONS AND MINIMUM PERFORMANCE RATINGS FOR WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT
FUEL STORAGE INPUT RATING TEST PROCEDURE REQUIRED PERFORMANCE

CAPACITY
GALLONS
A. STORAGE WATER HEATERS
Elect. 60 min. 10 CFR 430 EF = 0.91
TERMS:
EF = Energy factor, minimum overall efficiency.

ET = Minimum thermal efficiency with 70 degrees F delta T.
SL = Standby loss is maximum Btu/h based on a 70 degree F temperature difference
between stored water and ambient requirements.
V = Rated storage volume in gallons
Q = Nameplate input rate in Btu/h
SECTION 22 05 48.00 20
MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL

04/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Code - Steel

Steel Products

Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness
ASTM D471 (2012a) Standard Test Method for Rubber

Property - Effect of Liquids

Materials
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
The provisions of Section 23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND

METHODS apply to this section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.3.1 Decibels dB
Measure of sound level. Decibels are referenced to either 20 uPa for

sound pressure levels or one pW for sound power levels. dBA is the
overall "A" weighted sound level.
1.3.2 Machinery
The vibration or noise producing equipment that must be isolated.
1.3.3 Manufacturer
The fabricator or supplier of vibration-isolation or seismic-protection

materials and equipment. For mechanical equipment and machinery the term
machinery manufacturer will be used.
SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 1

1.3.4 Micropascal uPa
10 to the minus 6 power newtons per square meter.
1.3.5 Picowatt pW
10 to the minus 12 power watts.
1.4.1 Machinery Manufacturer's Sound Data
For each piece of indicated machinery to be vibration isolated, the

calculated sound power test data or sound pressure test data as levels in
dB in the eight octave bands between 63 and 8,000 Hz. Refer sound power
levels to one pW and sound pressure levels to 20 uPa. Submit the overall
"A" weighted scale sound pressure level in dB. Submit the standard test
procedure used to obtain the sound power or pressure data for the
applicable vibration isolation equipment size.
1.4.2 Machinery
For each item of machinery, compare spring static deflections with the
specified minimum static deflection, to show that the calculated spring
static deflections are not less than the minimum static deflections
specified. Rated spring static deflections are not acceptable in lieu of
calculated spring static deflections.
1.4.3 Seismic Protection Criteria
Use a Horizontal Force Factor minimum 100 percent of the machinery weight
considered passing through the machinery center of gravity in any
horizontal direction. Protect the structure or machinery from earthquakes
by rigid structurally sound attachment to the load-supporting structure.
Determine by calculations the number and size of seismic restraints needed
for each machinery. Verify seismic restraint vendor's calculations by a
registered professional engineer.
1.4.4 Welding
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Flexible connectors; G
Pipe guides; G
Thrust restraints; G
Machinery manufacturer's sound data
SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 2

SD-05 Design Data
Each item of machinery
Submit design calculations for either by the machinery

manufacturer for the recommended machinery mounting or by the
vibration-isolation equipment manufacturer.
SD-06 Test Reports
Equipment sound level tests
Submit seismic protection rating in three principal axes

certified by an independent laboratory or analyzed by an
independent licensed structural engineer.
Vibration and noise isolation components
Seismic protection components
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CORROSION PROTECTION FOR STEEL PARTS
ASTM A123/A123M hot-dipped galvanized, or equivalent manufacturer standard

coatings. Where steel parts are exposed to the weather, provide
galvanized coating of at least 2 ounces of zinc per square foot of
surface. Coat springs with neoprene.
2.2 NEOPRENE
ASTM D471 and ASTM D2240, Grade Durometer 40, 50, or 60, and oil resistant.
2.3 SUSPENSION ISOLATORS
Provide hangers with suspension isolators encased in open steel brackets.

Isolate hanger rods from isolator steel brackets with neoprene-lined
opening.
2.3.1 Suspension Neoprene Isolators
Provide double-deflection elements with minimum 3/8 inch deflection.
2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS FOR PIPING
Straight or elbow flexible connectors rated for temperatures, pressures,

and fluids to be conveyed. Provide flexible connectors with the strength
4 times operating pressure at highest system operating temperature.
Provide elbow flexible connectors with a permanently set angle.
2.4.1 Elastomeric Flexible Connectors
Fabricated of multiple plies of tire cord fabric and elastomeric materials

with integral reinforced elastomeric flanges with galvanized malleable
iron back up rings.
SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 3

2.4.2 Metal Flexible Connectors
Fabricated of Grade E phosphor bronze, monel or corrugated stainless steel

tube covered with comparable bronze or stainless steel braid restraining
and pressure cover.
2.5 PIPE GUIDES
Factory-fabricated. Weld steel bar guides to the pipe at a maximum radial

spacing of 60 degrees. The outside diameter around the guide bars shall
be smaller than the inside diameter of the guide sleeve in accordance with
standard field construction practice. For pipe temperatures below 60
degrees F, provide metal sleeve, minimum one pound per cubic foot density
insulation.
2.6 THRUST RESTRAINTS
Adjustable spring thrust restraints, able to resist the thrust force with
at least 25 percent unused capacity. The operating spring deflection
shall be not less than 50 percent of the static deflection of the
isolation supporting the machinery.
2.7 SEISMIC PROTECTION COMPONENTS FOR PIPING
Section 23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Vibration and Noise Isolation Components
Install vibration-and-noise isolation materials and equipment in

accordance with machinery manufacturer's instructions.
3.1.2 Suspension Vibration Isolators
Provide suspension isolation hangers for piping, suspended equipment, and

suspended equipment platforms in mechanical equipment rooms, as
specified. For operating load static deflections of 1/4 inch or less,
provide neoprene pads or single deflection neoprene isolators. For
operating load static deflections over 5/16 to 3/8 inch, provide
double-deflection neoprene element isolators. For operating load static
deflections over 3/8 inch, provide isolators with spring and neoprene
elements in series.
3.1.3 Thrust Restraints
Where required, provide pairs of thrust restraints, symmetrically

installed on both sides of the steady state line of thrust.
3.1.4 Flexible Pipe Connectors
Install flexible connectors in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions. When liquid pulsation dampening is required, flexible
connectors with spherical configuration may be used.
SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 4

3.1.5 Pipe Hanger and Support Installation
3.1.5.1 Pipe Hangers
Provide eye-bolts or swivel joints for pipe hangers to permit pipe thermal
or mechanical movement without angular misalignment of hanger vibration
isolator.
3.1.5.2 Valves
Provide vibration isolation hangers and supports at modulating, pressure

reducing, or control valves which will induce fluid pulsations. When
required or indicated, isolate valves with flexible connectors.
3.1.5.3 Pipe Risers
Provide pipe riser supports with bearing plates and two layers of 1/4 inch
thick ribbed or waffled neoprene pad loaded to not more than 50 psi.
Separate isolation pads with 1/4 inch steel plate. Weld pipe riser clamps
at anchor points to the pipe and to pairs of vertical acoustical pipe
anchor mountings which shall be rigidly fastened to the steel framing.
3.1.5.4 Supports at Base of Pipe Risers
Piping isolation supports at the base of risers shall be two layers of 1/2
inch thick heavy-duty neoprene pad separated by 1/4 inch thick steel
plate. Use bearing plates sized to provide a pad loading of not more than
500 psi. Weld the stanchion between the pipe and isolation support to the
pipe and weld or bolt to the isolation support. Bolt isolation support to
the floor slab with resilient sleeves and washers. Where supplementary
steel is required to support piping, provide a maximum deflection of 0.08
inches at the mid-span of this steel under the load. Rigidly support
piping from the supplementary steel with the supplementary steel isolated
from the building structure with isolators.
3.1.5.5 Pipe Anchors
Attach each end of the pipe anchor to an omni-directional pipe isolator

which in turn shall be rigidly fastened to the steel framing or structural
concrete. Provide a telescoping pipe isolator of two sizes of steel
tubing separated by a minimum 1/2 inch thick pad of heavy-duty neoprene or
heavy-duty neoprene and canvas. Provide vertical restraints by similar
material to prevent vertical travel in either direction. The load on the
isolation material shall not exceed 500 psi.
3.1.6 Equipment Room Sound Isolation
Do not allow direct contact between pipe or ducts and walls, floor slabs,
roofs, ceilings or partitions of equipment rooms.
3.1.6.1 Pipe Penetrations
Provide galvanized Schedule 40 pipe sleeves and tightly pack annular space
between sleeves and pipe with insulation having a flame spread rating not
more than 25 and a smoke developed rating not more than 50 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E84, maximum effective temperature 1000 degrees F,
bulk density 6 pounds/cu. ft. minimum. Provide uninsulated pipe with a
one inch thick mineral fiber sleeve the full length of the penetration and
seal each end with an interior or exterior and weather resistant
SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 5

non-hardening compound. Provide sealant and mineral-fiber sleeve of a

flame spread rating not more than 25 and a smoke developed rating not more
than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3.1.7 Electrical Connections
Provide flexible conduit or multiple conductor cable connections for

machinery with sufficient extra length to permit 2 inch minimum
displacement in any direction without damage.
3.1.8 Systems Not To Be Vibration Isolated
Do not provide vibration isolation for electrical raceways and conduits or

for fire protection, storm, sanitary, and domestic water piping systems
which do not include pumps or other vibrating, rotating, or pulsating
equipment including control and pressure reducing valves.
Provide equipment and apparatus required for performing inspections and

tests. Notify Contracting Officer 14 days prior to machinery sound and
vibration testing. Rebalance, adjust, or replace machinery with noise or
vibration levels in excess of those given in the machinery specifications,
or machinery manufacturer's data.
3.2.1 Field Inspections
Prior to initial operation, inspect the vibration isolators for

conformance to drawings, specifications, and manufacturer's data and
instructions. Check for vibration and noise transmission through
connections, piping, ductwork, foundations, and walls. Check connector
alignment before and after filling of system and during operation.
Correct misalignment without damage to connector and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2.2 Tests
Adjust, repair, or replace isolators as required to reduce vibration and

noise transmissions to specified levels.
3.2.2.1 Equipment Sound Level Tests
Measure continuous or intermittent steady state noise with a sound level

meter set for low response. Measure impact or impulse noise as dB peak
sound pressure level (20 uPa) with an impact noise analyzer. Measure work
distance from person to machinery noise center. Perform sound level tests
to determine conformance with sound level schedule indicated.
SECTION 22 05 48.00 20 Page 6

SECTION 22 07 19.00 40
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

08/13
PART 1 GENERAL
Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST

SYSTEMS applies to work specified in this section.
1.1 REFERENCES



Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders
for Thermal Insulation

Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular
Form

Fiber Pipe Insulation



Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type
Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered)
(Industrial Type)

Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with
Austenitic Stainless Steel

Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation

ASTM C921 (2010) Standard Practice for Determining

the Properties of Jacketing Materials for
Thermal Insulation
SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 1


Materials
NFPA 220 (2015) Standard on Types of Building

Construction
NFPA 255 (2006; Errata 2006) Standard Method of

Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
Within 30 days of Contract Award, submit installation drawings for pipe

insulation, conforming with the adhesive manufacturer's written
instructions for installation. Submit installation manual clearly stating
the manufacturer's instructions for insulation materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation Drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Adhesives; G
Coatings; G
Insulating Cement; G
Insulation Materials; G
SD-07 Certificates
Recycled Materials; G
Installation Manual; G
1.4.1 Recycled Materials
Provide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent

practicable, provided that the material meets all other requirements of
this section. The minimum recycled material content of the following
insulation types are:
SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 2

a. Rock Wool - 75 percent slag by weight
b. Fiberglass - 20-25 percent glass cullet by weight
c. Plastic Rigid Foam - 9 percent recovered material
d. Polyisocyanurate/Polyurethane - 9 percent recovered material
e. Rigid Foam - 9 percent recovered material
Submit recycled materials documentation indicating percentage of

post-industrial and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product.
Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content products to total
dollar value of products included in project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Provide noncombustible thermal-insulation system materials, as defined by

NFPA 220. Provide adhesives, coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and
thermal-insulation materials, except cellular elastomers, with a
flame-spread classification (FSC) of 25 or less, and a smoke-developed
classification (SDC) of 50 or less. Determine these maximum values in
accordance with ASTM E84 or NFPA 255. Provide coatings and sealants that
are nonflammable in their wet state.
Provide adhesives, coatings, and sealants with published or certified

temperature ratings suitable for the entire range of working temperatures
normal for the surfaces to which they are to be applied.
2.2 COMPONENTS
2.2.1 Insulation
Provide insulation with maximum value conductances as tested at any point,

not an average. Replace or augment insulation conductance found by
testing to exceed the specified maximum by an additional thickness to
bring it to the required maximum conductance and a complete finishing
system.
2.2.1.1 Mineral Fiber Insulation
Provide mineral fiber insulation conforming to ASTM C592, ASTM C553, or

ASTM C547 and suitable for surface temperatures up to 370 degrees F.
Provide insulation with a density not less than 4-pound per cubic foot and
with thermal conductivity not greater than 0.26 Btu per hour per square
foot per degree F at 150 degrees F mean.
2.2.1.2 Cellular Elastomer Insulation
Provide cellular elastomer insulation conforming to ASTM C534/C534M.

Ensure the water vapor permeability does not exceed 0.30 perms per foot
per inch per hour per square foot mercury pressure difference for 1-inch
thickness of cellular elastomer.
2.2.1.3 Cellular Glass Insulation
Conform to ASTM C552, Type II, Grade 2, pipe covering for Cellular Glass.
SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 3

Substitutions for this material are not permitted. Ensure minimum

thickness is not less than 1-1/2 inches.
2.2.1.4 Fiberglass Insulation
Conform to ASTM C547. Ensure the apparent thermal conductivity does not
exceed 0.54 Btu-inch per hour per square foot per degree F at 200 degrees F
mean.
Fiber glass pipe insulation having an insulating efficiency not less than
that of the specified thickness of mineral fiber pipe insulation may be
provided in lieu of mineral fiber pipe insulation for aboveground piping.
2.2.1.5 Pipe Fittings
Provide molded pipe fitting insulation covering for use at temperatures up

to and including 1200 degrees F.
2.2.2 Adhesives
2.2.2.1 Cloth Adhesives
Provide adhesives conforming to the requirements of ASTM C916, Type I, for

adhering, sizing, and finishing lagging cloth, canvas, and open-weave
glass cloth with a pigmented polyvinyl acetate emulsion.
2.2.2.2 Vapor-Barrier Material Adhesives
Provide adhesives for attaching laps of vapor-barrier materials and

presized glass cloth for attaching insulation to itself, to metal, and to
various other substrates, of nonflammable solvent-base, synthetic-rubber
type conforming to the requirements of ASTM C916, Type I, for attaching
fibrous-glass insulation to metal surfaces.
2.2.2.3 Cellular Elastomer Insulation Adhesive
For cellular elastomer insulation adhesive, provide a solvent cutback

chloroprene elastomer conforming to ASTM C916, Type I, and is a type
approved by the manufacturer of the cellular elastomer for the intended
use.
2.2.3 Caulk
Provide elastomeric joint sealant for caulking specified insulation

materials in accordance with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use A.
2.2.4 Corner Angles
Provide a nominal 0.016-inch thick aluminum 1 by 1-inch corner angle

piping insulation with factory applied kraft backing. Ensure aluminum
conforms to ASTM B209.
2.2.5 Coatings
2.2.5.1 Outdoor Vapor-Barrier Finishing
For coatings for outdoor vapor-barrier finishing of insulation surfaces,

such as fittings and elbows, provide a nonasphaltic, hydrocarbon polymer,
solvent-base mastic containing a blend of nonflammable solvents. Ensure
SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 4

coatings conform to the requirements of ASTM C1136 and ASTM C921.
2.2.5.2 Indoor Vapor-Barrier Finishing
Provide pigmented resin and solvent compound coatings for indoor

vapor-barrier finishing of insulation surfaces conforming to ASTM C1136,
Type II.
2.2.5.3 Outdoor and Indoor Nonvapor-Barrier Finishing (NBF)
Provide pigmented polymer-emulsion type NBF recommended by the insulation

material manufacturer for outdoor and indoor NBF coating of insulation
surfaces for the surface to be coated and applied to specified dry-film
thickness.
2.2.5.4 Cellular-Elastomer Insulation Coating
Provide a polyvinylchloride lacquer approved by the manufacturer of the

cellular elastomer finish coating.
2.2.5.5 Coating Color
Provide as specified by the Contracting Officer for the coating color.
2.3 MATERIALS
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:
a. Adhesives
b. Coatings
c. Insulating Cement
d. Insulation Materials
Provide compatible materials which do not contribute to corrosion, soften,

or otherwise attack surfaces to which applied, in either the wet or dry
state. Meet ASTM C795 requirements for materials to be used on stainless
steel surfaces. Provide materials that are asbestos free.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Clean surfaces free of oil and grease before insulation adhesives or

mastics are applied. Provide solvent cleaning required to bring metal
surfaces to such condition.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION SYSTEMS
Apply materials in conformance with the recommendations of the

manufacturer.
Install smooth and continuous contours on exposed work. Smoothly and

securely paste down cemented laps, flaps, bands, and tapes. Apply
adhesives on a full-coverage basis.
Apply insulation only to system or component surfaces that have been
SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 5

tested and approved.
Install insulation lengths tightly butted against each other at joints.

Where lengths are cut, provide smooth and square and without breakage of
end surfaces. Where insulation terminates, neatly taper and effectively
seal ends, or finish as specified. Direct longitudinal seams of exposed
insulation away from normal view.
Submit installation drawings for pipe insulation, conforming with the

adhesive manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3.2.1 Hot-Water Piping
Install a mineral fiber insulation with glass cloth jacket, Type T-2.
Insulate aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fittings, unions, flanges, and
miscellaneous surfaces.
3.2.2 Cold-Water Piping
Insulate aboveground pipes, valve bodies, fittings, unions, flanges, and

miscellaneous surfaces.
Provide 3/8-inch mineral fiber insulation with glass cloth jacket, Type T-2.
Install a cellular-elastomer insulation conforming to ASTM C534/C534M,

with a water-vapor permeability not exceeding 0.1 grain per square foot
per hour per inch mercury pressure-differential for 1-inch thickness.
Provide flexible unicellular-elastomeric thermal insulation for cold water

piping, Type T-3, with a thickness of 3/8 inch. Use expanded, closed-cell
pipe insulation only aboveground, not for underground piping.
3.3 APPLICATION
3.3.1 Type T-1, Mineral Fiber with Vapor-Barrier Jacket
Cover piping with mineral-fiber pipe insulation with factory-and

field-attached vapor-barrier jacket. Maintain vapor seal. Securely
cement jackets, jacket laps, flaps, and bands in place with vapor-barrier
adhesive. Provide jacket overlaps not less than 1-1/2 inches and
jacketing bands for butt joints 3-inches wide.
Cover exposed-to-view fittings and valve bodies with preformed

mineral-fiber pipe-fitting insulation of the same thickness as the
pipe-barrel insulation. Temporarily secure fitting insulation in place
with light cord ties. Apply a 60-mil coating of white indoor
vapor-barrier coating and, while still wet, wrap with glass lagging tape
with 50 percent overlap, and smoothly blend into the adjacent jacketing.
Apply additional coating as needed and rubber-gloved to smooth fillet or
contour coating, then allowed to fully cure before the finish coating is
applied. On-the-job fabricated insulation for concealed fittings and
special configurations, build up from mineral fiber and a special mastic
consisting of a mixture of insulating cement and lagging adhesive diluted
with 3 parts water. Where standard vapor-barrier jacketing cannot be
used, make the surfaces vapor tight by using coating and glass lagging
cloth or tape as previously specified.
In lieu of materials and methods previously specified, fittings may be

wrapped with a twine-secured, mineral-wool blanket to the required
SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 6

thickness and covered with premolded polyvinylchloride jackets. Make

seams vapor tight with a double bead of manufacturer's standard
vapor-barrier adhesive applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. Hold all jacket ends in place with AISI 300 series
corrosion-resistant steel straps, 15 mils thick by 1/2-inch wide.
Set pipe insulation into an outdoor vapor-barrier coating for a minimum of

6-inches at maximum 12-foot spacing and the ends of the insulation sealed
to the jacketing with the same material to provide an effective
vapor-barrier stop.
Do not use staples in applying insulation. Install continuous

vapor-barrier materials over all surfaces, including areas inside pipe
sleeves, hangers, and other concealments.
Provide piping insulation at hangers consisting of 13-pounds per cubic foot

density, fibrous-glass inserts or expanded, rigid, closed-cell,
polyvinylchloride. Seal junctions with vapor-barrier jacket where
required, glass-cloth mesh tape, and vapor-barrier coating.
Expose white-bleached kraft paper side of the jacketing to view.
Finish exposed-to-view insulation with not less than a 6-mil dry-film

thickness of nonvapor-barrier coating suitable for painting.
3.3.2 Type T-2, Mineral Fiber with Glass Cloth Jacket
Cover piping with a mineral-fiber, pipe insulation with factory-attached,

presized, white, glass cloth. Securely cement jackets, jacket laps,
flaps, and bands in place with vapor-barrier adhesive with jacket overlap
not less than 1-1/2 inches and jacketing bands for butt joints 3-inches
wide.
Cover exposed-to-view fittings with preformed mineral-fiber fitting

insulation of the same thickness as the pipe insulation and temporarily
secured in place with light cord ties. Install impregnated glass lagging
tape with indoor vapor-barrier on 50 percent overlap basis and the blend
tape smoothly into the adjacent jacketing. Apply additional coating as
needed, and rubber gloved to a smooth contour. Tape ends of insulation to
the pipe at valves 2-inches and smaller. Build up on-the-job fabricated
insulation for concealed fittings and special configurations from mineral
fiber and a mixture of insulating cement and lagging adhesive, diluted
with 3 parts water. Finish surfaces with glass cloth or tape lagging.
Cover all valves 2-1/2 inches and larger and all flanges with preformed
insulation of the same thickness as the adjacent insulation.
Finish exposed-to-view insulation with a minimum 6-mil dry-film thickness

of nonvapor-barrier coating suitable for painting.
In lieu of materials and methods specified above, fittings may be wrapped

with a twine-secured, mineral-wool blanket to the required thickness and
covered with premolded polyvinylchloride jackets. Hold all jacket ends in
place with AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel straps, 15 mils thick
by 1/2-inch wide. Provide fitting insulation, thermally equivalent to
pipe-barrel insulation to preclude surface temperatures detrimental to
polyvinylchloride.
SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 7

3.3.3 Type T-3, Cellular Elastomer
Cover piping-system surfaces with flexible cellular-elastomer sheet or

preformed insulation. Maintain vapor seal. Cement insulation into
continuous material with a solvent cutback chloroprene adhesive
recommended by the manufacturer for the specific purpose. Apply adhesive
to both of the surfaces on a 100-percent coverage basis to a minimum
thickness of 10 mils wet or approximately 150 square feet per gallon of
undiluted adhesive.
Seal insulation on cold water piping to the pipe for a minimum of 6-inches
at maximum intervals of 12-feet to form an effective vapor barrier. At
piping supports, ensure insulation is continuous through using
outside-carrying type clevis hangers with insulation shield. Install Cork
or Wood dowel load-bearing inserts between the pipe and insulation shields
to prevent insulation compression.
Insulate hot-water, cold-water, and condensate drain pipes to the extent

shown with nominal 3/8-inch thick, fire retardant (FR), cellular
elastomer, preformed pipe insulation. Seal joints with adhesive.
At pipe hangers or supports where the insulation rests on the pipe hanger
strap, cut the insulation with a brass cork borer and a No. 3 superior
grade cork inserted. Seal seams with approved adhesive. Insulate sweat
fitting with miter-cut pieces of cellular elastomer insulation of the same
nominal pipe size and thickness as the insulation on the adjacent piping
or tubing. Joint miter-cut pieces with approved adhesive. Slit and snap
covers over the fitting, and seal joints with approved adhesive.
Insulate screwed fittings with sleeve-type covers formed from miter-cut

pieces of cellular elastomer thermal insulation having an inside diameter
large enough to overlap adjacent pipe insulation. Butt pipe insulation
against fittings, and overlap not less than 1-inch. Use adhesive to join
cover pieces and cement the cover to the pipe insulation.
Finish surfaces exposed to view or ultraviolet light with a 2-mil minimum

dry-film thickness application of a polyvinylchloride lacquer recommended
by the manufacturer, and applied in not less than two coats.
3.3.4 Type T-10, Mineral-Fiber Fill
Pack voids surrounding pipe with mineral-fiber fill.
3.3.5 Type T-17, Calcium Silicate Weatherproof Jacket
Cover piping system surfaces with calcium silicate insulation. Cover

fittings and valve bodies with preformed insulation of the same material
and thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation.
Final acceptance is dependent upon providing construction (Record

Drawings) details to the Contracting Officer. Include construction
details, by building area, the insulation material type, amount, and
installation method. An illustration or map of the pipe routing locations
may serve this purpose.
SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 8

Provide a cover letter/sheet clearly marked with the system name, date,
and the words "Record Drawings insulation/material" for the data. Forward
to the Systems Engineer for inclusion in the Maintenance Database."
SECTION 22 07 19.00 40 Page 9

SECTION 23 00 00
AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS

08/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AMCA 201 (2002; R 2011) Fans and Systems
AMCA 210 (2007) Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans

for Aerodynamic Performance Rating
AMCA 300 (2008) Reverberant Room Method for Sound

Testing of Fans
AMCA 301 (1990; INT 2007) Methods for Calculating

Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data
AHRI 410 (2001; Addendum 1 2002; Addendum 2 2005;

Addendum 3 2011) Forced-Circulation
Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils
AHRI Guideline D (1996) Application and Installation of

Central Station Air-Handling Units
ABMA 11 (2014) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for

Roller Bearings
ABMA 9 (1990; ERTA 2012; S 2013) Load Ratings and

Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 52.2 (2012; Errata 2013; INT 1 2014; ADD A,

B, AND D SUPP 2015; INT 3 2015) Method of
Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning
Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle
Size
ASHRAE 62.1 (2010; Errata 2011; INT 3 2012; INT 4

2012; INT 5 2013) Ventilation for
Acceptable Indoor Air Quality
ASME A13.1 (2007; R 2013) Scheme for the

Identification of Piping Systems

Steel Products

Welded and Seamless

Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium

NEMA MG 10 (2013) Energy Management Guide for

Selection and Use of Fixed Frequency
Medium AC Squirrel-Cage Polyphase
Induction Motors


(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1966 (2005) HVAC Duct Construction Standards

Metal and Flexible, 3rd Edition
SMACNA 1981 (2008) Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines

for Mechanical Systems, 3rd Edition
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY (DOE)
PL-109-58 (1992; R 2005) Energy Efficient

Procurement Requirements
UL 586 (2009) Standard for High-Efficiency

Particulate, Air Filter Units
UL 6 (2007; Reprint Nov 2014) Electrical Rigid

Metal Conduit-Steel
UL 705 (2004; Reprint Dec 2013) Standard for

Power Ventilators
UL 900 (2004; Reprint Feb 2012) Standard for Air

Filter Units
Furnish ductwork, piping offsets, fittings, and accessories as required to

provide a complete installation. Coordinate the work of the different
trades to avoid interference between piping, equipment, structural, and
electrical work. Provide complete, in place, all necessary offsets in
piping and ductwork, and all fittings, and other components, required to
install the work as indicated and specified.
1.2.1 Service Labeling
Label equipment, including fans, air handlers, terminal units, etc. with
labels made of self-sticking, plastic film designed for permanent
installation. Labels shall be in accordance with the typical examples
below:
SERVICE LABEL AND TAG DESIGNATION
Air handling unit Number AHU
Exhaust Fan Number EF
Fan Coil Unit Number FC
Pump P
Identify similar services with different temperatures or pressures. Where

pressures could exceed 125 pounds per square inch, gage, include the
maximum system pressure in the label. Label and arrow piping in
accordance with the following:
a. Each point of entry and exit of pipe passing through walls.
b. Each change in direction, i.e., elbows, tees.
c. In congested or hidden areas and at all access panels at each point

required to clarify service or indicated hazard.
d. In long straight runs, locate labels at distances within eyesight of

each other not to exceed 75 feet. All labels shall be visible and
legible from the primary service and operating area.
For Bare or Insulated Pipes
for Outside Diameters of Lettering
1/2 thru 1-3/8 inch 1/2 inch
1-1/2 thru 2-3/8 inch 3/4 inch
2-1/2 inch and larger 1-1/4 inch
1.2.2 Color Coding
Color coding of all piping systems shall be in accordance with ASME A13.1 .
1.3 SUBMITTALS

CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Duct Connectors; G, A/E

In-Line Centrifugal Fans; G, A/E
Test Procedures
SD-06 Test Reports
Performance Tests; G
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions

Operation and Maintenance Training
In-Line Centrifugal Fans; G
Except as otherwise specified, approval of materials and equipment is

based on manufacturer's published data.
a. Where materials and equipment are specified to conform to the

standards of the Underwriters Laboratories, the label of or listing
with reexamination in UL Bld Mat Dir, and UL 6 is acceptable as
sufficient evidence that the items conform to Underwriters
Laboratories requirements. In lieu of such label or listing, submit a
written certificate from any nationally recognized testing agency,
adequately equipped and competent to perform such services, stating
that the items have been tested and that the units conform to the
specified requirements. Outline methods of testing used by the
specified agencies.
b. Where materials or equipment are specified to be constructed or

tested, or both, in accordance with the standards of the ASTM
International (ASTM), the ASME International (ASME), or other
standards, a manufacturer's certificate of compliance of each item is
acceptable as proof of compliance.
c. Conformance to such agency requirements does not relieve the item from
compliance with other requirements of these specifications.
d. Where products are specified to meet or exceed the specified energy

efficiency requirement of FEMP-designated or ENERGY STAR coveed
product categories, equipment selected shall have as a minimum the
efficiency rating identified under "Energy-Efficient Products" at
http://femp.energy.gov/procurement and
http://energy.gov/eere/femp/covered-product-category.
These specifications conform to the efficiency requirements as defined

in Public Law PL-109-58, "Energy Policy Act of 2005" for federal
procurement of energy-efficient products. Equipment having a lower
efficiency than ENERGY STAR or FEMP requirements may be specified if
the designer determines the equipment to be more life-cycle cost
effective using the life-cycle cost analysis methodology and procedure
in 10 CFR 436.
1.4.1 Prevention of Corrosion
Protect metallic materials against corrosion. Manufacturer shall provide

rust-inhibiting treatment and standard finish for the equipment
enclosures. Do not use aluminum in contact with earth, and where
connected to dissimilar metal. Protect aluminum by approved fittings,
barrier material, or treatment. Ferrous parts such as anchors, bolts,
braces, boxes, bodies, clamps, fittings, guards, nuts, pins, rods, shims,
thimbles, washers, and miscellaneous parts not of corrosion-resistant
steel or nonferrous materials shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance
with ASTM A123/A123M for exterior locations and cadmium-plated in
conformance with ASTM B766 for interior locations.
1.4.2 Asbestos Prohibition
Do not use asbestos and asbestos-containing products.
1.4.3 Ozone Depleting Substances Used as Refrigerants
Minimize releases of Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) during repair,

maintenance, servicing or disposal of appliances containing ODS's by
complying with all applicable sections of 40 CFR 82 Part 82 Subpart F.
Any person conducting repair, maintenance, servicing or disposal of
appliances owned by NASA shall comply with the following:
a. Do not knowingly vent or otherwise release into the environment, Class

I or Class II substances used as a refrigerant.
b. Do not open appliances without meeting the requirements of 40 CFR 82

Part 82.156 Subpart F, regarding required practices for evacuation and
collection of refrigerant, and 40 CFR 82 Part 82.158 Subpart F,
regarding standards of recycling and recovery equipment.
c. Only persons who comply with 40 CFR 82 Part 82.161 Subpart F,

regarding technician certification, can conduct work on appliances
containing refrigerant.
In addition, provide copies of all applicable certifications to the

Contracting Officer at least 14 calendar days prior to initiating
maintenance, repair, servicing, dismantling or disposal of appliances,
including:
a. Proof of Technician Certification
b. Proof of Equipment Certification for recovery or recycling equipment.
c. Proof of availability of certified recovery or recycling equipment.
1.4.4 Use of Ozone Depleting Substances, Other than Refrigerants
The use of Class I or Class II ODS's listed as nonessential in 40 CFR 82

Part 82.66 Subpart C is prohibited. These prohibited materials and uses
include:
a. Any plastic party spray streamer or noise horn which is propelled by a

chlorofluorocarbon
b. Any cleaning fluid for electronic and photographic equipment which

contains a chlorofluorocarbon; including liquid packaging, solvent
wipes, solvent sprays, and gas sprays.
c. Any plastic flexible or packaging foam product which is manufactured

with or contains a chlorofluorocarbon, including, open cell foam, open
cell rigid polyurethane poured foam, closed cell extruded polystyrene
sheet foam, closed cell polyethylene foam and closed cell
polypropylene foam except for flexible or packaging foam used in
coaxial cabling.
d. Any aerosol product or other pressurized dispenser which contains a

chlorofluorocarbon, except for those listed in 40 CFR 82 Part 82.66
Subpart C.
Request a waiver if a facility requirement dictates that a prohibited

material is necessary to achieve project goals. Submit the waiver request
in writing to the Contracting Officer. The waiver will be evaluated and
dispositioned.
Submit detail drawings showing equipment layout, including assembly and

installation details and electrical connection diagrams; ductwork layout
showing the location of all supports and hangers, typical hanger details,
gauge reinforcement, reinforcement spacing rigidity classification, and
static pressure and seal classifications. Include any information
required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and functions
properly as a unit on the drawings and show equipment relationship to
other parts of the work, including clearances required for operation and
maintenance. Submit drawings showing bolt-setting information, and
foundation bolts prior to concrete foundation construction for all
equipment indicated or required to have concrete foundations. Submit
function designation of the equipment and any other requirements specified

throughout this Section with the shop drawings.
1.4.6 Test Procedures
Submit proposed test procedures and test schedules for the ductwork leak
test, and performance tests of systems, at least 2 weeks prior to the
start of related testing.
Protect stored equipment at the jobsite from the weather, humidity and
temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.
Additionally, cap or plug all pipes until installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Except for the fabricated duct, plenums and casings specified in

paragraphs "Metal Ductwork" and "Plenums and Casings for Field-Fabricated
Units",
provide components and equipment that are standard products of
manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacturing of products that are
of a similar material, design and workmanship. This requirement applies
to all equipment, including diffusers, registers, fire dampers, and
balancing dampers.
a. Standard products are defined as components and equipment that have

been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use in similar
applications of similar size for at least two years before bid
opening.
b. Prior to this two year period, these standard products shall have been
sold on the commercial market using advertisements in manufacturers'
catalogs or brochures. These manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures
shall have been copyrighted documents or have been identified with a
manufacturer's document number.
c. Provide equipment items that are supported by a service organization.

In product categories covered by ENERGY STAR or the Federal Energy
Management Program, provide equipment that is listed on the ENERGY
STAR Qualified Products List or that meets or exceeds the
FEMP-designated Efficiency Requirements.
2.2 IDENTIFICATION PLATES
In addition to standard manufacturer's identification plates, provide

engraved laminated phenolic identification plates for each piece of
mechanical equipment. Identification plates are to designate the function
of the equipment. Submit designation with the shop drawings.
Identification plates shall be three layers, black-white-black, engraved
to show white letters on black background. Letters shall be upper case.
Identification plates 1-1/2-inches high and smaller shall be 1/16-inch
thick, with engraved lettering 1/8-inch high; identification plates larger
than 1-1/2-inches high shall be 1/8-inch thick, with engraved lettering of
suitable height. Identification plates 1-1/2-inches high and larger shall
have beveled edges. Install identification plates using a compatible
adhesive.
2.3 EQUIPMENT GUARDS AND ACCESS
Fully enclose or guard belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings,

projecting setscrews, keys, and other rotating parts exposed to personnel
contact according to OSHA requirements. Properly guard or cover with
insulation of a type specified, high temperature equipment and piping
exposed to contact by personnel or where it creates a potential fire
hazard.
2.4 ELECTRICAL WORK
a. Provide motors, controllers, integral disconnects, contactors, and

controls with their respective pieces of equipment, except controllers
indicated as part of motor control centers. Provide electrical
equipment, including motors and wiring, as specified in Section
26 20 00INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide manual or automatic
control and protective or signal devices required for the operation
specified and control wiring required for controls and devices
specified, but not shown. For packaged equipment, include
manufacturer provided controllers with the required monitors and timed
restart.
b. For single-phase motors, provide high-efficiency type,

fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors, including motors
that are part of a system, in accordance with NEMA MG 11. Integral
size motors shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance with
NEMA MG 1.
c. For polyphase motors, provide squirrel-cage medium induction motors,

including motors that are part of a system , and that meet the
efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with
NEMA MG 1. Select premium efficiency polyphase motors in accordance
with NEMA MG 10.
d. Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to

drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the
nameplate rating of the motor. Provide motors rated for continuous
duty with the enclosure specified. Provide motor duty that allows for
maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered
interval between start and stop. Provide motor torque capable of
accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of
the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting
period. Provide motor starters complete with thermal overload
protection and other necessary appurtenances. Fit motor bearings with
grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.
2.5 ANCHOR BOLTS
Provide anchor bolts for equipment placed on concrete equipment pads or on

concrete slabs. Bolts to be of the size and number recommended by the
equipment manufacturer and located by means of suitable templates.
Installation of anchor bolts shall not degrade the surrounding concrete.
2.6 SEISMIC ANCHORAGE
Anchor equipment in accordance with applicable seismic criteria for the

area and as defined in SMACNA 1981, Seismic Restraint Guidelines.
2.7 PAINTING FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
Paint equipment in accordance with approved equipment manufacturer's

standards unless specified otherwise. Field retouch only if approved.
Otherwise, return equipment to the factory for refinishing.
2.8 INDOOR AIR QUALITY
Provide equipment and components that comply with the requirements of

ASHRAE 62.1 unless more stringent requirements are specified herein.
2.9 AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT
2.9.1 Fans
Test and rate fans according to AMCA 210. Calculate system effect on air
moving devices in accordance with AMCA 201 where installed ductwork
differs from that indicated on drawings. Install air moving devices to
minimize fan system effect. Where system effect is unavoidable, determine
the most effective way to accommodate the inefficiencies caused by system
effect on the installed air moving device. The sound power level of the
fans shall not exceed 85 dBA when tested according to AMCA 300 and rated
in accordance with AMCA 301. Provide all fans with an AMCA seal. Connect
fans to the motors either directly or indirectly with V-belt drive. Use
V-belt drives designed for not less than 150 percent of the connected
driving capacity. Provide variable pitch motor sheaves for 15 hp and
below, and fixed pitch as defined by AHRI Guideline D (A fixed-pitch
sheave is provided on both the fan shaft and the motor shaft. This is a
non-adjustable speed drive.). Select variable pitch sheaves to drive the
fan at a speed which can produce the specified capacity when set at the
approximate midpoint of the sheave adjustment. When fixed pitch sheaves
are furnished, provide a replaceable sheave when needed to achieve system
air balance. Provide motors for V-belt drives with adjustable rails or
bases. Provide removable metal guards for all exposed V-belt drives, and
provide speed-test openings at the center of all rotating shafts. Provide
fans with personnel screens or guards on both suction and supply ends,
except that the screens need not be provided, unless otherwise indicated,
where ducts are connected to the fan. Provide fan and motor assemblies
with vibration-isolation supports or mountings as indicated. Use
vibration-isolation units that are standard products with published
loading ratings. Select each fan to produce the capacity required at the
fan static pressure indicated. Provide sound power level as indicated.
Obtain the sound power level values according to AMCA 300. Provide
standard AMCA arrangement, rotation, and discharge as indicated. Provide
power ventilators that conform to UL 705 and have a UL label.
2.9.1.1 In-Line Centrifugal Fans
Provide in-line fans with centrifugal backward inclined blades, stationary

discharge conversion vanes, internal and external belt guards, and
adjustable motor mounts. Mount fans in a welded tubular casing. Provide
a fan that axially flows the air in and out. Streamline inlets with
conversion vanes to eliminate turbulence and provide smooth discharge air
flow. Enclose and isolate fan bearings and drive shafts from the air
stream. Provide precision, self aligning ball or roller type fan bearings
that are sealed against dust and dirt and are permanently lubricated.
Provide L50 rated bearing life at not less than 200,000 hours as defined
by ABMA 9 and ABMA 11. Provide motors with dripprooftotally enclosed
enclosure.
2.9.2 Coils
Provide fin-and-tube type coils constructed of seamless copper tubes and

aluminum or copper fins mechanically bonded or soldered to the tubes.
Provide copper tube wall thickness that is a minimum of 0.016 inches.
Provide aluminum fins that are 0.0055 inch minimum thickness. Provide
copper fins that are 0.0045 inch minimum thickness. Provide casing and
tube support sheets that are not lighter than 16 gauge galvanized steel,
formed to provide structural strength. When required, provide multiple
tube supports to prevent tube sag. Test each coil at the factory under
water at not less than 400 psi air pressure and make suitable for 200 psi
working pressure and 300 degrees F operating temperature unless otherwise
stated. Mount coils for counterflow service. Rate and certify coils to
meet the requirements of AHRI 410.
2.9.2.1 Water Coils
Install water coils with a pitch of not less than 1/8 inch/foot of the
tube length toward the drain end. Use headers constructed of cast iron,
welded steel or copper. Furnish each coil with a plugged vent and drain
connection extending through the unit casing. Provide removable water
coils with drain pans.
2.9.3 Air Filters
List air filters according to requirements of UL 900, except list high

efficiency particulate air filters of 99.97 percent efficiency by the DOP
Test method under the Label Service to meet the requirements of UL 586.
2.9.3.1 Extended Surface Pleated Panel Filters
Provide 2 inch depth, sectional, disposable type filters of the size

indicated with a MERV of 8 when tested according to ASHRAE 52.2. Provide
initial resistance at 500 fpm that does not exceed 0.36 inches water gauge.
Provide UL Class 2 filters, and nonwoven cotton and synthetic fiber mat
media. Attach a wire support grid bonded to the media to a moisture
resistant fiberboard frame. Bond all four edges of the filter media to
the inside of the frame to prevent air bypass and increase rigidity.
2.9.3.2 Mini Pleat Type Filters
Provide 4 inch depth, sectional, replaceable dry media type filters of the
size indicated with a MERV of 13 when tested according to ASHRAE 52.2.
Provide initial resistance at 500 fpm that does not exceed 0.56 inches,
water gauge. Provide UL class 1 filters, and pleated microglass paper
media with corrugated aluminum separators, sealed inside the filter cell
to form a totally rigid filter assembly. Fluctuations in filter face
velocity or turbulent airflow have no effect on filter integrity or
performance.
2.10 SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICES
2.10.1 Condensate Drain Lines
Provide and install condensate drainage for each item of equipment that
generates condensate in accordance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL
PURPOSE except as modified herein.
The requirements for backflow preventers are specified in Section 22 00 00

2.10.3 Insulation
The requirements for shop and field applied insulation are specified in
Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
2.10.4 Controls
The requirements for controls are specified in Section 23 09 23.13 20

BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all
discrepancy before performing the work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
a. Install materials and equipment in accordance with the requirements of

the contract drawings and approved manufacturer's installation
instructions. Accomplish installation by workers skilled in this type
of work. Perform installation so that there is no degradation of the
designed fire ratings of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors.
b. No installation is permitted to block or otherwise impede access to

any existing machine or system. Install all hinged doors to swing
open a minimum of 120 degrees. Provide an area in front of all access
doors that clears a minimum of 3 feet. In front of all access doors
to electrical circuits, clear the area the minimum distance to
energized circuits as specified in OSHA Standards, part 1910.333
(Electrical-Safety Related work practices).
c. Except as otherwise indicated, install emergency switches and alarms

in conspicuous locations. Mount all indicators, to include gauges,
meters, and alarms in order to be easily visible by people in the area.
3.2.1 Condensate Drain Lines
Provide water seals in the condensate drain from all units. Provide a
depth of each seal of 2 inches plus the number of inches, measured in
water gauge, of the total static pressure rating of the unit to which the
drain is connected. Provide water seals that are constructed of 2 tees
and an appropriate U-bend with the open end of each tee plugged. Provide
pipe cap or plug cleanouts where indicated. Connect drains indicated to
connect to the sanitary waste system using an indirect waste fitting.
Insulate air conditioner drain lines as specified in Section 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
3.2.2 Equipment and Installation
Provide frames and supports for tanks, compressors, pumps, valves, air
handling units, fans, coils, dampers, and other similar items requiring
supports. Floor mount or ceiling hang air handling units as indicated.

Anchor and fasten as detailed. Set floor-mounted equipment on not less
than 6 inch concrete pads or curbs doweled in place unless otherwise
indicated. Make concrete foundations heavy enough to minimize the
intensity of the vibrations transmitted to the piping, duct work and the
surrounding structure, as recommended in writing by the equipment
manufacturer. In lieu of a concrete pad foundation, build a concrete
pedestal block with isolators placed between the pedestal block and the
floor. Make the concrete foundation or concrete pedestal block a mass not
less than three times the weight of the components to be supported.
Provide the lines connected to the pump mounted on pedestal blocks with
flexible connectors.
3.2.3 Access Panels
Install access panels for concealed valves, vents, controls, dampers, and
items requiring inspection or maintenance of sufficient size, and locate
them so that the concealed items are easily serviced and maintained or
completely removed and replaced.
3.2.4 Flexible Duct
Install pre-insulated flexible duct in accordance with the latest printed

instructions of the manufacturer to ensure a vapor tight joint. Provide
hangers, when required to suspend the duct, of the type recommended by the
duct manufacturer and set at the intervals recommended.
3.2.5 Metal Ductwork
Install according to SMACNA 1966 unless otherwise indicated. Install duct

supports for sheet metal ductwork according to SMACNA 1966, unless
otherwise specified. Do not use friction beam clamps indicated in
SMACNA 1966. Anchor risers on high velocity ducts in the center of the
vertical run to allow ends of riser to move due to thermal expansion.
Erect supports on the risers that allow free vertical movement of the
duct. Attach supports only to structural framing members and concrete
slabs. Do not anchor supports to metal decking unless a means is provided
and approved for preventing the anchor from puncturing the metal decking.
Where supports are required between structural framing members, provide
suitable intermediate metal framing. Where C-clamps are used, provide
retainer clips.
3.2.6 Dust Control
To prevent the accumulation of dust, debris and foreign material during

construction, perform temporary dust control protection. Protect the
distribution system (supply and return) with temporary seal-offs at all
inlets and outlets at the end of each day's work. Keep temporary
protection in place until system is ready for startup.
3.2.7 Insulation
Provide thickness and application of insulation materials for ductwork,

piping, and equipment according to Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Externally insulate outdoor air intake ducts and
plenums up to the point where the outdoor air reaches the conditioning
unit.
3.2.8 Duct Test Holes
Provide holes with closures or threaded holes with plugs in ducts and
plenums as indicated or where necessary for the use of pitot tube in
balancing the air system. Plug insulated duct at the duct surface,
patched over with insulation and then marked to indicate location of test
hole if needed for future use.
3.2.9 Power Transmission Components Adjustment
Test V-belts and sheaves for proper alignment and tension prior to
operation and after 72 hours of operation at final speed. Uniformly load
belts on drive side to prevent bouncing. Make alignment of direct driven
couplings to within 50 percent of manufacturer's maximum allowable range
of misalignment.
3.3 EQUIPMENT PADS
Provide or modify equipment pads to conform to the shape of each piece of

equipment served with a minimum 6-inch margin around the equipment and
supports. Allow equipment bases and foundations, when constructed of
concrete or grout, to cure a minimum of 28 calendar days before being
loaded.
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
Install work in such a manner and at such time that a minimum of cutting
and patching of the building structure is required. Make holes in exposed
locations, in or through existing floors, by drilling and smooth by
sanding. Use of a jackhammer is permitted only where specifically
approved. Make holes through masonry walls to accommodate sleeves with an
iron pipe masonry core saw.
3.5 CLEANING
Thoroughly clean surfaces of piping and equipment that have become covered
with dirt, plaster, or other material during handling and construction
before such surfaces are prepared for final finish painting or are
enclosed within the building structure. Before final acceptance, clean
mechanical equipment, including piping, ducting, and fixtures, and free
from dirt, grease, and finger marks. When the work area is in an occupied
space such as fire station office, protect all furniture and equipment
from dirt and debris. Incorporate housekeeping for field construction
work which leaves all furniture and equipment in the affected area free of
construction generated dust and debris; and, all floor surfaces
vacuum-swept clean.
3.6 PENETRATIONS
Provide sleeves and prepared openings for duct mains, branches, and other
penetrating items, and install during the construction of the surface to
be penetrated. Cut sleeves flush with each surface. Place sleeves for
round duct 15 inches and smaller. Build framed, prepared openings for
round duct larger than 15 inches and square, rectangular or oval ducts.
Sleeves and framed openings are also required where grilles, registers,
and diffusers are installed at the openings. Provide one inch clearance
between penetrating and penetrated surfaces except at grilles, registers,
and diffusers. Pack spaces between sleeve or opening and duct or duct
insulation with mineral fiber conforming with ASTM C553, Type 1, Class B-2.
3.6.1 Sleeves
Fabricate sleeves, except as otherwise specified or indicated, from 20

gauge thick mill galvanized sheet metal. Where sleeves are installed in
bearing walls or partitions, provide black steel pipe conforming with
ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 20.
3.6.2 Closure Collars
Provide closure collars of a minimum 4 inches wide, unless otherwise

indicated, for exposed ducts and items on each side of penetrated surface,
except where equipment is installed. Install collar tight against the
surface and fit snugly around the duct or insulation. Grind sharp edges
smooth to prevent damage to penetrating surface. Fabricate collars for
round ducts 15 inches in diameter or less from 20 gauge galvanized steel.
Fabricate collars for square and rectangular ducts, or round ducts with
minimum dimension over 15 inches from 18 gauge galvanized steel.
Fabricate collars for square and rectangular ducts with a maximum side of
15 inches or less from 20 gauge galvanized steel. Install collars with
fasteners a maximum of 6 inches on center. Attach to collars a minimum of
4 fasteners where the opening is 12 inches in diameter or less, and a
minimum of 8 fasteners where the opening is 20 inches in diameter or less.
3.6.3 Firestopping
Where ducts pass through fire-rated walls, fire partitions, and fire rated
chase walls, seal the penetration with fire stopping materials as
specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.7 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
Provide identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or

engraved anodized aluminum, indicating service and item number on all
valves and dampers. Provide tags that are 1-3/8 inch minimum diameter
with stamped or engraved markings. Make indentations black for reading
clarity. Attach tags to valves with No. 12 AWG 0.0808-inch diameter
corrosion-resistant steel wire, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded chain or
plastic straps designed for that purpose.
3.8 DUCTWORK LEAK TESTS
The requirements for ductwork leak tests are specified in Section 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.
3.9 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
The requirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing are specified in

Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC. Begin
testing, adjusting, and balancing only when the air supply and
distribution, including controls, has been completed, with the exception
of performance tests.
3.10 PERFORMANCE TESTS
After testing, adjusting, and balancing is complete as specified, test

each system as a whole to see that all items perform as integral parts of
the system and temperatures and conditions are evenly controlled
throughout the building. Record the testing during the applicable
season. Make corrections and adjustments as necessary to produce the

conditions indicated or specified. Conduct capacity tests and general
operating tests by an experienced engineer. Provide tests that cover a
period of not less than 1 day for each system and demonstrate that the
entire system is functioning according to the specifications. Make
coincidental chart recordings at points indicated on the drawings for the
duration of the time period and record the temperature at space
thermostats or space sensors, the humidity at space humidistats or space
sensors and the ambient temperature and humidity in a shaded and weather
protected area.
Submit test reports for the ductwork leak test, and performance tests in
booklet form, upon completion of testing. Document phases of tests
performed including initial test summary, repairs/adjustments made, and
final test results in the reports.
3.11 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
Provide a temporary bypass for water coils to prevent flushing water from
passing through coils. Inside of room fan-coil units thoroughly clean
ducts, plenums, and casing of debris and blow free of small particles of
rubbish and dust and then vacuum clean before installing outlet faces.
Wipe equipment clean, with no traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots.
Provide temporary filters prior to startup of all fans that are operated
during construction, and install new filters after all construction dirt
has been removed from the building, and the ducts, plenums, casings, and
other items specified have been vacuum cleaned. Maintain system in this
clean condition until final acceptance. Properly lubricate bearings with
oil or grease as recommended by the manufacturer. Tighten belts to proper
tension. Adjust control valves and other miscellaneous equipment
requiring adjustment to setting indicated or directed. Adjust fans to the
speed indicated by the manufacturer to meet specified conditions.
Maintain all equipment installed under the contract until close out
documentation is received, the project is completed and the building has
been documented as beneficially occupied.
3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
3.12.1 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Submit six manuals at least 2 weeks prior to field training.
3.12.2 Operation And Maintenance Training
Conduct a training course for the members of the operating staff as

designated by the Contracting Officer. Make the training period consist
of a total of 8 hours of normal working time and start it after all work
specified herein is functionally completed and the Performance Tests have
been approved. Conduct field instruction that covers all of the items
contained in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals as well as
demonstrations of routine maintenance operations. Submit the proposed
On-site Training schedule concurrently with the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals and at least 14 days prior to conducting the training course.
SECTION 23 03 00.00 20
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

08/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


IEEE C2 (2012; Errata 2012; INT 1-4 2012; INT 5-7

2013; INT 8 2014) National Electrical
Safety Code

Induction Motors


3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National
Electrical Code
This section applies to all sections of Divisions: 21, FIRE SUPPRESSION;

22, PLUMBING; and 23, HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING of this
project specification, unless specified otherwise in the individual
section.
1.3.1 Material and Equipment Qualifications
Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of

manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, which
are of a similar material, design and workmanship. Standard products
shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years
SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 1

prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of

equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.
The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year
period.

1.3.3 Service Support
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a

certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of
the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These
service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment
installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a
regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

acceptable.

these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.3.5.1 Definitions
For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract
documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word
"should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code
official" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For
Navy owned property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to
mean the "Contracting Officer." References to the "permit holder" shall
be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."
1.3.5.2 Administrative Interpretations
For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of

Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative
requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations
(FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the
Officer in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this
project. References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be
applied appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his
administrative cognizance and the FAR.
SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 2


before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's
1.5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Furnish motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors with their

respective pieces of equipment. Motors, controllers, disconnects and
contactors shall conform to and have electrical connections provided under
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Furnish internal wiring
for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment.
Extended voltage range motors will not be permitted. Controllers and
contactors shall have a maximum of 120 volt control circuits, and shall
have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished. When motors
and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated, the cost of
additional electrical service and related work shall be included under the
section that specified that motor or equipment. Power wiring and conduit
for field installed equipment shall be provided under and conform to the
requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
1.6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and

requirements specified herein.
1.6.1 New Work
Provide electrical components of mechanical equipment, such as motors,

motor starters , control or push-button stations, float or pressure
switches, solenoid valves, integral disconnects, and other devices
functioning to control mechanical equipment, as well as control wiring and
conduit for circuits rated 100 volts or less, to conform with the
requirements of the section covering the mechanical equipment. Extended
voltage range motors shall not be permitted. The interconnecting power
wiring and conduit, control wiring rated 120 volts (nominal) and conduit,
and the electrical power circuits shall be provided under Division 26,
except internal wiring for components of package equipment shall be
provided as an integral part of the equipment. When motors and equipment
furnished are larger than sizes indicated, provide any required changes to
the electrical service as may be necessary and related work as a part of
the work for the section specifying that motor or equipment.
1.6.2 Modifications to Existing Systems
Where existing mechanical systems and motor-operated equipment require

modifications, provide electrical components under Division 26.
1.6.3 High Efficiency Motors
1.6.3.1 High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors
Unless otherwise specified, single-phase fractional-horsepower

alternating-current motors shall be high efficiency types corresponding to
the applications listed in NEMA MG 11.
SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 3

1.6.3.2 High Efficiency Polyphase Motors
Unless otherwise specified, polyphase motors shall be selected based on

high efficiency characteristics relative to the applications as listed in
NEMA MG 10. Additionally, polyphase squirrel-cage medium induction motors
with continuous ratings shall meet or exceed energy efficient ratings in
accordance with Table 12-6C of NEMA MG 1.
1.6.4 Three-Phase Motor Protection
Provide controllers for motors rated one 1 horsepower and larger with
electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from
phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage. Provide protection for motors
from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay.
When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent

instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government
personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including
pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system.
Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the
operation and maintenance work.
Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the
equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government
for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of
instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section.
When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately
half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for
instruction with the equipment or system.
When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are

made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to
acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.
1.8 ACCESSIBILITY

PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT
New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall
be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.
3.1.1 Factory Painting Systems
Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject

to certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand
SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 4

125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors
shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test
shall be in accordance with ASTM B117, and for that test the acceptance
criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test,
the paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and
no loss of adhesion; and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage
beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark.
The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment
shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If
manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use
on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory
painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.
3.1.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces
Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces
need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the
surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and
solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces
subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned to
bare metal.
Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat
after the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting
and retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat
shall be aluminum or light gray.
a. Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the

metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F shall
receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of 1 mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry
film thickness of 1 mil per coat.
b. Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to

temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of
400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum
c. Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to

temperatures greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 600
degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film
SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 5

SECTION 23 05 48.00 40
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

02/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASA S2.71 (1983; R 2006) Guide to the Evaluation of

Human Exposure to Vibration in Buildings
NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS (2005) Procedural Standards for TAB

(Testing, Adjusting and Balancing)
Environmental Systems

SYSTEMS applies to work specified in this section to the extent applicable.
Ensure all vibration-control apparatus is the product of a single

manufacturing source, where possible. Human exposure levels should be
considered using ASA S2.71 and NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS.
Scheduled isolation mounting is in inches and is a minimum static

deflection.
Spans referred to in Part 2, "Vibration-Isolation Systems Application,"

means longest bay dimension.
Determine exact mounting sizes and number of isolators by the isolator

manufacturer based on equipment that will be installed. Check equipment
revolutions per minute (rpm) and spring deflections to verify that
resonance cannot occur.
Five working days prior to commencement of installation, submit

installation drawings for vibration isolator systems including equipment
and performance requirements.
Indicate within outline drawings for vibration isolator systems, overall

physical features, dimensions, ratings, service requirements, and weights
of equipment.
Within ten working days of Contract Award, submit equipment and

performance data for vibration isolator systems including equipment base
design; inertia-block mass relative to support equipment weight; spring
loads and free, operating, and solid heights of spring; spring diameters;
nonmetallic isolator loading and deflection; disturbing frequency; natural
frequency of mounts; deflection of working member; and anticipated amount
SECTION 23 05 48.00 40 Page 1

of physical movement at the reference points.
Ensure data includes the following:
a. Mountings
b. Isolators
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Outline Drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Equipment and Performance Data; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Type of Isolator; G, A/E
Type of Base; G
Allowable Deflection; G
Measured Deflection; G
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TYPE OF VIBRATION-ISOLATION PROVISIONS
Design for vibration isolation using NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS as

applicable to the following sections.
Submit test reports for testing vibration isolation for each type of
isolator and each type of base, and meet referenced standards contained
within this section. Include in test reports allowable deflection and
measured deflection also meeting referenced standards within this section.
2.1.1 Materials
Ensure rubber is natural rubber and elastomer is chloroprene. Shore A

durometer measurement of both materials and range between 40 and 60.
Inorganic materials such as precompressed, high-density, fibrous glass

encased in a resilient moisture-impervious membrane may be used in lieu of
specified natural rubber and elastomers. Where this substitution is made,
ensure specified deflections are modified by the manufacturing source to
accommodate physical characteristics of inorganic materials and to provide
equal or better vibration isolation.
SECTION 23 05 48.00 40 Page 2

Ensure weather-exposed metal vibration-isolator parts are corrosion

protected. Chloroprene coat springs.
2.1.2 Mountings
Provide the following mountings:
Type A: Composite pad, with 0.25-inch thick elastomer top and bottom
layers, molded to contain a pattern with nonslip characteristics in
all horizontal directions. Elastomer loading is not to exceed 40
pounds per square inch (psi). Ensure minimum overall thickness is 1
inch. Maximum deflections up to 0.25-inch are allowed.
Type B: Double rubber-in-shear or elastomer-in-shear with molded-in

steel reinforcement in top and bottom. Maximum deflections up to 0.50
inch are allowed.
Type C: Free-standing laterally stable open-spring type for

deflections over 0.50 inch, with built-in bearing and leveling
provisions, 0.25-inch thick Type A base elastomer pads, and
accessories. Ensure outside diameter of each spring is equal to or
greater than 0.9 times the operating height of the spring under rated
load.
Type D: Partially housed type, containing one or more vertically

restrained springs with at least 0.50 inch clearance maintained around
springs, with adjustable limit stops, 0.25-inch thick Type A base
elastomer pads, and accessories.
Type E: Pendulum-suspension configuration with free-standing stable

spring with resilient horizontal and vertical restraints to allow
maximum movements of 0.25 inch in each direction, 0.25-inch thick Type
A base elastomer pads.
Type F: Combination spring and rubber-in-shear or elastomer-in-shear

steel framed for hanger-rod mounting, with minimum total static
deflection of 1 inch.
Type G: Air spring with body constructed of reinforced elastomer

specifically suitable for application environment. Select air spring
to provide a natural frequency equal to 5 inches of deflection of
conventional specified steel springs. Provide facilities for
dead-level adjustment and height-control of supported equipment.
2.1.3 Bases
Provide the following bases:
Type U: Unit isolators without rails, structural-steel bases, or

inertia blocks.
Type R: Rails, connected mill-rolled structural steel, of sufficient

dimension to preclude deflection at midpoint of unsupported span in
excess of 1/1,440th of the span between isolators, power transmission,
component misalignment, and any overhung weight. Where Type R bases
are specified and the equipment proposed requires additional base
support, use a Type S base.
Type S: Structural-steel bases common to a supported assembly, made
SECTION 23 05 48.00 40 Page 3

from welded-joint mill-rolled structural steel with closed-perimeter

configuration, isolators attached to outrigger supports.
Ensure height of steel members is sufficient to provide stiffness

required to maintain equipment manufacturer's recommended alignment
and duty efficiency of power-transmission components. Ensure height
of steel member does not result in member deflection at midpoint of
unsupported span of more than 1/1,440th of the span between
isolators. Minimum height is 5 inches.
Type CIB: Provide concrete inertia blocks common to the entire

assembly, with welded-joint construction, mill-rolled structural-steel
perimeters, welded-in No. 4 reinforcing bars 8 inches on center each
way near the bottom of the block, outrigger-isolator mounting
provisions, anchor bolts, and be filled with 3,000 psi cured-strength
concrete.
Configure rectangular inertia bases to accommodate equipment supported.
Ensure minimum thickness of inertia base, in addition to providing

suitable mass, is sufficient to provide stiffness to maintain
equipment manufacturer's recommended alignment and duty efficiency of
power-transmission components, and is sufficient to result in base
deflection at midpoint of unsupported span of not more than 1/1,440th
of the span between isolators. Verify minimum thickness, the
preceding requirements not withstanding, is 8 percent of the longest
base dimension.
Ensure pumps with flexible couplings does not have inertia bases less than
8 inches thick, and the minimum mass of concrete inertia block is equal in
weight to supported equipment.
2.2 VIBRATION-ISOLATION SYSTEMS APPLICATION
Vibration isolation design per NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS.
2.2.1 Centrifugal Pump Locations
ON\ABOVE ON\ABOVE ON\ABOVE

GRADE GRADE GRADE
BASEMENT 20-FOOT 30-FOOT 40-FOOT
TYPE BELOW-GRADE FLOOR-SPAN FLOOR-SPAN FLOOR-SPAN
EQUIPMENT PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS*
Close-
couple
through
5 hp None -R-0.35 C-S-1.0 C-S-1.0
Bedplate-
mounted
through
5 hp None C-CIB-1.0 C-CIB-1.5 C-CIB-1.75
7-1/2 hp None C-CIB-1.0 C-CIB-1.75 C-CIB-2.5
*TYPE OF MOUNTING, BASE, AND MINIMUM DEFLECTION IN INCHES
SECTION 23 05 48.00 40 Page 4

2.2.2 Low-Pressure Suspended Air-Handling Unit (AHU) Locations
Vibration-isolation provisions apply to ceiling-suspended Air Moving and

Conditioning Association Class A packaged central-station units.
20-FOOT 30-FOOT 40-FOOT

ROOF-SPAN ROOF-SPAN ROOF-SPAN
TYPE EQUIPMENT PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS* PROVISIONS*
Through 5 hp F-U-1.0 F-U-1.0 F-U-1.0
7-1/2 hp and over

250 to 500 rpm F-U-1.75 F-U-1.75 F-U-1.75
500 rpm and over F-U-1.0 F-U-1.25 F-U-1.55
*TYPE OF MOUNTING, BASE, AND MINIMUM DEFLECTION IN INCHES
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Ensure rails, structural steel bases, and concrete inertia blocks are
raised not less than 1 inch above the floor and are level when equipment
supported is under operating load.
Ensure vibration-isolation installation and deflection testing after

equipment start-up is directed by a competent representative of the
manufacturer.
3.2 TESTS AND REPORTS
Ensure vibration-isolation devices are deflection tested. Submit test

reports in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Submittals,"
substantiating that all equipment has been isolated as specified and that
minimum specified deflections have been met. Make all measurements in the
presence of the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 23 05 48.00 40 Page 5

SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

08/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AMCA 203 (1990; R 2011) Field Performance

Measurements of Fan Systems

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 62.1 (2010; Errata 2011; INT 3 2012; INT 4

2012; INT 5 2013) Ventilation for
Acceptable Indoor Air Quality
AABC MN-1 (2002; 6th ed) National Standards for

Total System Balance
AABC MN-4 (1996) Test and Balance Procedures
NATIONAL AERONAUTICS AND SPACE ADMINISTRATION (NASA)
RCBEA GUIDE (2004) NASA Reliability Centered Building

and Equipment Acceptance Guide
NEBB MASV (2006) Procedural Standards for

Measurements and Assessment of Sound and
Vibration
NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS (2005) Procedural Standards for TAB

(Testing, Adjusting and Balancing)
Environmental Systems

(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1780 (2002) HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting

and Balancing, 3rd Edition
SMACNA 1858 (2004) HVAC Sound And Vibration Manual -

First Edition
SMACNA 1972 CD (2012) HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual -

2nd Edition
1.2 DEFINITIONS
a. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
b. COTR: Contracting Officer's Technical Representative.
c. DALT: Duct air leakage test
d. DALT'd: Duct air leakage tested
e. HVAC: Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning; or heating,

ventilating, and cooling.
f. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau
g. Out-of-tolerance data: Pertains only to field acceptance testing of

Final DALT or TAB report. When applied to DALT work, this phase means
"a leakage rate measured during DALT field acceptance testing which
exceeds the leakage rate allowed by SMACNA Leak Test Manual for an
indicated duct construction and sealant class.""a leakage rate
measured during DALT field acceptance testing which exceeds the
leakage rate allowed by Appendix D REQUIREMENTS FOR DUCT AIR LEAK
TESTING." When applied to TAB work this phase means "a measurement
taken during TAB field acceptance testing which does not fall within
the range of plus 5 to minus 5 percent of the original measurement
reported on the TAB Report for a specific parameter."
h. Season of maximum heating load: The time of year when the outdoor
temperature at the project site remains within plus or minus 30
degrees Fahrenheit of the project site's winter outdoor design
temperature, throughout the period of TAB data recording.
i. Season of maximum cooling load: The time of year when the outdoor
temperature at the project site remains within plus or minus 5 degrees
Fahrenheit of the project site's summer outdoor design temperature,
throughout the period of TAB data recording.
j. Season 1, Season 2: Depending upon when the project HVAC is completed

and ready for TAB, Season 1 is defined, thereby defining Season 2.
Season 1 could be the season of maximum heating load, or the season of
maximum cooling load.
k. Sound measurements terminology: Defined in AABC MN-1, NEBB MASV, or

SMACNA 1858 (TABB).
l. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing (of HVAC systems).
m. TAB'd: HVAC Testing/Adjusting/Balancing procedures performed.
n. TAB Agency: TAB Firm
o. TAB team field leader: TAB team field leader
p. TAB team supervisor: TAB team engineer.
q. TAB team technicians: TAB team assistants.
r. TABB: Testing Adjusting and Balancing Bureau.
1.2.1 Similar Terms
In some instances, terminology differs between the Contract and the TAB
Standard primarily because the intent of this Section is to use the
industry standards specified, along with additional requirements listed
herein to produce optimal results.
The following table of similar terms is provided for clarification only.

Contract requirements take precedent over the corresponding AABC, NEBB, or
TABB requirements where differences exist.
SIMILAR TERMS
Contract Term AABC Term NEBB Term TABB Term
TAB Standard National Standards Procedural Standards International

for Testing and for Testing, Standards for
Balancing Heating, Adjusting and Environmental
Ventilating, and Air Balancing of Systems Balance
Conditioning Systems Environmental Systems
TAB Specialist TAB Engineer TAB Supervisor TAB Supervisor
Systems Readiness Construction Phase Field Readiness Field Readiness

Check Inspection Check & Preliminary Check & Prelim.
Field Procedures Field Procedures
1.3 WORK DESCRIPTION
The work includes duct air leakage testing (DALT) and testing, adjusting,
and balancing (TAB) of new and existing heating, ventilating, and cooling
(HVAC) air distribution systems including equipment and performance data,
ducts, and piping which are located within, on, under, between, and
adjacent to buildings, including records of existing conditions.
Perform TAB in accordance with the requirements of the TAB procedural

standard recommended by the TAB trade association that approved the TAB
Firm's qualifications. Comply with requirements of AABC MN-1,
NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, or SMACNA 1780 (TABB) as supplemented and
modified by this specification section. All recommendations and suggested
practices contained in the TAB procedural standards are considered
mandatory.
Conduct DALT and TAB of the indicated existing systems and equipment and
submit the specified DALT and TAB reports for approval. Conduct DALT
testing in compliance with the requirements specified in SMACNA 1972 CD,
except as supplemented and modified by this section. Conduct DALT and TAB
work in accordance with the requirements of this section.
1.3.1 Air Distribution Systems
Test, adjust, and balance systems (TAB) in compliance with this section.
Obtain Contracting Officer's written approval before applying insulation
to exterior of air distribution systems as specified under Section 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
1.3.2 TAB SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS
Show the following information on TAB Schematic Drawings:
1. A unique number or mark for each piece of equipment or terminal.
2. Air quantities at air terminals.
3. Air quantities and temperatures in air handling unit schedules.
4. Ductwork Construction and Leakage Testing Table that defines the DALT
test requirements, including each applicable HVAC duct system ID or
mark, duct pressure class, duct seal class, and duct leakage test
pressure. This table is included in the file for Graphics for Unified
Facilities Guide Specifications:
http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/NAVGRAPH/graphtoc.pdf
The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Specialist must review the
Contract Plans and Specifications and advise the Contracting Officer of
any deficiencies that would prevent the effective and accurate TAB of the
system, including records of existing conditions, and systems readiness
check. The TAB Specialist must provide a Design Review Report
individually listing each deficiency and the corresponding proposed
corrective action necessary for proper system operation.
Submit three copies of the TAB Schematic Drawings and Report Forms to the
Contracting Officer, no later than 21 days prior to the start of TAB field
measurements.
1.3.3 Related Requirements
Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS,

Section 23 08 00.00 10 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS, and Section
23 09 23.13 20 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC applies to
work specified in this section.
Specific requirements relating to Reliability Centered Maintenance (RCM)

principals and Predictive Testing and Inspection (PTI), by the
construction contractor to detect latent manufacturing and installation
defects must be followed as part of the Contractor's Quality Control
program. Refer to the paragraph titled "Sustainability" for detailed
requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

Records of Existing Conditions; G
TAB Firm; G
Designation of TAB team assistants; G
Designation of TAB team engineer; Gor TAB Specialist; G
Designation of TAB team field leader; G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
TAB Schematic Drawings and Report Forms; G
SD-03 Product Data
TAB Related HVAC Submittals; G
A list of the TAB Related HVAC Submittals, no later than 7 days

after the approval of the TAB team engineer.
TAB Procedures; G
Proposed procedures for TAB, submitted with the TAB Schematic

Drawings and Report Forms.
Calibration; G
Systems Readiness Check; G
TAB Execution; G
TAB Verification; G
SD-06 Test Reports
DALT and TAB Work Execution Schedule; G
DALT and TAB Procedures Summary; G
Design review report; G
Pre-Final DALT report; G
Final DALT report; G, A/E
TAB report for Season 1; G, A/E
SD-07 Certificates
Independent TAB agency and personnel qualifications; G
Advance notice of Pre-Final DALT field work; G
Completed Pre-Final DALT Work Checklist; G
Advance Notice of TAB Field Work; G
Completed Pre-TAB Work Checklist
TAB Firm; G
Independent TAB Agency and Personnel Qualifications; G
DALT and TAB Submittal and Work Schedule; G
Design review report; G
Pre-field DALT preliminary notification; G
Pre-field TAB engineering report; G
Advanced notice for TAB field work; G
Prerequisite HVAC Work Check Out List; G
1.5.1 Independent TAB Agency and Personnel Qualifications
To secure approval for the proposed agency, submit information certifying

that the TAB agency is a first tier subcontractor who is not affiliated
with any other company participating in work on this contract, including
design, furnishing equipment, or construction. Further, submit the
following, for the agency, to Contracting Officer for approval:
a. Independent AABC or NEBB or TABB TAB agency:
TAB agency: AABC registration number and expiration date of current

certification; or NEBB certification number and expiration date of
current certification; or TABB certification number and expiration
date of current certification.
TAB team supervisor: Name and copy of AABC or NEBB or TABB TAB
supervisor certificate and expiration date of current
certification.
TAB team field leader: Name and documented evidence that the team
field leader has satisfactorily performed full-time supervision of
TAB work in the field for not less than 3 years immediately
preceding this contract's bid opening date.
TAB team field technicians: Names and documented evidence that each
field technician has satisfactorily assisted a TAB team field
leader in performance of TAB work in the field for not less than
one year immediately preceding this contract's bid opening date.
Current certificates: Registrations and certifications are current,

and valid for the duration of this contract. Renew Certifications
which expire prior to completion of the TAB work, in a timely
manner so that there is no lapse in registration or
certification. TAB agency or TAB team personnel without a current
registration or current certification are not to perform TAB work
on this contract.
b. TAB Team Members: TAB team approved to accomplish work on this
contract are full-time employees of the TAB agency. No other

personnel is allowed to do TAB work on this contract.
c. Replacement of TAB team members: Replacement of members may occur if

each new member complies with the applicable personnel qualifications
and each is approved by the Contracting Officer.
1.5.2 TAB Standard
Perform TAB in accordance with the requirements of the standard under

which the TAB Firm's qualifications are approved, i.e., AABC MN-1,
NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, or SMACNA 1780 unless otherwise specified
herein. All recommendations and suggested practices contained in the TAB
Standard are considered mandatory. Use the provisions of the TAB
Standard, including checklists, report forms, etc., as nearly as
practical, to satisfy the Contract requirements. Use the TAB Standard for
all aspects of TAB, including qualifications for the TAB Firm and
Specialist and calibration of TAB instruments. Where the instrument
manufacturer calibration recommendations are more stringent than those
listed in the TAB Standard, adhere to the manufacturer's recommendations.
All quality assurance provisions of the TAB Standard such as performance

guarantees are part of this contract. For systems or system components
not covered in the TAB Standard, TAB procedures must be developed by the
TAB Specialist. Where new procedures, requirements, etc., applicable to
the Contract requirements have been published or adopted by the body
responsible for the TAB Standard used (AABC, NEBB, or TABB), the
requirements and recommendations contained in these procedures and
requirements are considered mandatory, including the latest requirements
of ASHRAE 62.1.
1.5.3 Sustainability
Contractor must submit the following as part of the Quality Control Plan
for acceptance testing:
a. List all test equipment to be used, including its manufacturer,model

number, calibration date, and serial number.
b. Certificates of test personnel qualifications and certifications.

Provide certification of compliance with 40 CFR 82.
c. Proof of equivalency if the contractor desires to substitute a test

requirement.
Perform the following PTI as an integral part of the TAB process per the
most recent edition of the NASA RCBEA GUIDE:
Compressors:
a. Vibration Analysis
b. Balance Test and Measurement
c. Alignment (laser preferred)
d. Lubricating Oil Test
e. Thermodynamic Performance Test
f. Hydraulic Oil Test (optional)
Fans:
a. Vibration Analysis
b. Balance Test and Measurement
c. Alignment (laser preferred)

d. Lubricating Oil Test
e. Thermodynamic Performance Test
Heat Exchangers (Condenser Air Cooled):

a. Hydrostatic Test
b. Thermodynamic Performance Test
HVAC Ducts:
a. Operational Test
b. Ductwork Leak Testing (DALT); Pre-Final DALT report, Final
DALT report
1.5.4.1 TAB Firm
The TAB Firm must be either a member of AABC or certified by the NEBB or
the TABB and certified in all categories and functions where measurements
or performance are specified on the plans and specifications, including
TAB of environmental systems.
Certification must be maintained for the entire duration of duties

specified herein. If, for any reason, the firm loses subject
certification during this period, the Contractor must immediately notify
the Contracting Officer and submit another TAB Firm for approval. Any
firm that has been the subject of disciplinary action by either the AABC,
the NEBB, or the TABB within the five years preceding Contract Award is
not be eligible to perform any duties related to the HVAC systems,
including TAB. All work specified in this Section and in other related
Sections to be performed by the TAB Firm will be considered invalid if the
TAB Firm loses its certification prior to Contract completion and must be
performed by an approved successor.
These TAB services are to assist the prime Contractor in performing the
quality oversight for which it is responsible. The TAB Firm must be a
prime subcontractor of the Contractor and be financially and corporately
independent of the mechanical subcontractor, reporting directly to and
paid by the Contractor.
1.5.4.2 TAB Specialist
The TAB Specialist must be either a member of AABC,an experienced

technician of the Firm certified by the NEBB, or a Supervisor certified by
the TABB. The certification must be maintained for the entire duration of
duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the Specialist loses subject
certification during this period, immediately notify the Contracting
Officer and submit another TAB Specialist for approval. Any individual
that has been the subject of disciplinary action by either the AABC, the
NEBB, or the TABB within the five years preceding Contract Award is not
eligible to perform any duties related to the HVAC systems, including
TAB. All work specified in this Section and in other related Sections
performed by the TAB Specialist will be considered invalid if the TAB
Specialist loses its certification prior to Contract completion and must
be performed by the approved successor.
1.5.4.3 TAB Specialist Responsibilities
TAB Specialist responsibilities include all TAB work specified herein and
in related sections under his direct guidance. The TAB specialist is

required to be onsite on a daily basis to direct TAB efforts. The TAB
Specialist must participate in the commissioning process specified in
Section 23 08 00.00 10 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS.
1.5.4.4 TAB Related HVAC Submittals
The TAB Specialist must prepare a list of the submittals from the Contract
Submittal Register that relate to the successful accomplishment of all
HVAC TAB. Accompany the submittals identified on this list with a letter
of approval signed and dated by the TAB Specialist when submitted to the
Government. Ensure that the location and details of ports, terminals,
connections, etc., necessary to perform TAB are identified on the
submittals.
1.5.5 Responsibilities
The Contractor is responsible for ensuring compliance with the

requirements of this section. The following delineation of specific work
responsibilities is specified to facilitate TAB execution of the various
work efforts by personnel from separate organizations. This breakdown of
specific duties is specified to facilitate adherence to the schedule
listed in paragraph entitled "TAB Submittal and Work Schedule."
1.5.5.1 Contractor
a. TAB personnel: Ensure that the DALT work and the TAB work is
accomplished by a group meeting the requirements specified in
paragraph entitled "TAB Personnel Qualification Requirements."
b. Pre-DALT/TAB meeting: Attend the meeting with the TAB Supervisor, and
ensure that a representative is present for the sheetmetal contractor,
mechanical contractor, electrical contractor, and automatic
temperature controls contractor.
c. HVAC documentation: Furnish one complete set of the following

HVAC-related documentation to the TAB agency:
(1) Contract drawings and specifications
(2) Approved submittal data for equipment
(3) Construction work schedule
(4) Up-to-date revisions and change orders for the previously listed
items
d. Submittal and work schedules: Ensure that the schedule for submittals
and work required by this section and specified in paragraph entitled
"TAB Submittal and Work Schedule," is met.
e. Coordination of supporting personnel:
Provide the technical personnel, such as factory representatives or

HVAC controls installer required by the TAB field team to support the
DALT and the TAB field measurement work.
Provide equipment mechanics to operate HVAC equipment and ductwork

mechanics to provide the field designated test ports to enable TAB
field team to accomplish the DALT and the TAB field measurement work.
Ensure these support personnel are present at the times required by
the TAB team, and cause no delay in the DALT and the TAB field work.
Conversely, ensure that the HVAC controls installer has required

support from the TAB team field leader to complete the controls check
out.
f. Deficiencies: Ensure that the TAB Agency supervisor submits all

Design/Construction deficiency notifications directly to the
Contracting officer within 3 days after the deficiency is
encountered. Further, ensure that all such notification submittals
are complete with explanation, including documentation, detailing
deficiencies.
g. Prerequisite HVAC work: Complete check out and debugging of HVAC

equipment, ducts, and controls prior to the TAB engineer arriving at
the project site to begin the TAB work. Debugging includes searching
for and eliminating malfunctioning elements in the HVAC system
installations, and verifying all adjustable devices are functioning as
designed. Include as prerequisite work items, the deficiencies
pointed out by the TAB team supervisor in the design review report.
h. Prior to the TAB field team's arrival, ensure completion of the

applicable inspections and work items listed in the TAB team
supervisor's pre-field engineering report. Do not allow the TAB team
to commence TAB field work until all of the following are completed.
(1) HVAC system installations are fully complete.
(2) HVAC prerequisite checkout work lists specified in the paragraph

"Pre-Field TAB Engineering Report" are completed, submitted, and
approved. Ensure that the TAB Agency gets a copy of the approved
prerequisite HVAC work checklist.
(3) DALT field checks for all systems are completed.
(4) HVAC system filters are clean for both Season 1 and Season 2 TAB
field work.
i. Advance notice: Furnish to the Contracting Officer with advance

written notice for the commencement of the DALT field work and for the
commencement of the TAB field work.
j. Insulation work: For required DALT work , ensure that insulation is

not installed on ducts to be DALT'd until DALT work on the subject
ducts is complete. Later, ensure that openings in duct and machinery
insulation coverings for TAB test ports are marked, closed and sealed.
1.5.5.2 TAB Agency
Provide the services of a TAB team which complies with the requirements of
paragraph entitled "Independent TAB Agency Personnel Qualifications". The
work to be performed by the TAB agency is limited to testing, adjusting,
and balancing of HVAC air and water systems to satisfy the requirements of
this specification section.
1.5.5.3 TAB Team Supervisor
a. Overall management: Supervise and manage the overall TAB team work
effort, including preliminary and technical DALT and TAB procedures
and TAB team field work.
b. Pre-DALT/TAB meeting: Attend meeting with Contractor.
c. Design review report: Review project specifications and accompanying

drawings to verify that the air systems and water systems are designed
in such a way that the TAB engineer can accomplish the work in
compliance with the requirements of this section. Verify the presence
and location of permanently installed test ports and other devices
needed, including gauge cocks, thermometer wells, flow control
devices, circuit setters, balancing valves, and manual volume dampers.
d. Support required: Specify the technical support personnel required

from the Contractor other than the TAB agency; such as factory
representatives for temperature controls or for complex equipment.
Inform the Contractor in writing of the support personnel needed and
when they are needed. Furnish the notice as soon as the need is
anticipated, either with the design review report, or the pre-field
engineering report, the during the DALT or TAB field work.
e. Pre-field DALT preliminary notification: Monitor the completion of

the duct installation of each system and provide the necessary written
notification to the Contracting Officer.
f. Pre-field engineering report: Utilizing the following HVAC-related

documentation; contract drawings and specifications, approved
submittal data for equipment, up-to-date revisions and change orders;
prepare this report.
g. Prerequisite HVAC work checklist: Ensure the Contractor gets a copy

of this checklist at the same time as the pre-field engineering report
is submitted.
h. Technical assistance for DALT work.
(1) Technical assistance: Provide immediate technical assistance to

TAB field team.
(2) DALT field visit: Near the end of the DALT field work effort,
visit the contract site to inspect the HVAC installation and the
progress of the DALT field work. Conduct a site visit to the
extent necessary to verify correct procedures are being
implemented and to confirm the accuracy of the Pre-final DALT
Report data which has been reported. Also, perform sufficient
evaluation to allow the TAB supervisor to issue certification of
the final report. Conduct the site visit full-time for a minimum
of one 8 hour workday duration.
i. Final DALT report: Certify the DALT report. This certification

includes the following work:
(1) Review: Review the Pre-final DALT report data. From these field
reports, prepare the Certified Final DALT report.
(2) TAB Verification: Verify adherence, by the TAB field team, to
the procedures specified in this section.
j. Technical Assistance for TAB Work: Provide immediate technical

assistance to the TAB field team for the TAB work.
(1) TAB field visit: Near the end of the TAB field work effort, visit
the contract site to inspect the HVAC installation and the
progress of the TAB field work. Conduct site visit full-time for
a minimum of one 8 hour workday duration. Review the TAB final
report data and certify the TAB final report.
k. Certified TAB report: Certify the TAB report. This certification

includes the following work:
(1) Review: Review the TAB field data report. From this field
report, prepare the certified TAB report.
(2) Verification: Verify adherence, by the TAB field team, to the

TAB plan prescribed by the pre-field engineering report and verify
adherence to the procedures specified in this section.
l. Design/Construction deficiencies: Within 3 working days after the TAB

Agency has encountered any design or construction deficiencies, the
TAB Supervisor must submit written notification directly to the
Contracting Officer, with a separate copy to the Contractor, of all
such deficiencies. Provide in this submittal a complete explanation,
including supporting documentation, detailing deficiencies. Where
deficiencies are encountered that are believed to adversely impact
successful completion of TAB, the TAB Agency must issue notice and
request direction in the notification submittal.
m. TAB Field Check: The TAB team supervisor must attend and supervise
TAB field check.
1.5.5.4 TAB Team Field Leader
a. Field manager: Manage, in the field, the accomplishment of the work

specified in Part 3, "Execution."
b. Full time: Be present at the contract site when DALT field work or
TAB field work is being performed by the TAB team; ensure day-to-day
TAB team work accomplishments are in compliance with this section.
c. Prerequisite HVAC work: Do not bring the TAB team to the contract
site until a copy of the prerequisite HVAC Checklist, with all work
items certified by the Contractor to be working as designed, reaches
the office of the TAB Agency.
1.5.6 Test Reports
1.5.6.1 Data from DALT Field Work
Report the data for the Pre-final DALT Report and Certified Final DALT
Report in compliance the following requirements:
a. Report format: Submit report data on Air Duct Leakage Test Summary
Report Forms as shown on Page 6-2 of SMACNA 1972 CD. In addition,
submit in the report, a marked duct shop drawing which identifies each
section of duct tested with assigned node numbers for each section.
Include node numbers in the completed report forms to identify each

duct section. The TAB supervisor must review and certify the report.
b. The TAB supervisor must include a copy of all calculations prepared in

determining the duct surface area of each duct test section. In
addition,provide the ductwork air leak testing (DALT) reports with a
copy(s) of the calibration curve for each of the DALT test orifices
used for testing.
c. Instruments: List the types of instruments actually used to measure

the data. Include in the listing each instrument's unique
identification number, calibration date, and calibration expiration
date. Instruments must have been calibrated within one year of the
date of use in the field. Instrument calibration must be traceable to
the measuring standards of the National Institute of Standards and
Technology.
d. Certification: Include the typed name of the TAB supervisor and the
dated signature of the TAB supervisor.
1.5.6.2 Certified TAB Reports
Submit: TAB Report for Season 1 in the following manner:
a. Report format: Submit the completed pre-field data forms approved in

the pre-field TAB Engineering Report completed by TAB field team,
reviewed and certified by the TAB supervisor. Bind the report with a
waterproof front and back cover. Include a table of contents
identifying by page number the location of each report. Report forms
and report data must be typewritten. Handwritten report forms or
report data are not acceptable.
b. System Diagrams: Provide updated diagrams with final installed

locations of all terminals and devices, any numbering changes, and
actual test locations. Use a key numbering system on the diagram
which identifies each outlet contained in the outlet airflow report
sheets.
c. Duct Traverses: Report duct traverses for main supply, return,

exhaust, relief and outside air ducts. This includes all ducts,
including those which lack 7 1/2 duct diameters upstream and 2 1/2
duct diameters downstream of straight duct unobstructed by duct
fittings/offsets/elbows. The TAB Agency must evaluate and report
findings on the duct traverses taken. Evaluate the suitability of the
duct traverse measurement based on satisfying the qualifications for a
pilot traverse plane as defined by AMCA 203, "Field Measurements",
Section 8, paragraph 8.3, "Location of Traverse Plane."
f. Instruments: List the types of instruments actually used to measure

the tab data. Include in the listing each instrument's unique
date.
Instrumentation, used for taking wet bulb temperature readings must

provide accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent at the measured face
velocities. Submit instrument manufacturer's literature to document
instrument accuracy performance is in compliance with that specified.
g. Certification: Include the typed name of the TAB supervisor and the
dated signature of the TAB supervisor.
h. Performance Curves: The TAB Supervisor must include, in the TAB

Reports, factory pump curves and fan curves for pumps and fans TAB'd
on the job.
i. Calibration Curves: The TAB Supervisor must include, in the TAB

Reports, a factory calibration curve for installed flow control
balancing valves, flow venturi's and flow orifices TAB'd on the job.
1.6.1 DALT and TAB Services to Obtain Existing Conditions
Conduct DALT and TAB of the indicated existing systems and equipment and
submit the specified DALT and TAB reports for approval. Conduct this DALT
and TAB work in accordance with the requirements of this section.
1.7.1 DALT and TAB Submittal and Work Schedule
Comply with additional requirements specified in Appendix C: DALT AND TAB

SUBMITTAL AND WORK SCHEDULE included at the end of this section
1.7.2 Projects with Phased Construction
This specification section is structured as though the HVAC construction,

and thereby the TAB work, will be completed in a single phase. When the
construction is completed in phases, the DALT work and TAB work must be
planned, completed, and accepted for each construction phase.
1.7.2.1 Phasing of Work
This specification section is structured as though the HVAC construction,

and thereby the TAB work, is going to be completed in a single phase. All
elements of the TAB work are addressed on this premise. When a contract
is to be completed in construction phases, including the TAB work, and the
DALT work, the TAB work and DALT work must be planned for, completed and
approved by the Contracting Officer with each phase. An example of this
case would be one contract that requires the rehabilitation of the HVAC in
each of several separated buildings. At the completion of the final
phase, compile all approved reports and submit as one document.
1.7.3 DALT and TAB Submittal and Work Schedule
Submit this schedule,and TAB Schematic Drawings, adapted for this

particular contract, to the Contracting Officer (CO) for review and
approval. Include with the submittal the planned calendar dates for each
submittal or work item. Resubmit an updated version for CO approval every
90 calendar days days. Compliance with the following schedule is the
Contractor's responsibility.
Qualify TAB Personnel: Within 45 calendar days after date of contract

award, submit TAB agency and personnel qualifications.
Pre-DALT/TAB Meeting: Within 30 calendar days after the date of approval

of the TAB agency and personnel, meet with the COTR.
Design Review Report: Within 60 calendar days after the date of the TAB
agency personnel qualifications approval, submit design review report.
Pre-Field DALT Preliminary Notification: On completion of the duct

installation for each system, notify the Contracting Officer in
writing within 5 days after completion.
Ductwork Selected for DALT: Within 7 calendar days of Pre-Field DALT

Preliminary Notification, the COTR will select which of the project
ductwork must be DALT'd.
DALT Field Work: Within 48 hours of COTR's selection, complete DALT field
work on selected.
Submit Pre-final DALT Report: Within one working day after completion of
DALT field work, submit Pre-final DALT Report. Separate Pre-final DALT
reports may be submitted to allow phased testing from system to system.
DALT Work Field Check: Upon approval of the Pre-final DALT Report,
schedule the COTR's DALT field check work with the Contracting Officer.
Submit Final DALT Report: Within 15 calendar days after completion of

successful DALT Work Field Check, submit TAB report.
Pre-Field TAB Engineering Report: Within 7 calendar days after approval

of the TAB agency Personnel Qualifications, submit the Pre-Field TAB
Engineering Report.
Prerequisite HVAC Work Check Out List and Advanced Notice For TAB Field
Work: At a minimum of 115 calendar days prior to CCD, submit
prerequisite HVAC work check out list certified as complete, and
submit advance notice of commencement of TAB field work.
TAB Field Work: At a minimum of 90 calendar days prior to CCD, accomplish

TAB field work.
Submit TAB Report: Within 15 calendar days after completion of TAB field
work, submit TAB report.
TAB Field Check: 30 calendar days after Season 1 TAB report is approved
by the Contracting Officer, conduct field check.
Complete TAB Work: Prior to CCD, complete all TAB work.

TAB field work; submit TAB report; and conduct field check.
Complete TAB Work: Prior to CCD, complete all TAB work.
1.7.3.1 Design Review Report
Submit typed report describing omissions and deficiencies in the HVAC

system's design that would preclude the TAB team from accomplishing the
duct leakage testing work and the TAB work requirements of this section.
Provide a complete explanation including supporting documentation
detailing the design deficiency. State that no deficiencies are evident
if that is the case.
1.7.3.2 Pre-Field DALT Preliminary Notification
Notification: On completion of the installation of each duct system

indicated to be DALT'd, notify the Contracting Officer in writing within 7
calendar days after completion.
1.7.3.3 Pre-Field TAB Engineering Report
Submit report containing the following information:
a. Step-by-step TAB procedure:
(1) Strategy: Describe the method of approach to the TAB field work
from start to finish. Include in this description a complete
methodology for accomplishing each seasonal TAB field work session.
(2) Air System Diagrams: Use the contract drawings and duct
fabrication drawings if available to provide air system diagrams
in the report showing the location of all terminal outlet supply,
return, exhaust and transfer registers, grilles and diffusers. Use
a key numbering system on the diagrams which identifies each
outlet contained in the outlet airflow report sheets. Show
intended locations of all traverses and static pressure readings.
(3) Procedural steps: Delineate fully the intended procedural steps

to be taken by the TAB field team to accomplish the required TAB
work of each air distribution system and each water distribution
system. Include intended procedural steps for TAB work for
subsystems and system components.
b. Pre-field data: Submit AABC or NEBB or SMACNA 1780 data report forms
with the following pre-field information filled in:
(1) Design data obtained from system drawings, specifications, and

approved submittals.
(2) Notations detailing additional data to be obtained from the

contract site by the TAB field team.
(3) Designate the actual data to be measured in the TAB field work.
(4) Provide a list of the types of instruments, and the measuring

range of each, which are anticipated to be used for measuring in
the TAB field work. By means of a keying scheme, specify on each
TAB data report form submitted, which instruments will be used for
measuring each item of TAB data. If the selection of which
instrument to use, is to be made in the field, specify from which
instruments the choice will be made. Place the instrument key
number in the blank space where the measured data would be entered.
c. Prerequisite HVAC work checkout list: Provide a list of inspections

and work items which are to be completed by the Contractor. This list
must be acted upon and completed by the Contractor and then submitted
and approved by the Contracting Officer prior to the TAB team coming
to the contract site.
At a minimum, a list of the applicable inspections and work items

listed in the NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, Section III, "Preliminary TAB
Procedures" under paragraphs titled, "Air Distribution System
Inspection" and "Hydronic Distribution System Inspection" must be

provided for each separate system to be TAB'd.
1.8 WARRANTY
Furnish workmanship and performance warranty for the DALT and TAB system
work performed for a period not less than 1 years from the date of
Government acceptance of the work; issued directly to the Government.
Include provisions that if within the warranty period the system shows
evidence of major performance deterioration, or is significantly out of
tolerance, resulting from defective TAB or DALT workmanship, the
corrective repair or replacement of the defective materials and correction
of the defective workmanship is the responsibility of the TAB firm.
Perform corrective action that becomes necessary because of defective
materials and workmanship while system TAB and DALT is under warranty 7
days after notification, unless additional time is approved by the
Contracting Officer. Failure to perform repairs within the specified
period of time constitutes grounds for having the corrective action and
repairs performed by others and the cost billed to the TAB firm. The
Contractor must also provide a 1 year contractor installation warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WORK DESCRIPTIONS OF PARTICIPANTS
Comply with requirements of this section as specified in Appendix A WORK

DESCRIPTIONS OF PARTICIPANTS.
3.2 PRE-DALT/TAB MEETING
Meet with the Contracting Officer's technical representative (COTR) to

develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of the DALT work
and TAB work requirements. Ensure that the TAB supervisor is present at
this meeting. Requirements to be discussed include required submittals,
work schedule, and field quality control.
3.3 DALT PROCEDURES
3.3.1 Instruments, Consumables and Personnel
Provide instruments, consumables and personnel required to accomplish the

DALT field work. Follow the same basic procedure specified below for TAB
Field Work, including maintenance and calibration of instruments, accuracy
of measurements, preliminary procedures, field work, workmanship and
treatment of deficiencies. Calibrate and maintain instruments in
accordance with manufacturer's written procedures.
3.3.2 Advance Notice of Pre-Final DALT Field Work
On completion of the installation of each duct system indicated to be

DALT'd, notify the Contracting Officer in writing prior to the COTR's duct
selection field visit.
3.3.3 Ductwork To Be DALT'd
From each duct system indicated as subject to DALT, the COTR will randomly
select sections of each completed duct system for testing by the
Contractor's TAB Firm. The sections selected will not exceed 20 percent
of the total measured linear footage of duct systems indicated as subject
to DALT. Sections of duct systems subject to DALT will include 20 percent
of main ducts, branch main ducts, branch ducts and plenums for supply,
return, exhaust, and plenum ductwork.
It is acceptable for an entire duct system to be DALT'd instead of

disassembling that system in order to DALT only the 20 percent portion
specified above.
3.3.4 DALT Testing
Perform DALT on the HVAC duct sections of each system as selected by the
COTR. Use the duct class, seal class, leakage class and the leak test
pressure data indicated on the drawings, to comply with the procedures
specified in SMACNA 1972 CD.
In spite of specifications of SMACNA 1972 CD to the contrary, DALT

ductwork of construction class of 3-inch water gauge static pressure and
below if indicated to be DALT'd. Complete DALT work on the COTR selected
ductwork within 48 hours after the particular ductwork was selected for
DALT. Separately conduct DALT work for large duct systems to enable the
DALT work to be completed in 48 hours.
3.3.5 Pre-final DALT Report
After completion of the DALT work, prepare a Pre-final DALT Report meeting
the additional requirements specified in Appendix B REPORTS - DALT and
TAB. Data required by those data report forms shall be furnished by the
TAB team. Prepare the report neatly and legibly; the Pre-final DALT
report shall provide the basis for the Final DALT Report.
TAB supervisor shall review, approve and sign the Pre-Final DALT Report
and submit this report within one day of completion of DALT field work.
Verbally notify the COTR that the field check of the Pre-Final DALT Report
data can commence.
After completion of the DALT work, prepare a Pre-final DALT Report using
the reporting forms specified. TAB team to furnish data required by those
data report forms. Prepare the report neatly and legibly; the Pre-final
DALT report is the basis for the Final DALT Report. TAB supervisor must
review and certify the Pre-final DALT Report and submit this report within
one day of completion of DALT field work. Verbally notify the COTR that
the field check of the Pre-final DALT Report data can commence.
3.3.6 Quality Assurance - COTR DALT Field Acceptance Testing
In the presence of the COTR and TAB team field leader, verify for accuracy
Pre-final DALT Report data selected by the COTR. For each duct system,
this acceptance testing shall be conducted on a maximum of 50 percent of
the duct sections DALT'd.
Further, if any data on the Pre-final DALT report form for a given duct
section is out-of-tolerance, then field acceptance testing shall be
conducted on data for one additional duct section, preferably in the same
duct system, in the presence of the COTR.
3.3.7 Additional COTR Field Acceptance Testing
If any of the duct sections checked for a given system are determined to
have a leakage rate measured that exceeds the leakage rate allowed by
SMACNA Leak Test Manual for an indicated duct construction class and
sealant class, terminate data checking for that section. The associated
Pre-final DALT Report data for the given duct system will be disapproved.
Make the necessary corrections and prepare a revised Pre-final DALT
Report. Reschedule a field check of the revised report data with the COTR.
3.3.8 Certified Final DALT Report
On successful completion of all field checks of the Pre-final DALT Report

data for all systems, the TAB Supervisor is to assemble, review, certify
and submit the Final DALT Report to the Contracting Officer for approval.
On successful completion of all field checks of the Pre-Final DALT Report

data for all systems, the TAB Supervisor shall assemble, review, approve,
sign and submit the Final DALT Report in compliance with Appendix B
REPORTS - DALT and TAB to the Contracting Officer for approval.
3.3.9 Prerequisite for TAB Field Work
Do not commence TAB field work prior to the completion and approval, for
all systems, of the Final DALT Report.
3.4 TAB PROCEDURES
3.4.1 TAB Field Work
Test, adjust, and balance the HVAC systems until measured flow rates (air
and water flow) are within plus or minus 5 percent of the design flow
rates as specified or indicated on the contract documents.
That is, comply with the the requirements of AABC MN-1 and AABC MN-4 or
SMACNA 1780 (TABB) and SMACNA 1858 (TABB),except as supplemented and
modified by this section.
Test, adjust, and balance the HVAC systems until measured flow rates (air
and water flow) are within plus or minus 5 percent of the design flow
rates as specified or indicated on the contract documents. Conduct TAB
work, including measurement accuracy, and sound measurement work in
conformance with the AABC MN-1 and AABC MN-4, or NEBB TABES and NEBB MASV,
or SMACNA 1780 (used by TABB) and SMACNA 1858 sound measurement
procedures, except as supplemented and modified by this section.
3.4.2 Preliminary Procedures
Use the approved pre-field engineering report as instructions and

procedures for accomplishing TAB field work. TAB engineer is to locate,
in the field, test ports required for testing. It is the responsibility
of the sheet metal contractor to provide and install test ports as
required by the TAB engineer.
3.4.3 TAB Air Distribution Systems
3.4.3.1 Units With Coils
Report heating and cooling performance capacity tests for DX coils for the
purpose of verifying that the coils meet the indicated design capacity.
Submit the following data and calculations with the coil test reports:
a. For units with capacities of 7.5 tons (90,000 Btu) or less, such as
fan coil units, duct mounted reheat coils associated with VAV terminal
units, and unitary units, such as through-the-wall heat pumps:
Determine the apparent coil capacity by calculations using single

point measurement of entering and leaving wet and dry bulb
temperatures; submit the calculations with the coil reports.
3.4.3.2 Air Handling Units
Air handling unit systems including fans (air handling unit fans, exhaust
fans and winter ventilation fans), coils, ducts, plenums, mixing boxes,
and air distribution devices for supply air, return air, outside air,
mixed air relief air, and makeup air.
3.4.3.3 Rooftop Air Conditioning
Rooftop air conditioning systems including fans, coils, ducts, plenums,

and air distribution devices for supply air, return air, and outside air.
For refrigeration compressors/condensers/condensing units/evaporators,

report data as required by NEBB, AABC, and TABB standard procedures,
including refrigeration operational data.
3.4.3.4 Heating and Ventilating Units
Heating and ventilating unit systems including fans, coils, ducts,

plenums, roof vents, registers, diffusers, grilles, and louvers for supply
air, return air, outside air, and mixed air.
3.4.3.5 Makeup Air Units
Makeup air unit systems including fans, coils, ducts, plenums, registers,
diffusers, grilles, and louvers for supply air, return air, outside air,
and mixed air.
3.4.3.6 Fan Coils
Fan coil unit systems including fans, coils, ducts, plenums, and air
distribution devices for supply air, return air, and outside air.
3.4.3.7 Exhaust Fans
Exhaust fan systems including fans, ducts, plenums, grilles, and hoods for
exhaust air.
3.4.4 TAB Work on Performance Tests Without Seasonal Limitations
3.4.4.1 Performance Tests
In addition to the TAB proportionate balancing work on the air
distribution systems, accomplish TAB work on the HVAC systems which

directly transfer thermal energy. TAB the operational performance of the
heating systems and cooling systems.
3.4.4.2 Ambient Temperatures
On each tab report form used for recording data, record the outdoor and
indoor ambient dry bulb temperature range and the outdoor and indoor
ambient wet bulb temperature range within which the report form's data was
recorded. Record these temperatures at beginning and at the end of data
taking.
3.4.4.3 Refrigeration Units
For refrigeration compressors/condensers/condensing units, report data as

required by NEBB Form TAB 15-83, NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, including
refrigeration operational data.
3.4.4.4 Coils
Report heating and cooling performance capacity tests for, DX coils for
the purpose of verifying that the coils meet the indicated design
capacity. Submit the following data and calculations with the coil test
reports:
a. For units with capacities of 7.5 tons (90,000 Btu) or less, such as
fan coil units, duct mounted reheat coils associated with VAV terminal
units, and unitary units, such as through-the-wall heat pumps:
Determine the apparent coil capacity by calculations using single

point measurement of entering and leaving wet and dry bulb
temperatures; submit the calculations with the coil reports.
3.4.5 Workmanship
Conduct TAB work on the HVAC systems until measured flow rates are within
plus or minus 5 percent of the design flow rates as specified or indicated
on the contract documents. This TAB work includes adjustment of balancing
valves, balancing dampers, and sheaves. Further, this TAB work includes
changing out fan sheaves and pump impellers if required to obtain air and
water flow rates specified or indicated. If, with these adjustments and
equipment changes, the specified or indicated design flow rates cannot be
attained, contact the Contracting Officer for direction.
3.4.6 Deficiencies
Strive to meet the intent of this section to maximize the performance of

the equipment as designed and installed. However, if deficiencies in
equipment design or installation prevent TAB work from being accomplished
within the range of design values specified in the paragraph entitled
"Workmanship," provide written notice as soon as possible to the
Contractor and the Contracting Officer describing the deficiency and
recommended correction.
Responsibility for correction of installation deficiencies is the

Contractor's. If a deficiency is in equipment design, call the TAB team
supervisor for technical assistance. Responsibility for reporting design
deficiencies to Contractor is the TAB team supervisor's.
3.4.7 TAB Reports
Additional requirements for TAB Reports are specified in Appendix B

REPORTS - DALT and TAB
After completion of the TAB field work, prepare the TAB field data for TAB
supervisor's review and certification, using the reporting forms approved
in the pre-field engineering report. Data required by those approved data
report forms is to be furnished by the TAB team. Except as approved
otherwise in writing by the Contracting Officer, the TAB work and thereby
the TAB report is considered incomplete until the TAB work is accomplished
to within the accuracy range specified in the paragraph entitled
"Workmanship."
Prepare the report neatly and legibly; the pre-final TAB report is the
final TAB report minus the TAB supervisor's review and certification.
Obtain, at the contract site, the TAB supervisor's review and
certification of the TAB report.
Verbally notify the COTR that the field check of the TAB report data can
commence; give this verbal notice 48 hours in advance of field check
commencement. Do not schedule field check of the TAB report until the
specified workmanship requirements have been met or written approval of
the deviations from the requirements have been received from the
3.4.8 Quality Assurance - COTR TAB Field Acceptance Testing
3.4.8.1 TAB Field Acceptance Testing
During the field acceptance testing, verify, in the presence of the COTR,
random selections of data (water, air quantities, air motion) recorded in
the TAB Report. Points and areas for field acceptance testing are to be
selected by the COTR. Measurement and test procedures are the same as
approved for TAB work for the TAB Report.
Field acceptance testing includes verification of TAB Report data recorded

for the following equipment groups:
Group 1: All air handling units (rooftop and central stations).
Group 2: 25 percent of the supply diffusers, registers, grilles

associated with constant volume air handling units.
Group 3: 25 percent of the return grilles, return registers, exhaust

grilles and exhaust registers.
Further, if any data on the TAB Report for Groups 2 through 5 is found not
to fall within the range of plus 5 to minus 5 percent of the TAB Report
data, additional group data verification is required in the presence of
the COTR. Verify TAB Report data for one additional piece of equipment
in that group. Continue this additional group data verification until
out-of-tolerance data ceases to be found.
3.4.8.2 Additional COTR TAB Field Acceptance Testing
If any of the acceptance testing measurements for a given equipment group

is found not to fall within the range of plus 5 to minus 5 percent of the
TAB Report data, terminate data verification for all affected data for
that group. The affected data for the given group will be disapproved.
Make the necessary corrections and prepare a revised TAB Report.

Reschedule acceptance testing of the revised report data with the COTR.
Further, if any data on the TAB Report for a given field acceptance test
group is out-of-tolerance, then field test data for one additional field
test group as specified herein. Continue this increase field test work
until out-of-tolerance data ceases to to be found. This additional field
testing is up and above the original 25 percent of the of reported data
entries to be field tested.
If there are no more similar field test groups from which to choose,
additional field testing from another, but different, type of field
testing group must be tested.
3.4.8.3 Prerequisite for Approval
Compliance with the field acceptance testing requirements of this section

is a prerequisite for the final Contracting Officer approval of the TAB
Report submitted.
3.5 MARKING OF SETTINGS
Upon the final TAB work approval, permanently mark the settings of HVAC
adjustment devices including valves, gauges, splitters, and dampers so
that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Provide
permanent markings clearly indicating the settings on the adjustment
devices which result in the data reported on the submitted TAB report.
3.6 MARKING OF TEST PORTS
The TAB team is to permanently and legibly mark and identify the location
points of the duct test ports. If the ducts have exterior insulation,
make these markings on the exterior side of the duct insulation. Show the
location of test ports on the as-built mechanical drawings with dimensions
given where the test port is covered by exterior insulation.
3.7 APPENDICES
Appendix A WORK DESCRIPTIONS OF PARTICIPANTS

Appendix B REPORTS - DALT and TAB
Appendix C DALT AND TAB SUBMITTAL AND WORK SCHEDULE
Appendix D REQUIREMENTS FOR DUCT AIR LEAK TESTING
Appendix A
WORK DESCRIPTIONS OF PARTICIPANTS
The Contractor is responsible for ensuring compliance with all

requirements of this specification section. However, the following
delineation of specific work items is provided to facilitate and
co-ordinate execution of the various work efforts by personnel from
separate organizations.
1. Contractor
a. HVAC documentation: Provide pertinent contract documentation to the

TAB Firm, to include the following: the contract drawings and
specifications; copies of the approved submittal data for all HVAC
equipment, air distribution devices, and air/water measuring/balancing
devices; the construction work schedule; and other applicable
documents requested by the TAB Firm. Provide the TAB Firm copies of
contract revisions and modifications as they occur.
b. Schedules: Ensure the requirements specified under the paragraph "DALT

and TAB Schedule" are met.
c. Pre-DALT and TAB meeting: Arrange and conduct the Pre-DALT and TAB
meeting. Ensure that a representative is present for the sheet metal
contractor, the mechanical contractor, the electrical contractor, and
the automatic temperature controls contractor.
d. Coordinate Support: Provide and coordinate support personnel required

by the TAB Firm in order to accomplish the DALT and TAB field work.
Support personnel may include factory representatives, HVAC controls
installers, HVAC equipment mechanics, sheet metal workers, pipe
fitters, and insulators. Ensure support personnel are present at the
work site at the times required.
e. Correct Deficiencies: Ensure the notifications of Construction

Deficiencies are provided as specified herein. Refer to the paragraph
entitled "Construction Deficiencies." Correct each deficiency as soon
as practical with the Contracting Officer, and submit revised
schedules and other required documentation.
f. Pre-TAB Work Checklists: Complete check out and debugging of HVAC

equipment, ducts, and controls prior to the TAB engineer arriving at
the project site to begin the TAB work. Debugging includes searching
for and eliminating malfunctioning elements in the HVAC system
installations, and verifying all adjustable devices are functioning as
designed. Include as pre-TAB work checklist items, the deficiencies
pointed out by the TAB team supervisor in the design review report.
Prior to the TAB field team's arrival, ensure completion of the applicable
inspections and work items listed in the TAB team supervisor's DALT
and TAB Work Procedures Summary. Do not allow the TAB team to
commence TAB field work until all of the following are completed.
g. Give Notice of Testing: Submit advance notice of TAB field work

accompanied by completed prerequisite HVAC Work List
h. Insulation work: Ensure that no insulation is shall not be installed
on ducts to be DALT'd until DALT work on the subject ducts is

complete.
Ensure the duct and piping systems are properly insulated and vapor
sealed upon the successful completion and acceptance of the DALT and
TAB work.
2. TAB Team Supervisor
a. Overall management: Supervise and manage the overall TAB team work
effort, including preliminary and technical DALT and TAB procedures
and TAB team field work.
b. Schedule: Ensure the requirements specified under the paragraph "DALT

and TAB Schedule" are met.
c. Submittals: Provide the submittals specified herein.
d. Pre-DALT/TAB meeting: Attend meeting with Contractor. Ensure TAB

personnel that will be involved in the TAB work under this contract
attend the meeting.
e. Design Review Report: Submit typed report describing omissions and

deficiencies in the HVAC system's design that would preclude the TAB
team from accomplishing the duct leakage testing work and the TAB work
requirements of this section. Provide a complete explanation
including supporting documentation detailing the design deficiency.
State that no deficiencies are evident if that is the case.
f. Support required: Specify the technical support personnel required

from the Contractor other than the TAB agency; such as factory
representatives for temperature controls or for complex equipment.
Inform the Contractor in writing of the support personnel needed and
when they are needed. Furnish the notice as soon as the need is
anticipated, either with the design review report, or the DALT and TAB
Procedures Summary, the during the DALT or TAB field work.
Ensure the Contractor is properly notified and aware of all support

personnel needed to perform the TAB work. Maintain communication with
the Contractor regarding support personnel throughout the duration of
the TAB field work, including the TAB field acceptance testing
checking.
Ensure all inspections and verifications for the Pre-Final DALT and
Pre-TAB Checklists are completely and successfully conducted before
DALT and TAB field work is performed.
g. Advance Notice: Monitor the completion of the duct system

installations and provide the Advance Notice for Pre-Final DALT field
work as specified herein.
h. Technical Assistance: Provide technical assistance to the DALT and

TAB field work.
i. Deficiencies Notification: Ensure the notifications of Construction

Deficiencies are provided as specified herein. Comply with
requirements of the paragraph entitled "Construction Deficiencies."
Resolve each deficiency as soon as practical and submit revised
schedules and other required documentation.
j. Procedures: Develop the required TAB procedures for systems or system

components not covered in the TAB Standard.
3. TAB Team Field Leader
a. Field manager: Manage, in the field, the accomplishment of the work

specified in Part 3, "Execution."
b. Full time: Be present at the contract site when DALT field work or
TAB field work is being performed by the TAB team; ensure day-to-day
TAB team work accomplishments are in compliance with this section.
c. Prerequisite HVAC work: Do not bring the TAB team to the contract
site until a copy of the prerequisite HVAC work list, with all work
items certified by the Contractor to be working as designed, reaches
the office of the TAB Agency.
Appendix B
REPORTS - DALT and TAB
All submitted documentation must be typed, neat, and organized. All

reports must have a waterproof front and back cover, a title page, a
certification page, sequentially numbered pages throughout, and a table of
contents. Tables, lists, and diagrams must be titled. Generate and submit
for approval the following documentation:
1. DALT and TAB Work Execution Schedule
Submit a detailed schedule indicating the anticipated calendar date for

each submittal and each portion of work required under this section. For
each work entry, indicate the support personnel (such as controls
provider, HVAC mechanic, etc.) that are needed to accomplish the work.
Arrange schedule entries chronologically.
2. DALT and TAB Procedures Summary
Submit a detailed narrative describing all aspects of the DALT and TAB
field work to be performed. Clearly distinguish between DALT information
and TAB information. Include the following:
a. A list of the intended procedural steps for the DALT and TAB field
work from start to finish. Indicate how each type of data measurement
will be obtained. Include what Contractor support personnel are
required for each step, and the tasks they need to perform.
b. A list of the project's submittals that are needed by the TAB Firm in
order to meet this Contract's requirements.
c. The schematic drawings to be used in the required reports, which may

include building floor plans, mechanical room plans, duct system
plans, and equipment elevations. Indicate intended TAB measurement
locations, including where test ports need to be provided by the
Contractor.
d. The data presentation forms to be used in the report, with the

preliminary information and initial design values filled in.
e. A list of DALT and TAB instruments to be used, edited for this

project, to include the instrument name and description, manufacturer,
model number, scale range, published accuracy, most recent calibration
date, and what the instrument will be used for on this project.
f. A thorough checklist of the work items and inspections that need to be

accomplished before DALT field work can be performed. The Contractor
must complete, submit, and receive approval of the Completed Pre-Final
DALT Work Checklist before DALT field work can be accomplished.
g. A thorough checklist of the work items and inspections that need to be

accomplished before the TAB field work can be performed. The
Contractor must complete, submit, and receive approval of the
Completed Pre-TAB Work Checklist before the TAB field work can be
accomplished.
h. The checklists specified above shall be individually developed and

tailored specifically for the work under this contract. Refer to
NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, Section III, "Preliminary TAB Procedures"
under the paragraphs titled, "Air Distribution System Inspection" and
"Hydronic Distribution System Inspection" for examples of items to
include in the checklists.
3. Design Review Report
Submit report containing the following information:
a. Review the contract specifications and drawings to verify that the TAB
work can be successfully accomplished in compliance with the
requirements of this section. Verify the presence and location of
permanently installed test ports and other devices needed, including
gauge cocks, thermometer wells, flow control devices, circuit setters,
balancing valves, and manual volume dampers.
b. Submit a typed report describing omissions and deficiencies in the

HVAC system's design that would preclude the TAB team from
accomplishing the DALT work and the TAB work requirements of this
section. Provide a complete explanation including supporting
documentation detailing the design deficiency. If no deficiencies are
evident, state so in the report.
4. Pre-Final DALT Report for COTR DALT Field Checks
Report the data for the Pre-Final DALT Report meeting the following
requirements:
a. Submit a copy of the approved DALT and TAB Procedures Summary:

Provide notations describing how actual field procedures differed from
the procedures listed.
b. Report format: Submit a comprehensive report for the DALT field work
data using data presentation forms equivalent to the "Air Duct Leakage
Test Summary Report Forms" located in the SMACNA 1972 CD. In
addition, submit in the report, a marked duct shop drawing which
identifies each section of duct tested with assigned node numbers for
each section. Node numbers shall be included in the completed report
forms to identify each duct section.
c. Calculations: Include a copy of all calculations prepared in

determining the duct surface area of each duct test section. Include
in the DALT reports copy(s) of the calibration curve for each of the
DALT test orifices used for testing.
d. Instruments: List the types of instruments actually used to measure

the data. Include in the listing each instrument's unique
date. Instruments are to be calibrated within one year of the date of
use in the field; instrument calibration is to be traceable to the
measuring standards of the National Institute of Standards and
Technology.
e. TAB Supervisor Approval: Include on the submitted report the typed

name of the TAB supervisor and the dated signature of the TAB
supervisor.
5. Final DALT Report
On successful completion of all COTR field checks of the Pre-final DALT

Report data for all systems, the TABS Supervisor shall assemble, review,
sign and submit the Final DALT Report to the Contracting Officer for
approval.
6. TAB Reports: Submit TAB Report in the following manner:
a. Procedure Summary: Submit a copy of the approved DALT and TAB

Procedures Summary. When applicable, provide notations describing how
actual field procedures differed from the procedures listed.
b. Report format: Submit the completed data forms approved in the

pre-field TAB Engineering Report completed by TAB field team,
reviewed, approved and signed by the TAB supervisor. Bind the report
with a waterproof front and back cover. Include a table of contents
identifying by page number the location of each report. Report forms
and report data shall be typewritten. Handwritten report forms or
report data are not acceptable.
c. Air System Diagrams: Provided updated diagrams with final installed

locations of all terminals and devices, any numbering changes, and
actual test locations.
d. Duct Transverses: Report duct traverses for main and branch main
supply, return, exhaust, relief and outside air ducts. This shall
include all ducts, including those which lack 7 1/2 duct diameters
upstream and 2 1/2 duct diameters downstream of straight duct
unobstructed by duct fittings/offsets/elbows. The TAB Agency shall
evaluate and report findings on the duct traverses taken. Evaluate
the suitability of the duct traverse measurement based on satisfying
the qualifications for a pitot traverse plane as defined by AMCA 203,
"Field Measurements", Section 8, paragraph 8.3, "Location of Traverse
Plane".
e. Instruments: List the types of instruments actually used to measure

the tab data. Include in the listing each instrument's unique
date.
Instrumentation, used for taking wet bulb temperature readings shall

provide accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent at the measured face
velocities. Submit instrument manufacturer's literature to document
instrument accuracy performance is in compliance with that specified.
f. Performance Curves: The TAB Supervisor shall include, in the TAB

Reports, factory pump curves and fan curves for pumps and fans TAB'd
on the job.
g. Calibration Curves: The TAB Supervisor shall include, in the TAB

Reports, a factory calibration curve for installed flow control
balancing valves, flow venturis and flow orifices TAB'd on the job.
h. Data From TAB Field Work: After completion of the TAB field work,
prepare the TAB field data for TAB supervisor's review and approval
signature, using the reporting forms approved in the pre-field
engineering report. Data required by those approved data report forms
shall be furnished by the TAB team. Except as approved otherwise in
writing by the Contracting Officer, the TAB work and thereby the TAB
report shall be considered incomplete until the TAB work is
accomplished to within the accuracy range specified in the paragraph
entitled "Workmanship."
Appendix C
DALT AND TAB SUBMITTAL AND WORK SCHEDULE
Perform the following items of work in the order listed adhering to the
dates schedule specified below.
Submit TAB Agency and TAB Personnel Qualifications: Within 42 calendar

days after date of contract award.
Submit the DALT and TAB Work Execution Schedule: within 14 days after
receipt of the TAB agency and TAB personnel qualifications approval.
Revise and re-submit this schedule 28 days prior to commencement of
DALT work and 28 days prior to the commencement of TAB Season 1 work
and TAB Season 2 work.
Submit the DALT and TAB Work Procedures Summary: within 14 days after
receipt of the initial approved DALT and TAB Work Execution Schedule.
Meet with the COTR at the Pre-DALT/TAB Meeting: Within 28 calendar days
after receipt of the approved initial DALT/TAB Execution Schedule.
Submit Design Review Report: Within 56 calendar days after the receipt of
the approved initial DALT and TAB Work Execution Schedule.
Conduct measurements and submit the Record of Existing Facility

Conditions: within 28 days after receipt of approved DALT and TAB
Work Procedures Summary.
Advance Notice of Pre-Final DALT Field Work: After the completed

installation of the HVAC duct system to be DALT'd, submit to the
Contracting Officer an Advance Notice of Pre-Final DALT Field Work
accompanied by the completed Pre-Final DALT Work Checklistchecklist
for the subject duct system.
Ductwork Selected for DALT: Within 14 calendar days after receiving an

acceptable completed Pre-Final DALT Work Checklist, the Contracting
Officer's technical representative (COTR) will select the project
ductwork sections to be DALT'd.
DALT Field Work: Within 48 hours of COTR's selection, complete DALT field
work on selected project ductwork.
Submit Pre-Final DALT Report: Within two working days after completion of
DALT field work, submit Pre-final DALT Report. Separate Pre-final DALT
reports may be submitted to allow phased testing from system to system.
Quality Assurance - COTR DALT Field Checks: Upon approval of the

Pre-final DALT Report, the COTR's DALT field check work shall be
scheduled with the Contracting Officer.
Submit Final DALT Report: Within 14 calendar days after completion of

successful DALT Work Field Check, submit TAB report.
Advance Notice of TAB Field Work: At a minimum of 14 calendar days prior

to TAB Field Work, submit advance notice of TAB field work accompanied
by completed Pre-TAB Work Checklist.

TAB field work.
Submit TAB Report: Within 14 calendar days after completion of TAB field
work, submit initial TAB report.
Quality Assurance - COTR TAB Field Check: 30 calendar days after initial
TAB report is approved by the Contracting Officer, conduct field check.
Complete TAB Work: Prior to CCD, complete all TAB work and submit final.
Receive the approved TAB report: Within 21 calendar days, receive the
report from Contracting Officer approved TAB report.
Appendix D
REQUIREMENTS FOR DUCT AIR LEAK TESTING
SYSTEMS
MAU-1 VRF Fan Coil
Duct System Static for Supply N/A 4

Pressure, in inches
W.C.
for Return N/A 2
for Exhaust N/A N/A
for Outside Air 2 N/A
System Oval/Round for Supply A A

Duct and Rectangular
Duct SMACNA Seal Class
for Return A A
for Exhaust A A
for Outside Air A A
Appendix D
SYSTEMS
MAU-1 VRF Fan Coil
System Oval/Round for Supply N/A 3

Duct SMACNA Leak Class
for Return N/A 6
for Exhaust N/A N/A
System Rectangular for Supply N/A 6

Duct SMACNA Leak Class
for Return N/A 12
for Exhaust N/A N/A
Duct Test Pressure, for Supply N/A 2

in inches W.C.
for Return N/A 2
for Exhaust N/A N/A
for Outside Air 2 2
Appendix D
SYSTEMS
Indirect Evap Exhaust Systems

Cooler
Duct System Static for Supply 2 N/A

Pressure, in
millimeters W.C.
for Return 1 N/A
for Exhaust N/A 1
for Outside N/A N/A

Air
System Oval/Round for Supply A A

Duct and Rectangular
Duct SMACNA Seal
Class for Return A A
for Exhaust A A
for Outside A A
Air
System Oval/Round for Supply 6 N/A

Duct SMACNA Leak
Class
for Return 12 N/A
for Exhaust N/A 12
for Outside N/A N/A

Air
Appendix D
SYSTEMS
Indirect Evap Exhaust Systems

Cooler
System Rectangular for Supply 12 N/A

Duct SMACNA Leak
Class
for Return 24 N/A
for Exhaust N/A N/A
for Outside N/A N/A

Air
Duct Test Pressure, for Supply 2 N/A

in inches W.C.
for Return 1 N/A
for Exhaust N/A 1
for Outside N/A N/A

Air
SECTION 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

02/13
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

the basic designation only. At the discretion of the Government, the
manufacturer of any material supplied will be required to furnish test
reports pertaining to any of the tests necessary to assure compliance with
the standard or standards referenced in this specification.

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)

Buildings

Strip

Stainless Steel Wire

ASTM C1126 (2014) Standard Specification for Faced or

Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal
Insulation

Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders
for Thermal Insulation
ASTM C1710 (2011) Standard Guide for Installation of

Flexible Closed Cell Preformed Insulation
in Tube and Sheet Form

Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement
ASTM C450 (2008) Standard Practice for Fabrication

of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for
NPS Piping, and Vessel Lagging
ASTM C533 (2013) Standard Specification for Calcium

Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation

Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular
Form

Fiber Pipe Insulation

ASTM C610 (2011) Standard Specification for Molded

Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal
Insulation
ASTM C647 (2008; R 2013) Properties and Tests of

Mastics and Coating Finishes for Thermal
Insulation

Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with
Austenitic Stainless Steel

Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation

ASTM C921 (2010) Standard Practice for Determining

the Properties of Jacketing Materials for
Thermal Insulation
ASTM D2863 (2013) Measuring the Minimum Oxygen

Concentration to Support Candle-Like
Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index)
ASTM D5590 (2000; R 2010; E 2012) Standard Test

Method for Determining the Resistance of
Paint Films and Related Coatings to Fungal
Defacement by Accelerated Four-Week Agar
Plate Assay
ASTM D882 (2012) Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic

Sheeting
ASTM E2231 (2014) Specimen Preparation and Mounting

of Pipe and Duct Insulation Materials to
Assess Surface Burning Characteristics

Materials

FM GLOBAL (FM)


INDUSTRY (MSS)

MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MICA)
MICA Insulation Stds (1999) National Commercial & Industrial

Insulation Standards

NFPA 90B (2015) Standard for the Installation of

Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems
TECHNICAL ASSOCIATION OF THE PULP AND PAPER INDUSTRY (TAPPI)
TAPPI T403 OM (2010) Bursting Strength of Paper
MIL-A-24179 (1969; Rev A; Am 2 1980; Notice 1 1987)

Adhesive, Flexible Unicellular-Plastic
Thermal Insulation
MIL-A-3316 (1987; Rev C; Am 2 1990) Adhesives,

Fire-Resistant, Thermal Insulation
MIL-PRF-19565 (1988; Rev C) Coating Compounds, Thermal

Insulation, Fire- and Water-Resistant,
Vapor-Barrier
UL 723 (2008; Reprint Aug 2013) Test for Surface

Materials

Tests for Flammability of Plastic
Materials for Parts in Devices and
Appliances
1.2.1 General
Provide field-applied insulation and accessories on mechanical systems as
specified herein; factory-applied insulation is specified under the

piping, duct or equipment to be insulated.
1.2.2 Recycled Materials
Provide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent

practicable, provided that the materials meet all other requirements of
this section. The minimum recycled material content of the following
insulation are:
Rock Wool 75 percent slag of weight
Fiberglass 20-25 percent glass cullet by weight
Rigid Foam 9 percent recovered material
1.3 SUBMITTALS

Submit the three SD types, SD-02 Shop Drawings, SD-03 Product Data, and
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions at the same time for each system.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
MICA Plates; G
Pipe Insulation Systems and Associated Accessories
SD-03 Product Data
Pipe Insulation Systems; G
Pipe Insulation Systems; G
1.4.1 Installer Qualification
Qualified installers shall have successfully completed three or more

similar type jobs within the last 5 years.
Materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's unopened containers.

Materials delivered and placed in storage shall be provided with
protection from weather, humidity, dirt, dust and other contaminants. The
Contracting Officer may reject insulation material and supplies that
become dirty, dusty, wet, or contaminated by some other means. Packages
or standard containers of insulation, jacket material, cements, adhesives,
and coatings delivered for use, and samples required for approval shall
have manufacturer's stamp or label attached giving the name of the
manufacturer and brand, and a description of the material, date codes, and
approximate shelf life (if applicable). Insulation packages and
containers shall be asbestos free.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers

regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially
duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years
prior to bid opening. Submit a complete list of materials, including
manufacturer's descriptive technical literature, performance data, catalog
cuts, and installation instructions. The product number, k-value,
thickness and furnished accessories including adhesives, sealants and
jackets for each mechanical system requiring insulation shall be
included. The product data must be copyrighted, have an identifying or
publication number, and shall have been published prior to the issuance
date of this solicitation. Materials furnished under this section shall
be submitted together in a booklet and in conjunction with the MICA plates
booklet (SD-02). Annotate the product data to indicate which MICA plate
is applicable.
2.1.1 Insulation System
Provide insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA National

Insulation Standards plates as supplemented by this specification.
Provide field-applied insulation for heating, ventilating, and cooling
(HVAC) air distribution systems and piping systems that are located
within, on, under, and adjacent to buildings; and for plumbing systems.
Insulation shall be CFC and HCFC free.
2.1.2 Surface Burning Characteristics
Unless otherwise specified, insulation shall have a maximum flame spread

index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E84. Flame spread, and smoke developed indexes,
shall be determined by ASTM E84 or UL 723. Insulation shall be tested in
the same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in the
actual construction. Test specimens shall be prepared and mounted
according to ASTM E2231.
2.2 MATERIALS
Provide insulation that meets or exceed the requirements of

ASHRAE 90.1 - IP. Insulation exterior shall be cleanable, grease
resistant, non-flaking and non-peeling. Materials shall be compatible and
shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack surfaces to
which applied in either wet or dry state. Materials to be used on
stainless steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C795 requirements. Calcium
silicate shall not be used on chilled or cold water systems. Materials
shall be asbestos free. Provide product recognized under UL 94 (if
containing plastic) and listed in FM APP GUIDE.
2.2.1 Adhesives
2.2.1.1 Acoustical Lining Insulation Adhesive
Adhesive shall be a nonflammable, fire-resistant adhesive conforming to

ASTM C916, Type I.
2.2.1.2 Mineral Fiber Insulation Cement
Cement shall be in accordance with ASTM C195.
2.2.1.3 Lagging Adhesive
Lagging is the material used for thermal insulation, especially around a

cylindrical object. This may include the insulation as well as the
cloth/material covering the insulation. To resist mold/mildew, lagging
adhesive shall meet ASTM D5590 with 0 growth rating. Lagging adhesives
shall be nonflammable and fire-resistant and shall have a maximum flame
spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested
in accordance with ASTM E84. Adhesive shall be MIL-A-3316, Class 1,
pigmented white and be suitable for bonding fibrous glass cloth to faced
and unfaced fibrous glass insulation board; for bonding cotton brattice
cloth to faced and unfaced fibrous glass insulation board; for sealing
edges of and bonding glass tape to joints of fibrous glass board; for
bonding lagging cloth to thermal insulation; or Class 2 for attaching
fibrous glass insulation to metal surfaces. Lagging adhesives shall be
applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for
pipe and duct insulation.
2.2.1.4 Contact Adhesive
Adhesives may be any of, but not limited to, the neoprene based, rubber
based, or elastomeric type that have a maximum flame spread index of 25
and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84. The adhesive shall not adversely affect, initially or in
service, the insulation to which it is applied, nor shall it cause any
corrosive effect on metal to which it is applied. Any solvent dispersing
medium or volatile component of the adhesive shall have no objectionable
odor and shall not contain any benzene or carbon tetrachloride. The dried
adhesive shall not emit nauseous, irritating, or toxic volatile matters or
aerosols when the adhesive is heated to any temperature up to 212 degrees F.
The dried adhesive shall be nonflammable and fire resistant. Flexible
Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179, Type II, Class I. Provide
product listed in FM APP GUIDE.
2.2.2 Caulking
ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use A.
2.2.3 Corner Angles
Nominal 0.016 inch aluminum 1 by 1 inch with factory applied kraft

backing. Aluminum shall be ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3105, or 5005.
2.2.4 Fittings
Fabricated Fittings are the prefabricated fittings for flexible

elastomeric pipe insulation systems in accordance with ASTM C1710.
Together with the flexible elastomeric tubes, they provide complete system
integrity for retarding heat gain and controlling condensation drip from
chilled-water and refrigeration systems. Flexible elastomeric, fabricated
fittings provide thermal protection (0.25 k) and condensation resistance
(0.05 Water Vapor Transmission factor). For satisfactory performance,
properly installed protective vapor retarder/barriers and vapor stops
shall be used on high relative humidity and below ambient temperature
applications to reduce movement of moisture through or around the
insulation to the colder interior surface.
2.2.5 Finishing Cement
ASTM C450: Mineral fiber hydraulic-setting thermal insulating and

finishing cement. All cements that may come in contact with Austenitic
stainless steel must comply with ASTM C795.
2.2.6 Fibrous Glass Cloth and Glass Tape
Fibrous glass cloth, with 20X20 maximum mesh size, and glass tape shall
have maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index
of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Tape shall be 4 inch wide
rolls. Class 3 tape shall be 4.5 ounces/square yard. Elastomeric Foam
Tape: Black vapor-retarder foam tape with acrylic adhesive containing an
anti-microbial additive.
2.2.7 Staples
Outward clinching type ASTM A167, Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.
2.2.8 Jackets
2.2.8.1 Aluminum Jackets
Aluminum jackets shall be corrugated, embossed or smooth sheet, 0.016 inch

nominal thickness; ASTM B209, Temper H14, Temper H16, Alloy 3003, 5005,
or 3105. Corrugated aluminum jacket shall not be used outdoors. Aluminum
jacket securing bands shall be Type 304 stainless steel, 0.015 inch
thick, 1/2 inch wide for pipe under 12 inch diameter and 3/4 inch wide
for pipe over 12 inch and larger diameter. Aluminum jacket
circumferential seam bands shall be 2 by 0.016 inch aluminum matching
jacket material. Bands for insulation below ground shall be 3/4 by 0.020
inch thick stainless steel, or fiberglass reinforced tape. The jacket
may, at the option of the Contractor, be provided with a factory
fabricated Pittsburgh or "Z" type longitudinal joint. When the "Z" joint
is used, the bands at the circumferential joints shall be designed by the
manufacturer to seal the joints and hold the jacket in place.
2.2.8.2 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Jackets
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket and fitting covers shall have high impact
strength, ultraviolet (UV) resistant rating or treatment and moderate
chemical resistance with minimum thickness 0.030 inch.
2.2.8.3 Vapor Barrier/Weatherproofing Jacket
Vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket shall be laminated self-adhesive,

greater than 3 plies standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or
greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive); with 0.0000 permeability
when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, using the water transmission
rate test method; heavy duty, white or natural; and UV resistant.
Flexible Elastomeric exterior foam with factory applied, UV Jacket made
with a cold weather acrylic adhesive. Construction of laminate designed
to provide UV resistance, high puncture, tear resistance and excellent
Water Vapor Transmission (WVT) rate.
2.2.8.4 Vapor Barrier/Vapor Retarder
Apply the following criteria to determine which system is required.
a. On piping operating below 60 degrees F or located outside shall be

equipped with a vapor barrier.
b. Ducts, pipes and equipment that are located inside and that always
operate above 60 degrees F shall be installed with a vapor retarder
where required as stated in paragraph VAPOR RETARDER REQUIRED.
2.2.9 Vapor Retarder Required
ASTM C921, Type I, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all

surfaces except concealed ductwork, where a minimum puncture resistance of
25 Beach units is acceptable. Minimum tensile strength, 35 pounds/inch
width. ASTM C921, Type II, minimum puncture resistance 25 Beach units,
tensile strength minimum 20 pounds/inch width. Jackets used on insulation
exposed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting
without sizing. Based on the application, insulation materials that
require manufacturer or fabricator applied pipe insulation jackets are
cellular glass, when all joints are sealed with a vapor barrier mastic,
and mineral fiber. All non-metallic jackets shall have a maximum flame
spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested
in accordance with ASTM E84. Flexible elastomerics require (in addition
to vapor barrier skin) vapor retarder jacketing for high relative humidity
and below ambient temperature applications.
2.2.9.1 White Vapor Retarder All Service Jacket (ASJ)
ASJ is for use on hot/cold pipes, ducts, or equipment indoors or outdoors

if covered by a suitable protective jacket. The product shall meet all
physical property and performance requirements of ASTM C1136, Type I,
except the burst strength shall be a minimum of 85 psi. ASTM D2863
Limited Oxygen Index (LOI) shall be a minimum of 31.
In addition, neither the outer exposed surface nor the inner-most surface
contacting the insulation shall be paper or other moisture-sensitive
material. The outer exposed surface shall be white and have an emittance
of not less than 0.80. The outer exposed surface shall be paintable.
2.2.9.2 Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier Mastic Coatings
2.2.9.2.1 Vapor Barrier
The vapor barrier shall be self adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils
embossed) greater than 3 plies standard grade, silver, white, black and
embossed white jacket for use on hot/cold pipes. Permeability shall be
less than 0.02 when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. Products
shall meet UL 723 or ASTM E84 flame and smoke requirements and shall be UV
resistant.
2.2.9.2.2 Vapor Retarder
The vapor retarder coating shall be fire and water resistant and
appropriately selected for either outdoor or indoor service. Color shall
be white. The water vapor permeance of the compound shall be 0.013 perms
or less at 43 mils dry film thickness as determined according to procedure
B of ASTM E96/E96M utilizing apparatus described in ASTM E96/E96M. The
coating shall be nonflammable, fire resistant type. To resist

mold/mildew, coating shall meet ASTM D5590 with 0 growth rating. Coating
shall meet MIL-PRF-19565 Type II (if selected for indoor service) and be
Qualified Products Database listed. All other application and service
properties shall be in accordance with ASTM C647.
2.2.9.3 Laminated Film Vapor Retarder
ASTM C1136, Type I, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms,

minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except
concealed ductwork; where Type II, maximum moisture vapor transmission
0.02 perms, a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is
acceptable. Vapor retarder shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25
and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84. Flexible Elastomeric exterior foam with factory applied UV
Jacket. Construction of laminate designed to provide UV resistance, high
puncture, tear resistance and an excellent WVT rate.
2.2.9.4 Polyvinylidene Chloride (PVDC) Film Vapor Retarder
The PVDC film vapor retarder shall have a maximum moisture vapor
transmission of 0.02 perms, minimum puncture resistance of 150 Beach
units, a minimum tensile strength in any direction of 30 lb/inch when
tested in accordance with ASTM D882, and a maximum flame spread index of
25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance
with ASTM E84.
2.2.9.5 Polyvinylidene Chloride Vapor Retarder Adhesive Tape
Requirements must meet the same as specified for Laminated Film Vapor
Retarder above.
2.2.9.6 Vapor Barrier/Weather Barrier
The vapor barrier shall be greater than 3 ply self adhesive laminate
-white vapor barrier jacket- superior performance (less than 0.0000
permeability when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M). Vapor barrier
shall meet UL 723 or ASTM E84 25 flame and 50 smoke requirements; and UV
resistant. Minimum burst strength 185 psi in accordance with TAPPI T403 OM.
Tensile strength 68 lb/inch width (PSTC-1000). Tape shall be as specified
for laminated film vapor barrier above.
2.2.10 Vapor Retarder Not Required
ASTM C921, Type II, Class D, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on
all surfaces except ductwork, where Type IV, maximum moisture vapor
transmission 0.10, a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is
acceptable. Jacket shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a
maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.2.11 Wire
Soft annealed ASTM A580/A580M Type 302, 304 or 316 stainless steel, 16 or
18 gauge.
2.2.12 Insulation Bands
Insulation bands shall be 1/2 inch wide; 26 gauge stainless steel.
2.2.13 Sealants
Sealants shall be chosen from the butyl polymer type, the

styrene-butadiene rubber type, or the butyl type of sealants. Sealants
shall have a maximum permeance of 0.02 perms based on Procedure B for
ASTM E96/E96M, and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke
developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.3 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS
Insulation materials shall conform to Table 1. Insulation thickness shall

be as listed in Table 2 and meet or exceed the requirements of
ASHRAE 90.1 - IP. Insulation thickness shall be 1/2inch. Pipe insulation
materials shall be limited to those listed herein and shall meet the
following requirements:
2.3.1 Aboveground Cold Pipeline ( -30 to 60 deg. F)
Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications, shall

be as follows:
2.3.1.1 Cellular Glass
ASTM C552, Type II, and Type III. Supply the insulation from the
fabricator with (paragraph WHITE VAPOR RETARDER ALL SERVICE JACKET (ASJ))
ASJ vapor retarder and installed with all longitudinal overlaps sealed and
all circumferential joints ASJ taped or supply the insulation unfaced from
the fabricator and install with all longitudinal and circumferential
joints sealed with vapor barrier mastic.
2.3.1.2 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation
Closed-cell, foam- or expanded-rubber materials containing anti-microbial

additive, complying with ASTM C534/C534M, Grade 1, Type I or II. Type I,
Grade 1 for tubular materials. Type II, Grade 1, for sheet materials.
Type I and II shall have vapor retarder/vapor barrier skin on one or both
sides of the insulation, and require an additional exterior vapor retarder
covering for high relative humidity and below ambient temperature
applications.
2.3.1.3 Mineral Fiber Insulation with Integral Wicking Material (MFIWM)
ASTM C547. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do

not use in applications exposed to outdoor ambient conditions in climatic
zones 1 through 4.
2.3.2 Aboveground Hot Pipeline (Above 60 deg. F)
Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications shall

meet the following requirements. Supply the insulation with
manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.
2.3.2.1 Mineral Fiber
ASTM C547, Types I, II or III, supply the insulation with manufacturer's

recommended factory-applied jacket.
2.3.2.2 Calcium Silicate
ASTM C533, Type I indoor only, or outdoors above 250 degrees F pipe
temperature. Supply insulation with the manufacturer's recommended
factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.
2.3.2.3 Cellular Glass
ASTM C552, Type II and Type III. Supply the insulation with
manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket.
2.3.2.4 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation
Closed-cell, foam- or expanded-rubber materials containing anti-microbial

additive, complying with ASTM C534/C534M, Grade 1, Type I or II to 220
degrees F service. Type I for tubular materials. Type II for sheet
materials.
2.3.2.5 Phenolic Insulation
ASTM C1126 Type III to 250 degrees F service shall comply with ASTM C795.
Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied
jacket/vapor barrier.
2.3.2.6 Perlite Insulation
ASTM C610
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION - GENERAL
Insulation shall only be applied to unheated and uncooled piping and

equipment. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be
compressed at joists, studs, columns, ducts, hangers, etc. The insulation
shall not pull apart after a one hour period; any insulation found to pull
apart after one hour, shall be replaced.
3.1.1 Installation
Except as otherwise specified, material shall be installed in accordance

with the manufacturer's written instructions. Insulation materials shall
not be applied until tests specified in other sections of this
specification are completed. Material such as rust, scale, dirt and
moisture shall be removed from surfaces to receive insulation. Insulation
shall be kept clean and dry. Insulation shall not be removed from its
shipping containers until the day it is ready to use and shall be returned
to like containers or equally protected from dirt and moisture at the end
of each workday. Insulation that becomes dirty shall be thoroughly
cleaned prior to use. If insulation becomes wet or if cleaning does not
restore the surfaces to like new condition, the insulation will be
rejected, and shall be immediately removed from the jobsite. Joints shall
be staggered on multi layer insulation. Mineral fiber thermal insulating
cement shall be mixed with demineralized water when used on stainless
steel surfaces. Insulation, jacketing and accessories shall be installed
in accordance with MICA Insulation Stds plates except where modified
herein or on the drawings.
3.1.2 Firestopping
Where pipes and ducts pass through fire walls, fire partitions, above
grade floors, and fire rated chase walls, the penetration shall be sealed
with fire stopping materials as specified in Section 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING. The protection of ducts at point of passage through
firewalls must be in accordance with NFPA 90A and/or NFPA 90B. All other
penetrations, such as piping, conduit, and wiring, through firewalls must
be protected with a material or system of the same hourly rating that is
listed by UL, FM, or a NRTL.
3.1.3 Painting and Finishing
Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.1.4 Installation of Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation
Install flexible elastomeric cellular insulation with seams and joints

sealed with rubberized contact adhesive. Flexible elastomeric cellular
insulation shall not be used on surfaces greater than 220 degrees F.
Stagger seams when applying multiple layers of insulation. Protect
insulation exposed to weather and not shown to have vapor barrier
weatherproof jacketing with two coats of UV resistant finish or PVC or
metal jacketing as recommended by the manufacturer after the adhesive is
dry and cured.
3.1.4.1 Adhesive Application
Apply a brush coating of adhesive to both butt ends to be joined and to

both slit surfaces to be sealed. Allow the adhesive to set until dry to
touch but tacky under slight pressure before joining the surfaces.
Insulation seals at seams and joints shall not be capable of being pulled
apart one hour after application. Insulation that can be pulled apart one
hour after installation shall be replaced.
3.1.4.2 Adhesive Safety Precautions
Use natural cross-ventilation, local (mechanical) pickup, and/or general

area (mechanical) ventilation to prevent an accumulation of solvent
vapors, keeping in mind the ventilation pattern must remove any
heavier-than-air solvent vapors from lower levels of the workspaces.
Gloves and spectacle-type safety glasses are recommended in accordance
with safe installation practices.
3.1.5 Welding
No welding shall be done on piping, duct or equipment without written

approval of the Contracting Officer. The capacitor discharge welding
process may be used for securing metal fasteners to duct.
3.1.6 Pipes/Ducts/Equipment That Require Insulation
Insulation is required on all pipes.
3.2 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
Install pipe insulation systems in accordance with the approved

MICA Insulation Stds plates as supplemented by the manufacturer's
published installation instructions.
3.2.1 Pipe Insulation
3.2.1.1 General
Pipe insulation shall be installed on aboveground hot and cold pipeline

systems as specified below to form a continuous thermal retarder/barrier,
including straight runs, fittings and appurtenances unless specified
otherwise. Installation shall be with full length units of insulation and
using a single cut piece to complete a run. Cut pieces or scraps abutting
each other shall not be used. Pipe insulation shall be omitted on the
following:
a. Pipe used solely for fire protection.
b. Chromium plated pipe to plumbing fixtures. However, fixtures for use

by the physically handicapped shall have the hot water supply and
drain, including the trap, insulated where exposed.
c. Sanitary drain lines.
d. Air chambers.
e. Adjacent insulation.
f. ASME stamps.
g. Access plates of fan housings.
h. Cleanouts or handholes.
3.2.1.2 Pipes Passing Through Walls, Roofs, and Floors
Pipe insulation shall be continuous through the sleeve.
An aAluminum jacket or vapor barrier/weatherproofingJacket or Vapor

Barrier/Weatherproofing - self adhesive jacket (minimum 2 mils adhesive,
3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, greater than 3 ply
standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed with factory applied
moisture retarder shall be provided over the insulation wherever
penetrations require sealing.
3.2.1.2.1 Penetrate Interior Walls
The aluminum jacket or vapor barrier/weatherproofing - self adhesive

jacket (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000
permeability, greater than 3 plies standard grade, silver, white, black
and embossed shall extend 2 inches beyond either side of the wall and
shall be secured on each end with a band.
3.2.1.2.2 Penetrating Exterior Walls
Continue the aluminum jacket required for pipe exposed to weather through
the sleeve to a point 2 inches beyond the interior surface of the wall.
3.2.1.2.3 Hot Water Pipes Supplying Lavatories or Other Similar Heated

Service
Terminate the insulation on the backside of the finished wall. Protect
the insulation termination with two coats of vapor barrier coating with a
minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch applied with glass tape embedded
between coats (if applicable). Extend the coating out onto the insulation
2 inches and seal the end of the insulation. Overlap glass tape seams 1
inch. Caulk the annular space between the pipe and wall penetration with
approved fire stop material. Cover the pipe and wall penetration with a
properly sized (well fitting) escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate
shall overlap the wall penetration at least 3/8 inches.
3.2.1.2.4 Domestic Cold Water Pipes Supplying Lavatories or Other Similar

Cooling Service
Terminate the insulation on the finished side of the wall (i.e.,

insulation must cover the pipe throughout the wall penetration). Protect
the insulation with two coats of weather barrier mastic (breather emulsion
type weatherproof mastic impermeable to water and permeable to air) with a
minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch. Extend the mastic out onto the
insulation 2 inches and shall seal the end of the insulation. The annular
space between the outer surface of the pipe insulation and caulk the wall
penetration with an approved fire stop material having vapor retarder
properties. Cover the pipe and wall penetration with a properly sized
(well fitting) escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall overlap the
wall penetration by at least 3/8 inches.
3.2.1.3 Pipes Passing Through Hangers
Insulation, whether hot or cold application, shall be continuous through

hangers. All horizontal pipes 2 inches and smaller shall be supported on
hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield to protect the
insulation in accordance with MSS SP-69. Whenever insulation shows signs
of being compressed, or when the insulation or jacket shows visible signs
of distortion at or near the support shield, insulation inserts as
specified below for piping larger than 2 inches shall be installed, or
factory insulated hangers (designed with a load bearing core) can be used.
3.2.1.3.1 Horizontal Pipes Larger Than 2 Inches at 60 Degrees F and Above
Supported on hangers in accordance with MSS SP-69, and Section 22 00 00

3.2.1.3.2 Horizontal Pipes Larger Than 2 Inches and Below 60 Degrees F
Supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield in

accordance with MSS SP-69. An insulation insert of cellular glass,
prefabricated insulation pipe hangers, or perlite above 80 degrees F shall
be installed above each shield. The insert shall cover not less than the
bottom 180-degree arc of the pipe. Inserts shall be the same thickness as
the insulation, and shall extend 2 inches on each end beyond the
protection shield. When insulation inserts are required in accordance
with the above, and the insulation thickness is less than 1 inch, wooden
or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe and the shield
to prevent the weight of the pipe from crushing the insulation, as an
option to installing insulation inserts. The insulation jacket shall be
continuous over the wooden dowel, wooden block, or insulation insert.
3.2.1.3.3 Inserts
Covered with a jacket material of the same appearance and quality as the
adjoining pipe insulation jacket, overlap the adjoining pipe jacket 1-1/2
inches, and seal as required for the pipe jacket. The jacket material
used to cover inserts in flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall
conform to ASTM C1136, Type 1, and is allowed to be of a different
material than the adjoining insulation material.
3.2.1.4 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation
Flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be tubular form for

pipe sizes 6 inches and less. Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation used on
pipes larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around the pipe. On
pipes larger than 12 inches, the insulation shall be adhered directly to
the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe. Seams shall be staggered when
applying multiple layers of insulation. Sweat fittings shall be insulated
with miter-cut pieces the same size as on adjacent piping. Screwed
fittings shall be insulated with sleeved fitting covers fabricated from
miter-cut pieces and shall be overlapped and sealed to the adjacent pipe
insulation. Type II requires an additional exterior vapor
retarder/barrier covering for high relative humidity and below ambient
temperature applications.
3.2.1.5 Pipes in high abuse areas.
In high abuse areas such as janitor closets and traffic areas in equipment
rooms, kitchens, and mechanical rooms, welded PVC, stainless steel,
aluminum or flexible laminate cladding (comprised of elastomeric, plastic
or metal foil laminate) laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive,
3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket, - less than 0.0000
permeability; (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black
and embossed) jackets shall be utilized. Pipe insulation to the 6 foot
level shall be protected.
3.2.1.6 Pipe Insulation Material and Thickness
TABLE 1
Insulation Material for Piping
Service
Material Specification Type Class VR/VB
Req'd
Chilled Water (Supply & Return, Dual Temperature Piping, 40 F nominal)
Cellular Glass ASTM C552 II 2 Yes
Flexible Elastomeric ASTM C534/C534M I Yes

Cellular
Mineral Fiber with Wicking ASTM C547 I Yes
MaterialDo not use in
applications exposed to
outdoor ambient conditions
in climatic zones 1 through
4.
Heating Hot Water Supply & Return (Max 250 F)
Mineral Fiber ASTM C547 I 1 No
TABLE 1
Insulation Material for Piping
Service
Material Specification Type Class VR/VB
Req'd
Calcium Silicate ASTM C533 I No
Cellular Glass ASTM C552 II 2 No
Faced Phenolic Foam ASTM C1126 III Yes
Perlite ASTM C610 No

Flexible Elastomeric ASTM C534/C534M I 2 No
Cellular
Cold Domestic Water Piping, Makeup Water & Drinking Fountain Drain Piping

Flexible Elastomeric ASTM C534/C534M I No
Cellular
Hot Domestic Water Supply & Recirculating Piping (Max 200 F)
Mineral Fiber ASTM C547 I 1 No

Cellular
Faced Phenolic Foam ASTM C1126 III Yes
Exposed Lavatory Drains, Exposed Domestic Water Piping & Drains to Areas for
Handicapped Personnel
Cellular
Condensate Drain Located Inside Building

Cellular
Note: VR/VB = Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier
TABLE 2
Piping Insulation Thickness (inch)

Do not use integral wicking material in Chilled water applications exposed to
outdoor ambient conditions in climatic zones 1 through 4.
Service
Material Tube And Pipe Size (inch)
<1 1-<1.5 1.5-<4 4-<8 > or = >8
Chilled Water (Supply & Return, Dual Temperature Piping, 40 Degrees F nominal)
Cellular Glass 1.5 2 2 2.5 3
Mineral Fiber with Wicking 1 1.5 1.5 2 2

Material
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular 1 1 1 N/A N/A
Chilled Water (Supply & Return, Dual Temperature Piping, 40 Degrees F nominal)
Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2
Mineral Fiber with Wicking 1 1.5 1.5 2 2

Material
Heating Hot Water Supply & Return, Heated Oil (Max 250 F)
Mineral Fiber 1.5 1.5 2 2 2
Calcium Silicate 2.5 2.5 3 3 3
Cellular Glass 2 2.5 3 3 3
Perlite 2.5 2.5 3 3 3
Cold Domestic Water Piping, Makeup Water & Drinking Fountain Drain Piping
Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Hot Domestic Water Supply & Recirculating Piping (Max 200 F)
Mineral Fiber 1 1 1 1.5 1.5
Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2
TABLE 2
Piping Insulation Thickness (inch)

Do not use integral wicking material in Chilled water applications exposed to
outdoor ambient conditions in climatic zones 1 through 4.
Service
Material Tube And Pipe Size (inch)
<1 1-<1.5 1.5-<4 4-<8 > or = >8
Refrigerant Suction Piping (35 degrees F nominal)
Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Exposed Lavatory Drains, Exposed Domestic Water Piping & Drains to Areas for
Handicapped Personnel
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Condensate Drain Located Inside Building
Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
3.2.2 Aboveground Cold Pipelines
The following cold pipelines for minus 30 to plus 60 degrees F, shall be

insulated in accordance with Table 2 except those piping listed in
subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted. This includes
but is not limited to the following:
a. Make-up water.
b. Refrigerant suction lines.
c. Chilled water.
d. Dual temperature water, i.e. HVAC hot/chilled water.
e. Air conditioner condensate drains.
f. Exposed lavatory drains and domestic water lines serving plumbing

fixtures for handicap persons.
3.2.2.1 Insulation Material and Thickness
Insulation thickness for cold pipelines shall be determined using Table 2.
3.2.2.2 Factory or Field applied Jacket
Insulation shall be covered with a factory applied vapor retarder

jacket/vapor barrier or field applied seal welded PVC jacket or greater
than 3 ply laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils
embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000
permeability, standard grade, sliver, white, black and embossed for use
with Mineral Fiber, Cellular Glass, and Phenolic Foam Insulated Pipe.
Insulation inside the building, to be protected with an aluminum jacket or
greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2
mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability,
standard grade, Embossed Silver, White & Black, shall have the insulation
and vapor retarder jacket installed as specified herein. The aluminum
jacket or greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive
(minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product, less than 0.0000
permeability, standard grade, embossed silver, White & Black, shall be
installed as specified for piping exposed to weather, except sealing of
the laps of the aluminum jacket is not required. In high abuse areas such
as janitor closets and traffic areas in equipment rooms, kitchens, and
mechanical rooms, aluminum jackets or greater than 3ply vapor
barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils
embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, embossed
silver, white & black, shall be provided for pipe insulation to the 6 ft
level.
3.2.2.3 Installing Insulation for Straight Runs Hot and Cold Pipe
Apply insulation to the pipe with tight butt joints. Seal all butted
joints and ends with joint sealant and seal with a vapor retarder coating,
greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape
or PVDC adhesive tape.
3.2.2.3.1 Longitudinal Laps of the Jacket Material
Overlap not less than 1-1/2 inches. Provide butt strips 3 inches wide for
circumferential joints.
3.2.2.3.2 Laps and Butt Strips
Secure with adhesive and staple on 4 inch centers if not factory

self-sealing. If staples are used, seal in accordance with paragraph
STAPLES below. Note that staples are not required with cellular glass
systems.
3.2.2.3.3 Factory Self-Sealing Lap Systems
May be used when the ambient temperature is between 40 and 120 degrees F
during installation. Install the lap system in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Use a stapler only if specifically
recommended by the manufacturer. Where gaps occur, replace the section
or repair the gap by applying adhesive under the lap and then stapling.
3.2.2.3.4 Staples
coat all staples, including those used to repair factory self-seal lap
systems, with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than
3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape. Coat all
seams, except those on factory self-seal systems, with vapor retarder
coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less
than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.
3.2.2.3.5 Breaks and Punctures in the Jacket Material
Patch by wrapping a strip of jacket material around the pipe and secure it
with adhesive, staple, and coat with vapor retarder coating or PVDC
adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000
perm adhesive tape. Extend the patch not less than 1-1/2 inches past the
break.
3.2.2.3.6 Penetrations Such as Thermometers
Fill the voids in the insulation and seal with vapor retarder coating or
PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than
0.0000 perm adhesive tape.
3.2.2.3.7 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation
Install by slitting the tubular sections and applying them onto the piping
or tubing. Alternately, whenever possible slide un-slit sections over the
open ends of piping or tubing. Secure all seams and butt joints and seal
with adhesive. When using self seal products only the butt joints shall
be secured with adhesive. Push insulation on the pipe, never pulled.
Stretching of insulation may result in open seams and joints. Clean cut
all edges. Rough or jagged edges of the insulation are not be permitted.
Use proper tools such as sharp knives. Do not stretch Grade 1, Type II
sheet insulation around the pipe when used on pipe larger than 6 inches.
On pipes larger than 12 inches, adhere sheet insulation directly to the
pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe.
3.2.2.4 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories
a. Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the

fittings and accessories. The butted joints and ends shall be sealed
with joint sealant and sealed with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC
adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000
perm adhesive tape.
b. Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed around all fittings and

accessories and shall conform to MICA plates except as modified
herein: 5 for anchors; 10, 11, and 13 for fittings; 14 for valves;
and 17 for flanges and unions. Insulation shall be the same
insulation as the pipe insulation, including same density, thickness,
and thermal conductivity. Where precut/preformed is unavailable,
rigid preformed pipe insulation sections may be segmented into the
shape required. Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as
the adjoining pipe insulation shall be used. If nesting size
insulation is used, the insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one
pipe diameter. Elbows insulated using segments shall conform to MICA
Tables 12.20 "Mitered Insulation Elbow'. Submit a booklet containing
completed MICA Insulation Stds plates detailing each insulating system
for each pipe, duct, or equipment insulating system, after approval of
materials and prior to applying insulation.
(1) The MICA plates shall detail the materials to be installed and
the specific insulation application. Submit all MICA plates

required showing the entire insulating system, including plates
required to show insulation penetrations, vessel bottom and top
heads, legs, and skirt insulation as applicable. The MICA plates
shall present all variations of insulation systems including
locations, materials, vaporproofing, jackets and insulation
accessories.
(2) If the Contractor elects to submit detailed drawings instead of

edited MICA Plates, the detail drawings shall be technically
equivalent to the edited MICA Plate submittal.
c. Upon completion of insulation installation on flanges, unions, valves,

anchors, fittings and accessories, terminations, seams, joints and
insulation not protected by factory vapor retarder jackets or PVC
fitting covers shall be protected with PVDC or greater than 3 ply
laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape or two coats of
vapor retarder coating with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch,
applied with glass tape embedded between coats. Tape seams shall
overlap 1 inch. The coating shall extend out onto the adjoining pipe
insulation 2 inches. Fabricated insulation with a factory vapor
retarder jacket shall be protected with either greater than 3 ply
laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape, standard grade,
silver, white, black and embossed or PVDC adhesive tape or two coats
of vapor retarder coating with a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch and
with a 2 inch wide glass tape embedded between coats. Where fitting
insulation butts to pipe insulation, the joints shall be sealed with a
vapor retarder coating and a 4 inch wide ASJ tape which matches the
jacket of the pipe insulation.
d. Anchors attached directly to the pipe shall be insulated for a

sufficient distance to prevent condensation but not less than 6 inches
from the insulation surface.
e. Insulation shall be marked showing the location of unions, strainers,

and check valves.
3.2.2.5 Optional PVC Fitting Covers
At the option of the Contractor, premolded, one or two piece PVC fitting
covers may be used in lieu of the vapor retarder and embedded glass tape.
Factory precut or premolded insulation segments shall be used under the
fitting covers for elbows. Insulation segments shall be the same
insulation as the pipe insulation including same density, thickness, and
thermal conductivity. The covers shall be secured by PVC vapor retarder
tape, adhesive, seal welding or with tacks made for securing PVC covers.
Seams in the cover, and tacks and laps to adjoining pipe insulation
jacket, shall be sealed with vapor retarder tape to ensure that the
assembly has a continuous vapor seal.
3.2.3 Aboveground Hot Pipelines
All hot pipe lines above 60 degrees F, except those piping listed in
subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted, shall be
insulated in accordance with Table 2. This includes but is not limited to
the following:
a. Domestic hot water supply & re-circulating system.
b. Hot water heating.
Insulation shall be covered, in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations, with a factory applied Type I jacket or field applied
aluminum where required or seal welded PVC.
3.2.3.2 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories
Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the fittings

and accessories. The butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint
sealant. Insulation shall be marked showing the location of unions,
strainers, check valves and other components that would otherwise be
hidden from view by the insulation.
3.2.3.2.1 Precut or Preformed
Place precut or preformed insulation around all fittings and accessories.

Insulation shall be the same insulation as the pipe insulation, including
same density, thickness, and thermal conductivity.
3.2.3.2.2 Rigid Preformed
Where precut/preformed is unavailable, rigid preformed pipe insulation

sections may be segmented into the shape required. Insulation of the same
thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe insulation shall be
used. If nesting size insulation is used, the insulation shall be
overlapped 2 inches or one pipe diameter. Elbows insulated using segments
shall conform to MICA Tables 12.20 "Mitered Insulation Elbow".
3.2.4 Piping Exposed to Weather
Piping exposed to weather shall be insulated and jacketed as specified for

the applicable service inside the building. After this procedure, a
laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor
barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000 permeability (greater
than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed aluminum
jacket or PVC jacket shall be applied. PVC jacketing requires no
factory-applied jacket beneath it, however an all service jacket shall be
applied if factory applied jacketing is not furnished. Flexible
elastomeric cellular insulation exposed to weather shall be treated in
accordance with paragraph INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR
INSULATION in PART 3.
3.2.4.1 Aluminum Jacket
The jacket for hot piping may be factory applied. The jacket shall
overlap not less than 2 inches at longitudinal and circumferential joints
and shall be secured with bands at not more than 12 inch centers.
Longitudinal joints shall be overlapped down to shed water and located at
4 or 8 o'clock positions. Joints on piping 60 degrees F and below shall
be sealed with metal jacketing/flashing sealant while overlapping to
prevent moisture penetration. Where jacketing on piping 60 degrees F and
below abuts an un-insulated surface, joints shall be caulked to prevent
moisture penetration. Joints on piping above 60 degrees F shall be sealed
with a moisture retarder.
3.2.4.2 Insulation for Fittings
Flanges, unions, valves, fittings, and accessories shall be insulated and

finished as specified for the applicable service. Two coats of breather
emulsion type weatherproof mastic (impermeable to water, permeable to air)
recommended by the insulation manufacturer shall be applied with glass
tape embedded between coats. Tape overlaps shall be not less than 1 inch
and the adjoining aluminum jacket not less than 2 inches. Factory
preformed aluminum jackets may be used in lieu of the above. Molded PVC
fitting covers shall be provided when PVC jackets are used for straight
runs of pipe. PVC fitting covers shall have adhesive welded joints and
shall be weatherproof laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3
mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000
permeability, (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black
and embossed, and UV resistant.
3.2.4.3 PVC Jacket
PVC jacket shall be ultraviolet resistant and adhesive welded weather

tight with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Installation shall
include provision for thermal expansion.
3.2.5 Below Ground Pipe Insulation
3.2.5.1 Type of Insulation
Below ground pipe shall be insulated with Cellular Glass insulation, in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions for application with thickness
as determined from Table 2 (whichever is the most restrictive).
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS

01/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
ACG Commissioning Guideline (2005) Commissioning Guideline
NEBB Commissioning Standard (2009) Procedural Standards for Whole

Building Systems Commissioning of New
Construction; 3rd Edition

(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1429 (1994) HVAC Systems Commissioning Manual,

1st Edition
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)
LEED BD+C (2009; R 2010) Leadership in Energy and

Environmental Design(tm) Building Design
and Construction (LEED-NC)
1.2 DEFINITIONS
In some instances, terminology differs between the Contract and the

Commissioning Standard primarily because the intent of this Section is to
use the industry standards specified, along with additional requirements
listed herein to produce optimal results. The following table of similar
terms is provided for clarification only. Contract requirements take
precedent over the corresponding ACG, NEBB, or TABB requirements where
differences exist.
SIMILAR TERMS
Contract Term ACG NEBB TABB
Commissioning ACG Commissioning Procedural Standards SMACNA HVAC

Standard Guideline for Building Systems Commissioning
Commissioning Guidelines
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 1

SIMILAR TERMS
Contract Term ACG NEBB TABB
Commissioning ACG Certified NEBB Qualified TABB Certified

Specialist Commissioning Agent Commissioning Commissioning
Administrator Supervisor
1.3.1 General
Perform Commissioning in accordance with the requirements of the standard

under which the Commissioning Firm's qualifications are approved, i.e.,
ACG Commissioning Guideline, NEBB Commissioning Standard, or SMACNA 1429
unless otherwise stated herein. Consider mandatory all recommendations
and suggested practices contained in the Commissioning Standard. Use the
Commissioning Standard for all aspects of Commissioning, including
qualifications for the Commissioning Firm and Specialist and calibration
of Commissioning instruments. Where the instrument manufacturer
calibration recommendations are more stringent than those listed in the
Commissioning Standard, the manufacturer's recommendations shall be
adhered to. All quality assurance provisions of the Commissioning
Standard such as performance guarantees shall be part of this contract.
For systems or system components not covered in the Commissioning
Standard, Commissioning procedures shall be developed by the Commissioning
Specialist. Where new procedures, requirements, etc., applicable to the
Contract requirements have been published or adopted by the body
responsible for the Commissioning Standard used (ACG, NEBB, or TABB), the
requirements and recommendations contained in these procedures and
requirements shall be considered mandatory.
1.3.2 Energy
Formal LEED BD+C certification is not required; however, the Contractor is

required to provide documentation that meets the LEED BD+C Energy &
Atmosphere (EA) Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning. For New
Construction and Major Revisions provide, also, documentation that meets
EA Credit 3; Enhanced Commissioning. Provide documentation for as many
LEED credits as possible to support LEED Silver certification of the
project.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Commissioning Plan; G
SD-03 Product Data
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklists; G

Functional Performance Tests; G
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 2

SD-06 Test Reports
Commissioning Report
SD-07 Certificates
Commissioning Firm
Commissioning Specialist
1.5.1 Commissioning Firm
Submit certification of the proposed Commissioning Firm's qualifications

to perform the duties specified herein and in other related Sections, no
later than 21 days after the Notice to Proceed. Include in the
documentation the date that the Certification was initially granted and
the date when the current Certification expires. The firm is either a
member of ACG or certified by the NEBB or the TABB and certified in all
categories and functions where measurements or performance are specified
on the plans and specifications. Any lapses in Certification of the
proposed Commissioning Firm or disciplinary action taken by ACG, NEBB, or
TABB against the proposed Commissioning Firm shall be described in
detail. The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of
duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the firm loses subject
certification during this period, immediately notify the Contracting
Officer and submit another Commissioning Firm for approval. Any firm that
has been the subject of disciplinary action by the ACG, the NEBB, or the
TABB within the five years preceding Contract Award is not eligible to
perform any duties related to the HVAC systems, including Commissioning.
All work specified in this Section and in other related Sections to be
performed by the Commissioning Firm shall be considered invalid if the
Commissioning Firm loses its certification prior to Contract completion
and must be performed by an approved successor. These Commissioning
services are to assist the prime Contractor in performing the quality
oversight for which it is responsible. The Commissioning Firm shall be a
subcontractor of the prime Contractor and shall be financially and
corporately independent of all other subContractors. The Commissioning
Firm shall report to and be paid by the prime Contractor.
1.5.2 Commissioning Specialist
1.5.2.1 General
Submit certification of the proposed Commissioning Specialist's

qualifications to perform the duties specified herein and in other related
Sections, no later than 21 days after the Notice to Proceed. The
documentation shall include the date that the Certification was initially
granted and the date when the current Certification expires. The
Commissioning Specialist shall be an ACG Certified Commissioning Agent, a
NEBB Qualified Commissioning Administrator, or a TABB Certified
Commissioning Supervisor and shall be an employee of the approved
Commissioning Firm. Any lapses in Certification of the proposed
Commissioning Specialist or disciplinary action taken by ACG, NEBB, or
TABB against the proposed Commissioning Specialist shall be described in
detail. The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of
duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the Commissioning Specialist
loses subject certification during this period, immediately notify the
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 3

Contracting Officer and submit another Commissioning Specialist for

approval. Any individual that has been the subject of disciplinary action
by the ACG, the NEBB, or the TABB within the five years preceding Contract
Award is not eligible to perform any duties related to the HVAC systems,
including Commissioning. All work specified in this Section and in other
related Sections performed by the Commissioning Specialist shall be
considered invalid if the Commissioning Specialist loses certification
prior to Contract completion and must be performed by the approved
successor.
1.5.2.2 Responsibilities
Perform all Commissioning work specified herein and in related sections

under the direct guidance of the Commissioning Specialist. The
Commissioning Specialist shall prepare, no later than 28 days after the
approval of the Commissioning Specialist, the Commissioning Plan which
will be a comprehensive schedule and will include all submittal
requirements for procedures, notifications, reports and the Commissioning
Report. After approval of the Commissioning Plan, revise the Contract NAS
schedule to reflect the schedule requirements in the Commissioning Plan.
Begin the work described in this Section only after all work required in
related Sections has been successfully completed, and all test and
inspection reports and operation and maintenance manuals required in these
Sections have been submitted and approved. Pre-Functional Performance
Test Checklists shall be performed at appropriate times during the
construction phase of the Contract.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COMMISSIONING TEAM AND TEST FORMS AND CHECKLISTS
Designate Contractor team members to participate in the Pre- Functional

Performance Test Checklists and the Functional Performance Tests specified
herein. In addition, the Government team members will include a
representative of the Contracting Officer, the Design Agent's
Representative, and the Using Agency's Representative. The team members
shall be as follows:
Designation Function
A Contractor's Commissioning Specialist
M Contractor's Mechanical Representative
E Contractor's Electrical Representative
T Contractor's Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB)

Specialist
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 4

Designation Function
C Contractor's Controls Representative
D Design Agency Representative
O Contracting Officer's Representative
U Using Agency's Representative
Appendices A and B shall be completed by the commissioning team.

Acceptance by each commissioning team member of each Pre- Functional
Performance Test Checklist item shall be indicated by initials and date
unless an "X" is shown indicating that participation by that individual is
not required. Acceptance by each commissioning team member of each
functional performance test item shall be indicated by signature and date.
3.2 TESTS
Perform the pre-functional performance test checklists and functional

performance tests in a manner that essentially duplicates the checking,
testing, and inspection methods established in the related Sections.
Where checking, testing, and inspection methods are not specified in other
Sections, establish methods which will provide the information required.
Testing and verification required by this section shall be performed
during the Commissioning phase. Requirements in related Sections are
independent from the requirements of this Section and shall not be used to
satisfy any of the requirements specified in this Section. Provide all
materials, services, and labor required to perform the prefunctional
performance tests checks and functional performance tests. A functional
performance test shall be aborted if any system deficiency prevents the
successful completion of the test or if any participating non-Government
commissioning team member of which participation is specified is not
present for the test.
3.2.1 Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklists
Perform Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklists, for the items

indicated in Appendix A, at least 28 days prior to the start of
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checks.. Correct and re-inspect
deficiencies discovered during these checks in accordance with the
applicable contract requirements. Submit the schedule for the test checks
at least 14 days prior to the start of Pre-Functional Performance Test
Checks.
3.2.2 Functional Performance Tests
Submit test procedures at least 28 days prior to the start of Functional

Performance Tests. Submit the schedule for the tests at least 14 days
prior to the start of Functional Performance Tests. Perform Functional
Performance Tests for the items indicated in Appendix B. Begin Functional
Performance Tests only after all Pre-Functional Performance Test
Checklists have been successfully completed. Tests shall prove all modes
of the sequences of operation, and shall verify all other relevant
contract requirements. Begin Tests with equipment or components and
progress through subsystems to complete systems. Upon failure of any
Functional Performance Test item, correct all deficiencies in accordance
with the applicable contract requirements. The item shall then be
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 5

retested until it has been completed with no errors.
3.3 COMMISSIONING REPORT
Submit the Commissioning Report, no later than 14 days after completion of

Functional Performance Tests, consisting of completed Pre- Functional
Performance Test Checklists and completed Functional Performance Tests
organized by system and by subsystem and submitted as one package. The
Commissioning Report shall also include all HVAC systems test reports,
inspection reports (Preparatory, Initial and Follow-up inspections),
start-up reports, TAB report, TAB verification report, Controls start-up
test reports and Controls Performance Verification Test (PVT) report. The
results of failed tests shall be included along with a description of the
corrective action taken.
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 6

APPENDIX A
PRE-FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST CHECKLISTS
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 7

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Multizone Air Handling Unit
For Make-up Air Unit
Checklist Item A M E T C O
Installation
a. Inspection and access doors are operable

and sealed. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
b. Condensate drainage is unobstructed.

(Visually verify pan drains completely by
pouring a cup of water into drain pan.) ___ ___ X X X ___
c. Fan belt adjusted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
Electrical A M E T C O
a. Power available to unit disconnect. ___ X ___ X X ___
b. Power available to unit control panel. ___ X ___ X X ___
c. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ X ___ ___ X ___
d. Verify that power disconnect is located

within sight of the unit it controls. ___ X ___ X X ___
Coils A M E T C O
a. Refrigerant piping properly connected. ___ ___ X X X ___
Controls A M E T C O
a. O/A dampers/actuators properly installed. ___ X X X ___ ___
b. O/A dampers/actuators operable. ___ X X X ___ ___
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) A M E T C O
a. Construction filters removed and

replaced. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
b. TAB report approved. ___ X X ___ X
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 8

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - DX Air Cooled Condensing Unit
For VRF Condensing Unit:
Checklist Item A M E T C O
Installation
a. Check condenser fans for proper rotation. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
a. Power available to unit disconnect. ___ X ___ X X ___
b. Power available to unit control panel. ___ X ___ X ___ ___
c. Verify that power disconnect is located

within sight of the unit it controls ___ X ___ X ___ ___
a. Unit safety/protection devices tested. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
b. Control system and interlocks installed. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
c. Control system and interlocks

operational. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 9

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Fan Coil Unit
Checklist Item
Installation A M E T C O
a. Access doors/removable panels are operable

and sealed. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
b. Condensate drainage is unobstructed. ___ ___ X X X ___
c. Fan belt adjusted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
a. Power available to unit disconnect. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
b. Power available to unit control panel. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
c. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ ___ ___ ___ X ___
d. Verify that power disconnect is located

within sight of the unit it controls. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
Coils A M E T C O
a. DX piping properly connected. ___ ___ X X X ___
a. Control actuators properly

installed. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
b. Control actuators operable. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
c. Verify proper location and installation

of thermostat. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
a. TAB Report approved. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 10

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Exhaust Fan
For Exhaust Fan:
Checklist Item
a. Fan belt adjusted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
a. Power available to fan disconnect. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
b. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ ___ ___ ___ X ___
c. Verify that power disconnect is located

within sight of the unit it controls. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
a. Control interlocks properly installed. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
b. Control interlocks operable. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
c. Dampers/actuators properly installed. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
d. Dampers/actuators operable. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
e. Verify proper location and installation of

thermostat. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
a. TAB Report approved. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 11

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - HVAC System Controls
Checklist Item
a. Layout of control panel matches drawings. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
b. Framed instructions mounted in or near

control panel. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
c. Components properly labeled (on inside and

outside of panel). ___ ___ X X ___ ___
d. Control components piped and/or wired to

each labeled terminal strip. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
e. EMCS connection made to each labeled

terminal strip as shown. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
f. Control wiring and tubing labeled at all

terminations, splices, and junctions. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
Main Power and Control Air
a. 120 volt AC power available to panel. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
b. 20 psig
compressed air available to panel. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
a. TAB Report submitted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
- End of Appendix A -
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 12

APPENDIX B
FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS CHECKLISTS
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 13

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Air Cooled Condensing Unit
For Condensing Units
1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation

of refrigeration system in accordance with specifications including the
following: Start building air handler to provide load for condensing
unit. Activate controls system start sequence as follows.
a. Start air handling unit. Verify control system energizes

condensing unit start sequence. __________________________________________
b. Verify and record data in 2 and 3 below.
c. Shut off air handling equipment to verify condensing unit
de-energizes. ___________________________________________________________
d. Restart air handling equipment one minute after condensing unit

shut down. Verify condensing unit restart sequence. _____________________
2. Verify condensing unit amperage each phase and voltage phase to

phase and phase to ground.
Motor Full-Load Amps __________
Amperage Phase 1 __________ Phase 2__________ Phase 3_______
Voltage Ph1-Ph2 __________ Ph1-Ph3__________ Ph2-Ph3_______
Voltage Ph1-gnd __________ Ph2-gnd__________ Ph3-gnd_______
3. Record the following information:

Ambient dry bulb temperature __________ degrees F
Suction pressure __________ psig
Discharge pressure __________ psig
4. Unusual vibration, noise, etc.

___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
5. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above

functional performance tests and certify that the item tested has met the
performance requirements in this section of the specifications.
Signature and Date
Contractor's Commissioning Specialist _____________________________
Contractor's Mechanical Representative _____________________________
Contractor's Electrical Representative _____________________________
Contractor's TAB Representative _____________________________
Contractor's Controls Representative _____________________________
Design Agency Representative _____________________________
Contracting Officer's Representative _____________________________
Using Agency's Representative _____________________________
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 14

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Fan Coil Units
The Contracting Officer will select fan coil units to be spot-checked

during the functional performance test. The number of terminals shall not
exceed 10 percent. Hot water and chilled water systems must be in
operation providing design water temperatures.
1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation

of selected fan coils in accordance with specifications including the
following:
a. Cooling only fan coils:
(1) Verify fan coil unit response to room temp set point
adjustment.
1. Check blower fan airflow. _____ cfm
2. Check cooling coil water flow. _____ gpm
3. Verify proper operation of cooling water control
valve.______
4. Cooling mode inlet air temperature ______deg F
5. Cooling mode outlet air temperature______deg F
6. Calculate coil sensible capacity and compare to design:
Calculated _______BTU/hr Design______BTU/hr
b. Cooling/heating fan coils:
(1) Verify fan coil unit response to room temp set point
adjustment.
1. Check blower fan airflow. _____ cfm
2. Check cooling coil water flow. _____ gpm
3. Verify proper operation of cooling water control valve. ____
4. Check cooling mode inlet air temperature. _____deg F
5. Check cooling mode outlet air temperature. _____deg F
6. Calculate cooling coil sensible capacity and compare to
design:
7. Calculated _________BTU/hr Design_____BTU/hr
8. Check heating coil water flow. _____ gpm
9. Verify proper operation of heating water control valve. _____
10. Check heating mode inlet air temperature. _____ deg F
11. Check heating mode outlet air temperature. _____deg F
12. Calculate heating coil capacity and compare to design:
Calculated______BTU/hr design_______BTU/hr
2. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above

functional performance tests and certify that the item tested has met the
performance requirements in this section of the specifications.
Signature and Date
Contractor's Commissioning Specialist ____________________________
Contractor's Mechanical Representative _____________________________
Contractor's Electrical Representative ______________________________
Contractor's TAB Representative ______________________________
Contractor's Controls Representative _____________________________
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 15

Design Agency Representative _____________________________
Contracting Officer's Representative _____________________________
Using Agency's Representative _____________________________
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 16

Functional Performance Test Checklist - HVAC Controls
The Contracting Officer will select HVAC control systems to undergo

functional performance testing. The number of systems shall not exceed 10
percent. Perform this test simultaneously with FPT for AHU or other
controlled equipment.
1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall verify operation of

HVAC controls by performing the Performance Verification Test (PVT) test
for that system. Contractor to provide blank PVT test procedures
previously done by the controls Contractor.
2. Verify interlock with UMCS system______.
3. Verify all required I/O points function from the UMCS system_____.
4. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the Performance

Verification Test and certify that the item tested has met the performance
requirements in this section of the specifications.
Signature and Date
Contractor's Commissioning Specialist _________________________
Contractor's Mechanical Representative ___________________________
Contractor's Electrical Representative ___________________________
Contractor's TAB Representative ___________________________
Contractor's Controls Representative ___________________________
Design Agency Representative ___________________________
Contractor's Officer's Representative ___________________________
Using Agency's Representative ___________________________
- End of Appendix B -
-End of document
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 17

SECTION 23 09 23.13 20
BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC

08/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AMCA 500-D (2012) Laboratory Methods of Testing

Dampers for Rating

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 135 (2012; Errata 1 2013; INT 1-9 2013; Errata

2 2013; INT 10-12 2014; Errata 3 2014)
BACnet—A Data Communication Protocol for
Building Automation and Control Networks
ARCNET TRADE ASSOCIATION (ATA)
ATA 878.1 (1999) Local Area Network: Token Bus


Attachments

Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges,
and Pipe Fittings

IEEE C62.41.1 (2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges

Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and
Less) AC Power Circuits
IEEE C62.41.2 (2002) Recommended Practice on

Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 1

(1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits
IEEE C62.45 (2002; R 2008) Recommended Practice on

Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to
Low-Voltage (1000v and less)AC Power
Circuits
ISO 8802-3 (2000) Information Technology -

Telecommunications and Information
Exchange Between Systems - Local and
Metropolitan Area Networks - Specific
Requirements - Part 3: Carrier Sense
Multiple Access with Collision Detection
(CSMA/CD)Access Method and Physical Layer
Specifications

3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National
Electrical Code

(SMACNA)

UL 1449 (2014) Surge Protective Devices
UL 506 (2008; Reprint Oct 2013) Specialty

Transformers
UL 508A (2013; Reprint Jan 2014) Industrial

Control Panels
UL 916 (2007; Reprint Aug 2014) Standard for

Energy Management Equipment
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135: BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for

Building Automation and Control Networks, referred to as "BACnet". ASHRAE
developed BACnet to provide a method for diverse building automation
devices to communicate and share data over a network.
1.2.2 ARCNET
ATA 878.1 - Attached Resource Computer Network. ARCNET is a deterministic

LAN technology; meaning it's possible to determine the maximum delay
before a device is able to transmit a message.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 2

1.2.3 BACnet
Building Automation and Control Network; the common name for the
communication standard ASHRAE 135. The standard defines methods and
protocol for cooperating building automation devices to communicate over a
variety of LAN technologies.
1.2.4 BACnet/IP
An extension of BACnet, Annex J, defines this mechanism using a reserved

UDP socket to transmit BACnet messages over IP networks. A BACnet/IP
network is a collection of one or more IP subnetworks that share the same
BACnet network number. See also "BACnet Broadcast Management Device".
1.2.5 BACnet Internetwork
Two or more BACnet networks, possibly using different LAN technologies,

connected with routers. In a BACnet internetwork, there exists only one
message path between devices.
1.2.6 BACnet Network
One or more BACnet segments that have the same network address and are
interconnected by bridges at the physical and data link layers.
1.2.7 BACnet Segment
One or more physical segments of BACnet devices on a BACnet network,

connected at the physical layer by repeaters.
1.2.8 BBMD
BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD). A communications device,

typically combined with a BACnet router. A BBMD forwards BACnet broadcast
messages to BACnet/IP devices and other BBMDs connected to the same
BACnet/IP network. Every IP subnetwork that is part of a BACnet/IP
network must have only one BBMD. See also "BACnet/IP".
1.2.9 BAS
Building Automation Systems, including DDC (Direct Digital Controls) used

for facility automation and energy management.
1.2.10 BAS Owner
The regional or local user responsible for managing all aspects of the BAS
operation, including: network connections, workstation management,
submittal review, technical support, control parameters, and daily
operation.
1.2.11 BIBBs
BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks. A collection of BACnet services

used to describe supported tasks. BIBBs are often described in terms of
"A" (client) and "B" (server) devices. The “A” device uses data provided
by the "B" device, or requests an action from the “B” device.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 3

1.2.12 BI
BACnet International, formerly two organizations: the BACnet Manufacturers

Association (BMA) and the BACnet Interest Group - North America (BIG-NA).
1.2.13 BI/BTL
BACnet International/BACnet Testing Laboratories (Formerly BMA/BTL). The

organization responsible for testing products for compliance with the
BACnet standard, operated under the direction of BACnet International.
1.2.14 Bridge
Network hardware that connects two or more network (or BACnet

internetwork) segments at the physical and data link layers. A bridge may
also filter messages.
1.2.15 Broadcast
A message sent to all devices on a network segment.
1.2.16 Device
Any control system component, usually a digital controller, that contains

a BACnet Device Object and uses BACnet to communicate with other devices.
See also "Digital Controller".
1.2.17 Device Object
Every BACnet device requires one Device Object, whose properties represent
the network visible properties of that device. Every Device Object
requires a unique Object Identifier number on the BACnet internetwork.
This number is often referred to as the device instance.
1.2.18 Device Profile
A collection of BIBBs determining minimum BACnet capabilities of a device,

defined in ASHRAE Standard 135-2004, Annex L. Standard device profiles
include BACnet Operator Workstations (B-OWS), BACnet Building Controllers
(B-BC), BACnet Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC), BACnet
Application Specific Controllers (B-ASC), BACnet Smart Actuator (B-SA), and
BACnet Smart Sensor (B-SS). Each device used in new construction is
required to have a PICS statement listing BIBBs supported.
1.2.19 Digital Controller
An electronic controller, usually with internal programming logic and

digital and analog input/output capability, which performs control
functions. In most cases, synonymous with a BACnet device described in
this specification. See also "Device".
1.2.20 Direct Digital Control (DDC)
Digital controllers performing control logic. Usually the controller

directly senses physical values, makes control decisions with internal
programs, and outputs control signals to directly operate switches,
valves, dampers, and motor controllers.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 4

1.2.21 DDC System
A network of digital controllers, communication architecture, and user

interfaces. A DDC system may include programming, sensors, actuators,
switches, relays, factory controls, operator workstations, and various
other devices, components, and attributes.
1.2.22 Ethernet
A family of local-area-network technologies providing high-speed

networking features over various media.
1.2.23 Firmware
Software programmed into read only memory (ROM), flash memory,

electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM), or erasable
programmable read only memory (EPROM) chips.
1.2.24 Gateway
Communication hardware connecting two or more different protocols, similar

to human language translators. The Gateway translates one protocol into
equivalent concepts for the other protocol. In BACnet applications, a
gateway has BACnet on one side and non-BACnet (usually proprietary)
protocols on the other side.
1.2.25 Half Router
A device that participates as one partner in a BACnet point-to-point (PTP)

connection. Two half-routers in an active PTP connection combine to form
a single router.
1.2.26 Hub
A common connection point for devices on a network.
1.2.27 Internet Protocol (IP, TCP/IP, UDP/IP)
A communication method, the most common use is the World Wide Web. At the
lowest level, it is based on Internet Protocol (IP), a method for
conveying and routing packets of information over various LAN media. Two
common protocols using IP are User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). UDP conveys information to
well-known "sockets" without confirmation of receipt. TCP establishes
"sessions", which have end-to-end confirmation and guaranteed sequence of
delivery.
1.2.28 Input/Output (I/O)
Physical inputs and outputs to and from a device, although the term
sometimes describes software, or "virtual" I/O. See also "Points".
1.2.29 I/O Expansion Unit
An I/O expansion unit provides additional point capacity to a digital

controller.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 5

1.2.30 IP subnet
Internet protocol (IP) identifies individual devices with a 32-bit number

divided into four groups from 0 to 255. Devices are often grouped and
share some portion of this number. For example, one device has IP address
209.185.47.68 and another device has IP address 209.185.47.82. These two
devices share Class C subnet 209.185.47.00
1.2.31 Local-Area Network (LAN)
A communication network that spans a limited geographic area and uses the
same basic communication technology throughout.
1.2.32 MAC Address
Media Access Control address. The physical node address that identifies a
device on a Local Area Network.
1.2.33 Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP)
ISO 8802-3. One of the LAN options for BACnet. MSTP uses twisted-pair
wiring for relatively low speed and low cost communication (up to 4,000 ft
at 76.8K bps).
1.2.34 Native BACnet Device
A device that uses BACnet as its primary, if not only, method of

communication with other BACnet devices without intermediary gateways. A
system that uses native BACnet devices at all levels is a native BACnet
system.
1.2.35 Network
Communication technology for data communications. BACnet approved network

types are BACnet over Internet Protocol (IP), Point to Point (PTP)
Ethernet, ARCNET, MS/TP, and LonTalk®.
1.2.36 Network Number
A site-specific number assigned to each network segment to identify for

routing. This network number must be unique throughout the BACnet
internetwork.
1.2.37 Object
The concept of organizing BACnet information into standard components with

various associated properties. Examples include analog input objects and
binary output objects.
1.2.38 Object Identifier
An object property used to identify the object, including object type and
instance. Object Identifiers must be unique within a device.
1.2.39 Object Properties
Attributes of an object. Examples include present value and high limit

properties of an analog input object. Properties are defined in ASHRAE 135;
some are optional and some are required. Objects are controlled by
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 6

reading from and writing to object properties.
1.2.40 Peer-to-Peer
Peer-to-peer refers to devices where any device can initiate and respond
to communication with other devices.
1.2.41 Performance Verification Test (PVT)
The procedure for determining if the installed BAS meets design criteria
prior to final acceptance. The PVT is performed after installation,
testing, and balancing of mechanical systems. Typically the PVT is
performed by the Contractor in the presence of the Government.
1.2.42 PID
Proportional, integral, and derivative control; three parameters used to

control modulating equipment to maintain a setpoint. Derivative control
is often not required for HVAC systems (leaving "PI" control).
1.2.43 PICS
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS), describing the

BACnet capabilities of a device. See BACnet, Annex A for the standard
format and content of a PICS statement.
1.2.44 Points
Physical and virtual inputs and outputs. See also "Input/Output".
1.2.45 PTP
Point-to-Point protocol connects individual BACnet devices or networks

using serial connections like modem-to-modem links.
1.2.46 Repeater
A network component that connects two or more physical segments at the

physical layer.
1.2.47 Router
A BACnet router is a component that joins together two or more networks

using different LAN technologies. Examples include joining a BACnet
Ethernet LAN to a BACnet MS/TP LAN.
1.2.48 Stand-Alone Control
Refers to devices performing equipment-specific and small system control

without communication to other devices or computers for physical I/O,
excluding outside air and other common shared conditions. Devices are
located near controlled equipment, with physical input and output points
limited to 64 or less per device, except for complex individual equipment
or systems. Failure of any single device will not cause other network
devices to fail. BACnet "Smart" actuators (B-SA profile) and sensors
(B-SS profile) communicating on a network with a parent device are exempt
from stand-alone requirements.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 7

1.3 SUBCONTRACTOR SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

Perform all work in this section in accordance with the paragraph entitled
"Subcontractor Special Requirements" in Section 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE
REQUIREMENTS. The paragraph specifies that all contract requirements of
this section shall be accomplished directly by a first tier
subcontractor. No work required shall be accomplished by a second tier
subcontractor.
1.4 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC DESCRIPTION
a. Provide new BACnet DDC systems including associated equipment and

accessories. All new devices are accessible using a Web browser
interface and communicate using ASHRAE 135 BACnet communications
without the use of gateways, unless gateways are shown on the design
drawings and specifically requested by the Government. Where gateways
are allowed, they must support ASHRAE 135, including all object
properties and read-write services shown on Government approved
interoperability schedules. Manufacturer's products, including
design, materials, fabrication, assembly, inspection, and testing
shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 135, ASME B31.1, and NFPA 70,
except where indicated otherwise.
1.4.1.1 Control System Drawings Title Sheet
Provide a title sheet for the control system drawing set. Include the
project title, project location, contract number, the controls contractor
preparing the drawings, an index of the control drawings in the set, and a
legend of the symbols and abbreviations used throughout the control system
drawings.
1.4.1.2 List of I/O Points
Also known as a Point Schedule, provide for each input and output point
physically connected to a digital controller: point name, point
description, point type (Analog Output (AO), Analog Input (AI), Binary
Output (BO), Binary Input (BI)), point sensor range, point actuator range,
point address, BACnet object, associated BIBBS (where applicable), and
point connection terminal number. Typical schedules for multiple identical
equipment are allowed unless otherwise requested in design or contract
criteria.
1.4.1.3 Control System Components List
Provide a complete list of control system components installed on this

project. Include for each controller and device: control system
schematic name, control system schematic designation, device description,
manufacturer, and manufacturer part number. For sensors, include point
name, sensor range, and operating limits. For valves, include body style,
Cv, design flow rate, pressure drop, valve characteristic (linear or equal
percentage), and pipe connection size. For actuators, include point name,
spring or non-spring return, modulating or two-position action, normal
(power fail) position, nominal control signal operating range (0-10 volts
DC or 4-20 milliamps), and operating limits.
1.4.1.4 Control System Schematics
Provide control system schematics. Typical schematics for multiple
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 8

identical equipment are allowed unless otherwise requested in design or

contract criteria. Include the following:
a. Location of each input and output device
b. Flow diagram for each piece of HVAC equipment
c. Name or symbol for each control system component, such as V-1 for a
valve
d. Setpoints, with differential or proportional band values
e. Written sequence of operation for the HVAC equipment
f. Valve and Damper Schedules, with normal (power fail) position
1.4.1.5 HVAC Equipment Electrical Ladder Diagrams
Provide HVAC equipment electrical ladder diagrams. Indicate required

electrical interlocks.
1.4.1.6 Component Wiring Diagrams
Provide a wiring diagram for each type of input device and output device.
Indicate how each device is wired and powered; showing typical connections
at the digital controller and power supply. Show for all field connected
devices such as control relays, motor starters, actuators, sensors, and
transmitters.
1.4.1.7 Terminal Strip Diagrams
Provide a diagram of each terminal strip. Indicate the terminal strip

location, termination numbers, and associated point names.
1.4.1.8 BACnet Communication Architecture Schematic
Provide a schematic showing the project's entire BACnet communication

network, including addressing used for LANs, LAN devices including routers
and bridges, gateways, controllers, workstations, and field interface
devices. If applicable, show connection to existing networks.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Submit detailed and annotated manufacturer's data, drawings, and

specification sheets for each item listed, that clearly show compliance
with the project specifications.

approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Include the following in the project's control system drawing set:
Control system drawings title sheet; G
List of I/O Points; G
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 9

Control System Components List; G
Control system schematics; G
HVAC Equipment Electrical Ladder diagrams; G
Component wiring diagrams; G
Terminal strip diagrams; G
BACnet communication architecture schematic; G
SD-03 Product Data
Direct Digital Controllers; G
Include BACnet PICS for each controller/device type, including

smart sensors (B-SS) and smart actuators (B-SA).
BACnet Gateways; G
Include BACnet and workstation display information; bi-directional

communication ability; compliance with interoperability schedule;
expansion capacity; handling of alarms, events, scheduling and
trend data; and single device capability (not depending on
multiple devices for exchanging information from either side of
the gateway).
DDC Software; G
BACnet Operator Workstation; G
Include BACnet PICS for Operator Workstation software.
Sensors and Input Hardware; G
Output Hardware; G
Surge and transient protection; G
Indicators; G
Variable frequency (motor) drives; G
SD-05 Design Data
Performance Verification Testing Plan; G
Pre-Performance Verification Testing Checklist; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Performance Verification Testing Report; G
SD-07 Certificates
Contractor's Qualifications; G
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 10

Pre-PVT Checklist; G
BACnet Direct Digital Control Systems, Data Package 4; G
Controls System Operators Manuals, Data Package 4; G
VFD Service Manuals, Data Package 4; G
Training documentation; G
1.6.1 Standard Products
Provide material and equipment that are standard manufacturer's products

currently in production and supported by a local service organization.
1.6.2 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

before and during installation according to manufacturer's
1.6.3 Operating Environment
Protect components from humidity and temperature variation, dust, and

contaminants. If components are stored before installation, keep them
within the manufacturer's limits.
1.6.4 Finish of New Equipment
New equipment finishing shall be factory provided. Manufacturer's

standard factory finishing shall be proven to withstand 125 hours in a
salt-spray fog test. Equipment located outdoors shall be proven to
withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test.
Salt-spray fog test shall be according to ASTM B117, with acceptance

criteria as follows: immediately after completion of the test, the finish
shall show no signs of degradation or loss of adhesion beyond 0.125 inch
on either side of the scratch mark.
1.6.5 Verification of Dimensions
The contractor shall verify all dimensions in the field, and advise the
Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing work.
1.6.6 Contractor's Qualifications
Submit documentation certifying the controls Contractor performing the

work has completed at least three DDC systems installations of a similar
design to this project, and programmed similar sequences of operation for
at least two years.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 11

The advisory provisions in ASME B31.1 and NFPA 70 are mandatory.

Substitute "shall" for "should" wherever it appears and interpret all
references to the "authority having jurisdiction" and "owner" to mean the
1.6.8 Project Sequence
The control system work for this project shall proceed in the following
order:
a. Submit and receive approval on the Shop Drawings, Product Data, and
Certificates specified under the paragraph entitled "SUBMITTALS."
b. Perform the control system installation work, including all field

check-outs and tuning.
c. Provide support to TAB personnel as specified under the paragraph

"TEST AND BALANCE SUPPORT."
d. Submit and receive approval of the Controls System Operators Manual

specified under the paragraph "CONTROLS SYSTEM OPERATORS MANUALS."
e. Submit and receive approval of the Performance Verification Testing

Plan and the Pre-PVT Checklist specified under the paragraph
"PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TESTING."
f. Perform the Performance Verification Testing.
g. Submit and receive approval on the PVT Report.
h. Submit and receive approval on the Training Documentation specified

under the paragraph "INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL" and "VFD
Service Support". Submit at least 30 days before training.
i. Deliver the final Controls System Operators Manuals and VFD Service
Manuals.
j. Conduct the Phase I Training and VFD on-site/hands-on training.
k. Conduct the Phase II Training.
l. Submit and receive approval of Closeout Submittals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DDC SYSTEM
a. Provide a networked DDC system in compliance with the latest revision

of the ASHRAE 135 BACnet standard. Include all programming, objects,
and services required to meet the sequence of control. Provide BACnet
communications between the DDC system and native BACnet devices
furnished with HVAC equipment and plant equipment including boilers,
chillers, and variable frequency drives.
2.1.1 Direct Digital Controllers
Direct digital controllers shall be UL 916 rated.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 12

2.1.1.1 I/O Point Limitation
The total number of I/O hardware points used by a single stand-alone

digital controller, including I/O expansion units, shall not exceed 64,
except for complex individual equipment or systems. Place I/O expansion
units in the same cabinet as the digital controller.
2.1.1.2 Environmental Limits
Controllers shall be suitable for, or placed in protective enclosures

suitable for the environment (temperature, humidity, dust, and vibration)
where they are located.
2.1.1.3 Stand-Alone Control
Provide stand-alone digital controllers.
2.1.1.4 Internal Clock
Provide internal clocks for all BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC) and
BACnet Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC) using BACnet time
synchronization services. Automatically synchronize system clocks daily
from an operator-designated controller. The system shall automatically
adjust for daylight saving time.
2.1.1.5 Memory
Provide sufficient memory for each controller to support the required

control, communication, trends, alarms, and messages. Protect programs
residing in memory with EEPROM, flash memory, or by an uninterruptible
power source (battery or uninterruptible power supply). The backup power
source shall have capacity to maintain the memory during a 72-hour
continuous power outage. Rechargeable power sources shall be constantly
charged while the controller is operating under normal line power.
Batteries shall be replaceable without soldering. Trend and alarm history
collected during normal operation shall not be lost during power outages
less than 72 hours long.
2.1.1.6 Immunity to Power Fluctuations
Controllers shall operate at 90 percent to 110 percent nominal voltage

rating.
2.1.1.7 Transformer
The controller power supply shall be fused or current limiting and rated
at 125 percent power consumption.
2.1.1.8 Wiring Terminations
Use screw terminal wiring terminations for all field-installed

controllers. Provide field-removable modular terminal strip or a
termination card connected by a ribbon cable for all controllers other
than terminal units.
2.1.1.9 Input and Output Interface
Provide hard-wired input and output interface for all controllers as
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 13

follows:
a. Protection: Shorting an input or output point to itself, to another

point, or to ground shall cause no controller damage. Input or output
point contact with sources up to 24 volts AC or DC for any duration
shall cause no controller damage.
b. Binary Inputs: Binary inputs shall have a toggle switch and monitor
on and off contacts from a "dry" remote device without external power,
and external 5-24 VDC voltage inputs.
c. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Pulse accumulation inputs shall conform to

binary input requirements and accumulate pulses at a resolution
suitable to the application.
d. Analog Inputs: Analog inputs shall monitor low-voltage (0-10 VDC),

current (4-20 mA), or resistance (thermistor or RTD) signals.
e. Binary Outputs: Binary outputs shall have a toggle switch and send a
pulsed 24 VDC low-voltage signal for modulation control, or provide a
maintained open-closed position for on-off control. For HVAC
equipment and plant controllers, provide for manual overrides, either
with three-position (on-off-auto) override switches and status lights,
or with an adjacent operator display and interface. Where
appropriate, provide a method to select normally open or normally
closed operation.
f. Analog Outputs: Analog outputs shall send modulating 0-10 VDC or 4-20
mA signals to control output devices.
g. Tri-State Outputs: Tri-State outputs shall provide three-point

floating control of terminal unit electronic actuators.
2.1.1.10 Digital Controller BACnet Internetwork
Provide a BACnet internetwork with control products, communication media,

connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers. Provide intermediate gateways,
only when requested by the Government and shown on the contract drawings,
to connect existing non-BACnet devices to the BACnet internetwork.
Controller and operator interface communication shall conform to ASHRAE 135,
BACnet. If a controller becomes non-responsive, the remaining controllers
shall continue operating and not be affected by the failed controller.
2.1.1.11 Communications Ports
a. Direct-Connect Interface Ports: Provide at least one extra

communication port at each local BACnet network for direct connecting
a notebook computer or BACnet hand-held terminal so all network BACnet
objects and properties may be viewed and edited by the operator.
2.1.1.12 BACnet Gateways
Provide BACnet communication ports, whenever available as a plant

equipment OEM standard option, for DDC integration via a single
communication cable. Typical BACnet controlled plant equipment includes,
but is not limited to, boilers, chillers, and variable frequency motor
drives.
Provide gateways to connect BACnet to non-BACnet DDC controlled plant
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 14

equipment, only when specifically requested and approved by the

Government, and shown on the Government approved BACnet Communication
Architecture Schematic. Provide with each gateway an interoperability
schedule, showing each point or event on the legacy side that the BACnet
"client" will read, and each parameter that the BACnet network will write
to. Describe this interoperability in terms of BACnet services, or
Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBS), defined in ASHRAE 135 Annex K.
Provide two-year minimum warranty for each gateway, including parts and
labor.
The following minimum capabilities are required:
a. Gateways shall be able to read and view all readable object properties
listed in the interoperability schedule on the non-BACnet network to
the BACnet network and vice versa where applicable.
b. Gateways shall be able to write to all writeable object properties

listed in the interoperability schedule on the non-BACnet network from
the BACnet network and vice versa where applicable.
c. Gateways shall provide single-pass (only one protocol to BACnet

without intermediary protocols) translation from the non-BACnet
protocol to BACnet and vice versa.
d. Gateways shall meet the requirements of Data Sharing Read Property

(DS-RP-B), Data Sharing Write Property (DS-WP-B), Device Management
Dynamic Device Binding-B (DM-DDB-B), and Device Management
Communication Control (DM-DCC-B) BIBBs, in accordance with ASHRAE 135.
e. Gateways shall include all hardware, software, software licenses, and

configuration tools for operator-to-gateway communications. Provide
backup programming and parameters on CD media and the ability to
modify, download, backup, and restore gateway configuration.
2.1.1.13 Digital Controller Cabinet
Provide each digital controller in a factory fabricated cabinet

enclosure. Cabinets located indoors shall protect against dust and have a
minimum NEMA 4 rating. Cabinets located outdoors or in damp environments
shall protect against all outdoor conditions and have a minimum NEMA 4
rating. Outdoor control panels and controllers must be able to withstand
extreme ambient conditions, without malfunction or failure, whether or not
the controlled equipment is running. If necessary, provide a
thermostatically controlled panel heater in freezing locations, and an
internal ventilating fan in locations exposed to direct sunlight.
Cabinets shall have a hinged lockable door and an offset removable metal
back plate, except controllers integral with terminal units, like those
mounted on VAV boxes. Provide like-keyed locks for all hinged panels
provided and a set of two keys at each panel, with one key inserted in the
lock.
2.1.1.14 Main Power Switch and Receptacle
Provide each control cabinet with a main external power on/off switch
located inside the cabinet. Also provide each cabinet with a separate 120
VAC duplex receptacle.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 15

2.1.2 DDC Software
2.1.2.1 Programming
Provide programming to execute the sequence of operation indicated.
Provide all programming and tools to configure and program all
controllers. Provide programming routines in simple, easy-to-follow logic
with detailed text comments describing what the logic does and how it
corresponds to the project's written sequence of operation.
a. Graphic-based programming shall use a library of function blocks made

from pre-programmed code designed for BAS control. Function blocks
shall be assembled with interconnecting lines, depicting the control
sequence in a flowchart. If providing a computer with device
programming tools as part of the project, graphic programs shall be
viewable in real time showing present values and logical results from
each function block.
b. Menu-based programming shall be done by entering parameters,

definitions, conditions, requirements, and constraints.
c. For line-by-line and text-based programming, declare variable types

(local, global, real, integer, etc.) at the beginning of the program.
Use descriptive comments frequently to describe the programming.
d. If providing a computer with device programming tools as part of the

project, provide a means for detecting program errors and testing
software strategies with a simulation tool. Simulation may be
inherent within the programming software suite, or provided by
physical controllers mounted in a NEMA 1 test enclosure. The test
enclosure shall contain one dedicated controller of each type provided
under this contract, complete with power supply and relevant
accessories.
2.1.2.2 Parameter Modification
All writeable object properties, and all other programming parameters

needed to comply with the project specification shall be adjustable for
devices at any network level, including those accessible with web-browser
communication, and regardless of programming methods used to create the
applications.
2.1.2.3 Short Cycling Prevention
Provide setpoint differentials and minimum on/off times to prevent

equipment short cycling.
2.1.2.4 Equipment Status Delay
Provide an adjustable delay from when equipment is commanded on or off and

when the control program looks to the status input for confirmation.
2.1.2.5 Run Time Accumulation
Use the Elapsed Time Property to provide re-settable run time accumulation
for each Binary Output Object connected to mechanical loads greater than 1
HP, electrical loads greater than 10 KW, or wherever else specified.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 16

2.1.2.6 Timed Local Override
Provide an adjustable override time for each push of a timed local

override button.
2.1.2.7 Time Synchronization
Provide time synchronization, including adjustments for leap years,

daylight saving time, and operator time adjustments.
2.1.2.8 Scheduling
Provide operating schedules as indicated, with equipment assigned to

groups. Changing the schedule of a group shall change the operating
schedule of all equipment in the group. Groups shall be capable of
operator creation, modification, and deletion. Provide capability to view
and modify schedules in a seven-day week format. Provide capability to
enter holiday and override schedules one full year at a time.
2.1.2.9 Object Property Override
Allow writeable object property values to accept overrides to any valid

value. Where specified or required for the sequence of control, the
Out-Of-Service property of Objects shall be modifiable using BACnet's
write property service. When documented, exceptions to these requirement
are allowed for life, machine, and process safeties.
2.1.2.10 Alarms and Events
Alarms and events shall be capable of having programmed time delays and
high-low limits. When a computer workstation or web server is connected
to the BACnet internetwork, alarms/events shall report to the computer,
printer, e-mail, and cell phone as defined by an authorized operator.
Otherwise alarms/events shall be stored within a device on the BACnet
network until connected to a user interface device and retrieved. Provide
alarms/events in agreement with the point schedule, sequence of operation,
and the BAS Owner. At a minimum, provide programming to initiate
alarms/events any time a piece of equipment fails to operate, a control
point is outside normal range or condition shown on schedules,
communication to a device is lost, a device has failed, or a controller
has lost its memory. Power failure at any piece of equipment will result
in alarm.
2.1.2.11 Trending
Provide BACnet trend services capable of trending all object present

values set points, and other parameters indicated for trending on project
schedules. Trends may be associated into groups, and a trend report may
be set up for each group. Trends are stored within a device on the BACnet
network, with operator selectable trend intervals from 10 seconds up to 60
minutes. The minimum number of consecutive trend values stored at one
time shall be 100 per variable. When trend memory is full, the most
recent data shall overwrite the oldest data.
Trend logs collected and submitted show as an option to be selected during

the period when trend logs are collected, maximum activity to demonstrate
equipment capacities and so, override settings if necessary to achieve it.
The operator workstation shall upload trends automatically upon reaching
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 17

3/4 of the device buffer limit (via Notification_Threshold property), by

operator request, or by time schedule for archiving. Archived and
real-time trend data shall be available for viewing numerically and
graphically for at the workstation and connected notebook computers.
2.1.2.12 Device Diagnostics
Each controller shall have diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and
device fault condition. The DDC system shall recognize and report a
non-responsive controller.
2.1.2.13 Power Loss
Upon restoration of power, the DDC system shall perform an orderly restart
and restoration of control.
2.1.3 BACnet Operator Workstation
The workstation shall be capable of accessing all DDC system devices and
communicate using the BACnet protocol. The workstation shall be capable
of displaying, modifying, creating, archiving, and deleting (as
applicable): all points, objects, object properties, programming, alarms,
trends, messages, schedules, and reports.
2.1.3.1 Graphics Software
Provide web-based system graphics viewable on browsers compatible with MS

Internet Explorer 6.X or greater using an industry-standard file format
such as HTML, BMP, JPEG, or GIF.
Graphic displays shall have full-screen resolution when viewed on the

workstation and notebook computers. Dynamic data on graphics pages shall
refresh within 10 seconds using an Internet connection, or 30 seconds
using a dial-up modem connection. Graphics viewing shall not require
additional "plug-in" software like Java, Shockwave and Flash applications
unless the software is readily available for free over the Internet, and
certified for use with Navy Marine Corps Internet (NMCI) personal
computers.
The graphics shall show the present value and object name for each of the
project's I/O points on at least one graphic page. Arrange point values
and names on the graphic displays in their appropriate physical locations
with respect to the floor plan or equipment graphic displayed. Graphics
shall allow the operator to monitor current status, view zone and
equipment summaries, use point-and-click navigation between graphic pages,
and edit setpoints and parameters directly from the screens. Items in
alarm shall be displayed using a different color or other obvious visual
indicator.
Provide graphics with the following:
a. Graphic Types: Provide at least one graphic display for each piece of
HVAC equipment, building floor, and controlled zone. Indicate dynamic
point values, operating statuses, alarm conditions, and control
setpoints on each display. Provide summary pages where appropriate.
(1) Building Elevation: For buildings more than one story, provide
an elevation view of the building with links to each of the
building's floor plans. Simulate the building's architecture and
include the building number and floor numbers. If possible, use
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 18

an actual photograph of the building.
(2) Building Floor Plans: Provide a floor plan graphic for each of
the building's floors and roof with dynamic display of space
temperature and other important data. If used, indicate and
provide links to sub-plan areas. If possible, use the project's
electronic drawing files for the graphic backgrounds. Provide
clear names for important areas, such as "Main Conference Room."
Include room names and numbers where applicable. Include features
such as stairwells, elevators, and main entrances. Where
applicable, include the mechanical room, HVAC equipment, and
control component locations, with corresponding links to the
equipment graphics.
(3) Sub-plan Areas: Where a building's floor plan is too large to

adequately display on the screen, sub-divide the plan into
distinct areas, and provide a separate graphic display for each
area. Provide same level of detail requested in building floor
plan section above.
(4) HVAC Equipment: Provide a graphic display for each piece of HVAC
equipment, such as a fan coil unit, VAV terminal, or air handling
unit. Equipment shall be represented by a two or
three-dimensional drawing. Where multiple pieces of equipment
combine to form a system, such as a central chiller plant or
central heating plant, provide one graphic to depict the entire
plant. Indicate the equipment, piping, ductwork, dampers, and
control valves in the installed location. Include labels for
equipment, piping, ductwork, dampers, and control valves. Show
the direction of air and water flow. Include dynamic display of
applicable object data with clear names in appropriate locations.
(5) Sequence of Operation: Provide a graphic screen displaying the

written out full sequence of operation for each piece of HVAC
equipment. Provide a link to the sequence of operation displays
on their respective equipment graphics. Include dynamic real-time
data within the text for setpoints and variables.
b. Graphic Title: Provide a prominent, descriptive title on each graphic

page.
c. Dynamic Update: When the workstation is on-line, all graphic I/O

object values shall update with change-of-value services, or by
operator selected discrete intervals.
d. Graphic Linking: Provide forward and backward linking between floor

plans, sub-plans, and equipment.
e. Graphic Editing: Provide installed software to create, modify, and

delete the DDC graphics. Include the ability to store graphic symbols
in a symbol directory and import these symbols into the graphics.
f. Dynamic Point Editing: Provide full editing capability for deleting,

adding, and modifying dynamic points on the graphics.
2.2 SENSORS AND INPUT HARDWARE
Coordinate sensor types with the BAS Owner to keep them consistent with
existing installations.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 19

2.2.1 Field-Installed Temperature Sensors
Where feasible, provide the same sensor type throughout the project.
Avoid using transmitters unless absolutely necessary.
2.2.1.1 Thermistors
Precision thermistors may be used in applications below 200 degrees F.

Sensor accuracy over the application range shall be 0.36 degree F or less
between 32 to 150 degrees F. Stability error of the thermistor over five
years shall not exceed 0.25 degrees F cumulative. A/D conversion
resolution error shall be kept to 0.1 degrees F. Total error for a
thermistor circuit shall not exceed 0.5 degrees F.
2.2.1.2 Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs)
Provide RTD sensors with platinum elements compatible with the digital
controllers. Encapsulate sensors in epoxy, series 300 stainless steel,
anodized aluminum, or copper. Temperature sensor accuracy shall be 0.1
percent (1 ohm) of expected ohms (1000 ohms) at 32 degrees F. Temperature
sensor stability error over five years shall not exceed 0.25 degrees F
cumulative. Direct connection of RTDs to digital controllers without
transmitters is preferred. When RTDs are connected directly, lead
resistance error shall be less than 0.25 degrees F. The total error for a
RTD circuit shall not exceed 0.5 degrees F.
2.2.1.3 Temperature Sensor Details
a. Room Type: Provide the sensing element components within a decorative

protective cover suitable for surrounding decor. Provide room
temperature sensors with timed override button, setpoint adjustment
lever, digital temperature display.
b. Duct Probe Type: Ensure the probe is long enough to properly sense
the air stream temperature.
c. Duct Averaging Type: Continuous averaging sensors shall be one foot

in length for each 4 square feet of duct cross-sectional area, and a
minimum length of 6 feet.
d. Pipe Immersion Type: Provide minimum three-inch immersion. Provide

each sensor with a corresponding pipe-mounted sensor well, unless
indicated otherwise. Sensor wells shall be stainless steel when used
in steel piping, and brass when used in copper piping. Provide the
sensor well with a heat-sensitive transfer agent between the sensor
and the well interior.
e. Outside Air Type: Provide the sensing element on the building's north
side with a protective weather shade that positions the sensor
approximately 3 inches off the wall surface, does not inhibit free air
flow across the sensing element, and protects the sensor from snow,
ice, and rain.
2.2.2 Transmitters
Provide transmitters with 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC linear output scaled

to the sensed input. Transmitters shall be matched to the respective
sensor, factory calibrated, and sealed. Size transmitters for an output
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 20

near 50 percent of its full-scale range at normal operating conditions.

The total transmitter error shall not exceed 0.1 percent at any point
across the measured span. Supply voltage shall be 12 to 24 volts AC or
DC. Transmitters shall have non-interactive offset and span adjustments.
For temperature sensing, transmitter drift shall not exceed 0.03 degrees F
a year.
2.2.2.1 Relative Humidity Transmitters
Provide transmitters with an accuracy equal to plus or minus 3 percent

from 0 to 90 percent scale, and less than one percent drift per year.
Sensing elements shall be the polymer type.
2.2.2.2 Pressure Transmitters
Provide transmitters integral with the pressure transducer.
2.2.3 Current Transducers
Provide current transducers to monitor motor amperage, unless current

switches are shown on design drawings or point tables.
2.2.4 Air Quality Sensors
Provide power supply for each sensor.
2.2.4.1 CO2 Sensors
Provide photo-acoustic type CO2 sensors with integral transducers and

linear output. The devices shall read CO2 concentrations between 0 and
2000 ppm with full scale accuracy of at least plus or minus 100 ppm.
2.2.5 Input Switches
2.2.5.1 Timed Local Overrides
Provide buttons or switches to override the DDC occupancy schedule

programming for each major building zone during unoccupied periods, and to
return HVAC equipment to the occupied mode. This requirement is waived
for zones clearly intended for 24 hour continuous operation.
2.2.6 Freeze Protection Thermostats
Provide special purpose thermostats with flexible capillary elements 20

feet minimum length for coil face areas up to 40 square feet. Provide
longer elements for larger coils at 1-foot of element for every 4 square
feet of coil face area, or provide additional thermostats. Provide switch
contacts rated for the respective motor starter's control circuit
voltage. Include auxiliary contacts for the switch's status condition. A
freezing condition at any 18-inch increment along the sensing element's
length shall activate the switch. The thermostat shall be equipped with a
manual push-button reset switch so that when tripped, the thermostat
requires manual resetting before the HVAC equipment can restart.
2.2.7 Air Flow Measurement Stations
Air flow measurement stations shall have an array of velocity sensing

elements and straightening vanes inside a flanged sheet metal casing. The
velocity sensing elements shall be the RTD or thermistor type, traversing
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 21

the ducted air in at least two directions. The air flow pressure drop
across the station shall not exceed 0.08 inch water gage at a velocity of
2,000 fpm. The station shall be suitable for air flows up to 5,000 fpm,
and a temperature range of 40 to 120 degrees F. The station's measurement
accuracy over the range of 125 to 2,500 fpm shall be plus or minus 3
percent of the measured velocity. Station transmitters shall provide a
linear, temperature-compensated 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC output. The
output shall be capable of being accurately converted to a corresponding
air flow rate in cubic feet per minute. Transmitters shall be a 2-wire,
loop powered device. The output error of the transmitter shall not exceed
0.5 percent of the measurement.
2.3 OUTPUT HARDWARE
2.3.1 Control Dampers
Provide factory manufactured galvanized steel dampers where

indicated. Control dampers shall comply with SMACNA 1966 except as
modified or supplemented by this specification. Published damper leakage
rates and respective pressure drops shall have been verified by tests in
compliance with AMCA 500-D requirements.
Provide damper assembly frames constructed of 0.064 inch minimum

thickness galvanized steel channels with mitered and welded corners.
Damper axles shall be 0.5 inches minimum diameter plated steel rods
supported in the damper frame by stainless steel or bronze bearings.
Blades mounted vertically shall be supported by thrust bearings.
Dampers shall be rated for not less than 2000 fpm air velocity. The
pressure drop through each damper when full-open shall not exceed 0.04
inches water gage at 1000 fpm face velocity. Damper assemblies in ductwork
subject to above 3-inch water gauge static air pressure shall be
constructed to meet SMACNA Seal Class "A" construction requirements.
Provide the damper operating linkages outside of the air stream, including
crank arms, connecting rods, and other hardware that transmits motion from
the damper actuators to the dampers, shall be adjustable. Additionally,
operating linkages shall be designed and constructed to have a 2 to 1
safety factor when loaded with the maximum required damper operating
force. Linkages shall be brass, bronze, galvanized steel, or stainless
steel.
Provide access doors or panels in hard ceilings and walls for access to
all concealed damper operators and damper locking setscrews.
For field-installed control dampers, a single damper section shall have

blades no longer than 48 inches and no higher than 72 inches. The maximum
damper blade width shall be 12 inches. Larger sized dampers shall be built
using a combination of sections.
Frames shall be at least 2 inches wide. Flat blades shall have edges
folded for rigidity. Blades shall be provided with compressible gasket
seals along the full length of the blades to prevent air leakage when
closed.
The damper frames shall be provided with jamb seals to minimize air
leakage. Seals shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of
minus 40 degrees F to 200 degrees F.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 22

The leakage rate of each damper when full-closed shall be no more

than 3 cfm per sq. foot of damper face area at
1.0 inches water gage static pressure.
2.3.2 Control Valves
2.3.2.1 Valve Assembly
Valve bodies shall be designed for 125 psig minimum working pressure or
150 percent of the operating pressure, whichever is greater. Valve stems
shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Valve leakage ratings shall be 0.01
percent of rated Cv value. Class 125 copper alloy valve bodies and Class
150 steel or stainless steel valves shall meet the requirements of
ASME B16.5. Cast iron valve components shall meet the requirements of
ASTM A126 Class B or C.
2.3.2.2 Butterfly Valves
Butterfly valves shall be the threaded lug type suitable for dead-end
service and for modulation to the fully-closed position, with stainless
steel shafts supported by bearings, non-corrosive discs geometrically
interlocked with or bolted to the shaft (no pins), and EPDM seats suitable
for temperatures from minus 20 degrees F to plus 250 degrees F. Valves
shall have a means of manual operation independent of the actuator.
2.3.2.3 Two-Way Valves
Two-way modulating valves shall have an equal percentage characteristic.
2.3.2.4 Valves for Chilled Water Service
a. Bodies for valves 1-1/2 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze,
with threaded or union ends. Bodies for valves from 2 inches to 3
inches inclusive shall be of brass, bronze, or iron. Bodies for 2 inch
valves shall have threaded connections. Bodies for valves from 2-1/2
to 3 inches shall have flanged connections.
b. Internal valve trim shall be brass or bronze, except that valve stems
shall be stainless steel.
c. Unless indicated otherwise, provide modulating valves sized for 2 psi

minimum and 4 psi maximum differential across the valve at the design
flow rate.
d. Valves 4 inches and larger shall be butterfly valves, unless indicated

otherwise.
2.3.2.5 Valves for Hot Water Service
Valves for hot water service below 250 Degrees F:
a. Bodies for valves 1-1/2 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze,
with threaded or union ends. Bodies for valves from 2 inches to 3
inches inclusive shall be of brass, bronze, or iron. Bodies for 2 inch
valves shall have threaded connections. Bodies for valves from 2-1/2
to 3 inches shall have flanged connections.
b. Internal trim (including seats, seat rings, modulation plugs, valve
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 23

stems, and springs) of valves controlling water above 210 degrees F

shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
c. Internal trim for valves controlling water 210 degrees F or less shall
be brass or bronze. Valve stems shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
d. Non-metallic parts of hot water control valves shall be suitable for a

minimum continuous operating temperature of 250 degrees F or 50
degrees F above the system design temperature, whichever is higher.
e. Unless indicated otherwise, provide modulating valves sized for 2 psi

minimum and 4 psi maximum differential across the valve at the design
flow rate.
f. Valves 4 inches and larger shall be butterfly valves, unless indicated

otherwise.
2.3.3 Actuators
Provide direct-drive electric actuators for all control applications,

except where indicated otherwise.
2.3.3.1 Electric Actuators
Each actuator shall deliver the torque required for continuous uniform
motion and shall have internal end switches to limit the travel, or be
capable of withstanding continuous stalling without damage. Actuators
shall function properly within 85 to 110 percent of rated line voltage.
Provide actuators with hardened steel running shafts and gears of steel or
copper alloy. Fiber or reinforced nylon gears may be used for torques
less than 16 inch-pounds. Provide two-position actuators of single
direction, spring return, or reversing type. Provide modulating actuators
capable of stopping at any point in the cycle, and starting in either
direction from any point. Actuators shall be equipped with a switch for
reversing direction, and a button to disengage the clutch to allow manual
adjustments. Provide the actuator with a hand crank for manual
adjustments, as applicable. Thermal type actuators may only be used on
terminal fan coil units. Spring return actuators shall be provided on all
control dampers and all control valves except terminal fan coil units,
terminal VAV units, convectors, and unit heaters; unless indicated
otherwise. Each actuator shall have distinct markings indicating the
full-open and full-closed position, and the points in-between.
2.3.4 Output Switches
2.3.4.1 Control Relays
Field installed and DDC panel relays shall be double pole, double throw,
UL listed, with contacts rated for the intended application, indicator
light, and dust proof enclosure. The indicator light shall be lit when
the coil is energized and off when coil is not energized. Relays shall be
the socket type, plug into a fixed base, and replaceable without tools or
removing wiring. Encapsulated "PAM" type relays may be used for terminal
control applications.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 24

2.4 ELECTRICAL POWER AND DISTRIBUTION
2.4.1 Transformers
Transformers shall conform to UL 506. For control power other than

terminal level equipment, provide a fuse or circuit breaker on the
secondary side of each transformer.
2.4.2 Surge and Transient Protection
Provide each digital controller with surge and transient power

protection. Surge and transient protection shall consist of the following
devices, installed externally to the controllers.
2.4.2.1 Power Line Surge Protection
Provide surge suppressors on the incoming power at each controller or

grouped terminal controllers. Surge suppressors shall be rated in
accordance with UL 1449, have a fault indicating light, and conform to the
following:
a. The device shall be a transient voltage surge suppressor, hard-wire

type individual equipment protector for 120 VAC/1 phase/2 wire plus
ground.
b. The device shall react within 5 nanoseconds and automatically reset.
c. The voltage protection threshold, line to neutral, shall be no more

than 211 volts.
d. The device shall have an independent secondary stage equal to or

greater than the primary stage joule rating.
e. The primary suppression system components shall be pure silicon

avalanche diodes.
f. The secondary suppression system components shall be silicon avalanche

diodes or metal oxide varistors.
g. The device shall have an indication light to indicate the protection

components are functioning.
h. All system functions of the transient suppression system shall be

individually fused and not short circuit the AC power line at any time.
i. The device shall have an EMI/RFI noise filter with a minimum

attenuation of 13 dB at 10 kHz to 300 MHz.
j. The device shall comply with IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Class
"B" requirements and be tested according to IEEE C62.45.
k. The device shall be capable of operating between minus 20 degrees F

and plus 122 degrees F.
2.4.2.2 Controller Input/Output Protection
Provide controller inputs and outputs with surge protection via optical
isolation, metal oxide varistors (MOV), or silicon avalanche devices.
Fuses are not permitted for surge protection.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 25

2.4.3 Wiring
Provide complete electrical wiring for the DDC System, including wiring to
transformer primaries. Unless indicated otherwise, provide all normally
visible or otherwise exposed wiring in conduit. Where conduit is required,
control circuit wiring shall not run in the same conduit as power wiring
over 100 volts. Circuits operating at more than 100 volts shall be in
accordance with Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Run all
circuits over 100 volts in conduit, metallic tubing, covered metal
raceways, or armored cable. Use plenum-rated cable for circuits under
100 volts in enclosed spaces. Examples of these spaces include HVAC
plenums, within walls, above suspended ceilings, in attics, and within
ductwork.
2.4.3.1 Power Wiring
The following requirements are for field-installed wiring:
a. Wiring for 24 V circuits shall be insulated copper 18 AWG minimum and

rated for 300 VAC service.
b. Wiring for 120 V circuits shall be insulated copper 14 AWG minimum and
rated for 600 VAC service.
2.4.3.2 Analog Signal Wiring
Field-installed analog signal wiring shall be 18 AWG single or multiple

twisted pair. Each cable shall be 100 percent shielded and have a 20 AWG
drain wire. Each wire shall have insulation rated for 300 VAC service.
Cables shall have an overall aluminum-polyester or tinned-copper
cable-shield tape.
2.5 INDICATORS
2.5.1 Thermometers
Provide bi-metal type thermometers at locations shown. Thermometers shall

have either 9 inch long scales or 3.5 inch diameter dials, with insertion,
immersion, or averaging elements. Provide matching thermowells for
pipe-mounted installations. Select scale ranges suitable for the intended
service, with the normal operating temperature near the scale's midpoint.
The thermometer's accuracy shall be plus or minus 2 percent of the scale
range.
2.5.2 Pressure Gauges for Piping Systems
Provide pipe-mounted pressure gauges at the locations shown. Gauges shall

conform to ASME B40.100 and have a 4-inch diameter dial and shutoff cock.
Provide gauges in steam piping with a pressure snubber pigtail fitting.
Select scale ranges suitable for the intended service, with the normal
operating pressure near the scale's midpoint. The gauge's accuracy shall
be plus or minus 2 percent of the scale range.
2.6 VARIABLE FREQUENCY (MOTOR) DRIVES
Provide variable frequency drives (VFDs) as indicated. VFDs shall convert

240 or 460 volt (plus or minus 10 percent), three phase, 60 hertz (plus or
minus 2Hz), utility grade power to adjustable voltage/frequency, three
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 26

phase, AC power for stepless motor control from 5 percent to 105 percent
of base speed. VFDs shall be UL listed as delivered to the end user. The
VFD shall meet the requirements specified in the most current National
Electrical Code. Each VFD shall also meet the following:
a. The VFD shall use sine coded Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) technology.
PWM calculations shall be performed by the VFD microprocessor.
b. The VFD shall be capable of automatic control by a remote 4-20 mA

signal, by network command, or manually by the VFD control panel.
2.6.1 VFD Quality Assurance
VFDs shall be the manufacturer's current standard production unit with at

least 10 identical units successfully operating in the field.
2.6.2 VFD Service Support
a. Warranty: Provide the VFDs with a minimum 24-month full parts and
labor warranty. The warranty shall start when the contract's HVAC
system is accepted by the Government. Include warranty documentation,
dates, and contact information with the VFD on-site service manuals.
b. VFD Service Manuals: Provide the VFDs with all necessary

installation, operation, maintenance, troubleshooting, service, and
repair manuals in English including related factory technical
bulletins. Provide the documents factory bound, in sturdy 3-ring
binders, or hard bound covers. Provide a title sheet on the outside
of each binder indicating the project title, project location,
installing contractor, contract number, and the VFD manufacturer,
address, and telephone number. Each binder shall include a table of
contents and tabbed dividers, with all material neatly organized. The
documentation provided shall be specifically applicable to this
project, shall be annotated to reflect the actual project conditions,
and shall provide a complete and concise depiction of the installed
work.
c. Technical Support: Provide the VFDs with manufacturer's technical

telephone support in English, readily available during normal working
hours, and free of charge for the life of the equipment.
d. Initial Start-Up: Provide the VFDs with factory-trained personnel for

the on-site start-up of the HVAC equipment and associated VFD. The
personnel shall be competent in the complete start-up, operation, and
repair of the particular model VFD installed. The factory start-up
representative shall perform the factory's complete recommended
start-up procedures and check-out tests on the VFD. Include a copy of
the start-up test documentation with the VFD on-site service manuals.
e. Provide the VFDs with on-site/hands-on training for the user and
maintenance personnel. Provide a capable and qualified instructor
with minimum two years field experience with the operation and
maintenance of similar VFDs. The training shall occur during normal
working hours and last not less than 2 hours. Coordinate the training
time with the Contracting Officer and the end user. The VFD service
manuals shall be used during the training. The contractor shall
ensure the manuals are on-site before the start of training. The
training shall cover all operational aspects of the VFD.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 27

2.6.3 VFD Features
VFDs shall have the following features:
a. A local operator control keypad capable of:
(1) Remote/Local operator selection with password access.
(2) Run/Stop and manual speed commands.
(3) All programming functions.
(4) Scrolling through all display functions.
b. Digital display capable of indicating:
(1) VFD status.
(2) Frequency.
(3) Motor RPM.
(4) Phase current.
(5) Fault diagnostics in descriptive text.
(6) All programmed parameters.
c. Standard PI loop controller with input terminal for controlled

variable and parameter settings.
d. User interface terminals for remote control of VFD speed, speed

feedback, and an isolated form C SPDT relay, which energizes on a
drive fault condition.
e. An isolated form C SPDT auxiliary relay which energizes on a run

command.
f. A metal NEMA 1 enclosure for indoors, NEMA 4 with heater for outdoors.
g. An adjustable carrier frequency with 16 KHz minimum upper limit.
h. A built in or external line reactor with 3 percent minimum impedance

to protect the VFDs DC buss capacitors and rectifier section diodes.
2.6.4 Programmable Parameters
VFDs shall include the following operator programmable parameters:
a. Upper and lower limit frequency.
b. Acceleration and Deceleration rate.
c. Variable torque volts per Hertz curve.
d. Starting voltage level.
e. Starting frequency level.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 28

f. Display speed scaling.
g. Enable/disable auto-restart feature.
h. Enable/disable soft stall feature.
i. Motor overload level.
j. Motor stall level.
k. Jump frequency and hysteresis band.
l. PWM carrier frequency.
2.6.5 Protective Features
VFDs shall have the following protective features:
a. An electronic adjustable inverse time current limit with consideration

for additional heating of the motor at frequencies below 45Hz, for the
protection of the motor.
b. An electronic adjustable soft stall feature, allowing the VFD to lower

the frequency to a point where the motor will not exceed the full-load
amperage when an overload condition exists at the requested
frequency. The VFD will automatically return to the requested
frequency when load conditions permit.
c. A separate electronic stall at 110 percent VFD rated current, and a

separate hardware trip at 190 percent current.
d. Ground fault protection that protects the output cables and motor from
grounds during both starting and continuous running conditions.
e. The ability to restart after the following faults:
(1) Overcurrent (drive or motor).
(2) Power outage.
(3) Phase loss.
(4) Over voltage/Under voltage.
f. The ability shut down if inadvertently started into a rotating load

without damaging the VFD or the motor.
g. The ability to keep a log of a minimum of four previous fault

conditions, indicating the fault type and time of occurrence in
descriptive text.
h. The ability to sustain 110 percent rated current for 60 seconds
i. The ability to shutdown safely or protect against and record the

following fault conditions:
(1) Over current (and an indication if the over current was during
acceleration, deceleration, or running).
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 29

(2) Over current internal to the drive.
(3) Motor overload at start-up.
(4) Over voltage from utility power.
(5) Motor running overload.
(6) Over voltage during deceleration.
(7) VFD over heat.
(8) Load end ground fault.
(9) Abnormal parameters or data in VFD EEPROM.
2.6.6 Minimum Operating Conditions
VFDs shall be designed and constructed to operate within the following

service conditions:
a. Ambient Temperature Range, 0 to 120 degrees F.
b. Non-condensing relative humidity to 90 percent.
2.6.7 Additional Features
Provide VFDs with the following additional features:
a. BACnet communication interface port
b. Manual bypass circuit and switch integral to the drive to allow drive
bypass and operation at 100 percent speed. Motor overload and short
circuit protective features shall remain in use during the bypass mode.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Perform the installation under the supervision of competent technicians

regularly employed in the installation of DDC systems.
3.1.1 BACnet Naming and Addressing
Coordinate with the BAS Owner and provide unique naming and addressing for
BACnet networks and devices.
a. MAC Address
Every BACnet device shall have an assigned and documented MAC Address
unique to its network. For Ethernet networks, document the MAC
Address assigned at its creation. For ARCNET or MS/TP, assign from 00
to 64.
b. Network Numbering
Assign unique numbers to each new network installed on the BACnet

internetwork. Provide ability for changing the network number; either
by device switches, network computer, or field operator interface.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 30

The BACnet internetwork (all possible connected networks) can contain

up to 65,534 possible unique networks.
c. Device Object Identifier Property Number
Assign unique Device "Object_Identifier" property numbers or device

instances for each device on the BACnet internetwork. Provide for
future modification of the device instance number; either by device
switches, network computer, or field interface. BACnet allows up to
4,194,302 possible unique devices per internetwork.
d. Device Object Name Property Text
The Device Object Name property field shall support 32 minimum

printable characters. Assign unique Device "Object_Name" property
names with plain-English descriptive names for each device
For example, the Device Object Name that for the device controlling
the chiller plant at Building 3408 would be:
Device Object_Name = CW System B3408
A Device Object Name for a VAV box controller might be:
Device Object_Name = VAV BOX25
e. Object Name Property Text (Other than Device Objects)
The Object Name property field shall support 32 minimum printable

characters. Assign Object Name properties with plain-English names
descriptive of the application. Examples include "Zone 1 Temperature"
and "Fan Start/Stop".
f. Object Identifier Property Number (Other than Device Objects)
Assign Object Identifier property numbers according to design drawings

or tables if provided. If not provided, Object Identifier property
numbers may be assigned at the Contractor's discretion but must be
approved by the Government. In this case they must be documented and
unique for like object types within the device.
3.1.2 Minimum BACnet Object Requirements
a. Use of Standard BACnet Objects
For the following points and parameters, use standard BACnet objects,
where all relevant object properties can be read using BACnet's Read
Property Service, and all relevant object properties can be modified
using BACnet's Write Property Service:
all device physical inputs and outputs, all set points, all PID tuning
parameters, all calculated pressures, flow rates, and consumption
values, all alarms, all trends, all schedules, and all equipment and
lighting circuit operating status.
b. BACnet Object Description Property
The Object Description property shall support 32 minimum printable

characters. For each object, complete the description property field
using a brief, narrative, plain English description specific to the
object and project application. For example: "HW Pump 1 Proof."
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 31

Document compliance, length restrictions, and whether the description

is writeable in the device PICS.
c. Analog Input, Output, and Value Objects
Support and provide Description and/or Device_Type text strings

matching signal type and engineering units shown on the points list.
d. Binary Input, Output, and Value Objects
Support and provide Inactive_Text and Active_Text property

descriptions matching conditions shown on the points list.
e. Calendar Object
For devices with scheduling capability, provide at least one Calendar

Object with ten-entry capacity. All operators may view Calendar
Objects; authorized operators may make modifications from a
workstation. Enable the writeable Date List property and support all
calendar entry data types.
f. Schedule Object
Use Schedule Objects for all building system scheduling. All

operators may view schedule entries; authorized operators may modify
schedules from a workstation.
g. Loop Object or Equal
Use Loop Objects or equivalent BACnet objects in each applicable field

device for PID control. Regardless of program method or object used,
allow authorized operators to adjust the Update Interval, Setpoint,
Proportional Constant, Integral Constant, and Derivative Constant
using BACnet read/write services.
3.1.3 Minimum BACnet Service Requirements
a. Command Priorities
Use commandable BACnet objects to control machinery and systems,

providing the priority levels listed below. If the sequence of
operation requires a different priority, obtain approval from the
Priority Level Application
1 Manual-Life Safety
2 Automatic-Life Safety
3 (User Defined)
4 (User Defined)
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 32

Priority Level Application
5 Critical Equipment Control
6 Minimum On/Off
7 (User Defined)
8 Manual Operator
9 (User Defined)
10 (User Defined)
11 Load Shedding
12 (User Defined)
13 (User Defined)
14 (User Defined)
15 (User Defined)
16 (User Defined)
b. Alarming
(1) Alarm Priorities - Coordinate alarm and event notification with

the BAS Owner.
(2) Notification Class - Enable writeable Priority, Ack Required,

and Recipient List properties of Notification Class objects.
(3) Event Notification Message Texts - Use condition specific

narrative text and numerical references for alarm and event
notification.
c. Updating Displayed Property Values
Allow workstations to display property values at discrete polled

intervals, or based on receipt of confirmed and unconfirmed Change of
Value notifications. The COV increment shall be adjustable by an
operator using BACnet services, and polled intervals shall be
adjustable at the operator workstation.
3.1.4 Local Area Networks
Obtain Government approval before connecting new networks with existing

networks. Network numbers and device instance numbers shall remain unique
when joining networks. Do not change existing network addressing without
Government approval. See also "BACnet Naming and Addressing".
3.1.5 BACnet Routers, Bridges, and Switches
Provide the quantity of BACnet routers, bridges, and switches necessary
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 33

for communications shown on the BACnet Communication Architecture

schematic. Provide BACnet routers with BACnet Broadcast Message Device
(BBMD) capability on each BACnet internetwork communicating across an IP
network. Configure each BACnet device and bridge, router, or switch to
communicate on its network segment.
3.1.6 Wiring Criteria
a. Run circuits operating at more than 100 volts in rigid or flexible

conduit, metallic tubing, covered metal raceways, or armored cable.
b. Do not run binary control circuit wiring in the same conduit as power
wiring over 100 volts. Where analog signal wiring requires conduit,
do not run in the same conduit with AC power circuits or control
circuits operating at more than 100 volts.
c. Provide circuit and wiring protection required by NFPA 70.
d. Run all wiring located inside mechanical rooms in conduit.
e. Do not bury aluminum-sheathed cable or aluminum conduit in concrete.
f. Input/output identification: Permanently label each field-installed

wire, cable, and pneumatic tube at each end with descriptive text
using a commercial wire marking system that fully encircles the wire,
cable, or tube. Locate the markers within 2 inches of each
termination. Match the names and I/O number to the project's point
list. Similarly label all power wiring serving control devices,
including the word "power" in the label. Number each pneumatic tube
every six feet. Label all terminal blocks with alpha/numeric labels.
All wiring and the wiring methods shall be in accordance with UL 508A.
g. For controller power, provide new 120 VAC circuits, with ground.
Provide each circuit with a dedicated breaker, and run wiring in its
own conduit, separate from any control wiring. Connect the
controller's ground wire to the electrical panel ground; conduit
grounds are not acceptable.
h. Surge Protection: Install surge protection according to

manufacturer's instructions. Multiple controllers fed from a common
power supply may be protected by a common surge protector, properly
sized for the total connected devices.
i. Grounding: Ground controllers and cabinets to a good earth ground as

specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Conduit
grounding is not acceptable; all grounding shall have a direct path to
the building earth ground. Ground sensor drain wire shields at the
controller end.
j. The Contractor shall be responsible for correcting all associated

ground loop problems.
k. Run wiring in panel enclosures in covered wire track.
3.1.7 Accessibility
Install all equipment so that parts requiring periodic inspection,

operation, maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install
digital controllers, data ports, and concealed actuators, valves, dampers,
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 34

and like equipment in locations freely accessible through access doors.
3.1.8 Digital Controllers
a. Install as stand alone control devices (see definitions).
b. Locate control cabinets at the locations shown on the drawings. If

not shown on the drawings, install in the most accessible space, close
to the controlled equipment.
3.1.9 Hand-Off-Auto Switches
Wire safety controls such as smoke detectors and freeze protection

thermostats to protect the equipment during both hand and auto operation.
3.1.10 Temperature Sensors
Install temperature sensors in locations that are accessible and provide a

good representation of sensed media. Installations in dead spaces are not
acceptable. Calibrate sensors according to manufacturer's instructions.
Do not use sensors designed for one application in a different application.
3.1.10.1 Room Temperature Sensors
Mount the sensors on interior walls to sense the average room temperature
at the locations indicated. Avoid locations near heat sources such as
copy machines or locations by supply air outlet drafts. Mount the center
of the sensor 54 inches above the floor to meet ADA requirements.
3.1.10.2 Duct Temperature Sensors
a. Probe Type: Provide a gasket between the sensor housing and the duct
wall. Seal the duct penetration air tight. Seal the duct insulation
penetration vapor tight.
b. Averaging Type (and coil freeze protection thermostats): Weave the

capillary tube sensing element in a serpentine fashion perpendicular
to the flow, across the duct or air handler cross-section, using
durable non-metal supports. Prevent contact between the capillary and
the duct or air handler internals. Provide a duct access door at the
sensor location. The access door shall be hinged on the side, factory
insulated, have cam type locks, and be as large as the duct will
permit, maximum 18 by 18 inches. For sensors inside air handlers, the
sensors shall be fully accessible through the air handler's access
doors without removing any of the air handler's internals.
3.1.10.3 Immersion Temperature Sensors
Provide thermowells for sensors measuring piping, tank, or pressure vessel

temperatures. Locate wells to sense continuous flow conditions. Do not
install wells using extension couplings. Where piping diameters are
smaller than the length of the wells, provide wells in piping at elbows to
sense flow across entire area of well. Wells shall not restrict flow area
to less than 70 percent of pipe area. Increase piping size as required to
avoid restriction. Provide thermal conductivity material within the well
to fully coat the inserted sensor.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 35

3.1.10.4 Outside Air Temperature Sensors
Provide outside air temperature sensors in weatherproof enclosures on the

north side of the building, away from exhaust hoods and other areas that
may affect the reading. Provide a shield to shade the sensor from direct
sunlight.
3.1.11 Damper Actuators
Where possible, mount actuators outside the air stream in accessible areas.
3.1.12 Thermometers and Gages
Mount devices to allow reading while standing on the floor or ground, as

applicable.
3.1.13 Pressure Sensors
Locate pressure sensors as indicated.
3.1.14 Component Identification Labeling
Using an electronic hand-held label maker with white tape and bold black
block lettering, provide an identification label on the exterior of each
new control panel, control device, actuator, and sensor. Also provide
labels on the exterior of each new control actuator indicating the (full)
open and (full) closed positions. For labels located outdoors, use
exterior grade label tape, and provide labels on both the inside and
outside of the panel door or device cover. Acceptable alternatives are
white plastic labels with engraved bold black block lettering permanently
attached to the control panel, control device, actuator, and sensor. Have
the labels and wording approved by the BAS Owner prior to installation.
3.1.15 Network and Telephone Communication Lines
When telephone lines or network connections by the Government are

required, provide the Contracting Officer at least 60 days advance notice
of need.
3.2 TEST AND BALANCE SUPPORT
The controls contractor shall coordinate with and provide on-site support
to the test and balance (TAB) personnel specified under Section 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING. This support shall include:
a. On-site operation and manipulation of control systems during the

testing and balancing.
b. Control setpoint adjustments for balancing all relevant mechanical

systems, including fan coils.
c. Tuning control loops with setpoints and adjustments determined by TAB

personnel.
3.3 CONTROLS SYSTEM OPERATORS MANUALS
Provide three electronic and printed copies of a Controls System Operators

Manual. The manual shall be specific to the project, written to actual
project conditions, and provide a complete and concise depiction of the
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 36

installed work. Provide information in detail to clearly explain all

operation requirements for the control system.
Provide with each manual: CDs of the project's control system drawings,
control programs, data bases, graphics, and all items listed below.
Include gateway back-up data and configuration tools where applicable.
Provide CDs in jewel case with printed and dated project-specific labels
on both the CD and the case. For text and drawings, use Adobe Acrobat or
MS Office file types. When approved by the Government, AutoCAD and Visio
files are allowed. Give files descriptive English names and organize in
folders.
Provide printed manuals in sturdy 3-ring binders with a title sheet on the
outside of each binder indicating the project title, project location,
contract number, and the controls contractor name, address, and telephone
number. Each binder shall include a table of contents and tabbed
dividers, with all material neatly organized. Manuals shall include the
following:
a. A copy of the as-built control system (shop) drawings set, with all
items specified under the paragraph "Submittals." Indicate all field
changes and modifications.
b. A copy of the project's mechanical design drawings, including any

official modifications and revisions.
c. A copy of the project's approved Product Data submittals provided

under the paragraph "Submittals."
d. A copy of the project's approved Performance Verification Testing Plan

and Report.
e. A copy of the project's approved final TAB Report.
f. Printouts of all control system programs, including controller setup

pages if used. Include plain-English narratives of application
programs, flowcharts, and source code.
g. Printouts of all physical input and output object properties,

including tuning values, alarm limits, calibration factors, and set
points.
h. A table entitled "AC Power Table" listing the electrical power source
for each controller. Include the building electrical panel number,
panel location, and circuit breaker number.
i. The DDC manufacturer's hardware and software manuals in both print and
CD format with printed project-specific labels. Include installation
and technical manuals for all controller hardware, operator manuals
for all controllers, programming manuals for all controllers, operator
manuals for all workstation software, installation and technical
manuals for the workstation and notebook, and programming manuals for
the workstation and notebook software.
j. A list of qualified control system service organizations for the work

provided under this contract. Include their addresses and telephone
numbers.
k. A written statement entitled "Technical Support" stating the control
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 37

system manufacturer or authorized representative will provide

toll-free telephone technical support at no additional cost to the
Government for a minimum of two years from project acceptance, will be
furnished by experienced service technicians, and will be available
during normal weekday working hours. Include the toll-free technical
support telephone number.
l. A written statement entitled "Software Upgrades" stating software and

firmware patches and updates will be provided upon request at no
additional cost to the Government for a minimum of two years from
contract acceptance. Include a table of all DDC system software and
firmware provided under this contract, listing the original release
dates, version numbers, part numbers, and serial numbers.
3.3.1 Storage Cabinets
In each project mechanical room, provide a wall-mounted metal storage

cabinet with hinged doors. In addition to the number of manuals specified
above, provide an additional copy of the manuals in each of these
mechanical room storage cabinets. Provide cabinets large enough to hold
the entire set of Controls System Operators Manuals, and the HVAC
operation and maintenance manuals. Locate cabinets adjacent to DDC
control panels where applicable. Have each cabinet's proposed
installation site approved in advance by the Contracting Officer and the
BAS Owner. Prominently label each cabinet with the wording "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUALS." Prominently label each binder with the wording
"MECHANICAL ROOM COPY - DO NOT REMOVE."
3.4 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TESTING (PVT)
3.4.1 General
The PVT shall demonstrate compliance of the control system work with the
contract requirements. The PVT shall be performed by the Contractor and
witnessed and approved by the Government. If the project is phased,
provide separate testing for each phase. A Pre-PVT meeting to review the
Pre-PVT Checklist is required to coordinate all aspects of the PVT and
shall include the Contractor's QA representative, the Contractor's PVT
administrator, the Contracting Officer's representative, and the BAS Owner.
3.4.2 Performance Verification Testing Plan
Submit a detailed PVT Plan of the proposed testing for Government

approval. Develop the PVT Plan specifically for the control system in
this contract. The PVT Plan shall be an clear list of test items arranged
in a logical sequence. Include the intended test procedure, the expected
response, and the pass/fail criteria for every component tested.
The plan shall clearly describe how each item is tested, indicate where
assisting personnel are required (like the mechanical contractor), and
include what procedures are used to simulate conditions. Include a
separate column for each checked item and extra space for comments. Where
sequences of operations are checked, insert each corresponding routine
from the project’s sequence of operation. For each test area, include
signature and date lines for the Contractor's PVT administrator, the
Contractor's QA representative, the Contracting Officer's representative,
and the BAS Owner to acknowledge successful completion. The BAS Owner can
provide sample PVT forms and procedures upon request.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 38

3.4.3 PVT Sample Size
Test all central plant equipment and primary air handling unit controllers
unless otherwise directed. Twenty percent sample testing is allowed for
identical controllers typical of terminal control like VAV boxes and fan
coil units. The Government may require testing of like controllers beyond
a statistical sample if sample controllers require retesting or do not
have consistent results.
The Government may witness all testing, or random samples of PVT items.
When only random samples are witnessed, the Government may choose which
ones.
3.4.4 Pre-Performance Verification Testing Checklist
Submit the following as a list with items checked off once verified.
Provide a detailed explanation for any items that are not completed or
verified.
a. Verify all required mechanical installation work is successfully

completed, and all HVAC equipment is working correctly (or will be by
the time the PVT is conducted).
b. Verify HVAC motors operate below full-load amperage ratings.
c. Verify all required control system components, wiring, and

accessories are installed.
d. Verify the installed control system architecture matches approved

drawings.
e. Verify all control circuits operate at the proper voltage and are
free from grounds or faults.
f. Verify all required surge protection is installed.
g. Verify the A/C Power Table specified in "CONTROLS SYSTEM OPERATORS

MANUALS" is accurate.
h. Verify all DDC network communications function properly, including

uploading and downloading programming changes.
i. Using the BACnet protocol analyzer (if provided or required in this

specification), verify communications are error free.
j. Verify each digital controller’s programming is backed up.
k. Verify all wiring, components, and panels are properly labeled.
l. Verify all required points are programmed into devices.
m. Verify all TAB work affecting controls is complete.
n. Verify all valve and actuator zero and span adjustments are set
properly.
o. Verify all sensor readings are accurate and calibrated.
p. Verify each control valve and actuator goes to normal position upon
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 39

loss of power.
q. Verify all control loops are tuned for smooth and stable operation.
View trend data where applicable.
r. Verify each controller works properly in stand-alone mode.
s. Verify all safety controls and devices function properly, including

freeze protection and interfaces with building fire alarm systems.
t. Verify all electrical interlocks work properly.
u. Verify all workstations, notebooks and maintenance personnel interface

tools are delivered, all system and database software is installed,
and graphic pages are created for each workstation and notebook.
v. Verify the as-built (shop) control drawings are completed.
3.4.5 Conducting Performance Verification Testing
a. Conduct Government-witnessed PVT after approval of the PVT Plan and

the completed Pre-PVT Checklist. Notify the Contracting Officer of
the planned PVT at least 15 days prior to testing. Provide an
estimated time table required to perform the testing. Furnish
personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to
perform all aspects of the PVT. Ensure that testing personnel are
regularly employed in the testing and calibration of DDC systems.
Using the project's as-built control system (shop) drawings, the
project's mechanical design drawings, the approved Pre-PVT Checklist,
and the approved PVT Plan, conduct the PVT.
b. During testing, identify any items that do not meet the contract
requirements and if time permits, conduct immediate repairs and
re-test. Otherwise, deficiencies shall be investigated, corrected,
and re-tested later. Document each deficiency and corrective action
taken.
c. If re-testing is required, follow the procedures for the initial PVT.

The Government may require re-testing of any control system components
affected by the original failed test.
3.4.6 Controller Capability and Labeling
Test the following for each controller:
a. Memory: Demonstrate that programmed data, parameters, and trend/

alarm history collected during normal operation is not lost during
power failure.
b. Direct Connect Interface: Demonstrate the ability to connect directly

to each type of digital controller with a portable electronic device
like a notebook computer or PDA. Show that maintenance personnel
interface tools perform as specified in the manufacturer's technical
literature.
c. Stand Alone Ability: Demonstrate controllers provide stable and

reliable stand-alone operation using default values or other method
for values normally read over the network.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 40

d. Wiring and AC Power: Demonstrate the ability to disconnect any

controller safely from its power source using the AC Power Table.
Demonstrate the ability to match wiring labels easily with the control
drawings. Demonstrate the ability to locate a controller's location
using the BACnet Communication Architecture Schematic and floor plans.
e. Nameplates and Tags: Show the nameplates and tags are accurate and
permanently attached to control panel doors, devices, sensors, and
actuators.
3.4.7 Workstation and Software Operation
For every user workstation or notebook provided:
a. Show points lists agree with naming conventions.
b. Show that graphics are complete.
c. Show the UPS operates as specified.
3.4.8 BACnet Communications and Interoperability Areas
Demonstrate proper interoperability of data sharing, alarm and event

management, trending, scheduling, and device and network management. If
available or required in this specification, use a BACnet protocol
analyzer to assist with identifying devices, viewing network traffic, and
verifying interoperability. These requirements must be met even if there
is only one manufacturer of equipment installed. Testing includes the
following:
a. Data Presentation: On each BACnet Operator Workstation, demonstrate

graphic display capabilities.
b. Reading of Any Property: Demonstrate the ability to read and display

any used readable object property of any device on the network.
c. Setpoint and Parameter Modifications: Show the ability to modify all

setpoints and tuning parameters in the sequence of control or listed
on project schedules. Modifications are made with BACnet messages and
write services initiated by an operator using workstation graphics, or
by completing a field in a menu with instructional text.
d. Peer-to-Peer Data Exchange: Show all BACnet devices are installed and
configured to perform BACnet read/write services directly (without the
need for operator or workstation intervention), to implement the
project sequence of operation, and to share global data.
e. Alarm and Event Management: Show that alarms/events are installed and
prioritized according to the BAS Owner. Demonstrate time delays and
other logic is set up to avoid nuisance tripping, e.g., no status
alarms during unoccupied times or high supply air during cold morning
start-up. Show that operators with sufficient privilege can read and
write alarm/event parameters for all standard BACnet event types.
Show that operators with sufficient privilege can change routing
(BACnet notification classes) for each alarm/event including the
destination, priority, day of week, time of day, and the type of
transition involved (TO-OFF NORMAL, TO-NORMAL, etc.).
f. Schedule Lists: Show that schedules are configured for start/stop,
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 41

mode change, occupant overrides, and night setback as defined in the

sequence of operations.
g. Schedule Display and Modification: Show the ability to display any

schedule with start and stop times for the calendar year. Show that
all calendar entries and schedules are modifiable from any connected
workstation by an operator with sufficient privilege.
h. Archival Storage of Data: Show that data archiving is handled by the

operator workstation/server, and local trend archiving and display is
accomplished with BACnet Trend Log objects.
i. Modification of Trend Log Object Parameters: Show that an operator

with sufficient privilege can change the logged data points, sampling
rate, and trend duration.
j. Device and Network Management: Show the following capabilities:
(1) Display of Device Status Information
(2) Display of BACnet Object Information
(3) Silencing Devices that are Transmitting Erroneous Data
(4) Time Synchronization
(5) Remote Device Reinitialization
(6) Backup and Restore Device Programming and Master Database(s)
(7) Configuration Management of Half-Routers, Routers and BBMDs
3.4.9 Execution of Sequence of Operation
Demonstrate that the HVAC system operates properly through the complete
sequence of operation. Use read/write property services to globally read
and modify parameters over the internetwork.
3.4.10 Control Loop Stability and Accuracy
For all control loops tested, give the Government trend graphs of the
control variable over time, demonstrating that the control loop responds
to a 20 percent sudden change of the control variable set point without
excessive overshoot and undershoot. If the process does not allow a 20
percent set point change, use the largest change possible. Show that once
the new set point is reached, it is stable and maintained. Control loop
trend data shall be in real-time with the time between data points 30
seconds or less.
3.4.11 Performance Verification Testing Report
Upon successful completion of the PVT, submit a PVT Report to the

Government and prior to the Government taking use and possession of the
facility. Do not submit the report until all problems are corrected and
successfully re-tested. The report shall include the annotated PVT Plan
used during the PVT. Where problems were identified, explain each problem
and the corrective action taken. Include a written certification that the
installation and testing of the control system is complete and meets all
of the contract's requirements.
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 42

3.5 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
Provide a qualified instructor (or instructors) with two years minimum

field experience with the installation and programming of similar BACnet
DDC systems. Orient training to the specific systems installed.
Coordinate training times with the Contracting Officer and BAS Owner after
receiving approval of the training course documentation. Training shall
take place at the job site and/or a nearby Government-furnished location.
A training day shall occur during normal working hours, last no longer
than 8 hours and include a one-hour break for lunch and two additional
15-minute breaks. The project's approved Controls System Operators Manual
shall be used as the training text. The Contractor shall ensure the
manuals are submitted, approved, and available to hand out to the trainees
before the start of training.
3.5.1 Training Documentation
Submit training documentation for review 30 days minimum before training.

Documentation shall include an agenda for each training day, objectives, a
synopses of each lesson, and the instructor's background and
qualifications. The training documentation can be submitted at the same
time as the project's Controls System Operators Manual.
3.5.2 Phase I Training - Fundamentals
The Phase I training session shall last one day and be conducted in a
classroom environment with complete audio-visual aids provided by the
contractor. Provide each trainee a printed 8.5 by 11 inch hard-copy of
all visual aids used. Upon completion of the Phase I Training, each
trainee should fully understand the project's DDC system fundamentals.
The training session shall include the following:
a. BACnet fundamentals (objects, services, addressing) and how/where they

are used on this project
b. This project's list of control system components
c. This project's list of points and objects
d. This project's device and network communication architecture
e. This project's sequences of control, and:
f. Alarm capabilities
g. Trending capabilities
h. Troubleshooting communication errors
i. Troubleshooting hardware errors
3.5.3 Phase II Training - Operation
Provide Phase II Training shortly after completing Phase I Training. The

Phase II training session shall last one day and be conducted at the DDC
system workstation, at a notebook computer connected to the DDC system in
the field, and at other site locations as necessary. Upon completion of
the Phase II Training, each trainee should fully understand the project's
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 43

DDC system operation. The training session shall include the following:
a. A walk-through tour of the mechanical system and the installed DDC

components (controllers, valves, dampers, surge protection, switches,
thermostats, sensors, etc.)
b. A discussion of the components and functions at each DDC panel
c. Logging-in and navigating at each operator interface type
d. Using each operator interface to find, read, and write to specific

controllers and objects
e. Modifying and downloading control program changes
f. Modifying setpoints
g. Creating, editing, and viewing trends
h. Creating, editing, and viewing alarms
i. Creating, editing, and viewing operating schedules and schedule objects
j. Backing-up and restoring programming and data bases
k. Modifying graphic text, backgrounds, dynamic data displays, and links

to other graphics
l. Creating new graphics and adding new dynamic data displays and links
m. Alarm and Event management
n. Adding and removing network devices
SECTION 23 09 23.13 20 Page 44

SECTION 23 23 00
REFRIGERANT PIPING
10/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AHRI 710 I-P (2009) Performance Rating of Liquid-Line

Driers
AHRI 720 (2002) Refrigerant Access Valves and Hose

Connectors
ANSI/AHRI 750 (2007) Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion

Valves
ANSI/AHRI 760 (2007) Performance Rating of Solenoid

Valves for Use With Volatile Refrigerants

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 (2010; Addenda A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I,

J, K, L, N and O; Errata 2011; INT 1 2012;
Errata 2012; Addenda AD, SD, AE and AF
2013) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-Safety
Standard for Refrigeration Systems and
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 34-Designation and
Safety Classification of Refrigerants
ASHRAE 17 (2008) Method of Testing Capacity of

Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves
AWS A5.8/A5.8M (2011; Amendment 2012) Specification for

Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding
AWS BRH (2007; 5th Ed) Brazing Handbook

Code - Steel
AWS Z49.1 (2012) Safety in Welding and Cutting and

Allied Processes
ASME B1.20.1 (2013) Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)
ASME B16.11 (2011) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and

Threaded
ASME B16.21 (2011) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe

Flanges
ASME B16.22 (2013) Standard for Wrought Copper and

Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
ASME B16.26 (2013) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy

Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes
ASME B16.3 (2011) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,

Classes 150 and 300

ASME B16.9 (2012) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought

Steel Buttwelding Fittings
ASME B31.5 (2013) Refrigeration Piping and Heat

Transfer Components
ASME B31.9 (2014) Building Services Piping

Attachments

Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting
Materials for High-Temperature Service and
Other Special Purpose Applications

Seamless and Welded Carbon and Alloy-Steel
Tubes for Low-Temperature Service

Welded and Seamless


Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and
Refrigeration Field Service

Solder Metal

Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings
ASTM B75/B75M (2011) Standard Specification for Seamless

Copper Tube
ASTM B813 (2010) Standard Specification for Liquid

and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper
and Copper Alloy Tube
ASTM D3308 (2012) PTFE Resin Skived Tape
ASTM D520 (2000; R 2011) Zinc Dust Pigment
ASTM E84 (2015a) Standard Test Method for Surface

Materials

INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-58 (1993; Reaffirmed 2010) Pipe Hangers and

Supports - Materials, Design and
Manufacture, Selection, Application, and
Installation

1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Refrigerant Piping System; G
SD-03 Product Data
Refrigerant Piping System; G
1.3.1 Contract Drawings
Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate

all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. Carefully
investigate the plumbing, fire protection, electrical, structural and
finish conditions that would affect the work to be performed and arrange
such work accordingly, furnishing required offsets, fittings, and
accessories to meet such conditions.
Protect stored items from the weather, humidity and temperature

variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Proper protection and
care of all material both before and during installation is the
Contractor's responsibility. Replace any materials found to be damaged at
the Contractor's expense. During installation, cap piping and similar
openings to keep out dirt and other foreign matter.
1.5 MAINTENANCE
1.5.1 General
Submit Data Package 2 plus operation and maintenance as specified on each

sections.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS
a. Provide materials and equipment which are standard products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products,
that are of a similar material, design and workmanship and that have
been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to
bid opening.
b. The 2 year use shall include applications of equipment and materials

under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 2 years
experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product which has
been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products
having less than a 2 year field service record will be acceptable if a
certified record of satisfactory field operation, for not less than
6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown.
c. Products shall be supported by a service organization. System

components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated
locations.
d. Exposed equipment moving parts, parts that produce high operating

temperature, parts which may be electrically energized, and parts that
may be a hazard to operating personnel shall be insulated, fully
enclosed, guarded, or fitted with other types of safety devices.
Install safety devices so that proper operation of equipment is not
impaired. Welding and cutting safety requirements shall be in
accordance with AWS Z49.1.
2.2 ELECTRICAL WORK
Electrical equipment and wiring shall be in accordance with Section

26 20 00INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Field wiring shall be in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
2.3 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM
Refrigerant piping, valves, fittings, and accessories shall be in

accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 and ASME B31.5, except as specified
herein. Refrigerant piping, valves, fittings, and accessories shall be
compatible with the fluids used and capable of withstanding the pressures
and temperatures of the service. Refrigerant piping, valves, and

accessories used for refrigerant service shall be cleaned, dehydrated, and
sealed (capped or plugged) prior to shipment from the manufacturer's
plant. Submit drawings, at least 5 weeks prior to beginning construction,
provided in adequate detail to demonstrate compliance with contract
requirements. Drawings shall consist of:
a. Piping layouts which identify all valves and fittings.
b. Plans and elevations which identify clearances required for

maintenance and operation.
2.4 PIPE, FITTINGS AND END CONNECTIONS (JOINTS)
2.4.1 Steel Pipe
Steel pipe for refrigerant service shall conform to ASTM A53/A53M,

Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grades A or B. Type F pipe shall not be used.
2.4.1.1 Welded Fittings and Connections
Butt-welded fittings shall conform to ASME B16.9. Socket-welded fittings

shall conform to ASME B16.11. Welded fittings shall be identified with
the appropriate grade and marking symbol. Welded valves and pipe
connections (both butt-welds and socket-welds types) shall conform to
ASME B31.9.
2.4.1.2 Threaded Fittings and Connections
Threaded fitting shall conform to ASME B16.3. Threaded valves and pipe
connections shall conform to ASME B1.20.1.
2.4.1.3 Flanged Fittings and Connections
Flanges shall conform to ASME B16.5, Class 150. Gaskets shall be

nonasbestos compressed material in accordance with ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch
thickness, full face or self-centering flat ring type. This gaskets shall
contain aramid fibers bonded with styrene butadeine rubber (SBR) or
nitrile butadeine rubber (NBR). Bolts, nuts, and bolt patterns shall
conform to ASME B16.5. Bolts shall be high or intermediate strength
material conforming to ASTM A193/A193M.
2.4.2 Steel Tubing
Tubing shall be cold-rolled, electric-forged, welded-steel in accordance

with ASTM A334/A334M, Grade 1. Joints and fittings shall be socket type
provided by the steel tubing manufacturer.
2.4.3 Copper Tubing
Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B280 annealed or hard drawn as

required. Copper tubing shall be soft annealed where bending is required
and hard drawn where no bending is required. Soft annealed copper tubing
shall not be used in sizes larger than 1-3/8 inches. Joints shall be
brazed except that joints on lines 7/8 inchand smaller may be flared.
Cast copper alloy fittings for flared copper tube shall conform to
ASME B16.26 and ASTM B62. Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure
fittings shall conform to ASME B16.22 and ASTM B75/B75M. Joints and
fittings for brazed joint shall be wrought-copper or forged-brass sweat
fittings. Cast sweat-type joints and fittings shall not be allowed for
brazed joints. Brass or bronze adapters for brazed tubing may be used for
connecting tubing to flanges and to threaded ends of valves and equipment.
2.4.4 Solder
Solder shall conform to ASTM B32, grade Sb5, tin-antimony alloy for
service pressures up to 150 psig. Solder flux shall be liquid or paste
form, non-corrosive and conform to ASTM B813.
2.4.5 Brazing Filler Metal
Filler metal shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M, Type BAg-5 with AWS Type 3
flux, except Type BCuP-5 or BCuP-6 may be used for brazing
copper-to-copper joints.
2.5 VALVES
Valves shall be designed, manufactured, and tested specifically for

refrigerant service. Valve bodies shall be of brass, bronze, steel, or
ductile iron construction. Valves 1 inch and smaller shall have brazed or
socket welded connections. Valves larger than 1 inch shall have butt
welded end connections. Threaded end connections shall not be used,
except in pilot pressure or gauge lines where maintenance disassembly is
required and welded flanges cannot be used. Internal parts shall be
removable for inspection or replacement without applying heat or breaking
pipe connections. Valve stems exposed to the atmosphere shall be
stainless steel or corrosion resistant metal plated carbon steel.
Direction of flow shall be legibly and permanently indicated on the valve
body. Control valve inlets shall be fitted with integral or adapted
strainer or filter where recommended or required by the manufacturer.
Purge, charge and receiver valves shall be of manufacturer's standard
configuration.
2.5.1 Refrigerant Stop Valves
Valve shall be the globe or full-port ball type with a back-seating stem
especially packed for refrigerant service. Valve packing shall be
replaceable under line pressure. Valve shall be provided with a handwheel
or wrench operator and a seal cap. Valve shall be the straight or angle
pattern design as indicated.
2.5.2 Check Valves
Valve shall be the swing or lift type as required to provide positive

shutoff at the differential pressure indicated. Valve shall be provide
with resilient seat.
2.5.3 Liquid Solenoid Valves
Valves shall comply with ANSI/AHRI 760 and be suitable for continuous duty
with applied voltages 15 percent under and 5 percent over nominal rated
voltage at maximum and minimum encountered pressure and temperature
service conditions. Valves shall be direct-acting or pilot-operating
type, packless, except that packed stem, seal capped, manual lifting
provisions shall be furnished. Solenoid coils shall be moisture-proof, UL
approved, totally encapsulated or encapsulated and metal jacketed as
required. Valves shall have safe working pressure of 400 psi and a
maximum operating pressure differential of at least 200 psi at 85 percent
rated voltage. Valves shall have an operating pressure differential

suitable for the refrigerant used.
2.5.4 Expansion Valves
Valve shall conform to ANSI/AHRI 750 and ASHRAE 17. Valve shall be the
diaphragm and spring-loaded type with internal or external equalizers, and
bulb and capillary tubing. Valve shall be provided with an external
superheat adjustment along with a seal cap. Internal equalizers may be
utilized where flowing refrigerant pressure drop between outlet of the
valve and inlet to the evaporator coil is negligible and pressure drop
across the evaporator is less than the pressure difference corresponding to
2 degrees F of saturated suction temperature at evaporator conditions.
Bulb charge shall be determined by the manufacturer for the application
and such that liquid will remain in the bulb at all operating conditions.
Gas limited liquid charged valves and other valve devices for limiting
evaporator pressure shall not be used without a distributor or discharge
tube or effective means to prevent loss of control when bulb becomes
warmer than valve body. Pilot-operated valves shall have a characterized
plug to provide required modulating control. A de-energized solenoid
valve may be used in the pilot line to close the main valve in lieu of a
solenoid valve in the main liquid line. An isolatable pressure gauge
shall be provided in the pilot line, at the main valve. Automatic
pressure reducing or constant pressure regulating expansion valves may be
used only where indicted or for constant evaporator loads.
2.5.5 Safety Relief Valves
Valve shall be the two-way type, unless indicated otherwise. Valve shall
bear the ASME code symbol. Valve capacity shall be certified by the
National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors. Valve shall be
of an automatically reseating design after activation.
2.5.6 Evaporator Pressure Regulators, Direct-Acting
Valve shall include a diaphragm/spring assembly, external pressure

adjustment with seal cap, and pressure gauge port. Valve shall maintain a
constant inlet pressure by balancing inlet pressure on diaphragm against
an adjustable spring load. Pressure drop at system design load shall not
exceed the pressure difference corresponding to a 2 degrees F change in
saturated refrigerant temperature at evaporator operating suction
temperature. Spring shall be selected for indicated maximum allowable
suction pressure range.
2.5.7 Refrigerant Access Valves
Refrigerant access valves and hose connections shall be in accordance with

AHRI 720.
2.6 PIPING ACCESSORIES
2.6.1 Filter Driers
Driers shall conform to AHRI 710 I-P. Sizes 5/8 inch and larger shall be
the full flow, replaceable core type. Sizes 1/2 inch and smaller shall be
the sealed type. Cores shall be of suitable desiccant that will not plug,
cake, dust, channel, or break down, and shall remove water, acid, and
foreign material from the refrigerant. Filter driers shall be constructed
so that none of the desiccant will pass into the refrigerant lines.
Minimum bursting pressure shall be 1,500 psi.
2.6.2 Sight Glass and Liquid Level Indicator
2.6.2.1 Assembly and Components
Assembly shall be pressure- and temperature-rated and constructed of

materials suitable for the service. Glass shall be borosilicate type.
Ferrous components subject to condensation shall be electro-galvanized.
2.6.2.2 Gauge Glass
Gauge glass shall include top and bottom isolation valves fitted with
automatic checks, and packing followers; red-line or green-line gauge
glass; elastomer or polymer packing to suit the service; and gauge glass
guard.
2.6.2.3 Bull's-Eye and Inline Sight Glass Reflex Lens
Bull's-eye and inline sight glass reflex lens shall be provided for
dead-end liquid service. For pipe line mounting, two plain lenses in one
body suitable for backlighted viewing shall be provided.
2.6.2.4 Moisture Indicator
Indicator shall be a self-reversible action, moisture reactive, color

changing media. Indicator shall be furnished with full-color-printing tag
containing color, moisture and temperature criteria. Unless otherwise
indicated, the moisture indicator shall be an integral part of each
corresponding sight glass.
2.6.3 Vibration Dampeners
Dampeners shall be of the all-metallic bellows and woven-wire type.
Connector shall be a composite of interior corrugated phosphor bronze or

Type 300 Series stainless steel, as required for fluid service, with
exterior reinforcement of bronze, stainless steel or monel wire braid.
Assembly shall be constructed with a safety factor of not less than 4 at
300 degrees F. Unless otherwise indicated, the length of a flexible
connector shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the service
intended.
2.6.5 Strainers
Strainers used in refrigerant service shall have brass or cast iron body,
Y-or angle-pattern, cleanable, not less than 60-mesh noncorroding screen
of an area to provide net free area not less than ten times the pipe
diameter with pressure rating compatible with the refrigerant service.
Screens shall be stainless steel or monel and reinforced spring-loaded
where necessary for bypass-proof construction.
2.6.6 Pressure and Vacuum Gauges
Gauges shall conform to ASME B40.100 and shall be provided with throttling
type needle valve or a pulsation dampener and shut-off valve. Gauge shall
be a minimum of 3-1/2 inches in diameter with a range from 0 psig to
approximately 1.5 times the maximum system working pressure. Each gauge
range shall be selected so that at normal operating pressure, the needle
is within the middle-third of the range.
2.6.7 Temperature Gauges
Temperature gauges shall be the industrial duty type and be provided for
the required temperature range. Gauges shall have Fahrenheit scale in 2
degrees graduations scale (black numbers) on a white face. The pointer
shall be adjustable. Rigid stem type temperature gauges shall be provided
in thermal wells located within 5 feet of the finished floor. Universal
adjustable angle type or remote element type temperature gauges shall be
provided in thermal wells located 5 to 7 feet above the finished floor.
Remote element type temperature gauges shall be provided in thermal wells
located 7 feet above the finished floor.
2.6.7.1 Stem Cased-Glass
Stem cased-glass case shall be polished stainless steel or cast aluminum,

9 inches long, with clear acrylic lens, and non-mercury filled glass tube
with indicating-fluid column.
2.6.7.2 Bimetallic Dial
Bimetallic dial type case shall be not less than 3-1/2 inches, stainless
steel, and shall be hermetically sealed with clear acrylic lens.
Bimetallic element shall be silicone dampened and unit fitted with
external calibrator adjustment. Accuracy shall be one percent of dial
range.
2.6.7.3 Liquid-, Solid-, and Vapor-Filled Dial
Liquid-, solid-, and vapor-filled dial type cases shall be not less than
3-1/2 inches, stainless steel or cast aluminum with clear acrylic lens.
Fill shall be nonmercury, suitable for encountered cross-ambients, and
connecting capillary tubing shall be double-braided bronze.
2.6.7.4 Thermal Well
Thermal well shall be identical size, 1/2 or 3/4 inch NPT connection,
brass or stainless steel. Where test wells are indicated, provide captive
plug-fitted type 1/2 inch NPT connection suitable for use with either
engraved stem or standard separable socket thermometer or thermostat.
Mercury shall not be used in thermometers. Extended neck thermal wells
shall be of sufficient length to clear insulation thickness by 1 inch.
2.6.8 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
Pipe hangers, inserts, guides, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and
MSS SP-69.
2.6.9 Escutcheons
Escutcheons shall be chromium-plated iron or chromium-plated brass, either

one piece or split pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or
set screws.
2.7 FABRICATION
2.7.1 Factory Coating
Unless otherwise specified, equipment and component items, when fabricated

from ferrous metal, shall be factory finished with the manufacturer's
standard finish, except that items located outside of buildings shall have
weather resistant finishes that will withstand 500 hours exposure to the
salt spray test specified in ASTM B117 using a 5 percent sodium chloride
solution. Immediately after completion of the test, the specimen shall
show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, cracking, or loss of adhesion and
no sign of rust creepage beyond 1/8 inch on either side of the scratch
mark. Cut edges of galvanized surfaces where hot-dip galvanized sheet
steel is used shall be coated with a zinc-rich coating conforming to
ASTM D520, Type I.
2.7.2 Factory Applied Insulation
Refrigerant suction lines between the cooler and each compressor shall be
insulated. Factory insulated items installed outdoors are not required to
be fire-rated. As a minimum, factory insulated items installed indoors
shall have a flame spread index no higher than 75 and a smoke developed
index no higher than 150. Factory insulated items (no jacket) installed
indoors and which are located in air plenums, in ceiling spaces, and in
attic spaces shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke
developed index no higher than 50. Flame spread and smoke developed
indexes shall be determined by ASTM E84. Insulation shall be tested in
the same density and installed thickness as the material to be used in the
actual construction. Material supplied by a manufacturer with a jacket
shall be tested as a composite material. Jackets, facings, and adhesives
shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed
index no higher than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, perform a

verification of dimensions in the field. Advise the Contracting Officer
of any discrepancies found before performing any work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Pipe and fitting installation shall conform to the requirements of

ASME B31.1. Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at the
jobsite, and work into place without springing or forcing, completely
clearing all windows, doors, and other openings. Cutting or other
weakening of the building structure to facilitate piping installation are
not permitted without written approval. Cut pipe or tubing square,
removeremoved by reaming, and permit free expansion and contraction
without causing damage to the building structure, pipe, joints, or hangers.
3.2.1 Directional Changes
Make changes in direction with fittings, except that bending of pipe 4

inches and smalleris permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and wide
weep bends are formed. Mitering or notching pipe or other similar
construction to form elbows or tees is not permitted. The centerline
radius of bends shall not be less than 6 diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe
showing kinks, wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations will not be

accepted.
3.2.2 Functional Requirements
Piping shall be installed 1/2 inch/10 feet of pipe in the direction of

flow to ensure adequate oil drainage. Open ends of refrigerant lines or
equipment shall be properly capped or plugged during installation to keep
moisture, dirt, or other foreign material out of the system. Piping shall
remain capped until installation. Equipment piping shall be in accordance
with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations and the contract
drawings. Equipment and piping arrangements shall fit into space allotted
and allow adequate acceptable clearances for installation, replacement,
entry, servicing, and maintenance.
3.2.3 Fittings and End Connections
3.2.3.1 Threaded Connections
Make threaded connections with tapered threads and make tight with PTFE
tape complying with ASTM D3308 or equivalent thread-joint compound applied
to the male threads only. Show not more than three threads after the
joint is made.
3.2.3.2 Brazed Connections
Perform brazing in accordance with AWS BRH, except as modified herein.

During brazing, fill the pipe and fittings with a pressure regulated inert
gas, such as nitrogen, to prevent the formation of scale. Before brazing
copper joints, clean both the outside of the tube and the inside of the
fitting with a wire fitting brush until the entire joint surface is bright
and clean. Do not use brazing flux. Remove surplus brazing material at
all joints. Make steel tubing joints in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Paint joints in steel tubing with the
same material as the baked-on coating within 8 hours after joints are
made. Protect tubing against oxidation during brazing by continuous
purging of the inside of the piping using nitrogen. Support piping prior
to brazing and do not spring or force.
3.2.3.3 Welded Connections
Welded joints in steel refrigerant piping shall be fusion-welded. Branch

connections shall be made with welding tees or forged welding branch
outlets. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned of all scale and foreign matter
before the piping is assembled. During welding the pipe and fittings
shall be filled with an inert gas, such as nitrogen, to prevent the
formation of scale. Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and inspection
of weld shall conform to ASME B31.1. Weld defects shall be removed and
rewelded at no additional cost to the Government. Electrodes shall be
stored and dried in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M or as recommended by
the manufacturer. Electrodes that have been wetted or that have lost any
of their coating shall not be used.
3.2.3.4 Flared Connections
When flared connections are used, a suitable lubricant shall be used

between the back of the flare and the nut in order to avoid tearing the
flare while tightening the nut.
3.2.3.5 Flanged Connections
When steel refrigerant piping is used, union or flange joints shall be

provided in each line immediately preceding the connection to each piece
of equipment requiring maintenance, such as compressors, coils, chillers,
control valves, and other similar items. Flanged joints shall be
assembled square end tight with matched flanges, gaskets, and bolts.
Gaskets shall be suitable for use with the refrigerants to be handled.
3.2.4 Valves
3.2.4.1 General
Refrigerant stop valves shall be installed on each side of each piece of

equipment such as compressors condensers, evaporators, receivers, and
other similar items in multiple-unit installation, to provide partial
system isolation as required for maintenance or repair. Stop valves shall
be installed with stems horizontal unless otherwise indicated. Ball
valves shall be installed with stems positioned to facilitate operation
and maintenance. Isolating valves for pressure gauges and switches shall
be external to thermal insulation. Safety switches shall not be fitted
with isolation valves. Filter dryers having access ports may be
considered a point of isolation. Purge valves shall be provided at all
points of systems where accumulated noncondensable gases would prevent
proper system operation. Valves shall be furnished to match line size,
unless otherwise indicated or approved.
3.2.4.2 Expansion Valves
Expansion valves shall be installed with the thermostatic expansion valve

bulb located on top of the suction line when the suction line is less than
2-1/8 inches in diameter and at the 4 o'clock or 8 o'clock position on
lines larger than 2-1/8 inches. The bulb shall be securely fastened with
two clamps. The bulb shall be insulated. The bulb shall installed in a
horizontal portion of the suction line, if possible, with the pigtail on
the bottom. If the bulb must be installed in a vertical line, the bulb
tubing shall be facing up.
3.2.4.3 Valve Identification
Each system valve, including those which are part of a factory assembly,
shall be tagged. Tags shall be in alphanumeric sequence, progressing in
direction of fluid flow. Tags shall be embossed, engraved, or stamped
plastic or nonferrous metal of various shapes, sized approximately 1-3/8
inch diameter, or equivalent dimension, substantially attached to a
component or immediately adjacent thereto. Tags shall be attached with
nonferrous, heavy duty, bead or link chain, 14 gauge annealed wire, nylon
cable bands or as approved. Tag numbers shall be referenced in Operation
and Maintenance Manuals and system diagrams.
3.2.5 Vibration Dampers
Vibration damper shall be provided in the suction and discharge lines on

spring mounted compressors. Vibration dampers shall be installed parallel
with the shaft of the compressor and shall be anchored firmly at the
upstream end on the suction line and the downstream end in the discharge
line.
3.2.6 Strainers
Strainers shall be provided immediately ahead of solenoid valves and

expansion devices. Strainers may be an integral part of an expansion
valve.
3.2.7 Filter Dryer
A liquid line filter dryer shall be provided on each refrigerant circuit

located such that all liquid refrigerant passes through a filter dryer.
Dryers shall be sized in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations for the system in which it is installed. Dryers shall be
installed such that it can be isolated from the system, the isolated
portion of the system evacuated, and the filter dryer replaced. Dryers
shall be installed in the horizontal position except replaceable core
filter dryers may be installed in the vertical position with the access
flange on the bottom.
3.2.8 Sight Glass
A moisture indicating sight glass shall be installed in all refrigerant

circuits down stream of all filter dryers and where indicated. Site
glasses shall be full line size.
3.2.9 Discharge Line Oil Separator
Discharge line oil separator shall be provided in the discharge line from
each compressor. Oil return line shall be connected to the compressor as
recommended by the compressor manufacturer.
3.2.10 Accumulator
Accumulators shall be provided in the suction line to each compressor.
Connectors shall be installed perpendicular to line of motion being

isolated. Piping for equipment with bidirectional motion shall be fitted
with two flexible connectors, in perpendicular planes. Reinforced
elastomer flexible connectors shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Piping guides and restraints related to
flexible connectors shall be provided as required.
3.2.12 Temperature Gauges
Temperature gauges shall be located specifically on, but not limited to

the following: the sensing element of each automatic temperature control
device where a thermometer is not an integral part thereof. Thermal wells
for insertion thermometers and thermostats shall extend beyond thermal
insulation surface not less than 1 inch.
3.2.13 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and
MSS SP-69, except as modified herein. Pipe hanger types 5, 12, and 26
shall not be used. Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger
shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after erection while
still supporting the load. Piping subjected to vertical movement, when
operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures, shall be supported by
variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers.

Refer to Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
3.2.13.1 Hangers
Do not use Type 3 on insulated piping. Type 24 may be used only on

trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames.
3.2.13.2 Inserts
Secure Type 18 inserts to concrete forms before concrete is placed.

Continuous inserts which allow more adjustments may be used if they
otherwise meet the requirements for Type 18 inserts.
3.2.13.3 C-Clamps
Torque Type 19 and 23 C-clamps in accordance with MSS SP-69 and have both
locknuts and retaining devices, furnished by the manufacturer.
Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.
3.2.13.4 Angle Attachments
Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an

added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.
3.2.13.5 Saddles and Shields
Where Type 39 saddle or Type 40 shield are permitted for a particular pipe
attachment application, the Type 39 saddle, connected to the pipe, shall
be used on all pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium
is 60 degrees F or higher. Type 40 shields shall be used on all piping
less than 4 inches and all piping 4 inches and larger carrying medium less
than 60 degrees F. A high density insulation insert of cellular glass
shall be used under the Type 40 shield for piping 2 inches and larger.
3.2.13.6 Horizontal Pipe Supports
Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and a

support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting joint at
each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall be spaced not
over 5 feet apart at valves. Pipe hanger loads suspended from steel joist
with hanger loads between panel points in excess of 50 pounds shall have
the excess hanger loads suspended from panel points.
3.2.13.7 Vertical Pipe Supports
Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-on-grade,

and at intervals of not more than 15 feet not more than 8 feet from end of
risers, and at vent terminations.
3.2.13.8 Pipe Guides
Type 35 guides using, steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) or

graphite slides shall be provided where required to allow longitudinal
pipe movement. Lateral restraints shall be provided as required. Slide
materials shall be suitable for the system operating temperatures,
atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered.
3.2.13.9 Steel Slides
Where steel slides do not require provisions for restraint of lateral

movement, an alternate guide method may be used. On piping 4 inches and
larger, a Type 39 saddle shall be used. On piping under 4 inches, a Type
40 protection shield may be attached to the pipe or insulation and freely
rest on a steel slide plate.
3.2.13.10 High Temperature Guides with Cradles
Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is not
desirable, then the Type 35 guide shall include a pipe cradle, welded to
the guide structure and strapped securely to the pipe. The pipe shall be
separated from the slide material by at least 4 inches, or by an amount
adequate for the insulation, whichever is greater.
3.2.13.11 Multiple Pipe Runs
In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or

clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member.
Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and
support spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run.
3.2.13.12 Seismic Requirements
Piping and attached valves shall be supported and braced to resist seismic
loads as specified under UFC 3-310-04. Structural steel required for
reinforcement to properly support piping, headers, and equipment but not
shown shall be provided under this section. Material used for support
shall be as specified under Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL.
3.2.13.13 Structural Attachments
Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in

concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts
and anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5.
Supports shall not be attached to metal decking. Masonry anchors for
overhead applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only.
Structural steel brackets required to support piping, headers, and
equipment, but not shown, shall be provided under this section. Material
used for support shall be as specified under Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL
STEEL.
3.2.14 Pipe Alignment Guides
Pipe alignment guides shall be provided where indicated for expansion

loops, offsets, and bends and as recommended by the manufacturer for
expansion joints, not to exceed 5 feet on each side of each expansion
joint, and in lines 4 inches or smaller not more than 2 feet on each side
of the joint.
3.2.15 Pipe Anchors
Anchors shall be provided wherever necessary or indicated to localize

expansion or to prevent undue strain on piping. Anchors shall consist of
heavy steel collars with lugs and bolts for clamping and attaching anchor
braces, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor braces shall be installed in
the most effective manner to secure the desired results using turnbuckles
where required. Supports, anchors, or stays shall not be attached where
they will injure the structure or adjacent construction during

installation or by the weight of expansion of the pipeline. Where pipe
and conduit penetrations of vapor barrier sealed surfaces occur, these
items shall be anchored immediately adjacent to each penetrated surface,
to provide essentially zero movement within penetration seal. Detailed
drawings of pipe anchors shall be submitted for approval before
installation.
3.2.16 Access Panels
Access panels shall be provided for all concealed valves, vents, controls,
and items requiring inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of
sufficient size and located so that the concealed items may be serviced
and maintained or completely removed and replaced. Access panels shall be
as specified in Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.
3.2.17 Field Applied Insulation
Field installed insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00

THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, except as defined differently
herein.
Painting required for surfaces not otherwise specified, and finish

painting of items only primed at the factory are specified in Section
3.2.18.1 Color Coding
Color coding for piping identification is specified in Section 09 90 00

PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.2.18.2 Color Coding Scheme
A color coding scheme for locating hidden piping shall be in accordance

with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
Clean uncontaminated system(s) by evacuation and purging procedures

currently recommended by refrigerant and refrigerant equipment
manufacturers, and as specified herein, to remove small amounts of air and
moisture. Systems containing moderate amounts of air, moisture,
contaminated refrigerant, or any foreign matter shall be considered
contaminated systems. Restoring contaminated systems to clean condition
including disassembly, component replacement, evacuation, flushing,
purging, and re-charging, shall be performed using currently approved
refrigerant and refrigeration manufacturer's procedures. Restoring
contaminated systems shall be at no additional cost to the Government as
determined by the Contracting Officer. Water shall not be used in any
procedure or test.
3.4 TRAINING COURSE
a. Conduct a training course for 2 members of the operating staff as

designated by the Contracting Officer. The training period shall
consist of a total 4 hours of normal working time and start after the
system is functionally completed but prior to final acceptance tests.
3.5 REFRIGERANT PIPING TESTS
After all components of the refrigerant system have been installed and
connected, subject the entire refrigeration system to pneumatic,
evacuation, and startup tests as described herein. Conduct tests in the
presence of the Contracting Officer. Water and electricity required for
the tests will be furnished by the Government. Provide all material,
equipment, instruments, and personnel required for the test. Provide the
services of a qualified technician, as required, to perform all tests and
procedures indicated herein. Field tests shall be coordinated with
Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS.
3.5.1 Preliminary Procedures
Prior to pneumatic testing, equipment which has been factory tested and
refrigerant charged as well as equipment which could be damaged or cause
personnel injury by imposed test pressure, positive or negative, shall be
isolated from the test pressure or removed from the system. Safety relief
valves and rupture discs, where not part of factory sealed systems, shall
be removed and openings capped or plugged.
3.5.2 Evacuation Test
Following satisfactory completion of the pneumatic tests, the pressure

shall be relieved and the entire system shall be evacuated to an absolute
pressure of 300 micrometers. During evacuation of the system, the ambient
temperature shall be higher than 35 degrees F. No more than one system
shall be evacuated at one time by one vacuum pump. Once the desired
vacuum has been reached, the vacuum line shall be closed and the system
shall stand for 1 hour. If the pressure rises over 500 micrometers after
the 1 hour period, then the system shall be evacuated again down to 300
micrometers and let set for another 1 hour period. The system shall not
be charged until a vacuum of at least 500 micrometers is maintained for a
period of 1 hour without the assistance of a vacuum line. If during the
testing the pressure continues to rise, check the system for leaks, repair
as required, and repeat the evacuation procedure. During evacuation,
pressures shall be recorded by a thermocouple-type, electronic-type, or a
calibrated-micrometer type gauge.
3.5.3 System Charging and Startup Test
Following satisfactory completion of the evacuation tests, the system

shall be charged with the required amount of refrigerant by raising
pressure to normal operating pressure and in accordance with
manufacturer's procedures. Following charging, the system shall operate
with high-side and low-side pressures and corresponding refrigerant
temperatures, at design or improved values. The entire system shall be
tested for leaks. Fluorocarbon systems shall be tested with halide torch
or electronic leak detectors.
3.5.4 Refrigerant Leakage
If a refrigerant leak is discovered after the system has been charged, the
leaking portion of the system shall immediately be isolated from the
remainder of the system and the refrigerant pumped into the system
receiver or other suitable container. Under no circumstances shall the
refrigerant be discharged into the atmosphere.
3.5.5 Contractor's Responsibility
At all times during the installation and testing of the refrigeration

system, take steps to prevent the release of refrigerants into the
atmosphere. The steps shall include, but not be limited to, procedures
which will minimize the release of refrigerants to the atmosphere and the
use of refrigerant recovery devices to remove refrigerant from the system
and store the refrigerant for reuse or reclaim. At no time shall more than
3 ounces of refrigerant be released to the atmosphere in any one
occurrence. Any system leaks within the first year shall be repaired in
accordance with the requirements herein at no cost to the Government
including material, labor, and refrigerant if the leak is the result of
defective equipment, material, or installation.
SECTION 23 31 13.00 40
METAL DUCTS
11/12
PART 1 GENERAL

SYSTEMS apply to work specified in this section.
Section 23 05 48.00 40 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT applies to work in this section.
1.1 REFERENCES


Buildings

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK (2012) Handbook, HVAC Systems and

Equipment (IP Edition)
ASHRAE FUN IP (2013; Addenda and Corrigendum 2013)

Fundamentals Handbook, I-P Edition

Steel Products

Structural Steel

the Hot-Dip Process


SECTION 23 31 13.00 40 Page 1


(SMACNA)

SMACNA 1987 (2006) HVAC Duct Systems Inspection Guide,

3rd Edition
SAE AMS 2480 (2009; Rev H) Phosphate Treatment, Paint,

Base
UL 181 (2013) Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air

Connectors
UL 555 (2006; Reprint May 2014) Standard for Fire

Dampers
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists; G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Connection Diagrams; G
Record Drawings; G
Offset Fitting Configurations; G
SD-03 Product Data
Galvanized Steel Ductwork Materials; G
Mill-Rolled Reinforcing and Supporting Materials; G
Round Sheet Metal Duct Fittings; G
Flexible Connectors; G, A/E
Flexible Duct Materials; G
Power Operated Dampers; G, A/E
SECTION 23 31 13.00 40 Page 2

Fire Dampers and Wall Collars; G
Gravity Backdraft and Relief Dampers; G, A/E
Manual Volume Dampers; G, A/E
SD-05 Design Data
Design Analysis and Calculations; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Ductwork Leakage Tests; G
Operational Tests; G
SD-07 Certificates
Listing of Product Installations; G
Galvanized Steel Ductwork Materials; G
Mill-Rolled Reinforcing and Supporting Materials; G
Round Sheet Metal Duct Fittings; G
Dampers; G
Flexible Connectors; G
Power Operated Dampers; G
Fire Dampers and Wall Collars; G
1.3 RECORD DRAWINGS
Provide record drawings with current factual information. Include

deviations from, and amendments to, the drawings and concealed or visible
changes in the work, for medium/high pressure ductwork systems. Label
drawings "As-Built".
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Include the manufacturer's style or catalog numbers, specification and

drawing reference numbers, warranty information, and fabrication site
information within material, equipment, and fixture lists.
Provide low-pressure systems ductwork and plenums where maximum air

velocity is 2,000 feet per minute(fpm) and maximum static pressure is 2
inches water gage (wg), positive or negative.
Submit connection diagrams for low pressure ductwork systems indicating

the relation and connection of devices and apparatus by showing the
SECTION 23 31 13.00 40 Page 3

general physical layout of all controls, the interconnection of one system

(or portion of system) with another, and internal tubing, wiring, and
other devices.
Submit design analysis and calculations for low pressure ductwork systems
indicating the manufacturer's recommended air velocities, maximum static
pressures, temperature calculations and acoustic levels.
Submit records of existing conditions including the results of a survey

consisting of work area conditions, and features of existing structures
and facilities within and adjacent to the jobsite.
Submit equipment and performance data for medium/high pressure ductwork

systems consisting of use life, system functional flows, safety features,
and mechanical automated details. Submit test response and performance
characteristics curves for certified equipment.
Submit design analysis and calculations for medium/high pressure ductwork

systems indicating the manufacturer's recommended air velocities, maximum
static pressure, and temperature calculations.
2.2 MATERIALS
2.2.1 Galvanized Steel Ductwork Materials
Provide hot-dip galvanized carbon steel ductwork sheet metal of

lock-forming quality, with regular spangle-type zinc coating, conforming
to ASTM A924/A924M and ASTM A653/A653M, Designation G90. Treat duct
surfaces to be painted by apostatizing. Submit detailed duct support
calculations and details stamped by licensed engineer.
Conform to ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32
and SMACNA 1966 for sheet metal gages and reinforcement thickness.
Low pressure ductwork minimum standards are:
MINIMUM SHEET METAL GAGE
DUCT WIDTH
INCHES GAGE
0 - 12 26
13 - 30 24
31 - 60 22
2.2.2 Mill-Rolled Reinforcing And Supporting Materials
Conform to ASTM A36/A36Mfor mill-rolled structural steel and, wherever in

contact with sheet metal ducting galvanize to commercial weight of zinc or
coated with materials conforming to ASTM A123/A123M.
In lieu of mill-rolled structural steel, submit for approval equivalent

strength, proprietary design, rolled-steel structural support systems.
SECTION 23 31 13.00 40 Page 4

2.3 COMPONENTS
2.3.1 Round Sheet Metal Duct Fittings
Submit offset fitting configurations for approval. Shop fabricate

fittings.
2.3.1.1 Fittings Construction
Manufacture as separate fittings, not as tap collars welded or brazed into

duct sections.
Provide two-piece type miter elbows for angles less than 31 degrees,
three-piece type for angles 31 through 60 degrees, and five-piece type for
angles 61 through 90 degrees. Ensure centerline radius of elbows is 1-1/2
times fitting cross section diameter.
Provide conical type crosses, increasers, reducers, reducing tees, and

90-degree tees.
Ensure cutouts in fitting body are equal to branch tap dimension or, where
smaller, excess material is flared and rolled into smooth radius nozzle
configuration.
2.3.2 Fittings
Submit offset fitting configurations for approval.
Make divided flow fittings as separate fittings, not tap collars into duct
sections, with the following construction requirements:
a. Sound, airtight, continuous welds at intersection of fitting body and

tap
B. Tap liner securely welded to inner liner, with weld spacing not to
exceed 3 inches
c. Pack insulation around the branch tap area for complete cavity filling.
d. Carefully fit branch connection to cutout openings in inner liner

without spaces for air erosion of insulation and without sharp
projections that cause noise and airflow disturbance.
Continuously braze seams in the pressure shell of fittings. Protect

galvanized areas that have been damaged by welding with manufacturer's
standard corrosion-resistant coating.
Construct two-piece type elbows for angles through 35 degrees, three-piece

type for angles 36 through 71 degrees, and five-piece type for angles 72
through 90 degrees.
Provide conical type crosses, increasers, reducers, reducing tees, and

90-degree tees.
2.3.3 Dampers
Construct low pressure drop, high-velocity manual volume dampers, and

high-velocity fire dampers in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK,
Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.
SECTION 23 31 13.00 40 Page 5

2.3.4 Flexible Connectors For Sheet Metal
Use UL listed connectors, 30-ounce per square yard, waterproof,

fire-retardant, airtight, woven fibrous-glass cloth, double coated with
chloroprene. Clear width, not including clamping section, is 6 to 8 inches.
2.3.5 Duct Hangers
For duct hangers in contact with galvanized duct surfaces, provide

galvanized steel painted with inorganic zinc.
2.3.6 Mill-Rolled Reinforcing And Supporting Materials
Provide mill-rolled structural steel conforming to ASTM A36/A36M.

Whenever in contact with sheet metal ducting, provide galvanized steel in
accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.
In lieu of mill-rolled structural steel, submit equivalent strength,

proprietary-design, rolled-steel structural support systems for approval.
2.3.7 Flexible Duct Materials
Ensure flexible duct connectors comply with NFPA 90A, and conform with
UL 181, Class 1 material.
2.3.8 Manual Volume Dampers
Conform to SMACNA 1966 for volume damper construction.
Equip dampers with an indicating quadrant regulator with a locking feature

externally located and easily accessible for adjustment and standoff
brackets to allow mounting outside external insulation. Where damper rod
lengths exceed 30 inches, provide a regulator at each end of damper shaft.
2.3.8.1 Damper Construction
Provide all damper shafts with two-end bearings.
Ensure splitter damper is 22 -gage sheet metal and is 2 gages heavier than
duct in which installed. Hinges are full length piano-type.
Provide a full length damper shaft and extend it beyond the damper blade.
use a 3/8 inch square shaft for damper lengths up to 20 inches and a 1/2
inch square shaft for damper lengths 20 inches and larger. Where
necessary to prevent damper vibration or slippage, provide adjustable
support rods with locking provisions external to duct at damper blade end.
Provide dampers in ducts having a width perpendicular to the axis of the

damper that is greater than 12 inches of multiblade type having a
substantial frame with blades fabricated of 16 -gage metal. Provide
blades not exceeding 10 inches in width and 48 inches in length, pinned to
1/2 inch diameter shafts. Ensure dampers greater than 48 inches in width
are made in two or more sections with intermediate mullions, each section
being mechanically interlocked with the adjoining section or sections.
Provide blades with graphite-impregnated nylon bearings and connect so
that adjoining blades rotate in opposite directions.
SECTION 23 31 13.00 40 Page 6

2.3.9 Gravity Backdraft And Relief Dampers
Construct frames of not less than 1-1/2- by 4 inch reinforced 16-gage

galvanized carbon steel. Solidly secure frames and mullions in place and
seal with elastomer caulking against air bypass.
Provide shaft bearings with graphite-impregnated nylon.
Equip counterbalanced dampers with fixed or adjustable counterbalancing

weights.
Gravity backdraft dampers may be equipment manufacturer's standard

construction in sizes 18 by 18 inch or smaller, when furnished integral
with air moving equipment.
2.3.9.1 Blade Construction
Maximum blade width is 9 inches, and maximum blade length is 36 inches.

Blade material is 16-gage galvanized steel. Provide blades with
mechanically retained seals and 90-degree limit stops.
Blades linked together for relief service dampers are to open not less
than 30 degrees on 0.05 inch wg differential pressure.
2.3.10 Power Operated Dampers
Ensure dampers conform to applicable requirements specified under Section

23 09 23.13 20 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC.
2.3.11 Fire Dampers And Wall Collars
Ensure fire damper locations are in accordance with NFPA 90A.
Provide fire dampers in ductwork at firewall barriers.
Construct and label fire dampers in accordance with UL 555 to provide

damper and mounting fire-resistance that equals or exceeds fire-resistance
of the construction in which installed.
Construct wall collars in accordance with UL 555.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
For sheet metal surfaces to be painted, and surfaces to which adhesives

are to be applied, clean surface of oil, grease, and deleterious
substances.
Ensure strength is adequate to prevent failure under service pressure or

vacuum created by fast closure of duct devices. Provide leaktight,
automatic relief devices.
3.1.1 Construction Standards
Provide sheet metal construction in accordance with the recommendations

for best practices in ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, SMACNA 1966,
NFPA 90A, and ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32.
SECTION 23 31 13.00 40 Page 7

Design and fabricate supplementary steel in accordance with AISC 360 and
AISC 325.
Where construction methods for certain items are not described in the
referenced standards or herein, perform the work in accordance with
recommendations for best practice defined in ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK.
3.2 INSTALLATION
When furnishing the listing of product installations for medium/high

pressure ductwork systems include identification of at least 5 units,
similar to those proposed for use, that have been in successful service
for a minimum period of 5 years. Include purchaser, address of
installation, service organization, and date of installation.
Fabricate airtight and include reinforcements, bracing, supports, framing,

gasketing, sealing, and fastening to provide rigid construction and
freedom from vibration, airflow-induced motion and noise, and excessive
deflection at specified maximum system air pressure and velocity.
Provide offsets and transformations as required to avoid interference with

the building construction, piping, or equipment.
Make plenum anchorage provisions, sheet metal joints, and other areas
airtight and watertight by caulking mating galvanized steel and concrete
surfaces with a two-component elastomer.
3.2.1 Jointing
Enclose dampers located behind architectural intake or exhaust louvers by

a rigid sheet metal collar and sealed to building construction with
elastomers for complete air tightness.
Provide outside air-intake ducts and plenums made from sheet metal with
soldered watertight joints.
3.2.2 Ducts
Wherever ducts pass through firewalls or through walls or floors dividing

conditioned spaces from unconditioned spaces, provide a flanged segment in
that surface during surface construction.
Where interiors of ducting may be viewed through air diffusion devices,

construct the viewed interior with sheet metal and paint flat black.
3.3 APPLICATION
3.3.1 Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ducts
Weld angle iron frames at corners and ends, whenever possible. Rivet or
weld angle iron reinforcements to ducts not more than 6 inches on center,
with not less than two points of attachment. Spot welding, where used, is
3 inches on center.
Seal standard seam joints with an elastomer compound to comply with

SMACNA 1966 Seal Class A.
SECTION 23 31 13.00 40 Page 8

3.3.1.1 Longitudinal Duct Seams
Provide Pittsburgh lock corner seams.
3.3.1.2 Flexible Duct Joints
Between flexible duct without sheet metal collars and round metal ductwork
connections make joints by trimming the ends, coating the inside of the
flexible duct for a distance equal to depth of insertion with elastomer
caulk, and by securing with sheet metal screws or binding with a strap
clamp.
3.3.1.3 Square Elbows
Provide single-vane duct turns in accordance with SMACNA 1966, use on ducts
12 inches in width and narrower.
3.3.1.4 Radius Elbows
Conform to SMACNA 1966 for radius elbows. Provide an inside radius equal
to the width of the duct. Where installation conditions preclude use of
standard elbows, the inside radius may be reduced to a minimum of 0.25
times duct width and install turning vanes in accordance with the
following schedule.
RADIUS OF TURNING
WIDTH OF ELBOWS VANES IN PERCENT OF DUCT WIDTH
INCHES VANE NO. 1 VANE NO. 2 VANE NO. 3
Up to 16 56 -- --
17 to 48 43 73 --
49 and over 37 55 83
Where two elbows are placed together in the same plane in ducts 30 inches
wide and larger, continue the guide vanes through both elbows rather than
spaced in accordance with above schedule.
3.3.1.5 Outlets, Inlets, And Duct Branches
Install branches, inlets, and outlets so that air turbulence is reduced to

a minimum and air volume properly apportioned. Install adjustable
splitter dampers at all supply junctions to permit adjustment of the
amount of air entering the branch. Wherever an air-diffusion device is
shown as being installed on the side, top, or bottom of a duct, and
whenever a branch takeoff is not of the splitter type; provide a
commercially manufactured 45 degree side-take-off (STO) fitting with
manual volume damper to allow adjustment of the air quantity and to
provide an even flow of air across the device or duct it services.
Where a duct branch is to handle more than 25 percent of the air handled
by the duct main, use a complete 90-degree increasing elbow with an inside
radius of 0.75 times branch duct width. Size of the leading end of the
increasing elbow within the main duct with the same ratio to the main duct
size as the ratio of the related air quantities handled.
Where a duct branch is to handle 25 percent or less of the air handled by

the duct main, construct the branch connection with a 45 degree side
SECTION 23 31 13.00 40 Page 9

take-off entry in accordance with SMACNA 1966.
3.3.1.6 Duct Transitions
Where the shape of a duct changes, ensure the angle of the side of the
transition piece does not exceed 15 degrees from the straight run of duct
connected thereto.
Where equipment is installed in ductwork, ensure the angle of the side of

the transition piece from the straight run of duct connected thereto does
not exceed 15 degrees on the upstream side of the equipment and 22-1/2
degrees on the downstream side of the equipment.
3.3.1.7 Branch Connections
Construct radius tap-ins in accordance with SMACNA 1966.
3.3.1.8 Manual Volume Dampers
Provide balancing dampers of the splitter, butterfly, or multilouver type,

to balance each respective main and branch duct.
For dampers regulated through ceilings provide a regulator concealed in a

box mounted in the ceiling, with a cover finish aesthetically compatible
with ceiling surface. Where ceiling is of removable construction, set
regulators above the ceiling, and mark the location on ceiling in a manner
acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
3.3.1.9 Flexible Connectors For Sheet Metal
Connect air handling equipment, ducts crossing building expansion joints,

and fan inlets and outlets to upstream and downstream components by
treated woven-cloth connectors.
Install connectors only after system fans are operative, and vibration
isolation mountings have been adjusted. When system fans are operating,
ensure connectors are free of wrinkle caused by misalignment or fan
reaction. Width of surface is curvilinear.
3.3.2 Rectangular Sheet Metal Ducts
3.3.2.1 Medium-Pressure Gages, Joints, And Reinforcement
Ensure minimum sheet metal gages, joints, and reinforcements between

joints are in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16,
ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.
Ensure sheet metal minimum thickness, transverse reinforcement between

joints, and joints of ducts are in accordance with the following:
SHEET
LONGEST METAL REINFORCEMENT ANGLES
SIDE GAGE COMPANION ANGLE INCHES, 24 INCHES ON
INCHES ALL SIDES INCHES CENTER MAXIMUM
(BACK TO BACK)
______ _________ _______________ ____________________
97 to 108 16 2 by 2 by 1/8, Two 2 by 2 by 1/8,
SECTION 23 31 13.00 40 Page 10

SHEET
LONGEST METAL REINFORCEMENT ANGLES
SIDE GAGE COMPANION ANGLE INCHES, 24 INCHES ON
INCHES ALL SIDES INCHES CENTER MAXIMUM
(BACK TO BACK)
______ _________ _______________ ____________________
two tie rods two tie rods along
along angle angle
109 to 132 16 2 by 2 by 3/16, Two 2 by 2 by 3/16,

two tie rods two tie rods along
along angle angle
133 and 14 2 by 2 by 3/16, Two 2 by 2 by 3/16,

longer with tie rods with tie rods every
every 48 inches 48 inches
3.3.2.2 Medium- And High-Pressure Branches, Inlets, Outlets
Install branches, inlets, and outlets to minimize air turbulence and to

ensure proper airflow.
Install dampers so that the amount of air entering duct mains is

adjustable.
Provide commercially manufactured air extractors to allow adjustment of

the air quantity and to provide an even flow of air across the device or
duct served.
3.3.2.3 Duct Branch Transition
Where a duct branch handles over 25 percent of the air transported by the
duct main, use a complete 90-degree increasing, with an inside radius of
0.75 times duct branch width. Ensure the size of the trailing end of the
increasing elbow within the main duct is in the same ratio to the main
duct size as the ratio of the relative air quantities handled.
Where a duct branch is to handle 25 percent or less of the air handled by

the duct main, provide a branch connection with an inside radius of 0.75
times branch duct width, a minimum arc length of 45 degrees, and an
outside radius of 1.75 times duct branch width. Place arc tangent to duct
main.
3.3.3 Round Sheet Metal Ducts
3.3.3.1 Duct Gages And Reinforcement
Sheet metal minimum thickness, joints, and reinforcement between joints

shall be in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP,
Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.
Provide ducts with supplemental girth angle supports, riveted with solid
rivets 6 inches on center to duct. Locate girth angles as follows:
DIAMETER, INCHES REINFORCEMENT-MAXIMUM SPACING, INCHES
25 to 36 1-1/4 by 1-1/4, 1/8 thick, 72
SECTION 23 31 13.00 40 Page 11

DIAMETER, INCHES REINFORCEMENT-MAXIMUM SPACING, INCHES

inches on center
37 to 50 1-1/4 by 1-1/4, 1/8 thick, 60

inches on center
51 to 60 1-1/2 by 1-1/2, 1/8 thick, 48

inches on center
Bolt heads and nuts shall be hex-shaped, 5/16 inch diameter for ducts up to
50 inch diameter, and 3/8 inch diameter for 51 inch diameter ducts and
larger.
3.3.3.2 Duct Joints
Provide duct joints manufactured by machine, with spiral locksets to and

including 60 inch diameters, and to dimensional tolerances compatible with
fittings provided. Draw band girth joints are not acceptable.
Prepare slip joints by coating the male fitting with elastomer sealing
materials, exercising care to prevent mastic from entering fitting bore,
leaving only a thin annular mastic line exposed internally. Use sheet
metal screws to make assembly rigid, not less than four screws per joint,
maximum spacing 6 inches. Do not use pop rivets. Tape and heat seal all
joints.
3.3.3.3 Duct Transitions
Where the shape of a duct changes, ensure the angle of the side of the
transition piece does not exceed 15 degrees from the straight run of duct
connected thereto.
Where equipment is installed in ductwork, ensure the angle of the side of

the transition piece from the straight run of duct connected thereto does
not exceed 15 degrees on the upstream side of the equipment and 22-1/2
degrees on the downstream side of the equipment.
3.3.4 Transverse Reinforcement Joints
Provide transverse reinforcements that are riveted with solid rivets to

duct sides 6 inches on center.
3.3.5 Radius Elbows
Fabricate elbow proportions and radius elbows in accordance with

ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.
3.3.6 Plenum Connections
Ensure round duct connections are welded joint bellmouth type.
Ensure rectangular duct connections are bellmouth type, constructed in

accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter
32 and SMACNA 1966.
3.3.7 Access Openings
Install access panels in ductwork adjacent to fire dampers.
SECTION 23 31 13.00 40 Page 12

Minimum size of access opening is 12 by 18 inches, unless precluded by

duct dimension.
In lieu of access doors, use readily accessible flanged duct sections upon
approval. Provide stable hanger supports for disconnected duct terminal.
3.3.8 Duct Supports
Install duct support in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16,
ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966. Meet the minimum size for duct
hangers as specified in ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP,
Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966. Provide two hangers where necessary to
eliminate sway. Support attachment to duct surfaces by solid rivet 4
inches on center.
Take the following into account in selection of a hanging system:
a. Location and precedence of work under other sections
b. Interferences of various piping and electrical conduit
c. Equipment,and building configuration
d. Structural and safety factor requirements
e. Vibration, and imposed loads under normal and abnormal service

conditions
Determine support sizes, configurations, and spacing to show the minimal

type of supporting components required. After system startup, replace any
duct support device which, due to length, configuration, or size, vibrates
or causes possible failure of a member, or the condition otherwise be
alleviated. Exercise special care to preclude cascade-type failures.
Do not hang ductwork and equipment from roof deck, piping, or other ducts
or equipment. Maximum span between any two points is 10 feet, with lesser
spans as required by duct assemblies, interferences, and permitted loads
imposed.
Where support from metal deck systems is involved, coordinate support

requirements with installation of metal deck.
3.3.8.1 Hangars
Attach hanger rods, angles, and straps to beam clamps. Receive approval
from the Contracting Officer for concrete inserts, masonry anchors, and
fasteners for the application.
Hardened high-carbon spring-steel fasteners fitted onto beams and

miscellaneous structural steel are acceptable upon prior approval of each
proposed application and upon field demonstration of conformance to
specification requirements. Make fasteners from steel conforming to AISI
Type 1055, treated and finished in conformance with SAE AMS 2480, Type Z
(zinc phosphate base), Class 2 (supplementary treatment). Verify a
72-hour load-carrying capacity by a certified independent laboratory.
Where ductwork system contains heavy equipment, excluding air-diffusion

devices and single-leaf dampers, hang such equipment independently of the
SECTION 23 31 13.00 40 Page 13

ductwork by means of rods or angles of sizes adequate to support the load.
Sufficiently cross-brace hangers to eliminate swaying both vertically and

laterally.
3.3.8.2 Installation
Ensure hanger spacing gives a 20-to-1 safety factor for supported load.
Maximum load supported by any two fasteners is 100 pounds.
Install hangers on both sides of all duct turns, branch fittings, and
transitions.
Friction rod assemblies are not acceptable.
3.3.8.3 Strap-type Hangars
Support rectangular ducts up to 36 inches by strap-type hangers attached

at not less than three places to not less than two duct surfaces in
different planes.
Perforated strap hangers are not acceptable.
3.3.8.4 Trapeze Hangars
Support rectangular ducting, 36 inches and larger, by trapeze hangers.

Support ducts situated in unconditioned areas and required to have
insulation with a vapor-sealed facing on trapeze hangers. Space hangers
far enough out from the side of the duct to permit the duct insulation to
be placed on the duct inside the trapeze. Do not penetrate the
vapor-sealed facing with duct hangers.
Where trapeze hangers are used, support the bottom of the duct on angles
sized as follows:
WIDTH OF DUCT, INCHES MINIMUM BOTTOM ANGLE SIZE, INCHES
30 and smaller 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 by 1/8
31 to 48 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8
49 to 72 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 3/16
73 to 96 2 by 2 by 1/4
97 and wider 3 by 3 by 1/4
3.3.8.5 Purlins
Do not support ducting, when supported from roof purlins, at points

greater than one-sixth of the purlin span from the roof truss. Do not
exceed 400 pounds load per hanger when support is from a single purlin or
800 pounds when hanger load is applied halfway between purlins by means of
auxiliary support steel provided under this section. When support is not
halfway between purlins, the allowable hanger load is the product of 400
times the inverse ratio of the longest distance of purlin-to-purlin
spacing.
SECTION 23 31 13.00 40 Page 14

When the hanger load exceeds the above limits, provide reinforcing of
purlin(s) or additional support beam(s). When an additional beam is used,
have the beam bear on the top chord of the roof trusses, and also bear
over the gusset plates of top chord. Stabilize the beam by connection to
roof purlin along bottom flange.
Purlins used for supporting fire-protection sprinkler mains, electrical

lighting fixtures, electrical power ducts, or cable trays are considered
fully loaded. Provide supplemental reinforcing or auxiliary support steel
for these purlins.
3.3.8.6 Vibration Isolation
Isolate from vibration duct supports from structure at points indicated.

Refer to Section 23 05 48.00 40 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.
3.3.9 Flexible Connectors For Steel Metal
Connect air-handling equipment, ducts crossing building expansion joints,

and fan inlets and outlets to upstream and downstream components by
treated woven-cloth connectors.
Install connectors only after system fans are operative and all vibration
isolation mountings have been adjusted. When system fans are operating,
ensure connectors are free of wrinkles caused by misalignment or fan
reaction. Width of surface is curvilinear.
3.3.10 Insulation Protection Angles
Provide galvanized 20-gage sheet, formed into an angle with a 2 inch

exposed long leg with a 3/8 inchstiffening break at outer edge, and with a
variable concealed leg, depending upon insulation thickness.
Install angles over all insulation edges terminating by butting against a

wall, floor foundation, frame, and similar construction. Fasten angles in
place with blind rivets through the protection angle, insulation, and
sheet metal duct or plenum. Install angles after final insulation
covering has been applied.
3.3.11 Duct Probe Access
Provide holes with neat patches, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on

caps for air-balancing pitot tube access. Provide extended-neck fittings
where probe access area is insulated.
3.3.12 Openings In Roofs And Walls
Building openings are fixed and provide equipment to suit.
3.4.1 Fire Damper Tests
Perform operational tests on each fire damper in the presence of the

Contracting Officer by enervating a fusible link with localized heat.
Provide new links and install after successful testing.
SECTION 23 31 13.00 40 Page 15

3.4.2 Ductwork Leakage Tests
Conduct complete leakage test of new ductwork in accordance with Section

23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC. Perform tests prior
to installing ductwork insulation.
3.4.3 Inspection
Inspect ductwork in accordance with SMACNA 1987.
3.5 DUCTWORK CLEANING PROVISIONS
Protect open ducting from construction dust and debris in a manner

approved by the Contracting Officer. Clean dirty assembled ducting by
subjecting all main and branch interior surfaces to airstreams moving at
velocities two times specified working velocities, at static pressures
within maximum ratings. This may be accomplished by: filter-equipped
portable blowers which remain the Contractor's property; wheel-mounted,
compressed-air operated perimeter lances which direct the compressed air
and which are pulled in the direction of normal airflow; or other means
approved by the Contracting Officer. Use water- and oil- free compressed
air for cleaning ducting. After construction is complete, and prior to
acceptance of the work, remove construction dust and debris from exterior
surfaces. Clean in conformance with SMACNA 1987.
3.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Submit 6 copies of the operation and maintenance manuals 30 calendar days

prior to testing the medium/high pressure ductwork systems. Update data
and resubmit for final approval no later than 30 calendar days prior to
contract completion.
Ensure Operation and Maintenance Manuals are consistent with

manufacturer's standard brochures, schematics, printed instructions,
general operating procedures and safety precautions.
SECTION 23 31 13.00 40 Page 16

SECTION 23 34 23.00 40
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

05/14
PART 1 GENERAL
Provide power roof ventilators complete with all components and accessory
equipment as specified in this section.

1.1 REFERENCES



Aluminum for Use in Iron and Steel
Manufacturer
UL 705 (2004; Reprint Dec 2013) Standard for

Power Ventilators
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Shop Drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Housing; G, A/E
Fan; G, A/E
Bases; G, A/E
Roof Curbs; G, A/E
Dampers; G, A/E
Screens; G, A/E
SECTION 23 34 23.00 40 Page 1

SD-06 Test Reports
Final Test Reports; G
Record Drawings; G
Rate and label ventilators in accordance with the applicable standards of

the Air Movement Control Association, and license to bear the AMCA seal
for both air and sound.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Submit manufacturer's catalog data, including equipment and performance

data for power roof ventilator(s). As a minimum, include the following
data:
a. Fan Type
b. Fan Specifications, including:
(1) Number of rotating fan blades/vanes
(2) Number of stationary fan blades/vanes
(3) Rotating Speed(s)
(4) Number of belts (if belt driven)
(5) Belt Lengths- measured at the pitch line (if belt driven)
(6) Diameter of the drive sheave at the drive pitch line (if belt
driven)
(7) Diameter of the driven sheave at the drive pitch line (if belt
driven)
c. Location of Installation
d. Date of Installation (Required or Actual Acceptance Date)
e. Applicable reference drawing number(s)
Submit detailed shop drawings for power roof ventilator systems.
Provide roof ventilators that comply with UL 705 and are furnished
complete with bases, curbs, flashing flanges, noise baffles, dampers,
damper controls, louvers, and screens as indicated.
Provide corrosion-resistant steel bolts, rivets, and other fastenings used

in connection with protected metal.
SECTION 23 34 23.00 40 Page 2

2.2 HOUSING STYLE(S)
Provide round mushroom style vertical discharge style power roof

ventilator as indicated.
2.3 FAN TYPE(S)
Provide fan of the following type(s):
2.3.1 Centrifugal, Direct Drive
For Type C-PRV ventilator, provide a centrifugal roof ventilator with

direct drive, nonoverloading, backward-inclined wheel. Provide vibration
isolated drive with elastomer. Provide drive components that are mounted
in a compartment isolated from airstream.
2.3.2 Centrifugal, V-Belt Drive
For Type CB-PRV ventilator provide a centrifugal roof ventilator with

V-belt drive, nonoverloading, backward-inclined wheel. Provide vibration
isolated drive with elastomer. Provide drive components that are mounted
in a compartment isolated from airstream.
2.4 MATERIALS
Provide manufacturers' standard materials.
2.4.1 Aluminum Alloy
Provide aluminum alloy in accordance with ASTM B209 and ASTM B37.
2.5 BASES
For bases provided with the ventilators, use factory formed, of the type
indicated, of the same material as the hoods, and the thickness necessary
to meet the design requirement for connection to the roof. Provide bases
that are suitable for raised curb mounting where indicated. Form curb
flanges of the base as cap flashing, extending at least 2 inches over
roofing base. Where indicated or required, extend shafts of ventilators a
sufficient distance through the supporting construction to permit
attachment of vent ducts.
2.6 ROOF CURBS
Provide factory-formed metal ventilator curbs of the type and design

required for the ventilator and suitable for roof configuration and
flashing.
2.7 BACK-DRAFT DAMPERS
Provide gravity operated back-draft dampers with adjustable counterweight

of the same material as fan housing.
Provide motor operated back-draft dampers of the same material as fan

housing, where indicated in lieu of gravity backdraft damper.
Interlock damper actuating motor with fan motor.
SECTION 23 34 23.00 40 Page 3

2.8 SCREENS
Provide insert screens with frames of the same material as that used in
the ventilators and securely attach in a manner that permits easy removal
for access and cleaning.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install power roof ventilators in accordance with manufacturer's

installation instructions. Properly coordinate installation of
ventilators with other work. Coordinate anchors, attachments, and other
items to be built, for installation as the work progresses. Rigidly
install ventilators in a weathertight and watertight manner free from
vibration. Refer to Section 23 05 48.00 40 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT for vibration isolation considerations.
3.2.1 Acceptance
Prior to final acceptance, use precision alignment devices to demonstrate

that fan and motor are aligned as specified.
Prior to final acceptance, verify conformance to specifications with

vibration analysis. Provide vibration levels that are not more than .075
in/sec at 1 times run speed and at fan/blade frequency, and .04 in/sec at
other multiples of run speed.
3.2.2 Final Test Reports
Provide final test reports to the Contracting Officer. Provide reports

with a cover letter/sheet clearly marked with the System name, Date, and
the words "Final Test Reports - Forward to the Systems Engineer/Condition
Monitoring Office/Predictive Testing Group for inclusion in the
Maintenance Database."
3.3 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
Submit detailed record drawings upon completion of the installation.
SECTION 23 34 23.00 40 Page 4

SECTION 23 37 13.00 40
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLS

05/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 113 (2013) Method of Testing for Room Air

Diffusion
ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK (2012) Handbook, HVAC Systems and

Equipment (IP Edition)
ASHRAE FUN IP (2013; Addenda and Corrigendum 2013)

Fundamentals Handbook, I-P Edition

Certify air diffusion devices having been tested and rated in accordance
with , Chapter 17; , Chapter 31; ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 17;
ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 31; and ASHRAE 113, where such certification is
required.
Submit equipment and performance data for air-diffusion devices consisting

of sound data in terms of Noise Criteria (NC) index for the capacity range
of the device.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists; G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fabrication Drawings; G
SECTION 23 37 13.00 40 Page 1

SD-03 Product Data
Equipment and Performance Data; G, A/E
SD-04 Samples
Manufacturer's Standard Color Chart; G
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR-DIFFUSION DEVICE CONSTRUCTION
Preclude flutter, rattle, or vibration on air-diffusion device

construction and mounting. Refer to Section 23 05 48.00 40 VIBRATION AND
SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT for vibration isolation
considerations. Modify devices and provide accessories necessary for
mounting in indicated surface construction.
Select color from manufacturer's standard color chart which indicate the
manufacturer's standard color selections and finishes for air-diffusion
devices.
Provide color as indicated on drawings.
Provide supply diffusers with combination damper and equalizing grid.

Ensure dampers are extracting-splitter type, except as otherwise indicated.
Ensure air-diffusion device volume and pattern adjustments can be made

from the face of the device. Make volume adjustments by removable key.
Provide gaskets for supply-terminal air devices mounted in finished

surfaces.
Include within the material, equipment, and fixture lists the

manufacturer's style or catalog numbers, specification and drawing
reference numbers, warranty information, and fabrication site information.
Submit records of existing conditions consisting of the results of

Contractor's survey of work area conditions and features of existing
structures and facilities within and adjacent to the jobsite.
Commencement of work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.
Submit fabrication drawings for air-diffusion devices consisting of

fabrication and assembly details to be performed in the factory.
2.2 TYPES OF AIR-DIFFUSION DEVICES
2.2.1 Type DP Series
Provide type DP series supply diffuser with a square, perforated, hinged,

face plate with white baked enamel exterior finish, and black matte finish
on exposed-to-view interior surface.
Provide four-way deflection.
SECTION 23 37 13.00 40 Page 2

2.2.2 Type GS
Provide type GS supply grill double deflection type with adjustable face
bars parallel to short dimension and adjustable rear bars parallel to long
dimension.
Provide a baked enamel finish.
Provide aluminum construction.
2.2.3 Type GR
Provide type GR return grills, single deflection type with fixed face bars.
Provide grills installed in vertical surfaces with horizontal face bars

set downward at 35 degrees from vertical.
Provide grills installed in horizontal surfaces with face bars straight

and parallel to short dimension.
2.2.4 Type GCA
Provide type GCA with an individually adjustable, horizontal, curved-blade

grill and a one-way pattern.
2.2.5 Type GCB
Provide type GCB with an individually adjustable, vertical, curved-blade

grill and a one-way pattern.
2.2.6 Type GCD
Provide type GCD with an individually adjustable, vertical, curved-blade

grill and a two-way pattern.
2.2.7 Type GCE
Provide type GCE with an individually adjustable, vertical and horizontal,

curved-blade grill and a three-way pattern.
SECTION 23 37 13.00 40 Page 3

2.2.8 Type GCF
Provide type GCF with an individually adjustable, vertical and horizontal,

curved-blade grill and a four-way pattern.
2.2.9 Type RS
Provide type RS supply register, double-deflection type, with adjustable

face bars parallel to short dimension and adjustable rear bars parallel to
long dimension with opposed-blade type dampers.
2.2.10 Type RR
Provide type RR return register, single-deflection type with fixed face

bars with opposed-blade dampers.
Provide registers installed in vertical surfaces with horizontal face bars

set downward at approximately 35 degrees from vertical.
Provide registers installed in horizontal surfaces with face bars set

straight and parallel to short dimension.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install equipment as indicated and specified and in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations.
Submit installation drawings for air-diffusion devices. Indicate on

drawings overall physical features, dimensions, ratings, service
requirements, and equipment weights.
3.1.1 Operations and Maintenance Manuals
Provide operation and maintenance manuals consistent with manufacturer's

standard brochures, schematics, printed instructions, general operating
procedures and safety precautions.
SECTION 23 37 13.00 40 Page 4

SECTION 23 76 00.00 10
INDIRECT EVAPORATIVE COOLING SYSTEMS

04/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AMCA 210 (2007) Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans

for Aerodynamic Performance Rating
ABMA 11 (2014) Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for

Roller Bearings
ABMA 9 (1990; ERTA 2012; S 2013) Load Ratings and

Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings


Steel Products

Strip

Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

Structural Steel


SECTION 23 76 00.00 10 Page 1



Coatings of Cadmium Mechanically Deposited
ASTM D1654 (2008) Evaluation of Painted or Coated

Specimens Subjected to Corrosive
Environments
ASTM E2016 (2011) Standard Specification for

Industrial Woven Wire Cloth
SSPC PS 10.01 (1982; E 2004) Hot-Applied Coal Tar Enamel

Painting System
SSPC Paint 16 (2006) Coal Tar Epoxy-Polyamide Black (or

Dark Red) Paint
UL 507 (1999; Reprint Jun 2012) Standard for

Electric Fans
UL 746C (2004; Reprint Oct 2014) Polymeric

Materials - Use in Electrical Equipment
Evaluations
UL 900 (2004; Reprint Feb 2012) Standard for Air

Filter Units

Appliances
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Equipment; G, A/E
Test Procedures; G
Installation; G
Manufacturer's Representative; G
SECTION 23 76 00.00 10 Page 2

Service Organization; G
Training Course; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing; G
SD-07 Certificates
1.3.1 Coordination of Trades
Furnish tank supports, piping offsets, fittings, and any other accessories
as required to provide a complete installation and to eliminate
interference with other construction.
1.3.2 Manufacturer's Representative
Perform the work specified in this section under the supervision of and
certified by the Manufacturer's Representative. Provide certification for
installation drawings, test procedures, and test results.
a. The Manufacturer's Representative shall have no less than 3 continuous

years of experience directly involved in the design and installation
of evaporative cooling systems, and have served in a similar capacity
on no fewer than five projects of similar size and scope during that
period. Submit a letter, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of work,
listing the actual experience and training of the Manufacturer's
Representative.
b. Submit drawings consisting of layout of equipment including assembly

and installation details and electrical connection diagrams. Include
on the drawings any information required to demonstrate that the
system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit and
showing equipment relationship to other parts of the work, including
clearances required for operation and maintenance. Concurrent with
installation drawings, submit manufacturer's certification of
installation drawings.
c. Submit proposed test procedures for performance tests of systems, at

least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing.
1.3.3 Service Organization
Perform work specified in this section by a service organization certified

by the System Manufacturer. The Service Organization shall have no less
than 3 continuous years of experience directly involved in the
installation, maintenance, and repair of evaporative cooling systems, and
have served in a similar capacity on no fewer than five projects of
similar size and scope during that period. The Service Organization
submitted shall be capable of performing all maintenance and field repairs
SECTION 23 76 00.00 10 Page 3

and providing 4 hour onsite response to a service call on an emergency

basis. Submit a letter, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of work,
listing the actual experience and training of the Service Organization.
Protect all equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather,
humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
Provide one set of special tools, calibration devices, and instruments

required for operation, calibration, and maintenance of the equipment. In
addition, furnish a two year supply of all spare parts for system
operation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Provide an indirect evaporative cooling system designed and assembled by a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of systems that are of
a similar design, workmanship, capacity, and operation. Systems of
similar design and capacity shall have been in satisfactory commercial or
industrial use for 2 years before bid opening. The 2 years must be
satisfactorily completed by a system which has been sold or is offered for
sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers'
catalogs, or brochures. Systems having less than a 2-year field service
record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field
operation, for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer's
factory tests, can be shown. The system shall be supported by a service
organization certified by the system manufacturer.
2.1.2 Asbestos Prohibition
Asbestos and asbestos-containing products will not be accepted.
2.1.3 Nameplates
All equipment shall have a nameplate that identifies the manufacturer's

name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number.
2.1.4 Equipment Guards and Access
Fully enclose or guard belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings,

projecting setscrews, keys, and other rotating parts exposed to personnel
contact according to OSHA requirements. High temperature equipment and
piping exposed to contact by personnel or where it creates a potential
fire hazard shall be properly guarded or covered with insulation of a type
specified.
2.2 PIPING COMPONENTS
Piping components shall be as specified in Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY,

DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM.
SECTION 23 76 00.00 10 Page 4

2.3 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST
All ductwork and related accessories, including air filters and terminal
units, shall be as specified in Section 23 00 00 AIR-SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION,
VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM.
2.4 ELECTRICAL WORK
Electrical motor-driven equipment specified shall be provided complete

with motor, motor starter, and controls. Unless otherwise specified,
electric equipment, including wiring, shall be according to Section
26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Electrical characteristics and
enclosure type shall be as shown. Integral size motors shall be the
premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Motor starters
shall be provided complete with thermal overload protection and other
appurtenances necessary. Each motor shall be according to NEMA MG 1 and
shall be of sufficient size to drive the equipment at the specified
capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor. Manual or
automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the
operation specified, and any control wiring required for controls and
devices, but not shown, shall be provided. Where two-speed or
variable-speed motors are indicated, solid-state variable-speed controller
may be provided to accomplish the same function. Solid-state
variable-speed controllers shall be utilized for fractional hp through 10
hp ratings as indicated on drawings. Adjustable frequency drives shall be
used for larger motors as indicated on drawings.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Materials shall conform to the following:
2.5.1 Aluminum Sheets
ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, temper H14.
2.5.2 Steel Sheets, Galvanized
ASTM A924/A924M, commercial quality.
2.5.3 Steel Sheets, Uncoated
ASTM A1011/A1011M, hot-rolled, commercial quality.
ASTM A36/A36M.
2.5.5 Stainless Steel
ASTM A167 and ASTM A176.
2.5.6 Structural Polymeric Components
Components made of structural polymeric materials shall meet the

applicable requirements of UL 746C.
2.5.7 Nonstructural Polymeric Components
Components not made of structural polymeric materials shall meet or exceed
SECTION 23 76 00.00 10 Page 5

the requirements of UL 94 for Classifying Materials 94HB.
2.6 EVAPORATIVE COOLERS
Units shall be a self-contained indirect, weather resistant type, and

shall conform to UL 507 and UL 746C. Unit shall be the discharge type as
indicated. A guillotine type manual winterizing damper complete with
holding rack shall be provided on the discharge side of each unit.
Holding rack shall retain damper during operating season.
2.6.1 Fan Unit
The unit shall be the centrifugal type and shall be complete with motor,
drive equipment, and vibration-isolation supports between motor and fan
housing. Water distributor or rotary wheel motor shall be synchronized to
start and stop with the fan unit. Manual or automatic reset type thermal
overload protection shall be provided in the starter or shall be integral
with the motor. Motor starters shall be in a weather resistant
enclosure. Fan scroll and wheel shall be constructed of galvanized steel,
aluminum, stainless steel, or polymeric material with stainless steel,
hot-dip zinc coated steel or cadmium coated steel shaft. Fan scroll may
be made of a different material than the wheel. Bearings shall be sleeve
type, self-aligning and self-oiling with oil reservoirs, or precision
self-aligning roller or ball-type with accessible grease fittings or
permanently lubricated type. Grease fittings shall be connected to tubing
and serviceable from a single accessible point. Bearing life shall be L50
rated at not less than 200,000 hours as defined by ABMA 9 and ABMA 11.
2.6.1.1 Fan Rating
Indirect evaporative cooler fans shall have air delivery ratings based on
AMCA 210 tests by an AMCA approved laboratory.
2.6.1.2 Retarding Agent
An ultraviolet retarding agent such as additives, gel coatings or other

manufacturer approved equivalents shall be part of or applied on exterior
nonmetallic components susceptible to ultraviolet degradation from sun
rays and shall conform to UL 746C.
2.6.2 Evaporative Media
2.6.2.1 Evaporative and Eliminator Media
Media shall be fabricated of refined cellulose matrix, bonded synthetic

fiber, glass fiber, or nonferrous metal. Media shall conform to UL 900
Class II. Media shall be of the type specifically manufactured for use
with evaporative coolers. Nonferrous metal media shall be constructed of
corrosion and fungus resistant material not susceptible to decomposition
by fungal or bacterial action. Eliminator media shall be provided for
slinger-type systems. Media-pad face velocities shall not exceed 250 fpm
for wood aspen fiber. Media shall be securely mounted in a galvanized
steel, stainless steel, or polymeric material frame. Louvers shall be
positioned in such manner that the water will not run on the outside
surface. Nonrigid filter media shall be held in frame by a rigid retainer
grid, a 1/4 inch wire mesh or fabric netting.
SECTION 23 76 00.00 10 Page 6

2.6.2.2 Evaporative Media for Rotary-Type Units
The evaporative filter unit shall be either drum or disk type. Media
shall be fabricated of copper, bronze, or polymer material. No moisture
entrainment shall occur. Where necessary to prevent such entrainment,
eliminator media constructed of copper, copper alloy, or polymer material
shall be provided. Face velocities shall be limited to those recommended
by media manufacturer.
2.6.3 Water Handling Equipment
2.6.3.1 Water Handling Equipment for Drip Coolers
Water handling equipment shall thoroughly wet and continuously flush

evaporative surfaces of the media material. The water distribution system
shall be designed, to provide equal flow of water directly to the pads or
to each trough. Troughs, if used, shall be adjustable hot-dip galvanized
steel, stainless steel, or polymeric and suitably designed in a manner
that will effectively regulate the flow of water to the media pad to
obtain even and complete saturation. Troughs shall be adjustable for
leveling or sectionalized and each section supplied with water by means of
an individual tube. The water pump shall be a centrifugal type with
capacity and head characteristics for the specified operation of the unit
and shall be provided with a low water safety shut-off. The motor shaft
shall be constructed of stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel or
cadmium coated steel. The impeller shall be constructed of stainless
steel or polymeric material conforming to UL 746C. Pump housing shall be
constructed of painted or hot-dip zinc coated steel, brass, or polymeric
material conforming to UL 746C. Pump housing bottom shall be removable
for impeller cleaning and shall not permit galvanic action with cooler
bottom. Pump shall have permanently sealed and lubricated bearings and
fan cooled motor with moisture proof winding. Pump motor shall be
provided with a factory installed three conductor rubber sheathed flexible
cord with the third wire being the grounding conductor. Water pump shall
be provided with a filter screen constructed of plastic or bronze which
shall project 1 inch above the high water level of the water tank.
2.6.3.2 Water Blowdown Equipment
Water shall be periodically dumped (approximately every six to twelve

hours). This shall be done by either the use of a mechanical timer or by
measuring the conductivity and dumping the water when the conductivity
reaches 1500-2000 micro mhos.
2.6.4 Indirect Cooler Section
The indirect cooler shall consist of a frame and plate counter flow or
finned tube water-to-air heat exchanger, evaporative media, water
distribution header, scavenger fan and motor, and recirculating water
pump, drain, overflow and makeup water.
2.6.4.1 Heat Exchanger
The unit shall be constructed of stainless steel, polymeric material, or

aluminum with the surface exposed to water being fully protected against
corrosion by an epoxy coating. The plates shall be constructed in such a
way as to withstand a 1 inch water gauge differential pressure without
collapsing the plates. Units having horizontal air discharge shall be
provided with discharge baffle to direct air upward, constructed of the
SECTION 23 76 00.00 10 Page 7

same material and thickness as the casing. The unit must be at least 80
percent efficient. For cleaning purposes coils on finned tube
water-to-air heat exchangers shall be plugged at the return bins.
2.6.4.2 Water Distribution Header
The water distribution header shall be a nonwettable, nondrip type. Water

shall be distributed by means of copper spray headers with brass nozzles,
or PVC header and nozzles, which shall impart a fine water mist into the
scavenger air side of the heat exchanger.
2.6.4.3 Scavenger Fan
The fan shall be the centrifugal or axial type and shall be complete with
motor, drive equipment, and vibration-isolation supports between motor and
fan housing on single-phase motors. The fan motor shall be synchronized
to start and stop with the indoor fan unit. Water distributor motor shall
be synchronized to start and stop with the scavenger fan unit. Manual or
automatic reset type thermal overload protection shall be provided in the
starter or shall be integral with the motor. Motor starters shall be in a
weather resistant enclosure. Fan scroll and wheel shall be constructed of
galvanized steel, aluminum, stainless steel or polymeric material with
stainless steel, hot-dip zinc coated steel or cadmium coated steel shaft.
Fan scroll may be made of a different material than the wheel. Fans shall
have an air delivery rating based on AMCA 210 tests by an AMCA approved
laboratory.
2.6.4.4 Water Pump
The water pump shall be a self-priming centrifugal type with capacity and
head characteristics for the specified operation of the unit. The motor
shaft shall be constructed of stainless steel, cadmium coated steel or
hot-dip zinc galvanized steel. The impeller shall be constructed of
stainless steel or polymeric material conforming to UL 746C. Pump housing
shall be constructed of factory painted or hot-dip zinc coated steel or
polymeric material conforming to UL 746C. Pump housing bottom shall be
removable for impeller cleaning and shall not permit galvanic action with
cooler bottom. Pump shall have permanently sealed and lubricated bearings
and fan cooled motor with moisture proof winding. Pump motor shall be
provided with a factory installed three conductor rubber sheathed flexible
cord with the third wire being the grounding conductor. Water pump shall
be provided with a filter screen constructed of plastic which shall project
1 inch above the high water level of the water tank.
2.7 CABINETS
Galvanized steel sheets, stainless steel or polymeric material shall be

used in the construction of cabinets. Outside air inlets shall be
protected with bird screens that conform to ASTM E2016, Type I, Class 1, 2
by 2 mesh, 0.063 inch diameter aluminum wire or 0.031 inch diameter
stainless steel wire. Cabinets shall provide access to all moving parts
including fans, pumps, and float valves.
2.7.1 Metal Cabinets
Where possible, cabinets shall be factory assembled by either welded or

bolted and screwed construction. Cabinets shall be braced and
reinforced. Bolts, screws, hinges, trim, and other metal appurtenances
shall be cadmium plated or galvanized in accordance with ASTM B696 or
SECTION 23 76 00.00 10 Page 8

ASTM A123/A123M. When it is necessary to ship the unit disassembled, the

cabinet sections shall be designed for assembly with cadmium plated or
galvanized bolts. The interior and exterior of the galvanized steel
cabinet, including hinges, handles, and other trim, shall be cleaned and
chemically treated to assure paint adhesion. The interior bottom of
cabinet shall be factory coated with coal tar based enamel or epoxy and
shall meet the requirements of SSPC PS 10.01 or SSPC Paint 16. Galvanized
surfaces damaged during fabrication or handling shall be given a coat of
zinc-rich paint. Finish shall be as specified in paragraph PAINTING AND
FINISHING. Gauge of cabinet components shall be as indicated in TABLES I
and II.
TABLE I. STEEL CABINET (MINIMUM THICKNESS gauge)
Nominal Size of Industry Standard Air Rating
Component part 0-3500 cfm 3501/5500 cfm 5501/7000 cfm 7001/16000 cfm
of cooler
Water tank 22 22 20 18
Corner posts 23 23 23 20
Sides 22 22 22 22
Louver pad 27 27 27 27
holder
Blower scroll 23 22 20 20
Blower wheel 22 22 22 20
Drip trough 27 26 26 26
Top 22 22 20 20
TABLE II. STAINLESS STEEL CABINET (MINIMUM THICKNESS gauge)
Nominal Size of Industry Standard Air Rating
Component part 0/4500 cfm 4501/6500 cfm Beyond 6500 cfm
Corner posts 24 24 *
Bottom pan 22 20 *
Top pan 22 20 *
* In accordance with manufacturer's standards.
2.7.2 Polymeric Material Cabinets
Unit cabinets shall be constructed of polymeric materials, such as

fiberglass or polypropylene and shall meet the requirements of UL 746C,
Figure 12.1.
SECTION 23 76 00.00 10 Page 9

2.8 PREVENTION OF GALVANIC CORROSION
Materials that will be exposed to water during operation of the unit shall
be such that galvanic action will not occur in the normal operation of the
equipment. The interior of water tank and cabinet and the exterior of the
fan housing shall be finished with an enamel paint coat or epoxy coating.
There will be no evidence of holidays and particular attention will be
given to sealing joints. Media retainer will not be coated. This
paragraph does not apply to nonmetallic materials or the interior water
tank and cabinet of stainless steel materials.
2.9 FACTORY COATING
Equipment and component items, when fabricated from ferrous metal, shall
be factory finished with the manufacturer's standard finish except that
all components inside and outside of the evaporative cooling unit shall
have weather resistant finishes that will withstand 500 hours of exposure
to the salt spray test specified in ASTM B117 and ASTM D1654 using a 5
percent sodium chloride solution. Immediately after completion of the
test, the specimen shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, cracking,
or loss of adhesion, and no sign of rust creepage beyond 1/8 inch on
either side of the scratch mark. Upon request of the Contracting Officer,
results of the test will be submitted by the manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all
discrepancy before performing the work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Install all equipment as shown and in accordance with the manufacturer's

diagrams and recommendations except where otherwise indicated. Connect
units to the building's water supply system. Piping installation shall be
as specified in Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION,
AND EXHAUST SYSTEM.
a. Install a globe or gate valve and union in the water supply line
adjacent to each unit. Valves shall not be installed with stems below
the horizontal. Slope all supply piping to drain to the indicated
stop and waste valve.
b. Submit manufacturer's catalog data included with the detail drawings.

Highlight the data to show model, size, options, etc., that are
intended for consideration. Data shall be adequate to demonstrate
compliance with contract requirements for the following:
(1) Evaporative coolers

(2) Air washers
(3) Water tanks
(4) Thermostats
c. Submit proposed diagrams, at least 2 weeks prior to start of related

testing. System diagrams that show the layout of equipment, piping,
and ductwork, and typed condensed operation manuals explaining
preventative maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system
SECTION 23 76 00.00 10 Page 10

for normal, safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and
stopping the system shall be framed under glass or laminated plastic.
After approval, these items shall be posted where directed.
3.3 AIR-SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Install equipment, sheet metal work, air filters, and terminal units as
specified in Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND
EXHAUST SYSTEM.
3.4 TRAINING COURSE
a. Conduct a training course for operating staff as designated by the

Contracting Officer. Submit proposed schedule for field training at
least 2 weeks prior to the start of related training. The training
period, for a total of 8 hours of normal working time, shall start
after the system is functionally completed but prior to final
acceptance tests.
b. The field instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the
approved operation and maintenance manuals. Submit 6 manuals listing
step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation,
shutdown, cleaning, and routine maintenance, at least 2 weeks prior to
field training. Include in the manuals the manufacturer's name, model
number, parts list, list of parts and tools that should be kept in
stock by the owner for routine maintenance including the name of a
local supplier, simplified wiring and controls diagrams,
troubleshooting guide, and Service Organization (including address and
telephone number) for each item of equipment.
3.5 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing as specified in Section 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS.
3.6 PERFORMANCE TESTS
After testing, adjusting, and balancing has been completed as specified,

the system shall be tested as a whole to see that all items perform as
integral parts of the system and that operation is as specified. Submit
proposed test schedules for performance tests, at least 2 weeks prior to
the start of related testing. Make corrections and adjustments as
necessary to produce the conditions indicated or specified. Capacity
tests and general operating tests shall be conducted by the Manufacturer's
Representative. Tests shall cover a period of not less than 2 days and
shall demonstrate that the entire system is functioning according to the
specifications. Ambient air temperature and supply air temperature and
quantity readings shall be made at hourly intervals for the duration of
the time period. Submit test reports for the performance tests in booklet
form, upon completion of testing. Document in the reports all phases of
tests performed including initial test summary, all repairs/adjustments
made, and final test results.
3.7 CLEANING
Thoroughly clean ducts, plenums, and casings of all debris; blow them free
of all small particles of rubbish and dust before installing outlet
faces. Equipment shall be wiped clean, with all traces of oil dust, dirt,
or paint spots removed. Provide temporary filters for all fans that are
SECTION 23 76 00.00 10 Page 11

operated during construction; and after all construction dirt has been
removed from the building, install new filters. Bearings shall be
properly lubricated with oil or grease as recommended by the manufacturer.
SECTION 23 76 00.00 10 Page 12

SECTION 23 81 28.10 22
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF) MULTI-SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING AND HEAT PUMP
EQUIPMENT
01/16
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 (2013; Addenda A 2014; ERTA 1 2014; ERTA 2

2015; INT 1 2015; ERTA 3 2015) ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 15-Safety Standard for
Refrigeration Systems and ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 34-Designation and Safety
Classification of Refrigerants
ASHRAE 90.1 - IP (2013; INT 1 2013; Errata 1-3 2013; Errata

4-6 2014; Errata 7-8 2015; INT 2-3 2015)
Energy Standard for Buildings Except
Low-Rise Residential Buildings
ETL TESTING LABORATORIES (ETL)
ETL DLP (updated continuously) ETL Listed Mark

Directory
ISO 9001 (2008; Corr 1 2009) Quality Management

Systems- Requirements

3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National
Electrical Code

Section 23 05 48.00 40 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT, applies to work specified in this section.
Section 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING, applies to work specified in this

section.
SECTION 23 81 28.10 22 Page 1

Provide a complete air cooled, multiple evaporator, direct expansion

heating and cooling system. The system shall consist of multiple
evaporators using PID control. The outdoor unit shall be a direct
expansion (DX), air-cooled heat recovery air-conditioning system, variable
speed driven compressor multi zone split system, using R410A refrigerant.
The outdoor unit may connect an indoor evaporator capacity up to 200
percent to that of the outdoor condensing unit capacity. All indoor units
shall each be capable of operating separately with individual temperature
control.
The outdoor units shall be interconnected to the indoor units in

accordance with the manufacturer's engineering data detailing each
available indoor unit. The indoor units shall be connected to the outdoor
utilizing the manufacturer's specified piping joints and headers.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Indoor Units; G
Outdoor Units; G
Refrigerant Valves; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Manufacturers Installation Instructions
Operation And Maintenance Training
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 24.05 20 FACILITY

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION
Operation And Maintenance Manuals
Indoor Units; G, Data Package 3
Outdoor Units; G, Data Package 3
Training Course; G
a. The units shall be listed by ETL DLP and bear the ETL label.
SECTION 23 81 28.10 22 Page 2

b. All wiring shall be in accordance with NFPA 70.
c. The system will bear the Energy Star label.
d. The system will be produced in an ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 facility.
The system shall be factory tested for safety and function.
e. The outdoor unit shall be factory charged with R410A.
Unit shall be stored and handled according to the manufacturer's

recommendations.
1.7 WARRANTY
The units shall have a manufacturer's warranty for a period of one (1)
year from date of installation. The units shall have a limited labor
warranty for a period of one (1) year from date of installation. The
compressors shall have a minimum warranty of 5 years parts and labor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTDOOR UNITS
The outdoor unit shall be designed specifically for use with all other
series components.
a. The outdoor unit shall be factory assembled and pre-wired with all
necessary electronic and refrigerant controls. The refrigeration
circuit of the condensing unit shall consist of a scroll compressor,
motors, fans, condenser coil, electronic expansion valve, solenoid
valves, 4 way valve, distribution headers, capillaries, filters, shut
off valves, oil separators, service parts, liquid receivers and
accumulators.
b. Both liquid and suction lines must be individually insulated between

the outdoor and indoor units.
c. The outdoor unit can be wired and piped with outdoor unit access from
left, right or rear.
d. The connection ratio of indoor units must be individually insulated

between the outdoor and indoor units.
e. The sound pressure dB(A) at rated conditions shall be a value of 58

decibels at 3 feet from the front of the unit. The outdoor unit shall
be capable of operating at further reduced noise during the night time.
f. The system will automatically restart operation after a power failure

and will not cause any settings to be lost, thus eliminating the need
for re-programming.
g. The outdoor unit shall be modular in design and should allow for a
side-by-side installation with minimum spacing.
h. The following safety devices shall be included on the condensing

unit: High pressure switch, control circuit fuses, crankcase heaters,
fusible plug, high pressure switch, overload relay, inverter overload
SECTION 23 81 28.10 22 Page 3

protector, thermal protectors for compressor and fan motors,

overcurrent protection for the inverter and anti-recycling timers. To
ensure the liquid refrigerant does not flash when supplying to the
various fan coil units, the circuit shall be provided with a
sub-cooling feature. Oil recovery cycle shall be automatic occurring
2 hours after start of operation and then every 8 hours of operation.
i. The outdoor unit shall be capable of heating operation at 0 degrees F

dry bulb ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls.
2.1.1 Condenser Coil
a. The condenser coil shall be manufactured from copper tubes expanded

into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
b. The coil shall be of a waffle louver fin and high heat exchanger,
rifled bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance.
c. The coils shall be complete with corrosion treatment of an acrylic

resin type. The thickness of the coating must be between 2.0 to 3.0
microns.
d. Coils shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 at the

factory and be suitable for the working pressure of the installed
system.
2.1.2 Compressor
a. The scroll compressor shall be variable speed controlled which is

capable of changing the speed to follow the variations in total
cooling load as determined by the suction gas pressure as measured in
the condensing unit.
b. The inverter driven compressor in each condensing unit shall be of

highly efficient reluctance DC, hermetically sealed scroll.
c. The capacity control range shall be 6 to 100 percent, with 29

individual capacity steps. Each non-inverter compressor shall also be
of the hermetically sealed scroll type.
d. Each compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater, high

pressure safety switch, and internal thermal overload protector.
e. Oil separator shall be standard with equipment together with an oil

balancing circuit.
f. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.
g. The control wiring shall be a two-wire multiplex transmission system,

making it possible to connect multiple indoor units to one outdoor
unit with 2-cable wire, thus simplifying the wiring operation.
h. The VRF system must interface with the BACnet DDC system as described
in Section 23 09 23.13 20 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR
HVAC.
i. The control wiring shall be 16 AWG, 2 wire, non-polarity,

non-shielded, stranded.
SECTION 23 81 28.10 22 Page 4

2.2 BRANCH SELECTOR BOX FOR VRF HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM
The branch selector boxes shall be provided for use with heat recovery
system components.
a. The selector boxes shall be factory assembled, wired and piped.
b. The sum of connected capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range
up to 200 percent of rated capacity.
c. The branch controllers must be run tested at the factory.
d. The selector boxes must be mounted indoors.
e. When simultaneously heating and cooling, the units in heated mode

shall energize their sub cooling solenoid valve.
2.2.1 Unit Cabinet
a. The units shall have a galvanized steel plate casing.
b. Each cabinet shall house multiple refrigeration control valves and a

liquid gas separator.
c. The cabinet shall contain a tube in tube heat exchanger.
d. The unit shall have sound absorption thermal insulation material made
of flame and heat resistant foamed polyethylene.
2.2.2 Refrigerant Valves
a. The unit shall be furnished with a 3-way refrigerant valve to control

the direction of refrigerant flow.
b. Electronic expansion valves shall be used to control the variable

refrigerant flow.
c. The refrigerant connections must be of the solder-joint type.
2.2.3 Drainage
The unit will be drained as required. The control voltage between the
indoor and outdoor unit shall be non-shielded 2 conductor cable.
2.3 INDOOR UNITS - CEILING CONCEALED DUCTED UNIT
The indoor unit shall be a built-in ceiling concealed fan coil unit,
operable with R410A refrigerant, equipped with an electronic expansion
valve, for installation into the ceiling cavity. The unit shall be
constructed of a galvanized steel casing. It shall be compatible with the
outdoor unit heat pump and heat recovery model. It shall be a horizontal
discharge air with horizontal return air or bottom return air
configuration. Unit shall be a low height construction. Computerized PID
control shall be used to maintain room temperature within 1 degrees F.
The unit shall be equipped with a programmed drying mechanism that
dehumidifies while inhibiting changes in room temperature. Included as
standard equipment, MERV 8 filters, isolation valves at evaporator, a
condensate drain pan and drain pump kit. The indoor units sound pressure
shall range from 35 dB(A) to 43 dB(A) at low speed 5 feet below the
SECTION 23 81 28.10 22 Page 5

suction grille.
2.3.1 Indoor Unit
a. The indoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and tested.

Included in the unit is factory wiring, piping, electronic
proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal
protector, solder-joint connections, condensate drain pan, condensate
drain pump, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused
time delay, and test run switch. The unit shall have an adjustable
external static pressure switch.
b. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dehydrated air
prior to shipment from the factory.
c. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated from the outdoor unit.
d. Return air shall be through a mold resistant filter.
e. The indoor units shall be equipped with a condensate pan and

condensate pump.
f. The indoor units shall be equipped with a return air thermistor.
g. Switch box shall be reached from the side or bottom for ease of
service and maintenance.
2.3.2 Unit Cabinet
The cabinet shall be located into the ceiling and ducted to the supply and
return openings. The cabinet shall be constructed with sound absorbing
foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation.
2.3.3 Fan
The fan shall be direct-drive type fan, statically and dynamically

balanced impeller with high and low fan speeds available. The air flow
rate shall be available in high and low settings. The fan motor shall be
thermally protected and shall be tested in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.
2.3.4 Filter
The return air shall be filtered by means of a washable long-life filter

with mildew proof resin.
2.3.5 Coil
a. Coils shall be the direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes
expanded into aluminum fins to form a mechanical bond.
b. The coil shall be a waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled
bore tube design to ensure highly efficient performance.
c. The coil shall be a 3 row cross fin copper evaporator coil with 14 FPI
design completely factory tested.
d. The refrigerant connections shall be solder-joint connections and the

condensate will be 1 1/4 inch outside diameter.
SECTION 23 81 28.10 22 Page 6

e. A condensate pan shall be located under the coil.
f. A condensate pump shall be located below the coil in the condensate

pan with a built in safety arm.
g. A thermistor will be located on the liquid and gas line.
2.3.6 Electrical
Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be
a maximum of 3,280 feet (total 6,560 feet). Transmission (control) wiring
between the indoor and remote controller shall be a maximum distance of
1,640 feet.
2.3.7 Control
The unit shall have controls to perform input functions necessary to

operate the system. The unit shall interface with with the BACnet network.
2.3.8 Accessories
Provide a wall mounted, hard wired remote sensor kit for ceiling-embedded
type fan coils. The temperature sensor shall be located where indicated
in the documents, if not indicated, contractor shall request a location
from the engineer in writing.
2.4 INDIVIDUAL ZONE CONTROLLER - WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
2.4.1 Physical Characteristics
The control system shall be a neutral color plastic material. Each

control may have a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
2.4.2 Electrical Characteristics
From each circuit board to the controls, the electrical voltage shall be
16 volts DC.
2.4.2.1 Wiring
Control wiring shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from

indoor unit to indoor unit then to the branch selector box and outdoor
unit. Control wiring shall run from the indoor unit terminal block to the
specific. The wire shall be a non-shielded, 2-core sheathed vinyl cord or
cable, size AWG18-2.
2.4.3 Controller Characteristics
The wired remote controller shall be able to control 1 group (maximum of

16 fan coil units) and shall be able to function as follows:
a. The controller shall have a maximum wiring length of 1,640 feet.
b. The controller shall have a self diagnosis function that constantly

monitors the system for malfunctions.
c. The controller shall be able to immediately display fault location and

condition.
SECTION 23 81 28.10 22 Page 7

d. An LCD digital display will allow the temperature to be set in 1

degrees F units.
e. The controller shall monitor room temperature and preset temperature

by microcomputer and can select cool/heat operation mode automatically.
f. The controller shall allow the user to select cool, heat, and fan
operation mode with indoor remote controller of choice without using
the cool and heat selector.
The wired remote controller shall have the following features:
Operation Start/Stop
Operation Mode
Temperature Settings
60 Degrees F - 90 Degrees F Set Point
Range
Fan Speed
Airflow Direction
Monitoring Status
Malfunction Flashing
Malfunction Content
Filter Sign
Operation Mode
Temperature Setting
Permit/Prohibit Selection
Fan Speed
Airflow Direction
Control Management Field Setting Mode
Group Setting
Auto Re-Start
2.5 INTELLIGENT TOUCH CONTROLLER
2.5.1 Physical Characteristics
The control system shall be a neutral color plastic material. The
SECTION 23 81 28.10 22 Page 8

controller shall be a minimum 5.7 inches Liquid Crystal Display (LCD, QVGA
320x240, 4096 colors).
2.5.2 Electrical Characteristics
From each outdoor unit circuit board to the I-touch controller, the daisy
chained wiring electrical voltage shall be 16 volts DC.
2.5.2.1 Wiring
For heat recovery the control wiring shall be installed in a daisy chain
configuration from outdoor unit to each branch selector box then from the
branch selector box to the indoor unit.
2.5.2.2 Control Wiring Size
The wire shall be a non-shielded, stranded, 2 conductor PVC or vinyl clad

cable. 18-gauge copper cabling specified. Application of UV stabilized
cable should be standard when exposed to outside elements. Plenum rated
where applicable. Maximum wiring length between controller and indoor
units: 3,280 feet.
2.5.2.3 Power Supply to Controller
24V AC (transformer to be field supplied).
2.5.3 Controller Characteristics
The intelligent controller shall be able to control, via a full color LCD
touch screen, up to 10 outdoor units and 64 indoor unit groups (maximum
128 Fan Coil Units) with the following functions:
a. On/Off selection for each fan coil unit or group.
b. Temperature set point adjustment for each fan coil unit or group
c. Fan speed adjustment for each fan coil unit or group.
d. Heat/cool/automatic changeover mode selection.
e. Forced shutdown terminals.
f. Priority settings for restriction of local access for start/stop,

heat/cool mode and set point adjustment (at local remote controllers
if installed).
g. Temperature limitation in both heating and cooling mode.
h. Weekly schedule with start up and shut off times, temperature settings
and operation modes, 16 operations/ each day can be set in one
schedule, and 8 different schedules are available. In addition a
yearly calendar is also available for holidays or periods of non use.
i. Actual time and display setting.
j. Reset ability for malfunction codes and filter maintenance warning.
k. Maximum 13 months backup power supply to maintain the memory.
SECTION 23 81 28.10 22 Page 9

l. Malfunction reports can be sent via e-mail to a cell phone or a PC.
m. Remote monitoring via PC, network and web browser (optional).

Available web browser are: Real time status
monitoring/Operation/Malfunction history display/User password setting
and schedule setting.
Manufacturer to provide Web based software for off-site monitoring

purposes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
The system must be installed by factory trained and authorized

contractor. The contractor shall install the VRF system in accordance
with the recommendations of the VRF manufacturer as outlined in the
Manufacturers Installation Instructions.
3.2 START-UP
Equipment start-up, performance tests, and commissioning shall be provided

by a factory trained and authorized contractor. Control start-up and
commissioning shall be provided by the factory.
3.3 PRODUCT SUPPORT
Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manuals are to be provided to the

Government once commissioning is complete. Eight hours of Operation and
Maintenance training will be provided to the Government and Government's
personnel once commissioning is complete.
3.4 TRAINING COURSE
Conduct a training course for operating staff as designated by the

Contracting Officer. Submit proposed schedule for field training at least
2 weeks prior to the start of related training. The training period, for
a total of 16 hours each of normal working time, shall start after the
system is functionally completed but prior to final.
The field instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the
approved operation and maintenance manuals. Submit 6 manuals listing
step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, shutdown,
cleaning, and routine maintenance, at least 2 weeks prior to field
training. Include in the manuals the manufacturer's name, model, number,
parts list, list of parts and tools that should be kept in stock by the
Owner for routine maintenance including the name of a local supplier,
simplified wiring and controls diagrams, troubleshooting guide, and
Service Organization (including address and telephone number) for each
item of equipment.
SECTION 23 81 28.10 22 Page 10

SECTION 23 82 02.00 10
UNITARY HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT

04/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AHRI 700 (2014; Appendix C & D 2014) Specifications

for Fluorocarbon Refrigerants
ANSI/AHRI 210/240 (2008; Add 1 2011; Add 2 2012) Performance

Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning &
Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment
ANSI/AHRI 460 (2005) Performance Rating of Remote

Mechanical-Draft Air-Cooled Refrigerant
Condensers

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 (2013; Addenda A 2014; ERTA 1 2014; ERTA 2

2015; INT 1 2015; ERTA 3 2015) ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 15-Safety Standard for
Refrigeration Systems and ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 34-Designation and Safety
Classification of Refrigerants
AWS Z49.1 (2012) Safety in Welding and Cutting and

Allied Processes
ASME BPVC SEC IX (2010) BPVC Section IX-Welding and Brazing

Qualifications
ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 (2010) BPVC Section VIII-Rules for

Construction of Pressure Vessels Division 1

ASTM C1071 (2012) Standard Specification for Fibrous

Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and
Sound Absorbing Material)
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 1

ASTM D520 (2000; R 2011) Zinc Dust Pigment
ASTM E84 (2015a) Standard Test Method for Surface

Materials
NEMA MG 1 (2014) Motors and Generators
NEMA MG 2 (2014) Safety Standard for Construction

and Guide for Selection, Installation and
Use of Electric Motors and Generators
UL 1995 (2015) Heating and Cooling Equipment

Units
UL 900 (2015) Standard for Air Filter Units
Provide electrical equipment, motors, motor efficiencies, and wiring which

are in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
Electrical motor driven equipment specified shall be provided complete
with motors, motor starters, and controls. Electrical characteristics
shall be as shown, and unless otherwise indicated, all motors of 1
horsepower and above with open, dripproof, totally enclosed, or explosion
proof fan cooled enclosures, shall be the premium efficiency type in
accordance with NEMA MG 1. Field wiring shall be in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Each motor shall conform to NEMA MG 1 and
NEMA MG 2 and be of sufficient size to drive the equipment at the
specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor.
Motors shall be continuous duty with the enclosure specified. Motor
starters shall be provided complete with thermal overload protection and
other appurtenances necessary for the motor control indicated. Motors
shall be furnished with a magnetic across-the-line or reduced voltage type
starter as required by the manufacturer. Motor duty requirements shall
allow for maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered
interval between start and stop. Motors shall be sized for the applicable
loads. Motor torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load
within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor
terminals during one starting period. Motor bearings shall be fitted with
grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of enclosure. Manual
or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the
operation specified and any control wiring required for controls and
devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 2

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Materials and Equipment

Spare Parts
Posted Instructions
Verification of Dimensions
System Performance Tests
Demonstrations; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Refrigerant Tests, Charging, and Start-Up; G

System Performance Tests; G
SD-07 Certificates
Materials and Equipment

Service Organization
Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate

all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. Submit
drawings provided in adequate detail to demonstrate compliance with
contract requirements. Carefully investigate the plumbing, fire
protection, electrical, structural and finish conditions that would affect
the work to be performed and arrange such work accordingly, furnishing
required offsets, fittings, and accessories to meet such conditions.
Submit drawings consisting of:
a. Equipment layouts which identify assembly and installation details.
b. Plans and elevations which identify clearances required for

maintenance and operation.
c. Wiring diagrams which identify each component individually and

interconnected or interlocked relationships between components.
d. Details, if piping and equipment are to be supported other than as

indicated, which include loadings and type of frames, brackets,
stanchions, or other supports.
e. Automatic temperature control diagrams and control sequences.
f. Installation details which includes the amount of factory set

superheat and corresponding refrigerant pressure/temperature.
Stored items shall be protected from the weather, humidity and temperature
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 3

variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Proper protection and

care of all material both before and during installation shall be the
Contractor's responsibility. Replace any materials found to be damaged at
the Contractor's expense. During installation, piping and similar
openings shall be capped to keep out dirt and other foreign matter.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment specified,
after approval of detail drawings and not later than 1 month prior to the
date of beneficial occupancy. Include in the data a complete list of
parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, a
recommended spare parts list for 1 year of operation, and a list of the
parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced on a routine basis.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Provide Materials and equipment that are standard products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products,
which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. Submit
manufacturer's standard catalog data, at least 5 weeks prior to the
purchase or installation of a particular component, highlighted to show
material, size, options, performance charts and curves, etc. in adequate
detail to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements.
a. Data shall include manufacturer's recommended installation

instructions and procedures. If vibration isolation is specified for
a unit, vibration isolator literature shall be included containing
catalog cuts and certification that the isolation characteristics of
the isolators provided meet the manufacturer's recommendations. Data
shall be submitted for each specified component.
b. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or

industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2 year use shall
include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The 2 years experience shall be
satisfactorily completed by a product which has been sold or is
offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a 2
year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of
satisfactory field operation, for not less than 6000 hours exclusive
of the manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown.
c. Where the system, components, or equipment are specified to comply

with requirements of AHRI, ASHRAE, ASME, or UL, proof of such
compliance shall be provided. The label or listing of the specified
agency shall be acceptable evidence. In lieu of the label or listing,
a written certificate from an approved, nationally recognized testing
organization equipped to perform such services, stating that the items
have been tested and conform to the requirements and testing methods
of the specified agency may be submitted.
d. When performance requirements of this project's drawings and

specifications vary from standard AHRI rating conditions, computer
printouts, catalog, or other application data certified by AHRI or a
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 4

nationally recognized laboratory as described above shall be

included. If AHRI does not have a current certification program that
encompasses such application data, the manufacturer may self certify
that his application data complies with project performance
requirements in accordance with the specified test standards.
e. Products shall be supported by a service organization. Submit a

certified list of qualified permanent service organizations, which
includes their addresses and qualifications, for support of the
equipment. The service organizations shall be reasonably convenient
to the equipment installation and be able to render satisfactory
service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the
warranty period of the contract. System components shall be
environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.
2.1.2 Nameplates
Major equipment including compressors, condensers, receivers, heat

exchanges, fans, and motors shall have the manufacturer's name, address,
type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a plate
secured to the item of equipment. Plates shall be durable and legible
throughout equipment life and made of anodized aluminum. Plates shall be
fixed in prominent locations with nonferrous screws or bolts.
2.1.3 Safety Devices
Exposed moving parts, parts that produce high operating temperature, parts
which may be electrically energized, and parts that may be a hazard to
operating personnel shall be insulated, fully enclosed, guarded, or fitted
with other types of safety devices. Safety devices shall be installed so
that proper operation of equipment is not impaired. Welding and cutting
safety requirements shall be in accordance with AWS Z49.1.
2.2 UNITARY EQUIPMENT, SPLIT SYSTEM
Unit shall be an air-cooled, split system which employs a remote

condensing unit, a separate indoor unit, and interconnecting refrigerant
piping. Unit shall be the air-conditioning or heat pump type conforming
to applicable Underwriters Laboratories (UL) standards including UL 1995.
Unit shall be rated in accordance with ANSI/AHRI 210/240. Unit shall be
provided with necessary fans, air filters, coil frost protection, liquid
receiver, internal dampers, mixing boxes, supplemental heat, and cabinet
construction as specified in paragraph "Unitary Equipment Components".
The remote unit shall be as specified in paragraph REMOTE CONDENSER OR
CONDENSING UNIT. Evaporator or supply fans shall be double-width, double
inlet, forward curved, backward inclined, or airfoil blade, centrifugal
scroll type. Condenser or outdoor fans shall be the manufacturer's
standard for the unit specified and may be either propeller or centrifugal
scroll type. Fan and condenser motors shall have opendripproof enclosures.
2.2.1 Air-to-Refrigerant Coil
Coils shall have nonferrouscopper or aluminum tubes of 3/8 inch minimum

diameter with copper or aluminum fins that are mechanically bonded or
soldered to the tubes. Casing shall be galvanized steel or aluminum.
Contact of dissimilar metals shall be avoided. Coils shall be tested in
accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 at the factory and be suitable for the
working pressure of the installed system. Each coil shall be dehydrated
and sealed after testing and prior to evaluation and charging. Each unit
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 5

shall be provided with a factory operating charge of refrigerant and oil

or a holding charge. Unit shipped with a holding charge shall be field
charged. Separate expansion devices shall be provided for each compressor
circuit.
2.2.2 Refrigeration Circuit
Refrigerant-containing components shall comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34

and be factory tested, cleaned, dehydrated, charged, and sealed.
Refrigerant charging valves and connections, and pumpdown valves shall be
provided for each circuit. Filter-drier shall be provided in each liquid
line and be reversible-flow type. Refrigerant flow control devices shall
be an adjustable superheat thermostatic expansion valve with external
equalizer matched to coil, capillary or thermostatic control, and a pilot
solenoid controlled, leak-tight, four-way refrigerant flow reversing
valve. A refrigerant suction line control shall be provided to prevent
freeze-up in event of loss of water flow during heating cycle.
2.2.3 Unit Controls
Unit shall be internally prewired with a 24 volt control circuit powered

by an internal transformer. Terminal blocks shall be provided for power
wiring and external control wiring. Unit shall have cutoffs for high and
low pressure, and low oil pressure for compressors with positive
displacement oil pumps, supply fan failure, and safety interlocks on all
service panels. Head pressure controls shall sustain unit operation with
ambient temperature of 40 degrees F. Adjustable-cycle timers shall
prevent short-cycling. Unit shall be internally protected by fuses or a
circuit breaker in accordance with UL 1995.
2.3 REMOTE CONDENSER OR CONDENSING UNIT
Each remote condenser coil shall be fitted with a manual isolation valve
and an access valve on the coil side. Saturated refrigerant condensing
temperature shall not exceed 120 degrees F at 95 degrees F ambient. Unit
shall be provided with low ambient condenser controls to ensure proper
operation in an ambient temperature of 40 degrees F. Fan and cabinet
construction shall be provided as specified in paragraph "Unitary
Equipment Components". Fan and condenser motors shall have opendripproof
enclosures.
2.3.1 Air-Cooled Condenser
Unit shall be rated in accordance with ANSI/AHRI 460 and conform to the
requirements of UL 1995. Unit shall be factory fabricated, tested,
packaged, and self-contained. Unit shall be complete with casing,
propeller or centrifugal type fans, heat rejection coils, connecting
piping and wiring, and all necessary appurtenances.
2.3.1.1 Connections
Interconnecting refrigeration piping, electrical power, and control wiring

between the condensing unit and the indoor unit shall be provided as
required and as indicated. Electrical and refrigeration piping terminal
connections between condensing unit and evaporator units shall be provided.
2.3.1.2 Condensing Coil
Coils shall have nonferrous tubes of 3/8 inch minimum diameter with copper
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 6

or aluminum fins that are mechanically bonded or soldered to the tubes.

Casing shall be galvanized steel or aluminum. Contact of dissimilar
metals shall be avoided. Coils shall be tested in accordance with
ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34 at the factory and be suitable for the working
pressure of the installed system. Each coil shall be dehydrated and
sealed after testing and prior to evaluation and charging. Each unit
shall be provided with a factory operating charge of refrigerant and oil
or a holding charge. Unit shipped with a holding charge shall be field
charged. Separate expansion devices shall be provided for each compressor
circuit.
2.4 EQUIPMENT EFFICIENCY
Unit shall have an efficiency as indicated.
2.5 UNITARY EQUIPMENT COMPONENTS
2.5.1 Refrigerant and Oil
Refrigerant shall be one of the fluorocarbon gases. Refrigerants shall

have number designations and safety classifications in accordance with
ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34. Refrigerants shall meet the requirements of AHRI 700
as a minimum. Refrigerants shall have an Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP)
of less than or equal to 0.05. Provide and install a complete charge of
refrigerant for the installed system as recommended by the manufacturer.
Lubricating oil shall be of a type and grade recommended by the
manufacturer for each compressor. Where color leak indicator dye is
incorporated, charge shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendation.
2.5.2 Air Filters
Air filters shall be listed in accordance with requirements of UL 900,

except high efficiency particulate air filters of 99.97 percent efficiency
by the DOP Test Method shall be as listed under the label service and
shall meet the requirements of UL 586.
2.5.3 Mixing Boxes
Mixing boxes shall match the base unit in physical size and shall include
equally-sized openings, each capable of full air flow. Arrangement shall
be as indicated.
2.5.4 Cabinet Construction
Casings for the specified unitary equipment shall be constructed of

galvanized steel or aluminum sheet metal and galvanized or aluminum
structural members. Minimum thickness of single wall exterior surfaces
shall be 18 gauge galvanized steel or 0.071 inch thick aluminum on units
with a capacity above 20 tons and 20 gauge galvanized steel or 0.064 inch
thick aluminum on units with a capacity less than 20 tons. Casing shall
be fitted with lifting provisions, access panels or doors, fan vibration
isolators, electrical control panel, corrosion-resistant components,
structural support members, insulated condensate drip pan and drain, and
internal insulation in the cold section of the casing. Where double-wall
insulated construction is proposed, minimum exterior galvanized sheet
metal thickness shall be 20 gauge. Provisions to permit replacement of
major unit components shall be incorporated. Penetrations of cabinet
surfaces, including the floor, shall be sealed. Unit shall be fitted with
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 7

a drain pan which extends under all areas where water may accumulate.
Drain pan shall be fabricated from Type 300 stainless steel, galvanized
steel with protective coating as required, or an approved plastic
material. Pan insulation shall be water impervious. Extent and
effectiveness of the insulation of unit air containment surfaces shall
prevent, within limits of the specified insulation, heat transfer between
the unit exterior and ambient air, heat transfer between the two
conditioned air streams, and condensation on surfaces. Insulation shall
conform to ASTM C1071. Paint and finishes shall comply with the
requirements specified in paragraph FACTORY COATING.
2.5.4.1 Indoor Cabinet
Indoor cabinets shall be suitable for the specified indoor service and
enclose all unit components.
2.5.4.2 Outdoor Cabinet
Outdoor cabinets shall be suitable for outdoor service with a

weathertight, insulated and corrosion-protected structure. Cabinets
constructed exclusively for indoor service which have been modified for
outdoor service are not acceptable.
2.6 FINISHES
2.6.1 Factory Coating
2.6.1.1 Equipment and Components
Unless otherwise specified, equipment and component items, when fabricated

from ferrous metal, shall be factory finished with the manufacturer's
standard finish, except that items located outside of buildings shall have
weather resistant finishes that will withstand 125 hours exposure to the
salt spray test specified in ASTM B117 using a 5 percent sodium chloride
solution. Immediately after completion of the test, the specimen shall
show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, cracking, or loss of adhesion and
no sign of rust creepage beyond 1/8 inch on either side of the scratch
mark. Cut edges of galvanized surfaces where hot-dip galvanized sheet
steel is used shall be coated with a zinc-rich coating conforming to
ASTM D520, Type I.
2.6.2 Factory Applied Insulation
Refrigeration equipment shall be provided with factory installed

insulation on surfaces subject to sweating including the suction line
piping. Where motors are the gas-cooled type, factory installed
insulation shall be provided on the cold-gas inlet connection to the motor
in accordance with manufacturer's standard practice. Factory insulated
items installed outdoors are not required to be fire-rated. As a minimum,
factory insulated items installed indoors shall have a flame spread index
no higher than 75 and a smoke developed index no higher than 150. Factory
insulated items (no jacket) installed indoors and which are located in air
plenums, in ceiling spaces, and in attic spaces shall have a flame spread
index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed index no higher than 50.
Flame spread and smoke developed indexes shall be determined by ASTM E84.
Insulation shall be tested in the same density and installed thickness as
the material to be used in the actual construction. Material supplied by
a manufacturer with a jacket shall be tested as a composite material.
Jackets, facings, and adhesives shall have a flame spread index no higher
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 8

than 25 and a smoke developed index no higher than 50 when tested in

accordance with ASTM E84.
2.7 SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICES
2.7.1 Refrigerant Piping
Refrigerant piping for split-system unitary equipment shall be provided

and installed in accordance with Section 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING.
2.7.2 Ductwork
Ductwork shall be provided and installed in accordance with Section

23 00 00AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, perform Verification
of Dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any
discrepancy before performing any work. Submit a letter, at least 2 weeks
prior to beginning construction, including the date the site was visited,
confirmation of existing conditions, and any discrepancies found.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Work shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's published

diagrams, recommendations, and equipment warranty requirements. Where
equipment is specified to conform to the requirements of
ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1and ASME BPVC SEC IX, the design, fabrication, and
installation of the system shall conform to ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 and
ASME BPVC SEC IX.
3.2.1 Equipment
Refrigeration equipment and the installation thereof shall conform to

ANSI/ASHRAE 15 & 34. Necessary supports shall be provided for all
equipment, appurtenances, and pipe as required.
Painting required for surfaces not otherwise specified, and finish

painting of items only primed at the factory are specified in Section
Equipment shall be wiped clean, with all traces of oil, dust, dirt, or
paint spots removed. Temporary filters shall be provided for all fans
that are operated during construction, and new filters shall be installed
after all construction dirt has been removed from the building. System
shall be maintained in this clean condition until final acceptance.
Bearings shall be properly lubricated with oil or grease as recommended by
the manufacturer. Belts shall be tightened to proper tension. Control
valves and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment shall be
adjusted to setting indicated or directed. Fans shall be adjusted to the
speed indicated by the manufacturer to meet specified conditions.
Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be as specified in Section 23 05 93
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 9

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS.
3.4 DEMONSTRATIONS
Conduct a training course for the operating staff as designated by the

Contracting Officer. The training period shall consist of a total 8 hours
of normal working time and start after the system is functionally
completed but prior to final acceptance tests.
a. Submit a schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the date of the proposed

training course, which identifies the date, time, and location for the
training.
b. Submit the field posted instructions, at least 2 weeks prior to

construction completion, including equipment layout, wiring and
control diagrams, piping, valves and control sequences, and typed
condensed operation instructions. The condensed operation
instructions shall include preventative maintenance procedures,
methods of checking the system for normal and safe operation, and
procedures for safely starting and stopping the system. The posted
instructions shall be framed under glass or laminated plastic and be
posted where indicated by the Contracting Officer.
c. The posted instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the
approved operation and maintenance manuals as well as demonstrations
of routine maintenance operations. Submit 6 complete copies of an
operation manual in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets listing
step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation,
abnormal shutdown, emergency shutdown, and normal shutdown at least 4
weeks prior to the first training course. The booklets shall include
the manufacturer's name, model number, and parts list. The manuals
shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual,
and a brief description of all equipment and their basic operating
features.
d. Submit 6 complete copies of maintenance manual in bound 8-1/2 by 11

inch booklets listing routine maintenance procedures, possible
breakdowns and repairs, and a trouble shooting guide. The manuals
shall include piping and equipment layouts and simplified wiring and
control diagrams of the system as installed.
3.5 REFRIGERANT TESTS, CHARGING, AND START-UP
Split-system refrigerant piping systems shall be tested and charged as

specified in Section 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING. Packaged refrigerant
systems which are factory charged shall be checked for refrigerant and oil
capacity to verify proper refrigerant levels in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Following charging, packaged systems
shall be tested for leaks with a halide torch or an electronic leak
detector. Submit 6 copies of each test containing the information
described below in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets. Individual reports
shall be submitted for the refrigerant system tests.
a. The date the tests were performed.

b. A list of equipment used, with calibration certifications.
c. Initial test summaries.
d. Repairs/adjustments performed.
e. Final test results.
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 10

3.5.1 Refrigerant Leakage
If a refrigerant leak is discovered after the system has been charged, the
leaking portion of the system shall immediately be isolated from the
remainder of the system and the refrigerant pumped into the system
receiver or other suitable container. Under no circumstances shall the
refrigerant be discharged into the atmosphere.
3.5.2 Contractor's Responsibility
Take steps, at all times during the installation and testing of the
refrigeration system, to prevent the release of refrigerants into the
atmosphere. The steps shall include, but not be limited to, procedures
which will minimize the release of refrigerants to the atmosphere and the
use of refrigerant recovery devices to remove refrigerant from the system
and store the refrigerant for reuse or reclaim. At no time shall more than
3 ounces of refrigerant be released to the atmosphere in any one
occurrence. Any system leaks within the first year shall be repaired in
accordance with the requirements herein at no cost to the Government
including material, labor, and refrigerant if the leak is the result of
defective equipment, material, or installation.
3.6 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTS
Before each refrigeration system is accepted, conduct tests to demonstrate

the general operating characteristics of all equipment by a registered
professional engineer or an approved manufacturer's start-up
representative experienced in system start-up and testing, at such times
as directed. Six copies of the report provided in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch
booklets. The report shall document compliance with the specified
performance criteria upon completion and testing of the system. The
report shall indicate the number of days covered by the tests and any
conclusions as to the adequacy of the system.
a. Submit a schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related

testing, for the system performance tests. The schedules shall
identify the proposed date, time, and location for each test. Tests
shall cover a period of not less than 48 hours for each system and
shall demonstrate that the entire system is functioning in accordance
with the drawings and specifications.
b. Make corrections and adjustments, as necessary, tests shall be

re-conducted to demonstrate that the entire system is functioning as
specified. Prior to acceptance, service valve seal caps and blanks
over gauge points shall be installed and tightened. Any refrigerant
lost during the system startup shall be replaced.
c. If tests do not demonstrate satisfactory system performance,

deficiencies shall be corrected and the system shall be retested.
Tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Contracting Officer.
Water and electricity required for the tests will be furnished by the
Government. Provide all material, equipment, instruments, and
personnel required for the test.
d. Field tests shall be coordinated with Section 23 05 93 TESTING,

ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS. Submit 6 copies of the
report provided in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets. The report shall
document compliance with the specified performance criteria upon
completion and testing of the system. The report shall indicate the
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 11

number of days covered by the tests and any conclusions as to the

adequacy of the system. Submit the report including the following
information (where values are taken at least three different times at
outside dry-bulb temperatures that are at least 5 degrees F apart):
(1) Date and outside weather conditions.
(2) The load on the system based on the following:
(a) The refrigerant used in the system.

(b) Condensing temperature and pressure.
(c) Suction temperature and pressure.
(d) Ambient, condensing and coolant temperatures.
(e) Running current, voltage and proper phase sequence for each
phase of all motors.
(3) The actual on-site setting of operating and safety controls.
(4) Thermostatic expansion valve superheat - value as determined by

field test.
(5) Subcooling.
(6) High and low refrigerant temperature switch set-points
(7) Low oil pressure switch set-point.
(8) Defrost system timer and thermostat set-points.
(9) Moisture content.
(10) Capacity control set-points.
(11) Field data and adjustments which affect unit performance and
energy consumption.
(12) Field adjustments and settings which were not permanently marked
as an integral part of a device.
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 12

SECTION 26 00 00.00 20
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

07/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

IEEE 100 (2000; Archived) The Authoritative

Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms

Safety Code
IEEE C57.12.28 (2014) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment

- Enclosure Integrity
IEEE C57.12.29 (2014) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment

- Enclosure Integrity for Coastal
Environments


3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National
Electrical Code
This section applies to certain sections of Division 02, EXISTING

CONDITIONS, Division 13, SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION, Divisions 22 and 23,
PLUMBING and HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING, Division 27,
BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS, and Division 28, FIRE ALARM AND MASS
NOTIFICATION . This section applies to all sections of Division 26 and
33, ELECTRICAL and UTILITIES, of this project specification unless
specified otherwise in the individual sections. This section has been
incorporated into, and thus, does not apply to, and is not referenced in
the following sections.
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 1

Section 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING

Section 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
1.3 DEFINITIONS
a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics

terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as
defined in IEEE 100.
b. The technical sections referred to herein are those specification

sections that describe products, installation procedures, and
equipment operations and that refer to this section for detailed
description of submittal types.
c. The technical paragraphs referred to herein are those paragraphs in

PART 2 - PRODUCTS and PART 3 - EXECUTION of the technical sections
that describe products, systems, installation procedures, equipment,
and test methods.
1.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Electrical characteristics for this project shall be 480Y/277V, three

phase, four wire.
1.5 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATION
Submittals required in other sections that refer to this section must

conform to the following additional requirements as applicable.
1.5.1 Shop Drawings (SD-02)
Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating

proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories,
piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a
coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit
terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and
the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall
indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of
operating equipment devices.
1.5.2 Product Data (SD-03)
Submittal shall include performance and characteristic curves.

these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory
and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are
specified or indicated.
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 2

Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers

regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in
satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid
opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and
materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product
shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two
or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items
shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts
of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless
stated in the technical section.
1.6.2.1 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than
6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests,
is furnished.
1.6.2.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site

shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.
1.7 WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are

reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
during the warranty period of the contract.
1.8 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in

the technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel.
The operating instructions shall include the following:
a. Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each

principal system and item of equipment.
b. Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown

procedures.
c. Safety precautions.
d. The procedure in the event of equipment failure.
e. Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of each

system or item of equipment.
Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in

approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. For
operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide weather-resistant
materials or weatherproof enclosures. Operating instructions shall not
fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal
or peeling.
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 3

1.9 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE

acceptable.
1.10 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES

enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in the technical
sections or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription
shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position.
Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black
center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square.
1.11 WARNING SIGNS
Provide warning signs for the enclosures of electrical equipment including

substations, pad-mounted transformers, pad-mounted switches, generators,
and switchgear having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts.
a. When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in

accordance with IEEE C57.12.28 or IEEE C57.12.29, such as for
pad-mounted transformers, provide self-adhesive warning signs on the
outside of the high voltage compartment door(s). Sign shall be a
decal and shall have nominal dimensions of 7 by 10 inches with the
legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" printed in two lines of nominal 2 inch
high letters. The word "DANGER" shall be in white letters on a red
background and the words "HIGH VOLTAGE" shall be in black letters on a
white background. Decal shall be Panduit No. PPSO710D72 or approved
equal.
b. When such equipment is guarded by a fence, mount signs on the fence.

Provide metal signs having nominal dimensions of 14 by 10 inches with
the legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE KEEP OUT" printed in three lines of
nominal 3 inch high white letters on a red and black field.
1.12 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and

Where specified in the technical sections, furnish the services of

competent instructors to give full instruction to designated Government
personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the specified
systems and equipment, including pertinent safety requirements as
required. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the
operation and maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the
first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted
and turned over to the Government for regular operation. The number of
man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 4

in the individual section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which

shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250
corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements specified in the
technical sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent

surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting
shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as

indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two
sheet-metal screws or two rivets.
3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING
Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible

side, but space the signs a maximum of 30 feet apart.
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 5

SECTION 26 05 48.00 10
SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

10/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM E580/E580M (2014) Application of Ceiling Suspension

Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In
Panels in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic
Restraint
UL 1598 (2008; Reprint Oct 2012) Luminaires
The requirements for seismic protection measures described in this section

shall be applied to the electrical equipment and systems listed below.
Structural requirements shall be in accordance with Section 13 48 00
SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT.
1.2.2 Electrical Equipment
Electrical equipment shall include the following items to the extent

required on the drawings or in other sections of these specifications:
Control Panels Transformers
Pumps with Motors Light Fixtures
1.2.3 Electrical Systems
The following electrical systems shall be installed as required on the

drawings and other sections of these specifications and shall be
seismically protected in accordance with this specification: Conduit.
SECTION 26 05 48.00 10 Page 1

1.2.4 Contractor Designed Bracing
Submit copies of the Design Calculations with the Drawings. Calculations

shall be approved, certified, stamped and signed by a Registered
Professional Engineer. Calculations shall verify the capability of
structural members to which bracing is attached for carrying the load from
the brace. Design the bracing in accordance with UFC 3-310-04 and
additional data furnished by the Contracting Officer. Resistance to
lateral forces induced by earthquakes shall be accomplished without
consideration of friction resulting from gravity loads. UFC 3-310-04 uses
parameters for the building, not for the equipment in the building;
therefore, corresponding adjustments to the formulas shall be required.
Loadings determined using UFC 3-310-04 are based on strength design;
therefore, AISC 325 shall be used for the design. Develop the bracing for
the following electrical equipment and systems: Conduit systems and
lighting systems.
1.2.5 Conduits Requiring No Special Seismic Restraints
Seismic restraints may be omitted from electrical conduit less than 2-1/2
inches trade size. All other interior conduit, shall be seismically
protected as specified.
Submit detail drawings along with catalog cuts, templates, and erection
and installation details, as appropriate, for the items listed.
Submittals shall be complete in detail, indicating thickness, type, grade,
class of metal, and dimensions; and shall show construction details,
reinforcement, anchorage, and installation with relation to the building
construction. Submit copies of the design calculations with the detail
drawings. Calculations shall be stamped by a registered engineer and
shall verify the capability of structural members to which bracing is
attached for carrying the load from the brace.
1.3.1 Rigidly Mounted Equipment
The following specific items of equipment to be furnished under this

contract shall be constructed and assembled to withstand the seismic
forces specified in UFC 3-310-04. Each item of rigid electrical equipment
shall be entirely located and rigidly attached on one side only of a
building expansion joint. Piping, electrical conduit, etc., which cross
the expansion joint shall be provided with flexible joints that are
capable of accommodating displacements equal to the full width of the
joint in both orthogonal directions.
Transformers
Switchboards
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Lighting Fixtures in Buildings
SECTION 26 05 48.00 10 Page 2

Equipment Requirements
SD-03 Product Data
Lighting Fixtures in Buildings; G

Contractor Designed Bracing; G, A/E
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORTS
Lighting fixtures and supports shall conform to UL 1598.
2.2 SWAY BRACING MATERIALS
Sway bracing materials (e.g. rods, plates, rope, angles, etc.) shall be as
EQUIPMENT.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SWAY BRACES FOR CONDUIT
Conduit shall be braced as for an equivalent weight pipe in accordance

with Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT.
3.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES IN BUILDINGS
Lighting fixtures and supports shall conform to the following:
3.2.1 Pendant Fixtures
Pendant fixtures shall conform to the requirements of UFC 3-310-04.
3.2.2 Ceiling Attached Fixtures
3.2.2.1 Recessed Lighting Fixtures
Recessed lighting individual or continuous-row mounted fixtures shall be

supported by a seismic-resistant suspended ceiling support system built in
accordance with ASTM E580/E580M. Seismic protection for the fixtures
shall conform to the requirements of UFC 3-310-04. Recessed lighting
fixtures not over 56 pounds in weight may be supported by and attached
directly to the ceiling system runners using screws or bolts, number and
size as required by the seismic design. Fixture accessories, including
louvers, diffusers, and lenses shall have lock or screw attachments.
3.2.2.2 Surface-Mounted Lighting Fixtures
Surface-mounted lighting individual or continuous-row fixtures shall be

attached to a seismic-resistant ceiling support system built in accordance
with ASTM E580/E580M. Seismic protection for the fixtures shall conform
to the requirements of UFC 3-310-04.
3.2.3 Assembly Mounted on Outlet Box
A supporting assembly, that is intended to be mounted on an outlet box,

shall be designed to accommodate mounting features on 4 inch boxes,
SECTION 26 05 48.00 10 Page 3

plaster rings, and fixture studs.
3.2.4 Wall-Mounted Emergency Light Unit
Attachments for wall-mounted emergency light units shall be designed and

secured for the worst expected seismic disturbance at the site.
3.2.5 Lateral Force
Structural requirements for light fixture bracing shall be in accordance

with Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT.
SECTION 26 05 48.00 10 Page 4

SECTION 26 08 00
APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING

08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

NETA ATS (2013) Standard for Acceptance Testing

Specifications for Electrical Power
Equipment and Systems
Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to

this section with additions and modifications specified herein.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-06 Test Reports
Acceptance tests and inspections; G
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications of organization, and lead engineering technician; G
Acceptance test and inspections procedure; G
Contractor shall engage the services of a qualified testing organization

to provide inspection, testing, calibration, and adjustment of the
electrical distribution system and generation equipment listed in
paragraph entitled "Acceptance Tests and Inspections" herein.
Organization shall be independent of the supplier, manufacturer, and
installer of the equipment. The organization shall be a first tier
subcontractor. No work required by this section of the specification
shall be performed by a second tier subcontractor.
a. Submit name and qualifications of organization. Organization shall

have been regularly engaged in the testing of electrical materials,
devices, installations, and systems for a minimum of 5 years. The
organization shall have a calibration program, and test instruments
used shall be calibrated in accordance with NETA ATS.
b. Submit name and qualifications of the lead engineering technician

performing the required testing services. Include a list of three
comparable jobs performed by the technician with specific names and
telephone numbers for reference. Testing, inspection, calibration,
and adjustments shall be performed by an engineering technician,
certified by NETA or the National Institute for Certification in
Engineering Technologies (NICET) with a minimum of 5 years' experience
inspecting, testing, and calibrating electrical distribution and
generation equipment, systems, and devices.
1.4.2 Acceptance Tests and Inspections Reports
Submit certified copies of inspection reports and test reports. Reports

shall include certification of compliance with specified requirements,
identify deficiencies, and recommend corrective action when appropriate.
Type and neatly bind test reports to form a part of the final record.
Submit test reports documenting the results of each test not more than 10
days after test is completed.
1.4.3 Acceptance Test and Inspections Procedure
Submit test procedure reports for each item of equipment to be field

tested at least 45 days prior to planned testing date. Do not perform
testing until after test procedure has been approved.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ACCEPTANCE TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
Testing organization shall perform acceptance tests and inspections. Test

methods, procedures, and test values shall be performed and evaluated in
accordance with NETA ATS, the manufacturer's recommendations, and
paragraph entitled "Field Quality Control" of each applicable
specification section. Tests identified as optional in NETA ATS are not
required unless otherwise specified. Equipment shall be placed in service
only after completion of required tests and evaluation of the test results
have been completed. Contractor shall supply to the testing organization
complete sets of shop drawings, settings of adjustable devices, and other
information necessary for an accurate test and inspection of the system
prior to the performance of any final testing. Contracting Officer shall
be notified at least 14 days in advance of when tests will be conducted by
the testing organization. Perform acceptance tests and inspections on
applicable equipment.
3.2 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
Final acceptance of the system is contingent upon satisfactory completion

of acceptance tests and inspections.
3.3 PLACING EQUIPMENT IN SERVICE
A representative of the approved testing organization shall be present

when equipment tested by the organization is initially energized and
placed in service.
SECTION 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

02/14
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors,
Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

IEEE 81 (2012) Guide for Measuring Earth

Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth
Surface Potentials of a Ground System

Safety Code

ANSI C80.1 (2005) American National Standard for

Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)

Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)

NEMA FU 1 (2012) Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses
NEMA ICS 1 (2000; R 2008; E 2010) Standard for

Industrial Control and Systems: General
Requirements
NEMA ICS 2 (2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Standard for

Controllers, Contactors, and Overload
Relays Rated 600 V
NEMA ICS 4 (2010) Terminal Blocks
NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2011) Enclosures
NEMA KS 1 (2013) Enclosed and Miscellaneous

Distribution Equipment Switches (600 V
Maximum)

Induction Motors

NEMA RN 1 (2005; R 2013) Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC)

Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel
Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit
NEMA ST 20 (1992; R 1997) Standard for Dry-Type

Transformers for General Applications
NEMA TC 2 (2013) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl

Chloride (PVC) Conduit
NEMA TC 3 (2013) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride

(PVC) Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC
Conduit and Tubing
NEMA TP 1 (2002) Guide for Determining Energy

Efficiency for Distribution Transformers
NEMA WD 1 (1999; R 2005; R 2010) Standard for

General Color Requirements for Wiring
Devices
NEMA WD 6 (2012) Wiring Devices Dimensions

Specifications
NEMA Z535.4 (2011) American National Standard for

Product Safety Signs and Labels

3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National
Electrical Code
TIA-568-C.1 (2009; Add 2 2011; Add 1 2012) Commercial

Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard
TIA-569 (2012c; Addendum 1 2013; Errata 2013)

Commercial Building Standard for
Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
TIA-607 (2011b) Generic Telecommunications Bonding

and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer
Premises
29 CFR 1910.147 Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock Out/Tag

Out)
UL 1 (2005; Reprint Jul 2012) Standard for

Flexible Metal Conduit
UL 1063 (2006; Reprint Jul 2012) Machine-Tool

Wires and Cables
UL 1203 (2013) UL Standard for Safety

Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof
Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous
(Classified) Locations
UL 1242 (2006; Reprint Mar 2014) Standard for

Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit --
Steel
UL 1449 (2014) Surge Protective Devices
UL 1660 (2014) Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic

Conduit
UL 198M (2003; Reprint Feb 2013) Standard for

Mine-Duty Fuses
UL 20 (2010; Reprint Feb 2012) General-Use Snap

Switches
UL 360 (2013; Reprint Aug 2014) Liquid-Tight

Flexible Steel Conduit
UL 4248-1 (2007; Reprint Oct 2013) UL Standard for

Safety Fuseholders - Part 1: General
Requirements
UL 4248-12 (2007; Reprint Dec 2012) UL Standard for

Safety Fuseholders - Part 12: Class R
UL 44 (2014; Reprint Jun 2014)

Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables
UL 467 (2007) Grounding and Bonding Equipment
UL 486A-486B (2013; Reprint Feb 2014) Wire Connectors
UL 486C (2013; Reprint Feb 2014) Splicing Wire

Connectors
UL 489 (2013; Reprint Mar 2014) Molded-Case

Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches,
and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures
UL 498 (2012; Reprint Oct 2014) Attachment Plugs

and Receptacles
UL 5 (2011) Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings
UL 50 (2007; Reprint Apr 2012) Enclosures for

Electrical Equipment, Non-environmental
Considerations
UL 506 (2008; Reprint Oct 2013) Specialty

Transformers
UL 508 (1999; Reprint Oct 2013) Industrial

Control Equipment
UL 510 (2005; Reprint Jul 2013) Polyvinyl

Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber
Insulating Tape
UL 514A (2013) Metallic Outlet Boxes
UL 514B (2012; Reprint Nov 2014) Conduit, Tubing

and Cable Fittings
UL 514C (2014) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes,

Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers

Metal Conduit-Steel
UL 651 (2011; Reprint May 2014) Standard for

Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and
Fittings
UL 67 (2009; Reprint Nov 2014) Standard for

Panelboards
UL 674 (2011; Reprint Jul 2013) Electric Motors

and Generators for Use in Division 1
Hazardous (Classified) Locations
UL 797 (2007; Reprint Dec 2012) Electrical

Metallic Tubing -- Steel
UL 83 (2014) Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and
Cables

Service-Entrance Cables
UL 869A (2006) Reference Standard for Service

Equipment
UL 870 (2008; Reprint Feb 2013) Standard for

Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and
Associated Fittings
UL 943 (2006; Reprint Jun 2012) Ground-Fault

Circuit-Interrupters
UL 984 (1996; Reprint Sep 2005) Hermetic

Refrigerant Motor-Compressors
1.2 DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms

used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined in
IEEE 100.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Panelboards; G, A/E
Transformers; G, A/E
Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment

indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control
panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must
be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Identify circuit
terminals on wiring diagrams and indicate the internal wiring for
each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item
of equipment. Indicate on the drawings adequate clearance for
operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment
devices.
Wireways; G
Marking strips drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Receptacles; G
Circuit breakers; G
Switches; G
Transformers; G, A/E
Enclosed circuit breakers; G
Motor controllers; G
Manual motor starters; G
Telecommunications Grounding Busbar; G
Surge protective devices; G
SD-06 Test Reports
600-volt wiring test; G
Grounding system test; G
Transformer tests; G
Ground-fault receptacle test; G
SD-07 Certificates
Fuses; G
Transformer factory tests
Electrical Systems, Data Package 5; G
Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section

01 78 23, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein.
1.4.1 Fuses
Submit coordination data as specified in paragraph, FUSES of this section.

provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" or "must" had been
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Provide equipment,
materials, installation, and workmanship in accordance with the mandatory

material, design and workmanship and:
a. Have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years

prior to bid opening including applications of equipment and materials
under similar circumstances and of similar size.
b. Have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements,

manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period.
c. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required,
provide products of a single manufacturer; however, the component
parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer
unless stated in this section.
is furnished.

are not acceptable.
1.5 MAINTENANCE
1.5.1 Electrical Systems
Submit operation and maintenance manuals for electrical systems that

provide basic data relating to the design, operation, and maintenance of
the electrical distribution system for the building. Include the
following:
a. Single line diagram of the "as-built" building electrical system.
b. Schematic diagram of electrical control system (other than HVAC,

covered elsewhere).
c. Manufacturers' operating and maintenance manuals on active electrical

equipment.
1.6 WARRANTY
Provide equipment items supported by service organizations that are

1.7 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
Provide seismic details conforming to Section 13 48 00, SEISMIC PROTECTION

FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT and to Section 26 05 48.00 10, SEISMIC
PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
As a minimum, meet requirements of UL, where UL standards are established
for those items, and requirements of NFPA 70 for all materials, equipment,
and devices.
2.2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
Conform to the following:
2.2.1 Rigid Metallic Conduit
2.2.1.1 Rigid, Threaded Zinc-Coated Steel Conduit
ANSI C80.1, UL 6.
2.2.2 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
PVC Type EPC-40 in accordance with NEMA TC 2,UL 651.
2.2.3 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)
UL 1242, zinc-coated steel only.
2.2.4 Electrical, Zinc-Coated Steel Metallic Tubing (EMT)
UL 797, ANSI C80.3.
2.2.5 Plastic-Coated Rigid Steel and IMC Conduit
NEMA RN 1, Type 40( 40 mils thick).
2.2.6 Flexible Metal Conduit
UL 1.
2.2.6.1 Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit, Steel
UL 360.
2.2.7 Fittings for Metal Conduit, EMT, and Flexible Metal Conduit
UL 514B. Ferrous fittings: cadmium- or zinc-coated in accordance with

UL 514B.
2.2.7.1 Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC
Threaded-type. Split couplings unacceptable.
2.2.7.2 Fittings for EMT
Die Castcompression type.
2.2.8 Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
NEMA TC 3 for PVC, and UL 514B.
2.2.9 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit
UL 1660.
2.3 SURFACE RACEWAY
2.3.1 Surface Metal Raceway
UL 5, two-piece painted steel, totally enclosed, snap-cover type. Provide

multiple outlet-type raceway with grounding-type receptacle where
indicated. Provide receptacles as specified herein, spaced a minimum of
one every 18 inches.
2.4 OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS
UL 514A, cadmium- or zinc-coated, if ferrous metal. UL 514C, if

nonmetallic.
2.4.1 Floor Outlet Boxes
Provide the following:
a. Boxes: adjustable and concrete tight.
b. Each outlet: consisting of nonmetallic or cast-metal body with

threaded openings, or sheet-steel body with knockouts for conduits,
adjustable, brass flange ring, and cover plate, unless otherwise
indicated.
c. Telecommunications outlets: As indicated.
d. Receptacle outlets: consisting of flush aluminum or stainless steel

housing with duplex-type receptacle as specified herein.
e. Provide gaskets where necessary to ensure watertight installation.
2.4.2 Outlet Boxes for Telecommunications System
a. Standard type 4 11/16 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep.
b. Depth of boxes: large enough to allow manufacturers' recommended

conductor bend radii.
c. Outlet boxes for fiber optic telecommunication outlets: include a

minimum 3/8 inch deep single or two gang plaster ring as shown and
installed using a minimum 1 inch conduit system.
d. Outlet boxes for handicapped telecommunications station: 4 by 2 1/8 by

2 1/8 inches deep.
2.4.3 Clock Outlet for Use in Other Than Wired Clock System
a. Outlet box with plastic cover, where required, and single receptacle
with clock outlet plate.
b. Receptacle: recessed sufficiently within box to allow complete

insertion of standard cap, flush with plate.
c. Suitable clip or support for hanging clock: secured to top plate.
d. Material and finish of plate: as specified in paragraph DEVICE PLATES

of this section.
2.5 CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, AND PULL BOXES
Volume greater than 100 cubic inches, UL 50, hot-dip, zinc-coated, if

sheet steel.
2.6 WIRES AND CABLES
Provide wires and cables in accordance applicable requirements of NFPA 70

and UL for type of insulation, jacket, and conductor specified or
indicated. Do not use wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months
prior to date of delivery to site.
2.6.1 Conductors
a. Conductor sizes and capacities shown are based on copper, unless

b. Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter: stranded.
c. Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter: solid.
d. Conductors for remote control, alarm, and signal circuits, classes 1,

2, and 3: stranded unless specifically indicated otherwise.
e. All conductors: Copper.
2.6.1.1 Minimum Conductor Sizes
Provide minimum conductor size in accordance with the following:
a. Branch circuits: No. 12 AWG.
b. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits: No. 14 AWG.
c. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits: No. 16 AWG.
d. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits: No. 22

AWG.
2.6.2 Color Coding
Provide color coding for service, feeder, branch, control, and signaling
circuit conductors.
2.6.2.1 Ground and Neutral Conductors
Provide color coding of ground and neutral conductors as follows:
a. Grounding conductors: Green.
b. Neutral conductors: White.
c. Exception, where neutrals of more than one system are installed in
same raceway or box, other neutrals color coding: white with a

different colored (not green) stripe for each.
2.6.2.2 Ungrounded Conductors
Provide color coding of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems

as follows:
a. 208/120 volt, three-phase
(1) Phase A - black
(2) Phase B - red
(3) Phase C - blue
b. 480/277 volt, three-phase
(1) Phase A - brown
(2) Phase B - orange
(3) Phase C - yellow
c. 120/240 volt, single phase: Black and red
2.6.3 Insulation
Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70, provide

power and lighting wires rated for 600-volts, Type THWN/THHN conforming to
UL 83 or Type XHHW conforming to UL 44, except that grounding wire may be
type TW conforming to UL 83; remote-control and signal circuits: Type TW
or TF, conforming to UL 83. Where lighting fixtures require 90-degree
Centigrade (C) conductors, provide only conductors with 90-degree C
insulation or better.
2.6.4 Bonding Conductors
ASTM B1, solid bare copper wire for sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller diameter;
ASTM B8, Class B, stranded bare copper wire for sizes No. 6 AWG and larger
diameter.
2.6.4.1 Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB)
Provide a copper conductor TBB in accordance with TIA-607 with No. 6 AWG
minimum size, and sized at 2 kcmil per linear foot of conductor length up
to a maximum size of 3/0 AWG. Provide insulated TBB with insulation as
specified in the paragraph INSULATION and meeting the fire ratings of its
pathway.
2.6.4.2 Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications
Provide a copper conductor Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications

between the telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) and the
electrical service ground in accordance with TIA-607. Size the bonding
conductor for telecommunications the same as the TBB.
2.6.5 Service Entrance Cables
Service Entrance (SE) and Underground Service Entrance (USE) Cables, UL 854.
2.7 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS
UL 486A-486B for wire connectors and UL 510 for insulating tapes.

Connectors for No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter wires: insulated,
pressure-type in accordance with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C (twist-on
splicing connector). Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded
conductors.
2.8 DEVICE PLATES
a. UL listed, one-piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices

installed.
b. For metal outlet boxes, plates on unfinished walls: zinc-coated sheet

steel or cast metal having round or beveled edges.
c. For nonmetallic boxes and fittings, other suitable plates may be

provided.
d. Plates on finished walls: nylon or lexan, minimum 0.03 inch wall

thickness and same color as receptacle or toggle switch with which
they are mounted.
e. Screws: machine-type with countersunk heads in color to match finish

of plate.
f. Sectional type device plates are not be permitted.
g. Plates installed in wet locations: gasketed and UL listed for "wet

locations."
2.9 SWITCHES
2.9.1 Toggle Switches
NEMA WD 1, UL 20, single pole, double pole, three-way, and four-way,

totally enclosed with bodies of thermoplastic or thermoset plastic and
mounting strap with grounding screw. Include the following:
a. Handles: ivory thermoplastic.
b. Wiring terminals: screw-type, side-wired.
c. Contacts: silver-cadmium and contact arm - one-piece copper alloy.
d. Switches: rated quiet-type ac only, 120/277 volts, with current

rating and number of poles indicated.
2.9.2 Switch with Red Pilot Handle
NEMA WD 1. Provide the following:
a. Pilot lights that are integrally constructed as a part of the switch's
handle.
b. Pilot light color: red and illuminate whenever the switch is closed
or "on".
c. Pilot lighted switch: rated 20 amps and 120 volts or 277 volts as
indicated.
d. The circuit's neutral conductor to each switch with a pilot light.
2.9.3 Breakers Used as Switches
For 120- and 277-Volt fluorescent fixtures, mark breakers "SWD" in

accordance with UL 489.
2.9.4 Disconnect Switches
NEMA KS 1. Provide heavy duty-type switches where indicated, where

switches are rated higher than 240 volts, and for double-throw switches.
Utilize Class R fuseholders and fuses for fused switches, unless indicated
otherwise. Provide horsepower rated for switches serving as the
motor-disconnect means. Provide switches in NEMA 1 or 3R, enclosure as
indicated per NEMA ICS 6.
2.10 FUSES
NEMA FU 1. Provide complete set of fuses for each fusible switch.

Coordinate time-current characteristics curves of fuses serving motors or
connected in series with circuit breakers or other circuit protective
devices for proper operation. Submit coordination data for approval.
Provide fuses with a voltage rating not less than circuit voltage.
2.10.1 Fuseholders
Provide in accordance with UL 4248-1.
2.10.2 Cartridge Fuses, Current Limiting Type (Class R)
UL 198M, Class RK-5 time-delay type. Provide only Class R associated

fuseholders in accordance with UL 4248-12.
2.10.3 Cartridge Fuses, High-Interrupting Capacity, Current Limiting Type

(Classes J, L, and CC)
UL 198M, Class J for zero to 600 amperes, Class L for 601 to 6,000
amperes, and Class CC for zero to 30 amperes.
2.10.4 Cartridge Fuses, Current Limiting Type (Class T)
UL 198M, Class T for zero to 1,200 amperes, 300 volts; and zero to 800
amperes, 600 volts.
2.11 RECEPTACLES
a. UL 498, hard use (also designated heavy-duty), grounding-type.
b. Ratings and configurations: as indicated.
c. Bodies: ivory as per NEMA WD 1.
d. Face and body: thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting strap.
e. Dimensional requirements: per NEMA WD 6.
f. Screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals or of the solderless pressure

type having suitable conductor-release arrangement.
g. Grounding pole connected to mounting strap.
h. The receptacle: containing triple-wipe power contacts and double or

triple-wipe ground contacts.
2.11.1 Switched Duplex Receptacles
Provide separate terminals for each ungrounded pole. Top receptacle:

switched when installed.
2.11.2 Weatherproof Receptacles
Provide receptacles, UL listed for use in "wet locations". Include cast

metal box with gasketed, hinged, lockable and weatherproof while-in-use,
die-cast metal/aluminum cover plate.
2.11.3 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles
UL 943, duplex type for mounting in standard outlet box. Provide device
capable of detecting current leak of 6 milliamperes or greater and
tripping per requirements of UL 943 for Class A ground-fault circuit
interrupter devices. Provide screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals or
pre-wired (pigtail) leads.
2.11.4 Special Purpose Receptacles
Provide in ratings indicated. Furnish one matching plug with each

receptacle.
2.12 PANELBOARDS
Provide panelboards in accordance with the following:
a. UL 67 and UL 50 having a short-circuit current rating as indicated.
b. Panelboards for use as service disconnecting means: additionally

conform to UL 869A.
c. Panelboards: circuit breaker-equipped.
d. Designed such that individual breakers can be removed without

disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing
supplemental insulation supplied as means of obtaining clearances as
required by UL.
e. "Specific breaker placement" is required in panelboards to match the

breaker placement indicated in the panelboard schedule on the drawings.
f. Use of "Subfeed Breakers" is not acceptable unless specifically
g. Main breaker: "separately" mounted "above" or "below" branch

breakers.
h. Where "space only" is indicated, make provisions for future

installation of breakers.
i. Directories: indicate load served by each circuit in panelboard.
j. Directories: indicate source of service to panelboard (e.g., Panel PA

served from Panel MDP).
k. Provide new directories for existing panels modified by this project

as indicated.
l. Type directories and mount in holder behind transparent protective

covering.
m. Panelboards: listed and labeled for their intended use.
n. Panelboard nameplates: provided in accordance with paragraph FIELD

FABRICATED NAMEPLATES.
2.12.1 Enclosure
Provide panelboard enclosure in accordance with the following:
a. UL 50.
b. Cabinets mounted outdoors or flush-mounted: hot-dipped galvanized

after fabrication.
c. Cabinets: painted in accordance with paragraph PAINTING.
d. Outdoor cabinets: NEMA 3R raintight with conduit hubs welded to the

cabinet.
e. Front edges of cabinets: form-flanged or fitted with structural

shapes welded or riveted to the sheet steel, for supporting the
panelboard front.
f. All cabinets: fabricated such that no part of any surface on the

finished cabinet deviates from a true plane by more than 1/8 inch.
g. Holes: provided in the back of indoor surface-mounted cabinets, with

outside spacers and inside stiffeners, for mounting the cabinets with a
1/2 inch clear space between the back of the cabinet and the wall
surface.
h. Flush doors: mounted on hinges that expose only the hinge roll to
view when the door is closed.
i. Each door: fitted with a combined catch and lock, except that doors
over 24 inches long provided with a three-point latch having a knob
with a T-handle, and a cylinder lock.
j. Keys: two provided with each lock, with all locks keyed alike.
k. Finished-head cap screws: provided for mounting the panelboard fronts

on the cabinets.
2.12.2 Panelboard Buses
Buses shall be hard drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity and fully rated
the entire length of the bus.
Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers. Design main

buses and back pans so that breakers may be changed without machining,
drilling, or tapping. Provide isolated neutral bus in each panel for
connection of circuit neutral conductors. Provide separate ground bus
identified as equipment grounding bus per UL 67 for connecting grounding
conductors; bond to steel cabinet. In addition to equipment grounding
bus, provide second "isolated" ground bus, where indicated.
2.12.2.1 Panelboard Neutrals for Non-Linear Loads
Provide in accordance with the following:.
a. UL listed, with panelboard type specifically UL heat rise tested for

use on non-linear loads.
b. Panelboard: heat rise tested in accordance with UL 67, except with

the neutral assembly installed and carrying 200 percent of the phase
bus current during testing.
c. Verification of the testing procedure: provided upon request.
d. Two neutral assemblies paralleled together with cable is not

acceptable.
e. Nameplates for panelboard rated for use on non-linear loads: marked

"SUITABLE FOR NON-LINEAR LOADS" and in accordance with paragraph FIELD
FABRICATED NAMEPLATES.
f. Provide a neutral label with instructions for wiring the neutral of

panelboards rated for use on non-linear loads.
2.12.3 Circuit Breakers
UL 489, thermal magnetic-type having a minimum short-circuit current

rating equal to the short-circuit current rating of the panelboard in
which the circuit breaker will be mounted. Breaker terminals: UL listed
as suitable for type of conductor provided. Where indicated on the
drawings, provide circuit breakers with shunt trip devices. Series rated
circuit breakers and plug-in circuit breakers are unacceptable.
2.12.3.1 Multipole Breakers
Provide common trip-type with single operating handle. Design breaker

such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open.
Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any three adjacent
breaker poles are connected to Phases A, B, and C, respectively.
2.12.3.2 Circuit Breaker With Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter
UL 943 and NFPA 70. Provide with "push-to-test" button, visible

indication of tripped condition, and ability to detect and trip on current
imbalance of 6 milliamperes or greater per requirements of UL 943 for

Class A ground-fault circuit interrupter.
2.12.3.3 Circuit Breakers for HVAC Equipment
Provide circuit breakers for HVAC equipment having motors (group or

individual) marked for use with HACR type and UL listed as HACR type.
2.13 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
UL 489. Individual molded case circuit breakers with voltage and

continuous current ratings, number of poles, overload trip setting, and
short circuit current interrupting rating as indicated. Enclosure type as
indicated.
2.14 MOTOR SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTOR (MSCP)
Motor short-circuit protectors, also called motor circuit protectors

(MCPs): UL 508 and UL 489, and provided as shown. Provide MSCPs that
consist of an adjustable instantaneous trip circuit breaker used only in
conjunction with a combination motor controller which provides coordinated
motor branch-circuit overload and short-circuit protection. Rate MSCPs in
accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70.
2.15 TRANSFORMERS
Provide transformers in accordance with the following:
a. NEMA ST 20, general purpose, dry-type, self-cooled, ventilated.
b. Coil windings shall be copper.
c. Provide transformers in NEMA 1 enclosure.
d. Transformer insulation system:
(1) 220 degrees C insulation system for transformers 15 kVA and

greater, with temperature rise not exceeding 115 degrees C under
full-rated load in maximum ambient of 40 degrees C.
(2) 180 degrees C insulation for transformers rated 10 kVA and less,
with temperature rise not exceeding 115 degrees C under full-rated
load in maximum ambient of 40 degrees C.
e. Transformer of 115 degrees C temperature rise: capable of carrying

continuously 115 percent of nameplate kVA without exceeding insulation
rating.
f. Transformers: quiet type with maximum sound level at least 3 decibels

less than NEMA standard level for transformer ratings indicated.
2.15.1 Specified Transformer Efficiency
Transformers, indicated and specified with: 480V primary, 80 degrees C or

115 degrees C temperature rise, kVA ratings of 37.5 to 100 for single
phase or 30 to 500 for three phase, energy efficient type. Minimum
efficiency, based on factory test results: not be less than NEMA Class 1
efficiency as defined by NEMA TP 1 and DOE 2016 efficiency standards.
2.16 MOTORS
Provide motors in accordance with the following:
a. NEMA MG 1.
b. Hermetic-type sealed motor compressors: Also comply with UL 984.
c. Provide the size in terms of HP, or kVA, or full-load current, or a

combination of these characteristics, and other characteristics, of
each motor as indicated or specified.
d. Determine specific motor characteristics to ensure provision of

correctly sized starters and overload heaters.
e. Rate motors for operation on 208-volt, 3-phase circuits with a

terminal voltage rating of 200 volts, and those for operation on
480-volt, 3-phase circuits with a terminal voltage rating of 460
volts.
f. Use motors designed to operate at full capacity with voltage variation

of plus or minus 10 percent of motor voltage rating.
g. Unless otherwise indicated, use continuous duty type motors if rated 1

HP and above.
h. Where fuse protection is specifically recommended by the equipment

manufacturer, provide fused switches in lieu of non-fused switches
indicated.
2.16.1 High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors
Single-phase fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors: high

efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11.
In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or
overall efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment with
motor to meet the overall system rating indicated.
2.16.2 Premium Efficiency Polyphase Motors
Select polyphase motors based on high efficiency characteristics relative

to typical characteristics and applications as listed in NEMA MG 10. In
addition, continuous rated, polyphase squirrel-cage medium induction
motors must meet the requirements for premium efficiency electric motors
in accordance with NEMA MG 1, including the NEMA full load efficiency
ratings. In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal
or overall efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment
with motor to meet the overall system rating indicated.
2.16.3 Motor Sizes
Provide size for duty to be performed, not exceeding the full-load

nameplate current rating when driven equipment is operated at specified
capacity under most severe conditions likely to be encountered. When
motor size provided differs from size indicated or specified, make
adjustments to wiring, disconnect devices, and branch circuit protection
to accommodate equipment actually provided. Provide controllers for
motors rated 1-hp and above with electronic phase-voltage monitors
designed to protect motors from phase-loss, undervoltage, and
overvoltage. Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a

time adjustable restart relay.
2.16.4 Wiring and Conduit
Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an

integral part of the equipment. Provide power wiring and conduit for
field-installed equipment, and motor control equipment forming part of
motor control centers or switchgear assemblies, the conduit and wiring
connecting such centers, assemblies, or other power sources to equipment
as specified herein. Power wiring and conduit: conform to the
requirements specified herein. Control wiring: provided under, and
conform to, the requirements of the section specifying the associated
equipment.
2.17 MOTOR CONTROLLERS
Provide motor controllers in accordance with the following:
a. UL 508, NEMA ICS 1, and NEMA ICS 2.
b. Provide controllers with thermal overload protection in each phase,

and one spare normally open auxiliary contact, and one spare normally
closed auxiliary contact.
c. Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp and above with electronic
phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss,
undervoltage, and overvoltage.
d. Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time

adjustable restart relay.
e. When used with pressure, float, or similar automatic-type or

maintained-contact switch, provide a hand/off/automatic selector
switch with the controller.
f. Connections to selector switch: wired such that only normal automatic

regulatory control devices are bypassed when switch is in "hand"
position.
g. Safety control devices, such as low and high pressure cutouts, high
temperature cutouts, and motor overload protective devices: connected
in motor control circuit in "hand" and "automatic" positions.
h. Control circuit connections to hand/off/automatic selector switch or

to more than one automatic regulatory control device: made in
accordance with indicated or manufacturer's approved wiring diagram.
i. Provide selector switch with the means for locking in any position.
j. Provide a disconnecting means, capable of being locked in the open

position, for the motor that is located in sight from the motor
location and the driven machinery location. As an alternative,
provide a motor controller disconnect, capable of being locked in the
open position, to serve as the disconnecting means for the motor if it
is in sight from the motor location and the driven machinery location.
l. Overload protective devices: provide adequate protection to motor

windings; be thermal inverse-time-limit type; and include manual
reset-type pushbutton on outside of motor controller case.
m. Cover of combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit

breaker: interlocked with operating handle of switch or circuit
breaker so that cover cannot be opened unless handle of switch or
circuit breaker is in "off" position.
n. Minimum short circuit withstand rating of combination motor

controller: 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes.
o. Provide controllers in hazardous locations with classifications as

indicated.
2.17.1 Control Wiring
Provide control wiring in accordance with the following:
a. All control wire: stranded tinned copper switchboard wire with

600-volt flame-retardant insulation Type SIS meeting UL 44, or Type
MTW meeting UL 1063, and passing the VW-1 flame tests included in
those standards.
b. Hinge wire: Class K stranding.
c. Current transformer secondary leads: not smaller than No. 10 AWG.
d. Control wire minimum size: No. 14 AWG.
e. Power wiring for 480-volt circuits and below: the same type as
control wiring with No. 12 AWG minimum size.
f. Provide wiring and terminal arrangement on the terminal blocks to

permit the individual conductors of each external cable to be
terminated on adjacent terminal points.
2.17.2 Control Circuit Terminal Blocks
Provide control circuit terminal blocks in accordance with the following:
a. NEMA ICS 4.
b. Control circuit terminal blocks for control wiring: molded or

fabricated type with barriers, rated not less than 600 volts.
c. Provide terminals with removable binding, fillister or washer head

screw type, or of the stud type with contact and locking nuts.
d. Terminals: not less than No. 10 in size with sufficient length and
space for connecting at least two indented terminals for 10 AWG
conductors to each terminal.
e. Terminal arrangement: subject to the approval of the Contracting

Officer with not less than four (4) spare terminals or 10 percent,
whichever is greater, provided on each block or group of blocks.
f. Modular, pull apart, terminal blocks are acceptable provided they are
of the channel or rail-mounted type.
g. Submit data showing that any proposed alternate will accommodate the
specified number of wires, are of adequate current-carrying capacity,

and are constructed to assure positive contact between
current-carrying parts.
2.17.2.1 Types of Terminal Blocks
a. Short-Circuiting Type: Short-circuiting type terminal blocks:

furnished for all current transformer secondary leads with provision
for shorting together all leads from each current transformer without
first opening any circuit. Terminal blocks: comply with the
requirements of paragraph CONTROL CIRCUIT TERMINAL BLOCKS above.
b. Load Type: Load terminal blocks rated not less than 600 volts and of
adequate capacity: provided for the conductors for NEMA Size 3 and
smaller motor controllers and for other power circuits, except those
for feeder tap units. Provide terminals of either the stud type with
contact nuts and locking nuts or of the removable screw type, having
length and space for at least two indented terminals of the size
required on the conductors to be terminated. For conductors rated
more than 50 amperes, provide screws with hexagonal heads. Conducting
parts between connected terminals must have adequate contact surface
and cross-section to operate without overheating. Provide eEach
connected terminal with the circuit designation or wire number placed
on or near the terminal in permanent contrasting color.
2.17.3 Control Circuits
Control circuits: maximum voltage of 120 volts derived from control

transformer in same enclosure. Transformers: conform to UL 506, as
applicable. Transformers, other than transformers in bridge circuits:
provide primaries wound for voltage available and secondaries wound for
correct control circuit voltage. Size transformers so that 80 percent of
rated capacity equals connected load. Provide disconnect switch on
primary side.. Provide one fused secondary lead with the other lead
grounded.
2.17.4 Enclosures for Motor Controllers
NEMA ICS 6.
2.17.5 Multiple-Speed Motor Controllers and Reversible Motor Controllers
Across-the-line-type, electrically and mechanically interlocked.

Multiple-speed controllers: include compelling relays and
multiple-button, station-type with pilot lights for each speed.
2.17.6 Pushbutton Stations
Provide with "start/stop" momentary contacts having one normally open and
one normally closed set of contacts, and red lights to indicate when motor
is running. Stations: heavy duty, oil-tight design.
2.17.7 Pilot and Indicating Lights
Provide LED cluster lamps.
2.18 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS (MOTOR RATED SWITCHES)
Single, double, or three pole designed for flush or surface mounting with
overload protection and pilot lights.
2.18.1 Pilot Lights
Provide yoke-mounted, seven element LED cluster light module. Color: in

accordance with NEMA ICS 2.
2.19 LOCKOUT REQUIREMENTS
Provide disconnecting means capable of being locked out for machines and
other equipment to prevent unexpected startup or release of stored energy
in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.147. Comply with requirements of Division
23, "Mechanical" for mechanical isolation of machines and other equipment.
2.20 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Provide system of telecommunications wire-supporting structures (pathway),

including: outlet boxes, conduits with pull wires wireways, cable trays,
and other accessories for telecommunications outlets and pathway in
accordance with TIA-569 and as specified herein. Additional
telecommunications requirements are specified in Section 27 10 00,
BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM.
2.21 GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT
2.21.1 Ground Rods
UL 467. Ground rods: Copper-clad steel with minimum diameter of 3/4 inch
and minimum length 10 feet. Sectional ground rods are permitted.
2.21.2 Ground Bus
Copper ground bus: provided in the electrical equipment rooms as

indicated.
2.21.3 Telecommunications Grounding Busbar
Provide corrosion-resistant grounding busbar suitable for indoor

installation in accordance with TIA-607. Busbars: plated for reduced
contact resistance. If not plated, clean the busbar prior to fastening
the conductors to the busbar and apply an anti-oxidant to the contact area
to control corrosion and reduce contact resistance. Provide a
telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) in the telecommunications
entrance facility and a (TGB) in all other telecommunications rooms and
equipment rooms. The telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) and
the telecommunications grounding busbar (TGB): sized in accordance with
the immediate application requirements and with consideration of future
growth. Provide telecommunications grounding busbars with the following:
a. Predrilled copper busbar provided with holes for use with standard
sized lugs.
b. Minimum dimensions as indicated.
c. Listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
2.22 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Electrical materials, equipment, and devices for installation in hazardous
locations, as defined by NFPA 70: specifically approved by Underwriters'

Laboratories, Inc., or Factory Mutual for particular "Class," "Division,"
and "Group" of hazardous locations involved. Boundaries and
classifications of hazardous locations: as indicated. Equipment in
hazardous locations: comply with UL 1203 for electrical equipment and
industrial controls and UL 674 for motors.
Provide on each item of equipment a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's

acceptable.
Provide field fabricated nameplates in accordance with the following:
a. ASTM D709.
b. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure,

relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the
drawings.
c. Each nameplate inscription: identify the function and, when

applicable, the position.
d. Nameplates: melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black

center core.
e. Provide red laminated plastic label with white center core where
indicated.
f. Surface: matte finish. Corners: square. Accurately align lettering

and engrave into the core.
g. Minimum size of nameplates: one by 2.5 inches.
h. Lettering size and style: a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block
style.
2.25 WARNING SIGNS
Provide warning signs for flash protection in accordance with NFPA 70E and
NEMA Z535.4 for switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, and
motor control centers that are in other than dwelling occupancies and are
likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while
energized. Provide field installed signs to warn qualified persons of
potential electric arc flash hazards when warning signs are not provided
by the manufacturer. Provide marking that is clearly visible to qualified
persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the
equipment.
2.26 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS
Provide firestopping around electrical penetrations in accordance with

Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING .
2.27 WIREWAYS
UL 870. Material: steel galvanized 16 gauge for heights and depths up to

6 by 6 inches, and 14 gauge for heights and depths up to 12 by 12 inches.
Provide in length required for the application with screw- cover NEMA
enclosure per NEMA ICS 6.
2.28 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
Provide parallel type surge protective devices (SPD) which comply with
UL 1449 at the service entrance. Provide surge protectors in a NEMA 1
enclosure per NEMA ICS 6. Use Type 1 or Type 2 SPD and connect on the
load side of a dedicated circuit breaker.
Provide the following modes of protection:
FOR SINGLE PHASE AND THREE PHASE WYE CONNECTED SYSTEMS-

Phase to phase ( L-L )
Each phase to neutral ( L-N )
Neutral to ground ( N-G )
Phase to ground ( L-G )
SPDs at the service entrance: provide with a minimum surge current rating
of 80,000 amperes for L-L mode minimum and 40,000 amperes for other modes
(L-N, L-G, and N-G).
Provide SPDs. Maximum L-N, L-G, and N-G Voltage Protection Rating:
700V for 208Y/120V, three phase system

1,200V for 480Y/277V, three phase system
Maximum L-L Voltage Protection Rating:

The minimum MCOV (Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage) rating for L-N and
L-G modes of operation: 120% of nominal voltage for 240 volts and below;
115% of nominal voltage above 240 volts to 480 volts.
Provide factory-applied finish on electrical equipment in accordance with

the following:
a. NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements as

specified herein.
b. Interior and exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures:

thoroughly cleaned followed by a rust-inhibitive phosphatizing or
equivalent treatment prior to painting.
c. Exterior surfaces: free from holes, seams, dents, weld marks, loose
scale or other imperfections.
d. Interior surfaces: receive not less than one coat of

corrosion-resisting paint in accordance with the manufacturer's
standard practice.
e. Exterior surfaces: primed, filled where necessary, and given not less
than two coats baked enamel with semigloss finish.
f. Equipment located indoors: ANSI Light Gray, and equipment located

outdoors: ANSI Light Gray or Dark Gray.
g. Provide manufacturer's coatings for touch-up work and as specified in

paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING.
2.30 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
2.30.1 Transformer Factory Tests
Submittal: include routine NEMA ST 20 transformer test results on each

transformer and also provide the results of NEMA "design" and "prototype"
tests that were made on transformers electrically and mechanically equal
to those specified.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Electrical installations, including weatherproof and hazardous locations

and ducts, plenums and other air-handling spaces: conform to requirements
of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and to requirements specified herein.
3.1.1 Underground Service
Underground service conductors and associated conduit: continuous from

service entrance equipment to outdoor power system connection.
3.1.2 Service Entrance Identification
Service entrance disconnect devices, switches, and enclosures: labeled

and identified as such.
3.1.2.1 Labels
Wherever work results in service entrance disconnect devices in more than

one enclosure, as permitted by NFPA 70, label each enclosure, new and
existing, as one of several enclosures containing service entrance
disconnect devices. Label, at minimum: indicate number of service
disconnect devices housed by enclosure and indicate total number of
enclosures that contain service disconnect devices. Provide laminated
plastic labels conforming to paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES. Use
lettering of at least 0.25 inch in height, and engrave on black-on-white
matte finish. Service entrance disconnect devices in more than one
enclosure: provided only as permitted by NFPA 70.
3.1.3 Wiring Methods
Provide insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit, IMC, rigid

nonmetallic conduit, or EMT, except where specifically indicated or
specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70 to be installed otherwise.
Grounding conductor: separate from electrical system neutral conductor.
Provide insulated green equipment grounding conductor for circuit(s)
installed in conduit and raceways. Minimum conduit size: 3/4 inch in
diameter for low voltage lighting and power circuits. Vertical

distribution in multiple story buildings: made with metal conduit in
fire-rated shafts, with metal conduit extending through shafts for minimum
distance of 6 inches. Firestop conduit which penetrates fire-rated walls,
fire-rated partitions, or fire-rated floors in accordance with Section
07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.3.1 Pull Wire
Install pull wires in empty conduits. Pull wire: plastic having minimum
200-pound force tensile strength. Leave minimum 36 inches of slack at
each end of pull wire.
3.1.4 Conduit Installation
Unless indicated otherwise, conceal conduit under floor slabs and within
finished walls, ceilings, and floors. Keep conduit minimum 6 inches away
from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install conduit
parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural
members where located above accessible ceilings and where conduit will be
visible after completion of project. Run conduits under floor slab as if
exposed.
3.1.4.1 Restrictions Applicable to EMT
a. Do not install underground.
b. Do not encase in concrete, mortar, grout, or other cementitious

materials.
c. Do not use in areas subject to severe physical damage including but

not limited to equipment rooms where moving or replacing equipment
could physically damage the EMT.
d. Do not use in hazardous areas.
e. Do not use outdoors.
f. Do not use in fire pump rooms.
g. Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the
effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).
3.1.4.2 Restrictions Applicable to Nonmetallic Conduit
a. PVC Schedule 40 and PVC Schedule 80
(1) Do not use in areas where subject to severe physical damage,

including but not limited to, mechanical equipment rooms,
electrical equipment rooms, hospitals, power plants, missile
magazines, and other such areas.
(2) Do not use in hazardous (classified) areas.
(3) Do not use in fire pump rooms.
(4) Do not use in penetrating fire-rated walls or partitions, or

fire-rated floors.
(5) Do not use above grade, except where allowed in this section for
rising through floor slab or indicated otherwise.
(6) Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the
effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).
3.1.4.3 Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit
Use only as specified in paragraph FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS. Do not use when

the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude
Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).
3.1.4.4 Underground Conduit
Plastic-coated rigid steel; plastic-coated steel IMC; PVC, Type EPC-40.

Convert nonmetallic conduit, other than PVC Schedule 40 or 80, to
plastic-coated rigid, or IMC, steel conduit before rising through floor
slab. Plastic coating: extend minimum 6 inches above floor.
3.1.4.5 Conduit for Circuits Rated Greater Than 600 Volts
Rigid metal conduit or IMC only.
3.1.4.6 Conduit Installed Under Floor Slabs
Conduit run under floor slab: located a minimum of 12 inches below the
vapor barrier. Seal around conduits at penetrations thru vapor barrier.
3.1.4.7 Conduit Through Floor Slabs
Where conduits rise through floor slabs, do not allow curved portion of
bends to be visible above finished slab.
3.1.4.8 Conduit Installed in Concrete Floor Slabs
PVC, Type EPC-40, unless indicated otherwise. Locate so as not to

adversely affect structural strength of slabs. Install conduit within
middle one-third of concrete slab. Do not stack conduits. Space conduits
horizontally not closer than three diameters, except at cabinet
locations. Curved portions of bends must not be visible above finish
slab. Increase slab thickness as necessary to provide minimum one inch
cover over conduit. Where embedded conduits cross building and/or
expansion joints, provide suitable watertight expansion/deflection
fittings and bonding jumpers. Expansion/deflection fittings must allow
horizontal and vertical movement of raceway. Conduit larger than one inch
trade size: installed parallel with or at right angles to main
reinforcement; when at right angles to reinforcement, install conduit
close to one of supports of slab. Where nonmetallic conduit is used,
convert raceway to plastic coated rigid steel or plastic coated steel IMC
before rising above floor, unless specifically indicated.
3.1.4.9 Stub-Ups
Provide conduits stubbed up through concrete floor for connection to

free-standing equipment with adjustable top or coupling threaded inside
for plugs, set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment
in rigid steel conduit, except that flexible metal conduit may be used 6
inches above floor. Where no equipment connections are made, install
screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs in conduit end.
3.1.4.10 Conduit Support
Support conduit by pipe straps, wall brackets, threaded rod conduit

hangers, or ceiling trapeze. Fasten by wood screws to wood; by toggle
bolts on hollow masonry units; by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on
concrete or brick; and by machine screws, welded threaded studs, or
spring-tension clamps on steel work. Threaded C-clamps may be used on
rigid steel conduit only. Do not weld conduits or pipe straps to steel
structures. Do not exceed one-fourth proof test load for load applied to
fasteners. Provide vibration resistant and shock-resistant fasteners
attached to concrete ceiling. Do not cut main reinforcing bars for any
holes cut to depth of more than 1 1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams
or to depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete joints. Fill unused holes.
In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. In
suspended-ceiling construction, run conduit above ceiling. Do not support
conduit by ceiling support system. Conduit and box systems: supported
independently of both (a) tie wires supporting ceiling grid system, and
(b) ceiling grid system into which ceiling panels are placed. Do not
share supporting means between electrical raceways and mechanical piping
or ducts. Coordinate installationwith above-ceiling mechanical systems to
assure maximum accessibility to all systems. Spring-steel fasteners may
be used for lighting branch circuit conduit supports in suspended ceilings
in dry locations. Where conduit crosses building expansion joints, provide
suitable expansion fitting that maintains conduit electrical continuity by
bonding jumpers or other means. For conduits greater than 2 1/2 inches
inside diameter, provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the
equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in
the downward direction.
3.1.4.11 Directional Changes in Conduit Runs
Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast-metal

fittings. Make field-made bends and offsets with hickey or
conduit-bending machine. Do not install crushed or deformed conduits.
Avoid trapped conduits. Prevent plaster, dirt, or trash from lodging in
conduits, boxes, fittings, and equipment during construction. Free
clogged conduits of obstructions.
3.1.4.12 Locknuts and Bushings
Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where
required by NFPA 70, where insulated bushings are used, and where bushings
cannot be brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, use at least
minimum single locknut and bushing. Provide locknuts with sharp edges for
digging into wall of metal enclosures. Install bushings on ends of
conduits, and provide insulating type where required by NFPA 70.
3.1.4.13 Flexible Connections
Provide flexible steel conduit between 3 and 6 feet in length for recessed
and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration,
noise transmission, or movement; and for motors. Install flexible conduit
to allow 20 percent slack. Minimum flexible steel conduit size: 1/2 inch
diameter. Provide liquidtight flexible conduit in wet and damp locations
for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, movement or
motors. Provide separate ground conductor across flexible connections.
3.1.4.14 Telecommunications and Signal System Pathway
Install telecommunications pathway in accordance with TIA-569.
a. Horizontal Pathway: Telecommunications pathways from the work area to

the telecommunications room: installed and cabling length
requirements in accordance with TIA-568-C.1. Size conduits, wireways,
and cable trays in accordance with TIA-569 and as indicated.
b. Backbone Pathway: Telecommunication pathways from the

telecommunications entrance facility to telecommunications rooms, and,
telecommunications equipment rooms (backbone cabling): installed in
accordance with TIA-569. Size conduits, wireways, and cable trays for
telecommunications risers in accordance with TIA-569 and as indicated.
3.1.5 Busway Installation
Comply at minimum with NFPA 70. Install busways parallel with or at right
angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members. Support busways at 5
foot maximum intervals, and brace to prevent lateral movement. Provide
fixed type hinges on risers; spring-type are unacceptable. Provide
flanges where busway makes penetrations through walls and floors, and seal
to maintain smoke and fire ratings. Provide waterproof curb where busway
riser passes through floor. Seal gaps with fire-rated foam and caulk.
Provide expansion joints, but only where bus duct crosses building
expansion joints. Provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the
equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in
the downward direction.
3.1.6 Telecommunications Cable Support Installation
Install open top and closed ring cable supports on 4 ft to 5 ft centers to

adequately support and distribute the cable’s weight. Use these types of
supports to support a maximum of 50 0.25 in diameter cables. Install
suspended cables with at least 3 in of clear vertical space above the
ceiling tiles and support channels (T-bars). Open top and closed ring
cable supports: suspended from or attached to the structural ceiling or
walls with hardware or other installation aids specifically designed to
support their weight.
3.1.7 Boxes, Outlets, and Supports
Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling
of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. Boxes
for metallic raceways: cast-metal, hub-type when located in wet
locations, when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces, when
surface mounted on interior walls exposed up to 7 feet above floors and
walkways, or when installed in hazardous areas and when specifically
indicated. Boxes in other locations: sheet steel, except that aluminum
boxes may be used with aluminum conduit, and nonmetallic boxes may be used
with nonmetallic conduit system. Provide each box with volume required by
NFPA 70 for number of conductors enclosed in box. Boxes for mounting
lighting fixtures: minimum 4 inches square, or octagonal, except that
smaller boxes may be installed as required by fixture configurations, as
approved. Boxes for use in masonry-block or tile walls: square-cornered,
tile-type, or standard boxes having square-cornered, tile-type covers.
Provide gaskets for cast-metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes
installed flush with outside of exterior surfaces. Provide separate boxes
for flush or recessed fixtures when required by fixture terminal operating
temperature; provide readily removable fixturesfor access to boxes unless

ceiling access panels are provided. Support boxes and pendants for
surface-mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings independently of ceiling
supports. Fasten boxes and supports with wood screws on wood, with bolts
and expansion shields on concrete or brick, with toggle bolts on hollow
masonry units, and with machine screws or welded studs on steel. Threaded
studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lockwashers and nuts or
nail-type nylon anchors may be used in lieu of wood screws, expansion
shields, or machine screws. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded
to raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture
support; support sheet metal boxes directly from building structure or by
bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on
opposite sides of box, and support raceway with approved-type fastener
maximum 24 inches from box. When penetrating reinforced concrete members,
avoid cutting reinforcing steel.
3.1.7.1 Boxes
Boxes for use with raceway systems: minimum 1 1/2 inches deep, except
where shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved.
Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets: minimum 4 inches square,
except that 4 by 2 inch boxes may be used where only one raceway enters
outlet. Telecommunications outlets: a minimum of 4 11/16 inches square
by 2 1/8 inches deep, except for wall mounted telephones and outlet boxes
for handicap telephone stations. Mount outlet boxes flush in finished
walls.
3.1.7.2 Pull Boxes
Construct of at least minimum size required by NFPA 70 of code-gauge

aluminum or galvanized sheet steel, and compatible with nonmetallic
raceway systems, except where cast-metal boxes are required in locations
specified herein. Provide boxes with screw-fastened covers. Where
several feeders pass through common pull box, tag feeders to indicate
clearly electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.
3.1.7.3 Extension Rings
Extension rings are not permitted for new construction. Use only on
existing boxes in concealed conduit systems where wall is furred out for
new finish.
3.1.8 Mounting Heights
Mount panelboards, enclosed circuit breakers, motor controller and

disconnecting switches so height of operating handle at its highest
position is maximum 78 inches above floor. Mount lighting switches and
handicapped telecommunications stations 48 inches above finished floor.
Mount receptacles and telecommunications outlets 18 inches above finished
floor, unless otherwise indicated. Mount other devices as indicated.
Measure mounting heights of wiring devices and outlets in non-hazardous
areas to center of device or outlet.
3.1.9 Conductor Identification
Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap, splice,

or termination is made. For conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller diameter,
provide color coding by factory-applied, color-impregnated insulation.
For conductors No. 4 AWG and larger diameter, provide color coding by
plastic-coated, self-sticking markers; colored nylon cable ties and

plates; or heat shrink-type sleeves.
3.1.9.1 Marking Strips
Provide marking strips in accordance with the following:
a. Provide white or other light-colored plastic marking strips, fastened

by screws to each terminal block, for wire designations.
b. Use permanent ink for the wire numbers
c. Provide reversible marking strips to permit marking both sides, or

provide two marking strips with each block.
d. Size marking strips to accommodate the two sets of wire numbers.
e. Assign a device designation in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 to each

device to which a connection is made. Mark each device terminal to
which a connection is made with a distinct terminal marking
corresponding to the wire designation used on the Contractor's
schematic and connection diagrams.
f. The wire (terminal point) designations used on the Contractor's wiring

diagrams and printed on terminal block marking strips may be according
to the Contractor's standard practice; however, provide additional
wire and cable designations for identification of remote (external)
circuits for the Government's wire designations.
g. Prints of the marking strips drawings submitted for approval will be

so marked and returned to the Contractor for addition of the
designations to the terminal strips and tracings, along with any
rearrangement of points required.
3.1.10 Splices
Make splices in accessible locations. Make splices in conductors No. 10

AWG and smaller diameter with insulated, pressure-type connector. Make
splices in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter with solderless
connector, and cover with insulation material equivalent to conductor
insulation.
3.1.11 Covers and Device Plates
Install with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces

without use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings are not
permitted. Install plates with alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch. Use of
sectional-type device plates are not permitted. Provide gasket for plates
installed in wet locations.
3.1.12 Electrical Penetrations
Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated

walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.13 Grounding and Bonding
Provide in accordance with NFPA 70. Ground exposed, non-current-carrying
metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems,

grounding conductor in metallic and nonmetallic raceways,
telecommunications system grounds, and neutral conductor of wiring systems.
Make ground connection at main service equipment, and extend grounding
conductor to point of entrance of metallic water service. Make connection
to water pipe by suitable ground clamp or lug connection to plugged tee.
If flanged pipes are encountered, make connection with lug bolted to
street side of flanged connection. Supplement metallic water service
grounding system with additional made electrode in compliance with NFPA 70.
Make ground connection to driven ground rods on exterior of building. In
addition to the requirements specified herein, provide telecommunications
grounding in accordance with TIA-607. Where ground fault protection is
employed, ensure that connection of ground and neutral does not interfere
with correct operation of fault protection.
3.1.13.1 Ground Rods
Provide cone pointed ground rods. Measure the resistance to ground using
the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE 81. Do not exceed 25 ohms
under normally dry conditions for the maximum resistance of a driven
ground. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a single rod,two
additional rods, spaced on center, not less than twice the distance of the
length of the rod.
3.1.13.2 Grounding Connections
Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally

inaccessible, excepting specifically those connections for which access
for periodic testing is required, by exothermic weld or compression
connector.
a. Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld

manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up"
or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not
acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic
welds.
b. Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to

provide the correct circumferential pressure. Provide tools and dies
as recommended by the manufacturer. Use an embossing die code or
other standard method to provide visible indication that a connector
has been adequately compressed on the ground wire.
3.1.13.3 Ground Bus
Provide a copper ground bus in the electrical equipment rooms as

indicated. Noncurrent-carrying metal parts of transformer neutrals and
other electrical equipment: effectively grounded by bonding to the ground
bus. Bond the ground bus to both the entrance ground, and to a ground rod
or rods as specified above having the upper ends terminating approximately
4 inches above the floor. Make connections and splices of the brazed,
welded, bolted, or pressure-connector type, except use pressure connectors
or bolted connections for connections to removable equipment.
3.1.13.4 Resistance
Maximum resistance-to-ground of grounding system: do not exceed 5 ohms

under dry conditions. Where resistance obtained exceeds 5 ohms, contact
Contracting Officer for further instructions.
3.1.13.5 Telecommunications System
Provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with the following:
a. Telecommunications Grounding Busbars: Provide a telecommunications

main grounding busbar (TMGB) as indicated in the telecommunications
entrance facility. Install the TMGB as close to the electrical
service entrance grounding connection as practicable. Provide a
telecommunications grounding busbar (TGB) as indicated, in all other
telecommunications rooms and telecommunications equipment rooms.
Install the TGB as close to the telecommunications room panelboard as
practicable, when equipped. Where a panelboard for telecommunications
equipment is not installed in the telecommunications room, locate the
TGB near the backbone cabling and associated terminations. In
addition, locate the TGB to provide for the shortest and straightest
routing of the grounding conductors. Where a panelboard for
telecommunications equipment is located within the same room or space
as a TGB, bond that panelboard’s alternating current equipment ground
(ACEG) bus (when equipped) or the panelboard enclosure to the TGB.
Install telecommunications grounding busbars to maintain clearances as
required by NFPA 70 and insulated from its support. A minimum of 2
inches separation from the wall is recommended to allow access to the
rear of the busbar and adjust the mounting height to accommodate
overhead or underfloor cable routing.
b. Telecommunications Bonding Conductors: Provide main

telecommunications service equipment ground consisting of separate
bonding conductor for telecommunications, between the TMGB and readily
accessible grounding connection of the electrical service. Grounding
and bonding conductors should not be placed in ferrous metallic
conduit. If it is necessary to place grounding and bonding conductors
in ferrous metallic conduit that exceeds3 feet in length, bond the
conductors to each end of the conduit using a grounding bushing or a
No. 6 AWG conductor, minimum. Provide a telecommunications bonding
backbone (TBB) that originates at the TMGB extends throughout the
building using the telecommunications backbone pathways, and connects
to the TGBs in all telecommunications rooms and equipment rooms or as
indicated. Install the TBB conductors such that they are protected
from physical and mechanical damage. The TBB conductors should be
installed without splices and routed in the shortest possible
straight-line path. Make the bonding conductor between a TBB and a
TGB continuous. Where splices are necessary, the number of splices
should be a minimum. Make the splices accessible and located in
telecommunications spaces. Connect joined segments of a TBB using
exothermic welding, irreversible compression-type connectors, or
equivalent. Install all joints to be adequately supported and
protected from damage. Whenever two or more TBBs are used within a
multistory building, bond the TBBs together with a grounding equalizer
(GE) at the top floor and at a minimum of every third floor in
between. Do not connect the TBB and GE to the pathway ground, except
at the TMGB or the TGB.
c. Telecommunications Grounding Connections: Telecommunications

grounding connections to the TMGB or TGB: utilize listed compression
two-hole lugs, exothermic welding, suitable and equivalent one hole
non-twisting lugs, or other irreversible compression type
connections. Bond all metallic pathways, cabinets, and racks for
telecommunications cabling and interconnecting hardware located within
the same room or space as the TMGB or TGB to the TMGB or TGB
respectively. In a metal frame (structural steel) building, where the
steel framework is readily accessible within the room; bond each TMGB
and TGB to the vertical steel metal frame using a minimum No. 6 AWG
conductor. Where the metal frame is external to the room and readily
accessible, bond the metal frame to the TGB or TMGB with a minimum No.
6 AWG conductor. When practicable because of shorter distances and,
where horizontal steel members are permanently electrically bonded to
vertical column members, the TGB may be bonded to these horizontal
members in lieu of the vertical column members. All connectors used
for bonding to the metal frame of a building must be listed for the
intended purpose.
3.1.14 Equipment Connections
Provide power wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment
under this section of the specification. Except as otherwise specifically
noted or specified, automatic control wiring, control devices, and
protective devices within the control circuitry are not included in this
section of the specifications and are provided under the section
specifying the associated equipment.
3.1.15 Elevator
Provide circuit to line terminals of elevator controller, and disconnect

switch on line side of controller, outlet for control power, outlet
receptacle and work light at midheight of elevator shaft, and work light
and outlet receptacle in elevator pit.
3.1.16 Government-Furnished Equipment
Contractor make connections to Government-furnished equipment to make

equipment operate as intended, including providing miscellaneous items
such as plugs, receptacles, wire, cable, conduit, flexible conduit, and
outlet boxes or fittings.
3.1.17 Repair of Existing Work
Perform repair of existing work, demolition, and modification of existing

electrical distribution systems as follows:
3.1.17.1 Workmanship
Lay out work in advance. Exercise care where cutting, channeling,

chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, or other
surfaces is necessary for proper installation, support, or anchorage of
conduit, raceways, or other electrical work. Repair damage to buildings,
piping, and equipment using skilled craftsmen of trades involved.
3.1.17.2 Existing Concealed Wiring to be Removed
Disconnect existing concealed wiring to be removed from its source.

Remove conductors; cut conduit flush with floor, underside of floor, and
through walls; and seal openings.
3.1.17.3 Removal of Existing Electrical Distribution System
Removal of existing electrical distribution system equipment includes

equipment's associated wiring, including conductors, cables, exposed
conduit, surface metal raceways, boxes, and fittings, back to equipment's

power source as indicated.
3.1.17.4 Continuation of Service
Maintain continuity of existing circuits of equipment to remain. Maintain

existing circuits of equipment energized. Restore circuits wiring and
power which are to remain but were disturbed during demolition back to
original condition.
3.1.18 Surge Protective Devices
Connect the surge protective devices in parallel to the power source,

keeping the conductors as short and straight as practically possible.
Maximum allowed lead length is 3 feet.

3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING
Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible

side. Space the signs in accordance with NFPA 70E.
3.4 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent

surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting
as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
Furnish test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of test
results. Give Contracting Officer 5 working days notice prior to each test
s.
3.5.1 Devices Subject to Manual Operation
Operate each device subject to manual operation at least five times,

demonstrating satisfactory operation each time.
3.5.2 600-Volt Wiring Test
Test wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or
accidental grounds exist. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring
No. 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of
approximately 500 volts to provide direct reading of resistance. Minimum
resistance: 250,000 ohms.
3.5.3 Transformer Tests
Perform the standard, not optional, tests in accordance with the

Inspection and Test Procedures for transformers, dry type, air-cooled, 600
volt and below; as specified in NETA ATS. Measure primary and secondary
voltages for proper tap settings. Tests need not be performed by a
recognized independent testing firm or independent electrical consulting
firm.
3.5.4 Ground-Fault Receptacle Test
Test ground-fault receptacles with a "load" (such as a plug in light) to

verify that the "line" and "load" leads are not reversed.
3.5.5 Grounding System Test
Test grounding system to ensure continuity, and that resistance to ground

is not excessive. Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before
making connections to rod; tie grounding system together and test for
resistance to ground. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not
earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Submit written results of each test
to Contracting Officer, and indicate location of rods as well as
resistance and soil conditions at time measurements were made.
SECTION 26 23 00
SWITCHBOARDS
07/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM D1535 (2013) Specifying Color by the Munsell

System



Safety Code

ANSI/NEMA PB 2.1 (2007) General Instructions for Proper

Handling, Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution
Switchboards Rated 600 V or Less
NEMA LI 1 (1998; R 2011) Industrial Laminating

Thermosetting Products
NEMA PB 2 (2011) Deadfront Distribution Switchboards

3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National
Electrical Code

UL 891 (2005; Reprint Oct 2012) Switchboards
Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING and Section

26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT applies to this
section, with the additions and modifications specified herein.
1.3 DEFINITIONS

1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Switchboard Drawings; G, A/E
Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment

indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control
panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must
be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams
shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring
for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each
item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for
operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment
devices. Submittals shall include the nameplate data, size, and
capacity. Submittals shall also include applicable federal,
military, industry, and technical society publication references.
SD-03 Product Data
Switchboard; G, A/E
SD-06 Test Reports
Switchboard design tests
Switchboard production tests
Acceptance checks and tests
Assembled Operation and Maintenance Manuals; G
Equipment Test Schedule
1.5.1 Switchboard Product Data
Each submittal shall include manufacturer's information for each

component, device and accessory provided with the switchboard including:
a. Circuit breaker type, interrupting rating, and trip devices, including

available settings
b. Manufacturer's instruction manuals and published time-current curves

(on full size logarithmic paper) of the main secondary breaker and
largest secondary feeder device.
1.5.2 Switchboard Drawings
Drawings shall include, but are not limited to the following:
a. One-line diagram including breakers, current transformers, and meters
b. Outline drawings including front elevation, section views, footprint,

and overall dimensions
c. Bus configuration including dimensions and ampere ratings of bus bars
d. Markings and NEMA nameplate data.
e. Circuit breaker type, interrupting rating, and trip devices, including

available settings
f. Three-line diagrams and elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams with

terminals identified, and indicating prewired interconnections between
items of equipment and the interconnection between the items.
g. Manufacturer's instruction manuals and published time-current curves

(on full size logarithmic paper) of the main secondary breaker and
largest secondary feeder device.
h. Provisions for future extension.


stated in this section.
is furnished.

1.6 MAINTENANCE
1.6.1 Assembled Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Manuals shall be assembled and bound securely in durable, hard covered,

water resistant binders. The manuals shall be assembled and indexed in
the following order with a table of contents. The contents of the
assembled operation and maintenance manuals shall be as follows:
a. Manufacturer's O&M information required by the paragraph entitled

"SD-10, Operation and Maintenance Data".
b. Catalog data required by the paragraph entitled, "SD-03, Product Data".
c. Drawings required by the paragraph entitled, "SD-02, Shop Drawings".
d. Prices for spare parts and supply list.
e. Design test reports
f. Production test reports
1.7 WARRANTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT COORDINATION
Products and materials not considered to be switchboards and related

accessories are specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL
DISTRIBUTION, and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.2 SWITCHBOARD
NEMA PB 2 and UL 891.
2.2.1 Ratings
The voltage rating of the switchboard shall be as indicated on drawings.

The switchboard shall be UL listed and labeled for its intended use as
service entrance equipment.
2.2.2 Construction
Switchboard shall consist of vertical sections bolted together to form a

rigid assembly and shall be rear aligned. All circuit breakers shall be
front accessible. Where indicated, "space for future" or "space" shall
mean to include bus, device supports, and connections. Provide insulating
barriers in accordance with NEMA LI 1, Type GPO-3, 0.25 inch minimum
thickness. Apply moisture resistant coating to all rough-cut edges of
barriers. Switchboard shall be completely factory engineered and
assembled, including protective devices and equipment indicated with
necessary interconnections, instrumentation, and control wiring.
2.2.2.1 Enclosure
The switchboard enclosure shall be a NEMA ICS 6 Type 1. Enclosure shall

be bolted together with removable bolt-on sides. Paint enclosure,
including bases, ASTM D1535 light gray No. 61 or No. 49. Size enclosure
to match existing connections or provide splice section to intercept
existing service and feeders.
2.2.2.2 Bus Bars
Bus bars shall be copper with silver-plated contact surfaces. Plating

shall be a minimum of 0.0002 inch thick. Make bus connections and joints
with hardened steel bolts. The through-bus shall be rated at the full
ampacity of the main throughout the switchboard. Provide minimum
one-quarter by 2 inch copper ground bus secured to each vertical section
along the entire length of the switchboard. The neutral bus shall be
rated 100 percent of the main bus continuous current rating.
2.2.2.3 Main Section
The main section shall consist of an individually mounted insulated-case

circuit breaker.
2.2.2.4 Distribution Sections
The distribution sections shall consist of individually mounted,

molded-case circuit breakers as indicated.
2.2.3 Protective Device
Provide main and branch protective devices as indicated.
2.2.3.1 Insulated-Case Breaker
UL listed, 100 percent rated, stationary,, operated, low voltage,

insulated-case circuit breaker, with a short-circuit current rating as
indicated. Breaker frame size shall be as indicated.
2.2.3.2 Molded-Case Circuit Breaker
UL 489. UL listed and labeled, 100 percent rated, stationary, low

voltage molded-case circuit breaker as indicated. Series rated circuit
breakers are unacceptable.
2.2.4 Electronic Trip Units
Equip main and distribution breakers larger than 225 ampere trip with a
solid-state tripping system consisting of three current sensors and a
microprocessor-based trip unit that will provide true rms sensing
adjustable time-current circuit protection. The ampere rating of the
current sensors shall be the same as the breaker frame rating. The trip
unit ampere rating shall be as indicated. Ground fault protection shall
be zero sequence sensing. The electronic trip units shall have the
following features.
a. Main breakers shall have short delay pick-up and time settings and,
instantaneous settings and ground fault settings where indicated.
b. Distribution breakers shall have short delay pick-up and time

settings, instantaneous settings.
c. Main Breakers shall have a digital display for phase and ground
current.

acceptable. This nameplate and method of attachment may be the
manufacturer's standard if it contains the required information.
ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each switchboard,

equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in this
section or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall
identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates
shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center
core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square.
2.5.1 Equipment Test Schedule
The Government reserves the right to witness tests. Provide equipment

test schedules for tests to be performed at the manufacturer's test
facility. Submit required test schedule and location, and notify the
Contracting Officer 30 calendar days before scheduled test date. Notify
Contracting Officer 15 calendar days in advance of changes to scheduled
date.
a. Test Instrument Calibration
1. The manufacturer shall have a calibration program which assures

that all applicable test instruments are maintained within rated
accuracy.
2. The accuracy shall be directly traceable to the National Institute

of Standards and Technology.
3. Instrument calibration frequency schedule shall not exceed 12

months for both test floor instruments and leased specialty
equipment.
4. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment.
5. Calibrating standard shall be of higher accuracy than that of the

instrument tested.
6. Keep up-to-date records that indicate dates and test results of

instruments calibrated or tested. For instruments calibrated by
the manufacturer on a routine basis, in lieu of third party
calibration, include the following:
(a) Maintain up-to-date instrument calibration instructions and

procedures for each test instrument.
(b) Identify the third party/laboratory calibrated instrument to

verify that calibrating standard is met.
2.5.2 Switchboard Design Tests
NEMA PB 2 and UL 891.
2.5.2.1 Design Tests
Furnish documentation showing the results of design tests on a product of

the same series and rating as that provided by this specification.
a. Short-circuit current test
b. Enclosure tests
c. Dielectric test
2.5.3 Switchboard Production Tests
NEMA PB 2 and UL 891. Furnish reports which include results of production

tests performed on the actual equipment for this project. These tests
include:
a. 60-hertz dielectric tests
b. Mechanical operation tests
c. Electrical operation and control wiring tests
d. Ground fault sensing equipment test
2.6 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION
Provide a power system study as specified in Section 26 28 01.00 10

COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the
3.2 GROUNDING
NFPA 70 and IEEE C2, except that grounds and grounding systems shall have
a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding 5 ohms.
3.2.1 Grounding Electrodes
Provide driven ground rods as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND

ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION. Connect ground conductors to the upper end of
the ground rods by exothermic weld or compression connector. Provide
compression connectors at equipment end of ground conductors.
3.2.2 Equipment Grounding
Provide bare copper cable not smaller than No. 4/0 AWG not less than 24
inches below grade connecting to the indicated ground rods. When work in
addition to that indicated or specified is directed to obtain the
specified ground resistance, the provision of the contract covering
"Changes" shall apply.
3.2.3 Connections
Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or

compression connector. Exothermic welds and compression connectors shall
be installed as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL
DISTRIBUTION.
3.2.4 Grounding and Bonding Equipment
UL 467, except as indicated or specified otherwise.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES
Install and connect equipment furnished under this section as indicated on

project drawings, the approved shop drawings, and as specified herein.
3.3.1 Switchboard
ANSI/NEMA PB 2.1.
3.3.2 Field Applied Painting
Where field painting of enclosures is required to correct damage to the

manufacturer's factory applied coatings, provide manufacturer's
recommended coatings and apply in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.3.3 Field Fabricated Nameplate Mounting

3.4 FOUNDATION FOR EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES
3.4.1 Interior Location
Mount switchboard on concrete pad. Unless otherwise indicated, the pad

shall be at least 4 inches thick. The top of the concrete slab shall be
approximately 4 inches above finished floor. Edges above floor shall have
1/2 inch chamfer. The pad shall be of adequate size to project at least 8
inches beyond the equipment. Provide conduit turnups and cable entrance
space required by the equipment to be mounted. Seal voids around conduit
openings in slab with water- and oil-resistant caulking or sealant. Cut
off and bush conduits 3 inches above slab surface. Concrete work shall be
as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
Contractor shall submit request for settings of breakers to the

Contracting Officer after approval of switchboard and at least 30 days in
advance of their requirement.
3.5.1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests
Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and include

the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests,
performed in accordance with NETA ATS.
3.5.1.1 Switchboard Assemblies
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved

shop drawings.
2. Inspect physical, electrical, and mechanical condition.
3. Confirm correct application of manufacturer's recommended

lubricants.
4. Verify appropriate anchorage, required area clearances, and

correct alignment.
5. Inspect all doors, panels, and sections for paint, dents,
scratches, fit, and missing hardware.
6. Verify that circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to approved

shop drawings.
7. Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance

using low-resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible
bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method,
or performing thermographic survey.
8. Confirm correct operation and sequencing of electrical and

mechanical interlock systems.
9. Clean switchboard.
10. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated

surfaces.
11. Exercise all active components.
12. Inspect all mechanical indicating devices for correct operation.
13. Verify that vents are clear.
14. Test operation, alignment, and penetration of instrument

transformer withdrawal disconnects.
b. Electrical Tests
1. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section.
2. Perform overpotential tests.
3. Perform insulation-resistance test on control wiring; Do not

perform this test on wiring connected to solid-state components.
4. Perform control wiring performance test.
5. Perform primary current injection tests on the entire current

circuit in each section of assembly.
3.5.1.2 Circuit Breakers
Low Voltage - Insulated-Case and Low Voltage Molded Case with Solid State
Trips
1. Compare nameplate data with specifications and approved shop

drawings.
2. Inspect circuit breaker for correct mounting.
3. Operate circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation.
4. Inspect case for cracks or other defects.
5. Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance

using low resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible
bolted connections and/or cable connections by calibrated

torque-wrench method, or performing thermographic survey.
b. Electrical Tests
1. Perform contact-resistance tests.
2. Perform insulation-resistance tests.
3. Perform Breaker adjustments for final settings in accordance with

Government provided settings.
4. Perform long-time delay time-current characteristic tests
5. Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection.
6. Determine ground-fault pickup and time delay by primary current

injection.
7. Determine instantaneous pickup current by primary injection.
3.5.1.3 Grounding System
1. Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and

specifications.
b. Electrical Tests
1. IEEE 81. Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the

fall-of-potential method. On systems consisting of interconnected
ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are complete.
On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before
any wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry weather,
not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground
testing megger in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to
test each ground or group of grounds. The instrument shall be
equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions
thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or
grounding systems under test.
2. Submit the measured ground resistance of each ground rod and

grounding system, indicating the location of the rod and grounding
system. Include the test method and test setup (i.e., pin
location) used to determine ground resistance and soil conditions
at the time the measurements were made.
3.5.2 Follow-Up Verification
Upon completion of acceptance checks, settings, and tests, the Contractor

shall show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in
good operating condition and properly performing the intended function.
Circuit breakers shall be tripped by operation of each protective device.

Test shall require each item to perform its function not less than three
times. As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract,
the Contracting Officer shall be given 5 working days advance notice of
the dates and times for checks, settings, and tests.
SECTION 26 28 01.00 10
COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION

10/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

IEEE 242 (2001; Errata 2003) Recommended Practice

for Protection and Coordination of
Industrial and Commercial Power Systems -
Buff Book
IEEE 399 (1997) Brown Book IEEE Recommended

Practice for Power Systems Analysis

Safety Code

3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National
Electrical Code


The power system covered by this specification consists of: A fault

current analysis and protective device coordination beginning at the
existing primary pad-mounted switch and extend downstream to devices at
the load end.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 1

SD-03 Product Data
Fault Current Analysis; G, A/E

Protective Device Coordination Study; G, A/E
Equipment
Arc Flash Hazard Analysis; G, A/E
System Coordinator
Installation
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Testing
1.4.1 System Coordinator
System coordination, recommended ratings and settings of protective

devices, and design analysis shall be accomplished by a registered
professional electrical power engineer with a minimum of 3 years of
current experience in the coordination of electrical power systems.
Submit verification of experience and license number, of a registered
Professional Engineer as specified above. Experience data shall include
at least five references for work of a magnitude comparable to this
contract, including points of contact, addresses and telephone numbers.
1.4.2 System Installer
Calibration, testing, adjustment, and placing into service of the

protective devices shall be accomplished by a manufacturer's product field
service engineer or independent testing company with a minimum of two
years of current product experience in protective devices.
Devices and equipment shall be visually inspected when received and prior
to acceptance from conveyance. Protect stored items from the environment
in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Damaged
items shall be replaced.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODUCT
Provide protective devices and equipment which are the standard product of
a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the product and
that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory utility
type use for at least two years prior to bid opening. Submit data
consisting of manufacturer's time-current characteristic curves for
individual protective devices, recommended settings of adjustable
protective devices, and recommended ratings of non-adjustable protective
devices.
2.2 NAMEPLATES
Provide nameplates to identify all protective devices and equipment.

Nameplate information shall be in accordance with UL 489.
SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 2

2.3 CORROSION PROTECTION
Metallic materials shall be protected against corrosion. Ferrous metal

hardware shall be zinc or chrome-plated.
2.4 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION
Analyses shall be prepared to demonstrate that the equipment selected and

system constructed meet the contract requirements for ratings,
coordination, and protection. They shall include a load flow analysis, a
fault current analysis, arc flash analysis, and a protective device
coordination study. Submit the study along with protective device
equipment submittals. No time extensions or similar contact modifications
will be granted for work arising out of the requirements for this study.
Approval of protective devices proposed will be based on recommendations
of this study. The Government shall not be held responsible for any
changes to equipment, device ratings, settings, or additional labor for
installation of equipment or devices ordered and/or procured prior to
approval of the study. The studies shall be performed by a registered
professional engineer with demonstrated experience in power system
coordination in the last 3 years. Provide a list of references complete
with points of contact, addresses and telephone numbers. The selection of
the engineer is subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer.
2.4.1 Scope of Analyses
The fault current analysis, arc flash analysis, and protective device
coordination study shall begin at: the source bus and extend down to
system buses where fault availability is 10,000 amperes (symmetrical) for
building/facility 600 volt level distribution buses.
2.4.2 Determination of Facts
The time-current characteristics, features, and nameplate data for each

existing protective device shall be determined and documented. Coordinate
with the Base for fault current availability at the site.
2.4.3 Single Line Diagram
A single line diagram shall be prepared to show the electrical system

buses, devices, transformation points, and all sources of fault current
(including generator and motor contributions). A fault-impedance diagram
or a computer analysis diagram may be provided. Each bus, device or
transformation point shall have a unique identifier. If a fault-impedance
diagram is provided, impedance data shall be shown. Location of switches,
breakers, and circuit interrupting devices shall be shown on the diagram
together with available fault data, and the device interrupting rating.
2.4.4 Fault Current Analysis
2.4.4.1 Method
The fault current analysis shall be performed in accordance with methods

described in IEEE 242, and IEEE 399.
2.4.4.2 Data
Actual data shall be utilized in fault calculations. Bus characteristics

and transformer impedance shall be those proposed. Data shall be
SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 3

documented in the report.
2.4.4.3 Fault Current Availability
Balanced three-phase fault, bolted line-to-line fault, and line-to-ground

fault current values shall be provided at each voltage transformation
point and at each power distribution bus. The maximum and minimum values
of fault available at each location shall be shown in tabular form on the
diagram or in the report.
2.4.5 Coordination Study
The study shall demonstrate that the maximum possible degree of

selectivity has been obtained between devices specified, consistent with
protection of equipment and conductors from damage from overloads and
fault conditions. The study shall include a description of the
coordination of the protective devices in this project. A written
narrative shall be provided describing: which devices may operate in the
event of a fault at each bus; the logic used to arrive at device ratings
and settings; situations where system coordination is not achievable due
to device limitations (an analysis of any device curves which overlap);
coordination between upstream and downstream devices; and relay settings.
Recommendations to improve or enhance system reliability, and detail where
such changes would involve additions or modifications to the contract and
cost damages (addition or reduction) shall be provided. Composite
coordination plots shall be provided on log-log graph paper.
2.4.6 Study report
a. The report shall include a narrative describing: the analyses

performed; the bases and methods used; and the desired method of
coordinated protection of the power system.
b. The study shall include descriptive and technical data for existing
devices and new protective devices proposed. The data shall include
manufacturers published data, nameplate data, and definition of the
fixed or adjustable features of the existing or new protective devices.
c. The report shall document system voltages, fault MVA, system X/R
ratio, time-current characteristic curves, current transformer ratios,
and relay device numbers and settings; and existing power system data
including time-current characteristic curves and protective device
ratings and settings.
d. The report shall contain fully coordinated composite time-current

characteristics curves for each bus in the system, as required to
ensure coordinated power system protection between protective devices
or equipment. The report shall include recommended ratings and
settings of all protective devices in tabulated form.
e. The report shall provide the calculation performed for the analyses,
including computer analysis programs utilized. The name of the
software package, developer, and version number shall be provided.
2.4.7 Arc Flash Hazard Analysis
An arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584
equations that are presented in NFPA 70E, Annex D.
SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 4

The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated
at all significant locations in the electrical distribution system
(switchboards, panelboards, busway and splitters) where work could be
performed on energized parts.
The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall include all significant locations in

12kV, 480V and 208 volt systems where work could be performed on energized
parts.
Safe working distances shall be based upon the calculated arc flash
boundary considering an incident energy of 1.2 cal/cm2.
For low voltage systems, assume a working distance of 18 inch. For medium
voltage systems, assume a minimum working distance of 4 feet. For high
voltage systems, assume a minimum working distance of 6 feet.
When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of
the phase overcurrent devices will be retrieved from the short-circuit and
coordination study model. Ground overcurrent relays should not be taken
into consideration when determining the clearing time when performing
incident energy calculations.
The short-circuit calculations and the corresponding incident energy

calculations for multiple system scenarios must be compared and the
greatest incident energy must be uniquely reported for each equipment
location. Calculations must be performed to represent the maximum and
minimum contributions of fault current magnitude for all normal and
emergency operating conditions. The minimum calculation will assume that
the utility contribution is at a minimum and will assume a minimum motor
contribution (all motors off). Conversely, the maximum calculation will
assume a maximum contribution from the utility and will assume the maximum
amount of motors to be operating. Calculations shall take into
consideration the parallel operation of synchronous generators with the
electric utility, where applicable.
The incident energy calculations must consider the accumulation of energy

over time when performing arc flash calculations on buses with multiple
sources. Iterative calculations must take into account the changing
current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with
time. Fault contribution from motors and generators should be decremented
as follows:
1. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered

beyond 3-5 cycles.
2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should

be decayed to match the actual decrement of each as closely as
possible (e.g. contributions from permanent magnet generators will
typically decay from 10 per unit to 3 per unit after 10 cycles).
For each equipment location with a separately enclosed main device (where
there is adequate separation between the line side terminals of the main
protective device and the work location ), calculations for incident
energy and flash protection boundary shall include both the line and load
side of the main breaker.
When performing incident energy calculations on the line side of a main

breaker (as required per above), the line side and load side contributions
must be included in the fault calculation.
SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 5

Mis-coordination should be checked amongst all devices within the

immediate protective device upstream of the calculation location and the
calculation should utilize the fastest device to compute the incident
energy for the corresponding location.
Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective

device clearing time. Maximum clearing time will be capped at 2 seconds
based on IEEE 1584-2002 section B.1.2. Where it is not physically
possible to move outside of the flash protection boundary in less than 2
seconds during an arc flash event, a maximum clearing time based on the
specific location shall be utilized.
Calculate energy in cal/cm2 at each evaluated location. The design goal

shall be to establish arc flash levels that result in PPE levels of
Category 2 or less. Specifically identify locations where Category 2
cannot be achieved, such as upstream of a main breaker (between the
breaker and an upstream transformer) or downstream of UPS systems.
Arc Flash labels based on recommended overcurrent device settings and Arc
flash study results shall be provided after the results of the analysis
have been presented to the Government and after any system changes,
upgrades or modifications have been incorporated in the system.
The label shall include the following information, at a minimum:
1. Location designation.
2. Nominal voltage.
3. Flash protection boundary.
4. Hazard risk category.
5. PPE requirements.
6. Incident energy.
7. Working distance.
8. Engineering report number, revision number and issue date.
Labels shall be machine printed, with no field markings.
Arc flash labels shall be provided in the following manner and all labels
shall be based on recommended overcurrent device settings.
1. For each 600, 480 and applicable 208 volt panelboard, one arc
flash label shall be provided.
2. For each motor control center, one arc flash label shall be
provided.
3. For each low voltage switchboard, one arc flash label shall be
provided.
4. For each switchgear, one flash label shall be provided for each
section and at the entrance door to the switchgear room (weatherproof).
SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 6

Refer to Arc Flash labels at the end of this Section that shall be printed
as indicated above and attach to the electrical equipment indicated.
Labels will need to be revised if changes are made to the electrical
distribution system (Single Line Diagram) within the design or circuit
breaker settings or type are revised.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the
field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before
performing any work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Submit procedures including diagrams, instructions, and precautions

required to properly install, adjust, calibrate, and test the devices and
equipment. Install protective devices in accordance with the
manufacturer's published instructions and in accordance with the
requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2.
3.3 FIELD TESTING
Prior to field tests, submit the proposed test plan consisting of complete
field test procedure, tests to be performed, test equipment required, and
tolerance limits, and complete testing and verification of the ground
fault protection equipment, where used. Submit performance test reports
in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component
and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified
performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed
system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls.
3.3.1 General
Perform field testing in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Notify

the Contracting Officer 7 days prior to conducting tests. Furnish all
materials, labor, and equipment necessary to conduct field tests. Perform
all tests and inspections recommended by the manufacturer unless
specifically waived by the Contracting Officer. Maintain a written record
of all tests which includes date, test performed, personnel involved,
devices tested, serial number and name of test equipment, and test results.
3.3.2 Safety
Provide and use safety devices such as rubber gloves, protective barriers,
and danger signs to protect and warn personnel in the test vicinity.
Replace any devices or equipment which are damaged due to improper test
procedures or handling.
SECTION 26 28 01.00 10 Page 7

WARNING WARNING
Arc Flash and Shock Hazard Arc Flash and Shock Hazard
Appropriate PPE Required Appropriate PPE Required
122 in Flash Hazard Boundary 4 in Flash Hazard Boundary
27 cal/cm^2 Flash Hazard at 18 in 0.06 cal/cm^2 Flash Hazard at 18 in
Arc-rated shirt & pants + arc-rated Nonmelting or Untreated Fiber with
PPE Level PPE Level
coverall + arc-rated arc flash suit Weight >= 4.5 oz/sq yd
480 VAC Shock Hazard when cover is removed 230 VAC Shock Hazard when cover is removed
00 Glove Class 00 Glove Class
42 in Limited Approach 42 in Limited Approach
12 in Restricted Approach Avoid Contact Restricted Approach
1 in Prohibited Approach Avoid Contact Prohibited Approach
Location: DS-COMP Location: FACC
SKM Systems Analysis, Inc. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.
1 Pearl St., Redondo Beach, CA 1 Pearl St., Redondo Beach, CA

90277 (310) 698-4700 90277 (310) 698-4700
Job#: FDYD1739 Prepared on: 09/15/15 By: JACOBS Job#: FDYD1739 Prepared on: 09/15/15 By: JACOBS
Warning: Changes in equipment settings or system Warning: Changes in equipment settings or system
configuration will invalidate the calculated values and configuration will invalidate the calculated values and
PPE requirements PPE requirements
WARNING WARNING
6.1 cal/cm^2 Flash Hazard at 18 in 29 cal/cm^2 Flash Hazard at 18 in
Arc-rated shirt & pants + arc-rated Arc-rated shirt & pants + arc-rated
PPE Level PPE Level
coverall + arc-rated arc flash suit coverall + arc-rated arc flash suit
12 in Restricted Approach 12 in Restricted Approach
1 in Prohibited Approach 1 in Prohibited Approach
Location: DS-ELEV Location: PNL "HA"

90277 (310) 698-4700 90277 (310) 698-4700
WARNING WARNING
31 cal/cm^2 Flash Hazard at 18 in 35 cal/cm^2 Flash Hazard at 18 in
PPE Level PPE Level
12 in Restricted Approach 12 in Restricted Approach
1 in Prohibited Approach 1 in Prohibited Approach
Location: PNL "HB" Location: PNL "HM"

90277 (310) 698-4700 90277 (310) 698-4700
WARNING WARNING
16 cal/cm^2 Flash Hazard at 18 in 1.7 cal/cm^2 Flash Hazard at 18 in
PPE Level PPE Level
12 in Restricted Approach Avoid Contact Restricted Approach
1 in Prohibited Approach Avoid Contact Prohibited Approach
Location: PNL "HC" Location: PNL "LA"

90277 (310) 698-4700 90277 (310) 698-4700
WARNING WARNING
5.4 cal/cm^2 Flash Hazard at 18 in 7.7 cal/cm^2 Flash Hazard at 18 in
PPE Level PPE Level
Avoid Contact Restricted Approach Avoid Contact Restricted Approach
Avoid Contact Prohibited Approach Avoid Contact Prohibited Approach
Location: PNL "LB" Location: PNL "LD"

90277 (310) 698-4700 90277 (310) 698-4700
WARNING WARNING
7.9 cal/cm^2 Flash Hazard at 18 in 12 cal/cm^2 Flash Hazard at 18 in
PPE Level PPE Level
Avoid Contact Restricted Approach Avoid Contact Restricted Approach
Avoid Contact Prohibited Approach Avoid Contact Prohibited Approach
Location: PNL "LC" Location: PNL "LP"

90277 (310) 698-4700 90277 (310) 698-4700
DANGER
NO SAFE PPE EXISTS
ENERGIZED WORK PROHIBITED
171 in Flash Hazard Boundary
48 cal/cm^2 Flash Hazard at 18 in
PPE Level DO NOT WORK ON LIVE!
480 VAC Shock Hazard when cover is removed
00 Glove Class
42 in Limited Approach
12 in Restricted Approach
1 in Prohibited Approach
Location: SE
SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.
1 Pearl St., Redondo Beach, CA

90277 (310) 698-4700
Job#: FDYD1739 Prepared on: 09/15/15 By: JACOBS

Warning: Changes in equipment settings or system
configuration will invalidate the calculated values and
PPE requirements
SECTION 26 51 00
INTERIOR LIGHTING
07/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


GREEN SEAL (GS)
GS-12 (1997) Occupancy Sensors
IES HB-10 (2011) IES Lighting Handbook
IES LM-79 (2008) Electrical and Photometric

Measurements of Solid-State Lighting
Products
IES LM-80 (2008) Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED

Light Sources
IES RP-8 (2014) Roadway Lighting
IES TM-15 (2011) Luminaire Classification System for

Outdoor Luminaires
IES TM-21 (2011) Projecting Long Term Lumen

Maintenance of LED Light Sources


Safety Code

Nomenclature for Glass Bulbs Intended for
Use with Electric Lamps
ANSI C81.61 (2009; R 2014) American National Standard

for Electrical Lamp Bases -
Specifications for Bases (Caps) for

Electric Lamps

NEMA ICS 2 (2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Standard for

Controllers, Contactors, and Overload
Relays Rated 600 V
NEMA LE 4 (2012) Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling

Compatibility

3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National
Electrical Code

UL 844 (2012) Standard for Luminaires for Use in

Hazardous (Classified) Locations
UL 924 (2006; Reprint Apr 2014) Standard for

Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
Materials not considered to be lighting equipment or lighting fixture

accessories are specified in Section 26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT and 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Lighting
fixtures and accessories mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings are
1.3 DEFINITIONS

b. Average life is the time after which 50 percent will have failed and
50 percent will have survived under normal conditions.
c. Total harmonic distortion (THD) is the root mean square (RMS) of all
the harmonic components divided by the total fundamental current.
1.4.1 Lighting Control System
Provide lighting control system as indicated. Lighting control equipment

shall include, if indicated: control modules, power packs, dimming
ballasts, occupancy sensors, and light level sensors.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only or as
otherwise designated. When used, a designation following the "G"
designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the
Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
Data, drawings, and reports shall employ the terminology, classifications,

and methods prescribed by theIES HB-10 , as applicable, for the lighting
system specified.
Photometric Plan; G, A/E
LED Luminaire Warranty; G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Luminaire drawings; G, A/E
SD-03 Product Data
LED Lighting Fixtures and Drivers; G, A/E
Lighting contactor; G
Time switch; G
Exit signs; G, A/E
Emergency lighting equipment; G
Occupancy sensors; G
Energy Efficiency
SD-05 Design Data
Design Data for luminaires
SD-06 Test Reports
LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report; G
LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report; G
Operating test
Submit test results as stated in paragraph entitled "Field Quality

Control."
Lighting Control System, Data Package 5; G

01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein,
showing all light fixtures, control modules, control zones,
occupancy sensors, light level sensors, power packs, dimming
ballasts, schematic diagrams and all interconnecting control
wire, conduit, and associated hardware.
1.6.1.1 Luminaire Drawings
Include dimensions, effective projected area (EPA), accessories, and

installation and construction details. Photometric data, including zonal
lumen data, average and minimum ratio, aiming diagram, and computerized
candlepower distribution data shall accompany shop drawings.
1.6.1.2 Photometric Plan
For LED luminaires, include computer-generated photometric analysis of the

"designed to" values for the "end of useful life" of the luminaire
installation using a light loss factor of 0.7. For LED and all other
types of luminaires, the submittal shall include the following:
a. Horizontal illuminance measurements at finished grade, taken at a

maximum of every 10 feet.
b. Vertical illuminance measurements at 5 feet above finished grade.
c. Minimum and maximum footcandle levels.
d. Average maintained footcandle level.
e. Maximum to minimum ratio for horizontal illuminance only.
1.6.1.3 Design Data for Luminaires
a. Provide distribution data according to IES classification type as

defined in IES HB-10.
b. Shielding as defined by IES RP-8 or B.U.G. rating for the installed

position as defined by IES TM-15.
c. Provide safety certification and file number for the luminaire

family. Include listing, labeling and identification per NFPA 70
(NEC). Applicable testing bodies are determined by the US
Occupational Safety Health Administration (OSHA) as Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL) and include: CSA (Canadian
Standards Association), ETL (Edison Testing Laboratory), and UL
(Underwriters Laboratories).
d. Provide long term lumen maintenance projections for each LED luminaire
in accordance with IES TM-21. Data used for projections shall be
obtained from testing in accordance with IES LM-80.
e. Provide wind loading calculations for luminaires mounted on poles.

Weight and effective projected area (EPA) of luminaires and mounting
brackets shall not exceed maximum rating of pole as installed in
particular wind zone area.
1.6.1.4 LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report
Submit test report on manufacturer's standard production model luminaire.

Submittal shall include all photometric and electrical measurements, as
well as all other pertinent data outlined under "14.0 Test Report" in
IES LM-79.
1.6.1.5 LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report
Submit report on manufacturer's standard production LED package, array, or

module. Submittal shall include:
a. Testing agency, report number, date, type of equipment, and LED light
source being tested.
b. All data required by IES LM-80.
1.6.1.5.1 Test Laboratories
Test laboratories for the IES LM-79 and IES LM-80 test reports shall be
one of the following:
a. National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) accredited

for solid-state lighting testing as part of the Energy-Efficient
Lighting Products laboratory accreditation program.
b. One of the qualified labs listed on the Department of Energy - Energy

Efficiency & Renewable Energy, Solid-State Lighting web site.
c. A manufacturer's in-house lab that meets the following criteria:
1. Manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and

production of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires
and the manufacturer's lab has been successfully certifying these
fixtures for a minimum of 15 years.
2. Annual equipment calibration including photometer calibration in

accordance with National Institute of Standards and Technology.
1.6.1.6 Regulatory Requirements

1.6.1.7 Standard Products

1.6.1.7.1 Alternative Qualifications
if the manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and
production of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires for a
minimum of 15 years. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial
or industrial use for 15 years prior to bid opening. The product shall
have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
1.6.1.7.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site

1.6.1.8 Energy Efficiency
Comply with National Energy Policy Act and Energy Star requirements for
lighting products. Submit documentation for Energy Star qualifications
for equipment provided under this section. Submit data indicating lumens
per watt efficiency and color rendition index of light source.
1.7 WARRANTY

1.7.1 LED Driver Warranty
Furnish the LED Driver manufacturer's warranty. The warranty period shall
not be less than 5 years from the date of manufacture of the LED Driver.
LED Driver assembly in the lighting fixture, transportation, and on-site
storage shall not exceed 12 months, thereby permitting 4 years of the 5
year warranty to be in service and energized. The warranty shall state
that the malfunctioning LED Driver shall be exchanged by the manufacturer
and promptly shipped to the using Government facility. The replacement
LED Driver shall be identical to, or an improvement upon, the original
design of the malfunctioning LED Driver.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LED LIGHTING FIXTURES AND DRIVERS
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and

labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL.
FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed

and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.
Recessed Fixtures:
Comply with NEMA LE 4.
Bulb shape complying with ANSI C79.1.
Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61
CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3000 K.
Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours.
Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.

Internal driver.
Nominal Operating Voltage:as indicated.
1. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise

indicated.
Housings:
1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink.
2. Powder-coat finish.
2.1.1 Materials
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. Sheet metal
components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to
prevent warping and sagging.
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light
leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping
without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses,
diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping
and when secured in operating position.
Diffusers and Globes: As Scheduled.
Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high
resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to
heat, and UV radiation.
Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps.

Locate labels where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but
not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. Label shall
include the following lamp characteristics: "USE ONLY" and include
specific lamp type. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating.
CCT and CRI for all luminaires.
2.2 RECESS- AND FLUSH-MOUNTED FIXTURES
Provide type that can be relamped from the bottom. Access to ballast
shall be from the bottom. Trim for the exposed surface of flush-mounted
fixtures shall be as indicated.
2.3 SUSPENDED FIXTURES
Provide hangers capable of supporting twice the combined weight of

fixtures supported by hangers. Provide with swivel hangers to ensure a
plumb installation. Hangers shall be cadmium-plated steel with a
swivel-ball tapped for the conduit size indicated. Hangers shall allow
fixtures to swing within an angle of 45 degrees. Brace pendants provided
under canopies, in storage in shops or hangers to limit swinging.
Single-unit suspended fixtures shall have twin-stem hangers.
Multiple-unit or continuous row fluorescent fixtures shall have a tubing
or stem for wiring at one point and a tubing or rod suspension provided
for each unit length of chassis, including one at each end. Rods shall be
a minimum 0.18 inch diameter.
2.4 FIXTURES FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
In addition to requirements stated herein, provide fixtures for hazardous

locations which conform to UL 844 or which have Factory Mutual
certification for the class and division indicated.
2.5 SWITCHES
2.5.1 Toggle Switches
Provide toggle switches as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR

2.6 LIGHTING CONTACTOR
NEMA ICS 2, mechanically held contactor. Rate contactor as indicated.

Provide in NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6. Contactor shall
have silver alloy double-break contacts and coil clearing contacts for
mechanically held contactor. Provide contactor with hand-off-automatic
selector switch.
2.7 TIME SWITCH
Astronomic dial type or electronic type, arranged to turn "ON" at sunset

and turn "OFF" at predetermined time between 8:30 p.m. and 2:30 a.m. or
sunrise, automatically changing the settings each day in accordance with
seasonal changes of sunset and sunrise. Provide switch rated volts,
having automatically wound spring mechanism or capacitor, to maintain
accurate time for a minimum of 15 hours following power failure. Provide
time switch with a manual on-off bypass switch. Housing for the time
switch shall be surface-mounted, NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6.
2.8 EXIT SIGNS
UL 924, NFPA 70, and NFPA 101. Exit signs shall be self-powered type.
Exit signs shall use no more than 5 watts.
2.8.1 Self-Powered LED Type Exit Signs (Battery Backup)
Provide with automatic power failure device, test switch, pilot light,
integral self-testing module and fully automatic high/low trickle charger
in a self-contained power pack. Battery shall be sealed electrolyte type,
shall operate unattended, and require no maintenance, including no
additional water, for a period of not less than 5 years. LED exit sign
shall have emergency run time of 1 1/2 hours (minimum). The light
emitting diodes shall have rated lamp life of 70,000 hours (minimum).
2.9 EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
UL 924, NFPA 70, and NFPA 101. Provide lamps in wattage indicated.
2.9.1 Emergency Lighting Unit
Provide as indicated. Emergency lighting units shall be rated for 12

volts, except units having no remote-mounted lamps and having no more than
two unit-mounted lamps may be rated 6 volts. Provide integral self-testing
module.
2.9.2 Emergency System
Each system shall consist of an automatic power failure device, test

switch operable from outside of the fixture, pilot light visible from
outside the fixture, and fully automatic solid-state charger in a
self-contained power pack. Charger shall be either trickle, float,
constant current or constant potential type, or a combination of these.
Battery shall be sealed electrolyte type with capacity as required to
supply power to the number of lamps shown for each system for 90 minutes
at a minimum of 1100 lumens per lamp output. Battery shall operate
unattended and require no maintenance, including no additional water, for
a period of not less than 5 years. Emergency ballasts provided with
fixtures containing solid-state ballasts shall be fully compatible with
the solid-state ballasts.
2.10 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
UL listed. Comply with GS-12. Occupancy sensors and power packs shall be
designed to operate on the voltage indicated. Sensors and power packs
shall have circuitry that only allows load switching at or near zero
current crossing of supply voltage. Occupancy sensor mounting as
indicated. Sensor shall have an LED occupant detection indicator. Sensor
shall have adjustable sensitivity and adjustable delayed-off time range of
5 minutes to 15 minutes. Wall mounted sensors shall match the color of
adjacent wall plates as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, ceiling mounted sensors shall be white. Ceiling
mounted sensors shall have 360 degree coverage unless otherwise indicated.
Wall sensors shall be dimming type, single or bi-level as indicated.
a. Ultrasonic sensor shall be crystal controlled and shall not cause
detection interference between adjacent sensors.
b. Infrared sensors shall have a daylight filter. Sensor shall have a

fresnel lens that is applicable to space to be controlled.
c. Ultrasonic/Infrared Combination Sensor
Occupancy detection to turn lights on requires both ultrasonic and

infrared sensor detection. Lights shall remain on if either the
ultrasonic or infrared sensor detects movement. Infrared sensor shall
have lens selected for indicated usage and daylight filter to prevent
short wavelength infrared interference. Ultrasonic sensor frequency
shall be crystal controlled.
2.11 SUPPORT HANGERS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS
2.11.1 Wires
ASTM A641/A641M, galvanized regular coating, soft temper, 0.1055 inches in

diameter (12 gage).
2.11.2 Rods
Threaded steel rods, 3/16 inch diameter, zinc or cadmium coated.
2.12 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

acceptable.
2.12.2 Labels
Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements. All

luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific drivers and
ballasts according to proper lamp type. The following lamp
characteristics shall be noted in the format "Use Only _____":
a. Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for
all luminaires.
All markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily
visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when
lamps are in place. Ballasts shall have clear markings indicating
multi-level outputs and indicate proper terminals for the various outputs.

corrosion-resistance test.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Lighting Fixtures
Set lighting fixtures plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, in
alignment with adjacent lighting fixtures, and secure in accordance with
manufacturers' directions and approved drawings. Installation shall meet
requirements of NFPA 70. Mounting heights specified or indicated shall be
to the bottom of fixture for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to center of
fixture for wall-mounted fixtures. Obtain approval of the exact mounting
for lighting fixtures on the job before commencing installation and, where
applicable, after coordinating with the type, style, and pattern of the
ceiling being installed. Recessed and semi-recessed fixtures shall be
independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four
wires per fixture and located near each corner of each fixture. Ceiling
grid clips are not allowed as an alternative to independently supported
light fixtures. Round fixtures or fixtures smaller in size than the
ceiling grid shall be independently supported from the building structure
by a minimum of four wires per fixture spaced approximately equidistant
around the fixture. Do not support fixtures by ceiling acoustical
panels. Where fixtures of sizes less than the ceiling grid are indicated
to be centered in the acoustical panel, support such fixtures
independently and provide at least two 3/4 inch metal channels spanning,
and secured to, the ceiling tees for centering and aligning the fixture.
Provide wires for lighting fixture support in this section. Lighting
fixtures installed in suspended ceilings shall also comply with the
requirements of Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS.
3.1.2 Suspended Fixtures
Suspended fixtures shall be provided with 45 degree swivel hangers so that

they hang plumb and shall be located with no obstructions within the 45
degree range in all directions. The stem, canopy and fixture shall be
capable of 45 degree swing. Pendants, rods, or chains shall be braced to
prevent swaying using three cables at 120 degree separation. Suspended
fixtures in continuous rows shall have internal wireway systems for end to
end wiring and shall be properly aligned to provide a straight and
continuous row without bends, gaps, light leaks or filler pieces.
Aligning splines shall be used on extruded aluminum fixtures to assure
hairline joints. Steel fixtures shall be supported to prevent
"oil-canning" effects. Fixture finishes shall be free of scratches,
nicks, dents, and warps, and shall match the color and gloss specified.
Pendants shall be finished to match fixtures. Aircraft cable shall be
stainless steel. Canopies shall be finished to match the ceiling and
shall be low profile unless otherwise shown. Maximum distance between
suspension points shall be 10 feet or as recommended by the manufacturer,
whichever is less.
3.1.3 Exit Signs and Emergency Lighting Units
Wire exit signs and emergency lighting units ahead of the switch to the
normal lighting circuit located in the same room or area.
3.1.4 Occupancy Sensor
Provide quantity of sensor units indicated as a minimum. Provide

additional units to give full coverage over controlled area. Full
coverage shall provide hand and arm motion detection for office and
administration type areas and walking motion for industrial areas,
warehouses, storage rooms and hallways. Locate the sensor(s) as indicated
and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to maximize
energy savings and to avoid nuisance activation and deactivation due to
sudden temperature or airflow changes and usage. Set sensor "on" duration
to 15 minutes.
3.1.5 Light Level Sensor
Locate light level sensor as indicated and in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations. Adjust sensor for 50 footcandles or for
the indicated light level at the typical work plane for that area.
Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly

installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test to show
that equipment operates in accordance with requirements of this section.
3.2.1 Dimming
Test for full range of dimming capability. Observe for visually

detectable flicker over full dimming range.
3.2.2 Occupancy Sensor
Test sensors for proper operation. Observe for light control over entire
area being covered.
SECTION 26 56 00
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
05/13
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)

Buildings

CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION (CEC)
CEC Title 24 (2008; Effective Jan 2010) California's

Energy Efficiency Standards for
Residential and Nonresidential Buildings
IES HB-10 (2011) IES Lighting Handbook
IES LM-79 (2008) Electrical and Photometric

Measurements of Solid-State Lighting
Products
IES LM-80 (2008) Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED

Light Sources
IES RP-16 (2010; Addendum A 2008; Addenda B & C

2009) Nomenclature and Definitions for
Illuminating Engineering
IES RP-8 (2014) Roadway Lighting
IES TM-15 (2011) Luminaire Classification System for

Outdoor Luminaires
IES TM-21 (2011) Projecting Long Term Lumen

Maintenance of LED Light Sources


Safety Code


NEMA ANSLG C78.377 (2011) American National Standard for

Electric Lamps— Specifications for the
Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting
Products
NEMA C136.31 (2010) American National for Roadway and

Area Lighting Equipment - Luminaire
Vibration
NEMA C82.77 (2002) Harmonic Emission Limits - Related

Power Quality Requirements for Lighting
Equipment
NEMA WD 7 (2011) Occupancy Motion Sensors Standard

3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National
Electrical Code
47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices
UL 1310 (2011; Reprint Oct 2013) UL Standard for

Safety Class 2 Power Units

Plug-In, Locking Type Photocontrols for
Use with Area Lighting
UL 773A (2006; Reprint Nov 2013) Standard for

Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for
Lighting Control
UL 8750 (2009; Reprint May 2014) UL Standard for

Safety Light Emitting Diode (LED)
Equipment for Use in Lighting Products

Energy Management Equipment
Materials not considered to be luminaires or lighting equipment are

specified in Section 26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT. Luminaires and accessories installed in interior of buildings
are specified in Section 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING.
1.3 DEFINITIONS

terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings shall be as
defined in IEEE 100 and IES RP-16.
b. For LED luminaire light sources, "Useful Life" is the operating hours
before reaching 70 percent of the initial rated lumen output (L70)
with no catastrophic failures under normal operating conditions. This
is also known as 70 percent "Rated Lumen Maintenance Life" as defined
in IES LM-80.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

Photometric Plan; G
LED Luminaire Warranty; G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Luminaire drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
LED Luminaires; G
Luminaire Light Sources; G
Luminaire Power Supply Units (Drivers); G
Time switch; G
Lighting Control Relay Panel; G
Motion Sensor; G
Photocell; G
SD-05 Design Data
Design Data for luminaires
SD-06 Test Reports
LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report; G
LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report; G
Operating test
Submit operating test results as stated in paragraph entitled

"Field Quality Control."
SD-07 Certificates
Luminaire Useful Life Certificate; G
Submit certification from the manufacturer indicating the expected

useful life of the luminaires provided. The useful life shall be
directly correlated from the IES LM-80 test data using procedures
outlined in IES TM-21. Thermal properties of the specific
luminaire and local ambient operating temperature and conditions
shall be taken into consideration.
Submit instructions prior to installation.
LED Luminaire Warranty
Submit documentation that includes contact information, summary of

procedures, and the limitations and conditions applicable to the
project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim materials
for recycling and/or reuse.
1.5.1.1 Luminaire Drawings
Include dimensions, effective projected area (EPA), accessories, and

installation and construction details. Photometric data, including zonal
lumen data, average and minimum ratio, aiming diagram, and computerized
candlepower distribution data shall accompany shop drawings.
1.5.2 Photometric Plan
For LED luminaires, include computer-generated photometric analysis of the

"designed to" values for the "end of useful life" of the luminaire
installation using a light loss factor of 0.7. For LED and all other
types of luminaires, the submittal shall include the following:
Horizontal illuminance measurements at finished grade, taken at a maximum

of every 10 feet.
Vertical illuminance measurements at 5 feet above finished grade.
Minimum and maximum footcandle levels.
Average maintained footcandle level.
Maximum to minimum ratio for horizontal illuminance only.
1.5.3 Design Data for Luminaires
a. Provide distribution data according to IES classification type as

defined in IES HB-10.
b. Shielding as defined by IES RP-8 or B.U.G. rating for the installed

position as defined by IES TM-15.
c. Provide safety certification and file number for the luminaire

family. Include listing, labeling and identification per NFPA 70
(NEC). Applicable testing bodies are determined by the US
Occupational Safety Health Administration (OSHA) as Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratories (NRTL) and include: CSA (Canadian
Standards Association), ETL (Edison Testing Laboratory), and UL
(Underwriters Laboratories).
d. Provide long term lumen maintenance projections for each LED luminaire
in accordance with IES TM-21. Data used for projections shall be
obtained from testing in accordance with IES LM-80.
e. Provide wind loading calculations for luminaires mounted on poles.

Weight and effective projected area (EPA) of luminaires and mounting
brackets shall not exceed maximum rating of pole as installed in
particular wind zone area.
1.5.4 LED Luminaire - IES LM-79 Test Report
Submit test report on manufacturer's standard production model luminaire.

Submittal shall include all photometric and electrical measurements, as
well as all other pertinent data outlined under "14.0 Test Report" in
IES LM-79.
1.5.5 LED Light Source - IES LM-80 Test Report
Submit report on manufacturer's standard production LED package, array, or

module. Submittal shall include:
a. Testing agency, report number, date, type of equipment, and LED light
source being tested.
b. All data required by IES LM-80.
1.5.5.1 Test Laboratories
Test laboratories for the IES LM-79 and IES LM-80 test reports shall be
one of the following:
a. National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) accredited

for solid-state lighting testing as part of the Energy-Efficient
Lighting Products laboratory accreditation program.
b. One of the qualified labs listed on the Department of Energy - Energy
Efficiency & Renewable Energy, Solid-State Lighting web site.
c. A manufacturer's in-house lab that meets the following criteria:
1. Manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and

production of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires
and the manufacturer's lab has been successfully certifying these
fixtures for a minimum of 15 years.
2. Annual equipment calibration including photometer calibration in

accordance with National Institute of Standards and Technology.


if the manufacturer has been regularly engaged in the design and
production of high intensity discharge roadway and area luminaires for a
minimum of 15 years. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial
or industrial use for 15 years prior to bid opening. The product shall
have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements,

1.6 WARRANTY

1.6.1 LED Luminaire Warranty
Provide Luminaire Useful Life Certificate.

a. Provide a written five year on-site replacement warranty for material,

fixture finish, and workmanship. On-site replacement includes
transportation, removal, and installation of new products.
1. Finish warranty shall include warranty against failure and against

substantial deterioration such as blistering, cracking, peeling,
chalking, or fading.
2. Material warranty shall include:
(a) All power supply units (drivers).
(b) Replacement when more than 10 percent of LED sources in any

lightbar or subassembly(s) are defective or non-starting.
b. Warranty period must begin on date of beneficial occupancy.

Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer signed warranty
certificates prior to final payment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT COORDINATION
Luminaires and associated equipment and accessories for interior

applications are specified in Section 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING.
2.2 LED LUMINAIRES
UL 1598, NEMA C82.77 and UL 8750. Provide luminaires as indicated in

luminaire schedule and details on project plans. Provide luminaires
complete with light sources of quantity, type, and wattage indicated. All
luminaires of the same type shall be provided by the same manufacturer.
a. LED luminaire housings shall be die cast or extruded aluminum.
b. LED luminaires shall be rated for operation within an ambient

temperature range of minus 22 degrees F to 122 degrees F.
c. Luminaires shall be UL listed for wet locations per UL 1598.
d. LED luminaires shall produce a minimum efficacy as shown in the

following table, tested per IES LM-79. Theoretical models of initial
raw LED lumens per watt are not acceptable.
Application Luminaire Efficacy in

Lumens per Watt
Exterior Pole/Arm-Mounted Area and Roadway 65

Luminaires
Exterior Pole/Arm-Mounted Decorative 65

Luminaires
Exterior Wall-Mounted Area Luminaires 60
Bollards 35
Parking Garage Luminaires 70
e. Luminaires shall have IES distribution and NEMA field angle

classifications as indicated in luminaire schedule on project plans
per IES HB-10.
f. Housing finish shall be baked-on enamel, anodized, or baked-on powder

coat paint. Finish shall be capable of surviving ASTM B117 salt fog
environment testing for 2500 hours minimum without blistering or
peeling.
g. Luminaires shall not exceed the following IES TM-15 Backlight, Uplight
and Glare (B.U.G.) ratings:
1. Maximum Backlight (B) rating shall be determined by lighting zone

in which luminaire is placed.
2. Maximum Uplight (U) rating shall be U0.
3. Maximum Glare (G) rating shall be determined by lighting zone in

which luminaire is placed.
h. Luminaires shall be fully assembled and electrically tested prior to

shipment from factory.
i. The finish color shall be as indicated in the luminaire schedule or

detail on the project plans.
j. Luminaire arm bolts shall be 304 stainless steel or zinc-plated steel.
k. Luminaire lenses shall be constructed of clear tempered glass or

UV-resistant acrylic. Provide polycarbonate vandal-resistant lenses
as indicated.
l. The wiring compartment on pole-mounted, street and area luminaires

must be accessible without the use of hand tools to manipulate small
screws, bolts, or hardware.
m. Incorporate modular electrical connections, and construct luminaires

to allow replacement of all or any part of the optics, heat sinks,
power supply units, ballasts, surge suppressors and other electrical
components using only a simple tool, such as a manual or cordless
electric screwdriver.
n. Luminaires shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name,

address, model number, date of manufacture, and serial number securely
affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of the distributing
agent will not be acceptable.
o. Luminaire must pass 3G vibration testing in accordance with

NEMA C136.31.
p. All factory electrical connections shall be made using crimp, locking,

or latching style connectors. Twist-style wire nuts are not
acceptable.
2.2.2 Luminaire Light Sources
2.2.2.1 LED Light Sources
a. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) shall be in accordance with

NEMA ANSLG C78.377:
b. Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall be:
Greater than or equal to 70 for 4000 degrees K light sources.
c. Color Consistency:
Manufacturer shall utilize a maximum 4-step MacAdam ellipse binning

tolerance for color consistency of LEDs used in luminaires.
2.2.3 Luminaire Power Supply Units (Drivers)
2.2.3.1 LED Power Supply Units (Drivers)
UL 1310. LED Power Supply Units (Drivers) shall meet the following
requirements:
a. Minimum efficiency shall be 85 percent.
b. Drive current to each individual LED shall not exceed 600 mA, plus or
minus 10 percent.
c. Shall be rated to operate between ambient temperatures of minus 22

degrees F and 104 degrees F 122 degrees F.
d. Shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are

connected, typically ranging from 120 V to 480 V nominal.
e. Operating frequency shall be: 50 or 60 Hz.
f. Power Factor (PF) shall be greater than or equal to 0.90.
g. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) current shall be less than or equal to

20 percent.
h. Shall meet requirements of 47 CFR 15, Class B.
i. Shall be RoHS-compliant.
j. Shall be mounted integral to luminaire. Remote mounting of power

supply is not allowed.
k. Power supplies in luminaires mounted under a covered structure, such

as a canopy, or where otherwise appropriate shall be UL listed with a
sound rating of A.
l. Shall be dimmable, and compatible with a standard dimming control

circuit of 0 - 10V or other approved dimming system.
m. Shall be equipped with over-temperature protection circuit that turns

light source off until normal operating temperature is achieved.
2.2.4 LED Luminaire Surge Protection
Provide surge protection integral to luminaire to meet C Low waveforms as

defined by IEEE C62.41.2, Scenario 1, Location Category C.
2.3 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRE CONTROLS
Controls shall comply with Section 9 of ASHRAE 90.1 - IP . Provide a

control system interface within each luminaire that is compatible with the
energy management or control system used by the utility department in
charge of the project area for control of site lighting.
2.3.1 Photocell
UL 773 or UL 773A. Photocells shall be hermetically sealed, cadmium

sulfide light sensor type, 50/60 Hz with single-pole, single-throw
contacts. Photocell shall be designed to fail to the ON position.
Housing shall be constructed of die cast aluminum, rated to operate within
a temperature range of minus 40 to 158 degrees F. Photocell shall have a
1/2 in threaded base for mounting to a junction box or conduit. Provide
fixed base type housing. Photocell shall turn on at 1-3 footcandles and
turn off at 3 to 15 footcandles. A time delay shall prevent accidental
switching from transient light sources. Provide a directional lens in
front of the cell to prevent fixed light sources from creating a turnoff
condition.
2.3.2 Timeswitch
Timeswitch shall be an electronic type with a 7 day astronomic programming

function that changes on/off settings according to seasonal variations of
sunset and sunrise, providing a total of 56 on/off set points. Digital
clock display format shall be24 hour type. Provide power outage backup
for switch utilizing a lithium battery which provides coverage for a
minimum of 3 years. Timeswitch shall provide control to 4 channels or
loads. Contacts shall be rated for 30 amps at 120-277 VAC resistive load
in a DPST normally open (NO) configuration. Provide switch with manual
bypass or remote override control and ability for photosensor input.
Timeswitch shall be housed in a surface-mounted, lockable NEMA enclosure

constructed of painted steel or plastic polymer conforming to NEMA ICS 6.
2.3.3 Lighting Control Relay Panel
Panel shall consist of a single NEMA surface-mounted enclosure with two

separate interior sections; one for Class 1 (branch circuit) and one for
Class 2 (low voltage) wiring. Provide panel with 8 relays. Panel shall
be designed as a stand alone type. The Class 1 section shall contain the
load side of all relays and the incoming branch circuit wiring. The Class
2 section shall contain the control power transformer (24 volt output),
relays, relay control modules, and control wiring. Panel enclosure shall
be constructed of 16 gauge cold-rolled steel with baked-on enamel finish.
Panel shall meet requirements of UL 916, ASHRAE 90.1 - IP, CEC Title 24
and 47 CFR 15.
Relays shall be 1-pole, rated at 20 amperes 480 VAC with rated life of
120,000 mechanical operations minimum.
Relay control module shall be 24 volt, electronic type and control up to

16 separate relays (16 channel) or programmed groups of relays. Provide
with inputs for signals from devices such as photocells, timeclocks, and
motion sensors. Relay control module with integral timeclock function
shall be 24 volt, electronic type with LCD display and control up to 8
separate relays (8 channel).
2.3.4 Motion Sensor
NEMA WD 7, UL 773A. Provide dual technology passive infrared/microwave

type sensors with 270 degree coverage, time delay that can be adjusted
from 15 seconds to 15 minutes, and "fail to ON position" default state.
Sensors shall be located to achieve coverage of areas as indicated on
project plans. Coverage patterns shall be derated as recommended by
manufacturer based on mounting height of sensor and any obstructions such
as trees. Do not use gross rated coverage in manufacturer's product
literature. Sensors installed integral to the luminaire must be provided
by the luminaire manufacturer. Sensors shall have an integral light level
sensor that does not allow luminaires to operate during daylight hours and
shall be designed to operate on a voltage of 120/277 VAC. Provide sensors
to operate in conjunction with bi-level controllers that lower HID or LED
luminaires to a 50 percent output. Sensor shall be equipped with a
threaded base for mounting to a weatherproof junction box or mounted
directly to luminaire.
2.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

acceptable.
2.4.2 Labels
Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements.

Luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific light sources
and ballasts according to proper light source type.
Markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily

visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when
lamps are in place.

corrosion-resistance test.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Photocell Switch Aiming
Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations. Mount switch on

or beside each luminaire when switch is provided in cast weatherproof
aluminum housing with swivel arm. Set adjustable window slide for 10
footcandles photocell turn-on.
3.1.2 GROUNDING
Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including luminaires,

mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures. Where copper grounding
conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially
treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose.
Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly

installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test after 100
hours of burn-in time to show that the equipment operates in accordance
with the requirements of this section.
SECTION 27 05 28.36 40
CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

08/14
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES



Steel Products
NEMA VE 2 (2013) Cable Tray Installation Guidelines

3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National
Electrical Code
Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS and Section

26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT applies to work
1.2.1 Pre-Installation Meetings
The Contracting Officer will schedule a pre-installation meeting within 30

days of Contract Award. Submit the following for review and approval:
a. Fabrication Drawings
b. Installation Drawings
Submit manufacturer's product data for the following items:
a. Cable Trays
b. Supports
SECTION 27 05 28.36 40 Page 1

1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fabrication Drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Cable Trays; G
Supports; G
Manufacturer's Instructions; G
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
Comply with NEMA Standards Publication Number VE1, "Cable Tray Systems."
Comply with NEC, as applicable to construction and installation of cable

tray and cable channel systems (Article 392 NEC).
Provide products that are UL-classified and labeled.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Provide wire mesh cable trays, size as indicated.
2.2 FABRICATION
Submit fabrication drawings for cable trays consisting of fabrication and

assembly details to be performed in the factory.
Prior to assembly, coat contact surfaces of trays with an antioxidant

compound. Finish edges, fittings, and hardware free from burrs and sharp
edges. Include splice and end plates, dropouts, and miscellaneous
hardware.
2.3 MATERIALS
Provide cable trays constructed of steel in accordance with

ASTM A1008/A1008M with a zinc coating applied after fabrication.
Provide electroplated galvanized steel trays with finish in accordance

with ASTM A123/A123M.
SECTION 27 05 28.36 40 Page 2

2.4 COMPONENTS
2.4.1 Supports
Permit both vertical and horizontal adjustment, where possible on supports

and hangers. Provide an adequate bearing surface for the tray on the
horizontal and vertical tray supports and have provisions for holddown
clamps or fasteners. Provide a secure means other than friction for
fastening cable trays to supports in accordance with Section 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM and Section 26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION
FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT.
Support cable trays at not more than 6 -foot intervals. Place supports
for horizontal-elbow tray fittings within 2 -feet of each fitting
extremity and as recommended by the cable-tray manufacturer.
When supported at 6 -foot intervals, ensure the cable trays are capable of
carrying not less than 150 pounds per linear foot. Ensure tray fittings
do not have less than the load-carrying ability of straight tray sections
and have the manufacturer's minimum standard radius.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray installation.
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Manufacturer's Instructions
Submit manufacturer's instructions for cable trays including special

provisions required to install equipment components and system packages.
Detail impedances, hazards and safety precautions.
3.1.2 Installation Drawings
Thirty calendar days prior to shipment, submit installation drawings to

the Contracting Officer for approval. Coordinate drawings with all other
work in the immediate area that could come in conflict with the
installation. Include layout of cable tray work and details of both
horizontal and vertical supports as specified in paragraph entitled,
"Supports," of this section.
3.1.3 Grounding
Properly grounded cable trays by means of a low-resistance conductor of

sufficient capacity, but in no case smaller than No. 6 AWG copper. Bond
grounding conductor to cable-tray sections and fittings by compatible
bolted connections. Consider cable tray sections in tandem assembly as
having electrical continuity when these sections are bonded with
appropriate high-strength bolts. Provide permanent and continuous
effective grounding with an impedance sufficiently low to limit the
potential above ground and to facilitate operation of overcurrent devices
in the circuit. Provide grounding and bonding of cable trays in
accordance with NFPA 70.
SECTION 27 05 28.36 40 Page 3

SECTION 27 10 00
BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM

08/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (ECIA)
ECIA EIA/ECA 310-E (2005) Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and

Associated Equipment

ICEA S-90-661 (2012) Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually

Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables for
Use in General Purpose and LAN
Communications Wiring Systems Technical
Requirements
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NECA)
NECA/BICSI 568 (2006) Standard for Installing Building

Telecommunications Cabling
ANSI/NEMA WC 66 (2013) Performance Standard for Category 6

and Category 7 100 Ohm Shielded and
Unshielded Twisted Pairs

3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National
Electrical Code
TIA-1152 (2009) Requirements for Field Test

Instruments and Measurements for Balanced
Twisted-Pair Cabling
TIA-568-C.0 (2009; Add 1 2010; Add 2 2012) Generic

Telecommunications Cabling for Customer
Premises
TIA-568-C.1 (2009; Add 2 2011; Add 1 2012) Commercial

Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard
TIA-568-C.2 (2009; Errata 2010) Balanced Twisted-Pair

Telecommunications Cabling and Components
Standards
TIA-568-C.3 (2008; Add 1 2011) Optical Fiber Cabling

Components Standard
TIA-569 (2012c; Addendum 1 2013; Errata 2013)

Commercial Building Standard for
Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
TIA-606 (2012b) Administration Standard for the

Telecommunications Infrastructure
TIA-607 (2011b) Generic Telecommunications Bonding

and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer
Premises
U.S. FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)
FCC Part 68 Connection of Terminal Equipment to the

Telephone Network (47 CFR 68)
UL 1286 (2008; Reprint Oct 2014) Office Furnishings
UL 1863 (2004; Reprint Nov 2012) Communication

Circuit Accessories
UL 444 (2008; Reprint Apr 2010) Communications

Cables
UL 514C (2014) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes,

Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers

Marking and Labeling Systems
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM and Section 26 05 48.00 10

SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT apply to this section with
additions and modifications specified herein.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms
used in this specification shall be as defined in TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2,

TIA-569, TIA-606 and IEEE 100 and herein.
1.3.1 Campus Distributor (CD)
A distributor from which the campus backbone cabling emanates.

International expression for main cross-connect (MC).
1.3.2 Building Distributor (BD)
A distributor in which the building backbone cables terminate and at which

connections to the campus backbone cables may be made. International
expression for intermediate cross-connect (IC).
1.3.3 Floor Distributor (FD)
A distributor used to connect horizontal cable and cabling subsystems or

equipment. (International expression for horizontal cross-connect (HC).)
1.3.4 Telecommunications Room (TR)
An enclosed space for housing telecommunications equipment, cable,

terminations, and cross-connects. The room is the recognized
cross-connect between the backbone cable and the horizontal cabling.
1.3.5 Entrance Facility (EF) (Telecommunications)
An entrance to the building for both private and public network service
cables (including wireless) including the entrance point at the building
wall and continuing to the equipment room.
1.3.6 Equipment Room (ER) (Telecommunications)
An environmentally controlled centralized space for telecommunications

equipment that serves the occupants of a building. Equipment housed
therein is considered distinct from a telecommunications room because of
the nature of its complexity.
1.3.7 Open Cable
Cabling that is not run in a raceway as defined by NFPA 70. This refers
to cabling that is "open" to the space in which the cable has been
installed and is therefore exposed to the environmental conditions
associated with that space.
1.3.8 Open Office
A floor space division provided by furniture, moveable partitions, or

other means instead of by building walls.
1.3.9 Pathway
A physical infrastructure utilized for the placement and routing of

telecommunications cable.
The building telecommunications cabling and pathway system shall include

permanently installed horizontal cabling, horizontal pathways, work area
pathways, telecommunications outlet assemblies, conduit, raceway, and

hardware for splicing, terminating, and interconnecting cabling necessary
to transport telephone and data (including LAN) between equipment items in
a building. The horizontal system shall be wired in a star topology from
the telecommunications work area to the floor distributor or campus
distributor at the center or hub of the star. Provide telecommunications
pathway systems referenced herein as specified in Section 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. The telecommunications contractor must
coordinate with the NMCI/COSC/NGEN contractor concerning access to and
configuration of telecommunications spaces. The telecommunications
contractor may be required to coordinate work effort within the
telecommunications spaces with the NMCI/COSC/NGEN contractor.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Telecommunications drawings; G
Telecommunications Space Drawings; G
In addition to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, provide shop

drawings in accordance with paragraph SHOP DRAWINGS.
SD-03 Product Data
Telecommunications cabling (backbone and horizontal); G
Patch panels; G
Telecommunications outlet/connector assemblies; G
Connector blocks; G
Submittals shall include the manufacturer's name, trade name,

place of manufacture, and catalog model or number. Include
performance and characteristic curves. Submittals shall also
include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical
society publication references. Should manufacturer's data
require supplemental information for clarification, the
supplemental information shall be submitted as specified in
paragraph REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS and as required in Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
SD-06 Test Reports
Telecommunications cabling testing; G
SD-07 Certificates
Telecommunications Contractor Qualifications; G
Key Personnel Qualifications; G
Manufacturer Qualifications; G
Test plan; G
Factory reel tests; G
Telecommunications cabling and pathway system Data Package 5; G
Record Documentation; G
1.6.1 Shop Drawings
In exception to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, submitted plan

drawings shall be a minimum of 11 by 17 inches in size using a minimum
scale of 1/8 inch per foot, except as specified otherwise. Include wiring
diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed
location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping,
ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated
installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and
indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the
interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate
adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of
operating equipment devices. Submittals shall include the nameplate data,
size, and capacity. Submittals shall also include applicable federal,
military, industry, and technical society publication references.
1.6.1.1 Telecommunications Drawings
Provide registered communications distribution designer (RCDD) approved,

drawings in accordance with TIA-606. The identifier for each termination
and cable shall appear on the drawings. Drawings shall depict final
telecommunications installed wiring system infrastructure in accordance
with TIA-606. The drawings should provide details required to prove that
the distribution system shall properly support connectivity from the EF
telecommunications and ER telecommunications, CD's, BD's, and FD's to the
telecommunications work area outlets. The following drawings shall be
provided as a minimum:
a. T1 - Layout of complete building per floor - Building Area/Serving

Zone Boundaries and Horizontal Pathways. Layout of complete building
per floor. The drawing indicates location of building areas, serving
zones, telecommunications rooms, access points, pathways, grounding
system, and other systems that need to be viewed from the complete
building perspective.
b. T2 - Serving Zones/Building Area Drawings - Drop Locations and Cable

Identification (ID’S). Shows a building area or serving zone. These
drawings show drop locations, telecommunications rooms, access points
and detail call outs for common equipment rooms and other congested
areas.
c. T4 - Typical Detail Drawings - Faceplate Labeling, Firestopping,

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Safety, Department of
Transportation (DOT). Detailed drawings of symbols and typicals such
as faceplate labeling, faceplate types, faceplate population
installation procedures, detail racking, and raceways.
1.6.1.2 Telecommunications Space Drawings
Provide T3 drawings in accordance with TIA-606 that include

telecommunications rooms plan views, pathway layout (cable tray, racks,
ladder-racks, etc.), mechanical/electrical layout, and , rack, backboard
and wall elevations. Drawings shall show layout of applicable equipment
including incoming cable stub or connector blocks, building protector
assembly, outgoing cable connector blocks, patch panels and equipment
spaces and cabinet/racks. Drawings shall include a complete list of
equipment and material, equipment rack details, proposed layout and
anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to
other parts of the work including clearance for maintenance and
operation. Drawings may also be an enlargement of a congested area of T1
or T2 drawings.
1.6.2 Telecommunications Qualifications
Work under this section shall be performed by and the equipment shall be
provided by the approved telecommunications contractor and key personnel.
Qualifications shall be provided for: the telecommunications system
contractor, the telecommunications system installer, and the supervisor
(if different from the installer). A minimum of 30 days prior to
installation, submit documentation of the experience of the
telecommunications contractor and of the key personnel.
1.6.2.1 Telecommunications Contractor
The telecommunications contractor shall be a firm which is regularly and

professionally engaged in the business of the applications, installation,
and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment.
The telecommunications contractor shall demonstrate experience in
providing successful telecommunications systems within the past 3 years of
similar scope and size. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a
maximum of five successful telecommunication system installations for the
telecommunications contractor.
1.6.2.2 Key Personnel
Provide key personnel who are regularly and professionally engaged in the
business of the application, installation and testing of the specified
telecommunications systems and equipment. There may be one key person or
more key persons proposed for this solicitation depending upon how many of
the key roles each has successfully provided. Each of the key personnel
shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications
systems within the past 3 years.
Supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or

any of its components shall be Building Industry Consulting Services
International (BICSI) Registered Cabling Installers, Technician Level.
Submit documentation of current BICSI certification for each of the key
personnel.
In lieu of BICSI certification, supervisors and installers assigned to the
installation of this system or any of its components shall have a minimum

of 3 years experience in the installation of the specified copper and
fiber optic cable and components. They shall have factory or factory
approved certification from each equipment manufacturer indicating that
they are qualified to install and test the provided products. Submit
documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful
telecommunication system installations for each of the key personnel.
Documentation for each key person shall include at least two successful
system installations provided that are equivalent in system size and in
construction complexity to the telecommunications system proposed for this
solicitation. Include specific experience in installing and testing
telecommunications systems and provide the names and locations of at least
two project installations successfully completed using copper
telecommunications cabling systems. All of the existing
telecommunications system installations offered by the key persons as
successful experience shall have been in successful full-time service for
at least 18 months prior to the issuance date for this solicitation.
Provide the name and role of the key person, the title, location, and
completed installation date of the referenced project, the referenced
project owner point of contact information including name, organization,
title, and telephone number, and generally, the referenced project
description including system size and construction complexity.
Indicate that all key persons are currently employed by the

telecommunications contractor, or have a commitment to the
telecommunications contractor to work on this project. All key persons
shall be employed by the telecommunications contractor at the date of
issuance of this solicitation, or if not, have a commitment to the
telecommunications contractor to work on this project by the date that the
bid was due to the Contracting Officer.
Note that only the key personnel approved by the Contracting Officer in
the successful proposal shall do work on this solicitation's
telecommunications system. Key personnel shall function in the same roles
in this contract, as they functioned in the offered successful
experience. Any substitutions for the telecommunications contractor's key
personnel requires approval from The Contracting Officer.
1.6.2.3 Minimum Manufacturer Qualifications
Cabling, equipment and hardware manufacturers shall have a minimum of 3

years experience in the manufacturing, assembly, and factory testing of
components which comply with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2 and TIA-568-C.3.
1.6.3 Test Plan
Provide a complete and detailed test plan for the telecommunications

cabling system including a complete list of test equipment for the
components and accessories for each cable type specified, 60 days prior to
the proposed test date. Include procedures for certification, validation,
and testing.



is furnished.

Provide protection from weather, moisture, extreme heat and cold, dirt,
dust, and other contaminants for telecommunications cabling and equipment
placed in storage.
Connecting hardware shall be rated for operation under ambient conditions

of 32 to 140 degrees F and in the range of 0 to 95 percent relative
humidity, noncondensing.
1.9 WARRANTY

1.10 MAINTENANCE
1.10.1 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Commercial off the shelf manuals shall be furnished for operation,

installation, configuration, and maintenance of products provided as a
part of the telecommunications cabling and pathway system, Data Package
5. Submit operations and maintenance data in accordance with Section
01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein not later
than 2 months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. In addition to

requirements of Data Package 5, include the requirements of paragraphs
TELECOMMUNICATIONS DRAWINGS, TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACE DRAWINGS, and RECORD
DOCUMENTATION. Ensure that these drawings and documents depict the
as-built configuration.
1.10.2 Record Documentation
Provide T5 drawings including documentation on cables and termination

hardware in accordance with TIA-606. T5 drawings shall include schedules
to show information for cut-overs and cable plant management, patch panel
layouts and cover plate assignments, cross-connect information and
connecting terminal layout as a minimum. T5 drawings shall be provided in
hard copy format. Provide the following T5 drawing documentation as a
minimum:
a. Cables - A record of installed cable shall be provided in accordance

with TIA-606. The cable records shall include the required data
fields for each cable and complete end-to-end circuit report for each
complete circuit from the assigned outlet to the entry facility in
accordance with TIA-606. Include manufacture date of cable with
submittal.
b. Termination Hardware - A record of installed patch panels,

cross-connect points, distribution frames, terminating block
arrangements and type, and outlets shall be provided in accordance
with TIA-606. Documentation shall include the required data fields in
accordance with TIA-606.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
Components shall be UL or third party certified. Where equipment or

materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society
reference standards of the organizations, submit proof of such
compliance. The label or listing by the specified organization will be
acceptable evidence of compliance. In lieu of the label or listing,
submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent
to perform testing, and approved by the Contracting Officer. The
certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with
the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with
the specified organization's reference standard. Provide a complete
system of telecommunications cabling and pathway components using star
topology. Provide support structures and pathways, complete with outlets,
cables, connecting hardware and telecommunications cabinets/racks.
Cabling and interconnecting hardware and components for telecommunications
systems shall be UL listed or third party independent testing laboratory
certified, and shall comply with NFPA 70 and conform to the requirements
specified herein.
2.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS PATHWAY
Provide telecommunications pathways in accordance with TIA-569 and as

specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM and Section
26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. Provide
system furniture pathways in accordance with UL 1286.
2.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Cabling shall be UL listed for the application and shall comply with
TIA-568-C.0, TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, and NFPA 70. Provide a labeling
system for cabling as required by TIA-606 and UL 969. Ship cable on reels
or in boxes bearing manufacture date for for unshielded twisted pair
(UTP) in accordance with ICEA S-90-661 for all cable used on this
project. Cabling manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of
installation shall not be used.
2.3.1 Horizontal Cabling
Provide horizontal cable in compliance with NFPA 70 and performance

characteristics in accordance with TIA-568-C.1.
2.3.1.1 Horizontal Copper
Provide horizontal copper cable, UTP, 100 ohm in accordance with

TIA-568-C.2, UL 444, ANSI/NEMA WC 66, and ICEA S-90-661. Provide four
each individually twisted pair, minimum size 24 AWG conductors, Category
6, with a blue for data and white for voice thermoplastic jacket. Cable
shall be imprinted with manufacturers name or identifier, flammability
rating, gauge of conductor, transmission performance rating (category
designation) and length marking at regular intervals in accordance with
ICEA S-90-661. Provide plenum (CMP), riser (CMR), or general purpose (CM
or CMG) communications rated cabling in accordance with NFPA 70.
Substitution of a higher rated cable shall be permitted in accordance with
NFPA 70. Cables installed in conduit within and under slabs shall be UL
listed and labeled for wet locations in accordance with NFPA 70.
2.3.2 Work Area Cabling
2.3.2.1 Work Area Copper
Provide work area copper cable in accordance with TIA-568-C.2, with a blue
for data and white for voice thermoplastic jacket.
2.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACES
Provide connecting hardware and termination equipment in the

telecommunications entrance facility and telecommunication equipment rooms
to facilitate installation as shown on design drawings for terminating and
cross-connecting permanent cabling. Provide telecommunications
interconnecting hardware color coding in accordance with TIA-606.
2.4.1 Connector Blocks
Provide insulation displacement connector (IDC) Type 110 for Category 6

systems. Provide blocks for the number of horizontal and backbone cables
terminated on the block plus 25 percent spare.
2.4.2 Cable Guides
Provide cable guides specifically manufactured for the purpose of routing

cables, wires and patch cords horizontally and vertically on
telecommunications backboards. Cable guides of ring or bracket type
devices mounted on backboard for horizontal cable management and
individually mounted for vertical cable management. Mount cable guides
with screws.
2.4.3 Patch Panels
Provide ports for the number of horizontal and backbone cables terminated
on the panel plus 25 percent spare.
2.4.3.1 Modular to 110 Block Patch Panel
Provide in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2. Panels shall be

third party verified and shall comply with EIA/TIACategory 6 requirements.
Panel shall be constructed of 0.09 inches minimum aluminum and shall be
rack mounted and compatible with anECIA EIA/ECA 310-E 19 inches equipment
rack. Panel shall provide 48 non-keyed, 8-pin modular ports, wired to
T568A or T568B. Patch panels shall terminate the building cabling on Type
110 IDCs and shall utilize a printed circuit board interface. The rear of
each panel shall have incoming cable strain-relief and routing guides.
Panels shall have each port factory numbered and be equipped with
laminated plastic nameplates above each port.
2.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTOR ASSEMBLIES
2.5.1 Outlet/Connector Copper
Outlet/connectors shall comply with FCC Part 68, TIA-568-C.1, and

TIA-568-C.2. UTP outlet/connectors shall be UL 1863 listed, non-keyed,
8-pin modular, constructed of high impact rated thermoplastic housing and
shall be third party verified and shall comply with TIA-568-C.2 Category 6
requirements. Outlet/connectors provided for UTP cabling shall meet or
exceed the requirements for the cable provided. Outlet/connectors shall
be terminated using a Type 110 IDC PC board connector, color-coded for
both T568A and T568B wiring. Each outlet/connector shall be wired T568A.
UTP outlet/connectors shall comply with TIA-568-C.2 for minimum of 200
mating cycles.
2.5.2 Cover Plates
Telecommunications cover plates shall comply with UL 514C, TIA-568-C.1,

and TIA-568-C.2; flush design constructed of high impact thermoplastic
material in color to match color of receptacle/switch cover plates
specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide
labeling in accordance with the paragraph LABELING in this section.
2.6 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS
Provide in accordance with UL 467, TIA-607, and NFPA 70. Components shall
be identified as required by TIA-606. Provide ground rods, bonding
conductors, and grounding busbars as specified in Section 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.7 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL
Provide as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.

acceptable.

enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the
drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and,
when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic,
0.125 inches thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte
finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave
into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches.
Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inches high normal block style.
2.10 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS
2.10.1 Factory Reel Tests
Provide documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by

manufacturer to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2 cables.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install telecommunications cabling and pathway systems, including the

horizontal cable, pathway systems, telecommunications outlet/connector
assemblies, and associated hardware in accordance with NECA/BICSI 568,
TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-569, NFPA 70, and UL standards as
applicable. Provide cabling in a star topology network. Pathways and
outlet boxes shall be installed as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Install telecommunications cabling with copper media
in accordance with the following criteria to avoid potential
electromagnetic interference between power and telecommunications
equipment. The interference ceiling shall not exceed 3.0 volts per meter
measured over the usable bandwidth of the telecommunications cabling.
Cabling shall be run with horizontal and vertical cable guides in
telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection
equipment.
3.1.1 Cabling
Install UTP telecommunications cabling system as detailed in TIA-568-C.1,

TIA-568-C.2. Screw terminals shall not be used except where specifically
indicated on plans. Use an approved insulation displacement connection
(IDC) tool kit for copper cable terminations. Do not exceed
manufacturers' cable pull tensions for copper and optical fiber cables.
Provide a device to monitor cable pull tensions. Do not exceed 25 pounds
pull tension for four pair copper cables. Do not chafe or damage outer
jacket materials. Use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer. Do
not over cinch cables, or crush cables with staples. For UTP cable, bend
radii shall not be less than four times the cable diameter. Cables shall
be terminated; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Cables shall
not be spliced. Label cabling in accordance with paragraph LABELING in
this section.
3.1.1.1 Open Cable
Use only where specifically indicated on plans for use in cable trays, or
below raised floors. Install in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and
TIA-568-C.2. Do not exceed cable pull tensions recommended by the
manufacturer. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in

contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Placement
of cable parallel to power conductors shall be avoided, if possible; a
minimum separation of 12 inches shall be maintained when such placement
cannot be avoided.
Plenum cable shall be used where open cables are routed through plenum
areas. Plenum cables shall comply with flammability plenum requirements
of NFPA 70.
3.1.1.2 Horizontal Cabling
Install horizontal cabling as indicated on drawings Do not untwist

Category 6 UTP cables more than one half inch from the point of
termination to maintain cable geometry. Provide slack cable in the form
of a figure eight (not a service loop) on each end of the cable, 10 feet
in the telecommunications room, and 12 inches in the work area outlet.
3.1.2 Pathway Installations
Provide in accordance with TIA-569 and NFPA 70. Provide all building
pathway items, except cable tray as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR
3.1.3 Cable Tray Installation
Install cable tray as specified in Section 27 05 28.36 40 CABLE TRAYS FOR

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS. Only CMP and OFNP type cable shall be installed
in a plenum.
3.1.4 Work Area Outlets
3.1.4.1 Terminations
Terminate UTP cable in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2 and wiring

configuration as specified.
3.1.4.2 Cover Plates
As a minimum, each outlet/connector shall be labeled as to its function

and a unique number to identify cable link in accordance with the
paragraph LABELING in this section.
3.1.4.3 Cables
Unshielded twisted pair and fiber optic cables shall have a minimum of 12
inches of slack cable loosely coiled into the telecommunications outlet
boxes. Minimum manufacturer's bend radius for each type of cable shall
not be exceeded.
3.1.4.4 Pull Cords
Pull cords shall be installed in conduit serving telecommunications

outlets that do not have cable installed.
3.1.5 Telecommunications Space Termination
Install termination hardware required for Category 6 system. An

insulation displacement tool shall be used for terminating copper cable to
insulation displacement connectors.
3.1.5.1 Connector Blocks
Connector blocks shall be rack and wall mounted in orderly rows and
columns. Adequate vertical and horizontal wire routing areas shall be
provided between groups of blocks. Install in accordance with industry
standard wire routing guides in accordance with TIA-569.
3.1.5.2 Patch Panels
Patch panels shall be mounted in equipment cabinets or racks with

sufficient ports to accommodate the installed cable plant plus 25 percent
spares.
a. Copper Patch Panel. Copper cable entering a patch panel shall be

secured to the panel with cable ties to prevent movement of the cable.
3.1.6 Electrical Penetrations
Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated

wall, partitions, floors, or ceilings as specified in Section 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.7 Grounding and Bonding
Provide in accordance with TIA-607, NFPA 70 and as specified in Section

26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
3.2 LABELING
3.2.1 Labels
Provide labeling in accordance with TIA-606. Handwritten labeling is

unacceptable. Stenciled lettering for voice and data circuits shall be
provided using laser printer.
3.2.2 Cable
Cables shall be labeled using color labels on both ends with identifiers
in accordance with TIA-606.
3.2.3 Termination Hardware
Workstation outlets and patch panel connections shall be labeled using

color coded labels with identifiers in accordance with TIA-606.

3.4 TESTING
3.4.1 Telecommunications Cabling Testing
Perform telecommunications cabling inspection, verification, and

performance tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2. Test
equipment shall conform to TIA-1152. Perform optical fiber field

inspection tests via attenuation measurements on factory reels and provide
results along with manufacturer certification for factory reel tests.
Remove failed cable reels from project site upon attenuation test failure.
3.4.1.1 Inspection
Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for UL or third
party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in
telecommunications rooms and at workstations to confirm color code for
T568A or T568B pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm
compliance with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2. Visually confirm Category 6,
marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels.
3.4.1.2 Verification Tests
UTP backbone copper cabling shall be tested for DC loop resistance,

shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors, and
between conductors and shield, if cable has overall shield. Test
operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after
termination but prior to being cross-connected.
3.4.1.3 Performance Tests
Perform testing for each outlet and MUTOA as follows:
a. Perform Category 6 link tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and

TIA-568-C.2. Tests shall include wire map, length, insertion loss,
NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, return loss, propagation delay, and
delay skew.
3.4.1.4 Final Verification Tests
Perform verification tests for UTP systems after the complete

telecommunications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.
SECTION 28 31 76
INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM

08/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED SECTIONS
Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, applies to

this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein. In
addition, refer to the following sections for related work and
coordination:
Section 21 13 13.00 20 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION
Sections 14 24 00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS for additional work related to

elevators.
Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING for additional work related to
firestopping.
1.2 SUMMARY
1.2.1 Scope
a. This work includes completion of design for the modification and

extension of the existing fire alarm system to protect the building
addition and provide mass notification throughout the entire new and
existing building described herein and on the contract drawings for
the Building 229. Scope includes demolition and disposal of existing
equipment. New work includes system wiring, raceways, pull boxes,
terminal cabinets, outlet and mounting boxes, control equipment,
alarm, and supervisory signal initiating devices, alarm notification
appliances, supervising station fire alarm system transmitter, mass
notification system transceiver and antenna, and other accessories and
miscellaneous items required for a complete operating system even
though each item is not specifically mentioned or described. Provide
system complete and ready for operation.
b. Provide equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, inspection,

and testing in strict accordance with the required and advisory
provisions of NFPA 72, ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16, except as modified
herein. The system layout on the drawings show the intent of coverage
and are shown in suggested locations. Submit plan view drawing
showing device locations, terminal cabinet locations, junction boxes,
other related equipment, conduit routing, wire counts, circuit
identification in each conduit, and circuit layouts for all floors.
Drawings shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 170. Final
quantity, system layout, and coordination are the responsibility of
the Contractor.
1.3 REFERENCES

ASA S3.2 (2009; R 2014) Method for Measuring the

Intelligibility of Speech Over
Communication Systems (ASA 85)
ASME A17.1/CSA B44 (2013) Safety Code for Elevators and

Escalators
FM GLOBAL (FM)

IEEE C62.41.1 (2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges

Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and
Less) AC Power Circuits

INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION (IEC)
IEC 60268-16 (2003; ED 4.0) Sound System Equipment -

Part 16: Objective Rating Of Speech
Intelligibility By Speech Transmission
Index
ISO 7240-16 (2007) Fire Detection And Alarm Systems —

Part 16: Sound System Control And
Indicating Equipment
ISO 7240-19 (2007) Fire Detection and Alarm Systems —

Part 19: Design, Installation,
Commissioning and Service of Sound Systems
for Emergency Purposes
NFPA 170 (2012) Standard for Fire Safety and

Emergency Symbols

3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National
Electrical Code
NFPA 72 (2013) National Fire Alarm and Signaling

Code

UFC 3-601-02 (2010) Operations and Maintenance:

Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of
Fire Protection Systems
UFC 4-021-01 (2008; Change 1 2010) Design and O&M: Mass

Notification Systems
UL 1480 (2003; Reprint Oct 2012) Standard for

Speakers for Fire Alarm, Emergency, and
Commercial and Professional Use
UL 1971 (2002; Reprint Oct 2008) Signaling Devices

for the Hearing Impaired
UL 2017 (2008; Reprint May 2011) General-Purpose

Signaling Devices and Systems
UL 268 (2009) Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm

Systems
UL 464 (2009; Reprint Apr 2012) Standard for

Audible Signal Appliances
UL 521 (1999; Reprint May 2010) Heat Detectors

for Fire Protective Signaling Systems

Control Units and Accessories for Fire
Alarm Systems
UL Electrical Constructn (2012) Electrical Construction Equipment

Directory
UL Fire Prot Dir (2012) Fire Protection Equipment Directory
1.4 DEFINITIONS
Wherever mentioned in this specification or on the drawings, the

equipment, devices, and functions shall be defined as follows:
1.4.1 Interface Device
An addressable device that interconnects hard wired systems or devices to

an analog/addressable system.
1.4.2 Fire Alarm Control Unit and Mass Notification Autonomous Control
Unit (FMCP)
A master control panel having the features of a fire alarm and mass
notification control unit and fire alarm and mass notification control
units are interconnected. The panel has central processing, memory, input
and output terminals, and LCD or LED Display units.
1.4.3 Local Operating Console (LOC)
A unit designed to allow emergency responders and/or building occupants to

operate the MNS including delivery or recorded and/or live messages,
initiate strobe and textural visible appliance operation and other relayed
functions.
1.4.4 Terminal Cabinet
A steel cabinet with locking, hinge-mounted door that terminal strips are
securely mounted.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Nameplates; G, A/E
Wiring Diagrams; G, A/E
System Layout; G, A/E
System Operation; G, A/E
Notification Appliances; G, A/E
Amplifiers; G, A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Technical Data And Computer Software; G

Fire Alarm Control Unit and Mass Notification Control Unit (FMCP);
G, A/E
Terminal cabinets; G, A/E
Manual stations; G, A/E
Transmitters (including housing); G, A/E
Batteries; G, A/E
Battery chargers; G, A/E
Smoke sensors; G, A/E
Heat detectors; G, A/E
Notification appliances; G, A/E
Addressable interface devices; G, A/E
Amplifiers; G, A/E
Tone generators; G, A/E
Digitalized voice generators; G, A/E
Digital alarm communicator transmitter (DACT); G, A/E
Local Operating Console (LOC); G, A/E
SD-05 Design Data
Battery power; G, A/E

Battery chargers; G, A/E
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Quality Control

Testing Procedures; G, A/E
Smoke sensor testing procedures; G, A/E
SD-07 Certificates
Installer
Formal Inspection and Tests
Final Testing
System Operation; G
Fire Alarm/Mass Notification System
Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data Instructions; G

Instruction of Government Employees; G
As-Built Drawings; G
As-built shop drawings, at no later than 14 days after completion

of the Final Tests. The as-built drawings shall be updated to
reflect as-built conditions after all related work is completed
and shall reflect all changes and existing conditions for the
entire building at the completion of the project. Provide
electronic drawings in dwg or pdf format.
1.6 TECHNICAL DATA AND COMPUTER SOFTWARE
Technical data and computer software (meaning technical data that relates
to computer software) that are specifically identified in this project,
and may be defined/required in other specifications, shall be delivered,
strictly in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES. Identify data delivered
by reference to the particular specification paragraph against which it is
furnished. Data to be submitted shall include complete system, equipment,
and software descriptions. Descriptions shall show how the equipment will
operate as a system to meet the performance requirements of this
contract. The data package shall also include the following:
a. Identification of programmable portions of system equipment and

capabilities.
b. Description of system revision and expansion capabilities and methods

of implementation detailing both equipment and software requirements.
c. Provision of operational software data on all modes of programmable

portions of the fire alarm and detection system.
d. Description of Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Panel

equipment operation.
e. Description of auxiliary and remote equipment operations.
f. Library of application software.
g. Operation and maintenance manuals.
Equipment and devices shall be compatible and operable with existing

station fire alarm system and shall not impair reliability or operational
functions of existing supervising station fire alarm system. The
proprietary type Supervising Station (PSS) is located in building 1030 The
supervising equipment is OnyxWorks by Notifier. The existing Base-wide
area mass notification system is WAVES by MadahCom and reports to Building
916.
a. In NFPA publications referred to herein, consider advisory provisions

to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been substituted for
"should" wherever it appears; interpret reference to "authority having
jurisdiction" to mean the Naval Facilities Engineering Command,
Southwest Division, Fire Protection Engineer.
b. The recommended practices stated in the manufacturer's literature or

documentation shall be considered as mandatory requirements.
c. Devices and equipment for fire alarm service shall be listed by

UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM APP GUIDE.
1.7.1.1 Design Services
Installations requiring completion of installation drawings and

specification or modifications of fire detection, fire alarm, mass
notification system, fire suppression systems or mass notification systems
shall require the services and review of a qualified engineer. For the
purposes of meeting this requirement, a qualified engineer is defined as
an individual meeting one of the following conditions:
a. A registered professional engineer (P.E.) in fire protection

engineering.
1.7.1.2 Supervisor
NICET Fire Alarm Technicians to perform the installation of the system. A

NICET Level 3 Fire Alarm Technician shall supervise the installation of
the fire alarm system/mass notification system. The Fire Alarm technicians
supervising the installation of equipment shall be factory trained in the
installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment
specified herein and on the drawings.
1.7.1.3 Technician
Fire Alarm Technicians with a minimum of four years of experience utilized

to install and terminate fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets
and panels. The Fire Alarm technicians installing the equipment shall be
factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of
the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.
1.7.1.4 Installer
NICET Level II technician to assist in the installation of fire

alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and panels. An electrician
shall be allowed to install wire, cable, conduit and backboxes for the
fire alarm system/mass notification system. The Fire Alarm installer
shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and

operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.
1.7.1.5 Test Personnel
Fire Alarm Technicians with a minimum of eight years of experience (NICET

Level IV)utilized to test and certify the installation of the fire
alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and panels. The Fire Alarm
technicians testing the equipment shall be factory trained in the
installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment
specified herein and on the drawings.
1.7.1.6 Manufacturer
Components shall be of current design and shall be in regular and

recurrent production at the time of installation. Provide design,
materials, and devices for a protected premises fire alarm system,
complete, conforming to NFPA 72, except as otherwise or additionally
specified herein.
1.7.2.1 Requirements for Fire Protection Service
Equipment and material shall have been tested by UL and listed in

UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM and listed in FM APP GUIDE. Where the
terms "listed" or "approved" appear in this specification, they shall mean
listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE. The omission of these terms
under the description of any item of equipment described shall not be
construed as waiving this requirement. All listings or approval by
testing laboratories shall be from an existing ANSI or UL published
standard.
1.7.2.2 Fire Alarm/Mass Notification System
Furnish equipment that is compatible and is UL listed, FM approved, or

listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory for the intended
use. All listings by testing laboratories shall be from an existing ANSI
or UL published standard. Submit a unique identifier for each device,
including the control panel and initiating and indicating devices, with an
indication of test results, and signature of the factory-trained
technician of the control panel manufacturer and equipment installer.
With reports on preliminary tests, include printer information. Include
the NFPA 72 Record of Completion and NFPA 72 Inspection and Testing Form,
with the appropriate test reports.
1.7.2.3 Fire alarm Testing Services or Laboratories
construct fire alarm and fire detection equipment in accordance with

UL Fire Prot Dir, UL Electrical Constructn, or FM APP GUIDE.
Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather,

humidity, and temperature variation, dirt and dust, and other contaminants.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Submit annotated catalog data as required in the paragraph SUBMITTAL, in

table format on the drawings, showing manufacturer's name, model, voltage,
and catalog numbers for equipment and components. Submitted shop drawings
shall not be smaller than ISO A1. Also provide UL or FM listing cards for
equipment provided.
Provide materials, equipment, and devices that have been tested by a

nationally recognized testing laboratory, such as UL or FM Approvals, LLC
(FM), and listed or approved for fire protection service when so required
by NFPA 72 or this specification. Select material from one manufacturer,
where possible, and not a combination of manufacturers, for any particular
classification of materials. Material and equipment shall be the standard
products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the
products for at least two years prior to bid opening.
2.1.2 Nameplates
Major components of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address,

type or style, model or serial number, catalog number, date of
installation, installing Contractor's name and address, and the contract
number provided on a new plate permanently affixed to the item or
equipment. Major components include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. FMCPs
b. Automatic transmitter/transceiver
c. Terminal Cabinet
Furnish nameplate illustrations and data to obtain approval by the

Contracting Officer before installation. Obtain approval by the
Contracting Officer for installation locations. Nameplates shall be
etched metal or plastic, permanently attached by screws to panels or
adjacent walls.
2.1.3 Keys
Keys and locks for equipment shall be identical. Provide not less than
six keys of each type required. Master all keys and locks to a single key
as required by the Installation Fire Department.
LOC is not permitted to be locked or lockable.
2.2 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENT
All fire alarm and mass notification equipment shall be listed for use
under the applicable reference standards. Interfacing of Listed UL 864 or
similar approved industry listing with Mass Notification Panels listed to
UL 2017 shall be done in a laboratory listed configuration, if the
software programming features cannot provide a listed interface control.
If a field modification is needed, such as adding equipment like relays,
the manufacturer of the panels being same or different brand from
manufacturer shall provide the installing contractor for review and

confirmation by the installing contractor. As part of the submittal
documents, provide this information.
2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
The Addressable Interior Fire Alarm and Mass Notification System shall be
a complete, supervised, noncoded, analog/addressable fire alarm and mass
notification system conforming to NFPA 72, UL 864, and UL 2017. The
system shall be activated into the alarm mode by actuation of any alarm
initiating device. The system shall remain in the alarm mode until the
initiating device is reset and the control panel is reset and restored to
normal. The system may be placed in the alarm mode by local microphones,
LOC, or remotely from authorized locations/users.
Submit data on each circuit to indicate that there is at least 25 percent

spare capacity for notification appliances, 25 percent spare capacity for
initiating devices. Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings.
Submit a complete description of the system operation in matrix format on
the drawings. Submit a complete list of device addresses and
corresponding messages.
2.3.1 Alarm Initiating Devices and Notification Appliances (Visual, Voice,

Textural)
a. Connect alarm initiating devices to initiating device circuits (IDC)

Class "B", or to signal line circuits (SLC) Class "B" and installed
in accordance with NFPA 72.
b. Connect alarm notification appliances and speakers to notification

appliance circuits (NAC) Class "B".
c. The system shall operate in the alarm mode upon actuation of any alarm
initiating device or a mass notification signal. The system shall
remain in the alarm mode until initiating device(s) or mass
notification signal is/are reset and the control panel is manually
reset and restored to normal. Audible, and visual appliances and
systems shall comply with NFPA 72 and as specified herein. Fire alarm
system/mass notification system components requiring power, except for
the control panel power supply, shall operate on 24 Volts dc.
2.3.2 Functions and Operating Features
The system shall provide the following functions and operating features:
a. The FMCP shall provide power, annunciation, supervision, and control

for the system. Addressable systems shall be microcomputer
(microprocessor or microcontroller) based with a minimum word size of
eight bits with sufficient memory to perform as specified.
b. Provide signaling line circuits for each floor.
c. Provide notification appliance circuits. The visual alarm

notification appliances shall have the flash rates synchronized as
required by NFPA 72.
d. Provide electrical supervision of the primary power (AC) supply,

presence of the battery, battery voltage, and placement of system
modules within the control panel.
e. Provide an audible and visual trouble signal to activate upon a single

break or open condition, or ground fault. The trouble signal shall
also operate upon loss of primary power (AC) supply, absence of a
battery supply, low battery voltage, or removal of alarm or
supervisory panel modules. Provide a trouble alarm silence feature
that shall silence the audible trouble signal, without affecting the
visual indicator. After the system returns to normal operating
conditions, the trouble signal shall again sound until the trouble is
acknowledged. A smoke sensor in the process of being verified for the
actual presence of smoke shall not initiate a trouble condition.
f. Provide program capability via switches in a locked portion of the

FACP to bypass the automatic notification appliance circuits, fire
reporting system, air handler shutdown, elevator recall features.
Operation of this programming shall indicate this action on the FACP
display and printer output.
g. Alarm, supervisory, and/or trouble signals shall be automatically

transmitted to the fire department.
h. Alarm functions shall override trouble or supervisory functions.

Supervisory functions shall override trouble functions.
i. The system shall be capable of being programmed from the panels

keyboard. Programmed information shall be stored in non-volatile
memory.
j. The system shall be capable of operating, supervising, and/or

monitoring both addressable and non-addressable alarm and supervisory
devices.
k. There shall be no limit, other than maximum system capacity, as to the

number of addressable devices, that may be in alarm simultaneously.
l. Where the fire alarm/mass notification system is responsible for

initiating an action in another emergency control device or system,
such as an HVAC system and an elevator system, the addressable fire
alarm relay shall be in the vicinity of the emergency control device.
m. An alarm signal shall automatically initiate the following functions:
(1) Transmission of an alarm signal to EMD Building 1030.
(2) Visual indication of the device operated on the control panel

(FMCP).
(3) Continuous actuation of all alarm notification appliances.
(4) Recording of the event via electronically in the history log of

the fire control system unit.
(5) Operation of a smoke sensor in an elevator lobby or other

location associated with the automatic recall of elevators, shall
recall the elevators in addition to other requirements of this
paragraph.
(6) Operation of a duct smoke sensor shall shut down the appropriate
air handler in accordance with NFPA 90A in addition to other
requirements of this paragraph and as allowed by NFPA 72.
(7) Operation of a sprinkler waterflow switch serving an elevator

machinery room or elevator shaft shall operate shunt trip circuit
breaker(s) to shut down power to the elevators in accordance with
ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
(8) Activate textual LED signs with scrolling instructions.
n. A supervisory signal shall automatically initiate the following

functions:
(1) Visual indication of the device operated on the FACP and sound
the audible alarm at the respective panel.
(2) Transmission of a supervisory signal to EMD Building 230.
(3) Recording of the event electronically in the history log of the

control unit.
o. A trouble condition shall automatically initiate the following

functions:
(1) Visual indication of the system trouble on the FACP and on the
graphic annunciator, and sound the audible alarm at the respective
panel.
(2) Transmission of a trouble signal to EMD Building 230.
(3) Recording of the event in the history log of the control unit.
p. The maximum permissible elapsed time between the actuation of an

initiating device and its indication at the FACP is 10 seconds.
q. The maximum elapsed time between the occurrence of the trouble

condition and its indication at the FACP is 200 seconds.
r. Activation of a LOC pushbutton shall activate the audible and visual

alarms in the facility. The audible message shall be the one
associated with the pushbutton activated.
2.4 SYSTEM MONITORING
2.4.1 Valves
Each valve affecting the proper operation of a fire protection system,

including automatic sprinkler control valves, standpipe control valves,
sprinkler service entrance valve, valves at fire pumps, isolating valves
for pressure type waterflow or supervision switches, and valves at
backflow preventers, whether supplied under this contract or existing,
shall be electrically monitored to ensure its proper position. Provide
each tamper switch with a separate address.
2.5 MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM FUNCTIONS
2.5.1 Notification Appliance Network
The audible notification appliance network consists of speakers located to

provide intelligible instructions at areas as indicated. The Mass
Notification System announcements shall take priority over all other

audible announcements of the system including the output of the fire alarm
system in a normal or alarm state. When a mass notification announcement
is activated during a fire alarm, all fire alarm system functions shall
continue in an alarm state except for the output signals of the fire alarm
audible and visual notification appliances.
2.5.2 Strobes
Provide strobes to alert hearing-impaired occupants.
2.5.3 Wide Area MNS
The Wide Area MNS system in the area of the building shall not be
activated by the in-building MNS.
2.5.4 Voice Notification
An autonomous voice notification control unit is used to monitor and

control the notification appliance network and provide consoles for local
operation. Using a console, personnel in the building can initiate
delivery of pre-recorded voice messages, provide live voice messages and
instructions, and initiate visual strobe and optional textual message
notification appliances. The autonomous voice notification control unit
will temporarily override audible fire alarm notification while delivering
Mass Notification messages to ensure they are intelligible.
2.5.5 Installation-Wide Control
The autonomous control unit shall communicate with the central control
unit of the installation-wide system. The autonomous control unit shall
receive commands/messages from the central control unit and provide status
information. The fire alarm/MNS systems shall be compatible with the
existing WAVES base-wide MNS system manufactured by MADAHCOM/Cooper
Industries. Provide an 18 inches x 16 inches x 10 inches NEMA 4X
enclosure, adjacent to the fire alarm/MNS panel for the government
provided and installed MNS transceiver panel (Cooper Notification
TRX-401). The NEMA enclosure shall be installed within 15 feet of the fire
alarm/MNS voice panel. A minimum 1-1/2 inch conduit with LMR 400 cable
from the transceiver enclosure to 4 feet above the roof-line with a roof
mounted weather-head shall be provided for the future antenna
installation. A minimum of 6 feet of LMR 400 cable shall be coiled at
each end for the future antenna installation. The maximum distance from
the transceiver enclosure to the weather-head is 200 feet; longer cable
runs require upgrade to LMR 600 type cable. Dedicated 110 VAC power
terminated to a 20 Amp breaker shall be provided to the lower right area
of the MNS transceiver enclosure. Conduits shall also be provided from
the fire alarm/MNS panel to the transceiver enclosure for future panel
interconnections. A separate junction box containing a terminal strip,
with a minimum of four contacts, for the future MNS transceiver
connections shall be provided. The audio input and normally open relay
connections shall be fully programmed as a second microphone one way input
and all components provided in the FACP/MNS voice panel for the future
transceiver connection. These connections shall be clearly labeled.
Connection of the MNS transceiver, TRX-401, to the junction box containing

the terminal strip shall not be done under this contract and will be
completed by others.
2.6 OVERVOLTAGE AND SURGE PROTECTION
2.6.1 Signaling Line Circuit Surge Protection
For systems having circuits located outdoors, communications equipment

shall be protected against surges induced on any signaling line circuit
and shall comply with the applicable requirements of IEEE C62.41.1 and
IEEE C62.41.2. Cables and conductors, that serve as communications links,
shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end that meet the
following waveform(s):
a. A 10 microsecond by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of

1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.
b. An 8 microsecond by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of

1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes. Protection shall be
provided at the equipment. Additional triple electrode gas surge
protectors, rated for the application, shall be installed on each
wireline circuit within 3 feet of the building cable entrance. Fuses
shall not be used for surge protection.
2.6.2 Sensor Wiring Surge Protection
Digital and analog inputs and outputs shall be protected against surges
induced by sensor wiring installed outdoors and as shown. The inputs and
outputs shall be tested with the following waveform:
a. A 10 by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts

and a peak current of 60 amperes.
b. An 8 by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and

a peak current of 500 amperes. Fuses shall not be used for surge
protection.
2.7 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICES
The initiating device being monitored shall be configured as a Class "B"

initiating device circuits. The system shall be capable of defining any
module as an alarm module and report alarm trouble, loss of polling, or as
a supervisory module, and reporting supervisory short, supervisory open or
loss of polling such as waterflow switches, valve supervisory switches,
fire pump monitoring, independent smoke detection systems, relays for
output function actuation, etc. The module shall be UL or FM listed as
compatible with the control panel. The monitor module shall provide
address setting means compatible with the control panel's SLC supervision
and store an internal identifying code. Monitor module shall contain an
integral LED that flashes each time the monitor module is polled and is
visible through the device cover plate. Pull stations with a monitor
module in a common backbox are not required to have an LED.
2.8 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE
The control module shall be capable of operating as a relay (dry contact

form C) for interfacing the control panel with other systems, and to
control door holders or initiate elevator fire service. The module shall
be UL or FM listed as compatible with the control panel. The indicating
device or the external load being controlled shall be configured as a
Class "B" notification appliance circuits. The system shall be capable of
supervising, audible, visual and dry contact circuits. The control module
shall have both an input and output address. The supervision shall detect
a short on the supervised circuit and shall prevent power from being
applied to the circuit. The control model shall provide address setting
means compatible with the control panel's SLC supervision and store an
internal identifying code. The control module shall contain an integral
LED that flashes each time the control module is polled and is visible
through the device cover plate. Control Modules shall be located in
environmental areas that reflect the conditions to which they were listed.
2.9 ISOLATION MODULES
Provide isolation modules to subdivide each signaling line circuit into

groups of not more than 20 addressable devices between adjacent isolation
modules.
2.10 SMOKE SENSORS
2.10.1 Photoelectric Smoke Sensors
Provide addressable photoelectric smoke sensors as follows:
a. Provide analog/addressable photoelectric smoke sensors utilizing the

photoelectric light scattering principle for operation in accordance
with UL 268. Smoke sensors shall be listed for use with the fire
alarm control panel.
b. Provide self-restoring type sensors that do not require any

readjustment after actuation at the FACP to restore them to normal
operation. Sensors shall be UL listed as smoke-automatic fire sensors.
c. Components shall be rust and corrosion resistant. Vibration shall

have no effect on the sensor's operation. Protect the detection
chamber with a fine mesh metallic screen that prevents the entrance of
insects or airborne materials. The screen shall not inhibit the
movement of smoke particles into the chamber.
d. Provide twist lock bases for the sensors. The sensors shall maintain
contact with their bases without the use of springs. Provide
companion mounting base with screw terminals for each conductor.
Terminate field wiring on the screw terminals. The sensor shall have
a visual indicator to show actuation.
e. The sensor address shall identify the particular unit, its location
within the system, and its sensitivity setting. Sensors shall be of
the low voltage type rated for use on a 24 VDC system.
f. An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall

have the capability to manually access the following information for
each initiating device.
(1) Primary status
(2) Device type
(3) Present average value
(4) Present sensitivity selected
(5) Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.)
2.10.2 Duct Smoke Sensors
Duct-mounted photoelectric smoke detectors shall be furnished and

installed where indicated and in accordance with NFPA 90A. Units shall
consist of a smoke detector as specified in paragraph Photoelectric
Detectors, mounted in a special housing fitted with duct sampling tubes.
Detector circuitry shall be mounted in a metallic enclosure exterior to
the duct. (It is not permitted to cut the duct insulation to install the
duct detector directly on the duct). Detectors shall have a manual reset.
Detectors shall be rated for air velocities that include air flows between
500 and 4000 fpm. Detectors shall be powered from the fire alarm panel.
a. Sampling tubes shall run the full width of the duct. The duct
detector package shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A, UL 268
A, and shall be UL listed for use in air-handling systems. The
control functions, operation, reset, and bypass shall be controlled
from the fire alarm control panel.
b. Lights to indicate the operation and alarm condition; and the test and
reset buttons shall be visible and accessible with the unit installed
and the cover in place. Remote indicators shall be provided where
required by NFPA 72 and these shall be provided with test and reset
switches.
c. Remote lamps and switches as well as the affected fan units shall be
properly identified in etched plastic placards. Detectors shall
provide for control of auxiliary contacts that provide control,
interlock, and shutdown functions. Auxiliary contacts provide for
this function shall be located within 3 feet of the controlled circuit
or appliance. The detectors shall be supplied by the fire alarm
system manufacturer to ensure complete system compatibility.
2.10.3 Smoke Sensor Testing
Smoke sensors shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 and

manufacturer's recommended calibrated test method. Submit smoke sensor
testing procedures for approval. In addition to the NFPA 72 requirements,
smoke detector sensitivity shall be tested during the preliminary tests.
2.11 HEAT DETECTORS
2.11.1 Heat Detectors
Heat detectors shall be designed for detection of fire by fixed temperature.

The alarm condition shall be determined by comparing sensor valve with the
stored values. Heat detector spacing shall be rated in accordance with
UL 521.
2.11.1.1 Fixed Temperature Detectors
Detectors shall be designed for surface outlet box mounting and supported
independently of wiring connections. Detectors shall be designed to
detect high heat. The detectors shall have a specific temperature setting
of. The UL 521 test rating for the fixed temperature detectors shall be
rated for 50 by 50 feet.
2.11.2 Self-Test Routines
Automatic self-test routines shall be performed on each sensor that will

functionally check sensor sensitivity electronics and ensure the accuracy
of the value being transmitted. Any sensor that fails this test shall
indicate a trouble condition with the sensor location at the control panel.
2.11.3 Operator Access
An operator at the control panel, having the proper access level, shall
have the capability to manually access the following information for each
heat sensor:
a. Primary status
b. Device type
c. Present average value
d. Sensor range
2.11.4 Operator Control
An operator at the control panel, having the proper access level, shall
have the capability to manually control the following information for each
heat sensor:
a. Alarm detection sensitivity values
b. Enable or disable the point/device
c. Control sensors relay driver output
2.12 ELECTRIC POWER
2.12.1 Primary Power
Power shall be 120 VAC service for the FMCP from the AC service to the
building in accordance with NFPA 72.
2.13 SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY
Provide for system operation in the event of primary power source

failure. Transfer from normal to auxiliary (secondary) power or
restoration from auxiliary to normal power shall be automatic and shall
not cause transmission of a false alarm.
2.13.1 Batteries
Provide sealed, maintenance-free, sealed lead acid or lead-calcium

batteries as the source for emergency power to the FMCP. Batteries shall
contain suspended electrolyte. The battery system shall be maintained in
a fully charged condition by means of a solid state battery charger.
Provide an automatic transfer switch to transfer the load to the batteries
in the event of the failure of primary power.
2.13.1.1 Capacity
Battery size shall be the greater of the following two capacities.
a. Sufficient capacity to operate the fire alarm system under supervisory

and trouble conditions, including audible trouble signal devices for
24 hours and audible and visual signal devices under alarm conditions
for an additional 15 minutes.
b. Sufficient capacity to operate the mass notification for 60 minutes

after loss of AC power.
2.13.1.2 Battery Power Calculations
a. Verify that battery capacity exceeds supervisory and alarm power

requirements.
(1) Substantiate the battery calculations for alarm, alert, and

supervisory power requirements. Include ampere-hour requirements
for each system component and each panel component, and compliance
with UL 864.
(2) Provide complete battery calculations for both the alarm, alert,
and supervisory power requirements. Submit ampere-hour
requirements for each system component with the calculations.
(3) A voltage drop calculation to indicate that sufficient voltage is

available for proper operation of the system and all components,
at the minimum rated voltage of the system operating on batteries.
b. For battery calculations use the following assumptions: Assume a

starting voltage of 24 VDC for starting the calculations to size the
batteries. Calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified standby
time, and then calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified
alarm time. Calculate the nominal battery voltage after operation on
batteries for the specified time period. Using this voltage perform a
voltage drop calculation for circuit containing device and/or
appliances remote from the power sources.
2.13.2 Battery Chargers
Provide a solid state, fully automatic, variable charging rate battery

charger. The charger shall be capable of providing 120 percent of the
connected system load and shall maintain the batteries at full charge. In
the event the batteries are fully discharged (20.4 Volts dc), the charger
shall recharge the batteries back to 95 percent of full charge within 48
hours after a single discharge cycle as described in paragraph CAPACITY
above. Provide pilot light to indicate when batteries are manually placed
on a high rate of charge as part of the unit assembly if a high rate
switch is provided.
2.14 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT AND MASS NOTIFICATION CONTROL UNIT (FMCP)
Provide a complete control panel fully enclosed in a lockable steel

cabinet as specified herein. Operations required for testing or for
normal care and maintenance of the systems shall be performed from the
front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required at a
location to form a complete control panel, the unit cabinets shall match
exactly.
a. Each control unit shall provide power, supervision, control, and logic
for the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components,
internally mounted and arranged for easy access. Each control unit
shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal
building power supply. Provide each panel with supervisory functions
for power failure, internal component placement, and operation.
b. Visual indication of alarm, supervisory, or trouble initiation on the

fire alarm control panel shall be by liquid crystal display or similar
means with a minimum of 80 characters. The mass notification control
unit shall have the capability of temporarily deactivate the fire
alarm audible notification appliances while delivering voice
messages.
c. Provide secure operator console for initiating recorded messages,

strobes and displays; and for delivering live voice messages. Provide
capacity for at least eight pre-recorded messages. Provide the
ability to automatically repeat pre-recorded messages. Provide a
secure microphone for delivering live messages. Provide adequate
discrete outputs to temporarily deactivate fire alarm audible
notification, and initiate/synchronize strobes. Provide a complete
set of self-diagnostics for controller and appliance network. Provide
local diagnostic information display and local diagnostic information
and system event log file.
2.14.1 Cabinet
Install control panel components in cabinets large enough to accommodate

all components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of
panels as well as field wiring. The enclosure shall be identified by an
engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate
shall say "Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Panel" and shall not
be less than 1 inch high. Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal
identification plates for lamps, circuits, meters, fuses, and switches.
The cabinet shall be provided in a sturdy steel housing, complete with
back box, hinged steel door with cylinder lock, and surface mounting
provisions.
2.14.2 Control Modules
Provide power and control modules to perform all functions of the FACP.
Provide audible signals to indicate any alarm, supervisory, or trouble
condition. The alarm signals shall be different from the trouble signal.
Connect circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw-type
terminals with each terminal marked for identification. Locate diodes and
resistors, if any, on screw terminals in the FACP. Circuits operating at
24 VDC shall not operate at less than the UL listed voltage at the sensor
or appliance connected. Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not
have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage.
2.14.3 Silencing Switches
2.14.3.1 Alarm Silencing Switch
Provide an alarm silencing switch at the FMCP that shall silence the
audible and visual. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a
subsequent alarm.
2.14.3.2 Supervisory/Trouble Silencing Switch
Provide supervisory and trouble silencing switch that shall silence the
audible trouble and supervisory signal, but not extinguish the visual
indicator. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a
subsequent alarm, supervision, or trouble condition. Audible trouble
indication must resound automatically every 24 hours after the silencing
feature has been operated.
2.14.4 Non-Interfering
Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does
not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device. Circuits shall
be manually reset by switch from the FACP after the initiating device or
devices have been restored to normal.
2.14.5 Audible Notification System
The Audible Notification System shall comply with the requirements of

NFPA 72 for Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications System requirements
ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16, except as specified herein. The system shall
be a one-way multi-channel voice notification system incorporating user
selectability of a minimum eight distinct sounds for tone signaling, and
the incorporation of a voice module for delivery of prerecorded messages.
Audible appliances shall produce a temporal code 3 tone for three cycles
followed by a voice message that is repeated until the control panel is
reset or silenced. Automatic messages shall be broadcast through speakers
throughout the building/facility but not in stairs or elevator cabs. A
live voice message shall override the automatic audible output through use
of a microphone input at the control panel or the LOC.
a. When using the microphone, live messages shall be broadcast

throughout a selected floor or floors or all call. The system shall
be capable of operating all speakers at the same time. The Audible
Notification System shall support Public Address (PA) paging for the
facility. The microprocessor shall actively interrogate circuitry,
field wiring, and digital coding necessary for the immediate and
accurate rebroadcasting of the stored voice data into the appropriate
amplifier input. Loss of operating power, supervisory power, or any
other malfunction that could render the digitalized voice module
inoperative shall automatically cause the code 3 temporal tone to take
over all functions assigned to the failed unit in the event an alarm
is activated.
b. The Mass Notification functions shall override the manual or automatic

fire alarm notification or Public Address (PA) functions. Other fire
alarm functions including transmission of a signal(s) to the fire
department shall remain operational. The system shall have the
capability of utilizing LOC with redundant controls of the
notification system control panel. Notification Appliance Circuits
(NAC) shall be provided for the activation of strobe appliances. The
activation of the NAC Circuits shall follow the operation of the
speaker NAC circuits. Audio output shall be selectable for line
level. Amplifier outputs shall be not greater than 100 watts RMS
output. The strobe NAC Circuits shall provide at least 2 amps of 24
VDC power to operate strobes and have the ability to synchronize all
strobes. A hand held microphone shall be provided and, upon
activation, shall take priority over any tone signal, recorded message
or PA microphone operation in progress, while maintaining the strobe
NAC Circuits activation.
2.14.5.1 Outputs and Operational Modules
All outputs and operational modules shall be fully supervised with

on-board diagnostics and trouble reporting circuits. Provide form "C"
contacts for system alarm and trouble conditions. Provide circuits for
operation of auxiliary appliance during trouble conditions. During a Mass
Notification event the panel shall not generate nor cause any trouble
alarms to be generated with the Fire Alarm system.
2.14.5.2 Mass Notification
a. Mass Notification functions shall take precedence over all other

function performed by the Audible Notification System. Messages shall
utilize a female voice and shall be similar to the following:
(1) 1000 Hz tones (Fire Emergency/Evacuate/Code 3 Temporal)
"May I have your attention please. May I have your attention

please. A fire emergency has been reported in the building.
Please leave the building by the nearest exit." (Provide a 2
second pause.) "May I have your attention please, (repeat the
message)."
(2) 1000 Hz tones (Bomb Threat/Evacuate/Slow Whoop)
"Attention, Attention, A bomb threat alert has been issued for

this building. All personnel are to evacuate immediately using
the nearest exit. Further instructions will be issued outside the
building by emergency response teams."
(3) 1000 Hz tones (Intruder Alert/Announcement Chime)
"This is the mass notification system an intruder has been sighted

in or around the building. Please report any suspicious activity
sighted."
(4) 1000 Hz tones (Protect in Place/Announcement Chime)
"Attention. A force protection threat has been issued for this

area. Effective immediately, we are operating, 'secure and
lockdown procedures. All personnel should remain calm and stay
where you are. Please wait for further instructions."
(5) 1000 Hz tones (Evacuation Using Alternate Exits/Evacuate/Slow

Whoop)
"This is the mass notification system. An emergency has been

reported in the building. Please evacuate the buiding using
secondary exits. Do not use the main entry. Do not use the main
entry."
(6) 1000 Hz tones (Weather Alert/Announcement/Chime)

"This is the mass notification system. Dangerous weather
conditions have been reported in this area. Please stand by for
further instructions."
(7) 1000 Hz tones (System Test Message/Announcement/Chime)
"This is the mass notification system. This is only a test."
(8) 1000 Hz tones (All Clear/Announcement/No Pre-Tone)
"This is the mass notification system. This is an all clear

message."
c. The LOC shall incorporate a Push-To-Talk (PTT) microphone, redundant

controls and system status indicators of/for the system. The unit
shall incorporate microphone override of any tone generation or
prerecorded messages. The unit shall be fully supervised from the
control panel. The housing shall contain a latch (not lock).
d. Auxiliary Input Module shall be designed to be an outboard expansion

module to either expand the number of optional LOC's, or allow a
telephone interface.
e. LOC shall incorporate a Push-To-Talk (PTT) microphone, and controls to

allow Public Address paging in the facility. The Public Address
paging function shall not override any alarm or notification functions
and shall be disabled by such signals. The microphone shall be
handheld style. All wiring to the LOC shall be supervised in
accordance with UFC 4-021-01. Systems that require field modification
or are not supervised for multiple LOC's shall not be approved.
f. When an installation has more than one LOC, the LOC's shall be
programmed to allow only one LOC to be available for page or messaging
at a time. Once one LOC becomes active, all other LOC's will have an
indication that the system is busy (Amber Busy Light)and cannot be
used at that time. This is to avoid two messages being given at the
same time. Also, it must be possible to override or lockout the LOC's
from the Master Command Panel (in accordance with NFPA 72.)
2.14.6 Memory
Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all
functions. The use of long life batteries, capacitors, or other
age-dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to non-volatile
processors, PROMS, or EPROMS.
2.14.7 Field Programmability
Provide control units and control panels that are fully field programmable
for control, initiation, notification, supervisory, and trouble functions
of both input and output. The system program configuration shall be menu
driven. System changes shall be password protected and shall be
accomplished using personal computer based equipment. Any proprietary
equipment and proprietary software needed by qualified technicians to
implement future changes to the fire alarm system shall be provided as
part of this contract.
2.14.8 Input/Output Modifications
The FMCP shall contain features that allow the bypassing of input devices
from the system or the modification of system outputs. These control
features shall consist of a panel mounted keypad. Any bypass or
modification to the system shall indicate a trouble condition on the FMCP.
2.14.9 Resetting
Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm,

supervisory, or trouble signal while the alarm, supervisory or trouble
condition on the system still exists.
2.14.10 Instructions
Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a

Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame.
Install the instructions on the interior of the FACP. The card shall show
those steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is received as well
as the functional operation of the system under all conditions, normal,
alarm, supervisory, and trouble. The instructions shall be approved by
the Contracting Officer before being posted.
2.14.11 Walk Test
The FACP shall have a walk test feature. When using this feature,
operation of initiating devices shall result in limited system outputs, so
that the notification appliances operate for only a few seconds and the
event is indicated on the system printer, but no other outputs occur.
2.14.12 History Logging
In addition to the required printer output, the control panel shall have
the ability to store a minimum of 400 events in a log. These events shall
be stored in a battery-protected memory and shall remain in the memory
until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually. Resetting of the
control panel shall not clear the memory.
2.15 AMPLIFIERS, PREAMPLIFIERS, TONE GENERATORS
Any amplifiers, preamplifiers, tone generators, digitalized voice

generators, and other hardware necessary for a complete, operational,
textual audible circuit conforming to NFPA 72 shall be housed in a remote
FMCP, terminal cabinet, or in the FMCP. Submit data to indicate that the
amplifiers have sufficient capacity to simultaneously drive all
notification speakers at the maximum rating plus 25 percent spare
capacity. Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings.
2.15.1 Operation
The system shall automatically operate and control all building speakers
except those installed in the stairs and within elevator cabs. The
speakers in the stairs and elevator cabs shall operate only when the
microphone is used to deliver live messages.
2.15.2 Construction
Amplifiers shall utilize computer grade solid state components and shall
be provided with output protection devices sufficient to protect the
amplifier against any transient up to 10 times the highest rated voltage
in the system.
2.15.3 Inputs
Equip each system with separate inputs for the tone generator, digitalized
voice driver, panel mounted microphone, and Public Address Paging Function
(where allowed). Microphone inputs shall be of the low impedance,

balanced line type. Both microphone and tone generator input shall be
operational on any amplifier.
2.15.4 Tone Generator
The tone generator shall be of the modular, plug-in type with securely
attached labels to identify the component as a tone generator and to
identify the specific tone it produces. The tone generator shall produce
a code 3 temporal tone and shall be constantly repeated until interrupted
by either the digitalized voice message, the microphone input, or the
alarm silence mode as specified. The tone generator shall be single
channel with an automatic backup generator per channel such that failure
of the primary tone generator causes the backup generator to automatically
take over the functions of the failed unit and also causes transfer of the
common trouble relay.
2.15.5 Protection Circuits
Each amplifier shall be constantly supervised for any condition that could
render the amplifier inoperable at its maximum output. Failure of any
component shall cause automatic transfer to a designated backup amplifier,
illumination of a visual "amplifier trouble" indicator on the control
panel, appropriate logging of the condition on the system printer, and
other actions for trouble conditions as specified.
2.16 ANNUNCIATOR
2.16.1 Annunciator Panel
Provide an annunciator that includes an LCD display. The display shall

indicate the device in trouble/alarm or any supervisory device. Display
the device name, address, and location.
A building floor plan shall be provided mounted (behind plexiglass or

similar protective material) at the annunciator location. The floor plan
shall indicate all rooms by name and number including the locations of
stairs and elevators. The floor plan shall show all devices and their
programmed address to facilitate their physical location from the LCD
display information.
2.16.2 Programming
Where programming for the operation of the annunciator is accomplished by

a separate software program than the software for the FMCP, the software
program shall not require reprogramming after loss of power. The software
shall be reprogrammable in the field.
2.17 MANUAL STATIONS
Provide metal or plastic, semi-flush mounted, double action, addressable

manual stations, that are not subject to operation by jarring or
vibration. Stations shall be equipped with screw terminals for each
conductor. Stations that require the replacement of any portion of the
device after activation are not permitted. Stations shall be finished in
fire-engine red with molded raised lettering operating instructions of
contrasting color. The use of a key or wrench shall be required to reset
the station. Manual stations shall be mounted at 42 inches. Stations
shall have a separate screw terminal for each conductor.
2.18 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
2.18.1 Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Speakers
Audible appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 464.

Appliances shall be connected into notification appliance circuits.
Surface mounted audible appliances shall be painted red. Recessed audible
appliances shall be installed with a grill that is painted white.
a. Speakers shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 1480.

Speakers shall have six different sound output levels and operate with
audio line input levels of 70.7 VRMs and 25 VRMs, by means of
selectable tap settings. Tap settings shall include taps of 1/8, 1/4,
1/2, 1, and 2 watt. Speakers shall incorporate a high efficiency
speaker for maximum output at minimum power across a frequency range
of 150 Hz to 10,000 Hz, and shall have a sealed back construction.
Speakers shall be capable of installation on standard 4 inch square
electrical boxes. Where speakers and strobes are provided in the same
location, they may be combined into a single unit. All inputs shall
be polarized for compatibility with standard reverse polarity
supervision of circuit wiring via the FMCP.
b. Provide speaker mounting plates constructed of cold rolled steel

having a minimum thickness of 16 gauge or molded high impact plastic
and equipped with mounting holes and other openings as needed for a
complete installation. Fabrication marks and holes shall be ground
and finished to provide a smooth and neat appearance for each plate.
Each plate shall be primed and painted.
c. Speakers shall utilize screw terminals for termination of all field

wiring.
2.18.2 Visual Notification Appliances
Visual notification appliances shall conform to the applicable

requirements of UL 1971 and conform to the Architectural Barriers Act
(ABA). Fire Alarm Notification Appliances shall have clear high intensity
optic lens, xenon flash tubes, and be marked "Alert" in red letters. The
light pattern shall be disbursed so that it is visible above and below the
strobe and from a 90 degree angle on both sides of the strobe. Strobe
flash rate shall be 1 flash per second and a minimum of 15 candela (actual
output after derating for tinted lens) based on the UL 1971 test. Strobe
shall be surface or semi-flush mounted. Where more than two appliances
are located in the same room or corridor or field of view, provide
synchronized operation. Devices shall use screw terminals for all field
wiring.
2.19 ENVIRONMENTAL ENCLOSURES OR GUARDS
Environmental enclosures shall be provided to permit Fire Alarm or Mass

Notification components to be used in areas that exceed the environmental
limits of the listing. The enclosure shall be listed for the device or
appliance as either a manufactured part number or as a listed compatible
accessory for the UL category that the component is currently listed.
Guards required to deter mechanical damage shall be either a listed
manufactured part or a listed accessory for the category of the initiating
device or notification appliance.
2.20 INTERFACE TO THE BASE WIDE MASS NOTIFICATION NETWORK
2.20.1 Radio
The radio transceiver shall be bi-direction and meet all the requirements
of paragraph, RADIO TRANSMITTER AND INTERFACE PANELS as specified in this
Specification Section. The transceiver utilized in the Mass Notification
System shall be capable of the following:
a. Communication with the Central Control/Monitoring System to provide

supervision of communication link and status changes are reported by
automatic and manual poll/reply/acknowledge routines.
b. All monitored points/status changes are transmitted immediately and at

programmed intervals until acknowledged by the Central
Control/Monitoring System.
c. Each transceiver shall transmits a unique identity code as part of all

messages; the code is set by the user at the transceiver.
2.20.1.1 Radio Frequency Communications
Use of radio frequency-type communications systems shall comply with

National Telecommunications and Information Administration (NTIA)
requirements.
2.20.1.2 Licensed Radio Frequency Systems
An approved DD Form 1494 for the system is required prior to operation.
2.20.2 Secure Radio System
2.20.2.1 Communications Network
The communications network provides two-way signals between central

control units and autonomous control units (in individual building
systems), and should include redundant (primary and backup) communication
links. T
2.20.2.2 Radio Frequency Communications
Use of radio frequency-type communications systems shall comply with

National Telecommunications and Information Administration (NTIA)
requirements. The systems shall be designed to minimize the potential for
interference, jamming, eavesdropping, and spoofing.
2.20.2.3 Licensed Radio Frequency Systems
An approved DD Form 1494 for the system is required prior to operation.
2.21 AUTOMATIC FIRE TRANSMITTERS
2.21.1 Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT)
Provide DACT that is compatible with the existing supervising station fire
alarm system. Transmitter shall have a means to transmit water flow,
alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions via a single transmitter.
Transmitter shall have a source of power for operation that conforms to
NFPA 72. Transmitter shall be capable of initiating a test signal daily at
any selected time. Transmitter shall be arranged to seize telephone

circuits in accordance with NFPA 72.
2.21.2 Signals to Be Transmitted to the Base Receiving Station
The following signals shall be sent to the base receiving station:
a. Sprinkler water flow
b. Manual pull stations
c. Smoke detectors
d. Duct smoke detectors
e. Heat detectors
2.22 WIRING
Provide wiring materials under this section as specified in Section

26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM with the additions and modifications
specified herein. NFPA 70 accepted fire alarm cables that do not require
the use of raceways except as modified herein are permitted.
2.22.1 Alarm Wiring
The SLC wiring shall be solid copper cable in accordance with the
manufacturers requirements. Copper signaling line circuits and initiating
device circuit field wiring shall be No. 16 AWG size twisted and shielded
solid conductors at a minimum. Visual notification appliance circuit
conductors, that contain audible alarm appliances, shall be solid copper
No. 14 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Speaker circuits shall be copper
No. 16 AWG size twisted and shielded conductors at a minimum. Wire size
shall be sufficient to prevent voltage drop problems. Circuits operating
at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than the UL listed voltages for the
sensors and/or appliances. Power wiring, operating at 120 VAC minimum,
shall be a minimum No. 12 AWG solid copper having similar insulation.
Acceptable power-limited cables are FPL, FPLR or FPLP as appropriate with
red colored covering. Nonpower-limited cables shall comply with NFPA 70.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM INITIATING DEVICES AND NOTIFICATION

APPLIANCES
3.1.1 FMCP
Locate the FMCP where indicated on the drawings. Surface mount the
enclosure with the top of the cabinet 6 feet above the finished floor or
center the cabinet at 5 feet, whichever is lower. Conductor terminations
shall be labeled and a drawing containing conductors, their labels, their
circuits, and their interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the
FMCP.
3.1.2 Manual Stations:
Locate manual stations as required by NFPA 72 and as indicated on

contract drawings. Mount stations so that their operating handles are 4
feet above the finished floor. Mount stations so they are located no
farther than 5 feet from the exit door they serve, measured horizontally.
3.1.3 Notification Appliance Devices
Locate notification appliance devices as required by NFPA 72 andwhere

indicated on the contract drawings. Mount assemblies on walls as required
by NFPA 72 and to meet the intelligibility requirements. Ceiling mounted
speakers shall conform to NFPA 72.
3.1.4 Smoke and Heat Sensors
Locate sensors as required by NFPA 72 and their listings andas indicated

on a 4 inch mounting box. Locate smoke and heat sensors on the ceiling.
Install heat sensors not less than 4 inches from a side wall to the near
edge. Heat sensors located on the wall shall have the top of the sensor
at least 4 inches below the ceiling, but not more than 12 inches below the
ceiling. Smoke sensors are permitted to be on the wall no lower than 12
inches from the ceiling with no minimum distance from the ceiling. In
raised floor spaces, install the smoke sensors to protect 225 square feet
per sensor. Install smoke sensors no closer than 5 feet from air handling
supply outlets.
3.1.5 Annunciator
Locate the annunciator as shown on the drawings. Surface mount the

panel, with the top of the panel 6 feet above the finished floor or center
the panel at 5 feet, whichever is lower.
3.1.6 Water Flow Detectors and Tamper Switches
Connect to water flow detectors and tamper switches.
3.1.7 Local Operating Console (LOC)
Locate the LOC as required by NFPA 72 and as indicated. Mount the console
so that the top message button is no higher than 44 inches above the floor.
3.2 SYSTEM FIELD WIRING
3.2.1 Wiring within Cabinets, Enclosures, and Boxes
Provide wiring installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and installed

parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of any box,
enclosure, or cabinet. Conductors that are terminated, spliced, or
otherwise interrupted in any enclosure, cabinet, mounting, or junction box
shall be connected to screw-type terminal blocks. Mark each terminal in
accordance with the wiring diagrams of the system. The use of wire nuts
or similar devices is prohibited. Conform wiring to NFPA 70.
Indicate the following in the wiring diagrams.
a. Point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the points of connection and

terminals used for electrical field connections in the system,
including interconnections between the equipment or systems that are
supervised or controlled by the system. Diagrams shall show
connections from field devices to the FACP and remote fire alarm
control units, initiating circuits, switches, relays and terminals.
b. Complete riser diagrams indicating the wiring sequence of devices and
their connections to the control equipment. Include a color code

schedule for the wiring. Include floor plans showing the locations of
devices and equipment.
3.2.2 Terminal Cabinets
Provide a terminal cabinet at the base of any circuit riser and on each
floor at each riser. Terminal size shall be appropriate for the size of
the wiring to be connected. Conductor terminations shall be labeled and a
drawing containing conductors, their labels, their circuits, and their
interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the terminal cabinet.
Minimum size is 8 inches by 8 inches. Only screw-type terminals are
permitted.
3.2.3 Alarm Wiring
Voltages shall not be mixed in any junction box, housing, or device,

except those containing power supplies and control relays. Provide all
wiring in electrical metallic conduit. Conceal conduit in finished areas
of new construction and wherever practicable in existing construction.
The use of flexible conduit not exceeding a 6 foot length shall be
permitted in initiating device or notification appliance circuits. Run
conduit or tubing (rigid, IMC, EMT, FMC, etc. as permitted by NFPA 72 and
NFPA 70) concealed unless specifically indicated otherwise.
3.2.4 Conductor Terminations
Labeling of conductors at terminal blocks in terminal cabinets, FMCP, and

remote FMCP and the LOC shall be provided at each conductor connection.
Each conductor or cable shall have a shrink-wrap label to provide a unique
and specific designation. Each terminal cabinet, FMCP, and remote FMCP
shall contain a laminated drawing that indicates each conductor, its
label, circuit, and terminal. The laminated drawing shall be neat, using
12 point lettering minimum size, and mounted within each cabinet, panel,
or unit so that it does not interfere with the wiring or terminals.
Maintain existing color code scheme where connecting to existing equipment.
3.3 DISCONNECTION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING SYSTEM
Maintain existing fire alarm equipment fully operational until the new
equipment has been tested and accepted by the Contracting Officer. As new
equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until the new equipment
is accepted. Once the new system is completed, tested, and accepted by
the Government, it shall be placed in service and connected to the station
fire alarm system. Remove tags from new equipment and tag the existing
equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building.
a. After acceptance of the new system by the Contracting Officer, remove

existing equipment not connected to the new system, remove unused
exposed conduit, and restore damaged surfaces. Remove the material
from the site and dispose.
b. Disconnect and remove the existing fire alarm and smoke detection
systems where indicated and elsewhere in the specification.
c. Control panels and fire alarm devices and appliances disconnected and
removed shall be turned over to the Contracting Officer.
d. Properly dispose of fire alarm outlet and junction boxes, wiring,
conduit, supports, and other such items.
3.4 CONNECTION OF NEW SYSTEM
The following new system connections shall be made during the last phase
of construction, at the beginning of the preliminary tests. New system
connections shall include:
a. Connection of new system transmitter to existing base fire reporting

system.
Once these connections are made, system shall be left energized and new
audio/visual devices deactivated. Report immediately to the Contracting
Officer, coordination and field problems resulting from the connection of
the above components.
3.5 FIRESTOPPING
Provide firestopping for holes at conduit penetrations through floor

slabs, fire rated walls, partitions with fire rated doors, corridor walls,
and vertical service shafts in accordance with Section 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING.
3.6 PAINTING
Paint exposed electrical, fire alarm conduit, and surface metal raceway to
match adjacent finishes in exposed areas. Paint junction boxes red in
unfinished areas and conduits and surface metal raceways shall be painted
with a 1-inch wide red band every 10 feet in unfinished areas. Painting
shall comply with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.7.1 Testing Procedures
Submit detailed test procedures, prepared and signed by a Registered

Professional Engineer or a NICET Level 4 Fire Alarm Technician, and signed
by representative of the installing company, for the fire detection and
alarm system 60 days prior to performing system tests. Detailed test
procedures shall list all components of the installed system such as
initiating devices and circuits, notification appliances and circuits,
signaling line devices and circuits, control devices/equipment, batteries,
transmitting and receiving equipment, power sources/supply, annunciators,
special hazard equipment, emergency communication equipment, interface
equipment, Guard's Tour equipment, and transient (surge) suppressors.
Test procedures shall include sequence of testing, time estimate for each
test, and sample test data forms. The test data forms shall be in a
check-off format (pass/fail with space to add applicable test data;
similar to the forma in NFPA 72) and shall be used for the preliminary
testing and the acceptance testing. The test data forms shall record the
test results and shall:
a. Identify the NFPA Class of all Initiating Device Circuits (IDC),

Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC), Voice Notification System
Circuits (NAC Audio), and Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).
b. Identify each test required by NFPA 72 Test Methods and required test
herein to be performed on each component, and describe how this test
shall be performed.
c. Identify each component and circuit as to type, location within the

facility, and unique identity within the installed system. Provide
necessary floor plan sheets showing each component location, test
location, and alphanumeric identity.
d. Identify all test equipment and personnel required to perform each

test (including equipment necessary for testing smoke detectors using
real smoke).
e. Provide space to identify the date and time of each test. Provide
space to identify the names and signatures of the individuals
conducting and witnessing each test.
3.7.2 Tests Stages
3.7.2.1 Preliminary Testing
Conduct preliminary tests to ensure that devices and circuits are

functioning properly. Tests shall meet the requirements of paragraph
entitled "Minimum System Tests." After preliminary testing is complete,
provide a letter certifying that the installation is complete and fully
operable. The letter shall state that each initiating and indicating
device was tested in place and functioned properly. The letter shall also
state that panel functions were tested and operated properly. The letter
shall include the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary
tests. The Contractor and an authorized representative from each supplier
of equipment shall be in attendance at the preliminary testing to make
necessary adjustments.
3.7.2.2 Request for Formal Inspection and Tests
When tests have been completed and corrections made, submit a signed,
dated certificate with a request for formal inspection and tests to the
NAVFAC Southwest Division.
3.7.2.3 Final Testing
Notify the Contracting Officer in writing when the system is ready for
final acceptance testing. Submit request for test at least 15 calendar
days prior to the test date. The tests shall be performed in accordance
with the approved test procedures in the presence of the Contracting
Officer. Furnish instruments and personnel required for the tests. A
final acceptance test will not be scheduled until the following are
provided at the job site:
a. The systems manufacturer's technical representative
b. Marked-up red line drawings of the system as actually installed
c. Megger test results
d. Loop resistance test results
e. Complete program printout including input/output addresses
The final tests will be witnessed by the NAVFAC Southwest Division Fire
Protection Engineer. At this time, any and all required tests shall be
repeated at their discretion.
3.7.2.4 System Acceptance
Following acceptance of the system, as-built drawings and O&M manuals

shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer for review and acceptance.
Provide electronic drawings in dwg or pdf format. At least one set of
as-built (marked-up) drawings shall be provided at the time of, or prior
to the final acceptance test.
a. Furnish one set of CD or DVD discs containing software back-up and CAD
based drawings in latest version of AutoCAD and DXF format of as-built
drawings and schematics.
b. Include complete wiring diagrams showing connections between devices

and equipment, both factory and field wired.
c. Include a riser diagram and drawings showing the as-built location of

devices and equipment.
3.7.3 Minimum System Tests
Test the system in accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 72,
ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16. The required tests are as follows:
a. Megger Tests: After wiring has been installed, and prior to making
any connections to panels or devices, wiring shall be megger tested
for insulation resistance, grounds, and/or shorts. Conductors with
300 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 250 VDC.
Conductors with 600 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum
of 500 VDC. The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer
and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.
b. Loop Resistance Tests: Measure and record the resistance of each

circuit with each pair of conductors in the circuit short-circuited at
the farthest point from the circuit origin. The tests shall be
witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use
at the final acceptance test.
c. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and

ground. The tests shall be accomplished at the preliminary test with
results available at the final system test.
d. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in

the manufacturer's O&M manual.
e. Test each initiating device and notification appliance and circuit for
proper operation and response at the control unit. Smoke sensors shall
be tested in accordance with manufacturer's recommended calibrated
test method. Use of magnets is prohibited. Testing of duct smoke
detectors shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 except that,
for item 12(e) (Supervision) in Table 14.4.2.2, disconnect at least 20
percent of devices. If there is a failure at these devices, then
supervision shall be tested at each device.
f. Test the system for specified functions in accordance with the

contract drawings and specifications and the manufacturer's O&M manual.
g. Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by test, the
secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the time
period and in the manner specified.
h. Determine that the system is operable under trouble conditions as

specified.
i. Visually inspect wiring.
j. Test the battery charger and batteries.
k. Verify that software control and data files have been entered or
programmed into the FACP. Hard copy records of the software shall be
provided to the Contracting Officer.
l. Verify that red-line drawings are accurate.
m. Measure the current in circuits to ensure there is the calculated

spare capacity for the circuits.
n. Measure voltage readings for circuits to ensure that voltage drop is

not excessive.
o. Disconnect the verification feature for smoke sensors during tests to

minimize the amount of smoke needed to activate the sensor. Testing
of smoke sensors shall be conducted using real smoke or the use of
canned smoke which is permitted.
p. Measure the voltage drop at the most remote appliance (based on wire
length) on each notification appliance circuit.
3.7.3.1 Intelligibility Tests
Intelligibility testing of the System shall be accomplished in accordance

with NFPA 72 for Voice Evacuation Systems, IEC 60268-16, and ASA S3.2.
Following are the specific requirements for intelligibility tests:
a. Intelligibility Requirements: Verify intelligibility by measurement

after installation.
b. Ensure that a CIS value greater than the required minimum value is
provided in each area where building occupants typically could be
found. The minimum required value for CIS is 0.70.
c. Areas of the building provided with hard wall and ceiling surfaces
(such as metal or concrete) that are found to cause excessive sound
reflections may be permitted to have a CIS score less than the minimum
required value if approved by the DOD installation, and if building
occupants in these areas can determine that a voice signal is being
broadcast and they must walk no more than 33 feet to find a location
with at least the minimum required CIS value within the same area.
d. Areas of the building where occupants are not expected to be normally

present are permitted to have a CIS score less than the minimum
required value if personnel can determine that a voice signal is being
broadcast and they must walk no more than 50 feet to a location with
at least the minimum required CIS value within the same area.
e. Take measurements near the head level applicable for most personnel in
the space under normal conditions (e.g., standing, sitting, sleeping,
as appropriate).
f. The distance the occupant must walk to the location meeting the
minimum required CIS value shall be measured on the floor or other
walking surface as follows:
(1) Along the centerline of the natural path of travel, starting

from any point subject to occupancy with less than the minimum
required CIS value.
(2) Curving around any corners or obstructions, with a 12 inches

clearance there from.
(3) Terminating directly below the location where the minimum

required CIS value has been obtained.
Use commercially available test instrumentation to measure intelligibility

as specified by ISO 7240-19 and ISO 7240-16 as applicable. Use the mean
value of at least three readings to compute the intelligibility score at
each test location.
3.8 INSTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEES
3.8.1 Instructor
Include in the project the services of an instructor, who has received

specific training from the manufacturer for the training of other persons
regarding the inspection, testing, and maintenance of the system
provided. The instructor shall train the Government employees designated
by the Contracting Officer, in the care, adjustment, maintenance, and
operation of the fire alarm and fire detection system. Each instructor
shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of this installation. The
instructor shall be trained in operating theory as well as in practical
O&M work. Submit the instructors information and qualifications including
the training history.
3.8.2 Required Instruction Time
Provide 4 hours of instruction after final acceptance of the system. The

instruction shall be given during regular working hours on such dates and
times as are selected by the Contracting Officer. The instruction may be
divided into two or more periods at the discretion of the Contracting
Officer. The training shall allow for rescheduling for unforeseen
maintenance and/or fire department responses.
3.9 Technical Data and Computer Software
Provide, in manual format, lesson plans, operating instructions,

maintenance procedures, and training data for the training courses. The
operations training shall familiarize designated government personnel with
proper operation of the installed system. The maintenance training course
shall provide the designated government personnel adequate knowledge
required to diagnose, repair, maintain, and expand functions inherent to
the system.
3.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) DATA INSTRUCTIONS
Submit 6 copies of the Operation and Maintenance Data Instructions,

indexed and in booklet form. Manuals shall be approved prior to
training. The Interior Fire Alarm And Mass Notification System Operation
and Maintenance Data Instructions shall include all information required

by Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and the following:
a. Operating manual outlining step-by-step procedures required for system

startup, operation, and shutdown. The manual shall include the
manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and
complete description of equipment and their basic operating features.
b. Maintenance manual listing routine maintenance procedures, possible

breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guide. The manuals shall
include conduit layout, equipment layout and simplified wiring, and
c. The manuals shall include complete procedures for system revision and
expansion, detailing both equipment and software requirements.
d. Software delivered for this project shall be provided, on each type of

CD/DVD media utilized.
e. Printouts of configuration settings for all devices.
f. Routine maintenance checklist. The routine maintenance checklist

shall be arranged in a columnar format. The first column shall list
all installed devices, the second column shall state the maintenance
activity or state no maintenance required, the third column shall
state the frequency of the maintenance activity, and the fourth column
for additional comments or reference. All data (devices, testing
frequencies, etc.) shall comply with UFC 3-601-02.
3.11 EXTRA MATERIALS
3.11.1 Repair Service/Replacement Parts
Repair services and replacement parts for the system shall be available
for a period of 10 years after the date of final acceptance of this work
by the Contracting Officer. During guarantee period, the service
technician shall be on-site within 24 hours after notification. All
repairs shall be completed within 24 hours of arrival on-site.
3.11.2 Interchangeable Parts
Spare parts furnished shall be directly interchangeable with the

corresponding components of the installed system. Spare parts shall be
suitably packaged and identified by nameplate, tagging, or stamping.
Spare parts shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer at the time of
the final acceptance testing.
3.11.3 Spare Parts
Furnish the following spare parts and accessories:
a. Four fuses for each fused circuit
b. Two of each type of notification appliance in the system (e.g.

speaker, FA strobe, MNS strobe, etc.)
c. Two of each type of initiating device included in the system (e.g.

smoke detector, thermal detector, manual station, etc.)
3.11.4 Special Tools
Software, connecting cables and proprietary equipment, necessary for the

maintenance, testing, and reprogramming of the equipment shall be
furnished to the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 31 00 00
EARTHWORK
08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES
1.1.1 Excavation
The unit of measurement for excavation and borrow will be the cubic yard,
computed by the average end area method from cross sections taken before
and after the excavation and borrow operations, including the excavation
for building foundation systems, utilities, and undercuts for pavement
placement, when the material is acceptably utilized or disposed of as
herein specified. The measurements will include authorized excavation of
unsatisfactory subgrade soil, and the volume of any loose rocks
encountered/collected within the limits of work; allowance will be made on
the same basis for selected backfill ordered as replacement. The
measurement will not include the volume of subgrade material or other
material that is scarified or plowed and reused in-place, and will not
include the volume excavated without authorization or the volume of any
material used for purposes other than directed. The volume of overburden
stripped from borrow pits and the volume of excavation for ditches to
drain borrow pits, unless used as borrow material, will not be measured
for payment. The measurement will not include the volume of any
excavation performed prior to the taking of elevations and measurements of
the undisturbed grade.
1.1.2 Piping Trench Excavation
Measure trench excavation by the number of linear feet along the

centerline of the trench and excavate to the depths and widths specified
for the particular size of pipe. Replace unstable trench bottoms with a
selected granular material. Include the additional width at manholes and
similar structures, the furnishing, placing and removal of sheeting and
bracing, pumping and bailing, and all incidentals necessary to complete
the work required by this section.
1.1.3 Topsoil Requirements
Separate excavation, hauling, and spreading or piling of topsoil and

related miscellaneous operations will be considered subsidiary obligations
of the Contractor, covered under the contract unit price for excavation.
1.1.4 Overhaul Requirements
Allow the unit of measurement for overhaul to be the station-yard. The

overhaul distance will be the distance in stations between the center of
volume of the overhaul material in its original position and the center of
volume after placing, minus the free-haul distance in stations. The haul
distance will be measured along the shortest route determined by the
Contracting Officer as feasible and satisfactory. Do no measure or waste
unsatisfactory materials for overhaul where the length of haul for borrow
is within the free-haul limits.
1.1.5 Select Granular Material
Measure select granular material in place as the actual cubic yards

replacing wet or unstable material in trench bottoms within the limits
shown. Provide unit prices which include furnishing and placing the
granular material, excavation and disposal of unsatisfactory material, and
additional requirements for sheeting and bracing, pumping, bailing,
cleaning, and other incidentals necessary to complete the work.
1.2 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
Payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, tools,
supplies, and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
1.2.1 Piping Trench Excavation
Payment for trench excavation will constitute full payment for excavation
and backfilling, including specified overdepth except unstable trench
bottoms.
1.2.2 Unclassified Excavation
Unclassified excavation will be paid for at the contract unit price per
cubic yard for unclassified excavation.
1.2.3 Unclassified Borrow
Unclassified borrow will be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic
yard for unclassified borrow.
1.2.4 Authorized Overhaul
The number of station-yards of overhaul to be paid for will be the product

of number of cubic yards of overhaul material measured in the original
position, multiplied by the overhaul distance measured in stations of 100
feet and will be paid for at the contract unit price per station-yard for
overhaul in excess of the free-haul limit as designated in paragraph
DEFINITIONS.
1.3 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING
Base bids on the following criteria:
a. Surface elevations are as indicated.
b. Pipes or other artificial obstructions, except those indicated, will

not be encountered.
c. Material character is indicated by the boring logs.
1.4 REFERENCES


(AASHTO)

Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using
a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm
(18-in.) Drop

Correction for Coarse Particles in the
Soil Compaction Test
AWWA C600 (2010) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water

Mains and Their Appurtenances
ASTM C136 (2006) Standard Test Method for Sieve

Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
ASTM D1140 (2000; R 2006) Amount of Material in Soils

Finer than the No. 200 (75-micrometer)
Sieve
ASTM D1556 (2007) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in

Place by the Sand-Cone Method
ASTM D1557 (2012) Standard Test Methods for

Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000
ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3)
ASTM D1883 (2007; E 2009; E 2009) CBR (California

Bearing Ratio) of Laboratory-Compacted
Soils
ASTM D2434 (1968; R 2006) Permeability of Granular

Soils (Constant Head)
ASTM D2487 (2011) Soils for Engineering Purposes

(Unified Soil Classification System)
ASTM D422 (1963; R 2007; E 2014; E 2014)

Particle-Size Analysis of Soils
ASTM D4318 (2010; E 2014) Liquid Limit, Plastic

Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils
EPA 600/4-79/020 (1983) Methods for Chemical Analysis of

Water and Wastes
EPA SW-846.3-3 (1999, Third Edition, Update III-A) Test

Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste:
Physical/Chemical Methods
1.5 DEFINITIONS
1.5.1 Satisfactory Materials
Satisfactory materials comprise any materials classified by ASTM D2487 as

GW, GP, GM, GP-GM, GW-GM, GC, GP-GC, GM-GC, SW, SP. Satisfactory
materials for grading comprise stones less than 8 inches, except for fill
material for pavements which comprise stones less than 3 inches in any
dimension.
1.5.2 Unsatisfactory Materials
Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory

materials are unsatisfactory. Unsatisfactory materials also include
man-made fills; trash; refuse; backfills from previous construction; and
material classified as satisfactory which contains root and other organic
matter or frozen material. Notify the Contracting Officer when
encountering any contaminated materials.
1.5.3 Cohesionless and Cohesive Materials
Cohesionless materials include materials classified in ASTM D2487 as GW,

GP, SW, and SP. Cohesive materials include materials classified as GC,
SC, ML, CL, MH, and CH. Materials classified as GM and SM will be
identified as cohesionless only when the fines are nonplastic. Perform
testing, required for classifying materials, in accordance with ASTM D4318,
ASTM C136, ASTM D422, and ASTM D1140.
1.5.4 Degree of Compaction
Degree of compaction required, except as noted in the second sentence, is

expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test
procedure presented in ASTM D1557 abbreviated as a percent of laboratory
maximum density. Since ASTM D1557 applies only to soils that have 30
percent or less by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch
sieve, express the degree of compaction for material having more than 30
percent by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch sieve as a
percentage of the maximum density in accordance with AASHTO T 180 and
corrected with AASHTO T 224. To maintain the same percentage of coarse
material, use the "remove and replace" procedure as described in NOTE 8
of Paragraph 7.2 in AASHTO T 180.
1.5.5 Overhaul
Overhaul is the authorized transportation of satisfactory excavation or

borrow materials in excess of the free-haul limit of 1 mile (or 52.8
stations). Overhaul is the product of the quantity of materials hauled
beyond the free-haul limit, and the distance such materials are hauled
beyond the free-haul limit, expressed in miles or in stations.
1.5.6 Topsoil
Material suitable for topsoils obtained from offsite areas is defined as:
Natural, friable soil representative of productive, well-drained soils in
the area, free of subsoil, stumps, rocks larger than one inch diameter,
brush, weeds, toxic substances, and other material detrimental to plant
growth. Amend topsoil pH range to obtain a pH of 5.5 to 7.
1.5.7 Unstable Material
Unstable materials are too wet to properly support the utility pipe,
conduit, or appurtenant structure.
1.5.8 Select Granular Material
Select granular material consist of materials classified as GW, GP, SW, SP,
or SM by ASTM D2487 where indicated. The liquid limit of such material
must not exceed 15 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318. The
plasticity index must not be greater than 0 percent when tested in
accordance with ASTM D4318, and not more than 15 percent by weight may be
finer than No. 200 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D1140.
Provide a minimum coefficient of permeability of 0.008 feet per minute
when tested in accordance with ASTM D2434.
1.5.8.2 California Bearing Ratio Values
Bearing Ratio: At 0.1 inch penetration, provide a bearing ratio of 15

percent at 95 percent ASTM D1557 maximum density as determined in
accordance with ASTM D1883 for a laboratory soaking period of not less
than 4 days. Conform the combined material to the following sieve
analysis:
Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight
2-1/2 inches 100
No. 4 50 - 85
No. 10 20 - 80
No. 40 10 - 60
No. 200 5 - 25
1.5.9 Initial Backfill Material
Initial backfill consists of select granular material or satisfactory

materials free from rocks 1 inch or larger in any dimension or free from
rocks of such size as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is
smaller. When the pipe is coated or wrapped for corrosion protection,
free the initial backfill material of stones 1 inch or larger in any
dimension or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller.
1.5.10 Expansive Soils
Expansive soils are defined as soils that have a plasticity index equal to
or greater than 15 when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318.
Subsurface soil boring logs are shown on the drawings. These data
represent the best subsurface information available; however, variations
may exist in the subsurface between boring locations.
1.6.1 Blasting
Blasting will not be permitted.
1.7 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Utilization of Excavated Materials; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing
Borrow Site Testing
Within 24 hours of conclusion of physical tests, submit 3 copies

of test results, including calibration curves and results of
calibration tests.
SD-07 Certificates
Testing
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR OFFSITE SOILS
Test offsite soils brought in for use as backfill for Total Petroleum
Hydrocarbons (TPH), Benzene, Toluene, Ethyl Benzene, and Xylene (BTEX) and
full Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) including
ignitability, corrosivity and reactivity. Backfill shall contain a
maximum of 100 parts per million (ppm) of total petroleum hydrocarbons
(TPH) and a maximum of 10 ppm of the sum of Benzene, Toluene, Ethyl
Benzene, and Xylene (BTEX) and shall pass the TCPL test. Determine TPH
concentrations by using EPA 600/4-79/020 Method 418.1. Determine BTEX
concentrations by using EPA SW-846.3-3 Method 5030/8020. Perform TCLP in
accordance with EPA SW-846.3-3 Method 1311. Provide Borrow Site Testing
for TPH, BTEX and TCLP from a composite sample of material from the borrow
site, with at least one test from each borrow site. Do not bring material
onsite until tests have been approved by the Contracting Officer.
2.2 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Provide metallic core or metallic-faced, acid- and alkali-resistant,

polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured specifically for warning
and identification of buried utility lines. Provide tape on rolls, 3
inches minimum width, color coded as specified below for the intended
utility with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters
continuously over the entire tape length. Warning and identification to
read, "CAUTION, BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW" or similar wording.
Provide permanent color and printing, unaffected by moisture or soil.
Warning Tape Color Codes
Red Electrical
Orange Telephone and Other Communications
Green Sewer and Drain Systems
2.2.1 Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping
Provide polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and

printing requirements specified above, with a minimum thickness of 0.004
inch, and a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise and 1250 psi
crosswise. Manufacture tape with integral wires, foil backing, or other
means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to
3 feet deep. Encase metallic element of the tape in a protective jacket
or provide with other means of corrosion protection.
2.3 DETECTION WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC PIPING
Insulate a single strand, solid copper detection wire with a minimum of 12

AWG.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL
Where indicated or directed, strip topsoil to a depth of 4 inches. Spread

topsoil on areas already graded and prepared for topsoil, or transported
and deposited in stockpiles convenient to areas that are to receive
application of the topsoil later, or at locations indicated or specified.
Keep topsoil separate from other excavated materials, brush, litter,
objectionable weeds, roots, stones larger than 1 inch in diameter, and
other materials that would interfere with planting and maintenance
operations. Remove from the site any surplus of topsoil from excavations
and gradings.
3.2 GENERAL EXCAVATION
Perform excavation of every type of material encountered within the limits

of the project to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated and as
specified. Perform the grading in accordance with the typical sections
shown and the tolerances specified in paragraph FINISHING. Transport
satisfactory excavated materials and place in fill or embankment within
the limits of the work. Excavate unsatisfactory materials encountered
within the limits of the work below grade and replace with satisfactory
materials as directed. Include such excavated material and the
satisfactory material ordered as replacement in excavation. Dispose
surplus satisfactory excavated material not required for fill or
embankment in areas approved for surplus material storage or designated
waste areas. Dispose unsatisfactory excavated material in designated
waste or spoil areas. During construction, perform excavation and fill in
a manner and sequence that will provide proper drainage at all times.
Excavate material required for fill or embankment in excess of that
produced by excavation within the grading limits from the borrow areas
indicated or from other approved areas selected by the Contractor as
specified.
3.2.1 Gutters
Finish excavation of gutters by cutting accurately to the cross sections,

grades, and elevations shown on plans. Do not excavate gutters below
grades shown. Backfill the excessive open gutter excavation with
satisfactory, thoroughly compacted, material or with suitable stone or
cobble to grades shown. Dispose excavated material as shown or as
directed, except in no case allow material be deposited a maximum 4 feet
from edge of a ditch. Maintain excavations free from detrimental
quantities of leaves, brush, sticks, trash, and other debris until final
acceptance of the work.
3.2.2 Drainage
Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water
encountered during construction. Completely drain construction site
during periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry.
Construct storm drainage features (ponds/basins) at the earliest stages of
site development, and throughout construction grade the construction area
to provide positive surface water runoff away from the construction
activity and provide temporary ditches, swales, and other drainage
features and equipment as required to maintain dry soils. When unsuitable
working platforms for equipment operation and unsuitable soil support for
subsequent construction features develop, remove unsuitable material and
provide new soil material as specified herein. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor to assess the soil and ground water conditions presented
by the plans and specifications and to employ necessary measures to permit
construction to proceed.
3.2.3 Trench Excavation Requirements
Excavate the trench as recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe to be

installed. Slope trench walls below the top of the pipe, or make
vertical, and of such width as recommended in the manufacturer's printed
installation manual. Provide vertical trench walls where no
manufacturer's printed installation manual is available. Shore trench
walls more than 4 feet high, cut back to a stable slope, or provide with
equivalent means of protection for employees who may be exposed to moving
ground or cave in. Shore vertical trench walls more than 4 feet high.
Excavate trench walls which are cut back to at least the angle of repose
of the soil. Give special attention to slopes which may be adversely
affected by weather or moisture content. Do not exceed the trench width
below the pipe top of 24 inches plus pipe outside diameter (O.D.) for
pipes of less than 24 inches inside diameter, and do not exceed 36 inches
plus pipe outside diameter for sizes larger than 24 inches inside
diameter. Where recommended trench widths are exceeded, provide redesign,
stronger pipe, or special installation procedures by the Contractor. The
Contractor is responsible for the cost of redesign, stronger pipe, or
special installation procedures without any additional cost to the
Government.
3.2.3.1 Bottom Preparation
Grade the bottoms of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and

support for the bottom quadrant of each section of the pipe. Excavate
bell holes to the necessary size at each joint or coupling to eliminate
point bearing. Remove stones of 1 inch or greater in any dimension, or as
recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller, to avoid point
bearing.
3.2.3.2 Removal of Unyielding Material
Where unyielding material is encountered in the bottom of the trench,

remove such material 12 inches below the required grade and replaced with
suitable materials as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION.
3.2.3.3 Removal of Unstable Material
Where unstable material is encountered in the bottom of the trench, remove

such material to the depth directed and replace it to the proper grade
with select granular material as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING AND
COMPACTION. When removal of unstable material is required due to the
Contractor's fault or neglect in performing the work, the Contractor is
responsible for excavating the resulting material and replacing it without
3.2.3.4 Excavation for Appurtenances
Provide excavation for structures of sufficient size to permit the

placement and removal of forms for the full length and width of structure
footings and foundations as shown. Clean rock or loose debris and cut to
a firm surface either level, stepped, or serrated, as shown or as
directed. Remove loose disintegrated rock and thin strata. Specify
removal of unstable material. When concrete or masonry is to be placed in
an excavated area, take special care not to disturb the bottom of the
excavation. Do not excavate to the final grade level until just before
the concrete or masonry is to be placed.
3.2.4 Underground Utilities
The Contractor is responsible for movement of construction machinery and

equipment over pipes and utilities during construction. Perform work
adjacent to non-Government utilities as indicated in accordance with
procedures outlined by utility company. Excavation made with power-driven
equipment is not permitted within 2 feet of known Government-owned utility
or subsurface construction. For work immediately adjacent to or for
excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction, excavate by
hand. Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and
continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new
grade is assured. Support uncovered lines or other existing work affected
by the contract excavation until approval for backfill is granted by the
Contracting Officer. Report damage to utility lines or subsurface
construction immediately to the Contracting Officer.
3.2.5 Structural Excavation
Ensure that footing subgrades have been inspected and approved by the
Contracting Officer prior to concrete placement. Backfill and compact
over excavations and changes in grade to 95 percent of ASTM D1557 maximum
density.Extend overexcavations 5 feet vertically and horizontally, beyond
the limits of building foundations.
3.3 OPENING AND DRAINAGE OF EXCAVATION AND BORROW PITS
Except as otherwise permitted, excavate borrow pits and other excavation

areas providing adequate drainage. Transport overburden and other spoil
material to designated spoil areas or otherwise dispose of as directed.
Provide neatly trimmed and drained borrow pits after the excavation is
completed. Ensure that excavation of any area, operation of borrow pits,

or dumping of spoil material results in minimum detrimental effects on
natural environmental conditions.
3.4 GRADING AREAS
Where indicated, divide work into grading areas within which satisfactory
excavated material will be placed in embankments, fills, and required
backfills. Do not haul satisfactory material excavated in one grading
area to another grading area except when so directed in writing. Place
and grade stockpiles of satisfactory as specified. Keep stockpiles in a
neat and well drained condition, giving due consideration to drainage at
all times. Clear, grub, and seal by rubber-tired equipment, the ground
surface at stockpile locations; separately stockpile excavated
satisfactory and unsatisfactory materials. Protect stockpiles of
satisfactory materials from contamination which may destroy the quality
and fitness of the stockpiled material. If the Contractor fails to
protect the stockpiles, and any material becomes unsatisfactory, remove
and replace such material with satisfactory material from approved sources.
3.5 FINAL GRADE OF SURFACES TO SUPPORT CONCRETE
Do not excavate to final grade until just before concrete is to be

placed. For pile foundations, stop the excavation at an elevation of from
6 to 12 inches above the bottom of the footing before driving piles.
After pile driving has been completed, complete the remainder of the
excavation to the elevations shown. Only use excavation methods that will
leave the foundation rock in a solid and unshattered condition. Roughen
the level surfaces, and cut the sloped surfaces, as indicated, into rough
steps or benches to provide a satisfactory bond. Protect shales from
slaking and all surfaces from erosion resulting from ponding or water flow.
3.6 GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION
Remove and replace unsatisfactory material with satisfactory materials, as

directed by the Contracting Officer, in surfaces to receive fill or in
excavated areas. Scarify the surface to a depth of 6 inches before the
fill is started. Plow, step, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper
than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that the fill material will bond with
the existing material. When subgrades are less than the specified
density, break up the ground surface to a minimum depth of 6 inches,
pulverizing, and compacting to the specified density. When the subgrade
is part fill and part excavation or natural ground, scarify the excavated
or natural ground portion to a depth of 12 inches and compact it as
specified for the adjacent fill.
3.7 UTILIZATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
Dispose unsatisfactory materials removed from excavations into designated

waste disposal or spoil areas. Use satisfactory material removed from
excavations, insofar as practicable, in the construction of fills,
embankments, subgrades, shoulders, bedding (as backfill), and for similar
purposes. Submit procedure and location for disposal of unused
satisfactory material. Submit proposed source of borrow material. Do not
waste any satisfactory excavated material without specific written
authorization. Dispose of satisfactory material, authorized to be wasted,
in designated areas approved for surplus material storage or designated
waste areas as directed. Clear and grub newly designated waste areas on
Government-controlled land before disposal of waste material thereon. Do
not dispose excavated material to endanger a partly finished structure,
impair the efficiency or appearance of any structure, or be detrimental to
the completed work in any way.
3.8 BURIED TAPE AND DETECTION WIRE
3.8.1 Buried Warning and Identification Tape
Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape. Bury tape
36 inches maximum below finished grade.
3.8.2 Buried Detection Wire
Bury detection wire directly above non-metallic piping at a distance not

to exceed 12 inches above the top of pipe. Extend the wire continuously
and unbroken. Terminate the ends of the wire inside the drainage
structures at each end of the pipe. Furnish insulated wire over it's
entire length.
3.9 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
Place backfill adjacent to any and all types of structures, and compact to
at least 90 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesive materials or
95 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesionless materials, to
prevent wedging action or eccentric loading upon or against the
structure. Prepare ground surface on which backfill is to be placed and
provide compaction requirements for backfill materials in conformance with
the applicable portions of paragraphs GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION. Finish
compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled
rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment.
3.9.1 Trench Backfill
Backfill trenches to the grade shown. Do not backfill the trench until
all specified tests are performed.
3.9.1.1 Replacement of Unyielding Material
Replace unyielding material removed from the bottom of the trench with
select granular material or initial backfill material.
3.9.1.2 Replacement of Unstable Material
Replace unstable material removed from the bottom of the trench or

excavation with select granular material placed in layers not exceeding 6
inches loose thickness.
3.9.1.3 Bedding and Initial Backfill
Provide bedding of the type and thickness shown. Place initial backfill
material and compact it with approved tampers to a height of at least one
foot above the utility pipe or conduit. Bring up the backfill evenly on
both sides of the pipe for the full length of the pipe. Take care to
ensure thorough compaction of the fill under the haunches of the pipe.
Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section, provide
bedding for buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4, except as
specified herein. Compact backfill to top of pipe to 95 percent of
ASTM D1557 maximum density. Plastic piping shall have bedding at minimum
4 inches below and 12 inches above pipe. Provide materials as follows:
3.9.1.3.1 Class I
Angular, 0.25 to 3/4 inch, graded stone, including a number of fill

materials that have regional significance such as coral, slag, cinders,
crushed stone, and crushed shells.
3.9.1.3.2 Class II
Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of 3/4 inch, including
various graded sands and gravels containing small percentages of fines,
generally granular and noncohesive, either wet or dry. Soil Types GW, GP,
SW, and SP are included in this class as specified in ASTM D2487.
3.9.1.4 Final Backfill
Fill the remainder of the trench, except for special materials for roadways
with satisfactory material. Place backfill material and compact as
follows:
3.9.1.4.1 Roadways
Place backfill up to the required elevation as specified. Do not permit

water flooding or jetting methods of compaction.
3.9.1.4.2 Sidewalks and Miscellaneous Areas
Deposit backfill in layers of a maximum of 12 inches loose thickness, and

compact it to 85 percent maximum density for cohesive soils and 90 percent
maximum density for cohesionless soils. Apply this requirement to all
other areas not specifically designated above.
3.9.2 Backfill for Appurtenances
After the similar structure has been constructed, place backfill in such a
manner that the structure is not damaged by the shock of falling earth.
Deposit the backfill material, compact it as specified for final backfill,
and bring up the backfill evenly on all sides of the structure to prevent
eccentric loading and excessive stress.
3.10 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Special requirements for both excavation and backfill relating to the

specific utilities are as follows:
3.10.1 Electrical Distribution System
Provide a minimum cover of 24 inches from the finished grade to direct

burial cable and conduit or duct line, unless otherwise indicated.
3.11 EMBANKMENTS
3.11.1 Earth Embankments
Construct earth embankments from satisfactory materials free of organic or

frozen material and rocks with any dimension greater than 3 inches. Place
the material in successive horizontal layers of loose material not more
than 12 inches in depth. Spread each layer uniformly on a soil surface

that has been moistened or aerated as necessary, and scarified or
otherwise broken up so that the fill will bond with the surface on which
it is placed. After spreading, plow, disk, or otherwise brake up each
layer; moisten or aerate as necessary; thoroughly mix; and compact to at
least 90 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesive materials or 95
percent laboratory maximum density for cohesionless materials. Compaction
requirements for the upper portion of earth embankments forming subgrade
for pavements are identical with those requirements specified in paragraph
SUBGRADE PREPARATION. Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers,
pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or
other approved equipment.
3.12 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
3.12.1 Construction
Shape subgrade to line, grade, and cross section, and compact as

specified. Include plowing, disking, and any moistening or aerating
required to obtain specified compaction for this operation. Remove soft
or otherwise unsatisfactory material and replace with satisfactory
excavated material or other approved material as directed. Excavate rock
encountered in the cut section to a depth of 6 inches below finished grade
for the subgrade. Bring up low areas resulting from removal of
unsatisfactory material or excavation of rock to required grade with
satisfactory materials, and shape the entire subgrade to line, grade, and
cross section and compact as specified.
3.12.2 Compaction
Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers,

steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment.
Except for paved areas, compact each layer of the embankment to at least 95
percent of laboratory maximum density.
3.12.2.1 Subgrade for Pavements
Compact subgrade for pavements to at least 95 percentage laboratory

maximum density for the depth below the surface of the pavement shown.
When more than one soil classification is present in the subgrade,
thoroughly blend, reshape, and compact the top 6 inches of subgrade.
3.13 FINISHING
Finish the surface of excavations, embankments, and subgrades to a smooth

and compact surface in accordance with the lines, grades, and cross
sections or elevations shown. Provide the degree of finish for graded
areas within 0.1 foot of the grades and elevations indicated except that
the degree of finish for subgrades specified in paragraph SUBGRADE
PREPARATION. Finish gutters in a manner that will result in effective
drainage. Repair graded, topsoiled, or backfilled areas prior to
acceptance of the work, and re-established grades to the required
elevations and slopes.
3.13.1 Subgrade and Embankments
During construction, keep embankments and excavations shaped and drained.

Maintain ditches and drains along subgrade to drain effectively at all
times. Do not disturb the finished subgrade by traffic or other
operation. Protect and maintain the finished subgrade in a satisfactory

condition until base or pavement is placed. Do not permit the storage or
stockpiling of materials on the finished subgrade. Do not lay base course
or pavement until the subgrade has been checked and approved, and in no
case place base, surfacing, or pavement, on a muddy, spongy, or frozen
subgrade.
3.13.2 Grading Around Structures
Construct areas within 5 feet outside of each building and structure line
true-to-grade, shape to drain, and maintain free of trash and debris until
final inspection has been completed and the work has been accepted.
3.13.3 Protection of Existing Structures
Contractor to take all necessary precautions to prevent undermining

existing structure. Contractor to submit plan and design of proposed
retention/shoring system to Contracting Officer's representative for
review and approval prior to proceeding with foundation related work.
Excavations near existing foundations may be planned with an "A-B-C"
slot-cutting method with a maximum width of 6 feet. The maximum slot-cut
depth should not exceed 5 feet in accordance with project specific soils
reports and structural plans as applicable.
3.14 TESTING
Perform testing by a Corps validated commercial testing laboratory or the

Contractor's validated testing facility. Submit qualifications of the
Corps validated commercial testing laboratory or the Contractor's
validated testing facilities. If the Contractor elects to establish
testing facilities, do not permit work requiring testing until the
Contractor's facilities have been inspected, Corps validated and approved
by the Contracting Officer.
a. Determine field in-place density in accordance with ASTM D1556.
b. When test results indicate, as determined by the Contracting Officer,

that compaction is not as specified, remove the material, replace and
recompact to meet specification requirements.
c. Perform tests on recompacted areas to determine conformance with

specification requirements. Appoint a registered professional civil
engineer to certify inspections and test results. These
certifications shall state that the tests and observations were
performed by or under the direct supervision of the engineer and that
the results are representative of the materials or conditions being
certified by the tests. The following number of tests, if performed
at the appropriate time, will be the minimum acceptable for each type
operation.
3.14.1 Fill and Backfill Material Gradation
One test per 100 cubic yards stockpiled or in-place source material.
Determine gradation of fill and backfill material in accordance with
ASTM C136.
3.14.2 In-Place Densities
a. One test per 2,000 square feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift of
fill or backfill areas compacted by other than hand-operated machines.
b. One test per 2,000 square feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift of
fill or backfill areas compacted by hand-operated machines.
c. One test per 500 linear feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift of
embankment or backfill for roads.
3.14.3 Moisture Contents
In the stockpile, excavation, or borrow areas, perform a minimum of two

tests per day per type of material or source of material being placed
during stable weather conditions. During unstable weather, perform tests
as dictated by local conditions and approved by the Contracting Officer.
3.14.4 Optimum Moisture and Laboratory Maximum Density
Perform tests for each type material or source of material including

borrow material to determine the optimum moisture and laboratory maximum
density values. One representative test per 500 cubic yards of fill and
backfill, or when any change in material occurs which may affect the
optimum moisture content or laboratory maximum density.
3.14.5 Tolerance Tests for Subgrades
Perform continuous checks on the degree of finish specified in paragraph

SUBGRADE PREPARATION during construction of the subgrades.
3.14.6 Displacement of Sewers
After other required tests have been performed and the trench backfill
compacted to the finished grade surface, inspect the pipe to determine
whether significant displacement has occurred. Conduct this inspection in
the presence of the Contracting Officer. Inspect pipe sizes larger than
36 inches, while inspecting smaller diameter pipe by shining a light or
laser between manholes or manhole locations, or by the use of television
cameras passed through the pipe. If, in the judgment of the Contracting
Officer, the interior of the pipe shows poor alignment or any other
defects that would cause improper functioning of the system, replace or
repair the defects as directed at no additional cost to the Government.
3.15 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL
Remove surplus material or other soil material not required or suitable

for filling or backfilling, and brush, refuse, stumps, roots, and timber
from Government property and to a licensed/permitted facility or to a
location approved by the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 31 11 00
CLEARING AND GRUBBING

08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Nonsaleable Materials; G
SD-04 Samples
Tree wound paint

Herbicide
Deliver materials to store at the site, and handle in a manner which will
maintain the materials in their original manufactured or fabricated
condition until ready for use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TREE WOUND PAINT
Submit samples in cans with manufacturer's label of bituminous based paint

of standard manufacture specially formulated for tree wounds.
2.2 HERBICIDE
Comply with Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (Title 7

U.S.C. Section 136) for requirements on Contractor's licensing,
certification and record keeping. Contact the command Pest Control
Coordinator prior to starting work. Submit samples in cans with
manufacturer's label.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
3.1.1 Roads and Walks
Keep roads and walks free of dirt and debris at all times.
3.1.2 Utility Lines
Protect existing utility lines that are indicated to remain from damage.
Notify the Contracting Officer immediately of damage to or an encounter
with an unknown existing utility line. The Contractor is responsible for
the repairs of damage to existing utility lines that are indicated or made
known to the Contractor prior to start of clearing and grubbing
operations. When utility lines which are to be removed are encountered
within the area of operations, notify the Contracting Officer in ample
time to minimize interruption of the service. Refer to Section 01 30 00,
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS.
3.2 CLEARING
Clearing shall consist of the felling, trimming, and cutting of trees into
sections and the satisfactory disposal of the trees and other vegetation
designated for removal, including downed timber, snags, brush, and rubbish
occurring within the areas to be cleared. Trees, stumps, roots, brush,
and other vegetation in areas to be cleared shall be cut off flush with or
below the original ground surface, except such trees and vegetation as may
be indicated or directed to be left standing. Trees designated to be left
standing within the cleared areas shall be trimmed of dead branches 1-1/2
inches or more in diameter. Limbs and branches to be trimmed shall be
neatly cut close to the bole of the tree or main branches. Cuts more than
1-1/2 inches in diameter shall be painted with an approved tree-wound
paint.
3.3 TREE REMOVAL
Where indicated or directed, trees and stumps that are designated as trees
shall be removed from areas outside those areas designated for clearing
and grubbing. This work shall include the felling of such trees and the
removal of their stumps and roots as specified in paragraph GRUBBING.
Trees shall be disposed of as specified in paragraph DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS.
3.4 GRUBBING
Grubbing consists of the removal and disposal of stumps, roots larger than
3 inches in diameter, and matted roots from the designated grubbing
areas. Remove material to be grubbed, together with logs and other
organic or metallic debris not suitable for foundation purposes, to a
depth of not less than 18 inches below the original surface level of the
ground in areas indicated to be grubbed and in areas indicated as
construction areas under this contract, such as areas for buildings, and
areas to be paved. Fill depressions made by grubbing with suitable
material and compact to make the surface conform with the original
adjacent surface of the ground.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
3.5.1 Saleable Timber
All timber on the project site noted for clearing and grubbing shall
become the property of the Contractor, and shall be removed from the
project site and disposed of off stations.
3.5.2 Nonsaleable Materials
Written permission to dispose of such products on private property shall

be filed with the Contracting Officer. Logs, stumps, roots, brush, rotten
wood, and other refuse from the clearing and grubbing operations, except
for salable timber, shall be disposed of outside the limits of
Government-controlled land at the Contractor's responsibility, except when
otherwise directed in writing. Such directive will state the conditions
covering the disposal of such products and will also state the areas in
which they may be placed.
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20
EXCAVATION AND FILL

02/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AWWA C600 (2010) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water

Mains and Their Appurtenances


Aggregates
ASTM D1140 (2000; R 2006) Amount of Material in Soils

Finer than the No. 200 (75-micrometer)
Sieve

ASTM D1557 (2012; E 2015) Standard Test Methods for

ASTM D2216 (2010) Laboratory Determination of Water

(Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass
ASTM D2321 (2014; E 2014) Standard Practice for

Underground Installation of Thermoplastic
Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow
Applications
ASTM D2487 (2011) Soils for Engineering Purposes

(Unified Soil Classification System)

ASTM D698 (2012; E 2014) Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Standard
Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/cu. ft. (600
kN-m/cu. m.))
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 1

EPA SW-846.3-3 (1999, Third Edition, Update III-A) Test

Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste:
Physical/Chemical Methods
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Capillary Water Barrier
A layer of clean, poorly graded crushed rock, stone, or natural sand or

gravel having a high porosity which is placed beneath a building slab with
or without a vapor barrier to cut off the capillary flow of pore water to
the area immediately below a slab.
1.2.2 Degree of Compaction
Degree of compaction is expressed as a percentage of the maximum density

obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D1557, for general soil
types, abbreviated as percent laboratory maximum density.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

submittals not having a "G" designation are for for information only.
When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the
office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the
following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-06 Test Reports
Borrow Site Testing; G
Fill and backfill test
Porous fill test for capillary water barrier
Density tests
Moisture Content Tests
Copies of all laboratory and field test reports within 24 hours of the
completion of the test.
Perform in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation of materials.
1.5 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING
Base bids on the following criteria:
a. Surface elevations are as indicated.
b. Pipes or other artificial obstructions, except those indicated, will

not be encountered.
c. Ground water elevations indicated by the boring log were those

existing at the time subsurface investigations were made and do not
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 2

necessarily represent ground water elevation at the time of

construction.
e. Material character is indicated by the boring logs.
f. Suitable backfill and bedding material in the quantities required is

not available at the project site
g. Blasting will not be permitted. Remove material in an approved manner.
1.6 REQUIREMENTS FOR OFF SITE SOIL
Soils brought in from off site for use as backfill shall be tested for
petroleum hydrocarbons, BTEX, PCBs and HW characteristics (including
toxicity, ignitability, corrosivity, and reactivity). Backfill shall not
contain concentrations of these analytes above the appropriate State
and/or EPA criteria, and shall pass the tests for HW characteristics.
Determine petroleum hydrocarbon concentrations by using appropriate State
protocols. Determine BTEX concentrations by using EPA SW-846.3-3 Method
5035/8260B. Perform complete TCLP in accordance with EPA SW-846.3-3
Method 1311. Perform HW characteristic tests for ignitability,
corrosivity, and reactivity in accordance with accepted standard methods.
Perform PCB testing in accordance with accepted standard methods for
sampling and analysis of bulk solid samples. Provide borrow site testing
for petroleum hydrocarbons and BTEX from a grab sample of material from
the area most likely to be contaminated at the borrow site (as indicated
by visual or olfactory evidence), with at least one test from each borrow
site. For each borrow site, provide borrow site testing for HW
characteristics from a composite sample of material, collected in
accordance with standard soil sampling techniques. Do not bring material
onsite until tests results have been received and approved by the
1.7.1 Utilities
Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes and utilities

during construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Perform work
adjacent to non-Government utilities as indicated in accordance with
procedures outlined by utility company. Excavation made with power-driven
equipment is not permitted within two feet of known Government-owned
utility or subsurface construction. For work immediately adjacent to or
for excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction, excavate
by hand. Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction
and continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the
new grade is assured. Support uncovered lines or other existing work
affected by the contract excavation until approval for backfill is granted
by the Contracting Officer. Report damage to utility lines or subsurface
construction immediately to the Contracting Officer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
2.1.1 Satisfactory Materials
Any materials classified by ASTM D2487 as GW, GP, GM, GP-GM, GW-GM, GC,
GP-GC, GM-GC, SW, SP, free of debris, roots, wood, scrap material,
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 3

vegetation, refuse, soft unsound particles, and frozen, deleterious, or

objectionable materials. Unless specified otherwise, the maximum particle
diameter shall be one-half the lift thickness at the intended location.
2.1.2 Unsatisfactory Materials
Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory

materials. Unsatisfactory materials also include man-made fills, trash,
refuse, or backfills from previous construction. Unsatisfactory material
also includes material classified as satisfactory which contains root and
other organic matter, frozen material, and stones larger than 6 inches.
The Contracting Officer shall be notified of any contaminated materials.
2.1.3 Common Fill
Approved, unclassified soil material with the characteristics required to

compact to the soil density specified for the intended location.
2.1.4 Backfill and Fill Material
ASTM D2487, classification GW, GP, GM, GC, SW, SP, SM, SC with a maximum
ASTM D4318 liquid limit of 1, maximum ASTM D4318 plasticity index of 5,
and a maximum of 25 percent by weight passing ASTM D1140, No. 200 sieve.
2.2 SUBGRADE MATERIAL FOR PAVEMENT
Subgrade material shall consist of compacted in-place native soil or

imported imported fill material. Native soil used as SUBGRADE material
shall be free of oversized material 4 inches or larger in diameter.
Imported fill shall be approved by the Geotechnical Engineer and
Contracting Officer and meet the following requirements:
Maximum particle size: 4 inches.
Maximum liquid limit: 10 percent.
Maximum plasticity index: 5 percent.
Maximum percentage passing the No. 200 sieve: 20 percent.
Minimum sand equivalent: 10.
Minimum CBR VALUE(1): 15.
NOTE:
1. Minimum relative compaction of 95 percent based on test

procedure presented in ASTM D1557.
2.3 UTILITY BEDDING MATERIAL
Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section, provide

bedding for buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4, except as
specified herein. Backfill to top of pipe shall be compacted to 95
percent of ASTM D698 maximum density. Plastic piping shall have bedding
at minimum 4 inches below and 12 inches above pipe. Provide ASTM D2321
materials as follows:
a. Class I: Angular, 0.25 to 3/4 inch, graded stone, including a number
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 4

of fill materials that have regional significance such as coral, slag,

cinders, crushed stone, and crushed shells.
b. Class II: Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of 3/4
inch, including various graded sands and gravels containing small
percentages of fines, generally granular and noncohesive, either wet
or dry. Soil Types GW, GP, SW, and SP are included in this class as
specified in ASTM D2487.
Metallic core or metallic-faced, acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene

plastic warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and
identification of buried utility lines. Provide tape on rolls, 3 inch
minimum width, color coded as specified below for the intended utility
with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters
continuously over the entire tape length. Warning and identification to
read, "CAUTION, BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW" or similar wording.
Color and printing shall be permanent, unaffected by moisture or soil.
Warning Tape Color Codes
Red: Electric
Orange: Telephone and Other Communications
Green: Sewer and Drain Systems
2.4.1 Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping
Polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing

requirements specified above. Minimum thickness of the tape shall be
0.004 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise and
1250 psi crosswise. Tape shall be manufactured with integral wires, foil
backing, or other means of enabling detection by a metal detector when
tape is buried up to 3 feet deep. Encase metallic element of the tape in
a protective jacket or provide with other means of corrosion protection.
2.5 DETECTION WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC PIPING
Detection wire shall be insulated single strand, solid copper with a

minimum of 12 AWG.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
3.1.1 Drainage
Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water
encountered during construction.
3.1.1.1 Drainage
So that construction operations progress successfully, completely drain

construction site during periods of construction to keep soil materials
sufficiently dry. The Contractor shall establish/construct storm drainage
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 5

features (ponds/basins) at the earliest stages of site development, and

throughout construction grade the construction area to provide positive
surface water runoff away from the construction activity and/or provide
temporary ditches, dikes, swales, and other drainage features and
equipment as required to maintain dry soils, prevent erosion and
undermining of foundations. When unsuitable working platforms for
equipment operation and unsuitable soil support for subsequent
construction features develop, remove unsuitable material and provide new
soil material as specified herein. It is the responsibility of the
Contractor to assess the soil and ground water conditions presented by the
plans and specifications and to employ necessary measures to permit
construction to proceed. Excavated slopes and backfill surfaces shall be
protected to prevent erosion and sloughing. Excavation shall be performed
so that the site, the area immediately surrounding the site, and the area
affecting operations at the site shall be continually and effectively
drained.
3.1.2 Underground Utilities
Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate. The

Contractor shall physically verify the location and elevation of the
existing utilities indicated prior to starting construction. The
Contractor shall scan the construction site with electromagnetic and sonic
equipment and mark the surface of the ground where existing underground
utilities are discovered.
3.1.3 Machinery and Equipment
Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes during

construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Repair, or remove and
provide new pipe for existing or newly installed pipe that has been
displaced or damaged.
3.2.1 Clearing and Grubbing
Unless indicated otherwise, remove trees, stumps, logs, shrubs, brush and
vegetation and other items that would interfere with construction
operations within the clearing limits. Remove stumps entirely. Grub out
matted roots and roots over 2 inches in diameter to at least 18 inches
below existing surface.
3.2.2 Stripping
Strip suitable soil from the site where excavation or grading is indicated
and stockpile separately from other excavated material. Material
unsuitable for use as topsoil shall be wasted. Locate topsoil so that the
material can be used readily for the finished grading. Where sufficient
existing topsoil conforming to the material requirements is not available
on site, provide borrow materials suitable for use as topsoil. Protect
topsoil and keep in segregated piles until needed.
3.2.3 Unsuitable Material
Remove vegetation, debris, decayed vegetable matter, sod, mulch, and

rubbish underneath paved areas or concrete slabs.
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 6

3.3 EXCAVATION
Excavate to contours, elevation, and dimensions indicated. Reuse

excavated materials that meet the specified requirements for the material
type required at the intended location. Keep excavations free from water.
Excavate soil disturbed or weakened by Contractor's operations, soils
softened or made unsuitable for subsequent construction due to exposure to
weather. Excavations below indicated depths will not be permitted except
to remove unsatisfactory material. Unsatisfactory material encountered
below the grades shown shall be removed as directed. Refill with backfill
and fill material and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D698 maximum density.
Unless specified otherwise, refill excavations cut below indicated depth
with backfill and fill material and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D1557
maximum density. Satisfactory material removed below the depths
indicated, without specific direction of the Contracting Officer, shall be
replaced with satisfactory materials to the indicated excavation grade;
except as specified for spread footings. Determination of elevations and
measurements of approved overdepth excavation of unsatisfactory material
below grades indicated shall be done under the direction of the
3.3.1 Structures With Spread Footings
Ensure that footing subgrades have been inspected and approved by the
Contracting Officer prior to concrete placement. Fill over excavations
with concrete during foundation placement.
3.3.2 Pipe Trenches
Excavate to the dimension indicated. Grade bottom of trenches to provide

uniform support for each section of pipe after pipe bedding placement.
Tamp if necessary to provide a firm pipe bed. Recesses shall be excavated
to accommodate bells and joints so that pipe will be uniformly supported
for the entire length.
3.3.3 Excavated Materials
Satisfactory excavated material required for fill or backfill shall be

placed in the proper section of the permanent work required or shall be
separately stockpiled if it cannot be readily placed. Satisfactory
material in excess of that required for the permanent work and all
unsatisfactory material shall be disposed of as specified in Paragraph
"DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL."
3.3.4 Final Grade of Surfaces to Support Concrete
Excavation to final grade shall not be made until just before concrete is
to be placed. Only excavation methods that will leave the foundation in a
solid and unshattered condition shall be used. Approximately level
surfaces shall be roughened, and sloped surfaces shall be cut as indicated
into rough steps or benches to provide a satisfactory bond. Shales shall
be protected from slaking and all surfaces shall be protected from erosion
resulting from ponding or flow of water.
Unsatisfactory material in surfaces to receive fill or in excavated areas

shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory materials as directed by
the Contracting Officer. The surface shall be scarified to a depth of 6
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 7

inches before the fill is started. Sloped surfaces steeper than 1

vertical to 4 horizontal shall be plowed, stepped, benched, or broken up
so that the fill material will bond with the existing material. When
subgrades are less than the specified density, the ground surface shall be
broken up to a minimum depth of 6 inches, pulverized, and compacted to the
specified density. When the subgrade is part fill and part excavation or
natural ground, the excavated or natural ground portion shall be scarified
to a depth of 12 inches and compacted as specified for the adjacent fill.
Material shall not be placed on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or
contain frost. Compaction shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot rollers,
pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, or other approved
equipment well suited to the soil being compacted. Material shall be
moistened or aerated as necessary to plus or minus 2 percent of optimum
moisture. Minimum subgrade density shall be as specified herein.
3.5 FILLING AND BACKFILLING
Fill and backfill to contours, elevations, and dimensions indicated.

Compact each lift before placing overlaying lift.
3.5.1 Common Fill Placement
Provide for general site and under pile-supported structures. Use

satisfactory materials. Place in 8 inch lifts. Compact areas not
accessible to rollers or compactors with mechanical hand tampers. Aerate
material excessively moistened by rain to a satisfactory moisture
content. Finish to a smooth surface by blading, rolling with a smooth
roller, or both.
3.5.2 Backfill and Fill Material Placement
Provide for paved areas and under concrete slabs, except where select
material is provided. Place in 8 inch lifts. Do not place over wet or
frozen areas. Place backfill material adjacent to structures as the
structural elements are completed and accepted. Backfill against concrete
only when approved. Place and compact material to avoid loading upon or
against the structure.
3.6 BORROW
Where satisfactory materials are not available in sufficient quantity from

required excavations, approved borrow materials shall be obtained as
specified herein.
Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape. Bury tape
36 inches maximum below finished grade.
3.8 BURIED DETECTION WIRE
Bury detection wire directly above non-metallic piping at a distance not

to exceed 12 inches above the top of pipe. The wire shall extend
continuously and unbroken. The ends of the wire shall terminate inside
the drainage structures at each end of the pipe. The wire shall remain
insulated over it's entire length.
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 8

3.9 COMPACTION
Prior to placement of fill, excavation shall be scrified to a depth of 8

inches, moisture conditioned to above optimum moisture content, and
compacted to at least 90 percent relative compaction. Placement of fill
should be placed in layers less than 8 inches thick, moisture conditioned
at least 2 percent above optimum moisture content, and compacted to at
least 95 percent relative compaction based on test procedure presented in
ASTM D1557.
3.9.1 General Site
Compact underneath areas designated for vegetation and areas outside the 5
foot line of the paved area or structure to 90 percent of ASTM D1557.
Compact expansive materials to not less than 90 percent.
3.9.2 Structures, Spread Footings, and Concrete Slabs
Compact top 12 inches of subgrades to 95 percent of ASTM D1557. Compact

fill and backfill material or select material to 95 percent of ASTM D1557.
3.9.3 Adjacent Area
Compact areas within 5 feet of structures to 95 percent of ASTM D1557.
3.9.4 Paved Areas
Compact top 12 inches of subgrades to 95 percent of ASTM D1557. Compact

fill and backfill materials to 95 percent of ASTM D1557.
3.10 FINISH OPERATIONS
3.10.1 Grading
Finish grades as indicated within one-tenth of one foot. Grade areas to

drain water away from structures. Maintain areas free of trash and
debris. For existing grades that will remain but which were disturbed by
Contractor's operations, grade as directed.
3.10.2 Protection of Surfaces
Protect newly backfilled, graded, and topsoiled areas from traffic,

erosion, and settlements that may occur. Repair or reestablish damaged
grades, elevations, or slopes.
3.11 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL
Remove from Government property.
3.12.1 Sampling
Take the number and size of samples required to perform the following
tests.
3.12.2 Testing
Perform one of each of the following tests for each material used. Provide
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 9

additional tests for each source change.
3.12.2.1 Fill and Backfill Material Testing
Test fill and backfill material in accordance with ASTM C136 for
conformance to ASTM D2487 gradation limits; ASTM D1140 for material finer
than the No. 200 sieve; ASTM D4318 for liquid limit and for plastic limit;
ASTM D698 or ASTM D1557 for moisture density relations, as applicable.
3.12.2.2 Porous Fill Testing
Test porous fill in accordance with ASTM C136 for conformance to gradation
specified in ASTM C33/C33M.
3.12.2.3 Density Tests
Test density in accordance with ASTM D1556. Perform an ASTM D1556 density
test at the start of the job. Test each lift at randomly selected
locations every 2000 square feet of existing grade in fills for structures
and concrete slabs, and every 2500 square feet for other fill areas and
every 2000 square feet of subgrade in cut. Include density test results
in daily report.
Bedding and backfill in trenches: One test per 500 linear feet in each
lift.
3.12.2.4 Moisture Content Tests
In the stockpile, excavation or borrow areas, a minimum of two tests per

day per type of material or source of materials being placed is required
during stable weather conditions. During unstable weather, tests shall be
made as dictated by local conditions and approved moisture content shall
be tested in accordance with ASTM D2216. Include moisture content test
results in daily report.
SECTION 31 23 00.00 20 Page 10

SECTION 31 63 29
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS

11/14
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials and Commentary

Structural Concrete
ACI 304R (2000; R 2009) Guide for Measuring,

Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete
ACI 305R (2010) Guide to Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306.1 (1990; R 2002) Standard Specification for

Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 318 (2014; Errata 2014) Building Code

Requirements for Structural Concrete and
Commentary
ACI 336.1 (2001) Specification for the Construction

of Drilled Piers
AWS A5.1/A5.1M (2012) Specification for Carbon Steel

Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding

Code - Steel
AWS D1.4/D1.4M (2011) Structural Welding Code -

Reinforcing Steel

Concrete

Reinforcement


Cement
ASTM C172 (2010) Standard Practice for Sampling


ASTM C39/C39M (2014a) Standard Test Method for

Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens

CRSI 10MSP (2009; 28th Ed) Manual of Standard Practice
FHWA NHI-10-016 (2010) Drilled Shafts: Construction

Procedures and LRFD Design Methods
29 CFR 1926.501 Duty to Have Fall Protection
29 CFR 1926.502 Fall Protection Systems Criteria and

Practices
29 CFR 1926.651 Specific Excavation Requirements
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drilled Shaft Diameters; G
Top and Bottom of Shaft Elevations; G
Steel Reinforcement; G
Anchor Bolt Locations; G
Accessories; G
SD-05 Design Data
Mix Design Data; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Ground Water Conditions; G
Slump; G
Concrete; G
Compressive Strength; G
SD-07 Certificates
Bill of Lading for Ready-Mix Concrete Deliveries; G
Steel Reinforcement; G
Welding Certificates; G
Excavation and Drilling Equipment; G
Qualifications of Excavator; G
1.3 QUALITY CONTROL
1.3.1 General
Install drilled shaft foundations in accordance with applicable

requirements as described by ACI 336.1, and FHWA NHI-10-016
1.3.2 Sequencing and Scheduling
Submit a detailed installation plan describing the schedule for drilling

and/or excavation, installation of steel reinforcement and concrete
placement with anticipated site conditions so that each excavated shaft is
poured the same day that the drilling is performed.
1.3.3 Inspection Criteria
Inspection activities should be designed to minimize delays while insuring

the intent of the Industry Standard Specifications.
1.3.4 Qualification of Excavation Contractor
An experienced excavator with five (5) years experience and licensed in

the State of Arizona, specialized in excavating and installing work
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project. Submit certificates substantiating the Qualifications of
Excavator.
1.3.5 Welding Qualifications
Provide and maintain qualified procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, AWS D1.4/D1.4M, and AWS A5.1/A5.1M. Submit Welding
Certificates to the Contracting Officer.
1.3.6 Pre-Construction Conference
After submittals are received and approved but before drilled shaft
excavation and foundation work, including associated work, is performed,
the Contracting Officer will hold a pre-construction conference to review
the following:
a. The drawings, specifications and the geotechnical report.
b. Finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,

Excavator's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make
progress and avoid delays.
c. Methods and procedures related to drilled shaft foundation

installation, including engineer's written instructions.
d. Support conditions for compliance with requirements, including

alignment between foundation system and erection of structural members.
e. Governing regulations and requirements for, certificates, insurance,

tests and inspections if applicable.
f. Temporary protection requirements for foundation assembly during and

after installation.
1.4.1 Existing Conditions
Locate existing underground utilities before excavating drilled shaft

foundations. If existing utilities are to remain in place, provide
protection during drilled shaft operations.
1.4.2 Interruption of Existing Utilities
Do not interrupt any utility to occupied facilities unless directed in

writing by the Contracting Officer.
1.4.3 Weather Limitations
Proceed with installation preparation only when existing and forecasted

weather conditions permit work to proceed without water entering into the
area of excavation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Submit design data for the following:
a. Mix design data in accordance with the paragraph entitled, "Ready-Mix

Concrete", accompanied by the Bill of Lading for Ready Mix Concrete
deliveries.
2.1.1 Assembly
Installation drawings are to include, but not limited to, the following
items indicating a completely dimensioned layout and location of drilled
shafts and concrete placement for foundation system. Submit detailed shop
drawings for the following:
a. Drilled shaft diameters
b. Depth of test holes
c. Top and bottom of shaft elevations
d. Steel reinforcement
e. Anchor bolt locations
f. Accessories
EQUIPMENT
2.2 EQUIPMENT
2.2.1 Drilling and Excavation Equipment
Provide drilling and excavation equipment having adequate capacity,

including but not limited to, power, torque and down thrust to excavate a
hole of diameter and depth indicated. Also provide excavation and
over-reaming tools of adequate design, size and strength to perform the
work indicated.
Provide special drilling equipment including, but not limited to, rock
core barrels, rock tools, air tools and other equipment as necessary to
construct the shaft excavation to the size and depth indicated when
materials encountered can not be drilled using earth augers and/or
over-reaming tools.
Submit certificates substantiating appropriate selection of excavation and

drilling equipment.
2.3 MATERIALS
2.3.1 Steel Reinforcement
2.3.1.1 Deformed Steel Bars
Steel bars conforming to ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 ksi and ACI 318.
2.3.1.2 Plain Steel Wire
Steel wire conforming to ASTM A1064/A1064M.
2.3.2 Ready-Mix Concrete
Ready-Mix concrete and mix design conforming to ACI 117, ACI 301, and
ACI 304R, minimum compressive strength 5,500 psi at 28 days. Slump
results between 5 to 6 inches, according to ASTM C143/C143M.
Portland cements conforming to ASTM C150/C150M, Type II. Provide one

brand and type of cement for formed concrete having exposed-to-view
finished surfaces.
Potable water conforming to ASTM C94/C94M.
Measure, batch, mix and deliver concrete according to ASTM C94/C94M and
furnish batch ticket information.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Protect existing structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other

facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, vibration,
and other hazards created by drilled shaft foundation operations.
Provide Fall Protection as required by 29 CFR 1926.501, 29 CFR 1926.502

and 29 CFR 1926.651.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1 Construction Criteria
Provide equipment for checking the dimensions and alignment of each shaft
excavation. Determine dimensions and alignment jointly with the
contractor and engineer. Measure final shaft depths with appropriate
weighted tape measure or other approved method after cleaning.
Provide and install monolithically cast-in-place concrete drilled shaft

foundation to the sizes indicated.
Provide and install straight cylindrical shaft foundation of the type

indicated.
Tolerances:
a. Maximum variation of the center of any shaft foundation from the

required location: 3 inches, measured at the ground surface.
b. Bottom Diameter: Minus zero, plus 6 inches, measured in any direction.
c. Maximum variation from plumb: 1:40.
d. Maximum bottom level: Plus or minus 2 inches.
3.2.2 Excavation
Accomplish excavation of shaft foundations by standard excavation methods

including, but not limited to, conventional augers fitted with soil and/or
rock teeth, or under-reaming tools attached to drilling equipment of
adequate size, power, torque and down thrust necessary for the work.
Perform excavation through whatever materials that are encountered to the

dimensions, depths and applicable ACI 336.1 tolerances.
Protect excavated walls with temporary watertight steel casings of

sufficient length to prevent water intrusion, cave-ins, displacement of
surrounding earth, and injury to personnel and damage to construction
operations.
Excavate shafts for drilled foundations to indicated elevations. Remove

loose debris, materials and/or muck to make bottom surfaces level within
ACI 336.1 tolerances.
Remove water from excavated shaft prior to concrete placement.
3.2.3 Steel Reinforcement
Comply with recommendations in the CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice"

CRSI 10MSP for fabricating, placing and supporting reinforcement. Shop
fabricate steel reinforcement in accordance with ACI SP-66.
When practicable to deliver the reinforcement cage assembly to the jobsite

as a complete unit ready for installation, should it not be possible make
remaining connections and/or splices, as indicated on the approved shop
drawings, at-grade level prior to lowering the complete assembly into the
hole.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth and other foreign
materials. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. Set wire ties
with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
Lower reinforcement steel into the hole in such a manner as to prevent

damage to the walls of the excavation. Place, tie and/or clip cage
symmetrically about the axis of the shaft. Use centering devices securely
attached to the cage to clear the shaft walls and maintain the cage in
place throughout the concrete placement operations.
Cooperate with other trades in setting of anchor bolts, inserts, and other
embedded items. Where conflicts occur between reinforcing and embedded
items, notify the Contracting Officer so that conflicts may be reconciled
before concrete placement. Position and support anchors and embedded
items with appropriate accessories.
Use templates to set anchor bolts, leveling plates and other accessories
required for structure erection. Provide blocking and/or holding devices
to maintain required anchoring positions during final concrete placement.
3.2.4 Concrete Placement
Keep all equipment, including but not limited to, mixers, pumps, hoses,
tools and screeds clean and free of set concrete throughout the placement
operation.
Convey concrete from the mixer to place of deposit by best industry

methods that prevents segregation and loss of material. Size and design
the equipment for conveying concrete to ensure uniform, continuous
placement of concrete.
Place concrete in accordance with ACI 318.
Place concrete in a continuous operation and without segregation into dry

excavations whenever possible after inspection and written approval by the
Contracting Officer. Use all practicable means to obtain a dry excavation
before and during concrete placement.
Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold
or hot temperatures. When hot weather conditions exist that would impair
quality and strength of placed concrete, comply with ACI 305R. Comply
with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.
A minimum of 50 percent of the base for each shaft is to be less than 1/2
inch of sediment at the time of concrete placement. Maximum depth of

sediment or debris at any place on the base of the shaft is not to exceed
1-1/2 inches. Shaft cleanliness is to be determined by the engineer by
visual inspection.
3.3.1 Test Reports
As a minimum, submit the following test reports and data.
a. Soils Report
b. Ground Water conditions
c. Load Test
d. Penetration Test
e. Slump
f. Concrete
g. Compressive Strength
Sample and test concrete for quality control during placement. Quality
control testing is provided by the contract.
Sample freshly placed concrete for testing in accordance with ASTM C172.
Make concrete test specimens for compressive strength at 7 and 28 days for
each design mix conforming to ASTM C31/C31M. Compression test concrete in
accordance with ASTM C39/C39M.
Test Slump at plant for each design mix in accordance with ASTM C143/C143M.
SECTION 32 05 33
LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT
02/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM D5851 (1995; R 2011) Planning and Implementing a

Water Monitoring Program
ASTM D6155 (2013) Nontraditional Coarse Aggregate for

Bituminous Paving Mixtures
TCIA Z133.1 (2006) American National Standard for

Arboricultural Operations - Pruning,
Repairing, Maintaining, and Removing
Trees, and Cutting Brush - Safety
Requirements
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Pesticide
Any substance or mixture of substances, including biological control

agents, that may prevent, destroy, repel, or mitigate pests and are
specifically labeled for use by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA). Also, any substance used as a plant regulator, defoliant,
disinfectant, or biocide. Examples of pesticides include fumigants,
herbicides, insecticides, fungicides, nematicides, molluscicides and
rodenticides.
1.2.2 Planter Beds
A planter bed is defined as an area containing one or a combination of the

following plant types: shrubs, vines, wildflowers, annuals, perennials,
ground cover, and a mulch topdressing excluding turf. Trees may also be
found in planter beds.
Section 32 84 24 IRRIGATION SPRINKLER SYSTEM applies to this section for

installation of irrigation equipment requirements, with additions and
modifications herein.
Section 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS applies to this section for installation

of trees, shrubs, and ground cover with additions and modifications herein.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

Integrated Pest Management Plan; G
SD-03 Product Data
Fertilizer; G
SD-07 Certificates
Maintenance inspection report
Maintenance
Tree, staking and guying removal
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.5.1 Delivery
Deliver fertilizer, gypsum, iron to the site in original containers

bearing manufacturer's chemical analysis, name, trade name, or trademark,
and indication of conformance to state and federal laws. Instead of
containers, fertilizer, gypsum may be furnished in bulk with a certificate
indicating the above information.
1.5.2 Storage
1.5.2.1 Fertilizer, Lime, Iron, Mulch Storage
Material shall be stored in designated areas. Lime and fertilizer shall

be stored in cool, dry locations away from contaminants.
1.5.2.2 Antidessicants Storage
Do not store with fertilizers or other landscape maintenance materials.
1.5.3 Handling
Do not drop or dump materials from vehicles.
1.6 MAINTENANCE
Submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals for planting materials.

Include instructions indicating procedures during one typical year
including variations of maintenance for climatic conditions throughout the
year. Provide instructions and procedures for watering; promotion of
growth, including fertilizing, pruning, and mowing; and integrated pest
management. O&M Manuals shall include pictures of planting materials

cross referenced to botanical and common names, with a description of the
normal appearance in each season.
Develop a water monitoring program for surface and ground water on the
project site in accordance with ASTM D5851 and consistent with the water
management program utilized during construction operations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 POST-PLANT FERTILIZER
Fertilizer for trees, plants, and shrubs shall be as recommended by plant

supplier, except synthetic chemical fertilizers are not permitted.
Fertilizers containing petrochemical additives or that have been treated
with pesticides or herbicides are not permitted.
2.1.1 Granular Fertilizer
Organic, granular controlled release fertilizer containing the following

minimum percentages, by weight, of plant food nutrients, or as recommended
by soils testing laboratory:
16 percent available nitrogen

10 percent available phosphorus
10 percent available potassium
2.2 WATER
Source of water shall be approved by the Contracting Officer, and be of

suitable quality for irrigation.
2.3 MULCHES TOPDRESSING
Free from noxious weeds, mold, pesticides, or other deleterious materials.
2.3.1 Inert Mulch Materials
Stone complying with ASTM D6155, riverbank stone, crushed pit-run rock,
and granite chips as specified in Section 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS.
2.3.2 Recycled Organic Mulch
Recycled mulch may include compost, tree trimmings, or pine needles with a
gradation that passes through a 2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inch screen. It shall be
cleaned of all sticks a minimum 1 inch in diameter and plastic materials a
minimum 3 inch length. The material shall be treated to retard the growth
of mold and fungi.
2.4 PESTICIDES
Submit an Integrated Pest Management Plan, including weed and pest

management strategies proposed alternatives to herbicides and pesticides.
Use biological pest controls as approved in the Plan.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXTENT OF WORK
Provide landscape construction maintenance to include irrigation equipment

cleaning and adjustments, fertilizing, watering, weeding, pruning, stake
and guy adjusting for all newly installed landscape areas , unless
indicated otherwise, and at all areas inside or outside the limits of the
construction that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations.
3.1.1 Policing
The Contractor shall police all landscaped areas. Policing includes

removal of leaves, branches and limbs regardless of length or diameter,
dead vegetation, paper, trash, cigarette butts, garbage, rocks or other
debris. Collected debris shall be promptly removed and disposed of at an
approved disposal site.
3.1.2 Drainage System Maintenance
The Contractor shall remove all obstructions from surface and subsurface
drain lines to allow water to flow unrestricted in swales, catch basins,
storm drain curb inlets, and yard drains. Remove grates and clear debris
in catch basins. Open drainage channels are to be maintained free of all
debris and vegetation at all times. Edges of these channels shall be
clear of any encroachment by vegetation.
3.2 IRRIGATION ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD
The irrigation establishment period will commence on the date that

inspection by the Contracting Officer shows that the new irrigation
equipment furnished under this contract have been satisfactorily installed
and is functional and shall continue for a period of 365 days.
3.2.1 Maintenance During the Irrigation Establishment Period
Begin maintenance immediately after irrigation equipment has been

installed and is functional. Inspect irrigation equipment at least once a
week during the installation and establishment period and perform needed
maintenance promptly. Automatic controllers not equipped with rain
shut-off sensors shall be turned off during periods of rain that exceed
twelve hours of continuous rainfall in one day or during rain storms of
one day or more. Once the rain has subsided timers shall be reactivated.
Irrigation controllers shall be inspected and reprogrammed after power
outages. Contractor shall be responsible for winterization and startup.
Sprinkler heads shall direct water away from buildings and hard surfaced
areas.
3.2.2 Water Restrictions
The Contractor shall abide by state, local or other water conservation

regulations in force during the establishment period. Automatic
controller shall be adjusted to comply with the water conservation
regulations schedule.
3.2.3 Final Acceptance
Operation and coverage test is acceptable if system operates through at

least one complete cycle for areas to be irrigated and all leaks or
repairs have been completed.
3.2.4 Controller Charts
Provide one chart for each controller supplied. Indicate in chart area
controlled by the automatic controller. The chart is a reduction of the
actual plan that will fit the maximum dimensions inside the controller
housing. Use a black line print for the chart and a different pastel or
transparent color to indicate each station zone of coverage. After chart
is completed and approved for final acceptance, seal chart between two 20
mil pieces of clear plastic.
3.3 EXTERIOR PLANT ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD
The exterior plant establishment period will commence on the date that
inspection by the Contracting Officer shows that the new plants furnished
under this contract have been satisfactorily installed and shall continue
for a period of 365 days.
3.3.1 Frequency of Maintenance
Begin maintenance immediately after plants have been installed. Inspect

exterior plants at least once a week during the installation and
establishment period and perform needed maintenance promptly.
3.3.2 Promotion of Plant Growth and Vigor
Water, prune, fertilize, mulch, adjust stakes, guys and turnbuckles,

eradicate weeds and perform other operations necessary to promote plant
growth, and vigor.
3.3.3 Planter Bed Maintenance
Planter beds shall be weeded, fertilized, irrigated, kept pest free,

pruned, and mulch levels maintained. Fertilize exterior planting
materials to promote healthy plant growth without encouraging excessive
top foliar growth. Remove noxious weeds common to the area from planting
areas by mechanical means.
3.3.3.1 Shrub Selective Maintenance
In addition to the above requirements, shrubs shall be selectively pruned,

and shaped for health and safety when the following conditions exist:
Remove growth in front of windows, over entrance ways or walks, and any
growth which will obstruct vision at street intersections or of security
personnel; Remove dead, damaged or diseased branches or limbs; where shrub
growth obstructs pedestrian walkways; where shrub growth is found growing
against or over structures; where shrub growth permits concealment of
unauthorized persons. All pruning debris shall be disposed of in a proper
manner.
3.3.3.2 Tree Maintenance
Tree maintenance shall include adjustment of stakes, ties, guy supports

and turnbuckles, watering, fertilizing, pest control, mulching, pruning
for health and safety and fall leaf cleanup. Fertilize exterior trees to
promote healthy plant growth without encouraging excessive top foliar
growth. Stakes, ties, guy supports and turnbuckles shall be inspected and
adjusted to avoid girdling and promote natural development. All trees
within the project boundaries, regardless of caliper, shall be selectively

pruned for safety and health reasons. These include but are not limited to
removal of dead and broken branches and correction of structural
defects. Prune trees according to their natural growth characteristics
leaving trees well shaped and balanced. Pruning of all trees including
palm trees shall be accomplished by or in the presence of a certified
member of the International Society of Arboriculture and in accordance
with TCIA Z133.1. All pruning debris generated shall be disposed of in a
proper manner.
3.3.4 Slope Erosion Control Maintenance
The Contractor shall provide slope erosion control maintenance to prevent

undermining of all slopes in newly landscaped areas. Maintenance tasks
include immediate repairs to weak spots in sloped areas, and maintaining
clean, clear culverts, and graded berms, to intercept and direct water
flow to prevent development of large gullies and slope erosion and during
periods of extended rainfall, irrigation systems shall be secured. Eroded
areas shall be filled with amended topsoil and replanted with the same
plant species. Erosion control blankets damaged due to slope erosion shall
be reinstalled.
3.3.5 Removal of Dying or Dead Plants
Remove dead and dying plants and provide new plants immediately upon
commencement of the specified planting season, and replace stakes, guys,
mulch and eroded earth mound water basins. No additional plant
establishment period will be required for replacement plants beyond the
original warranty period. A tree shall be considered dying or dead when
the main leader has died back, or a minimum of 20 percent of the crown has
died. A shrub or ground cover shall be considered dying or dead when a
minimum of 20 percent of the plant has died. This condition shall be
determined by scraping on a branch an area 1/16 inch square, maximum, to
determine the cause for dying plant material and shall provide
recommendations for replacement. The Contractor shall determine the cause
for dying plant material and provide recommendations for replacement.
3.3.6 Tracking of Unhealthy Plants
Note plants not in healthy growing condition, as determined by the

Contracting Officer, and as soon as seasonal conditions permit, remove and
replace with plants of the same species and sizes as originally specified.
Install replacement plantings in accordance with Section 32 93 00 EXTERIOR
PLANTS.
3.3.7 Final Inspection
Final inspection will be made upon written request from the Contractor at
least 10 days prior to the last day of the establishment period. Final
inspection will be based upon satisfactory health and growth of plants and
on the following:
3.3.7.1 Total Plants on Site
Plants have been accepted and required number of replacements have been
installed.
3.3.7.2 Mulching and Weeding
Planter beds and earth mound water basins are properly mulched and free of
weeds.
3.3.7.3 Tree Supports
Stakes, guys, and turnbuckles are in good condition.
3.3.7.4 Remedial Work
Remedial measures directed by the Contracting Officer to ensure plant

material survival and promote healthy growth have been completed.
3.3.8 Unsatisfactory Work
When work is found to not meet design intent and specifications,

maintenance period will be extended at no additional cost to the
Government until work has been completed, inspected and accepted by
3.4.1 Maintenance Inspection Report
Provide maintenance inspection report to assure that landscape maintenance

is being performed in accordance with the specifications and in the best
interest of plant growth and survivability. Site observations shall be
documented at the start of the establishment period, then quarterly
following the start, and at the end of establishment period. Results of
site observation visits shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer
within 7 calendar days of each site observation visit.
3.4.2 Tree Staking and Guying Removal
The Contractor shall provide a certified letter that all stakes and guys
are removed from all project trees at the end of the establishment period.
SECTION 32 11 24
GRADED CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE FOR FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT

11/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM C117 (2013) Standard Test Method for Materials

Finer than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in
Mineral Aggregates by Washing
ASTM C131/C131M (2014) Standard Test Method for Resistance

to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the
Los Angeles Machine



ASTM D1883 (2007; E 2009; E 2009) CBR (California

Bearing Ratio) of Laboratory-Compacted
Soils

ASTM D75/D75M (2014) Standard Practice for Sampling

Aggregates
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Aggregates
SD-06 Test Reports
Gradation
Bearing ratio
Liquid limit
Plasticity index
Percentage of wear
Density
Gradation
Smoothness
Density
Thickness
Inspect materials delivered to site for damage and store as to prevent

segregation and contamination.
1.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
Do not construct base course when atmospheric temperature is below 35

degrees F or when rainfall or other weather conditions detrimentally
affect the quality of the finished course.
1.5 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
Equipment shall be dependable and adequate for the purpose intended.

Maintain equipment in satisfactory and safe operating condition. Subject
to approval, special equipment dictated by local conditions may be used.
Calibrated equipment, such as scales, batching equipment, spreaders, and
similar items, shall have been recalibrated by an approved calibration
laboratory within 12 months of commencing work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Aggregates
Base or miscellaneous base material consisting of durable and sound

crushed concrete, crushed gravel, or crushed stone, free of lumps or balls
of clay or other objectionable matter. Crushed stone and gravel shall be
free from flat, elongated, soft, or disintegrated pieces. Crushed gravel
retained on a No. 4 sieve shall have at least 90 percent by weight with at
least two fractured faces and 100 percent by weight with at least one
fractured face. Base course materials samples shall have a bearing ratio
of at least 100 as determined by laboratory tests on a 4-day soaked
specimen in accordance with ASTM D1883; compact specimen in accordance
with ASTM D1557, Method D. Determine grain size in accordance with
ASTM C136 and amount of material finer than 200 mesh sieve in accordance
with ASTM C117. Aggregate, other than slag, shall have a percentage of wear
not exceeding 45 when tested in accordance with ASTM C131/C131M, Grading B.

Soil binder material, that portion of material passing the No. 40 sieve,
shall be of such composition that the composite material conforms to the
requirements specified herein. The base course shall be of such nature
that it can be compacted readily with watering and rolling to a firm,
stable base and shall conform to the following sizes:
Sieve Percentage Passing Sieve
1 - 1/2 inch 100
3/4 inch 90 - 100
3/8 inch 50 - 80
No. 4 35 - 55
No. 30 10 - 30
No. 200 2 - 9
ASTM C131/C131M Test Grading B
Miscellanous Base
Sieve Percentage Passing Sieve
2 inch 100
1 - 1/2 inch 85 - 100
3/4 inch 50 - 85
No. 4 25 - 45
No. 30 10 - 25
No. 200 2 - 9
ASTM C131/C131M Test Grading A
That portion of the material passing the No. 40sieve shall have a liquid
limit of not more than 25 and a plasticity index of not more than 5 as
determined by ASTM D4318.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 BASE COURSE
Construct the graded aggregate base course on a prepared subgrade, as

indicated. Verify compacted subgrade, granular base, or stabilized soil
is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads. Provide line
and grade stakes for control. Place grade stakes in lanes parallel to the
centerline of areas to be paved and space for string lining or other
control methods. The base course shall consist of aggregate processed,
deposited, spread, and compacted on a prepared surface. The Contractor

shall be responsible for protection of completed areas against detrimental
effects. Recondition, reshape, and recompact areas damaged by freezing,
rainfall, or other weather conditions.
3.2 MIXING OF MATERIALS
Mix aggregates in a stationary or traveling plant. Proportion aggregates

by weight or volume in such quantities that specified gradation, liquid
limit, and plasticity index requirements are met after the base course has
been placed and compacted. Incorporate, during the mixing operation,
water in quantities sufficient to provide the necessary moisture content
for the specified compaction. Mixing operations shall produce
satisfactory uniform blending and the method of discharging into trucks
shall not produce segregation.
3.3 PLACING
Do not dump mixed materials in piles, but place on prepared subgrade or

subbase in layers of uniform thickness with a spreader. When a compacted
course 8 inches in thickness is required, place material in a single
layer. When a compacted course in excess of 8 inches is required, place
material in layers of equal thickness. Do not exceed 8 inches or have
less than 3 inches in thickness for any compacted layer. Place layers so
that when compacted, they will be true to grades or levels required with
the least possible surface disturbance. Where the base course is
constructed in more than one layer, clean previously constructed layers of
loose and foreign matter. Maintain material water content during the
placing period to obtain the compaction specified. Make adjustments in
placing procedures or equipment to obtain true grades, to minimize
segregation and degradation, to reduce or increase water content, and to
insure a satisfactory base course.
3.3.1 Stationary-Plant Method
Mix aggregates, binder material and water until a uniform homogeneous

mixture is obtained. Do not dump materials in piles; place in layers of
essentially uniform thickness, not to exceed 8 inches after compaction, by
an approved spreader. Tail gate spreading will be acceptable only with
permission, under conditions such as where space limitations prohibit use
of the spreader.
3.3.2 Windrow Traveling-Plant Method
Place aggregates and binder materials in windrows of such cross section

and proportions that, when picked up, mixed, and redeposited in windrows,
the finished mixture shall conform to the specified requirements. Do not
exceed the rated capacity of the traveling plant with the size of the
windrow of the combined materials. Add water, in quantity sufficient to
provide the necessary moisture content for compacting, to the aggregates
at the time of mixing. Mix materials uniformly by the traveling plant,
deposit in windrows of uniform cross section, and spread in a layer of
uniform thickness to the required contour and grades.
3.4 COMPACTING AND FINISHING
Immediately following the placing, spread the finished mixture uniformly

in a layer and bring to optimum moisture content. The loose thickness and
the surface of the layer shall be such that the specified density and the
required thickness shall be obtained after compaction. Compact the layer

with steel-faced, vibrating or pneumatic-tired rollers, or other suitable
compacting equipment or combinations thereof. Continue compacting until
the layer is compacted through the full depth to a field density of at
least 100 percent of the maximum density at optimum moisture content
tested in accordance with ASTM D1556. In areas not accessible to rollers
or compactors, compact the mixture with mechanical hand tampers. If the
mixture is excessively moistened by rain, aerate by blade graders, or
other suitable equipment. Aerate until the moisture content of the
material is that needed to obtain the required density. Finish the
surface of the layer by a combination of rolling and blading. Final
surface shall be smooth and free from waves, irregularities, and ruts or
soft yielding spots.
3.5 FINISHING AT EDGES OF BASE COURSE
Place earth or other approved materials along the edges of the base course
in such quantity that it will compact to the thickness of the course being
constructed. When the course is being constructed in two or more layers,
place material to the thickness of each layer. In each operation, allow
at least a one foot width of the shoulder to be rolled and compacted
simultaneously with the rolling and compacting of each layer.
Approve materials and material sources in advance of the use of such

materials in the work. Replace base where samples are removed.
3.6.1 Sampling
3.6.1.1 Aggregates at the Source
Prior to production and delivery of aggregates, take at least one initial

sample in accordance with ASTM D75/D75M. Collect each sample by taking
three incremental samples at random from the source material to make a
composite sample of not less than 50 pounds. Repeat above sampling when
source of material is changed or when unacceptable deficiencies or
variations from specified grading of materials are found in testing.
3.6.1.2 During Construction
Take one random sample from each 1000 tons of completed course material,
but not less than one random sample per day's run. Take samples in
accordance with ASTM D75/D75M.
3.6.2 Testing
3.6.2.1 Aggregates
Test each sample of base course material without delay. Make gradation
tests from each sample in accordance with ASTM C136. Make sieve analysis
on material passing the No. 200 sieve in accordance with ASTM C117.
3.6.2.2 Smoothness Tests
Test with a 10 foot straightedge, applied parallel with and at right

angles to the center line of the paved area. Correct deviations in the
surface in excess of 1/2 inch by loosening, adding or removing material,
reshaping, watering, and compacting. The smoothness requirements
specified herein apply only to the top layer when base course is
constructed in more than one layer.
3.6.2.3 Field Density Tests
ASTM D1556. Take one test for each 500 square yards of each layer of base
course.
3.6.2.4 Laboratory Density Tests
In accordance with ASTM D1557, Method D.
3.6.2.5 Thickness Tests
Measure thickness of base course at intervals such that there will be a

depth measurement for at least each 500 square yards of complete base
course. Make depth measurements by test holes, at least 3 inches in
diameter, through the base course. Where base course deficiency is more
than 1/2 inch, correct by scarifying, adding mixture of proper gradation,
reblading, and recompacting. Where the measured thickness is more than
1/2 inch thicker than indicated, consider it as the indicated thickness
plus 1/2 inch for determining the average. The average thickness is the
average of the depth measurements and shall not underrun the thickness
indicated.
3.7 MAINTENANCE
After construction is completed, maintain the base course throughout,

except where portion of the succeeding course is under construction
thereon. Maintenance includes drainage, rolling, shaping, and watering,
as necessary, to maintain the course in proper condition. Correct
deficiencies in thickness, composition, construction, smoothness, and
density, which develop during the maintenance, to conform to the
requirements specified herein. Maintain sufficient moisture by light
sprinkling with water at the surface to prevent a dusty condition.
SECTION 32 12 16
HOT-MIX ASPHALT (HMA) FOR ROADS

08/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


(AASHTO)
AASHTO M 156 (2013) Standard Specification for

Requirements for Mixing Plants for
Hot-Mixed, Hot-Laid Bituminous Paving
Mixtures
AASHTO M 320 (2010) Standard Specification for

Performance-Graded Asphalt Binder
ASPHALT INSTITUTE (AI)
AI MS-2 (1997 6th Ed) Mix Design Methods
ASTM C117 (2013) Standard Test Method for Materials

Finer than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in
Mineral Aggregates by Washing
ASTM C1252 (2006) Standard Test Methods for

Uncompacted Void Content of Fine Aggregate
(as Influenced by Particle Shape, Surface
Texture, and Grading)
ASTM C127 (2012) Standard Test Method for Density,

Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and
Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
ASTM C128 (2012) Standard Test Method for Density,

Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and
Absorption of Fine Aggregate
ASTM C131/C131M (2014) Standard Test Method for Resistance

to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the
Los Angeles Machine

ASTM C142/C142M (2010) Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps

and Friable Particles in Aggregates
ASTM C29/C29M (2009) Standard Test Method for Bulk

Density ("Unit Weight") and Voids in
Aggregate
ASTM C566 (2013) Standard Test Method for Total

Evaporable Moisture Content of Aggregate
by Drying
ASTM C88 (2013) Standard Test Method for Soundness

of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or
Magnesium Sulfate
ASTM D140/D140M (2014) Standard Practice for Sampling

Bituminous Materials
ASTM D1461 (2011) Moisture or Volatile Distillates in

ASTM D2172/D2172M (2011) Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen

from Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D2419 (2014) Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and

Fine Aggregate
ASTM D242/D242M (2009; R 2014) Mineral Filler for

ASTM D2489/D2489M (2008) Estimating Degree of Particle

Coating of Bituminous-Aggregate Mixtures
ASTM D2950/D2950M (2014) Density of Bituminous Concrete in

Place by Nuclear Methods
ASTM D3665 (2012) Random Sampling of Construction

Materials
ASTM D3666 (2013) Standard Specification for Minimum

Requirements for Agencies Testing and
Inspecting Road and Paving Materials
ASTM D4125/D4125M (2010) Asphalt Content of Bituminous

Mixtures by the Nuclear Method
ASTM D4791 (2010) Flat Particles, Elongated

Particles, or Flat and Elongated Particles
in Coarse Aggregate
ASTM D4867/D4867M (2009; R 2014) Effect of Moisture on

Asphalt Concrete Paving Mixtures
ASTM D5444 (2008) Mechanical Size Analysis of

Extracted Aggregate
ASTM D6307 (2010) Asphalt Content of Hot Mix Asphalt

by Ignition Method
ASTM D6925 (2009) Standard Test Method for

Preparation and Determination of the
Relative Density of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA)

Specimens by Means of the Superpave
Gyratory Compactor
ASTM D6926 (2010) Standard Practice for Preparation

of Bituminous Specimens Using Marshall
Apparatus
ASTM D6927 (2006) Standard Test Method for Marshall

Stability and Flow of Bituminous Mixtures
STATE OF CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (CALTRANS)
CTM 526 (2002) Operation of California

Profilograph and Evaluation of Profiles
COE CRD-C 171 (1995) Standard Test Method for

Determining Percentage of Crushed
Particles in Aggregate
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Mix Design; G
Quality Control; G
Material Acceptance; G
SD-04 Samples
Asphalt Cement Binder
Aggregates
SD-06 Test Reports
Aggregates; G
QC Monitoring
SD-07 Certificates
Asphalt Cement Binder; G
Testing Laboratory
Do not place the hot-mix asphalt upon a wet surface or when the surface
temperature of the underlying course is less than specified in Table 3.
The temperature requirements may be waived by the Contracting Officer, if

requested; however, meet all other requirements, including compaction.
Table 3. Surface Temperature Limitations of Underlying Course
Mat Thickness, inches Degrees F
3 or greater 40
Less than 3 45
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Perform the work consisting of pavement courses composed of mineral

aggregate and asphalt material heated and mixed in a central mixing plant
and placed on a prepared course. HMA designed and constructed in
accordance with this section shall conform to the lines, grades,
thicknesses, and typical cross sections indicated. Construct each course
to the depth, section, or elevation required by the drawings and roll,
finish, and approve it before the placement of the next course.
2.1.1 Asphalt Mixing Plant
Plants used for the preparation of hot-mix asphalt shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M 156 with the following changes:
2.1.1.1 Truck Scales
Weigh the asphalt mixture on approved, certified scales at the

Contractor's expense. Inspect and seal scales at least annually by an
approved calibration laboratory.
2.1.1.2 Testing Facilities
Provide laboratory facilities at the plant for the use of the Government's
acceptance testing and the Contractor's quality control testing.
2.1.1.3 Inspection of Plant
Provide the Contracting Officer with access at all times, to all areas of
the plant for checking adequacy of equipment; inspecting operation of the
plant; verifying weights, proportions, and material properties; checking
the temperatures maintained in the preparation of the mixtures and for
taking samples. Provide assistance as requested, for the Government to
procure any desired samples.
2.1.1.4 Storage bins
Use of storage bins for temporary storage of hot-mix asphalt will be

permitted as follows:
a. The asphalt mixture may be stored in non-insulated storage bins for a

period of time not exceeding 3 hours.
b. The asphalt mixture may be stored in insulated storage bins for a

period of time not exceeding 8 hours. The mix drawn from bins shall
meet the same requirements as mix loaded directly into trucks.
2.1.2 Hauling Equipment
Provide trucks for hauling hot-mix asphalt having tight, clean, and smooth
metal beds. To prevent the mixture from adhering to them, the truck beds
shall be lightly coated with a minimum amount of paraffin oil, lime
solution, or other approved material. Petroleum based products shall not
be used as a release agent. Each truck shall have a suitable cover to
protect the mixture from adverse weather. When necessary to ensure that
the mixture will be delivered to the site at the specified temperature,
truck beds shall be insulated or heated and covers (tarps) shall be
securely fastened.
2.1.3 Asphalt Pavers
Provide asphalt pavers which are self-propelled, with an activated screed,

heated as necessary, and capable of spreading and finishing courses of
hot-mix asphalt which will meet the specified thickness, smoothness, and
grade. The paver shall have sufficient power to propel itself and the
hauling equipment without adversely affecting the finished surface.
2.1.3.1 Receiving Hopper
Provide paver with a receiving hopper of sufficient capacity to permit a

uniform spreading operation and equipped with a distribution system to
place the mixture uniformly in front of the screed without segregation.
The screed shall effectively produce a finished surface of the required
evenness and texture without tearing, shoving, or gouging the mixture.
2.1.3.2 Automatic Grade Controls
Equip the paver with a control system capable of automatically maintaining

the specified screed elevation. The control system shall be automatically
actuated from either a reference line and/or through a system of
mechanical sensors or sensor-directed mechanisms or devices which will
maintain the paver screed at a predetermined transverse slope and at the
proper elevation to obtain the required surface. The transverse slope
controller shall be capable of maintaining the screed at the desired slope
within plus or minus 0.1 percent. A transverse slope controller shall not
be used to control grade. Provide controls capable of working in
conjunction with any of the following attachments:
a. Ski-type device of not less than 30 feet in length.
b. Taut stringline set to grade.
c. Short ski or shoe for joint matching.
d. Laser control.
2.1.4 Rollers
Rollers shall be in good condition and shall be operated at slow speeds to

avoid displacement of the asphalt mixture. The number, type, and weight
of rollers shall be sufficient to compact the mixture to the required
density while it is still in a workable condition. Do not use equipment
which causes excessive crushing of the aggregate.
2.2 AGGREGATES
Provide aggregates consisting of crushed stone, crushed gravel, crushed

slag, screenings, natural sand and mineral filler, as required. Submit
sufficient materials to produce 200 lb of blended mixture for mix design
verification. The portion of material retained on the No. 4 sieve is
coarse aggregate. The portion of material passing the No. 4 sieve and
retained on the No. 200 sieve is fine aggregate. The portion passing the
No. 200 sieve is defined as mineral filler. Submit all aggregate test
results and samples to the Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to
start of construction.
2.2.1 Coarse Aggregate
Provide coarse aggregate consisting of sound, tough, durable particles,

free from films of material that would prevent thorough coating and
bonding with the asphalt material and free from organic matter and other
deleterious substances. All individual coarse aggregate sources shall
meet the following requirements:
a. The percentage of loss shall not be greater than 40 percent after 500
revolutions when tested in accordance with ASTM C131/C131M.
b. The percentage of loss shall not be greater than 18 percent after five
cycles when tested in accordance with ASTM C88 using magnesium sulfate.
c. At least 75 percent by weight of coarse aggregate shall have at least

two or more fractured faces when tested in accordance with
COE CRD-C 171. Fractured faces shall be produced by crushing.
d. The particle shape shall be essentially cubical and the aggregate

shall not contain more than 20 percent percent, by weight, of flat and
elongated particles (3:1 ratio of maximum to minimum) when tested in
e. Slag shall be air-cooled, blast furnace slag, with a compacted weight

of not less than 75 lb/cu ft when tested in accordance with
ASTM C29/C29M.
f. Clay lumps and friable particles shall not exceed 0.3 percent, by
weight, when tested in accordance with ASTM C142/C142M.
2.2.2 Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, sound, tough, durable particles

free from coatings of clay, silt, or any objectionable material and
containing no clay balls.
a. All individual fine aggregate sources shall have a sand equivalent

value not less than 45 when tested in accordance with ASTM D2419.
b. The fine aggregate portion of the blended aggregate shall have an

uncompacted void content not less than 45.0 percent when tested in
accordance with ASTM C1252 Method A.
c. The quantity of natural sand (noncrushed material) added to the

aggregate blend shall not exceed 25 percent by weight of total
aggregate.
d. Clay lumps and friable particles shall not exceed 0.3 percent, by
weight, when tested in accordance with ASTM C142/C142M
2.2.3 Mineral Filler
Mineral filler shall be nonplastic material meeting the requirements of

ASTM D242/D242M.
2.2.4 Aggregate Gradation
The combined aggregate gradation shall conform to gradations specified in

Table 4, when tested in accordance with ASTM C136 and ASTM C117, and shall
not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the high limit on the adjacent
sieve or vice versa, but grade uniformly from coarse to fine.
Table 4. Aggregate Gradations
Sieve Size, inch Gradation 2 Percent Passing Gradation 3 Percent Passing

by Mass (Preferred) by Mass (Alternate)
1 --- ---
3/4 100 ---
1/2 76-96 100
3/8 69-89 76-96
No. 4 53-73 58-78
No. 8 38-60 40-60
No. 16 26-48 28-48
No. 30 18-38 18-38
No. 50 11-27 11-27
No. 100 6-18 6-18
No. 200 3-6 3-6
2.3 ASPHALT CEMENT BINDER
Submit a 5 gallon sample for mix design verification. Asphalt cement

binder shall conform to AASHTO M 320 Performance Grade (PG). Test data
indicating grade certification shall be provided by the supplier at the
time of delivery of each load to the mix plant. Submit copies of these
certifications to the Contracting Officer. The supplier is defined as the
last source of any modification to the binder. The Contracting Officer
may sample and test the binder at the mix plant at any time before or
during mix production. Obtain samples for this verification testing in
accordance with ASTM D140/D140M and in the presence of the Contracting
Officer. Furnish these samples to the Contracting Officer for the
verification testing, which shall be at no cost to the Contractor. Submit
samples of the asphalt cement specified for approval not less than 14 days
before start of the test section. Submit copies of certified test data,
amount, type and description of any modifiers blended into the asphalt
cement binder.
2.4 MIX DESIGN
a. Develop the mix design. The asphalt mix shall be composed of a

mixture of well-graded aggregate, mineral filler if required, and
asphalt material. The aggregate fractions shall be sized, handled in
separate size groups, and combined in such proportions that the
resulting mixture meets the grading requirements of the job mix
formula (JMF). Submit proposed JMF. The hot-mix asphalt shall be
designed in accordance with Marshall (MS-02), Superpave (SP-2), or
Hveem (MS-02) procedures and the criteria shown in Table 5. Use the
hand-held hammer to compact the specimens for Marshall mix design. If
the Tensile Strength Ratio (TSR) of the composite mixture, as
determined by ASTM D4867/D4867M is less than 75, the aggregates shall
be rejected or the asphalt mixture treated with an approved
anti-stripping agent. The amount of anti-stripping agent added shall
be sufficient to produce a TSR of not less than 75. Provide an
antistrip agent, if required, at no additional cost. Sufficient
materials to produce 200 pound of blended mixture shall be provided to
the Contracting Officer for verification of mix design at least 14
days prior to construction of test section.
2.4.1 JMF Requirements
Submit in writing the job mix formula for approval at least 14 days prior
to the start of the test section including as a minimum:
a. Percent passing each sieve size.
b. Percent of asphalt cement.
c. Percent of each aggregate and mineral filler to be used.
d. Asphalt viscosity grade, penetration grade, or performance grade.
e. Number of blows of hand-held hammer per side of molded specimen. (NA

for Superpave)
f. Number of gyrations of Superpave gyratory compactor, (NA for Marshall

mix design)
g. Laboratory mixing temperature.
h. Lab compaction temperature.
i. Temperature-viscosity relationship of the asphalt cement.
j. Plot of the combined gradation on the 0.45 power gradation chart,

stating the nominal maximum size.
k. Graphical plots of stability (NA for Superpave), flow (NA for

Superpave), air voids, voids in the mineral aggregate, and unit weight
versus asphalt content as shown in AI MS-2.
l. Specific gravity and absorption of each aggregate.
m. Percent natural sand.
n. Percent particles with 2 or more fractured faces (in coarse aggregate).
o. Fine aggregate angularity.
p. Percent flat or elongated particles (in coarse aggregate).
q. Tensile Strength Ratio(TSR).
r. Antistrip agent (if required) and amount.
s. List of all modifiers and amount.
t. Correlation of hand-held hammer with mechanical hammer (NA for

Superpave).
u. Percentage and properties (asphalt content, binder properties, and

aggregate properties).
Table 5. Mix Design Criteria
Test Property 50 Blows or Mix 75 Blows or Mix

Gyrations Gyrations
Stability, pounds, minimum (NA for *1000 *1800
Superpave)
Flow, 0.01 inch, (NA for Superpave) 8-18 8-16
Air voids, percent 3-5 3-5
Percent Voids in mineral aggregate

(VMA),(minimum)
Gradation 1 13.0 13.0
TSR, minimum percent 75 75
* This is a minimum requirement. The average during construction shall be

significantly higher than this number to ensure compliance with the specifications.
** Calculate VMA in accordance with AI MS-2, based on ASTM C127 and ASTM C128 bulk
specific gravity for the aggregate.
2.4.2 Adjustments to Field JMF
Keep the Laboratory JMF for each mixture in effect until a new formula is
approved in writing by the Contracting Officer. Should a change in
sources of any materials be made, perform a new laboratory jmf design and
a new JMF approved before the new material is used. The Contractor will
be allowed to adjust the Laboratory JMF within the limits specified below
to optimize mix volumetric properties with the approval of the Contracting
Officer. Adjustments to the Laboratory JMF shall be applied to the field
(plant) established JMF and limited to those values as shown. Adjustments
shall be targeted to produce or nearly produce 4 percent voids total mix
(VTM).
TABLE 6. Field (Plant) Established JMF Tolerances
Sieves Adjustments (plus or minus), percent
1/2 inch 3
No. 4 3
No. 8 3
No. 200 1
Binder Content 0.4
If adjustments are needed that exceed these limits, develop a new mix
design. Tolerances given above may permit the aggregate grading to be
outside the limits shown in Table 4; while not desirable, this is
acceptable, except for the No. 200 sieve, which shall remain within the
aggregate grading of Table 4.
2.5 TACK COAT
Provide a tack coat of AASTO SS-1H asphalt emulsion.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF ASPHALT BINDER MATERIAL
Heat the asphalt cement material avoiding local overheating and providing
a continuous supply of the asphalt material to the mixer at a uniform
temperature. The temperature of unmodified asphalts shall be no more than
325 degrees F when added to the aggregates. Performance-Graded (PG)
asphalts shall be within the temperature range of 260 - 310 degrees F when
added to the aggregate.
3.2 PREPARATION OF MINERAL AGGREGATE
Heat and dry the aggregate for the mixture prior to mixing. No damage
shall occur to the aggregates due to the maximum temperature and rate of
heating used. The temperature of the aggregate and mineral filler shall
not exceed 350 degrees F when the asphalt cement is added. The
temperature shall not be lower than is required to obtain complete coating
and uniform distribution on the aggregate particles and to provide a
mixture of satisfactory workability.
3.3 PREPARATION OF HOT-MIX ASPHALT MIXTURE
The aggregates and the asphalt cement shall be weighed or metered and
introduced into the mixer in the amount specified by the JMF. Mix the
combined materials until the aggregate obtains a uniform coating of
asphalt binder and is thoroughly distributed throughout the mixture. Wet

mixing time shall be the shortest time that will produce a satisfactory
mixture, but no less than 25 seconds for batch plants. Establish the wet
mixing time for all plants based on the procedure for determining the
percentage of coated particles described in ASTM D2489/D2489M, for each
individual plant and for each type of aggregate used. The wet mixing time
will be set to at least achieve 95 percent of coated particles. The
moisture content of all hot-mix asphalt upon discharge from the plant
shall not exceed 0.5 percent by total weight of mixture as measured by
ASTM D1461.
3.4 PREPARATION OF THE UNDERLYING SURFACE
Immediately before placing the hot mix asphalt, clean the underlying
course of dust and debris. Apply a prime coat in accordance with the
contract specifications.
3.5 TESTING LABORATORY
Submit certification of compliance and Plant Scale Calibration

Certification. Use a laboratory to develop the JMF that meets the
requirements of ASTM D3666. The Government will inspect the laboratory
equipment and test procedures prior to the start of hot mix operations for
conformance to ASTM D3666. The laboratory shall maintain the Corps
certification for the duration of the project. A statement signed by the
manager of the laboratory stating that it meets these requirements or
clearly listing all deficiencies shall be submitted to the Contracting
Officer prior to the start of construction. The statement shall contain
as a minimum:
a. Qualifications of personnel; laboratory manager, supervising

technician, and testing technicians.
b. A listing of equipment to be used in developing the job mix.
c. A copy of the laboratory's quality control system.
d. Evidence of participation in the AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory

(AMRL) program.
3.6 TRANSPORTING AND PLACING
3.6.1 Transporting
Transport the hot-mix asphalt from the mixing plant to the site in clean,
tight vehicles. Schedule deliveries so that placing and compacting of
mixture is uniform with minimum stopping and starting of the paver.
Provide adequate artificial lighting for night placements. Hauling over
freshly placed material will not be permitted until the material has been
compacted as specified, and allowed to cool to 140 degrees F. To deliver
mix to the paver, use a material transfer vehicle operated to produce
continuous forward motion of the paver.
3.6.2 Placing
Place and compact the mix at a temperature suitable for obtaining density,
surface smoothness, and other specified requirements. Upon arrival, place
the mixture to the full width by an asphalt paver; it shall be struck off
in a uniform layer of such depth that, when the work is completed, it will
have the required thickness and conform to the grade and contour
indicated. Regulate the speed of the paver to eliminate pulling and
tearing of the asphalt mat. Unless otherwise permitted, placement of the
mixture shall begin along the centerline of a crowned section or on the
high side of areas with a one-way slope. Place the mixture in consecutive
adjacent strips having a minimum width of 10 feet. The longitudinal joint
in one course shall offset the longitudinal joint in the course
immediately below by at least 1 foot; however, the joint in the surface
course shall be at the centerline of the pavement. Transverse joints in
one course shall be offset by at least 10 feet from transverse joints in
the previous course. Transverse joints in adjacent lanes shall be offset
a minimum of 10 feet. On isolated areas where irregularities or
unavoidable obstacles make the use of mechanical spreading and finishing
equipment impractical, the mixture may be spread and luted by hand tools.
3.7 COMPACTION OF MIXTURE
After placing, the mixture shall be thoroughly and uniformly compacted by

rolling. Compact the surface as soon as possible without causing
displacement, cracking or shoving. The sequence of rolling operations and
the type of rollers used shall be at the discretion of the Contractor.
The speed of the roller shall, at all times, be sufficiently slow to avoid
displacement of the hot mixture and be effective in compaction. Any
displacement occurring as a result of reversing the direction of the
roller, or from any other cause, shall be corrected at once. Furnish
sufficient rollers to handle the output of the plant. Continue rolling
until the surface is of uniform texture, true to grade and cross section,
and the required field density is obtained. To prevent adhesion of the
mixture to the roller, keep the wheels properly moistened but excessive
water will not be permitted. In areas not accessible to the roller, the
mixture shall be thoroughly compacted with hand tampers. Any mixture that
becomes loose and broken, mixed with dirt, contains check-cracking, or is
in any way defective shall be removed full depth, replaced with fresh hot
mixture and immediately compacted to conform to the surrounding area.
This work shall be done at the Contractor's expense. Skin patching will
not be allowed.
3.8 JOINTS
The formation of joints shall be performed ensuring a continuous bond

between the courses and to obtain the required density. All joints shall
have the same texture as other sections of the course and meet the
requirements for smoothness and grade.
3.8.1 Transverse Joints
Do not pass the roller over the unprotected end of the freshly laid
mixture, except when necessary to form a transverse joint. When necessary
to form a transverse joint, it shall be made by means of placing a
bulkhead or by tapering the course. The tapered edge shall be cut back to
its full depth and width on a straight line to expose a vertical face
prior to placing material at the joint. Remove the cutback material from
the project. In both methods, all contact surfaces shall be given a light
tack coat of asphalt material before placing any fresh mixture against the
joint.
3.8.2 Longitudinal Joints
Longitudinal joints which are irregular, damaged, uncompacted, cold (less
than 175 degrees F at the time of placing adjacent lanes), or otherwise

defective, shall be cut back a maximum of 3 inches from the top of the
course with a cutting wheel to expose a clean, sound vertical surface for
the full depth of the course. All cutback material shall be removed from
the project. All contact surfaces shall be given a light tack coat of
asphalt material prior to placing any fresh mixture against the joint.
The Contractor will be allowed to use an alternate method if it can be
demonstrated that density, smoothness, and texture can be met.
3.9 QUALITY CONTROL
3.9.1 General Quality Control Requirements
Develop and submit an approved Quality Control Plan. Submit aggregate and
QC test results. Do not produce hot-mix asphalt for payment until the
quality control plan has been approved addressing all elements which
affect the quality of the pavement including, but not limited to:
a. Mix Design
b. Aggregate Grading
c. Quality of Materials
d. Stockpile Management
e. Proportioning
f. Mixing and Transportation
g. Mixture Volumetrics
h. Moisture Content of Mixtures
i. Placing and Finishing
j. Joints
k. Compaction
l. Surface Smoothness
3.9.2 Testing Laboratory
Provide a fully equipped asphalt laboratory located at the plant or job

site and meeting the pertinent requirements in ASTM D3666. Laboratory
facilities shall be kept clean and all equipment maintained in proper
working condition. The Contracting Officer shall be permitted
unrestricted access to inspect the Contractor's laboratory facility, to
witness quality control activities, and to perform any check testing
desired. The Contracting Officer will advise the Contractor in writing of
any noted deficiencies concerning the laboratory facility, equipment,
supplies, or testing personnel and procedures. When the deficiencies are
serious enough to adversely affect test results, the incorporation of the
materials into the work shall be suspended immediately and will not be
permitted to resume until the deficiencies are corrected.
3.9.3 Quality Control Testing
Perform all quality control tests applicable to these specifications and

as set forth in the Quality Control Program. The testing program shall
include, but shall not be limited to, tests for the control of asphalt
content, aggregate gradation, temperatures, aggregate moisture, moisture
in the asphalt mixture, laboratory air voids, stability (NA for
Superpave), flow (NA for Superpave), in-place density, grade and
smoothness. Develop a Quality Control Testing Plan as part of the Quality
Control Program.
3.9.3.1 Asphalt Content
A minimum of two tests to determine asphalt content will be performed per

lot (a lot is defined in paragraph MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE and PERCENT
PAYMENT) by one of the following methods: the extraction method in
accordance with ASTM D2172/D2172M, Method A or B, the ignition method in
accordance with ASTM D6307, or the nuclear method in accordance with
ASTM D4125/D4125M. Calibrate the ignition oven or the nuclear gauge for
the specific mix being used. For the extraction method, determine the
weight of ash, as described in ASTM D2172/D2172M, as part of the first
extraction test performed at the beginning of plant production; and as
part of every tenth extraction test performed thereafter, for the duration
of plant production. The last weight of ash value obtained shall be used
in the calculation of the asphalt content for the mixture.
3.9.3.2 Gradation
Determine aggregate gradations a minimum of twice per lot from mechanical

analysis of recovered aggregate in accordance with ASTM D5444. When
asphalt content is determined by the ignition oven or nuclear method,
aggregate gradation shall be determined from hot bin samples on batch
plants, or from the cold feed on drum mix plants. For batch plants, test
aggregates in accordance with ASTM C136 using actual batch weights to
determine the combined aggregate gradation of the mixture.
3.9.3.3 Temperatures
Check temperatures at least four times per lot, at necessary locations, to

determine the temperature at the dryer, the asphalt cement in the storage
tank, the asphalt mixture at the plant, and the asphalt mixture at the job
site.
3.9.3.4 Aggregate Moisture
Determine the moisture content of aggregate used for production a minimum

of once per lot in accordance with ASTM C566.
3.9.3.5 Moisture Content of Mixture
Determine the moisture content of the mixture at least once per lot in
accordance with ASTM D1461 or an approved alternate procedure.
3.9.3.6 Laboratory Air Voids, Marshall Stability and Flow
Take mixture samples at least four times per lot compacted into specimens,
using 50 blows per side with the hand-held Marshall hammer as described in
ASTM D6926. When the Superpave gyratory compactor is used, mixes will be
compacted to 50 gyrations in accordance with ASTM D6925. Hot-mix provided
under the DOT Superpave option shall be compacted in accordance with the
DOT requirements. After compaction, determine the laboratory air voids of
each specimen. Stability and flow shall be determined for the
Marshall-compacted specimens, in accordance with ASTM D6927.
3.9.3.7 In-Place Density
Conduct any necessary testing to ensure the specified density is

achieved. A nuclear gauge may be used to monitor pavement density in
accordance with ASTM D2950/D2950M.
3.9.3.8 Grade and Smoothness
Conduct the necessary checks to ensure the grade and smoothness

requirements are met in accordance with paragraphs MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE and
PERCENT PAYMENT.
3.9.3.9 Additional Testing
Any additional testing, which the Contractor deems necessary to control

the process, may be performed at the Contractor's option.
3.9.3.10 QC Monitoring
Submit all QC test results to the Contracting Officer on a daily basis as

the tests are performed. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to
monitor any of the Contractor's quality control testing and to perform
duplicate testing as a check to the Contractor's quality control testing.
3.9.4 Sampling
When directed by the Contracting Officer, sample and test any material
which appears inconsistent with similar material being produced, unless
such material is voluntarily removed and replaced or deficiencies
corrected by the Contractor. All sampling shall be in accordance with
standard procedures specified.
3.9.5 Control Charts
For process control, establish and maintain linear control charts on both
individual samples and the running average of last four samples for the
parameters listed in Table 8, as a minimum. These control charts shall be
posted as directed by the Contracting Officer and kept current at all
times. The control charts shall identify the project number, the test
parameter being plotted, the individual sample numbers, the Action and
Suspension Limits listed in Table 8 applicable to the test parameter being
plotted, and the Contractor's test results. Target values from the JMF
shall also be shown on the control charts as indicators of central
tendency for the cumulative percent passing, asphalt content, and
laboratory air voids parameters. When the test results exceed either
applicable Action Limit, take immediate steps to bring the process back in
control. When the test results exceed either applicable Suspension Limit,
halt production until the problem is solved. Use the control charts as
part of the process control system for identifying trends so that
potential problems can be corrected before they occur. Make decisions
concerning mix modifications based on analysis of the results provided in
the control charts. The Quality Control Plan shall indicate the
appropriate action to be taken to bring the process into control when
certain parameters exceed their Action Limits.
Table 8. Action and Suspension Limits for the Parameters to be Plotted on

Individual and Running Average Control Charts
Individual Samples Running Average of
Last Four Samples
Parameter to be Plotted Action Suspension Action Suspension
Limit Limit Limit Limit
No. 4 sieve, Cumulative percent 6 8 4 5
passing, deviation for JMF target;
plus or minus values
No. 30 sieve, Cumulative percent 4 6 3 4
No. 200 sieve, Cumulative percent 1.4 2.0 1.1 1.5
Stability, pounds (minimum) (NA for Superpave)
75 Blow JMF 1800 1700 1900 1800
50 Blow JMF 1000 900 1100 1000
Flow, 0.01 inch (NA for Superpave)
75 Blow JMF 8 min. 7 min. 9 min. 8 min.
16 max. 17 max. 15 max. 16 max.
50 Blow JMF 8 min. 7 min. 9 min. 8 min.
18 max. 19 max. 17 max. 18 max.
Asphalt content, percent deviation 0.4 0.5 0.2 0.3

from JMF target; plus or minus value
Laboratory Air Voids, percent No specific action and suspension limits set
deviation from JMF target value since this parameter is used to determine
percent payment
In-place Mat Density, percent of TMD No specific action and suspension limits set
since this parameter is used to determine
percent payment
In-place Joint Density, percent of TMD No specific action and suspension limits set
since this parameter is used to determine
percent payment
3.10 MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE
Testing for acceptability of work will be performed by an independent

laboratory hired by the Contractor. Forward test results and payment
calculations daily to the Contracting Officer. Acceptance of the plant
produced mix and in-place requirements will be on a lot to lot basis. A
standard lot for all requirements will be equal to 8 hours of production.
Where appropriate, adjustment in payment for individual lots of hot-mix
asphalt will be made based on in-place density, laboratory air voids,
grade and smoothness in accordance with the following paragraphs. Grade

and surface smoothness determinations will be made on the lot as a whole.
Exceptions or adjustments to this will be made in situations where the mix
within one lot is placed as part of both the intermediate and surface
courses, thus grade and smoothness measurements for the entire lot cannot
be made. In order to evaluate laboratory air voids and in-place (field)
density, each lot will be divided into four equal sublots.
3.10.1 Sublot Sampling
One random mixture sample for determining laboratory air voids,

theoretical maximum density, and for any additional testing the
Contracting Officer desires, will be taken from a loaded truck delivering
mixture to each sublot, or other appropriate location for each sublot.
All samples will be selected randomly, using commonly recognized methods
of assuring randomness conforming to ASTM D3665 and employing tables of
random numbers or computer programs. Laboratory air voids will be
determined from three laboratory compacted specimens of each sublot sample
in accordance with ASTM D6926. The specimens will be compacted within 2
hours of the time the mixture was loaded into trucks at the asphalt
plant. Samples will not be reheated prior to compaction and insulated
containers will be used as necessary to maintain the temperature.
3.10.2 Additional Sampling and Testing
The Contracting Officer reserves the right to direct additional samples

and tests for any area which appears to deviate from the specification
requirements. The cost of any additional testing will be paid for by the
Government. Testing in these areas will be in addition to the lot
testing, and the requirements for these areas will be the same as those
for a lot.
3.10.3 Grade
The final wearing surface of pavement shall conform to the elevations and
cross sections shown and shall vary not more than 0.05 foot from the plan
grade established and approved at site of work. Finished surfaces at
juncture with other pavements shall coincide with finished surfaces of
abutting pavements. Deviation from the plan elevation will not be
permitted in areas of pavements where closer conformance with planned
elevation is required for the proper functioning of drainage and other
appurtenant structures involved. The grade will be determined by running
lines of levels at intervals of 25 feet, or less, longitudinally and
transversely, to determine the elevation of the completed pavement
surface. Within 5 working days, after the completion of a particular lot
incorporating the final wearing surface, test the final wearing surface of
the pavement for conformance with the specified plan grade. Diamond
grinding may be used to remove high spots to meet grade requirements.
Skin patching for correcting low areas or planing or milling for
correcting high areas will not be permitted.
3.10.4 Surface Smoothness
Use one of the following methods to test and evaluate surface smoothness
of the pavement. Perform all testing in the presence of the Contracting
Officer. Keep detailed notes of the results of the testing and furnish a
copy to the Government immediately after each day's testing. Where
drawings show required deviations from a plane surface (crowns, drainage
inlets, etc.), the surface shall be finished to meet the approval of the
3.10.4.1 Smoothness Requirements
3.10.4.1.1 Straightedge Testing
The finished surfaces of the pavements shall have no abrupt change of 1/4
inch or more, and all pavements shall be within the tolerances of 1/4 inch
in both the longitudinal and transverse directions, when tested with an
approved 12 feet straightedge.
3.10.4.1.2 Profilograph Testing
The finished surfaces of the pavements shall have no abrupt change of 1/8
inch or more, and each 0.1 mile segment of each pavement lot shall have a
Profile Index not greater than 9 inches/mile when tested with an approved
California-type profilograph. If the extent of the pavement in either
direction is less than 200 feet, that direction shall be tested by the
straightedge method and shall meet requirements specified above.
3.10.4.2 Testing Method
After the final rolling, but not later than 24 hours after placement, test
the surface of the pavement in each entire lot in such a manner as to
reveal all surface irregularities exceeding the tolerances specified
above. Separate testing of individual sublots is not required. If any
pavement areas are ground, these areas shall be retested immediately after
grinding. Test each lot of the pavement in both a longitudinal and a
transverse direction on parallel lines. Set the transverse lines 15 feet
or less apart, as directed. The longitudinal lines shall be at the
centerline of each paving lane for lanes less than 20 feet wide and at the
third points for lanes 20 feet or wider. Also test other areas having
obvious deviations. Longitudinal testing lines shall be continuous across
all joints.
3.10.4.2.1 Straightedge Testing
Hold the straightedge in contact with the surface and move it ahead
one-half the length of the straightedge for each successive measurement.
Determine the amount of surface irregularity by placing the freestanding
(unleveled) straightedge on the pavement surface and allowing it to rest
upon the two highest spots covered by its length, and measuring the
maximum gap between the straightedge and the pavement surface in the area
between these two high points.
3.10.4.2.2 Profilograph Testing
Perform profilograph testing using approved equipment and procedures

described in CTM 526. The equipment shall utilize electronic recording
and automatic computerized reduction of data to indicate "must-grind"
bumps and the Profile Index for each 0.1 mile segment of each pavement
lot. Grade breaks on parking lots shall be accommodated by breaking the
profile segment into shorter sections and repositioning the blanking band
on each segment. The "blanking band" shall be 0.2 inches wide and the
"bump template" shall span 1 inch with an offset of 0.3 inch. Compute the
Profile Index for each pass of the profilograph in each 0.1 mile segment.
The Profile Index for each segment shall be the average of the Profile
Indices for each pass in each segment. The profilograph shall be operated
by a DOT approved operator. Furnish a copy of the reduced tapes to the
Government at the end of each day's testing.
SECTION 32 16 13
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS

04/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


(AASHTO)
AASHTO M 182 (2005; R 2009) Standard Specification for

Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and
Cotton Mats

Concrete

Reinforcement

ASTM C171 (2007) Standard Specification for Sheet

Materials for Curing Concrete
ASTM C172/C172M (2014a) Standard Practice for Sampling


Volumetric Method

Pressure Method
ASTM C309 (2011) Standard Specification for Liquid

Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete




PVC Expansion
ASTM D5893/D5893M (2010) Cold Applied, Single Component,

Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant
for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements

Facilities
Provide plant, equipment, machines, and tools used in the work subject to
approval and maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all times.
The equipment shall have the capability of producing the required product,
meeting grade controls, thickness control and smoothness requirements as
specified. Use of the equipment shall be discontinued if it produces
unsatisfactory results. The Contracting Officer shall have access at all
times to the plant and equipment to ensure proper operation and compliance
with specifications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Concrete
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Quality Control
1.4.1 Placing During Cold Weather
Do not place concrete when the air temperature reaches 40 degrees F and is
falling, or is already below that point. Placement may begin when the air
temperature reaches 35 degrees F and is rising, or is already above 40
degrees F. Make provisions to protect the concrete from freezing during
the specified curing period. If necessary to place concrete when the
temperature of the air, aggregates, or water is below 35 degrees F,
placement and protection shall be approved in writing. Approval will be
contingent upon full conformance with the following provisions. The

underlying material shall be prepared and protected so that it is entirely
free of frost when the concrete is deposited. Mixing water and aggregates
shall be heated as necessary to result in the temperature of the in-place
concrete being between 50 and 85 degrees F. Methods and equipment for
heating shall be approved. The aggregates shall be free of ice, snow, and
frozen lumps before entering the mixer. Covering and other means shall be
provided for maintaining the concrete at a temperature of at least 50
degrees F for not less than 72 hours after placing, and at a temperature
above freezing for the remainder of the curing period.
1.4.2 Placing During Warm Weather
The temperature of the concrete as placed shall not exceed 85 degrees F

except where an approved retarder is used. The mixing water and/or
aggregates shall be cooled, if necessary, to maintain a satisfactory
placing temperature. The placing temperature shall not exceed 95 degrees F
at any time.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE
Provide concrete conforming to the applicable requirements except as

otherwise specified. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of
3500 psi at 28 days. Maximum size of aggregate shall be 1-1/2 inches.
Submit copies of certified delivery tickets for all concrete used in the
construction.
2.1.1 Air Content
Mixtures shall have air content by volume of concrete of 5 to 7 percent,

based on measurements made immediately after discharge from the mixer.
2.1.2 Slump
The concrete slump shall be 3 inches plus or minus 1 inch where determined
in accordance with ASTM C143/C143M.
2.1.3 Reinforcement Steel
Reinforcement bars shall conform to ASTM A615/A615M. Wire mesh

reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A1064/A1064M.
2.2 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS
2.2.1 Impervious Sheet Materials
Impervious sheet materials shall conform to ASTM C171, type optional,

except that polyethylene film, if used, shall be white opaque.
2.2.2 Burlap
Burlap shall conform to AASHTO M 182.
2.2.3 White Pigmented Membrane-Forming Curing Compound
White pigmented membrane-forming curing compound shall conform to ASTM C309,

Type 2.
2.3 CONCRETE PROTECTION MATERIALS
Concrete protection materials shall be a linseed oil mixture of equal

parts, by volume, of linseed oil and either mineral spirits, naphtha, or
turpentine. At the option of the Contractor, commercially prepared
linseed oil mixtures, formulated specifically for application to concrete
to provide protection against the action of deicing chemicals may be used,
except that emulsified mixtures are not acceptable.
2.4 JOINT FILLER STRIPS
2.4.1 Expansion Joint Filler, Premolded
Expansion joint filler, premolded, shall conform to ASTM D1751 or

ASTM D1752, 1/2 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 JOINT SEALANTS
Joint sealant, cold-applied shall conform to ASTM C920 or ASTM D5893/D5893M

and be compatible with selected expansion joint filler material.
2.6 FORM WORK
Design and construct form work to ensure that the finished concrete will
conform accurately to the indicated dimensions, lines, and elevations, and
within the tolerances specified. Forms shall be of wood or steel,
straight, of sufficient strength to resist springing during depositing and
consolidating concrete. Wood forms shall be surfaced plank, 2 inches
nominal thickness, straight and free from warp, twist, loose knots, splits
or other defects. Wood forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet.
Radius bends may be formed with 3/4 inch boards, laminated to the required
thickness. Steel forms shall be channel-formed sections with a flat top
surface and with welded braces at each end and at not less than two
intermediate points. Ends of steel forms shall be interlocking and
self-aligning. Steel forms shall include flexible forms for radius
forming, corner forms, form spreaders, and fillers. Steel forms shall
have a nominal length of 10 feet with a minimum of 3 welded stake pockets
per form. Stake pins shall be solid steel rods with chamfered heads and
pointed tips designed for use with steel forms.
2.6.1 Sidewalk Forms
Sidewalk forms shall be of a height equal to the full depth of the

finished sidewalk.
2.6.2 Curb and Gutter Forms
Curb and gutter outside forms shall have a height equal to the full depth
of the curb or gutter. The inside form of curb shall have batter as
indicated and shall be securely fastened to and supported by the outside
form. Rigid forms shall be provided for curb returns, except that benders
or thin plank forms may be used for curb or curb returns with a radius of
10 feet or more, where grade changes occur in the return, or where the
central angle is such that a rigid form with a central angle of 90 degrees
cannot be used. Back forms for curb returns may be made of 1-1/2 inch
benders, for the full height of the curb, cleated together. In lieu of
inside forms for curbs, a curb "mule" may be used for forming and
finishing this surface, provided the results are approved.
2.7 Detectable Warning System
Detectable Warning Systems shown on the contract plans are to meet

requirements of ICC A117.1 - Section 705.
PART 3 EXECUTION
The subgrade shall be constructed to the specified grade and cross section
prior to concrete placement. Subgrade shall be placed and compacted as
directed in project-specific soils-report and/or project drawings.
3.1.1 Sidewalk Subgrade
The subgrade shall be tested for grade and cross section with a template
extending the full width of the sidewalk and supported between side forms.
3.1.2 Curb and Gutter Subgrade
The subgrade shall be tested for grade and cross section by means of a
template extending the full width of the curb and gutter. The subgrade
shall be of materials equal in bearing quality to the subgrade under the
adjacent pavement.
3.1.3 Maintenance of Subgrade
The subgrade shall be maintained in a smooth, compacted condition in

conformity with the required section and established grade until the
concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be in a moist condition when
concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be prepared and protected to
produce a subgrade free from frost when the concrete is deposited.
3.2 FORM SETTING
Set forms to the indicated alignment, grade and dimensions. Hold forms
rigidly in place by a minimum of 3 stakes per form placed at intervals not
to exceed 4 feet. Corners, deep sections, and radius bends shall have
additional stakes and braces, as required. Clamps, spreaders, and braces
shall be used where required to ensure rigidity in the forms. Forms shall
be removed without injuring the concrete. Bars or heavy tools shall not
be used against the concrete in removing the forms. Any concrete found
defective after form removal shall be promptly and satisfactorily
repaired. Forms shall be cleaned and coated with form oil each time
before concrete is placed. Wood forms may, instead, be thoroughly wetted
with water before concrete is placed, except that with probable freezing
temperatures, oiling is mandatory.
3.2.1 Sidewalks
Set forms for sidewalks with the upper edge true to line and grade with an
allowable tolerance of 1/8 inch in any 10 foot long section. After forms
are set, grade and alignment shall be checked with a 10 foot
straightedge. Forms shall have a transverse slope as indicated with the
low side adjacent to the roadway. Side forms shall not be removed for 12
hours after finishing has been completed.
3.2.2 Curbs and Gutters
The forms of the front of the curb shall be removed not less than 2 hours
nor more than 6 hours after the concrete has been placed. Forms back of
curb shall remain in place until the face and top of the curb have been
finished, as specified for concrete finishing. Gutter forms shall not be
removed while the concrete is sufficiently plastic to slump in any
direction.
3.3 SIDEWALK CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING
3.3.1 Formed Sidewalks
Place concrete in the forms in one layer. When consolidated and finished,
the sidewalks shall be of the thickness indicated. After concrete has
been placed in the forms, a strike-off guided by side forms shall be used
to bring the surface to proper section to be compacted. The concrete
shall be consolidated by tamping and spading or with an approved vibrator,
and the surface shall be finished to grade with a strike off.
3.3.2 Concrete Finishing
After straightedging, when most of the water sheen has disappeared, and
just before the concrete hardens, finish the surface with a wood or
magnesium float or darby to a smooth and uniformly fine granular or sandy
texture free of waves, irregularities, or tool marks. A scored surface
shall be produced by brooming with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction
transverse to that of the traffic, followed by edging.
3.3.3 Edge and Joint Finishing
All slab edges, including those at formed joints, shall be finished with
an edger having a radius of 1/8 inch. Transverse joint shall be edged
before brooming, and the brooming shall eliminate the flat surface left by
the surface face of the edger. Corners and edges which have crumbled and
areas which lack sufficient mortar for proper finishing shall be cleaned
and filled solidly with a properly proportioned mortar mixture and then
finished.
3.3.4 Surface and Thickness Tolerances
Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 5/16 inch from the testing edge
of a 10-foot straightedge. Permissible deficiency in section thickness
will be up to 1/4 inch.
3.4 CURB AND GUTTER CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING
3.4.1 Formed Curb and Gutter
Concrete shall be placed to the section required in a single lift.

Consolidation shall be achieved by using approved mechanical vibrators.
Curve shaped gutters shall be finished with a standard curb "mule".
3.4.2 Curb and Gutter Finishing
Approved slipformed curb and gutter machines may be used in lieu of hand
placement.
3.4.3 Concrete Finishing
Exposed surfaces shall be floated and finished with a smooth wood float
until true to grade and section and uniform in texture. Floated surfaces
shall then be brushed with a fine-hair brush with longitudinal strokes.
The edges of the gutter and top of the curb shall be rounded with an
edging tool to a radius of 1/2 inch. Immediately after removing the front
curb form, the face of the curb shall be rubbed with a wood or concrete
rubbing block and water until blemishes, form marks, and tool marks have
been removed. The front curb surface, while still wet, shall be brushed
in the same manner as the gutter and curb top. The top surface of gutter
and entrance shall be finished to grade with a wood float.
3.4.4 Joint Finishing
Curb edges at formed joints shall be finished as indicated.
3.4.5 Surface and Thickness Tolerances
Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4 inch from the testing edge
of a 10-foot straightedge. Permissible deficiency in section thickness
will be up to 1/4 inch.
3.5 SIDEWALK JOINTS
Sidewalk joints shall be constructed to divide the surface into

rectangular areas. Transverse contraction joints shall be spaced at a
distance equal to the sidewalk width or 5 feet on centers, whichever is
less, and shall be continuous across the slab. Longitudinal contraction
joints shall be constructed along the centerline of all sidewalks 10 feet
or more in width. Transverse expansion joints shall be installed at
sidewalk returns and opposite expansion joints in adjoining curbs. Where
the sidewalk is not in contact with the curb, transverse expansion joints
shall be installed as indicated. Expansion joints shall be formed about
structures and features which project through or into the sidewalk
pavement, using joint filler of the type, thickness, and width indicated.
Expansion joints are not required between sidewalks and curb that abut the
sidewalk longitudinally.
3.5.1 Sidewalk Contraction Joints
The contraction joints shall be formed in the fresh concrete by cutting a

groove in the top portion of the slab to a depth of at least one-fourth of
the sidewalk slab thickness, using a jointer to cut the groove, or by
sawing a groove in the hardened concrete with a power-driven saw, unless
otherwise approved. Sawed joints shall be constructed by sawing a groove
in the concrete with a 1/8 inch blade to the depth indicated. An ample
supply of saw blades shall be available on the job before concrete
placement is started, and at least one standby sawing unit in good working
order shall be available at the jobsite at all times during the sawing
operations.
3.5.2 Sidewalk Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be formed with 1/2 inch joint filler strips. Joint
filler in expansion joints surrounding structures and features within the
sidewalk may consist of preformed filler material conforming to ASTM D1752
or building paper. Joint filler shall be held in place with steel pins or
other devices to prevent warping of the filler during floating and
finishing. Immediately after finishing operations are completed, joint

edges shall be rounded with an edging tool having a radius of 1/8 inch,
and concrete over the joint filler shall be removed. At the end of the
curing period, expansion joints shall be cleaned and filled with
cold-applied joint sealant. Joint sealant shall be gray or stone in
color. The joint opening shall be thoroughly cleaned before the sealing
material is placed. Sealing material shall not be spilled on exposed
surfaces of the concrete. Concrete at the joint shall be surface dry and
atmospheric and concrete temperatures shall be above 50 degrees F at the
time of application of joint sealing material. Excess material on exposed
surfaces of the concrete shall be removed immediately and concrete
surfaces cleaned.
3.5.3 Reinforcement Steel Placement
Reinforcement steel shall be accurately and securely fastened in place

with suitable supports and ties before the concrete is placed.
3.6 CURB AND GUTTER JOINTS
Curb and gutter joints shall be constructed at right angles to the line of
curb and gutter.
3.6.1 Contraction Joints
Contraction joints shall be constructed directly opposite contraction

joints in abutting portland cement concrete pavements and spaced so that
monolithic sections between curb returns will not be less than 5 feet nor
greater than 15 feet in length.
a. Contraction joints (except for slip forming) shall be constructed by

means of 1/8 inch thick separators and of a section conforming to the
cross section of the curb and gutter. Separators shall be removed as
soon as practicable after concrete has set sufficiently to preserve
the width and shape of the joint and prior to finishing.
b. When slip forming is used, the contraction joints shall be cut in the
top portion of the gutter/curb hardened concrete in a continuous cut
across the curb and gutter, using a power-driven saw. The depth of
cut shall be at least one-fourth of the gutter/curb depth and 1/8 inch
in width.
3.6.2 Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be formed by means of preformed expansion joint

filler material cut and shaped to the cross section of curb and gutter.
Expansion joints shall be provided in curb and gutter directly opposite
expansion joints of abutting portland cement concrete pavement, and shall
be of the same type and thickness as joints in the pavement. Where curb
and gutter do not abut portland cement concrete pavement, expansion joints
at least 1/2 inch in width shall be provided at intervals not less than 30
feet nor greater than 120 feet. Expansion joints shall be provided in
nonreinforced concrete gutter at locations indicated. Expansion joints
shall be sealed immediately following curing of the concrete or as soon
thereafter as weather conditions permit. Expansion joints and the top 1
inch depth of curb and gutter contraction-joints shall be sealed with
joint sealant. The joint opening shall be thoroughly cleaned before the
sealing material is placed. Sealing material shall not be spilled on
exposed surfaces of the concrete. Concrete at the joint shall be surface
dry and atmospheric and concrete temperatures shall be above 50 degrees F

at the time of application of joint sealing material. Excess material on
exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be removed immediately and concrete
surfaces cleaned.
3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION
Protect concrete against loss of moisture and rapid temperature changes

for at least 7 days from the beginning of the curing operation. Protect
unhardened concrete from rain and flowing water. All equipment needed for
adequate curing and protection of the concrete shall be on hand and ready
for use before actual concrete placement begins. Protection shall be
provided as necessary to prevent cracking of the pavement due to
temperature changes during the curing period.
3.7.1.1 Mat Method
The entire exposed surface shall be covered with 2 or more layers of

burlap. Mats shall overlap each other at least 6 inches. The mat shall
be thoroughly wetted with water prior to placing on concrete surface and
shall be kept continuously in a saturated condition and in intimate
contact with concrete for not less than 7 days.
3.7.1.2 Impervious Sheeting Method
The entire exposed surface shall be wetted with a fine spray of water and
then covered with impervious sheeting material. Sheets shall be laid
directly on the concrete surface with the light-colored side up and
overlapped 12 inches when a continuous sheet is not used. The curing
medium shall not be less than 18-inches wider than the concrete surface to
be cured, and shall be securely weighted down by heavy wood planks, or a
bank of moist earth placed along edges and laps in the sheets. Sheets
shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced if torn or otherwise damaged
during curing. The curing medium shall remain on the concrete surface to
be cured for not less than 7 days.
3.7.1.3 Membrane Curing Method
A uniform coating of white-pigmented membrane-curing compound shall be

applied to the entire exposed surface of the concrete as soon after
finishing as the free water has disappeared from the finished surface.
Formed surfaces shall be coated immediately after the forms are removed
and in no case longer than 1 hour after the removal of forms. Concrete
shall not be allowed to dry before the application of the membrane. If
any drying has occurred, the surface of the concrete shall be moistened
with a fine spray of water and the curing compound applied as soon as the
free water disappears. Curing compound shall be applied in two coats by
hand-operated pressure sprayers at a coverage of approximately 200 square
feet/gallon for the total of both coats. The second coat shall be applied
in a direction approximately at right angles to the direction of
application of the first coat. The compound shall form a uniform,
continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and shall be
free from pinholes or other imperfections. If pinholes, abrasion, or
other discontinuities exist, an additional coat shall be applied to the
affected areas within 30 minutes. Concrete surfaces that are subjected to
heavy rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied
shall be resprayed by the method and at the coverage specified above.
Areas where the curing compound is damaged by subsequent construction

operations within the curing period shall be resprayed. Necessary
precautions shall be taken to insure that the concrete is properly cured
at sawed joints, and that no curing compound enters the joints. The top
of the joint opening and the joint groove at exposed edges shall be
tightly sealed before the concrete in the region of the joint is resprayed
with curing compound. The method used for sealing the joint groove shall
prevent loss of moisture from the joint during the entire specified curing
period. Approved standby facilities for curing concrete pavement shall be
provided at a location accessible to the jobsite for use in the event of
mechanical failure of the spraying equipment or other conditions that
might prevent correct application of the membrane-curing compound at the
proper time. Concrete surfaces to which membrane-curing compounds have
been applied shall be adequately protected during the entire curing period
from pedestrian and vehicular traffic, except as required for joint-sawing
operations and surface tests, and from any other possible damage to the
continuity of the membrane.
3.7.2 Backfilling
After curing, debris shall be removed and the area adjoining the concrete
shall be backfilled, graded, and compacted to conform to the surrounding
area in accordance with lines and grades indicated.
3.7.3 Protection
Completed concrete shall be protected from damage until accepted. Repair

damaged concrete and clean concrete discolored during construction.
Concrete that is damaged shall be removed and reconstructed for the entire
length between regularly scheduled joints. Refinishing the damaged
portion will not be acceptable. Removed damaged portions shall be
disposed of as directed.
3.7.4 Protective Coating
Protective coating, of linseed oil mixture, shall be applied to the

exposed-to-view concrete surface after the curing period, if concrete will
be exposed to de-icing chemicals within 6 weeks after placement. Concrete
to receive a protective coating shall be moist cured.
3.7.4.1 Application
Curing and backfilling operation shall be completed prior to applying two

coats of protective coating. Concrete shall be surface dry and clean
before each application. Coverage shall be by spray application at not
more than 50 square yards/gallon for first application and not more than
70 square yards/gallon for second application, except that the number of
applications and coverage for each application for commercially prepared
mixture shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Coated surfaces shall be protected from vehicular and pedestrian traffic
until dry.
3.7.4.2 Precautions
Protective coating shall not be heated by direct application of flame or

electrical heaters and shall be protected from exposure to open flame,
sparks, and fire adjacent to open containers or applicators. Material
shall not be applied at ambient or material temperatures lower than 50
degrees F.
Submit copies of all test reports within 24 hours of completion of the

test.
Perform the inspection and tests described and meet the specified
requirements for inspection details and frequency of testing. Based upon
the results of these inspections and tests, take the action and submit
reports as required below, and any additional tests to insure that the
requirements of these specifications are met.
3.8.2 Concrete Testing
3.8.2.1 Strength Testing
Provide molded concrete specimens for strength tests. Samples of concrete

placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day nor less than once
for every 250 cubic yards of concrete. The samples for strength tests
shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C172/C172M. Cylinders for
acceptance shall be molded in conformance with ASTM C31/C31M by an
approved testing laboratory. Each strength test result shall be the
average of 2 test cylinders from the same concrete sample tested at 28
days, unless otherwise specified or approved. Concrete specified on the
basis of compressive strength will be considered satisfactory if the
averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or
exceed the specified strength, and no individual strength test result
falls below the specified strength by more than 500 psi.
3.8.2.2 Air Content
Determine air content in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M or ASTM C231/C231M.

ASTM C231/C231M shall be used with concretes and mortars made with
relatively dense natural aggregates. Two tests for air content shall be
made on randomly selected batches of each class of concrete placed during
each shift. Additional tests shall be made when excessive variation in
concrete workability is reported by the placing foreman or the Government
inspector. If results are out of tolerance, the placing foreman shall be
notified and he shall take appropriate action to have the air content
corrected at the plant. Additional tests for air content will be
performed on each truckload of material until such time as the air content
is within the tolerance specified.
3.8.2.3 Slump Test
Two slump tests shall be made on randomly selected batches of each class
of concrete for every 250 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, of concrete
placed during each shift. Additional tests shall be performed when
excessive variation in the workability of the concrete is noted or when
excessive crumbling or slumping is noted along the edges of slip-formed
concrete.
3.8.3 Thickness Evaluation
The anticipated thickness of the concrete shall be determined prior to

placement by passing a template through the formed section or by measuring
the depth of opening of the extrusion template of the curb forming
machine. If a slip form paver is used for sidewalk placement, the

subgrade shall be true to grade prior to concrete placement and the
thickness will be determined by measuring each edge of the completed slab.
3.8.4 Surface Evaluation
The finished surface of each category of the completed work shall be

uniform in color and free of blemishes and form or tool marks.
3.9 SURFACE DEFICIENCIES AND CORRECTIONS
3.9.1 Thickness Deficiency
When measurements indicate that the completed concrete section is

deficient in thickness by more than 1/4 inch the deficient section will be
removed, between regularly scheduled joints, and replaced.
3.9.2 High Areas
In areas not meeting surface smoothness and plan grade requirements, high
areas shall be reduced either by rubbing the freshly finished concrete
with carborundum brick and water when the concrete is less than 36 hours
old or by grinding the hardened concrete with an approved surface grinding
machine after the concrete is 36 hours old or more. The area corrected by
grinding the surface of the hardened concrete shall not exceed 5 percent
of the area of any integral slab, and the depth of grinding shall not
exceed 1/4 inch. Pavement areas requiring grade or surface smoothness
corrections in excess of the limits specified above shall be removed and
replaced.
3.9.3 Appearance
Exposed surfaces of the finished work will be inspected by the Government

and any deficiencies in appearance will be identified. Areas which
exhibit excessive cracking, discoloration, form marks, or tool marks or
which are otherwise inconsistent with the overall appearances of the work
shall be removed and replaced.
3.10 Detectable Warning System
Install Detectable Warning Systems required by contract plans per

ICC A117.1, Section 705, and by manufacturers' installation instructions.
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
04/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

FS TT-P-1952 (Rev E) Paint, Traffic and Airfield

Markings, Waterborne
1.2 SUBMITTALS

submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only or as
otherwise designated. When used, a designation following the "G"
designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the
Government.
SD-03 Product Data
Paints for roads and streets
Equipment; G
Lists of proposed equipment, including descriptive data, and

notifications of proposed Contractor actions as specified in this
section. List of removal equipment shall include descriptive data
indicating area of coverage per pass, pressure adjustment range,
tank and flow capacities, and safety precautions required for the
equipment operation.
SD-06 Test Reports
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications
Volatile Organic Compound, (VOC)
Certificate stating that the proposed pavement marking paint

meets the VOC regulations of the local Air Pollution Control
District having jurisdiction over the geographical area in which
the project is located.
Construction equipment list
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 1

Deliver paints, paint materials and thermoplastic compound materials in

original sealed containers that plainly show the designated name,
specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture,
manufacturer's directions, and name of manufacturer. Provide storage
facilities at the job site, only in areas approved by the Contracting
Officer or authorized representative, for maintaining materials at
temperatures recommended by the manufacturer.
1.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
Apply paint to clean, dry surfaces, and unless otherwise approved, only
when the air and pavement surface temperature is at least 5 degrees above
the dew point and the air and pavement temperatures are above 40 degrees F
and less than 95 degrees F for oil-based materials; above 50 degrees F and
less than 110 degrees F for water-based materials. Maintain paint
temperature within these same limits.
1.5 EQUIPMENT
Machines, tools, and equipment used in the performance of the work shall
be approved by the Contracting Officer and maintained in satisfactory
operating condition. Submit construction equipment list for approval by
1.5.1 Mobile and Maneuverable
Application equipment shall be mobile and maneuverable to the extent that

straight lines can be followed and normal curves can be made in a true
arc.
1.5.2 Paint Application Equipment
1.5.2.1 Hand-Operated, Push-Type Machines
Provide hand-operated push-type applicator machine of a type commonly used

for application of paint to pavement surfaces. Paint applicator machine
shall be acceptable for marking small street and parking areas.
Applicator machine shall be equipped with the necessary paint tanks and
spraying nozzles, and shall be capable of applying paint uniformly at
coverage specified. Applicator for water-based markings shall be equipped
with non-stick coated hoses; metal parts in contact with the paint
material shall be constructed of grade 302, 304, 316, or equal stainless
steel.
1.5.2.2 Self-Propelled or Mobile-Drawn Pneumatic Spraying Machines
Provide self-propelled or mobile-drawn pneumatic spraying machine with

suitable arrangements of atomizing nozzles and controls to obtain the
specified results. Provide machine having a speed during application
capable of applying the stripe widths indicated at the paint coverage rate
specified herein and of even uniform thickness with clear-cut edges. .
Provide paint applicator with paint reservoirs or tanks of sufficient
capacity and suitable gages to apply paint in accordance with requirements
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 2

specified. Equip tanks with suitable air-driven mechanical agitators.

Equip spray mechanism with quick-action valves conveniently located, and
include necessary pressure regulators and gages in full view and reach of
the operator. Install paint strainers in paint supply lines to ensure
freedom from residue and foreign matter that may cause malfunction of the
spray guns. Provide pneumatic spray guns for hand application of paint in
areas where the mobile paint applicator cannot be used. Applicator for
water-based markings shall be equipped with non-stick coated hoses; metal
parts in contact with the paint material shall be constructed of grade
302, 304, 316, or equal stainless steel.
1.5.3 Surface Preparation Equipment
1.5.3.1 Waterblast Equipment
The water pressure shall be specified at 2600 psi at 140 degrees F in

order to adequately clean the surfaces to be marked. The Contractor shall
furnish all equipment, material, and labor required to obtain and deliver
water from the designated fire hydrant to the work area(s).
1.5.4 Traffic Controls
Suitable warning signs shall be placed near the beginning of the worksite
and well ahead of the worksite for alerting approaching traffic from both
directions. Small markers shall be placed along newly painted lines or
freshly placed raised markers to control traffic and prevent damage to
newly painted surfaces or displacement of raised pavement markers.
Painting equipment shall be marked with large warning signs indicating
slow-moving painting equipment in operation.
1.6 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
1.6.1 Lighting
When night operations are necessary, all necessary lighting and equipment
shall be provided. Lighting shall be directed or shaded to prevent
interference with aircraft, the air traffic control tower, and other base
operations. All lighting and related equipment shall be capable of being
removed from the runway within 15 minutes of notification of an
emergency. Night work must be coordinated with the Airfield Manager and
approved in advance by the Contracting Officer or authorized
representative. The Government reserves the right to accept or reject
night work on the day following night activities by the Contractor.
1.6.2 Roads, Streets, and Parking Areas
When traffic must be rerouted or controlled to accomplish the work, the

necessary warning signs, flagpersons, and related equipment for the safe
passage of vehicles shall be provided.
1.7 WEATHER LIMITATIONS FOR REMOVAL
Pavement surface shall be free of snow, ice, or slush. Surface

temperature shall be at least 40 degrees F and rising at the beginning of
operations, except those involving shot or sand blasting. Operation shall
cease during thunderstorms. Operation shall cease during rainfall, except
for waterblasting and removal of previously applied chemicals.
Waterblasting shall cease where surface water accumulation alters the
effectiveness of material removal.
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Provide materials conforming to the requirements specified herein.
2.1.1 Paints for Roads and Streets
FS TT-P-1952, color as indicated. The Contractor shall submit to the

Contracting Officer a certificate stating that the proposed pavement
marking paint meets the Volatile Organic Compound, (VOC) regulations of
the local Air Pollution Control District having jurisdiction over the
geographical area in which the project is located not less than 14 days
prior to installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Allow new pavement surfaces to cure for a period of not less than 30 days
before application of marking materials. Thoroughly clean surfaces to be
marked before application of the paint. Remove dust, dirt, and other
granular surface deposits by sweeping, blowing with compressed air,
rinsing with water, or a combination of these methods as required. Remove
rubber deposits, existing paint markings, residual curing compounds, and
other coatings adhering to the pavement by water blasting or approved
chemical removal method. Scrub affected areas, where oil or grease is
present on old pavements to be marked, with several applications of
trisodium phosphate solution or other approved detergent or degreaser and
rinse thoroughly after each application. After cleaning oil-soaked areas,
seal with shellac or primer recommended by the manufacturer to prevent
bleeding through the new paint. Do not commence painting in any area until
pavement surfaces are dry and clean.
3.1.1 Early Painting of Rigid Pavements
Pretreat rigid pavements that require early painting with an aqueous

solution containing 3 percent phosphoric acid and 2 percent zinc
chloride. Apply the solution to the areas to be marked.
3.1.2 Early Painting of Asphalt Pavements
For asphalt pavement systems requiring painting application at less than

30 days, apply the paint and beads at half the normal application rate,
followed by a second application at the normal rate after 30 days.
3.2 APPLICATION
3.2.1 Testing for Moisture
Apply pavement markings to dry pavement only. The Contractor shall test
the pavement surface for moisture before beginning work after each period
of rainfall, fog, high humidity, or cleaning, or when the ambient
temperature has fallen below the dew point. Do not commence marking until
the pavement is sufficiently dry and the pavement condition has been
approved by the CO or authorized representative. Employ the "plastic wrap
method" to test the pavement for moisture as follows: Cover the pavement
with a 12 inch by 12 inch section of clear plastic wrap and seal the edges
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 4

with tape. After 15 minutes, examine the plastic wrap for any visible
moisture accumulation inside the plastic. Do not begin marking operations
until the test can be performed with no visible moisture accumulation
inside the plastic wrap.
3.2.2 Rate of Application
3.2.2.1 Nonreflective Markings
Apply paint evenly to the pavement surface to be coated at a rate of 105

plus or minus 5 square feet per gallon.
3.2.3 Painting
Apply paint pneumatically with approved equipment at rate of coverage

specified herein. Provide guidelines and templates as necessary to
control paint application. Take special precautions in marking numbers,
letters, and symbols. Manually paint numbers, letters, and symbols.
Sharply outline all edges of markings. The maximum drying time
requirements of the paint specifications will be strictly enforced, to
prevent undue softening of bitumen, and pickup, displacement, or
discoloration by tires of traffic. Discontinue painting operations if
there is a deficiency in drying of the markings until cause of the slow
drying is determined and corrected.
3.3 FIELD TESTING, INSPECTION, AND DEMONSTRATIONS
3.3.1 Sampling and Testing
As soon as the paint materials are available for sampling, obtain by

random selection from the sealed containers, two quart samples of each
batch in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Accomplish adequate
mixing prior to sampling to ensure a uniform, representative sample. A
batch is defined as that quantity of material processed by the
manufacturer at one time and identified by number on the label. Clearly
identify samples by designated name, specification number, batch number,
project contract number, intended use, and quantity involved. Test
samples by an approved laboratory. If a sample fails to meet
specification, replace the material in the area represented by the samples
and retest the replacement material as specified above. Submit copy of
the test results to the Contracting Officer. Include in the report of
test results a listing of any specification requirements not verified by
the test laboratory. At the discretion of the Contracting Officer, samples
provided may be tested by the Government for verification.
3.3.2 Inspection
Examine material at the job site to determine that it is the material

referenced in the report of test results or certificate of compliance. A
certificate of compliance shall be accompanied by test results
substantiating conformance to the specified requirements.
3.3.3 Surface Preparations and Application Procedures
Surface preparations and application procedures will be examined by the

Contracting Officer to determine conformance with the requirements
specified. Approve each separate operation prior to initiation of
subsequent operations.
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 5

3.4 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND PROTECTION
Place warning signs near the beginning of the work site and well ahead of
the work site for alerting approaching traffic from both directions.
Place small markers along newly painted lines to control traffic and
prevent damage to newly painted surfaces. Mark painting equipment with
large warning signs indicating slow-moving painting equipment in
operation. Do not use foil-backed material for temporary pavement marking
because of its potential to conduct electricity during accidents involving
downed power lines.
Demonstrate success of bond of new paint marking and the pavement surface,
vacuum cured surface of new marking after a seven (7) day dry time.
Inspect newly applied markings for signs of bond failure based on visual
inspection and comparison to results from Test Stripe Demonstration
paragraph.
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 6

SECTION 32 31 13.53
HIGH-SECURITY CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

04/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Metallic-Coated, Steel Woven Wire Fence
Fabric

Metallic-Coated Carbon Steel Barbed Wire

Hardware
ASTM A392 (2011a) Standard Specification for

Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric
ASTM A702 (2013) Standard Specification for Steel

Fence Posts and Assemblies, Hot Wrought

Galvanized Coatings


ASTM F1043 (2014) Strength and Protective Coatings on

Metal Industrial Chain-Link Fence Framework
ASTM F1083 (2013) Standard Specification for Pipe,

Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized)
Welded, for Fence Structures
ASTM F1184 (2005; R 2010) Industrial and Commercial

Horizontal Slide Gates
ASTM F567 (2014a) Standard Practice for Installation

of Chain Link Fence
ASTM F626 (2014) Standard Specification for Fence

Fittings

ASTM F900 (2011) Industrial and Commercial Swing

Gates
FS RR-F-191 (Rev K) Fencing, Wire and Post Metal (and

Gates, Chain-Link Fence Fabric, and
Accessories)
FS RR-F-191/1 (Rev F) Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal

(Chain-Link Fence Fabric)
FS RR-F-191/2 (Rev E) Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal

(Chain-Link Fence Gates)
FS RR-F-191/3 (Rev E; Am 1) Fencing, Wire and Post,

Metal (Chain-Link Fence Posts, Top Rails
and Braces)
FS RR-F-191/4 (Rev F) Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal

(Chain-Link Fence Accessories)
1.2 SUBMITTALS

approval.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fence Installation
Installation Drawings
Location of gate, corner, end, and pull posts
Gate Assembly
Gate Hardware and Accessories
SD-03 Product Data
Fence Installation
Gate Assembly
SD-04 Samples
Fabric
Posts
Post Caps
Braces
Line Posts
Sleeves
Top Rail
Barbed Wire
Barbed Wire Supporting Arms
Stretcher Bars
Gate Posts
Padlocks

Wire Ties
SD-06 Test Reports
zinc coating
SD-07 Certificates
Chain Link Fence

Reports
Zinc Coating
Fabric
Barbed Wire
Stretcher Bars
Concrete
Fence Installation
Gate Assembly
Hardware Assembly
Accessories
Operating and maintenance instructions
1.3.1 Required Report Data
Submit reports, signed by an official authorized to certify on behalf of

the manufacturer, of chain-link fencing listing and accessories regarding
weight in ounces for zinc coating. Submit reports demonstrating full
compliance with the following standards: FS RR-F-191, FS RR-F-191/1,
FS RR-F-191/2, FS RR-F-191/3, and FS RR-F-191/4
1.3.2 Assembly and Installation Drawings
Submit Manufacturer's instructions and complete Fence Installation Drawings

for review and approval by the Contracting Officer prior to shipment.
Drawing details shall include, but are not limited to: Fence Installation,
Location of gate, corner, end, and pull posts, Gate Assembly, Turnstiles,
and Gate Hardware and Accessories.
Deliver materials to site in an undamaged condition. Store materials off

the ground to provide protection against oxidation caused by ground
contact.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FENCE FABRIC
2.1.1 General
Provide ASTM A392, Class 2, zinc-coated steel wire with minimum coating

weight of 2.0 ounces of zinc per square foot of coated surface. Fabricate
fence fabric of 9 gauge wire woven in 2 inch mesh conforming to ASTM A116.
Set fabric height as shown. Fabric shall be twisted and barbed on the top
and bottom selvages. Secure fabric to posts using stretcher bars or ties
spaced 15 inches on center, or by integrally weaving to integral fastening
loops of end, corner, pull, and gate posts for full length of each post.
Install fabric on opposite side of posts from area being secured.
2.2 POSTS
2.2.1 Metal Posts for Chain Link Fence
Provide posts conforming to ASTM F1083, zinc-coated. Group IC steel pipe,

zinc-coated with external coating Type A or Type B and Group II, meeting
the strength and coating requirements of ASTM F1043 and ASTM A702.
Provide sizes as shown on the drawings. Line posts and terminal (corner,
gate, and pull) posts selected shall be of the same designation throughout
the fence. Provide gate post for the gate type specified subject to the
limitation specified in ASTM F900 and/or ASTM F1184. Post spacing shall
conform to the recommended guidelines as set forth in the CLFMI "Wind Load
Guide for the Selection of Line Post Spacing and Size" unless specified to
exceed those guidelines.
FS RR-F-191/3 line posts; Class 1, steel pipe, Grade B. End, corner, and
pull posts; Class 1, steel pipe, Grade B.
2.2.2 Accessories
a. Provide accessories conforming to ASTM F626. Ferrous accessories

shall be zinc or aluminum coated.
b. Furnish truss rods for each terminal post. Provide truss rods
with turnbuckles or other equivalent provisions for adjustment.
c. Provide Barbed wire supporting arms of the single, 45 degree

outward angle 3-strand arm type and of the design required for the
post furnished. Secure arms by top rail.
d. Furnish post caps in accordance with manufacturer's standard

accessories.
e. Provide 9 gauge steel tie wire for attaching fabric to rails,

braces, and posts and match the coating of the fence fabric. Tie
wires for attaching fabric to tension wire on high security fences
shall be 9 gage stainless steel. Provide double loop tie wires 6.5
inches in length. Miscellaneous hardware coatings shall conform to
ASTM A153/A153M unless modified.
2.3 BRACES AND RAILS
Group IC steel pipe, zinc-coated, shall meet the strength and coating
requirements of ASTM F1043. Braces and rails shall be Group IC, steel
pipe, size NPS 1-1/4 or Group II, formed steel sections, size 1-21/32 inch
and be zinc coated (Type A) and polyvinyl chloride-coated conforming to
the requirements of ASTM F1043. Group II, formed steel sections, size
1-21/32 inch, conforming to ASTM F1043, may be used as braces and rails if
Group II line posts are furnished.
Braces, top rail; Class 1, steel pipe, Grade B, in minimum sizes listed in

FS RR-F-191/3 for each class and grade. Steel pipe, Class 1, Grade B
shall meet the following performance criteria when subjected to salt spray
testing in accordance with ASTM B117: Exterior 1,000 hours with maximum 5
percent red rust; Interior 650 hours with maximum 5 percent red rust.
2.4 WIRE
2.4.1 Wire Ties
Submit samples as specified. FS RR-F-191/4. Provide wire ties

constructed of the same material as the fencing fabric.
2.4.2 Barbed Wire
Provide barbed wire conforming to ASTM A121 zinc-coated, Type Z, Class 3,

or aluminum-coated, Type A, with 12.5 gauge wire with 14 gauge, round,
4-point barbs spaced no more than 5 inches apart.
2.5 CONCRETE
ASTM C94/C94M, using 3/4 inch maximum size aggregate, and having minimum
compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. Grout shall consist of one
part portland cement to three parts clean, well-graded sand and the
minimum amount of water to produce a workable mix.
2.6 GATES
2.6.1 Gate Assembly
Provide gate assembly conforming to ASTM F900 and/or ASTM F1184 of the
type and swing shown. Provide gate frames conforming to strength and
coating requirements of ASTM F1083 for Group IA, steel pipe, with external
coating Type A, nominal pipe size (NPS) 1-1/2. Provide gate frames
conforming to strength and coating requirements of ASTM F1043, for Group
IC, steel pipe with external coating Type Type B, nominal pipe size (NPS)
1-1/2. Gate fabric shall be as specified for chain link fabric.
2.6.2 Gate Leaves
For gate leaves, more than 8 feet wide, provide either intermediate
members and diagonal truss rods or tubular members as necessary to provide
rigid construction, free from sag or twist. Gate leaves less than 8 feet
wide shall have truss rods or intermediate braces. Provide intermediate
braces on all gate frames with an electro-mechanical lock. Attach fabric
to the gate frame by method standard with the manufacturer except that
welding will not be permitted.
2.6.3 Gate Hardware and Accessories
Submit manufacturer's catalog data. Furnish and install latches, hinges,

stops, keepers, rollers, and other hardware items as required for the
operation of the gate. Arrange latches for padlocking so that the padlock
will be accessible from both sides of the gate. Provide stops for holding
the gates in the open position. For high security applications, each end
member of gate frames shall be extended sufficiently above the top member
to carry three strands of barbed wire in horizontal alignment with barbed
wire strands on the fence.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FENCE INSTALLATION
Perform complete installation conforming to ASTM F567.
3.1.1 Line and Grade
Install fence to the lines and grades indicated. Clear the area on either
side of the fence line to the extent indicated. Space line posts
equidistant at intervals not exceeding 10 feet. Terminal (corner, gate,
and pull) posts shall be set at abrupt changes in vertical and horizontal
alignment. Provide fabric continuous between terminal posts; however,
runs between terminal posts shall not exceed 500 feet. Repair any damage
to galvanized surfaces, including welding, with paint containing zinc dust
in accordance with ASTM A780/A780M.
3.1.2 Excavation
Clear all post holes of loose material. Spread waste material where
directed. Eliminate ground surface irregularities along the fence line
to the extent necessary to maintain a 1 inch clearance between the bottom
of the fabric and finish grade.
3.2 POST INSTALLATION
3.2.1 Earth
a. Set posts plumb and in alignment. Set posts in concrete to the depth
indicated on the drawings.
b. Posts set in concrete shall be set in holes not less than the diameter
shown on the drawings. Thoroughly consolidate concrete around each
post, free of voids and finished to form a dome. Allow concrete to
cure for 72 hours prior to attachment of any item to the posts. Group
II line posts may be mechanically driven, for temporary fence
construction only. Set driven posts to a minimum depth of 3 feet and
protect with drive caps when setting.
c. Test fence post rigidity by applying a 50 pound force on the post,

perpendicular to the fabric, at 5 feet above ground. Post movement
measured at the point where the force is applied shall be less than or
equal to 3/4 inch from the relaxed position. Test every tenth post
for rigidity. When a post fails this test, make further tests on the
next four posts on either side of the failed post. All failed posts
shall be removed, replaced, and retested at the Contractor's expense.
3.3 RAILS
Bolt rails to double rail ends and securely fasten double rail ends to the
posts. Peen bolts to prevent easy removal.
3.4 FABRIC INSTALLATION
a. Install chain link fabric on opposite side of the area being secured.
Attach fabric to terminal posts with stretcher bars and tension
bands. Space bands at approximately 15 inch intervals. Install
fabric and pull taut to provide a smooth and uniform appearance free
from sag, without permanently distorting the fabric diamond or

reducing the fabric height. Fasten fabric to line posts at

approximately 15 inch intervals and fastened to all rails and tension
wires at approximately 12 inch intervals.
b. Cut fabric by untwisting and removing pickets. Accomplish splicing by

weaving a single picket into the ends of the rolls to be joined. The
bottom of the installed fabric shall be 1 plus or minus 1/2 inch above
the ground.
c. After the fabric installation is complete, exercise the fabric by

applying a 50 pound push-pull force at the center of the fabric
between posts; the use of a 30 pound pull at the center of the panel
shall cause fabric deflection of not more than 2.5 inches when pulling
fabric from the post side of the fence; every second fence panel shall
meet this requirement; resecure and retest all failed panels at the
3.5 SUPPORTING ARMS
Install barbed wire supporting arms and barbed wire as indicated on the
drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer. Anchor supporting arms
to the posts in a manner to prevent easy removal with hand tools. Pull
barbed wire taut and attach to the arms with clips or other means that
will prevent easy removal.
3.6 GATE INSTALLATION
a. Install gates at the locations shown. Mount gates to swing as

indicated. Install latches, stops, and keepers as required. Install
gates as recommended by the manufacturer.
b. Coordinate with the Contracting Officer to provide and install

appurtenances required for use of padlocks provided by the Contracting
Officer.
c. Weld or otherwise secure hinge pins, and hardware assembly to prevent

removal.
d. Submit 6 copies of operating and maintenance instructions, a minimum

of 2 weeks prior to field training. Operating instructions shall
outline the step-by-step procedures required for system startup,
operation, and shutdown. Include the manufacturer's name, model
number, service manual, parts list, and brief description of all
equipment and their basic operating features. Include in the
maintenance instructions routine maintenance procedures, possible
breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guide. Also include the
general gate layout, equipment layout and simplified wiring and
3.7 GROUNDING
a. Ground fences on each side of all gates, at each corner, at the

closest approach to each building located within 50 feet of the fence,
and where the fence alignment changes more than 15 degrees. Grounding
locations shall not exceed 650 feet. Bond each gate panel with a
flexible bond strap to its gate post. Ground fences crossed by
powerlines of 600 volts or more at or near the point of crossing and
at distances not exceeding 150 feet on each side of crossing.

3.8 SECURITY
Install new security fencing, remove existing security fencing, and

perform related work to provide continuous security for facility.
Schedule and fully coordinate work with Contracting Officer and cognizant
Security Officer.
3.9 CLEANUP
Remove waste fencing materials and other debris from the work site each
workday.

SECTION 32 84 24
IRRIGATION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

08/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API)
API Std 598 (2009) Valve Inspecting and Testing
AWWA C500 (2009) Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water

Supply Service
AWWA C511 (2007) Standard for Reduced-Pressure

Principle Backflow Prevention Assembly
AWWA C651 (2005; Errata 2005) Standard for

Disinfecting Water Mains
AWWA C901 (2008) Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and

Tubing, 1/2 In. (13mm) Through 3 In. (76
mm), for Water Service

Attachments

Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC), Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40, 80, and 120

Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated
Pipe (SDR Series)
ASTM D2464 (2013) Standard Specification for Threaded

Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 80

Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 40
ASTM D2564 (2012) Standard Specification for Solvent

Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Piping Systems
ASTM D2774 (2012) Underground Installation of

Thermoplastic Pressure Piping
ASTM D2855 (1996; R 2010) Standard Practice for

Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and
Fittings
ASTM D3261 (2012; E 2014) Standard Specification for

Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic
Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic
Pipe and Tubing
ASTM F441/F441M (2013; E 2013) Standard Specification for

Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80

(FCCCHR)
FCCCHR List (continuously updated) List of Approved

Backflow Prevention Assemblies

3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National
Electrical Code
NSF/ANSI 14 (2014) Plastics Piping System Components

and Related Materials

Fittings
Section 23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, and Section

26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, applies to this
section, with additions and modifications specified herein.
This system is designed with a water pressure minimum of 50 pounds per

square inch (psi) maximum of 100 psi at connection to main and 30 psi at
the last head in each zone.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Piping materials, tubing, and fittings
Valves and accessories
Sprinkler heads
Backflow preventers
Automatic controller
Solvent cement
Control wiring
Water meter
Rain shut-off device
Valve boxes and lids
SD-06 Test Reports
Backflow preventers; G, A/E
Pressure test; G, A/E
Operation test; G, A/E
Including verification of sprinkler head layout
Submit record of pressure tests conducted on recording gage.
Automatic controller
Piping materials
Backflow preventers
Valves
Water meter
Weather sensor device
Submit mounting details for automatic controllers.
Piping materials and fittings, Data Package 2; G
Backflow preventers, Data Package 2; G
Valves, Data Package 2; G
Automatic controller, Data Package 2; G
Water meter, Data Package 2; G
Rain shut-off device, Data Package 2; G

01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. Include troubleshooting
procedures with respect to valve and controller problems.
Controller Charts
1.5.1 Delivery
Deliver materials in original rolls, packages, cartons, and containers

with the name of manufacturer, brand, and model. Inspect materials
delivered to the site for damage.
1.5.2 Storage
Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective covering. Store

plastic piping and rubber gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight. Do
not store materials directly on ground. Keep inside of pipes and fittings
free from dirt and debris.
1.5.3 Handling
Handle and carry pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories in such a manner
as to ensure delivery to trench in sound undamaged condition. Do not drag
pipe.
1.6 EXTRA STOCK
a. 2 additional sprinkler heads (nozzles, bodies, screens, pressure

compensating devices) of each size and type;
b. 2 valve keys for operating manual valves;
c. 2 wrenches for removing and installing each type of head;
d. 2 quick coupler keys and hose swivels;
e. 4 irrigation controller housing keys.
f. 2 hand-held remotes compatible with controller system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
2.1.1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Fittings and Solvent Cement
NSF/ANSI 14, seal of approval for potable water.
2.1.1.1 Pipe
ASTM D1785, PVC 1120 Schedule 40 for mainline below 2 inches; or ASTM D2241,
PVC 1120 SDR 21, Class 315 for mainline 2 inches and above.
2.1.1.2 Fittings
a. Solvent Welded Socket Type: ASTM D2466, Schedule 40.
b. Threaded Type: ASTM D2464, Schedule 80.
2.1.1.3 Solvent Cement
ASTM D2564.
2.1.2 Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Piping
2.1.2.1 Pipe
AWWA C901, outside diameter (od) base with dimension ratio (DR) of 9.3 to
provide 150 psi minimum pressure rating.
2.1.2.2 Fittings
ASTM D3261, DR of 9.3.
2.1.3 Dielectric Fittings
ASTM F441/F441M, Schedule 80, CPVC threaded pipe nipples, 4 inch length.
2.1.4 Pipe Sleeving
a. Provide PVC piping two times the diameter of main or lateral piping.
b. Provide grey PVC electrical conduit sized according to number of

control wires. Minimum 2 inch size.
2.2 IRRIGATION AND DRIP SPRINKLER HEADS
2.2.1 Irrigation Heads
2.2.1.1 Pressure Compensating Bubbler Head
Capable of providing a consistent discharge rate of .25 to 50 gpm at 30 psi.

Plastic inlet filter screen bubbler assembly to protect the nozzle against
clogging. Permanently assembled design constructed of durable,
ultra-violet resistant plastic with a integral rubber flow washer for
regulating the discharge rate at an operating pressure range of 20 to 90
psi.
2.3 VALVES
2.3.1 Isolation Valve
2.3.1.1 Ball Valves, Less than 3 Inches
API Std 598, plastic body, soldered ends.
2.3.1.2 Gate Valves, 3 Inches and Larger
AWWA C500, bottom wedging double discs, parallel seats, non-rising stems,
open by counterclockwise turning. Provide flanged end connections.
Provide bronze interior construction of valves including stem containing a
maximum 2 percent aluminum and maximum 16 percent zinc.
2.3.2 Control Valves
2.3.2.1 Remote Control Valve, Electrical
Solenoid actuated globe valves of 3/4 to 3 inch size, direct current (dc),
60/50 cycle 56 amps in rush current and 28 amps holding current. Provide
plastic valve housing suitable for service at 150 psi operating pressure.
Provide pressure regulating module capable of regulating outlet pressure
between 15 to 25 psi (plus or minus) 5 psi and adjustable screw for
setting pressure schrader valve connection for monitoring pressure.
2.3.3 Quick Coupling Valves
Two piece unit consisting of a coupler water seal valve assembly and a
removable upper body to allow spring and key track to be serviced without
shutout of main. Provide brass parts. Provide rubber lockable lids with
springs for positive closure on key removal.
2.3.4.1 Reduced Pressure Type Backflow Preventers
AWWA C511. Provide backflow preventers complete with 150 psi rated
flanged bronze mounted valve and strainer, 304 stainless steel or bronze,
internal parts. Total pressure drop through complete assembly shall be a
maximum of 10 psi at rated flow. Listing of particular make,
model/design, and size in FCCCHR List will be acceptable as required proof
for testing and certification.
a. Piping Assembly: Red brass pipe and fittings.
b. Strainers: Bronze or brass construction with gasket caps. Equip

units with No. 200 mesh stainless steel screen elements.
2.4 ACCESSORIES AND APPURTENANCES
2.4.1 Water Meter
Meter to include roll sealed register, magnetic drive, straight reading

(odometer shall indicate in gallons, large numerals, glass lens for
legibility,) low flow indicator to detect leaks, tamper proof seal pin to
detect theft; sturdy durable, corrosion resistant main case, electrical
grounding continuity; nutating disc measuring chamber with minimum head
loss. Meter shall be itron, fully compatible with the existing MCAS Yuma
advanced metering system.
2.4.2 Backflow Preventer Accessories
2.4.2.1 Pressure Gages
ASME B40.100, single style pressure gage for water with 4 1/2 inch dial,
brass or aluminum case, bronze tube, gage cock, pressure snubber, and
siphon. Provide scale range suitable for irrigation systems.
2.4.2.2 Backflow Preventer Enclosure
Frame to be constructed of 3/16 inch angle iron with 1 1/2 inch No. 9
expanded metal covering. Construct in a one piece single swing or a two
piece double hinge configuration. Provisions for pad locking and lighting
handles. Size to fit backflow assembly to installed. Color to be tan.
Lock for enclosure provided by others.
2.4.2.3 Concrete Pads
Cast-in-place reinforced concrete construction for reduced pressure type

backflow preventers.
2.4.3 Weather Sensor Device
2.4.3.1 Weather Sensor Device
Install weather sensing element as indicated in plans. Sensor must be

capable of interrupting the control valve common wire when rainfall occurs.
Operating voltage 24 VAC, maximum current one amp. Static charge
protection with snubber network.
2.4.4 Air/Vacuum Relief
Construct of PVC with a maximum operating pressure of 140 psi.
2.5 Automatic Controller
Controller with 120 volt single phase service, operating with indicated
station, and grounded chassis, with locking hinge cover, pedestal mounted.
2.5.1 Controller Features
a. 4-station controller with 4 independent programs that can run

concurrently.
b. Allows an infinite number of cycles per day by placing the program in

a looping mode.
c. Ability to be programmed in one second increments, from one second to

24 minutes.
d. A water budgeting capability in all stations within a program in one

percent increments from one percent to 255 percent.
e. A programmable watering calendar ranging from 1 to 30 days.
f. A single-station timed manual feature that allows a station to be

turned on manually for its programmed watering time.
g. A semi-automatic manual cycle feature.
h. A true manual operation with safety shut-off at midnight and indicate

which station is on by means of L.E.D.S.
i. UL listed, having a re-settable circuit breaker, cadmium plated,

weatherproof steel case, and keyed lock.
j. Evapotranspiration controller with no service fees.
2.6 ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS
2.6.1 Control Wiring for Electrically Operated Valves
NFPA 70, copper conductor 14 gage wire, Type UF.
2.6.2 Conduit
UL 651, rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit, Schedule 40.
2.7 CONCRETE MATERIALS
2500 psi compressive concrete strength at 28 days as specified under

Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install sprinkler system after site grading has been completed.
3.1.1 Trenching
Hand trench around roots to pipe grade when roots of 2 inches diameter or
greater are encountered. Make width of trench 4 inches minimum or 1 1/2
times diameter of pipe, whichever is wider. Backfill and hand tamp over
excavation. When rock is encountered, excavate 4 inches deeper and
backfill with silty sand (SM) or well-graded sand (SW) to pipe grade.
Keep trenches free of obstructions and debris that would damage pipe. Do
not mix subsoil with topsoil. Bore under existing concrete walks, drives
and other obstacles at a depth conforming to bottom of adjacent trenches.
Install pipe sleeve, two pipe diameters larger than sprinkler pipe, to
fill bore. Prior to backfilling of trench, Contracting Officer shall
verify and approve location of all irrigation heads.
3.1.2 Piping System
3.1.2.1 Clearances
a. Minimum horizontal clearances between lines: 4 inches for 2 inch pipe

and less; 12 inches for 2 inch pipe and more.
b. Minimum vertical clearances between lines: One inch.
3.1.2.2 Minimum Backfill Cover
a. 24 inches for pressure mainline pipe and valve control wire.
b. 12 inches for non-pressure lateral pipe.
c. 24 inches for all piping under paved or non-paved pedestrian paths.
d. 30 inches for all piping under traffic loads.
e. Install pipe sleeves at depths indicated in "c" and "d".
3.1.3 Piping Installation
3.1.3.1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe
a. Solvent-Cemented Joints: ASTM D2855.
b. Threaded Joints: full cut with a maximum of three threads remain

exposed on pipe and nipples. Make threaded joints tight without
recourse to wicks or fillers, other than polytetrafluoroethylene
thread tape.
c. Piping: ASTM D2774 or ASTM D2855, and pipe manufacturer's

instructions. Install pipe in a serpentine (snaked) manner to allow
for expansion and contraction in trench before backfilling. Install
pipes at temperatures over 40 degrees F.
3.1.3.2 Dielectric Protection
Where pipes of dissimilar metal are joined, make connection with

dielectric fitting.
3.1.4 Irrigation Heads
Install plumb and level with terrain.
3.1.4.1 Irrigation Heads
Nozzle mounted on fixed riser minimum 6 inches above grade in mulched

planter beds, 12 inches above grade in planter beds with groundcover.
Provide swing joint assembly attachment between lateral lines and fixed
risers.
3.1.5 Valves
3.1.5.1 Isolation Valves
Install in a valve box extending from grade to below valve body, with a
minimum of 4 inches cover measured from finish grade to top of valve stem.
3.1.5.2 Control Valves
Plumb valve in a valve box extending from grade to below valve body, with
minimum of 4 inch cover measured from grade to top of valve. Install
automatic valves beside sprinkler heads with a valve box.
3.1.5.3 Quick Coupling Valves
Install in a valve box extending from grade to below valve body, with a
minimum of 4 inches cover measured from finish grade to top of valve stem.
a. Install backflow preventer in new connection to existing water

distribution system, between connection and control valves. Install
with concrete pads.
b. Flush pipe lines prior to installing device.
c. Device shall not be installed in pits or where any part of the device
could become submerged in standing water
d. Install device a minimum of 12 inches from trees, walls, fences,

structures and other obstructions.
3.1.7 Accessories
3.1.7.1 Water Meter
Install meter upstream of backflow preventer per manufacturer's

recommendations and local PWC Utility Department Instructions.
3.1.7.2 Valve Boxes and Lids
a. Install with one cu ft pea gravel sump below valve.
b. Support valve box with brick.
c. Provide wire screen between gravel sump and bottom of valve body for
rodent protection.
d. For turf areas, install flush with finish grade.
e. For planter beds, install 2 inches above finish grade.
f. For sloped conditions, install valve box level with terrain.
3.1.7.3 Backflow Preventer Enclosure
a. Install with concrete pad.
b. Place hinges so direction of swing will not conflict with other site
features.
3.1.7.4 Weather Sensor Device
a. Install as per manufacturer's recommendations.
b. For pedestal mounted controllers, mount to side of controller housing.
3.1.8 Electrical Circuits
Bury wires beside mainline pipe in same trench. Provide grey electrical
conduit where wires run under paved or non-paved pedestrian paths and
vehicular roads. Tag wires at controller and control valve location with
plastic tie wrapped tags. Provide one control wire to each control valve
location and one common wire looped from controller to each control
valve. provide one separate control valve wire of a different color from
controller to each control valve cluster.
3.1.8.1 Loops
Provide a 12 inch loop of wire at each valve where controls are connected.
3.1.8.2 Expansion and Contraction
Bundle multiple tubes or wires and tape together at 20 foot intervals with
12 inch loop for expansion and contraction.
3.1.8.3 Splices
Make electrical splices waterproof. Locate all field electrical splices in

valve boxes.
3.1.9 Automatic Controller
Determine exact location of controllers in field before installation.

Coordinate the electrical service to these locations. Install in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 70.
3.1.10 Flushing
After piping, risers, and valves are in place and connected, but prior to
installation of sprinkler heads and valves, flush piping system under a
full head of water. Maintain flushing for 3 minutes.
3.1.11 Adjustment
After grading, plant installation, and rolling of planted areas, adjust

sprinkler heads flush with finished grade. Make adjustments by providing
new nipples of proper length or by use of heads having an approved device,
integral with head, which will permit adjustment in height of head without
changing piping.
3.1.12 Sterilization
Sprinkler system fed from a potable water system shall be sterilized

upstream of backflow preventer in accordance with AWWA C651. Sterilize new
waterlines for a minimum of 24-hours, to meet state, health test
requirements before placing in service. Minimum retention period shall be
3 hours.
The Contractor will conduct and the Contracting Officer and the QC
representative will witness field inspections and field tests specified in
this section. Perform field tests, and provide labor, equipment, and
incidentals required for testing.
3.2.1 Pressure Test
3.2.1.1 Duration
During pressure test, maintain a hydrostatic pressure of 150 psi without

pumping for a period of one hour with an allowable pressure drop of 5 psi
before backfilling system.
3.2.1.2 Leaks
Correct leaks. Make necessary corrections to stop leakage.
3.2.1.3 Retest
Retest system twice until pressure can be maintained for duration of test.
3.2.2 Operation Test
3.2.2.1 Accessories
At conclusion of pressure test, install irrigation heads or drip heads,

quick coupling assemblies, and hose bib, and test entire system for
operation under normal operating pressure. Make necessary corrections or
adjustments to raise or lower pressure for each system if tests results do
not match pressure requirements.
3.2.2.2 Acceptance
Operation test is acceptable if system operates through at least one

complete cycle for areas to be irrigated.
3.2.3 Controller Charts
Provide one chart for each controller supplied. Indicate in chart area
controlled by automatic controller. The chart is a reduction of the
actual plan that will fit the maximum dimensions inside controller
housing. Use black line print for chart and a different pastel or
transparent color to indicate each station area of coverage. After chart
is completed and approved for final acceptance, seal chart between two 20
mil pieces of clear plastic.
SECTION 32 93 00
EXTERIOR PLANTS
02/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Stainless Steel Wire
ASTM C602 (2013a) Agricultural Liming Materials
ASTM D4427 (2013) Peat Samples by Laboratory Testing
ASTM D4972 (2013) pH of Soils
ASTM D5268 (2013) Topsoil Used for Landscaping

Purposes
ASTM D5539 (2013) Seed Starter Mix
AmericanHort (AH)
ANSI/ANLA Z60.1 (2004) American Standard for Nursery Stock
L.H. BAILEY HORTORIUM (LHBH)
LHBH (1976) Hortus Third
TCIA A300P1 (2008) ANSI A300 Part1: Tree Care

Operations - Trees, Shrubs and Other Woody
Plant Maintenance Standard Practices -
Pruning
TCIA Z133.1 (2006) American National Standard for

Arboricultural Operations - Pruning,
Repairing, Maintaining, and Removing
Trees, and Cutting Brush - Safety
Requirements
DOA SSIR 42 (1996) Soil Survey Investigation Report

No. 42, Soil Survey Laboratory Methods
Manual, Version 3.0
Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK, Section 32 84 24 IRRIGATION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS,

and Section 32 05 33 LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT applies to this section for
pesticide use and plant establishment requirements, with additions and
modifications herein.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

State Landscape Contractor's License
Time Restrictions and Planting Conditions
Indicate anticipated dates and locations for each type of

planting.
SD-03 Product Data
Peat
Composted Derivatives
Rotted Manure
Organic Mulch Materials
Gypsum
Inert Mulch; G
Fertilizer
Root control barrier; G
Staking Material
Metal anchors
Antidesiccants
Photographs; G
SD-04 Samples
Inert Mulch; G
Submit one pint of mulch.
SD-06 Test Reports
Topsoil composition tests; Soil Test of proposed area; Soil Test

location map
Percolation Test; Percolation Test of proposed area
SD-07 Certificates
Nursery certifications
Indicate names of plants in accordance with the LHBH, including

type, quality, and size.
1.4.1 Topsoil Composition Tests
Commercial test from an independent testing laboratory including basic

soil groups (moisture and saturation percentages,
Nitrogen-Phosphorus-Potassium (N-P-K) ratio, pH (ASTM D4972), soil
salinity), secondary nutrient groups (calcium, magnesium, sodium, Sodium
Absorption Ratio (SAR)), micronutrients (zinc, manganese, iron, copper),
toxic soil elements (boron, chloride, sulfate), cation exchange and base
saturation percentages, and soil amendment and fertilizer recommendations
with quantities for plant material being transplanted. Soil required for
each test shall include a maximum depth of 18 inches of approximately 1
quart volume for each test. Areas sampled should not be larger than 1 acre
and should contain at least 6-8 cores for each sample area and be
thoroughly mixed. Problem areas should be sampled separately and compared
with samples taken from adjacent non-problem areas. The location of the
sample areas should be noted and marked on a parcel or planting map for
future reference.
1.4.2 Nursery Certifications
a. Indicate on nursery letterhead the name of plants in accordance with

the LHBH, including botanical common names, quality, and size.
b. Inspection certificate.
c. Mycorrhizal fungi inoculum for plant material treated
1.4.3 State Landscape Contractor's License
Construction company shall hold a landscape contractors license in the

state where the work is performed and have a minimum of five years
landscape construction experience. Submit copy of license and three
references for similar work completed in the last five years.
1.4.4 Percolation Test
Immediately following rough grading operation, identify a typical location

for one of the largest trees and or shrubs and excavate a pit per the
project details. Fill the pit with water to a depth of 12 inches. The
length of time required for the water to percolate into the soil, leaving
the pit empty, shall be measured by the project Landscape Architect and
verified by the Contracting Officer. Within six hours of the time the
water has drained from the pit, the Contractor, with the Contracting
Officer and project Landscape Architect present, shall again fill the pit
with water to a depth of 12 inches. If the water does not completely
percolate into the soil within 9 hours, a determination shall be made
whether a drainage system or a soil penetrant will be required for each
tree and or shrub being transplanted.
1.4.5 Pre-Installation Meeting
Convene a pre-installation meeting a minimum of one week prior to

commencing work of this section. Require attendance of parties directly
affecting work of this section. Review conditions of operations,
procedures and coordination with related work. Agenda shall include the
following:
a. Tour, inspect, and discuss conditions of planting materials.
b. Review planting schedule and maintenance.
c. Review required inspections.
d. Review environmental procedures.
1.5.1 Delivery
1.5.1.1 Branched Plant Delivery
Deliver with branches tied and exposed branches covered with material
which allows air circulation. Prevent damage to branches, trunks, root
systems, and root balls and desiccation of leaves.
1.5.1.2 Soil Amendment Delivery
Deliver to the site in original, unopened containers bearing

manufacturer's chemical analysis, name, trade name, or trademark, and
indication of conformance to state and federal laws. Instead of
containers, fertilizer, gypsum, sulfur, iron, and lime may be furnished in
bulk with a certificate indicating the above information. Store in dry
locations away from contaminates.
1.5.1.3 Plant Labels
Deliver plants with durable waterproof labels in weather-resistant ink.

Provide labels stating the correct botanical and common plant name and
variety as applicable and size as specified in the list of required
plants. Attach to plants, bundles, and containers of plants. Groups of
plants may be labeled by tagging one plant. Labels shall be legible for a
minimum of 60 days after delivery to the planting site.
1.5.2 Storage
1.5.2.1 Plant Storage and Protection
Store and protect plants not planted on the day of arrival at the site as
follows:
a. Shade and protect plants in outside storage areas from the wind and
direct sunlight until planted.
b. Keep plants in a moist condition until planted by watering with a fine

mist spray.
c. Do not store plant material directly on concrete or bituminous

surfaces.
1.5.2.2 Fertilizer, Gypsum, pH Adjusters and Mulch Storage
Store in dry locations away from contaminants.
1.5.2.3 Topsoil
Prior to stockpiling topsoil, eradicate on site undesirable growing

vegetation. Clear and grub existing vegetation three to four weeks prior
to stockpiling existing topsoil.
1.5.2.4 Root Control Barrier
Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective covering in dry

location. Store under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store
materials directly on ground.
1.5.3 Handling
Do not drop or dump plants from vehicles. Avoid damaging plants being
moved from nursery or storage area to planting site. Handle container
plants carefully to avoid damaging or breaking the earth ball or root
structure. Do not handle plants by the trunk or stem. Remove damaged
plants from the site.
1.5.4 TIME LIMITATION
Except for container-grown plant material, the time limitation from

digging to installing plant material shall be a maximum of 90 days. The
time limitation between installing the plant material and placing the
mulch shall be a maximum of 24 hours.
1.6 TIME RESTRICTIONS AND PLANTING CONDITIONS
Coordinate installation of planting materials during optimal planting

seasons for each type of plant material required.
1.6.1 Planting Dates
Plant all plants from March 15 to June 1 for spring planting; September 15
to November 15 for fall planting.
1.6.2 Restrictions
Do not plant when ground is frozen, snow covered, muddy, or when air
temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit
1.7 GUARANTEE
All plants shall be guaranteed for one year beginning on the date of
inspection by the Contracting Officer to commence the plant establishment
period, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except
for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse
by the Government or by weather conditions unusual for the warranty period.
Remove and replace dead planting materials immediately unless required to
plant in the succeeding planting season. At end of warranty period,

replace planting materials that die or have 25 percent or more of their
branches that die during the construction operations or the guarantee
period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PLANTS
2.1.1 Regulations and Varieties
Existing trees and shrubs to remain shall be protected and a planting plan
be arranged around them. Furnish nursery stock in accordance with
ANSI/ANLA Z60.1, except as otherwise specified or indicated. Each plant
or group of planting shall have a "key" number indicated on the nursery
certifications of the plant schedule. Furnish plants, including turf
grass, grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of
the project. Plants specified shall be low maintenance varieties,
tolerant of site's existing soils and climate . Spray plants budding into
leaf or having soft growth with an antidesiccant before digging. Plants of
the same specified size shall be of uniform size and character of growth.
Plants shall be chosen with their mature size and growth habit in mind to
avoid over-planting and conflict with other plants, structures or
underground utility lines. All plants shall comply with all Federal and
State Laws requiring inspection for plant diseases and infestation.
2.1.2 Shape and Condition
Well-branched, well-formed, sound, vigorous, healthy planting stock free

from disease, sunscald, windburn, abrasion, and harmful insects or insect
eggs and having a healthy, normal, and undamaged root system.
2.1.2.1 Deciduous Trees and Shrubs
Symmetrically developed and of uniform habit of growth, with straight

boles or stems, and free from objectionable disfigurements.
2.1.2.2 Evergreen Trees and Shrubs
Well developed symmetrical tops with typical spread of branches for each
particular species or variety.
2.1.2.3 Ground Covers and Vines
Number and length of runners and clump sizes indicated, and of the proper
age for the grade of plants indicated, furnished in removable containers,
integral containers, or formed homogeneous soil section.
2.1.3 Plant Size
Minimum sizes measured after pruning and with branches in normal position,
shall conform to measurements indicated, based on the average width or
height of the plant for the species as specified in ANSI/ANLA Z60.1.
Plants larger in size than specified may be provided with approval of the
Contracting Officer. When larger plants are provided, increase the ball
of earth or spread of roots in accordance with ANSI/ANLA Z60.1.
2.1.4 Root Ball Size
All box-grown, field potted, field boxed, collected, plantation grown,

bare root, balled and burlapped, container grown, processed-balled, and
in-ground fabric bag-grown root balls shall conform to ANSI/ANLA Z60.1.
All wrappings and ties shall be biodegradable. Root growth in container
grown plants shall be sufficient to hold earth intact when removed from
containers. Root bound plants will not be accepted.
2.1.4.1 Mycorrhizal fungi inoculum
Before shipment, root systems shall contain mycorrhizal fungi inoculum.
2.1.5 Growth of Trunk and Crown
2.1.5.1 Deciduous Trees
A height to caliper relationship shall be provided in accordance with

ANSI/ANLA Z60.1. Height of branching shall bear a relationship to the
size and species of tree specified and with the crown in good balance with
the trunk. The trees shall not be "poled" or the leader removed.
a. Single stem: The trunk shall be reasonably straight and symmetrical

with crown and have a persistent main leader.
b. Multi-stem: All countable stems, in aggregate, shall average the size

specified. To be considered a stem, there shall be no division of the
trunk which branches more than 6 inches from ground level.
2.1.5.2 Deciduous Shrubs
Deciduous shrubs shall have the height and number of primary stems
recommended by ANSI/ANLA Z60.1. Acceptable plant material shall be well
shaped, with sufficient well-spaced side branches, and recognized by the
trade as typical for the species grown in the region of the project.
2.1.5.3 Broadleaf Evergreen Plant Material
Broadleaf evergreen plant material shall have the height-to-spread ratio

recommended by ANSI/ANLA Z60.1. Acceptable plant material shall be well
shaped and recognized by the trade as typical for the variety grown in the
region of the project.
2.1.5.4 Ground Cover and Vine Plant Material
Ground cover and vine plant material shall have the minimum number of
runners and length of runner recommended by ANSI/ANLA Z60.1. Plant
material shall have heavy, well developed and balanced crown with
vigorous, well developed root system and shall be furnished in containers.
2.2 TOPSOIL
2.2.1 Existing Soil
Modify to conform to requirements specified in paragraph entitled

"Composition."
2.2.2 On-Site Topsoil
Surface soil stripped and stockpiled on site and modified as necessary to

meet the requirements specified for topsoil in paragraph entitled
"Composition." When available topsoil shall be existing surface soil
stripped and stockpiled on-site in accordance with Sections 31 00 00
EARTHWORK and 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.
2.2.3 Composition
Evaluate soil for use as topsoil in accordance with ASTM D5268. From 5 to
10 percent organic matter as determined by the topsoil composition tests
of the Organic Carbon, 6A, Chemical Analysis Method described in
DOA SSIR 42. Maximum particle size, 3/4 inch, with maximum 3 percent
retained on 1/4 inch screen. The pH shall be tested in accordance with
ASTM D4972. Topsoil shall be free of sticks, stones, roots, plants, and
other debris and objectionable materials. Other components shall conform
to the recommendations provided by Soils Testing Laboratory for growth and
establishment of specified plants.
2.3 SOIL CONDITIONERS
Provide singly or in combination as required to meet specified

requirements for topsoil. Soil conditioners shall be nontoxic to plants.
All soil amendments shall follow recommendations of Soils Testing
Laboratory determined by on-site sampling.
2.3.1 Lime
Commercial grade limestone containing a calcium carbonate equivalent

(C.C.E.) as specified in ASTM C602 of not less than 80 percent.
2.3.2 Aluminum Sulfate
Commercial grade.
2.3.3 Sulfur
100 percent elemental
2.3.4 Iron
100 percent elemental
2.3.5 Peat
Natural product of peat moss derived from a freshwater site and conforming
to ASTM D4427 and ASTM D5539 as modified herein. Shred and granulate peat
to pass a 1/2 inch mesh screen and condition in storage pile for minimum 6
months after excavation. Biobased content shall be a minimum of 100
percent. Peat shall not contain invasive species, including seeds.
2.3.6 Sand
Clean and free of materials harmful to plants.
2.3.6.1 Gradation
A minimum 95 percent by weight shall pass a No. 10 sieve and a minimum 10
percent by weight shall pass a No. 16 sieve. Greensand shall be balanced

with the inclusion of trace minerals and nutrients.
2.3.7 Super Absorbant Polymers
To improve water retention in soils, super absorbent polymers shall be

sized according to manufacturer's recommendations. Polymers shall be added
as a soil amendment and be cross-linked polyacrylamide with an absorption
capacity of 250-400 times its weight.
2.3.8 Perlite
Horticultural grade.
2.3.9 Composted Derivatives
Ground bark, nitrolized sawdust, humus or other green wood waste material
free of stones, sticks, invasive species, including seeds, and soil
stabilized with nitrogen and having the following properties:
2.3.9.1 Particle Size
Minimum percent by weight passing:
No. 4 mesh screen 95

No. 8 mesh screen 80
2.3.9.2 Nitrogen Content
Minimum percent based on dry weight:
Fir Sawdust 0.7

Fir or Pine Bark 1.0
2.3.9.3 Biobased Content
Minimum 100 percent.
2.3.10 Gypsum
Coarsely ground gypsum from recycled scrap gypsum board comprised of

calcium sulfate dihydrate 91 percent, calcium 22 percent, sulfur 17
percent; minimum 96 percent passing through 20 mesh screen, 100 percent
passing thru 16 mesh screen.
2.3.11 Vermiculite
Horticultural grade for planters.
2.3.12 Rotted Manure
Well rotted horse or cattle manure containing maximum 25 percent by volume

of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of seeds, stones,
sticks, soil, and other invasive species.
2.4 PLANTING SOIL MIXTURES
100 percent topsoil as specified herein.
2.5 FERTILIZER
Fertilizer for groundcover, wildflowers and grasses is not permitted.

Fertilizer for trees, plants, and shrubs shall be as recommended by plant
supplier, except synthetic chemical fertilizers are not permitted.
Fertilizers containing petrochemical additives or that have been treated
with pesticides or herbicides are not permitted.
2.5.1 Granular Fertilizer
Organic, granular controlled release fertilizer shall consist of minimum

percentages, by weight, of plant food nutrients per the recommendations of
Soils Testing Laboratory, determined by on-site sampling.
2.5.2 Fertilizer Tablets
Organic, plant tablets composed of tightly compressed fertilizer chips

forming a tablet that is insoluble in water, is designed to provide a
continuous release of nutrients for at least 24 months and shall contain
plant food nutrients following a minimum percentage by weight as
recommended by the Soils Testing Laboratory.
2.6 INERT MULCH
Free from noxious weeds, mold, pesticides, or other deleterious materials.
2.6.1 Inert Mulch Materials
Riverbank stone, crushed pit-run rock, and granite chips, 3/4 inch SRE;
color: Tan-Gray-Green (Sierra Verde).
2.6.2 Recycled Organic Mulch
Recycled mulch may include compost, tree trimmings, or pine needles with a
gradation that passes through a 2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inchscreen. It shall be
cleaned of all sticks a minimum 1 inch in diameter and plastic materials a
minimum 3 inches length. The material shall be treated to retard the
growth of mold and fungi.
2.7 STAKING AND GUYING MATERIAL
2.7.1 Staking Material
2.7.1.1 Tree Support Stakes
Rough sawn hard wood free of knots, rot, cross grain, bark, long slivers,
or other defects that impair strength. Stakes shall be minimum 2 inches
square or 2 1/2 inch diameter by 8 feet long, pointed at one end. .
2.7.2 Guying Material
2.7.2.1 Guying Wire
12 gauge annealed galvanized steel, ASTM A580/A580M.
2.7.2.2 Guying Cable
Minimum five-strand, 3/16 inch diameter galvanized steel cable plastic

coated.
2.7.3 Hose Chafing Guards
New or used 2 ply 3/4 inch diameter reinforced rubber or plastic hose,
black or dark green, all of same color.
2.7.4 Flags
White 3/4 inch diameter, schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be used as covering
for guying material and shall be a minimum of 48 inches long.
2.7.5 Turnbuckles
Galvanized or cadmium-plated steel with minimum 3 inch long openings

fitted with screw eyes. Eye bolts shall be galvanized or cadmium-plated
steel with one inch diameter eyes and screw length 1 1/2 inches, minimum.
2.7.6 Deadmen
4 by 8 inch rectangular or 8 inch diameter by36 inch long, redwood wood

material.
2.7.7 Metal Anchors
2.7.7.1 Driven Anchors
Malleable iron, arrow shaped, galvanized, sized as follows:
Tree Caliper Anchor Size
2 inches and under 3 inches
3 to 6 inches 4 inches
2.7.7.2 Screw Anchors
Steel, screw type with welded-on 3 inch round helical steel plate, minimum
3/8 inch diameter, 15 inches long.
2.7.8 Underground Tree Staking System
Provide anchor and staking per manufacturers recommendations for tree

rootball/container size.
2.8 ANTIDESICCANTS
Sprayable, water insoluble vinyl-vinledine complex which produce a

moisture retarding barrier not removable by rain or snow. Film shall form
at temperatures commonly encountered out of doors during planting season
and have a moisture vapor transmission rate (MVT) of the resultant film of
maximum 10 grams per 24 hours at 70 percent humidity.
2.9 ROOT CONTROL BARRIER
Pre-formed, linear barrier with integral vertical root deflecting ribs

constructed of ultraviolet resistant polypropylene material. Color to be
black .
2.10 WATER
Source of water to be approved by Contracting Officer and suitable quality

for irrigation and shall not contain elements toxic to plant life,
including acids, alkalis, salts, chemical pollutants, and organic matter.
Use collected storm water or graywater when available.
2.11 MYCORRHIZAL FUNGI INOCULUM
Mycorrhizal fungi inoculum shall be composed of multiple-fungus inoculum

as recommended by the manufacturer for the plant material specified.
The Contracting Officerand Landscape Architect of Record will inspect

plant materials at the project site and approve them. Tag plant materials
for size and quality.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXTENT OF WORK
Provide soil preparation, fertilizing, tree, shrub, groundcover, and

planting, edging, staking and guying, , erosion control materialand root
control barrier installation and a mulch topdressing of all newly graded
finished earth surfaces, unless indicated otherwise, and at all areas
inside or outside the limits of construction that are disturbed by the
Contractor's operations.
3.2 ALTERNATIVE HERBICIDE TREATMENT (SOLARIZING SOIL)
Within 48 hours of subsoil preparation, saturate soil with water to a

depth of 3 feet. Immediately stake polyethylene sheeting over area to be
planted. Stake tightly to surface of soil. Maintain sheeting in place
for a minimum of 6 weeks. Immediately after removing sheeting, cover area
to be planted with topsoil. Do not till soil prior to applying topsoil.
3.3 PREPARATION
3.3.1 Protection
Protect existing and proposed landscape features, elements, and sites from
damage or contamination. Protect trees, vegetation, and other designated
features by erecting high-visibility, reusable construction fencing.
Locate fence no closer to trees than the drip line. Plan equipment and
vehicle access to minimize and confine soil disturbance and compaction to
areas indicated on Drawings.
3.3.2 Layout
Stake out approved plant material locations and planter bed outlines on
the project site before digging plant pits or beds. The Contracting
Officer reserves the right to adjust plant material locations to meet

field conditions. Do not plant closer than 24 inches to a building wall,
pavement edge, fence or wall edge and other similar structures. Provide
on-site locations for excavated rock, soil, and vegetation.
3.3.3 Erosion Control
Provide erosion control and seeding with native plant species to protect
slopes.
3.3.4 Soil Preparation
3.3.4.1 pH Adjuster Application Rates
Apply pH adjuster at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of

the soils at the job site.
3.3.4.2 Soil Conditioner Application Rates
Apply soil conditioners at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis

of the soils at the job site.
3.3.4.3 Fertilizer Application Rates
Apply fertilizer at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of

the soils at the job site.
3.3.5 Root Control Barrier
Install linear polypropylene barrier a minimum 1/2 inch above finish

grade to prevent root growth over the barrier. Backfill the outside of
the barrier with 3/4 to one inch gravel a minimum width as recommended by
manufacturer. For linear barrier application use appropriate device to
connect two pieces.
3.3.6 Subsoil Drainage for Plant Pits and Beds
Provide as indicated. Backfill trenches as specified in Sections 31 00 00

EARTHWORK and 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.
3.4 PLANT BED PREPARATION
Verify location of underground utilities prior to excavation. Protect

existing adjacent turf before excavations are made. Do not disturb
topsoil and vegetation in areas outside those indicated on Drawings.
Where planting beds occur in existing turf areas, remove turf to a depth
that will ensure removal of entire root system. Measure depth of plant
pits from finished grade. Depth of plant pit excavation shall be as
indicated and provide proper relation between top of root ball and
finished grade. Install plant material as specified in paragraph entitled
"Plant Installation." Do not install trees within 10 feet of any utility
lines or building walls.
3.5 PLANT INSTALLATION
3.5.1 Individual Plant Pit Excavation
Excavate pits at least twice as large in diameter as the size of ball or

container to depth shown.
3.5.2 Plant Beds with Multiple Plants
Excavate plant beds continuously throughout entire bed as outlined to

depth shown.
3.5.3 Handling and Setting
Set plants on native soil and hold plumb in the center of the pit until
soil has been tamped firmly around root ball. Set plant materials, in
relation to surrounding finish grade, one to 2 inches above depth at
which they were grown in the nursery, collecting field or container.
Replace plant material whose root balls are cracked or damaged either
before or during the planting process.
Plant material shall be set in plant beds according to the drawings.

Backfill soil mixture shall be placed on previously scarified subsoil to
completely surround the root balls, and shall be brought to a smooth and
even surface, blending to existing areas.
3.5.3.1 Balled and Burlapped Stock
Backfill with prepared soil mixture to approximately half the depth of

ball and then tamp and water. Carefully remove or fold back excess burlap
and tying materials from the top a minimum 1/3 depth from the top of the
rootball. Tamp and complete backfill, place mulch topdressing, and
water. Remove wires and non-biodegradable materials from plant pit prior
to backfill operations.
3.5.3.2 Container Grown Stock
Remove from container and prevent damage to plant or root system.
3.5.3.3 Ground Covers and Vines
Plant after placing mulch topdressing. Do not remove plant materials from
flats or containers until immediately before planting. Space at intervals
indicated. Plant at a depth to sufficiently cover all roots. Start
watering areas planted as required by temperature and wind conditions.
Apply water at a rate sufficient to ensure thorough wetting of soil to a
depth of 6 inches without run off or puddling. Smooth planting areas
after planting to provide even, smooth finish. Mulch as indicated.
3.5.4 Earth Mounded Watering Basin for Individual Plant Pits
Form with topsoil around each plant by replacing a mound of topsoil around
the edge of each plant pit. Watering basins shall be 6 inches deep for
trees and 4 inches deep for shrubs. Eliminate basins around plants in
plant beds containing multiple plants.
3.5.5 Placement of Mulch Topdressing
Place specified mulch topdressing on top of weed control fabric covering

total area enclosed by edging. Place mulch topdressing to a depth of 3
inches.
3.5.6 Mulch Topdressing
Provide mulch topdressing over entire planter bed surfaces and individual
plant surfaces including earth mound watering basin around plants to a

depth of 3 inches after completion of plant installation and before
watering. Keep mulch out of the crowns of shrubs. Place mulch a minimum
2 to 3 inches away from trunk of shrub or tree.
3.5.7 Installation of Edging
Install concrete edging material as indicated.
3.5.8 Fertilization
3.5.8.1 Fertilizer Tablets
Place fertilizer planting tablets evenly spaced around the plant pits to
the manufacturer's recommended depth.
3.5.8.2 Granular Fertilizer
Apply granular fertilizer as a top coat prior to placing mulch layer and
water thoroughly.
3.5.9 Watering
Start watering areas planted as required by temperature and wind

conditions. Slow deep watering shall be used. Apply water at a rate
sufficient to ensure thorough wetting of soil to a depth of 12 inches
without run off or puddling. Watering of other plant material or adjacent
areas shall be prevented.
3.5.10 Staking and Guying
3.5.10.1 Staking
Stake plants with the number of stakes indicated as detailed. Attach guy
wire half the tree height but not more than 5 feet high. Drive stakes to
a depth of 3 feet into the ground outside the plant pit. Do not injure
the root ball. Use hose chafer guards where guy wire comes in contact
with tree trunk.
3.5.10.2 Guying
Guy plants as indicated. Attach guying cable around the tree trunk at an
angle of 45 degrees at approximately 1/2 of the trunk height. Protect tree
trunks with chafing guards where guying wire contacts the tree trunk.
Anchor guys to galvanized iron pipe anchors. Cover each guying cable with
3/4 inch PVC pipe as detailed.
3.5.10.3 Chafing Guards
Use hose chafing guards, as specified where guy cable will contact the
plant.
3.5.10.4 Galvanized Iron Anchors
Drive galvanized iron anchors into firm ground outside of plant pit a
minimum 30 inches below finish grade. Place equal distance from tree
trunk and around the plant pit. Top of pipe shall be 1 inch below grade.
3.5.10.5 Underground Tree Staking System
Install underground tree staking system per manufacturer's instructions.
3.5.11 Pruning
Prune in accordance with safety requirement of TCIA Z133.1.
3.5.11.1 Trees and Shrubs
Remove dead and broken branches. Prune to correct structural defects

only. Retain typical growth shape of individual plants with as much
height and spread as practical. Do not cut central leader on trees. Make
cuts with sharp instruments. Do not flush cut with trunk or adjacent
branches. Collars shall remain in place. Pruning shall be accomplished by
trained and experienced personnel and shall be accordance with TCIA A300P1.
3.5.11.2 Wound Dressing
Do not apply tree wound dressing to cuts.
3.6 RESTORATION AND CLEAN UP
3.6.1 Restoration
Turf areas, pavements and facilities that have been damaged from the
planting operation shall be restored to original condition at the
3.6.2 Clean Up
Excess and waste material shall be removed from the installed area and
shall be disposed offsite at an approved landfill, recycling center, or
composting center. Separate and recycle or reuse the following landscape
waste materials: nylon straps, wire, ball wrap, burlap, wood stakes.
Adjacent paved areas shall be cleared.
SECTION 33 11 23
NATURAL GAS AND LIQUID PETROLEUM PIPING

11/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM D2513 (2014; E 2014) Thermoplastic Gas Pressure

Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings

Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for
Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene
Pipe and Tubing
NFPA 54 (2015) National Fuel Gas Code
49 CFR 192 Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by

Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards
Section 23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to

this section, with additions and modifications specified herein.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Warning and identification tape
SD-07 Certificates
PE welder's qualifications
PE pipe and fittings
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and
manufacturer's visual joint appearance chart.
1.4.1 PE Welder's Qualifications
Prior to installation, Contractor shall have supervising and installing

personnel trained by a PE pipe manufacturer's sponsored course of not less
than one week duration, or present proof satisfactory to the Contracting
Officer that personnel are currently working in the installation of PE gas
distribution lines.
1.4.2 Safety Standards
49 CFR 192 .
Handle, transport, and store plastic pipe and fittings carefully. Plug or
cap pipe ends during transportation or storage to minimize dirt and
moisture entry. Do not subject to abrasion or concentrated external
loads. Discard PE pipe sections and fittings that have been damaged.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Conform to NFPA 54 and with requirements specified herein. Supply piping

to appliances or equipment shall be at least as large as the inlets
thereof.
2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS
2.2.1 Underground Polyethylene (PE)
PE pipe and fittings are as follows:
a. Pipe: ASTM D2513, 100 psig working pressure, Standard Dimension Ratio
(SDR), the ratio of pipe diameter to wall thickness, 11.5 maximum.
b. Socket Fittings: ASTM D2683.
c. Butt-Fusion Fittings: ASTM D2513, molded.
2.2.2 Transition Fittings
a. Plastic to Plastic: Manufacturer's standard slip-on PE mechanical

coupling, molded, with stainless-steel ring support, O-ring seals, and
rated for 150 psig gas service. Manufacturer's standard fused tapping
(PE-to-PE) tee assembly with shut-off feature.
2.3 BURIED UTILITY WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Provide detectable aluminum-foil plastic-backed tape or detectable

magnetic plastic tape manufactured specifically for warning and
identification of buried piping. Tape shall be detectable by an
electronic detection instrument. Provide tape in rolls, 3 inch minimum
width, color-coded yellow for natural gas, with warning and identification
imprinted in bold black letters continuously and repeatedly over entire
tape length. Warning and identification shall be "CAUTION BURIED GAS

PIPING BELOW" or similar wording. Use permanent code and letter coloring
unaffected by moisture and other substances contained in trench backfill
material.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install gas piping, appliances, and equipment in accordance with NFPA 54.
3.1.1 Excavating and Backfilling
Perform excavating and backfilling of pipe trenches as specified in

Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. Place pipe directly in trench bottom and
cover with minimum 3 inches of sand to top of pipe. If trench bottom is
rocky, place pipe on a 3 inch bed of sand and cover as above. Provide
remaining backfilling. Coordinate provision of utility warning and
identification tape with backfill operation. Bury utility warning and
identification tape with printed side up at the depth of pipe indicated on
the drawings.
3.1.2 Piping
Cut pipe to actual dimensions and assemble to prevent residual stress.
3.1.2.1 Cleanliness
Clean inside of pipe and fittings before installation. Blow lines clear
using 80 to 100 psig clean dry compressed air. Cap or plug pipe ends to
maintain cleanliness throughout installation.
3.1.2.2 Buried Plastic Lines
Provide totally PE piping. Prior to installation, obtain printed

instructions and technical assistance in proper installation techniques
from pipe manufacturer. When joining new PE pipe to existing pipe line,
ascertain what procedural changes in the fusion process is necessary to
attain optimum bonding.
a. PE Piping: Prior to installation, Contractor shall have supervising

and installing personnel, certified in accordance with paragraph
entitled "Welder's Qualifications." Provide fusion-welded joints
except where transitions have been specified. Use electrically heated
tools, thermostatically controlled and equipped with temperature
indication. (Where connection must be made to existing plastic pipe,
contractor shall be responsible for determination of compatibility of
materials and procedural changes in fusion process necessary to attain
maximum integrity of bond.)
b. Laying PE Pipe: Bury pipe 18 inches below finish grade or match

existing cover depth, whichever is greater. Lay in accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.1.2.3 Connections to Existing Pipeline
When making connections to live gas mains, use pressure tight installation
equipment operated by workmen trained and experienced in making hot taps.
For connections to existing underground pipeline or service branch, use
transition fittings for dissimilar materials.
3.2.1 PE Fusion Welding Inspection
Visually inspect butt joints by comparing with, manufacturer's visual

joint appearance chart. Inspect fusion joints for proper fused
connection. Replace defective joints by cutting out defective joints or
replacing fittings. Inspect 100 percent of all joints and reinspect all
corrections. Arrange with the pipe manufacturer's representative in the
presence of the Contracting Officer to make first time inspection.
3.2.2 Pressure Tests
Use test pressure of 1 1/2 times maximum working pressure, but in no case
less than 50 psig. Do not test until every joint has set and cooled at
least 8 hours at temperatures above 50 degrees F. Conduct testing before
backfilling; however, place sufficient backfill material between fittings
to hold pipe in place during tests. Test system gas tight in accordance
with NFPA 54. Use clean dry air or inert gas, such as nitrogen or carbon
dioxide, for testing. Systems which may be contaminated by gas shall
first be purged as specified. Make tests on entire system or on sections
that can be isolated by valves. After pressurization, isolate entire
piping system from sources of air during test period. Maintain test
pressure for at least 8 hours between times of first and last reading of
pressure and temperature. Take first reading at least one hour after test
pressure has been applied. Do not take test readings during rapid weather
changes. Provide temperature same as actual trench conditions. There
shall be no reduction in the applied test pressure other than that due to
a change in ambient temperature. Allow for ambient temperature change in
accordance with the relationship PF + 14.7 = (P1 + 14.7) (T2 + 460) / T1 +
460), in which "T" and "PF" represent Fahrenheit temperature and gage
pressure, respectively, subscripts "1" and "2" denote initial and final
readings, and "PF" is the calculated final pressure. If "PF" exceeds the
measured final pressure (final gage reading) by 1/2 psi or more, isolate
sections of the piping system, retest each section individually, and apply
a solution of warm soapy water to joints of each section for which a
reduction in pressure occurs after allowing for ambient temperature
change. Repair leaking joints and repeat test until no reduction in
pressure occurs. In performing tests, use a test gage calibrated in one
psi increments and readable to 1/2 psi.
3.2.3 System Purging
After completing pressure tests, and before testing a gas contaminated

line, purge line with nitrogen at junction with main line to remove all
air and gas. Clear completed line by attaching a test pilot fixture at
capped stub-in line at building location and let gas flow until test pilot
ignites. Procedures shall conform to NFPA 54.
-CAUTION-
Failure to purge may result in explosion

within line when air-to-gas is at correct
mixture.
SECTION 33 30 00
SANITARY SEWERS
04/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1 Sanitary Sewer Gravity Pipeline
Provide laterals of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe. Provide

building connections 4 inch lines of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe.
Provide new and modify existing exterior sanitary gravity sewer piping
and appurtenances. Provide each system complete and ready for operation.
The exterior sanitary gravity sewer system includes equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship as specified herein more than 5 feet outside
of building walls.
1.2 REFERENCES

ASTM C969 (2002; R 2009) Standard Practice for

Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance
Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe
Sewer Lines

Applications
ASTM D2412 (2011) Determination of External Loading

Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by
Parallel-Plate Loading
ASTM D3034 (2014a) Standard Specification for Type

PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe
and Fittings


Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining
Plastic Pipe
ASTM F949 (2010) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Corrugated Sewer Pipe with a Smooth
Interior and Fittings
UNI-BELL PVC PIPE ASSOCIATION (UBPPA)
UBPPA UNI-B-6 (1998) Recommended Practice for

Low-Pressure Air Testing of Installed
Sewer Pipe
1.3 SUBMITTALS

Existing Conditions
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Pipeline materials
SD-06 Test Reports
Reports
Install specified materials by a licensed underground utility Contractor

licensed for such work in the state where the work is to be performed.
Installing Contractor's License shall be current and be state certified or
state registered.
1.4.2 Drawings
a. Submit Installation Drawings showing complete detail, both plan and

side view details with proper layout and elevations.
b. Submit manufacturer's shop drawings for frames, covers, and gratings.
c. Submit As-Built Drawings for the complete sanitary sewer system

showing complete detail with all dimensions, both above and below
grade, including invert elevation.
d. Sign and seal As-Built Drawings by a Professional Surveyor and

Mapper. Include the following statement: "All potable water lines
crossed by sanitary hazard mains are in accordance with the permitted
utility separation requirements."
1.5.1 Delivery and Storage
1.5.1.1 Piping
Inspect materials delivered to site for damage; store with minimum of

handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective
coverings. Store plastic piping and jointing materials and rubber gaskets
under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on
the ground. Keep inside of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris.
1.5.1.2 Metal Items
Check upon arrival; identify and segregate as to types, functions, and

sizes. Store off the ground in a manner affording easy accessibility and
not causing excessive rusting or coating with grease or other
objectionable materials.
1.5.2 Handling
Handle pipe, fittings, and other accessories in such manner as to ensure

delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition. Carry, do not drag,
pipe to trench.
Submit drawings of existing conditions, after a thorough inspection of the

area in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Details shall include
the environmental conditions of the site and adjacent areas. Submit
copies of the records for verification before starting work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPELINE MATERIALS
Pipe shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements

specified below. Submit manufacturer's standard drawings or catalog cuts.
2.1.1 PVC Plastic Gravity Sewer Piping
2.1.1.1 PVC Plastic Gravity Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D3034, SDR 35, or ASTM F949 with ends suitable for elastomeric gasket
joints.
2.1.1.2 PVC Plastic Gravity Joints and Jointing Material
Joints shall conform to ASTM D3212. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F477.
2.2 REPORTS
Compaction and density test shall be in accordance with Section 31 00 00

EARTHWORK. Submit Test Reports. Submit Inspection Reports for daily
activities during the installation of the sanitary system. Information in
the report shall be detailed enough to describe location of work and
amount of pipe laid in place, measured in linear feet.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES AND APPURTENANT CONSTRUCTION
3.1.1 General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines
These general requirements apply except where specific exception is made

in the following paragraphs entitled "Special Requirements."
3.1.1.1 Location
The work covered by this section shall terminate at a point approximately

5 feet from the building , unless otherwise indicated. Where sanitary
sewer lines pass above water lines, encase sewer in concrete for a
distance of 10 feet on each side of the crossing, or substitute
rubber-gasketed pressure pipe for the pipe being used for the same
distance. Where sanitary sewer lines pass below water lines, lay pipe so
that no joint in the sewer line will be closer than 3 feet, horizontal
distance, to the water line.
3.1.1.2 Earthwork
Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
3.1.1.3 Pipe Laying and Jointing
Inspect each pipe and fitting before and after installation; replace those
found defective and remove from site. Provide proper facilities for
lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Lay nonpressure pipe with the
bell or groove ends in the upgrade direction. Adjust spigots in bells and
tongues in grooves to give a uniform space all around. Blocking or
wedging between bells and spigots or tongues and grooves will not be
permitted. Replace by one of the proper dimensions, pipe or fittings that
do not allow sufficient space for installation of joint material. At the
end of each work day, close open ends of pipe temporarily with wood blocks
or bulkheads. Provide batterboards not more than 25 feet apart in
trenches for checking and ensuring that pipe invert elevations are as
indicated. Laser beam method may be used in lieu of batterboards for the
same purpose. Branch connections shall be made by use of regular fittings
or solvent cemented saddles as approved. Saddles for PVC pipe shall
conform to Table 4 of ASTM D3034.
3.1.1.4 Connections to Existing Lines
Obtain approval from the Contracting Officer before making connection to

existing line. Conduct work so that there is minimum interruption of
service on existing line. Provide bypass of existing sewer system for
duration of work on the existing sewer line to be approved by Contracting
Officer.
3.1.2 Special Requirements
3.1.2.1 Installation of PVC Plastic Piping
Install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General

Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" of this section and with the
requirements of ASTM D2321 for laying and joining pipe and fittings. Make
joints with the gaskets specified for joints with this piping and assemble
in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D2321 for assembly of joints.
Make joints to other pipe materials in accordance with the recommendations

of the plastic pipe manufacturer.
3.1.3 Installations of Wye Branches
Cutting into piping for connections shall not be done except in special
approved cases. When the connecting pipe cannot be adequately supported
on undisturbed earth or tamped backfill, the pipe shall be encased in
concrete backfill or supported on a concrete cradle as directed. Concrete
required because of conditions resulting from faulty construction methods
or negligence shall be installed at no additional cost to the Government.
The installation of wye branches in an existing sewer shall be made by a
method which does not damage the integrity of the existing sewer. One
acceptable method consists of removing one pipe section, breaking off the
upper half of the bell of the next lower section and half of the running
bell of wye section. After placing the new section, it shall be rotated
so that the broken half of the bell will be at the bottom. The two joints
shall then be made with joint packing and cement mortar.
3.2.1 Field Tests and Inspections
The Contracting Officer will conduct field inspections and witness field
tests specified in this section. Perform field tests and provide labor,
equipment, and incidentals required for testing. Be able to produce
evidence, when required, that each item of work has been constructed in
accordance with the drawings and specifications.
3.2.2 Tests for Nonpressure Lines
Check each straight run of pipeline for gross deficiencies by holding a

light in a manhole; it shall show a practically full circle of light
through the pipeline when viewed from the adjoining end of line. When
pressure piping is used in a nonpressure line for nonpressure use, test
this piping as specified for nonpressure pipe.
3.2.2.1 Leakage Tests
Test lines for leakage by either infiltration tests or exfiltration tests,

or by low-pressure air tests. Prior to testing for leakage, backfill
trench up to at least lower half of pipe. When necessary to prevent
pipeline movement during testing, place additional backfill around pipe
sufficient to prevent movement, but leaving joints uncovered to permit
inspection. When leakage or pressure drop exceeds the allowable amount
specified, make satisfactory correction and retest pipeline section in the
same manner. Correct visible leaks regardless of leakage test results.
3.2.2.1.1 Infiltration Tests and Exfiltration Tests
Perform these tests for sewer lines made of the specified materials, not
only concrete, in accordance with ASTM C969. Make calculations in
accordance with the Appendix to ASTM C969.
3.2.2.1.2 Low-Pressure Air Tests
Perform tests as follows:
3.2.2.1.2.1 PVC Plastic Pipelines
Test in accordance with UBPPA UNI-B-6. Allowable pressure drop shall be

as given in UBPPA UNI-B-6. Make calculations in accordance with the
Appendix to UBPPA UNI-B-6.
3.2.2.2 Deflection Testing
Perform a deflection test on entire length of installed plastic pipeline

on completion of work adjacent to and over the pipeline, including leakage
tests, backfilling, placement of fill, grading, paving, concreting, and
any other superimposed loads determined in accordance with ASTM D2412.
Deflection of pipe in the installed pipeline under external loads shall
not exceed 4.5 percent of the average inside diameter of pipe. Determine
whether the allowable deflection has been exceeded by use of a
pull-through device or a deflection measuring device.
3.2.2.2.1 Pull-Through Device
This device shall be a spherical, spheroidal, or elliptical ball, a

cylinder, or circular sections fused to a common shaft. Circular sections
shall be so spaced on the shaft that distance from external faces of front
and back sections will equal or exceed diameter of the circular section.
Pull-through device may also be of a design promulgated by the Uni-Bell
Plastic Pipe Association, provided the device meets the applicable
requirements specified in this paragraph, including those for diameter of
the device, and that the mandrel has a minimum of 9 arms. Ball, cylinder,
or circular sections shall conform to the following:
a. A diameter, or minor diameter as applicable, of 95 percent of the

average inside diameter of the pipe; tolerance of plus 0.5 percent
will be permitted.
b. Homogeneous material throughout, shall have a density greater than 1.0

as related to water at 39.2 degrees F, and shall have a surface
Brinell hardness of not less than 150.
c. Center bored and through-bolted with a 1/4 inch minimum diameter steel
shaft having a yield strength of not less than 70,000 psi, with eyes
or loops at each end for attaching pulling cables.
d. Each eye or loop shall be suitably backed with a flange or heavy

washer such that a pull exerted on opposite end of shaft will produce
compression throughout remote end.
3.2.2.2.2 Deflection Measuring Device
Sensitive to 1.0 percent of the diameter of the pipe being tested and
shall be accurate to 1.0 percent of the indicated dimension. Deflection
measuring device shall be approved prior to use.
3.2.2.2.3 Pull-Through Device Procedure
Pass the pull-through device through each run of pipe, either by pulling
it through or flushing it through with water. If the device fails to pass
freely through a pipe run, replace pipe which has the excessive deflection
and completely retest in same manner and under same conditions.
3.2.2.2.4 Deflection measuring device procedure
Measure deflections through each run of installed pipe. If deflection

readings in excess of 4.5 percent of average inside diameter of pipe are
obtained, retest pipe by a run from the opposite direction. If retest
continues to show a deflection in excess of 4.5 percent of average inside
diameter of pipe, replace pipe which has excessive deflection and
completely retest in same manner and under same conditions.
SECTION 33 40 00
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES

02/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Gray Iron Castings

Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM C1103 (2003; R 2009) Standard Practice for Joint

Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast
Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines

Pressure Method
ASTM C270 (2014) Standard Specification for Mortar

for Unit Masonry

Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe
and Fittings



PVC Expansion
ASTM D1784 (2011) Standard Specification for Rigid

Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and
Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Compounds
Place by the Rubber Balloon Method

Applications
ASTM D3034 (2014a) Standard Specification for Type

PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe
and Fittings

ASTM D6938 (2010) Standard Test Method for In-Place

Density and Water Content of Soil and
Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow
Depth)
ASTM F1417 (2011a) Standard Test Method for

Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity
Sewer Lines Using Low Pressure Air
1.2 SUBMITTALS

approval.
SD-03 Product Data
Placing Pipe
Submit printed copies of the manufacturer's recommendations for

installation procedures of the material being placed, prior to
installation.
SD-04 Samples
Pipe for Storm Drains
SD-07 Certificates
Resin Certification
Pipeline Testing
Hydrostatic Test on Watertight Joints
Determination of Density
Frame and Cover
1.3.1 Delivery and Storage
Materials delivered to site shall be inspected for damage, unloaded, and

stored with a minimum of handling. Materials shall not be stored directly
on the ground. The inside of pipes and fittings shall be kept free of
dirt and debris. Before, during, and after installation, plastic pipe and
fittings shall be protected from any environment that would result in
damage or deterioration to the material. Keep a copy of the

manufacturer's instructions available at the construction site at all
times and follow these instructions unless directed otherwise by the
Contracting Officer. Solvents, solvent compounds, lubricants, elastomeric
gaskets, and any similar materials required to install plastic pipe shall
be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall
be discarded if the storage period exceeds the recommended shelf life.
Solvents in use shall be discarded when the recommended pot life is
exceeded.
1.3.2 Handling
Materials shall be handled in a manner that ensures delivery to the trench

in sound, undamaged condition. Pipe shall be carried to the trench, not
dragged.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE FOR STORM DRAINS
Pipe for storm drains shall be of the sizes indicated and shall conform to
the requirements specified.
2.1.1 PVC Pipe
Submit the pipe manufacturer's resin certification, indicating the cell

classification of PVC used to manufacture the pipe, prior to installation
of the pipe.
2.1.1.1 Type PSM PVC Pipe
ASTM D3034, Type PSM, maximum SDR 35, produced from PVC certified by the
compounder as meeting the requirements of ASTM D1784, minimum cell class
12454-B.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
2.2.1 Concrete
Unless otherwise specified, concrete and reinforced concrete shall conform

to the requirements for 4,000 psi concrete. The concrete mixture shall
have air content by volume of concrete, based on measurements made
immediately after discharge from the mixer, of 5 to 7 percent when maximum
size of coarse aggregate exceeds 1-1/2 inches. Air content shall be
determined in accordance with ASTM C231/C231M. The concrete covering over
steel reinforcing shall not be less than 1 inch thick for covers and not
less than 1-1/2 inches thick for walls and flooring. Concrete covering
deposited directly against the ground shall have a thickness of at least 3
inches between steel and ground. Expansion-joint filler material shall
conform to ASTM D1751, or ASTM D1752, or shall be resin-impregnated
fiberboard conforming to the physical requirements of ASTM D1752.
2.2.2 Mortar
Mortar for pipe joints, connections to other drainage structures, and

brick or block construction shall conform to ASTM C270, Type M, except
that the maximum placement time shall be 1 hour. The quantity of water in
the mixture shall be sufficient to produce a stiff workable mortar. Water
shall be clean and free of harmful acids, alkalis, and organic
impurities. The mortar shall be used within 30 minutes after the

ingredients are mixed with water. The inside of the joint shall be wiped
clean and finished smooth. The mortar head on the outside shall be
protected from air and sun with a proper covering until satisfactorily
cured.
2.2.3 Frame and Cover
Submit certification on the ability of frame and cover to carry the

imposed live load. Frame and cover shall be cast gray iron, ASTM A48/A48M,
Class 35B; cast ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. Weight, shape,
and size shall be as indicated on the plans. The word "Storm Sewer" shall
be stamped or cast into covers so that it is plainly visible.
2.2.4 Joints
2.2.4.1 PVC Plastic Pipes
Joints shall be solvent cement or elastomeric gasket type in accordance

with the specification for the pipe and as recommended by the pipe
manufacturer.
2.3 HYDROSTATIC TEST ON WATERTIGHT JOINTS
2.3.1 PVC Pipe
A hydrostatic test shall be made on the watertight joint types as

proposed. Only one sample joint of each type needs testing; however, if
the sample joint fails because of faulty design or workmanship, an
additional sample joint may be tested. During the test period, gaskets or
other jointing material shall be protected from extreme temperatures which
might adversely affect the performance of such materials. Test
requirements for joints in clay pipe shall conform to ASTM C425. Test
requirements for joints in PVC plastic pipe shall conform to ASTM D3212.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION FOR STORM DRAINS, AND DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Excavation of trenches, and for appurtenances and backfilling for culverts

and storm drains, shall be in accordance with the applicable portions of
Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK and the requirements specified below.
3.1.1 Trenching
The width of trenches at any point below the top of the pipe shall be not
greater than the outside diameter of the pipe plus 12 inches on each side
of pipeto permit satisfactory jointing and thorough tamping of the bedding
material under and around the pipe. Sheeting and bracing, where required,
shall be placed within the trench width as specified, without any
overexcavation. Where trench widths are exceeded, redesign with a
resultant increase in cost of stronger pipe or special installation
procedures will be necessary. Cost of this redesign and increased cost of
pipe or installation shall be borne by the Contractor without additional
cost to the Government.
3.1.2 Removal of Unstable Material
Where wet or otherwise unstable soil incapable of properly supporting the
pipe, as determined by the Contracting Officer, is unexpectedly

encountered in the bottom of a trench, such material shall be removed to
the depth required and replaced to the proper grade with select granular
material, compacted as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING. When removal of
unstable material is due to the fault or neglect of the Contractor while
performing shoring and sheeting, water removal, or other specified
requirements, such removal and replacement shall be performed at no
3.2 BEDDING
The bedding surface for the pipe shall provide a firm foundation of
uniform density throughout the entire length of the pipe.
3.2.1 Plastic Pipe
Bedding for PVC pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2321. Use Class
IB or II material for bedding, haunching, and initial backfill.
3.3 PLACING PIPE
Each pipe shall be thoroughly examined before being laid; defective or

damaged pipe shall not be used. Plastic pipe shall be protected from
exposure to direct sunlight prior to laying, if necessary to maintain
adequate pipe stiffness and meet installation deflection requirements.
Pipelines shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated. Proper
facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches.
Lifting lugs in vertically elongated metal pipe shall be placed in the
same vertical plane as the major axis of the pipe. Pipe shall not be laid
in water, and pipe shall not be laid when trench conditions or weather are
unsuitable for such work. Diversion of drainage or dewatering of trenches
during construction shall be provided as necessary. Deflection of
installed flexible pipe shall not exceed the following limits:
TYPE OF PIPE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE

DEFLECTION (percent)
Plastic (PVC) 5
Note post installation requirements of paragraph DEFLECTION TESTING in

PART 3 of this specification for all pipe products including deflection
testing requirements for flexible pipe.
3.3.1 PVC Pipe
Laying shall proceed upgrade with spigot ends of bell-and-spigot pipe and
tongue ends of tongue-and-groove pipe pointing in the direction of the
flow.
3.4 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
3.4.1 Drainage Appurtenances
Construction shall be of concrete; complete with frames and covers where

indicated. Pipe connections to concrete cleanout boxes shall be made
mortar type connections per plans.
3.5 BACKFILLING
3.5.1 Backfilling Pipe in Trenches
After the pipe has been properly bedded, selected material from excavation
or borrow, at a moisture content that will facilitate compaction, shall be
placed along both sides of pipe in layers not exceeding 8 inches in
compacted depth. The backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of
pipe for the full length of pipe. The fill shall be thoroughly compacted
under the haunches of the pipe. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted
with mechanical tampers or rammers. This method of filling and compacting
shall continue until the fill has reached an elevation of at least 12
inches above the top of the pipe for flexible pipe. The remainder of the
trench shall be backfilled and compacted by spreading and rolling or
compacted by mechanical rammers or tampers in layers not exceeding 8 inches.
Tests for density shall be made as necessary to ensure conformance to the
compaction requirements specified below. Where it is necessary, in the
opinion of the Contracting Officer, that sheeting or portions of bracing
used be left in place, the contract will be adjusted accordingly.
Untreated sheeting shall not be left in place beneath structures or
pavements.
3.5.2 Backfilling Pipe in Fill Sections
For pipe placed in fill sections, backfill material and the placement and
compaction procedures shall be as specified below. The fill material
shall be uniformly spread in layers longitudinally on both sides of the
pipe, not exceeding 8 inches in compacted depth, and shall be compacted by
rolling parallel with pipe or by mechanical tamping or ramming. Prior to
commencing normal filling operations, the crown width of the fill at a
height of 12 inches above the top of the pipe shall extend a distance of
not less than twice the outside pipe diameter on each side of the pipe or
12 feet, whichever is less. After the backfill has reached at least 12
inches above the top of the pipe, the remainder of the fill shall be
placed and thoroughly compacted in layers not exceeding 8 inches. Use
select granular material for this entire region of backfill for flexible
pipe installations.
3.5.3 Movement of Construction Machinery
When compacting by rolling or operating heavy equipment parallel with the

pipe, displacement of or injury to the pipe shall be avoided. Movement of
construction machinery over a culvert or storm drain at any stage of
construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Any damaged pipe shall be
repaired or replaced.
3.5.4 Compaction
Cohesionless materials include gravels, gravel-sand mixtures, sands, and

gravelly sands. Cohesive materials include clayey and silty gravels,
gravel-silt mixtures, clayey and silty sands, sand-clay mixtures, clays,
silts, and very fine sands. When results of compaction tests for
moisture-density relations are recorded on graphs, cohesionless soils will
show straight lines or reverse-shaped moisture-density curves, and
cohesive soils will show normal moisture-density curves.
3.5.4.2 Minimum Density
Backfill over and around the pipe and backfill around and adjacent to
drainage structures shall be compacted at the approved moisture content to
the following applicable minimum density shall be 95 percent relative
compaction.
3.5.5 Determination of Density
Testing is the responsibility of the Contractor and performed at no

additional cost to the Government. Testing shall be performed by an
approved commercial testing laboratory or by the Contractor subject to
approval. Tests shall be performed in sufficient number to ensure that
specified density is being obtained. Laboratory tests for
moisture-density relations shall be made in accordance with ASTM D1557
except that mechanical tampers may be used provided the results are
correlated with those obtained with the specified hand tamper. Field
density tests shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D2167 or
ASTM D6938. When ASTM D6938 is used, the calibration curves shall be
checked and adjusted, if necessary, using the sand cone method as
described in paragraph Calibration of the referenced publications.
ASTM D6938 results in a wet unit weight of soil and ASTM D6938 shall be
used to determine the moisture content of the soil. The calibration
curves furnished with the moisture gauges shall be checked along with
density calibration checks as described in ASTM D6938. Test results shall
be furnished the Contracting Officer. The calibration checks of both the
density and moisture gauges shall be made at the beginning of a job on
each different type of material encountered and at intervals as directed.
3.6 PIPELINE TESTING
3.6.1 Leakage Tests
Lines shall be tested for leakage by low pressure air or water testing or
exfiltration tests, as appropriate. Low pressure air testing for plastic
pipe shall conform to ASTM F1417. Testing of individual joints for
leakage by low pressure air or water shall conform to ASTM C1103. Prior
to exfiltration tests, the trench shall be backfilled up to at least the
lower half of the pipe. If required, sufficient additional backfill shall
be placed to prevent pipe movement during testing, leaving the joints
uncovered to permit inspection. Visible leaks encountered shall be
corrected regardless of leakage test results. When the water table is 2
feet or more above the top of the pipe at the upper end of the pipeline
section to be tested, infiltration shall be measured using a suitable weir
or other device acceptable to the Contracting Officer. An exfiltration
test shall be made by filling the line to be tested with water so that a
head of at least 2 feet is provided above both the water table and the top
of the pipe at the upper end of the pipeline to be tested. The filled
line shall be allowed to stand until the pipe has reached its maximum
absorption, but not less than 4 hours. After absorption, the head shall
be reestablished. The amount of water required to maintain this water
level during a 2-hour test period shall be measured. Leakage as measured
by the exfiltration test shall not exceed 0.2 gallons per inch in diameter
per 100 feet of pipeline per hour. When leakage exceeds the maximum
amount specified, satisfactory correction shall be made and retesting
accomplished.
3.6.2 Post-Installation Inspection
Check each flexible pipe (PVC) for rips, tears, joint separations, soil
migration through the joint, cracks, localized bucking, bulges, settlement
and alignment.
a. Replace pipes having cracks greater than 0.1 inches in width or

deflection greater than 5 percent deflection. An engineer shall
evaluate all pipes with cracks greater than 0.01 inches but less than
0.10 inches to determine if any remediation or repair is required.
Repair or replace any pipe with crack exhibiting displacement across
the crack, exhibiting bulges, creases, tears, spalls, or delamination.
b. Reports: The deflection results and final post installation

inspection report shall include: a copy of all video taken, pipe
location identification, equipment used for inspection, inspector
name, deviation from design, grade, deviation from line, deflection
and deformation of flexible pipe systems, inspector notes, condition
of joints, condition of pipe wall (e.g. distress, cracking, wall
damage dents, bulges, creases, tears, holes, etc.).
SECTION 33 71 02
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

02/15
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


(AASHTO)
AASHTO HB-17 (2002; Errata 2003; Errata 2005, 17th

Edition) Standard Specifications for
Highway Bridges
ACI 318M (2011; Errata 2013) Building Code

Requirements for Structural Concrete &
Commentary
ASSOCIATION OF EDISON ILLUMINATING COMPANIES (AEIC)
AEIC CS8 (2007) specification for Extruded

Dielectric Shielded Power Cables Rated 5
Through 46 kV

Hard-Drawn Copper Wire
ASTM B3 (2013) Standard Specification for Soft or

Annealed Copper Wire
ASTM B496 (2014) Standard Specification for Compact

Round Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper
Conductors

Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors,
Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft
ASTM C309 (2011) Standard Specification for Liquid

Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete
ASTM C32 (2013) Standard Specification for Sewer

and Manhole Brick (Made from Clay or Shale)
ASTM C478 (2014) Standard Specification for Precast

Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
ASTM C857 (2014) Standard Practice for Minimum

Structural Design Loading for Underground
Precast Concrete Utility Structures

Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and
Precast Box Sections Using Preformed
Flexible Joint Sealants
ASTM F512 (2012) Smooth-Wall Poly (Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Conduit and Fittings for Underground
Installation
IEEE 400.2 (2013) Guide for Field Testing of Shielded

Power Cable Systems Using Very Low
Frequency (VLF)
IEEE 404 (2012) Standard for Extruded and Laminated

Dielectric Shielded Cable Joints Rated
2500 V to 500,000 V
IEEE 48 (2009) Standard for Test Procedures and

Requirements for Alternating-Current Cable
Terminations Used on Shielded Cables
Having Laminated Insulation Rated 2.5 kV
through 765 kV or Extruded Insulation
Rated 2.5 kV through 500 kV


Safety Code
IEEE Stds Dictionary (2009) IEEE Standards Dictionary: Glossary

of Terms & Definitions
ICEA S-94-649 (2013) Standard for Concentric Neutral

Cables Rated 5 Through 46 KV

ANSI C119.1 (2011) Electric Connectors - Sealed

Insulated Underground Connector Systems
Rated 600 Volts
ANSI/NEMA WC 71/ICEA S-96-659 (1999) Standard for Nonshielded Cables

Rated 2001-5000 Volts for use in the
Distribution of Electric Energy
NEMA RN 1 (2005; R 2013) Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC)

Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel
Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit
NEMA TC 2 (2013) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl

Chloride (PVC) Conduit
NEMA TC 6 & 8 (2013) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride

(PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for
Underground Installations
NEMA TC 9 (2004) Standard for Fittings for Polyvinyl

Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for
Underground Installation
NEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639 (2012) 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cable for

Use in the Transmission and Distribution
of Electric Energy

3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National
Electrical Code
TIA-758 (2012b) Customer-Owned Outside Plant

Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard
RUS Bull 1751F-644 (2002) Underground Plant Construction
CID A-A-60005 (Basic; Notice 2) Frames, Covers,

Gratings, Steps, Sump And Catch Basin,
Manhole
UL 1072 (2006; Reprint Jun 2013) Medium-Voltage

Power Cables

Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit --
Steel
UL 44 (2014; Reprint Jun 2014)

Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables
UL 486A-486B (2013; Reprint Feb 2014) Wire Connectors
UL 510 (2005; Reprint Jul 2013) Polyvinyl

Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber
Insulating Tape
UL 514A (2013) Metallic Outlet Boxes
UL 514B (2012; Reprint Nov 2014) Conduit, Tubing

and Cable Fittings

Metal Conduit-Steel

Fittings
UL 83 (2014) Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and

Cables

Service-Entrance Cables

Appliances
Items provided under this section must be specifically suitable for the
following service conditions. Seismic details must conform to UFC
3-310-04, "Seismic Design for Buildings" and Sections 13 48 00 SEISMIC
PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT and 26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC
PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT .
Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING applies to this section,

with the additions and modifications specified herein.
1.4 DEFINITIONS

terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as
defined in IEEE Stds Dictionary.
b. In the text of this section, the words conduit and duct are used
interchangeably and have the same meaning.
c. In the text of this section, "medium voltage cable splices," and

"medium voltage cable joints" are used interchangeably and have the
same meaning.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Precast underground structures; G, A/E
SD-03 Product Data
Medium voltage cable; G, A/E
Medium voltage cable joints; G, A/E
Medium voltage cable terminations; G, A/E
Precast concrete structures; G, A/E
Sealing Material
Pulling-In Irons
Manhole frames and covers; G, A/E
Handhole frames and covers; G, A/E
Cable supports (racks, arms and insulators); G
SD-06 Test Reports
Medium voltage cable qualification and production tests; G, A/E
Field Acceptance Checks and Tests; G, A/E
Arc-proofing test for cable fireproofing tape; G, A/E
Cable Installation Plan and Procedure; G, A/E
Six copies of the information described below in 8-1/2 by 11 inch

binders having a minimum of three rings from which material may
readily be removed and replaced, including a separate section for
each cable pull. Separate sections by heavy plastic dividers with
tabs, with all data sheets signed and dated by the person
supervising the pull.
a. Site layout drawing with cable pulls numerically identified.
b. A list of equipment used, with calibration certifications.

The manufacturer and quantity of lubricant used on pull.
c. The cable manufacturer and type of cable.
d. The dates of cable pulls, time of day, and ambient

temperature.
e. The length of cable pull and calculated cable pulling
tensions.
f. The actual cable pulling tensions encountered during pull.
SD-07 Certificates
Cable splicer/terminator
Cable Installer Qualifications
1.6.1 Precast Underground Structures
Submittal required for each type used. Provide calculations and drawings
for precast manholes and handholes bearing the seal of a registered
professional engineer including:
a. Material description (i.e., f'c and Fy)
b. Manufacturer's printed assembly and installation instructions
c. Design calculations
d. Reinforcing shop drawings in accordance with ACI SP-66
e. Plans and elevations showing opening and pulling-in iron locations and
details
1.6.2 Certificate of Competency for Cable Splicer/Terminator
The cable splicer/terminator must have a certification from the National

Cable Splicing Certification Board (NCSCB) in the field of splicing and
terminating shielded medium voltage (5 kV to 35 kV) power cable using
pre-manufactured kits (pre-molded, heat-shrink, cold shrink). Submit
"Proof of Certification" for approval, for the individuals that will be
performing cable splicer and termination work, 30 days before splices or
terminations are to be made.
1.6.3 Cable Installer Qualifications
Provide at least one onsite person in a supervisory position with a

documentable level of competency and experience to supervise all cable
pulling operations. Provide a resume showing the cable installers'
experience in the last three years, including a list of references
complete with points of contact, addresses and telephone numbers. Cable
installer must demonstrate experience with a minimum of three medium
voltage cable installations. The Contracting Officer reserves the right
to require additional proof of competency or to reject the individual and
call for an alternate qualified cable installer.

provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "must" had been
installation, and workmanship must be in accordance with the mandatory and
advisory provisions of IEEE C2 and NFPA 70 unless more stringent

requirements are specified or indicated.

material, design and workmanship. Products must have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year
period must include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product must have been for sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same
class of equipment are required, these items must be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.
is furnished.

are not acceptable, unless specified otherwise.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT, DUCTS, AND FITTINGS
2.1.1 Rigid Metal Conduit
UL 6.
2.1.1.1 Rigid Metallic Conduit, PVC Coated
NEMA RN 1, Type A40, except that hardness must be nominal 85 Shore A

durometer, dielectric strength must be minimum 400 volts per mil at 60 Hz,
and tensile strength must be minimum 3500 psi.
2.1.2 Intermediate Metal Conduit
UL 1242.
2.1.2.1 Intermediate Metal Conduit, PVC Coated
NEMA RN 1, Type A40, except that hardness must be nominal 85 Shore A

durometer, dielectric strength must be minimum 400 volts per mil at 60 Hz,
and tensile strength must be minimum 3500 psi.
2.1.3 Plastic Duct for Concrete Encasement
Provide Type EB-20 per UL 651, ASTM F512, and NEMA TC 6 & 8 or Type EPC-40
per UL 651 and NEMA TC 2, as indicated.
2.1.4 Innerduct
Provide corrugated or solid wall polyethylene (PE) or PVC innerducts, or

fabric-mesh innerducts, with pullwire. Size as indicated.
2.1.5 Duct Sealant
UL 94, Class HBF. Provide high-expansion urethane foam duct sealant that
expands and hardens to form a closed, chemically and water resistant,
rigid structure. Sealant must be compatible with common cable and wire
jackets and capable of adhering to metals, plastics and concrete. Sealant
must be capable of curing in temperature ranges of 35 degrees F to 95
degrees F. Cured sealant must withstand temperature ranges of -20 degrees
F to 200 degrees F without loss of function.
2.1.6 Fittings
2.1.6.1 Metal Fittings
UL 514B.
2.1.6.2 PVC Conduit Fittings
UL 514B, UL 651.
2.1.6.3 PVC Duct Fittings
NEMA TC 9.
2.1.6.4 Outlet Boxes for Steel Conduit
Outlet boxes for use with rigid or flexible steel conduit must be
cast-metal cadmium or zinc-coated if of ferrous metal with gasketed
closures and must conform to UL 514A.
2.2 LOW VOLTAGE INSULATED CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Insulated conductors must be rated 600 volts and conform to the

requirements of NFPA 70, including listing requirements. Wires and cables
manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to the site are
not acceptable. Service entrance conductors must conform to UL 854, type
USE.
2.2.1 Conductor Types
Cable and duct sizes indicated are for copper conductors and THHN/THWN
unless otherwise noted. Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller must be
solid. Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger must be stranded. All conductors
must be copper.
2.2.2 Conductor Material
Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70, wires in

conduit, other than service entrance, must be 600-volt, Type THWN/THHN
conforming to UL 83 or Type XHHW conforming to UL 44. Copper conductors
must be annealed copper complying with ASTM B3 and ASTM B8.
2.2.3 Jackets
Multiconductor cables must have an overall PVC outer jacket.
2.2.4 In Duct
Cables must be single-conductor cable.
2.2.5 Cable Marking
Insulated conductors must have the date of manufacture and other

identification imprinted on the outer surface of each cable at regular
intervals throughout the cable length.
Identify each cable by means of a fiber, laminated plastic, or non-ferrous

metal tags, or approved equal, in each manhole, handhole, junction box,
and each terminal. Each tag must contain the following information; cable
type, conductor size, circuit number, circuit voltage, cable destination
and phase identification.
Conductors must be color coded. Provide conductor identification within

each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made. Conductor
identification must be by color-coded insulated conductors, plastic-coated
self-sticking printed markers, colored nylon cable ties and plates, heat
shrink type sleeves,or colored electrical tape. Control circuit
terminations must be properly identified. Color must be green for
grounding conductors and white for neutrals; except where neutrals of more
than one system are installed in same raceway or box, other neutrals must
be white with a different colored (not green) stripe for each. Color of
ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems must be as follows:
a. 208/120 volt, three-phase
(1) Phase A - black
(2) Phase B - red
(3) Phase C - blue
b. 480/277 volt, three-phase
(1) Phase A - brown
(2) Phase B - orange
(3) Phase C - yellow
c. 120/240 volt, single phase: Black and red
2.3 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS
Must provide a uniform compression over the entire conductor contact

surface. Use solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors.
a. For use with copper conductors: UL 486A-486B.
2.4 LOW VOLTAGE SPLICES
Provide splices in conductors with a compression connector on the
conductor and by insulating and waterproofing using one of the following

methods which are suitable for continuous submersion in water and comply
with ANSI C119.1.
2.4.1 Heat Shrinkable Splice
Provide heat shrinkable splice insulation by means of a thermoplastic

adhesive sealant material applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
2.4.2 Cold Shrink Rubber Splice
Provide a cold-shrink rubber splice which consists of EPDM rubber tube

which has been factory stretched onto a spiraled core which is removed
during splice installation. The installation must not require heat or
flame, or any additional materials such as covering or adhesive. It must
be designed for use with inline compression type connectors, or indoor,
outdoor, direct-burial or submerged locations.
2.5 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE
Cable (conductor) sizes are designated by American Wire Gauge (AWG) and
Thousand Circular Mils (Kcmil). Conductor and conduit sizes indicated are
for copper conductors unless otherwise noted. Insulated conductors must
have the date of manufacture and other identification imprinted on the
outer surface of each cable at regular intervals throughout cable length.
Wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of
delivery to the site are not acceptable. Provide single conductor type
cables unless otherwise indicated.
2.5.1 Cable Configuration
Provide Type MV cable, conforming to NEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639 and UL 1072,

concentric neutral underground distribution cable conforming to
ICEA S-94-649. Provide cables manufactured for use in duct applications
as indicated. Cable must be rated 15 kV with 133 percent insulation level.
2.5.2 Conductor Material
Provide concentric-lay-stranded, Class B conductors. Provide soft drawn

copper cables complying with ASTM B3 and ASTM B8 for regular concentric
and compressed stranding or ASTM B496 for compact stranding.
2.5.3 Insulation
Provide ethylene-propylene-rubber (EPR) insulation conforming to the

requirements of ANSI/NEMA WC 71/ICEA S-96-659 and ICEA S-94-649.
2.5.4 Shielding
Cables rated for 2 kV and above must have a semiconducting conductor

shield, a semiconducting insulation shield, and an overall copper tape
shield for each phase.
2.5.5 Neutrals
Neutral conductors must be copper, employing the same insulation and

jacket materials as phase conductors, except that a 600-volt insulation
rating is acceptable.Concentric neutrals conductors must be copper, having
a combined ampacity 1/3 of the phase conductor ampacity rating.
2.5.6 Jackets
Provide cables with a PVC jacket.
2.6 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE TERMINATIONS
IEEE 48 Class 1; of the molded elastomer, prestretched elastomer, or

heat-shrinkable elastomer. Acceptable elastomers are track-resistant
silicone rubber or track-resistant ethylene propylene compounds, such as
ethylene propylene rubber or ethylene propylene diene monomer. Separable
insulated connectors may be used for apparatus terminations, when such
apparatus is provided with suitable bushings. Terminations, where
required, must be provided with mounting brackets suitable for the
intended installation and with grounding provisions for the cable
shielding, metallic sheath, or armor. Terminations must be provided in a
kit, including: skirts, stress control terminator, ground clamp,
connectors, lugs, and complete instructions for assembly and
installation. Terminations must be the product of one manufacturer,
suitable for the type, diameter, insulation class and level, and materials
of the cable terminated. Do not use separate parts of copper or copper
alloy in contact with aluminum alloy parts in the construction or
installation of the terminator.
2.6.1 Cold-Shrink Type
Terminator must be a one-piece design, utilizing the manufacturer's latest

technology, where high-dielectric constant (capacitive) stress control is
integrated within a skirted insulator made of silicone rubber.
Termination must not require heat or flame for installation. Termination
kit must contain all necessary materials (except for the lugs).
Termination must be designed for installation in low or highly
contaminated indoor and outdoor locations and must resist ultraviolet rays
and oxidative decomposition.
2.6.2 Heat Shrinkable Type
Terminator must consist of a uniform cross section heat shrinkable

polymeric construction stress relief tubing and environmentally sealed
outer covering that is nontracking, resists heavy atmospheric
contaminants, ultra violet rays and oxidative decomposition. Provide heat
shrinkable sheds or skirts of the same material. Termination must be
designed for installation in low or highly contaminated indoor or outdoor
locations.
2.7 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE JOINTS
Provide joints (splices) in accordance with IEEE 404 suitable for the
rated voltage, insulation level, insulation type, and construction of the
cable. Joints must be certified by the manufacturer for waterproof,
submersible applications. Upon request, supply manufacturer's design
qualification test report in accordance with IEEE 404. Connectors for
joint must be tin-plated electrolytic copper, having ends tapered and
having center stops to equalize cable insertion.
2.7.1 Heat-Shrinkable Joint
Consists of a uniform cross-section heat-shrinkable polymeric construction
with a linear stress relief system, a high dielectric strength insulating

material, and an integrally bonded outer conductor layer for shielding.
Replace original cable jacket with a heavy-wall heat-shrinkable sleeve
with hot-melt adhesive coating.
2.7.2 Cold-Shrink Rubber-Type Joint
Joint must be of a cold shrink design that does not require any heat
source for its installation. Splice insulation and jacket must be of a
one-piece factory formed cold shrink sleeve made of black EPDM rubber.
Splice must be packaged three splices per kit, including complete
installation instructions.
2.8 TAPE
2.8.1 Insulating Tape
UL 510, plastic insulating tape, capable of performing in a continuous

temperature environment of 80 degrees C.
2.8.2 Buried Warning and Identification Tape
Provide detectable tape in accordance with Section 31 23 00.00 20

EXCAVATION AND FILL.
2.8.3 Fireproofing Tape
Provide tape composed of a flexible, conformable, unsupported intumescent

elastomer. Tape must be not less than .030 inch thick, noncorrosive to
cable sheath, self-extinguishing, noncombustible, adhesive-free, and must
not deteriorate when subjected to oil, water, gases, salt water, sewage,
and fungus.
2.9 PULL ROPE
Plastic or flat pull line (bull line) having a minimum tensile strength of
200 pounds.
2.10 GROUNDING AND BONDING
2.10.1 Driven Ground Rods
Provide copper-clad steel ground rods conforming to UL 467 not less than
3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length. Sectional type rods may be
used for rods 20 feet or longer.
2.10.2 Grounding Conductors
Stranded-bare copper conductors must conform to ASTM B8, Class B,

soft-drawn unless otherwise indicated. Solid-bare copper conductors must
conform to ASTM B1 for sizes No. 8 and smaller. Insulated conductors must
be of the same material as phase conductors and green color-coded, except
that conductors must be rated no more than 600 volts. Aluminum is not
acceptable.
2.11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Provide concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

In addition, provide concrete for encasement of underground ducts with
3000 psi minimum 28-day compressive strength. Concrete associated with

electrical work for other than encasement of underground ducts must be
4000 psi minimum 28-day compressive strength unless specified otherwise.
2.12 UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES
Provide precast concrete underground structures or standard type

cast-in-place manhole types as indicated, conforming to ASTM C857 and
ASTM C478. Top, walls, and bottom must consist of reinforced concrete.
Walls and bottom must be of monolithic concrete construction. Locate duct
entrances and windows near the corners of structures to facilitate cable
racking. Covers must fit the frames without undue play. Form steel and
iron to shape and size with sharp lines and angles. Castings must be free
from warp and blow holes that may impair strength or appearance. Exposed
metal must have a smooth finish and sharp lines and arises. Provide
necessary lugs, rabbets, and brackets. Set pulling-in irons and other
built-in items in place before depositing concrete. Install a pulling-in
iron in the wall opposite each duct line entrance. Cable racks, including
rack arms and insulators, must be adequate to accommodate the cable.
2.12.1 Precast Concrete Structures, Risers and Tops
Precast concrete underground structures may be provided in lieu of

cast-in-place subject to the requirements specified below. Precast units
must be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture
of precast concrete products, including precast manholes.
2.12.1.1 General
Precast concrete structures must have the same accessories and facilities
as required for cast-in-place structures. Likewise, precast structures
must have plan area and clear heights not less than those of cast-in-place
structures. Concrete materials and methods of construction must be the
same as for cast-in-place concrete construction, as modified herein.
Slope in floor may be omitted provided precast sections are poured in
reinforced steel forms. Concrete for precast work must have a 28-day
compressive strength of not less than 4000 psi. Structures may be precast
to the design and details indicated for cast-in-place construction,
precast monolithically and placed as a unit, or structures may be
assembled sections, designed and produced by the manufacturer in
accordance with the requirements specified. Structures must be identified
with the manufacturer's name embedded in or otherwise permanently attached
to an interior wall face.
2.12.1.2 Design for Precast Structures
ACI 318M. In the absence of detailed on-site soil information, design for
the following soil parameters/site conditions:
a. Angle of Internal Friction (phi) = 30 degrees
b. Unit Weight of Soil (Dry) = 110 pcf, (Saturated)

= 130 pcf
c. Coefficient of Lateral Earth Pressure (Ka) = 0.33
d. Ground Water Level = 3 feet below ground elevation
e. Vertical design loads must include full dead, superimposed dead, and
live loads including a 30 percent magnification factor for impact.

Live loads must consider all types and magnitudes of vehicular
(automotive, industrial, or aircraft) traffic to be encountered. The
minimum design vertical load must be for H20 highway loading per
AASHTO HB-17.
f. Horizontal design loads must include full geostatic and hydrostatic

pressures for the soil parameters, water table, and depth of
installation to be encountered. Also, horizontal loads imposed by
adjacent structure foundations, and horizontal load components of
vertical design loads, including impact, must be considered, along
with a pulling-in iron design load of 6000 pounds.
g. Each structural component must be designed for the load combination

and positioning resulting in the maximum shear and moment for
thatparticular component.
h. Design must also consider the live loads induced in the handling,
installation, and backfilling of the manholes. Provide lifting
devices to ensure structural integrity during handling and
installation.
2.12.1.3 Construction
Structure top, bottom, and wall must be of a uniform thickness of not less
than 6 inches. Thin-walled knock-out panels for designed or future duct
bank entrances are not permitted. Provide quantity, size, and location of
duct bank entrance windows as directed, and cast completely open by the
precaster. Size of windows must exceed the nominal duct bank envelope
dimensions by at least 12 inches vertically and horizontally to preclude
in-field window modifications made necessary by duct bank misalignment.
However, the sides of precast windows must be a minimum of 6 inches from
the inside surface of adjacent walls, floors, or ceilings. Form the
perimeter of precast window openings to have a keyed or inward flared
surface to provide a positive interlock with the mating duct bank
envelope. Provide welded wire fabric reinforcing through window openings
for in-field cutting and flaring into duct bank envelopes. Provide
additional reinforcing steel comprised of at least two No. 4 bars around
window openings. Provide drain sumps a minimum of 12 inches in diameter
and 4 inches deep for precast structures.
2.12.1.4 Joints
Provide tongue-and-groove joints on mating edges of precast components.

Shiplap joints are not allowed. Design joints to firmly interlock
adjoining components and to provide waterproof junctions and adequate
shear transfer. Seal joints watertight using preformed plastic strip
conforming to ASTM C990. Install sealing material in strict accordance
with the sealant manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide
waterproofing at conduit/duct entrances into structures, and where access
frame meets the top slab, provide continuous grout seal.
2.12.2 Manhole Frames and Covers
Provide cast iron frames and covers for manholes conforming to

CID A-A-60005. Cast the words "ELECTRIC" or "TELECOMMUNICATIONS" in the
top face of power and telecommunications manhole covers, respectively.
2.12.3 Handhole Frames and Covers
Frames and covers of steel must be welded by qualified welders in

accordance with standard commercial practice. Steel covers must be
rolled-steel floor plate having an approved antislip surface. Hinges must
be of stainless steel with bronze hinge pin, 5 by 5 inches by approximately
3/16 inch thick, without screw holes, and must be for full surface
application by fillet welding. Hinges must have nonremovable pins and
five knuckles. The surfaces of plates under hinges must be true after the
removal of raised antislip surface, by grinding or other approved method.
2.12.4 Brick for Manhole Collar
Provide sewer and manhole brick conforming to ASTM C32, Grade MS.
2.13 CABLE SUPPORTS (RACKS, ARMS, AND INSULATORS)
The metal portion of racks and arms must be zinc-coated after fabrication.
2.13.1 Cable Rack Stanchions
The wall bracket or stanchion must be 4 inches by approximately 1-1/2 inch

by 3/16 inch channel steel, or 4 inches by approximately 1 inch
glass-reinforced nylon with recessed bolt mounting holes, 48 inches long
(minimum) in manholes. Slots for mounting cable rack arms must be spaced
at 8 inch intervals.
2.13.2 Rack Arms
Cable rack arms must be steel or malleable iron or glass reinforced nylon
and must be of the removable type. Rack arm length must be a minimum of 8
inches and a maximum of 12 inches.
2.13.3 Insulators
Insulators for metal rack arms must be dry-process glazed porcelain.

Insulators are not required for nylon arms.
2.14 CABLE TAGS IN MANHOLES
Provide tags for each power cable located in manholes. The tags must be
polyethylene. Do not provide handwritten letters. The first position on
the power cable tag must denote the voltage. The second through sixth
positions on the tag must identify the circuit. The next to last position
must denote the phase of the circuit and include the Greek "phi" symbol.
The last position must denote the cable size. As an example, a tag could
have the following designation: "11.5 NAS 1-8(Phase A)500," denoting that
the tagged cable is on the 11.5kV system circuit number NAS 1-8,
underground, Phase A, sized at 500 kcmil.
2.14.1 Polyethylene Cable Tags
Provide tags of polyethylene that have an average tensile strength of 3250

pounds per square inch; and that are 0.08 inch thick (minimum),
non-corrosive non-conductive; resistive to acids, alkalis, organic
solvents, and salt water; and distortion resistant to 170 degrees F.
Provide 0.05 inch (minimum) thick black polyethylene tag holder. Provide
a one-piece nylon, self-locking tie at each end of the cable tag. Ties
must have a minimum loop tensile strength of 175 pounds. The cable tags
must have black block letters, numbers, and symbols one inch high on a
yellow background. Letters, numbers, and symbols must not fall off or
change positions regardless of the cable tags' orientation.
2.15.1 Arc-Proofing Test for Cable Fireproofing Tape
Manufacturer must test one sample assembly consisting of a straight lead

tube 12 inches long with a 2 1/2 inch outside diameter, and a 1/8 inch
thick wall, and covered with one-half lap layer of arc and fireproofing
tape per manufacturer's instructions. The arc and fireproofing tape must
withstand extreme temperature of a high-current fault arc 13,000 degrees K
for 70 cycles as determined by using an argon directed plasma jet capable
of constantly producing and maintaining an arc temperature of 13,000
degrees K. Temperature (13,000 degrees K) of the ignited arc between the
cathode and anode must be obtained from a dc power source of 305 (plus or
minus 5) amperes and 20 (plus or minus 1) volts. The arc must be directed
toward the sample assembly accurately positioned 5 (plus or minus 1)
millimeters downstream in the plasma from the anode orifice by fixed flow
rate of argon gas (0.18 g per second). Each sample assembly must be
tested at three unrelated points. Start time for tests must be taken from
recorded peak current when the specimen is exposed to the full test
temperature. Surface heat on the specimen prior to that time must be
minimal. The end point is established when the plasma or conductive arc
penetrates the protective tape and strikes the lead tube. Submittals for
arc-proofing tape must indicate that the test has been performed and
passed by the manufacturer.
2.15.2 Medium Voltage Cable Qualification and Production Tests
Results of AEIC CS8 qualification and production tests as applicable for

each type of medium voltage cable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install equipment and devices in accordance with the manufacturer's

published instructions and with the requirements and recommendations of
NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 as applicable. In addition to these requirements,
install telecommunications in accordance with TIA-758 and
RUS Bull 1751F-644.
3.2 CABLE INSPECTION
Inspect each cable reel for correct storage positions, signs of physical
damage, and broken end seals prior to installation. If end seal is
broken, remove moisture from cable prior to installation in accordance
with the cable manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION PLAN AND PROCEDURE
Obtain from the manufacturer an installation manual or set of instructions

which addresses such aspects as cable construction, insulation type, cable
diameter, bending radius, cable temperature limits for installation,
lubricants, coefficient of friction, conduit cleaning, storage procedures,
moisture seals, testing for and purging moisture, maximum allowable
pulling tension, and maximum allowable sidewall bearing pressure. Perform
pulling calculations and prepare a pulling plan and submit along with the
manufacturer's instructions in accordance with SUBMITTALS. Install cable
strictly in accordance with the cable manufacturer's recommendations and
the approved installation plan.
Calculations and pulling plan must include:
a. Site layout drawing with cable pulls identified in numeric order of

expected pulling sequence and direction of cable pull.
b. List of cable installation equipment.
c. Lubricant manufacturer's application instructions.
d. Procedure for resealing cable ends to prevent moisture from entering

cable.
e. Cable pulling tension calculations of all cable pulls.
f. Cable percentage conduit fill.
g. Cable sidewall bearing pressure.
h. Cable minimum bend radius and minimum diameter of pulling wheels used.
i. Cable jam ratio.
j. Maximum allowable pulling tension on each different type and size of

conductor.
k. Maximum allowable pulling tension on pulling device.
3.4 UNDERGROUND STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION
Provide standard type cast-in-place construction as specified herein and

as indicated, or precast construction as specified herein. Horizontal
concrete surfaces of floors must have a smooth trowel finish. Cure
concrete by applying two coats of white pigmented membrane forming-curing
compound in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions, except that precast concrete may be steam cured. Curing
compound must conform to ASTM C309. Locate duct entrances and windows in
the center of end walls (shorter) and near the corners of sidewalls
(longer) to facilitate cable racking and splicing. Covers for underground
structures must fit the frames without undue play. Steel and iron must be
formed to shape and size with sharp lines and angles. Castings must be
free from warp and blow holes that may impair strength or appearance.
Exposed metal must have a smooth finish and sharp lines and arises.
Provide necessary lugs, rabbets, and brackets. Set pulling-in irons and
other built-in items in place before depositing concrete. Manhole
locations, as indicated, are approximate. Coordinate exact manhole
locations with other utilities and finished grading and paving.
3.4.1 Precast Concrete Construction
Set commercial precast structures on 6 inches of level, 90 percent

compacted granular fill, 3/4 inch to 1 inch size, extending 12 inches
beyond the structure on each side. Compact granular fill by a minimum of
four passes with a plate type vibrator. Installation must additionally
conform to the manufacturer's instructions.
3.4.2 Pulling-In Irons
Provide steel bars bent as indicated, and cast in the walls and floors.
Alternatively, pipe sleeves may be precast into the walls and floors where
required to accept U-bolts or other types of pulling-in devices possessing
the strengths and clearances stated herein. The final installation of
pulling-in devices must be made permanent. Cover and seal exterior
projections of thru-wall type pulling-in devices with an appropriate
protective coating. In the floor the irons must be a minimum of 6 inches
from the edge of the sump, and in the walls the irons must be located
within 6 inches of the projected center of the duct bank pattern or
precast window in the opposite wall. However, the pulling-in iron must
not be located within 6 inches of an adjacent interior surface, or duct or
precast window located within the same wall as the iron. If a pulling-in
iron cannot be located directly opposite the corresponding duct bank or
precast window due to this clearance limitation, locate the iron directly
above or below the projected center of the duct bank pattern or precast
window the minimum distance required to preserve the 6 inch clearance
previously stated. In the case of directly opposing precast windows,
pulling-in irons consisting of a 3 foot length of No. 5 reinforcing bar,
formed into a hairpin, may be cast-in-place within the precast windows
simultaneously with the end of the corresponding duct bank envelope.
Irons installed in this manner must be positioned directly in line with,
or when not possible, directly above or below the projected center of the
duct bank pattern entering the opposite wall, while maintaining a minimum
clear distance of 3 inches from any edge of the cast-in-place duct bank
envelope or any individual duct. Pulling-in irons must have a clear
projection into the structure of approximately 4 inches and must be
designed to withstand a minimum pulling-in load of 6000 pounds. Irons
must be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.
3.4.3 Cable Racks, Arms and Insulators
Cable racks, arms and insulators must be sufficient to accommodate the

cables. Space racks in power manholes not more than 3 feet apart, and
provide each manhole wall with a minimum of two racks. Space racks in
signal manholes not more than 16 1/2 inches apart with the end rack being
no further than 12 inches from the adjacent wall. Methods of anchoring
cable racks must be as follows:
a. Provide a 5/8 inch diameter by 5 inch long anchor bolt with 3 inch
foot cast in structure wall with 2 inch protrusion of threaded portion
of bolt into structure. Provide 5/8 inch steel square head nut on
each anchor bolt. Coat threads of anchor bolts with suitable coating
immediately prior to installing nuts.
b. Provide concrete channel insert with a minimum load rating of 800

pounds per foot. Insert channel must be steel of the same length as
"vertical rack channel;" channel insert must be cast flush in
structure wall. Provide 5/8 inch steel nuts in channel insert to
receive 5/8 inch diameter by 3 inch long steel, square head anchor
bolts.
c. Provide concrete "spot insert" at each anchor bolt location, cast

flush in structure wall. Each insert must have minimum 800 pound load
rating. Provide 5/8 inch diameter by 3 inch long steel, square head
anchor bolt at each anchor point. Coat threads of anchor bolts with
suitable coating immediately prior to installing bolts.
Cast-iron frames and covers not buried in concrete or masonry must be

cleaned of mortar, rust, grease, dirt and other deleterious materials, and
given a coat of bituminous paint.
3.5 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT AND DUCT SYSTEMS
3.5.1 Requirements
Run conduit in straight lines except where a change of direction is

necessary. Provide numbers and sizes of ducts as indicated. Provide a
4/0 AWG bare copper grounding conductor below medium-voltage distribution
duct banks. Bond bare copper grounding conductor to ground rings (loops)
in all manholes and to ground rings (loops) at all equipment slabs
(pads). Route grouding conductor into manholes with the duct bank
(sleeving is not required). Ducts must have a continuous slope downward
toward underground structures and away from buildings, laid with a minimum
slope of 3 inches per 100 feet. Depending on the contour of the finished
grade, the high-point may be at a terminal, a manhole, a handhole, or
between manholes or handholes. Provide ducts with end bells whenever duct
lines terminate in structures.
Perform changes in ductbank direction as follows:
a. Short-radius manufactured 90-degree duct bends may be used only for

pole or equipment risers, unless specifically indicated as acceptable.
b. The minimum manufactured bend radius must be 18 inches for ducts of

less than 3 inch diameter, and 36 inches for ducts 3 inches or greater
in diameter.
c. As an exception to the bend radius required above, provide field

manufactured longsweep bends having a minimum radius of 25 feet for a
change of direction of more than 5 degrees, either horizontally or
vertically, using a combination of curved and straight sections.
Maximum manufactured curved sections: 30 degrees.
3.5.2 Treatment
Ducts must be kept clean of concrete, dirt, or foreign substances during

construction. Field cuts requiring tapers must be made with proper tools
and match factory tapers. A coupling recommended by the duct manufacturer
must be used whenever an existing duct is connected to a duct of different
material or shape. Ducts must be stored to avoid warping and
deterioration with ends sufficiently plugged to prevent entry of any water
or solid substances. Ducts must be thoroughly cleaned before being laid.
Plastic ducts must be stored on a flat surface and protected from the
direct rays of the sun.
3.5.3 Conduit Cleaning
As each conduit run is completed, for conduit sizes 3 inches and larger,
draw a flexible testing mandrel approximately 12 inches long with a
diameter less than the inside diameter of the conduit through the
conduit. After which, draw a stiff bristle brush through until conduit is
clear of particles of earth, sand and gravel; then immediately install
conduit plugs. For conduit sizes less than 3 inches, draw a stiff bristle
brush through until conduit is clear of particles of earth, sand and

gravel; then immediately install conduit plugs.
3.5.4 Galvanized Conduit Concrete Penetrations
Galvanized conduits which penetrate concrete (slabs, pavement, and walls)

in wet locations must be PVC coated and must extend from at least 2 inches
within the concrete to the first coupling or fitting outside the concrete
(minimum of 6 inches from penetration).
3.5.5 Multiple Conduits
Separate multiple conduits by a minimum distance of 3 inches, except that

light and power conduits must be separated from control, signal, and
telephone conduits by a minimum distance of 12 inches. Stagger the joints
of the conduits by rows (horizontally) and layers (vertically) to
strengthen the conduit assembly. Provide plastic duct spacers that
interlock vertically and horizontally. Spacer assembly must consist of
base spacers, intermediate spacers, ties, and locking device on top to
provide a completely enclosed and locked-in conduit assembly. Install
spacers per manufacturer's instructions, but provide a minimum of two
spacer assemblies per 10 feet of conduit assembly.
3.5.6 Conduit Plugs and Pull Rope
New conduit indicated as being unused or empty must be provided with plugs
on each end. Plugs must contain a weephole or screen to allow water
drainage. Provide a plastic pull rope having 3 feet of slack at each end
of unused or empty conduits.
3.5.7 Conduit and Duct Without Concrete Encasement
3.5.7.1 Encasement Under Roads and Structures
Under roads, paved areas, and railroad tracks, install conduits in

concrete encasement of rectangular cross-section providing a minimum of 3
inch concrete cover around ducts. Concrete encasement must extend at least
5 feet beyond the edges of paved areas and roads, and 12 feet beyond the
rails on each side of railroad tracks. Depths to top of the concrete
envelope must be not less than 24 inches below finished grade.
3.5.8 Duct Encased in Concrete
Construct underground duct lines of individual conduits encased in

concrete. Depths to top of the concrete envelope must be not less than 18
inches below finished grade, except under roads and pavement, concrete
envelope must be not less than 24 inches below finished grade. Do not mix
different kinds of conduit in any one duct bank. Concrete encasement
surrounding the bank must be rectangular in cross-section and must provide
at least 3 inches of concrete cover for ducts. Separate conduits by a
minimum concrete thickness of 3 inches. Before pouring concrete, anchor
duct bank assemblies to prevent the assemblies from floating during
concrete pouring. Anchoring must be done by driving reinforcing rods
adjacent to duct spacer assemblies and attaching the rods to the spacer
assembly. Provide color, type and depth of warning tape as specified in
Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL.
3.5.8.1 Connections to Manholes
Duct bank envelopes connecting to underground structures must be flared to

have enlarged cross-section at the manhole entrance to provide additional
shear strength. Dimensions of the flared cross-section must be larger
than the corresponding manhole opening dimensions by no less than 12 inches
in each direction. Perimeter of the duct bank opening in the underground
structure must be flared toward the inside or keyed to provide a positive
interlock between the duct bank and the wall of the structure. Use
vibrators when this portion of the encasement is poured to assure a seal
between the envelope and the wall of the structure.
3.5.8.2 Connections to Existing Underground Structures
For duct bank connections to existing structures, break the structure wall
out to the dimensions required and preserve steel in the structure wall.
Cut steel and extend into the duct bank envelope. Chip the perimeter
surface of the duct bank opening to form a key or flared surface,
providing a positive connection with the duct bank envelope.
3.5.8.3 Connections to Existing Concrete Pads
For duct bank connections to concrete pads, break an opening in the pad
out to the dimensions required and preserve steel in pad. Cut the steel
and extend into the duct bank envelope. Chip out the opening in the pad
to form a key for the duct bank envelope.
3.5.8.4 Connections to Existing Ducts
Where connections to existing duct banks are indicated, excavate the banks
to the maximum depth necessary. Cut off the banks and remove loose
concrete from the conduits before new concrete-encased ducts are
installed. Provide a reinforced concrete collar, poured monolithically
with the new duct bank, to take the shear at the joint of the duct banks.
Remove existing cables which constitute interference with the work.
3.5.8.5 Partially Completed Duct Banks
During construction wherever a construction joint is necessary in a duct

bank, prevent debris such as mud, and dirt from entering ducts by
providing suitable conduit plugs. Fit concrete envelope of a partially
completed duct bank with reinforcing steel extending a minimum of 2 feet
back into the envelope and a minimum of 2 feet beyond the end of the
envelope. Provide one No. 4 bar in each corner, 3 inches from the edge of
the envelope. Secure corner bars with two No. 3 ties, spaced approximately
one foot apart. Restrain reinforcing assembly from moving during
concrete pouring.
3.5.8.6 Removal of Ducts
Where duct lines are removed from existing underground structures, close
the openings to waterproof the structure. Chip out the wall opening to
provide a key for the new section of wall.
3.5.9 Duct Sealing
Seal all electrical penetrations for radon mitigation, maintaining

integrity of the vapor barrier, and to prevent infiltration of air,
insects, and vermin.
3.6 CABLE PULLING
Test existing duct lines with a mandrel and thoroughly swab out to remove
foreign material before pulling cables. Pull cables down grade with the
feed-in point at the manhole or buildings of the highest elevation. Use
flexible cable feeds to convey cables through manhole opening and into
duct runs. Do not exceed the specified cable bending radii when
installing cable under any conditions, including turnups into switches,
transformers, switchgear, switchboards, and other enclosures. Cable with
tape or wire shield must have a bending radius not less than 12 times the
overall diameter of the completed cable. If basket-grip type
cable-pulling devices are used to pull cable in place, cut off the section
of cable under the grip before splicing and terminating.
3.6.1 Cable Lubricants
Use lubricants that are specifically recommended by the cable manufacturer

for assisting in pulling jacketed cables.
3.7 CABLES IN UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES
Do not install cables utilizing the shortest path between penetrations,

but route along those walls providing the longest route and the maximum
spare cable lengths. Form cables to closely parallel walls, not to
interfere with duct entrances, and support on brackets and cable
insulators. Support cable splices in underground structures by racks on
each side of the splice. Locate splices to prevent cyclic bending in the
spliced sheath. Install cables at middle and bottom of cable racks,
leaving top space open for future cables, except as otherwise indicated
for existing installations. Provide one spare three-insulator rack arm
for each cable rack in each underground structure.
3.7.1 Cable Tag Installation
Install cable tags in each manhole as specified, including each splice.

Tag wire and cable provided by this contract. Install cable tags over the
fireproofing, if any, and locate the tags so that they are clearly visible
without disturbing any cabling or wiring in the manholes.
3.8 CONDUCTORS INSTALLED IN PARALLEL
Conductors must be grouped such that each conduit of a parallel run

contains 1 Phase A conductor, 1 Phase B conductor, 1 Phase C conductor,
and 1 neutral conductor.
3.9 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE SPLICING AND TERMINATING
Make terminations and splices with materials and methods as indicated or

specified herein and as designated by the written instructions of the
manufacturer. Do not allow the cables to be moved until after the
splicing material has completely set. Make splices in underground
distribution systems only in accessible locations such as manholes,
handholes, or aboveground termination pedestals.
3.10 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE TERMINATIONS
Make terminations in accordance with the written instruction of the

termination kit manufacturer.
3.11 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE JOINTS
Provide power cable joints (splices) suitable for continuous immersion in

water. Make joints only in accessible locations in manholes or handholes
by using materials and methods in accordance with the written instructions
of the joint kit manufacturer.
3.11.1 Joints in Shielded Cables
Cover the joined area with metallic tape, or material like the original
cable shield and connect it to the cable shield on each side of the
splice. Provide a bare copper ground connection brought out in a
watertight manner and grounded to the manhole grounding loop as part of
the splice installation. Ground conductors, connections, and rods must be
as specified elsewhere in this section. Wire must be trained to the sides
of the enclosure to prevent interference with the working area.
3.12 CABLE END CAPS
Cable ends must be sealed at all times with coated heat shrinkable end
caps. Cables ends must be sealed when the cable is delivered to the job
site, while the cable is stored and during installation of the cable. The
caps must remain in place until the cable is spliced or terminated.
Sealing compounds and tape are not acceptable substitutes for heat
shrinkable end caps. Cable which is not sealed in the specified manner at
all times will be rejected.
3.13 FIREPROOFING OF CABLES IN UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES
Fireproof (arc proof) wire and cables which will carry current at 2200
volts or more in underground structures.
3.13.1 Fireproofing Tape
Tightly wrap strips of fireproofing tape around each cable spirally in

half-lapped wrapping. Install tape in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.13.2 Tape-Wrap
Tape-wrap metallic-sheathed or metallic armored cables without a

nonmetallic protective covering over the sheath or armor prior to
application of fireproofing. Wrap must be in the form of two tightly
applied half-lapped layers of a pressure-sensitive 10 mil thick plastic
tape, and must extend not less than one inch into the duct. Even out
irregularities of the cable, such as at splices, with insulation putty
before applying tape.
3.14 GROUNDING SYSTEMS
NFPA 70 and IEEE C2, except provide grounding systems with a resistance to
solid earth ground not exceeding 25 ohms.
3.14.1 Grounding Electrodes
Provide cone pointed driven ground rods driven full depth plus 6 inches,
installed to provide an earth ground of the appropriate value for the
particular equipment being grounded.
If the specified ground resistance is not met, an additional ground rod

must be provided in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 (placed
not less than 6 feet from the first rod). Should the resultant (combined)
resistance exceed the specified resistance, measured not less than 48
hours after rainfall, notify the Contracting Officer immediately.
3.14.2 Grounding Connections
Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally

inaccessible, by exothermic weld or compression connector.
a. Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld

manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up"
or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not
acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic
welds.
b. Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to

provide the correct circumferential pressure. Tools and dies must be
as recommended by the manufacturer. An embossing die code or other
standard method must provide visible indication that a connector has
been adequately compressed on the ground wire.
3.14.3 Grounding Conductors
Provide bare grounding conductors, except where installed in conduit with

associated phase conductors. Ground cable sheaths, cable shields,
conduit, and equipment with No. 6 AWG. Ground other noncurrent-carrying
metal parts and equipment frames of metal-enclosed equipment. Ground
metallic frames and covers of handholes and pull boxes with a braided,
copper ground strap with equivalent ampacity of No. 6 AWG. Provide direct
connections to the grounding conductor with 600 v insulated, full-size
conductor for each grounded neutral of each feeder circuit, which is
spliced within the manhole.
3.14.4 Ground Cable Crossing Expansion Joints
Protect ground cables crossing expansion joints or similar separations in

structures and pavements by use of approved devices or methods of
installation which provide the necessary slack in the cable across the
joint to permit movement. Use stranded or other approved flexible copper
cable across such separations.
3.14.5 Manhole Grounding
Loop a 4/0 AWG grounding conductor around the interior perimeter,

approximately 12 inches above finished floor. Secure the conductor to the
manhole walls at intervals not exceeding 36 inches. Connect the conductor
to the manhole grounding electrode with 4/0 AWG conductor. Connect all
incoming 4/0 grounding conductors to the ground loop adjacent to the point
of entry into the manhole. Bond the ground loop to all cable shields,
metal cable racks, and other metal equipment with a minimum 6 AWG
conductor.
3.14.6 Fence Grounding
Provide grounding for fences as indicated.Provide grounding for fences

with a ground rod at each fixed gate post and at each corner post. Drive
ground rods until the top is 12 inches below grade. Attach a No. 4 AWG
copper conductor, by exothermic weld to the ground rods and extend

underground to the immediate vicinity of fence post. Lace the conductor
vertically into 12 inches of fence mesh and fasten by two approved bronze
compression fittings, one to bond wire to post and the other to bond wire
to fence. Each gate section must be bonded to its gatepost by a 1/8 by
one inch flexible braided copper strap and ground post clamps. Clamps
must be of the anti-electrolysis type.
3.15 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
Provide in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION

AND FILL.
3.15.1 Reconditioning of Surfaces
3.15.1.1 Unpaved Surfaces
Restore to their original elevation and condition unpaved surfaces

disturbed during installation of duct. Preserve sod and topsoil removed
during excavation and reinstall after backfilling is completed. Replace
sod that is damaged by sod of quality equal to that removed. When the
surface is disturbed in a newly seeded area, re-seed the restored surface
with the same quantity and formula of seed as that used in the original
seeding, and provide topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding,
sprigging, or mulching.
3.15.1.2 Paving Repairs
Where trenches, pits, or other excavations are made in existing roadways

and other areas of pavement where surface treatment of any kind exists ,
restore such surface treatment or pavement the same thickness and in the
same kind as previously existed, except as otherwise specified, and to
match and tie into the adjacent and surrounding existing surfaces.
3.16 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Provide concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
3.16.1 Concrete Slabs (Pads) for Equipment
Unless otherwise indicated, the slab must be at least 8 inches thick,

reinforced with a 6 by 6 - W2.9 by W2.9 mesh, placed uniformly 4 inches
from the top of the slab. Slab must be placed on a 6 inch thick,
well-compacted gravel base. Top of concrete slab must be approximately 4
inches above finished grade with gradual slope for drainage. Edges above
grade must have 1/2 inch chamfer. Slab must be of adequate size to
project at least 8 inches beyond the equipment.
Stub up conduits, with bushings, 2 inches into cable wells in the concrete
pad. Coordinate dimensions of cable wells with transformer cable training
areas.
3.16.2 Sealing
When the installation is complete, seal all conduit and other entries into
the equipment enclosure with an approved sealing compound. Seals must be
of sufficient strength and durability to protect all energized live parts
of the equipment from rodents, insects, or other foreign matter.
3.17.1 Performance of Field Acceptance Checks and Tests
Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and include

the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests,
performed in accordance with NETA ATS.
3.17.1.1 Medium Voltage Cables
Perform tests after installation of cable, splices, and terminators and

before terminating to equipment or splicing to existing circuits.
(1) Inspect exposed cable sections for physical damage.
(2) Verify that cable is supplied and connected in accordance with

contract plans and specifications.
(3) Inspect for proper shield grounding, cable support, and cable
termination.
(4) Verify that cable bends are not less than ICEA or manufacturer's
minimum allowable bending radius.
(5) Inspect for proper fireproofing.
(6) Visually inspect jacket and insulation condition.
(7) Inspect for proper phase identification and arrangement.
b. Electrical Tests
(1) Perform a shield continuity test on each power cable by ohmmeter

method. Record ohmic value, resistance values in excess of 10
ohms per 1000 feet of cable must be investigated and justified.
(2) Perform acceptance test on new cables before the new cables are
connected to existing cables and placed into service, including
terminations and joints. Perform maintenance test on complete
cable system after the new cables are connected to existing cables
and placed into service, including existing cable, terminations,
and joints. Tests must be very low frequency (VLF) alternating
voltage withstand tests in accordance with IEEE 400.2. VLF test
frequency must be 0.05 Hz minimum for a duration of 60 minutes
using a sinusoidal waveform. Test voltages must be as follows:
CABLE RATING AC TEST VOLTAGE for

ACCEPTANCE TESTING
5 kV 10kV rms(peak)
8 kV 13kV rms(peak)

ACCEPTANCE TESTING
15 kV 20kV rms(peak)

MAINTENANCE TESTING
5 kV 7kV rms(peak)
8 kV 10kV rms(peak)
3.17.1.2 Low Voltage Cables, 600-Volt
Perform tests after installation of cable, splices and terminations and

before terminating to equipment or splicing to existing circuits.
(1) Inspect exposed cable sections for physical damage.
(2) Verify that cable is supplied and connected in accordance with

contract plans and specifications.
(3) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections.
(4) Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and

indentation.
(5) Visually inspect jacket and insulation condition.
(6) Inspect for proper phase identification and arrangement.
b. Electrical Tests
(1) Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No. 6 AWG and larger
diameter using instrument which applies voltage of approximately
1000 volts dc for one minute.
(2) Perform continuity tests to insure correct cable connection.
3.17.1.3 Grounding System
a. Visual and mechanical inspection
Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and
specifications.
b. Electrical tests
Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-potential

method in accordance with IEEE 81. On systems consisting of
interconnected ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are
complete. On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests
before any wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry
weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground
resistance tester in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to
test each ground or group of grounds. The instrument must be equipped
with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate
the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test.
Provide site diagram indicating location of test probes with
associated distances, and provide a plot of resistance vs. distance.
3.17.2 Follow-Up Verification
Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, show by demonstration in

service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and
properly performing the intended function. As an exception to
requirements stated elsewhere in the contract, the Contracting Officer
must be given 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times of
checking and testing.
.... -- End of Section --

BLD 229 Spec

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

BLD 229 Spec

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BLD 229 Spec

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Marine Corps Air Station (MCAS)

Engine Maintenance Shop

SOLICITATION NO.: N62473-12-D-0263 T.O. #X003

WORK ORDER NO.: 1312010

JACOBS PROJECT NO.: FDYD1739

FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

3161 Michelson Drive, Suite 500

Engine Maintenance Shop

SOLICITATION NO.: N62473-12-D-0263 T.O. #X003

P-617 Aviation Maintenance and

ARCHITECT CIVIL ENGINEER STRUCTURAL ENGINEER

CERTIFICATION PAGE 000000 - 1

CERTIFICATION PAGE 000000 - 2

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 01 10 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS PROCEDURES

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 05 23 PRESSURE TESTING AN AIR BARRIER SYSTEM FOR AIR TIGHTNESS

08 11 13 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

10 14 00.20 INTERIOR SIGNAGE

12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2

13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 13 13.00 20 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION

22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS

26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

27 05 28.36 40 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 3

31 23 00.00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

33 11 23 NATURAL GAS AND LIQUID PETROLEUM PIPING

-- End of Project Table of Contents --

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 4

1.2 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

Contract drawings are as follows:

DRAWING REVISION NAVFAC DWG TITLE

G001 18218450 TITLE SHEET

G002 18218451 SHEET INDEX

C001 18218452 NOTES, LEGEND, ABBREVIATIONS, & MAPS

C002 18218453 BORING LOGS (FOR REFERENCE ONLY)

C101 18218454 EXISTING CONDITIONS, SURVEY SHEET, & BORING LOCATION

CI103 18218456 IMPROVEMENT PLAN

CG104 18218457 GRADING PLAN

CU105 18218458 UTILITY PLAN

CS106 18218459 HORIZONTAL CONTROL PLAN

C107 18218460 EROSION CONTROL PLAN